JP6722842B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning drum game machine (slot machine).

Gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction in which the game balls fall in the game area of the game board, as well as winning openings, starting openings, and variable winning openings that allow the game balls to win. It is common. When a game ball is won in these, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, it is known that such a game stand can execute the effect .

JP 2008-200302 A

However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the performance .

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a characteristic in production .

The gaming table of the present invention for solving the above-mentioned object,
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a display of time,
A certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect") may be started in response to the timer display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started,
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
When the display of the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display”) is started, a certain effect different from the first effect may be started. ,
When the display of the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is started, the first effect is always started,
The first effect is an effect that allows the player to recognize that the symbol variation display is a big hit,
When the time indicated by the initial value of the timer value when the second timer display is started is longer than the execution time of the symbol variable display when the second timer display is started (hereinafter, There is a "first case"),
In the first case, execution of the first effect is started before the second timer display indicates the certain time.
It is characterized by

According to the game table of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic in rendering .

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the back side. It is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display pattern of special figure 2, (c) is a decorative pattern An example is shown, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display design of a general figure. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of main control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetching process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figures 1 and special figures 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit/miss determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process and (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process, (d) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of production device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of production device 206. It is a figure explaining an example of production which can be applied in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 17 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure which shows other examples of timer notice production in steps. It is a figure showing an example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure showing another example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is a figure explaining the aspect of the change of the remaining time display meter in button production. It is a figure showing other examples of button production in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production step by step centering on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the other production example of timer announcement production. (A) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. It is a flowchart of a main control unit main loop process. 7 is a flowchart of main controller timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of special figure related lottery processing, and (b) is a flowchart of special figure per lottery processing. It is a flowchart of the process during symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a special figure display confirmation weight process. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start weight process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special electric power releasing process. It is a flowchart of a special electric wire operation process. It is a flowchart of special electric power combination control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the content of a special electricity combination operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of a special electricity combination operation data table. It is a flowchart of a special electric vehicle remaining ball detection processing. It is a flowchart of a special electric power operation end processing. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of an option menu screen in a state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. FIG. 66 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 65. FIG. 67 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 66. FIG. 68 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 67. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a model customization screen. It is the figure which shows one example of the production which uses the fluctuation icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change production of the hold icon and the change production of the variable icon by the navigation character YM. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78, a modification, etc. It is the figure which shows the production example where the reservation framework becomes temporarily invisible. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS. It is a figure which shows the modification etc. which are shown in FIG. An example of an effect in which an effect of a button holding icon is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which has the period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example which has the period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of an effect in which a navigation character YM is entwined with a decorative pattern of a general figure is shown. It is a figure which shows the example which a change notice display is standby-displayed. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the reservation frame which differs from the reservation frame which is explained so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure box used until now as the icon of a change alert notification appears as a hold icon. An example of an effect in which a navigation effect YM is entwined with a meter effect is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. An example of effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect|action which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect|production apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14(b). It is a figure which shows an example of the other effect|action which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect|action apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14(b). It is a figure which shows an example of further another effect|action which entwined the navigation character YM by the effect|action apparatus 206 shown in FIG.14(b). It is a figure which shows an example of the production which entwined the navigation character YM by the production|generation apparatus 206 in which the 2nd display device was provided below the decorative pattern display device 208 (1st display device). It is a figure showing an example when other productions are performed during execution of the productions selected by the player. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 6 is a table summarizing music that can be output from the speaker 120. FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 101 is performed. FIG. 103 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 102. It is the figure which shows one example of the production due to production device 206 which is shown in figure 14(b). FIG. 105 is a view illustrating a sequel to the example illustrated in FIG. 104. It is a figure which shows the example in which the reservation frame which the player selected is changed. It is a figure which shows the modification etc. of the example shown in FIG. It is the figure which shows the production example in the pachinko machine which is set to automatic button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation etc. of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an overlapping relationship between a display of a ball removal notification that is notified when a plate full tank error occurs and each of the other displays of the brightness adjustment window BW. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the ball-out notification. It is a figure which shows the example in which several types of error displays are displayed. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of an error which can be detected by payout control section 600 of pachinko machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure. It is a figure showing various notice icons and various notice displays. It is a figure which shows the icon for mini games. It is a figure which shows a hold icon and a change icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the notice icon is stocked by winning the mini game B, and the notice display is displayed by using the stocked notice icon to change the display mode of the variable icon. It is the figure which shows the continuation of the production example which is shown in Figure 120 step by step, and the figure which shows the deformation example of that production example. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification-6th modification of the production example of FIG. 120 (a1)-FIG. 121 (a40). It is a figure showing the 7th modification-10th modification of the example of production of Drawing 120 (a1)-Drawing 121 (a40). It is a figure which shows the other modification of the production example of FIG. 120 (a1)-FIG. 121 (a40). A plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed by using a plurality of the notice icons that have been stocked, and the display mode of the variable icons is changed step by step. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of an effect shown in FIG. 125, and the example of an effect of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example of production of mini-game A of the announcement of Yoshimune treasure step by step. It is a figure which shows the middle of the 1st modification of the production example of FIG. 126 (1)-127 (38)-the 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the 3rd modification of the production example of FIGS. 126 (1) to 127 (38), and the middle of the 4th to 5th modifications. It is a figure showing the continuation of the 5th modification of the example of production of Drawing 126 (u1)-Figure 127 (e 38), and the example of production in which stocked notice icon YI is promoted. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of effect|action which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted, and the modification of the example of effect. It is a figure showing in stages an example of an effect in which a notice display YH of a button appears from a notice icon YI. It is the figure which shows the production example where the execution frequency of button production is stocked gradually. It is the figure which shows the continuation of the production example where the execution frequency of button production is stocked, and other production examples. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect|action which the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI can be known before the release. It is a figure which shows in stages an example of production in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times. It is a figure showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of the same type of notice display YH are released from the same stocked notice icon YI, and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI were stocked step by step. It is a figure which shows the example which the notice icon YI emitted from the notice icon YI is used in multiple times in the state which can be understood from before release. It is the figure which shows the production example and the like which continues from Figure 139. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. It is a figure showing an example of a roulette effect for a notice icon stock in steps. It is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for advance notice icon stock, and an example of effect accompanied by button operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the “button” notice icon YI changes in accordance with a button operation, and another example. It is a figure showing the example of production which continues from Drawing 144, and the example which displays the same notice icon in a plurality of modes. It is a figure which shows the example of production etc. by the structure which the display means is arrange|positioned under the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the 2nd decorative design display 208M and the 3rd decorative design display 208N. It is a figure showing in stages an example of an effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in Drawing 119 (b). It is a figure showing a modification of the example of an effect shown in Drawing 148. It is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. It is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is being executed, and other effect examples. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted in the middle of a plurality of fluctuations. It is a figure showing the continuation of the example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the meter effect, and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119(b), and other effect examples. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which combined the display of a certain type of hold icon and an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the other production example using the icon of a bomber system as a display of an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example etc. of various notices regarding the display of an icon change notice. It is a figure which shows the example of a combination of the 1st decorative symbol display device 208L and another display means. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the 2nd decorative design display 208M and the 3rd decorative design display 208N. It is a figure which roughly shows seven example productions in which various icons and displays are used. It is the figure which showed an example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the display starting mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY in steps. It is the figure which showed an example of the display starting mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows a mode that the chance up meter production is performed during super reach production. It is a diagram showing a state in which another pattern of the chance up meter effect is performed during the super reach effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the change production of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change production of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure explaining another pattern of the change production of the display mode of a chance up meter preparation display. It is a figure which shows a mode that a chance up meter ranks up during production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the chance up meter which raised rank. It is a figure explaining another pattern of rank up of a chance up meter. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state in which the upgraded opportunity-up meter preparation display MTY is continuously displayed in a ranked-up display mode even when switched to the opportunity-up meter CMT. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which alerts that a chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other example of an effect which alerts that a chance up meter preparation display is displayed. It is a figure showing an example of an effect that a chance up notice is given at a check point not shown in the chance up meter. It is a figure showing in stages about another example of production using a chance up meter. It is a figure showing about another pattern of the production using a chance up meter. It is a figure shown about the modification of the production using the chance up meter shown in Drawing 183. It is a figure shown about another production pattern of production using the chance up meter shown in Drawing 183. It is the figure which showed an example of the pre-reading announcement using a chance up meter preparation display in stages. It is a figure explaining another display pattern of a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a chance up meter performed in another super reach. It is a figure explaining the modification of the production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining another production pattern of production by a chance up meter. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by the chance up meter performed in a probability change state. It is a figure explaining the example which gives a notice of the effect by a chance up meter on a display device other than a decorative symbol display device. It is the figure which shows the production example which uses the 2nd decorative design display 208M and the 3rd decorative design display 208N. The correspondence relation between the display mode (color) of the effect display in the effect device 206 and the notation used in the present specification and the drawings is shown, and (a) is the relationship between the display color in the decorative pattern display device 208. , (B) are the correspondence with the emission color in the light emitting means such as a full-color LED. It is the figure which showed an example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed the example of the production which is done in this execution form in stages. It is the figure which showed one example of the timer announcement production step by step. It is the figure which showed the example of the production which is done in this execution form in stages. It is the figure which showed the example of the production which is done in this execution form in stages. It is the figure which showed the example of the production which is done in this execution form in stages. It is the figure which showed other production patterns of the timer announcement production in stages. It is the figure which showed the example of the production which is done in this execution form in stages. It is the figure which showed an example of the production using a chance up meter in steps. It is the figure which showed the example of the production which is done in this execution form in stages. It is the figure which showed one example of the timer announcement production step by step. It is the figure which showed one example of the timer announcement production step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 237 in steps. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 239 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another display example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 246 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 249 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing in steps about another example of the production which continues from Drawing 250 (24). It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 263 in stages. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 263 to 264. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 266 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 268 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 268 to 269. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 273 to 274. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 275 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 275-276. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the effect which continues from FIG. 279 (18). It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer notice production shown in FIGS. 279 to 280. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 285 stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 286 in steps. It is a figure showing stepwise about an example of the production in the big hit game performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing in stages about the example of a display when an error display is displayed in the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a timer notice display. It is a figure showing an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the preliminary announcement production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the preliminary announcement production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the preliminary announcement production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a timer notice production applicable to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing an example of a button repeated hit production applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|generation by the description display applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of effects of the effect shown in FIG. 309 in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up advance notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo continuous production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing an example of the production which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another example of the production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of the extended production of a reservation display frame. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 325 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 326 step by step. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect performed in pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 328 stepwise. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 330 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 335 stepwise. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 339 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 341 in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 345 step by step. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed with the pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 349 in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 352 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the timer notice production performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the pending notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 360 step by step. It is a figure which shows in steps about another example of the timer announcement effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in a pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice effect performed in a pachinko machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is the figure which shows step by step concerning the production pattern where the mini game is executed in the button timer announcement production. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is a figure which shows step by step about another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed in the present embodiment, (a) is a timing chart explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is not in the reach state but is out of reach. Yes, (b) is a timing chart for explaining the flow of variable display of a decorative pattern that is a big hit or loses after reaching the reach state. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a timer notice production. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|generation in another case following FIG. 409 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the display example of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize|stored in RAM408, (c) is a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of an increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, and (b) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 416 in steps. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 425 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of the increase production of a notice icon in stages. It is a figure showing an example of production in which a notice icon changes in stages. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example in a stepwise manner when power is cut off or restored while a notice icon is being displayed. It is a figure which shows other examples of notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows the modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 440 stepwise. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing another example of production of a notice icon digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages about the example of production using the movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of a notice icon increase effect in stages. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of a notice icon increase effect in stages. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase production of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows other example of effects of a notice icon increase effect in stages. It is a figure which shows other examples of notice icon increase production and digest production in stages. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase production and digestion production of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment in stages. It is a figure showing an example of the production which can be performed in decorative pattern display device 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in stages. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production and digest production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 456 in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase production and digest production which can be applied to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 458 in steps. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing another example of production concerning this embodiment in stages. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relation between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is a figure which shows in stages the other example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows an example of the structure of the production|generation effector 206 in the game board 200 applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of a change change notice production as a look-ahead notice production by a reservation icon applicable to an embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown by FIG. 471. It is a figure which shows another modification of the production shown by FIG. 471. It is a figure showing in steps about an example of super reach production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of a pending change notice production. It is a figure which shows in steps about an example of the symbol variation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stages about another example of the extended production of a reservation display frame. It is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 37 is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the supporting machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory|storage part which memorize|stores the electronic data which implement|achieves this invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning drum game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table that allows a player to obtain a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage tray door 108, and a launch. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store. A speaker 120 (a low-pitched speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is in an electrically connected state (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). Is provided with a pair of floating connectors, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are in a connected state), and a state in which sound can be output from the speaker 120 is set. Become.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertically rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge 112. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (gaming store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body open sensor (inner frame open sensor) that detects that the main body 104 is opened. ing.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge 112 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. A clerk of the game shop can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 109 that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (high-pitched speaker that outputs high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Has been. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, a device using a light source as an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a light emitting device such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode fluorescent lamp may be referred to as a lamp. Equivalent to.

The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage dish is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish opened. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is provided with a door-side ball passage unit capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “ball”) and guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the operation of the player, and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball firing handle 134 that shoots the ball to the game area 124 of the game board, a production button 136 (chance button 136) that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and a production button. Chance button lamp 138 which is built in 136 (chance button 136) and makes the effect button 136 (chance button 136) emit light, and a ball lending for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game shop. An operation button 140, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with a game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. The operation key unit 137 is provided with up and down keys, such as an up key and a down key, and left and right keys, such as a left key and a right key, as a cross key, and an enter key at the center of the cross key. There is. A cancel key is also arranged below the cross key on the right side. Note that the pachinko machine 100 does not include the door 108 with a ball storage dish, and the front frame door 106 has an upper dish 126, a lower dish 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball ejection lever 132, a ball firing handle 134, a chance button 136, a chance button. All or a part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display section, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided. The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the ball storage tray door 108) is open to the main body 104. Also, if the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the rendering means (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) provided in the front frame door 106. Button lamp 138. Production by the production movable body when the front frame door 106 is provided), display on the ball lending display section, chance button 136, ball lending operation button 140, return operation button 142 and The operation key unit 137 is operated, and the lower tray full tank detection sensor can be detected.
Further, in the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182 configuring the power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102, the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray). The door 108 may be included) and the game board 200 are configured such that a power supply voltage is supplied from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower part of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. , Is provided. This launching device 110 sends a game ball to the game area 124 of the game board at every elapse of a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) while the player continuously operates the ball firing handle 134. It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right hit button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 in the operated state may be provided. The ball firing handle 134 is a firing stop switch (not shown) that invalidates the firing (emission) of the game ball accompanying the operation of the ball firing handle 134, and that the player touches the ball firing handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting. It should be noted that a right hit button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 in the operated state may be provided. Further, when the touch sensor detects that the ball firing handle 134 is in the operated state from the non-operated state during the display of the demo screen, a dedicated effect may be performed. .. For example, the effect display by the display unit, the effect sound by the sound output unit, the light emission effect by various decorative LEDs and the light guide plate, and the effect movable body (provided on the game board or the frame) can be mentioned. Rendering may be performed by four types of rendering means, or may be performed by one or more types of rendering means. Further, even if the same type of effect means, there may be an effect means for performing the exclusive effect and an effect means for not performing the exclusive effect. (For example, the production movable body of the frame performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body of the game board does not perform a dedicated production, or the production movable body A of the game board performs a dedicated production, but the production movable body B of the game board. There is no special effect, etc. This example can be applied to other effect means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. Note that, in FIG. 1, a specific configuration of the game area 124 is omitted, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls having an opening opening upward, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

The payout device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and inside thereof, a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) are provided. The dispensing device 152 is provided in the main body 104, is detachable from the main body 104, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and temporarily retains the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls that have temporarily stayed are delivered one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that gives a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high signal or the low signal, when the game ball is not passing, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined amount. Based on the satisfaction of the condition, a game value (gaming ball) of an amount corresponding to the grant condition is granted (paid) to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for accommodating a main board 156 which constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) for performing control processing of the whole game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-board 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of gaming balls ( (See FIG. 4) and a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 having an error canceling switch 168 that cancels an error by an operation of a game shop staff, a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 4). (Refer to FIG. 4) and a power supply control unit 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric amusement machines, and a power switch that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk. 178 and a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on, and signals of the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. A CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving is provided. The main board case 158 containing the main board 156, the first sub-board case 162 containing the first sub-board 160, and the second sub-board case 166 containing the second sub-board 164 are the game board 200. A power supply provided on the back surface of the power supply including a payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 equipped with an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power switch 178 and a RAM clear switch 180. A power supply board case 184 for housing the board 182 and a CR interface section 186 are provided in the main body 104.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

A rendering device 206 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the approximate center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary The symbol reserve lamp 216, the first special symbol reserve lamp 218, the second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and the high-precision middle lamp 222 are arranged. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "universal symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, which will be described in detail later.

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and a left symbol display region 208a and a middle symbol display region 208b. And the right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Lum
Other display devices may be employed including an incence display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The public figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative design displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is a design representing the design displayed on the first special design display device 212 or the second special design display device 214 in a form that enhances the effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of a predetermined first variable game (a detailed figure variable game which will be described later in detail) that is being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of variable figure games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 218 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 220 are the lamps for showing the number of the predetermined 2nd fluctuation game which has been reserved (details fluctuation game which details are mentioned later), this execution In the form, it is possible to suspend the special figure variation game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight if the first special figure and the second special figure are combined). The term "hold" here means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on start information described later.

The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying means) for making a notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability medium lamp 222 is configured to notify the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter not to notify the current symbol control state. There is. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but as the symbol control state here, it may be any of the normal state, the time saving state (electric power support state), and the probability variation state, and the state with the special symbol probability variation and It may be one of the states in which there is no special figure probability change.

It should be noted that in the present specification, description will be made using a word that refers to a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) called a control state, but the term "control state" includes a concept of a so-called game state.

In addition, a general winning opening 226, a universal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the effect device 206. ing.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the entry into the general winning openings 226 (in the general winning openings 226). When the prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player may be referred to as a "prize ball" and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental" as a consideration for a prize, and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (gaming ball)".

The universal figure starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through-chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is installed in each. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the universal starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the universal figure starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the universal figure variation game by the universal figure display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball. Along with discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of itself does not change.

In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is arranged below the first special figure starting port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (den Chu). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning the prize in the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the closed state of the pair of blade members 2321 is an opening/closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure variation game is won and the universal figure display device 210 hits and stops the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times to the second special figure starting port 232. The ball can be entered (the prize winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is the state where the winning is easy. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting area in which the easiness of entering a game ball is variable and changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. With the pair of blade members 2321 open, of the game balls that have entered the game region 124, the second special region that is the variable starting region is more than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230, which is the fixed starting region. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or less than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In addition, although two of the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided in the present embodiment, three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special figure starting ports may be provided and one second special figure starting port may be provided, and conversely, there is one first special figure starting port. It may be provided and two second special figure starting ports may be provided. Further, when there is only one special figure display device, three starting ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning port 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening with a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can enter the variable winning opening more easily than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state in the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning port 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player side until the door member 2341 becomes substantially vertical to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning a prize port 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly closed to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3, as long as the winning of the gaming ball is achieved by passing or entering the gaming ball. When the special figure variation game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning port 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The ball that has entered the variable winning port 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Although only one variable winning port is provided in this embodiment, two variable winning ports may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open, the other variable winning opening is always closed. However, both variable winning openings may be opened in some cases. Also, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting ball direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged near these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any winning port or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The balls contained in the upper plate 126 are supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper portion of the game area 124 drops downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening. Outgoing outlet 240 by winning in (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or simply passing through universal figure starting port 228. To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234), a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special opening 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the outlet. The sensor may be configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the area where the game ball can roll, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the area where the game ball cannot roll. .. Further, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door) are arranged on the back side of the rendering device 206. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball, which has entered the warp entrance 242a provided on the upper left side of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball ridden by a game nail 238 or the like, and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

In the present embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and includes an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm portion 224a to a shoulder position and an elbow. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b is provided at the position. The production movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b respectively move to the left and right according to the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208, when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, their respective inner ends overlap. In a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner ends of the respective doors are slightly overlapped with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can each be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern the displayed decorative pattern is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 to be visible through the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portions of the holes in the lattice are closed with a semitransparent lens body, The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji part of the lattice holes may be completely blocked (shielded), and the rear decorative pattern display device 208 may not be visible at all. Good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect movable member 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative pattern display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 showing the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central portion of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 for controlling, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a main sub-control unit according to a command transmitted by the main control unit 300. In addition, a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. There is.

First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a time. And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing, and a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built therein). It is equipped with. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value within a range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through each starting opening, a winning opening, and a variable winning opening, and a lower plate full tank sensor. However, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, and the like in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, such as the first special figure display device 212 or the first special symbol display device 212. The drive circuit 324 for performing the display control of the 2 special figure display device 214, the drive circuit 326 for performing the display control of the predetermined symbol display device, for example, the universal figure display device 210, and the various status display portions 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the universal figure holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc., and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. For controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 as a special electric accessory, and the like. The driving circuit 334 is connected to the driving circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is similarly set. The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, the game control is started (the main control unit main processing described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. It is possible to communicate with the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured to be unable to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300 from the first sub-control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to send a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to be able to send a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Good.

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times, and the like. The serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in different ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be included in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game underframe lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 detects various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the production movable body 224, and the like, and presses of various buttons that form the production button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal from the button sensor 426 is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and a CPU 504. VDP (video display processor) 516 which reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the RAM 506 and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518 to display the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. And are equipped with. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

Next, the payout controller 600, the launch controller 630, and the power controller 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on the control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball rental. It is detected whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. Further, the payout control unit 600 has paid out award ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. Ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout controller 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like. When they are open, these sensors detect and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The firing control unit 630 is a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 for instructing to permit or stop firing, and a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134 outputs the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player. Control of the firing solenoid 632 that drives the firing rod 146 and the firing mallet 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 that supplies the balls from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on the control signal that indicates the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout device 152. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to predetermined components (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Condenser). In the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 fires the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative pattern display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be performed will be described.

The special figure 1 variation game is started on condition that the first starting mouth sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, and the ball enters the special opening 2 starting opening 232. The special figure 2 variation game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variation display of special figure 1" (special figure Fluctuating game). Further, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure fluctuation game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of variation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the variation time determined before the start of variation of the special figure 2 When, passes, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special figure. The variable display of this special map may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

FIG. 5(a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. In FIG. 5(a), nine types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 5A, the white parts in the figure show the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts show the locations of the segments that are turned on.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“Special symbol A” to “Special symbol G”) are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special symbol. "Special map A" is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, and is a 15R probability variable jackpot pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special map B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. So, while 5 out of 15 rounds can be expected to win coins, the remaining rounds cannot be expected to win coins, which is a real 5R probability variable jackpot design, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot design. There is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) design that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "Special drawing D" is a 15R jackpot design, 8 out of 15 rounds. You can expect to win balls in one round, but you cannot expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB. While you can expect to win balls in the rounds, you can not expect to win balls in the remaining rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB, "Special Figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot design, and "Special Figure G" is a 2R jackpot. It is a symbol, which is a 2R certainty variation big hit symbol which is called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, in which it is not possible to expect winning of a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that is produced by a player in such a manner as to make it difficult for the player to specify how long a round in which a win can be expected at the start of the big hit continues. This is a big hit that creates a form that encourages the player whether or not the round in which the winning of balls can be expected to continue continues when the player's eyes or the ninth round) are reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not to be a big hit in the special figure variation game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not to be a special jackpot is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the regular jackpot and the probability jackpot is the difference in the probability of winning the jackpot in the next special figure variation game (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is a special figure. This is called a low probability state. In addition, there is a case where the game is transferred to a time saving state (electric power support state) after the big hit game is over. Here, the electric support state is a predetermined advantage that the player is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. The state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the time saving state is referred to as a high probability state of universal figure (hereinafter, may be referred to as "probability change of normal figure"), and the state not in the short period of time is referred to as low probability state of universal figure. In this way, the electric power support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the "electric power support state" is a state where the general map is concerned, and the "time saving state" is a state where the special map is concerned or a state where the general map and the special figure are concerned. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time saving flag, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric power support state and the universal figure high probability state. It is easier to win the universal figure variation game in the universal figure high probability state than in the universal figure low probability state (normal figure probability variation). For example, the winning probability of the universal figure fluctuation game is 1/100 in the universal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the universal figure high probability state (electric support state). Also, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game becomes shorter than in the non-electric power support state (general figure variation short). For example, in the non-electric power support state, the fluctuation time of the universal figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric power support state. Further, in the electric power support state, the opening time in one time opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric power support state (electrical chewing open period extension). For example, in the non-electrically-supported state, the 0.5-second power-chew open period is extended to 2 seconds in the electrically-powered support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electrically supported state than in the non-electrically supported state (the number of times of opening the electrically-powered chew increases). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electrically supported state for each winning of the universal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electrically supported state (2 seconds open and 1 second closed and 2 seconds again). Open). Due to the extension of the electric-chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric-chew opening, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, particularly in a big hit game, if a game ball is picked up by an electric chu with a small number of prize balls, and if the number of game balls to the variable winning port (attacker) 234 is reduced, a disadvantage may occur to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure probabilistic change, the general figure short cut, the extension of the electric chew open period, and the increase of the number of the electric chew open are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage is high, and the player may be in a power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew opening period and the increase in the number of electric chew opening is performed to increase the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electrically-supported state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electrically-supported state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between the difficult winning state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the easy winning state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in the easy winning state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “special map A” to “special map E” are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter is stopped, the electric power support state (universal figure high probability state) is started until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed after that, the special support variable game is maintained for 100 times while the electric support state is maintained, and the 101st non-powered game is performed. It shifts to the support state (universal figure low probability state). On the other hand, when the big hit without the electric support (“special figure G”) is won, the electric support state does not shift after the big hit game ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when "special map A" to "special map E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure high probability state after the jackpot game is over. Further, when "special map F" is stopped and displayed, after the jackpot game is over, the control state becomes the special map low probability general figure high probability state. Further, when the "special map G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special map high probability general figure low probability state after the jackpot game is over.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If you do, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hitting game, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state shifts. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the end of the small hit game. "Special drawing H" shown in FIG. 5(a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing mode (the number of times of opening and closing and the opening time) of the variable winning a prize port 234 in the small hit game and the opening/closing mode of the variable winning a prize port 234 in the big hit game to which the special character G is stopped and displayed (open) The number of times of opening and the time of opening are substantially the same, but they may be different, and for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the time of opening may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing I” is a lost design.

FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. In FIG. 5(b), six types of special maps, “special map a” to “special map f”, are shown. Of these, five types of special maps are jackpot patterns (“special map a” to “special map”). Fig. e"). "Special map a" is a 15R big hit pattern, is a 15R probability variation big hit pattern that can be expected to win balls in all rounds of 15 rounds, and "special map b" is a 15R big hit pattern, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to win balls in all of the rounds, and "Special Drawing c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and is expected to win balls in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that you can't expect to win out in the remaining rounds, and the "special map d" is a 15R jackpot design, and you can expect to win out in four out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a substantial 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal jackpot design.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as the lost symbol. “Special drawing f” is a lost design.

FIG. 5(c) shows an example of a decorative design. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes 10 types of “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first starting opening sensor detects that a ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230 or the special opening 2 starting opening 232, that is, the ball has entered the special opening 1 starting opening 230, or the special opening 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second starting orifice sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting orifice 232. In the pattern display area, "decoration 1"→"decoration 2"→"decoration 3"→... "decoration 9"→"decoration 10"→"decoration 1"→... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying substantially 5R probability variation big hit ("special drawing B"), 5R normal big hit ("special drawing F"), 2R normal big hit ("special drawing e"), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration" 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" A combination of ornamental patterns in which three ornamental patterns of the same number are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1-decoration 1"). Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. Moreover, when notifying the 15R probability variation big hit ("special drawing A" and "special drawing a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop decoration "7". Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, substance 8R-RUB, and substance 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is like a lord. A combination of decorative patterns that are decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1" and "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4") is stopped and displayed. Also, when notifying a hidden probability change (“special map G”) that is a big hit of 2R or a small hit (“special map H”), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol such as "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, disperse). Stop the display).

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stopped symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

FIG. 5(d) shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a universal figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the public figure of the present embodiment, "Public figure A" which is a winning symbol and "Public symbol B" which is a deviating symbol. On the basis of the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the universal figure starting port 228, the universal figure display device 210 causes all seven segments to light up and one segment in the center to light up. Repeated lighting "Public variable display" (Public variable game) is performed. Then, after the change time elapses, either one of the symbols "Public symbol A" which is a hit symbol and "Public symbol B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5(d), the white portions in the drawing show the locations of the segments where the light is turned off, and the black portions show the locations of the segments where the light is turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of the "variable display of the universal figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the universal figure may be referred to as the variable display of the universal figure.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main processing main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special figure determination random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, random number value of special figure winning, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, an area in the RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special figures is sometimes referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the hit determination (lottery) can be suspended. There is also a random number storage area for general drawings. As will be described later, the special figure starting information storage unit stores a plurality of types of starting information into one set, and the starting information is stored one by one in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which this activation signal is input, resets and starts by a reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allows the operation of and sets the initial value. In the present embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supply that the power supply control unit 660 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the step is performed. It proceeds to S107. Even when the power does not reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I/O 310 (for example, a test output port, Processing for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether the state before the power is cut off (before the power failure) is restored, and when the state before the power failure is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) ), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a clerk of a game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that the operation has been performed). If the RAM clear signal is ON (when RAM clear is required), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) or not (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal) is determined. When the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (main setting). When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating the initial values of the universal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the universal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, the value 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generating random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. It should be noted that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (mainly) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (not to detect abnormal processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main controller timer interrupt.

In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various sphere detection sensors are input via the input port of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence/absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 performs various operations. The data is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

Further, in step S205, the presence/absence information of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of No. 1 matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals of the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, there is a present detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, when the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first starting opening sensor that detects the ball entering the first special drawing starting opening 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a prize in the starting opening 230, that is, a game medium that passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in the first special figure starting opening 230 is performed. If the presence/absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and the universal figure winning random number value and The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, if the range of possible numbers for the universal figure winning random number is 0 to 100, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the universal figure winning random number value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, the result obtained by obtaining a value from a random number counter for generating a universal figure winning random number value that varies in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the obtained value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter that corresponds to the random number counter The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to judge that the random number counter for generating the universal random number I'll do it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for general-purpose winning random number value generation has completed one round, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has completed one cycle. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for

In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the symbol is displayed on the universal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time to change/stop displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210. Various including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time of changing/stopping display, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning a prize counter updating process, when there is a winning in the winning holes 234, 226 and the starting openings 230, 232, the RAM 30
The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is read out to 8 and 1 is added to set the value in the original prize ball storage area.

In addition, in step S217, prize winning acceptance processing is performed. In the prize winning process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of starting information acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area of the starting information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 in accordance with the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set) and bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when it is on, it indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is indicated.

In step S221, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the universal figure state update process in the middle of the universal figure variation display (the value of the universal figure display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol. ON/OFF control of 7-segment LED is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the general-purpose stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the open period to the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening/closing the drive of 2321 and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a loss, the universal figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure loss flag is on, even in the universal figure state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, nothing is performed and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

In step S223, a universal figure related lottery process is performed. In this universal figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the universal figure variation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the universal figure is not operating), and the pending universal figure variation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unwinned by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and in the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and the universal figure display device 210 displays the universal figure display device 210 based on the obtained universal figure timer random number value. One time during which the figure is variably displayed is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored in the ordinary figure variation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the ordinary figure variation display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure pending count storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed, but first, the special figure state update processing for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 variable display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeats lighting and extinguishing drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variation game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the rotation start setting transmission process is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. .. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure When the probability variation flag is also on and the universal figure probability variation flag is also on, any one of special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured to have the special figure e when the figure probability variation flag is off and the general figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure f when the loss flag is on. The 7 segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214, 15R special big hit pattern (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit pattern (special figure e), lost symbol ( Special figure f)
Any one of the symbols is confirmed and displayed.

Further, thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the special display 2 that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the special FIG. 2 variable game. Further, if the hour/hour count stored in the hour/hour count storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the hour/hour count, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, the time saving flag is turned off. Further, even during the big hit game (during the special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

In addition, the predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the pattern for stopping the variable display is the special figure 2. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that there is is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later, and then the process ends.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In addition to setting the special figure 2 operating in the area, in order to stand by for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds) First, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect production period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the variable winning port 234 is detected) The solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), the door member Is output in the open state and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning port 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closing period in. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which is repeated at a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the illustrated embodiment) of opening/closing control of the door member, and when it is finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, a storage area of a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to stand by for a period during which an image is displayed to notify the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is finished. The information indicating the production standby period is set in. Further, if the universal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving frequency (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and is also provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the universal figure probability variation flag is set to OFF, neither the time saving number is set in the time saving number storage unit nor the time saving flag is turned ON.

The time saving here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit is shortened. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the high probability state of universal figure (universal figure probable variation). In the high probability state of the universal figure, the probability of being hit in the universal variation game is higher than in the low probability state of the universal figure. In addition, the general figure high probability state is shorter than the general figure low probability state in the variation time of the universal figure fluctuation game (general figure variation short). Furthermore, in the universal figure high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in the universal figure low probability state (electric chute extension). In addition, in the universal figure high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the universal figure low probability state. The state in which any one of these figures is confirmed, the figure is shortened, and the electric chou spread is called electric sapo (starting entrance winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to OFF during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general figure low probability state is maintained. This is a high probability probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 starting hole 232 until the game balls enter There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be won during a big hit increases and the gambling ability increases, which is to solve this problem.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating execution of the end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (timing when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variation game is out, the out flag is turned on. When the deviation flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), Toku-zu 2 inactive is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

Then, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) about special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, description thereof will be omitted. Omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure related lottery processing for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special map-related lottery process (special map 2 related lottery process) for the special map 2 is performed first (step S229), and then the special map-related lottery process for the special map 1 (special map 1-related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Special figure 2 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is inactive and special figure 2 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, the game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area. Special figure 1 related lottery processing, the variation game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not done, the state of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the non-operating state, and special figure 1 which is suspended Assuming that the number of variable games is 1 or more, it is executed by using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area.

Regarding these special figure related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variation game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are met at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, so the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. If the number of pending special game 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable games related to the pending special game 1 variable games are not performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the determination result of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and notifies the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232. The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure variation game having a high advantage (special figure 2 variation game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variation game having a low advantage (special figure 1 variation game in this example). Therefore, it may be easy to give a difference in the degree of advantage of the game state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special piece) from the earliest (oldest stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. FIG. 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value) is acquired, and based on the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 starting information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the ROM 306 It is determined whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a non-win by using the hit/miss judgment table stored in (a hit/miss judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information and the determined hit/miss judgment result, and the like. After the variable display, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit/miss determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit determination, the acquired random number for determining the special figure variation time, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of Toku-zu 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the earliest special figure 2 starting information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and Figure 2 The special figure 2 reservation number in the reservation number storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 starting information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is performed based on the special figure 2 starting information stored in this temporary area. You may do it.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is similarly performed. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game with a high degree of advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low degree of advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority variation is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variation game with a low advantage is started with priority over the special advantage 2 variation game with a high advantage, and the special figure 1 is held pending It may be the special figure 1 priority variation that is preferentially digested over the hold. Also, without prioritizing either the special figure 2 variation game with a high advantage or the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, the special figure variation game related to the suspension of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started. It may be a change in the winning opening winning order that starts in order. In the starting mouth winning order variation, the maximum number of reservations is 8 regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, so in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, it is compared with the priority fluctuation in which the maximum number of reservations is 4. It may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of reservations.

Further, in the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special map are not performed depending on the state of one special map, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above special map state update By performing the processing and the special figure-related lottery process independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a plurality of special figures may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when a plurality of special maps are simultaneously changed in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special maps, or the lottery results of the respective special maps are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to separately display each lottery result, or one display may be configured to display a lottery result of a plurality of special symbols. In addition, when fluctuations relating to a plurality of special maps are simultaneously performed, the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special map whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 subsequent to step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The scheduled output information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (in the present exemplary embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, finish effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a pattern variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flag values, and the timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating numbers, etc., it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the special diagram 2 starting port 232, and winning at the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of the prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in the prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and the stop symbols stored in the prefetch result storage unit are included in the command data. Including.

Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, out-of-match flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing and special figures stored in the RAM 308 are included in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-described winning award effect setting transmission process, the command data stores the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the award effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating a value, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games that are held, etc. is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variation games or special figure 2 variation games Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of pending special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, general command special figure pending increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the contents of effect control based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read to monitor the presence/absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence/absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full tank error. .. When the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower tray full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning a prize port 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 are controlled through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display sections 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, setting of interrupt permission is performed, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or a stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as restore data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of an input/output port is performed. After that, the state becomes HALT.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special map prefetch process (step S224) of the main controller timer interrupt process. In the main controller timer interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 51, the special figure prefetching process is performed in the winning opening winning process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and pre-determines the stop symbol before the winning/disapproval determining process, and the pre-determination result (special The prefetch result) is stored in the prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit that stores the pre-reading result of the special figure 1 and the number of special figure 1 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit are specified. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining special figure 1 pre-reading result is deleted. Are processed so that the rank of the data of 1 is advanced by one. Also, each time the number of special figure 1 pre-reading is increased by one, new data of special figure 1 pre-reading result is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 1 pre-reading result having the lowest rank (last).

Further, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section for storing the special figure 2 pre-reading result and the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the number is provided. The special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit, the data of the special figure 2 pre-reading result having the highest rank is erased every time the number of special figure 2 pre-reading decreases by 1, and the remaining order of the special figure 2 pre-reading result data is deleted. Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 prefetches is increased by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch results is written in the next rank to the data of the special figure 2 preread results having the lowest rank.

In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increased (step S301). Whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored, for example, in the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and in the special figure 2 prefetched number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of prefetches. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reserved number is larger than the special figure 2 preread number, and the special figure 2 reserved number is the special figure 2 preread number. If they are the same, it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is specified before the win/fail judgment processing in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). Figure 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Further, the process of step S303 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later. Then, by using the pre-read special figure 2 starting information, the table for determining whether or not to win or not shown in FIG. 10 and the table for determining special symbols shown in FIG. 11, the special symbols 2 variable game stop symbol relating to the starting information is specified. Preliminary determination is performed before the win/loss determination process in the FIG. 2 related lottery process (step S229). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, pre-determination of the stop symbol of the special diagram 2 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. In addition, this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first empty area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Then, it transfers to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage. The comparison is performed with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increased, the special figure prefetching process is ended and the main control unit is executed. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the non-electricity support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric power support is not being performed (the power is being supported (universal figure high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric power support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value) is specified before the winning/judgment processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Figure 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Further, the process of step S311 is performed before the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53 described later. Then, by using the pre-reading special figure 1 start information, and the hit determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of hit determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is set to the special figure 1 related lottery. Preliminary determination is made prior to the hit/miss determination processing in the processing (step S231). In the special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53, which will be described later, pre-determination of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery process S708. In addition, this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used for determining whether it is true or false.

In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained by the preliminary determination is stored in the first free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is replaced with the "undetermined" information indicating that the starting information is not pre-read without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 starting information. Store in the first empty area of the set. After that, the special figure prefetching process is terminated and the process returns to the main controller timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) described above, only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be stored. All pre-reading results in the set may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

In addition, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 2 and pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of special figure 1 except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special maps 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold, for example. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not in non-electric support), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always executed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch is performed. The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

FIG. 9 exemplifies a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 preread result information is stored in the special figure 1 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the special-reading 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of reserveable special-playing 1 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing I" (disappearance) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "holding 2" stores stop symbol information "special drawing I". "(Departure) is stored, "special drawing A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in the storage area "holding 3" as stop symbol information, and "special drawing I" is stored in the storage area "holding 4" as stop symbol information. "(Disappearance) is stored.

FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 preread result information is stored in the special figure 2 preread result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage section has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in this embodiment) as the holdable number of special figure 2 variable games. .. Each storage area is associated with the holding order (holding 1 to holding 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 9(b), the storage area "holding 1" stores "special drawing f" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas "holding 2" to "holding 4" have stop symbols. No information is stored. In addition, in FIG. 9B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 9C shows an example of the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 during electronic support. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the storage area “holding 1”, “undetermined” information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the judgment result and the special symbol variation time are pre-determined, and the information is stored in the pre-read result storage unit and is also stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as pre-read result information. Can be sent.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, for a win/fail judgment table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for win/loss determination, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for win/loss determination. In the case of the special figure high probability state in the case of performing the special decision of the special figure 1, the high probability table for decision judgment shown in FIG. The low probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the Toku-zu 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or an outfall is selected as the hit/miss determination result. It should be noted that the present invention can also be applied to the hit/miss determination table used in the per-special-drawing lottery process in step S801 of FIG.

Similarly, in the case of performing the success/failure determination of the special figure 2, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the special figure low probability state is referred to by referring to the high probability table for success/failure determination shown in FIG. In this case, the low probability table for win/fail judgment shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referred win/loss determination table and the acquired random number value, the win/loss determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variation game, the big hit or the outlier is selected as the hit/miss judgment result.

FIG. 10C is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. When the result of the jackpot judgment is out of range, the table for small hit determination shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range shown by the referred small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value. , Select the result of the special drawing small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the win/no-judgment result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the win/no judgment result, and the loss is generated with the probability of 63536/65536. However, if the winning/disapproval determination result (lottery result) of the special drawing per special drawing is the special drawing 2, the small hit is not selected. Note that the present invention is also applicable to the small hitting determination table used in the special figure small hitting lottery process of step S803 of FIG.

Next, the stop is performed based on the result of winning/decision determination determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11(a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), based on the hit result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number, the special figure Select the stop pattern of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit/miss result of Toku-zu 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special maps A to G, and when the hit/no hit determination result of Toku-zu 1 is a small hit, Toku-zu H is selected, and when the hit/no-go result of Toku-zu 1 is missing, toku-zu I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b), based on the hit result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The special design 2 stop design is selected by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the hit/fail result of Toku-zu 2 is a big hit, any one of the Toku-zu a to Toku-e is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

Note that the symbols in the special symbol state update process of FIG. 53(a) may also be determined using the special symbol determination table of this example, and the display symbol data of the special symbols 1 is displayed in the display symbol lottery process of step S708. When determining, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), based on the hit result of the special figure 1 by the special figure per lottery process of step S707, and the numerical range of the random number value, Select the display pattern data of special figure 1.

Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, the input/output ports are initialized and the storage area in the RAM 408 is initialized.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or operation according to the detection result. Processing for changing to effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137 is performed.

In step S413 subsequent to step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 following step S413, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 442 and 452 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

In step S417 subsequent to step S415, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500, the control command is set to be output. Then, it returns to step S403.

FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects the strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is set to a predetermined value when triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main processing and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S443 subsequent to step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub control unit main process, and the other effect random number updating process is performed. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization processing, the initialization of the input/output port and the initialization processing of the storage area in the RAM (not shown) are performed.

In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this processing is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the processing proceeds to step S505. .. In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

In step S509 following step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative pattern display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the effect data read in step S509 includes an instruction to the VDP 516, this instruction is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, it returns to step S503.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. To be executed in the cycle. In step S541 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S543 subsequent to step S541, the other effect random number updating process and the like are performed.

FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, a transfer instruction of image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: NO), it waits until the transfer end interrupt signal is input.

In step S555, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 sets VR in step S551.
Information of image data forming the display image in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the AM 518 (coordinate axes of VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) To the VDP 516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In response to this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the image drawing end is input, and when the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), If not (step S559: No), the process waits until the generation end interrupt signal is input.

In step S561, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

In the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the rendering device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative pattern display device 208 may be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the right side of the lower part of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on its left side, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 can be displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal h0s, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it notifies that the symbol variable is being displayed. When the symbol is fixedly displayed (while the symbol is stopped), the variable icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a lord's character is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the hold icon. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed all the time, and a specific notice or effect using the navigation character YM (for example, a look-ahead notice, a notice in the symbol variation display, or a hold of the symbol variation display is accumulated N times. It may be displayed at the time of display) or when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 14A, since four variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are reserved, four reservation icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the reservation icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round unpatterned and white display mode), but they are displayed in accordance with the progress of the game. May change. As a result, the notice display and the prefetch notice display can be performed. Here, the variable icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variable display. Further, the variable icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. The variable icon h0 may not be displayed.

The variation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time when the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon is started. To be more precise, when the first hold icon with the oldest winning prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon is referred to as the variable icon, or even if the variable icon moves. Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed with a display size different from the hold icon (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may facilitate the identification of the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may have the same size. The variable icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice about whether or not the change is appropriate (a notice of the change) depending on its display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the hit/miss result of the special figure change game is held. The erasing timing may be before, at the same timing, or after the timing at which the result of the variation is notified. The variable icon h0 may not be displayed.

In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a second decorative pattern (fifth pattern) smaller than the first decorative pattern is a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is stopped. The second decorative pattern may not be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and only the first decorative pattern may be displayed. Further, the second decorative design may not be displayed on the decorative design display device 208, but may be displayed on another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative patterns in the second decorative pattern matches the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern, but the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern and the decoration in the second decorative pattern A part (1 or 2 of the decorative patterns) or all of the combinations of the patterns may be inconsistent. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second hold number display (here, “4” and “0”) of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Note that the special symbol display device 208 does not have to display the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2. In addition, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Good. It should be noted that the second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special maps 1 and 2, or may display the hold numbers of both of the special maps 1 and 2. Good.

In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability variation state, hidden probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display irrelevant to the result of judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain game state (any one or more of a normal game state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a law (for example, it changes in order such as background display A→background display B→background display C→background display A→... If it collapses, it may be announced as a big hit confirmation (premier announcement). The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

In addition, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the production movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved vertically or rotated according to the production content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the family crest monument 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest part 224E is below the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga with the character "Large", and the second with the character "Board" are provided. The large-scale behavior auditors 224Gb, the third large-scale behavioral auditors 224Gc on which the characters "swing" are applied, and the fourth large-scale behavioral auditors 224Gd on which the characters "dance" are applied are arranged. Each of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. ing. At this time, the 1st large board behavior part 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior part 224Gd are located in the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, and can be overlapped with the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. .. In addition, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd internally have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED or the like, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. .. The thousand-box box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest actor 224E, the first large board behavioral part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral part 224Gd, and the thousand-box box part 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut in a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of a region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display device 28 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208.
4 are provided. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, by the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the symbol of the special figure is stopped, the LED is lit and displayed, but during the change of the symbol of the special figure, it is blinking or turned off. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, and the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is stopped.

In the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14B, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the display area is slightly shorter in height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each configured to be slidable in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above do not have to be configured to be able to perform all, and any one operation or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different, for example, the number of effect operations that can be performed are different. Alternatively, the performance operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to be able to perform an effect operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a performance operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, or Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbol for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it is added here to make sure that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, and perform multiple types of effect display. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front surface side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the rendering device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. The decoration member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative pattern display device 208L may be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure holding lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This holding frame can also be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, the variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation display is being performed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a lord's character is displayed. The second UI unit 281 has a hold icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the variable icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 14B, since four variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are reserved, four reservation icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the reservation icon display area. In FIG. 14B, the variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round unpatterned and white display mode), but The display mode may change according to the progress. As a result, the notice display and the prefetch notice display can be performed.

In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in a combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The combination is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the second decorative design is displayed on the same decorative design display device as the first decorative design, but it may be displayed on a different decorative design display device. Further, the second decorative design may not be displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L, and only the first decorative design may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative patterns in the second decorative pattern matches the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern, but the combination of the decorative patterns in the first decorative pattern and the decoration in the second decorative pattern A part (1 or 2 of the decorative patterns) or all of the combinations of the patterns may be inconsistent. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display region, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display the 2nd hold|holding number display on the decoration design display device which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. In addition, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 does not need to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be done. It should be noted that the second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special maps 1 and 2, or may display the hold numbers of both of the special maps 1 and 2. Good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As the background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability variation state, hidden probability variation state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display irrelevant to the result of judgment. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain game state (any one or more of a normal game state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a time saving state). In this case, it may change with a law (for example, it changes in order such as background display A→background display B→background display C→background display A→... If it collapses, it may be announced as a big hit confirmation (premier announcement). The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer circumference, but a frameless form may be used. Moreover, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the family crest accessory 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. .. In the example illustrated in FIG. 14B, the family crest monument 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest monument 224E illustrated in FIG. 14B is the upper end of the family crest monument 224E. Although the portion is a position slightly overlapping the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned thousand-box box accessory 224H is arranged, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest actor 224E, and the thousand box actor 224H, and the player displays the display state of each decorative symbol display device through the light guide plate. The motion of each effect movable body can be visually confirmed.

Further, in FIG. 14B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an example of an effect using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of effects applicable in the present embodiment.

FIGS. 15A1 to 15A2 show an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14A. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 15(A1), when the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H operate, the state shown in FIG. 15(A2) is obtained. Specifically, the first large board action character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd are first positioned until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are at the positions facing the front. Each of them rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the thousand-box box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps at approximately the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the thousand-box action product 224H is arranged on the front side of the first large-board action product 224Ga to the fourth large-board action product 224Gd, and the first large-board action product 224Ga to the fourth large-board action product 224Gd are the thousand-box action product. It is considered difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. In addition, you may comprise so that the 1000-box box role object 224H may not overlap with the front surface side of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga-the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In addition, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand-axle box auditors 224H and configured to overlap the thousand-robot box auditors 224H.

In FIG. 15(B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. ..

15C1 to FIG. 15C4 show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A. Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 15C1 to 15C4, a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as a production movable body is provided in place of the family crest 224E. The POV display 224I is also called a versa writer, is vertically movable, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has a lifting arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the lifting arm. The elevating arm can be moved up and down by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line in the LED array, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full-color LEDs or single-color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs one lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on Versa data, which is a kind of effect data. To do. By doing so, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs changes during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd and the thousand-box action product 224H. Can be set.

FIG. 15C1 shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

FIG. 15C2 shows that the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps with the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208 substantially at the center. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 15C3 shows that the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array accelerates its rotation from low speed to high speed. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotating area of the LED array overlaps the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative pattern, and it is difficult to visually recognize them while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 15(C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters "heat" are displayed, and the advance notice display or the prefetch advance notice display is shown. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative design, a background image, or the like. Also, P
While the image is displayed on the OV display 224I, the light emission brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. .. Further, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative pattern display device 208 may be displayed in the dark mode.

In FIG. 15(D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, and the like. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

FIGS. 15E1 to 15E2 show that the family coat emblem 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(E1), the family crest monument 224E moves from the initial position to a raised position and overlaps the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and at least a part of the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than when they do not overlap each other. Thereafter, as illustrated in FIG. 15(E2), the family crest monument 224E is rotating in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family coat emblem 224E may vibrate along with or instead of rotating. Alternatively, only the ascending may be performed, and the rotation and the vibration may not be performed. In addition, it is also applicable to the rendering device 206 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 15(F1), a state is shown in which the 1000-box box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b). Specifically, it is shown that the thousand-box box accessory 224H is moving from the initial position to a position where it overlaps with the front surface side of substantially the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), the first decorative symbol is made more difficult to visually recognize than the case where it is in the non-overlapping state because the thousand-box box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this example of performance, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the Senmon box accessory 224E does not operate so that the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. It should be noted that there may be a case where both the thousand-box box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. In addition, when the Thousand Box Actor 224H operates, a retracting operation of further moving the family crest 224E may be performed.

In FIG. 15(G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, with respect to the background image, a region that is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides is configured to be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Thereby, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. It is possible to display the display. The second decorative symbol display device 208M slides upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208.
N may slide downward, the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, or the second decorative symbol display. The device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 15(H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown as being displayed across the devices 208N. That is, the left pattern of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the expanded first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and do not extend across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across two display devices, for example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

FIG. 15(I1) to FIG. 15(I2) show an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15(I1) to FIG. 15(I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest cast 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 15(I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front surface side of the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates, and then the fixed rotation. It is shown that the speed is reached, the rotation speed is constant, and the word "heat" is displayed.

In FIG. 15(J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are performing different displays from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIGS. 15(K1) to 15(K4) show an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b). In the example shown in FIGS. 15(K1) to 15(K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the region is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 15 (K1), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial position is shown.

In FIG. 15(K2), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. Has been done. At this time, the displays of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scroll along with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display is made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted according to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a display with a sense of unity. As shown in FIG. 15(K2), the family crest monument 224E moves downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the retracted position. Has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without scrolling. Further, the family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position or may vibrate while the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating, It may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 15(K3) to 15(K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are close to each other, and the counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are integrally rotating in the direction (CCW direction). In FIG. 15(K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are shown rotated 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative pattern so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively match the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A display is displayed that rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. Thereby, the player may rotate the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but the displayed image may not appear to rotate.

FIG. 15(L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub-display device 208S is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the family crest accessory 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub-display device 208S is the decorative pattern display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. On the sub display device 208S, the respective displays on the above-mentioned first UI unit 280 and second UI unit 281 are displayed. That is, on the sub display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. The display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani walks from the right side to the left side is shown, but a part of the character SBH overlaps with the sub display device 208S. It is made more difficult to visually recognize than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. Note that, as shown in FIG. 15 (L1′), a display image (background image, character SBH of the sabotani, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

In FIG. 15 (M1), the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd are shown. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is on the front side in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1 large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the 4th large-board behavior auditors 224Gd rotate to the positions where the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are in front, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. Of the sub display device 208S that has moved to the position on the front side of the center of the sub display device 208S. At this time, a cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, which shows that a predetermined notice effect or a look-ahead notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 18 is a diagram showing in sequence, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 17, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. ..

In FIG. 16, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, a general symbol hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following, description will be made by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, but it is also possible to apply the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B. Further, in the following, illustrations of the family crest actor 224E, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the thousand-box box auditors 224H, and the light guide plate IL are omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (coast background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative design is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative design of the first decorative design in combination with the decorative design of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". The navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI portion 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 16(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of special figure 1 and the second holding number display, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 turned on, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side have the older winning icons.

In FIG. 16(1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode. It is displayed in a (circular, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that in FIG. 16A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four UI icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the ID icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 16A, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are sectioned by broken lines to facilitate the description, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 16(1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or the extinction of the fourth symbol blinking→the start of the variation of the second decorative symbol→the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon→the ornament Although it is performed in the order of starting the variation of the symbols, this order may be changed.

In FIG. 16(2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon or decoration The design hasn't changed yet. In addition, the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may start simultaneously, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 starts. May be started, or the symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variable display of the fourth symbol is started.

In FIG. 16(3), the second hold number display is updated from 2 to 1, and a state in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. It should be noted that the update display of the second hold number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number indicator is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second hold number display may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 16(4), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon of the current pattern change) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the base of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon located at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 14). At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

In FIG. 16(5), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 16(6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the base hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11, is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then changes in the first decorative symbol. The display will start. In addition, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the moving animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the end of the moving animation, or The movement animation may end after the variable display of one decorative pattern starts.

In FIG. 16(7), a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(8), a state in which the navigation character YM gives a navigation character notice is shown. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice is started, a balloon with the letters "opportunity" displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed to inform that the expectation for a big hit is high.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(9) shows that the conversation announcement is started while the navigation character announcement is being given. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped. Further, in the navigator character notice, the balloon display is changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the jackpot is further increased. It should be noted that the timing at which the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “No”, or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “No”. Note that there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) that promotes from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “Extreme heat”) may not be performed. .. Further, the navigation character notice is not limited to the notice in the symbol variation display, but also the notice in advance, the notice indicating that a certain notice will be given, and the explanation display (various notices, game states, characters that appear in the effects of the pachinko machine 100). Or explanation of the stage of production, etc., also referred to as a tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative design, and the grandpa's conversation image CI2 is displayed along with the grandfather character's operation promotion notification image. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is configured by a remaining time display meter MT that indicates the remaining time. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 16(10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(10), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, in the navigation character notice, the balloon display is changed from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Extreme heat", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps a part of the old conversation image CI2. Note that the timing at which the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "intense heat", or the timing at which the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed is displayed after the grandpa conversation image CI2 is displayed. The display may be updated to "intense heat", or the old conversation image CI2 may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "intense heat". As described above, in this example of performance, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display having the same size as that in FIG. 16(9) is displayed), and the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 16(11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time has elapsed, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 16 (13), the game is played. It is shown that the person presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136). At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the navigation character advance notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the production button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 16(14), in the grandpa conversation image CI2, the operation promotion notification image is replaced with "a fever." May be displayed. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. The notice character display such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136). It may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is ended, and the first decorative pattern is easily visible. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16(16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 16(17), “decoration” is displayed on the right symbol. 7” is stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16(17) to 16(19), when the reach state is formed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach start animation is performed. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging/reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode can be adopted as the display mode of the animation at the start of reach. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by seeing this reach start animation.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 16(20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 changes. The icon h0 is left behind and the frame is displayed below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 (the hold icon h11 in the effect example shown in FIG. 16(20)) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. .. The start of the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol and the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or The frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started after the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image in is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16(22), the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-sized board action product 224Ga and the second large-sized board action product 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Note that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23 ), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior. There may be a case where only the accessory 224Gd is operated and the light guide plate IL does not emit light, or only the light guide plate IL emits light, and the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior There is a case where the operation of the object 224Gd is not performed, and there is a case where both the operation of the first large board action member 224Ga to the fourth large board action object 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il are not performed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16(24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, as shown in FIG. 17(25), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position. In addition, the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior member 224Gd return to their initial positions, or the first large-scale behavior member 224Ga to the second large-scale behavior member 224Ga to The start of the movement of the four-large-board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIG. 16 (22) to FIG. 24 (24 ), a series of effects performed by the first large board behavioral member 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed in a series. It may be configured so that a big hit is more likely to occur than in the case where no effect is performed.

In FIG. 17 (26), the state of development into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the subsequent decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (27) shows a duel scene between the main character and the enemy swordsman. Animation is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), the player can receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17(30) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 17(31), the player It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being pressed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the jackpot is highly reliable. Notice production is performed. The lord's cut-in image CI3 overlaps the animation display of the duel scene, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the lord's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Alternatively, it may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17(33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect has started after developing to super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), the player can receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17(36), it is shown that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 17(37), the player It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being pressed. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after developing to super reach. In this case, the operation reaches the super reach. The speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT decreases in the second button effect after the start may be faster than the speed in which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after developing to super reach. Also, the operation valid period in the first button performance after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the second button performance after developing to super reach, or after developing to super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development to the super reach may have the same length.

When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 17 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image. Along with this, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative pattern are overlapped by the first large board behavioral product 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object. It is considered to be difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the second large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga. The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. The effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without being performed. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Gd are performed, the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth after the effect images are displayed. The operation of the large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd are started, or the effect image may be displayed. And the operation of the first large-scale behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may not be performed, and an effect display that causes a loss may be performed. It is also possible to display the revival effect and perform the effect display that is a big hit after the effect display is displayed. It should be noted that when the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

Then, in FIG. 17 (39), the thousand-box box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, in FIG. 17 (40 ), it is shown that the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are not limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-box action product 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not conducted.

FIG. 17 (41) shows a state where the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the thousand-box box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 17(43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17(44), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd respectively move toward the initial positions. Has started. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarting while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also restarted.

Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17(46), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 17(47), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern to notify that it is a big hit. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative pattern is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. The swing fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. .. In addition, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18(50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol is confirmed to stop, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 18 (51), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control part 300 to the first sub control part 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit start effect. The display will start. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", a "special bonus" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game is played. It has been reported to the person that the 15R probability variation big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), a mini right hit display for instructing a right hit is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. Note that the mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 18(53), after the right-hand hitting instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right-hand hit is displayed, as shown in FIG. 18(54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, the mini right hitting display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the current round "1R" is displayed in the upper right corner. It should be noted that the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game or the total number of prize balls obtained during the continuous vacation may be displayed.

After that, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the round effect display, and at the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 18 (56) shows that the big hit game is finished and the big hit end effect display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability variable big hit, after the big hit game ends, the game state becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probably changed state with electric support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is displayed, and it is informed that the state shifts to the probability changing state with electric support.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display for calling attention to forgetting to take out the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4) (attention display) is displayed. In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state not being electric support is over, or regardless of the situation where the big hit is a big hit It may be displayed without fail when the game is over.

FIG. 18 (58) shows the state before the jackpot game is over, the state changes to the positive variation state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probability variation state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probability variation state with electric support, and the decorative design is also a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state) .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and the display mode (shape here) is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be identified by just looking at it. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same. 18(58) to (63), in order to make it easier to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is displayed. The icon is indicated by a broken line. Further, in FIG. 18 (58) to (63), the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is divided by a broken line to facilitate the description, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probability change state with power support, the holding icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini right hit display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character of "bonus ×○" indicating the number of consecutive holidays is displayed below it. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first big hit game is over, "bonus x 1" indicating that is displayed.

Then, after the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18(59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(60) instructs the player to strike right. Right hit notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in a mode in which the characters "please right-hand" are displayed on the semitransparent strip image. The right-hand hit notification overlaps the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the decorative design does not overlap. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the first big hit game, but may also be displayed in the electric sapo state that has transitioned after the big hit game other than the first big hit game has finished. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game ends and the electric power support state is entered. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the player has won the first special figure starting port 230. In this case, it may be determined that the left-handed stroke has been performed and the right-handed stroke notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18(60), the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61), a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started is shown. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handing notification is displayed, the right-handing notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 18 (62). Note that the mini right-handed display continues to be performed.

FIG. 18 (63) shows a state in which the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is suspended. That is, in the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, all four lamps are turned on to indicate that there are four special figure 2 holds, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are held. Is displayed four times. Also, in the second hold number display, “4” is displayed, which indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 2 is four.

FIG. 19 (49a) shows another effect example following that of FIG. 17 (48). 16 to 17, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and the middle pattern is "decoration 7" is described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), a state in which the first decorative pattern is shaken and changed by a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is shown. It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. In addition, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of special figure B at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a). At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is not judged as the symbol fixed stop, The first decorative symbol continues to shake and fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are decorations of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped. By seeing this, the player may sometimes be able to recognize that either the actual 5R probability variation big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or the 2R normal big hit has been hit.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control part 300 to the first sub control part 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), the decoration symbol display device 208, the big hit start effect. The display will start. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", a "bonus" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the player It is reported that the actual 5R probability variation big hit is either 5R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), the mini right hit display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 19 (38b) shows another effect example following that of FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that it is lost. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is restarted. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is restarted. Here, the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It remains and is hidden.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 19(41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) are scrolled in from below the display area, and the holding icon is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation fluctuation is started in the combination of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b). At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state of not receiving the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined to be the symbol fixed stop, The fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is continuously changed, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still in the variable display.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative design and the second decorative design are decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", respectively. Along with the stop display in the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays the symbols in a manner that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b), the variable icon erasing animation is displayed. In the variable icon deletion animation display, the variable icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, the animation display in which the variable icon h0 disappears is performed as shown in FIG. 19 (46b). The variable icon deletion animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In FIG. 20, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 20(1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(2) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer notice effect is started by the timer notice display TM1 being framed in from the right side of the display screen. "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. The countdown may be started (after that).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 20(3) to 20(7), the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 20(5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 20(6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 20(8), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20(9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo symbol pattern in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol starts to move at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 20(11), the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, and then shown in FIG. 20(12). As described above, the cut-in display including the lord's character and the character display of "continuation" is performed. In this embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. Here, the pseudo-relation is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-repeating is executed, the larger the chance of being hit. The pseudo-relational pattern may be framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. When the pseudo-relational pattern is framed out downward, the pseudo-relational pattern is not started, and the decorative pattern with the missing pattern is not displayed. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be set and the reach effect may be started. In this way, in this example of performance, the timer is notified so that the pseudo-relation is started after the countdown is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20(13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-relation is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(14), the display of “×2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

In the timer notice production, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is counted down to “00:00”, a certain notice production such as a pseudo continuous production may be performed without fail. There may or may not be done.

FIG. 20(3a) shows another effect example following FIG. 20(2). In this example of performance, "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started 20 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 20(10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-coupling is performed in the above-described manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 12 (14a), the second variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that FIG. 20(10a), FIG. 20(11a), and FIG. 20(14a) are effects corresponding to FIG. 20(10), FIG. 20(11), and FIG. 14(14), respectively.

Then, after “decoration 7” and “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, as shown in FIG. 20 (15a), 20 seconds have elapsed since the timer advance notice effect was started, and the timer When the timer display of the advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 20(16a), in the timer advance notice display TM1, the word “attention” indicating that the notice is to be noticed instead of the timer display is displayed. Is displayed. Further, at this time, the right design changes from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7". The right symbol may remain unchanged as "decoration 6". Then, as shown in FIGS. 20(16a) to (17a), the second pseudo run is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo run. As described above, the timer advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 20(3a) to (17a) give advance notice that the second pseudo-run is started. Also, the fact that the second pseudo-relation is being announced in advance can also mean that the first pseudo-relation is also being informed, that is, in this example of performance, by the timer notice production, It can be said that the start of the first and second simulated runs has been announced. Note that the timer advance notice in this example of performance is a notice of the start of the second pseudo-relation, but it may be a notice of another type of notice or the occurrence of an effect.

FIG. 20(7b) shows another effect example following FIG. 20(6). 20(7b) to (11b) correspond to FIG. 20(7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(7b), the display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (8b-1), the face image of the lord's character to which the balloon line "Ikuze" is added instead of the "attention" character display in the timer notice display TM1. YMF is displayed. Then, after that, as shown in FIG. 20(8b-2), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. In this way, the notice other than the timer notice display TM1 may be used to call attention to the notice. It should be noted that the means for urging the attention to the notice after the countdown in the timer notice production is completed is not limited to the display, and may be performed by a voice or a lamp, or a combination of two or more of the display, the voice, and the lamp. You may do it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (9b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol in which the lord's character is represented in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side is started. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 20(10b), the moving display of the pseudo continuous symbols is continuously displayed, and the face image YMF of the lord's character is deleted, as shown in FIG. 20(11b). After the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 20(12), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed.

In this example of effect, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the effect (pseudo-relation) corresponding thereto is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00". However, there may be a case where an effect corresponding to this is not performed.

Further, another notice may be given while the timer display countdown is being performed on the timer notice display TM1. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice not related to the timer notice effect.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

FIG. 21(a1) shows another effect example following FIG. 20(7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 21(a1), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(a2), the navigation character YM is displayed with the sword facing toward the variable icon h0. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(a3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0 is displayed, and then shown in FIG. 21(a5). As described above, the advance notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0 is displayed. The look-ahead notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, as shown in FIG. 21(a7), the reach state by "decoration 7" occurs. In this way, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this example effect is an effect that gives advance notice that a notice is given.

FIG. 21B1 shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started as "30:00", that is, the advance notice effect that 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Is to be started. At the timing shown in FIG. 21(b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "29:69". As described above, a plurality of types of countdown time may be prepared for the timer announcement effect. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be. The shorter the length, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be configured, or the reliability of the big hit may be configured to remain unchanged regardless of the countdown time.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(b2), about 8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown, and in the first decorative pattern, the reach effect by "decoration 7" has started. It is shown.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21(b3), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved to the upper left and right respectively, and displayed, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is displayed. The frame icon is framed out below the screen, and the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

After that, in FIG. 21(b4), it is shown that the super reach (swordsman reach) has been developed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(b4), the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 21(b5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character and the enemy character are shown. Animation of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. During this time, the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 21(b5), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21(b6), the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display and the advance notice is displayed. “Attention” is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 21( b 7 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the advance notice in which the character “heat” is added to the variable icon h 0. As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed even after the transition to the reach state.

FIG. 21(b4′-2) shows another effect example following FIG. 21(b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(b4′-2), it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “02:37” after the animation display of the duel scene is started. There is. In other words, the state is shown when approximately 27 seconds have elapsed since the countdown by the timer advance notice effect was started. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(b4′-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the appearance that the button effect is started is shown. It should be noted that this button effect is different from the effect announced by the timer notification effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(b5′), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21(b6′), the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display. The word “Attention” is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 21( b 7 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the advance notice in which the character “heat” is added to the variable icon h 0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display (or effect) that is performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is being performed during the execution of the button effect.

In the above-described production example, the example in which the change display of the change icon h0 is displayed as the production performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other productions may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(b7″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give a notice.

FIG. 21(b6″″) shows another example of effect following FIG. 21(b5). When the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 21(b6″″), the timer notice advance display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (b6″″-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes and a notice display is performed, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit reliability. It is shown that the display is switched to the cut-in display showing that the degree is extremely high. In the cut-in display, the princess character is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and the character "Jitsuatsu" indicating that the reliability of the big hit is extremely high is displayed. It should be noted that this cut-in display may be a notice display that confirms a big hit. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect, two or more notice images are displayed. The display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change and only the cut-in display may be performed.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 21(c1) to 21(c2) show how the lever production starts as a result of the countdown in the timer notice production. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 21(c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and instead of the timer display, the attention is given to the notice. The "attention" character of is displayed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, a production lever 136V is provided in addition to the production button 136 (chance button 136) as the operation means for production.

Then, as shown in FIG. 21(c2), a lever image 136Va simulating the effect lever 136V and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the lever effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 21(c3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the lever effect is started as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect, but the button effect described above may be performed instead of the lever effect.

There may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, a button image 136a in a default mode, or a button image 136a having a different color from the default mode (for example, red or gold). , A button image 136a in which a character notation (for example, "excited heat" or "high expectations" or the like) or a character is added to the default mode, a button image 136a having a size different from the default mode (for example, a large button effect or a mini button) Production), button images 136a that are displayed in a larger number than the default mode (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed, the same number of operations as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times) are performed. Alternatively, the operation may be performed a number of times different from the number of button images 136a (for example, once, twice, four times, etc.) In addition, the effect buttons 136 (chance buttons 136) may be operated. As the response display according to the operation, a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, or a number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 21D1 to 21D4 show that the effect movable body operates as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. As shown in FIG. 21(d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach is achieved by "decoration 7" in the first decorative symbol, and the reach effect is shown. In the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 remains and is framed out downward, and the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. Further, a timer advance notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 21(d1), the timer advance notice display TM1 shows that the timer display is "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 21(d2), the timer notice display TM1 displays the word "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Then, as shown in FIG. 21(d3), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Then, as shown in FIG. 21(d4), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect, the first large-board behavior auditors Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors Gd as the movable objects are shown to operate. The object 224E or the Senryo box role product 224H may operate, and two or more of the first large board behavior product Ga to the fourth large board behavior product Gd, the family crest role product 224E, and the Senryo box role product 224H operate. May be.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 22(1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22(1), the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22(1), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:69".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(2) shows that the navigation character YM is performing the timer addition effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect starts, a balloon with the characters "addition" displayed near the navigation character YM is displayed, and the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer announcement effect is extended. It should be noted that, for example, a button effect, a pseudo continuous effect, an opportunity advance notification, a pre-reading announcement, or the like may be given from the time when the timer announcement effect is started until the timer addition effect is started. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 22(3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is informed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22(4), the effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the count-up animation display may not be performed. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 22(4a), the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is difficult to visually recognize. After the effect image shown in FIG. 22(4a) is displayed, the count-up animation shown in FIG. 22(4) may be displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. That is, it can be said that the display mode on the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 22(6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and after a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the completion of the timer addition effect) has elapsed, the first pseudo continuous effect. Is started, the pseudo-relational symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22(7), and it is informed that the pseudo-repetition will be performed.

In this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed and the time is added to the timer display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than when the time is not added. There may be no change or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 22(1b) to 22(6b) show a state in which the timer addition effect by the conversation announcement is performed instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(1b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22(1b), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22(1b), the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22(1b), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “09:69”. Further, in FIG. 22(1b), the conversation announcement is started, and the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The timing at which the timer notice effect is started and the timing at which the conversation notice is started may be the same, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, or the conversation notice may be given. The timer advance notice effect may be started after it is started. In addition, the sir's conversation image CI1 is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the sir's conversation image CI1 is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(2b), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and moved below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the old character is displayed. At the same time, the grandpa's conversation image CI2 is displayed in which the character display "10 seconds extra." As a result, it is informed that the time display of the timer notice display TM will add 10 seconds to the time display. It should be noted that the countdown of the timer display in the timer announcement effect is continuously performed. In addition, the grand conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the display of the grand conversation image CI2 than in the case where the timer announcement display TM1 is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the old conversation image CI2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22(4b), the effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22(6b), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display in the timer notice display TM is displayed. The time is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time displayed on the timer. In addition, in this effect example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 22(4b′-1) to FIG. 22(4b′-2), The conversation announcement may be continued until the count-up animation display ends. Further, the timing of ending the conversation notice and the timing of ending the count-up animation display may be the same.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 22(1c) to 22(6c) show another example of the timer-added effect according to the conversation notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22(1c), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 22(1c), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 22(1c), the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect is started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the center right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 22(1c), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:69". In addition, in FIG. 22(1c), the conversation announcement is started, and the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. It should be noted that the lord's conversation image CI1 is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the lord's conversation image CI1 is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the timer notice display TM1 is not overlapped. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and moved below the display position of the second decorative pattern. The old conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image described above is displayed is displayed together with the character. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 22(2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Further, even during the execution of the conversation notice, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed.

Then, the operation valid period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (2c-2). FIG. 22 (2c-3) shows a state in which about 1.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation valid period was started, and the length of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is a length corresponding to the elapsed time. It is decreasing. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears and the player is informed. The fact is notified. Then, as shown in FIG. 22(3c), the display of the old conversation image CI2 is changed to the character display of "10 seconds additional time" indicating the time added from the operation prompting notification image, and in the timer notice display TM. It is notified that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display. It should be noted that when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated during the operation valid period, the time addition on the timer display may not be performed. In addition, when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT is once disappeared, and then the display is changed to the character display "10 seconds extra." Alternatively, the display may be changed to a character display of "additional 10 seconds" without displaying the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT. In addition, on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated in the operation valid period, the character display of "additional 10 seconds" may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. May be. That is, a display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22(4c), the effect of adding time is performed by the display of the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may be ended after the conversation notice is ended, or the conversation notice may be continuously given until the count-up animation display is finished. May end at the same time as the end of the count-up animation display.

Then, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 22(6c), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display in the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 22(6c), after 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display, the timer display counts down to "09:85".

In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 22(2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown display in the timer notice effect is continuously displayed even during the operation valid period. After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22(2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22(2c-3'), the countdown update display in the timer notice effect is not displayed during the operation valid period. 22 (2c-4') at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed since the timer was displayed internally (leaving the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06:00"). The timing result (for example, 2.00 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 22(2c-4')) may be reflected on the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to restart the countdown update display.

Further, for example, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 22(2c-2), as shown in FIG. 22(2c-3″), the countdown is updated in the timer notice effect during the operation valid period. Without the display (leaving the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 as "06:00"), the internal clocking is performed, and the operation valid period elapses as shown in FIG. 22 (2c-4″). However, it does not reflect the internal time measurement result, and as shown in FIG. 22 (3c″), the display of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 indicates “10 seconds additional time” indicating the time added from the operation promotion notification image. At the timing when the character display is changed, the internal time measurement result (for example, 1.23 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (3c″)) is reflected on the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown update display is displayed. May be restarted.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

FIG. 23(1d) to FIG. 23(2d) show another effect example of FIG. 22(1b) to FIG. 22(2b). In FIG. 23(1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of the lord is “Attention to timer notice”. As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being "00:00". That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by displaying the conversation image CI1 of the lord in FIG. 23(1d).

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and moved below the display position of the second decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. In 2b), the above-mentioned old conversation image CI2 is displayed. In this way, after paying attention to the timer notice effect, it may be notified that the timer display changes.

FIG. 23(1e) shows another effect example of FIG. 23(1d). In FIG. 23(1e), the timer display is "00" by performing scroll display SC1 that scrolls from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1 in place of the palace's conversation image CI1. You may make it pay attention to the effect produced as a result of becoming ":00". That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 23(1e), the characters "Watch the timer notice" scroll in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 23(1f) to 23(6f) are another example of the timer addition effect, in which the countdown of the added time is performed by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Showing. FIG. 23(1f) is an example of effect following FIG. 22(3). After notification of the additional time by the balloon of the navigation character YM, the additional timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1. It is shown that the frame is in from the right end. In this additional timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the additional time is displayed. Here, although the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is performed while the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, the countdown may be interrupted. The additional timer display TM2 overlaps the balloon of the navigation character YM and is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the navigation character YM does not overlap. Also, the additional timer display TM2 indicates the navigation character Y.
The balloons of M may be overlapped.

FIG. 23(2f) shows that the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. Here, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be erased after the animation of the frame-in of the overlay timer display TM2 is completed, or the frame of the overlay timer display TM2 may be framed after the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased. The animation may be completed, or the timing of completing the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 and the timing of erasing the balloon of the navigation character YM may be the same. In FIG. 23(2f), the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer notification display TM1, but the timer notification display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap each other. 23(2f″), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM1, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed as shown in FIG. 23(2f″). You may make it overlap with the addition timer display TM2.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 23(2f) to 23(4f), the process continues until the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23(5f), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the state of the timer notice display TM1 being framed out to the right end of the display screen is shown. .. Here, after the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started, the frame-out animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be started, or at the timing when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is started. The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 23(5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(5f'), the word "attention" may be displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to urge attention to the notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (6f), in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, a pseudo continuous symbol appears in the middle symbol and the pseudo continuous symbol may be performed. The additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous symbol does not appear at the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, and the pseudo continuous symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this effect example, the added time is not added to the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 and is displayed on the added timer display TM2 different from the timer notification display TM1 and the countdown is performed. ing. It should be noted that the notification of the added time may be a notification of a total value of a plurality of timer advance notice displays. For example, a value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer advance notice display TM1 may be displayed, and the remaining addition time display TM2 may be displayed. A value obtained by adding 7 seconds may be displayed. The addition timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice newly displayed as the timer is added, or a timer notice originally displayed before the timer is added.

FIGS. 23(3fa) to 23(8fa) are still another example of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown in the addition timer display TM2 are simultaneously performed. It shows the situation. FIG. 23(3fa) is an example of production following FIG. 23(2f), and after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1. Is shown to be starting. That is, in this example of performance, the additional time is reported as 10 seconds, but the additional time is practically 5 seconds. It should be noted that the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 may be a time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 to 10 seconds which is the additional time so that the additional time is substantially added by 10 seconds. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 23 (3fa), "15:00" may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

After that, the countdown is continued in the manner shown in FIGS. 23(3f) to (6f), and in FIG. 23(7fa), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo symbol is to be performed. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted and the first pseudo-repeating is performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-relation is started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and the word “attention” indicating that the warning is displayed instead of the timer display is displayed. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the replay symbol RP as the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second pseudo symbol is started. .. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 23 (9fa′), the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a notice may be given. Further, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed after the pine symbol CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, it is also possible to suggest that, as an effect to be performed as a result of the countdown by the timer notice effect, a notice effect or a big hit other than the pseudo-relation. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC are overlapped with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, in this effect example, the timer display is increased as one mode of the change of the display mode of the timer display. The timer display may be divided.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 24(1), the number of holdings in special figure 1 is 2, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. , "2" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 2 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(2), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed overlapping with the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and indicates that time is added in the timer notice effect. In addition, you may announce that a timer announcement production will be performed. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol stops, The left symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. In addition, the display timing of the notice icon to be stocked is not limited to the case where the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed in association with the decorative pattern, and various types of notice such as the notice icon temporary stop, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. There may be a case where it is performed at any timing such as a notice or a hold in the design variable display by the effect, a look-ahead notice by various effects such as the navigation character YM, or the like.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(3), in the first UI unit 280, the platform on which the navigation character YM stands is raised and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icon is displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. Note that the number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be set arbitrarily.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(4), the notice icon MI1 of the clock moves to the notice icon display area 285 and is stocked. In addition, in the first decorative symbol, a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol is shown. Here, the timing when the right symbol stops and the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol stops. The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24(5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is reduced and displayed, stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. ing. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(5), the middle design is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative design and the second decorative design are a combination of the missing decorative design of "Decorative 4-Decorative 1-Decorative 7". It is shown that it is confirmed and displayed. The timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is stored in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, or the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. The decorative pattern may be confirmed and displayed after being stored, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285 after the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24(6), one holding of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the symbols is performed. Further, the timer advance notice effect has also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 24(6), the timer indication displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:69", and the countdown is being performed. Note that there may be an effect display (for example, the navigation character YM) that overlaps the timer notification display only during execution of a certain effect (for example, stock effect of the notice icon). On the contrary, there may be an effect display in which the timer notice is overlapped only while a certain effect is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24(7), an effect is displayed around the notice icon MI1 of the clock stored in the notice icon display area 285 to announce that the notice icon MI1 of the clock will be used. .. Note that "07:31" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24(8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed substantially at the center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be erased at the timing of popping out of the notice icon display area 285.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24(9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. It should be noted that the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display is started, or the count-up animation may be displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted. The notification may be started, or the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be deleted after the display of the count-up animation is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24(10), the notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25(A1) to 25(A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A1), the timer notice effect is started, and "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol. Also, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A3), a balloon in which the characters "add on" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. In addition, even if the characters "add on" are displayed, the time displayed by the timer may not be added, or another effect may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-1), after displaying a character of "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3a-2). Alternatively, a balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and "+10 seconds" indicating the additional time may be displayed on the balloon to notify the additional time. In this example of the effect, the effect to be displayed as "attention" is not a notice display but an addition of 10 seconds. In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), the timer display is replaced with the word "yet" indicating that the timer notification effect will continue, and then the timer notification display TM1 is added. The time to be added may be notified by switching to the display of “+10 seconds” indicating the time to be added. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (A3b-1), after displaying the characters "Still" on the timer notice display TM1, the balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10" indicating the time to be added to the balloon is displayed. The display of “second” may be performed. Further, after the display shown in FIG. 25(A3), the display as shown in FIG. 25(A3b-2) may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 25(A4), 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is restarted. .. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(A4), in response to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 being “00:00”, the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Is shown. The timing at which the timer display is updated and the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or the pseudo continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is updated, The timer display may be updated after the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25(B1) to 25(B5) show effect examples in which the timer is shortened in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "06:99", and the countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B1), a balloon in which the word "subtract" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is subtracted from the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B2), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display shows "05:89". Further, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction" and is changed to "-3 seconds" indicating the shortened time. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds and the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the initially displayed time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25(B3), an effect of shortening the time (timer shortening effect) is performed by displaying a shortened animation in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is variably displayed at high speed. Note that the shortened animation display may not be performed. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(B4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “02:00”, and the time in the timer display is shortened (subtracted) by 3 seconds. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode on the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed due to the effect of shortening the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer shortening effect is being performed.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 25(B5), the word "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display to warn the notice. The advance notice is displayed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 25 (B5′), the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-relational symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-repetition is started. The timing at which the "attention" character in the timer notice display TM1 starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine pattern CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the "attention" character. After the start of the display, the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed, or after the pine symbol CC (or the replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, the "attention" character May start displaying. The appearance rate of the contents of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change in the timer notification effect, for example, while the timer notification effect is being executed. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-relational pattern is stopped and the pseudo-relational notification is likely to be made. You may make it easy to give a highly reliable notice of the jackpot. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-relation may be notified earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25(C1) to 25(C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(C1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 25(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(C1), the timer notice effect is being performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is being performed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(C1), a balloon displaying the characters "timer notice level UP" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the jackpot reliability of the timer notice display TM1 is shown. It is suggested that it may improve.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25(C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from, for example, white to red, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display, it is informed that a highly reliable notice may be given as the notice to be executed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 25D1 to 25D5 show effect examples in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and restarted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (D1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(D1), the timer notice production is performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 25(D1), a balloon in which the character "Stop" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. The timing at which the balloon with the word "Stop" is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, or the balloon with the word "Stop" is displayed. After that, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the display of the balloon to which the character “Stop” is added may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (D2), the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo symbol is informed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 25(D2), the countdown of the timer display is suspended, and the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "06:99".

Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D3), in the decorative design display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative design is restarted, and the second display of the variable design by pseudo-linking is performed. Has been done. It should be noted that “×2” is displayed below the second decorative pattern, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed by the pseudo link. Then, as shown in FIG. 25(D3), a balloon in which the word "restart" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display is restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 25(D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is restarted, and thereafter, the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased as shown in FIG. 25(D5). As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as pseudo-relation is being performed, and it is possible to restart the countdown after the effect is finished. Has been done.

As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of the timer notice display TM1 may change (increase or decrease) more than before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change, and the timer notice display TM1 is notified to change, the timer notice display TM1 may be increased to 2 or more, and conversely. If three notifications TM1 are displayed and the notification of the timer notification TM1 is changed, the timer notification TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less. Here, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time previously notified by the timer notice display TM1. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 indicating 10 seconds, if two timer notice displays TM1 are increased, 10 There are two timer notice displays TM1 that notify the seconds). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is decreased, the total value of the times previously notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed, or the timer notice display TM1 may be decreased as it is. (For example, assuming that there are two timer notice displays TM1 that notify 10 seconds, if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds becomes one). When there are a plurality of timer notice displays TM1 that have changed due to increase or decrease, the timer notice display TM1 may start counting down at the same timing or at different timings.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step. In the effect example shown in FIG. 26, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the family crest auditor 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, and the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H are not shown in the drawings for ease of explanation.

26A1 to 26A6 show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(A1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26(A1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(A1), the timer notice effect is started, and "05:89" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26(A1), a balloon in which the character “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is announced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner portion thereof overlaps the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(A3), on the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is performed and the effect of adding time is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(A4), the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased on the sub display device 208S. In this example of effect, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 26B1 to 26B7 show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 26(B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:54" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

Then, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26(B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon are switched to the display of the character “+10 seconds”, and the timer display is added to the timer display in the notice display TM1. The time to be notified is announced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side of the decoration pattern display device 208 substantially in the center, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The production will be done by adding time. At least a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the sub display device 208S, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the timer notice display TM1 than in the case where the sub display device 208S does not overlap. Further, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is located on the front side substantially at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timing at which the count-up animation display starts may be the same, or the sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol. The count-up animation display may be started after being positioned on the front side of the center of the device 208, or the count-up may be performed before the sub-display device 208S is positioned on the front side of the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. Animation display may start.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 26B4 to 26B5, the sub display device 208S displays a countdown of the additional time. More specifically, the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S is decreased by 1 second, while the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is added by 1 second. .. In this example of performance, while the countdown display of the additional time is being displayed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is interrupted, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S becomes “0 second”, the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It is updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and it is difficult to specify the time of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. Good.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(B6), in the sub display device 208S, the display of the additional time is switched to the display of “Restart” indicating that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is restarted, and thereafter, The sub display device 208S starts descending toward the initial position.

FIG. 26B7 shows a state in which the sub display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted, and at the timing shown in FIG. 26(B7), the timer display is “14:23”. After that, the display of "Restart" displayed on the sub display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the variation icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 26(B1). Here, the timing at which the countdown of the timer display restarts and the timing at which the sub-display device 208S starts to descend may be the same, or the sub-display device 208S starts to descend after the countdown of the timer display restarts. Alternatively, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted after the sub display device 208S starts to descend. Further, the timing when "Restart" is started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S and the timing when the countdown of the timer display is restarted may be the same, or after the display of "Restart" is started on the sub display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted, or "Restart" may be started to be displayed on the sub display device 208S after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. The timing at which the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position and the timing at which the countdown of the timer display restarts may be the same, or the countdown of the timer display restarts after the sub display device 208S returns to the initial position. Alternatively, the sub display device 208S may return to the initial position after the countdown of the timer display is restarted.

26C1 to 26C6 show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(C1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 26(C1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(C1), the timer notice effect is started, and "05:89" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26(C1), a balloon in which the character “+10 seconds” is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is announced. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26(C1), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts displaying a sucking animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer advance notice display TM1 sucks out the balloon. An effect image showing that the action is being performed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. , "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM
The display mode of the character “” extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative pattern display device 208. The navigation character YM has a facial expression that surprises the user.

In FIG. 26(C3), a state in which the sucking animation is continuously displayed is shown. Specifically, the display of "+10 seconds" sucked by the timer notice display TM1 by the sucking animation is further moved toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of "+10 seconds" continues to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, on the timer notice display TM1, the above-mentioned count-up animation display has started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “+10 seconds” absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. , The state of moving toward the timer notice display TM1 while being reduced. It should be noted that while the sucking animation is being displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (an animation that accompanies the sucking animation) by seeing the sucking animation, but there is no particular need to perform the animation. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(C5), when the display of “+10 seconds” is completely absorbed by the timer notice display TM1, the absorption animation display is completed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26(C6), the timer is displayed. The notice display TM1 shows that the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed. In the case where a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer notice effect may be performed by only one decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

27A1 to 27A4 show another example of the timer addition effect. 27A1 to FIG. 27A4, the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14A will be used for explanation, but in order to facilitate the explanation, the family crest actor 224E, A part of the first large-scale behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd and the thousand box dynamics accessory 224H will be described by omitting illustration.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(A1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 27(A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(A1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27(A2), the second large-board behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27(A3), on the timer notice display TM1, a count-up animation display is performed and an effect of adding time is started.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In addition, in this example of performance, the second large-board behavior auditors 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd among the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operate to display 10 on the timer display. Although it is informed that the addition of seconds is performed, the time to be added may be different depending on the number of the active components of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, for example, When all of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd are activated, 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. In addition, in this example of performance, the second large-board behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate only once to notify that 10 seconds are added to the timer display. The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times. For example, when the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd operate three times, the timer display may add 30 seconds. May be.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 27B1 to 27B4 show examples of additional timer productions using the family crest cast 224E. In addition, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 27(B1) to 27(B4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a) will be used for explanation. A description will be given by omitting the illustration of the 224 Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd and the thousand-axle box accessory 224H.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 27(B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27(B2), the family crest accessory 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, overlaps with the decorative pattern display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Works in the direction. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a state in which the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times is displayed around the overlapping family crest part 224E. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E, whereby the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is informed that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27(B3), on the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is performed and the effect of adding time is started.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to “15:00”, and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. It should be noted that in this example of performance, the fact that the family crest part 224E operates only once notifies that 10 seconds are added to the timer display, but the addition time may differ depending on the number of operations. Of course, for example, when the family crest part 224E operates three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

27(C1) to FIG. 27(C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 27(C1) to 27(C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are omitted from the drawing for ease of explanation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27(C1), it is shown that the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 27(C1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed in the holding display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and "1" indicating that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the second holding number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area. In addition, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed on the first UI unit 280.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is being performed, and the countdown of the timer display is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 27(C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display, and in this example of performance, when the timer display becomes "05:00", the countdown is interrupted, and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. The countdown may be continuously performed without interruption.

In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters "additional 10 seconds" are displayed, and the time to be added is notified to the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27(C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the directions in which they approach each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, As shown in FIG. 27(C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the position closest to each other. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped. Has become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27(C4), the display of "15:00" showing the time when 10 seconds is added to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second display. It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27(C5), the display of "15:00" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not displaying the timer display. The 2 decorative pattern display device 208M and the 3rd decorative pattern display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the 1st decorative pattern display device 208L. The display start timing of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the movement start timing of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same, After the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decorative symbol. The display of “15:00” on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started after the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27(C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. It It should be noted that the countdown of the timer display in the state where the display of "15:00" is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 27(C4)). May be restarted. The case where the timer display is displayed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be configured to be a big hit more easily than when the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device, The jackpots may be the same in ease, or may be configured so as not to be a jackpot.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing another example of the timer announcement effect step by step.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 28(A1) to (A4) show another example of the timer addition production using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 28(A1) to (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b) is applied, and further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are omitted from the drawing for ease of explanation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28(A1), it is shown that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 28(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer display countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, two timer advance notice effects are performed. In this effect example, the timer notice effect performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is the first timer notice effect, and the timer notice effect performed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second timer notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 28(A1), "05:89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15:89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been done.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in the directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this effect example, the countdown of the timer display is continued even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, but it may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest position, as shown in FIG. 28(A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. The times indicated by the timer displays respectively displayed in 208N are summed up, and the display of "20:00" showing the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, but it does not have to be interrupted. Further, the timer display of "20:00" is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, since it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to visually recognize. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N
However, the movement to the initial position is started along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 28(A3) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to their initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device. In response to the movement of 208N, scroll display is performed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in response to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N responds to the movement to the initial position. The display of "20:00" is scrolled to the left. In the process of moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol. When "20:00" displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 28(A3) is displayed. As shown, the display of “20:00” is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 28(A4), the timer display of "20:00" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. The countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 28(A3)). Here, the easiness of a big hit may be different depending on the decorative pattern display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this example of performance, when the timer display is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L, It is more likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the jackpots may or may not be the same.)

The effect examples shown in FIG. 28(B1) to FIG. 28(B3) show an example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 28(B1) to (B3), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a) is applied, but in this effect example, instead of the family crest cast 224E, FIG. The POV display 224I described above with reference to FIG. 28(B1) to FIG. 28(B3), in order to facilitate the description, a part of the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd and the thousand-box box accessory 224H will be described. The illustration is omitted here.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 28(B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and "05:71" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28(B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. By the lighting control of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character "+10" is displayed by the simple display, and the time to be added to the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 28(B1), by rotating the LED array of the POV display 224I, all of the first decorative symbol and the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are removed. It overlaps with the rotation area and is difficult to see.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28(B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves to the lower right direction, and the display "+10" displayed only on the POV display 224I so far. Is also displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. That is, the character “+10” is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative pattern display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may have a decorated display mode. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "+10" so as to match the display of the character "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, there is a case in which the display of "+10" on the POV display 224I and the display of the character "+10" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 can provide a sense of unity. In addition, in this effect example, the number font displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the number font displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, but it may be the same.

After that, after the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, the POV display 224I stops in the initial posture as shown in FIG. 28(B3). At this time, the display of the character “+10” displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to visually recognize than when the LED array is rotating. In this example of performance, thereafter, 10 seconds is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 28C1 to 28C5 show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (decorative pattern display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the effect example shown in FIG. 28(C1) to FIG. 28(C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 28(B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(C1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 28(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28(C1), the timer notice effect is started, and "06:87" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 28(C1), the POV display 224I has risen from the initial position to the position on the front surface side in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. It should be noted that the entire variable icon h0 and the first decorative symbol and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped with the POV display 224I, which is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the POV display 224I is not overlapped.

After that, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts to rotate and reaches a constant rotation speed and is rotated at a constant speed, as shown in FIG. 28(C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The timer display displayed on the display is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown is continuing. Further, at this time, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of areas and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest actor 224E, whereby 10 seconds are displayed on the timer display. It is informed that the addition will be made.

After that, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 28(C3), an effect of bursting the timer display is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28(C4), the timer display after adding is "15:00". Is displayed. In this example of performance, the countdown is interrupted when "15:00" is displayed, but it may be continued.

Then, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is started to decrease, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the timer notice display TM1 again. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C5), it stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer advance notice display TM1 is "15:00", and then the countdown is restarted. The countdown may be restarted while the timer display is displayed on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be made to be a big hit more easily than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative pattern display device 208, but the big hit is easily made. May be the same or may not be a big hit.

In addition, in the timer announcement effect described so far, when adding, shortening, or interrupting the timer in the timer display, internally from the beginning of the countdown before the change to the end of the countdown after the change. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time before the change may be counted down, and the time after the change may be counted down (for example, if the time is changed 10 seconds after the countdown is started, If 10 seconds is counted down and "Attention" is displayed 5 seconds after the change, then another 5 seconds is counted down). Further, the display of the countdown and the internally counted time may be the same.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 29, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted. In addition, in this example of effect, the above-described effect lever 136V is further provided.

FIG. 29(1) shows another effect example following FIG. 17(25). In FIG. 29(1), the state of development into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(1), an enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(2), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the progress status of the current reach effect is roughly indicated by the position. Information. Here, the traveling speed of the character SBH of Sabohani is not constant but may vary depending on the progress situation of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29(2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. That is, when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are respectively reached on the way of the character SBH of Sabohani, a specific notice may be issued. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. In this example of production, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the state that has evolved into the super reach shown in FIG. 29(1) is started. The display may be started at different timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the variation of the decorative pattern The display may be started when the display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(3), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the starting point SP.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(4), at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the character Boy of Boyi appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is shown. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the boy character BOY. It can be said that the boy character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(5), a balloon with the letters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and a notice is given by the character display of the chance up. I'm informing you. The timing at which the boy character BOY starts to display and the timing at which the balloon of the sabotani character SBH starts to display may be the same, or the balloon of the sabotani character SBH may be displayed after the balloon character BOY starts to display. It may be displayed, or the boy character BOY may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the sabotani character SBH is started. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the advance notice by the display of the Boy character BOY is being given, but may not be stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29(6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice. The letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed. Further, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed when the character SBH of Savohani approaches the checkpoint. In this case, the entire chance up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed, or only the relevant checkpoint portion may be enlarged and displayed. This is also applicable in the following description.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of “UP” has been eliminated, part of the display is visible.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 29(8), when the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the second check point CP2, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(9). It is displayed and the button effect is started. Then, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29(10), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Here, the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player performs a button operation or until the operation valid period elapses, but may not stop.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29(11), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 29(12), the player It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being pressed.
When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29(13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. Notice production is performed. In this example of performance, the cut-in image CI3 of Tonosama is a special cut-in image that is surrounded by a golden frame and shows a state of riding a large motorcycle while wearing sunglasses and smoking a cigar. It is reported that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 29(13), a cut-in image CI3 of the lord (see FIG. 17(32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed. May be. The cut-in image CI1 of this hall shown in FIG. 29(13) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has been operated within the operation valid period, or may be displayed. The button 136 (chance button 136) may be displayed without fail when it is operated within the operation valid period. In addition, the cut-in image CI1 of this hall shown in FIG. 29(13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). Good, it may be always displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), or the operation valid period without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). It may not be displayed when has passed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(14), a balloon with the letters “Chance Up Gold Cut-in” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the cut-in surrounded by a gold frame is displayed. It informs that a notice has been given by displaying an image. Note that the display start timing of the lord's cut-in image CI3 may be the same as the display start timing of the balloon of the sabotani character SBH, or the sabotani character's character may be displayed after the lord's cut-in image CI3 starts to be displayed. The balloon of SBH may be displayed, and the cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Savohani is started. Although the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, it may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, or the character SBH of Sabohani becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after reaching, or the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2 after the button effect is started. In the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is configured not to be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without the production button 136 (chance button 136) being operated, the production button 136 (chance button 136) Even if is not operated, it may be possible to notify that the advance notice of the chance increase has occurred as in the case where the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has been operated, or the advance notice of the chance increase has occurred. It may not be informed, or only a part of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance may be informed (for example, the balloon is not displayed and only the character "UP" is displayed).

Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (15 ), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice. The letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(16) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of "UP" has been eliminated, part of the display is visible.

Then, when the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 29(17), the lever image 136Va is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. A balloon with the letters “Chance Up Lever” is displayed near the character SBH to notify that the notice by the lever effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. In addition, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started during the display of the balloon to which the characters of “chance up lever” are added. Although the remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (placard) of the chance up meter CMT, the remaining time display meter MT may overlap all of them, and the opportunity up meter CMT may be displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. Of the chance up meter CMT may be displayed so as not to overlap, while the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed. There may be a case where the up-meter CMT partially or entirely overlaps the remaining time display meter MT, and while the opportunity up-meter CMT is being displayed, a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped. Good.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 29(20), the player can receive the operation of the effect lever 136V. The chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Note that the sabotani character SBH may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the lever operation is performed by the player or the operation valid period elapses.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 29 (21) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is located before the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 29(22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 29(23), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth board. The large-board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL emits light, and the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, the effect (the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd and the thousand-box work product 224H is activated when the production lever 126V shown in FIG. 29 (23) is operated, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. 17), and the effect performed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) shown in FIG. 17 (40) is operated is the same, but different. It may be. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first large-sized board action product 224Ga to the fourth-sized board action product 224Gd and the thousand-box action product 224H are returned to their respective initial positions, and the decorative pattern is displayed. The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. Although the chance up meter CMT also fades in along with the animation display fade-in of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be re-displayed after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. .. The operation of FIGS. 29(23) to (24) is performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 17(38) to (44).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29(25), a state in which the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed and restarted is shown. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the enemy swordsman appears to be in agony and appears to be defeated. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the final point GP, and the placard indicates the character “V”, which indicates a big hit.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (26), the main character's shrine wins the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is notified that it is a big hit. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 28 (28), the first decorative pattern is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Swing fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is finished. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, the character SBH of Sabohan and the placard) may be displayed.

In the effect using the chance up meter CMT described above, the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. In this case, the case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is not displayed. The reliability of the big hit may be the same when the chance up meter CMT is displayed and when it is not displayed.

Further, there may be a notice of a chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, there may be a notice of a chance up that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, the position of the check point may be moved or the check point may be erased during the performance of the chance up meter CMT.

Further, during execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani indicating the current position returns to a position (position indicating the past) before the current position, or a previous position (indicating the future). Position).

Further, the effect itself on the chance up meter CMT may be a mini game, and for example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the check point, the effect of increasing the chance may be performed. In addition, for example, an enemy character may be arranged at the check point, and an effect may be performed in which the chance is increased when the teammate character fights and wins.

Further, as an effect of increasing a chance during execution of the jackpot game (for example, rank-up bonus, probability variation promotion, promotion to a jackpot game with more balls, etc.), an effect using the chance up meter CMT may be performed.

Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden when the power is restored. Further, the display of the chance up meter CMT itself may be returned, but the history of the timing of the checkpoint and the occurrence of the chance up effect before the power failure may be hidden.

Moreover, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer advance notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance up meter CMT.

In addition, when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the checkpoint, the chance-up effect may be always performed, and may or may not be performed. This is similarly applicable to the production of the chance up meter described below.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 30(3a) is another example of effect following FIG. 29(2), and the same effect as in FIG. 29(3) is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(4a), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even if the character SBH of Sabohani arrives at the first checkpoint CP1, the advance notice of the chance is not given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30(5a), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 30(5a) to 30(7a), the character SBH of Sabohani has the first checkpoint. Passing through CP1 as it is, neither marking at the first checkpoint CP1 nor display of the character "UP" is performed. As a result, at the first check point CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the announcement has not been issued. In addition, when the advance notice of the chance up is not given at the first check point CP1, the display of the first check point CP1 may be erased as shown in FIG. 30(7a′), for example. Also, as shown in FIG. 30(7a″), instead of the letters “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, the display of “X” indicating that the chance up notice has not been given. May be performed. Even if the advance notice of the chance is not actually given, it is assumed that the advance notice of the chance is given after the character SBH of Sabohani has passed the check point, and marking at the check point or “UP” is performed. May be displayed, for example, the marking or the character “UP” may be hidden once at the checkpoint and then the marking or the character “UP” may be displayed. The character SBH of Sabohani may return to the checkpoint to give an advance notice of the chance and display the marking or the character "UP". In addition, for example, when the reach effect is rewound to the beginning or halfway, and then the character SBH of Sabohani passes the check point, the opportunity increase effect is performed, and the marking and the characters “UP” are displayed. May be displayed.

FIG. 30(17b) is another example of effect following FIG. 29(16), and the same effect as in FIG. 29(17) is performed. At the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the placard is displayed as a question mark, and when the character SBH of Sabohani arrives at the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the state that the lever effect as the advance notice of the chance is not started is displayed. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30(19b), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 30(17b) to FIG. 30(20b), the character SBH of Sabohani has the third checkpoint. Passing through CP3 as it is, neither marking at the third check point CP3 nor displaying of the characters “UP” is performed. Note that FIG. 30 (19b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has started and the player is ready to accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). ing.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 30 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani is located before the final point GP.

Then, within the operation valid period, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 30 (21b), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. A message saying that the character and the enemy swordsman have lost the battle is displayed along with a line saying "Did you remove it?". Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach production will be developed.

After that, after the cut-in image CI4 by the lord's character shown in FIG. 30(23b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 30(24b), the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach. Is started. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and moves toward the starting point SP.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 30(25b) to (29b), while the character SBH of Sabohani is heading to the start point SP, an indication for changing the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed. To do. Therefore, due to the movement of the character SBH of Savohani, for example, as shown in FIGS. 30(26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the fifth check point CP5 appears. As shown in FIG. 30 (28b) to FIG. 30 (29b), the fourth check point CP4 appears.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (29b) shows that the character SBH of Savohani is again positioned at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display state before the change of the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 (the state where the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed) is displayed. Has become. Then, on the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the character SBH of the sabotani is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), a state where the SP swordsman reach is developed is shown. The SP swordsman reach is a reach that develops and transitions to a swordsman reach, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into an SP swordsman reach. In the SP swordsman reach, as shown in Fig. 30 (30b), the hero's lord and the enemy's swordsman face each other, which is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach, but pandas are used as assistants to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (30b), at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4, the Kopanda support group KPD composed of three Kopanda characters cheers. A notice is displayed to show that the SP swordsman's reach has become extremely reliable. It can be said that this Kopanda cheering party KPD is functioning as a character for increasing chances. The Kopanda cheering party KPD may or may not always appear in the SP swordsman reach.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (31b), a balloon with the letters "Chance Up Copanda Cheering Party" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Savohani, and a notice is displayed by the character display of chance up. I am informed that I was broken. The timing when the display of the Kopanda support group KPD starts may be the same as the timing when the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Savohani starts, or the balloon of the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed after the display starts by the support group KPD. It may be displayed, or the Kopanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. Note that the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 during the advance notice by the display of the Kopanda cheering party KPD, but may not stop.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (32b) shows that the character SBH of Sabohan has reached the fifth checkpoint CP5. Then, the display of "collaboration deadly" that the chance-up effect is performed is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (33b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lever image 136Va together with the display of "one shot". To be done. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the letters “chance up lever” added is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to inform that the notice by the lever effect has started. Here, there may be a case where the lever effect that is the chance-up effect is not performed but the button effect that is the effect of operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is performed. Also, the lever effect may be always performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth checkpoint CP5 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 29(24) to (28), and it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit.

FIG. 30(23c) is another example of effect following FIG. 29(22). In the lever effect shown in FIG. 29(18) to FIG. 29(22), the player operates the effect lever 136V, It shows that the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is notified and it is notified. Also, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows the character “x” indicating that it is a loss, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression. ing.

FIG. 30(5d) is a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 29(5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(5d), a large number of boy characters BOY (boy group) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. .. That is, it is shown that a notice is given by the appearance of the Boys group. When the boyy character appears in groups, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the boyy character BOY appears alone. In addition, the chance up meter CMT displays a balloon with the characters “Chance Up BOY Group” added near the character SBH of Sabohani to inform that the advance notice has been given by the character display of the chance up. In this way, different chance-up effects may be performed even at the same chance-up points, or the same effect may be performed at the same chance-up points.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 31(7e) is another effect example following FIG. 29(6), and the same effect as in FIG. 29(7) is performed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 31(8e) to (9e), in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani jumps over the second check point CP2 and reaches the position before the third check point CP3, and then the third check point CP3. It waits at that place until a chance-up notice corresponding to checkpoint CP3 is given. While the effect of the character SBH of Sabohani jumping over the second check point CP2 and reaching the third check point CP3 is being performed, the effect corresponding to the second check point CP2 (for example, FIG. 29 (9)-). The button effect and the like shown in FIG. 15 (15) may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second check point CP2 may be marked in red and the character “UP” may be displayed as the effect.

FIG. 31(2f) is another effect example following FIG. 29(1). In the effect example shown in FIG. 31(2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from the effect example shown in FIG. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is configured in a green rod shape, and instead of the character SBH of Savohani, the position of the marker MRK is used to roughly notify the current progress of the reach production. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the moving speed of the marker MRK is not constant but may change depending on the progress status of the effect, but may be constant. In addition, the display form of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is represented by a question mark, so as to give a sense of expectation that the advance notice of the chance is given. The start point and the end point are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 31(3f) following FIG. 31(2f) shows that the marker MRK has started to move from the start point.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(4f), at the timing when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1, the boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31(5f), a balloon with the letters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the marker MRK, and the advance notice by the character display of the chance up has been given. Is informed. The marker MRK stands by at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 31(5f) to (6f).

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31(7f-1) to (7f-2), the state in which the marker MRK has started to move is shown. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed over the gauge portion. The boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 31 (7f-2).

FIG. 31 (4 g ′) shows an example of an effect when the boy character BOY does not appear even after the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP 1 after the effect shown in FIG. 31 (3 f) is performed. Has been done. Specifically, when the boy character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 31(4f), as shown in FIG. 31(4g'), the chance up meter CMT is at the first check point CP1. Instead of displaying the question mark, “X” is displayed to indicate that the notice has not appeared. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4g″), the display of the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased and no display may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31 (4g′″), the display mode may be left unchanged while the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 is displayed.

FIG. 31(2h) is still another effect example following FIG. 29(1). The production example shown in FIG. 31(2h) is similar to the display mode of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 31(2f), but the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are hidden. They differ in points. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the advance notice of the chance increase, and it may be possible to give the player an expectation as to when the advance notice of the chance increase is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 31(5h), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the marker MRK to notify that the advance notice has been given by the character display of the chance up. At this time, a part of the characters "UP" showing that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice has appeared.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 31(6h) to (7h), as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is changed, the hidden “UP” character is changed. Appear.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

32A1 to FIG. 32A11 show a state in which the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing of occurrence of pseudo rendition and the number of occurrences of pseudo rendition during execution of pseudo rendition. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32(A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A2), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed to show that the chase effect is started as an example of the pseudo continuous effect.

After that, in FIG. 32(A3), a state where the chase effect is started is shown. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display in which the main character, the lord, chases the evil merchant is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance up meter CMT in the above-described mode shown in FIG. 31(2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32(A3), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a pseudo-relation may occur, and are intended to give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the marker MRK reaches each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 on the way, a pseudo run may occur. In addition, it has been suggested that reaching the final point makes it easier for the unscrupulous merchants to be captured and to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this example of performance, as the pseudo-relation occurs, the jackpot is more likely to occur. It should be noted that, when the pseudo-ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo-ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is determined. The big hits may be confirmed when the number of pseudo runs is other than four. For example, when the number of pseudo runs is one and four, the big hits may be decided. The number of pseudo-repetitions that are confirmed as a big hit is less likely to occur than other pseudo-repetition times.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A4) shows that the marker MRK is starting to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A5), the first decorative pattern is shown to fluctuate in a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(A6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "continuation" is displayed in the display in which the main character's lord is chasing the evil merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo-link will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example. Even if the display of the main character chasing after the evil merchant is the same as the timing when the character "Continue" is displayed and the timing at which the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the character "Continued" is displayed. Okay, after the word "Continue" is displayed on the display that the main character chases after the evil merchant, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may switch from the question mark to the display of the character "Continue." After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continuation", the character "continuation" may be displayed in the display in which the hero of the protagonist chases the evil merchant.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A7) shows that the first decorative symbol is swinging and fluctuating in a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A7) shows that the distance between the main character's hall and the evil merchant is shortened.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A8), the character "continuation" is displayed along with the display in which the main character chases after the evil merchant, and it is informed that the second pseudo-link will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A9), a state in which the first decorative pattern fluctuates in a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6” is shown. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. In addition, the angle that shows the hero's chasing after the evil merchant has been changed, and the expression of the evil merchant who had been able to afford until now has become a frustrated expression.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(A10), the character "continuation" is displayed along with the display that the main character chasing after the evil merchant, and the state that the third pseudo-repeation is informed is displayed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third checkpoint CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(A11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "Secure" and the appearance that the main character's lord has captured the evil merchant. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the final point, which indicates that, in the present symbol variation display, the pseudo run is performed three times in total. Further, at this time, in the first decorative pattern, the reach state is reached by "decoration 7", and the reach effect is started.

32B1 to 32B14 show an example of the effect, in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed during the normal variable display of the decorative symbol, and the timing of the advance notice of the chance up is notified. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32(B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance up meter CMT in the above-described mode shown in FIG. 31(2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32(B2), the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are arranged. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and the player is expected to have a sense of expectation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(B3), the marker MRK is starting to move from the starting point. In addition, a balloon in which the characters "opportunity" are displayed is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character advance notice is given by the navigation character YM. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the notice of the navigator character YM with the balloon of the "opportunity" is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but an opportunity directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of up.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(B4), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1. Then, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "opportunity" to "no". In response to this, a balloon with the word “chance up or not” added is displayed near the marker MRK to notify that the navigation character YM has given a notice of a chance up. Note that the marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that conversation advance notice has started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. This lord's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation announcement. Also,
This lord's conversation image CI1 overlaps with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped. Further, the lord's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the lord's conversation image CI1 than in the case where the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped. It should be noted that the conversation image CI1 of the lord is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(B5), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT is changed, the hidden “UP” character is changed. The appearance is shown. As a result, the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance is shown. In addition, the character displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM is changed from "No" to "Extreme heat". In this example of performance, the notice by the balloon of the character “navy heat” of the navigation character YM is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT is increased. May be a notice of. The conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the second decorative design. It should be noted that the lord's conversation image CI1 is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT here as well, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the conversation image CI1 than in the case where the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(B6), the chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation announcement, the grandfather's conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 16(10) is displayed is displayed together with the grandfather's character. The old conversation image CI2 is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a chance up notice that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32(B6), the operation valid period is not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding thereto is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the old conversation image CI2. Further, as shown in FIG. 32(B6), the lord's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the conversation image CI2 than in the non-overlapping state. The marker MRK that has reached the second check point CP2 is in a standby state.

Then, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 32(B7). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 32(B7).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 32(B8) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation valid period started. At the timing shown in FIG. 32(B8), the navigation character advance notice has ended and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been erased. Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 32(B9), as shown in FIG. 32(B10), in the grand conversation image CI2, the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Instead, the words "It's intense heat" may be displayed. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the outer frame of the old conversation image CI2 is the display mode highlighted by the thick gold line, which is more likely to be a big hit than in the case of the normal outer frame display mode. Is informed. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, in response to the change in the display form of the outer frame of the old conversation image CI2 to a gold color, a balloon with the word “Chance up gold frame” is displayed near the marker MRK. , Has announced that the announcement of a chance up in the conversation announcement has been made. Note that the marker MRK waits at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. Note that when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 may or may not be displayed. When the old conversation image CI2 is not displayed, it is not necessary to notify that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, it may be informed, or only a part may be informed. (For example, only the characters "UP" are displayed).

The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 32(B11) shows that the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the balloon overlaps the old conversation image CI2, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the old conversation image CI2 than in the case where the balloon does not overlap. Note that the position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 32(B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 32(B11) from the beginning.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(B12), in the chance up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden “UP” character is displayed. It is shown as it appears. As a result, the history of the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also ended. The balloon display may be erased at the timing when the conversation announcement ends, or may be erased after the conversation announcement ends. Further, the conversation announcement may be ended after the display of the balloon is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(B13), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7" and is in the reach state. At this time, the marker MRK of the chance up meter CMT has reached the final point, and it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 32(B14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect is started and the chance up meter CMT is erased. The timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started, or the chance. The reach effect may be started after the upmeter CMT is erased.

It should be noted that the production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is ended when the reach state is reached, but the production may be continued even when the reach state is reached, or it is continued even after shifting to the super reach. You may do it. Further, when the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variable display is finished. At this time, for example, when the super reach is started, an effect by the chance up meter CMT different from the effect by the continuously executed chance up meter CMT may be started. Further, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not always start during the normal symbol variation display. Further, in the normal symbol variation display, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not start, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be always started. Further, when the production with the chance up meter CMT is enabled, the production with the chance up meter CMT may be started when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. In this case, for example, a display to that effect may be displayed so that the player can recognize it.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 33, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 33(A1) to 33(A5), the effect is started by the chance up meter CMT, but is erased halfway.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A1), it has been developed to super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, depending on the position. The progress status of the reach production is roughly reported. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are respectively reached on the road, a specific notice may be generated, but at the timing shown in FIG. 33(A1), the character SBH of Savohani becomes the first. The first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 have been reached, respectively, but since there is no advance notice of a chance up corresponding to them, the display of the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is erased. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(A1) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the second check point CP2.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A2), a cut-in display showing a state in which a grandfather character having an energy drink speaks “Fight” is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, when the cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect by the chance up meter CMT has been completed by giving a notice that a big hit is more likely than a notice of an opportunity up related to the chance up meter CMT. There is. The display of this cut-in is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this effect example, the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is finished before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is finished before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the checkpoint. In this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT may be necessarily ended midway, or the chance up meter CMT may or may not be ended midway. At this time, for example, the content of the effect to be performed thereafter may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends midway or not, or the same effect may be performed. .. Further, when the chance up meter CMT ends midway, the big hit may be more likely to occur than when the chance up meter CMT does not end midway. Also, the reliability of the big hit when the chance up meter CMT ends midway is the same as when the chance up meter CMT does not end midway when a chance up notice is issued at all check points. May be Alternatively, when the chance up meter CMT does not end halfway, the big hit may be more likely to occur than when the chance up meter CMT ends halfway.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of “one hit”, and the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase related to the chance up meter CMT.

After that, the operation valid period is started, and the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 33(A4), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol. Is displayed to notify that the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is a big hit. In addition, in the case of a loss, as shown in FIG. 33(A4′), “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is notified that the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is lost. To be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, and the state that the main character's lord has defeated the enemy swordsman is shown, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. ..

FIG. 33(A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33(A1). Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A2a), a cut-in display showing a state in which the princess character speaks "I will rewrite the reach" is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the big hit by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variable display has been effected with other contents. When this cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of the cut-in is also a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of a chance increase directly related to the chance up meter CMT. As described above, also in this effect example, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the appearance of the chance up meter CMT before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint is also shown. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A2a), the variable icon h0 is also deleted, but it may not be deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 33(A3a), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but in this chance up meter CMT, the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 appear, and each is red. It is marked with and the letters "UP" are displayed. That is, although the advance notice of the chance increase corresponding to the first check point CP1 and the advance notice of the chance increase corresponding to the second check point CP2 were not actually given, both are shown as being performed and the big hit. It shows that the reliability of is improving.

FIG. 33(A3a′-1) shows another example of effect that follows FIG. 33(A2a). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A3a′-1), it is shown that the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 30(30b). SP swordsman reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than swordsman reach. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), a chance up showing that the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third check point CP3. A notice is displayed to notify that the reliability of SP swordsman reach for jackpots has increased dramatically. Note that the child panda cheering party KPD may or may not always appear. Further, in FIG. 33 (A3a′-1), the erased chance up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode is the same as the display mode before the chance up meter CMT is erased.

FIG. 33(A3a′-2) is an effect example following FIG. 33(A2a), and shows an effect example different from FIG. 33(A3a′-1). The example of production shown in FIG. 33(A3a′-2) is different from that of FIG. 33(A3a′-1) in the display mode of the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2) is a chance up meter different from the chance up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed, and specifically, the figure As described above with reference to 30 (30b), the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33 (A3a′-2), it is indicated that the co-panda cheering party KPD appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4, which passed through after moving to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the Kopanda cheering party KPD, which indicates that a chance-up notice is given. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is restarted, the character SBH of Sabohani may be located at the starting point SP and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the character SBH of Sabohani may be at the final point GP. You may start from the end of SP Swordsman Reach.

FIG. 33(A3a″) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 33(A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (A3a″), the state where the full rotation reach is started is shown. The full-rotation reach is a reach in which a big hit is determined, and since it is not necessary to give the player more expectation, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. 33 (A3a''') ), the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it has been notified that the big hit will be settled at the time when the full rotation reach is started, so the position of the character SBH of Sabohani is changed to the final point GP without passing through the fifth check point CP5. The placard may display "V" indicating that it is a big hit. It should be noted that the timing at which the all-rotation reach starts and the timing at which the character SBH at Sabohani reaches the final point GP may be the same, or the character SBH at the Savohani reaches the final point GP after the all-rotation reach starts. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is displayed again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the full rotation reach is started. However, the full rotation reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

FIG. 33(A2b) to FIG. 33(A3b) show another effect example following FIG. 33(A1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(A2b), a state in which the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image is shown. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. It should be noted that the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operate, and the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the effect of overlapping on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. However, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 33(B1) to 33(B4), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, but the result by the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the way and the effect by the chance up meter CMT is finished. It is shown.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(B1), it has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is shown. Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GM, depending on the position. The progress status of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are reached on the road, a specific notice may be generated. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 33(B1), the character SBH of Savohani becomes the first. Although the first check point CP1 has been reached, no corresponding advance notice of a chance increase has been issued, so the red check mark and "UP" are not displayed at the first check point CP1. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(B1) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving from the first check point CP1.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed, showing that it is informed that there is a high possibility of loss. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 33(B3), the main character's lord is defeated by an enemy swordsman, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is informed that it will be lost. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, it is displayed that the character SBH of Sabohani is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 33(B3′), although “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle pattern and it is informed that it will be lost, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani is the last. It may be displayed that the vehicle is proceeding toward the point GP. After that, as shown in FIG. 33(B4), the first decorative pattern is shake-changed by a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and then stopped and displayed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 34, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 34(A1) to (A5), the chance up meter CMT is once erased during the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(A1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the swordsman, is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen.
In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34(A1), a first checkpoint CP1, a second checkpoint CP2, and a third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. The character SBH of Sabohani is shown to start moving from the start point SP.

After that, in FIG. 34(A2), the state where the light guide plate IL emits light and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The emission of light from the light guide plate IL serves as a notice of an increase in chance corresponding to the first check point CP1. At this time, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display is darkened so that the pattern on the light guide plate IL can be seen more easily. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display is interrupted by the dark display is restarting while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also restarted. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, a balloon with the letters “chance up illumination light emission” is displayed near the character SBH of the sabotani to inform that the advancement of the chance has been given. Note that the light guide plate IL continues to emit light.

In FIG. 34(A4), it is shown that the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene continues. In addition, the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown.

FIG. 34(A5) shows a state in which the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. The chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move.

In this example, the light-guide plate IL emits light as a notice of a chance increase in the reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned effect, and the character SBH of the sabotani may be displayed at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, for example. You may apply in the production which arrives and stirs up whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, in addition to the effect of inspiring whether it is a big hit or loss, it is applied in the effect of inspiring whether it is a big hit or something other than that (for example, the development develops, a loss is displayed, etc.) You may. Even in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 34(B1) to 34(B6) show that the chance up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(B1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34(B1), a first checkpoint CP1, a second checkpoint CP2 and a third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(B1), the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, and the character Boy of the boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that the advance notice of the chance is being given. Furthermore, in this example of performance, guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, an icon indicating the upper key and the lower key of the operation key unit 137 and the characters “Meter non-display by arrow key operation” are displayed, and the player can operate the operation key unit 137. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach is started, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the swordsman reach is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 34(B2), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and the advance notice by the character display of the chance up has been given. Is informed.

Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 34(B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 34(B4). .. Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 34(B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 34(B6). At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is in the position which should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is restarted. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 34(B2) may not be displayed, and the effect on the chance up meter CMT may be restarted from a point where it is sharp. Further, as shown in FIG. 34(B6′), when the effect between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 is omitted and the display of the chance up meter CMT is restarted, the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed. May be located in front of the second check point CP2, and may wait at that position until the timing of giving a notice corresponding to the second check point CP2. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 34(B6) and FIG. 34(B6′), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red and “UP” is indicated by the appearance of the boy character BOY. The letters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 34(B6), the character “UP” overlaps with the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is difficult to visually recognize it.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 34(B1) to 34(B6), the display/non-display of the chance up meter CMT can be switched as many times as necessary according to the operation of the player. After being displayed, after being hidden by the player's operation, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT.

In addition, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is initially displayed, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 34(B4), the chance up meter CMT is initially hidden. It may be configured to be in a closed state.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter. In FIG. 35, an example of effect in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed is shown.

In FIG. 35, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210.
The first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the universal figure holding lamp 216, and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 35(A1) to FIG. 35(A2) show how the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb each display the same content.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the swordsman, is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A1), two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the left and right sides of the variable icon h0 at the bottom of the display screen. In this effect example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. The chance up meters CMTa and CMTb have the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 31(2f) and described above. In the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35(A1), first check points CP1a and CP1b, second check points CP2a and CP2b, and third check points CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. The first check point CP1a (CP1b) to the third check point CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks to give an expectation that the advance notice of the chance is given. Here, the check points indicated by the first chance up meter CMTa and the check points indicated by the second chance up meter CMTb are targeted for the same advance notice of opportunity. It should be noted that although two chance up meters are displayed in this example of performance, only one chance up meter may be displayed, for example, two chance up meters may be displayed rather than one chance up meter. The big hits may be more likely to be displayed when they are displayed, or the big hits may be the same (reliability). Further, when the effect is produced by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Further, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. In addition, in this example of performance, the advance rates of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are the same, but they may be different, for example, the advance rate of the second chance up meter CMTb. However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A2), the markers MRKa, MRKb have reached the first check points CP1a, CP1b and the boy character BOY has appeared. A balloon added with the letters "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is informed that a chance up notice is given by the character display.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 35(A2′), in the first chance up meter CMTa, the word “Chance up BOY passed” is displayed in the balloon, and the reliability is displayed in the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the boy character BOY may be notified.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 35(A2″), when the appearance of the boy character BOY and the appearance that the boy character BOY is humming as a rare notice are displayed, the first chance The word "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed on the balloon of the up meter CMTa, and the word "Chance Up Nose" indicating that the rare notice has occurred is displayed on the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. Good.

In this example of performance, the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb have the same traveling speed of the markers MRKa and MRKb, but they may proceed at different speeds. Further, in this example of presentation, balloons are displayed on both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but it is also possible to display only one of them.

FIG. 35(A2a-1) to FIG. 35(A2a-2) show another effect example following FIG. 35(A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A2a-1) following FIG. 35(A1), the markers MRKa, MRKb have reached the first chance upmeters CMTa, CMTb, and the Boy character BOY has appeared. Then, a balloon with the words "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a chance up notice is displayed by the character display. It has been announced that it was done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter. Only CMTb is displayed. In this way, after displaying two chance up meters, one of them may be deleted. For example, when one of the two chance up meters is deleted, it is not deleted. It may be more likely to be a big hit, or may be more likely to be a big hit when not erased. Further, the reliability may be different depending on the deleted chance up meter. Moreover, both the two chance up meters may be deleted.

FIG. 35(A2b-1) to FIG. 35(A2b-2) show still another effect example following FIG. 35(A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(A2b-1) following FIG. 35(A1), the markers MRKa, MRKb have reached the first chance up meters CMTa, CMTb, and the Boy character BOY has appeared. Then, a balloon with the words "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and a chance up notice is displayed by the character display. It has been announced that it was done. At this time, the display form of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a red thick line, and it is informed that the reliability of the big hit is further improved. That is, in the display form of the balloons of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display form of the balloons of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display form of the balloons of the second chance up meter CMTb is a display of a highly reliable notice of a big hit. It can be called a mode. Note that the display mode of the balloon may be changed by only one of the two chance up meters or both of them may be changed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa in which the balloon with low reliability is displayed from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb in which a highly reliable balloon is displayed is displayed. In this way, after displaying two chance up meters, the display of the chance up meter in which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. Alternatively, after displaying the two chance up meters, the chance up meter in which the balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued and the display of the other chance up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be deleted.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 35B1 to 35B2 are two chance up meters CMTa.
, CMTb display different chance advance notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(B1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variation icon h0 in between at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35(B1), the first chance up meter CMTa has three check points (first check point CP1a, second check point CP2a, third check point CP3a). It is arranged. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two check points (fourth check point CP4b and fifth check point CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth check point CP4b and the fifth check point CP5b are the first check point. The advance notice and the start timing of the chance increase corresponding to any of CP1a to the third check point CP3a are different. In this production example, when the arrival timing of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first check point CP1a, the second check point CP2a, the third check point CP3a, the fourth check point CP4b, and the fifth check point CP5b are arranged in time series. , The first check point CP1a, the fourth check point CP4b, the second check point CP2a, the fifth check point CP5b, and the third check point CP3a.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first check point CP1a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb. It is shown that MRKb has reached the fourth check point CP4b and the boy character BOY has started humming. In response to this, in the second chance up meter CMTb, a balloon with the letters "Chance up humming" added is displayed near the marker MRKb to inform that the advance notice of the chance up has been given.

In addition, in this example of performance, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, if one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, a chance up notice corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter that is not displayed is announced. It may not be performed, or a chance up notice corresponding to a check point in the chance up meter that is not displayed may be given. Further, there may be a check point that is not notified when one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, or the check point that is notified. Good.

The effect examples shown in (C1) to (C4) of FIG. 35 show a state in which the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance advance notices.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C1), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist Tonosama and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variation icon h0 in between at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 35(C1), the second chance up meter CMTa is a meter showing the progress of the entire reach production, and one check point (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been done. This development point CPA indicates a point where the reach performance may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the starting point to the check point, the period from the check point to the check point, or the period from the check point to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTa. When the period of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this example of performance, the period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as a first period, and the period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as a second period. Further, in this effect example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 31(2f). The second chance up meter CMTb has the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 29B and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 35(C1), the first chance up meter CMTa is in the display mode corresponding to the first period, and the three check points (first check point CP1, second check point CP2, The third check point CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that there is a possibility that a notice of a chance up may occur when the marker MRK reaches each check point. Further, the marker MRK on the first chance up meter CMTa and the character SBH of Sabohani on the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C2), a state in which a button effect is performed is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 35(C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and a state is shown in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. Further, the first chance up meter CMTa displays the character "UP" indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred at the first check point CP1, and the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2. It is shown. The second check point CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up that appears as a result of the button effect. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the character SBH of Sabohan is proceeding toward the development point CPA.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first check point CP1 and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , A state in which a cut-in display showing that the princess character is saying "I'll rewrite the reach" is displayed. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa has been erased. Note that when the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased and only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be deleted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 35(C4), the cut-in image of the panda is displayed, and the state of shifting to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in the display mode corresponding to the second period, two check points (fourth check point CP4, fifth check point CP5) are arranged, and each check is performed. It is shown that when the marker MRK reaches the point, there is a possibility that a notice of a chance up may occur. Further, in the second chance up meter CMTb, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is advancing from the development point CPA toward the final point GP.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 36(A1) to (A7) show that the chance up meter CMT notifies the timing of occurrence of pseudo rendition and the number of occurrences of pseudo rendition during execution of pseudo rendition. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 32(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A1), the character "Secure Echigoya" is displayed, and a state in which a chase effect is started as an example of a pseudo continuous effect is shown.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A2) shows that the first decorative symbol is swinging and fluctuating in a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6”. A chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative pattern, and the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in this chance up meter CMT. , It has been announced that pseudo checkups may occur at each checkpoint. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first check point CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(A3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "CONTINUE" is displayed on the display in which the main character's lord is chasing the evil merchant, and it is informed that the first pseudo-link will be performed. Is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first check point CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the character "CONTINUE". Further, at this time, the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the variable display may be performed in a translucent display mode, for example.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A4), a state is shown in which the first decorative symbol variable display (that is, the second decorative symbol variable display) by the first pseudo-repeating is being performed. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(A5), the unscrupulous merchant has escaped, but by recovering the 1,000-box, it is shown that it has reached reach. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second check point CP2, and the display of the second check point CP2 is changed from the question mark to the reach state by a letter “R”. The display has been switched. As a result, the pseudo continuous effect is terminated midway, and as shown in FIG. 36(A6), the display of the pseudo continuous effect fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36(A7), when the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left in the first UI unit 280. And the hold icon h11 displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is erased when the fade-out of the display of the pseudo continuous effect is completed. In this way, the chance up meter CMT may reach the end more easily than the case where the chance up meter CMT ends at a checkpoint in the middle. Also, the likelihood of a big hit may be different depending on which checkpoint is reached.

In addition, as an example of the effect of hiding the chance up meter CMT, the procedure may be performed as shown in (A6a-1) to (A6a-2) of FIG. 36. Specifically, in FIG. 36(A5), when the pseudo continuous effect is ended midway, FIG. 36(A6a-1) to FIG. 36(A6a-).
As shown in 2), the chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out of the chance up meter CMT from the display screen.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 36(B1) to FIG. 36(B7) show that the chance up meter CMT is performing the effect from the start of the reach effect to the development of the super reach. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(B1), a state is shown in which the reach effect transitioning to reach "decoration 7" is performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 36(B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Then, in this effect example, when the reach effect is started, the chance up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed. The effect using the chance up meter CMT is performed until the super reach is displayed or until the loss is displayed without shifting to the super reach. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 36(B1), in the reach effect, when the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2, a notice of a chance increase corresponding to each check point is given. Is being performed, and the character “UP” to that effect is displayed. Further, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative pattern.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36(B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left and is displayed below the display area. It is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is framed out as well as being framed out. The chance up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third check point CP3. The chance up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after the movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first symbol is not overlapped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(B3), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-sized board action product 224Ga and the second large-sized board action product 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Further, in this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT is also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. ing. In addition, in this example of performance, the marker MRK continues to progress while the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd are operating, but the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga. The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavior accessory 224Gd is operating. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be hidden while the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operating. Further, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 36(B3), a balloon with the letters “Chance up large board behavior” is displayed near the marker MRK, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior part are displayed. It informs that the advance notice of the chance up by the thing 224Gd was given.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 36(B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, as shown in FIG. 36(B6), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position. At the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, the marker MRK reaches the final point in the chance up meter CMT, but the emission of the light guide plate IL ends after the marker MRK reaches the final point. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends. In addition, in this production example, after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative symbol is left. Although the design overlaps the chance up meter CMT, the first decorative design is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT before the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate. After the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd operate, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may do it. Further, the front-rear relationship between the first decorative symbol and the chance up meter CMT does not have to be changed before and after the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd. The chance up meter CMT is erased after the first large-board behavior component 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior component 224Gd return to the initial positions. After that, as shown in FIG. 36(B7), the super reach is developed.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 37(A1) to (A5), other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT overlap the chance up meter CMT during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Here, other effects may overlap only part of the chance up meter CMT, or other effects may overlap all of the chance up meter CMT.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(A1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is being developed, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves between the start point and the end point, and the current reach effect progresses depending on the position. It informs the situation roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the starting point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37(A1), the marker MRK becomes the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding advance notice of a chance increase is generated, and at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(A1) shows that the marker MRK is proceeding from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(A2), the treasure box BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the chance up meter CMT than when the treasure box BX does not overlap the chance up meter CMT. The treasure box BX is a notice production that is not related to the notice of the chance up corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. Further, the marker MRK does not stop during the display of the treasure box BX and continues to proceed.

In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second check point CP2, a corresponding advance notice of an opportunity increase occurs, and at the second check point CP2, a notification to that effect is issued. Is displayed. The treasure box BX still overlaps the chance up meter CMT.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(A4), the treasure box BX is opened, and the state of the character “intense heat” appears from inside. The display of the character "intense heat" is also a notice effect that is not related to the notice of the chance increase corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of a chance increase corresponding to the check point in the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37(A5), the treasure box BX which is overlapped and displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the chance up meter CMT is in a state where it is easily visible.

FIG. 37(B1) shows a state in which other effects unrelated to the chance up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance up meter CMT during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(B1), during execution of the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter CMT, the wipe is performed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and a state in which simultaneous production is performed on the wipe screen WP is shown. Here, the simultaneous production is, for example, an RTC (Real Time Clock) or a built-in timer as a time measuring means, and is the same model of a pachinko machine 100 attached to the same game island, and the same effect content is the same. It is a performance performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous production starts and is erased when the simultaneous production ends. Further, the wipe screen WP may be displayed even when an effect other than the simultaneous effect is performed.

FIG. 37(C1) to FIG. 37(C2) show a state in which an error display is displayed during execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 37(C1), it is shown that an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist, the lord, and the enemy, the swordsman, is being developed, which has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(C1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses depending on the position. It informs the situation roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(C1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached, a specific notice may be generated, and at the timing shown in FIG. 37(C1), the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding advance notice of a chance increase occurs, and at the first check point CP1, the character "UP" is displayed to notify that fact. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(C1), the marker MR
It is shown that K is progressing from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2.

After that, for example, a radio device such as a transceiver detects that a strong electric wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100 is output. When it is detected by the means, as shown in FIG. 37(C2), an error display is displayed by the character display of "radio wave detected" to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 37(C2), this error display does not overlap the chance up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors. For example, a ball drop error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 1) is full, or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. It is also applicable to a door opening error or the like that occurs when it is detected that the door member is opened, such as (1). Depending on the type of error, the error may not be displayed, or the error may be notified by voice or a lamp.

FIG. 37(C2a), FIG. 37(C2b) and FIG. 37(C2c) show other display examples of the error display. For example, as shown in FIG. May be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37(C2b), a plurality of error displays are configured to be able to be performed at the same time, and when an error occurs, the display is arranged vertically from the upper left side of the display screen. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error display causes the chance up meter CMT to be displayed so as to overlap. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37 (C2c), it is shown that an error is displayed on the entire display screen. Specifically, the fact that strong magnetism is emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 1) of the pachinko machine 100 is detected by, for example, magnetic force detection means provided in the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(C2c), an error display is displayed on the entire display screen by the character display of "Magnetism is detected" to that effect. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, for example, a big hit determination may not be performed, and a part of the processing in the main control unit 300 may not be performed until the power is cut off to prevent the game from proceeding. .. If the power is shut off while the error is being displayed, and then the power supply is restored, the variation time of the symbol variation display that was being executed when the power was turned off has elapsed and the symbol variation stop command has been issued. Until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400, for example, “in preparation” may be displayed on the entire display screen.

FIGS. 37(D1) to 37(D2) show how the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display device. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 37D1 to 37D2, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the sub display device 208S is a decorative pattern display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(D1), it has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist Tono and the enemy swordsman is shown. Further, a chance up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, showing that an effect is being produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(D1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the end point, and the current reach effect progresses depending on the position. It informs the situation roughly. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(D1), the first check point C
P1, a second checkpoint CP2 and a third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and when the marker MRK reaches each of the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP, a specific notice is given. When the marker MRK reaches the first check point CP1 at the timing shown in FIG. 37(D1), a corresponding advance notice of a chance increase is generated, and the first check point is generated. In CP1, the character "UP" for notifying that effect is displayed. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 37(D1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first check point CP1 toward the second check point CP2. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the character "vs swordsman" indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed is displayed, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

In FIG. 37(D2), the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, a cut-in image of the hero's lord is displayed, with a balloon showing the characters "Game".

In this example of effect, the sub-display device 208S, which is an example of a display unit, overlaps the chance up meter CMT, but another display unit may overlap the chance up meter CMT. For example, a display unit composed of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, 7 segments, a dot matrix, a lamp and the like can be applied.

Further, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 37(E1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the sub display device 208S. You may Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

It should be noted that in this production example, an example in which the chance up meter CMT is overlapped with another display has been described, but the present invention is also applied to the case where the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a change mode of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

In FIG. 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

38(A1) to 38(A9), the change rate of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change rate of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation announcement are shown. Are shown to be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Also, the variation icon h
0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A2), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). The operation effective period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

After that, in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38(A3), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(A3), it is shown that the conversation announcement is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the notice of conversation. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the grandfather's conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image includes a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136)a and a remaining time display meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A4), the operation valid period in the conversation announcement has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding thereto is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation valid period is started, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the grandparent conversation image CI2 and the palace's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 38(A4), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, the old conversation image CI2 is partially overlapped with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

After that, the operation valid period in the conversation announcement starts at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A5). The player may sometimes be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 38(A5). The operation effective period of the button effect based on the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation effective period of the button effect performed by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38(A5) to FIG. 38(A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is displayed more than the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM decreases. The speed at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is reduced faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A8), as shown in FIG. 38(A9), the old conversation image CI2 is changed to the operation promotion notification image. In some cases, the words "It's intense heat" may appear. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. On the other hand, on the other hand, the balloon image of the navigation character YM, on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed, is changed to the display of the character “intense heat”, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is considerably high. ing. That is, in this effect example, one operation of the effect button shows that the effect corresponding to the operation result of the button is performed for both the button effect in the conversation notice and the button effect by the navigation character YM. ing. It should be noted that the character display of "It's intense heat" displayed in the old conversation image CI2 and the character display of "Glamor heat" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are also displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 38(A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 38(A9a-1), the button started earlier. An effect may be performed according to the operation result corresponding to the effect. That is, in this effect example, since the button effect by the navigation character YM is started before the button effect in the conversation notice, as shown in FIG. 38(A9a-1), the effect button 136 in the button effect by the navigation character YM. Only the effect (character display of "hot heat" in the balloon of the navigation character YM) corresponding to the operation of the (chance button 136) is performed, and the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in the button effect based on the conversation notice is performed. The production (the character display of "Intense heat" displayed on the old conversation image CI2) is not performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (A9a-2), when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) for the second time, as shown in FIG. 28 (A9a-3), the operation is started later. The effect corresponding to the operation result corresponding to the button effect is performed. That is, an effect (character display of "exciting heat" in the old conversation image CI2) is performed according to the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in the button effect by the conversation notice.

In this example of effect, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated when the operation valid period is started for each of the two button effects, the button effect at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter decreases at a high speed. The effect may be performed in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136), or the effect button 136 (chance may be given priority to the button effect in which the gauge in the remaining time display meter decreases at a low speed. An effect may be performed according to the operation of the button 136).

Further, in this production example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different, but, for example, until a certain time, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the grand notice image CI2. The speed may be the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed at a certain time. ..

Further, in this effect example, the operation valid period related to the grandfather's notice image CI2 is set to 5 seconds. However, for example, it is prepared for 5 seconds and 10 seconds, and the remaining time display meter is provided at a speed corresponding to each. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation valid period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation valid period of the grand notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is selected to be 10 seconds.

Further, in this effect example, in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension is started later than in the case where "exciting heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect is previously displayed, "exciting heat! ”Is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is set to be higher, so that the notice displayed later is more likely to be displayed when the big hit is given, and the notice displayed later is more likely to be displayed. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying it while the attention level is relatively lowered. In addition, compared with the case where "intense heat" is displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM in which the effect is displayed earlier, "intense heat" is displayed in the grandpa's conversation image CI2, which has started to be extended later. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lower or the reliability of the big hit may be the same.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 38(B1) to 38(B11) show that both the timer advance notice effect and the effect using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B1), it is shown that an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is being performed, which has developed into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT are displayed side by side, and it is shown that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38(B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the current position depends on the position. The progress status of the reach production is roughly reported. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 38(B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. It is shown that a specific notice may be issued when each of the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 is reached on the way, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B2) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the start point SP.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice effect is started at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohan reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It is shown. That is, in this example of performance, it can be said that the start of the timer advance notice function functions as a notice of an increased chance. Further, "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B4), a balloon with the letters "Chance Up Timer Notice" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, indicating that the chance up notice has been given. I am informing you. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 is counting down the timer display, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38(B4).

After that, as shown in FIG. 38(B5), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice. The letters are displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "08:81" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38(B5).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B6) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of “UP” has been eliminated, part of the display is visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "08:31" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38(B6).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started moving from the second check point CP2. In this example of performance, when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2, the advance notice of a chance increase (for example, occurrence of cut-in) is performed, and the second check point CP2 is marked in red. At the same time, the letter "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the history of the notice being issued is shown. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04:14" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 38(B7).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B8) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third checkpoint CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "00:00", showing that the countdown is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 38(B9), the timer notice display TM1 displays the word "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. According to this effect example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 started later is faster than the ratio (speed) of the change of the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier to the whole. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time taken from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time taken from the start point SP of the character SBH of the sabotani to the final point GP by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Lever” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the lever is displayed. It notifies that the notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in the lever effect is a notice of a chance increase displayed corresponding to the arrival at the third check point CP3, and at the same time, a notice given as a result of completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. .. That is, it can be said that the object of the advance notice of the chance up shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT is the same as the object of the advance notice given as a result of the timer advance effect. Alternatively, it can also be said that the advance notice of the chance that the Sabohani character SBH has reached the third check point CP3 and the advance notice indicated by the "attention" character on the timer advance notice display TM1 are the same. Note that the target of the advance notice of the chance up shown in the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be different from the target of the advance notice given as the result of the timer advance effect, for example, in the effect by the chance up meter CMT, the third check The lever image 136Va gives a notice of a chance up when the character SBH of Sabohani arrives at the point CP3, and the notice made as a result of the timer notice effect makes the display form of the appearing lever image 136Va a more reliable display form. May change (for example, change from red to gold).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 38(B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. Further, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. The display of "UP" is
It is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the character SBH than in the case where it is not overlapped.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect stepwise.

In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 39(1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(2) shows that the button effect has started. In this example of performance, 6 sets of operation promotion notification images, which are combinations of button images and remaining time display meters, are displayed. Specifically, the first operation promotion notification image including the first button image 136a1 and the first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time are displayed. The second operation prompting notification image composed of the display meter MT2 is arranged at the center of the upper part of the display screen, and the third operation prompting notification image composed of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. The fourth operation prompting notification image, which is arranged in the upper right and is composed of the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged in the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining image are displayed. A fifth operation promotion notification image including the time display meter MT5 is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation promotion notification image including the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 is displayed on the display screen. It is located at the bottom right of. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 39(3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39(4), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced in all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6. Has been done. In this effect example, among the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation valid period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation valid period for the other operation promotion notification image. It is designed to be shorter and allow the operation valid period to pass earlier. In this example of performance, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image all have the same operation valid period. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

After that, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 39(5), as shown in FIG. 39(6), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the first operation promotion notification. It is shown that the image is changed to the Kopanda character KP and a notice is given. The second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have not changed. That is, in this effect example, one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) changes only one operation promotion notification image of the plurality of operation promotion notification images. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, The fifth operation promotion notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image are preferentially changed in the display mode one by one. The order of the operation prompting notification images for changing the display mode is not limited to the order described above, and can be set appropriately. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) once.

In addition, in this example of production, when the first remaining time display meter MT1 (the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the remaining display corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the highest priority. Although the gauge of the time display meter) decreases faster than the remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(4a), a third remaining time display meter MT3 (production button 136) is displayed. When the (chance button 136) is operated, the gauge of the remaining time display meter corresponding to the third operation prompting notification image in which the display mode changes in the third priority is changed to the first remaining time display meter MT1. It may be faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1, MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 including. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(4b), when the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display order is changed to the lowest priority. The gauge of the remaining time display meter (6) corresponding to the operation prompting notification image 6 may be faster or slower than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter that accelerates the gauge reduction is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but can be set to an appropriate one.

In addition, in this example of performance, the button images 136a1 to 136a6 are configured in all of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image. For any one or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(4c), as the image forming the sixth operation promotion notification image, the sixth button image 136a6 is replaced with a sixth operation image promoting the operation of the production lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 may be displayed. In this case, the remaining time display meters of the first operation prompting notification image to the sixth operation prompting notification image may have the same gauge reduction speed, or as shown in FIG. So that the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image forming the lever image 136Va6 of is reduced is faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to the other operation promotion notification images. It may be done or it may be delayed. With such a configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 39(4c) is performed, the effect lever 136V is operated once after the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). It may be possible to facilitate manipulation.

Further, in this effect example, the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image is reduced is displayed in the other operation promotion notification image. Although it is different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(4d), there may be two or more different speeds at which the gauges of the remaining time display meters decrease. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(4d), the speed at which the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3, MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image decrease is the other operation promotion notification. The image remaining time meters MT1, MT2, MT4, MT6 are different from each other, and the fifth remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third remaining operation time notification image corresponds to the fifth remaining operation time notification image corresponding to the third remaining time display meter MT3. The remaining time display meter MT5 may increase the speed at which the gauge decreases.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 40, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 40(A1) to FIG. 40(A6) show a plurality of timer advance notice effects being performed at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 40(A1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, FIG. 40(A1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, the timer advance notices TM1 and TM2 are framed in from the right side of the display area to start the timer advance notice effects. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display "10:00", which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In this effect example, as will be described later, since the countdown speed of the timer display in one timer advance notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display in the other timer advance notice display, it takes time to complete the countdown. Different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above may be referred to as the first timer notice display TM1 and the one displayed below may be referred to as the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(A2) shows a state in which the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 respectively start counting down the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(A3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this effect example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that of the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down according to the actual time elapsed, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 40(A3), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is "09:73", and the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 is "06:73". Has become. The countdown speed is not limited to the one described above, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 may be set to a speed that matches the passage of actual time. The countdown speed of the first timer notification display TM2 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer notification display TM2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 40(A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, the state is shown when 4 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer advance notice display started. You can

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, the word "attention" is displayed in place of the timer display, inviting attention to the notice. On the other hand, the countdown of the first timer advance notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display is "05:87" at the timing shown in FIG. 40(A5). After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be given. The second timer notice display TM2 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(A6), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed. After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be given. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In this effect example, the case where the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice effect started earlier is The countdown speed of the timer display in the timer preview display may be faster or slower than the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer preview display related to the timer preview effect started later.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 40(B1) to 40(B4), a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed for one of the timer advance notice effects is added. Showing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40(B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. In addition, FIG. 40(B1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display (first timer advance notice display TM1 and second timer advance notice display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area. Both timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 display "10:00", which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display is the same.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(B2) shows that the frame-in of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 has been completed. After that, the timer notice displays TM1 and TM2 respectively start counting down the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(B3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2. It should be noted that both the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 count down in accordance with the passage of actual time. At the timing shown in FIG. 40(B3), both the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 are "09:73". The countdown speed is not limited to the one described above, and may be set appropriately, and may be slower or faster than the actual elapsed time, for example. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(B3), it is shown that the navigation character YM is performing the timer addition effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is informed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(B4), the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to “19:00”, and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The situation is shown. At this time, since no addition is made to the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2, there is a difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2. Is occurring. Therefore, two timer advance notice effects are started, but the time is added to one of the timer displays in the middle, so that the timing at which the countdown ends is different.

In this example, the time is added to one of the two timer notice displays, but the time may be shortened (subtracted) or the timer notice may be displayed during execution. The countdown of one of the timer displays may be temporarily stopped so that the time until the countdown is completed may be different.

Further, in this example of performance, the case where the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice started earlier. Time is added to the timer display in the timer preview display related to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display related to the timer notification effect started later is completed, the timer notification effect started earlier is added. The countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display may be completed. In addition, the time is shortened for the timer display in the timer notification display related to the timer notification effect that was started later, before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display related to the timer notification effect that was started earlier is completed. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display related to the timer notification effect started later may be completed.

In addition, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed while the two timer notice effects are being performed, time addition is performed with respect to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, in addition to the timer display in the timer preview display related to any of the timer preview effects, time is added (or the time is shortened or the countdown is temporarily stopped) to display any timer preview display. It may be changed.

In addition, after the two timer preview effects are started, two timer addition effects and the like (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to the respective timer preview effects are performed. You may make it the time addition etc. with respect to the timer display in a display be performed about each.

Further, after the two timer preview effects are started, three timer addition effects and the like (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, and for example, for one of the two timer preview effects, The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects or the like, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer addition effect or the like with respect to the other timer announcement effect. Further, three timer addition effects and the like may be performed, and for example, the timer display may be changed only by two timer addition effects of three, or only one of the three timer addition effects and the like. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 40(C1) to (C4), the remaining time display timer indicating the operation valid period for each of the plurality of operating means is used in the effect that prompts the user to operate any of the plurality of operating means. It is shown as being displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(C1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 40(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(C1), button effect is started. Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, a left key image 137aL imitating the left key forming the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL. The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. In addition, a right key image 137aR that imitates the right key that constitutes the operation key unit 137 is displayed in an overlapping manner with the right door image DRR, and is displayed below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed on. After that, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be accepted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40(C2), both of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR have their operation effective period started and the gauges have decreased. The situation is shown. In this effect example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL, and the operation valid period passes earlier. Has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

FIG. 40(C3) shows a state where the player operates the left key to select the left door image DRL. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen to be enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. Further, the right door image DRR is deleted together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. This informs that the left door image DRL has been selected.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40(C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the door of the left door image DRL is open, and the appearance of the replay symbol RP is shown. As a result, for example, it is announced that the pseudo-relation will be performed.

On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 40(C2), when the right key is operated and the right door image DRR is selected, as shown in FIG. 40(C4a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the right door image. The door of the DRR may open and the pine pattern CC may appear. The character "Gekiatsu" is added to the pine pattern CC, which suggests that the reliability of the jackpot has been dramatically increased.

As described above, in this example of performance, when one of the two remaining time display meters, which has a faster gauge reduction, is selected, a notice display having a higher degree of reliability is displayed. Alternatively, the same display may be displayed. Further, when one of the two remaining time display meters, which has a slower gauge reduction, is selected, a highly reliable advance notice display may be displayed.

Further, in this effect example, the operation valid period of the left door image DRL is set to be shorter than the operation valid period of the right door image DRR, but the operation valid period may be the same. For example, even when the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, it waits until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0, and the operation of the right key is performed. The operation may be enabled or the operation of the right key may be disabled during standby.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 41, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

41(A1) to FIG. 41(A12), the manner in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 41(A1), the to-be-held number in the toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first to-be-held icon h11 is displayed. "1" indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this example of performance, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and when the timer notice display is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it is displayed in a small size. .. Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, it may be at least a small size. In this case, the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes large before the countdown display is started. The size may be displayed, the size may be displayed in another size, or the display mode itself may be different.

In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A2), the timer display continues to count down, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 41(A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 41(A3), when the timer display is "03:00" indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated. It is changed to substantially the center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. In addition, you may make it overlap with the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the first decorative design is enlarged and displayed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, an enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continued while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is being performed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not be changed and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this example of performance, when the timer display is "03:00", the timer notice display TM1 is always displayed in an enlarged manner, but it may not be enlarged. When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be more likely to be a big hit than when it is not enlarged. Further, in this example of performance, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 41(A4) to 41(A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 41(A5), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 41(A6), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to visually recognize by the enlarged timer display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41(A8), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. The character "attention" is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" may not be displayed, or no presentation may be performed.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (the center on the right side of the display screen). The timer advance notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being displayed in a reduced size.

Then, as shown in FIG. 41(A10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol starts to move at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(A11), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 41(A12). As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-link will be executed.

In the example of the effect, in the timer notice effect, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged when the timer display is “03:00” indicating the remaining 3 seconds, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (number part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice The direction of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from horizontal to vertical), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, and the timer may be changed. Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, time may be added to the timer display, time may be shortened with respect to the timer display, or timer display may be performed. Of the timer display may be stopped, the countdown speed of the timer display may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 is divided and newly added. The timer notice display may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

Further, in this example of performance, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, that is, a small size and a large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes. When displaying the "attention" character display in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a medium size, and when displaying the timer display or the "attention" character display in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. The size may be displayed. Thereby, for example, it may be possible to change the display mode depending on the reliability of the big hit.

Further, in this example of performance, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the small size to the large size, but it may be changed from the small size to the medium size to the large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from a small size to a medium size, and when it is "03:00", the medium size is changed to a large size. The size may be changed. In addition, the size may change from the small size to the medium size, but may not change to the large size.

Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). The size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display becomes “00:00”, or the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to display the “attention” character. The size may be changed to a large size.

Further, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the color of the frame or the background of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of gold>red>green>blue). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size>medium size>small size). The reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

Further, for example, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the color of the timer display or the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of gold> red> green> blue). ). Further, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the size of the timer display or the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is high in the order of large size>medium size>small size). ). Further, the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on the shape of the timer display or the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1.

Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be made to appear easily. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the pseudo-relational pattern is easily stopped. You may do it.

Further, in this example of effect, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a certain effect is performed, but no effect may be performed even if the countdown is completed. May be. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily caused.

Further, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size, but at the start of the countdown or the display start of the timer notice display TM1. It may be a large-sized display mode.

Further, in this example of performance, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the timer display is also changed to a large size. However, only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size and the timer display is changed. The size of may not be changed. Further, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion and the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and/or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, although the color of the frame portion (and/or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may not change. Although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and/or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer advance notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may change its form by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed in shape by animation, the timer display may also be changed in shape by animation. Further, although the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes its form by animation, the timer display may not change. Although the timer display changes its form by animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

41B1 to 41B4 show another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 41(B1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "00:31", and the timer display counts down. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being variably displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 41(B2) to (B3), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 41(B4), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
This "attention" character is enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1. It should be noted that after the timer display becomes "00:00", the character display of "attention" may not be displayed, and no presentation may be performed. At this time, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative pattern is not overlapped. In this way, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character "attention" is displayed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed when the timer display becomes "00:00".

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

42(A1) to (A3), the example of displaying the timer advance notice display TM1 after the change of the display form on another display means when the display form of the timer advance notice display TM1 changes. Showing. 42(A1) to FIG. 42(A3), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a), the sub-display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest 224E. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(A1), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. The sub display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42(A1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 42(A1), the timer notice production is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged in the upper center part of the sub display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as the timer display and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size on the sub display device 208S. In addition, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a small size on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(A2), the variable display of the decorative symbol is still performed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the countdown of the timer display continues in the timer advance notice display TM1, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42(A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42(A3), when the timer display is 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative pattern is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208 completely, and then the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed from the sub display device 208S. The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208, or may be displayed before the timer notice display TM1 extends between the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and the enlarged display animation are being performed.

42(B1) to FIG. 42(B3), when the display mode of the timer notification display TM1 changes, another effect example in which the timer notification display TM1 after the display mode is changed is displayed on another display means. An example is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. The sub display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. At the timing shown in FIG. 42(B1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 displays "09:69" as the timer display, and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(B2), the variable display of the decorative symbol is still displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42(B2). In addition, at this time, the sub display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, is located in the front of the decorative pattern display device 208 substantially in the center, and is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The displayed decorative pattern and the timer notice display TM1 overlap with each other and are more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where they are not overlapped. Further, while the sub display device 208S is rising, the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S are erased. The variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be deleted before the sub display device 208S starts moving, or the sub display device 208S completes moving. After that, it may be erased, may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S starts moving, or may be erased at the timing when the sub display device 208S completes the movement. Further, only one of the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display positions of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42(B3), when the timer display is 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further, The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be moved from the decorative pattern display device 208 to the sub display device 208S completely, and then the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in an enlarged manner. The display may be enlarged while moving across the display device 208S, or may be displayed before the timer notice display TM1 extends between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Note that the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and the enlarged display animation are being performed. In addition, in this effect example, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S. Also, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed continuously. In this case, for example, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. ..

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 42(C1) to (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 42(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 41(A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

In the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 42(C2), the countdown of the timer display continues, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 42(C2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 42(C3), when the timer display is “03:00” indicating that the remaining time is 3 seconds, the display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed. The timer advance notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is arranged inside the circular meter. As shown in FIG. 42(C3) to FIG. 42(C6), the display state of the circular meter portion changes in the clockwise direction from the 12 o'clock position as time passes. Although the timer notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode is partially overlapped with the change icon h0, the change icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Further, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but the size may be changed depending on, for example, the remaining time. For example, when the remaining time is 1 second, the circular meter unit is enlarged. It may be displayed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1a after the change of the display mode may be configured only by the circular meter portion and the timer display may not be performed. Further, the first decorative pattern is the timer notice display T after the change of the display mode.
It is overlapped with M1a, and the first decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where it is not overlapped. The first decorative pattern may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, a change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the change display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is being performed. Further, when the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, the timer display portion may not be changed and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 42(C4) to 42(C6), the countdown and the gauge reduction display in the timer advance notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes “00:00”. In this production example, the production of the countdown is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the reduction display of the gauge of the circular meter portion. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (C6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to visually recognize due to the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

When the display in the timer notice display TM1a becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 42(C7), in the timer notice display TM1a, in place of the timer display, the pseudo continuation effect is displayed. Character is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed. It should be noted that characters other than "Continue" may be displayed. For example, when the timer reaches the SP reach as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer display, "SP reach" is displayed and the SP reach is displayed. You may notify that it shifts. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, “Attention” may be displayed to pay attention to the occurrence of the advance notice.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 42(C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42(A9), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of the lord is displayed in the middle pattern. The display in which the pseudo-successive symbols are moved at a low speed from the top to the bottom is started. After that, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-repetition is executed.

In this example of performance, the character "CONTINUE" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed. However, for example, a question mark is added to the character "CONTINUE" to make the pseudo continuous effect. The display may be performed so that the presentation may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when the pseudo-relational effect is performed, the big hit may be settled.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer displays for the same effect are respectively displayed by a plurality of timer notice displays, one timer notice display may be displayed in a large size, or both timer notice displays may be displayed. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. In addition, the timer display of "03:00" is displayed on one timer notice display, and the other timer notice display is roughly displayed, for example, "3 seconds left". A countdown display may be displayed.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 43, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 43(A1) to 43(A8) show that the timer advance notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer advance notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 43(A1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A2) shows that the navigation character YM is performing the timer addition effect. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. It is informed that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the time of the countdown performed in the timer announcement effect is extended.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43(A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, “+10 seconds” indicating the additional time is displayed, and the additional time is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display is 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display. It is changed to approximately the center of the device 208. In this example of performance, the countdown is temporarily interrupted at "05:00", but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed due to the remaining time of the timer display being the predetermined time, but the timer notice display TM1 is added by adding time to the timer display. Is an enlarged display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A4), although the enlarged timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped with the balloon of the navigation character YM, the enlarged timer advance notice display of the navigation character YM is displayed. You may make it overlap with TM1. Further, the condition that the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed is not limited to the addition of the time in the timer display. For example, when the timer display changes, such as a reduction in the time in the timer display or a stop of the countdown. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 43(A5), a timer advance notice display TM1 that is displayed in an enlarged manner displays a count-up animation and an effect of adding time to the timer display.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A6), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. Note that the countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. The display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the countdown of the timer display is restarted.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 43(B1) to 43(B7), in the timer announcement effect, the timer announcement display is enlarged and displayed when the time of the timer display is added. At the timing shown in FIG. 43(B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. "1" indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped on the left symbol and "decoration 7" is stopped on the right symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(B1), the timer notice effect is being performed, and the timer notice countdown display of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and "00:00" is displayed. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “attention” to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Is displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(B3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and “00:00” is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a pseudo symbol symbol representing the lord's character in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The pseudo continuous effect by the pseudo continuous symbols is continuously performed from FIG. 43(B3) to FIG. 43(B7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(B4), in the enlarged timer preview display TM1, a count-up animation is displayed and an effect of adding the time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(B5), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 15 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. ..

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 43(B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (the center on the right side of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is restarted. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo continuous symbol is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(B7), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed, and thereafter, the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The timer notice display TM1 is counting down the timer display, and the timer display is "14:92" at the timing shown in FIG. 43(B7).

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

44A1 to FIG. 44A8 show the manner in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display mode of the timer notice display changes and the notice rank is increased. ing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. Note that the hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "20:35", and the timer display counts down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman, the enemy of the main character, has begun to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(A2).

FIG. 44(A3) shows that animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(A3).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44(A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The color of the frame of is changed from white to red, and “LvUP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit is higher is added. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 has been upgraded. Although the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is being performed. Here, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed due to the remaining time of the timer display being the predetermined time, and the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is a highly reliable display of the big hit. By changing the mode, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (the center on the right side of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced.

As shown in FIG. 44(A6), when the display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display as shown in FIG. 44(A7). "Attention" is displayed to call attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44(A7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this cut-in display, the characters "Jitsuatsu" indicating that the jackpot is highly reliable are displayed together with the princess character. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(A7), in response to the rank up of the timer notice display TM1, the character display of "expected large" is additionally added. As a result, a big hit is more likely to occur than in the case where a cut-in display in which the character display of “expected large” is not added is displayed. It should be noted that the character display of “high expectations” may be displayed or may not be displayed when the timer advance notice display TM1 is ranked up. In addition, the character display of "high expectations" may be displayed on condition that the timer notice display TM1 is ramped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. May be. In this example of performance, the character display of "high expectations" is more easily displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. In addition, in FIG.
In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in ), the display of the variable icon h0 is also changed and the advance notice display is performed. This change in the display of the variable icon h0 may be performed as a result of the countdown being completed in the timer announcement effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer announcement effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

As described above, in this example of performance, the rank advancement of the timer notice display TM1 may be a notification indicating that the notice given as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice production has been promoted, or the timer notice. The rank up of the display TM1 itself may function as an advance notice of the chance up. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be ranked up to notify that the expectation of displaying a highly reliable notice of a big hit is high in advance.

In addition, in this effect example, the rank up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice given as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted. For example, the first decorative pattern It may indicate that the reach pattern in may be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach is performed with "decoration 2" in which the probability variation big hit is not confirmed and the reach effect is being performed, the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and when the big hit is the probability variation big hit. May be determined, and the reach may change to “decoration 7” which is likely to be a big hit.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 44(B1) to FIG. 44(B7) show how the effect using the chance up meter is started when the timer notice effect is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B1), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B1), the timer notice production is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "20:35", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B2), animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman has started to be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 44(B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged in addition to the start point SP and the end point GP. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(B2).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the starting point SP. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(B3).

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44(B4), at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the character Boy of Boy appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. Is shown. That is, it is shown that a chance to advance due to the appearance of the boy character BOY is being announced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44(B4), when the boy character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed so that the boy character BOY is conspicuous. That is, by displaying the timer notice display TM1 in a reduced size, it may be possible to prevent the display of the boy character BOY from being disturbed, and it is also possible that the boy character BOY is giving a chance advance notice. Sometimes it can be easily recognized. The timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down the timer display even when it is reduced, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 44(B4). The countdown of the timer display may be interrupted while the reduced display is being performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 44(B4) to 44(B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of the chance up by the boy character BOY ends.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44(B7), when the advance notice of the chance up by the boy character BOY ends, the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this example of performance, while the timer advance notice TM1 is displayed, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size to notify that the opportunity advance notice is being issued. In some cases, the purpose can be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1, an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, a change in the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the timer display itself, a change in the display position of the timer notice display TM1, and a timer notice The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

45(A1) to FIG. 45(A3), the example of the effect shows that the display position of the timer notice display that was displayed when shifting to the super reach is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45(A1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, "1" indicating that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(A1), a state of shifting to super reach is shown. Specifically, it has been suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(A1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "21:37", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(A2), the title of Super Reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that it has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(A3), an animation of a duel scene between the main character, the lord, and the enemy, the swordsman, is displayed. When the animation display of the duel scene is started, the timer notice display TM1 changes its display position. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 45(A3′), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to make the effect of super reach stand out.

In this example of effect, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the effect of shifting to the super reach shown in FIG. 45(A1) is performed. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the title of the super reach shown in FIG. 45(A2) is displayed. Good. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move to the original position again at a specific timing (for example, a timing of 3 seconds before or 0, a chance increase of the timer notice display TM1, etc.). It may be displayed as it is. Even when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size, it is displayed in an enlarged manner (for example, first displayed at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or 0, timing of the timer notice display TM1). Display of a different size or a display larger than the size initially displayed).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 45(B1) to 45(B7) show a state in which the display position of the timer notice display that is displayed when the effect movable body operates is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45(B1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, "1" indicating that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(B1), a state of shifting to super reach is shown. Specifically, it has been suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "27:37", and the timer display countdown is performed.

In FIG. 45(B2), it is shown that the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “25:34” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(B2). Here, at least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 is overlapped by the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd, and the timer announcement display is more than in the case where they are not overlapped. TM1 is difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45(B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end of the center of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. In addition, when the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd do not operate, the display position may not be changed, but the display positions may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45(B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the light guide plate IL
The effect image that appears when is emitted is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, but the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed. The display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 45(B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, as shown in FIG. 45(B6), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45(B7), the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (the central portion of the right end of the display screen). On the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(B7). Note that the timing at which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. After starting to move to the original position, the operations of the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd may be started to return to the initial position.

45(C1) to FIG. 45(C5), the example of the effect shows that the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative pattern is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 45(C1), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1 in the second holding number display. “1” indicating that is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C1), the timer notice effect is started, "29:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design does not overlap.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C2), the "decoration 7" is stopped on each of the left symbol and the right symbol, and the state of reaching is shown. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "22:04" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the first decorative pattern.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper and left directions, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. , The navigation character YM and the hold icon h11 are framed out and not displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “21:37” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap the first decorative symbol.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C4) shows a state in which the device has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45(C4), the title of Super Reach in which the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed large is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “20:35” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative pattern.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 45(C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the first decorative pattern. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-described chance up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance up meter is performed.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 46, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216 and the fourth. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

46A1 to FIG. 46A10 show the manner in which the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the player's operation. At the timing shown in FIG. 46(A1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1, and in the second display of number of reservations, "1" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A1), a state of shifting to super reach is shown. Specifically, it has been suggested that the left symbol and the right symbol move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "21:37", and the timer display counts down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A2), the title of Super Reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that it has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A3), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman, the enemy of the main character, has begun to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:19” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A3). Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display in which the character of "reduce timer" is displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, is displayed by the player. It is informed that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this example of performance, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer notice production is started, or when the reach state is reached. May be displayed in.

Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A4), as shown in FIG. 46(A5), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a reduced size and its display position is changed. change. Specifically, the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to above the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while shrinking may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then reduced, or the display position may be changed after the reduced display. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden.
Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “18:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46(A5), the characters of "enlarge timer" are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged by the player operating the upper key. Then, it is informed that the original size is displayed, and that the display position is also returned to the original position.

Thereafter, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to its original size as shown in FIG. 46(A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "17:81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 46(A7), a guide display in which the character of "reduce timer" is displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. This informs that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 46(A3), when the timer advance notice display TM1 has the default display size and the default display position, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A8) shows a state in which the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(A8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 46(A9), when the timer display is "03:00" indicating that there are 3 seconds remaining, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. The display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. The display position and the display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes "03:00" and the display is reduced, the display position is returned to the default display position with the default display size at this timing. Alternatively, the reduced display may be performed at the changed display position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(A10), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and the state where the countdown is completed is shown.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 46(B1) to (B9) show that the timer notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer notice effect. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B1), the title of Super Reach in which the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size is displayed, and the appearance of development into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach) is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B1), the timer notice effect is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "20:35", and the timer display counts down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B2), an animation of a duel scene with the swordsman, the enemy of the main character, has begun to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(B2).

FIG. 46(B3) shows that animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “15:47” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46(B3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of “15:00” indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and then, FIG. As shown in (B5), the timer advance notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as a left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as a right timer notice display TM2R. The timer indications in these timer advance notice indications TM1L and TM1R show the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 46(B5), they show "13:56". In this example of performance, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. Note that the number of times the timer notice display is divided is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the big hit. Further, in these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame changes to red, but the color of the frame does not have to change, and when the color of the frame changes to red, the frame changes. You may make it a big hit more easily than when the color does not change. Further, the color of the frame of either one of the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(B6), when the timer display in the timer advance notice displays TM1L, TM1R becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 46(B7), the timer advance notice displays TM1L, TM1R show the timer display. Instead of this, the word "attention" is displayed to the effect that the notice is called. Then, as shown in FIG. 46(B8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a cut-in display indicating that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". There is. This cut-in display is an effect produced by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in one of the two timer notification displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notification display TM1L). This is a notification that the promotion will be made to a reach production with higher sexuality. It should be noted that the effect may be produced by the completion of the countdown of the timer display in both of the timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B9), a state where the SP swordsman reach is developed is shown. The SP swordsman reach is a reach that develops and transitions to a swordsman reach, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into an SP swordsman reach. In the SP swordsman reach, as shown in Figure 46 (B9), it is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the protagonist's lord and the enemy's swordsman confront each other, but they follow the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 46(B9), a notice display showing that the Kopanda cheering party KPD composed of three Kopanda characters is cheering is displayed, and SP swordsman reach It informs us that the reliability of the big hits has dramatically increased. The Kopanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the other timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) is completed.

In this example of performance, the advancement of chance and advancement of reach production are performed corresponding to the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is performed corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can be said that there is a chance up production among the developed reach production.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 47(A1) to (A5) show the timer notice production using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 47(A1) to (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. However, the image displayed in the area is also visible. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are omitted in the drawing for ease of explanation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47(A1), it has been developed into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is shown. .. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47(A1), the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1, and in the second number of reservations display, the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1. "1" shown is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer notice effect is being performed, "15:47" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is being counted down.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47(A2), the animation of the duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47(A2).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47(A3), a predetermined effect is applied to a display area near the second decorative symbol display device 208M in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and a display area near the third decorative symbol display device 208N. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47(A3).

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(A4), a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice display is divided into two. The timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M after the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 47(A4), "13: 56” is shown. Although the countdown of the timer display continues during the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. May interrupt the countdown of the timer display. In this example of performance, it is suggested that the reliability of the big hit is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of times the timer notice display is divided is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The greater the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the big hit. For example, in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the timer display may be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively return to the initial positions. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 47(A5).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 47(B1) to 47(B5) show the timer notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 47(B1) to (B5), a mini display device 208P is provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position, such as the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 1). In this example of performance, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as an LCD, EL, 7-segment, lamp, and drum may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and by driving the shutter member, the mini display device 208P can be switched between the easily visible state and the visually difficult state.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47(B1) shows a state in which a super-reach (swordsman reach) has been developed, and an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist's lord and the enemy swordsman is being performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47(B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the second number of reservations display indicates that the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are out of frame and are not displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47(B1), the timer notice production is performed, the timer notice display TM1 displays "18:19", and the timer display counts down. Further, the timer advance notice effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6:19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, two timer notice effects are shown to be performed in parallel, and the timer indication is "0" in the timer notice effect TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In such a case, an effect such as an advance notice of a chance increase may be given. Further, when the timer display on the mini display device 208P is "0", an effect such as an advance notice of a chance increase is given. There are cases.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47(B2), the timer notice display is displayed at the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 at "15:00" indicating that the remaining time is 15 seconds. The effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, also in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display is 3 seconds remaining.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the time of the timer display shown in the mini display device 208P is the timer advance notice display displayed in the decorative pattern display device 208. The character "UP" indicating that the time is added to the timer display of TM1 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(B4), the time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the time is updated to "18:00".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47(B5), in the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted. At the timing shown in FIG. 47(B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the display screen is difficult to view due to the shutter member. In addition, in this effect example, when the time is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is ended, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even if time is added to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer effect may not be finished in the mini display device 208P, and then the timer display may be counted down.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 48, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the public figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

48(A1) to FIG. 48(A10) show a state in which the notification that the timer advance notice effect is started is displayed by displaying that the timer advance notice effect is being started before the timer advance notice effect is started. Showing. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A1), the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48(A1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and the first holding icon h11 to the third holding icon h13 are displayed, and in the second holding number display. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 3 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A2) shows that the timer advance notice preparation effect has started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice preparation effect is started. In the timer advance notice preparation effect, a message indicating that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared is displayed to give the player a sense of expectation. At the timing shown in FIG. 48(A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. Note that, for example, the display of "STANDBY" described later may be displayed.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A3) shows that the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that fact. That is, in this effect example, it is an effect that is performed as one mode of the pre-reading announcement for announcing that the timer announcement effect will be performed in the hold. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed functions as a preparing display. It should be noted that it may be a change notice for notifying that the timer notice effect will be performed in the changing symbol display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48(A4), the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display section. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in a mini size display size. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while shrinking may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then reduced, or the display position may be changed after the reduced display. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the display position may not be changed.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A5), a state is displayed in which the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special diagram 1. The timer notice display TM1 is still maintained below the second hold display section. In this way, it can be said that the timer advance notice preparation effect is an effect that may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A7), a state is displayed in which the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special diagram 1. The timer notice display TM1 is still maintained below the second hold display section. The symbol variable display this time corresponds to the hold that has been the target of prefetching.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and returned to the original size, and the display position also returns to the original position, and the timer display is started from the display of "STANDBY". Indicates that the display is switched to "10:00". As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has started. When the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while enlarging may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged and displayed, or the display position may be changed after enlarged and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display may be the same as the timing of changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(A10), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

After that, for example, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes a display of a specific time (for example, “03:00”) or when the display mode changes, the display size of the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed. The size may be changed from a small size to a large size.

In this example of performance, the timer display countdown is started after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. However, in the timer notice display TM1, the display of “STANDBY” is switched to the timer display, and the timer display is performed. The display position of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be changed after the countdown is started.

48B1 to FIG. 48B8 shows a state in which a plurality of notice icons MI1 of a clock functioning as a look-ahead notice are stocked and a timer notice effect is performed by the number of the notice icons MI1 of the stocked clocks. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48(A1), the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and the first holding icon h
The 11th to 3rd hold icons h13 are displayed, and in the second hold number display, "3" indicating that the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is 3 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B2), a state where "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. This "decoration 3" has a notice icon MI1 of the clock added thereto, indicating that one notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Note that the notice icons MI1 of two or more watches may be stocked at one time.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B3), a state is displayed in which the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 9-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. Further, below the second decorative pattern, a timer notice stock display area TMst showing the number of stocked notice icons MI1 of the clock is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, “timer notice stock×1” indicating that the notice icon MI1 of one clock is stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect will be performed at least once in the hold. It should be noted that time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. Further, the remaining time displayed on the timer display when the timer notice effect is started may be determined according to the number of stocks of the notice icon MI1 of the clock. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the stock number is added every time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears. In this example of performance, it can be said that the display in which the number of stocks for which the timer has been announced is displayed in the timer notice stock display area TMst functions as the in-preparation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B4), a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is shown. Also, it is shown that the navigation character YM is giving a notice of navigation characters. This navigator character advance notice is made by displaying a balloon near the navigator character YM with the clock icon and the characters "get". The navi-character advance notice in this production example functions as a pre-read advance notice that the timer advance notice production will be performed while the call is held. As described above, the number of the notice icon MI1 of the clock stocked in one symbol variable display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, there may be a plurality of types of effects that are performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Further, in the effect performed when the clock notice icon MI1 is stocked, the number of stocked clock notice icons MI1 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B5), a state is displayed in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock×3" indicating that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked is displayed. As a result, it is informed that the timer advance notice effect will be performed at least three times within the hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B6), a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B7), one of the three notice icons MI1 of the stocked clock is consumed, and the timer notice effect is started. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a chance up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this example of performance, one timer notice icon MI1 is consumed to start one timer notice effect, but two timer notice icons MI1 are consumed to perform two timer notice effects in parallel. It may be performed as follows. Further, in this effect example, one timer notice icon MI1 is consumed to start one timer notice effect. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(B7′), the clock notice icon MI1 is set. There may be a case where the timer advance notice production is started without being exhausted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 48(B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the approximate right center of the display screen, and the countdown of the timer display is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by a moving animation. When the timer notice icon MI1 is consumed and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be displayed substantially at the center, but may be displayed at the substantially right end center of the display screen from the beginning. ..

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, timer advance notice effect in timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 22(1)],
The first display is a certain effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 20(11) to 12(12) or a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 21(a5). A lever effect shown in FIG. 21(c2), a notice by a stop display of a pine symbol CC as a chance symbol shown in FIG. 23(9fa′), a decorative symbol display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative symbol display device. 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, a display effect using the mini display device 208P] is a display for informing the timing of performing,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a timer addition effect shown in FIG. 22(2) to FIG. 22(5)],
The second display is a display that gives advance notice that the timing at which the certain effect starts is changed [for example, in the timer addition effect shown in FIG. 22(2) to FIG. "Additional information" or "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the character YM],
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [for example, as shown in FIG. 22(2) to FIG. 22(5), the timer notice effect in the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. When a timer is being used, a timer addition effect is being performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the time until the certain effect is started is informed by the first display, it is foretold that the time informed by the second display will change. There is a possibility that it may happen, so not only waiting for the time until a certain performance starts, but also expecting that the time may change, and enjoy the first display You may be able to.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing at which a certain effect is performed. In addition, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed.

In addition, the second display may give a notice only when the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, or gives a notice other than that the timing at which a certain effect starts is changed. It may be one. Further, the second display may always give a notice that the timing at which a certain production is started changes, or may not give a notice that the timing at which a certain production starts changes. It may be one.

Further, only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or even a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Further, the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

Note that the start of the timer notice display may be that the display of the first display is started, or that the display of the countdown display is started (for example, if a number is displayed, It may be that the countdown of the countdown display is started. Further, the end of the timer notice display may be that the first display is not displayed, or that the countdown display is not displayed (for example, the number is erased and “attention” is displayed). The displayed state may be included), or the countdown by the countdown display may be completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and the display displayed on the first display after the countdown is completed. It may be that (for example, the character display of “attention”) is hidden.

In addition, “the display mode of the first display is changed after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 22(2) to 22(5), After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is updated, and the time is added on the timer display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the first display.

Here, it may be configured such that only the display mode of the first display changes after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display after the second display is displayed. The display mode of the display other than the above may be changed. Further, the display mode of the first display may be configured to always change after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed. It may be configured so as not to change.

Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed. May change.

In addition, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a sub display device 208S or the like],
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means,
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but by displaying the second display on the second display means as well. In some cases, it is possible to focus attention on both of the two display units without concentrating the line of sight on only the first display unit.

Here, the display means may include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include the display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to not include the first display means and the second display means. Good.

In addition, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed on the second display means, or may not be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, “the second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. Placed on the side, etc.],
The first display means may be overlapped by the second display means displaying the second display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 26(A2) to (A3)]. , The decorative pattern display device 208 is overlapped with the sub display device 208S on which the timer addition effect is being performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the second display means may overlap the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is focused and a certain effect is started. In some cases, it may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the time to change may change.

Here, the second display means in which the second display is displayed may only overlap the first display means, or the second display in which the second display is displayed. There may be a case where display means other than the first display means are overlapped by the display means. Further, the second display means that the second display is displayed, the first display means may be overlapped by all means, or the second display means that the second display is displayed, There may be cases where one display means does not overlap.

Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means displaying the second display, or the second display displaying the second display. The first display means may be overlapped by the display means other than the means.

In addition, “the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26(B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 26(B3) is a decorative symbol display device. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions such as the position where the front surface of the 208 substantially overlaps with the front side.
The second display means is a display means that overlaps the first display means at the second position [eg, as shown in FIG. 26(B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. At a position where the sub display device 208S overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 at a position where the sub display device 208S overlaps with the front surface side in the approximate center of the 208],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means may also be movable. Further, the second display means may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be arranged between the first position and the second position. It may be configured so that it may not move.

Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

The second display means may be capable of overlapping the first display means only at the second position, or may be overlapped with the first display means at a position other than the second position. It can be anything. Further, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. Good.

Further, "the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 20(2) to 20(7)],"
The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain effect is performed is counted down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(2) to 20(7), the timer of the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed. The countdown in the display informs the timing of pseudo-linking, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the countdown display or may not include the countdown display.

In the countdown display, only the timing until a certain effect is performed may be performed by the countdown, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed may be performed by the countdown. .. Further, in the countdown display, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be always performed by the countdown, or the timing until the certain effect is performed may not be performed by the countdown. Good.

In addition, "even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or even when the second display is displayed, it is continued in addition to the countdown by the countdown display. There may be things. Also, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued even when the second display is being displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even when the second display is being displayed. Good.

Also, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued even when only the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even when the second display is not being displayed. Good.

In addition, “While displaying the second display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the second display, or anything other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the second display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be necessarily interrupted during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the second display is being displayed, and the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, display of “attention” character in timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(8)],”
The third display is a display different from the first display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display is a display not included in the certain effect,
The third display is displayed when the first display indicates 0 (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(7) to 20(8), the timer in the timer advance notice display TM1). When the display becomes 0, the character "Attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to further enhance the sense of expectation for the third display by the countdown of the first display.

Here, when the first display is a display showing 0, only the third display may be displayed, or when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display is displayed. Other displays may also be displayed. Further, when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display may be always displayed, and when the first display is a display showing 0, the third display is It may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first display is a display showing 0, and also when the first display is a display showing 0, A third display may be displayed.

Further, "when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the second display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation by displaying the second display.

In addition, when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. When the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. It may be.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, pseudo continuous production shown in (9) to (12) of FIG. 20],
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display,
The fourth display is a performance display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. In addition, a certain presentation may necessarily include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, “a production movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations [for example, family crest actor 224E, Senryo box actor 224H, first large board behavioral part 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral part 224Gd, second decorative symbol display device 208M. , A third decorative symbol display device 208N, a sub display device 208S, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of motions is a first motion [for example, a motion of the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd shown in FIG. 21(d3)],
The certain effect is an effect including the first action,
The first operation is a performance operation,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect moving means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of performing a plurality of types of actions. Further, the production-enabling means may always execute a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Moreover, the production movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of performing an operation other than the first operation. Further, the effect moving means may be one that always executes the first operation, or may not execute the first operation.

Further, the certain effect may include only the first action, or may include an action other than the first action. Moreover, a certain effect may necessarily include the first action, or may not include the first action.

In addition, “when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIG. 20(11) to FIG. The case where the pseudo-run shown in 12) is started is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the pseudo-run is not started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that a certain effect is performed.

It should be noted that, when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may always be finally fixedly displayed, and even when a certain effect is performed, the big hit symbol may not be finally fixedly displayed. Good.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16(9) to (14) or FIGS. 20(9) to (12). 29. (4) and the advance display of a chance up shown in (13) of FIG. 29, etc.].
In the period from the start of display of the first display to the start of display of the second display, the display of the fifth display may start.
The fifth display is a notice display,
When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 16(9) to 14(14)). It is more likely to be a big hit when the conversation notice shown in is given than in the case where the conversation notice is not given.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the fifth display will be displayed during the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. is there.

Here, in the period from the start of display of the first display to the start of display of the second display, there may be a case where only the fifth display is started, and the first display is In the period from the start of display to the start of display of the second display, the display other than the fifth display may be started in some cases. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the display of the fifth display may be always started, or the display of the first display may be started. The display of the fifth display may not be started in the period until the display of the second display is started.

In addition, the display of the fifth display may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. The display of the fifth display may be started in a period other than the period from the start to the display of the second display.

In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot design may be finally confirmed and displayed, or even when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot design is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, the display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 33(A1)],
The period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. It may be displayed during the specified period],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [eg, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 29(18), etc.],
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing indicated by the check point CP3 at which the notice by the lever effect is started as shown in FIG. 29(18)].
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start,
The period display may be deleted after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. If the cut-in display shown in FIG. 33(A2) is performed before the timing indicated by the point CP3 is reached, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the first timing of the period display is known during the display of the period display, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing comes close. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing is reached. Even at the timing before the first timing comes, it is possible to direct the line of sight to the display means to see the period display. There are cases.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw in the game from the time the period display is displayed until the first timing.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, a plurality of types of display may be displayed without fail, or a plurality of types of display may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the period display and the first effect display, or may display the period display and the first display in some cases.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may also be displayed during a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed during a certain period of the reach effect display, or during a certain period of the reach effect display. It may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

Further, only the period display may be erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing comes after the display of the period display starts. Before that, the display other than the period display may be erased. In addition, the period display may be erased before the first timing from the display of the period display is started, or the period display may be deleted before the first timing. The display may not be erased in some cases.

Further, the period display may be deleted only after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached, or it is the first timing after the display of the period display is started. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

It should be noted that the period in which the period display is displayed may be during variable display, during big hit game, during demo display, during symbol stop display, etc., regardless of during reach.

Further, the period display may be displayed during execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during execution of a specific reach and not displayed during execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed during long reach, but may be displayed during SP reach. Further, it may not be displayed in the first half of SP reach, but may be displayed in the second half of SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of SP reach and not displayed in the second half of SP reach.

Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended. Good. Further, the start of the period display is, for example, a timing at which an effect such as a reach effect for which the period display is performed is started, and the end of the period display is a timing at which the effect is ended. However, it does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed or not. Further, the start of the period display means the time when the progress of the character or the marker on the chance up meter starts, and the end of the period display means the time when the progress of the character or the marker on the chance up meter ends. It may be. Further, when the chance up meter is configured to be displayed/hidden by the operation means, the start of the period display means the timing at which the opportunity up meter is started to be displayed by the operation means. The end may be the timing when the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operating means.

Further, the start of the period display means, for example, from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display indicating that the chance up meter can be displayed) to the end of the period display effect (for example, the chance up meter. Until the display suggesting that can be displayed is hidden or until the chance up meter is hidden).

Further, the term display includes not only what is displayed until the first timing is reached, but also what is erased before the first timing is reached.

Further, the certain period may be two or more during the period in which the reach effect display is being performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended for each certain period, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display is started and ended, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period is started, a new period is displayed. The second period display as a display may start and end.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display [for example, display of cut-in grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2), display of effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b), etc.] And
The second effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing [for example, as shown in FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. 33(A2) and FIG. 33(A2b), the chance up meter is displayed. In the CMT effect, before the sabotani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, the display of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2) or the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b) may be displayed. Etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33(A1) to (A2) and FIG. In the effect produced by the upmeter CMT, the display timing of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2) or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b) is not notified, etc.],
The period display is erased during the display of the second effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. 33(A2) and FIG. 33(A2b), shown in FIG. 33(A2). When the grandfather's cut-in is displayed or the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b) is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the display not notified by the period display may be displayed, the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing, so before the first timing comes. May also have expectations.

Here, there may be a case where only the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, or an effect display other than the second effect display is also displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

Further, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or when the second effect display is displayed before the first timing. There may be.

Further, the period display may not notify only the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify other than the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started. May be. Further, the period display may not necessarily notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

Further, during the display of the second effect display, only the period display may be deleted, or during the display of the second effect display, displays other than the period display may be deleted. Further, the period display may be necessarily deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be deleted during the second effect display.

Further, the period display may be deleted only while the second effect display is being displayed, or the period display may be deleted when the second effect display is not being displayed.

Instead of the effect display, an error notification such as a ball pulling error, a notification indicating a firing position, a notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card, or the like may be used. Further, as a form of the effect display, a display that appears by light emission by an LED, operation by the effect movable means, or light emission by the light guide plate may be used.

Moreover, you may notify by the period display the timing when the second effect display is displayed. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

In addition, "the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the cut-in of a grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2) or an effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b)]. is there,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the second effect display before the first timing, it is possible to suggest that there may be a big hit without waiting for the first timing, It may be possible for the player to have expectations even during the period until the first timing comes.

Further, "when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, when the second effect display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, and even when the second effect display is finally displayed, the big hit symbol is finally fixedly displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, “a production movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations [for example, family crest actor 224E, Senryo box actor 224H, first large board behavioral part 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral part 224Gd, second decorative symbol display device 208M. , A third decorative symbol display device 208N, a sub display device 208S, a POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of motions is a second motion [for example, a motion of the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd shown in FIG. 33(A3b)].
The second operation is a performance operation,
The second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect moving means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of performing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of performing a plurality of types of actions. Further, the effect moving means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Also, only the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display, or an operation other than the second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display. May be. Further, the second operation may be always performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of actions is the first action [for example, the action of the family crest monument 224E shown in FIGS. 15(E1) to (E2) and FIG. Senryo box accessory 224H operation],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the period display is configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33(A2a) to (A3a), After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make an expectation for redisplay of the period display.

Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be configured to be displayed again, or after the period display is erased, a display other than the period display may be displayed again. It may be configured. Further, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is erased, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is erased. May be.

Further, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is erased, or the period display may be configured to be displayed again even after the period display is not erased. Good.

In addition, “the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses after the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33(A2) to (A5). In addition, after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the period display is erased, only the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is erased, a certain period elapses. The display other than the period display may not be displayed. Further, after the period display is erased, the period display may not necessarily be displayed until a certain period of time elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed in some cases.

Further, the period display may be configured not to be displayed only after the period display is erased until a certain period elapses, or the certain period elapses even after the period display is not erased. The period display may not be displayed until.

In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is being performed, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display is not performed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be displayable when a second certain period is started after the first certain period. Further, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

In addition, “the certain period is a period during execution of super reach,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, a notice of a champ up by the display of the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29(4), and a hall shown in FIG. 29(13). Of advancement of opportunity by displaying cut-in image CI3 of
The third effect display is a display different from the first effect display,
The period display is performed at the second timing [for example, the timing indicated by checkpoint CP1 at which the advance notice of the champ up is displayed by the display of the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29(4), the master shown in FIG. 29(13). Of the check-in point CP2 at which the advance notice of the chance up by the display of the cut-in image CI3 is started] is also displayed.
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be such that only the second timing may be notified, or timing other than the second timing may be notified. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the second timing, or one that may not notify the second timing.

Further, the second timing may be one in which only the display of the third effect display may be started, or there is a possibility that something other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be one. Further, the second timing may be one in which the display of the third effect display is always started, or may be one in which the display of the third effect display may not be started.

Note that the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more.

Further, when a certain reach occurs, the effect display is always performed three times, and when another reach occurs, the effect display is always performed twice, so that the place where the effect display is performed may be fixed. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be performed three times when the effect is reached, and the effect display may be performed only once when the effect is reached. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "notifying very often", or may be more likely to be shifted. Also, the likelihood of a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of timing notifications. Further, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the more likely it is to be a big hit.

Further, the second timing may be a timing after the first timing, the second timing may be a timing before the first timing, or the first timing and the second timing. The two timings may be the same timing.

In addition, “the first effect display is a first notice display [for example, a notice by lever effect shown in FIG. 29(18)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, "One of the multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least a part of the first display becomes difficult to see" is "when at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the third display",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
The display means is the first display means,
The first display means is a means for displaying the period display,
The second display means is a means for performing a performance operation,
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured by only a plurality of display means, or may be configured by other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

The first display means may display only the period display,
The display other than the period display may be displayed in some cases. In addition, the first display means may always display the period display, or may not display the period display.

In addition, the second display means may perform only the effect operation, or may perform an operation other than the effect operation. In addition, the second display means may be one that always performs the effect operation, or may be one that does not perform the effect operation.

Further, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means, or when at least a part of the period display is overlapped by the second display means. There may be Further, there may be a case where at least a part of the period display is always overlapped by the second display means, and there is a case where at least a part of the period display is not overlapped by the second display means. Good.

Also, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, an effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 38(A1) to 38(A9)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, the display of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38(A4) to (A9)],
The first display and the second display are different displays,
At least part of the display mode of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38(A1)] is the first speed [for example, 10 The speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.]
At least a part of the display mode of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the grandpa's conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 38(A4)] is the second speed [for example, a gauge at 5 seconds] The speed may disappear, etc.]
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

In recent years, a lot of displays are displayed on the display means, and there is a problem that a player unfamiliar with the game or a player playing the model for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this gaming table, by making the first speed and the second speed different, it is possible to naturally guide the player's line of sight to a display in which the display mode changes at a high (slow) speed, and the player having the above problem. May be able to entertain the production.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may display a plurality of types of displays without fail, or may display a plurality of types of displays in some cases.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or may be displayed in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may also be displayed during a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed during a certain period of the reach effect display, or during a certain period of the reach effect display. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the first timing, or one that may not notify the first timing.

Further, only the period display may be erased before the first timing comes after the display of the period display starts, or the first timing comes after the display of the period display starts. Before that, the display other than the period display may be erased. Further, the period display may be surely erased before the first timing after the display of the period display is started, or it may be the first timing after the display of the period display is started. Before, the period display may not be erased.

Further, the period display may be deleted only after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached, or it is the first timing after the display of the period display is started. Other than before, the period display may be deleted.

In addition, "the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38(A1)],
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, a gauge display in the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 38(A4)].
The time display is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation valid period] [for example, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 38(A1) or FIG. 38( The remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4) has its gauge reduced according to the time from the start of the effective operation period],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize the speed of change in the display mode.

Here, the first display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. In addition, the first display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the second display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the second display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the time display may be such that the display mode changes only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode changes according to other than the passage of time in a certain period. May be. Further, the time display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change according to the passage of time in a certain period. It may be.

In addition, there are cases where both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 38(A4) to 38(A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the effect display in which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed and the operation promotion notification image displayed in the grand conversation image CI2 in the conversation announcement are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to make the production lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

Here, there may be a case where only the first display and the second display are both displayed, and there is a case where both the first display and the second display are displayed. Good. Further, both the first display and the second display may be displayed without fail, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of “hot” in a balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38(A9)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display such as "Intense heat" in the old conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 38(A9)],
The third display and the fourth display are different displays,
The first display is a display in which at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the first time [for example, 10 seconds] has elapsed,
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display modes can be changed until a second time [for example, 5 seconds] has elapsed,
When the first time has elapsed since the first display started to be displayed, the third display may be displayed,
When the second time has elapsed from the start of display of the second display, the fourth display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be one in which only at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display modes until the first time elapses. Display modes other than the above may be changeable. Further, the first display may be one in which at least a part of the display modes always changes until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display modes change until the first time elapses. It may not be possible.

Further, the second display may be one in which only at least a part of the display modes can be changed until the second time elapses, or other than at least a part of the display modes until the second time elapses. The display mode of may be changeable. Further, the second display may be one in which at least a part of the display modes always changes until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display modes change until the second time elapses. It may not be possible.

In addition, when the first time has elapsed from the start of the display of the first display, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may start displaying the first display. When time passes, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the first time has elapsed since the first display started to be displayed, the third display may be displayed without fail, or when the first time has elapsed since the first display started to be displayed. The third display may not be displayed.

Further, when the second time has elapsed from the start of the display of the second display, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may start to display the second display. When time passes, a display other than the fourth display may be displayed. Also, when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed, the fourth display may be displayed without fail, or when the second time has elapsed since the second display started to be displayed. In some cases, the fourth display may not be displayed.

The third display and the fourth display may have the same display mode or different display modes.

Further, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the big hit may be higher or lower in the fourth display. The third display and the fourth display may have the same jackpot reliability.

In addition, “the first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40(A1)],
The second display is the countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 40(A1)],
The countdown display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect [for example, display of pseudo continuous effect] is performed [for example, a first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 40(A1)]. And the second timer notice display TM2 notifies the time until the pseudo-relation occurs by a countdown display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Further, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be notified without fail, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, “operating means that can be operated by the player [for example, effect button 136 (chance button 136), etc.] is provided,
The first display is an operation valid period display,
The second display is the operation valid period display,
The operation valid period display is a display showing a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid, or may indicate something other than the period during which the operation of the operation means is valid. The operation valid period display may necessarily indicate the period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid, or may not indicate the period during which the operation of the operation unit is valid.

Further, “the first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 35(A1)],
The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 35(A1)],
The period display is a display for informing a first timing [for example, the timing at which the advance notice of a chance up by the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 35(A2) is started].
The first timing means a certain effect in a first period [for example, a period during which an animation of a duel scene in the swordsman reach shown in (A1) to (A2) of FIG. 35 is performed] [eg, FIG. There is a possibility that the display of the advance notice of the chance by the boy character BOY shown in (A2)] is performed.
From the start to the end of the first period, the first timing is notified,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other than the first timing. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the first timing, or one that may not notify the first timing.

Further, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may be started in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may be started in the first period. There is a possibility that it may be done. Further, the first timing may be such that the sixth display is always started during the first period, or the sixth display may not be started during the first period. May be.

Also, only the first timing may be notified during the period from the start to the end of the first period, or during the period from the start to the end of the first period, the first Other than the timing may be notified. Further, the first timing may be notified without fail during the period from the start to the end of the first period, or the first timing may be notified from the start to the end of the first period. The timing may not be reported.

Further, the first timing may be notified only from the start to the end of the first period, or in addition to the period from the start to the end of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, “the display mode of at least a part of the second display may change at the first speed depending on the passage of time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, depending on the passage of time, there may be a case where at least a part of the display manners of the second display changes only at the first speed, and according to the passage of time, the second display There may be a case where at least a part of the display modes change at a speed other than the first speed. Also, depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display manner of the second display may change at the first speed without fail, and according to the passage of time, at least a part of the second display. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

In addition, depending on the passage of time, there may be a case where only at least a part of the display manner of the second display changes at the first speed, and depending on the passage of time, at least the second display. There may be a case where something other than some display modes changes at the first speed.

In addition, "when at least a part of the display form of the second display changes at the second speed than when at least a part of the display form of the second display changes at the first speed In the end, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, when at least a part of the display form of the second display changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even when the mode changes at the second speed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, “the first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 38(A1) to FIG. 38(A9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display is an effect display [e.g., display of grandpa's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 38(A4) to (A9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub display device 208S, a first decorative pattern display device 208L, a second decorative pattern display device 208M, a third decorative pattern display device 208N, mini Display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A1)],
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A1)],
The countdown display is a display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed by counting down [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A1) to 41(A7), a timer advance notice display is displayed. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 informs the timing of pseudo-linking, etc.],
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display changes from the first display mode [for example, a small size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A1)] to the second display mode. In some cases, the display mode may change to a mode [for example, a large size display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A3)].
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw attention to the countdown display itself by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

The first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may necessarily include the countdown display or may not include the countdown display. The first display may be the countdown display, or the first display may not be the countdown display.

In addition, the countdown display may notify the timing until a certain effect is performed only by performing the countdown, or the timing until the certain effect is performed by not performing the countdown. It may be one that does. In addition, the countdown display may be a notification that always notifies the timing until a certain effect is performed, or if the timing until a certain effect is not notified by performing the countdown. There may be

Further, during the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode only to the second display mode. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display may be displayed during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only while the countdown display is being displayed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

The countdown display may be a timer display.

Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. May be. Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing when the countdown is ended. Good.

In addition, “the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is terminated by the time the symbol variation display is terminated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(1) to 20(7). , The display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and is finished during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the countdown display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is completed is completed during one execution of the symbol variation display, so the effect may not be redundant.

Here, the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be ended before the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started during execution of the symbol variation display, The display other than the countdown display may be terminated before the symbol variation display is terminated. In addition, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be surely ended before the symbol variation display ends, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol concerned is displayed. The countdown display may not end before the variable display ends.

Further, the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be ended only until the symbol variation display is ended, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol concerned is displayed. The countdown display may be ended besides the time until the variable display is ended.

In addition, “the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size [for example, a small size],
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [eg, large size, etc.],
In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the expectation for the countdown display can be changed (the countdown display with the increased display size can be focused) by increasing the display size of the countdown display.

Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. The display mode may be displayed. The first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a certain display mode.

The second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display is displayed in a display size other than the second display size. The display mode may be displayed. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a certain display mode.

The display sizes may be the same, for example, the display sizes may be the same, but the colors and shapes of the frames and characters may be different.

Also, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

Further, when “when the display of the countdown display is started [eg, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20(3)], the first The display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is changed to the first display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the one display mode. In addition, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be the first display. There may be a case where it is not displayed in the display mode.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, or the first display is displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

When the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 20(2)], the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, only when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode, or other than when the display of the first display is started, One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, "during the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, shown in FIGS. 41(A2) to (A3). As described above, when the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 is "03:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of the timer display of the timer display TM1 is "33:00", the timer notification display TM1 is displayed. Has changed from small size to large size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect the display mode to change during the countdown display.

Here, while the countdown display is being displayed, the first display may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail, or the first display may be changed to the first display mode during the countdown display. The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the countdown display.

Further, the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail while the countdown display is being displayed. The first display mode may be changed to the second display mode.

In addition, “the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than in the case where the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot pattern,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation that the first display is changed to the second display mode.

In addition, when the first display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the first display may be the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed to the second display mode, the jackpot pattern may not be finally displayed in a finalized manner.

In addition, “the first display is a display in which the display position may change [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A2) to (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position is changed from the substantially right center of the display screen of 208 to the substantially center],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display position of the first display is changed, which may give a visual change and improve the effect of the effect.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position may change, or one other than the display position may change. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or one in which the display position may not change.

In addition, “When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIG. 41(A2) to FIG. ), when the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from the small size to the large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center to the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.], A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, it may be possible to draw attention to the first display.

Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position other than the display position of the first display may also change. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, and the first display changes from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may change, or the first display may change to the first display mode. The display position of the first display may be changed in a case other than the case of changing from the second display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be a moving display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1],"
The display position of the first display is changed by performing the moving display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A2) to (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed by an enlarged display animation. Enlarged display, display position changes, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of the production may be improved.

Here, the first display may be a display in which only the moving display may be performed, or a display in which a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, by performing the moving display, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and by performing the moving display, the display positions of other than the display position of the first display may be changed. Good. Further, the display position of the first display may be changed without fail by performing the moving display, or the display position of the first display may not be changed by performing the moving display. ..

In addition, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, or even when the display position of the first display changes even when the moving display is performed. Good.

In addition, while the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display progresses,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the moving display, or something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued during the display of the moving display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be always continued during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the moving display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued when the moving display is not being displayed.

In addition, while the display of the movement display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the moving display, or other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted during the display of the moving display. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be always interrupted during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the moving display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the moving display is not being displayed.

In addition, “the countdown display is a display for counting down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A2) to (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The countdown in the display informs the timing of pseudo-linking, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may be a countdown of only the time until a certain effect is performed, or may be something other than a countdown of the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may be one that always counts down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not be counted down before the certain effect is performed.

In addition, by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that the timing for performing the certain effect has come [for example, shown in FIGS. 41(A7) to (A8). As described above, when the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notification display TM1 to notify that the pseudo link is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified that only the timing at which a certain effect is performed is reached, or by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display. It is also possible to notify other than the timing at which a certain performance is performed. Further, by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, it may be informed that the timing when a certain effect has been performed, or by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, There may be a case where it is not notified that it is the time when a certain effect is performed.

Further, it may be notified that the timing for performing a certain effect is reached only by displaying the display showing 0 in the countdown display, or other than the display showing 0 in the countdown display. By doing so, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

In addition, “the countdown display is configured to be erased after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 41(A7) to (A11), After the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the effect may not be redundant by deleting the countdown display after the countdown is completed.

Here, only the countdown display may be erased after the display showing 0 in the countdown display, or other than the countdown display after the display showing 0 in the countdown display is displayed. May also be configured to be erased. Further, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the display showing 0 in the countdown display is displayed, or the countdown display may be deleted after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so as not to be performed.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be erased only after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, and the countdown display may be displayed other than after the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be erased.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, display of “attention” character in timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 41(A8), etc.],”
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed [for example, FIG. 41(A7) to As shown in the figure (A11), after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed in place of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the second display is displayed when the countdown display is erased, which may improve the effect of erasing the countdown display.

Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than the certain effect. In addition, the second display may not necessarily be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Further, the second display may be included in a certain effect.

Further, when a display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed, or a display showing 0 in the countdown display. When is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed. Further, when the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be surely deleted after the second display is displayed, or the display showing 0 in the countdown display. When is displayed, the countdown display may not be erased after the second display is displayed.

The countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed only when the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display. In addition to the case where is displayed, the countdown display may be erased after the second display is displayed. Further, when a display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be erased only after the second display is displayed, or a display showing 0 in the countdown display. When is displayed, the countdown display may be erased even after the second display is displayed.

In addition, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a sub display device 208S or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 42(A1), The timer advance notice display TM1 of the size is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode. When is displayed, the first display may be displayed on display means other than the first display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, and the first display of the first display mode is When displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode is displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display unit in a case other than the case.

Further, "when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is the second display. It may be displayed on the means [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (A2) to (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative pattern. Displayed on the display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the display means to be displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be possible to visually improve the effect.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means. In some cases, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display changes to the second display means. It may be displayed on other display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display means. There may be, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display on the second display means It may not be displayed.

Further, only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed on the second display means. The first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means may change to the second display mode when the first display is the second display. It may be displayed on the display means.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The countdown display described so far may be displayed only during execution of the symbol variation display, or may be displayed as a prefetching notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may also function as a prefetch notice. Here, it may be performed only as a pre-reading notice.

Further, in the case where the countdown display is performed as a look-ahead notice, the countdown display may be displayed during the period between the symbol variation display and the symbol variation display performed next. In that case, during the symbol stop display, the notification of the time by the countdown display may be stopped/interrupted/stopped (for example, the time of the fixed stop timing of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown It may be possible to stop notating the time, etc. The time notification may be continued by the countdown display even during the symbol stop display. Also, the countdown is internally performed during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be internally stopped during the symbol stop display.

Also, when displaying a countdown display as a prefetch notice, if there is a hold whose variable time changes depending on the number of holds (for example, a hold whose variable time is indefinite), the countdown display should not be displayed. Good. This is because if the symbol variation display time is indefinite, it may be difficult to know at what timing the countdown becomes 0, so for example, it is necessary to match the generation timing (pseudo rendition, reach, etc.). In the case of (development, etc.), it is preferable to perform only in the symbol variable display.

On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed also when the hold of which the variable time is indefinite is in the hold. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it suddenly occurs (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as promotion to a round during a big hit, a telop display such as "intense hot approach", etc. It suffices that the countdown of the timer be completed before the end of the hold of the target is completed). In addition, even when an effect that requires timing adjustment occurs, a certain timing (for example, start of a pending pattern variation display that is a pre-reading target) n An effect that forces time to be adjusted is performed Good.

Further, the countdown display may be displayed during the big hit. In this case, the display may be continued over the intervals between rounds. Here, during the big hit game, the period of one round is indefinite, so it is preferable to appropriately set the countdown time, for example, to prevent the countdown display from occurring in the final round, or during the big hit end interval (final When the jackpot end display period ends after the round ends and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4 ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book edge is forced. You may make it display the combined time (For example, even if it is not 0 in countdown display, "00:00" is forcibly displayed and an effect is generated).

Further, the time until the simultaneous production, the production by RTC, etc., may be notified by a countdown display.

Further, the display device may be configured by a transmissive liquid crystal, and on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal, a directing means such as an effect moving means and a decorative member, and another display device such as a drum or an LCD are arranged. They may be configured to be visible through. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable by the liquid crystal shutter between a state in which the back side is visible and a state in which the rear side is difficult to visually recognize.

In addition, the operation mode of the production movable means such as the accessory may change or the light emission mode of the lamp may change according to the notification of the time by the countdown display.

In addition, a display that gives notice that production that may affect the countdown display itself (for example, addition/subtraction of timer, interruption, fast forward/rewind, enlargement/reduction of countdown display, change of color or shape, etc.) (For example, an effect of agitating that something may occur due to the mini character) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen in the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character comes out, something is always done. May be performed, or an effect may be performed such that something is always performed when another character comes out. At this time, for example, the larger the number of appearances of the character, the more likely it is to be a big hit.

Moreover, when the number of countdown displays is large, the final big hit may be likely to occur, or when the chance up notice is given, the final big hit may be likely to occur.

Further, with respect to the chance up meter, even if a part or all of the meter is enlarged or reduced, or promotion effect (for example, a color or shape is changed, a character or a marker indicating the current position is changed, etc.) is performed. Good.

Also, in the above description,
[A game table provided with image display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [for example, a notice or the like due to the appearance of the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29(4)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, a display of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29(2)],
The period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is being performed [for example, as shown in FIG. It may be displayed during the specified period],
The period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, the character SBH of the sabotani shown in FIG. 29(2)],
At the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29(2) from the start position [for example, the position shown in FIG. 29(2), the position shown at the start point SP, etc.] to the first position. By moving to the end position [for example, the position shown in the final point GP shown in FIG. 29(2)] via the position shown in FIG. Is composed of
When the cursor display reaches the first position, the first timing [for example, the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29(4), at which the advance notice by the appearance of the Boy character BOY is started, is shown. Timing etc.],
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started in the reach effect display,
The period display is a display that may display a first chance up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the first check point CP1 shown in FIG. 29(6)],
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, a display position corresponding to the first position (hereinafter, “first display position [eg, shown in FIG. 29(6), The display position of "UP" above the first check point CP1]"), the first chance-up display is displayed,
When the first chance-up display is displayed, the first chance-up display is configured to be continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the end position [for example, As shown in FIG. 29(25), the display of "UP" above the first check point CP1 is continuously displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display [for example, the display of the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 33(A2) or the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b)],
The third effect display is an effect display different from the first effect display,
The display of the third effect display may be started before the first timing comes after the display of the period display is started [for example, FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. 33(A2) and As shown in FIG. 33(A2b), in the production by the chance up meter CMT, before the sabotani character SBH reaches the third check point CP3, the display of the grandfather's cut-in shown in FIG. The effect image shown in A2b) may be displayed, etc.],
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden [for example, as shown in FIG. 33(A1) to FIG. 33(A2) and FIG. 33(A2b), FIG. The opportunity up meter CMT is deleted when the cut-in display of the grandfather shown or the effect image shown in FIG. 33(A2b) is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Further, “the period display is a display including a first checkpoint display [for example, a display of the first checkpoint CP1 shown in FIG. 29(4)],
The first checkpoint display is a display showing the first position,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first checkpoint display is a display that is displayed until the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, as shown in FIG. 29(2) to FIG. The checkpoint CP1 is displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "when the third effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the third effect display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, FIG.
8) shows the lever image 136Va],
The cursor display is moved to the end position through both the first position and the second position [for example, the position indicated by the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29(2)]. Has been done,
When the cursor display reaches the second position, the second timing [for example, the timing indicated by the third check point CP3 when the display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29(18) is started] Is notified,
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the second effect display may be started in the reach effect display,
The period display is a display that may display a second chance up display [for example, a display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 shown in FIG. 29(19), etc.],
When the display of the second effect display is started at the second timing, a display position corresponding to the second position (hereinafter, "second display position [e.g., shown in FIG. 29 (19), The display position of "UP" above the third check point CP3]"), the second chance up display is displayed,
When the second chance up display is displayed, the second chance up display is continuously displayed until at least the cursor display reaches the end position [eg, As shown in FIG. 29(25), the display of “UP” above the third check point CP3 is continuously displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, “The first chance-up display is displayed only when the display of the first effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29(4) to FIG. When the advance notice is started due to the appearance of the boy, "UP" is displayed above the first check point CP1, but as shown in FIGS. 30(4a) to 30(7a), the first check point is displayed. If the advance notice of the chance is not started even if the character SBH of Sabohani arrives at CP1, "UP" is not displayed above the first checkpoint CP1, etc.],
The second chance-up display is displayed only when the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29(18) to (19), the lever image 136Va is displayed. Is started, “UP” is displayed above the third check point CP3, but as shown in FIG. 30 (17b) to FIG. 30 (20b), the character of the sabotani at the third check point CP3. If the display of the lever image 136Va is not started even when the SBH arrives, "UP" is not displayed above the third check point CP3, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the period display is a display that may display a first non-chance up display [for example, a display of “x” indicating that the advance notice of the opportunity up has not been given, etc.],”
The period display is a display that may display a second non-chance up display [for example, a display of “×” indicating that the advance notice of the chance up has not been given, etc.],
When the display of the first effect display is not started at the first timing, the first non-chance up display is displayed at the first display position [for example, in FIG. 30 (7a″). As shown in the figure, when the advance notice of the chance up is not given at the first check point CP1, the display of “UP” is replaced with the display of “X” showing that the advance notice of the chance up is not given. Etc.],
When the display of the second effect display is not started at the second timing, the second non-chance up display is displayed at the second display position [for example, a chance at the third check point CP3. If the advance notice is not given, the display of "UP" is replaced with the display of "x" indicating that the advance notice of the chance is not given, etc.], .. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the period display is a display including a second checkpoint display [for example, a display of the third checkpoint CP3 shown in FIG. 29(4)],
The second checkpoint display is a display showing the second position,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a display that suggests that the hit/miss determination result is derived when the cursor display reaches the end position [for example, as shown in FIG. Display of 3 check points CP3],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "When the display of the third effect display is finished in the certain period after the third effect display is displayed and the period display is hidden, the period display is displayed again. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (A2a) to (A3a), after the chance up meter CMT is erased by the display of the cut-in of the princess character, the cut-in of the princess character is displayed. When the display ends and the animation display of the duel scene is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, “the period display is not displayed during the certain period after the period display is hidden [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33(A2) to 33(A5), After the chance up meter CMT is deleted by the display of the cut-in of the old character, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain period is a period during execution of super reach,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 116, an example of effects applicable to the gaming table such as the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described in detail. Here, as the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 49 to 116 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 117 to 193, and vice versa. The technical ideas shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 117 to 193 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 49 to 116. At that time, components having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced with each other.

The main controller power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49(a) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, FIG. 49(b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 49(c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the activation signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the activation signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302, to which the activation signal is input, performs a reset start by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

First, in step S101, the stack pointer is initialized. In this stack pointer initial setting, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

Succeedingly, in a step S102, it is determined whether or not the low voltage signal is turned on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (main value). In the example, it is determined whether the voltage is 9 V or higher. When the voltage value of the power source is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the wait is performed until the voltage value of the power source becomes the predetermined value or more, and when it becomes the predetermined value or more (step S102: Yes), It proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initial setting, the WDT 314 is activated, the RAM 308 is permitted to be accessed, a process of setting a numerical value that determines an execution cycle of a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in each register of the timer circuit 312, and the main control unit 300. After performing the initial setting of serial communication between the payout control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600, setting the maximum value of the hardware random number, and the like, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of the game store or the like is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the basic circuit 302 is initialized to the step S108. Then, the initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and the initial startup process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated check It is determined whether or not the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to restore the state before the power failure. Execute the startup process. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (step S106: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Then, the initial activation process described later is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 49(b), the return activation process will be described. When the recovery activation process is started, in step S201, initialization for recovery activation is performed. Specifically, the process of setting the information indicating "return start" in the power status information, the process of setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and the device error (error flag due to magnetic detection or winning abnormality) The process of clearing, the process of clearing the previous device error status, the process of clearing the device error status for the security signal, etc. are performed.

Succeedingly, in a step S202, an address after the storage area initialized in the step S201 is set as an address for starting the RAM clear, and thereafter, the return activation processing is ended.

In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. When the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer or register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was cut off. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power-off state has been restored, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in the sub-command transmission process in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later. ..

Next, the initial startup processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial start-up process is started, in step S301, a soft random number is initialized. Specifically, the initial settings of the soft random numbers used in the lottery for special maps and general maps.

Succeedingly, in a step S302, an address after the storage area initialized in the step S301 is set as an address for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial starting process is ended.

In addition, in the initial start-up process, for example, the setting of interrupt prohibition, the setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), etc. are performed. Further, at this point, the normal recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial activation process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and like the power recovery command, in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. , To the first sub-control unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 49A, after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, a RAM clear process is performed in step S109. In this RAM clear processing, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

Succeedingly, in a step S110, sub-control related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, a sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, the processing for setting the initial value of the sub control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

In step S111, output port setting is performed. With this output port setting, symbol data, launch position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, ordinary figure hit signal, ordinary electric accessory (second special figure starting port 232, electric chew) operating signal, ordinary figure operation Medium signal, easy-to-win state signal, special figure per hit signal, special figure small hit signal (only for models with small hits), special figure changing mid signal, special figure changing time shortening status signal, special electric winning (variable winning a prize Port 234, attacker) operating signal, condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special winning opening solenoid signal, ordinary electric accessory solenoid signal, design LED data, external terminal board signal etc. are set Set the output port, etc.
After finishing the process of step S111, the process proceeds to the main control unit main loop process. Here, the easy winning state may mean a power-supporting state.

Next, the main control unit main loop processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control unit main loop process.

When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above-described main control power-on process, next, in step S401 of the main control unit main loop process for starting execution of this main control unit main loop process, interruption prohibition is performed. After setting, in step S402, the counter value of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted. In step S403, basic random number initial value update processing is performed (step S403). In the basic random number initial value updating process, a process of updating the initial value generating random number counter for generating the initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and the general figure determining random number counter is performed. For updating the random number counter for initial value generation, for example, assuming that the range of numerical values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

After setting interrupt permission in step S404, subcommand transmission processing is performed in step S405). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and if there is a command to be transmitted, the process of transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, after performing the other determination random number update process, the process proceeds to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the general figure variation time determination random number is performed.

In step S407, it is determined whether the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), and if the voltage value is equal to or higher than the predetermined value (step S407). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop processing, and when the value is less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, the power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, the power supply status information is set to "suspend" after setting the interrupt prohibition. In addition, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a register having a 1-byte configuration having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is calculated. Store in the area. After that, after setting the access to the RAM 308 is prohibited, the HALT state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the main controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the main controller timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt process, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area.

In steps S502 and S503, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S403 is updated, and the special control determining random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is next. , Update the random number counter for determining the special figure variation time and the random number counter for determining the universal figure variation period. For example, the numerical range that can be taken as a random number is 0
When set to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the value is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter makes one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, set in the random number counter, and the random number counter makes one round. In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 1 and a counter for obtaining the random number value of Toku-zu 2 may be separately provided.

In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is being limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated), and if the interrupt function is being limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). If (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519. If the interrupt function is not being limited (when the first sub control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, that the interrupt function is being limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, the first When it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. When the bidirectional communication with the first sub-control unit 400 is possible, a command for confirming whether the first sub-control unit 400 is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has started. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (in this embodiment, a magnetic detection error) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the universal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the universal symbol display device 210, the time for varying/stopping the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for, the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period for measuring the time to change/stop display the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 , And updates various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S507, processing such as updating the input port status is performed. In this input port status update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), the universal figure starting port 228, the out port 240 are input through the input port of the I/O 310. The presence/absence of a signal relating to a switch such as a variable winning port (attacker) 234 and a winning port (general winning port 226) is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

Explaining the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor as an example, the RAM 308 stores information on the presence/absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) of the previous two times in the RAM 308. Is read from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and provided, and this information is stored in the RAM 308 in the two-preceding detection signal storage area partitioned and provided for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is stored. ), the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. Remember. Further, the detection signals of the respective sphere detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning in the starting opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area is erased because the winning is invalid.

Further, in step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning a prize winning process, the above-mentioned two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the information of the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the current detection signal recording area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly activated at a very short interval of about 2 ms is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in the above-described step S507, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the two-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before two times, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, if the detection signal is continuously detected for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the input, it is determined that a prize has been won. If the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after the detection signal is absent, it may be determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous-previous detection signal, previous detection signal, and current detection signal). In this step S507, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no previous detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, there is a present detection signal). (The information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the universal figure starting port 228. It is determined that there has been a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won.

For example, when the information on the presence/absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is a winning in the general winning opening 226. However, if the information about the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. The process is branched to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning in the mouth 226.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a single winning, it is not determined that there is a winning until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination clear pattern information, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is subsequently determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

Further, in the winning a prize winning process of step S508, a winning a prize counter updating process is also performed. In this winning hole counter updating process, when there is a winning in the winning hole 226, the variable winning hole 234, the special figure 1 starting hole 230, and the special figure 2 starting hole 232, each winning hole in the RAM 308 or each starting hole. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

In addition, in the winning opening winning process of step S508, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In the prize receiving process, whether or not the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232, the universal figure starting opening 228, and the variable winning opening 234 are matched with the winning determination pattern information is determined. Judgment is made using the judgment result. If there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is changed to the special figure 1 random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value as the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

In addition, when there is a winning in the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is selected as the special figure 2 win. The value is acquired as a random number value and the value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as the special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a prize in the universal figure starting port 228 and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the universal figure winning random number value as the universal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When the variable winning port 234 is won, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port 234. In addition, when the random number of the special figure is acquired, the special figure pre-reading process (whether the winning or failing, the pattern, and the pre-reading lottery of the variable time) are also performed. The special figure prefetching process will be described later in detail.

In step S509, winning-related error check processing is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a process for confirming and monitoring a prize-related abnormality and setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of gaming balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for presentation.

In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. The command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600 is a communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control unit 600, which is transmitted after the activation waiting time of the first sub control unit 400 after the power is turned on. Confirmation, a command for notifying the activation method (initial activation, return activation) of the main control unit 300) and a prize ball number command for instructing the payout of the designated prize balls.

In addition, as the command that the main control unit 300 receives from the payout control unit 600, a communication confirmation return command (a response command indicating that the command from the main control unit 300 has been received by the payout control unit 600) or a test firing test signal is used. Command (award ball signal output request), a command including information on the occurrence status of a payout system error (including no error), and a prize ball payout operation status command (whether a prizeball payout is in operation/not in operation). There is a command to display or a display to indicate that the payout is in progress (LED is turned on/off) to the first sub-control unit 400).

Next, in step S512, a special figure state update process for special figures 1 and 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the process state of the special figure. The special figure status update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

In step S513, general-university-state update processing is performed. The universal figure state updating process is one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the universal figure. For example, in the general figure state update processing in the middle of the general figure variation display (the value of the above-mentioned general figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Lighting off control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the variable display of the universal figure (general figure variation game).

Further, in the public figure state update processing at the timing when the public figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the public figure display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the mode is turned on and off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the off symbol. ON/OFF control of 7-segment LED is performed.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general-picture state update process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting/extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting indicating that the general-purpose stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fixed display of one of the winning symbol and the deviating symbol. After that, during a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the universal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. By this setting, the symbols that are confirmed and displayed are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the universal figure variation game.

Further, if the result of the universal figure variation game is a hit, the universal figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the universal figure hit flag is on, the universal figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the universal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is stored in the RAM 308. While the normal operation is set in the setting area, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And outputs information indicating the open period to the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal state updating process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening/closing the 2232, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the universal figure state updating process which starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the regular area inactive state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the universal figure fluctuation game is out, the universal figure out flag is turned on as described later. If the unillustrated flag is on, even in the unillustrated state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the unusual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the normal figure non-operation is set. In the universal figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S514 without doing anything.

Further, in step S513, a universal figure related lottery process is also performed. In this public figure-related lottery process, opening/closing control of the general figure fluctuation game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the pending general figure fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal figure variation game is won or unselected by a random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the above random number storage area. The winning judgment is made, and when the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of no win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the universal figure timer random number value described above is acquired as the universal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired universal figure timer random number value. One of the times is selected to change the display of the public figure on the public figure display device 210, and the variable display time is stored in the general figure change time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure change display time. It should be noted that the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games is stored in the universal figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending universal figure fluctuation games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in this general-use figure hold number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, and when the predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted. Further, by driving various solenoids 332, controlling the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display via the display circuit 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. is set to the output port of the I/O 310.

In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In this external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, subcommand management processing is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations are made for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information (subcommand) transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, and the bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a big hit start command, a big hit round number designation command, a power recovery command, Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type) such as a RAM clear command that can specify the type of command.

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, etc. In the case of the fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag is included. In the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit round number, and the like are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, whether or not there is a winning at the second special figure starting port 232, and whether or not there is a winning at the variable winning port 234. Including presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning in the variable winning a prize mouth 234, a special winning a prize winning command is set.

In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related lottery processing stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are selected. It sets the information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that is held, and the like. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, output to the decorative pattern display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. The control information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the information indicating the number of the first special figure variation games or the second special figure variation games that are held, etc. are set.

In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game underframe lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. The effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the information indicating the number of the first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game that are held, etc. are set. In the above-described special winning opening opening setting transmission processing, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set information indicating the number. In the above-described special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game Set information indicating the number. Further, in this step S516, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 for command data, advance notice information (advance notice information, false) (Advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the contents of effect control based on the information of the command data.

In step S517, a display display setting process is performed. In this indicator display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as "holding ball number, symbol combination", state (in electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing such as setting the output data. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting the control signal set in each process to the solenoid or the LED, a process of transmitting the prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

In step S519, wait processing for waiting for sub-control activation is performed. In this sub-control activation wait wait process, the activation wait counter of the sub-control is decremented by 1 and the activation wait counter becomes 0 in order to wait until the first sub-control unit 400 is activated and becomes ready for communication. If so, prepare to send a predetermined command. As the predetermined command, any one or more of a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors are released, a lower plate full tank error occurrence condition) A command indicating that there is an error, an error indicating that a payout number insufficient error has occurred, a main control communication error command (command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnection error Is a generation state command, a firing position command (a command for informing the firing position according to the state), and the like.

In step S520, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the processing returns to the main control unit main loop processing. ..

Next, the special figure state updating process (step S512) in the main controller timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the special figure state update processing.

In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired/saved, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value of the special figure processing state, a special figure-related lottery process shown in FIG. 53A, a symbol variation process shown in FIG. 54, and a special diagram shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later. Display confirmation weight processing, hit start weight processing shown in FIG. 56(a), special electric power combination operation processing shown in FIG. 57, special electric power remaining ball detection processing shown in FIG. 60, special electric power operation end processing shown in FIG. 61, and FIG. Any one of the hit end display weight processing shown is executed.

In step S603, the prize winning status is set to ON. Further, in step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined, and in the next step S605, it is determined whether or not there is a state change of the special figure processing state (change in the value indicated by the special figure processing state), and the special figure processing is performed. When there is no state change (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update processing is terminated and there is a change in the special figure processing state. When (the value indicated by the special figure processing state has changed) (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the "variation waiting state". If it is (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if it is not (step S606). : No), and proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special drawing processing state is set to the "hit start display wait state". If the result is true (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not, ( Step S607: No), and the special figure state update process is terminated.

In step S608, a subcommand transmission request is set (in the present embodiment, after setting a game state command transmission request including a special figure and a general figure game state, a launch position including information on whether the player is right-handed or not. After setting the command transmission request), the special figure status update processing is terminated. Note that the order of subcommand transmission requests is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or a plurality of command transmission requests may be collectively performed in one process.

Next, the special figure state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state updating process.

This special figure related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates the "variation waiting state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

In step S701 of the special figure related lottery process, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved sphere number is 0, In the case of (when there is no suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when it is other than 0 (when there is suspension of special figure 2 variable game) (step S702: No), the process proceeds to step S705 to execute the process related to Toku-zu 2.

In step S703, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 1 reserved sphere number is 0. If there is no suspension of the variation game (step S704: Yes), the special figure related lottery processing is terminated, and if it is other than 0 (if there is a suspension of the variation game of the special figure 1) (step S704: No). , To proceed to step S705 in order to execute the processing relating to Toku-zu 1.

In step S705, when the process related to Toku-zu 2 is executed, the value of the special-figure 2 holding sphere number stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by 1, and when the process related to Toku-zu 1 is executed, the value is stored in the RAM 308. The value of the stored special figure 1 number of reserved balls is subtracted by one. In step S706, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process relating to special figure 2 is executed, the random number values stored in the random number storage areas corresponding to the pending figures 2 to 4 of special figure 2 are changed from the pending figures 1 to 1 of special figure 2. When shifting to the random number storage area corresponding to No. 3 and clearing the random number storage area corresponding to the reservation 4 of Toku-zu 2 and executing the process related to Toku-zu 1, it corresponds to the reservations 2 to 4 of Toku-zu 1 The random number value stored in the random number storage area is shifted to the random number storage areas corresponding to the reservations 1 to 3 in the special figure 1, and the random number storage area corresponding to the reservation 4 in the special figure 1 is cleared. As described above, the gaming table (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine. Further, each of the special maps 2 and 1 can store up to four reservations.

In step S707, a special drawing per lottery process is performed. As will be described later in detail, in the special drawing-based lottery process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or the special figure 1 variable game) is hit. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In this display symbol lottery process, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and the second special symbol is obtained based on the random number value and the result of the special symbol lottery process in step S707. The special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is selected by lottery.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment can perform various customizations.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, if the symbol variation display is not started even after a fixed time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the symbol variation display is stopped, the display shifts to the demonstration mode and the decorative symbol display device 208 It becomes a demo screen. In addition, from the stop of the symbol variation display of the special symbol to the shift to the demonstration mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the combination of the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated. When operated, a special animation may be displayed. On the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or a combination of stop patterns of decorative patterns (when the decorative pattern is composed of images of characters and the like and character images (including numbers), images of characters and the like are displayed on the demo screen. Is displayed and the character image may not be displayed, or both the character image and the character image may be displayed), or a movie including the model title (note that the degree of expectation is High-quality notices and production introduction movies that introduce highly-reachable contents may be included), and there is also a period during which the menu icon, volume adjustment icon, and brightness adjustment icon are displayed. .. It should be noted that the demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop display of decorative symbols is displayed.

When the chance button 136 is operated while the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an option menu. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, a volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 can be increased or decreased. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the light amount of the LED such as the game board lamp 442 or/and the game underframe lamp 452 is increased or decreased. Can be made Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 14 and the like, but need not include it. If the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 are operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed. Conversely, if the brightness adjustment window is displayed, the operation key unit 137 is displayed. By operating the left and right keys of, the volume adjustment window is displayed.

As will be described later in detail, an icon for "returning to the demo screen" is prepared in the option menu, and if the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor on this icon, the screen returns to the demo screen. be able to. Further, when the variable display of special symbols is started, the option menu is automatically ended, and the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period (for example, 1 minute) with the option menu displayed, the screen automatically returns to the demo screen.

When the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the demo screen is returned from the volume adjustment window, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When the button is pressed, the amount of light is determined, and the demo screen is returned from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the demo screen is automatically returned after a lapse of a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) after operating the left and right keys or the up and down keys. Further, when the variable display of special symbols is started, the volume adjustment window and the brightness adjustment window are also automatically disappeared here, and the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 63B is a diagram showing the structure of the option menu.

In the option menu, it is possible to roughly perform "effect customization", "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection".

The “auto button mode” in the “production customization” may be the same response production as when operating the operation means such as the chance button 136 without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. Note that ON/OFF described in “Option” in FIG. 63B means setting/non-setting and valid/invalid. “Long-press automatic continuous hit” means that the operation means such as the chance button 136 is simply long-pressed, and high-speed pressing is repeated during the long-press operation (continuous hits are performed). ) It is a function to perform the same response effect as the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The “group notice” is a type of normal notice (preliminary notice of the fluctuation), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expectation) of the big notice of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% confidence that the fluctuation that the group notice is displayed may be a big hit! ? However, if you want to increase the frequency that the group notice appears as a notice of the fluctuation, set the reliability to 50%, and set the frequency that the group notice appears as a notice of the fluctuation to 50% than when you set it. Although it is also low, if you want to be displayed in the fluctuation as a big hit rich (big hit confirmed) reliability 100%! ? Set to. The "winning sound notice" is a type of pre-reading notice when the number of holdings increases due to winning at the special map starting port. The winning sound notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operating means such as the chance button 136 has started and/or does not inform that the operation valid period of the operating means is in progress. When "Navi" is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation effective period of the operating means, or a character display such as "it may be good to operate the operating means" is displayed. Will be done. "No pre-reading notice" is not performed for all pre-reading notices other than the pre-reading notice by the display mode of the hold icon (for example, pre-reading notice by the movable means (effect movable body) or the pre-read notice display other than the hold icon by the display means) ( (Corresponding to "ON"). The “premier up” is a setting for increasing the appearance frequency of a big hit rich or big hit confirmed effect (corresponding to “ON”). “No change to hold” is a setting that does not give advance notice of advance due to the display mode of the hold icon (corresponding to “ON”). The "one-shot notification" is a specific notice about a big hit concentration or a big hit confirmation (for example, a production operation by a production movable body, a big hit rich (big hit confirmation) sound by a sound output means, a frame or a game board. Some or all of the decorative LED lights will be used to give notice.)

In addition, in the present specification, "big hit confirmation" means a symbol variation in which a big jackpot confirmation notice is displayed or a symbol variation of a lookahead target reservation when the relevant notice of big jackpot confirmation and/or prefetch notice notice is displayed. When the pre-reading notice for confirming the big hit is displayed, it indicates that the fluctuation or the hold of the pre-reading target is always the big hit (the same applies to the following description).

Further, in the present specification, "big hit concentration" means a state where the expectation for a big hit is high, and even if the notice of the big hit concentration and/or the notice of pre-reading notice is displayed, the notice of the big hit concentration is displayed. It is shown that even if a large-scale rich pre-reading notice is displayed toward the design change or the pre-reading target pending design change, it may be lost (same in the following description). Further, the jackpot concentration may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies in the following description).

Furthermore, the description "hot" in the present specification is also a state where the expectation for a big hit is high, but even if the notice of hot and/or the notice of look-ahead notice is displayed, a design with a notice of hot is displayed. It indicates that even if a hot-reading advance notice is displayed for the fluctuation or the symbol fluctuation of the pre-reading target suspension (this also applies to the following description). In addition, "hot" may indicate that the expectation of the big hit is lower than that of the big hit, and "intense heat" may indicate that the big hit is concentrated or the big hit is confirmed (explained below. The same in.)

Further, the "Daitomo" described in FIG. 63(b) is a membership service in which membership registration is performed and access is made to the Web server through the Internet line, and the level (lv) can be obtained by accumulating experience values. Is a service that allows you to get various benefits according to your level. When the member service of "Daitomo" is executed, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 have specifications that do not support the "Daitomo" member service. For models with specifications compatible with the "Ditemo" member service, if the user mode is set and the level of the Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Further, in FIG. 63(b), the item described as "Daitomo setting" is opened only by membership registration and setting to the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 at the time of joining Daitomo, the holding frame B can be used only by setting the user mode and selecting the holding frame. Here, the holding frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. The “initial setting” means that the item is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, "Daitomo" can have an experience of membership before being officially registered as a member, and as a trial play, an experienced character can use the grandfather character in character selection.

Further, one of the above benefits of Daitomo is an item that cannot be selected unless the level of Daitomo is raised. That is, among the "character selection", "holding frame selection", "holding display selection", and "background display selection", the item for which the Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in the "opening condition" is the displayed level. It is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

FIG. 64 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen when the member service is not used.

By operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. "Direction customization", "Character selection", "Holding frame selection", "Holding display selection", "Background display selection", "Initialization", "Return to demo screen" items are connected by an arrow Between the two, the cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of the operation key unit 137, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the screen corresponding to the item displayed by the cursor is displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor is placed on the item of "production customization", the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the production customization screen. Further, when the cursor is moved to the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the option menu screen is switched to the demo screen.

On the other hand, the "return" icon is displayed on each of the "production customization screen", "character selection screen", "holding frame selection screen", "holding display selection screen", "background display selection screen", and "initialization confirmation screen". Is displayed, and by moving the cursor to the icon of "return" and pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to return to the option menu screen. Alternatively, the user may be able to return to the option menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "return" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the variable display of the special figure is started, even if the option menu screen is displayed, the "production customization screen" is displayed. , "Character selection screen", "Holding frame selection screen", "Holding display selection screen", "Background display selection screen", "Initialization confirmation screen", it also shifts to the screen of variable display of decorative symbols.

Subsequently, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 will be specifically described using display examples on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of calling the option menu screen, the volume adjustment window, and the brightness adjustment window from the demo screen. The example described here is an example of a pachinko machine 100 having specifications that do not support the "DAITOMO" member service, and the open condition of FIG. 63(b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. It is possible. In the following embodiments, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an icon showing the appearance of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit or an icon showing the appearance of the chance button. In this case, a colorless and non-patterned icon indicates an inoperable operating means, and an icon displayed in another mode (colored and/or patterned) indicates an operable operating means.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative pattern (third pattern) and the second decorative pattern (fifth pattern). The special variable symbol display is stopped. Furthermore, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. In other words, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. In this state, when a fixed time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 65(1) is started. Even before the elapse of a certain period of time, the final display period of the special symbol stop symbol is ended, and the next symbol variable display is not started (for example, the special symbol stop symbol is fixed in the state where there is no hold. Immediately after the display period elapses, these icons MI, VI, BI may be displayed by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the cross key of the operation unit). In addition to the condition that a certain fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the special figure has ended, these icons MI, VI, BI may be displayed. Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, BI is started, even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds), the option menu screen and the volume adjustment are performed. The window or the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

Further, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include a display (character display or image display) of the contents that are being customized.
For example, in the case of the menu icon MI, character display or icon display for production customization, in the case of the volume adjustment icon VI, a gauge display showing the volume level, and in the case of the brightness adjustment icon BI, a gauge display showing the light amount level. May be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include a large item display (for example, “character selection”) shown in FIG. 63(b), or may not be included as shown in FIG. 65(1). Good.

In FIG. 65(2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. The same applies even if the upper key 137u is operated. Although the cross key is lit in white in a non-operated state, the pressed key changes to red lighting, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

By operating the down key 137d, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(3). The brightness adjustment window BW is a display larger than the brightness adjustment icon BI, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(3), the menu icon MI disappears and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. The brightness adjustment window BW having a size about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the light amount of the LED for the game board lamp 442 and/or the game underframe lamp 452 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is the brightest five levels.

In FIG. 65(4), the down key 137d is operated again, and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG.

In FIG. 65(6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65(7) has moved up one level and returned to the 5th level. Even if the up key 137u is operated in the 5-level state, the light amount does not increase any more. Even if the down key 137d is operated in the 1-level state, the light amount does not decrease further. Further, if no operation is performed for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demo screen in which the three icons MI, VI, BI are displayed, but if the up key 137d or the down key 137u is operated, the fixed period The start count can be updated. That is, the period until returning to the demo screen can be extended. It should be noted that 0 level below 1 level may be settable. At this 0 level, the LED will remain off.

In FIG. 65(8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The same applies even when the left key 137l is operated.

By operating the right key, the volume control window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(9). The volume adjustment window VW is displayed larger than the volume adjustment icon VI, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times the volume adjustment icon VI. Is enlarged and displayed, the menu icon MI disappears, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is three levels of the intermediate volume.

In FIG. 65(10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again, and the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. Even if the right key is operated in the 5th loudest state, the volume does not increase any more. In addition, even if the left key is operated in the 1-level state, the volume does not decrease further. If no operation is performed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demo screen where the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. The period can be extended. Note that it may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At the 0 level, the speaker 120 keeps muted.

Since a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, BI are displayed. I'm back.

In FIG. 65(14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 65(15) displays the option menu screen. Note that the chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit in red before it is pressed. In this option menu screen, all of the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative design (third design), and the second decorative design (fifth design) disappear, and under the character display of "menu". , 7 kinds of icons such as a performance customization icon, a character selection icon, a holding frame selection icon, a holding display selection icon, a background display selection icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen in order from the top in a vertical line. It is displayed. A cursor icon cs which can be moved up and down by the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 65(14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top production customization icon, and the other production icons are displayed in white, whereas the production customization icon is lit in red. Further, on the option menu screen, the pattern of the operation means that can be used for the selection operation and the determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, the chance button 136 and the symbols of the cursor icon cs and the up/down keys 137u and 137d used for moving the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. In addition, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136 in the determination operation, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

Here, although the option menu screen is not displayed even if the chance button 136 is operated during brightness adjustment or volume adjustment in FIGS. 65(2) to (12), it may be displayed. .. The initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of displaying the option menu screen may be the top production customization icon, the return icon, or any other icon. Alternatively, it may be an icon of an item currently being customized.

In FIG. 65(16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the effect customizing icon, and as shown in FIG. 65(17), the decorative pattern display device 208 has an effect customizing screen. Is displayed. A five-line list is displayed on the production customization screen, and in the list, five items from the top of the display of the small items in the production customization shown in FIG. Button navigation”) and respective options (for example, “OFF ON”) are displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. Below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for collectively returning the settings to the initial values are arranged in a horizontal row from the left side. ing. Further, in the production customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the time of starting the production customization screen display is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The return icon for which the cursor display is displayed has a frame highlighted, and is further illuminated and displayed in red. Further, the currently set option among the displayed options is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65(17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Furthermore, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed at the lower right of the effect customization screen. In the production customizing screen, all the keys 137u, d, l, r of the cross keys are displayed in red.

In FIG. 65(18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, in the production customization screen shown in FIG. 65 (19), the frame of the item in the auto button mode is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and an explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

In FIG. 65(20), the right key 137r is operated while the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(21), the currently set option in the auto button mode changes to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. If the left key 137l is operated while the currently set option is OFF, the key operation is invalid, but the same result as when the right key 137r is operated may be obtained.

In FIG. 65(22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item immediately below in the auto button mode (long press auto continuous hit). That is, in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65(23), the frame of the item of long press auto continuous hit is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and a description of this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirm icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the return icon when the setting is not changed. However, the icon may be moved to the confirmation icon or may be moved to the return icon regardless of whether the setting is changed.

After that, the down key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the back button navigation item at the bottom. That is, in the production customizing screen shown in FIG. 65(25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, a balloon display is added, and a description of this item is displayed.

In FIG. 65(26), the down key 137d is operated once again, and the list of five lines is updated as shown in FIG. 65(27). The button mode item disappears, and the cursor display is moved to the newly added item, which is 06 in FIG. 63( b ), without prior notice.

In FIG. 65(28), the lower key 137d is further operated.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 65.

The list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d, and in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 66(29) following FIG. 65(28), the last small item of effect customizing in FIG. 63(b) is 09. The cursor is moved to the one-time notification item.

When the down key 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 66(30), as shown in FIG. 66(31), the cursor display moves to the confirm icon, and the confirm icon has the frame highlighted. , It is displayed in red.

In FIG. 66 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as a determination operation, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 66 (33a), a notification screen for notifying the completion of setting of effect customization is overlaid on the effect customization screen from the front side. Is displayed. Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of effect customization is updated may be displayed. A return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed on the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a), and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

In FIG. 66(34), the chance button 136 is operated, and as shown in FIG. 66(35), the screen returns to the option menu screen.

The return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 66 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the production customization screen, and by operating the return icon arranged on the production customization screen, the option menu screen is displayed. You may be able to return.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is being displayed as shown in FIG. 66(36) (see FIG. 66(38)), FIG. ), the cursor icon cs that has been displayed in the production customization icon is moved down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

In FIG. 66(39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 66(40), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a character selection screen. Is displayed. A list of 5 lines is also displayed on the character selection screen, and in the list, 5 items (“01 Yoshimune” to “05 Hani”) from the top of the options displayed in the character selection shown in FIG. 63(b) are displayed. It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 66 (40 ), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and on the left side of the character selection screen, the pattern of the character of the item for which the cursor display is displayed (here, the pattern of Yoshimune) is preview-displayed. Has been done. Note that, as shown in 73(b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be omitted. Further, in the lower right of the character selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross-shaped key (up/down keys 137u, d only for red) used for selection operation, and a red chance used for determination operation. The design of the button 136 is also displayed.

The character set by the character selection here is always displayed, always appears at the time of production, and the appearance frequency becomes higher than other characters.

When the down key 137d is operated once as shown in FIG. 66(41), the cursor display moves to the grandfather of the item one below Yoshimune, as shown in FIG. 66(42). The design is previewed.

In FIG. 66(43), the down key 137d is operated five more times, and the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66(44), the list shown in FIG. 63(b) is displayed. The cursor display is moved to the item of 07, which is the last option for character selection.

When the down key 137d is operated again as shown in FIG. 66(45), the cursor display moves to the return icon and the frame of the return icon is highlighted as shown in FIG. 66(46). , It is displayed in red.

Here, when the down key 137d, not the chance button 136, is operated only once (FIG. 66 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. 66 (48), Yoshimune 01 Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display is moved to that Yoshimune item. Then, in FIG. 66 (49 ), the chance button 136 is operated. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66(50), an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed in the area where the preview display was performed. Although a confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) for confirming that the character settings are updated may be displayed, but in this example, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. When finished, the setting of the selected character is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 66(51).

Even if the animation showing the determination of the character ends, the character selection screen is still displayed, and it is possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the back icon arranged on the character selection screen. Good.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is being displayed (see FIG. 66 (52)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down one position, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the holding frame selection icon, and the holding frame selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 66 (54 ), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the holding frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 66 (55 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 holds the holding frame. A selection screen is displayed. A list of five lines is also displayed on the reservation frame selection screen, and in the list, five items (“01 reservation frame A” to “05” from the top of the options displayed in the reservation frame selection shown in FIG. 63(b) are displayed. The hold frame E”) is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 66 (55), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the holding frame A, and the holding frame of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is the holding icon and the variable icon in the window on the left side of the holding frame selection screen. It is displayed with a preview. Note that, as shown in 73(b), the default setting of the holding frame selection is the holding frame A, but this initial setting itself may be deleted, or a dedicated holding that cannot be selected here. A frame may be prepared. Further, in the lower right of the hold frame selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only in red), and a red icon used for the determination operation are displayed. The pattern of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The holding frame set by the holding frame selection here is displayed as the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 in the lower portion of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 66 (56), the down key 137d is operated once.

67 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 66.

In response to the single operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 66(56) continued from FIG. 66(55), the cursor display is 1 in the holding frame A in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 67(57). The reserved frame B of the item below is moved, and the reserved frame B is preview-displayed in the left window.

In FIG. 67 (58 ), the decision operation by the chance button 136 is performed. In the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 67(59), when the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is performed is generated and the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (60). Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the hold frame is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the holding frame selection screen remains as it is, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the holding frame selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down menu key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (61)), as shown in FIG. 67 (62), it is suspended until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down one position, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon lights up in red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (63 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a hold display selection screen. A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold display selection screen. In the list, five items (“01 icon A” to “05 icon” from the top of the options displayed in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 63(b) are displayed. E”) is displayed. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 67 (63), the cursor display is displayed in the item of icon A, and the icon of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed together with the hold frame in the window on the left side of the hold display selection screen. There is. Note that, as shown in 73(b), the initial setting of the hold display selection is the icon A, but this initial setting itself may be deleted, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here is displayed. You may prepare. Further, in the lower right of the hold display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of the cross key used for selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for determination operation. The pattern of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The icon set by the hold display selection here is displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or the variable icon h0 on the hold frame UI.

After that, the down key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is preview-displayed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window in which the preview display is being performed again occurs on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67(65), When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen displaying a cancel icon and an update icon) for confirming that the icon setting is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen may remain as it is, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 67 (67)), as shown in FIG. 67 (68), it is held until then. The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down one position, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 67 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the background display selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 67 (70), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the background. A selection screen is displayed. A list of 5 lines is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 63B are displayed on the list. Has been done. That is, one item is displayed for each line of the list of 5 lines. In FIG. 67 (70), the cursor display is displayed in the item of the background A, and the background of the item for which the cursor display is displayed is preview-displayed in the window on the left side of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73(b), the background display selection is initially set to the background A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here may be set. You may prepare. Further, in the lower right of the background display selection screen, a back icon for returning to the option menu screen, a pattern of the cross key used for selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for determination operation The pattern of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

The background set by the background display selection here is displayed as the background display in the normal state in the decorative pattern display device 208. The background display in the normal state mentioned here does not include the background display in the prefetch mode, the background display as a notice of the big hit of the fluctuation, and the background display in the power support state. However, it may be included only in the background display in the electric power support state.

After that, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is preview-displayed in the left window. In this state, the decision operation is performed by the chance button 136, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67 (72), the effect display Ed1 that surrounds the left window in which the preview display is being performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected background is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 67 (73). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the background setting is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen remains as it is, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

When the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is displayed after returning to the option menu screen (see FIG. 67 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 67 (75), The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the return icon for returning to the demo screen, and the return icon lights in red.

In FIG. 67 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the return icon, and as shown in FIG. 67 (77), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a demo screen. To be done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. That is, the background is changed to an empty background, the holding frame UI is different from the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 65(1), and in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen, it is set to ON by effect customization. The mode name (here, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, the customization numbers are displayed alternately in ascending order. For example, if the 01 auto button mode and the 05 back button navigation are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are displayed alternately in the frame RW in the upper right of the screen. It should be noted that when it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but may be the same or may be displayed. Further, when no setting is made, OFF may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. In addition, the group notice of setting the reliability and the long-press automatic continuous hit for setting the speed of repeated hits may be set but not displayed in the frame RW. Further, the set mode may not be displayed in detail, but may be displayed only, for example, “during production customization”.

In FIG. 67 (79), a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp. 220 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. All of the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are being stopped and displayed. In addition, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are also stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol shown in FIG. 67 (79). The symbol display device 284 also shows a stop display. Further, all of the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 67 (79) are all turned off, and in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even in the displayed second hold number display, both the hold number of Toku-zu 1 and the hold number of Toku-zu 2 are zero. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variable display is not started after the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 67(80), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 67(80) has started the symbol variable display. However, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub control units 400 and 500 shown in FIG. 67 (80) are also decorative symbols. The variable display is not started, and the fourth symbol display device 284, which is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, still displays the stop display. Incidentally, in the fourth design display device 284 shown in FIG. 67 (80), the black square represents that the first decorative design (third design) is stopped and displayed, and the gray circle represents the second decorative design (fifth design). Represents the stop display, the white square represents the variable display of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the white circle represents the variable display of the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display, and the second number of holdings displayed in the upper right corner portion. In the display, the reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is momentarily displayed as "1".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 67 (82), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 which is displayed as "1" for a moment in the second holding number display is "0". It should be noted that the second reserved number display may not be displayed as "1" even for a moment since it is immediately consumed after the first special figure starting port 230 is won, and may be left as "0".

In FIG. 67 (83), the increase animation of the first hold icon h11 has started.

68 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67.

In FIG. 68 (84) continued from FIG. 67 (83), the increase animation ends and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 68 (84) is an icon newly set in hold display selection for production customization, and is displayed in a default display mode (diamond-shaped unpatterned and white display mode). There is.

In FIG. 68 (85), although the variable display of the first decorative symbol is not yet started, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the delay from the start of the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. The deletion of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI is started, and the display is transparent. The erasing here may be an animation, but the erasing is not necessarily an erasing animation, and in FIG. 68 (86), the erasing of these three icons MI, VI, BI is completed.

In FIG. 68 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area, and in FIG. 68 (88) the movement of the first hold icon h11 has been completed. On the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode (diamond-shaped unpatterned and white display mode) is displayed. Then, in FIG. 68 (89), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finally started, and the first decorative symbol is changing slowly. In addition, in detail at the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the left symbol starts the variable symbol display first, the middle symbol starts the variable symbol display, and the right symbol finally starts the variable symbol display. However, the order of the variable display start of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and the three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may simultaneously start the variable display. In addition, before the variable display of the first decorative pattern is started, an animation based on the decorative pattern (for example, an animation in which the decorative pattern is once displayed large and then returns to the original size, or the decorative pattern is an image and characters of a character or the like). In the case of being composed of images (including numbers), an image of a character or the like may be animated before the first decorative pattern starts to change).

In FIG. 68 (91), the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed. 68(93), if the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212, 214 is started (see FIG. 68(92)). As shown in, a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the hold frame UI. The volume display bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol (third symbol), at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. .. When the left key 137l is operated while the volume adjusting bar display VB is displayed, the bar display is decreased by one level and the sound is reduced, and when the right key 137r is operated, the bar display is increased by one level and the sound is increased. , The volume can be adjusted.

In the present embodiment, only after the symbol variable display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, only the volume adjustment can be performed. Even if the volume can be adjusted at all times, the bar display VB for adjusting the volume may not be displayed. Moreover, even during the big hit game, only the volume adjustment can be performed at any time. However, it may be restricted for a certain period. For example, during a big hit game start effect, during an interval between rounds, during a big hit game end effect, during execution of super reach effect, during confirmation display of a symbol on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, or for a decorative symbol. Result screen during confirmation display, during confirmation display of lost symbols, during confirmation display of big hit symbols, and at the end of electric support (time saving) state (for example, at the end of ST) (for example, the number of balls or/and The display may be restricted during the display of the screen for displaying the number of consecutive holidays or the like, or the period in which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for the effect. In addition, when the super reach effect is a game effect, it is regulated until the result of winning or losing is notified, and it may be adjustable thereafter, or it is adjusted after the three decorative symbols are aligned and the shaking display is started. This may be possible, or the entire period from the super reach effect to the stop display may be restricted.

In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low accuracy normal figure low accuracy state. Also, after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the light amount adjustment is impossible, but the light amount adjustment bar is used. The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for volume adjustment so that the light amount can be adjusted, or the light amount can be adjusted without the bar display. Furthermore, even after the symbol variable display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, effect customization, character selection, etc. may be settable.

Moreover, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated in a state where the volume adjustment icon VI and the like are disappeared, that is, while the symbol is changing, without displaying the volume display bar display VB as in the present embodiment, It may be possible to adjust the volume. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds). However, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured to be able to update the count start for the certain period (that is, to extend the period until returning to the demo screen). If the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is erased by the start of the variation of the symbol, the erase animation is canceled midway and immediately. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI and the like may be displayed again without canceling the deletion animation, or the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed after the deletion animation has been completed.

Further, even after the variable display of the symbols on the special figure display devices 212, 214 is started, the presence or absence of the display of the three icons MI, VI, BI is kept until the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Regardless, it may be possible to adjust the light amount, and it is also possible to set performance customization, character selection, and the like.

Further, even when the volume adjustment and/or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the pattern change, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

69 is a diagram showing a modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 66.

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69(32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66(32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 69(33b1). The return icon is displayed with the frame highlighted and further illuminated in red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 69 (33b2)), a confirmation screen asking whether to return to the option menu screen is displayed over the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 69 (33b3)). ). On this confirmation screen, a return icon that acknowledges returning to the option menu screen and a cancel icon that cancels returning to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33b2), the cursor display is changed to the cancel icon. It is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the return icon (FIG. 69 (33b5-1), or when the cursor display is displayed in the cancel icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customizing screen (FIG. 69 (33b5-2)).

When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69(32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 66(32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 69(33c1). Then, when the right key 137r is operated once more (FIG. 69 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 69 (33c3). When the chance button 136 is operated in this state ((33c4) in FIG. 69), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize the effect customization is displayed overlaid on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 69 (33c5). )). In this confirmation screen, a “Yes icon” that accepts the initialization and a “No icon” that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 69 (33c5), the cursor display is the “No icon”. "Is displayed. Then, when the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 69 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to “Yes icon” (FIG. 69 (33c7-1), and in this state, FIG. 69 (33c8-1) When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in, initialization of effect customization is executed.In this initialization, all values set by the player in effect customization are returned to the initial values. It is possible to perform initialization even when it is not set, but it is possible not to do so.When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is overlaid on the production customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 69 (33c9-1)) Next, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 69 (33c6-2)), the effect customizing screen in which the initialization is reflected is displayed. Although nothing was set, all items are set to OFF, which is the initial value.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another modification.

When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 70 (74b1) instead of the two times operation of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 67 (74a), as shown in FIG. 70 (74b2). The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon lights up in red.

In FIG. 70 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 70 (74b4), all the settings are set in the decorative symbol display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is displayed over the option menu screen from the front side. In this confirmation screen, a “Yes icon” that accepts the initialization and a “No icon” that cancels the initialization are displayed. In FIG. 70 (74b4), the cursor display is the “No icon”. "Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (74b5-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the “yes icon” (FIG. 70 (74b6-1), or the cursor display is displayed to the “no icon”). 70 (74b5-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 70 (74b6-2)).

As shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1), when the chance button 136 is operated in the state where the cursor is displayed in the “yes icon” (FIG. 70 (74b7-1)), initialization of all settings is executed. It In the initialization here, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. It should be noted that it is possible to perform initialization even when nothing is specifically set, but it may not be possible. When the initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed on the option menu screen in an overlapping manner from the front side (FIG. 70 (74b8-1)). Then, when the chance button 136 is operated ((b) (74b9-1) in FIG. 70), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in (74b10-1) in FIG.

In addition, after the player has performed various customizations, if the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the ball firing handle 134 is not operated for a certain period (for example, 5 minutes) without returning to the option menu screen. May initialize various settings. Also, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 70 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 69 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the “yes icon” may be removed from the confirmation screen, and the initialization may be performed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Further, even if there is a “yes icon”, if there is no operation, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, the initialization may be performed only when “Initialize” is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed on the “Yes icon”). ..

In addition, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same as the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and/or the brightness may be performed at the same timing, One may be initialized before the other. Also, when initializing the volume and initializing the brightness at the same timing as the initializing settings for various settings, do not display the initialization confirmation screen for initializing the volume and initializing the brightness. Alternatively, a confirmation screen for initializing all settings, volume, and brightness may be displayed.

Further, a display for confirming whether to initialize the setting of effect customization may be automatically displayed during the symbol change. For example, if it is displayed once per 100 fluctuations, if it has been fluctuated a fixed number of times since it was last displayed, or if it has been fluctuated a fixed number of times since the fluctuation that was started first, it is always displayed. Alternatively, it may be displayed at random (for example, when the player wins in the display lottery).

70(I) to 70(V') are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during the jackpot round.

In this example, for example, the player can select a song in the first round or the second round, reach a certain round after the second round, and customize from the next round. The certain round here is a round in which the V attacker can win the prize, and specifically, it is 5 rounds. In FIG. 70(I), the decorative design display device 208 of the fifth round is shown, and the letter V that fuels the winning of the V attacker is displayed. Further, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

FIG. 70(II) is a period corresponding to the inter-round interval when the V attacker is closed. It should be noted that the decorative pattern display device 208 still displays 5 rounds even if the interval between rounds is between 5 rounds and 6 rounds. In addition, the attacker is closed, but the right-handed notification continues.

In FIG. 70(III), the attacker has started opening and the sixth round has started. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(III), a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed. That is, in this example, the effect customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round after the fifth round in which the V attacker can win. It should be noted that it may be executable only in the sixth round, or may be executable in multiple rounds after the sixth round.

In FIG. 70(IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, the effect design screen shown in FIG. 65 etc. is reduced and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(V), and a list of 5 lines is displayed. There is.

Also, in FIG. 70(V) shown as a modification of FIG. 70(V), a display regarding only one line (only one item) of the list of five lines (here, a display regarding the auto button mode) is displayed. There is. In this modification, all the production customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up/down keys 137u, 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON/OFF the items displayed with the left/right keys 137l, 137r. ..

It should be noted that, in the example of FIG. 70(V) or the example of FIG. 70(V'), only some of the effect customization may be changeable.

In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V winning is performed with a so-called V confirmation machine). The customization is not limited to the V confirmation machine and may be performed from a certain round.

Further, the period during which the music can be selected during the big hit game may not be customized, and the customization may be performed from the round in which the selected music is output. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the music selected in the middle of the round may be output. In this case, if the selected music is output even in the round in which the music is selected. , Customization can be done within the round.

In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the end of the specific round. In detail, you may be able to customize at the same time as the end of a particular round, you may be able to customize from the start of the next round of a particular round, and between the particular round and the next round It may be possible to customize from an inter-round interval.

Further, customization may be feasible at any time during the jackpot round. Also, the customization may be executable at any time during the jackpot game. The big hit game here is a period from the start of the big hit to the end of the big hit, which includes a round.

It should be noted that, from the viewpoint of the main control unit 300, the period from the time when the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed until the first round is started means that the special electric accessory ( It is a period from when the attacker is turned on to when it is turned on, and includes a period in which the big hit game start effect is being executed. In addition, the display (for example, the display of the special bonus) that was displayed in the big hit game start effect may be continuously displayed even after the first round is started, but it is 1 round until the attacker starts the first opening. It is a period until the eyes start. Further, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbols is based on the confirmation display of the symbols on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214, not the confirmation display of the decorative symbols. Also, if the game machine is a right-handed notification before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit or special hit of special figure 1), the timing at which the right-handed notification is started is also a big hit symbol. It is included in the period from the time the final confirmation is displayed to the start of the first round.

During the period from the time when the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed until the start of the first round, the customization may not be performed, or the opposite may be performed.

In addition, customization may not be performed during the period from the end of the final round to the start of the symbol variation at the shortest. For example, customization may not be performed during the big hit end production.

Further, during the warning of forgetting to remove the prepaid card, customization may not be performed, or conversely, it may be performed.

In addition, customization may not be performed during a specific performance (for example, V winning performance, music selection, probability variation suggestion, etc.). Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during a period in which performance selection (for example, music selection, performance mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Further, the customization may be configured not to be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operation means used for the customization, or the customization may be restricted before the effect is started. By doing so, the regulation of customization functions as a notice of the production.

Further, contrary to the example shown in FIGS. 70(I) to (V'), customization may not be performed when a certain round is reached. For example, 1R to 14R can be customized, but 15R may not be customized. Alternatively, the customization can be performed up to 5R to 12R, but may not be possible after 13R.

Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is displayed. For example, when a two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period of time during a big hit game, or when a two-dimensional code is displayed by the player's operation (for example, "press button to display two-dimensional code") When a two-dimensional code is issued by a button operation while being performed), customization may not be performed. On the other hand, on the contrary, the two-dimensional code may be configured to be customized even while being displayed. All or a part of the two-dimensional code and the display relating to customization may be displayed at a position where they overlap, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap with part or all of the display relating to customization from the front side, and conversely, part or all of the display relating to customization may be displayed in two-dimensional form. It may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the code from the front side.

70(I) to 70(V'), the big hit performance of the pachinko machine having the variable winning opening having the probability variation area has been described, but the big hit of the pachinko machine having the variable winning opening having no probability variation area has been described. The present invention is also applicable to the big hits of so-called 1st and 2nd models in which the big hit starts when a V prize is won.

70(VI) to 70(VIII) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(VI), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are rapidly changing. is there. Also, in the frame RW at the upper right of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(VI), it is displayed that the auto button mode is currently customized, and below that, effect customization is executed. A character display for notifying that it is possible and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 70(VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 70(VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. 70(V′). A display related to only (only one item) (here, a display related to the auto button mode) is displayed. Also in this example, by scrolling the items with the up/down keys 137u, 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching ON/OFF of the displayed items with the left/right keys 137l, 137r, all the effect customization can be changed.

FIG. 70(IX) to FIG. 70(XI) are diagrams showing another example in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

Also in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and three decorative symbols are rapidly changing. is there. Further, in FIG. 70(IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The second display device 208P has a smaller display screen than the decorative pattern display device 208. The second display device 208P is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70(IX) is in the initial position and can move up and down. The second display device 208P partially overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position, and when descending from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 increases.

A model title is displayed on the second display device 208P, and a display RW' indicating that the auto button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. .. Further, below the display RW′, a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed.

In FIG. 70(X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and the entire screen of the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 70(XI) has been changed to the same screen as the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65 and the like. In addition, a part of the contents of the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65 or the like (for example, the customization display being executed) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining contents may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Further, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 65 and the like may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Further, the display using the second display device 208P is also applicable to the display regarding customization during the big hit game.

Note that the customization may be executed at any time during the variable display of symbols. For example, it may be configured so that customization can be performed even while the super reach effect is being displayed. Alternatively, on the contrary, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed while the super reach effect is displayed. The super-reach effect referred to here also includes an effect and a sign effect that are agitated until the judge effect such as a duel effect starts after reaching the reach state. For example, the effect of changing the display position of the left design and the right design of the decorative design which is assumed to enter the reach state and the production before the character display suggesting the development to the super reach are also included. Further, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a display screen of a decorative pattern, it is included in the super reach effect until it is switched to a display screen of a decorative pattern.

It should be noted that the effects of the fanned part and the omen effects may be customized or may not be customized. Further, customization may be performed after switching from the judge effect result display screen or the display of the judge effect to the decorative pattern display, or may not be performed in the opposite.

Further, customization may be performed even during the simultaneous production executed on a plurality of gaming machines, or conversely, it may not be possible during the simultaneous production. Further, during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, customization may be performed, or conversely, the customization may not be performed. Furthermore, during the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, customization may be allowed only when the jackpot is finally won, or may not be reversed, and eventually the game is lost. Only in this case, the customization may be allowed or, on the contrary, the customization may not be allowed. Further, in the state of holding, the customization may be allowed or may not be allowed to be performed until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. Further, during execution of a specific effect during symbol variation display (for example, in the prefetch mode), customization may be performed, or conversely, it may not be performed.

Further, when customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. Good.

In addition, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, the player's operations (for example, display with the chance button, switch with the arrow keys, etc.) will list the missions that have been achieved and the game history (number of revolutions, number of balls released, number of missions cleared). , The number of jackpots played this time, the maximum number of consecutive villas played this time, etc.), or the user can change the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. It may have been done. Furthermore, while the user mode (Daitomo) is being set, a list of missions and game history that have been achieved by player operations (eg, display with the chance button, switch with the arrow keys, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) It is configured to be able to display (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of jackpots played this time, maximum number of consecutive games played this time, etc.), character set by the user, background, hold frame The hold display may be changed.

Further, when the mission is completed during the setting of the user mode, an icon notifying that the mission has been completed may be displayed.

Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having a specification compatible with the "DAITOMO" member service will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of this specification, the opening condition of FIG. 63(b) is adopted. A top menu is prepared for the pachinko machine 100 of this specification. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. It should be noted that the top menu may be able to be called only by operating the chance button 136 without going through the demo screen. Alternatively, the demo screen may be automatically switched and displayed without operating the chance button 136. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

On the top menu, there are Daitomo icon, model customization icon, initialization icon, and return icon.

FIG. 71(1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

Also on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the cursor is moved up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of “DAITOMO”, “Model customization”, “Initialization”, and “Return to demo screen”, you can operate the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 to connect with each other connected by arrows. When the cursor moves and the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor is displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is moved to the item “DAITOMO” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is moved to the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

On the other hand, a "return" icon is displayed on each of the "Daitomo screen", the "model customization screen", and the "initialization confirmation screen". Move the cursor to the "return" icon and press the chance button 136. Then, you can go back to the top menu screen. Alternatively, the user may be able to return to the top menu screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "return" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212, 214 and the variable display of the special figure is started, even if the top menu screen is displayed, the "Daitomo screen", " Even on the "model customization screen" and the "initialization confirmation screen", the screen changes to the decorative pattern variable display screen.

FIG. 71(2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

The transition diagram of the model customizing screen shown in FIG. 71(2) is the same as the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 64 except for the "return to top menu" at the bottom and the "top menu screen" to the right of it. Therefore, redundant description will be omitted. If the cursor is moved to the item “return to top menu” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

FIG. 72 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

Also on the Daitomo screen, the cursor is moved up and down by operating the up key 137u or the down key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of “Trial play”, “Password input”, “Data save”, “Data clear”, “Quick start”, and “Return to top menu screen”, the operation key unit is connected between the items connected by the arrow. The cursor is moved by operating the up key or the down key of 137, and a screen corresponding to the item displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is pressed with the cursor on the item of “trial play”, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, the cursor is moved by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and the chance button 136 is selected to move to a new registration screen or to start the trial play. You can go back to. Further, from the new registration screen, by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r and determining the chance button 136, it is possible to shift to the password input screen or return to the Daitomo screen. ..

When the cursor is moved to the item of “password input” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password input screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is entered, and if the entered password is correct, the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode is switched after a certain period of time.

When the cursor is moved to the item of “data storage” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data storage confirmation screen. In the data storage confirmation screen, if “Yes” is determined by moving the cursor by selecting the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136, the screen moves to the two-dimensional code issuing screen. However, if “Yes” is determined in the same manner, a two-dimensional code is issued, and it is possible to shift to the demo screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, whether the data storage confirmation screen or the two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed, "No" is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross keys 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136. In this case, each display is repeated.

When the cursor is moved to the item of “data clear” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

If the cursor is moved to the item "quick start" and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. The quick start start screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

On the other hand, a "return" icon is displayed on each of the "trial play screen", "password input screen", "data save confirmation screen", "data clear confirmation screen", and "quick start start screen", By moving the cursor to the "return" icon and pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen. Alternatively, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 without moving the cursor to the "return" icon.

Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212, 214 and the variable display of the special figure is started, even if it is the Daitomo screen, the "trial pre-screen" is displayed. Even if it is, etc., the screen shifts to a screen for variable display of decorative patterns.

The parenthesized reference numerals shown in FIG. 72 are associated with the parenthesized drawing numbers in FIG. 73.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(a). On this top menu screen, all of the background display, the holding frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative design (third design), and the second decorative design (fifth design) disappear, and under the character display of "menu", Four types of icons, such as a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen, are displayed in order from the top in a vertical column. Also, in FIG. 72A, a cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the bottom return icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, whereas the return icon is lit in red. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started is the return icon. Also on the top menu screen, the pattern of the cross key (only the up and down keys 137u and 137u are red) used for the selection operation and the pattern of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right.

The screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73(b1) is the chance menu 136 with the cursor icon cs displayed on the Daitomo icon on the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a). It is the Daitomo screen displayed by being pressed. In this Daitomo screen, in order to return to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in the vertical line from top to bottom under the display of “Daitomo” Six types of icons such as the back icon of are displayed. Further, in FIG. 72(b1), the cursor display is displayed on the trial play icon at the top, and the trial play icon is highlighted in a frame and further lit in red. Moreover, the character of Yoshimune appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical line, and an explanation about the trial play is displayed. Further, below the display of the explanation, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u, d are red) and the design of the red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the trial play screen shown in FIG. 73(b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the trial play screen shown in FIG. 73(b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as benefits of the experience of joining Daitomo. Below that display, underneath it is a confirmation icon to save the setting changes, a return icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a "start icon" to start trial play, a new registration to register as a new member. The icons are arranged horizontally in a row from the left side. The cursor display is displayed in the "start icon", and this position is the initial position. In this state, when the right key 137r is operated once, the cursor display moves to the “new registration icon”, and when the decision button operation is performed by pressing the sodoko chance button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays The new registration screen shown in FIG. 73(b1-2) is displayed.

In the new registration screen shown in FIG. 73(b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code QR1 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function and the two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed. The text recommending that you access the website (Daitomo site) of the embedded URL and obtain the password from it is displayed. Below the display of the text, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but may be displayed without passing through the trial play screen. For example, when a new registration icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b1) in addition to the trial play icon and the new registration icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b2), the cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and the explanation about the password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the password input screen shown in FIG. 73(b2-1) is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In the password input screen shown in FIG. 73(b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw and, under the password input area pw, alphabets, symbols, and numerical dials kw are displayed. The person who inputs the password moves the cursor (displayed in gray and T is specified in FIG. 73(b2-1-1)) using the four-way controller 137u, d, l, r to move the character specified by the cursor. Is performed character by character in accordance with the password acquired from the Daitomo site by the operation of inputting in the password input area pw by the determination operation using the chance button 136 (see FIG. 73 (b2-1-1)). Under the dial kw, a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erasing icon for erasing input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating completion of password input are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left side. Has been done.

When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor displayed on the completion icon. If the input of the password is incorrect, the input error window shown in FIG. 73(b2-1-2) is displayed. When this window disappears, the password input operation can be performed again. The previously input password may be cleared from the password input area pw or may remain as it is. If the password input is correct, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode after the window for input completion shown in FIG. 73(b2-1-3) is displayed for a certain period of time. ..

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b3), a cursor display is displayed on the data save icon, and an explanation about data save is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the data saving confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73(b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, if trial play or quick start is being performed, or if the password has not been entered, disable the data save icon from being selected or prevent this data save confirmation screen from being displayed. However, it may be selectable or displayable.

In the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73 (b3-1), a “Yes” icon that acknowledges that the data will be saved and a “No” icon that the data will not be saved are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 73 (b3-2)). This two-dimensional code QR2 includes the URL of the Daitomo site, the player's ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, the number of balls played, the number of big hits, the number of consecutive games, the level of Daitomo mode, and experience). (Including values, mission achievement information, etc.) are embedded, and the two-dimensional code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function, and the website (Daitomosite) of the URL embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2. ), the data will be saved on the Daitomo site server. An end icon is displayed in the lower right of the data storage confirmation screen. When the reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, the end icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated. Is displayed.

In FIG. 73 (b3-2-1), the end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “Yes” icon that acknowledges the end and a “No” icon that does not end are displayed. When the “YES” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the demo screen in which the die-tomo mode is not set.

The data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2, such as the game history information of this time, may be deleted from the pachinko machine after the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, and FIG. 73 (b3-2-1). May be deleted from the pachinko machine 100 at the stage when the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, or may not be deleted until the data clear described later is performed.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and an explanation about data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decoration pattern display device 208 displays a data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73(b4-1). If you are performing trial play or quick start, or if you have not entered the password, disable the data clear icon and prevent the data clear confirmation screen from being displayed. However, it may be selectable or displayable.

In the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 73(b4-1), a "Yes" icon for confirming that the data such as the game history information of this time is erased and a "No" icon for not erasing the data are displayed. There is. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine and the erase completion screen is displayed.

The erasure completion screen is displayed in FIG. 73 (b4-1-1). The erasure completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the screen returns to the Daitomo screen.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the quick start start screen shown in FIG. 73(b5-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode.

In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 73(b6), the cursor display is displayed on the return icon, and on the right side, returning to the top menu screen is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative pattern display device 208 switches to the top menu screen.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

When the second model customizing icon is selected from the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a) and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the model customizing screen shown in FIG. 74(c). Is displayed. In this model customization screen, under the character display of "Model customization", a production customization icon, a character selection icon, a hold frame selection icon, a hold display selection icon, a background display selection icon, and an initialization are displayed in order from the top in a vertical line. Seven types of icons such as an icon and a return icon for returning to the top menu screen are displayed. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 74(c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top production customization icon, and the other production icons are displayed in white, whereas the production customization icon is lit in red. In the model customization screen, the design of the cross key used for the selection operation and the design of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed at the lower right. Furthermore, the chance button 136 and the symbols of the cursor icon cs and the up/down keys 137u and 137u used for moving the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. In addition, the decision key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136 in the decision operation, or the decision key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

In FIG. 74(c1), the effect customizing screen is displayed, but in the effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 65(17), the options of the input sound notice and the back button navigation are not yet released. Be different. If the Daitomo password has not been entered or the level that satisfies the opening condition has not been reached, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c1) appears.

The character selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74(c2), but the character selection screen shown in FIG. 66(40) has all other options unreleased except for Yoshimune's option. The difference is that the choices are not even displayed as to what character they are. It should be noted that a part or all of the character image may be displayed even if it is an unreleased option, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which a selectable character is recognizable ( For example, a display including “Daitomo Lv.20: Princess is open” and the like may be displayed. Here, the display regarding the unreleased options is also applicable to other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display). If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c2) appears. Only Yoshimune can be selected on this screen.

On the other hand, in the character selection screen shown in FIG. 74(c2'), since the password is input or the trial play is selected, the grandfather character can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

Although the reservation frame selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74(c3), the reservation frame selection screen shown in FIG. 66(55) is the same as the reservation frame A option except that the other selection options are unreleased. Yes, the other option is that it does not even show what the name of the holding frame is. If the Daitomo password has not been input, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c3) appears. On this screen, only the hold frame A can be selected.

On the other hand, in the holding frame selection screen shown in FIG. 74(c3'), since the password is input, the holding frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

The hold display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74(c4), but the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 67(63) is that all other options have not been released except the option of icon A. , The other options are different in that they do not even show what the name of the pending display is. If the Daitomo password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c4) appears. On this screen, only icon A can be selected.

On the other hand, in the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 74(c4'), since the password is entered, the icon B can also be selected. However, here as well, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

The background display selection screen is displayed in FIG. 74(c5), but the background display selection screen shown in FIG. The difference is that the other options don't even show what the background name is. If the Daitomo password has not been input, the screen shown in FIG. 74(c5) appears. On this screen, only the background A can be selected.

On the other hand, in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 74(c5'), since the password is input, the background B can also be selected. However, here as well, after 03, it cannot be selected because it does not reach the level that satisfies the opening condition.

In FIG. 74(d1), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all the settings is displayed. However, since it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 70 (74b6-1), description thereof will be omitted. Further, although the initialization completion screen is displayed in FIG. 74(d2), the description is omitted because it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 70(74b8-1).

FIG. 74(e1) is a diagram showing an example of the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 74(e1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative pattern (third pattern) and the second decorative pattern (fifth pattern). The special variable symbol display is stopped. Furthermore, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. In other words, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, below the second hold number display, the current level of the Daitomo mode (here, level 1) and the experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74(e1) corresponds to, for example, the screen immediately after the new registration and the transition to the demo screen.

Further, the corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 74(e1). For example, when Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice “Start Daitomo” is output, and when trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, “Trial” is displayed. When the voice "Start play" is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice "Start Daitomo. Let's do our best today" is output. Note that different sound effects are output depending on whether the corresponding sound effect is started by the trial play, when the Daitomo is started by quick start, or when the password is entered. , The same sound effect may be output, and the same sound effect may be output in two cases. Further, the sound effect may change depending on the level of the Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. Also, when returning to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 74(e1) through model customization, the sound effect may not be output, and a dedicated sound effect may be output. Further, an animation may be displayed together with the corresponding sound effect or in place of the corresponding sound effect. When the symbol variation start is started while the sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) in the middle, or may be output to the end as it is.

In addition, if the quick start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or if the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed. In the case of at least one of them, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74(c) may not be called for a certain period, or the certain period may be set. The top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74(c) may be called up without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74(c) may not be called for a certain period.

FIG. 74(e1-1) shows a state in which the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period has elapsed since the demo screen shown in FIG. 74(e1) was displayed. FIG.

Note that the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, one minute) after the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73A is displayed. Good. Further, when the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, r is operated during this fixed period, the operation is invalidated. However, it may be valid in some cases.

In addition, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed (for example, immediately after or shortly after the symbol variation display is stopped without a hold), the figure The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown at 65 can be called. Further, when the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW are called and there is no operation for a certain period, the screen may be returned to the screen shown in FIG. 74(e1-1).

Further, when the stop symbol is displayed in the state where there is no hold, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period, and the certain period is as shown in FIG. The model customization screen shown in) may not be called.

Further, even during a period in which the top menu screen shown in FIG. 73(a) and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 74(c) cannot be called, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 should be called. May be possible.

Furthermore, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65 and the screen shown in FIG. 74(e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also displayed on the screen shown in FIG. 74(e1-1). There is a state in which neither of them is displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may or may not be executable.

FIG. 74(e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demo screen displayed via FIG. 73(b3-2-1) after the two-dimensional code is issued in FIG. 73(b3-2). As the output sound from the speaker 120, a voice saying "Thank you for your hard work" is output. Further, the output sound effect may be changed depending on the state before this demo screen is displayed.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the variable icon.

Here, the variation icon h0 will be summarized once again. The variation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, which is displayed after the suspension of the special figure variation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 at the same time when the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon is started. More precisely, when the first hold icon h11 having the oldest winning prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the variable icon display area CIS, the moving icon is referred to as a variable icon, or the variable icon moves. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The variable icon h0 is displayed with a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from that of the hold icon h11. This may facilitate the identification of the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11, but they may have the same size. The variable icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The change icon h0 can give a notice about whether or not the change is valid (a notice of the change) depending on its display mode, and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon h0 can be regarded as an icon related to holding, and can be considered as a kind of holding icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or losing the special figure changing game is held. The erasing timing may be before, at the same timing, or after the timing at which the result of the variation is notified. Further, in addition to the default display mode (for example, a circular unpatterned and white display mode), a plurality of types of display modes of the variation icon h0 are prepared as normal advance notification display modes, and depending on the display mode, The jackpot reliability (expectation) is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern. In the following description, the degree of expectation of a big hit is represented by color. The default white color is when “no change” is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variable icon h0. Although the default white fluctuation icon does not announce the expectation of the big hit, the expectation of the big hit may be announced (in that case, the color of the icon with the lowest expectation of the big hit). White blinking has the lowest expectation of a big hit (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). As a color of the normal notice display mode, a so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes from white flashing to blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in ascending order of big hit expectation is displayed. The gold color is a big jackpot, and the iridescent one has a higher expectation of a jackpot than that. For example, it may be said that the jackpot is confirmed. Note that this color relationship is the same for the color of the display mode of the pre-reading notice by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when the color is red or more, it means red, gold, or rainbow.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central area. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative design (fifth design) is variably displayed. Further, a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigator character YM of the lord's character is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. 75(A1). Various effects such as icons and mini-items are displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75(A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variable displays. For example, the display is started at the same time as the start of a certain symbol variable display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variable display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. Further, the variable display of the symbol may be terminated and may be continuously displayed even during the display of the stop display, or may be temporarily disappeared or may not be seen. Then, during the display of the next symbol variation display that is started continuously, it may be displayed continuously, or may disappear temporarily or disappear. Alternatively, the display may be terminated during the display of the next symbol variable display. Further, there may be a case where it is displayed only in part or all of the entire period during which one symbol variable display is displayed, and may not be displayed during the next symbol variable display. The navigation character YM can be said to be a so-called constantly displayed character, but it does not have to be continuously displayed in any case. Furthermore, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75(A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is also the default display mode (the circular unpatterned and white display mode).

In FIG. 75 (A2-1), a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that another icon or the like may change when the change notice is displayed. Other icons include the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the variable icon h0, and a decorative pattern. That is, the icon or the like that has been displayed before the display of the change notice display is to be changed. However, even if the display of the change notice display is started at the same time as the display of the change notice display or the display is started later, it may be changed. The player may or may not know what will be changed at the time when the display of the change notice display is started. There may also be suggestions on what to change. Furthermore, even if the change notice display is displayed, nothing may change depending on the change notice display, which may be a false notice. Further, the change notice display may be determined to have only one target object, or may be necessarily changed.

The treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 75 (a2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The icon I2 of the carpet is displayed only at the time of appearance, and when the icon I1 of the treasure box reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, the icon I2 disappears or jumps out of the screen. As the appearance timing of the icon of this change notice display, when the first decorative pattern changes rapidly, at the start of the pattern change, when the moving of the change icon h0 is completed, and when the special figure start opening is won (when the hold is increased) At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of certain success, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation (at the time of re-variation start) in the pseudo continuous production, at the start of the reach state, super reach At the start, you can enumerate during super-reach. That is, the appearance timings of the change notice display icons may be all of the above-listed ones. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. There may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure box icon I1. For example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like may change depending on the display mode (size, color, animation difference) of the treasure box or the carpet. Good. Further, as for the effect display that is displayed only at the time of appearance or exit, like the icon I2 of the carpet, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, the probability of changing is high, or a state advantageous for the player. The probability of changing the display mode to the display mode may increase. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but in some cases, the effect display other than the navigation character (holding icon, change icon, notice display of the change, prefetch notice display, etc.) may be changed. It may be. In addition, among presentation displays other than the navigation character (holding icon, change icon, notice display of the change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), pre-read notice display (timer notice, pre-read mode background display, etc.) It is possible that the navigation character is not changed by one effect display, a plurality of effect displays, or a notice display that changes all effect displays, but the navigation character may be changed in some cases. Good. Further, the change notice display may be configured such that the navigation character is changed more often than the effect display other than the navigation character is changed, but conversely, the frequency of changing the navigation character is effect other than the navigation character. The frequency may be less than the frequency of changing the display, and the two frequencies may be performed at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (the effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is displayed by the "notice of changing the effect display (change notification display, notification display that changes effect display other than the navigation character. Hereinafter, referred to as notice A)". When the effect display that is changed less frequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A, when the effect display changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A than when the effect display is changed by the notice A is changed. May or may not be configured so that a big hit can be easily made.

In FIG. 75 (A3-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. This treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 75 (A4-1), the display mode of the treasure box icon I1 changes. That is, the change animation is displayed, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, which is clearer than before the smoke image appeared. It becomes difficult to see. When an icon other than the navigation character YM or the like is displayed, the smoke image may cover part or all of the display of the icon or the like other than the navigation character YM from the front side. In addition, the treasure chest may not be opened. Furthermore, another notice may be given even if the treasure box is opened. In FIG. 75 (A 5-1), the smoke image disappears and the display mode of the navigation character YM changes. That is, the dark blue (default color) kimono worn by the navi character YM has changed to a red kimono. The change of the kimono of the navi character YM into a red kimono may suggest that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change. It may be determined that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes at the time when the treasure box icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a gold kimono or a rainbow kimono. It may also blink white, change to blue, or change to green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change corresponding to the color of the hold icon and/or the variable icon (for example, when green hold is displayed in hold 2, the navigation character YM is displayed in green). Change into a kimono). Here, in the case where the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variable icon and/or the hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon and/or the variable icon is changed in multiple ways, it is first consumed. May be configured so that the color of the hold icon or the variable icon that corresponds to the color of the navi character may correspond to the color of the hold icon that will be consumed later, and the color of the navi character, The color with high jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, and the color with low jackpot expectation may be displayed preferentially, regardless of the color of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon itself. May be displayed with a high pending or floating icon color, or with a low pending or floating icon color with a low jackpot expectation regardless of the color of the pending or floating icon itself. The colors of the pending icon and/or the variable icon that are being displayed may all be reflected in the color of the navigation character, and the color of the navigation character is displayed randomly from the colors of the pending icon and/or the varying icon that are changing. May be done. Further, next to the navigation character YM whose display mode has been changed, the icon I1 of the treasure box with the lid open is still displayed. The icon I1 of the treasure box may disappear at the same time as the smoke image appears, or may disappear together with the smoke image. The icon I1 of the treasure box disappears at the timing of FIG. 75 (a6-1), and only the navi character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative pattern continues to be displayed at high speed.

In FIG. 75 (7), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is displayed in swing (temporary stop) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In addition, in the second decorative pattern, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative patterns continue to be displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 75 (8), the background screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 has been developed into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect), the background screen of the wilderness has changed to the background screen of the wilderness, and the temporarily stopped left symbol is the decorative pattern display device. Moving to the upper left of 208, the right pattern which is also temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the background screen h of the wilderness, a duel scene is displayed in which the main character, Tonosama, and the enemy swordsman face each other. In addition, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS have disappeared, and the first hold icon h11 has also disappeared. Although the height of the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0′ is displayed and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on it. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navi character YM of a lord wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. During the super reach effect, the entire hold frame UI may be hidden. That is, the pedestal hs0′ in the variable icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS may also be hidden. Further, during the super reach effect, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be hidden. Further, during the super reach effect, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be hidden. Further, during the super reach effect, all of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 are hidden, and the hold frame UI (left base icon bIl, four stages hs1 to hs4, and pedestal hs0 (hs0')) is displayed. , Right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or conversely, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may all be displayed and the hold frame UI may be hidden.

In FIG. 75(a9), the navi character YM of the lord who had been standing facing the front until then turns to the variation icon h0 and changes into a pose in which the sword is pulled out and is standing. In FIG. 75(A10), the sword of the lord's navigation character YM oscillates, and in FIG. 75(A11), the change icon h0 that was white until then changes to red. As described above, the variable icon in the red display mode has a considerably high expectation of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variable display. In FIG. 75(A12), the lord's navigation character YM has returned to the posture of standing in front. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A12) is still in the display mode of the red kimono, but may return to the default display mode (display mode of the dark blue kimono).

In FIG. 75 (A13), although not shown, the button effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the gauge decreases as the operation valid period starts. After that, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, a cut-in image of the lord is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and a notice effect is given to inform that the reliability of the big hit is high. The lord's cut-in image overlaps the animation display of the duel scene, and it is considered difficult to visually recognize it compared to the case where the lord's cut-in image is not displayed. The cut-in image of the lord may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be one that is done.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208, the cut-in image of the lord is erased, the animation display of the duel scene continues, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the button production for the second time after developing to super reach. Is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

In the remaining time display meter, the gauge decreases as the operation valid period starts. It should be noted that the operation valid period for the second button effect after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period for the first button effect after developing to super reach. In this case, the operation reaches super reach. After that, the speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect decreases may be faster than the speed in which the gauge in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect decreases after developing to super reach. Also, the operation valid period in the first button performance after developing to super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the second button performance after developing to super reach, or after developing to super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development to the super reach may have the same length.

When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large-scale behavior accessory shown in FIG. 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left pattern and the right pattern of the effect image and the first decorative pattern are respectively overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object. It is considered to be difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Note that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. The effect in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period elapses without the operation. In addition, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd is performed. In addition, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Gd are performed, the first large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral goods 224Ga to the fourth after the effect images are displayed. The operation of the large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, the effect image may be displayed after the operations of the first large-scale behavior auditor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditor 224Gd are started, or the effect image may be displayed. And the operation of the first large-scale behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, even if the effect display that causes the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd to operate is not performed and is lost. It is also possible to display the revival effect and perform the effect display that is a big hit after the effect display that causes a loss is performed. It should be noted that, when the effect in which the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate is started, the displayed variation icon h0 is hidden, but may be continuously displayed.

After that, the thousand-box box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14(a) moves and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. .. Further, thereafter, the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operations of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are not limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-box action product 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not conducted.

After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, the thousand box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd start moving toward the respective initial positions. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also restarted.

Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 75 (A14-1). In FIG. 75 (A14-1), the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slash each other is displayed.

The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 75(a9) to (a12) corresponds to an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “change effect”) that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0. This change effect can be viewed as a part of the super reach effect, but can also be viewed as an effect different from the super reach effect that is started when the super reach effect is started. As the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, at the start of the symbol change, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, and when the prize is given to the special figure starting port (pending) When increasing), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, when a certain production is successful, at the first stop of the first decorative symbol, at the time of temporary stop or continuation (at the start of re-fluctuation) in the pseudo continuous production, at the start of the reach state. , The start of super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, as the start timing of the change effect, all of the above-listed ones may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

Also, the timing of the change icon h0 changes, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, at the start of the pattern change, when the change icon h0 has been moved, and the special symbol start opening is awarded. At the time of increase (holding increase), at the start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, at the time of certain production success, at the first stop of the first decorative pattern, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo continuous production (at the time of re-variation start), reach The state start time, super reach start time, etc. can be listed. That is, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may be all of the above-listed timings. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied. Furthermore, the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes may overlap with the button effective period in the above-described button effect. It should be noted that the display mode of the variable icon may not be changed after a certain period of time during the super reach effect. The super reach production described here is also a competition production, including a button production, and is a kind of so-called final judge production in which either the main character or the enemy wins. The display mode of the variable icon may not be changed after the result of the final judge effect is displayed. In addition, when an animation for changing the display mode of the variable icon is performed by the navigation character YM, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed without fail, or there may be a failure. May be. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the variable icon h0, and a case where the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed (successful) and a case where it is not changed (failed). There may be

In addition, the change animation of the variable icon by the navigation character YM may not be performed in some cases. In that case, at the end of the super reach effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative pattern is displayed are switched by the wipe. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode (display mode of a dark blue kimono) after being switched by the wipe, and the navigation character YM may be used as a look-ahead notice of the next symbol variable display. The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

In FIG. 75 (A15-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman has fallen down and the main character, Tono, has won is displayed, and the tongue's navigation character YM is also in a winning pose. However, the middle pattern is not displayed yet, and the middle pattern of "decoration 7" is displayed in the same figure (A16-1), but the red variable icon h0 is still displayed, and the second decoration The symbols are also being displayed in a variable manner. Moreover, at the stage of the same figure (A16-1), each of the first decorative symbols (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation). In addition, in FIG. 75 (A15-1), an animation for a big hit by the hero of the protagonist may be executed.

Here, up to FIG. 75 (A15-1) before the middle pattern is displayed, it can be seen as a super reach effect, but the middle pattern is displayed and it seems that the victory has been finalized (A16-1). ) Can be seen as a super reach production, or can be further advanced and seen as a super reach production until just before the stop display is performed. Further, as described above, the super reach effect here corresponds to an example of the final judge effect, and until the result of the final judge effect is finalized (for example, immediately before the stop display is performed), the super reach effect is being executed. Good. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the swing fluctuation is started with the combination of the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". It should be noted that the second decorative design is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left design, the middle design, and the right design. The background here may be a non-displayed background image, a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or the same background image as before the super reach is performed. In addition, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the special icon 1 hold icon may be displayed. Although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display mode of special figure A. Although the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where it has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, so it is determined that the symbol is confirmed to be stopped. Since it is not, the swing fluctuation continues in the first decorative design, and the second decorative design and the fourth design display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively, and On the four-symbol display device, the display is performed in a mode that the symbol has stopped.

After that, when the big hit game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the big hit start effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208.

During the super reach, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect, which is the final judge effect, is started, a part or all of the hold frame UI may be hidden or disappeared. For example, the right base icon bIr has been displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappeared when the final judge effect is started. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the variable icon h0 may be hidden or disappeared, or the navigation character YM may be hidden or disappeared. Both of the characters YM may be hidden or disappear. Further, when the hold icon is displayed until then, the hold icon may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Further, other icons and mini-characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started, if they have been displayed until then.

As shown in FIG. 75(a2-1) instead of FIG. 75(a2-1), a balloon display such as "change!?" may be added to the lord's navigation character YM, or in the same figure(a-2). As shown in 2-3), a balloon display such as "preparing for change" may be added. Thereafter, returning to FIG. 75 (A3-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed. The balloon display of the navigation character YM corresponds to the notice effect (precursor effect) of the start of the change notice display. That is, it is a notice indicating that the navigation character itself may change, such as “change!?”, or the navigation character is about to change (“change preparing” is displayed, such as “preparing change”) It may be a notice indicating that the change will always occur within the specified fluctuation or after the fluctuation in which “Preparing for change” is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (A3-1) instead of FIG. 75 (A3-1), while the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, In some cases, the carpet icon I2 appears and the treasure chest icon I1 rides on the carpet icon I2 and flies away. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change and corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75(A4-2) instead of FIG. 75(A4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the manner and easiness of change of the navigation character YM may be announced in advance. In the case of FIG. 75 (A4-2), it is previously announced that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono of the same color as smoke. In addition, depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the degree of expectation of the change or the big hit in the hold may be announced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (A 5-1) instead of FIG. 75 (A 5-2), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM may not change but the navigation character YM itself may become large. .. As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, a pose) in addition to the change in color. The color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A 5-2) may be dark blue (default color) or may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 75 (A5-2) overlaps with a part of the treasure box icon I1 from the front side. In addition, a part of the navigation character YM may overlap the entire treasure box icon I1 from the front side. Alternatively, at least part of the treasure box icon I1 may overlap with at least part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

Further, as a probability of changing the variation icon h0, that is, a degree of expectation of a big hit, a larger display mode with a default color is higher than a smaller display mode with a default color, and a smaller display mode with a red color, The display size in red and larger may be higher. Further, as far as the size and the color are concerned, the color may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in red and smaller may be higher than the display mode in which the default color is large. Alternatively, on the contrary, the size may be prioritized, and for example, the display mode in which the default color is large may be higher than the display mode in which the red color is small. Further, the size (display size) of the navigation character YM may be large or small, and may be a plurality of sizes such as an intermediate size.

When the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a red kimono, the change icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in the display mode wearing a gold kimono, the change icon h0 changes to gold and the rainbow. In the case of a display mode in which a colored kimono is worn, the change icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the variation icon h0 may easily change to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose expectation of a big hit is red or more. That is, if the change of the change icon h0 is successful, it may be determined that the color changes to red or more, or that the color itself changes to red or more. However, even when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the expectation of a big hit may change to a color below red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Further, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, which is a premier color, the color of the variable icon h0 may also be changed to rainbow. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, it means that the direct display of the navigation character YM is a direct big hit, and the navigation character YM is in another color. When the display mode of wearing a kimono (for example, red) is changed, if the display mode of the variable icon changes, it is easy for the player to hit the big jackpot. It can be reported indirectly.

In addition, the navigation character YM displays the change icon h0 even when the display mode has not changed.
May be changed. Alternatively, the change icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode changes. Furthermore, the character of the main character is a so-called constantly displayed character, but the navigation character YM that changes the variable icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the variable icon h0 is changed. It may also be a character that is displayed only when giving a notice. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as the character that changes the variable icon h0, or only the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization is the variable icon. You may make it usable as a character which changes h0.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 75.

75(A6-1), FIG. 76(A6-2-1) to FIG. 75(A6-2-3), and then returning to FIG. The navigation character YM may change a plurality of times until the icon I1 of the treasure box, which is, is hidden. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, whereas the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-2-2) is a gold kimono. Note that the treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and may be newly displayed. Further, the change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of changes. In this case, the treasure chest icon I1 repeats opening and closing.

Further, following FIG. 75 (A 6-1), the change animation as shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-1) to FIG. 76 (A 6-3-2) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice (here, the UFO icon UFI) different from the change notice display. In the same figure (6-3-3a) continuing from FIG. 76 (6-3-2), a gold beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 76 (A 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode wearing a gold kimono. Alternatively, in the same figure (6-3-3b) continuing from FIG. 76 (6-3-2), a gray beam from the incoming UFO icon UFI is directed toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM is illuminated and is enlarged while wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. 76 (6-3-4b).

Although the promotion has been described here, there may be a case where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is irradiated (so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode, There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn, or a case in which the size is reduced (when demoted).

Further, FIG. 76 (A14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 75 (A14-1) which is a scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slash each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, "decoration 6" different from the left and right symbols ("decoration 7") is displayed large (swing display), and in the same figure (14-2-2), the left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol All the decorative symbols of the design are once displayed lighter than the normal darkness. Also, in the figure, a scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-3), all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed again in the normal darkness, and in the same figure (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. Then, the production scene (production display) of the super reach is switched to the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach production shown in FIG. 75 (A1) and the like). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 76 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is temporarily changed to a wipe display of the same color with no pattern. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-6), the background is returned to the normal background by wiping out and the navigation character YM is displayed.
The display mode of is also returned to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may be returned to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing of FIG. 76 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 76 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect is finished, and the decorative pattern display device 208 swayingly displays “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of the losses. There is. Further, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are also displayed. The variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 76 (A 14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may be returned to the default display mode, or even if the variable icon h0 itself is deleted. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be the same as the display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display that returns from the state where the display state of the navigation character changes to the default state cannot be visually recognized because the navigation character is hidden, but the display that returns from the state where the display state of the navigation character changes to the default state May be visible. (For example, a display in which the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed is switched to a default state, an animation display in which the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed is returned to the default state, and the like are included.)
At the time of wipeout (FIG. 76 (A 14-2-6) to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-7)), the variable icon h0 and/or the navigation character YM are displayed, but not displayed. In some cases, the revival effect may be more easily performed when it is displayed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed.

Furthermore, in FIG. 76 (A 14-2-1) to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-3), although a part of the holding frame UI (the pedestal hs0′ and the right base icon bIr) is displayed, the holding frame is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only a part of the UI may be hidden. Further, the variable icon h0 may be hidden or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed until then, the hold icon may also be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may be hidden if they have been displayed so far.

77 is a diagram showing another modification of the example shown in FIG.

77 (A 16-2-1) to FIG. 77 (A 16-2-2) may be displayed subsequent to FIG. 75 (A 16-1). That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-2), the entire screen is beginning to become thin. After this, the screen may disappear once in the re-lottery effect, and the screen (screen of Victory of victory) shown in FIG. 77 (A 16-2-1) may be displayed again, or FIG. 75 (A 14-2-3). ) Screen (screen of defeat of lord) may be displayed, or a combination of decorative patterns (in the case of a combination of big hits or a loss of a normal pattern) in a normal background as shown in the same figure (a 16-2-3). A screen may be displayed in which (there may be a combination) is shaken.

Further, even on the screen that is re-displayed, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed, and if the display mode of the navigation character YM or/and the variable icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot determination (for example, a probability change A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be confirmed. Alternatively, if the display mode has not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not confirmed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be confirmed, or the display mode is a golden or iridescent premium. , The advantageous jackpot may be definite.

77 (I1) to FIG. 77 (I12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations and also functions as a prefetching notice.

In FIG. 77 (I1), a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

In FIG. 77 (2), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that have been lost. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 77 (I3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the next symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed.

In FIG. 77 (I4-1), a change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. In other words, the lord's navigation character YM, which had been standing upright to the front (initial posture), changes to the pose in which the sword is pulled out while facing the variable icon h0. In FIG. 77(15), the sword of the lord's navigation character YM oscillates, but in FIG. 77(6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect ends in failure. There is. In FIG. 77 (7), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that have been lost. The navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed again in the initial posture.

In FIG. 77 (B8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is restarted. Even when the third symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 77 (B9), the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is restarted. In FIG. 77 (11), the change icon h0 that was white until then has changed to red, and the normal notice has started. In FIG. 12B, the navigation character YM has returned to the initial posture with the display mode wearing a red kimono. After that, although not shown in the drawing, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display currently performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 77 (YES 4-1), in FIG. 77 (YES 4-2-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the symbol variable display. In the same figure (I 4-2-2), the change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be an animation, or the display position may be momentarily switched. Further, when the navigation character YM goes out of the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, a business trip is displayed on the signboard at a position (initial position) where the navigation character YM was displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The icon display described as “medium”) may be displayed.

There may be a case where the change effect on the hold icon by the navigation character YM fails (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it always succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Good. Also, the change effect may be performed only on the hold icon to be read ahead. For example, only when the number of holdings is 1, the first holding icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of holding icons (which may include a variable icon) may be targeted. Furthermore, the change effect on the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times until the display mode of the prefetch target hold changes (until it succeeds), or may not be performed again if it fails once. ..

Further, the change effect may be performed again for the hold icon whose display mode has once changed due to the change effect. This is not limited to the hold icon, and the same applies to the variable icon h0.

Furthermore, in the change effect for the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM may be moved from the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not go out of the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the holding frame UI, or may be movable outside the holding frame UI.

In this example, the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the next change after the change in which the color of the navigation character YM is red to the change of the prefetch target hold. There may be a change in which no change animation is performed between the change following the change in which the color of the navigation character YM is red and the change in the prefetch target. Further, a change animation may be performed even when the navigation character YM changes to red.

FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of the change effect of the hold icon and the change effect of the variable icon by the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 78 (1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

In FIG. 78 (U2), the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) appears outside the holding frame UI and approaches the holding frame UI. The effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 78 (v3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second hold icon h12, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed as shown in FIG. 78 (v4). , The default display mode is changed to a white flashing display mode. That is, promotion production has succeeded. There are multiple types of effect icons, and the success probability of promotion effect may change depending on the effect icon that appears. For example, when the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be surely successful, and when the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. When the third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 78 (v 4), the UFO icon UFI has disappeared. In FIG. 78 (v 5), the three decorative symbols are in a temporary stop state. In FIG. 78 (6), the variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (e7), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In FIG. 78 (e8), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture.

In FIG. 78 (v 9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a bow-drawing pose, and promotion of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 78(u10), an arrow is fired, the arrow flies over the variation icon h0, and in FIG. 78(u11), the arrow hits the first hold icon h11 which is a white blinking display mode, In FIG. 12C, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from white blinking to blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Note that the promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change) or, conversely, may always succeed (change the display mode of the hold icon). Further, only when the number of holdings is one, the first holding icon h11 may be targeted, or a plurality of holding icons (which may include variable icons) may be targeted. Furthermore, the promotion effect may be performed any number of times until the display mode changes (until it succeeds) with respect to the prefetch target suspension, or may not be performed again after one failure. Moreover, you may perform promotion production again with respect to the hold icon which the display mode changed once by promotion production. The promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect that is displayed only for one of the hold icons even if a plurality of hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the number of hold decreases. However, the promotion effect is performed by the navigation character only for the hold icon A.), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and/or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. .. In FIG. 78 (13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture, and in FIG. 78 (14), the variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the missing decorative symbols in the stopped state. Has been done. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 78 (15), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the same FIG. (U16), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture. The change icon h0 is an icon that has changed from the first hold icon h11 that has changed to the blue display mode in the promotion effect, and is also displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the blue display mode.

In FIG. 78 (u17), the change icon display treasure box icon I1 appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 78 (u17) the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box is displayed. Icon I1 of remains. In FIG. 78 (v 19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside. The smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM. Is clearly harder to see than before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 78 (e 20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. At the timing of FIG. 78 (e 21), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and only the navi character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigation character YM represents the reliability (expectation) of the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. Alternatively, it may represent the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the variable icon. Further, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, it may indicate the easiness of change (promotion) of the display mode of the hold icon.

In FIG. 78 (C23), a reach state is entered, and in FIG. 78 (C24), a super reach effect is developed. When developing to the super reach effect, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS disappear, and when the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. Also, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 78 (v), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the navi character YM of the lord wearing a red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is sinking, the variable icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 78 (25) during super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the variable icon h0 in a blue display mode is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0'. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 75. Further, both the pedestal hs0' and the variation icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (e 27-1), as a continuation of the super reach effect, a duel scene in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed on the background screen h of the wilderness. .. Again, both the pedestal hs0' and the variation icon h0 are displayed.

79 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 78 and a modified example.

In FIG. 79 (e 29), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed lighter than the normal darkness, and the scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. Also here, both the pedestal hs0' and the variation icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (v30), the super reach effect ends, the display returns to the normal background, and the second decorative pattern and the second hold number display, the pedestal hs0′ and the variable icon h0 are displayed. There is. In FIG. 79 (u 31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol is restored, and the pedestal that has been sunk until now begins to rise with the fluctuation icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (C32), the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a shaking manner, and the holding frame UI is also redisplayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

Also, instead of FIG. 78 (v 20-1), in FIG. 79 (v 20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode wearing a premier iridescent kimono. In this case, since the display mode of the navigation character YM is iridescent regardless of the display mode (color) of the variable icon h0, the big hit is confirmed. The display mode of the variable icon may be changed to a display mode of red or more, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color. When the navigation character YM functions as a pre-reading notice, the display mode of the pre-reading target hold icon may be changed to a display mode of red or more, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

Also, instead of FIG. 78 (v 27-1), in FIG. 79 (v 27-2), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the navigation mode of the display mode wearing a red kimono is further used. The character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may promote its own display mode or change the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

Here, the notice by the effect icon (here, the UFO icon UFI) and/or the change notice display (here, the treasure box icon I1) is displayed before one decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol) is temporarily stopped. It is configured such that, after one decorative design is temporarily stopped, the effect icon and/or the change notice display is not used to give a notice, but one decorative design is temporarily stopped. The effect icon and/or the change notice display may be displayed after that. Although it is described as one decorative design, it may be a plurality of decorative designs or all decorative designs. Further, while the design (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the effect icon and/or the change notice display does not give a notice, but it may be done.

79(e1) to FIG. 79(e4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode.

In FIG. 79(e1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 79 (e2), the pose of the navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 79 (e3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, which makes it difficult to see. In the same figure (e4-1), the display mode changes to wearing a red kimono. ing.

Further, in FIG. 79 (e 3-1) instead of FIG. 79 (e 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and thereafter, the navigation character YM is in a red kimono. Changes to the display mode wearing. In this way, the change animation itself may give a notice of the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for announcing that the display mode will be changed to red or more if the change of the navigation character is successful, and it is determined that the display mode is changed to red or more. It may be a notice display.

Further, in place of FIG. 79 (e 3-1), in the same figure (e 3-3), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, and the pattern variation display currently being performed, or After that, a big hit is confirmed (may be a big hit rich) in the symbol variation display started. In this way, the change animation itself may give the advance notice or the advance notice. It should be noted that the rainbow-colored smoke image may be a notification that the change to the rainbow-colored display mode will be made if the change of the navigation character is successful. In this case, even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed, It is not necessary that the pattern variation in which the smoke image of the color is displayed and/or the pending state is a big hit determination (may be a big hit density).

Further, in FIG. 79 (e 4-2) instead of FIG. 79 (e 4-1), the navi character is changed to another navi character. Here, it has been changed to a princess navigation character. The type of changing character may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above, or may be only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

Further, in FIG. 79 (e 4-2) instead of FIG. 79 (e 4-2), the navi character is changed to a navi character (for example, a bancho character) that cannot be selected by the player. It should be noted that the bancho navi character may be configured such that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the change icon is easier to perform than the nav character YM, or the change and/or hold of the symbol in which the navi character has changed. It may be configured to have a high expectation of a big hit.

It should be noted that the navigation character of Hime (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the variation icon may be performed more easily than the navigation character YM, and the variation of the symbol in which the navigation character has changed and It may be configured to have a high expectation of a big hit in the hold, or configured to easily (or inevitably) generate a notice and/or super reach effect that a princess (bancho) appears. It may be.

When the navigation character YM is changed to another navigation character, the navigation character YM may be changed to only a navigation character that the player can select, and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character. It may be configured, and there may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and a case where the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player selects the navigation character that is selectable by the player. The non-navi character may be configured such that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the change icon is more likely to be performed, and the expectation of a change in the pattern in which the navigation character changes and/or a big hit in the hold is higher. It may be configured as follows. On the contrary, in both cases where the player is changed to the selectable navigation character and when the player is changed to the non-selectable navigation character, the player plays the game more than the non-selectable navigation character. The navigation character that can be selected by the person may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the change icon can be performed more easily, and the change of the navigation character and/or the expectation of a big hit in the hold state It may be configured to be highly flexible.

Further, instead of FIG. 79 (e 4-1), in FIG. 79 (e 4-4), the character does not change, and the change effect of the character itself fails.

In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes the display mode of the navigation character YM by itself, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled. The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be announced. For example, when the red treasure box icon I1 appears, it may be determined that the navigation character YM changes to red or a display mode of red or more.

Further, depending on the color of the icon I1 of the treasure box, the expectation level of the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display or in the symbol variation display started thereafter may be announced. That is, the normal notice or the prefetch notice may be given depending on the color of the treasure box icon I1.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (1). The navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 80 (1) is the default display mode. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

In FIG. 80 (2), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third holding icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 80 (4), the variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed in the initial posture. The background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (4).

In FIG. 80 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. On the decorative design display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative design has started, and the background of the sea is still displayed.

In FIG. 80 (6), a background change notice, which is a type of prefetch notice, is started. The target of the background change notice here (pre-reading target suspension) is the suspension increased at the timing of FIG. 80 (2) (second suspension at this timing). In the background change notice, a sliding door image appears from the left and right, and the entire sliding screen becomes a sliding door image due to the animation in which the sliding door is closed (see FIG. 80 (7)). Therefore, the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding doors and are invisible. Instead of the fusuma image, an image that overlaps the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and a part of the navigation character YM from the front side may appear. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be rendered such that no images overlap.

The background change notice may be started at the time of winning the pre-reading target suspension (timing of FIG. 80 (2)). In this example, the change is started during the next change of the winning change, but the change is not limited to the next change and may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension is finished. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the variation of the prefetch target suspension.

In the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door) may indicate the expectation of the jackpot of the prefetch target, or if the navigation character YM of the same color as the sliding door appears. , Functions as an advance notice that the navigation character YM changes, and corresponds to a change advance notice display. It may also function as a notice of the background itself, such as the case where the color of the fusuma is green and the background of the mountain changes. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 80(8), the sliding doors are opened, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM start to be seen. In FIG. 80(8), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door images are Disappeared. Due to the background change notice, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed to the night background. In addition, the navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the lord's character has changed to a robot character. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

In FIG. 80 (11), the reach state is entered. In addition, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode between FIG. 80 (9-1) and FIG. 80 (11). Note that the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change from the default display mode to a red display mode when the reach state is entered. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, all hold icons h11 and h12 have disappeared. After that, it developed into super reach production, and changed to the background of the super reach production (here, the background of the wilderness). On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (13), the scene where the lord is defeated is displayed in the background of the wilderness. In addition, the navigation character YM of the robot overlaps with the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

In FIG. 80 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 80 (15), in the wipe display here, neither the variable icon h0 nor the navigation character YM disappears, and further, the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display disappear, and the model title is displayed in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 80 (16), the wipeout is performed and the background returns to the background of the night, and the navigation character YM is also beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 80 (17), the wipe effect is finished, and the decorative pattern display device 208 sways and displays the combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”. Further, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the variable icon h0 in the red display mode and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed again.

In FIG. 80 (eighteen), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of lost characters.

After that, the first hold is exhausted, and after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variable display is started as shown in FIG. 80 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol has been started, and the symbol variation of the prefetch target suspension has ended, but the background remains the night background.

In FIG. 80 (21), the background change notice is restarted, the sliding door image appears from the left and right, and the sliding door is closed again, so that the entire display screen becomes a sliding door image (FIG. 80 (22)). reference). In FIG. 80 (23), the sliding doors are opened, and the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM start to be seen. In the same drawing (24), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door images are Disappeared. As shown in FIG. 80 (24), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has returned to the background of the sea, and the navigation character YM has also returned to the lord's character.

In addition, instead of FIG. 80 (9-1), in FIG. 80 (9-2), the display mode of the navigation character YM of the robot is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) of the background-dependent character may also change according to the reliability of the big hit. Alternatively, it may have changed originally.

It should be noted that the navigation character YM may change depending on the effect background regardless of the background of the prefetching notice. For example, when a coastal background, a castle town background, and a castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may be changed depending on each background. Note that the appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Also, when the player changes the effect mode, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. Also, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the effect background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed on the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed on the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed on the effect background A. Here, when the navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the variable icon is more easily performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. It may be configured such that the navigation character has a changed symbol variation and/or the expectation of a big hit in the hold is high (or a big hit is confirmed (may be a big hit rich)). It may be configured such that a notice that a navigation character that does not match the background appears and/or a super-reach effect occurs frequently (or always occurs).

On the contrary, the type of the navigation character YM may not change even if the background is changed, or may not change absolutely.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 81 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 81 (or 2-1), a speech balloon of a line for calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of the balloon corresponds to a notice made by the currently displayed navigator character YM that another character (grandpa or princess) will be displayed. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), in addition to the lord's navigation character YM, the display of the princess navigation character YM1 is added, and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or may be a mode in which the character appears momentarily. In the case of an animation display, the smoke image may be an animation in which the character is not initially visible, or may be an animation that appears by walking from the right end of the screen. This princess navigation character YM1 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 81 (or 4), the variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. Both the default navigator character YM and the princess navigator character YM1, which are default display modes, are displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 81 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 are still displayed. In this way, the display of the plurality of navigation characters may span multiple variations. However, in the symbol variable display in which the navigation character YM1 has appeared, the navigation character YM1 that has appeared may disappear. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigation character (here, the lord's navigation character YM) is displayed over a plurality of variations.

In FIG. 81 (or 5), this time, a balloon of a line that calls a grandfather is additionally displayed on the two navigation characters YM and YM1, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 6-1), In addition to the two navigation characters YM and YM1, the display of the grandpa navigation character YM2 is added, and the grandpa is successfully called. In other words, this means that all three have been completed. In this production, the more the navigation characters gather, the higher the probability that the variation icon h0 will change, the higher the probability that the variation icon h0 will change to a premier color or a color close to the premier, and the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variation. It may become higher or the expectation of a big hit after the next change may be higher. In addition, when all three people are gathered, the iridescent color of the premiere or the big hit may be decided. In FIG. 81 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in a reach state in a state where all three persons are gathered, and “decoration 7” is shaken and displayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 2-1), in FIG. 81 (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given. That is, in FIG. 81 (or 2-1), the dialogue of the navigation character YM is a notice, but in this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette notice is started. .. The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the notice of the appearance of another navigation character, or may be another notice (such as a notice of a pending change). In FIG. 81 (or 2-2), the princess character is displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After that, the navigator character YM1 of the princess may appear, but there may be a case where no navigator character appears (a so-called failure), or a different navigator character (for example, the grandpa navigator character YM2). It may appear in some cases. The roulette display icon RI is configured so that the characters of the characters that have already appeared are not displayed, but the characters of the characters that have already appeared may appear. In that case, a plurality of the same characters may be displayed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, when the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, the navigation character of the princess is displayed. Depending on the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI, three characters may be promoted to the characters that have already appeared (for example, the princess character is 3 on the roulette display icon RI). When the stop is displayed, the princess appears at the first time, the princess's kimono changes to red at the second time, and the princess's kimono changes to gold at the third time.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-2), no navigation character may appear and the operation may fail.

Also, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), in FIG. 81 (or 3-3), the old navigation character YM2 appears instead of the princess navigation character YM1. In this way, the order of appearance is not fixed, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigation characters displayed next to each other. For example, in FIG. 81 (or 3-1), the navigator character YM of the lord thought that the navigator character YM1 of the princess came, but the navigator character YM2 of the grandpa came and an astonished animation is displayed. The grandfather may come before the princess in the premiere production. Depending on the order in which the characters appear, the changing probability of the change icon h0 changes, the probability of changing the color to a premier or a color close to the premier changes, the expectation of a big hit in the change, or a big hit after the next change. The expectations may change, or they may not be affected at all.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), the display position may be previously determined by the character, as shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1). That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-1), the lord's navigation character YM is displayed at the left end, and the princess navigation character YM1 is displayed with one person left. Then, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-4-3), a grand navigation character YM2 is displayed at a position separated by one person. Thus, even if the order of display positions (lord, grandfather, princess) is fixed, the order may be broken (lord, princess, grandfather). In this case, the premiere effect It may be (a big hit confirmation effect) or a big hit.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 3-1), as shown in the same figure (or 3-5-1), when the number of navigation characters increases, the increase is displayed in a character display (here, “Hime Stock” )), or by voice from a speaker, or by blinking a lamp or the like. In addition, in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-3), the fact that all members have gathered is notified by a character display. In addition, when all the members succeed, the character display is always "All members", but a different character display (for example, "Gekiatsu" or "All members reach") is displayed. In this case, it may be a premiere effect (big hit confirmation effect), a big hit rich, or a specific reach mode may be started without fail. Also here, together with the notification of the character display, or instead of the notification of the character display, the notification may be performed by voice from a speaker, or the notification may be performed by blinking a lamp or the like.

Further, instead of FIG. 81 (or 6-1), as shown in FIG. 81 (or 6-2), characters other than the lord, princess, and grandpa (here, a haniwa character YM3 simulating a cactus) are increased. In the case of winning, it may be a premiere effect (a big hit confirmation effect) or a big hit.

In addition, when "Grandpa" is displayed even though "Hime" is specified and called, it may be a premiere effect (big hit confirmation effect) or a big hit, and "Hime" is called. If the frequency of displaying the "grandpa" is higher than that of the old character, when the called character ("hime") appears, the jackpot may be concentrated (or the jackpot is confirmed). Further, depending on the display mode of the navigation character (lord in this example) that calls another navigation character, the other navigation character may easily appear (stock) or may be difficult to appear (stock). In addition, depending on the type of the navigation character that calls another navigation character, the other navigation character may easily appear (stock) or may be difficult to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for another navi character to appear (stock) when the navi character of the princess calls it than the navi character of the lord. The characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be navigation characters of the same type. For example, a plurality of navigator characters YM of the lord may be displayed, or may be described as lord*3. In addition, even the same type of navigation characters may have different display modes (color, shape, pose, size). Furthermore, the effect performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, when an effect in which the character is emitted from the effect icon display area DIS is performed, the pseudo-relation effect starts when the lord is released, the hold is promoted when the princess is released, and the timer advance notice starts when the grandpa is released. .. Also, a plurality of characters may be released. Furthermore, when a plurality of characters are released at the same time, an effect different from the release of a single character may be performed. For example, when the lord and the princess are released at the same time, a pseudo continuous production that is hotter than the lord alone may be started.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a modification or the like shown in FIG. 81.

In FIG. 82 (Ki), the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, and to the right of that, the princess navigation character YM1 in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. ing. Further, on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1, a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display is displayed. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

In FIG. 82 (ki 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and only the navigator character YM1 of the princess among the navi character YM of the lord and the navi character YM1 of the princess has smoke. It is wrapped in an image. That is, the smoke image does not reach the lord's navigation character YM. In FIG. 82 (ki 4), the smoke image disappears, and the princess navigation character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In FIG. 82 (Ki 5), the treasure chest icon I1 has disappeared.

In FIG. 82 (ki 2-1) instead of FIG. 82 (ki 2-1), the pose of the lord's navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 82 (KI 2-2-2), the lord's navigation character YM makes a smoke image appear, and only the princess' navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 82 (KI 2-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the princess navigation character YM1 changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Moreover, the lord's navigation character YM has returned to the initial posture.

In FIG. 82 (KI 3-1) instead of FIG. 82 (KI 3-1), the smoke image appearing from the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed for both the lord's navigation character YM and the princess navigation character YM1. It wraps the navigation character. Then, in FIG. 82 (KI 3-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and both the navi character YM of the lord and the navigation character YM1 of the princess are changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono. That is, the display mode of both of them has changed. Here, both of them change to the same color, but they may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both of the smoke images may be wrapped, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, princess) may be promoted and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Also, both navigation characters may be promoted. In that case, one of the characters (for example, princess) may be hotter than the other character (for example, Yoshimune) may be changed, and the expectation of the big hit may be the same. Also, it may be hotter when both characters change than when one character changes. Also, it may be hotter that one character changes than both characters change depending on the change mode. For example, a combination of the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode and the princess's navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the lord's navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono and also the red mode With the combination of the princess navi character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Further, both characters may be changed without fail. In that case, the color may be changed to the same color or may be changed to a different color. Further, the meaning of the changed character may change depending on the changing character. For example, in the case of a navi character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the fluctuation is hot, and in the case of a navi character YM1 in a display mode wearing a red kimono, it is easy to develop into super reach. Good. Also, if it is the navi character YM of the lord in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the big hit is confirmed, and if the navigation character YM of the princess in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono is the big hit with a certainty confirmation ( It may be an advantageous jackpot confirmation).

In this example, the navigation character YM is displayed when one navigation character is always displayed and another navigation character is newly called by the navigation character, or when a plurality of navigation characters are constantly displayed. The present embodiment can be applied to the case where one or a plurality of navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing because there is a period in which the navigation characters are not displayed.

FIG. 82 (KU1-1) to FIG. 82 (KU7) show an example of effect in which button effects are entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 82(K1-1), the navigator character YM of the lord in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a display form of a balloon and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In FIG. 82(3), the operation valid period is started, and in FIG. 82(4), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. 82(5), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. 82(6), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the lord's character is visually recognized by the effect image. It's getting harder. In FIG. 82 (ku7), the navi character is changed to a lord like a display in a red kimono.

Also in FIG. 82 (1-2-1), the navigator character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture, but the button display icon 136D is not displayed here. That is, the back button effect is being performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 82 (K 1-2-2), the chance button 136 is operated in the same figure (K 1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM has started. In this way, the display mode of the navigation character may change depending on the back button effect.

It should be noted that both the back button effect and the other button effect (with button display) may both change, the back button effect may be prioritized, and the other button effect may be prioritized. The same applies when the back buttons overlap.

Further, when the look-ahead button notice and the change button notice (normal notice) overlap, the look-ahead button notice may be prioritized, or the change button notice may be prioritized.

In addition, instead of FIG. 82 (KU2-1), in FIG. 82 (2-2), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but the position is away from the navigation character YM. The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at positions outside the effect icon display area DIS and outside the holding frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice given by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may also be changed by this different notice. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be always displayed or may be displayed before the start of the effective period.

FIG. 83 shows an example of effect in which the effect of the button holding icon is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In FIG. 83 (C-3-1), the lord's navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 83 (-3-1) is a button hold icon, and the button image 136a is displayed on the white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 here is within the period of the fluctuation. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (1-3-2a), the smoke image of the effect appears as shown in FIG. 83 (1-3-3a), and the smoke image displays the navigation image. Part or all of the character YM is hidden, making it more difficult to visually recognize it than before the smoke image appears. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 has been deleted, and the first hold icon h11 does not change (for example, change in display mode). That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is being displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. It should be noted that the navigation character and/or the button holding icon itself does not change when the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period. However, there is a possibility that the state may shift to the later-described diagram (1-3-4) via the state shown in FIG. 83 (1-3-3a).

In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (1-3-2a), as shown in (1-3-3b1) of FIG. The effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11, and the change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 83 (1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from a white circle display mode to a blue circle display mode. It should be noted that there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (eventually, a pattern that failed). In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (KU 1-3-2a), it is displayed in FIG. 83 (KU 1-3-3b2) without passing through the same figure (KU 1-3-3b1). As shown in the figure, the icon that was the button holding icon may change to a display mode of a blue circle display without a change animation.

Alternatively, as shown in (1-3-3b1) of FIG. 83, (1-3-4) of FIG. 83, although the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change and remains as a white circle, the navigation character The YM may change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. The change of the display mode of the navigation character YM here is not a change animation when it goes through FIG. 83 (1-3-3b1), but the display mode is switched instantaneously. In the case of passing through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed when the process goes through FIG. 83 (1-3-3b1). It should be noted that the change may occur immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or the change may occur slightly later. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 83 (1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 83 (1-3-4) without passing through the same figure (1-3-3b1). As described above, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

Further, even if the button holding icon is displayed, the chance button is not operated (Fig. 83 (1-3-2b1)) and the next variation is started (the variation of the first decorative symbol is still started). In the case where the variation of the second decorative symbol has not been started yet), the variation icon h0 may become the button holding icon, as shown in (1-3-2b2) in the figure. In this case, the button effect has been carried over to the next variation, and if the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 83 (1-3-2b3′). The white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed may change to the display mode of the blue circle display (success pattern). When changing, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, it may change. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, regarding the variable icon h0, the button image 136a disappears, but there is no change (for example, change in display mode) in the white circle display where the button image 136a was displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button holding icon has failed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated and the next change is started, the button hold icon may not change and the button hold icon may be changed. It may be configured to be automatically changed after the next change is started without operating the button.

Even if the button holding icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (Fig. 83 (1-3-2b1)) and the next change is started, the same figure (1-3) is displayed. -2b2'), an effect image may be applied to the variable icon h0 and a change animation may be started. In this case, the process may shift to the previous FIG. 83 (1-3-2b3') or may shift to the previous FIG. 83 (1-3-2b3).

The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 83 (-3-1) has the default display mode, but the navigation character YM has the same display mode. That is, in FIG. 83 (1-3-4), the second promotion is performed. When there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the holding icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button when the button holding icon is displayed.

Further, when eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N pieces are accumulated, the hold icons are changed to part or all of the button hold icons, and the hold icon, the variable icon, and the navigation character YM are changed according to the button operation. It may be configured to change. This is applicable even when only four hold icons are displayed.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example in which there is a period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (K1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 84 (key 2), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased, and the third holding icon h13 is additionally displayed. This third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

In FIG. 84 (key 3), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 84 (K4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 is changed to a blue display mode in response to the start of the symbol variable display. Even if the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (key 5-1), and in FIG. 84 (key 6-1) the smoke image disappears and the lord's navigation character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. YM is displayed. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 84 (key 6-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice corresponding to the prefetch target suspension (prefetch notice and/or notice of the change).

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 84 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail if there is a prefetch target suspension, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

In FIG. 84 (K7), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM in the default display mode whose display is started during the symbol variable display stopped and displayed here is still displayed in the initial posture.

Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 84 (key 9-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The navigation character YM is changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono in the display mode by the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 75 (a 4-1) (FIG. 84 (key 11)). In addition, even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change without the treasure box icon I1 appearing. That is, the change notice display may not be displayed.

In FIG. 84 (key 13), the variation of the prefetch target suspension is started, and the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is also displayed during this change. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not initially displayed, but after being displayed, it is always displayed over a plurality of variations.

Note that the navigation character YM may disappear when the change of the prefetch target suspension that is currently being performed ends. In this case, the navigation character YM may disappear between the three symbols or the temporary stop (swing display) to the stop of the symbols in the change of the decorative symbols of the prefetch target suspension, or one or two decorative symbols. May disappear after a temporary stop (first stop or second stop).

The navigation character YM may disappear at the timing of the stop display in FIG. 84 (key 7) and may not be displayed across the fluctuation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ke 5-1) instead of FIG. 84 (Ke 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the effect icon display area DIS, but the hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. The navigation character YM may be displayed in a plurality of places, and may be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Furthermore, the navigation character YM may execute different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variable icon may be different depending on the display position, and thus the reliability of the big hit may be different. Note that the location where the navigation character YM is displayed may be only one display area (for example, the effect icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

Further, as shown in (5-3) of FIG. 84 instead of (5-1) of FIG. 84, the navigation character YM can move in the hold icon display area HIS (in the left base icon bIl). Then, when the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 84 (KE 5-1), as shown in FIG. 84 (KE 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

The navigation character may perform animation to move a plurality of display areas (for example, effect icon display area DIS, hold icon display area HIS, variable icon display area CIS, etc.).

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Further, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes.

After that, the hold digestion continues, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (key 6-2-3a), the combination of the lost decorative patterns is displayed in a shaking state without the hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-4), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

In FIG. 85 (K 6-2-6), in the state where there is no hold, there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not yet started varying , The second decorative pattern has begun to change. At this point, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-7), an increase animation of the hold icon representing the already-held hold (holding of the changed pattern display started) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (key 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and the erasing animation of the navigation character YM has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. There is. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. Note that, in reality, FIGS. 85 (ke 6-2-6) to FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-8) are the events for a moment, but the deletion animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of symbol variable display from the state where there is no hold. The disappearance timing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. May be after the start of. When the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

Further, instead of FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-3a), as shown in FIG. 85 (ke 6-2-3b1), a reach state may be entered, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. It may be configured such that it does not change in some cases, or conversely, it may change during the reach state. Also, the display mode of the variable icon may be configured not to change during the reach state by the navigation character YM, or conversely, may change during the reach state.

In FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-3b2), the super reach production is developed, and in the same figure (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which the lord and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. In this FIG. 85 (key 6-2-3b3) also, the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

Note that the navigation character YM may be configured such that the display mode may be promoted when the reach reaches the super reach, and conversely, the display mode may not be promoted when the reach reaches the normal reach. May be. On the contrary, even in the normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a pre-reading notice after the next change. Further, when the "navi character promotion" symbol is stopped in the middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Further, the display mode may be promoted as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

Then, in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect and the like described with reference to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 6-2-3b5), "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of loses, is shaken and displayed. The display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (K 6-2-3b 6 ), the combination of the defects “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM also defaults. Is displayed as it is.

FIG. 85 (Ke 6-2-1) to (Ke 6-2-8), (Ke 6-2-3b1) to (Ke 6-2-3b6) are summarized, and the symbol variation of the prefetch target suspension ends. , The navigation character displayed as a notice (prefetch notice and/or notice of the change) corresponding to the read ahead target hold is not hidden even when the hold becomes 0, and the next change is started. It has been erased. It should be noted that the navigation character is a pre-reading target pending before the fluctuation of the symbol ends (for example, before the decorative symbol becomes one or more temporary stop displays, at the same time as the temporary stop, or after the temporary stop, or the decorative symbol. All (three in this example: left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) are temporarily stopped before being temporarily stopped, and at the same time when temporarily stopped, then the symbols (special symbols) are stopped. It may be erased before), or after the symbol variation of the prefetch target suspension is completed (at the same time when the symbol (special figure) is stopped or after it is stopped).

FIG. 86 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86, the variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged. Further, a production icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on the base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, the second hold number display shows that the hold number of special figure 1 is “3” and the hold number of special figure 2 is “2”, and five hold icons are displayed in total. There is. All of these five hold icons are default display modes.

In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 86, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh hold , The eighth stage hs7, hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). Also, until the 3rd hold is accumulated, the 4th stage is white, the 5th and subsequent stages are gray, and when the 4th hold is accumulated, the 5th stage is white, and the 6th and later stages. Will turn gray. In this way, the display mode of the stage changes depending on the number of holdings, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a1).

In FIG. 86 (ko a2), the hold of the special figure 2 is increased by 1, and the hold increase animation is performed in the same figure (ko a3), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a4), the hold icon is displayed. Is displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also a default display mode. Further, the seventh stage hs7 changes to white, and the gray stage is the eighth stage hs8 only.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (a5), the navigation character YM in the default display mode appears, and a balloon saying "2 more tanks are full" is added. The navigation character YM appears when the number of holdings is N or more (6 or more in this example).

In FIG. 86 (ko a6), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by 1, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a7), seven holding icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. Is added a balloon saying "1 more is full". The added 7th hold icon h7 is also a default display mode. Further, the final eighth stage hs8 has also changed to white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

In FIG. 86 (ko a8), the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is increased by 1, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (ko a9), eight holding icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM of the default display mode is displayed. Has been added to the balloon "Full tank". The added 8th hold icon h8 is also a default display mode. In addition, in this example, the navigation character YM uses the balloon to give the notification about the number of holdings, but the notification may be omitted.

In this example, the navigation character YM may change when eight reservations are accumulated (when full). In FIG. 86 (a10), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. Further, the smoke image itself may not appear, and the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may change without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change without fail when wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 86 (step a11), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon saying "The inside of the hold is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and the look-ahead notice is executed. .. The notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. Further, the degree of expectation of a big hit in the hold may be given in advance by a notice displayed in a balloon. Further, in the present example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol variation in which the reserve is full, but the navigation character may be configured to change in the next variation of the symbol variation in which the reserve is full. In addition, the navigation character may change for each symbol variation, and the variation of the navigation character may give advance notice of the symbol variation.

The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, but may be the display size, the pose, or the shape. Also, there may be a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may differ depending on the character. For example, even if the navi character of Princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navi character of the lord in the display mode wearing a red kimono, or the navigator character who is the leader is hotter than the navi character of the lord mode. Good.

FIG. 87 shows an example of effect in which the navigation character YM is entwined with a decorative design of a general figure.

In FIG. 87 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the changing icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a circled special figure 1 first hold icon h11, which represents the hold of special figure 1, is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 1st hold icon h11 is a default display mode. Moreover, in FIG. 87 (this b1), although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays a variable display of a decorative pattern of a general figure, and as a result, in addition to “○” and “×”, “geki” as a big hit notice of the special map of the variation is displayed. "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 87 (b2), “◯” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is notified that the general figure lottery has been won.

In FIG. 87 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM is in the default display mode, and appears when the general figure lottery is won. In the succeeding FIG. 87 (step b4), since the general drawing lottery is won, Den Chu is opened and the navigation character YM notifies that Den Chu is being opened. In FIG. 87 (step b5-1), since the electric Chu is open, there is a prize following the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reserved special figure 2 is increased to four, which is full. In FIG. 87 (this b6-1), it is displayed in the second hold number display that the hold number of special figure 1 is "1" and the hold number of special figure 2 is "4". Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing the 2 hold are displayed (special figure 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). Note that all of the four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are default display modes. This pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is changed to the special figure 1 It is displayed so as to overlap part of the hold icon of from the front side.

In FIG. 87 (Fig. b7), the notification by the navigation character YM that the electric power chute is open ends, and in the subsequent diagram (Fig. b8), the electric chuo open time has ended, so the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. Is going on. Note that the roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all of the pending symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. In FIG. 87 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

After that, in FIG. 87 (this b11), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 87 (b12), the suspension of the special figure 2 first hold icon h21 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (b13), the variation icon of special figure 2 is changed. A diamond-shaped variation icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0.

In FIG. 87 (this b14), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM changes. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. The smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may always appear. Alternatively, when the hold is full, the navigation character YM may change without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured so as to always change when wrapped in a smoke image, or may not change even if wrapped in a smoke image.

In FIG. 87 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and a balloon "This fluctuation is hot" is added to the navigation character YM, and a normal notice is given. There is. In addition, the advance notice is usually issued depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

Also, in place of FIG. 87 (this b15-1), in FIG. 87 (this b15-2-1), the navigation character YM is still in the default display mode, and the change effect has failed. The navigator character YM is provided with a balloon saying "This is a fluctuation."

After that, the holding of the special figure 2 progresses, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (this b15-2-3), the symbol variable display of the last special figure 2 is performed. Also here, a balloon saying "This variation is" is added to the navigation character YM, and the effect by the navigation character YM is continued from the previous FIG. 87 (step b15-2-1). In FIG. 87 (this b15-2-4), a balloon saying “Farewell” is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect by the navigation character YM is completed. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (b15-2-5). When it is hot, the navigation character YM does not disappear, and the effect by the navigation character YM may continue, but on the contrary, the navigation character YM may always disappear. Even when the super reach effect is started between FIG. 87 (FIG. b15-2-1) to FIG. 87 (FIG. b15-2-4), the effect by the navigation character YM continues and the navigation character YM is displayed. Alternatively, the effect by the navigation character YM may be ended and the navigation character YM may disappear.

It should be noted that the navigation character YM described in FIGS. 87 (b1) to (b15-1) and (b15-2-1) to (b15-2-4) in FIG. Although only the advance notice is given and the advance notice is not given, the advance notice may be given in some cases.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example in which the change notice display is displayed on standby.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (Sa), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (Sa).

In FIG. 88 (Sa2), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased, and the third holding icon h13 and the fourth holding icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is the prefetch target hold.

In FIG. 88 (S3), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. Even during this stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 88 (Sa4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Even if the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (S5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display for changing the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, with the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display, it is informed (preliminary notice) that the navigation character YM may eventually appear. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display becomes a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The standby display of the icon I1 of the treasure box is a display with the icon I2 of the carpet remaining on.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 7), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display.

In FIG. 88 (Sa8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 9-1), the variable display of the symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the symbol variable display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby display. In this way, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 may be performed over a plurality of variations.

A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 11-1), and in FIG. 88 (Sa 12), the smoke image disappears and the lord's navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 12) is the default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM appears. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear and may not appear. Further, the smoke image itself may not be displayed in some cases, or the smoke image may be always displayed. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to always appear when the smoke image is displayed.

The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 88 (S2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail if there is a prefetch target suspension, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon of the change notice display and the navigation character YM are the pre-reading notice made for the same pre-reading object suspension (in this example, the suspension 4 represented by the fourth suspension icon h14 shown in FIG. 88 (Sa2)). However, the icon of the treasure box of the change notice display and the prefetch target suspension of the navigation character YM may be different.

In FIG. 88 (Sa12), when the lord's navigation character YM appears, then only the carpet icon I2 disappears, and the treasure box icon I1 remains in the effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

In FIG. 88 (Sa 14), the change of the prefetch target suspension is started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed while the prefetch target is being changed. In FIG. 88 (Sa15-1), the treasure box is opened, and a smoke image comes out from the inside to wrap around the navigator character YM of the lord. In FIG. 88 (Sa 16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the lord's navigation character YM is changed from the default display mode to the display mode wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM that has changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice (normal notice) of the change.

The change effect of the navigation character YM using the icon I1 of the treasure box may be started at the time of winning the prefetch target suspension (timing of FIG. 88 (Sa2)). Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail if there is a prefetch target suspension, or may be displayed only when the production lottery is won.

Further, in place of FIG. 88 (Sa 10-1), in FIG. 88 (Sa 10-2-1), the lord's navigation character YM does not appear, but the carpet icon I2 disappears, and a treasure box for change notice display is displayed. The standby display of the icon I1 of has been completed. A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (Sa 10-2-2). The smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM is displayed. The display position of YM and the variation icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 88 (Sa 10-2-3), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. Alternatively, or conversely, the navigation character YM may not appear and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change.

Also, instead of FIG. 88 (Sa 11-1), in FIG. 88 (Sa 11-2), although the smoke image is displayed, and the navigation character YM is not visible, the carpet icon I2 disappears. The standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display has ended. Thus, the timing of ending the standby display may be before the navigation character YM appears. Further, the timing of ending the standby display may be the same as the appearance of the navigation character YM. Further, it may be a timing of temporary stop of the decorative design, a timing of stop display of the decorative design, or a timing of starting change of the decorative design. Note that after the standby display of the change notice display is finished, the navigation character is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold, but even after the standby display of the change notice display is finished, the navigation character is displayed for the same prefetch target hold. There may be cases where there is a change (for example, a change following the change after the standby display has ended, or a change within the standby display has ended). Further, although the change notice display is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change notice display is finished, the change notice display may be displayed again for the same prefetch target hold (for example, the standby display There is a change after the next change after the end of the change, and the change within the end of the waiting display is included).

Further, instead of FIG. 88 (Sa13), in FIG. 88 (Sa13-2-1), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. 13-2-2), the treasure box does not open, the navigation character YM does not change, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Is gone. In this way, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the icons of the treasure box I1 and the navigation character YM, only the treasure box icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. When both icons disappear, both icons may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of effect using a holding frame different from the holding frame described so far.

The hold frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1) is a closed type that is spread over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, although the holding frame UI described so far has the same components (pedestal hs0, etc.), in the state of FIG. 89 (1), the area of the holding frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 , The other regions are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, and the right frame UIf3, and the sea background is displayed in the other regions, and the sea background is displayed in the reserved frame UI. Is not displayed. The hold frame UI shown in FIG. 89 (1) is a left frame UIf1, an upper frame UIf2, a right frame UIf3, and further, the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the hold frame UI is shown. Are promoted by changing these colors.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern, and the lowermost end of the decorative pattern that changes at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative pattern may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Further, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 89 (See 2-1), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2, and in FIG. 89 (See 3), only the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 becomes , Remains in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 89 (4), the icon I1 of the treasure box is opened, and an icon in which the character display "frame promotion" is displayed appears from inside to notify (notify) promotion of the hold frame UI. In FIG. 89 (5), the holding frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Note that the hold frame UI may not be promoted even if the "frame promotion" icon appears. In addition, when the "frame promotion" icon appears, the hold frame UI may be always promoted.

In addition, instead of FIG. 89 (FIG. 2-1), in FIG. 89 (FIG. 2-2-1), the lower half of the huge panda is displayed in the area where the background of the sea is displayed. By the lower half of this huge panda, the variable display of the first decorative pattern is overlapped from the front side. However, the second decorative design and the second number-of-holds display are displayed in front of the lower body of the panda. 89. The huge panda is passing from top to bottom, and eventually enters the area of the holding frame UI, and part or all of the holding frame UI is overlapped from the front side by the huge panda. In the state shown in (2-2-2), only a part of each of the upper left and the upper right of the holding frame UI is not yet overlapped with the image of the panda, but the state shown in (2-2-3) in the figure. Then, the entire holding frame UI overlaps the image of the panda. The appearance of a huge panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of notice of change. Although the holding frame UI is entirely overlapped by the huge panda, the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire holding frame UI.

FIG. 89 (and 2-2-4) shows one mode of the decorative pattern display device 208 after the huge panda has finished passing, and the first hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode ( Promotion)
Therefore, the navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to a display mode wearing a red kimono, and the holding frame UI has also been promoted to red display. The display mode of the variable icon may also be changed (promoted). Further, all or some of the left frame UIf1 and the like, the hold icon, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may change. For example, only the left frame UIf1 and the like may be changed to red and the holding frame UI may be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, a change may occur outside the holding frame UI.

FIG. 89 (2-2-4') shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and in addition to the change in the holding frame UI, Changes have occurred outside the holding frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increased. When this level rises, the reach production becomes easier to start, the pseudo continuous production becomes easier to start, and the design mode is switched to a design that appears when the jackpot with a probability variation occurs. Further, when the reach effect is started in a state where this level is high, the expectation of a big hit becomes high. The background may change.

If the appearance of a huge panda is a big hit announcement, it may be displayed in front of the image of the panda so that the first decorative pattern may overlap the image of the passing panda from the front side or the big hit. Even with a notice, the first decorative pattern may be overlapped with the image of the passing panda.

Further, in place of FIG. 89 (shown 2-1), in FIG. 89 (shown 2-3-1), a sliding effect fusuma image is added to the holding frame UI, and the same figure (shown 2-3). The state shown in 1) is a state in which the sliding door image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in the figure (2-3-2) is a state in which the sliding door image is fully opened (wipe-out state).

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example in which a treasure box icon I1 that has been used as a change notice notification icon so far appears as a hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (s 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, a treasure box icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 90 (SU 2-1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols that are missing. In FIG. 90 (SU 3), the treasure box icon is displayed. The hold of the first hold icon h11 has been exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. The first holding icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the variation icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the variation icon h0 here.

In FIG. 90(s4), the treasure box of the treasure box icon which is the variable icon h0 opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image is the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Cover and change animation is running. In FIG. 90 (S5), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the change icon h0. Although the smoke image corresponds to a change notice, the smoke image may not overlap the change icon h0 that is a change candidate, or the smoke image may not appear.

Further, in FIG. 90 (Su 1-1), instead of FIG. 90 (Su 1-1), the second hold icon h12 in the default display mode is also displayed. The second hold icon h12 is overlapped with the first hold icon h11 which is a treasure box icon. That is, at least a part of the holding icons having a relatively high expectation of the big hit overlaps at least a part of the holding icons having a relatively low degree from the front side. Note that at least a part of the hold icon in the prefetching notice mode may overlap at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, irrespective of the expectation of a big hit, at least a part of the hold icon that is consumed first may overlap with at least a part of the hold icon that is consumed later from the front side. In FIG. 90 (S 1-2-2), the treasure box of the treasure box icon that is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears, and the smoke image overlaps the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 90 (S 1-2-3), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

In addition, in FIG. 90 (Su 2-1) instead of FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), the treasure box of the treasure box icon that is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and in FIG. 2 (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears and both the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Aspects are changing. Here, both are changed to the same red color, but they may be changed to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, both of the smoke images may be wrapped, but only one may change and the other may remain the default.

In addition, in FIG. 90 (Su 2-1) instead of FIG. 90 (Su 2-1), the treasure box of the treasure box icon that is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the change icon h0 of the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 90 (2-3-2), the smoke image disappears, and only the display mode of the variable icon h0 in which the smoke images overlap is changed.

It should be noted that the icons (holding icon, variable icon) and/or navigation characters that are not overlapped by the smoke image also include the icons (holding icon, variable icon) and/or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change of the display mode of the character (may be at the same time as the change of the display mode or after the change of the display mode).

FIG. 91 shows an example of effect in which the navi character YM is entwined with a meter effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW having a white meter frame mf is displayed beside it. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-1) is in an empty state. When the meter display is full, the navigation character YM is promoted. Note that, by changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), it is possible to give an advance notice of the ease with which the meter is accumulated, or give a pre-reading notice and/or a notice of the change.

In FIG. 91 (Set 2), a temporary stop (first stop) of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed, and "decoration 4" is displayed in a swinging manner. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the pattern of "decoration 4", and in FIG. 91 (step 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW and becomes the white meter display MW. It is displayed overlapping. FIG. 91
As shown in (step 4), the meter-up item UpI that has moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by one level. It should be noted that the meter rising item has a different meter rising degree depending on the color. The white meter increase item UpI raises the level of the white meter display MW by one level.

In FIG. 91 (step 4), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in the same figure (step 5-1), the first hold icon h11. Has been released, and the variable display of symbols has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 91 (Set 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. The roulette effect here is always when something happens (when there is no loss) and when it does not happen (when there is no loss). Examples of something include a change in the hold icon, a normal notice (a notice of the change), and the like. Also, for example, if there is a character-based super-reach that includes Tono Super Reach, Hime Super Reach, and Grandpa Super Reach as one type of super reach, as an example of something above, the type of developing super reach (for example, There are also notices for character-based super reach, notices for specific super reach (for example, Tono super reach), and the like.

In FIG. 91 (SE8), the blue meter-raising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and in FIG. 91 (SE9), the blue meter-raising item UpIb is moved to the white meter display MW and white. It is displayed overlapping the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91 (step 10), the blue meter-up item UpIb that has moved to the white meter display MW is captured (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is raised by two levels. The blue meter up item UpIb raises the white meter display MW by two levels. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 91 (step 10) has three levels.

In FIG. 91 (SE11), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 91 (SE12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the variable display of patterns has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 91 (SE11), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 91 (SE12), the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the variable display of patterns has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 91 (step 13). The button display icon 136D is a display form of a balloon and corresponds to a notice given by the navigation character YM itself. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display, or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

In FIG. 91 (step 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 91 (step 15), the remaining period meter is decreasing. In FIG. 91 (step 16), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. 91 (step 17), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the meter rising icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM. The meter rise icon MUI is in the form of a balloon, and the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (step 17) displays a green meter rise item UpIm. The meter rise icon MUI also overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf) like the previous button display icon 136D. The meter rise icon MUI may overlap the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the valid operation period, the response display may be displayed or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes a display other than the meter rise icon MUI, and when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, display of the meter rise icon MUI). ) May be displayed as a response display only. Even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, and the meter increases only when the response display is displayed, and the meter does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 91 (step 18), the green meter-up item UpIm in the meter-up icon MUI has moved to the white meter display MW and is displayed overlapping with the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 91 (step 19 ), the green meter-up item UpIm that has moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW rises by 3 levels. The white meter display MW shown in (step 19) is full. In FIG. 91 (SE 20-1 ), the white meter display MW changes to the character display “promotion”, and a change animation (not shown) is started. In FIG. 91 (SE 21 ), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. It has been changed (promoted) to the display mode wearing the kimono. The color of the kimono of the navigation character YM changed here coincides with the background color of the character display "promotion" shown in FIG. 91 (SE 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 91 (SE 20-1). A display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is announced in advance. The change animation may be omitted. In addition, the white meter display shown in (21) in the figure has returned to an empty state, but it may remain full. Further, when the meter display is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change (promote) without fail, or may not change (promote) (failure).

As shown in (1-2-1) of FIG. 91, instead of FIG. 91 (step 1-1), the meter display may not always be displayed. As shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-2-2), the meter-up item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter increase item UpI moves to a fixed position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (step 1-2-4), the meter display (here, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter increase item UpI serves as a notice that the meter display is displayed. Further, the meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter increase item UpI. For example, the meter-up item UpI may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 91 (SE 1-2-2) and FIG. 91 (SE 1-2-3 ).

In FIG. 91 (Set 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is increased by 1 level by the meter increase item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 91, when the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises after that. However, even if the meter display is displayed, the meter may not rise (corresponding to false). Or, there may be a case where the meter rising item does not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if the meter rise item appears.

In addition, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a pre-reading notice that the meter may be accumulated. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed at the same time as the start of the symbol fluctuation display where the meter rising item appears, or during the symbol fluctuation, and in this case, the meter display may accumulate the meter within the fluctuation. There will be a notice that there is.

92 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example described with reference to FIG. 91.

In place of FIG. 91 (SE1-1), in FIG. 92 (SE1-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at a high speed with no hold, and the white meter display MW in an empty state is It is displayed. While the white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 91 (SE1-1) was full at 6 levels, the white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 92 (SE1-3-1) was displayed. The MW is full at level 5.

In FIG. 92 (step 1-3-3a), the meter rise icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. In the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 92 (step 1-3-3a), a gold meter rise item UpIg is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 92 (step 1-3-4a) is filled up at once due to the gold meter-up item UpIg. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be in an empty state or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue, but if it is in the accumulated state, even if the blue gauge is full. It is also possible that the gold gauge up item UpIg fills the tank at once, so that the gold gauge may be full.

On the other hand, also in FIG. 92 (step 1-3-3b), the meter increase icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and a rainbow-colored meter increase item UpIn is displayed here. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 92 (step 1-3-4b) is also filled up at once due to the iridescent meter-up item UpIn. After that, the animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be in an empty state or may remain stored. In addition, when it is in a state of being accumulated, it may be full with a blue gauge, or when it is full with a rainbow meter up item UpIn at once, it is full with a rainbow gauge. It may be in a tongue state.

White, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow items are available as meter-up items. Of these items, only the rainbow-colored meter-raising item UpIn and the gold-colored meter-raising item UpIg are items that can increase the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter-raising item UpI is increased by 1 level, the blue meter-increasing item UpIb is increased by 2 levels, the green meter-increasing item UpIm is increased by 3 levels, and the red meter-increasing item UpIr is increased by 4 levels.

In addition, the rainbow-colored meter-up item UpIn also functions as a big hit confirmation notice. On the other hand, the gold meter up item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is filled with one rainbow-colored meter-up item UpIn, when the meter is filled with one gold-colored meter-up item UpIn, or with other colors (white, blue, green, red) The meaning is different when the meter is filled up with a combination of items for increasing meters.

In the meter display, the colors of the meter itself (gauge) that increase in the meter frame mf are white, blue, green, and red meter increasing items, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

It should be noted that the color of the meter rising item may also have a function as a normal notice or a look-ahead notice. In addition, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be represented by a color.

In addition, the color of the meter rising item may be linked to the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM, or may be necessarily linked. For example, when a gold meter-up item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM is also likely to change to a display mode wearing a gold kimono, or it always changes, and vice versa, a display in which the navigation character YM wears a gold kimono. According to the aspect, the gold meter-up item UpIg may easily appear or may always appear.

Furthermore, the order of appearance of the meter-raising items and the combination of colors may function as a pre-reading notice or as a normal notice. Also, the order of appearance of the meter-raising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of a big hit. On the contrary, the order of appearance of the meter-raising items and the combination of colors may be completely unrelated to the expectation of the big hit.

In addition, in this example, the meter is stored until it reaches 15 (the meter is full three times). Note that in the meter display in which the tank is full at the 6th level in FIG. 91, the meter is accumulated until it reaches 18 (again, the meter is full 3 times). Here, when the meter overflows by displaying the meter increase item (for example, when the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are accumulated), the meter is set to 0 while promoting the navigation character. It is also possible to collect the amount that has not been accumulated. For example, when the red meter-up item UpIt is displayed when three meters are accumulated, the meter is filled up once, and the meter is further accumulated in two levels.

In addition, when the meter overflows in the state where the meter is full twice, the meter may be filled up and the portion which cannot be stored may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be reset to 0 when the prefetch target variation or the variation has ended, or may remain displayed regardless of the prefetch target variation or the variation. In addition, you may cut off the portion that you have not accumulated. For example, when a meter is stored, the meter at that time may be in a state of 0, a full state, a special display, or a non-display of the meter. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured not to overflow. For example, when three have already been accumulated, only two white meter-up items UpI or one blue meter-up item UpIb is displayed.

In the example starting from FIG. 92 (SE1-4-1) instead of FIG. 91 (SE1-1), in FIG. 92 (SE1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI. , Is illuminated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono as shown in FIG. The balloon is attached. This “Up high accuracy medium” informs that the meter rising item is in a state where it is easy to accumulate.

Note that, depending on the display mode of the notice for changing the navigation character YM, the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may occur or may necessarily occur. Further, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may be always issued, or a plurality of types of effect display (preliminary display) including the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may be performed. , The effect display including the notification of “Up High Probability Medium” may not be performed.

Further, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may be different depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM. For example, in the case of the red navigation character YM, "Up high accuracy" is notified, in the case of the gold navigation character YM, the intense heat display is displayed, and in the case of the rainbow-colored navigation character YM, the iron plate display is displayed. May be done. Note that the navigation characters YM having different display modes may give the same notice (the same type of notice).

In place of FIG. 91 (SE 5-1), in FIG. 92 (SE 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is 1 level with blinking white, and the kimono of the navigation character YM also blinks white. There is. Then, once the meter is full and returns to an empty state, in FIG. 92 (step 5-2-3), the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to the display mode wearing a green kimono, The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to green and has risen to 3 levels. Then, after the meter is full again and the state returns to the empty state, in FIG. 92 (step 5-2-5), the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed to the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono. The gauge of the white meter display MW has also changed to rainbow color and is full. In this way, the meter storage condition and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. Further, the color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may correspond to each other.

It should be noted that, when all the meters are accumulated, a pattern in which a big hit is confirmed or a high expectation of a big hit and a pattern in which the meters are accumulated and released to perform an effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is discharged when the level is accumulated up to 2 levels, a blue equivalent effect is performed, and when the meter is accumulated up to 4 levels, the red equivalent effect is generated. Is done.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing another modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 91.

In place of FIG. 91 (SE6-1), in FIG. 93 (SE6-2), the roulette display icon RI and the meter rise icon MUI are displayed on the white blinking meter display MW′ in which the meter frame mf blinks in white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rise icon MUI overlaps a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. It is more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the roulette display icon RI shown in 7-1). On the other hand, in the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 91 (step 7-1), a green meter rise item UpIm is displayed. The meter rising icon MUI may overlap the entire roulette display icon RI from the front side. On the contrary, at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI at least partially overlaps the roulette display icon RI from the front side. You can wrap it. As a priority order displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, when there is a notice that the meter rising icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is being displayed, the meter rising icon is displayed by displaying the white blinking meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although it is informed that there is a possibility that it will be displayed, even if there is a notice that the meter rising icon may be displayed, it may not be notified by the meter frame, It may be configured not to notify that the meter rising icon may be displayed. In addition, the advance notice notifying that the meter rising icon may be displayed may be given not only by the meter frame but also by another display or rendering means.

In place of FIG. 91 (step 7-1), in FIG. 93 (step 7-2), the blue meter-up item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, it is difficult to visually recognize because the meter rise icon MUI still overlaps. In this way, the meter rise icons may overlap each other. When the meter rise icons overlap each other, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, the higher meter rise may be prioritized, or the meter rise may be higher. The lower one may be prioritized. Further, the navigator character YM does not overlap the meter rising icon from the front side, but may overlap.

Further, in place of FIG. 91 (SE 7-1), in FIG. 93 (SE 7-3-1), an image up for notifying (notifying) that the meter rise icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI is displayed. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear how many colors of the meter-raising icon will be displayed, and thereafter, the colors of the meter-raising icon will be displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this way, when it is informed in the roulette effect that the meter rise icon is displayed although it is unknown what color it is, as shown in FIG. 93 (step 7-3-2), the roulette display icon RI is displayed. The effect display Ed1 to which the aura has been added is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 93 (step 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 changes, and the display is as if the blue meter rise icon is enlarged. At this stage, it is not known how many colors of the meter rise icon are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter-raising icon may also be displayed in the roulette display icon RI.

In FIG. 93 (step 7-3-4), the blue meter rise icon UpIb is displayed as an enlarged blue meter rise icon that overlaps the roulette display icon RI, and the white blinking meter display MW is displayed. Moved to'and blinking white meter display MW' is displayed overlapping. Further, the roulette display icon RI fades out, the display becomes fainter, and gradually disappears. The color of the meter-raising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. Thereafter, the blue meter-up item UpIb is fetched (stocked) in the white blinking meter display MW', and the white blinking meter display MW' is leveled up.

Note that the blue meter-up item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI and be taken into the white blinking meter display MW'. In this case, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter-up item UpIb may be displayed before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, may be displayed at the same time as it is displayed, or may be displayed. It may be displayed after being displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, the blue meter-raising item UpIb may be displayed before the display of an enlarged blue meter-raising icon, or at the same time as the display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed after being displayed.

In FIG. 93 (SE-20-2-1) instead of FIG. 91 (SE-20-1), the white meter display MW in the full state is temporarily changed to the character display of “stock”, and the empty state is displayed. When returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. In addition, you may change the icon (holding icon, change icon) other than the navigation character or other effect display that changes only the display mode of the navigation character YM by opening the icon I1 of the treasure box.

FIG. 94 shows an example of effect in which a telop effect is entwined with the navigation character YM.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (part 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two special reservations 1 are reserved, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12 are displayed. Both the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 94 (part 2-1), the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, the possibility that the navigation character YM may change is displayed in characters, which corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as "Navi character change highly accurate" or a character display such as "Navi character change highly accurate preparation" is flown from right to left on the screen. In addition to this, the telop display trp is plain and no characters are displayed, and the telop display indicates "○○ high accuracy medium", "XX&○○ high accuracy medium", "○○ high accuracy medium". There may be a case where the user is informed in advance that there is a possibility that "Preparing", "XX or XX high-precision preparing", "High-precision preparing", etc. may be displayed. Even if a plain telop display trp is displayed here, "○○ high-accuracy in progress", "XX & ○○ high-accuracy in progress", "○○ high-accuracy in preparation", "XX or ○○ high-accuracy in preparation" In some cases, "," "high-precision preparation in progress", etc. are not displayed. In addition, "○○ high-precision preparation in progress", "XX or XX high-precision preparation in progress", "high-precision preparation in progress", etc. are displayed, and there is a possibility that a high probability state will occur for the production displayed as a telop from now on. This may be notified in advance. "XX" and "XX" described here are various effects (for example, hold (hold icon and/or change icon) change, pseudo-repeated, advance notice with high-expected color, high expectation for big hit. The name of a notice (so-called gekiatsu notice) is shown.

Note that the high-probability state of the effect described here means that the notification that the high-probability state is notified by the telop display is the high-probability state that is notified by the telop rather than when the high-probability state is not notified by the telop display. This shows a state in which the frequency of the operation is high. That is, in FIG. 94 (Sol. 1) to (Sol. 14), (Soh 2-2), (Sw 2-3), and (Sw. 8-2) in FIG. The symbol “” indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than when the notification of “navigation character highly accurate” is not displayed on the telop display. Also, the "high-precision preparation" included in the above-mentioned "○○ high-precision preparation", "XX or XX high-precision preparation", "high-precision preparation", etc. will be notified by the telop display. The production being performed is in a high-probability state from now on (variation after the change that started displaying the telop containing "high-precision preparation" or the change that started displaying the telop containing "high-precision preparation" (Inside) (or a high probability state may occur).

In FIG. 94 (3), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, conversely, the second decorative pattern may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

In FIG. 94 (S4), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. After that, the lost symbols are stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 94 (6), the variable display of symbols is also started. The telop display trp is continuing.

In FIG. 94 (S7), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 94 (S8-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp continues. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and also in FIG. 94 (10), the variable display of symbols is started, and in the same figure (11), the telop display trp is still continuing.

The navigation character YM may change when the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears, the change animation is started, the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 opens. In this case, it can be said that the display such as “Navi character change highly accurate” in the telop display trp indicates the appearance of the treasure box icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

In FIG. 94 (12), the change animation of the navigation character YM is restarted, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 94 (13), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to a display mode wearing a gold kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing.

While the telop display trp is displayed, the change effect of the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times. However, if the navigation character YM changes once while the telop display trp is displayed, the navigation character YM changes thereafter. It may be configured not to.

In FIG. 94 (14), the reach state is entered, but the telop display trp is still continuing. As the timing at which the display of the telop display trp disappears, at the time of starting the super reach (for example, FIG. 78 (e.g. 24)), during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol (for example, during the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop) , Symbol stop character, start of next change, etc.

In the present example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. Alternatively, the navigation character may be configured to perform only the change effect.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (s 2-1), the telop display trp may be displayed in two steps, upper and lower, as shown in the same figure (s 2-2 ). Then, different contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

In addition, in the telop display, the high-precision middle display may be displayed for other notices. As long as the same prefetch target is held, the display timing may be the same or one may be later than the other. In addition, when one telop display of “High accuracy middle” is displayed, the telop display may not be displayed or may be displayed for another prefetch target hold. In that case, a telop display regarding the same notice (for example, “Navi character high probability middle”) may be separately displayed, and the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the display start order, or the display position of each telop may be fixed.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (s 2-1), the same content may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in the same FIG. (s 2-3). That is, the same telop display may be displayed multiple times. In some cases, it may be possible to appeal that the expectation of a big hit is higher when displaying a plurality of ones than when displaying only one. However, even if a plurality of images are displayed, the expectation level of the big hit may be the same as the case where only one is displayed. Further, displaying a plurality of the same telop displays may be repeated. That is, a plurality of telop displays having the same content may be displayed each time the display of the telop display is started.

Further, instead of FIG. 94 (S8-1), as shown in the same drawing (S8-2), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), no further change is made. May be notified by a telop display trp. In this example, the character display of "completion" is displayed. However, even if this notification is made, the navigation character YM may further change.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(b).

FIG. 95 (1a-1) shows a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 95 (ta 2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and “decoration 7” is displayed in shaking (temporary stop) on both the left symbol and the right symbol, and in the same figure (ta 3a), it is a supermarket. All the displays have disappeared from the first decorative symbol display device 208L after shifting to the reach effect. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM are disappeared.

In FIG. 95 (4a), the design of the enemy swordsman is displayed on the entire screen on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the reduced first decorative symbol, the variable icon h0, and the navigation character YM. The variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

In FIG. 95 (5a), the background of the wilderness that is the background display of the super reach effect is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman face each other.

Here, in place of FIG. 95 (ta 1a-1), in FIG. 95 (ta 1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display area CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12 is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third hold icon. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes and divides the image displayed across.

Although the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the right base icon bIr may also be displayed in an enlarged manner together with the navigation character YM.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (1a-2), the image may not be displayed in an enlarged manner, and may extend over a plurality of display devices. For example, a pattern that is straddling from the beginning of display, a pattern that is displayed straddling after moving from its original position, a pattern that is displayed when the image changes and straddling, or an image is enlarged and displayed straddling. Pattern, and on the contrary, a pattern in which the image is reduced and displayed across the area. Further, when the image is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 95 (1a-2), the expectation of the big hit is high, the hold icon is easily changed, the change icon is easily changed, or the navigation character YM is displayed. May be easier to change. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, in the case where the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices and the display device A in the front overlaps a part of the display area of the display device B, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display apparatus B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display apparatus A in FIG.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-2) can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, in place of FIG. 95 (ta 1a-1), a part of the holding frame UI is moved and displayed in the same figure (ta 1a-3). That is, the effect icon display area DIS is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The navigation character YM is also displayed on the right base icon bIr.

In this way, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, or another effect change (for example, hold). Change of icon or variable icon) may be facilitated. Also, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the high degree of expectation of a big hit, and the change of other effects (for example, change of a hold icon or a change icon) are possible. They may be different or may be the same with no effect. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM changes may be higher in the case of moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than in the case of moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the movement of the navigation character YM has been described above, the same applies to the case where the hold icon moves to another display device or the variable icon moves to another display device.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 95 (1a-3), it can be seen that the holding frame Ui is divided (broken). That is, although the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be moved to another place of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-3) can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 95 (ta 1a-1), in FIG. 95 (ta 1a-4), the navigation character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can be seen as an increase in the navigation character YM.

In this way, when the navigation character YM is divided (increased), the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, or other production changes (for example, a hold icon or It may be easier for the change icon to change).

Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the location where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increase).

As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 95 (1a-4) can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later. That is, also in the other effect examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increased) in some cases, and may be always divided (increased).

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B.

In FIG. 96 (1b), the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 95 (1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 96 (2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. Also, in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and third decorative symbol display devices 208N shown in FIG. 96 (2b), the background display of the sea disappears.

In FIG. 96 (3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and a signboard icon "searching" is displayed instead. Further, the same character (lord) YM' as the navigation character YM is displayed and running on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea disappears. Moreover, the character display "searching" is displayed on it. Similarly, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with the image of the question mark on the second decorative pattern display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea disappears.

The icon of the sign “Searching” may be a notification indicating that the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM is likely to succeed. Further, the probability of success is higher when the signboard color is blue than white, and the success probability is higher when the signboard color is red than blue. It should be noted that promotion may be confirmed as long as it is red. Further, this signboard may change in color, display characters, or the like, but may not change. In addition, a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

In FIG. 96 (4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state) so far, are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Coming in. It should be noted that this period corresponds to the period of the fan production.

In FIG. 96 (5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, it moves to the position of the fully closed state (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but it may be the position before contact.

FIG. 96 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of the promotion success pattern, and in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the running character (lord) YM' poses with his thumb up, and above that. Is displayed with a character display indicating the level up. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to an actual display, and a thousand box is displayed. It should be noted that a display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the thousand box. For example, if the thousand boxes are blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono. In addition, although the color, the open/closed state, and the like of this thousand-box box may change, they may not change. In FIG. 96 (7b), the character (lord) YM' displayed on the third decorative pattern display device 208N is changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono.

Then, in FIG. 96 (8b), each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to separate from each other, and returns to the initial state. .. When each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial state, a wipe effect is performed on each of the decorative symbol display devices 208M and N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 96 (9b) are in the middle of wipe-in, and in FIG. 96 (10b), the wipe-in is completed and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, the wipe display in which only the model title is displayed is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (10b), the smoke image is displayed at the position where the signboard icon was displayed until then.

In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 96 (11b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, wipeout is started. In this example, the wipe-in animation (an animation that closes from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (an animation that opens from the inside to the outside) are different, but the same animation may be used. In FIG. 96 (12b), the wipeout is completed, and the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N. In addition, in one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and/or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or a plurality of effect movable bodies that do not include a liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs effect operation). And, there is a production that the navigation character is promoted.)

The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 96 can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B.

In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, four reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. All of these four hold icons h11 to h14 are default display modes. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

In FIG. 97 (1a-3-2), a moving animation in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed. In this FIG. 97 (1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is located just between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Here, also, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame interferes and divides the navigation character YM displayed across the frame. A navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3).

On the other hand, in FIG. 97 (1a-3-2′), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the third decorative symbol display device. In 208N, an example of enlarged display is shown. Although only the right hand and the toes of the right foot of the navigation character YM are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-2′), the toes of the right hand and the right foot are enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the portion that has entered the third decorative symbol display device 208N. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (1a-3-3'), a navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. .. In this way, when the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed, the navigation character YM may be more likely to change, the expectation of a big hit may be higher, and the like, than when it is not enlarged and displayed. The change of the effect (for example, change of the hold icon or the change icon) may be facilitated, or may be the same without any influence. Further, when the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may or may not always be enlarged and displayed.

The moving animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 97 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

Further, instead of FIG. 96 (8b), FIG. 97 (5b-2) shows a pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM has failed. In FIG. 96 (4b), when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving toward each other and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. Is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which are stopped on the way also return to the initial state, but the notification of change effect (elevation effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 ((5b-2)), the character (lord) YM' is in a pose in which he is facing backward and depressed. It should be noted that the notification of failure may be started in the middle of returning to the initial state. Alternatively, the notification of failure may be started at a stage where the vehicle has stopped before reaching a certain position.

Further, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, it may be a failure, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Further, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This also applies to the effects described above, which are divided into success and failure.

Further, if the change effect (elevation effect) here fails, the navigation character YM will continue for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or until the promotion failure to the end of N variations, The change may be restricted until the fluctuation of the prefetch target suspension related to the promotion failure ends).

Further, in place of FIG. 96 (ta 6b-1), FIG. 97 (ta 6b-2) includes a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol up to a certain position (for example, a position in a fully closed state). Although the display device 208N has moved, a pattern in which the change effect (elevation effect) has failed is shown. Similarly to the above, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 97 (6b-2) also displays the character (lord) YM' in the pose in which the pose is facing backward and depressed. Further, on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to an actual display, and a mandarin orange box is displayed there.

In this way, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. On the contrary, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted without fail. Also, the navigation character YM may be promoted even in the state shown in FIG. 97 (6b-2), or conversely, in this state, the failure may be confirmed.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 in which the second display device is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1c). On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative pattern display device 208 (first display device), and the hold frame UI is displayed on this second display device 208S. ing. That is, the hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. The second display device 208S may be fixed or may be capable of moving up and down.

In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (1c), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Further, the default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (2c), a sliding effect fusuma image is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 98 (3c), the fusuma image is fully closed (wiping-in state). Is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98(4), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98(5c), the sliding door image is in a fully opened state (wipeout state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (5c) where the wipe effect is finished, neither the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, nor the navigation character YM is displayed. The mini-game animation by is displayed. That is, due to the wipe effect, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are also hidden, and a change (promotion) in the display mode of the navigation character YM is bet (dividing) mini of golf. The game has started. In addition, even in the same mini game, there may be a mini game in which a successful super reach production is started. At the stage of FIG. 98 (ta 4c), it can be seen that the mini game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the bet (dividing) mini game is, and therefore, of the FIG. 98 (ta 5c). I don't know until the stage. Therefore, in some cases, at least the second display device 208S can be focused on until the description of the mini game (here, “If you enter the cup, you are promoted to Yoshimune”) is performed.

In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (6c-1), the cup-in succeeds brilliantly. When the cup-in is successful, the wipe effect is started again, and the fusuma image starts to close again in FIG. 98 (7c). is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (9c), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in (10c) of the figure, the fusuma image is fully opened (wipeout state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 98 (10c) that has been wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipeout is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 98 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 98 (12c), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes to the display mode of the red kimono.

Further, in FIG. 98 (ta 6c-1) instead of FIG. 98 (ta 6c-1), the cup-in fails. In this way, when the mini game in which the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM is bet fails, the navigation character YM does not have to be promoted, but may be promoted. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (6c-1), when the mini game is successful, the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

It should be noted that when wiping out from FIG. 98 (8c), a wipe effect that may suggest to the player the possibility that the navigation character YM is promoted may be used, or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

Further, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG. 98 (10c).

Further, the second display device 208S may perform the production operation during execution of the mini game. In addition, at the time of success (Fig. 98 (Fig. 6c-1) in this example), at the time of failure (Fig. 98 (Fig. 6c-2) in this example) and agitation (Fig. 98 (Fig. 98c) in this example). Different staging operations may be performed. In addition, instead of the second display device 208S, an effect operation by an effect movable body may be performed.

The mini game described with reference to FIG. 98 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of a case where another effect is executed during execution of the effect selected by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in the "character selection" shown in FIG. 63(b), "Copanda" of 07 is set, in the "holding frame selection", the "holding frame B" of 02 is set, and in the "holding display selection". The “icon C” of 03 is set, and the “background E” of 05 is set in the background display selection.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame B is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 has been accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa1), the background of the background E (empty background) is displayed.

In FIG. 99 (a a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, the first decorative pattern is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 that is the default display mode of the icon C is displayed. The navigation character YM of Copanda is also displayed.

In FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 99 (Aa4-1), the carpet icon I2. Disappears, and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 99 (a5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, and the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image hides part or all of the navigation character YM and the navigation character YM. Is clearly harder to see than before the smoke image appeared. The change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the back button may be used or the operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 99 (a6), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM changes from co-panda to bancho. The longest character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player, as shown in FIG. 63(b). The player may change to a character that can be selected (for example, a grandfather, a princess, etc.), or the character may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

In FIG. 99 (A7), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and in FIG. 99 (A8), the reach state is entered. The navigator character YM having the longest length shown in FIG. 99 (a8) is provided with a balloon icon of "NEXT" that suggests a pseudo continuous effect.

In FIG. 99 (Aa9), the pseudo continuous pattern (the pattern of the lord's character) is temporarily stopped in the middle pattern of the first decorative pattern, and in the same figure (A10), the lord's character and the character display of "continuation". A cut-in display consisting of and is displayed. In this embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. Here, the pseudo-relation is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-repeating is executed, the larger the chance of being hit.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (a11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “×2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-relation is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (a12), the display of “×2” is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

The navigator character YM having the longest length shown in FIG. 99 (aa13) is again provided with the balloon icon of "NEXT" that suggests the pseudo-relation effect, and there is still hope for the continuation of the pseudo-replication. After that, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, or once or a plurality of times, the player enters the reach state and further develops into a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect). The background screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa15) changes to the background of the wilderness which is the background display of the swordsman reach production, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shows the main character and the enemy swordsman. The duel scenes facing each other are displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bI1 in the hold icon display area HIS and the four stages hs1 to hs4 are disappeared. Further, the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on it. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the longest navigation character YM is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

The navigator character YM of the bancho shown in FIG. 99 (Aa16) is provided with a balloon icon of "chance" that fuels a big hit, and the navigator character YM of the bancho is performing a stirrup effect.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa18), the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slashed each other is displayed in the super reach production. Here, the swordsman is lying down, and as a middle pattern, left and right The "decoration 6" different from the design ("decoration 7") is displayed large (shaking display). Although the height of the pedestal in the variable icon display area CIS is low, the lowered pedestal hs0' is displayed and the variable icon h0 is still displayed on it. In addition, the longest navigation character YM is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. After that, the wipe effect is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (Aa19), it is in the middle of the wipe-in. In the same figure (Aa20), the wipe-in is completed, and then the wipe-out is started. In the figure (a a21), while returning to the background of the background E (empty background), the navigation character YM of the copanda is also beginning to be seen. In FIG. 99 (Aa22), the wipe effect has ended, and the decorative pattern display device 208 swayingly displays "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of losses. The hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the variable icon h0, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is also displayed again. Further, a blue hold icon (prefetch hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 79(e2) to (e4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change the display mode of itself. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is running out, but the display mode of the navigation character YM is changed by the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier for the player to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player, as compared with the case where the player changes without using the treasure box icon I1 (for example, the player himself changes). Here, the advantageous state includes a transition to a big hit game state, a transition to a big hit game state in which the number of balls is large, and a transition to a definite change state or an electric support state.

In this example, even if the hold icon increases while the hold icon is hidden, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden when the hold icon changes from hidden to visible. Look-ahead notice may be given. Note that if the number of holds increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold is consumed (until it is displayed in the variable icon display area, or until it is deleted from the variable icon display area. It may be configured to regulate the read-ahead notice and/or the notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold while the hold icon is not displayed, or the target of the change with the increased hold. It may be configured such that the pre-reading notice by the hold icon is regulated, and the pre-reading notice and/or the notice of the change may be given after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

In this example, while the pre-reading notice by the one hold icon is being executed, the pre-reading notice by the other hold icon may be given, but the pre-reading notice by the other hold icon may be made while the pre-reading notice is made by the one hold icon. , Until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is exhausted (may be displayed in the variable icon display area or may be deleted from the variable icon display area) Good.

In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give advance notice and/or look-ahead notice of the change, but the navigation character selected by the player gives notice of the change and/or look-ahead notice. You may not be discouraged. The tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by a balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may not be discouraged. Further, in this example, the navigation character and/or the look-ahead notice may be given by the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player, but the notice and/or the look-ahead notice may not be given. Further, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and/or the variable icon is easier to perform than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character changes. It may be configured to have a high expectation of a jackpot variation in the design and/or a pending big jackpot (or a jackpot confirmed (may be a jackpot rich)), a notice that the navigation character appears, and/or It may be configured so that the frequency of occurrence of the super reach effect is high (or always occurs).

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 99.

In place of FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa3-2), a change notice display is performed by light emission of the light guide plate IL instead of the treasure box icon I1. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be announced by a different production means from the production means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) in which the navigation character YM is displayed.

In addition, instead of FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa3-3), instead of the icon I1 of the treasure box, change notice display by the effecting operation of the movable means (here, the crest member 224E). It is carried out. That is, the family crest monument 224E moves from the initial position to a position where it has risen, and overlaps the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Note that there is no hold icon here, but if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps the hold icon. After that, the family crest monument 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest monument 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family coat emblem 224E may vibrate along with or instead of rotating. Alternatively, only the ascending may be performed, and the rotation and the vibration may not be performed. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the effect operation of the family crest product 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest product 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the easiness of change to the navigation character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by a light emission effect by the LED provided on the family crest monument 224E.

In addition, instead of FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa3-4), a change notice display is performed by sound output from the speaker 120 instead of the treasure box icon I1. The change notice display may be performed by the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a-a4-1), as shown in FIG. 100 (a-a-4-2), while the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, The icon I1 may fly on the carpet icon I2 and fly away. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change and corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (Aa6-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa6-2), although the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change. Also corresponds to the so-called failure pattern.

Further, in place of FIG. 99 (Aa6-1), in FIG. 100 (Aa6-3), the navigation character YM of the Copanda is the same Copanda, but a different color of the clothes (here, the red clothes are red clothes). Of the navigation character YM and succeeded in the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM.

Further, in place of FIG. 99 (Aa3-1), in FIG. 100 (Ab1), as in the example shown in FIG. 98, the second display device 208S is provided below the decorative pattern display device 208 (first display device). Are arranged, and this second display device 208S is provided with a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS, and a pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. .. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM of Copanda is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (Abl), the conversation notice is given by the notice of the grandfather character and the character display "The navigation character is changed", and the notice of change is displayed by the notice of the conversation. It is being appreciated. That is, the change of the navigation character YM is announced by a production means (here, the decorative pattern display device 208) different from the production means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. There is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 100 (Ab2), the navigation character YM is changed from the co-panda to the bancho, which is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

Further, instead of FIG. 99 (a2), the speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 100 (a1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 65(9) and the brightness (light amount) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 65(3) are set as “user set values”. It is written on the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. In this example, both are 3 levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and the brightness set by the player are forcibly changed at the time of execution to the effect and output from the speaker 120, or the game board lamp 442 or/and the game underframe. Since the LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is written in the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 as “actual setting value”. This also applies to the following examples. In FIG. 100 (ac2), the speaker 120, which is a production means different from the production means in which the "hot heat" is likely to be announced, is notified that the "hot heat" is likely to be given. ing. The volume of the speaker 120 (actual setting value) at this time matches the user setting value. After that, in FIG. 100 (ac3), a notice of “intense heat” is executed, the characters “intense heat” are displayed in large size on the decorative pattern display device 208, and sound is output from the speaker 120 and the game board is used. The lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are emitting light. The volume (actual setting value) at the time of execution of the "heat" notice exceeds the user setting value and is level 5, and the luminance (actual setting value) also exceeds the user setting value and is level 5. That is, the output is made at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and light is emitted at a higher brightness than the brightness level set by the player. It should be noted that, during performance production, the volume and brightness may exceed the user-set value or may be forcedly below the user-set value (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the timing at which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is not limited to this example. For example, the brightness may change at the timing when the sound during the intense heat approach is output, or the sound during the intense heat approach may be changed. The volume and brightness may change while is output. In addition, when a certain effect is executed, only the volume out of the volume and the brightness may be output in excess of the user set value, or only the brightness may be emitted in excess of the user set value. There are also cases where both exceed.

It should be noted that the user settings of the volume and the brightness may be possible even on a game console that does not have the convenient volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. Any gaming machine that can set the volume and brightness may be used. Further, the technical idea here can be applied (hereinafter the same) even when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the hue of the image, and the like.

As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 100 can be applied to the effect examples described so far and can also be applied to the effect examples described later.

FIG. 101 is a table summarizing songs that can be output from the speaker 120.

In the game console in the example here, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. The serial numbers 1 to 11 in the table of FIG. 101 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive big villas. For example, if the jackpot is not run for 15 consecutive nights, the song "Ohwa- Behavior" cannot be selected. Also, a plurality of songs may be selectable. For example, if 15 jackpots are played, all the songs with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

Also, the song with the serial number 12 is during the big hit start interval (while the big hit start performance is being executed).
When the back button navigation mode is set, it is a song that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times. When the back button navigation mode is set, a guide about operating the chance button 136 is issued. , When the back button navigation mode is not set, no notification is given. The guidance may not be notified even when the back button navigation mode is set, or conversely, the guidance may be notified even when the back button navigation mode is not set.

The songs with serial numbers 13 and 14 are songs that can be selected on condition that a big hit is made in a specific reach. "Collaboration SP" here refers to a super-reach production in which multiple characters co-star (for example, a super-reach production in which Yoshimune and Panda co-star in a swordsman reach). The “big hit” is a big hit when the premier character “Kaede” appeared in the cut-in image during super reach.

102 is a diagram showing an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 101 is performed.

In FIG. 102(a1), it is a probable variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), and the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. The second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(1), and the hold number of special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of special figure 2 is also. It is 3. Further, this pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and in FIG. 102, only the holding icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown. All of these three hold icons h21 to h23 are default display modes. In addition, it is the third consecutive big hit. Further, in the song name display portion MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102(A1), the song name of the song currently being output (here, the default “may be there”) is displayed. Is displayed, and the music piece of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probability changing state. Further, icons of up/down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the song name display portion MN, and it is informed that the songs can be selected by operating the up/down keys 137u, d. A background screen of the universe is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the background screen of the universe is a background screen for the probability change state.

In FIG. 102(a2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 102(a3), the music title of the music title display portion MN is changed to "mega giga summer". Since the music is output from the speaker 120 a little after the music selection operation (for example, 500 msec), there is a period in which the music name of the music name display portion MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. Note that the song name of the song name display portion MN and the song actually output from the speaker 120 may be configured to match. In FIG. 102 (a4), the song “Mega Giga Summer” is also output from the speaker 120. When the music is changed, the music is output from the beginning, but for example, when the timing or time when the music flows is determined by power-on or RTC (Real Time Clock) effect, or when the music is output last time. If it is, it may be output from the middle.

In FIG. 102 (a5), the number of special maps 2 is increased and the special 2 is full (the number of reservations displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). , The display start of the fourth hold icon is a little later than the display of the hold number display being updated to 4, and in the same figure (B6), the fourth hold icon 24 of the prefetch advance notice display mode (white blinking) is displayed. Has been done. After that, the three special maps 2 are reserved, and in FIG. 102(a8), the symbols of the special maps 2 are stopped, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing. There is. In addition, the number of remaining reservations of special figure 2 is 1, and the 1st reservation icon h21 changes to the display mode of red.

In FIG. 102 (a9), the last hold of the special drawing 2 has been digested, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has started the variable display of the decorative pattern. Even in the state of FIG. 102 (B10), the selected song is still “Mega Giga Summer”, and in FIG. 102 (B11), the bancho character C11 appears and a song change notice is given. The song change notice is a big hit notice that includes the effect of forcibly changing the song selected by the player to another song, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a look-ahead notice. .. In this example, since the song change notice is displayed, the jackpot confirmation (or the jackpot richness) is announced for the symbol variation for which the song change notice is displayed, but the symbol variation for which the song change notice is displayed is lost. There may be cases. For example, if "Todoroke DREAM", which is the theme song of the character that appeared, is successful (the expectation of the jackpot is high, or the jackpot is confirmed (the jackpot may be rich)). If "" is not output, it may be a failure, and the symbol variation on which the music change notice is displayed may be out of order. In addition, even when "Todoroke DREAM" is not output and the music change notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been confirmed by another effect (for example, revival effect). In addition, when the song change notice is displayed, the big hit is confirmed (or big hit rich) about the next change of the pattern change for which the song change notice is displayed / or the expectation of the big hit is larger than when a notice other than the song change notice is given A look-ahead notice may be given to announce that the degree is high. Further, even when the music change notice fails, it may be configured such that another effect (for example, a revival effect) is always notified that the big hit is confirmed. However, the music change notice may be annoying to the player in some cases, for example, the music selected by the player is forcibly replaced, so in return, a big hit if the music change notice is started. It may be confirmed.

A music change effect sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (A12). Further, although the music of "Mega Giga Summer" output from the speaker 120 is not output, the music of "Mega Giga Summer" may be output. In addition, the bancho character C11 that appeared in the song change notice raises one hand, and the hand overlaps a part of the song name display portion MN.

In FIG. 102 (a13), the song title of the song title display section MN is changed to “Distance”, but no song is output from the speaker 120. Even if the output of the song “Mega Giga Summer” is continuously output as it is in FIG. 102 (A11) during all or part of the period in FIG. 102 (A12) to (A15-1). Alternatively, the output of “Distance” changed by the music change notice may be started from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 101, “Distance” is not a song released next to “Mega Giga Summer” but a song different from “Todoroke DREAM”. However, “Distance” is the song immediately before “Todoroke DREAM” in the release order. In the song change notice here, such a song of "Distance" is put in between and finally "Todoroke DREAM" is output. In addition, at the stage of FIG. 102 (B13), “Tokeke DREAM” may be displayed in the song title display portion MN.

In FIG. 102 (A14), the music change effect sound effect is output again from the speaker 120, and the length character C11 is raising one hand. Although the song "Distance" is not output from the speaker 120 even after a certain period of time has elapsed since the song name in the song name display portion MN was changed to "Distance", it may be output.

In FIG. 102 (a15), the song title in the song title display section MN is changed to “Todoroke DREAM”, and the speaker 120 outputs the song change effect sound effect again. The song change notice may be successful at the stage when "Todoruke DREAM" is displayed on the song title display portion MN, and the speaker 120 outputs the song "Todoroke DREAM" in FIG. That is, when "Todoroke DREAM" is displayed on the song title display portion MN, the song "Todoroke DREAM" is always output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that there may be a case in which even if "Roar DREAM" is displayed, the speaker 120 does not output the music of "Roar DREAM" and the operation fails.

Also, in this example, when the song change notice is displayed, "Roar DREAM" is always output, but the original "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed in the song name display area MN in FIG. 102 (B15). In the case of failure, it is a failure (disappearance), and thereafter, “mega giga summer” may be output from the speaker 120. Alternatively, when “Distance” is still displayed in the song title display portion MN at the timing of FIG. 102 (B15), it is a failure (disappearance), and then “Distance” may be output from the speaker 120. The original “Mega Giga Summer” may be displayed in the song name display area MN selected by the player, and the output of the song “Mega Giga Summer” may be started.

Depending on whether "Distance" is displayed or "Kimi no Kakera" to be released next to "Mega Giga Summer" is displayed in the song title display area MN at the timing of FIG. It may represent the degree of expectation of a jackpot for fluctuations and/or symbol fluctuations within a hold. That is, the expectation of a big hit may be higher when "Distance" is displayed than when "Kimi no Kakera" is displayed.

In addition, you may express the expectation degree of the big hit about the said fluctuation|variation and/or the fluctuation|variation of symbols in pending|holding by the frequency|count of the change of the music by a music change notice. For example, when the music is changed twice due to the music change notice, the change and/or the pending pattern change may be more likely to be hit big when the music is changed twice. .. Further, when the music changes a certain number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the fluctuation and/or the pattern fluctuation in the hold may be a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich). On the contrary, if the music has changed a certain number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, the loss may be confirmed.

Further, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B16), the animation of “Todoroke DREAM” is also displayed. Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (B19), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7", which is a combination of the jackpot with probability variation, is swayingly displayed. In 20), the combination is confirmed and displayed. In this example, when the song change notice is displayed, the song is always changed to “Todoroke DREAM”, and then the song “Todoroke DREAM” is output from the speaker 120, and “Todoroke DREAM” is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. An animation (including lyrics display) is displayed, which is a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music becomes "Roar DREAM", the music of "Roar DREAM" is output from the speaker 120 and/or "Roar DREAM" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The animation may not be displayed in some cases. That is, even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, it may be lost unless the effect display corresponding to the music is performed next time.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (a21), the start screen of the big hit game is displayed, and the big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120, during the big hit start interval (while the big hit start performance is being executed). Is.

The timing of FIG. 103 (B22) is the timing immediately after the start of the first round. In the jackpot game production in this example, the first round and the second round are music selection periods. When the first round is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 automatically displays the music selection screen. Note that the music selection may be started by the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even during the music selection period, when the selection of the music ends, the music selection screen disappears and the round effect is started. The decorative pattern display device 2
In 08, a display indicating that it is the first round (“1R”) and a display of the number of discharged balls (the number of prize balls) (0pt) are also displayed.

A music release list GR is displayed on the music selection screen. Since we have achieved 4 consecutive villas in this big hit, "Kiseki no Universe" is newly added to the music release list GR and it is selectable. The "New" universe is displayed with the "New" mark. In this example, since the newly added music is displayed in the second row of the music release list GR, “may be there” and “mega giga summer” which have already been released. Is hidden. Here, the newly opened “space of miracle” is selected, and the chorus portion of “space of miracle” is output from the speaker 120. In the music release list GR, the above-mentioned "Roar DREAM" is not displayed, and "Roar DREAM" cannot be selected. However, when the production of "Roar DREAM" is executed, the "Roar DREAM" may be released. In this case, the display position of "Todoroke DREAM" in the music release list GR may be a position directly below the previously released song ("Kimi no Kakera") or the "Kiseki no I" that was released this time. It may be a position directly under the "universe". Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 103, since it is the sixth song in the release order, it may be at the position of the sixth song counting from the beginning song, but in this case, three question marks are displayed side by side. You will be pinched. In addition, when the production of "Todoroke DREAM" is executed, "Todoroke DREAM" among the songs released according to the number of consecutive holidays ("Kiseki no Universe") and "Todoroke DREAM" Only one song may be released, or both songs may be released.

In FIG. 103 (a24), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor csd is aligned with the display of three question marks below the display of "space of miracle" in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks in a row is an unreleased display and the song title is unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unknown what music will be released in the future. It should be noted that at the timing of FIG. 103 (B24), the game ball has begun to win the attacker.

When the cursor csd is aligned with the display where three question marks are lined up, scrolling downward is automatically started (Fig. 103 (a25)), and the cursor csd goes to the end and "there is there" Maybe". Note that instead of automatically scrolling downward, scrolling may be performed by the player's own operation. Further, instead of displaying three question marks side by side, the titles of songs scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Alternatively, on the contrary, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not released. That is, in the music release list GR, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged side by side may not be displayed, and only the released music title may be displayed.

Also in FIG. 103 (B27), the automatic scrolling is not completed, and the chorus part of "the universe of miracle" is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. In addition, during music selection, a part of each music (chorus part in this example) is output so as to loop, but it may not be looped. For example, after outputting for a certain period of time, the next music May be automatically transferred to, or the music may not be output until the next is selected. Further, all of the music pieces may be output from the beginning, or all of the music pieces from the middle (for example, the chorus portion) to the back may be output.

Also in FIG. 103 (B28), the automatic scrolling has not ended, and the cursor csd has not returned to the head "May be there", but from the speaker 120, instead of "the miracle universe," It may be there." The output of the chorus part has started. In addition, it may be configured such that the music "may be there" is not output until the cursor csd is placed at "may be there". FIG. 103(A30) shows that the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling. In FIG. 103(A31), the cursor csd may be located at the top. I don't know," and the automatic scrolling has ended. Normally, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is placed on the display of the target music (may be at the same time as the alignment or before the alignment). The music is started to be output, but "May be there" is being output during the automatic scrolling, so the music that was output at the time of (a) in FIG. The continuation of is output as it is. It should be noted that after the cursor csd is set to "may be there" (may be at the same time as being set or before it is set), "may be there" newly. May be newly started from the beginning of the chorus part of “may be there” (that is, the beginning of the song output by the song selection).

After that, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is brought into alignment with the display of "mega giga summer" as shown in FIG. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 103 (A34), and "mega giga summer" is determined. In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 103 (a35), the display of the determined "mega giga summer" is displayed in red, and the speaker 120 outputs the music determination sound.

When the music is determined in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen. The decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 102 (a36) displays the round effect screen of the second round, and the title "Mega Giga Summer" of the selected song is displayed at the lower left of the decorative design display device 208. Has been done. In addition, the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is output from the speaker 120. The selected song is output from the beginning when the round effect is started. When all the music is output from the beginning of the music as well as the chorus when selecting the music, the music may be output from the continuation at the start of the round effect.

Further, in place of FIG. 102 (B15-1), in FIG. 103 (B15-2-1), the song name of “CREA” is displayed in the song name display portion MN of the decorative pattern display device 208. The song with this song name is a song not included in the table shown in FIG. That is, the music cannot be selected by the player. The music "CREA" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 102 (A15-2-2), and the animation of the character "CREA" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and " The lyrics of the song "CREA" are also displayed. In this way, when a music that cannot be selected by the player comes to be output, the expectation of a big hit may be high or the big hit may be confirmed. However, it may include a case of losing. Further, in the subsequent music selection by the player, the music of "CREA" has been output once, and thus may be added as one of the selectable music in the music release list GR, or vice versa. , Adding may be prohibited. In addition, it may be selectable in the song selection during the big hit game, and may be unselectable in the song selection during the symbol change. On the contrary, it may not be selected in the song selection during the big hit game, and may be selected in the song selection during the symbol change. It may be possible.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of effects by the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (a1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

Further, in FIG. 104, similar to FIG. 100 (ac1), “volume” and “user setting value” of “luminance” are described in the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 of each figure, and “volume” in the lower right. and"
The "actual setting value" of "brightness" is described. Further, the types of "BGM", "SE (sound effect)", and "light emission" of the effects that are actually executed are also described.

In FIG. 104 (a1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user setting value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

In order to forcibly set the volume and the brightness to the actual set values, the effect control data itself may instruct to ignore the user set values and execute the values set by the effect data. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may perform self-management using a table in which effects that ignore values are summarized, or may be managed based on a command from the main control unit 300.

In FIG. 104 (a3), a super reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is developed, and the left symbol temporarily stopped on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and also temporarily stopped. The right symbol that is present moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 104 (a3), the super-reach development BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are displayed according to the super-reach development lamp pattern. Emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

In FIG. 104 (a4), the first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each of them advances from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 104 (a4), the BGM disappears, and the sound effect during super reach development time role moving object is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. In this way, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd and the auditors such as the light guide plate IL perform the directing operation, but the volume and the brightness remain at the user-set values.

It should be noted that the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd temporarily return to the initial positions at appropriate timings.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (a6) displays the scene after the main character and the enemy swordsman duel in the wilderness background screen and the swordsman and swordsman slash each other. In FIG. 104 (wa6), the BGM for super reach is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for the game board and the lamp 452 for the game underframe according to the lamp pattern for the super reach, Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (a7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 104 (c8), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has started, and in FIG. 104 (c9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT has decreased, and thereafter, as shown in the same figure (c10). The chance button 136 is operated at a timing within the operation valid period. During this period (FIG. 104 (Wa7-1) to FIG. 104 (Wa11-1)), the super-reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user-set value, and the super-reach result agitation effect sound is generated. Is also output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the gaming board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value in accordance with the pattern variation lamp pattern. Note that the button effect may correspond to a suggestion that an effect in which the volume and brightness settings are changed may start.

In response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 104 (Ua10), in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (Ua11-1), the effect image is displayed from the scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 104 (wa11-1) in response to the operation of the chance button 136, BGM disappears, and the jackpot confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at 5 levels exceeding the user setting value. In accordance with the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with five levels of brightness exceeding the user set value. That is, both the volume and the brightness are forcibly increased.

Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the effect described in FIG. 104 (wa11-1) is executed. However, if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped and the revival effect may be performed.

In FIG. 104 (a a12), again, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and respectively advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device. 208 overlaps from the front side. Then, in FIG. 104 (wa13), the thousand-box box accessory 224H operates and moves downward from the initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. In (a14) of the same drawing, the light guide plate IL emits light again, and a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image is shown on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In the meantime (FIG. 104 (wa12) to FIG. 104 (wa14)), similarly to FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the big hit confirmation sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user set value. Then, the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 also emit light with 5 levels of brightness in accordance with the big hit confirmation lamp pattern, which also exceeds the user set value.

Even if the accessory does not perform the production operation due to a failure or the like, the volume/luminance may be changed from the user set value, or in this case, the user set value may be left unchanged.

Further, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the button image 136 is displayed, such as in FIG. 104 (a-7-1). That is, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here is a notice (resultingly, a big hit notice) as a result of the button effect, and such a previous change may be treated as one of the big hit confirmation effects.

Further, here, the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation of the accessory such as the thousand-box box accessory 224H is started or the movement of the accessory to the effect position is completed. The volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed according to the above, or the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed a plurality of times by one symbol variation, and the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed only once at a maximum by one symbol variation. Further, here, the volume and the brightness are changed together, but only the volume may be changed, or only the brightness may be changed (the same applies hereafter).

In time, in FIG. 104 (a15), the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the sub-control units 400 and 500 receive the command to return the thousand-carton box accessory 224H to the initial position. It starts moving toward and returns to the initial position. Here, the big hit confirmation sound effect from the speaker 120 is lowered to the user set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 which are emitting light according to the big hit confirmation lamp pattern,
It has been lowered to the user set value. This is returned to the user set value by the sub-control units 400 and 500 receiving the command to return the thousand-box box accessory 224H to the initial position.

Next, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out and becomes faint and gradually disappears. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (wa17), The display of the scene after the swordsmen cut off each other fades in. Further, at this timing, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd start to return to the initial positions. During this period (FIG. 104 (wa16) to FIG. 104 (wa17)) as well as in FIG. 104 (wa15), the jackpot 120 is outputting the jackpot confirmation sound effect at the volume set by the user. The game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452, which emit light according to the confirmation lamp pattern, also emit light at the brightness set by the user.

It should be noted that during the period in which the sound data and/or the light emission data are the same as in FIGS. 104 (a11-1) to (a17), the volume and/or the brightness changes from the user set value, and another sound data is generated. The volume and/or the brightness may be returned to the user-set value when the light emission data is switched to and/or the light emission data. Conversely, the volume and/or the brightness may change from the user-set value over the period in which the sound data and/or the light emission data is switched one or more times.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (a18), the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slash each other is completely restored. Further, at this timing, the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd are stopped at the initial positions. In FIG. 105 (a18), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 are used according to the super reach win use lamp pattern. Emits light with the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. Note that the timing at which the volume and the brightness return to their original positions is not limited to the timing in FIG. 104 (wa15) (the timing at which the accessory (thousand box accessory 224H) begins to return from the effect position toward the initial position), but this timing (background (Display switching timing), a timing at which the victory of the duel scene is confirmed (timing in FIG. 105 (wa a19-1)), or a timing at which the combination of decorative symbols for the big hit is stopped and displayed. May be

In FIG. 105 (a19-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman has fallen down and the main character, the lord, has won is displayed, and the lord's navigation character YM is also in a winning pose. In FIG. 105 (a 19-1 ), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the voice of the main character, “Yatteze,” is the same as the user set value. The level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game underframe lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value in accordance with the super reach winning use lamp pattern.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the confirmation display is performed.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (Ua11-1), in FIG. 105 (Ua11-2), after the swordsman and the swordsman slash each other in response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 104 (Ua10). The display of the scene is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is displayed as a large symbol (shaking display). This is a display indicating that the button effect has failed. At this time, the BGM for defeating the super reach is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp 442 for the game board according to the ramp pattern for defeating the super reach. The gaming frame lamp 452 emits light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. As described above, the volume and/or the brightness do not have to be changed from the user set value when the rendering fails, or when the loss richness or the loss is confirmed, the volume and/or the brightness can be changed from the user set value. Good.

Further, instead of FIG. 104 (wa11-1), the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (wa11-2') is the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. However, in this example, the volume is lower than the user set value and the brightness is also lower than the user set value. In this way, the volume and/or the brightness may be reduced when the rendering fails, or when the loss richness or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and/or the brightness may be lowered when the effect is successful or when the big hit is concentrated or the big hit is confirmed.

In place of FIG. 104 (Wa7-1), button effect is not started in FIG. 105 (Wa7-2-1), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the same (Wa7-2-2), A magnified display of the main character's lord's character is displayed to inform that he or she has won. As described above, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the accessory (movable means) such as the thousand box accessory 224H is not involved, when the specific effect display is displayed, The volume and/or the brightness may be forcibly changed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (a7-2-3), the display returns to the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other, and the volume and brightness also returned to the same level as the user set value. ing.

It should be noted that the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed depending on not only the accessory and the display but also the effect by another effect means. Examples of other presentation means here include a light guide plate IL, a versatile light (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like. The volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed in response to a winning of a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a starting opening, an attacker) or a passage through a specific gate. Furthermore, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed even in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

Further, instead of FIG. 105 (wa a19-1), in the example continuing from the same drawing (wa a19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the same drawing (wa a19-2-1), The display of the scene where the protagonist's lord wins fades out as shown in the same figure (wa a19-2-3), and then, as shown in the same figure (wa a19-2-4), the first decorative pattern is The combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging manner. In this example, after the volume and brightness are forcibly changed in FIG. 104 (w a11-1), the state is continued to FIG. 105 (w a19-2-3), and then the user setting value is returned. That is, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is completed or until the same decorative pattern is lined up and three shaking displays are started. Further, it may be continued until the shaking display is completed. Further, the state in which the volume and the brightness are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judgment effect is finished.

Although the volume and/or the brightness is forcibly increased when the accessory is operated, the volume or the brightness may be decreased. Further, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume or/and the brightness may not change. Alternatively, the player may prepare a volume or brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, even if the value is changed to a value larger than the maximum value which is the user set value or a value smaller than the minimum value which is the user set value. Good.

Further, the brightness may increase and the volume may decrease, and conversely, the volume may increase and the brightness may decrease. Further, the brightness may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the brightness may not change. Further, when the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain the same, or the value forcibly changed is displayed. May be. Also, the volume or brightness may be adjustable by the player when the volume or brightness changes, or may not be adjustable when the volume or brightness changes.

FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed. Note that the display mode of the variable icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon in which the volume or/and the brightness is not forcibly changed. For example, when the expectation of a big hit changes to a mode in which the expectation is not so high, the volume or/and the brightness may not be forcibly changed. For example, if the expectation of a big hit increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and iridescent, the volume or/and brightness must be forcibly changed unless the change is greater than red. Good. Alternatively, conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed.

FIG. 104 (c) is an example in which the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed when an effect (hot effect) with a high expectation of a big hit appears. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104(c), the conversation notice enclosed by the red frame appears. The hot effect is an effect using red, gold, or iridescent, and in this case, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed. The amount of change may be different for red (for example, 1 level up), for gold (for example, 2 level up), and for rainbow color (for example, up to the maximum level), or the same. It may be.

FIG. 104 (d) is an example in which the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the decorative decorative pattern for the loss is temporarily stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (d-2), thereafter, the revival effect accompanied by the wipe effect is executed. In this case, the volume or/and the brightness may be changed before the result display. That is, the volume or/and the brightness may be forcibly changed at the same time when the revival effect is started.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in “Character selection” shown in FIG. 63(b), “Copanda” of 07 is set, and in “Holding frame selection”, 04 “Holding frame D” to which the fusible image for wipe effect is added is displayed. The “holding display selection” is set to 03 “icon C”, and the background display selection is set to 05 “background E”.

In the description here, the color used in the rendering represents the high expectation of the big hit, and the expectation of the big hit increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow. For example, a color or the like as a display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be used. Hereinafter, a color change in a direction in which the expectation of a big hit increases may be referred to as promotion. This also applies to the following description. Note that this can also be applied to the above description.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (d), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 has been accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode of the icon C, is displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106D, the background of the background E (empty background) is displayed.

After that, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by two, and three holding icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the stop display shown in FIG. 106 (3). Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 106 (D4), one hold is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. Further, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not been started yet.

In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 106 (d), the movement animation of the first holding icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation of the holding icons h12 and h13 are started, but the sliding effect sliding window is used. The image appears from the left and right. It should be noted that the animation for moving the first hold icon h11 toward the pedestal hs0 and the shift movement animation for the hold icons h12 and h13 may not be performed during the appearance of the fusuma image for the wipe effect. In FIG. 106(D6), the sliding door image is in a fully closed state (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is invisible. In FIG. 106(D7), the variable display of the first decorative pattern is also started, and in FIG. 106(D8), the first decorative pattern is changing rapidly. In FIG. 106 (D8) also, the hold frame UI is in the wipe-in state).

In FIG. 106 (D9-1), the wipeout is started, and the sliding effect sliding door image is beginning to open. In FIG. 106 (D10), the sliding door image is in a fully opened state (wipeout state). In the wipe effect here, the holding frame is changed. That is, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 106D is a "holding frame R" different from the "holding frame D" selected by the player in the customization setting, and the holding is surrounded by a red frame. It becomes a frame. The “holding frame R” is a holding frame that cannot be selected by the customization setting, but it may be selectable. In addition, the foot of the navigation character YM is invisible due to the red frame. The "holding frame R" is a holding frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the holding icon is likely to change, and "Holding change!? Time" is beside the co-panda of the navigation character YM. Character display is displayed. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice target is a hold of the first hold icon h11 because one hold is exhausted in FIG. 106 (4). Here, the "hold change!? time" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high-probability state for effect".

The bomber icon I3 appears from the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (D12) and passes over the holding frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile toward the hold icon, and the missile hits the first hold icon h11, which is the hold of the prefetching notice target. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 hit by the missile changes, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (d13) changes to the blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not fired, the missile does not hit any of the holding icons or the fluctuation icons, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits. There may be. All of these correspond to the failure of promotion production.

In FIG. 106 (D15), the reach state is reached, and in the same drawing (D16), the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. There are red design and blue design for the pending change pattern. When the red pending change pattern is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is elevated by two stages, and when the blue pending change pattern is temporarily stopped, the pending icon The display mode is promoted by one level. FIG. 106
In (D16), the red pending change pattern is temporarily stopped, and in (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 106 (D17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in FIG. (D18), the effect image Ed3 disappears and the first hold icon h11 becomes The display mode has changed to red. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (D19), the middle pattern, which was a red pending change pattern until now, changes to "decoration 2", and "decoration 1"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 1". The combination of is variably displayed (temporarily stopped). In FIG. 106 (D20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

In FIG. 106 (D22), the red hold icon that has been the first hold icon 11 so far is moved to the pedestal hs0 and is displayed as the variable icon h0 in the red display mode. Even when the hold of the prefetching notice target is exhausted, the display of the characters "Hold change!? Time" continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 106 (D23), a gold ray is radiated from the navigation character YM toward the variable icon h0, and in FIG. 106 (D24), the variable icon that has been red until now has changed to gold.

In FIG. 106 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. 106 (D28), the super reach effect is developed. In the super reach production, the sky background is switched to the wilderness background and the duel scene is displayed. In the super reach state, the hold frame UI is left on the pedestal hs0 and the rest is all gone, and the hold icon is also gone. However, the variation icon h0 has not disappeared, and the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. The pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 106 (d) is the pedestal of the "holding frame D" before being changed by the wipe effect. That is, the original pedestal. However, it may be the pedestal of the "holding frame R" after being changed by the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the variation icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or the normal reach state (FIG. 106 (D26)). Further, the entire hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach effect is finished, the hidden frame UI, the hold icon, and the like that have been hidden may be displayed, and after the super reach effect is finished, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol variation. The holding frame D may be displayed from the start of the display.

In this example, the color of the frame of the holding frame UI remains red even when the reach state is reached, but if the color of the frame of the holding frame UI also changes, the big hit expectation level is increased. Good.

It should be noted that the holding frame (for example, "holding frame R") that is not selected by the player is more than that when the prefetch holding icon is displayed in the holding frame (for example, "holding frame D") selected by the player. When the look-ahead hold icon is displayed, it may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally displayed more easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player. A case where the look-ahead hold icon is displayed in a hold frame (for example, "hold frame R") not selected by the player, as compared to the case where the read-ahead hold icon is displayed in (for example, "hold frame D") However, even if the same look-ahead hold icon is displayed, the jackpot pattern may be finally displayed easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the look-ahead hold icon.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 106.

In place of FIG. 106 (D9-1), in FIG. 107 (D9-2-1), both the hold icon and the variable icon have once changed to a special mode (character). In addition, the navigation character YM has also changed to panda. In this example, thereafter, the display mode of each color reflects the expectation of the big hit. Here, the easiness of changing to a color with a high expectation of a big hit is determined by the mode of the character once displayed.

In FIG. 107 (D9-2-2), a mini game with the panda of the navigation character YM is played. The character that has won the mini game changes to a color icon (holding icon or variable icon) with a high expectation of a big hit. The grandpa character has a 50% chance of winning, the princess character has a 75% chance of winning, and the lord's character has a 100% chance of winning. A premium character may be provided in addition to the lord's character. The premier character changes to an icon of a color that confirms a big hit (rainbow color here).

In FIG. 107 (D9-2-3), a rock-paper-scissors game is played as a mini game, and all rock-paper-scissors games are played. As a result, both of the old characters lost, and the lord's character won. In addition, a plurality of characters may win.

In FIG. 107 (D9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and after the fusuma image shown in (D9-2-5) is completely closed (the wipe-in state), the wipe-out is performed (the same figure). (D9-2-6)), in the holding frame UI shown in (D9-2-7) of the same figure, the second holding icon h12 is changed to a blue holding icon. Note that the hold frame UI remains “holding frame D”.

107(e1) to FIG. 107(e12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of fluctuations.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e1), the holding frame UI of the holding frame D is displayed, and in the effect icon display area DIS, a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM. In addition, two reservations of special figure 1 are accumulated, and a first reservation icon h11 and a second reservation icon h12, which are the default display modes of the icon C, are displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e1), the background of the background E (empty background) is displayed.

In FIG. 107 (e2), the number of the hold of special figure 1 is increased by one and the number of the third hold icons h13 is increased. Here, the hold of the prefetching notice target is the hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 107 (e3), the combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. (e4), one hold is consumed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in (e4). The variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In FIG. 107 (e5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears in the effect icon display area DIS on the carpet icon I2. In this example, the icon I1 of the treasure box of the change notice display is displayed on standby. After that, one hold is exhausted, and the hold of the prefetching notice object becomes the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 107 (e7), the combination of lost decorative patterns is stopped and displayed, and the icon I1 of the treasure box continues to be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS while remaining on the icon I2 of the carpet.

In FIG. 107 (e9), the hold of the first hold icon h11, which is the hold of the prefetching notice target, is exhausted, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (e9) starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure box icon I1 is still displayed while remaining on the carpet icon I2, and this treasure box icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of fluctuations. In FIG. 107 (e10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. That is, in FIG. 107 (e11), the treasure box with the treasure box icon I1 is wide, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigation character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 107 (e12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the copanda selected by the player in the above-described customization setting has changed to the navigation character YM of the length. The navigator character YM of the bancho is a character that cannot be selected by the customization setting, but may be made selectable.

In addition, in this example, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is displayed in addition to the navigation character YM across the true symbol variation display such as the symbol variation display of the special figure. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the change. For example, the change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, and the navigation character YM which is constantly displayed is changed due to the change notice display at the third pseudo-repeating time, or before the change. The change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the change, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo run, and the navigation character YM that is constantly displayed by the change notice display is displayed at the third pseudo run. May change.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of effects in the pachinko machine set to the automatic button mode.

The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the automatic button mode, and the upper right of the decorative pattern display device 208 indicates that the automatic button mode is set.

In FIG. 108(A1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols that are lost on the background of the sea. In addition, one hold of the special figure 1 is accumulated, and the first hold icon h11, which is the default display mode, is displayed. The navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI. A chance button 136 is shown at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 108(A1) is normally lit in white. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 is always turned on even outside the chance button operation valid period, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the chance button operation valid period. May be

In FIG. 108(A2), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted, the variable display of symbols is started, and then the conversation announcement is started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in a reduced size and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the grandfather character is displayed. At the same time, the old conversation image CI2 on which the button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image that prompts the chance button 136 to be pressed within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is configured. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 108 (A5-1), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation image CI1 is moreover overlapped than in the case where it is not overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the conversation image CI1. In this example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the pal's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the pal's conversation image CI1 may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (A6). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing of FIG. 108(A6). The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108(A6) starts blinking in white.

At the timing of FIG. 108(A7), the suspension of Toku-zu 1 increases. However, the hold icon is not yet displayed at this timing. In addition, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced due to the lapse of time after the start of the operation valid period. In FIG. 108 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 108(A8-1) is a button hold icon, and a red button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. Although the remaining period meter MT is not displayed, it may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1) changes to lighting in blue and starts vibrating in response to the appearance of the button holding icon.

In FIG. 108(A10), a certain period of time has passed since the operation effective period of the button effect in the conversation announcement was started. Then, the auto button mode functions in response to the button effect in the conversation notice, the old conversation image CI2 is updated as shown in FIG. 108(A11), and the message "Summer vacation still or not" is displayed as a response display to the auto button. The text display is displayed. Note that the button hold icon does not function in the automatic button mode, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIGS. 108(A12) to (A13), as an operation promoting mode for the button holding icon, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while lighting blue.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (A15), a combination of lost decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 108(A15) has finished vibrating, and has returned from blue lighting to normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 108(A14), the chance button 136 has finished vibrating and has returned to white lighting. This is because the operation valid period of the button hold icon has expired. The operation valid period of the button hold icon may be terminated, for example, when a predetermined valid period has elapsed, or the decorative design may be terminated by performing the first stop, or the decorative design The process may be ended when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still in the display mode of the button hold icon. Then, in FIG. 108 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11 which is the button hold icon is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108(A16), the second decorative symbol has started variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started variable display, and the display mode of the button holding icon is changed. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

In FIG. 108(A17), the hold decrease animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the button hold icon starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and in FIG. , A button suspension icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the display mode, and a change animation is started on the pedestal hs0 in the same figure (A19). In the same figure (A20), a change icon h0 in a blue display mode is displayed. It's changing.

109 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 108 and the like.

Then, in FIG. 109 (A22), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 109 (A23), the first decorative symbol is fluctuating at high speed.

In this example, the automatic button mode is set all the time, but the chance button 136 was not operated by the time the fixed pattern change display changed to the button hold icon is confirmed regardless of the setting of the automatic button mode. In this case, the display mode automatically changes after the hold decrease animation. In other words, while the button hold icon is in the hold mode of the display mode, it changes to the hold icon of the blue display mode in response to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold decrease animation is started (the change icon h0 It can be seen that the change icon h0 is displayed, and the display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

Also, the automatic button mode may be terminated by operating the chance button 136 during the automatic button mode. In that case, while the remaining period meter MT is displayed, the automatic button mode may not be terminated even if the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button is displayed even when the remaining period meter MT is displayed. The operation of 136 may terminate the auto button mode.

If the chance button 136 has not been operated, the variable icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or may not be changed to the blue variable icon h0. You may change to the change icon h0 of the display mode of. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not end. Furthermore, the fact that the change icon h0 in the blue display mode does not change when the chance button 136 is not operated is the same whether in the automatic button mode or in the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and further, it may be changed in the auto button mode but not changed in the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period in the state where the auto button mode is not set, the character display of "Summer vacation still?" is displayed as shown in FIG. 108 (A11). The old conversation image CI2 is not updated. However, it may be updated.

Also, in place of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. The button display icon 136D also displays a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Also, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-1), a meter display MW' is also displayed. The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2), a button display icon 136D is displayed together with the grand conversation image CI2 on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes without button operation. There is.

Also, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-3), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In this case, the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times, and the automatic button function does not have to work even in the case of an effect in which the chance button 136 needs to be operated a plurality of times. It should be noted that, if the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may be activated for the remaining button effect images.

Also, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-4), a button effect image (button is displayed on the second display device 208S arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 (first display device). The image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In the example of FIG. 109 (Aa5-4), the number of button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S is one, but one or a plurality of button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S include The button function may not work.

In addition, instead of FIG. 108 (A5-1), in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-1), the decorative pattern display device 208 is informed to prompt continuous hitting of the chance button 136. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2), the button repeated hit effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and continuous hit meter RHM. .. The automatic button function does not work for the button repeated hit effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt the operation. Then, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), the consecutive hits of the chance button 136 are started, the consecutive hit meter RHM shown in (Aa5-5-6) of the same figure rises, and the response display is performed. In FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-5), continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, and a response display such as an increase in the continuous hit meter RHM is also displayed. However, the chance button 136 shown in (Aa5-5-6) of FIG. It continues to vibrate and continues to illuminate in blue. In the examples so far, it is sufficient to operate the chance button 136 once, but in this example, since continuous hits are required, the vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 are continued. Note that, even in the case of long-pressing, since the operation of the chance button 136 becomes long as in the continuous hitting, the technical idea here can be applied. The timing of FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation valid period elapses and the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. The vibration and blue lighting of the chance button 136 continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. After that, the chance button 136 immediately stops vibrating and returns to white lighting. The auto button function may be activated when the operation is performed once or more. In addition, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press auto continuous hitting function is configured to work, so that the same response display as when performing the continuous hitting operation is displayed by performing long pressing for a certain period. However, if the auto button function does not work, the long press auto continuous hitting function may not work.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 108.

Instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), in the example continuing from FIG. 110 (A8-2-1), after the operation valid period of the button holding icon has started, with respect to the button effect in the conversation notice. In this example, the chance button 136 is operated once before the automatic button function of 1. In this case, both the response effect of the button hold icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button holding icon is changed as the response effect of the button holding icon, and the old conversation image CI2 is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation announcement. The change in the button holding icon corresponds to a pre-reading notice, and the update of the old conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice also corresponds to the pre-reading notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. The change in the button change icon in FIG. 108(A20) corresponds to a normal notice.

In addition, you may make it display only the response production of the person whose auto button function does not work. That is, only the change animation of the button holding icon may be displayed, and the old conversation image CI2 may not be updated. Alternatively, on the contrary, only the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function may be displayed.

Further, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who does not operate the auto button function may be displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who operates the automatic button function may be displayed. On the contrary, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who operates the automatic button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not operate the automatic button function is displayed. You may

Further, although the above description using FIG. 110 (A-8-2-1) to FIG. 110 (A-8-2-4) was made during the setting of the automatic button mode, the automatic button mode is not set yet. The same is true for.

110 (Aa8-3) instead of FIG. 108 (A8-1), the chance button 136 vibrates and emits a special color (blue here) even when the automatic button mode is not set. Indicates. It should be noted that different notifications may be given when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

In place of FIG. 108 (A8-1), in FIG. 110 (Aa8-3′), when the automatic button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits a normal color (blinks white here). Here is an example.

Further, as another example, in FIG. 110 (Ab1), during the big hit game, the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the chance button 136 should be repeatedly struck. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (Ab2), the button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed together with the display of the third round, but during the big hit game, the auto button function is used. May not be activated, or conversely, the auto button function may be activated.

FIG. 110 (Ba1-1) to FIG. 110 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of effect regarding the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 110 (Ba1-1), the effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit in white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 110 (Ba2), the appearance of a button holding icon (first holding icon h11) in which the auto button function does not work causes the chance button 136 to start vibrating and change to blue lighting to prompt an operation. In FIG. 110 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which was the button hold icon, has changed (see FIG. 110 (Ba1-5)).

110(Ba1-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 110(Ba1-1), the only difference is that in FIG. 110(Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It changes to blue lighting, which means that the back button has been notified.

The remaining period meter MT, which represents the remaining period of the operation valid period described above, will be described in more detail. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the remaining period meter MT described above is displayed. The display mode of the remaining period meter MT is changed according to the passage of time (in this example, the reduced display is performed), and the display state is located behind the remaining time display region MT1 according to the passage of time. Is changed (in this example, an increase display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color or shape) of the remaining time display area MT1 and/or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is red instead of the default color (white in this example). When it is displayed in. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode, and when the remaining time display area MT1 is reduced and displayed as time passes, it is displayed in a special display mode as time passes. Display area (in the present example, the decorative pattern display device 20
It may be possible to focus on 8). On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode and the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased with the passage of time, Along with this, the area displayed in the special display mode increases, so that the player who wants to see the special display mode in the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (such as the chance button 136 in this example). It may be possible to increase variations in how to enjoy the game and improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. The remaining time display area MT1 and/or the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed at the time when the remaining time meter is first displayed (in the remaining time display area MT1, the remaining time meter is first displayed. In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the remaining time display area MT1 decreases and the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible for the first time.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time elapses after the operation valid period elapses.

Further, the navigation character YM explained so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the navigation character YM described so far is displayed. First, the navigation character may be configured not to give various notices. Further, another navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character B”) may be displayed while the navigation character (hereinafter, “navi character A”) is being displayed. In that case, the navigation character A displayed earlier may be overlapped with the navigation character B displayed later, and conversely, the navigation character B displayed later may be displayed first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions that do not overlap each other. For example, there is a case where the navigation character YM that is constantly displayed overlaps with one or a plurality of variations by a navigation character that gives advance notice and/or prefetch notice. Furthermore, the change notice display may be performed by performing the effect display indicating that the change notice display may be displayed by the navigation character.

FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the overlap relationship between the display of the ball-out notification that is notified by the occurrence of the plate full error and the other displays of the brightness adjustment windows BW.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111(α1), the hold frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative patterns (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative pattern (third pattern) and the second decorative pattern (fifth pattern). The special variable symbol display is stopped. Furthermore, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number of special figure 1 and the hold number of special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the design variable display is not started after the fixed display of the special symbols is confirmed, and the menu icon MI, so that the lower portion of the first decorative symbol overlaps from the front side. A volume adjustment icon VI and a brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. In addition, a ball-out notification such as "Please remove the ball" is displayed at the bottom of the first decorative pattern so as to overlap from the front side. The display of the ball-out notification is a slightly transparent display, and when the display of the ball-out notification is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the display on the back side becomes slightly visible. Hereinafter, what is displayed so as to overlap from the front side or what is displayed in the layer on the front side may be simply referred to as “overlap”. It should be noted that the display of the ball-out notification may be a display in which the display on the back side is completely invisible. Furthermore, a sound such as "please pull out the ball" is also output from the speaker 120.

The display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the upper left second decorative design and the upper right second hold number display, and does not overlap these displays. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as to never overlap with the second decorative symbol or/and the second held number display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display position of the frame RW at the upper right of the screen for notifying the current setting state, and the display does not overlap with this frame RW either. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the frame RW, or may overlap. Further, the display of the notification of the ball removal is displaced from the display position of the holding frame UI and does not overlap the holding UI. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the holding frame UI, or may overlap.

In FIG. 111(α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. Although the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed after the display of the notification of the ball removal, the display of the notification of the ball removal has priority, and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on a layer behind the display of the notification of the ball removal. It is displayed. That is, the display of the notification of removal of the ball overlaps the brightness adjustment window BW.

Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, the brightness adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are also hidden, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111(α3), 1 The variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. However, the ball removal operation is not yet performed, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. Note that the same operation is performed when the bowl emptying operation is performed and the dish full tank error is once resolved, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and a new ball removal notification display is displayed. The display of the ball-out notification overlaps the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 111 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and the bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the holding frame UI. The volume display bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variable icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the volume display bar display VB is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated each time the bar display VB is displayed. By operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit, it is possible to display the bar display for brightness adjustment, and this bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. The following description of the volume display bar display VB can be applied to the brightness adjustment bar display. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed at the same time. Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment or the bar display for brightness adjustment may be always displayed, or may be displayed only for a certain period. Also, the display may be possible only while operating the left and right keys or the up and down keys.

Further, the bar display VB for volume adjustment and the display of the ball-out notification are displayed at positions where they do not overlap. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or may overlap.

Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from both the hold icon and the variable icon in the display position and does not overlap these icons. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold icon and/or the variable icon, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display of the navigation character YM and does not overlap the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the navigation character YM, or may overlap.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α4), the super reach effect is being performed, and the duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. Here too, the display of the ball notification is displayed, the left pattern of "decoration 7" moved to the upper left, the right pattern of "decoration 7" moved to the upper right, and the display of the ball notification is overlapped. ing. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is also overlapped with the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness. Note that the volume can be adjusted even during the super reach, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α4). The bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the display of the duel scene in the background of the wilderness.

The start screen of the big hit game is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5), but the big hit start effect display here also overlaps the ball-out notification display. In addition, even during the big hit game, the volume can be adjusted, and a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α5). The bar display VB for adjusting the volume also overlaps the big hit start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the right-hit suggestion display (display different from the right-hit warning. This is equivalent to the mini right-hit display of FIG. 18 (52) described above) at the upper left of the screen. It does not overlap the right-handed hint display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as to never overlap with the right-handing suggestion display, or may overlap. The right-handed suggestion display may not be displayed on the big hit game start screen.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α6), a right-hit instruction screen for instructing the player to right-hit is displayed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is the first big hit (the normal big hit state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) to the first big hit (first consecutive solitary) big hit. The 1st (1st consecutive villa) big hit from (special figure high-accuracy ordinary figure low probability) and the first (1st consecutive villa) big hit from sudden probability change (special figure high-accuracy general figure high-accuracy) Note that the latent probability variation state and/or sudden probability variation state described above refer only to the state that has transitioned from the normal state, excluding those that occurred in the probability variation state or the shortened state). However, a right hitting instruction screen may be displayed for each big hit. The right hitting instruction screen here overlaps the display of the notification of the ball removal, while the right hitting suggestion display does not overlap the display of the notification of the ball removal. In this example, the right-handing warning display (corresponding to the right-handing notification in FIG. 17 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display at the time of right-handing of the hitting warning in FIG. 116 described later) is displayed while the right-handing instruction screen is displayed. Although not performed, the right-handed warning display may be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is being displayed. Further, while the left-handing warning display (corresponding to the liquid crystal display at the time of left-handing of the hitting warning of FIG. 116 described later) is not displayed during the display of the right-handing instruction screen, it may be displayed. Further, although the right-handing suggestion display is performed while the right-handing instruction screen is being displayed, the right-handing suggestion display may not be performed while the right-handing instruction screen is being displayed.

In FIG. 111 (α7), the first round is started and the round effect is displayed. The display of the notification of removal of the ball and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the display of the round effect. It should be noted that the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display of the number of rounds at the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap with the display of the number of rounds. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the number of rounds display, or may be displayed in some cases. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the display of the number of discharged balls (0 pt) at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap with the displayed number of discharged balls. The display of the notification of ball removal may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the number of discharged balls, or may be displayed in some cases.

In FIG. 111 (α8) of the fourth round, promotion production is performed in the fifth round, which suggests whether or not there is a big chance that the second variable winning a prize opening will be open for a long time and it will be easy to pass V. As a result, a success effect indicating that the promotion effect is successful is being executed. That is, it is informed that it is a big hit game in which the probability variation transition condition is easily established. The display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the display of the successful presentation. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111(α8), the display of the star “V chance GET” is also started. The display of the notification of the ball removal is displaced from the display of the "V chance GET" of this star mark, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the star "V chance GET", or may be displayed in some cases.

In FIG. 111 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the big hit game, and also urges you to perform V passage in this round. The display "Aim for V" is displayed. As a result, it may be possible for the player to surely perform the V passage. The display of the ball-out notification overlaps with the display "Aim for V".

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), there is a passage (V passage) of the game ball to the probability variation operation area in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is informed that the probability variation acquisition has been confirmed. The display of "V" is large. That is, the display of "V", which is the notification that the probability variation acquisition has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that there is V passage. The display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the display of "V". It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (α10), the display of the star mark “V chance GET” may be hidden.

When the fifth round ends, a big hit game end effect is performed in a manner as shown in FIG. 111 (α11). In the above-mentioned big hit game, since the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, while the symbol fluctuation display is displayed for a certain number of times after the end of the big hit game, the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure High probability state). Therefore, in the big hit game end effect, a display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that the state changes to the probability changing state (probability changing effect) is performed. The display of the notification of removal of the ball and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush". It should be noted that the right hit suggestion display is also displayed in the end effect of the big hit game, but it may not be displayed.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α12), a prepaid card forgetting warning display (corresponding to the caution display of FIG. 18 (57) described above) is displayed. The display of the notification of the removal of the ball and the bar display VB for adjusting the volume overlap the warning display for forgetting to remove the prepaid card. In the end effect of the prepaid card forgetting warning display, the right-handing suggestion display is displayed, but it may not be displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α13), a display of the number of big hits (BONUS×3) is displayed just below the right-handing suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. Further, a music title display portion MN is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and up and down key icons of the operation key unit are displayed on the left side thereof. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

The display of the ball-out notification is different from the display of the number of big hits, and does not overlap with this display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap with the display of the number of big hits, or may be overlapped. In addition, the display of the ball-out notification is also displaced from the song title display portion MN, and does not overlap the song title display portion MN. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed on the song title display portion MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the icon of the up/down key and does not overlap with the icon of the up/down key. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the icons of the up and down keys, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball-out notification is displaced from the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen.
It does not overlap with the hold number display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the second hold number display, or may overlap.

Further, although the volume display bar display VB shown in FIG. 111 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, it may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α14), a big hit game start screen is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α15), the music selection screen shown in FIG. 103 is displayed. The display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the music release list GR.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α16), the music selection is finished and the round effect is started. At the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (α16), the title of the currently selected song is displayed. The display of the ball-out notification is different from the display of the song title display and does not overlap with the song title display. The display of the ball-out notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the music title display, or may overlap.

In addition, in FIG. 111 (α17) of the fourth round, a display “Aim for V with the next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and in FIG. 111 (α18) of the fifth round, “ The display "Aim for V" is displayed, and the display of the ball-out notification overlaps these displays displayed on the right side of the screen. Here, FIG. 111 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the fourth round. In addition, FIG. 111 (α18) indicates the start of the fifth round, and may correspond to the case where the special electric power combination operating signal of the main control unit 300 changes from OFF to ON. In this case, the period between FIG. 111 (α17) and FIG. 111 (α18) corresponds to the period of the inter-round interval from the end of 4 rounds to the start of 5 rounds, and the signal indicating that the special electric wheel is operating of the main control unit 300 is It will be the period from on to off.

Further, in FIG. 111 (α19), “V” is displayed on the right side of the screen due to V passing, and the display of the ball-out notification overlaps with the display of “V”. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap with the display of "V".

Note that FIG. 111 (α20) may be a state in which 5R is being executed and a certain period of time has passed after V passage, or at the end of 5 rounds (for example, the remaining ball detection period of the main control unit). (A period corresponding to the end).

After that, the jackpot game progresses up to 15 rounds (Fig. 111 (α21) to (23) in Fig. 111), and in Fig. 111 (α24), the display of "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed as in the same diagram (α11). ) Is displayed, and the bar display VB for displaying the notification of the removal of the ball and the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlap with the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush”. In FIG. 111 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the inter-round interval.

Note that there is a time lag between the timing in the main control unit 300 and the actual timing because the command is transmitted from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 receives it, and various controls are performed.

Further, in FIG. 111, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the inter-round interval. For example, "5R" is displayed during the inter-round interval between the fifth round and the sixth round, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number part may be hidden.

The same is true at the end of 15 rounds, and round display may be performed or non-display may be performed during the inter-round interval.

In this example, the right-handed warning display may be displayed during the big hit, but the left-handed warning display may not be displayed, but the left-handed warning display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the warning is not given.

The display of the ball-out notification is described above as an example, but the description here is not limited to the display of the ball-out notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in FIGS. 114 and 115). It is applicable to the display of the notification regarding

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a display example of the ball-out notification.

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112(β) is such that the display behind the ball-out notification is completely invisible.

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps with the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) overlaps a part of the brightness adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. It should be noted that the display of the notification of removal of the ball may overlap the entire brightness adjustment window BW or the entire volume adjustment icon VI. Further, the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display like the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 111, and the display on the back side is slightly visible. However, it may be a display in which the display on the rear side is completely invisible, such as the display of the notification of the ball removal shown in FIG.

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ2) overlaps the bar display VB for volume adjustment displayed during the symbol variation display. The display of this ball-out notification does not overlap with the navigation character YM, but the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps with the navigation character YM. Further, the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ1) may be a display in which the display on the back side is completely invisible, like the display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (β). ,the same.). Not only the volume adjusting bar, but also functions that can be set by the player while the symbol is changing and the display regarding the above-mentioned Daitomo (the above-mentioned production customizing screen shown in FIG. 65(V) and (V′), etc. A list of the missions achieved by the player's operation regardless of the variation status of the symbols while the song title display area MN shown in FIG. 102(1), the bar for brightness adjustment, and the user mode (Daitomo) are being set. Display of game history (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of jackpots played this time, maximum number of consecutive games played this time, etc.), character or background set by user, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed.

The display of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1) overlaps the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM. When the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 112 (γ3-1), the volume display bar display VB is displayed. In the display of the ball-out notification and the bar display VB for volume adjustment, the display of the ball-out notification is prioritized and displayed on the front side. Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be prioritized and displayed on the front side. In any case, the volume display bar display VB also overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and may also overlap the hold icon h11.

In FIG. 112 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 112 (γ3-2), the display of the ball-out notification is overlapped with the volume display bar display VB.

In FIG. 112 (δ3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 112 (δ3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation to notify the removal of the ball. Is overlaid on the display. Here, the display of the notification of ball removal overlaps the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap a part of the display of notification of ball removal. In addition, the navigation character YM may not perform animation such that it overlaps the whole or part of the display of the notification of ball removal. This technical idea can be applied to the display regarding other errors described later.

In FIG. 112(ε), the display of the ball-out notification does not have a frame display but is displayed only in characters.

FIG. 112 (ζ1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball ejection lever 132. By the peripheral image display 132G, a part of each of the first decorative symbol, the menu icon MI, the volume adjusting icon VI, and the brightness adjusting icon BI is overlapped.

In FIG. 112 (ζ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the same character display as the character display of “Aim for V” shown in FIG. 111 (α9) to hide the character display.

In FIG. 112 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim V at next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 111 (α17).

In FIG. 112 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star “V chance GET”.

In FIG. 112 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the display of “Aim for V at the next R” displayed on the right side.

In FIG. 112 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the volume display bar display VB and hides a part of the volume adjustment bar display VB. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap all of the volume display bar display VB. Note that, in this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star “V chance GET”.

In FIG. 112 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the volume display bar display VB and a part of “Aim for V with the next R” on the right side.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

An example of errors A to E shown in FIG. 113 will be described later. The ball-out notification may or may not be included in these errors A to E.

In FIG. 113(ι1), the transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and the warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 113(ι1′), an opaque display indicating the error A is displayed.

In FIG. 113(ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, as in FIG. 112(γ3-1), and other points. Is the same as the description in FIG. 112 (γ3-1).

In FIG. 113(ι3-1), a plurality of types of error display (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, a newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the first generated error is the error A. From the speaker 120, the latest warning sound of the error E is output. Note that the warning sounds may be output in the order of occurrence of all displayed errors.

In FIG. 113(ι3-2), since the error E is eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears, and the warning sound of the error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the error that occurred last is canceled, the warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

In FIG. 113 (ι3-2′), the volume display bar display VB overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of error A notification to error E notification). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the transparent display of the error E notification at the bottom, and the character display of the error E is hidden. It should be noted that a plurality of types of error displays may overlap the volume display bar display VB.

In FIG. 113(ι4-1), when an error occurs in the order of error ABCDE, the error with the highest priority to be notified is displayed above, and the speaker 120 outputs the warning sound of the error with the highest priority. To be done. An error with a high priority is an error with a high degree of importance (for example, a serious error for a game shop), and specifically, it may be the order of the list shown in FIG. 114. In FIG. 113(ι4-1), the error B has the highest priority.

In FIG. 113(ι4-2), since the error B is eliminated, the transparency display of the error B notification disappears, and the speaker 120 outputs the warning sound of the error E, which is the second error so far.

In FIG. 113(ι5-1), an error A occurs, a transparency display of the error A notification is displayed, and a warning sound of the error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, the error Z occurs. Error Z is an error to stop the game, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (ι5-2) is a blue screen, and all the displays except the display related to the error Z are not displayed. ing. The error to stop the game here is an error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error) in which the main control unit 300 does not perform various lottery. That is, it is an error that the main control unit 300 cannot perform various lottery, or does not perform various lottery even if it is possible. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 like the error Z is not limited to the error for stopping the game, but is, for example, an effect moving means error described later or an error for stopping the payout operation. Good. Although some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 116 described later may be the error Z, conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. May not be displayed in the display mode of the error Z. Further, when the main control unit 300 does not perform various kinds of lottery, commands are not transmitted to the sub control units 400 and 500, so that various kinds of lottery are not eventually performed on the sub control units 400 and 500.

In FIG. 113 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, a plurality of types of error displays (an opaque display of error A notification to error E notification) are displayed in the error occurrence order at the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208. The error display of FIG. 113(κ1) is a display in which the display behind the error display is completely invisible, but it is a slightly transparent display, and the display of the ball-out notification overlaps from the front side. When displayed on, the display on the back side may be slightly visible.

In FIG. 113 (κ2), the display of the ball-out notification is added in the state shown in FIG. 113 (κ1). Here, the ball-out notification error (plate full tank error) is not included in the plurality of types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in the plurality of types of error (error A to error E). Good. It should be noted that, instead of the error of the ball-out notification, an error that frequently occurs may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (error A to error E).

Part of the error of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 113 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. It should be noted that all the ball-out notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

On the other hand, the error of the ball-out notification shown in FIG. 113(κ2) overlaps the error display of a plurality of types displayed at the left end.

The error notification display regarding the control on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500 may be overlapped with the error notification display regarding the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting warning display may be overlapped by the ball-out notification, or conversely, the ball warning notification may be overlapped by the hitting warning display. Further, both of the error notification displays regarding the control on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500 and the error notification display regarding the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap with each other. May be.

FIG. 113 (λ1-1) is in the symbol variation display, and the simultaneous production executed by a plurality of gaming machines is started in the middle of the symbol variation display. FIG. 113 (λ1-2) shows an example of a display screen of the simultaneous production in normal time (error has not occurred and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 113 (λ1-2), in the normal time, the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 replaces the background display of the simultaneous production. The volume display bar display VB may be displayed so as to overlap the background display of the simultaneous production. However, the reverse is also possible. Further, regarding the error display, there is an example shown in FIG. 113 (λ2′) described later, but the error display may be displayed so as to overlap with the background display of the simultaneous production. However, the reverse is also possible.

FIG. 113(λ2) shows an example in which simultaneous productions occur during the super reach production. During the super reach effect, the display of the simultaneous effect is displayed in the separate frame display section OFD in the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the player can enjoy the effect of the super reach and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. If the gaming machine is equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of simultaneous production is displayed on these display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. May be.

FIG. 113(λ2′) shows an example of the case where simultaneous effects are generated during the error notification display. Here, the situation in which the super reach production is being performed also overlaps, but it may be before the first stop of the decorative pattern, or in the normal reach state or the same. The display of the simultaneous production is displayed in the separate frame display portion OFD, and a plurality of types of error displays (transparency display of the error A notification to the error E notification) are displayed without changing before the simultaneous production occurs, and the separate frame display portion is displayed. The display of the simultaneous production in the OFD is overlapped with a plurality of types of error display.

The volume display bar display VB may be overlapped with the simultaneous effect display on the separate frame display section OFD. Alternatively, conversely, the volume adjustment bar display VB may be overlapped with the simultaneous effect display on the separate frame display section OFD.

Further, in the gaming table provided with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as "second display means"). .) overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter, referred to as “first display device”), the first display according to the movement of the second display device. A part of the display on the means may be displayed on the second display means. In this case, the error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

As described above, in the description using FIGS. 111 to 113, the words “error” and “warning” are used, but it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and it is possible to notify that an error has occurred. Alternatively, it may be a notification that an instruction has been issued to eliminate the error that has occurred. Further, the one described as an error may be set to have a higher priority than the one described as a warning.

<Error notification/Error detectable by main controller>
Next, an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

The errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example are a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) non-connection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, starting opening 2 (electric Chu), special winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, special winning opening discharge excess error, big winning opening excess prize error, shock abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error and the like.

The magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) and this state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms), and then the power is turned on again. It is an error that returns when you do. For switch (sensor) disconnection error, when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on), one of special Fig. 1, 2 start port, universal start port (gate), and attacker is not connected (harness is broken or connector is disconnected). This occurs when the state of (1) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected device (Special Fig. 1 and 2 starting port, general figure starting port, attacker) is connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on). This error is returned when it is detected that The magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when the magnetic field (radio wave) is detected by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor.

The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a large jade is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormality errors, the general winning opening error is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226) is an abnormal value, and the error of the starting opening 2 is usually This is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when the electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232) is not activated, and the error of the special winning opening is the special winning opening (for example, This is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the variable winning port 234) is an abnormal value.

The special winning opening discharge excess error occurs when the number of discharges> the number of balls entered during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area validity period, and the next main control unit timer when the special winning opening discharge excess error occurs This error returns when interrupt processing occurs.

The prize winning excess error occurs when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special train combination operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls received = number of balls discharged. It is an error that recovers when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. In the process of returning from the special winning opening winning excess error, the probability variation area related passage number is set to zero.

The impact abnormality error is a state in which the impact sensor level changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (=power supply is ON) and during the period of validity of the probability variation area (specific area), and the state is ON. This error occurs when it continues for a time (for example, 12 ms), and is returned when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes from the probability variation region valid period to outside the probability variation region valid period.

The solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photo sensor has not performed an operation of changing from OFF to ON or an operation of changing from ON to OFF even once during the probability variation period valid period. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) of FIG. 114 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is prohibited from operating (the game cannot be played). Although the error becomes lower, the other error may be the highest priority error, and the high priority may not be the order of the list shown in FIG. 114. Details of the error occurrence condition, the recovery condition, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the recovery operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. In addition, "when the winning end display period ends" of the return condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big winning opening (attacker) is when the end display period of the big hit or the small hit ends.

<Error that can be detected by the error notification/payout control unit>
Next, an error that can be detected by the payout controller 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of an error that can be detected by the payout controller 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

As the errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the lower tray full tank error (lower plate full tank error, pan full tank error), the number of payouts insufficient error, the number of payouts switch error, the illegal payout error, and the excessive payout Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 cannot be received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame opening error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, there are magnetic error error, external clock error error, magnetic field error error, switch level error error, switch disconnection error, shock sensor error, etc., which are not shown.

The error occurrence condition, the return condition, the payout operation in the payout device 152, and the launch operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 115(a). It should be noted that "stop." described in the item "stop firing" in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

FIG. 115( b) is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which are conditions for generating a door opening error. The door open error occurs when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error has occurred, and becomes the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error have released. It is an error.

<Error notification/other examples>
Note that the above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection error is other error (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch non-connection error (error related to disconnection or disconnection of connector of device controlled by main control unit), shock abnormality error, The payout control communication error, the switch level error, the winning rate error, the door opening error, and the upper plate full error) may have higher priority, but may have the same priority.

Further, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and an error with a low priority (for example, magnetic field detection error) occur at the same time, if the output condition is met first by the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, the magnetic field (radio wave) ) The operation for the magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed after the operation for the detection error is executed. In that case, the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is all the devices (decorative symbol display device) that notify from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and speaker 120, etc.) may be switched (overwriting data) such that only one or more devices (eg, speaker 120) are overwritten and others One or more of the devices may continue to notify the user of the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error.

<Specific example of error notification/report mode>
Next, a specific example of a notification mode of error notification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

The liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 116 means an error display by the display means (the decorative pattern display device 208 in this example), and the character display described in “” is displayed. Here, the error display by the display means is configured to be displayed until the error is released, and to be hidden when the error is released. However, even after the error is released, the error is displayed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds). ) It may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured to be hidden after a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error is not canceled. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, and may be an error display by lighting of a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a POV display.

The sound effect described in FIG. 116 may be a notification by a sound output unit (speaker 120 in this example), and “” is repeatedly output as a sound. Here, the audio notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is released, but even if the error is not released, a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred. Then, the voice may be configured not to be output, or the voice may be configured to be output for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is released.

The error illumination LED described in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position visible to the player), and is configured to light up only when an error related to payout occurs. However, it may be configured to turn on some or all of various errors related to the power supply, main control, and sub control (sub control), or may be configured to not turn on some or all of them. Good. Further, although the error illumination LED is not turned on in the warning regarding the sub-control (in this example, the impact warning and the hitting warning), it may be turned on. The error illumination LED may be in a constantly lit state, or may be turned off to notify that an error has occurred when an error occurs. The payout illumination LED described in FIG. 116 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (a position visible to the player), and is turned on while payout by the payout device 152 is being performed. The light is turned off during the period when the payout device 152 is not paying out. Further, although the payout illumination LED is turned on when a part of the payout error (in this example, the payout amount shortage error) occurs, the payout lighting LED may be turned on only during the period when the payout by the payout device 152 is being performed. It may be configured to turn on when an error relating to payout occurs. The decorative LED shown in FIG. 116 is the game board 200 or a frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The main body 104 (inner frame) and/or the outer frame 102 is provided with the decorative LED. Lamp may be provided or may be configured not to be provided), and emits light according to various effects. In addition, the decorative LED shown in FIG. 116 may stop the light emitting effect and light up in the light emitting pattern for the error even if the light emitting effect is performed when the error occurs. (As an example at the time of recovery, the light emission effect may be configured to proceed in another layer even during an error, and the light emission effect at the time of error recovery may be configured to be recovered when the error is recovered. May be configured not to perform the light emission effect until a timing at which it is easy to recover (for example, when a new light emission effect is started), or may be configured to recover from the effect data at the time when the error occurs. (Good) Here, the error notification by turning on the various LEDs is configured to turn on or blink until the error is cleared, and turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared, It may be configured to turn on or blink for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or to be turned off after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been cleared. May be.

The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 of this example are (1) an error related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) an error related to a power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). And the like, and (4) warning regarding sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.

<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/error regarding payout>
First, the error related to payout will be described. Examples of the "error relating to payout (payout control unit 600)" in this example include a lower tray full tank error (hereinafter, also referred to as a full plate error), a glass frame opening error, an insufficient number of payout errors, an excessive payout error, an illegal payout error, The payout quantity switch error, the main control communication error, the CR unit non-connection error, the CR unit communication error, and the door opening error are listed. Here, the payout error display 7-segment LED is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 (transparent or highly transparent). It is visible through the payout substrate case 172 made of resin).

In this example, when a lower tray full tank error occurs, the number “2” is displayed on the light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Notifying by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (decoration pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that lower tray full tank error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (In this example, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect is output indicating that a lower tray full tank error has occurred). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, the case where the lower tray full tank error occurs when the lower plate 128 is full will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of a pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (plate full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. ..

When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number "1" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) notifies (in this example, a decorative LED ( Blinking of frame lamps and board lamps), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display in this example indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred).

When a door opening error occurs, the numeral "1" is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). While displaying, the first light emitting means gives notification, and the second light emitting means (in this example, decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) gives notification (in this example, decorative LED (frame). (Blinking of a lamp or a panel lamp), a notification by a display unit (in this example, the decorative pattern display device 208) (in this example, a display indicating that a door opening error has occurred), and a sound output unit (in this example, The speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred).

Further, the notification of the door opening error may be a notification of the glass frame opening error, and a part of the notification mode of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error (for example, the notification by the display means) is made different. The other notifications may be the same, or all the notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the payout of the game balls may be interrupted, and the payout of the game balls may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

Further, when a payout amount shortage error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, the payout error display 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed, the third light emitting means (LED for payout illumination in the present example) notifies (lighting LED for payout illumination in this example is turned on) by the third light emitting means. Note that the notification mode of other error notifications related to payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. 116.

<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/error relating to power supply>
Next, an error regarding the power supply will be described. The “error relating to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)” in this example includes blown fuse 1, blown fuse 2, and blown fuse 3. In this example, the error notification is not performed when an error related to the power supply occurs. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. Although an error relating to the power supply is not reported in this example, it may be reported by a display unit, a sound output unit, or various LEDs. Further, a power supply status confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply board. Here, the power supply status confirmation LED may be configured to be constantly turned on after the power is turned on and may be turned off when an error occurs. Conversely, the power supply status confirmation LED may be configured to be turned off after the power is turned on and an error is generated. It may be configured to be turned on.

<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/error relating to main control, etc.>
Next, an error relating to the main control and the like will be described. The “error relating to the main control (main control unit 300), etc.” in this example includes a magnetic (magnet) detection error, an external clock error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch level error, a switch disconnection error, and a shock error. Examples of the error include an error, a winning rate abnormality error, a special winning opening winning excess error, a special winning opening discharging excess error, and a solenoid error error (special winning opening error).

In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp). Blinking), a display means (in this example, the decorative pattern display device 208) informs (in this example, display of a character indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred), and a sound output means ( In this example, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred).

Further, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative L
Notification by ED (frame lamp or board lamp) (in this example, blinking of decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) and notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (this example) Then, display of a character indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred, and notification by a sound output unit (speaker 120 in this example) (effect sound indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example). Sound output). When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

Further, when an impact abnormality error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) Blinking), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that an impact abnormality error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) A notification (in this example, the output of a sound effect indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred) is performed. When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

Further, when a special winning opening winning excess error occurs, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) (Flashing of the lamp), notification by the display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred), and sound output means (this example) Then, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect is output indicating that a special winning opening winning excess error has occurred).

Further, when the special winning opening discharge excess error occurs, the error notification is not performed. It should be noted that error notification (light emitting means (in this example, decoration LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) blinks (in this example, decoration LED (frame lamp or board lamp) blinks) and display means ( In this example, a notification by the decorative pattern display device 208) (in this example, display of a character indicating that a special winning opening discharge excess error has occurred) and a notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example) (this example) Then, a sound effect indicating that the special winning opening discharge excess error has occurred)) may be performed.

Further, when a solenoid abnormality error (special winning opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( Blinking of frame lamps and board lamps), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display of characters indicating that solenoid abnormal error has occurred in this example), and sound output means (book) In the example, the speaker 120) makes a notification (in this example, a sound effect indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred). When the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds have passed.

It should be noted that the winning rate abnormality error is a general winning opening (general winning opening 226 in this example), starting opening 2 (second special figure starting opening 232 in this example) and large winning opening (variable winning opening in this example). 234) is configured to perform the same error notification, but different error notification may be performed depending on the winning opening where the error occurs. Further, as another error corresponding to the winning rate error, there is an abnormal winning error. An abnormal winning a prize error is a certain winning condition (for example, a general winning hole 226, a second special figure starting hole 232, a variable winning hole 234, etc.) under a certain specific condition (for example, when an N ball is fired, during a big hit). It is an error that occurs when a certain number or more of winnings are detected in other than (except during electric support (universal figure high accuracy state)). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the same gaming machine status, notification, and action as in the winning rate abnormal error may be used.

The error regarding the main control and the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, a notification is given by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp)). Blinking), notification by display means (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) (display indicating that a door opening error has occurred in this example), and notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example). (In this example, a sound effect indicating that a door opening error has occurred is output). Note that other error notification modes regarding main control and the like, causes of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and measures are as shown in FIG. 116.

<Error notification/specific example of notification mode/warning/error regarding sub-control>
Next, a warning/error related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the "warning/error relating to the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)" in this example include a shock warning, a hitting warning, and an effect moving means error. In this example, when a shock warning is issued, the display means (decorative symbol display device 208 in this example) gives a notification (in this example, a character indicating that the shock warning has been issued) is issued. Will not be notified.

In addition, when the hitting warning is generated, a notification (display of characters indicating that the hitting warning is generated in this example) by the display unit (decorative pattern display device 208 in this example) and a sound output unit ( In this example, the speaker 120) gives a notification (in this example, a sound effect is output indicating that a hitting warning has occurred), but the light emitting means does not give a notification.

The production moving means error means various production moving means when the power is turned on (in this example, the production moving body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest part 224E, the first large board behavior part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior part 224Gd, and a thousand box. Effect moving means provided on the game board such as the accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106. It may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102) Incidentally, the effect moving means is provided on the frame. If it is, the effect moving means of the frame is included, but it is not necessary to include it, and it is determined that there is an abnormality when the initial operation of (the effect moving means does not have to be provided in the frame) is performed. This is the error that occurs in some cases. The abnormality referred to here indicates a case where the initial operation is not normally performed, but, for example, a sensor (ON in the initial position) at the initial position of each effect movable means is in an OFF state. It may also indicate the case where it is not turned on even after performing the retry operation once or a plurality of times, or the case where it is determined that the sensor is kept in the ON state. Further, the initial operation may include all or any one or two of the home-return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full-stroke operation. Here, the return-to-origin operation is an operation of checking the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the production movable means in which the sensor at the initial position is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. Further, the sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a failure of the sensor, and is an operation for performing the minimum operation of switching the sensor from ON to OFF. Further, the full stroke operation is an operation of moving to the maximum position at which the production movable means can operate and returning to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect movable means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, the sensor check operation and/or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order after the origin return operation is performed for all the effect movable means. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the production movable body A→the production movable body B→the production movable body C, and the production movable body B is not at the initial position, the origins of the production movable bodies A to C are set. After the return operation is performed (apparently, the effect movable body B is operated), the sensor check operation and/or the full stroke operation are performed in the order of the effect movable body A, the effect movable body B, and the effect movable body C. Further, it may be configured such that after the initial operation is performed for the effect moving means that is not at the origin position, the initial operation is performed for the other effect movable means. (For example, in the case where the initial operation is performed in the order of the production movable body A, the production movable body B, and the production movable body C, and the sensor of the initial position of the production movable body B is OFF, the production movable body B is initially set. The operation is performed, and thereafter, the initial operation of the effect movable body A→the effect movable body C is performed.) When it is determined that the plurality of effect movable means are not in the initial positions, the effect movable means having a higher priority is first activated. It may be configured to perform an operation (origin return operation or initial operation including the origin return operation).

In addition, as for the production movable means error, the production movable means has various circuits (for example, the drive circuit 422) when the connector of the production movable means is not properly connected, the harness of the production movable means is broken, or the connector is damaged. It is an error that occurs even when not normally connected to. It should be noted that "error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of production moving means" and "error that occurs when it is determined that there is an abnormality when performing initial operation of various production moving means when power is turned on" are separate errors. You may divide and notify.

Further, the effect movable means error is an error that may be displayed during the display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may not be displayed during the displaying of the returning display.

Note that the error relating to the sub-control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error relating to the main control or the payout, and a different display mode. An error display may be displayed with. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the sub-control, or may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the main control, or may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display regarding the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

Further, in the case of an error relating to sub-control (in this example, an effect moving means error), in addition to the error display by the display means, the decorative LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 may be turned on or blinking. The sound output means may be configured to notify the error, or both may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured such that a part or all of the error notification is ended by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) (chance button)) by the player. Good. (For example, when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated while the production moving unit error is occurring, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error output by the sound output unit is notified. Ends, the blinking display by the decorative LED on the game board ends, part of the decorative LED on the frame goes out, and the blinking by the other part continues, etc. By operating the operation means in this way, It is conceivable that the error notification of the rendering means A continues, the error notification of the rendering means B ends, the part of the rendering means C ends, and the other part continues as it is. Means, display means, decoration LED, etc.)
When displaying the liquid crystal loading display when the power is turned on, the error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display showing a state in which the data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub control unit 500 is being read. When the reading of the data stored in the RON 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, the symbol stop display (the symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or the symbol fluctuation display) or the returning display (preparing display) is displayed. It The display during recovery is a display that is displayed when the game control is restored during a symbol variation or a big hit, and if the symbol is varying, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer becomes 0). If it is a big hit, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). In addition, it may be configured to return from the returning display to the symbol changing display at a specific timing during the symbol changing (for example, start of super reach effect, temporary stop display of three decorative symbols, etc.). Further, various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing (for example, start or end of a specific round, start or end of jackpot start effect, start or end of jackpot end display) during jackpot. Here, while the returning display may be displayed, all or part of the above-mentioned error display may be displayed, but it is configured not to be displayed for all or part of the other error display. May be. Further, although all the above-mentioned error displays are not displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display, some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the display of the liquid crystal loading display. ..

The change effect display may be a change notice display.

When the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, when the hold prefetching notice is started, the icon A is forcibly changed from the icon B to the icon G selectable by the player. Alternatively, the icon A may change to a form of an icon that cannot be selected by the player when the hold prefetching notice is started.

It should be noted that there may be provided a plurality of operating means relating to performance. Here, when the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation means B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operation means A (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means A or “operation means”). A character display such as "press A". Hereinafter, when "operation means image A" is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B or " A character display such as "press operation means B." Hereinafter, referred to as "operation means image B") may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the case where it is displayed. The image regarding the operation means in which the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the jackpot pattern mode is definitely displayed may not change. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not have to work for the operation means B, the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed, and the auto button for both operation means may be the same. The function may work, or the auto button function may not work for both operating means. Further, the display mode of the navigation character may be changed more easily when the operation means image B is displayed than when the operation means image A is displayed, but it may be the reverse. The success degree of the change in the display mode of the navigation character may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the display mode of the navigation character when the operation means image B is displayed is changed to a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher than when the operation means image A is displayed. It may be configured to be easy, but it may be reversed, and the display mode in which the navigation character is likely to change may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, although the operation means image A is displayed more frequently than the operation means image B is displayed, it may be reversed or the same. .. In addition, an effect (promotion effect or demotion effect) in which the operation means image A changes to the operation means image B may be performed. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the effective period of the operation effective period of the operation means A and before the operation effective period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the valid operation period of A and during the valid period of operation of the operating means B, and is outside the valid period of the valid operating period of the operating means A and outside the valid valid period of the operating means B. Alternatively, it may be during the valid operation period of the operation means A and during the valid operation period of the operation means B. The same applies when the operation means image B is changed to the operation means image A. In the above description, the two operating means, the operating means A and the operating means B, have been described as an example, but the same applies to the case where there are three or more operating means.

It should be noted that the effects that can be selected by the player are the special figure starting port, the general figure starting port, the general winning opening and/or the effect gate (the prize ball is not performed even if the player enters the gate and is detected by the sensor, only the effect is produced. It may increase according to the points obtained by passing through the gate (which is performed). Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect to be acquired may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the point obtained by passing becomes a specific point, for example, in the decorative pattern display device 208. It may be configured such that “display for performing an effect for lottery of an effect to be acquired from now on (gacha effect)” is performed and an effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 is acquired.

It should be noted that the player may be configured to be able to switch between displaying and hiding the navigation character by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). The display/non-display of the navigator character may be always possible, or may be possible only while the navigator character is displayed, until a certain period elapses from the start of the variation of the symbol (for example, one or more, or All decorative designs may be temporarily stopped, etc.), and the display/non-display of the navigation character may not be switched during execution of the super reach effect. The navigation character may be configured to be displayed/hidden switched, or may be configured to be displayed/hidden only while the symbol is stopped (while the special map is stopped).

Although the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine) has been described in detail above, the gaming table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) can be used. It can also be applied to a rotating-game machine (slot machine) used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described above is a pachinko machine (1 type+1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1, 2, 3, 3 types, 1+2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot or ball) More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, a winning combination is achieved, and when a winning combination is achieved, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) in which a player is given a privilege. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are launched into the game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the enclosed balls are won in a predetermined entry area. It may be an enclosed ball type gaming table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has been awarded to the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won a prize to the game area again.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of gaming machines, and will be described more specifically below with reference to the drawings.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a first decorative pattern display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative pattern display devices 208L to 208N, a second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first icon [for example, a variation icon h0],
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter, referred to as a “fluctuation icon”) related to a symbol variable display [for example, the symbol variable display] being executed,
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent display mode, etc.],
When the variable icon of the second display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally finalize and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the variable icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example, , High expectations for big hits],
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across successive symbol variable displays [for example, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. 77 (I12)],
The second icon is an effect that changes the variable icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIG. 77 (B-9) to (B11) and the like]. Is an icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent kimono wearing mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Display mode] is an icon that may be displayed in
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area of the display unit, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. .. Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be simultaneously displayed in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon displayed simultaneously with the variable icon in the icon display area during the first period. Furthermore, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

Further, "to straddle" means to interpose a period of stop display of symbols (variable stop period). Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed while the variable display of symbols is being displayed, or may be an icon that disappears once in the middle. Also, the icon may be continuously displayed during the stop display of the symbol, may be an icon that disappears once in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be

Further, "the icon that may be displayed across the continuous variable display of symbols" is the "icon that is always displayed and that may be erased and then redisplayed". ..

Further, the second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

The display means may be a means that always displays a plurality of types of displays.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition mentioned here, there are n or more holds, there is a hold for which pre-reading notice is made, customization is performed by the player, a certain notice (for example, timer notice, (Conversation notice etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a notice display for prefetching notice, the second icon is stocked, the degree of expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is It is possible to enumerate that it is high and that you have won the preliminary drawing. That is, the certain conditions may be all of the above listed conditions. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of displays is a change effect display [for example, a treasure box icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button holding icon, meter displays MW and MG icons, a giant panda, a grandpa character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi characters have changed", images of fusuma, fusuma images for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 75 (A3-1) to FIG. 75 (A6), FIG. (A6-3-2) to the same figure (A6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (C 1-3-1) to (C 1-3-3), the meter effect shown in FIG. 91, diagram 89 (shi 2-2-1) to the same figure (shi 2-2-3), FIG. 100 (a b 1) to (a b 2 ), FIG. 80 (6) to the same figure (8), FIG. 9-2-1) etc.] is a display that may be used.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the change effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display that the mode is changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect that changes the display mode of the variable icon. Alternatively, on the contrary, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon, and in this case, the change effect display is the display of the second icon. The icon may be used only for the effect of changing the mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

Further, the change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is not displayed.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second icon does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 75 (3-2-1) to FIG. 75 (3-2-2), FIG. 83 ( 1-3-1) to FIG. 1-3 (b-3), FIG. 100 (A4-2), and FIG. 100 (A6-2)] are also icons.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed is finally larger than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the expectation of a big hit is high],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed" means "the second icon of the third display mode is displayed and the second icon is “When the display mode does not change to the fourth display mode”.

Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode is, finally, a jackpot pattern mode than the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be difficult to confirm and display.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display about a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, Fig. 78 (C 20-1), Fig. 87 (C b 15-1)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the second icon may be a notice display about the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed," means "the notice of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is the second icon. “Done by”.

Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a notice mode of a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a prefetching notice [for example, FIG. 83 (key 5-1) to FIG. 83 (key 13), FIG. 86 (core a11)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the phrase “the second icon may be a notice display of a read-ahead notice” may mean “a read-ahead notice is made by the second icon”.

Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variable icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

Further, the variable icon of the second display mode, and when both icons of the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, than when both icons are not displayed, Finally, the jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, when the variation icon of the second display mode, and both icons of the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, one of the two icons The jackpot pattern mode may be finalized and displayed more easily than when only the icon is displayed.

Further, when either one of the variable icon in the second display mode and the second icon in the fourth display mode is displayed, no icon is displayed. In the end, the jackpot pattern mode may be finalized and displayed more easily than in the case.

Further, the variable icon of the second display mode, and when both icons of the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, than when both icons are not displayed, Finally, the jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The state in which the change icon is in a default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second icon in a display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) different from the default display mode The jackpot pattern mode may be finally settled and displayed more easily than the state in which both icons are displayed.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the variable icon in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon in the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) The displayed state is the change icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the fourth display mode). The jackpot pattern mode may be finalized and displayed more easily than the state in which both the second icons are displayed.

Further, the variable icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode, and when the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always definitely displayed. May be. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally obtained. It may be definitely displayed. Even if the variable icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. Further, while the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variable icon may be displayed in the one display mode or the second display mode. Good.

Further, the variable icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, an advantageous jackpot is confirmed (eg, jackpot confirmation with probability variation, jackpot confirmation for long rounds), rare reach (eg, full-rotation reach, etc.) is likely to appear, or other premier effects are available. It may be easy to do, or it may be easy to hit the revival. Alternatively, on the contrary, it may be difficult to hit the revival. In addition, the mode of the operating means may change (for example, the button pops out, rotates, is recessed, or the built-in lamp emits light in a rare light emission mode (for example, rainbow light emission mode that changes to seven colors)). .. In addition, you can get the privilege of production customization, increase the number of productions that can be selected during the big hit game, start special super reach, special big hit round (for example, the second attacker opens Round) may be started.

Further, the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon may suggest the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach). For example, when the display mode of the variable icon is lord and the display mode of the second icon is swordsman, it may be suggested to develop into a swordsman reach in which the lord and the swordsman duel.
Alternatively, when the display mode of the fluctuation icon is a helmet and the display mode of the second icon is a lord, it is possible to function as a notice (normal notice) of the change only after two icons are displayed. May be configured.

Moreover, the jackpot reliability (expectation) may be different depending on the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the variation icon of the first display aspect, a combination of the second icon of the fourth display aspect, the variation icon of the second display aspect, the combination of the third display aspect of the The reliability of the jackpot (expectation) may be different from that of the second icon combination.

Also,
In the case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the change icon is the first icon when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. It is easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the probability that the variable icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is determined by the variable icon of the first display mode by the second icon of the fourth display mode. The case of changing to the second display mode is more than the case of changing the variable icon of the first display mode to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be high.

Here, "more than when the second icon in the third display mode is displayed" means that the variable icon is changed from the first display mode to the second icon in the third display mode. Than in the case where the effect of changing to the second display mode is performed.”

Further, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variable icon may be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode without fail. Further, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variable icon does not necessarily change from the first display mode to the second display mode, It may change.

Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variable icon is the fifth icon when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. The display mode may be changed easily.

As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variable icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variable icon is always changed. Good.

Furthermore, the variable icon in a display mode that is likely to change may differ depending on the display mode of the second icon. Further, the notice that is likely to appear (pseudo consecutive notice, timer notice, prefetch notice) may change depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
There is a case where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 81, the example shown in FIG. 82 (1) to (5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, a big hit may be easily made, or the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may be easily changed.

In addition, a combination of a plurality of the second icons (a combination of the second icon of the same display mode, a combination of the second icon of a different display mode), it is easy to hit the jackpot, the hold icon or the variable icon The display mode of may change easily, or the notice that is likely to appear (pseudo consecutive notice, timer notice, prefetch notice) may change.

Also,
“Providing an operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operation unit is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 82(1) to 82(7)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, for example, there may be a case where the third display mode is changed to the fourth display mode in response to an operation of the operation unit.

Further, the second icon is a display mode relating to the operating means, and the display mode may change according to the operation of the operating means. The display mode relating to the operating means may be a display mode imitating the operating means, or a display mode prompting to operate the operating means (operation promotion display mode), It may be a display mode relating to the operation valid period of the operating means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation valid period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operating means. It may be present, a combination of these display modes may be used, or a display mode including at least one of these display modes may be used.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a meter display, and the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon is displayed. The display mode of may change.

Further, when the operation means is operated in a so-called back button state in which a notification for operating the operation means is not issued even during the operation valid period of the operation means, the display mode of the second icon May change.

Further, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.

Also,
"The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73(b)],
The fourth display mode is a display mode that is not selected by the player [for example, a display mode of the length shown in FIG. 79 (e 4-3)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that the player can select, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that the player cannot select. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second icon changes without any other display effect [for example, FIG. 79 (e 1) to FIG. 79 (e 3-1 ), FIG. )-(7) in the figure],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the second icon may change without being accompanied by another display effect" means that "the display mode of the second icon is changed by the effect of the second icon". May change.”

Also,
“The variable icon is an icon that has a case where the display mode changes without being accompanied by another display effect [for example, FIG. 90 (s 3) to (s 4)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the variable icon may change the display mode without being accompanied by another display effect" means that the variable icon display mode may change depending on the variable icon effect. It may be.

Also,
"One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.],
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of holding balls (hereinafter referred to as "holding icon"),
The hold icon includes a plurality of types of display modes [for example, hold display selection icons A to G in FIG. 63(b), FIG. 78(v), FIG. 78(v), FIG. Default display mode, white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.]
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, or the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. May be.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [e.g., decorative design display device 208, first decorative design display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative design display devices 208L-N
, A second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first icon,
The first icon is an icon related to the hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, variable icon h0, etc.],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent display mode, etc.],
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM],
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across successive symbol variable displays [for example, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. 77 (I12)],
The second icon is an effect of changing the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIG. 77 (B-9) to (B11)). Etc.] may be used for
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of a default color, a display mode of a lord, a display mode of a copanda],
The second icon is a fourth display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent kimono wearing mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Display mode] is an icon that may be displayed in
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second icon changes without any other display effect [for example, FIG. 79 (e 1) to FIG. 79 (e 3-1 ), FIG. )-(7) in the figure],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained. Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only once in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of displays is a change effect display [for example, a treasure box icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button holding icon, meter displays MW and MG icons, a giant panda, a grandpa character. Conversation notice including the character display "Navi characters have changed", images of fusuma, fusuma images for wipe production, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 75 (A3-1) to FIG. 75 (A6), FIG. (A6-3-2) to the same figure (A6-3-4a), FIG. 83 (C 1-3-1) to (C 1-3-3), the meter effect shown in FIG. 91, diagram 89 (shi 2-2-1) to the same figure (shi 2-2-3), FIG. 100 (a b 1) to (a b 2 ), FIG. 80 (6) to the same figure (8), FIG. 9-2-1) etc.] is a display that may be used.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“When the display mode of the second icon does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 75 (3-2-1) to FIG. 75 (3-2-2), FIG. 83 ( 1-3-1) to the same figure (1-3-3b2, FIG. 100 (A4-2), FIG. 100 (A6-2))],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display about a big hit in the symbol variation display being executed [for example, Fig. 78 (C 20-1), Fig. 87 (C b 15-1)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a preview display of a prefetching notice [for example, FIG. 86 (mark a11)] in FIG. 83 (key 5-1) to FIG.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
There is a case where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 81, the example shown in FIG. 82 (1) to (5), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“Providing an operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes when the operation unit is operated [for example, an example shown in FIGS. 82(1) to 82(7)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is an icon that has a case where the display mode changes without being accompanied by other display effects [for example, FIG. 90 (S3) to FIG. (S4)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "the display mode of the first icon may change without being accompanied by other display effects" means that "the display mode of the first icon is notified by the first icon. May change.”

Also,
"The "icon related to the hold display" described above is "the icon of the concept that includes both the hold icon and the floating icon",
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24],
The variable icon is an icon [eg, a variable icon h0] that represents a completed hold,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The "icon related to the hold display" above is the "hold icon",
The hold icon is an icon representing an undigested hold [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the above-mentioned "icon regarding the hold display" is a "fluctuation icon", and the variation icon may be an icon [for example, a variation icon h0] representing the already-held digest. Good.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Direction means [for example, the decorative design display device 208, the first decorative design display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative design display devices 208L to 208N, the second display device 208S, a speaker 120, a game board lamp 442, a game underframe lamp 452, a thousand box box accessory 224H, etc.],
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.],
Equipped with
The production means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of production,
One type of production of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One type of production of the plurality of types of production is a second production,
When the operation means is operated during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, "Summer vacation is still not shown in FIG. 108(A11)]? "Response display of ~" may be executed.
In the auto button mode, when a first time [eg, the auto button function activation time (time immediately before FIG. 108 (A6) to immediately before (A11) in FIG. 108)] elapses after the first period is started, The first production may be executed,
The second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, the operation valid period (see FIG.
8-1) to (A14) period], when the operation means is operated, the second effect [for example, an effect in which the hold icon is changed to a blue display mode, FIG. 109 ( Aa5-5-6) to (Aa5-5-7) in the figure, the response display in which the continuous hammering meter RHM is raised] may be executed.
In the auto button mode, even if a second time [for example, the auto button function activation time] has elapsed after the second period was started, the second effect is not executed [for example, FIG. Of the continuous hammer meter RHM in FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG. 109 (Aa5-5-4)],
In the automatic button mode, when the operation of the operation means is performed before the second time elapses after the second period is started, the second effect is executed. And
It is configured such that the state of the operating means can be changed from one of the first state and the second state [for example, white lighting] to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting],
When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [for example, FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. A14) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. "
I explained.

According to the invention of this description, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the operation means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the second period in the auto button mode, the sight line is guided to the operating means to prompt the operation of the operating means. May be possible.

Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed even if the operation means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state in which the auto button mode is not set.

The operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated) during the auto button mode, may be accepted or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the effect of A and not accepted in the effect of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Further, the operation of A operating means (for example, chance button 136) is accepted, but the operation of B operating means (for example, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operating means, etc.) is not accepted. Good.

Further, during the period of the second period, effect means other than the operation means (for example, display by the display means, movable means, light emitting means, etc.) may be configured to change.

Also,
“When the state of the operating means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 110 (Aa8-3)] ],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

By doing so, the state of the operating means may change during the period of the second period in the non-auto button mode, so that it is possible to induce the operating means to direct the line of sight and prompt the operation of the operating means. Sometimes you can. Further, regardless of whether or not the automatic button mode is set, the second effect is not executed unless the operation means is operated during the period of the second period, and the motivation to operate the operation means is improved. May be possible.

Also,
"There is a case where at least a part of the first period overlaps with at least a part of the second period [eg, immediately before FIGS. 108(A8-1) to (A11), and FIG. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
“A period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the auto button mode overlap [for example, in FIG. 108 (A8-1) to FIG. In the period until immediately before, in FIG. 109 (Aa5-2-2) and FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-1)], when the operation unit is operated, the first effect and the second effect are changed. At least one of the effects is executed [for example, FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 110 (Aa8-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Good.

In addition, when the operation unit is operated before the first time elapses after the first period starts, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. However, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

For example, when two button displays are displayed in the auto button mode, one of the button displays has the function of the auto button mode, a response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The function of the button mode does not work, and there is a sense of discomfort that the user has to operate the button by himself, which may improve the interest of the game.

Also,
“When the operation means operates in a period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period in the non-auto button mode overlap, And at least one of the second effect is executed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Here, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Good.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The first effect may be executed even if there is no operation before the first period ends.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, the operation valid period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In addition, even if there is no operation until the second period ends, the second effect may be executed.
"The rendering means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N (all Included), second display device 208S, etc.],
The plurality of types of presentation is a plurality of types of display,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a response display,
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated,
The first effect is a first response display of the response effects [for example, a response display of "Summer vacation is still ~" of FIG. 108(A11)),
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means,
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (button image 136a and remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 108(A5-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, When the operation means is operated, the first response display may be displayed,
When the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 108(A8-1) or the like] is displayed as the operation display, when the operation unit is operated, The second response may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The operation display may be a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a] showing the appearance of the operation means, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, the remaining time display meters MT, PUSH]. Character display, “press” character display, display of arrow indicating operation direction, and the like].

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect for a symbol variation display being executed [eg, a notice effect for a big hit in the symbol variation display (normal notice)],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that both the first effect and the second effect may be the same, only the first effect may be the same, and only the second effect is the same. May be.

Also,
"At least one of the first effect and the second effect, the effect of the symbol variation display that is being executed is terminated, and then the effect of the symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation that is started next It is a display, a symbol fluctuation display that is started next, or a notice effect (prefetching notice) about a big hit in the symbol fluctuation display that is started next next].
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Note that both of the first effect and the second effect may be the same, only the first effect may be the same, and only the second effect may be the same. May be.

Also,
“The first period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation valid period”),
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation valid period”).
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

A meter display showing the operation valid period of at least one of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period [for example, the display of the remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 108(A5-1)] ] May be displayed during the auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the button holding icon shown in FIG. 108 (A8-1).

Further, the meter display may be a display by a gauge (a bar display that increases or decreases), or may be a display that changes in the shade of the display color with the passage of time and is grayed out when the remaining period is exhausted. Good.

Alternatively, on the contrary, the meter indicating the operation valid period may be displayed only in the non-auto button mode and may not be displayed in the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted from the old conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 108(A5-1) in the auto button mode, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 110(Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode is displayed. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

Further, regardless of whether the meter is in the auto button mode or not, when the meter indicating the operation valid period is displayed [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 108 to 110] is not displayed [for example, FIG. 108 to FIG. 110, a button change icon or a button hold icon].

Also,
"The operating means is a means for performing a production operation [e.g., light emission, vibration, etc.]. A gaming table."
Was also explained.

In addition, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example, Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

Further, the first state may be a state in which the operating means is stopped.

Further, the effect producing means may be one in which an effect producing movable means [for example, a vibrator] is provided, and the producing operation may be an operation [for example, vibration] performed by the producing movable means. Good.

In addition, the second state is a state of being deformed (for example, protruding or dented), or a state in which the effect movable means is operating [for example, an advancing state, a retreating state, a vibrating state, a rotating state, a curing state. Etc.].

The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is a means capable of executing a driving operation such as lighting, blinking, or turning off,
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in a first mode,
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the drive operation in a second mode,
The first aspect and the second aspect may be different aspects.

The first aspect may be an off state, and the second aspect may be an on state.

The first mode may be a mode of lighting in a first color, and the second mode may be a mode of lighting in a second color.

The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
"The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000],
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Direction means [for example, the decorative design display device 208, the first decorative design display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative design display devices 208L to 208N, the second display device 208S, a speaker 120, a game board lamp 442, a game underframe lamp 452, a thousand box box 224H, etc.].
The production means is a means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of production,
One type of production of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
The first effect is an effect selected by the player [for example, an effect by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 63(b), an effect by each option of (c) reservation frame selection, ( e) effect by each option of hold display selection, (f) effect by each option of background display selection, music output effect of music title shown in FIG. 101].
One kind of effect of the plurality of kinds of effects is a second effect [for example, effect by the navigation character YM, music output effect, hold frame UI effect, hold effect, background effect,].
During execution of the first effect, when a third effect [for example, a change notice by the treasure box icon I1, a music change notice, a wipe effect, a background change notice, etc.] is executed, In the case of changing to the second effect [for example, FIG. 99 (a a3-1) to the same figure (a a6-1), FIG. 102 (a11) to the same figure (a15-1), and FIG. 106 are shown. For example, when the background A is selected by the player in FIG. 80 (1), the background change notice of FIG. 6 (6) to FIG. 7 (7) (wipe-in and wipe-out of the fusuma image for wipe effect) ), changes to the background of the pre-reading notice displayed in FIG. 8(8) to FIG. 21(21), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Here, the third effect may be one kind of effect of the plurality of kinds of effects and may be an effect executed by the effecting means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect which is not executed by the effecting means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effecting means (for example, sound output means) different from the effecting means. ..

Further, the first effect may be a customizable effect that can be selected in a demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is shifted until a certain time is started, or an effect that can be selected even during execution of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game that can be selected by the player.

Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until the simultaneous effect such as the island simultaneous effect is started.

Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device, dot matrix display device, 7-segment display device, organic EL display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means and the like can be listed. In addition, a light guide plate that receives light from the side and emits light toward the front, and a POV display that can display a pattern by an afterimage effect can be listed as examples. As the rendering means, all of those listed above may be used. On the other hand, some of the items listed above may not be applied.

Further, the production means may be a device that produces a light emission production, and in this case, the light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed by the light emission color, etc.) may be different depending on the mode. ..

Also,
"The rendering means is an image display means (for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). ), the second display device 208S, etc.],
The first effect is a first effect display [for example, (b) effect display by character selection of FIG. 63(b) or (c) effect display by option of reserve frame selection, (e). Effect display by each option of the hold display selection, (f) effect display by each option of the background display selection, the song name shown in FIG. 101 displayed in the song name display portion MN of FIG. 102].
The second effect refers to a second effect display [for example, effect display by the navigation character YM, effect display by the holding frame UI, song title display portion MN “Distance” in FIGS. 102(a13) to (a14). 102 (B15-1), the song name display portion MN “Tokeke DREAM”].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the rendering means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
"The third effect refers to a third effect display [for example, a treasure box icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button holding icon, meter display MW and MG icons, a huge panda, a grandpa character "Navi character 102. (a11) to FIG. 102 (a15-1), the longest character C11, etc.], which includes a conversation notice including the character display "change", a fusuma image, a sliding effect fusuma image.
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where at least a part of the third effect display overlaps with at least a part of the first effect display. That is, there may be a case where only a part of the third effect display overlaps only a part of the first effect display, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. May be overlapped with each other, all of the third effect display may be overlapped with only part of the first effect display, and all of the third effect display may be overlapped. There may be a case where all of the first effect displays overlap. Further, at least part of the third effect display may overlap with at least part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), or conversely, the first effect display. There may be a case where at least a part of the above is overlapped with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

Further, the image display device displays a variable display of the decorative design, a stop display of the decorative design, an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (holding icon), and an icon related to the variable display of the running pattern (fluctuation icon). There are cases where The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable display of the decorative design, or closer to the first effect display than the stop display of the decorative design. May be displayed on the screen, may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the hold icon, or may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the variable icon. It may be done.

Also,
"Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [for example, FIG. 79(e1) to FIG. 79(e3-1), FIG. 82 (KU2-1) to FIG. 82 (KU7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where the player is provided with an operation unit provided at a position where the player can operate, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation unit is operated. ..

Further, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change in the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, and the effect mode is changed. Even if the change is made in response to the operation of the operation means, for example, the change is made in response to the start of execution of the prefetching notice (rush into the prefetching mode (corresponding to the second effect display)). Good.

Also,
“When the first effect is changed to the second effect due to the execution of the third effect [for example, in the case of FIG. 99 (Aa4-1) to FIG. 99 (Aa6-1)] ], the third effect is not executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [for example, FIG. 79 (e2) to the same figure (e4-1)). In the end, it is easier to shift to a state that is advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit game state, a big hit game state with a large number of balls, a probability variation state, an electric support state],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the third effect is executed, it may be configured to always shift to a state advantageous to the player. Alternatively, on the contrary, even if the third effect is executed, it may not be possible to shift to a state advantageous to the player.
Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variable display is being displayed, a big hit game state can be cited. Further, it may be in a super reach state or a pseudo continuous production state. On the other hand, as the advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, the probability change state or the electric support state after the end of the big hit game can be mentioned. Further, it may be in a round promotion state in which the number of rounds apparently increases.

Also,
“Providing an operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like] provided at a position where the player can operate,
There is a case where the first effect is selected when the operation means is operated [for example, a case of FIG. 66 (37) to FIG. (50)],
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"When the first effect is not changed to the second effect even if the third effect is executed during the execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 75 (3-2-1)- The same figure (3-2-2), FIG. 83 (ku 1-3-1) to the same figure (ku 1-3-3b2), FIG. 100 (a4-2), and FIG. 100 (aa6-2). Case]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

For example, when the production means is a display means, the first production display may not be changed to the second production display even if the third production is executed. When the means is a light emitting means, there is a case where the first light emitting effect is not changed to the second light emitting effect even if the third effect is executed, and the effect means outputs a sound. In the case of a means, even if the third effect is executed, it may not be changed from the first sound output effect to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first action effect may not be changed to the second action effect.

On the contrary, when the third effect is executed during the execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect without fail.

Also,
"The second effect is one of the effects selectable by the player,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

On the contrary, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.

Also,
“A sound output unit capable of outputting music [for example, a speaker 120] is provided,
The rendering means is a display means (for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, Second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [for example, the music title display portion MN of FIG. 102 (a15-1), the same figure (a16) to the same figure (a18)],
The music display is a display [for example, display of a song name or lyrics] about the music output by the sound output means,
The first effect is a first music display [for example, "Mega Giga Summer"],
The game machine characterized in that the second effect is a second music display [for example, "Todoroke DREAM"]. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in a third display mode [for example, a default display mode],
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a kimono of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, iridescent]. Is
The second icon is an icon when there is a case where it is displayed across consecutive symbol variable displays [for example, in the case of FIG. 99 (a1) to (a2)].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, "crossing over" is to interpose the period (variation stop period) of stop display of symbols. Further, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed while the variable display of symbols is being displayed, or may be an icon that disappears once in the middle. Also, the icon may be continuously displayed during the stop display of the symbol, may be an icon that disappears once in the middle, or an icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be

Also,
"The rendering means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L only, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. , Second display device 208S, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One type of icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One type of icon of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
One type of icon among the plurality of types of icons is a third icon,
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter, referred to as “fluctuation icon”) related to the symbol variation display being executed [for example, variation icon h0],
The second icon is an icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across successive symbol variable displays,
The third icon is an icon (hereinafter, referred to as “holding icon”) corresponding to the number of holding balls (for example, holding icon h11),
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The variable icon is displayed in an icon display area [for example, a variable icon display area CIS in a hold frame UI having a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. Sometimes it is an icon,
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI],
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS of the hold frame UI],
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a first mode [for example, "holding frame D"],
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a second mode [for example, "holding frame R"],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display area may be an area in which an area icon is displayed, an area in which a hold frame is displayed, or an area in which a user interface (UI) is displayed. May be The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. Further, the area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. The icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, a navigation character icon) display area.

Further, the third effect may be an effect that switches the mode of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping the front side is displayed in the icon display area.

Also,
"One type of production of the plurality of types of production is a fourth production,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, a telop display trp shown in FIG. 94] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
[The third effect is a notice effect about a big hit in a pattern variation display being executed [eg, a notice of a normal notice by the color of the treasure box icon, a big hit confirmation (or a big hit rich) notice by the bancho character C11]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
"The third effect is an effect of a pre-reading notice [for example, an effect of a pre-reading notice in the color of the treasure box icon],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also,
“The gaming table is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that what is described as a variable display of a decorative pattern above may be a variable display of a design (more specifically, a special drawing), and a description that is displayed as a stop display of a decorative pattern means that the design (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

Next, an example of effects applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 193. As the technical idea, it is possible to apply the technical idea shown in FIGS. 117 to 193 to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 48 and 49 to 116, and vice versa. ~ The technical ideas shown in Figs. 48 and 49 to 116 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in Figs. 117 to 193. At that time, components having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced with each other.

In the example of the effect described below, the display means (for example, any one or two or all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M decorative symbol display device), the notice icon, A notice display, a mini game A icon, a mini game B icon, a hold icon, a change icon, and an icon change notice display are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing various notice icons and various notice displays.

In FIG. 117(a), five types of notice icons are shown. Of these five types of notice icons, four types are box-shaped icons and the remaining one type is an operation means type (button type) icon.

There are four types of box-shaped icons, namely, a box icon, a red box icon, a gold box icon, and a rainbow box icon having different colors, and two types of modes (mode a and mode d) are prepared for each. Mode a is a display mode in which the box is closed, and mode d is a display mode in which the box is open.

In the above description and the following description, the type and the display mode may be different depending on the color difference and the display method. For example, the color of the first type and the first display mode is white, and the color of the second type and the second display mode is also white, but the display method of the second type and the second display mode is blinking (white and Alternate display with another color (for example, background color or black). The first type and the first display mode correspond to the default type and display mode. The color of the third type and the third display mode is blue, the color of the fourth type and the fourth display mode is green, the color of the fifth type and the fifth display mode is red, and the sixth type and the fifth display mode. The color of the six display modes is gold, and the color of the seventh type and the seventh display mode is rainbow. When various icons and various displays may be prepared in the first to seventh types and display modes, and the light emitting means such as various LEDs can emit light in the first to seventh display modes. There is. Of the first to seventh types and display modes, the type and display mode having a larger number (the seventh number is the largest) may or may not be the display mode advantageous to the player. For example, the larger the number or the display mode, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit,
It may indicate that a certain production is likely to be started. In the following description, the change from the nth display mode to the (n+1)th display mode may be referred to as one step up or one step up. Further, changing from the nth display mode to the (n+m)th display mode may be referred to as increasing or promoting the display mode by m steps. Further, a display mode in which the number of n is relatively large may be referred to as an upper display mode, and a display mode in which the number of n is relatively small may be referred to as a lower display mode. Note that both n and m are natural numbers of 1 or more (the same applies in the following description).

Although there is only one type of button type icon (button icon), four types of modes (mode a, mode b, mode c, mode d) are prepared. The mode a is a display mode including only a button image imitating the chance button 136. Modes b and c are display modes in which a remaining time display meter indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is added below the button image. The mode a is a mode in which there is no remaining time display meter in the modes b and c, and therefore, even if the chance button 136 is operated, it is invalid. In mode b, the remaining time display meter is full display (display in which the valid operation period is all remaining), and in mode c, the remaining time display meter is 0 display (display in which no valid operation period remains). ). That is, the mode b is a mode before starting the time counting (countdown) of the operation valid period or immediately after starting the time counting. The mode c is a mode at the time when the operation valid period has passed without operating the chance button 136 or after the time has passed. When the clocking of the operation valid period is started, the meter of the third display mode starts to decrease with the passage of time. Aspect d is a display aspect of an effect image (here, a smoke image) that hides the button image and the operation valid period display. Note that the button icon may have a plurality of types of icons of different types, like the box-shaped icon. For example, there may be default button icons, red button icons, gold button icons, and rainbow button icons in different colors.

In addition, the types of the notice icon and the button icon are not limited to only colors, and there may be icons of different sizes and shapes, and any two or more of a plurality of elements such as the size, shape, and color of the icon. May be combined. For example, No. In addition to the one-box icon, there may be different types of icons such as a treasure box icon and a thousand-box icon that imitates the thousand-box icon 224H shown in FIG. Further, the icon size may be increased as the reliability increases (for example, the gold box icon is larger than the red box icon). Also, the shape of the box may differ between the red box icon and the gold box icon box.

The notice icon may be displayed by changing the display position from the display position where the display is first started. That is, there is a case where the display moves from the first position to the second position and is continuously displayed (stock) at the second position. The second position is the stock display position. The display may be continued (stock) without changing the display position. Aspect a is the aspect at the start of stock, but also the aspect at the start of display. Mode d is a mode in which the notice icon is used. That is, when the notice icon shown in FIG. 117(a) is used for an effect, the display mode changes to mode d. The box-shaped icon is used at a predetermined timing and changes to the mode d. The button icon is used when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, and changes to the mode d. However, even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon always changes from the form c to the form d after the operation valid period elapses. Good. Further, when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button icon does not have to change to the mode d. In that case, the button icon may be deleted, may continue to be displayed as it is in the mode a, or the display in which only the remaining time display meter of the mode b or the mode c is hidden (the peripheral edge portion is the mode a (A different display from) may be displayed, and it may be configured such that a notice display described later is not displayed although it changes to the mode d. When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the mode c may be displayed once and then the mode d may be displayed.

The appearance rate and the reliability are different for each type of notice icon. The appearance rate is easily displayed in the order of A, B, C, and D. In other words, it means that A is most likely to be displayed (displayed frequently). Although not shown in FIG. 117(a), E indicates that it is most difficult to be displayed (display frequency is low). The reliability represents the reliability of the big hit, and is the reliability of the big hit in the pattern variation display where the icon is used (reliability of the normal notice), or the reliability of the big hit in the pattern variation display of the prefetch target (prediction notice Reliability). This reliability is likely to be a big hit in the order of accuracy, A, B, C, D, E, F. That is, the winning probability is the one that is most likely to be a big hit (always a big hit = reliability is 100%), and the F is the most difficult to hit. The reliability represented by the first type or the first display mode described above is F, the reliability represented by the second type or the second display mode is E, and the reliability represented by the third type or the third display mode is D. The reliability represented by the fourth type and the fourth display mode is C, the reliability represented by the fifth type and the fifth display mode is B, and the reliability represented by the sixth type and the sixth display mode is It becomes A, and the reliability represented by the seventh type and the seventh display mode is accurate. The reliability F may be 0% or higher than 0%. If the reliability F is 0%, it cannot be said that a big hit is announced, but in this specification, a case where the reliability F is 0% may be referred to as a notice.

In FIG. 117(b), 31 types of notice icons are shown. The description of these 31 types of notice icons is as described in the outline of the effect contents in the figure. However, in this description, “always performed” means that in the modified example, “may not be performed”. It may be." In addition, descriptions such as "may be" and "may be" can be read as "must be" in the modified example.

Also, the "VS swordsman reach" described in "Outline of production contents" is the swordsman reach shown in FIG. 17, FIG. 75, etc., and the "all group reach" is shown in FIG. 81 (or 3-5-3). It is a super reach that is not shown in the figure. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the super reach is performed may be more likely to be a big hit in the case where the “all-members reach” is performed than in the case where the “VS swordsman reach” is performed. The "thousand box (character)" becomes the thousand-box box character 224H shown in FIG. 14 and the like, and the "family crest (character)" becomes the family crest character 224E shown in FIG.

Further, the 31 types of notice icons shown in FIG. 117(b) may also function as notice display. The notice display is a display that is started when the notice icon is used. For example, there is a case where the box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117(a) changes to the mode d and a notice display appears from the inside. In this case, it is not possible to know what kind of notice display will appear until the box-shaped icon changes to the mode d. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not set in advance to a one-to-one relationship or a many-to-one relationship, but a one-to-many or a many-to-many relationship. However, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display may be previously set to a one-to-one relation or a many-to-one relation. For example, the red box notice icon and the red change notice display (No. 7) are set in advance in a one-to-one relationship, and if the red box notice icon is displayed, then the red box notice must be displayed. It may be decided that the icon will change to the mode d and the red notice display will appear from the inside, or the case where the red box notice icon changes to the mode d and that of the mode a without change. It may disappear as it is, and when the mode d is changed, the red notice display may appear. In addition, as a box-shaped icon that is a notice icon, a transparent box-shaped icon that allows you to see the contents is prepared, and you can see that this transparent box-shaped icon contains one or more types of notice displays. May be. If only one type of notice display is included, the player can know in advance the type of notice display that appears when the mode d changes, but if there are multiple types of notice display, know I can't. When a plurality of types of notice displays are included, the roulette may be displayed in a transparent box. Further, there is a possibility that "a notice icon may be displayed when it is used" due to "a notice icon in a form in which it is not known what kind of notice display will appear" such as a box-shaped icon shown in FIG. 117(a). You may give a notice of "A notice display". For example, if the box's advance notice icon is displaying (superior) in a balloon or the like, the advance notice of the "super hot" may always be displayed when the box's advance notice icon is used, It may or may not be displayed. In addition, if the box's advance notice icon displays "Geki Atsu" and "?" in the balloon or roulette display (preliminary notice), if the box's advance notice icon is used, "Geki Atsu" and "?" Either one of the notices may be always displayed, or both may not be displayed, and a notice different from the displayed one may be displayed. As described above, the plurality of options may be announced in advance by the notice icon (and/or a notice different from the notice icon), and one or a plurality of notice displays may be displayed.

When the icon shown in FIG. 117(b) is a notice icon, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display is set to a one-to-one relationship in advance, and if the notice icon changes to the mode d, The notice icon functions as a notice display. The difference between the notice icon and the notice display is that the notice icon corresponds to the notice of a certain notice, and the notice display corresponds to the notice. That is, the notice icon corresponds to the notice of the notice display.

In the description of the effect contents in FIG. 117(b), "in the displayed change" means that the icon functions as a notice display, and the icon functions as a notice icon. If it is, read it as "In the fluctuation that the notice icon was used." That is, the notice display is used in the displayed symbol variation display, while the notice icon may be carried over to the symbol variation display started after the displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 117(b), mode A and mode B are shown. However, when functioning as a notice display, only mode A is used, and when functioning as a notice icon, mode A is stocked. The state B is a state in which the notice icon is used, and the mode B is a mode in which a circle mark is added to the mode A. Even if the notice icon is used once, it may not disappear and can be used again. In this case, after changing from the mode A to the mode B, the mode returns to the mode A again. However, during the period displayed in the mode B, the notice icon cannot be used, and after returning to the mode A, it can be used. Become. Further, although there are notice icons (No. 1, 27 to 31) for which aspect B is not prepared, these notice icons are icons that disappear when used.

The 31 types of advance notice icons or advance notice displays shown in FIG. 117(b) include different color icons or different color displays, and the reliability of the jackpot varies depending on the displayed color, as described in the above display mode. That is, the reliability of the big hit is higher in the “red change” (No. 8) of the red color (fifth display mode) than in the “change” (No. 7) of the default color represented by “de”. ..

Although the appearance rate is also shown in FIG. 117(b), this appearance rate is the same as the appearance rate described in FIG. 117(a). In addition, No. The appearance rate of 16 "High-precision notice in XX" varies depending on the contents of XX. For example, the appearance rate of “preliminary notice of change in pending icon high probability” or “preliminary notice of icon stock high accuracy confirmation” is B. The "previous notice icon stock high-probability notice" may be displayed only during execution of the notice icon stock effect, or may be displayed before the notice icon stock effect is started. In addition, the appearance rate of the “super hot production high-precision middle notice”, “timer notice high-precision middle notice”, and “feature action high-precision middle notice” becomes C. However, the appearance rate may be the same or different in the contents of ○○. In this "XX high-probability notice", XX is more likely to be executed when it is displayed, but XX may be executed if it is displayed.

In addition, No. 2 “Chance” icon or No. If the "red chance" icon of 3 is functioning as a notice display, the reach effect may not occur even if another "notice" is announced as a "chance". When the "chance" is announced by the icon, the normal reach effect may be generated without fail. In addition, other notice productions (for example, notice productions that appear frequently such as conversation notices), notice productions that appear more frequently than the notices given by the notice display, and notice productions that are displayed when the symbol variation display is a shortened variation. "Chance" or "Red Chance" icon rather than "Chance" (including cases of inconclusive notice such as "Chance?" or "Chance!?") When the announcement is made, the reach effect (which may be the normal reach effect or the super reach effect may be generated) is more likely to occur, or in both cases. There is no difference and the occurrence probabilities may be the same.

The notice icon described with reference to FIG. 117 is an icon that may be displayed as a result of the effect of the mini game. A mini game is a type of presentation display, and two types of mini games are prepared. Two types of mini-games are available: a mini-game (Mini-game A) to announce Yoshimune's treasure and a mini-game (Mini-game B) to announce Janken battle. A dedicated icon is used in each mini game. The mini game is automatically started if the starting conditions are set, and the result of the mini game is determined according to the result of the judgment or the result of the look-ahead.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a mini game icon.

FIG. 118(a) shows four types of mini game A icons. Each of these four types of mini game A icons includes an image of a box-shaped icon (box image) shown in FIG. 117(a). The “box” icon includes a white box image in the first display mode, that is, a white box notice icon. The “red box” icon includes a red box image in the fifth display mode, that is, a red box notice icon. The "gold box" icon includes a gold box image in the sixth display mode, that is, a notice icon of the gold box. The "rainbow box" icon includes a rainbow-colored box image in the seventh display mode, that is, a rainbow box notice icon. Of these four types of icons, the remaining three types of icons except the “rainbow box” icon have four modes (modes a to d), and the “rainbow box” icon has these four modes. Only two of the two aspects (aspect c, aspect d) are prepared. Modes a to c are modes in which the respective notice icons are placed on the carpet and the meter display of hit points (HP) is displayed thereon. In the mini game A, a character of Yoshimune attacks the carpet, and if the attack is effective, the hit points (HP) decrease, and when the HP becomes 0, a treasure (preliminary icon) can be acquired. In the meter display of mode a, the gauge of the third display mode (blue) is in a full state, and HP is 100 points. In the meter display of mode b, the gauge of the fourth display mode (green) is in a half state, and HP is 50 points. In the meter display of mode c, the gauge of the fifth display mode (red) is slightly displayed, and HP is 10 points. The mode d is a mode that is displayed after the HP becomes 0, and the carpet display disappears, the meter display also disappears, each notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon is acquired under the notice icon. This is a mode in which the characters “Get!!” are displayed.

In the mini game A, four types of icons for the mini game A are started to be displayed in any mode. That is, when the display is started in the mode a, the remaining HP at the display start (at the time of appearance) is 100/100, and when the display is started in the mode b, the remaining HP at the start of the display is 50. When the display is started in the mode c, the remaining HP at the start of display is 10/100. FIG. 118(a) shows the appearance rate for each aspect, but the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117(a). The icon for mini game A in the rainbow box has only a few HP left from the start of display, and you can always get the treasure (preliminary icon), but for other icons, you must acquire the treasure (preliminary icon). In some cases, you can do it, in other cases you can't. In addition, the icon for the mini game A of the rainbow box may be able to acquire the notice icon during the variable display of the display that has been started, or in the variable display that is started next to the variable display. In some cases, the notice icon can be acquired. However, the notice icon may be acquired without fail during the variable display of the symbols which is started to be displayed, or may not be acquired unless the variable display is started next.

FIG. 118(b) shows the relationship between the number of remaining HP points at the start of the variable display of symbols and the probability of acquisition of the notice icon. The icon for the mini game A may be displayed across the continuous symbol variable display. That is, there is a case where the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display which has been started is carried over and displayed. The meter display in the mode when the display of the mini game A icon is started is decreased by 10 points each time an effective attack on the carpet is determined. Therefore, the icon for the mini game A in the rainbow box can acquire the notice icon once a valid attack is determined.

If the number of remaining HP points is 60 points or more at the time of disclosure of the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display in which the display of the icon for the mini game A is started, the meter display is in the third display mode (blue). ), there is a 10% probability that the notice icon can be obtained during the started symbol fluctuation display. If the number of remaining HP points is 30 points or more and 50 points or less at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fourth display mode (green), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do is 50%. When the number of remaining HP points is 10 points or 20 points at the start of the symbol variation display, the meter display is displayed in the fifth display mode (red), and the notice icon is acquired during the started symbol variation display. The probability of being able to do is 100%.

FIG. 118(c) shows two types of opponent icons for the mini game B. One of the two types of opponent icons for the mini game B is a swordsman character icon, and the other type of icon is a panda character icon. The appearance rate of the swordsman character icon is A, and the appearance rate of the panda character icon is B. The alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117A. Therefore, the swordsman character icon is more likely to appear than the panda character icon. In the Janken Showdown mini-game B, the icon of a certain character and the icons of these opponents make a rock-paper-scissors showdown, and when a certain character wins (when the opponent loses), a notice icon is displayed. If a certain character is defeated (when the opponent wins), on the contrary, the notice icon cannot be obtained.

In addition, modes a to f are prepared for each character icon of the opponent. The mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or a mode of waiting after the mini game is started. Aspect b is an aspect when a goo is played in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, an aspect c is an aspect when a choki is issued, and an aspect d is an aspect when a par is issued. The mode e is a mode when the opponent character is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when a certain character wins), and the mode f is, on the contrary, when the opponent character wins the rock-paper-scissors confrontation ( When a certain character is defeated).

FIG. 118(d) shows the degree of expectation of the advance notice icon in the mini game B. Although a certain character is used in the above, in the mini game B, a character of a villager, a character of a grandfather, and a character of Yoshimune are used as a character (a character corresponding to the above-mentioned certain character) to compete with the opponent character for rock-paper-scissors. A character is prepared. Therefore, there are six battle cards as shown in FIG. 118(d), and the degree of expectation of each is determined. A indicates that the degree of expectation of acquisition is 100%, B indicates that it is 80%, C indicates that it is 60%, D indicates that it is 40%, and E indicates 20%. F represents 10%, and G represents greater than 0% and less than 1%. The panda character icon is less likely to appear as an opponent character than the swordsman character icon, but the notice icon has a higher expectation of acquisition than the swordsman character icon. Further, in the case of a match between Yoshimune and Panda, regardless of the type of the notice icon, the notice icon can be acquired with a probability of 100%. The notice icon of the rainbow box is selected only in the case of a big hit. The "-" display in FIG. 118(d) indicates that the notice icon of the rainbow box does not appear (acquisition expectation level 0%).

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a hold icon and a change icon.

The hold icon is an icon relating to the undigested symbol variation display, the variation icon is an icon relating to the digested symbol variation display, and both icons are icons relating to the symbol variation display. Here, "variation of XX reservation" means "symbol variation display corresponding to XX reservation".

FIG. 119(a) shows each mode for each type of the hold icon and the variable icon. The description of each type of icon is as described in the remarks in the figure, but no. No. 1 is the default mode and No. 2 to No. 7 is a notice mode. That is, if it is the hold icon, it is in the form of advance notice, and if it is the variable icon, it is in the form of normal notice. The pre-reading notice hold icon may be displayed from the start of display (at the time of starting winning), may be displayed by changing at the start of symbol variation, or by changing depending on the effect during symbol variation display. It may be displayed. The variable icon in the normal notice mode may be displayed from the start of display (timing corresponding to the start of the symbol variation), or may be displayed by changing according to the effect during the symbol variation display.

The hold icon and the variable icon are configured to be able to change (rank up) step by step in the order of default mode>flashing white>blue>green>red>gold>rainbow. For example, when the rank is increased during the blue hold, it changes to the green hold. Note that the hold icon and the variable icon do not necessarily have to change step by step. For example, in the icon change notice display described later, there is a predetermined one in which, when the change of the icon form is successful, the change form is predetermined regardless of the form of the icon to be changed (for example, FIG. 119(b). No. 2 to No. 3, No. 5 to No. 6, No. 8 to No. 10). When a change notice is given by the icon in the default form itself, it usually ranks up to white blinking, but when the icon in the default form is changed due to the icon change notice, it does not change to white blinking and is put on blue hold. Rank up. Also, the icon of the default mode is No. 2 to No. 7, No. 14-No. 19 and the VS display mode of FIG. 129 described later, and the icon display mode with the character “SP” of FIG. 180 described later may be changed. 2 to No. The icon of No. 7 is NO. 14-No. The icon of 19 or the VS display mode shown in FIG. 129 or the icon display mode with the character “SP” shown in FIG. 180 described later does not change, but it may change. In addition, No. 8 to No. The display mode of No. 13 is supposed to be displayed in that mode from the time of winning, but icons of other display modes (for example, No. 1 to No. 7 and/or No. 14 to No. 19). It may be changed from the icon). Also, only the default mode may be changeable.

The display mode of the variable icon is determined according to the result of the judgment, but even if the result of the judgment is a loss, the display is changed to a mode other than the default display. Performance may be executed. In addition, among the plurality of displayed hold icons, which display mode of which hold icon is to be displayed is determined according to the result of prefetching, but when the result of prefetching is lost. Even if there is, an effect of changing the display mode to a mode other than the default display mode may be executed. In addition, the display mode may change for a plurality of hold icons.

No. 8 and No. Reference numeral 9 denotes an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the button effect (for example, the button notice effect) or during the button effect. Here, No. The function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks of “Button A” in 8 will be supplemented. When the button A icon has the function (1), the display mode of the button A icon is displayed until the pattern variation display corresponding to the button A icon is started even if the chance button 136 is operated. Is configured not to change from blue to rainbow, and the operation valid period is started after (or immediately after or at the same time) the symbol variable display corresponding to the button A icon is started, and the operation valid period ends. If the chance button 136 is operated before the operation is performed or the operation valid period ends, the display mode of the button A icon is changed to any of blue to rainbow. Note that the display mode of the button A icon may be configured not to change when the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period. When the button A icon has the function of (2), before the symbol variable display corresponding to the button A icon is started after the button A icon is displayed (that is, before the symbol variable display corresponding to the button A icon is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated by the time of (variation display of symbols), the display mode of the button A icon is configured to change from blue to rainbow. Here, when the button A icon has the function (2), the display mode of the button A icon does not change even if the chance button 136 is operated while the symbol is stopped. It may not change, and may be configured to change. Further, when the button A icon has the function (2), the operation valid period may be set even during the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the button A icon. That is, it may include the same function as the function (1). , No. Regarding the function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks of “Button B” of No. 9, the No. This is the same as the function (1) and the function (2) described in the remarks for “Button A” in 8.

No. Reference numeral 10 denotes an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the timer effect (for example, the timer notice effect) or during the timer notice effect.

No. Numeral 11 indicates the time before or before the start of the promotion effect of the target holding in FIGS. 156 (Ec1) to (Ec8) and FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-1) to (Ec5-2-5) described later, or It is an icon that may be displayed during the promotion production.

No. When 12 is displayed at or before the start of the roulette hold (N selection hold) effect in FIGS. 151 (A1-2-1) to (A1-2-12) described later, or during the effect. There is an icon. In the roulette icon of this example, the roulette icon itself changes to stop roulette, but the roulette icon itself may change to stop roulette. The icon may change and the icon different from the roulette icon may change.

No. Reference numeral 13 denotes an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the meter effect, or during the meter effect, and the meter decreases until the hold icon is consumed and the variable icon disappears. If the production is performed and the meter display becomes 0, it is successful and some change or something occurs. That is, the meter display is of a decreasing type. In addition, when the meter display does not finally become 0, both the Echigoya image and the HP meter image are displayed as they are, and the HP meter image shows the final remaining HP. ing. Further, in the case of the hold icon, the effect of reducing the meter display may be performed even in the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon, and the meter display may be 0. Further, in the case of the hold icon, an effect that the meter is reduced may be performed in one or a plurality of symbol variation displays, and a variation in which the meter is reduced and a variation which is not performed may be performed. Further, even when displayed as a hold icon, the effect of actually reducing the meter may be performed only in the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon. Also, in the above description, the meter display is of the decreasing type, but may be of the increasing type. If the type is increasing, it is successful if the meter display is full within the valid period.

No. 14-No. Reference numeral 16 denotes an icon displayed in the Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice of the mini game A described with reference to FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the mini game A, or during the mini game A. Use this icon to attack a carpet with a notice icon. Aspect a is a standby pose, aspect b is a ready pose, and aspect c is a pose in which an arrow is fired. No. 17-No. Reference numeral 19 denotes a certain icon displayed in the rock-paper-scissors competition announcement of the mini game B described with reference to FIGS. 118(c) and (d) (a character confronting the character icon of the opponent shown in FIG. 118(c)). Icon). That is, it is an icon that may be displayed at or before the start of the mini game B, or during the mini game B. The mode a is a mode before the start of the mini game, or a mode of waiting after the mini game is started. Aspect b is an aspect when a goo is played in a rock-paper-scissors confrontation, an aspect c is an aspect when a choki is issued, and an aspect d is an aspect when a par is issued. The mode e is a mode when the player is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when the opponent character wins), and the mode f is, on the contrary, when the player is defeated in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation (when the opponent character is defeated). It is a mode of. In addition, No. 14-No. The icon 19 corresponds to a white blinking icon.

No. 1 shown in FIG. Nos. 14 to 16 are icons dedicated to the mini game A. Since 17 to No. 19 are the icons dedicated to the mini game B, if these dedicated icons appear, the player knows that the mini game is started, and these dedicated icons are the notices of the mini game. Also works as.

In addition, although the appearance rate and the reliability are also shown in FIG. 119(a), the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117(a), The symbol representing the reliability here is also the same as the symbol representing the reliability described in FIG. 117(a).

In addition to the types shown in FIG. 119(a), there are types of hold icons and variable icons.

FIG. 119(b) shows an icon change notice display. The icon change notice display is a display used for an effect of changing the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon. That is, it is a display that appears in a change animation that changes the form of the icon. Further, the display is also used for an effect in which an attempt to change the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon fails. That is, it is a display that appears in a non-changing animation in which the change of the icon form fails and the icon form does not change. The description of the icon change notice display of each type is as described in the remarks in the figure.

No. 1-No. The mode a in each display of 16 is the mode at the start of the change animation (
A mode at the time of starting display of the icon change notice display and a default mode), and a mode b is a mode at the time of changing the icon. In addition, No. 11-No. The mode c in each display of 15 is a mode when the mode change of the icon is successful, and is a mode that may be displayed by a change animation. On the other hand, No. 11-No. The mode d in each display of 15 is a mode when the mode change of the icon has failed, and is a mode that may be displayed in a non-changing animation. No. The display of 17 is the display of the huge panda displayed in FIGS. 89 (2-2-1) to (2-2-3) in FIG. 89, and there is no change in the aspect from the appearance to the change.

FIG. 119(b) shows the appearance rate of each type of display, but the alphabet representing the appearance rate here is also the same as the alphabet representing the appearance rate described in FIG. 117(a). Further, FIG. 119(b) also shows the types of icons that change the mode. That is, No. 1-No. Each display of 10 may change the mode of the variable icon or may change the mode of the hold icon. On the other hand, No. 11-No. Each display of No. 16 changes only the mode of the variable icon, and No. The display of 17 pandas changes only the mode of the hold icon. In addition, No. 11-No. Each display of 16 may be changed so that only the mode of the hold icon is changed, or the mode of the variable icon may be changed or the mode of the hold icon may be changed. Good. In addition, No. The display of the panda 17 may be changed so that only the mode of the variable icon is changed, or the mode of the hold icon may be changed, or the mode of the variable icon may be changed. May be.

In addition, No. 1-No. Each display of the balloon system of No. 3 and No. 3 4 to No. 6 bomber system displays and No. 6 7-No. Each display of 10 flying boats, and No. 10 12-No. Each of the 15 Yoshimune system displays has a different color. The color difference here is the same in some cases, depending on the displayed color, the success probability of the icon aspect change, that is, the probability when there is no icon aspect change and the probability when there is (icon change rate) are the same. In some cases. Further, even when the mode of the icon is changed, the number of icons whose mode is changed may be different depending on the displayed color. In FIG. 119(b), the "icon change ratio" is shown as the success probability of the change of the aspect of the icon, and the "probability of the number of changing icons" is also shown as the probability of the number of icons whose aspect is changed. For example, No. 4 to No. In each of the 6 bomber system displays, the default color display (No. 4) represented by “de” is more likely than the other color displays (No. 5, 6) to have a higher probability of success in changing the aspect of the icon. Is high. However, in the default color bomber display (No. 4), the icon display mode can be increased only by one level. That is, the nth display mode is changed to the (n+1)th display mode. For example, when changing the mode of the hold icon in the white blinking mode (second display mode), it is changed to the blue mode (third display mode), and the hold icon in the blue mode (third display mode) is changed. When changing the mode, the mode is changed to the green mode (fourth display mode). However, only when changing the mode of the hold icon of the default mode (first display mode), the mode is changed to the blue mode (third display mode). On the other hand, the red (fifth display mode) bomber display (“red bomber” of No. 5) is displayed when the mode is changed regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started. , And is always changed to the same display mode (fifth display mode) as itself. That is, the n-th display mode is always changed to the fifth display mode. For example, when the default icon (first display mode) of the holding icon or the blue mode (third display mode) of the holding icon is changed, the red mode (fifth display) Be sure to change the mode). In addition, when the bomber display in gold (6th display mode) (No. 6 “gold bomber”) is changed regardless of the mode of the hold icon when the bomber display is started, , And is always changed to the same display mode (sixth display mode) as itself. That is, the n-th display mode is always changed to the sixth display mode. For example, if the default icon (first display mode) or the green mode (fourth display mode) is used for changing the mode, a golden mode (sixth mode) Be sure to change the mode). Further, the “red bomber” display (No. 5) has a higher probability of success in changing the aspect of the icon than the “gold bomber” display (No. 6). That is, No. 4 to No. In the display of the bomber system of 6, the higher the display mode, the lower the success probability of the mode change of the icon becomes, but it is easy to make a big hit with the variable display of symbols corresponding to the changed icon. In addition, No. 1-No. The same applies to the display of the balloon system of 3. However, in the display of the bomber system, in the display of the default color (No. 4), the success rate of the change of the icon form is 100%, and if the bomber of the default color is displayed, the form of the icon will always change. To do. Moreover, the default color bomber changes the mode of the two icons with a probability of 5% if two or more icons are displayed at the start of the pattern variation display in which the default color bomber is displayed. For example, the mode of the variable icon and the mode of one hold icon may change, or the modes of the two hold icons may change. In addition, when the number of icons becomes two after the symbol variable display in which the default color bomber is displayed is started, the default color bomber does not change the two icons, but the default color bomber If the second icon is displayed between the start of the variable display and the time when the bomber in the default color is displayed, the two icons displayed may change. It may be. About this note, No. 7-No. Display and/or No. 10 of the flying boat system. It is also applicable to the display of 17 "pandas". On the other hand, in the balloon-based display, in the default color display (No. 1), the success probability of the icon mode change is 30%, and when the icon mode changes, the mode is limited to one icon. Change.

In addition, No. 7-No. In each display of the 10 flying boats, regardless of the display mode (display color), the success probability of changing the mode of the icon is 100%, and if the flying boat is displayed regardless of the color, the mode of the icon is Be sure to change. Moreover, the default-colored flying boat (No. 7) has a 50% probability that two or more icons are displayed at the start of the pattern variation display in which the default-colored flying boat is displayed. Change the form of the icon. However, also here, the flying boat of the default color can raise the display mode of the icon by only one level. On the other hand, the flying boats (No. 8 to No. 10) other than the default color always change the display mode of one certain icon to the same display mode as itself. Therefore, No. 7-No. In the display of 10 flying boats, the higher the display mode, the easier it is to hit big with the variable display of symbols corresponding to the changed icon. Note that the timing at which two or more icons are displayed is not limited to the start time of the variable display in which the flying boat of the default color is displayed, and may be the time when the flying boat of the default color is displayed. (The same applies below).

Furthermore, No. 12-No. In the display of Yoshimune of No. 15, both the default color display (No. 12) and the display of red (No. 13 “Akayoshimune”) represented by “de” have a success probability of 50 of the variation of the variation icon. %. The change target of Yoshimune's display is limited to the variable icon, and since only one variable icon is displayed, the mode of two or more icons is not changed. Further, in the gold display (No. 14 “Kanayoshimune”), the success probability of the variation icon mode change is 25%, which is lower than the display of “Akayoshimune”. However, in the rainbow display (No. 15 “Nijiyoshimune”), the success probability of the variation of the variation icon is 100%, which is higher than the “Kinyoshimune” display. Even in the display of Yoshimune, Yoshimune (No. 13 to No. 15) other than the default color changes the display mode of the variable icon to the same display mode as itself.

In the display of the guard length (No. 16), the success probability of changing the mode of the variable icon is 100%, and when the display of the bank length is displayed, the mode of the variable icon is necessarily raised by one step.

In the display of the panda (No. 17), the success probability of the change of the mode of the hold icon is 100%, and when the display of the panda is displayed, the mode of the hold icon is surely raised by one step. Moreover, if two or more hold icons are displayed at the start of the variable display in which the display of the panda is performed, the mode of the two hold icons is changed with a probability of 50%. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 119(b), only a maximum of two icons are changed, but three or more icons may be changed, and regardless of the number, all the displayed icons are displayed. There may be a case where the hold icon of, or all the displayed icons are changed.

Subsequently, effects using the various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119 will be described using specific examples.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which the advance notice icon is stocked by winning the mini game B, and the advance notice icon is displayed by using the stocked advance notice icon to change the display mode of the variable icon. Is.

In FIG. 120, it is a normal state (non-probably changed state and non-electric power support state (non-time saving state)), and even in the following production examples, unless otherwise specified, the production examples are in the normal state. Further, although FIG. 120 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208. (The same applies to the figures that follow.).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central region. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative design (fifth design) is variably displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120(A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120(A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special drawings 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Note that the background screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 120(A1) is solid white, but this solid white color indicates that the background screen is omitted in the drawing. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but the case of a solid white color indicates that the background screen is omitted as in the case of FIG. 120(A1).

In FIG. 120 (A2), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in the special-figure 1 is increased by one, and the total is three. In the second reservation number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (2), the reservation number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 120 (A3-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. Although the third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed in the default display mode by the increasing animation, the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. In FIG. 120(a3-1), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes so far, are the same as those of No. 119 of FIG. 119(a). The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. In addition, here, the icon of the default display mode is changed to the icon of the mode a of the type of villager, but the display mode of the prefetch notice (for example, the blue display mode described in No. 3 of FIG. 119(a) or The green display mode icon described in No. 4) may be changed to a villager type icon. In this case, the upper display mode (for example, the green display mode of the fourth display mode) is lower than the lower display mode (for example, the blue display mode of the third display mode) than the icon of the villager type. Also, the icon of the old type is likely to be displayed, and the display mode above (for example, the red display mode of the fifth display mode) is more likely to be the icon of the Yoshimune type. Further, the third hold icon h13 indicating the target hold of the prefetching notice is the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 may also be changed to a villager type icon. Further, only the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the villager type icon, or only the second hold icon h12 may be changed to the villager type icon. That is, the number of icons that change into villager type icons may be one or more. By changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to villager type icons, the mini game (specific mini-game) is displayed in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. It may be announced that a game (mini game B in this example) or an unspecified mini game (mini game A, mini game B, or another mini game in this example) is played. Further, the mini game is started at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variable display (in this example, the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) for starting the mini game B (may be immediately after). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 120 (A4), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the combination of the missing decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

In FIG. 120 (5), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A5), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the upper right is displayed. In the two-holding number display, the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by one and becomes “2”. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started and the effect image EF1 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 120 (A5), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 of the character of the villager has started moving toward the first stage hs1 and has been displayed on the third stage hs3 until now. The hold icon h13 has started moving toward the second stage hs2. The animation of the appearance of the opponent icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, the animation of the appearance of the opponent icon may be started first, or conversely, the movement of the hold icon may be started. The animation may be started first.

Even in FIG. 120 (A6), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is used as the villager type mode a (standby mode). Icon is displayed. The villager character with the variable icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon also ends, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI becomes
The icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the panto type shown in FIG. 118(c) is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). On the right side of the opponent icon TI, an appearance area AS that is a first area is displayed in a frame. In the appearance area AS, a character display of "prize" is displayed, and a notice icon YI that can be obtained when winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is displayed. That is, the display start position of the advance notice icon YI is a position within the appearance area AS. From a different point of view, it can be said that the first area is a notice area for giving notice of icons that can be acquired in the mini game B. In the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 120 (6), the No. shown in FIG. 117 (a) is displayed. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. Further, a stock region SS, which is a second region, is provided on the appearance region AS, which is a region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 120 (6). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS overlap. The appearance area AS and the stock area SS may not be overlapped with each other. Also, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI and the movement animation of the hold icon may end at the same time, the appearance animation of the opponent icon TI may end earlier, or conversely, the hold icon. The moving animation of may end first. Further, the appearance of the opponent icon TI and the appearance of the notice icon YI may be simultaneous, the opponent icon TI may appear first, or, conversely, the notice icon YI may appear. It may appear first.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is then started. In the mini game B, if the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI have a rock-paper-scissors battle, and the villager character with the variable icon h0 wins, the notice icon displayed in the appearance area AS. You can get YI. The rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B may be started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or may be started when the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation here is villagers vs. pandas, and since the prize is the “box” notice icon YI, according to the expectation of acquisition shown in FIG. 118(d), there is a probability of C (60%). Can be earned. That is, there is a 60% chance that the villager will win.

In FIG. 120 (A8-1), a rock-paper-scissors-fighting animation is performed by the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 shows the mode b (goo It has been changed to an icon). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has been changed to an icon of a mode c of the panda type (a mode when the player sneaks out). As a result, the villager character with the variable icon h0 wins. The first hold icon h11 is an icon of the villager type mode a (standby mode), and the standby animation is executed.

In FIG. 120 (A9-1), the change icon h0 is changed to an icon of a mode f of the type of villager (mode when winning), and an opponent icon TI is a mode e of the type of panda e (when defeated). (A mode), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A9-1), an animation is performed to celebrate that the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won. Although the standby animation is continued for the first hold icon h11, when a result of the mini game is output, an animation corresponding to the result may be executed. That is, even if the hold icon is changed to the icon of the same character as the variable icon h0, it is executed only for the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game, the animation mourning the defeat, or the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game. May be. In addition, an animation corresponding to the result of the mini game may also be executed with the hold icon that has changed to an icon of a different character than the variable icon h0.

In FIG. 120 (10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the variable icon h0. That is, the No. shown in FIG. 117(a), which was displayed in the appearance area AS. The "box" notice icon YI of 1 goes out of the appearance area AS, is once displayed in a large size, moves to a certain position (stock position) in the stock area SS, and is displayed at that certain position (stock display (See FIG. 120 (11)). In FIG. 120 (12), the animation of celebrating that the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won has continued, but the opponent icon TI that has lost is the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the panda type. And the panda character is performing a stand-by animation (the default animation).

In FIG. 120 (A13), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the same combination of the missing decorative patterns.

In FIG. 120 (14), the stop display is being performed (the final display is being performed), and in the changing icon h0, the erasing animation is started while the animation celebrating the victory of the villager character is continued, and the changing icon h0 is displayed. The villager character gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. In FIG. 120 (A15), the stop icon is being displayed (the final display is being made), and the change icon h0 has completely disappeared.

The mini game B may end at the same time as the end of the variable display of the symbols, the end of the variable display of the first decorative symbols, or the end of the final display of the first decorative symbols. May be.

In FIG. 120 (A16), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A16), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the upper right symbol is displayed. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decremented by 1 and becomes “1”. Also, in FIG. 120 (A16), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. Further, the second hold icon h12, which is the default display mode but is held in advance of the advance notice subject, has started moving toward the first stage hs1.

In FIG. 120 (A17) as well, the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and as the variable icon h0, the mode a of the type of villager (a mode of standby) Icon is displayed. Further, in this example, the opponent who has previously competed is displayed as it is, and the opponent icon TI becomes the icon of the panda character. Therefore, it becomes a villager vs. a panda. However, the character of the opponent may change for each confrontation (every symbol variation display). Further, in this example, the battle is performed with the character (the villager's character) whose hold icon first changed, but the character may change each time the hold is exhausted (every shift movement). For example, there may be a case where the villager changes to the old man, the old man changes to Yoshimune, the villager changes to Yoshimune, or the old man changes to the villager. As described with reference to FIG. 118(d), if the Yoshimune vs. panda confrontation is reached, the notice icon can be obtained with a probability of 100% regardless of the type of the notice icon. In addition, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 120(A17), No. shown in FIG. 117(A) is displayed. The "red box" notice icon YI of 2 appears.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A18), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area, and the rock-paper-scissors competition of the second mini game B is also started. Since the second game of rock-paper-scissors is a villager vs. panda, and the prize is the notice icon YI of “red box”, according to the degree of expectation of acquisition shown in FIG. 118(d), there is a probability of D (40%). Can be obtained at. That is, the probability is lower than that of the first time and the villagers win with a 40% probability.

In FIG. 120 (A19-1), a rock-paper-scissors-fighting animation is performed by the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 shows the mode b (goo of the villager type). It has been changed to an icon). On the other hand, the opponent icon TI has changed to an icon of the mode d of the panda type (mode when the par is played). As a result, the panda character with the opponent icon TI wins.

In FIG. 120 (A20), the change icon h0 changes to an icon of a mode e of villager type (mode when defeated), and an opponent icon TI is a mode f of type of panda f (mode when winning). ) Icon, and on the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A21), the display mode of the villager character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. .. That is, the villager character, which has been the display mode of the variable icon h0, is gradually disappearing, and at the same time, the icon of the default display mode gradually appears. In other words, the replacement animation is a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, since the player has lost the Janken confrontation, it is not possible to acquire the "red box" notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS, and in FIG. 120 (A21), the notification icon YI appears together with the frame surrounding the appearance area AS. The area AS itself is gradually faded out to the right end of the screen, and the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappeared from the screen. In FIG. 120 (a22), the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

In FIG. 120 (A23), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the same combination of lost decorative patterns.

In FIG. 120 (A 24 ), the pre-reading notice target hold, which has been the first hold until now, has been exhausted, and the symbol variation display that is the pre-reading subject change has been started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A24), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. The variable icon h0 of is displayed. It should be noted that there is no single hold icon, and “0” is displayed for both the second hold number displays of special figure 1 and special figure 2.

In FIG. 120 (A25), a conversation notice as a normal notice is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that, while other effects are not being performed during the period during which the mini game B is being performed, even during the period during which the mini game B is being performed, other effects such as a conversation notice may also be performed. Good. The conversation notice here is the same as the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 16(10) to 16(12). That is, when the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed in the central area. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped. On the other hand, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in the foreground. That is, the notice icon YI continuously displayed in the stock area is overlapped from the front side with a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord, although it is displayed before the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

Even in the display of the notice effect performed using the entire screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the effect display of super reach, etc.), the notice icon YI does not overlap the notice display and is in stock. It may continue to be displayed. On the contrary, the display of the notice effect performed using the entire screen may be overlapped and may be temporarily hidden. For example, if the notice icon YI is a notice effect display to be used, the notice icon YI is continuously displayed in stock without being overlapped. Further, also in the screen for user customization shown in FIG. 68 (93) and the like, in which the design is changing, the notice icon YI may be overlapped by the volume display bar display VB, or conversely, the volume adjustment may be performed. May be overlapped with the bar display VB. The notice icon YI may be overlapped by the display relating to various errors and the display relating to the warning described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116, or conversely, the notice icon YI may be overlapped with the display relating to the error and the display relating to the warning. You can wrap it. For example, when the importance of the error or the warning is low or the relation with the wrongdoing is low, the display of the notice icon YI has priority, and the notice icon YI is not overlapped but is continuously displayed in stock. Good.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the grandfather's conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed by. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative pattern is hidden by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, but the notice icon YI displayed in stock is displayed in front of the grandpa's conversation image CI2 and hidden by the grandpa's conversation image CI2. It has not been.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 120 (A27) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation valid period was started.

The timing of FIG. 120 (A28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a sequel to the effect example shown in FIG. 120 and a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example.

In FIG. 121 (A29) continued from FIG. 120 (A28), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 is changed from the operation promotion notification image to the reach effect. It has changed to the display of "Reach!" to announce that it will be started. The notice character display such as "Let's reach!" may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed even when it is done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol becomes easy to see. There is.

In FIG. 121 (A31-1), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 121 (A32), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is open when used, and the box icon An animation in which the notice YH pops out from the inside is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 7 is a red notice display of "red change", and the "red change" notice display is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed in two steps. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the opening of the box (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 121 (A33), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the red "red change" notice display YH is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (A34), the variable icon change animation using the advance notice display YH is started. In FIG. 121 (A34), the notice display YH of "red change" is changed to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 121 (A35), the light ball YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. In FIG. 121 (A36), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode before the animation started after the variable icon change animation ended, is No. 119 (a). It has changed to the blue display mode described in 3. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the normal notification display mode.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 121 (A37), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. The variable icon h0 that has changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed. In FIG. 121 (A38), the normal reach effect ends, and "decoration 5" that is not "decoration 6" swings in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols is fluctuating and fluctuating.

In FIG. 121 (A39), the combination of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 121 (A40), it is confirmed and displayed. The variable icon h0 changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the fixed display is started, and disappears when the fixed display is started. The change icon h0 may disappear before the confirmation display.

Subsequently, a modified example of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 120(a1) to 121(a40) described above will be described. Hereinafter, the description will be centered on the differences from the effect examples described so far, and the description of the overlapping points may be omitted.

The first modified example is the same until FIG. 120 (A7), and as shown in FIG. 121 (A8-2-1) instead of FIG. 120 (A8-1), in the first modified example, , The character of the villager with the change icon h0 is the mode b when the goo is put out, whereas the character of Panda with the opponent icon TI is the mode d when the par is put out, and the villager with the change icon h0 is Will lose the character. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-2), the change icon h0 changes to an icon of a villager type mode e (mode when defeated), and an opponent icon TI is a panda type mode f (win). The state is changed to the icon of (the mode when it is done), and a losing effect (an animation that makes you sad about losing) is being performed.

In FIG. 121 (A8-2-3) in which the first decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is the appearance area because the villager character of the change icon h0 is defeated. After disappearing from the AS, both the villager character with the variable icon h0 and the panda character with the opponent icon TI are performing the standby animation (default animation). As a result, the notice icon YI is not displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 121 (A8-2-4), the variation display of the symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 120 (A8-2-5), the combination of the decorative patterns of the lost is stopped. The villager character, which is being displayed (confirmed display) and has the variable icon h0, gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0 by the erasing animation. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-6) also, the stop icon is being displayed (during confirmation display), and the variation icon h0 has completely disappeared.

Then, similarly to FIGS. 119 (A16) to FIG. 120 (A19-1), the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 loses even in the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-7), as in the case of FIG. 121 (A8-2-2), the defeat effect of the character of the villager of the change icon h0 is performed. In FIG. 121 (A8-2-8), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Go Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 121 (A8-2-9), after the variable display of the patterns is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost is stopped and displayed, in FIG. 121 (A8-2-10), the prefetching is performed. The symbol variation display, which is the subject variation, has been started.

The first modified example described above is an example in which the mini game B is a so-called gasse.

Next, the second modification will be described. In FIG. 121 (A22), when the stocked notice icon YI is used, the notice icon YI is changed to the mode d (the box is opened), but in the second modification, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. Will be involved.

The second modification is the same up to FIG. 121 (A 31-1), and FIG. 121 (A 31-2-1) is the state in which the reach effect is started, as in FIG. 121 (A 31-1). Is. When the reach effect is started, in this second modified example, as shown in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-2), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT and. The timing shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation valid period. May be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation valid period is started at the timing of FIG. 121 (A 31-2-3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-4) shows a certain amount after the operation valid period has started. It is shown in a display mode when time has elapsed.

The timing of FIG. 121 (A31-2-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 121 (A 31-2-6), the notice icon YI, which is the mode a in which the box is closed, is An animation (box opening animation) in which the advance notice display YH pops out of the box is displayed by changing to the open display mode d. Subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 121 (A33).

Here, the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be hidden after the remaining time display meter MT becomes 0, or may not be displayed at the time of operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed. Also, the deletion animation of the operation promotion notification image may be started or executed at the same time as the box opening animation, the deletion animation may be started or executed first, or the box opening animation may be started first. It may be executed.

Note that the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the valid period has elapsed. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136, the box opening animation may be changed depending on whether the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the box opening animation may be the same animation regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a third modified example to a sixth modified example of the effect examples of FIGS. 120(a1) to 121(a40).

In the third modification, the notice icon YI is not the “box” icon but the No. shown in FIG. 117(a). It is the icon of the "button" of No. 5. This "button" icon may be displayed in the appearance area AS from the beginning, may be an icon changed from another icon in the appearance area AS, or may be an icon changed from another icon in the stock area. It may be a changed icon.

The "button" notice icon YI shown in FIG. 122 (A31-3-1) is an icon of the mode a indicating that even if the chance button 136 is operated, there is no remaining time display meter. .. That is, it is the mode of only the button 136a.

In FIG. 122 (A 31-3-2), the form of the “button” notice icon YI is changed to the form b in which the remaining time display meter MT is added. However, the remaining time display meter MT is in full display, which is before the start of the operation valid period. The remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed.

In FIG. 122 (A 31-3-3), the operation valid period is started, and in FIG. 122 (A 31-3-4), the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced.

The timing of FIG. 122 (A31-3-5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 122 (A31-3-6), the form of the notice icon YI of the “button” is the display form of the effect image (smoke image). The effect image (smoke image) disappears and a red “red change” notice display appears in FIG. The change in the form of the notice icon YI after the chance button 136 is operated is the display of an animation (animation after operation). Subsequent examples are the same as the examples after FIG. 121 (A33).

The change of the "button" notice icon YI to the display mode of the effect image (smoke image) may be performed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may be executed even when the operation valid period elapses without executing. Further, in the configuration that is executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136, the post-operation animation may be changed depending on whether the chance button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period. Good. Alternatively, the post-operation animation may be the same animation regardless of whether the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. Furthermore, the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d may be executed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period.

In the fourth modified example, the notice display changes the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon in parallel with the progress of the mini game.

The fourth modification is the same until FIG. 120 (A 18), and FIG. 122 (A 19-2-1) is the same as FIG. 120 (A 19-1) in the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B. The panda character with the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-2), the notice icon YI displayed in stock is used while the mini game B is still continuing. That is, the notice icon YI of the form a in which the box is closed is changed to the form d in which the box is open, and an animation in which the notice YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 6 is a notice display of "change" in the default color of 6, and is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the hold icon change animation using the notice display YH is started.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-3), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A 20), the defeat effect of the character of the villager of the change icon h0 is performed. In addition, in FIG. 122 (A 19-2-3), the notice icon YI used in the middle of the mini game B disappears in the middle of the mini game B, and the default icon “change” is displayed by the hold icon change animation. 121 (A34), the notice display YH is changed to a light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c, and the light ball YHb is the first hold icon h11 representing the hold of the prefetching notice object. It flew toward the target and hit the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-2-4), the holding icon change animation ends while the losing character of the villager character continues in the mini game B, and the first holding icon is the default display mode before the animation starts. The display mode of h11 is No. 1 in FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2. That is, the display mode of the hold icon h11 representing the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice. Then, as in FIG. 120 (A21), the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. Eventually, the symbol variation display is ended, and after the combination of the missing decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display which is the prefetch target variation is started.

In the fifth modified example, the notice display changes the combination mode of the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol.

The fifth modification is the same up to FIG. 120 (A18), and FIG. 122 (A19-3-1) is the same as FIG. 120 (A19-1) in the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B. The panda character with the opponent icon TI has won. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-2), while the mini game B is still continuing, the notice icon YI which is displayed in stock is used. That is, the notice icon YI of the form a in which the box is closed is changed to the form d in which the box is open, and an animation in which the notice YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH appearing here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). This is a look-ahead notice display of "12th chance" and is once displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The "look-ahead" look-ahead notice display here is a display for giving notice of the occurrence of a look-ahead notice in which the combination of chance eyes is definitely displayed when the first decorative symbol is finally confirmed.

In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-4), the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is displayed on the right symbol display area 208c for a while after the box of the notice icon YI is opened (after it appears). Displayed in. On the other hand, since the game of losing the rock-paper-scissors game is lost, the replacement animation of the display mode of the villager character and the default display mode is started, and the opponent icon TI gradually disappears. Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” is gradually disappearing from the screen together with the appearance area AS. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol changes from high speed change to low speed change. In this example, the variation display of the first decorative pattern is changed at a low speed, and then the chance eye digestion effect is started, but the chance eye digestion effect is started immediately after the notice display YH of the “chance eye” appears. May be done. As shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-6), since the variable display of the first decorative symbol becomes a low-speed variation, the notice display YH of the “chance eye” is the light ball YHb in the right symbol display area 208c. Has changed to. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-7), the ball of light YHb flies toward the first decorative symbol that is changing at a low speed, and hits the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-8), the effect image EF2 is displayed on all the three decorative patterns that are changing slowly, and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-3-9). , The first decorative pattern is shaking and fluctuating from "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" which is the chance. The chances of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6" and "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7". Similar to the chance item, the pre-reading target variation (next symbol variation display) is a weak chance item that is relatively hard to hit big, and a strong chance item that is relatively easy to hit is “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”. -"Decoration 1", "decoration 3"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 8", "decoration 4"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 8". In FIG. 122 (A 19-3-10), an effect image EF3 for notifying that the chance eyes of “decoration 1”, “decoration 3”, and “decoration 5” are stopped and displayed is displayed. In 3-11), the chances of "decoration 1"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 5" are stopped and displayed.

In the sixth modified example, No. 1 in FIG. The notice display YH of "Chance" of 2 is an example in which the look-ahead notice that the pending change symbol is temporarily stopped is combined with the medium symbol of the first decorative symbol described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 122 (A 19-4-1) shows a state where the panda character with the opponent icon TI has won in the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-2), the reach effect is started with the first decorative symbol, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c. It should be noted that the display mode of the villager character has changed to the default display mode since the player has lost the Janken confrontation, and the opponent icon TI has disappeared. Further, the notice icon YI of “red box” disappears along with the appearance area AS. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-3), the notice icon YI is used in the reach state, and the notice display YH of “chance” appears. In other words, the "chance" notice display YH appears after the start of the reach, and the "chance" notice display YH here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display. Equivalent to a kind of. The currently displayed symbol variation display is a symbol variation display one time before the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice subject variation, and the notice display YH of "chance" is different from the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice subject variation. It corresponds to a normal notice about the variable display of symbols. After the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-4). The notice icon YI may disappear with an erasing animation, or may disappear in an instant without using the erasing animation. Further, in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-5), the notice display YH of “chance” disappears in the reach state.

And in FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the pending change symbol HHZ is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol. The hold change symbol HHZ has a red symbol and a blue symbol, and when the red hold variable symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of any of the displayed hold icons (here, the first hold icon h11) is displayed. When the blue hold pending change pattern is temporarily stopped by two steps, the display mode of the hold icon is promoted by one step. In FIG. 122 (A 19-4-6), the blue pending change pattern HHZ is temporarily stopped, and after that, the pending change animation as shown in FIG. 106 (D17) is started, and in the default display mode. The certain first hold icon h11 changes to the second display mode (white flashing display mode). In addition, the pending change symbol HHZ is a look-ahead notice regarding the first pending icon h11.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing seventh to tenth modified examples of the effect examples of FIGS. 120(a1) to 121(a40).

The seventh modification is the same up to FIG. 121 (A30-1), and FIG. 123 (A31-4-1) is the prefetching announcement target variation, as in FIG. 121 (A31-1). The reach effect has been started with the variable display of symbols. In FIG. 123 (A 31-4-2), the notice icon YI is used after the start of the reach, and the notice icon YI in FIG. The notice display YH of "Chance" of 2 appears. The "chance" notice display YH that appears here is a normal notice that increases the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display, which was the look-ahead announcement variation. It should be noted that after the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed, the used notice icon YI disappears as shown in FIG. 123 (A 31-4-3).

The eighth modification is an example in which one of the hold icons changes to the opponent icon TI. That is, as shown in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-1), when the winning of the hold (third hold) that is the target of the look-ahead notice is awarded, the hold icon indicating the hold before the hold for the look-ahead notice is displayed as an opponent. It changes to the icon TI. In addition, the hold icon representing the hold prior to the look-ahead notice target hold also changes for the character (here, a villager character) who fights the character of the opponent icon TI. In the eighth modified example, the first hold icon h11 is changed to the opponent icon TI. That is, the icon has changed to the type of panda character. Also, the second hold icon h12 has changed to an icon of the type of villager character. In FIG. 123 (A 3-2-2), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and in FIG. 123 (A 3-2-3), the movement animation of the hold icon is started and the right base of the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. The effect image EF1 is displayed on the icon bIr. As a result, as shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-4), the variable icon h0 becomes the opponent icon TI, and the first hold icon h11 causes the character (here, the villager here) who fights the character of the opponent icon TI. Character) is an icon. An appearance area AS surrounded by a frame appears in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, and a notice icon YI that can be acquired when winning the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is displayed therein. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (A3-2-5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B is also started. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-6), a rock-paper-scissors confrontation animation is performed by the panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variable icon h0, and the villager character of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Villager character wins. Fig. 123 (A3
In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in (2-7), an animation to celebrate that the villager character of the first hold icon h11 has won is started, and in the subsequent same figure (3-2-8). The stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS has started. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-9), the notice icon YI is displayed at the stock position.

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-10), the mini game B is finished, and at the first stage hs1 of the hold icon display area HIS, the display mode of the villager character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. There is. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the replacement animation of the panda character icon and the variable icon in the default display mode is started. Each of the replacement animations here may be an animation that returns to the display mode before changing to a villager character or a panda character, or a different display mode from the display mode before the change. It may be a replacement animation. For example, the display mode before the change may be the default display mode, or the display mode may be replaced with the display mode of the prefetch notice or the normal notice. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-11), both the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode. Further, the notice icon YI remains displayed in stock. This notice icon YI is a notice icon in which the hold to be the second hold in FIG. 123 (A3-2-11) is a pre-read notice target, and is used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold. .. However, it may be used in the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be used during execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, which was the icon of the villager character.

The ninth modification is the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, FIG. 123 (A 3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8b1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8). In this ninth modification, the notice icon YI that has come out of the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving to the stock area SS, and the default display mode until then is displayed. The second hold icon h12 representing the target hold of the prefetching notice was replaced with the stock display in the hold icon display area HIS (Fig. 123 (a 3-2-8b2) to the same figure (a 3 -2-8b3)). It should be noted that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 can be considered to have changed to the display mode of the advance notice icon YI. Further, the notice icon YI that has emerged from the appearance area AS may be moved into the stock area SS and then to the hold icon display area HIS. The hold icon display area HIS may also serve as the stock area SS.

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8b4), the notice icon YI replaced by the second hold icon h12 is displayed as the change icon h0 on the base hs0 of the change icon display area CIS as the hold is exhausted. ing. In FIG. 123 (3-2-8b5), the notice icon YI, which is the variation icon h0, is used on the pedestal hs0 and changes to the mode d in which the box is opened. The notice display YH of "Chance" of 2 appears. In FIG. 123 (3-2-8b5), since the reach has not started yet, the notice display YH of the “chance” here indicates that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. The notice will be displayed.

The notice icon YI is moved to the pedestal hs0 and is replaced with the change icon h0 while being displayed in the appearance area AS or once displayed in the stock area SS and during the variable display of the symbol for the pre-reading notice pending. Alternatively, it may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS and replaced with the hold icon of the read-ahead notice subject hold during the symbol variation display or the stop display before the symbol change display of the read-ahead notice subject hold.

Further, the notice icon YI is used in the state of the hold icon, and the notice display Y of the look-ahead notice is displayed.
There may be cases where H appears. In this case as well, the notice icon YI remains displayed in the appearance area AS, or once is displayed in the stock area SS, and then is displayed in the symbol variation display or the stop display before the symbol variation display of the prefetching notice object pending. During this, the hold icon may be moved to the hold icon display area HIS and replaced with the hold icon of the prefetching notice target hold.

The tenth modification is also the same as the eighth modification halfway. That is, FIG. 123 (A 3-2-7) is the same, and FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8c1) is also the same as FIG. 123 (A 3-2-8). In this tenth modification as well, the notice icon YI that has emerged from the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size, and then moves to the hold icon display area HIS without moving to the stock area SS. Then, in the tenth modification, the notice icon YI is replaced with the first hold icon h11 that is the icon of the villager who played the mini game B. That is, a hold icon different from the hold icon representing the prefetching notice target hold is replaced. In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be acquired, and in that case, the reserved icons may be replaced with the number of reservation icons. That is, one notice icon YI may be replaced with one hold icon. Alternatively, a plurality of notice icons Yi are collectively replaced with one hold icon, and a plurality of notice icons replaced with the hold icons are shown with numbers representing the plurality of numbers, or the hold icons are The plurality of notice icons replaced with may be displayed in a color representing the number of the plurality of notice icons. Furthermore, the notice icon YI may be replaced with the change icon h0.

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c3), the character "I did it" in the animation celebrating the victory of the mini game remains, but the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. ing. The panda character of the opponent icon TI, which is the variable icon h0, is still in the mode e, and the character “I did it” disappears at the timing of changing to the mode a. In addition, the character "Yatane" may disappear at the same time when the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI, or before the first hold icon h11 of the villager's icon is replaced with the notice icon YI. It may disappear. For example, it may disappear at the timing of FIG. 123 (a 3-2-8c2).

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c4), the notice icon YI replaced with the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon h0 and is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the change icon display area CIS. The symbol variation display performed in FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c4) is a symbol variation display before the target variation of the prefetching notice. During execution of this variable display of symbols, the animation of stocking the notice icon is started. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 123 (3-2-8c4) is the notice icon YI, but is not the notice icon used for the subject change of the prefetch notice. The animation started here is an animation of stocking the notice icon used in the target change of the prefetch notice. The variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 123 (3-2-8c4) functions as a stock confirmation icon of the notice icon used in the subject change of the prefetch notice.

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c5), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, and the effect image EF4 is displayed to notify that the notice icon used in the subject change of the prefetch notice is stocked. It should be noted that some icon is beginning to appear faintly behind the effect image EF4. In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c6), the effect image EF4 pops out of the variation icon h0 and moves to the stock area SS. On the other hand, the variable icon h0 has changed to the default display mode. This default display mode is a display mode when the variable icon h0 is started to be displayed as a hold icon (third hold icon h13). That is, although the display mode has changed variously after the start of display, the display mode before the change is restored. The display may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode before the change.

In FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c5), the effect image EF4 is displayed in the stock area SS as the notice icon YI used in the target change of the prefetch notice.

Note that the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 123 (3-2-8c3) may be used before it becomes the variable icon. Further, an animation for moving the notice icon YI displayed as the first hold icon h11 to the second hold icon h12 representing the prefetching notice target hold is performed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the notice change of the notice icon YI is performed. The display may be announced in advance. After FIG. 123 (A3-2-8c7), it continues to FIG. 120 (A22).

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing another modified example of the effect examples of FIGS. 120(a1) to 121(a40).

In the eleventh modification, the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are areas dedicated to the mini game. This eleventh modification is the same until FIG. 120 (A2), and in FIG. 124 (A3-3-1), the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS disappears, and the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon. The display area DIS is connected. Hereinafter, the area in which the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS are connected is collectively referred to as a mini game dedicated area MGS. In the mini-game exclusive area MGS shown in FIG. 124 (A 3-3-1), the appearance area AS that is the first area is displayed in a frame. In the variable icon display area CIS of the mini game dedicated area MGS, the panda character of the opponent icon TI is displayed in the mode a. Here, the variation icon h0 corresponding to the currently displayed symbol variation display is changed to the panda character of this opponent icon TI. In addition, at the back of the appearance area AS, there is provided an entrance/exit through which a character enters and leaves.

In FIG. 124 (A3-3-2), the variable display of symbols is finished, but the panda character with the opponent icon TI continues to be displayed by the standby animation. That is, in this example, when the variable icon h0 changes to the opponent icon TI, the variable icon h0 continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI even if the corresponding symbol variable display ends. In other words, the icon of the panda character plays the roles of both the changing icon h0 and the opponent icon TI during the variable display of symbols, but when the variable display of the symbol ends, it plays the role of only the opponent icon TI. It will be. The panda character icon only plays the role of the opponent icon TI, and the variable icon h0 may be erased.

In FIG. 124 (A3-3-3), the variable display of the symbols is started, and the first hold icon h11, which is the character icon of the villager displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, is directed toward the mini game exclusive area MGS. Start moving. In FIG. 124 (A3-3-4), the character icon of the villager, which has been the first hold icon h11 until now, is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area CIS of the mini-game exclusive area MGS. .. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which was the variable icon in the previous symbol variable display, continues to be displayed as the opponent icon TI, and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation between the villager and the panda is started (Fig. 124 (3-3-5-5). )). When the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started, the notice icon YI appears in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI may appear at the same time as the start of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, or the warning icon YI may appear before the start of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation.

In FIG. 124 (A3-3-6), the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins, and in FIG. 124 (A3-3-7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is displayed. Has been started. Also, an animation has been launched to celebrate the victory in the rock-paper-scissors showdown. In FIG. 124 (A3-3-8), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and in FIG. 124 (A3-3-9), the animation celebrating the victory in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation ends. When this animation ends, as shown in FIG. 124 (A3-3-10), the icon of the character of the villager, which is the change icon h0, exits from the entrance provided at the back of the appearance area AS, and then the pattern. The variable display ends (FIG. 124 (A3-3-11)). The icon of the villager character, which is the variation icon h0, may exit from the doorway provided at the back of the appearance area AS after the symbol variation display ends. On the other hand, the icon of the panda character, which is the opponent icon TI, continues to be displayed until all the rock-paper-scissors battles are completed. However, there may be a case where the icon of the swordsman character is replaced on the way. The exit timing of the icon of the villager character may be the same as the symbol variable display. Further, when the rock-paper-scissors showdown continues after this, the icon of the villager character may be displayed in stock in the mini-game exclusive area MGS until all the rock-paper-scissors battles are completed without leaving. The opponent icon TI and/or the exiting variable icon h0 of the character may enter from the entrance/exit. Also, an animation may be performed in which the opponent icon TI exits when the mini game ends.

In the modification shown in FIG. 124 (A 9-2-1) and FIG. 124 (A 9-2-2), the variation icon h0 is the No. 1 in FIG. It is an icon of the character of Yoshimune shown in FIG. 19, and the opponent icon TI is an icon of the character of panda. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118(d), a 100% chance of winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, and in this example, the notice icon of "rainbow box" that confirms the big hit is displayed in the appearance area AS. In FIG. 124 (A 9-2-2), the variable display is finished with the notice icon of “rainbow box” being displayed in stock. The notice icon of "rainbow box" has a high reliability of the jackpot and functions as a prefetch notice. Note that the "rainbow box" notice icon may function as a notice of the change.

In addition, in the box-shaped notice icon, it is advantageous for the player that the notice display (item) inside the box is "red box" rather than "box" (for example, a notice that easily develops into super reach) It is a display or a notice display with high reliability of a big hit), and the "gold box" is more advantageous to the player than the "red box". Therefore, if only the box-shaped notice icon is displayed, and whether the notice display actually appears or not depending on the color of the box-shaped notice icon, how advantageous the notice is if the notice display appears. Whether it is a display can be estimated in advance. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 117(a), the reliability of the jackpot is determined by the color of the box-shaped notice icon. Therefore, the color of the box-shaped notice icon is easy to hit the jackpot and game. This shows both the ease of obtaining a notice display that is advantageous to the user. It should be noted that depending on the display mode of the notice icon, only the ease with which an advantageous notice display is obtained may be shown, or only the ease with which a jackpot is hit may be shown.

The modified example shown in FIG. 124 (A3-4) is an example in which the hold icon of the prefetching notice target hold may also be used in the mini game. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-4), the third hold icon h13 representing the look-ahead notice target hold is also changed to the icon of the character of the villager, and participates in the rock-paper-scissors confrontation. As a result, if you win the rock-paper-scissors confrontation, you may get the notice display used during the execution of the symbol variation display of the look-ahead notice object pending. Further, the hold icon representing the hold behind the prefetching notice target hold may be changed to an icon that allows participation in the mini game. In this case, if the hold icon of the prefetching notice pending is changed to a fluctuation animation and a mini game is played, until the mini game ends, or until the variable display of the prefetching notice pending is finished, It may be in the form of an icon that allows participation in the game, and thereafter, the original display form may be restored. Further, after the mini game (for example, mini game B) is finished, the icon does not change to a dedicated icon that can participate in the mini game (for example, mini game B), but a new mini game (of the same type) Even if it changes to a dedicated icon that can participate in a mini game (eg, mini game B) or a different type of mini game (eg, mini game A) Good.

The modified example shown in FIG. 124 (3-5) is an example in which the hold icon displayed as an icon capable of participating in a mini game is not limited to one type of icon. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-4), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as an icon of the type of the grandfather, and the second hold icon h12 is No. shown in FIG. 119(a). It is displayed with icons of 18 kinds of villager characters.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 124 (3-6), the hold icon that is displayed first as an icon that allows participation in the mini game is displayed as an icon that can also participate in the mini game. In addition, it is an example in which at least a part of the hold icon to be digested later may overlap. That is, in FIG. 124 (A3-6), the first hold icon h11 is No. 1 shown in FIG. 19 Yoshimune character type icons are displayed, the second hold icon h12 is also displayed as the same Yoshimune character type icon, and the hind legs of the Yoshimune character icon that is the first hold icon h11 are 21 The hold icon h12 overlaps the front leg of the Yoshimune character icon.

Further, the relationship of this overlap may be reversed, or a hold icon having a high reliability of a big hit may be displayed in front. Further, the displayed hold icon may indicate the degree of expectation of the prefetch target variation. For example, when two holding icons of the Yoshimune character are displayed, it may be easier to make a big hit with the change in the prefetch target when two holding icons are displayed.

In the modified examples shown in FIG. 124 (A 31-5-1) to FIG. 124 (A 31-5-3), the cursor CS is used for the notice icon YI displayed in stock. FIG. 124 (A31-5-1) shows the same state as FIG. 121 (A31-1), and in FIG. 124 (A31-5-2), the notice of the mode a which is the display mode in which the box is closed. The display of the cursor CS points to the icon YI. The display of the cursor CS is a display for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used. After FIG. 124 (A31-5-3), it continues to FIG. 121 (A33). When the cursor CS indicates, the notice icon YI may be always used or may not be used. In addition, an effect that gives advance notice that the box will open (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) and the display of the cursor CS may be used in combination. Furthermore, a second modification will be shown. As shown in FIG. 121 (a 31-2-2), the display of the operation promotion notification image may be used in combination.

In FIG. 124 (A 31-5-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, the box opening animation is displayed instead, the mode changes to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is displayed in the box. It's popping out.

In the modified examples shown in FIG. 124 (A 30-2-1) to FIG. 124 (A 30-2-4), an effect is given to give advance notice that the box will open. FIG. 124 (A30-2-1) is in the same state as FIG. 121 (A30-1), and in FIG. 124 (A30-2-2), the box icon displayed as the notice icon YI is An animation production that vibrates rattlingly is being executed. This animation effect fuels the possibility that the notice icon YI may be used. It should be noted that this animation effect is started before the first temporary stop is performed in the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Note that it may be started at the same time as the first temporary stop, or may be started after the first temporary stop. Further, this animation effect may be started before the reach effect is started, may be started at the same time as the reach effect, or may be started after the reach effect is started. Furthermore, this animation effect may be an animation that is always executed when the box-shaped notice icon is used, or may be an animation that may not be executed. In addition, this animation effect may be executed across the continuous symbol variable display. That is, it may be executed even during the symbol fluctuation stop, or may be temporarily stopped during the symbol fluctuation stop, and this animation effect may be started when the symbol fluctuation display is restarted. Alternatively, this animation effect may be started and ended within the period of one symbol variable display and not executed across consecutive symbol variable displays.

In Fig. 124 (30-2-3), the reach state is displayed, but the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly continues, and during this reach state, this animation effect is switched to the box open animation effect. The notice icon YI shown in FIG. 124 (30-2-4) has changed to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is popping out from the box. Then, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

The effect that gives advance notice of the box opening may be executed across the reach effects as in this example, or may not be executed across the reach effects. Also, if an effect that gives advance notice of the opening of the box is executed, the box of the notice icon YI may or may not always be opened.

In the modified examples shown in FIG. 124 (A30-3-1) to FIG. 124 (A30-3-4), a modified example of an effect of giving advance notice of the box opening is executed. In this example, the animation effect in which the box icon vibrates rattlingly indicates whether the timing of using the notice icon YI is near or far depending on the magnitude of the vibration. That is, as shown in FIG. 124 (A30-3-2), when the vibration is weak, the timing of using the advance notice icon YI is far, and when the timing of using the advance notice icon YI is close, -3-3) It changes to strong vibration. In other words, the vibration increases as the use timing approaches. In FIG. 124 (30-30-4), the box of the notice icon YI is opened when the vibration becomes maximum, and the notice display YH pops out from the inside. Then, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33).

The degree of vibration may indicate the reliability of the advance notice icon YI being used or the advantage of the advance notice display contained therein. That is, the vibration may be increased as the reliability and the advantage are higher.

FIG. 124 (30-30-4') shows an example in which the box of the notice icon YI has not opened even though the vibration has become maximum. As described above, in the animation effect in which the icon of the box vibrates rattlingly, there is a case where the effect of gasse is performed. When the lost decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the notice icon YI disappears.

Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked will be described.

FIG. 125 is a stage example in which a plurality of notice icons are stocked by winning in the mini game B, and a notice display is displayed and the display form of the variable icon is changed by using the plurality of notice icons in stock. FIG.

The explanation here will be focused on the difference from the effect example of FIG. 120 (A1) to FIG. 121 (A40) in which only one notice icon was stocked.

In FIG. 125 (I 1-1), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A 4 ), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols. (“Decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of lost decorative patterns. Both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 125 (I 1-1) are the same as No. 1 in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 representing the target hold of the prefetching notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 125 (I2) after the symbol variable display is started, as in FIG. 120 (A7), the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS includes the aspect a of the type of panto as the opponent icon TI. Icon is displayed, and a notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the appearance area AS which is the first area. Further, a stock area SS that is a second area is provided on the appearance area AS, and is an area surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. The stock area SS in this example is provided with a first stock position SS1, a second stock position SS2, and a third stock position SS3, and a part of the third stock position SS3 overlaps with a part of the appearance area AS. ing.

In FIG. 125 (I3), the rock-paper-scissors-confrontation animation of the mini game B is performed and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won, as in FIG. 120 (A8-1). In FIG. 125 (I4), an animation is performed to celebrate the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0. In FIG. 125 (I5), the animation is displayed in the appearance area AS. No. shown in. The notice icon YI of “box” of No. 1 is displayed at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (2)) in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 125 (I 6 ), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A 15 ), the variable display of symbols is finished, the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is being stopped (is being displayed for confirmation), and the variable icon h 0 is also disappeared.

In FIG. 125 (7) after the symbol variable display is started, the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started. Further, in the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 125(7), the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(a) is displayed. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. In FIG. 125 (I8), the rock-paper-scissors-fighting animation of the mini game B is performed, and the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 is winning for the second time. In FIG. 125(I9), an animation is performed to celebrate the victory of the villager character with the variable icon h0. In FIG. 125(I10), the animation is displayed in the appearance area AS. No. shown in. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. In the subsequent FIG. 125 (I11), the second “box” notice icon YI is displayed at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (I2)) in the stock area SS. In other words, the newly stocked notice icon YI is displayed below the previously stocked notice icon YI. The distance between the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 is less than the height of one notice icon. Note that the first stock position SS1 and the second stock position SS2 may not be provided, and stock may be carried out randomly in an empty area. Further, if the first notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is used before the third notice icon YI is stocked (released from the stock area SS). In the case of), the third notice icon YI may be stocked at the first stock position SS1.

In FIG. 125 (I12), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A23), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are lost is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 125 (I13), as in the case of FIG. 120 (A24), the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation is started, and in FIG. 125 (I14-1), as in FIG. The conversation notice as is started. On the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (I14-1), the palace's conversation image CI1 is displayed in the central area. The two notice icons YI in the stock area SS overlap with a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. After the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 125 (I15), the previously stocked first notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1) is displayed. The first notice icon YI used is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is popping out from the box. The notice display YH of this "reach" also overlaps a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side. The notice display YH of "reach" at this timing is a display that gives a notice that the reach effect more than the normal reach is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 125 (I16), the conversation announcement is updated, as in FIG. 120 (A26). In the conversation notice, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the grandpa's conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather's character is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (A26), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. The first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is not deleted in FIG. 125 (YES 16), but is deleted in FIG. 125 (I 17 ). The notice display YH of "reach" is still displayed. Even in the same figure (17), the operation valid period has not started. As described above, the first notice icon YI may be deleted before the start of the operation valid period, but may be deleted at the same time as the start of the operation valid period, or may be deleted after the operation valid period is started. May be.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 125 (18) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation valid period was started.

The timing of FIG. 125 (19) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing.

In FIG. 125(I20), as in FIG. 120(I20), in response to the chance button 136 being pressed within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 is changed from the operation promotion notification image to the current line. The display has been changed to the character display of "Reach!", which announces that the reach production will start with the displayed variable display. Therefore, the same thing (that the reach production is started by the currently displayed symbol variation display) is also announced by a notice (here, the grandpa's conversation image CI2) different from the notice display YH of "reach". Will be there. Further, when two types of notices are given in this way, one notice may be a notice with higher reliability than the other notice. Alternatively, the advance display YH of the “reach” displayed first may be used to notify the normal reach occurrence, and the conversation notification displayed subsequently may be used to notify the super reach occurrence. By giving such a time-series notice, it may appear that the production (reach type) is promoted. On the other hand, on the contrary, it is possible to give notice of the occurrence of super reach by the notice display YH of the “reach” displayed first, and give notice of the occurrence of normal reach in the conversation notice displayed later. ) May appear to be demoted. However, since it is a notice about reach production within the same fluctuation, whichever comes first may be better. In addition, for example, when the notice YH announces "reach" and the conversation notice displays "continue" for announcing the pseudo continuous production, the pseudo continuous notice after the reach occurs (for example, the pseudo continuous symbol stops. ) Occurs, and it is possible to give a notice until the pseudo continuous production is started.

In addition, even if a pseudo-announcement is made twice by the notice display YH and another notice within one break in the symbol variation display (the period from the start of the symbol variation to the temporary suspension of the pseudo-association), the pseudo-association is 1 It may be configured to be performed only once (that is, the temporary stop is performed once), or may be configured to generate the pseudo-repetition (temporary stop is generated) by the number of times the notice is given.

In this way, by combining the notice display YH and the notice by another effect, promotion effect and demotion effect can be performed within one symbol variation display. For example, in the pseudo continuous production, the promotion production can be performed as the number of pseudo continuous productions increases. For example, the third display mode may be announced in the first variation of the pseudo consecutive number, and the fifth display mode may be announced in the second variation of the pseudo consecutive number. It should be noted that the third display mode may be announced in the second pseudo mode change, and further, the second display mode may be announced in the second pseudo mode change as the demotion effect. Good. Further, in the case of the pseudo continuous production, in the one-time symbol variable display, the notice of the third display mode may be given first, and then the notice of the fifth display mode may be given next, or conversely, first. Alternatively, the fifth display mode may be announced first, and then the third display mode may be announced.

Note that the advance notice character display such as "Reach!" in the old conversation image CI2 is displayed only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. However, it may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136.

In FIG. 125 (I22), as in FIG. 121 (A30-1), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative pattern becomes easy to see. There is. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may disappear at the same time, the conversation image CI1 of the lord displayed on the back side may disappear first, or the conversation image CI1 displayed on the front side. The conversation image CI2 of 1 may disappear first.

In FIG. 125 (I23), the reach effect is started as previously announced, and the “decoration 6” is fluctuatingly changed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, in the reach state, the second stocked notice icon YI is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 125 (I 24), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and the notice display YH of “change” pops out from the inside. In this example, the notice icons YI are used in the order in which the notice icons YI are stocked, but the notice icons YI may be used regardless of the stock order. For example, the notice icon YI in which the notice display YH having a high advantage appears may be used earlier or may be used later. Further, a higher reliability depending on the type of the notice icon YI may be used earlier or may be used later. Further, here, the notice display YH of the "change" that has appeared appears on the right pattern that is temporarily stopped (here, it overlaps with the "decoration 6", and it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap. The notice display YH of “change” overlaps the right pattern from the front side. This is not the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 but at the second stock position SS2. It is related to the notice display YH released from the notice icon Y2 that has been stocked.

In FIG. 125 (i25), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the “change” notice display YH is still displayed. In the succeeding FIG. 125 (B26), the variable icon change animation using the advance notice display YH is started. In FIG. 125 (26), the advance notice YH of “change” is changed to the light ball YHb while the state of overlapping with the temporarily stopped right symbol is maintained. In FIG. 125(I27), the light ball YHb flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. Also here, the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH has been emitted affects, and the light ball YHb is changed at a position different from the example shown in FIG. 121 (A34) to FIG. 121 (A35). It flies toward the change icon h0 along the trajectory. However, even if the position of the notice icon YI from which the notice display YH is released is different, the notice display YH is released to the same position (for example, the position of the “change” notice display YH shown in FIG. 121 (A32)), It may be changed to the light ball YHb at the position and fly toward the variable icon h0 on the same trajectory.

In FIG. 125(I28), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode before the animation started after the change icon change animation ended, is No. 119(a). The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the normal notification display mode. After that, it continues to FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 125, the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed to announce that the reach effect will be performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but from the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is not started. Also, in the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is started, the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed, and as a result, than the symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of "reach" is not displayed, The symbol variation display in which the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed makes it easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol mode.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 125 and an effect example of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-2-1) to FIG. 126 (i 14-2-1), the state shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-2-1) is as shown in FIG. 125 (i 14-1). 126 (I 14-2-2), the display of the cursor CS points to the notice icon YI to be used. Here, the display of the cursor CS points to the advance notice icon YI which is stocked at the first stock position SS1 (see FIG. 125 (2)). The display of the cursor CS also overlaps with the conversation image CI1 of the lord from the front side.

In FIG. 126 (I 14-2-3), the display of the cursor CS disappears, and the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 that the display of the cursor CS was pointing up to then opens and the box The notice display YH of "reach" is popping out from the inside.

The box of the notice icon YI may be opened by operating the chance button 136. In this case, the operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 may be displayed, or may be the back button that is not displayed. Further, the display position of the cursor CS is operated by the up and down keys of the cross key 181a so that the player can select the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI selected by the cursor CS is opened by operating the chance button 136. You may Alternatively, the notice icon YI that is not used may be indicated by the cursor CS. Further, the cursor CS may be displayed or not displayed. In this case, when the cursor CS is displayed, it may be easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol, or conversely, it is difficult to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol. Yes, there is no difference between the two. After that, it continues to FIG.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-3-1) to FIG. 126 (i 14-3-1), the state shown in FIG. 126 (i 14-3-1) is as shown in FIG. 125 (i 14-1). The state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 126, and in FIG. 126 (I 14-3-2), two displays of the cursor CS are displayed, and both of the notice icons YI are pointed to. As a result, it is not known which of the notice icons YI is used first.

In FIG. 126 (I 14-3-3), both of the displays of the two cursors CS disappear, the box of the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position SS1 opens, and the notice of "reach" is displayed from the box. The display YH is popping out.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 126 (I 14-4-1) to FIG. 126 (I 14-4-1), the state shown in FIG. 126 (I 14-4-1) is as shown in FIG. 125 (I 14-1). The state is the same as that shown in FIG. 126, and also in FIG. 126 (I 14-4-2), two displays of the cursor CS are displayed, and both of the notice icons YI are pointed to. In this example, as shown in FIG. 126 (I 14-4-3), after both the displays of the two cursors CS disappear, the notice icons YI of both the two cursors CS pointed to until then. The box opens, and the notice display YH of “reach” pops out from the box of the notice icon YI that was stocked at the first stock position SS1 and is stocked at the second stock position SS2 (see FIG. 125 (2)). The notice display YH of “change” is popping out from the box of the notice icon YI that was displayed. The boxes of both the notice icons YI may be opened at the same time, may be opened in the stock order, and the notice display YH having a high advantage may be opened first or later. Further, a higher reliability depending on the type of the notice icon YI may be opened earlier or may be opened later. After that, the notice display YH of “reach” is erased as shown in FIG. 125 (yes 20), while the notice display YH of “change” as shown in FIG. 125 (yes 26) is displayed on the temporarily stopped right symbol. It changes to a light ball YHb in the overlapping state. After that, the variable icon change animation ends, and the display mode of the variable icon h0, which is the default display mode before the animation starts, is No. 119 in FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2. It should be noted that the end of the variable icon change animation may precede the deletion of the "reach" notice display YH, may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted later.

The modification shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-1) to FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4) is an example for explaining the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 126 (I 1-2-1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is four, which is the upper limit, and four reservation icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Of these hold icons, for example, the third hold is the look-ahead notice target hold, and all the first hold icons h11 to third hold icons h13 are icons that can participate in the mini game (village character icon). Has changed to. The maximum stock number of the notice icon YI is “3” (maximum reserved number −1), which is less than the maximum reserved number of 4 in special figure 1 or special figure 2. However, the number may be the same as the maximum reserved number of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, or may be the same as the total number of the maximum reserved number of the special figure 1 and the maximum reserved number of the special figure 2. Alternatively, the number may be one less than the total number (for example, 8). Further, it may be larger than the maximum holding number or may be larger than the total number.

In FIG. 126 (1-2-2), the mini game B is further won in a state where two notice icons YI have already been acquired. As a result, as shown in FIG. 126 (B 1-2-3), the third notice icon YI has come out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. In this state, the third enlarged and displayed notice icon YI overlaps the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 from the front side. As a result, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 becomes difficult to be seen for a moment. However, by setting the position of the notice icon YI coming out of the appearance area AS to a position separated from the second stock position SS2, the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position SS2 is prevented from overlapping. You can also

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4), the first stock position SS1, the second stock position SS2, and the third stock position SS3 (FIG. 125) provided in the stock area SS are provided. (See (ii)) A notice icon YI is displayed for each. A part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4) overlaps a part of the appearance area AS from the front side.

On the other hand, a part of the appearance area AS shown in FIG. 126 (I 1-2-4') overlaps with a part of the notice icon YI displayed at the third stock position SS3 from the front side, and the third stock The lower half of the notice icon YI displayed at the position SS3 is difficult to see.

Note that the stock area SS may be provided at a position that does not overlap the appearance area AS so that the stock area SS does not overlap the appearance area AS or the appearance area AS. For example, the stock region SS may be provided in the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The production examples shown in FIG. 126 (u 1) and subsequent figures are diagrams showing stepwise the production examples of the mini game A of Yoshimune treasure acquisition notice.

In FIG. 126 (U1), as in FIG. 120 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special drawings 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 126 (U2), as in FIG. 120 (A2), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special-figure 1 is increased by one, and the total is three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (U2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3".

In FIG. 126 (3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by an increasing animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. In FIG. 121 (3), both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, which have been the default display modes so far, are the same as the No. 1 in FIG. 119(a). The icon has changed to the mode a of the kind of Yoshimune (bow) described in 14. The change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may be performed before the third hold icon h13 of the target hold of the prefetching notice is displayed in an increased manner or simultaneously with the increased display. Alternatively, it may be performed after the increase display. More specifically, the change of the display mode of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 (change of the hold icon) may be completed before the increase animation of the third hold icon h13 is started. The change of the hold icon may be completed at the same time when the increase animation is started, or the change of the hold icon may be completed after the increase animation is started. Further, when the change of the hold icon is performed by the change animation, the change animation may be started before the increase animation is started, or the change animation may be started at the same time as the increase animation. However, the change animation may be started after the increase animation is started. In addition, by changing the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 to the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) type mode a, in the variable display of symbols corresponding to the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively. A mini game (a specific mini game (mini game A in this example) or an unspecified mini game (mini game A, mini game B, or other mini game in this example) is to be played. You may give a notice. In addition, the mini game is started at the same time as or after the start of the symbol variation display (in this example, the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11) for starting the mini game A (may be immediately after). The icon to be performed may be configured to change.

In FIG. 126(u4), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 126 (v 5), the hold that was the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (v5), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started, and the first upper decorative symbol is displayed. In the two-holding number display, the number of holdings in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon shown in FIG. 118(a) is started and the icon AI is slightly displayed at the right end of the screen. 'Begins to be displayed. In addition, in FIG. 126 (v), the moving animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (yumi), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 until now, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 of the displayed Yoshimune (bow) character has started moving toward the first stage hs1 and has been displayed on the third stage hs3 until now, although it is the default display mode The third reservation icon h13 of the notice target reservation has started moving toward the second stage hs2. Here, when the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow) starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, the pedestal hs0 is lowered a little. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the mini game A icon and the movement animation of the hold icon may be started at the same time, or the appearance animation of the mini game A icon may be started first, or vice versa. The animation of moving the hold icon may be started first.

Also in FIG. 126 (6), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and as the variable icon h0, the mode a of the Yoshimune (bow) type (standby) Icon) is displayed. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). On the other hand, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A continues, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is on the carpet and in the white box image in the first display mode (see FIG. 117(a)). An icon AI′ displaying the notice icon YI) of the mode “a” of “No. 1” shown is displayed. This icon AI' is different from the icon AI for the mini game A shown in FIG. 118(a).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 126 (7), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. In addition, in FIG. 126 (v 7), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the meter display MTh of the hit point (HP) is additionally displayed in the icon AI′. It However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (state of 0).

In FIG. 126 (8), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and here, as a part of the appearance animation, hit points (HP) are displayed in the empty meter display MTh added earlier. The displayed animation is executed. In FIG. 126 (e 8), the blue gauge gag is beginning to be seen, though slightly. As described with reference to FIG. 118(b), the color of the gauge changes according to the number of HP points. Since the animation here is a blue gauge from the beginning, it can be seen at the stage of looking at the gauge color that the number of HP points is 60 or more. In addition, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the mini game A icon AI has a mode a in which the gauge is full, a mode b in which the gauge is half, and a mode c in which the gauge is only slightly. Since there is only mode d, it can be expected that the gauge will increase to the full state when the blue gauge gag is seen. Here, after the display of the HP is completed (after the increase of the gauge stops), the color of the gauge may be changed to a color according to the number of points of the HP, or as the gauge increases, The color of the gauge may be represented by a color corresponding to the number of points at that time. In FIG. 126 (v 9), the blue gauge gag has increased to half, and in FIG. 126 (v 10) the blue gauge gag has increased to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, in this example, the “box” icon of the mode a has appeared as the icon AI for the mini game A.

In FIG. 126 (u11), the form of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 is changed to the form b holding a bow, and the form of the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first hold icon h11 is also changed to It changes to a mode b with a bow, which is slightly different from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. In FIG. 126 (u 12), both the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 and the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first hold icon h11 have fired arrows and changed to the mode c.

In FIG. 126 (13), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0, which is close to the mini-game A icon AI, is stuck in the carpet, and the first hold icon h11 of Yoshimune (bow). The arrow fired by the character is flying towards the carpet. In FIG. 126 (v 14-1), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the 1-hold icon h11 is also stuck in the carpet, and both arrows hit the carpet brilliantly.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect of the mini game A of the announcement of Yoshimune's treasure step by step.

In FIG. 127 (U 15-1) following FIG. 126 (U 14-1), damage calculation is performed, and the damage is 60 points due to the two arrows sticking. In FIG. 127 (15-1), the damage point notification (the number “60”) is displayed, and in FIG. 127 (16), the blue gauge gag that has been full (100 points) is reduced. Have begun. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification display begins to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (C17), the gauge gag has decreased to the remaining 40 points. The color of the gauge gag changes from blue until then, to green, when it reaches 50 points or less. The damage calculation may be started at the stage when the arrow pierces the carpet. That is, the damage calculation may be started at the timing of FIG. 126 (13) when the first arrow hits the carpet, and the gauge gag may be decreased.

Both the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 that fired the arrow and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 continue to be displayed in the mode c, but are changed to the standby mode a. May be.

In FIG. 127 (18), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the same combination of the missing decorative patterns.

In FIG. 127 (v 19), the stop icon is being displayed (the confirmation display is being performed), and the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 has started. The Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 gradually moves into the base hs0. Disappears. Also in FIG. 127 (e 20), the stop display is being performed (the confirmation display is being performed), and the change icon h0 has completely disappeared.

In FIG. 127 (21), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (U21), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second upper decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a of standby (default) when the symbol variable display is started. And FIG. 127
In (U22), the animation of moving the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (Yumi), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 until now, is the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. The second holding icon h12, which is displayed in the second stage hs2 and is the default display mode, which is the read-ahead notice target pending, starts moving toward the first stage hs1. ing. Further, in the second hold number display on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (v22), the hold number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to "1".

Also in FIG. 127 (v 23), the first decorative symbol is still displayed in a stopped state, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) character is displayed as the variable icon h0. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (U24), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in FIG. 27 (U25), the mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0. Has changed to a mode b with a bow. In FIG. 127 (e26), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0 shoots an arrow and changes to the mode c. In FIG. 127 (u 27), the arrow fired by the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is stuck in the carpet, and damage calculation is performed. In the same figure (u 28), damage point notification (“40 In this figure (29), the green gauge gag, which had 40 points remaining, started to decrease, and when the number of points was 20 points or less, it changed from green to red until then. ing. Also, when the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification begins to fade and gradually disappears. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 127 (v30), the gauge gag has disappeared to 0 points. In this way, the number of hit points (HP), which was 100 points at the beginning of the mini game A, has been successfully reduced to 0 points, and a treasure (preliminary icon) can be obtained. The number of damages given may exceed the number of remaining HP points.

In FIG. 127 (31), the mini game A icon AI whose meter display MTh has become 0 is covered by the effect image EF5, and in FIG. 127 (32), the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini game A of aspect d is displayed. For use icon AI is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (v 33), when the icon AI for mini game A of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (v) of FIG. 32), the icon for mini game A of aspect d is displayed. Icon AI is No. shown in FIG. 117(a). The notice icon YI of the mode a of "box" of 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS as shown in FIG.

Eventually, in FIG. 127 (35 ), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols with a loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”). "-"Decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of the missing decorative designs.

127 (v) 36 to (v) 37 are in stop display (during confirmation display), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 has started, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is It gradually disappears into the pedestal hs0. Further, here, the pedestal hs0, which has been slightly lowered until then, is rising toward the original height. Also in FIG. 127 (v), the stop icon is being displayed (confirmed), the change icon h0 has completely disappeared, and the pedestal hs0 has returned to its original height. The notice icon YI stocked in the stock area SS is displayed without being used. Thereafter, it continues to FIG. 120 (A24). In this example, the hit points are not recovered (for example, the remaining hit points are 40 in FIG. 127 (U17), and the remaining hit points are 40 in (U21) to (U24) in FIG. 27). , Hit points may be recovered. For example, the hit points may be recovered when the next symbol variable display is started.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the first to third modifications of the effect example of FIGS. 126 (1) to 127 (38).

The first modified example is an example of one-time acquisition of the notice icon, and is the same up to FIG. 126 (14-1). In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-1), the damage point notification is normally displayed, but it is not displayed here, and in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2), the meter display MTh is full. The mini-game A icon AI in the state a is covered with the effect image EF5, and in FIG. 15C, the effect image EF5 disappears and the mini-game A icon AI in the state d is displayed. There is. That is, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag is decreasing are omitted, and the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is displayed all at once. Of the damage point notification display and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases, only the damage point notification display may be omitted, or only the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases may be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 128 (C 15-2-4), when the mini game A icon AI of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (C 15-2-3) of the figure), the mode A The icon AI for the mini game A of d is the No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the mode a of "box" of 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is displayed in the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-5).

Eventually, in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-6), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left also shows the same combination of missing decorative patterns.

In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-7), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-7), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. The character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 that has fired the arrow changes from the mode c to the mode a of standby (default) when the symbol variable display is started. Then, in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-8), the movement animation of the hold icon is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 until now, is The second holding icon h12, which starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS and is displayed on the second stage hs2 until now, which is the default display mode, but which is the read-ahead notice target holding, is the first stage. The movement has started toward hs1. Further, in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is restarted, and the icon AI′ is starting to be slightly displayed at the right end of the screen.

Also in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-9), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the moving animation of the hold icon ends, and the variable icon h0 is of the Yoshimune (bow) type. The icon of the mode a (standby mode) is displayed. In addition, in the second hold number display on the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-9), the hold number of the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to "1". Further, the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A continues, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is on the carpet and is a white box image in the first display mode (see FIG. 117(a)). The icon AI′ displaying the notice icon YI) of the mode “a” of No. 1 shown is displayed. In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-10), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and in this appearance animation, the icon AI′ has hit points (HP).
The meter display MTh is additionally displayed. However, the meter display MTh additionally displayed here is an empty state (state of 0). In FIG. 128 (15-2-11), the appearance animation of the icon for the mini game A is continued, and here, as a part of the appearance animation, hit points are added to the empty meter display MTh added earlier. The animation in which (HP) is displayed is executed, and the blue gauge gag increases to full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100, and this completes the appearance animation of the mini game A icon. After all, here too, the "box" icon of the mode a has appeared as the icon AI for the mini game A.

In FIG. 128 (15-2-12), the character mode of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a bow-holding mode b, and then the first hold icon h11 of Yoshimune (bow). Bow) is fired from the character. In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-13), the arrow fired by the Yoshimune (bow) character of the first hold icon h11 is stuck in the carpet, and here again, the damage point notification display and the gauge gag are reduced. In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-14), the icon AI for the mini game A in the mode a in which the meter display MTh is full is covered with the effect image EF5 in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-14). 15-2-15), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is displayed all at once.

As shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-16), when the mini-game A icon AI of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see FIG. 15U-2-3), the mode The icon AI for the mini game A of d is the No. 1 shown in FIG. 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a of “Box” of FIG. 1, and the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the notice icon YI of FIG. It is displayed under the notice icon YI previously stocked in 5). In this way, the one notice icon is successfully acquired in succession, and two notice icons YI are stocked.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2b1) to FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2b5), the process is the same up to FIG. 126 (U 14-1). The modification here is also an example of one-time acquisition of the notice icon, but in this example, the display of the damage point notification and the animation display in which the gauge gag decreases are executed without omission. In FIG. 128 (15-2-2b1), damage point notification (red number “100”) is displayed. Also, in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b2), the blue gauge gag that was in the full state (100 points) started to decrease, the gauge gag decreased to the remaining 50 points, and the color of the gauge gag remained until then. Changes from blue to green, and the green gauge gag continues to decrease. When the gauge gag starts to decrease, the damage point notification display begins to fade and gradually disappears.

The notice may be given by displaying the damage point notification or the color of the carpet. For example, if the display color of the damage point notification is rainbow, even if the notice icon on the carpet is not the "rainbow box" notice icon, you can get the "rainbow box" notice icon. From the characteristics of the notice icon of "rainbow box", the big hit of the pre-reading target fluctuation is decided. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point notification is iridescent, the symbol variation display may be a big hit confirmation. Alternatively, when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red), the probability of acquiring the notice icon may be higher than when the display color is the default color. Alternatively, the symbol variation display when the display color of the damage point is a specific color (for example, red) may be more likely to be a big hit than the symbol variation display when the display color is the default color. The same may be applied to the case of carpet color.

In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, and the gauge ga
g has decreased to the remaining 20 points, the color of the gauge gag has changed from the previous green to red, and the red gauge gag continues to decrease. Moreover, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing.

In FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2b3), the green gauge gag continues to decrease, the gauge gag decreases to the remaining 20 points, the color of the gauge gag changes from the previous green to red, and the red gauge gag continues to decrease further. Moreover, the display of the damage point notification is almost disappearing. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (15-2-2b4), the gauge has decreased to 0 points and the gauge gag has disappeared.

When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the icon AI for the mini game A is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-2-2b5), and thereafter, FIG. 128 (U 15-2-3) and the like. It becomes the same as, and the notice icon YI can be obtained.

FIG. 128 (U 15-3-1) to FIG. 128 (U 15-3-3) in the third modified example, FIG. 128 (U 15-2-1) to FIG. 128 (U 15) in the first modified example. -2-3). In the third modified example, the next mini game A icon AI appears earlier than in the first modified example, and the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is restarted without waiting for the start of the next change. That is, as shown in FIG. 128 (step 15-3-4), when the mini game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS, the mini game A icon AI The appearance animation is started again, and the icon AI' is starting to be displayed slightly at the right end of the screen. In addition, in FIG. 128 (15-3-5), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is white on the carpet in the first display mode. An icon AI′ displaying a box image (preliminary icon YI of No. 1 “box” mode a shown in FIG. 117(a)) is displayed. The stock display of the notice icon YI and the entire display of the icon AI' may be the same, the stock display may be earlier, or conversely, the whole display may be earlier. The meter display MTh is added to the icon AI' only after the next change is started.

Eventually, in FIG. 128 (U 15-3-6), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”). -"Decoration 4"-"decoration 1") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative pattern on the upper left also shows the same combination of missing decorative patterns.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a continuation of the third modified example of the effect examples of FIGS. 126 (1) to 127 (38) and the middle of the fourth to fifth modified examples.

In FIG. 129 (U 15-3-7), which is a continuation of the third modified example, the variable icon h0, which is the icon of the character of Yoshimune (bow), is completely displayed (stopped display) and is completely disappeared. There is.

In FIG. 129 (step 15-3-8) in which the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MTh of the HP in an empty state is additionally displayed in the icon AI′, and the subsequent figure 129 (step 15-3-9). ), the animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to the full tank. After that, the flow is the same as that shown in FIG.

FIG. 129 (C 15-4-1) to FIG. 128 (C 15-4-5) in the fourth modified example, and FIG. 128 (C 15-3-1) to C (15) in the third modified example. -3-5). In the fourth modified example, the appearance animation of the mini game A icon is executed a plurality of times within one symbol variable display, and a plurality of mini game A icons AI appear. The number of appearances of the mini-game A icon AI may be the maximum stock number of the advance notice icon YI, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number. However, if the maximum number of stocks is exceeded, the previously announced notice icon YI is used or a mini game A of Gase is performed before the new notice icon YI is acquired, and the new notice icon YI is added. Cannot be earned.

In FIG. 128 (U 15-4-6), within the symbol variation display that has already acquired one notice icon YI, a new icon AI′ is additionally displayed with the meter display MTh of the HP in an empty state, and continues. In FIG. 128 (step 15-4-7), the animation in which HP is displayed on the empty meter display MTh is executed, and the blue gauge gag is increased to the full tank. The symbol variation display is still continuing, and in FIG. 128 (U 15-4-8), the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variation icon h0, which was the mode c so far, is also the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11. The characters of () also change to the mode b in which they both hold a bow, and aim at the carpet of the new icon AI for mini-game A. In the fourth modified example, it is possible to make a plurality of attacks in one symbol variation display. For example, the same mini-game A icon AI can be attacked multiple times. However, even if the attack can be performed a plurality of times, the same mini-game A icon AI may be allowed to attack only once.

Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two characters, and in FIG. 128 (15-4-9), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 is also Yoshimune of the first hold icon h11 ( The arrow fired from the character (bow) was also stuck in the carpet, the damage was calculated, the damage point notification (the number "40") was displayed, and the tank was full (100 points). The blue gauge gag is beginning to decrease in the same figure (15-4-10). In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 128 (15-4-11), the color of the gauge gag remains blue and decreases to 60 points. Here, before the meter display MTh decreases to 0 points, as shown in FIG. 128 (U 15-4-12), the symbol variation display ends, but the meter display MTh becomes 0 points, It is also possible to acquire the second notice icon YI. Further, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 subsequent to FIG. 128 (U 15-4-12), the mini game A is continuing and it is possible to obtain the second notice icon. .. It should be noted that the number of advance notice icons YI that can be acquired can be set in various ways based on the maximum number of stocks, as described above regarding the number of appearances of the mini-game A icons AI. That is, the number of advance notice icons YI to be acquired may be the maximum stock number, may be less than the maximum stock number, or may exceed the maximum stock number.

The fifth modified example is an example in which a dedicated area for the mini game A is prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-1), the background screen, which has been omitted in the drawings so far, is displayed. This background screen is a sea background screen. In this FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1), as in FIG. 126 (U 1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special drawings 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-1), as in FIG. 126 (U 2), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special-figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. .. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-1), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as “3”.

In Fig. 129 (1-2-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3. The third hold icon h13 is a hold icon in a display mode not shown in FIG. 119(a). That is, it is a display mode (VS display mode) in which VS is displayed as a character, and is a display mode for notifying that the mini game A is to be performed in the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold prior to the hold of the hold icon in this display mode. Is. That is, if the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the VS display mode, the mini game A is executed in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold and/or the second hold. It should be noted that when the VS display mode of the hold icon is displayed, the mini game A may or may not always be executed. Note that the hold of the hold icon in the VS display mode is the target hold of the prefetching notice, and the VS display mode is also a kind of the display mode of the prefetching notice.

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-4), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-5), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (U-1-2-5), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”.

Even in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-6), the first decorative pattern in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in this FIG. 129 (U 1-2-6), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A is displayed. Has started. That is, when the exclusive area appearance animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 is displayed in the effect display area 208d where the hold frame UI was displayed, and the hold icon is also covered by the effect image EF6. Has been done. In FIG. 129 (1-2-7), the effect image EF6 of the flame becomes thin, and the icons and the like in the back of the effect image EF6 are beginning to appear faintly.

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-8), the dedicated area appearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 disappears completely, and the effect display area 208d replaces the hold frame UI with the mini game. The dedicated area MSS of A appears. In the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-8), two Yoshimune (bow) icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed. Both of these two icons YMI1 and YMI2 are displayed in mode a (standby mode). Further, at the right end of the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A, an icon AI′ having a notice icon on the carpet is displayed, and further, a dedicated area for the meter display MTh of hit points (HP) is provided and dedicated to that area. A meter display MTh is displayed in the area. In the meter display MTh shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-8), the blue gauge gag is full. That is, the number of remaining HP points is 100.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in Fig. 129 (1-2-9), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game A is started in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. It should be noted that the mini game A may be started at the same time when the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the mini game A may be started after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, or the first decorative symbol. The mini game A may be started before the variable display of the symbols is started. When the mini game A is started, the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with the mini game opening image. The mini game opening image is a translucent image, and the match card of the mini game is displayed in characters (here, “Yoshimune” VS “carpet”).

In FIG. 129 (U 1-2-10), the mini game opening image disappears, and in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-11), the two icons YMI1 and YMI2 of Yoshimune (bow) which have been in the mode a until now are displayed. The characters change into a mode b in which they both hold a bow and aim at the carpet of the icon AI for the mini game A. Here, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the possibility that the mini game A will be played even in the next variation. In this example, since two Yoshimune (bow) icons are displayed, it is more likely that the mini game A will be executed even in the next change, as compared with the case where only one Yoshimune (bow) icon is displayed. .. The number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may represent the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired. That is, the greater the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons, the higher the degree of expectation that the notice icon Yi can be acquired.

Alternatively, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons may correspond to the number of hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode. That is, if the number of the hold icons before the hold icon in the VS display mode is three, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons also becomes three, and as in this example, before the hold icon in the VS display mode. If the number of the hold icons is 2, the number of Yoshimune (bow) icons is also 2. Further, the number of confrontations that can be confronted is determined according to the number of holding icons before the holding icon in the VS display mode, such as one carpet or one attack against one Yoshimune (bow) icon. The number of times may be displayed in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A.

Eventually, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-12), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, damage calculation is performed, and damage point notification (“ The number “40”) is displayed, and the blue gauge gag that was in a full state (100 points) is beginning to decrease in FIG.

FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a continuation of the fifth modified example of the production examples of FIGS. 126 (1) to 127 (38) and a production example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted.

In FIG. 130 (U-1-2-14), which is a continuation of the fifth modified example, a semi-transparent notice image such as “following the next change” is displayed because one attack has ended while one symbol change display has been completed. Is displayed. The dedicated area MSS of the mini game A is once covered with this preview image. Note that this advance notice image may not be displayed in some cases.

In FIG. 130 (U-1-2-15), the notice image disappears, and in FIG. 130 (U-1-2-16), the variable display of the pattern ends, and the combination of the decorative patterns with a loss (“decoration 6”-“decoration”) 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed.

Fig. 130 (U 1-2-17) is in the stop display (confirming display), the sticked arrow disappears from the carpet, and in Fig. 130 (U 1-2-18), the first decoration in the central region Although the symbols are still stopped and displayed, the hold, which was the first hold until now, is exhausted and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (1-2-2), the variable display is started in the upper left second decorative symbol.

After that, an arrow is fired from each of the two icons YMI1 and YMI2, and in FIG. 130 (U 1-2-19), two arrows are stuck in the carpet, and in the subsequent FIG. 130 (U 1-2-20). In the meter display MTh shown, the point has decreased to 0 points and the gauge gag has disappeared. When the meter display MTh becomes 0, the mini game A icon AI is covered with the effect image EF5 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 130 (1-2-2), the effect image EF5 disappears, and the mini-game A icon AI of the mode d is displayed. When the mini-game A icon AI of the mode d starts moving toward the stock area SS (see (1-2-2) in FIG. 130) as shown in FIG. 130 (1-2-2). , The icon AI for the mini game A of the mode d is No. 1 shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of the mode “a” of box 1 of FIG. 1 is changed to the notice icon YI of the mode a with the box closed in the stock area SS, as shown in FIG. When the stock of the notice icon YI is completed, the exclusive area disappearing animation of the mini game A is started. That is, when the dedicated area disappearing animation of the mini game A is started, the flame effect image EF6 gradually appears in the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. In FIG. 130 (U 1-2-24), the exclusive area MSS of the mini game A is covered with the semi-transparent flame effect image EF6, and in FIG. 130 (U 1-2-25), the flame effect. It is covered by the image EF6. Note that the dedicated area disappearing animation of the mini game A may be started before the stocking of the notice icon YI is completed. For example, the dedicated area disappearing animation of the mini game A may be started immediately after the icon AI for mini game A of the aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS. Further, the exclusive area disappearing animation of the mini game A may be started at the same time when the stock of the notice icon YI is completed.

In FIG. 130 (1-2-26), the dedicated area disappearance animation of the mini game A ends, the flame effect image EF6 disappears completely, and the effect display area 208d appears the dedicated area MSS of the mini game A. Reverts to the previous configuration. That is, the hold frame UI is displayed, and the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS displays the variation icon h0 in the default display mode. The variable icon h0 in the default display mode corresponds to the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-3) to FIG. 129 (U 1-2-5). Further, on the first stage hs1 of the variable icon display area CIS, the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is the third hold icon h13 that is displayed in the VS display mode shown in FIG. 129 (U 1-2-3) to (U 1-2-5). Equivalent to. The first hold icon h11 corresponding to the third hold icon h13 that was displayed in the VS display mode may be displayed in the VS display mode as it is, or any one of the blue to iridescent icons. It may be displayed in a form.

Note that the hold (fourth hold) after the third hold icon h13 that was displayed in the VS display mode is the target hold for the prefetching notice and is stocked as shown in FIG. 130 (1-2-26). The notice icon YI that is being displayed may be used during the fourth pending symbol variation display. In addition, the second hold icon h12 may be displayed in the VS display mode, and the mini game may be played until the second hold symbol variation display is displayed.

Eventually, in FIG. 130 (1-2-27), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”). -"Decoration 4"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second decorative design on the upper left also shows the same combination of missing decorative designs.

Next, an example of an effect in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 130(e1-1), the mini-game A icon AI of the aspect d is displayed. The variable icon h0 is an icon of a Yoshimune (bow) character, but the first hold icon h11 is an icon in a default display mode. In this modified example as well, the hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the prefetching notice target hold. In addition, the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 130(e2), the notice icon YI that has changed from the mini game A icon AI of the mode d is stocked in the stock area SS. The notice icon YI stocked here is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is the notice icon of the aspect a of the "box" of 1. Further, the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols with a loss (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 7”). The display is stopped, and the second decorative design on the upper left also displays the same combination of the lost decorative designs. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 130 (e3), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (E3), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. Then, the moving animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 130 (e4), the first hold icon h11 of the character of Yoshimune (bow), which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, is displayed as the variable icon h0. ing. The character of Yoshimune (bow) who has become the variable icon h0 has changed from the mode c to the mode a of the standby (default).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 130 (e5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, a mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is started. The mini game here is a little different from the mini game A described so far, and the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI in which the target icon hangs on the parachute appears. In FIG. 130 (e6), the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI in which the target icon hangs on the parachute is descending from the upper right of the screen, and the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the variable icon h0 shown in the same figure (e7) is , The character changes to b with a bow and is aiming for the target icon, and eventually a character of Yoshimune (bow) fires an arrow. In FIG. 130(e8), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 130(e9), the letters "Lv.UP" for notifying the promotion confirmation are displayed next to the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI. It should be noted that the arrow fired from the Yoshimune (bow) character of the variable icon h0 may always hit the target icon of the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI, or may not hit it. ..

In FIG. 130(e10), when the notice icon YI that has been displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI changes to the No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(a) so far. No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(a). It has been promoted to the "red box" notice icon 2 (Fig. 130 (e11)).

Eventually, the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI disappears as shown in FIG. 130 (e12), and in the following figure (e13), the promoted notice icon YI is used. That is, when used, the notice icon YI of “red box” in the form a in which the box is closed is changed to the form d in which the box is open and the notice display YH is displayed in the box. A pop-up animation is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 7 is a red notice display of "red change", which is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, etc. will be changed in two steps.

In FIG. 130 (e13), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the variable icon change animation using the red "red change" notice display YH is started. In FIG. 130 (e 14), the red “red change” notice display YH has changed to a light ball YHb.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect of promoting the stocked notice icon YI and a modification of the example of the effect.

In FIG. 130 (E15) continued from FIG. 130 (E14), the light ball YHb in which the red “red change” notice display YH has changed is aimed at the variable icon h0 which is the icon of the Yoshimune (bow) character. When it flies and hits the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 is covered with the effect image EF8, and when the effect image EF8 disappears, the variable icon h0 changes to the No. 1 shown in FIG. 4 has changed to the “green” variation icon (FIG. 130 (e16)).

In this example, the mini game for promoting the stock-displayed notice icon YI has been performed, but a mini-game for further obtaining the notice icon may also be performed. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

Further, in this example, a dedicated icon such as the notice icon promotion dedicated icon YSI appears, but the hold icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may change to the notice icon promotion icon. It may be. Furthermore, an icon for obtaining a notice icon, such as the mini-game icon AI, may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon. Further, the appearance of the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI serves as a notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also notifies that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production. In this case, the variation icon h0 is used to execute the effect of giving a notice that the notice icon may be promoted. However, even if a notice other than the change icon h0 or the hold icon is used, the notice may be given. Good, or be sure to give a notice.

Next, a modified example of the effect example in which the stocked notice icon YI is promoted will be described.

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-1), the icon AI for the mini game A of aspect d is displayed. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both Yoshimune (bow) character icons. The hold of the first hold icon h11 becomes the look-ahead notice hold. In addition, the mini-game A icon AI of aspect d starts moving toward the stock area SS.

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-2), the variable display of symbols continues, and the notice icon YI of the form a of “box”, which is different from the icon AI for mini game A of the form d, is stocked in the stock area SS. Has been done.

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-3), there is a ball in the starting point 230 of Toku-zu 1 and the number of holdings of Toku-zu 1 is increased by 1 to become 2 in total. In the second reservation number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e1-2-3), the reservation number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "2".

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-4), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 representing the increased second hold is the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character. If a mini-game for acquiring the notice icon is played in the currently displayed symbol variation display, the Yoshimune (bow) character of the second hold icon h12 may not be used, or the opposite. It may be used for. That is, during the variable display of symbols with an increase in hold, use of the increased hold icon may or may not be prohibited from being used in the mini game for acquiring the notice icon.

In Fig. 131 (e 1-2-5), the variable display of the symbols is terminated without using the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is lost in the central area. The combination of the decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also stops and displays the same combination of the lost decorative patterns. Furthermore, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the change icon h0 has disappeared.

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-6), the hold, which has been the first hold until now, is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. The symbol variation display started here is a symbol variation display in which the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the stock area SS is used. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-6), the first decorative symbol remains stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started. Then, the moving animation of the hold icon is started, and in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-7), the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode that has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far is the default display mode. The variable icon h0 is displayed as it is.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock is also started in this modification. In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-9), the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI whose target icon hangs on the parachute is descending from the upper right of the screen, and this modification shown in the same figure (e 1-2-10) In the example, the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the first hold icon h11 changes to the state b holding a bow and aims at the target icon. In Fig. 131 (e 1-2-11), an arrow is fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) of the hold icon, and in Fig. 131 (e 1-2-12), the fired arrow heads toward the target icon. Flying In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-13), the arrow fired from the character of Yoshimune (bow) hits the target icon, and the promotion of the notice icon YI displayed in stock is confirmed. In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-14), the letter “Lv.UP” for notifying the promotion confirmation is displayed next to the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI, and FIG. 131 (e 1-2-15) Then, when the notice icon YI that has been displayed in stock is covered with the effect image EF7 and the effect image EF7 disappears, the notice icon YI has been promoted from the "box" so far to the "red box" notice icon. (FIG. 131 (e 1-2-16)).

In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-17), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI promoted to “red box” is used in the reach state. That is, as shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-18), the box of the notice icon YI opens, and from the inside, the No. shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed. The notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" of 19 comes out. The notice display YH of "VS swordsman reach" is a face icon of a swordsman character, and is a display for notifying that the super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach will be performed by the displayed variation. In FIG. 131 (e 1-2-19), the used notice icon YI disappears, but the notice display YH of “VS Swordsman Reach” is still displayed.

In Fig. 131 (e 1-2-20), the notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" has disappeared, but at the same time that the notice display YH disappears, the super reach production of VS Swordsman Reach is started as the notice. .. When the notice display YH of "VS Swordsman Reach" is displayed, the super reach effect of VS Swordsman Reach may or may not be started. An image of an enemy swordsman is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-221), and the first decoration shown in the following figure (e 1-2-22). On the pattern display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed. It should be noted that when the super reach effect is started, all the reservation frame UIs are hidden (disappeared) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and remains displayed on the remaining top plate. further,
The second decorative pattern and the second hold number display also continue to be displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (e 1-2-23), "decoration 5" as the middle symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene where Yoshimune is defeated. In the following FIG. 131 (e 1-2-24), the same effect as the wipe effect described with reference to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-4) to FIG. 76 (A 14-2-5) is performed. As shown in (E 1-2-24), the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L once becomes the wipe display of the same color with no pattern. By this wipe display, the variable icon h0 disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. The variable icon h0 may be displayed.

In 143 (e 1-2-25), the background is returned to the normal background by wiping out, and the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the character of Yoshimune (bow), is also returned to the default display mode. .. However, the first hold icon h11 may be in the display mode of the Yoshimune (bow) character until it is consumed, or the display mode may be changed at another timing.

In 143 (e 1-226), the display is stopped with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”.

It should be noted that in this modification as well, a mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may be performed together. Alternatively, in the variable display in which the notice icon YI is used, the mini game for further acquiring the notice icon may not be performed, and only the mini game for promoting the notice icon YI displayed in stock may be performed.

Also in this modified example, the hold icon may be changed to the notice icon promotion icon, or the change icon may be changed to the notice icon promotion icon. Furthermore, an icon for obtaining a notice icon, such as the mini-game icon AI, may change to an icon for promoting a notice icon. Further, the appearance of the notice icon promotion exclusive icon YSI serves as a notice that the notice icon may be promoted, and the mini game itself that promotes the notice icon YI also notifies that the notice icon may be promoted. It corresponds to the production. Then, in this modified example, the hold icon is used to execute the effect of notifying that the notice icon may be promoted. You may choose to give a notice.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect in which the notice display YH of the button appears from the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 132 (a1), the symbol variation display that is the variation of the prefetch target is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a1), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. The variable icon h0 of is displayed. It should be noted that there is no single hold icon, and “0” is displayed for both the second hold number displays of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Further, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock.

In FIG. 132 (a2), the previously stocked first notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI opens the box. The display mode is changed to the display mode d, and from the box, No shown in FIG. 117(b) is displayed.
． The notice button YH of “button” 21 is popping out. This "button" notice display YH is a button image that imitates the chance button 136, and is a display that changes the displayed symbols to give a notice that the button effect will be performed. Even if it is done, the button effect may not be actually performed.

In FIG. 132 (a3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is deleted, but the notice display YH of the “button” remains displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 132 (a4), the advance notice display YH of the "button" changes to a light ball YHb, and as shown in the same drawing (a5), the light ball YHb is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It flies to the right end portion of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, a character "preparing" indicating that the button operation is not yet accepted is displayed on the button image icon 136aI. Therefore, the display of the button image icon 136aI and the character "preparing" is also a display indicating that the button effect is stocked, and the button effect is performed in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It is also a display for announcing.

In FIG. 132 (a7), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 132 (a8), the "decoration 6" that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a is moved to the bottom of the second decorative symbol before the super reach effect is moved, and is swung in the right symbol display area 208c. The fluctuating “decoration 6” moves to below the second hold number display. Next, the button image icon 136aI and the character "preparing" that have been displayed in the lower right corner until now are moved to the lower left corner before shifting to the super reach effect. In FIG. 132 (a9), the button image icon 136aI and the variable icon h0 overlap each other during the movement. That is, the button image icon 136aI passes behind the variable icon h0. As a result, the variable icon h0 overlaps part of the button image icon 136aI from the front side. Note that the button image icon 136aI may pass through the labor side of the variable icon h0 so that a part of the button image icon 136aI overlaps the variable icon h0 from the front side. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character "in preparation" may be moved so as not to overlap the variable icon h0. Alternatively, the button image icon 136aI and the character “in preparation” may not be moved, and the button image icon 136aI may be moved to the moving position instantaneously without performing the animation. That is, the display position may be instantaneously switched. In this case, the state shown in FIG. 132 (a9) disappears. In FIG. 132 (a10), the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode and the characters “in preparation” have been moved to the lower left corner.

Eventually, super reach production was started, and VS swordsman reach was started here. An image of an enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a11), and the main character is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in the same figure (a12). An animation of a duel scene between Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed.

In the middle of the duel scene animation, as shown in FIG. 132 (a13), the second notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked at the second stock position) that was later stocked and remains until now is displayed. No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b) is used. Twenty "UP" notice display YH is popping out. This "UP" notice display YH is a displayed variable display and is a display for notifying that the effect will be promoted. When the "UP" notice display YH is displayed, the effect is always promoted. You may or may not be promoted. When the notice display YH of "UP" is displayed, the notice display YH is immediately used, and the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI is started as shown in FIG. 132 (a14). That is, when this promotion animation is started, the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode (first display mode), which was displayed in the lower left corner, is displayed together with the characters "preparing" and the flame effect image EF6'. It is covered by and is difficult to see. In FIG. 132 (a15), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6′ disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the fifth display mode (red) button image icon 136aI. There is.

The animation of the duel scene continues while the cut-in image CI3 and the like are displayed (FIG. 132 (a16)). In FIG. 132 (a17), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI has started again. The button image icon 136aI is promoted for the second time without any notice. However, the promotion may be announced by other notice, may be given notice, or may not be given notice. In FIG. 132 (a17), the button image icon 136aI of the fifth display mode (red) is covered with the effect image EF6' of flame again together with the characters "preparing", and it is difficult to see. In FIG. 132 (a18), the promotion animation of the button image icon 136aI ends, the flame effect image EF6' disappears, and the button image icon 136aI is promoted to the lever image icon 139aI. In the pachinko machine 100 as well, although the operation lever is not shown, the operation lever is provided at a position where the player can operate. Further, instead of the operation lever, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction or a second chance button 137 may be used.

In FIG. 132 (a19), the cut-in image CI3 disappears, the animation of the duel scene is approaching the end, and the time to start the button production is approaching. In FIG. 132 (a20), the animation in which the lever image icon 139aI is gradually enlarged is started. The lever image icon 139aI becomes the lever image 139a by this animation. When this animation is started, the character "in preparation" disappears, and after the figure (a21), the lever image 139a is once enlarged to the maximum in the figure (a22). After that, in FIG. 132 (a23), the lever image 139a becomes slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a23), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the lever is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 132 (a24)). The button performance here is a kind of final judge performance. The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 132 (a25) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period.

The timing of FIG. 132 (a26) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the operation lever 139 at this timing. Then, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 17, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the display shown in FIG. The first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left pattern and the right pattern etc. of the first decorative pattern are overlapped by the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral part. It is difficult to visually recognize the object 224Gd as compared with the case where the object 224Gd is not overlapped. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, the 1000-box box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL emits light. The character effect produced by the thousand-box box character 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a jackpot confirmed effect.

Note that the effect using various types of accessories in FIG. 132 (a27) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 has been operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed when the time has elapsed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial position, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a28), "decoration 6" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene in which Yoshimune has won. After this, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of an effect in which the number of executions of the button effect is stocked.

In FIG. 133 (Ob1), the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (Ob1). Further, two notice icons YI are displayed in stock. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (b2). In addition, the first notice icon YI previously stocked (the notice icon YI stocked at the first stock position) is used, and the first notice icon YI is a display mode in which the box is opened. It changes to d and the notice display YH of the "button" is popping out from the box. The "button" notice display YH in this example of performance is a display for giving notice that the "button" notice display YH itself is stocked.

In FIG. 133 (b3), the first notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is deleted, but the notice display YH of the “button” remains displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 133 (b4), the advance notice display YH of the “button” is changed to a light ball YHb, and as shown in the figure (a5), the light ball YHb is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It flies to the right end portion of the right base icon bIr. In FIG. 132 (a6), the button image icon 136aI in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed at the right end portion thereof. Further, the character "x1" representing the number of stocks is displayed on the button image icon 136aI. One button effect is executed for one stock. Here, the button image icon 136aI is stocked, but in short, it means that the number of executions of the button effect is stocked.

In FIG. 133 (b7), the second notice icon YI (the notice icon YI stocked in the second stock position) that was later stocked is used, and the notice display of the “button” is again displayed from the box. YH is popping out. In FIG. 133 (b8), the second notice icon YI, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, is deleted, and the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to a light ball YHb, and the light ball is changed. YHb flies toward the button image icon 136aI displayed in the lower right corner and hits the button image icon 136aI. In FIG. 133 (b9), the stock number on the button image icon 136aI is “×3”. This means that when the light ball YHb hits the button image icon 136aI in FIG. 133 (b8), two button image icons 136aI are stocked. As described above, the notice display YH of the “button” is a notice that the notice display YH of the “button” itself is stocked, and the number of the notice display YH of the “button” is displayed. It is not announced in advance whether the button image icon 136aI will be stocked, and thus, a plurality of button image icons 136aI may be stocked for a single "button" advance notice display YH. For example, a maximum of 10 button image icons 136aI may be stocked for one advance notice YH of the “button”. However, it may be configured such that only one button image icon 136aI is stocked for one notice display YH of the “button”. Further, the number of stocks of the button image icon 136aI may be determined according to the display mode of the “button” advance notice display YH. For example, in the notice display YH of the “button” in the first display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI is 1, but in the notice display YH of the “button” in the fifth display mode, the stock number of the button image icon 136aI. May be 5. The maximum stock number of the button image icon 136aI is, for example, 10. In other words, the maximum number of executions of the button effect is 10 times.

In FIG. 133 (b10), the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI, and it is announced that the button effect will be started. In FIG. 133 (b11), a large button image 136a is displayed. The stock number on the button image icon 136aI has been reduced from “×3” to “×2” at this stage. After that, in FIG. 133 (b12), the button image 136a becomes slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b12), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation effective period is started (FIG. 133 (b13)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 133 (b14) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 133 (b15) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 16, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 133 (b16), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the non-display screen, and at the same time as shown in FIG. The first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the light guide plate IL is also emitting light.

Note that the effect using various types of accessories in FIG. 133 (b16) may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed when the time has elapsed.

In FIG. 133 (b17), each of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd returns to the initial position, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the super reach is achieved. Promotion of the production is being carried out. In other words, it is announced that Panda will participate in the VS Swordsman Reach to help Yoshimune, the main character. Thus, in FIG. 133 (b18), the animation of the duel scene continues with the panda participating in the battle, and in FIG. 133 (b19), the effect image EF9 is added again to the button image icon 136aI, and the second button is pressed. It is announced that the production will start. In FIG. 133 (b20), the second button effect is started, the button image 136a is displayed, and the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed, and a little time has passed since the operation valid period started. ing. Further, the number of stocks on the button image icon 136aI is reduced from “×2” to “×1”.

The timing of FIG. 133 (b21) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (b22), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the gold cut-in image GCT described as “Go!!!Go!!” in the sixth display mode (gold). It is announced that the expectation of a big hit is quite high.

The display of the gold cut-in image GCT in FIG. 133 (b22) may be performed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. If it does, it may be executed.

In FIG. 133 (b23), the gold cut-in image GCT disappears and the animation of the duel scene returns, and in the following FIG. 133 (b24), the animation of the duel scene is about to end. In FIG. 133 (b25), the final judge effect is started, and a large default button image 136a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as a part of this final judge effect. Then, in FIG. 133 (b26), the effect image EF9 is added to the button image icon 136aI three times, and it is foretold that the button effect for the third time is started. In FIG. 133 (b27), the promotion effect of the button image 136a is performed, the effect image EF10 is added to the large default button image 136a, and in the same figure (b28), the button of the fifth display mode (red). It has been promoted to image 136. By being promoted to the button image 136 of the fifth display mode (red), the expectation of the big hit is further increased. Note that at the stage of FIG. 133 (b27), the display of the button image icon 136aI and the stock number has disappeared.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect in which the number of executions of the button effect is stocked, and other example of the effect.

In FIG. 134 (Ob29) subsequent to FIG. 133 (Ob28), the button image 136a in the fifth display mode (red) is slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed. There is. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (b29), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 134 (b30)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (b31) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 134 (b32) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 17, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a27), the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image, and the display shown in FIG. The first large-scale behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect image and the left pattern and the right pattern etc. of the first decorative pattern are overlapped by the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral part. It is difficult to visually recognize the object 224Gd as compared with the case where the object 224Gd is not overlapped. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, the 1000-box box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 14 operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd. In addition, the light guide plate IL emits light. The character effect produced by the thousand-box box character 224H shown in FIG. 14 is a jackpot confirmed effect.

Note that the effect using various types of accessories and the like in FIG. 134 (b33) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. It may also be executed when the time has elapsed.

After that, the various accessories return to the initial position, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, and the display of the effect image is switched to the display of the final judgment result on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (b34), "decoration 6" as a medium symbol is displayed in large size together with the scene in which Yoshimune has won. After this, the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In this example, when one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is consumed (used), as shown in FIG. 133 (b12), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed. The operation promotion notification image including is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 134 (b30), the button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image may be promoted, but one button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen is consumed. When (used), the operation prompting notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed without fail, or the button image icon 136aI stocked at the lower right of the screen may be displayed. The button of the button image 136a displayed as the operation promotion notification image when it is completely consumed (used) may be configured to be promoted without fail. Further, in this example, when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used), one operation promotion notification image is displayed, but when one button image icon 136aI is consumed (used), the operation promotion notification image is displayed. Two or more images may be displayed or one image may be displayed, or two or more images may be displayed. Here, the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light may be upgraded in accordance with the promotion of the button image 136a of the operation promotion notification image. Alternatively, the button image 136 of the operation promotion notification image may not be promoted, and only the emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may be promoted. The emission color of the chance button lamp 138 may change from the default color to red when one stocked button image icon 136aI is consumed, and from red to gold when two of the stocked button image icons 136aI are consumed. In the case of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 is used, but in the case of operating means different from the chance button 136 (for example, the operating lever 139 etc.), the emission color of the light emitting means that causes these operating means to emit light. Will be promoted.

In this example, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed as the operation promotion notification image, but only the button image 136a may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, and the remaining time is displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Only the display meter MT may be displayed, and character representations such as “press button”, “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, and “long press” may be displayed as the operation prompting notification image (even if the character representation indicates an operation method. ) And a button image 136a may be displayed, only the character notation may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image, or the character notation and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. The character notation, the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT may be displayed as the operation promotion notification image. Further, as the operation promotion notification display, an image simulating the shape of the operating means (for example, button display 136a), an image showing the elapse of the operation valid period of the operating means and/or the remaining time of the operation valid period (for example, remaining time). Time display meter MT), character display related to operation (for example, “press button” or “PUSH”, “continuous hit”, “long press”) and image display other than the above (for example, one or a plurality of “shapes of operating means”) Character image display different from the image imitating the above (By displaying the character image as the operation promotion notification display, the displayed variable display may be more likely to be a big hit eventually than when it is not displayed.)" and the like. ), one or more image displays may be displayed.

FIG. 134 (c1) to FIG. 134 (c7) are diagrams showing, in stages, a first example in which the mini game is started in response to a button operation.

In FIG. 134 (c1), the first decorative pattern in the central area is stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is an icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the type of villager. Is displayed. Also, as the first hold icon h11, the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the type of villager is displayed. Further, although the second hold icon h12 is also displayed, this second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, as the opponent icon for the mini game B, the icon of the mode a (standby mode) of the panto type shown in FIG. 118(c) is displayed. The panda character with the opponent icon TI also executes the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance area AS, the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c2), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is then started. In this example, the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is performed by operating the chance button 136. In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 134 (c3), between the icon of the character of the villager, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the character of panto, which is the opponent icon, which is scheduled to perform a rock-paper-scissors battle, An operation promotion notification image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 134 (c4)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 134 (c5) is shown in a display mode when a little time has elapsed after the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 134 (c6) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, according to the operation of the chance button 136, the rock-paper-scissors showdown is started, and the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is performed. In FIG. 134 (c7), the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won. Then, it continues to FIG. 120 (a 9-1).

It should be noted that the start of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. That is, the mini game may be started only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the mini game is started even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period. May be configured such that it is easier to win the mini game, that is, it is easier to obtain the notice icon YI when the player operates the device within a valid operation period than when the player does not operate it.

FIG. 134 (o d1) to FIG. 134 (o d7) are diagrams showing, in stages, a second example in which the mini game is started in response to a button operation.

FIGS. 134(d1) to (d2) are the same states as FIGS. 134(d) to (d2) except that the notice icon YI is stocked.

In FIG. 134 (d3), the stocked notice icon YI is used, and the notice display YH of “button” appears from the inside. In FIG. 134 (d4), the used notice icon YI disappears, but the “button” notice display YH is still displayed, and in FIG. 134 (d5), the “button” notice display YH: It moves toward between the icon of the character of the villager, which is the variable icon h0, and the icon of the character of Panta, which is the opponent icon, which is scheduled to have a rock-paper-scissors confrontation. In FIG. 134 (d6), the notice display YH of the “button” is located between the icon of the character of the villager who is the variable icon h0 and the icon of the character of Panta who is the opponent icon.

In FIG. 134 (d7), a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is additionally displayed on the advance notice display YH of the “button”. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (d7), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 134 (c6) and the like.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of effects in which the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon YI can be seen before the emission.

In FIG. 135 (or a1), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the same combination of lost decorative patterns. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 135 (or a1) is the No. 1 icon in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 indicating the target hold of the prefetching notice is the default display mode.

In FIG. 135 (or a2), the hold that was the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a2), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started and the first upper right symbol is displayed. In the 2-holding number display, the holding number in Toku-zu 1 is decremented by 1 and becomes “1”. Further, in the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS, which has not been displayed until now, the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B is started and the effect image EF1 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 135 (or a2), the movement animation of the hold icon is also started. That is, the first hold icon h11 of the villager character, which has been displayed on the first stage hs1 so far, starts moving toward the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, and is displayed on the second stage hs2 so far. The second hold icon h12 in the default display mode has started moving toward the first stage hs1.

Also in FIG. 135 (or a3-1), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but the movement animation of the hold icon ends, and the variation icon h0 is used as the mode a (standby of the villager type). Aspect) icon is displayed. The villager character with the variable icon h0 is executing the standby animation (default animation). In addition, the appearance animation of the opponent icon also ends, the effect image EF1 disappears in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and the opponent icon TI has the aspect a ( The (standby mode) icon is displayed, and the panda character of this opponent icon TI is also executing the standby animation (default animation). Further, in the appearance area AS, the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. In addition, No. shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 121 and the like, the “change” 6 is the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI, but here, it is treated as the notice icon YI. Strictly speaking, in the case of the notice display YH, there is no frame display surrounding the changed character, but in the case of the notice icon YI, there is the frame display. Since the "change" notice icon YI is displayed with the default color "change" characters, the player selects from the notice icon won by winning the rock-paper-scissors confrontation when the appearance area AS is displayed. The notice display YH to be released is known.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the rock-paper-scissors competition of the mini game B is then started. In FIG. 135 (or a5), a rock-paper-scissors competition animation is performed by the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, and the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won.

In FIG. 135 (or a7), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started by the victory of the villager character of the change icon h0. That is, the "change" notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS exits from the appearance area AS, is temporarily displayed in a large size, and moves to the stock area SS as shown in FIG. 135 (or a8). , Displayed in stock. The notice icon YI thus stock-displayed is also displayed with the character "change" of the default color.

On the pedestal hs0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a9), the display mode of the villager character and the replacement animation of the default display mode are started. Also, the opponent icon TI gradually disappears from the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, the empty appearance area AS gradually fades out to the right end of the screen. In FIG. 135 (or a10), the variation icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS, and nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. Absent.

In FIG. 135 (or a11), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”- The "decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the same combination of lost decorative patterns.

In FIG. 135 (or a12), the read-ahead notice target hold, which has been the first hold so far, is exhausted, and the symbol variation display that is the read-ahead subject change is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 135 (or a12), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have started variable display, and the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS has a default display mode. The variable icon h0 of is displayed. Further, the notice icon YI of "change" has been displayed in stock so far.

In FIG. 135 (or a14), the variable icon change animation using the "change" notice icon YI that has been displayed in stock until then is started. In this variation icon change animation, as shown in FIG. 135 (or a14), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI is about to be used is added to the "change" notice icon YI. The "change" notice icon YI corresponds to the "change" notice display YH when the effect image EF11 is added. In FIG. 135 (or a15), the "change" notice icon YI ("change" notice display YH) to which the effect image EF11 is added flies toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. .. In FIG. 135 (or a16), the display mode of the variable icon h0, which was the default display mode before the animation started after the variable icon change animation ended, is No. 119 of FIG. The display mode is changed to the white blinking display mode described in 2.

In this example, it may be considered that the “change” notice icon YI itself collides with the change icon h0.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-2) is an example in which the notice icon YI of the same type is displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, three "change" notice icons YI are displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-3) is an example in which different types of notice icons YI are displayed in the appearance area AS. Here, the notice icon YI of "red change", the notice icon YI of "super hot", and the notice icon YI of "SP" are displayed. The types are not limited to all different types, and may be different types. For example, the notice icon YI of "change", the notice icon YI of "change", and the notice icon YI of "SP" may be displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI of the same type (here, notice icons YI of “change”) are stocked in the stock area SS.

The example shown in Fig. 135 (or b) is an example in which a plurality of different types of notice icons YI( are stocked in the stock area SS. Here, the notice icon YI of "red change" and "super hot". The notice icon YI and the notice icon YI of "SP" are displayed. Note that the notice icons YI are not limited to all different types, and may be different types. The "change" notice icon YI and the "SP" notice icon YI may be displayed, and the "box" notice icon YI and the "red box" notice icon YI shown in FIG. The "button" notice icon YI may be stocked, or the "box" notice icon YI, the "box" notice icon YI, and the "gold box" notice icon YI may be stocked. , May be stocked.

In each of the examples shown in FIG. 135 (or d), FIG. 135 (or e), and FIG. 135 (or f), the box-shaped notice icon YI shown in FIG. 117(a) whose contents are unknown is displayed in the appearance area AS. Is an example in which a plurality is displayed. The example shown in FIG. 135( or d) is an example in which three notice icons YI of “box” shown in FIG. 117(a) are displayed in the appearance area AS. That is, the same type of box-shaped icon is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 135 (or e), the notice icon YI of “box”, the notice icon YI of “box”, and the notice icon YI of “red box” are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, box-shaped icons of the same type and box-shaped icons of different types are displayed in combination. In the example illustrated in FIG. 135 (or f), the notice icon YI of “box”, the notice icon YI of “red box”, and the notice icon YI of “gold box” are displayed in the appearance area AS. Is. That is, all different types of box-shaped icons are displayed.

Here, the example shown in FIG. 135 (or a3-2), (or a3-3), (or d), FIG. 135 (or e), or FIG. 135 (or f) appears if the mini game succeeds. This is an example in which all the notice icons YI displayed in the area AS can be acquired. It should be noted that if the mini game succeeds, any one or two of the notice icons YI displayed in the appearance area AS may be configured to be obtainable. In addition, a roulette notice that sequentially displays the notice icons YI that can be acquired in the appearance area AS is given, and the roulette is displayed before the mini game is started/while the mini game is being executed/after the mini game is successful. It may be configured such that the notice icon that can be stopped and acquired (or acquired) is confirmed.

Next, an example of production in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times will be described.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of effect in which one stocked notice icon is used multiple times.

In FIG. 136 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold for the prefetch notice. Also, the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and nothing is displayed in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 136(a2), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 119(b) is started for the right base icon bIr, and a smoke-like effect image EF is displayed.
12 is displayed. In FIG. 136(A3), the appearance animation of the icon change notice display has ended, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS has the No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b). The icon change notice display IYH of 16 “bancho” is displayed. The icon change notice display gives notice that the notice icon YI will be acquired or that the display mode of the icon will change. The “bancho” icon change notice display IYH here is a notice for notifying that the notice icon YI will be acquired. In FIG. 136 (A 4 ), the icon change notice display IYH's guard character is “box”. It is notified that the notice icon YI has been acquired, and the notice icon YI of “box” is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. That is, in this example, the notice icon YI is acquired without playing the mini game. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 136 (A6), after the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is stopped and displayed, in the same FIG. Has been started.

When the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation is started, the notice icon YI stocked in the previous symbol variation display is used as shown in FIG. 136 (A8-1), and the box is closed. The notice icon YI of a certain mode a is changed to a mode d that is a display mode in which the box is opened, and an animation in which the notice display YH pops out of the box is displayed. The notice display YH that appears here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 6 is a notice display of "change" of the default color of 6, which is a notice for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, etc. is changed by one step.

In the example of performance until now, when the notice icon YI was used once and changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box was opened, it was erased as it is, but in this example of effect, FIG. 136 (A 9) is displayed. As shown, the notice icon YI changes from the display mode in which the box is open to the display mode in which the box is closed and is not erased. The fact that the box of the notice icon YI has returned to the closed state means that the box may be reopened in the symbol variation display in which the box is opened, that is, in the symbol variation display which is the currently pre-reading variation. It means that you have foretold. Even when the box of the notice icon YI returns to the closed state, the box may not be reopened or may be reopened without fail. Further, even if it is not opened continuously (even if it is not opened immediately), it may be opened while the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation continues. Alternatively, it may be opened again during a specific period (for example, a specific period spanning continuous symbol variable displays) irrespective of the symbol variable display that is the prefetch target variation. Furthermore, although it has been described here that the reopening is performed, the reopening may be closed and the reopening may be performed more than twice.

In FIG. 136(A10), the notice display YH of “change” released from the notice icon YI is used, and the display form of the variable icon, which has been the default display form (first display form) so far, blinks white. The display mode (second display mode) has changed.

In addition, in FIG. 136 (a11), the notice icon YI that has once returned to the closed display mode a is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the second icon in the box is displayed. The notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is No. shown in FIG. 117(b). This is a notice display of "REACH" in 17, and this notice display of "REACH" is a displayed variable display, and is a display for notifying that normal reach or more or reach reach production is performed. In this way, there is a case in which a type of notice display different from the type of the first (previous) notice display YH appears. However, the same type of notice display YH may appear continuously. Further, it may be configured so that only the notice display of a type different from the type that appeared last time or once appears, or only the notice display of the same type as the type of the first notice display YH appears. May be. It should be noted that the "reach" notice display may notify that the normal reach will be performed. In that case, when the "reach" notice display is performed, the normal reach occurs in the symbol variation display in which the notice display is displayed. It will be decided to do.

In FIG. 136 (A12), the notice icon YI changes to the mode a which is the display mode in which the box is closed again and is not erased. Further, the notice display YH disappears after a certain fixed display period has elapsed after the appearance (FIG. 136 (A13)), but if the notice display YH is "reach", when the reach effect is performed, It may continue to be displayed until the reach effect is started.

Soon, as shown in FIG. 136 (A 14 ), the reach effect is started, and “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c. In this example, the reach effect is always performed when the “reach” notice display YH appears, but the reach effect is not always performed just because the “reach” notice display YH appears. Alternatively, even if the notice display YH of “reach” appears, the reach effect may not be performed and the variable display of symbols may end. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 136 (A15), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH which is the third from the box is released (FIG. 136 (A16)). The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). This is a notice display of "chance" in the default color of 2. When the notice display of the "chance" of the default color is displayed during the reach, it is a display that gives a notice of an increase in the reliability of a big hit by the variation. Also here, the type of the notice display different from the type of the second (previous) notice YH appears. This is because the reach effect has already been started, so the notice display YH of "reach" cannot be made to appear again. If there is no such situation, even if the notice display YH of the same type appears. Good. Note that the notice display YH of "reach" may be displayed again during the execution of the reach effect. For example, if the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed again during the normal reach, it may be announced that the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. It may or may not evolve into reach, and may or may not evolve into super reach. In addition, when the "Leach" notice display YH is displayed during execution of Super Reach A, which has a lower reliability for jackpots than Super Reach B, it is announced that Super Reach A will develop into Super Reach B. However, in that case, it may develop into the super reach B without fail, and it may or may not develop into the super reach B. Further, in the reach effect, the notice display that appears may be limited. In this example, an upper limit is set for the number of notice displays YH appearing from the same notice icon YI (for example, up to 5), and the notice display YH appears within the range. .. As described above, although the upper limit is set, the larger the number of notice displays YH coming out from the same notice icon YI, or the kind of notice display YH coming out from the same notice icon YI is. The larger the number, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, the conversely may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be independent of the number or type. In this example, the upper limit number of the notice display YH that appears from the same notice icon YI is configured to be larger than the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI, but the same number may be used. On the contrary, the maximum stock number of the notice icon YI may be configured to be larger than the upper limit number of the notice display YH appearing from the same notice icon YI.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A17), in this example, the notice icon YI that has emitted the third notice display YH disappears without returning to the closed display mode a. The notice icon YI may be configured to disappear without fail when opened once during the reach. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the notice display YH is always deleted when the notice display YH is released up to the upper limit number. Further, even if the notice display YH is released up to the upper limit number, the notice display YH may continue to be displayed without disappearing. This is the same even if the notice display YH is not emitted up to the upper limit number. Further, the display mode may be returned to the closed display mode a and may be continuously displayed without being opened again, or the open display mode b may be continuously displayed.

In FIG. 136 (A 18 ), the normal reach effect ends, and “decoration 5” that is not “decoration 6” swings in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols is fluctuating and fluctuating.

In FIG. 136 (A19), the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. 136 (A20), it is fixedly displayed. The variable icon h0 changed to the blue display mode continues to be displayed until the fixed display is started, and disappears when the fixed display is started. The change icon h0 may disappear before the confirmation display.

In the example described here, the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed to notify that the reach effect is performed, and the reach effect is actually started, but rather than the symbol variation display in which the reach effect is not started, In the variation display in which the reach effect is started, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. As a result, this means that the “reach” is displayed more than in the variation display in which the notice display YH of the “reach” is not displayed. In the symbol variable display in which the notice display YH of “” is displayed, the final jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finalized and displayed. Further, first, the notice display of "change" is released in FIG. 136 (A8-1), and the notice display of "reach" is released in the second time (A11). , "Change" notice display may be released, or the same type of "red change" notice display as that of "Change" notice display (No. 7 notice display shown in FIG. 117(b)) may be released. May be.

Next, an example in which a plurality of the same type of notice display YH are released from the same stocked notice icon YI will be described.

The same is true up to FIG. 136 (A7), and when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target variation is started, the stocked notice icon YI is used as shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-1). Then, the display changes to the display mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). The notice display of "Oval" of 27, and if the notice number of this Oval can be collected by a predetermined number (three in this case), it will be a super reach effect or the thousand-box box effect described in Fig. 132 (a27). Although there is a display that gives notice that production will be performed, it may not be possible to collect a predetermined number. In addition, even if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, there may be a case where neither the super reach effect nor the production of a thousand-box box is performed. However, if one sheet appears, a predetermined number of sheets may be surely collected, and if a predetermined number of sheets are collected, at least one of the super reach production and the production of a thousand box box product may be performed without fail. When the notice display YH of "Oval" appears, it is stock-displayed in the area (Oval stock area KS) next to the second decorative symbol display (Fig. 136 (A8-2-2)). This small-sized stock area KS is an area different from the stock area SS (see FIG. 136 (5)) in which the notice icon YI is stocked, and these two areas do not partially overlap. However, these two areas may at least partially overlap with each other or may be completely the same area. Further, the stocked notice icon YI and the stocked "oval" notice display YH do not overlap, but at least a part of them may overlap, or all of them may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-2), the notice icon YI that has emitted the “Oval” notice display YH returns to the closed display mode b, and the same figure (A8-2-3) is displayed. In ), the variable display of symbols is continued. In addition, the notice display YH of "small size" may be configured so that only one sheet can be stocked in one symbol variation display.

In FIG. 136 (A8-2-4), the notice icon YI that once returned to the closed display mode a is changed to the opened display mode d again, and two icons are displayed from the box. Noticeable notice display YH is released. The notice display YH released here is not the notice display YH of the "small size", but the No. shown in FIG. 117(b). 7 is a notice display of "red change", and the notice display of "red change" is a display for notifying that the display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like is changed in two stages. In FIG. 136 (A8-2-5), the advance notice icon YI changes to the mode a, which is the display mode in which the box is closed again, and is not erased. Further, the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the display mode of the variable icon, which has been the default display mode (first display mode) until now, is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode). There is.

In FIG. 136 (A8-2-6), the advance notice icon YI is changed to the opened display form d again, and the third advance notice display YH is released from the box. Here, two "oval" notice displays YH are released all at once. As described above, a plurality of advance notice displays YH may be released in one release. However, only one may be released in one release. In FIG. 136 (A8-2-7), the notice display of these two “Oval” is displayed in stock in the Oval stock area KS, and the Oval stock area shown in FIG. 136 (A8-2-7). In the KS, three "oval" notice displays YH, which are the predetermined number, are stocked. In this example, the notice display YH of "small size" is emitted from one notice icon YI a plurality of times (twice in this example), but the notice display YH of "small form" is emitted only once from one notice icon YI. It may be configured not to be released. Further, it may be configured such that only the "oval" notice display YH is not emitted from one notice icon YI.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example in which a plurality of the same type of advance notice display YH are released from the same stocked advance notice icon YI, and other effect examples.

In FIG. 137 (A 8-2-8) following FIG. 136 (A 8-2-7), the notice display YH of three “Oval”, which is the predetermined number, is stocked in the Oval stock area KS. , These three "oval" notice displays YH are used. That is, when the predetermined number of three "oval" notice displays YH are accumulated, they are used immediately. In this case, No. 1 shown in FIG. In the form of the notice display YH of 28 "three oval sheets", it is re-displayed relatively large in the center of the screen. No. 28, "3 oval-sized" notice display YH is a display for giving notice that super-reach A, super-reach B, VS swordsman reach, or super-reach more than everyone's collective reach will be performed. However, even if the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect may not be performed, or if the notice display YH of "3 oval sheets" is displayed, the super reach effect is always displayed. May be done.

It should be noted that it is not used immediately when the predetermined number of "orange" notice displays YH are accumulated, but after the state of stocking the three "orange" notice displays YH continues. And may be used. Further, the "small size" notice display YH can be stocked across the variable display of symbols, and it is possible to stock up to the variable display of the pre-reading target, but 3 sheets are accumulated before the variable display of the pre-reading target. If there is not, the notice display YH of "small size stocked until then" is erased from the small size stock area KS at the time when the variable display of the pattern to be read ahead ends. Alternatively, it may be used separately without storing three pieces. It should be noted that the stock of the "orange" notice display YH may be configured not to straddle the symbol variation display, and in that case, when the symbol variation display in which the "orange" notice display YH is stocked ends, " It is configured such that the notice display YH of "small size" is deleted.

In addition, No. shown in FIG. Each of the 30 "character stock" notice displays ("Den", "Grandpa", "Princess") is similar to the "Oval" notice display described here. The area for stocking the advance notice display of the character may be provided as an area different from the oval stock area KS, or may be provided in common with the oval stock area KS.

No. shown in FIG. 117(b). No. 27 “Oval” or No. Each icon of "Character Stock" of 30 ("Den", "Grandpa", "Princess") is stocked in each stock area (Oval stock area KS or character stock area not shown) after being displayed as a notice YH. By doing so, it functions as a notice icon. Note that the advance notice icon YI may be released from the advance notice icon YI and the advance notice icon YI may be stocked. That is, the advance notice icon YI may be stocked without the advance notice display YH.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-9), the notice display YH of “3 small sheets” disappears and the reach effect is started. That is, the "decoration 7" fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Then, in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10a), as announced, the super reach effect of the VS swordsman reach is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman. Animation is displayed. Even if the super reach effect is started, the stock display of the notice icon YI continues in the stock area SS, but it may disappear when the super reach effect is started.

Also in FIG. 137 (A8-2-11) during the super reach effect, the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). It is a notice display of "Gekiatsu" in 4. The notice display of "Gekiatsu" displayed after the reach production is started is equivalent to a type of normal notice that considerably increases the reliability of the big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-12), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display mode a, but the notice display YH of “Gekiatsu” is displayed. However, in this example, after passing through FIG. 137 (A8-2-13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (A8-2-14) has a scene in which Yoshimune is defeated, along with a middle symbol. The “decoration 6” is displayed in large size, and thereafter, the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b1) to FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b11) are diagrams showing an example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

FIG. 137 (A8-2-9) is the same, and FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b1) is also in the same state as FIG. 137 (A8-2-10a). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b2), a scene in which Yoshimune is defeated and a large "Decorative 6" as a medium symbol are displayed in the stock area SS. , The notice icon YI in the closed state is still displayed in stock.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b3), the wipe effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (A8-2-10b4), the display screen is once wiped with the same color without a pattern. Will be displayed. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 disappears, and the notice icon YI that has been displayed in stock also disappears, but the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b5), wiping out has started and the display at the back is gradually beginning to be seen. Here, the fluctuating first decorative pattern (“decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”) is beginning to be seen. In the subsequent FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b6), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be seen. The player has begun to see the notice icon YI, so that the notice icon YI further emits the notice display YH after the wipeout is completed (after the wipe effect is finished), or as shown in FIG. I expect the advance notice icon YI itself to be promoted. Note that the notice icon YI may remain disappeared and may not be displayed again at the wipeout stage. The notice icon YI that is displayed in stock may be displayed even while the wipe effect is being executed. The notice icon YI displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect may be used and the notice display YH may be released. However, whether or not the notice icon YI is displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect. Regardless, the notice icon may not be used. Further, although the notice icon YI described here is the notice icon YI that has been used once or more, the same is true for an unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 120 (11), etc.). Yes (the same applies below).

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b7), the wipeout is performed and the background is returned to the normal background, but the change icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" fluctuates. Furthermore, in the stock area SS, a closed notice icon YI is displayed. Although the advance notice icon YI itself has not been promoted, for example, it may be promoted from the type of “box” to the type of “red box”.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b8), the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d again, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). It is a notice display of "iron plate" of 5. The notice display of the "iron plate" is a symbol variation display of the look-ahead target, that is, a symbol variation display that is currently being performed, and is a display that announces that the big hit is confirmed. Here, there may be a case where the advance notice display of "change" is released and the change icon YI is promoted by one stage, which leads to a revival effect described later. Alternatively, even if the variable icon has a default display mode, the advance notice display of “red change” may be released, which may lead to a later-described revival effect. Further, the release of the notice display at the same time as the shaking change may be confirmed as a big hit.

In FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b9), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed display form a, but the notice display YH of “iron plate” is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b10), the revival effect is started, and in the same figure (A8-2-10b11), "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "decoration 7" is displayed shaking. After that, this combination is confirmed and displayed as it is.

The advance notice icon YI may be carried over to the next change. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed across the wipe effect as in this example, the notice icon may not be used and may be hidden at the end of the symbol variation display. Further, the notice icon YI may be carried over to the big hit production or the game state after the big hit is finished, or such carry-over may be prohibited. As described above, the same applies to the unused notice icon YI (for example, the notice icon YI in FIG. 120A, etc.).

FIG. 137 (A1-2-1) to FIG. 137(A1-2-6) are diagrams showing another example in which the notice icon YI is used across the wipe effect during the super reach effect.

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-1), similarly to FIG. 136 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. It is displayed. The first hold represented by the first hold icon h11 is the target hold for the prefetch notice. Also, the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode, and nothing is displayed in the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

After this, the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 136(A2) to (A7) and FIG. 136(A8-2-1) to (A8-2-11) are performed, and FIG. In (a1-2-2), the state is the same as that shown in FIG. 137 (a8-2-10b1). Then, the wipe effect is started through the same state as the state shown in FIG. 137 (A 8-2-10b2) (FIG. 137 (A 1-2-3)). The wipe effect here is the same as the wipe effect shown in FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b3) to FIG. 137 (A8-2-10b6).

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-4), the wipe effect has ended and the background has returned to the normal background, but the variable icon h0 remains in the third display mode (blue). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" fluctuates. Furthermore, in the stock area SS, a closed notice icon YI is displayed. Note that the notice icon YI may remain disappeared at the stage of wipeout, and may be redisplayed when the next fluctuation starts, or may be redisplayed during the big hit game. The notice icon YI displayed during the big hit game may be prohibited from being used, or may be used in the same manner as during the symbol variation display. In the first place, the display of the notice icon YI may be restricted (prohibited) so that it is not displayed during the big hit game.

In FIG. 137 (A1-2-5), the notice icon YI is changed to the opened display mode d, and the notice display YH is released from the box. The notice display YH released here is a notice display of "red change". The notice display of "red change" here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). Unlike the notice display of "red change" in No. 7, this is a notice for notifying that the display form is the same as the display form of itself.

In FIG. 137(1-2-6), there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 is the same as the display mode of the notice display of “red change” (in the fifth display mode). It has changed to a certain red display mode). In other words, here we have been promoted to four levels. In this example, the combination of lost decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is fixedly displayed as it is without performing the revival effect.

According to this example, the notice icon YI is used as a further look-ahead notice instead of the current design change display which was the design change display of the look-ahead target. As a result of the look-ahead, the design variation display that is behind the current design variation display has a higher expectation of a big hit (for example, if the variation of the variation time is long, it is a variation of the big hit. May be) as in this example. In this example, the display mode (here, the fifth display mode) is higher than the variation icon (see FIG. 137 (1-2-6)) in the third display mode (the display mode of “blue”) that has been lost. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed to. However, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed to a display mode (third display mode) equivalent to the display mode of the variable icon that causes a loss, or the display mode of the variable icon that causes a loss may be changed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed to the lower display mode (for example, the second display mode). In addition, the variation icon of the loss variation may be as in this example when the display icon is in the third display mode or more, and may be as in this example when the display icon is in the third display mode or less. In addition, the case may be as in this example regardless of the display mode of the variation icon of the loss variation. Further, the pre-reading notice is not limited to the change in the display mode of the hold icon, and other pre-reading notice may be given (for example, chance, pre-reading background change (red stage change), etc.).

It should be noted that although the "red change" notice display is emitted here, the "change" notice display may be emitted in some cases. Further, a notice display for notifying that the change icon h0 is changed to a display mode above the display mode (for example, one or more steps) (for example, green above the blue in this example) is released. Good.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 138 (A1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. Further, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is also displayed. Nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

After that, in FIG. 138 (A1-3-2) showing the state in which the design variation is displayed in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is not held, two notice icons YI are stocked in the stock area SS. There is. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-3), the previously announced first notice icon YI is used, and the first notice icon YI is changed to the mode d which is the display mode in which the box is opened. , The notice display YH of "red change" is emitted from the box. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-4), the notice icon YI has returned to the mode a in which the box is closed, and the notice display YH of “red change” is used, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the following manner. The display mode is changed to the third display mode (“blue” display mode).

Subsequently, in FIG. 138 (A1-3-5), the second notice icon YI that has been stocked later is used, and the second notice icon YI is in the mode d in which the box is in the display mode. It changed and the notice display YH of "reach" was emitted from the box. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-6), the second notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-7), “reach” is displayed. The notice display YH disappears, the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (A1-3-8), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the remaining notice icon YI changes to the opened display mode again, and the notice display YH that is the second from the box is released (FIG. 138 (A1-3-9)). ). The notice display YH released here is a notice display of the default color “chance”. In FIG. 138 (A1-3-10), the first notice icon YI also disappears and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

In FIG. 138 (A1-3-11), the normal reach effect ends, and “decoration 5” that is not “decoration 6” swings in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols fluctuates, and then is fixedly displayed.

In the example described above, the notice icon YI is used in the stock order, but the notice icon YI may be used regardless of the stock order. Further, the number of times the notice icon YI was used was twice for the notice icon YI that was previously stocked, whereas it was only once for the notice icon YI that was stocked later. As described above, the number of times of use may be different depending on the notice icon YI, but may be the same. If the number of times the notice icon YI is used is the same, the number of uses may be the same during the period from the stocking of one notice icon to the use of all the plurality of notice icons. For example, if the previously announced notice icon is used twice, the later-stocked notice icon is also used twice, and if the previously-stocked notice icon is used three times, it is later stocked. The notice icon given is also used three times. In this way, the number of times of using other icons may be adjusted. Also, the number of times of use may be predetermined. In this case, no matter how many pieces are stocked, any notice icon is always used a predetermined number of times. Further, the previously stocked notice icon YI may be configured to use the notice icon YI more times than the previously stocked notice icon YI, or conversely may be configured to be less frequently used. ..

Also, the maximum number of times of use may be predetermined or may change. When the maximum number of times of use changes, it may change depending on the game state (normal state, electric support state (time saving state), probability variation state), or the maximum number of times of use increases in a certain prefetch zone state. Good. Further, in a certain game state (for example, a normal state, but may be a power support state (time saving state) or a probability change state), the notice icon may not be stocked.

FIG. 138(A1-4-1) to FIG. 138(A1-4-11) are diagrams showing another example in which a plurality of advance notice icons YI are stocked in stages.

FIGS. 138(A1-4-1) to FIG. 138(A1-4-4) show the same states as FIG. 138(A1-3-1) to FIG. In FIG. 138 (A1-4-5), the previously announced first notice icon YI is continuously used. As a result, the notice display YH of "reach" is released. In FIG. 138 (A1-4-6), the first notice icon YI continuously used disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” is displayed. ), the notice display YH of “reach” disappears and the reach effect is started. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 138 (A1-4-8), the display of the normal reach effect has started, and during this normal reach effect, it has not been used until now. The second notice icon YI stocked from is used, and the notice display YH of the default color “chance” is released (FIG. 138 (A1-4-9)). In FIG. 138 (A1-4-10), the remaining notice icon YI also disappears and the notice display YH of “chance” is displayed.

In FIG. 138 (A1-4-11), the normal reach effect ends, and the combination of the decorative symbols and the lost symbols fluctuates, and then the final display is confirmed.

As in this example, the notice icon YI may disappear in the stock order. That is, it may be configured such that, when the previously stocked notice icon YI is used up, the next stocked notice icon YI is started to be used.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example in which the advance notice icon YI released from the advance notice icon YI is used a plurality of times in a state in which it can be seen before the release.

139 (a1) to 139 (a3) are the same states as FIGS. 136 (a1-1) to 136 (a3), and in FIG. 139 (a4), the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. On the right base icon bIr, a “bancho” icon change notice display IYH is displayed. The "bancho" icon change notice display IYH here is also a display for giving notice that the notice icon YI will be acquired, but like the effect example described with reference to FIG. 135, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). The notice icon YI of "change" of 6 is displayed. That is, the icon change notice display IYH of “bancho” is No. 1 shown in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of 6 "change" is acquired, and the player can see the display (by reading the characters) and the notice display YH released from the notice icon can be "change". Recognize that it is a notice display of.

In FIG. 139 (a5), the notice icon YI of “change” has moved to the stock area SS, and is displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 139 (a6). Eventually, as shown in FIG. 139 (a7), after the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the missing decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, in the same figure (a8), the variable display for the pre-reading target is displayed. Has been started.

When the symbol variation display, which is the variation of the prefetch target, is started, the conversation notice as the normal notice described with reference to FIG. 120 is started. A detailed description is given to the above description, and briefly described here, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a9), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed in the central area. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not overlap the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the notice icon YI is displayed in the foreground. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the conversation notice is updated, and the old conversation image CI2 is displayed in which the operation promotion notice image including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. Is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Further, the old conversation image CI2 is displayed at a position shifted from the notice icon YI displayed in stock, and the two do not overlap.

Eventually, the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 139 (a11) is shown in a display mode when a certain amount of time has elapsed after the operation valid period was started.

The timing of FIG. 139 (a12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 139 (a13), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, the old conversation image CI2 gives a notice from the operation promotion notification image that the reach effect will start. Reach it!" The notice character display such as "Let's reach!" may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may be displayed even when it is done.

Further, the variable icon change animation is started in a state where the old conversation image CI2 that has been changed to the character display of "REACH!" is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 139 (a14), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI is about to be used is added to the "change" notice icon YI. In FIG. 139 (a15), a light ball flies from the stock area SS toward the variation icon h0 and hits the variation icon h0. The variation icon h0 that the light ball hits changes to the second display mode (white flashing display mode).

The "change" display displayed in the stock area SS in FIG. 139 (a15) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 139 (a16), the "change" notice display YH is shown in FIG. 117 (b). Is changed to the mode b shown in FIG. That is, it has been changed to a mode showing that it has been used. During the mode b, the notice display YH cannot be used as the notice icon YI.

In FIG. 139 (a17), the notice display YH of the mode b is changed to the notice icon YI, and the notice icon YI can be used again. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L illustrated in FIG. 139 (a18), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is ended, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible.

In FIG. 139 (a19), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a20), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variation icon change animation is started, the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI (FIG. 139 (a21)), and in FIG. 139 (a22), the light from the stock area SS is displayed. The ball flies toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. The variation icon h0 hit by the ball of light has now changed to the third display mode (blue display mode).

The display of "change" displayed in the stock area SS of FIG. 139 (a22) corresponds to the notice display YH, and in FIG. 139 (a23), the notice display YH of "change" is shown in FIG. 117(b). Although it has changed again to the mode b shown in (a), it is returned to the notice icon YI in the figure (a24), and it can be used again. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a24), the super reach development effect is displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (a25), the VS swordsman reach is displayed. Super reach production has started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 139 (a26). Even when the super reach effect is started, the change icon h0 is displayed and the notice icon YI is displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 139 (a27), in the middle of the duel scene animation, the variation icon change animation is started, the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI again, and in FIG. 139 (a28), the stock area is displayed. A light ball flies from the SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of effect and the like continued from FIG. 139.

In FIG. 140 (a a29) continued from FIG. 139 (a a28), in the fluctuation icon change animation, the fluctuation icon h0 hit by a ball of light changes to the fourth display mode (green display mode). .. Also, although the notice display YH of "change" has changed again to the mode b, the notice icon YI has returned to the notice icon YI in FIG. 140 (a30), and it can be used.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a31), a scene in which Yoshimune is defeated and “decoration 5” as a medium symbol are displayed in large size, but the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. Is still in stock.

Then, the wiping effect is started again here (FIG. 140 (a32)), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a33), the display screen once becomes the wipe display of the same color with no pattern. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 disappears, and the notice display YH that has been displayed in stock also disappears. In FIG. 140 (a34), the wipeout starts, and the display at the back gradually starts to be seen. Here, the fluctuating first decorative pattern (“decoration 6”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”) is beginning to be seen. In the subsequent FIG. 140 (a35), the lower half of the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS is beginning to be seen.

In FIG. 140 (a36), although the wipeout is performed and the background is returned to the normal background, the variable icon h0 remains in the fourth display mode (green). Further, in the first decorative pattern, the combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" fluctuates. Further, a notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

In FIG. 140 (a37), the notice icon YI has disappeared. The notice icon YI may disappear before the wipe effect, may remain in the wipe-out stage and may not be displayed again, or may disappear at the same time as the wipe effect ends. May be present, may not disappear until the super reach effect is finished, or may not disappear until the final confirmation is displayed. The notice icon YI that is in stock may be displayed even while the wipe effect is being executed. The notice icon YI displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect may be used and the notice display YH may be released. However, whether or not the notice icon YI is displayed in stock during the execution of the wipe effect. In any case, the notice icon may be configured not to be used.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (a38), the first decorative symbol is "
The combination of "decoration 6"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed.

Next, an example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked will be described.

It is the same up to FIG. 139 (a6), and thereafter, by the time before the symbol variation display ends, the No. shown in FIG. 117 (b). No. 21 "button" notice icon YI and No. 21. After the notice icon YI of "REACH" in 17 is continuously stocked, as shown in FIG. 139 (Ib1), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols with a loss is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (b2), the symbol variation display which is the prefetch target variation is started. In this example, a plurality of notice icons that can recognize what the notice display YH emitted from the notice icon is, just by looking at the display or reading the character, are changed to the next variation (prediction target variation pattern). (Variable display).

In the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target variation, the same conversation notice as the conversation notice that has been described many times up to now, such as FIG. 139 (a9) to (a17), is started (FIG. 140 (ab3)). ). Here, the explanation of the conversation notice is minimized, and the notice icon YI that is stocked is explained. In FIG. 140 (a b 4 ), among the three notice icons YI of the “change” notice icon YI, the “button” notice icon YI, and the “reach” notice icon YI, the “button” notice icon YI is shown. , The notice image YI of "reach" is added with an effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used. In FIG. 140 (b5), the effect image EF11 disappears from each of them, and the notice display YH of the “button” of the form b and the notice display YH of the “reach” of the form b are obtained. Here, in the stock area SS, the circle marks of the aspects b partially overlap each other, but they may be displayed so as not to overlap each other. In addition, the stocked order may be overlapped in the earlier order, or conversely, the stocked order may be overlapped in the earlier order. In FIG. 140 (b5), since the notice display of “button” is used, the button effect is executed in the conversation notice. That is, the operation promotion notification image composed of the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. In FIG. 140 (b6), the notice display YH of “button” and the notice display YH of “reach” have both returned to the notice icon YI, and can be used again.

Then, the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period (FIG. 140 (b7). Then, since the notice display of "reach" is used from the operation promotion notification image, the reach effect is started. It has been changed to the display of "Reach!"

When the conversation notice ends, in FIG. 140 (b10), the first stop of the left symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol. When the first stop is performed, the effect image EF11 is added to the "reach" notice icon YI. The effect image EF11 may be added to the "reach" notice icon YI before the first stop is performed, at the same time as the first stop is performed, or the first stop. May be added before the second stop is performed (that is, before the reach state is generated). In FIG. 140 (b11), the effect image EF11 disappears, and the notice display YH of “reach” of aspect b is displayed. In FIG. 140 (b12), the second stop of the right symbol is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the reach state is reached. ing.

In the reach state, the variation icon change animation is started this time, and the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI as shown in FIG. 140 (b13). Then, in FIG. 140 (b14), the ball of light flies toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0. The display mode has changed to a white flashing display mode. Also, the notice display YH of "change" has changed to the mode b again, but in FIG. 140 (a16), the notice icon YI has returned to the notice icon YI.

On the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b17), the display of the normal reach effect is started. During this normal reach effect, the variation icon change animation is started again, and the effect image EF11 is added again to the “change” notice icon YI (FIG. 139 (b18)).

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example in which a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked.

In FIG. 141 (Ib19) continued from FIG. 140 (Ib18), the ball of light flies toward the fluctuation icon h0 and hits the fluctuation icon h0. In FIG. 141 (Ib20), the fluctuation of the light ball hits. The icon h0 has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). Also, although the notice display YH of “change” has changed to the mode b again, in FIG. 141 (b21), it is returned to the notice icon YI and can be used. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (b21), the super reach development effect is displayed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same diagram (b22), the VS swordsman reach is displayed. Super reach production has started, and the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size. An animation of a duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (b23). Even if the super reach effect is started, the change icon h0 is displayed, and the three notice icons YI are still displayed in stock in the stock area SS. As shown in FIG. 141 (b21), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button” in the middle of the duel scene animation, and in the subsequent FIG. 141 (b25), the first decorative symbol display On the device 208L, an operation promotion notification image including a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (b25), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Further, although the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to the mode b again, after that, the notice icon YI is returned to and usable. Eventually, the button effect starts and the operation valid period starts (FIG. 141 (b26)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (b27) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period starts.

The timing shown in FIG. 141 (b28) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button operation here is an operation for deciding whether or not the lord's cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 17(32) appears, and in this example, the lord's cut-in image CI3 does not appear, and the cut-off image of the duel scene is displayed. The animation only progresses (FIG. 141 (b21) to (b31) in FIG. 141. Note that the variation icon change animation is started according to the button operation, and the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. Therefore, the display mode of the variable icon may change.

In FIG. 141 (b32), the effect image EF11 is added again to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in the subsequent FIG. 141 (b33), the chance button 136 is imitated on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An operation promotion notification image composed of a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. Eventually, the button effect starts and the operation valid period starts, and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 141 (b34) shows the display mode when a little time has passed after the operation valid period started. It is shown. Further, although the notice display YH of the “button” is changed to the mode b again (FIG. 141 (b33)), after that, the notice icon YI is returned to be usable.

The timing of FIG. 141 (b35) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. The button effect here is the final judge effect, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 141 (b36), the scene where Yoshimune is defeated and "decoration 5" as a medium symbol are displayed large. ing. After that, the first decorative symbol display device 208L is subjected to the wipe effect performed after FIG. 140 (a32) and the notice icon YI is erased as shown in FIG. 140 (a37). The combination of the missing decorative designs of "-" decoration 5"-"decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed.

The display of the final judge screen shown in FIG. 141 (b36) may be executed on condition that the chance button 136 has been operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed in some cases.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the roulette effect for the notice icon stock.

The state shown in FIG. 142 (C1) is a state in which there is no suspension of special symbols, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not perform variable display of decorative symbols. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (c), the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS is provided with the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock. The roulette RLT is divided into a left area and a right area, and the name (icon name) of any one of the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b) stops in the left area. .. On the other hand, a cross mark, a question mark, or a surprise mark stops in the right area. In addition, there are multiple area colors (for example, white, blue, green, red, and gold) for both left and right areas, and you can use them by combining icon names and marks. To be done. In the roulette display RLT shown in FIG. 142 (C1), the icon name of "change" is displayed on the green background in the left area, and the cross mark is displayed on the white background in the right area. Icon YI cannot be acquired. That is, when the cross mark is displayed, the notice icon cannot be acquired.

After that, there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (C2), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but at the upper left corner. In 2 decorative patterns, variable display has been started. Also, on the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS, the animation of increase of the variable icon is started, and the pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 142 (C3) displays the variable icon h0 in the default display mode.

When the symbol variable display is started, the roulette display (variable display) is also started in the roulette RLT for the advance notice icon stock (Fig. 142 (C4)). Here, the roulette display is started before the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, but the start of the roulette display may be the same as the start of the variable display of the first decorative pattern, or the first decoration. It may be after the start of variable display of symbols.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (C5), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. After the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the left area of the roulette RLT is stopped, and the icon name of "reach" is displayed on the green background (Fig. 142 (C5)). On the other hand, the variable display in the right area continues. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 142 (C 7-1), the variable display in the right area is also stopped and the question mark is displayed on the green background. With this combination, the notice icon "reach?" can be obtained, and the notice icon YI of "reach?" is stocked in the stock area SS shown in FIG. 142 (C8). The notice icon YI of "reach?" is a weak notice icon to the extent that reach production may be performed, and the reach production is often not performed than when the notice icon YI of "reach" is used. ..

It should be noted that when the notice icon YI of “reach?” is acquired, the display of the roulette RLT may be turned off, but in this example, the display is continued. In this example, the display of the roulette RLT straddles the variable display in the left region and the variable display in the right region, but the display of the roulette RLT shows the variable display in the left region and/or the right region. You may straddle the variable display in the state in which it is performed. Further, during the stop display of the symbols, the display of the RLT (the state where the variable display of the left area and/or the right area is being performed or the state where the variable display of the left area and/or the right area is stopped) is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.

In FIG. 142 (C9-1), the first stop of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the "decoration 6" is temporarily stopped on the left symbol. In this symbol variation display, the notice icon YI of "reach?" is not used, and the reach effect is not performed, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 142 (C10), "decoration 6"-" The combination of the decorative patterns of the decoration 4”-“decoration 1” that is lost fluctuates, and in FIG. 11C, the combination is definitely displayed. Here, since there is no subsequent hold, when the confirmation display is performed, the notice icon YI of "reach?" disappears. However, if there is a subsequent hold, it may be carried over to the next change, or it may be carried over without fail. Alternatively, even if there is a subsequent hold, it may not be carried over.

Note that the number of times the roulette is changed is one here for one symbol variation display, but it may be changed multiple times. In addition, the symbol variation display of the look-ahead target variation and the symbol variation display before that may be provided with a difference in the number of times the roulette is varied in one symbol variation display, for example, the symbol variation display of the look-ahead variation However, the number of fluctuations of the roulette may be increased or, on the contrary, decreased, as compared with the previous symbol fluctuation display. For example, in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target variation, the roulette display may be performed once as the prefetching notice, and in the symbol variation display of the prefetching subject variation, the roulette display may be performed three times as the normal notice. However, the number of times may not be fixed, and may be zero.

Further, the notice icon YI may be stocked by a production different from the roulette display described here (for example, a mini game such as rock-paper-scissors competition), or the notice icon YI may be displayed while the roulette display is being performed. It is not necessary to perform a production such as a mini game that can obtain the. Further, in the variable display in which the roulette display is performed or is performed, the effect such as the mini game in which the notice icon YI can be acquired may not be performed.

Next, the reach agitation effect will be described.

The same is true up to FIG. 142 (C 8), and in FIG. 142 (C 9-2-1), the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notification icon YI is about to be used is added to the notification icon YI of “reach?”. Has been added. In the following FIG. 142 (C9-2-2), the reach twisting effect is started, and the twisting fluctuation is performed in the first decorative pattern. That is, here, the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol are switched to the low speed fluctuation, the left symbol rotates upward, the right symbol rotates downward, and an effect of temporarily stopping at the vertical center position is executed. (FIG. 142 (C9-2-3). However, as shown in FIG. 142 (C9-2-4), the provisional stop is not performed, and the reach flairing production ends in failure. The effect image EF11 is Although it disappears when the reach aspiration effect is started, it may be continuously displayed on the notice icon YI of "reach?" during the reach aspiration effect. The "reach?" notice icon YI shown has a circle indicating that it has been used, but this circle disappears immediately and the notice icon YI becomes reusable. In the first decorative pattern in 9-2-5a), all three decorative patterns are changed at low speed, and in the same figure (C 9-2-6a), "decoration 7"
-The combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 7"-"decoration 8" fluctuates and is fixedly displayed by the combination (Fig. 142 (9-2-6a)), but the notice icon of "reach?" YI is hidden before the decorative design is confirmed and displayed.

In this example, the notice image YI is added with the effect image EF11 for notifying that the notice icon YI will be used, but the mode of the notice icon YI itself changes before the use is started or when the use is disclosed. You may. For example, the notice icon YI itself may become large, or the notice icon YI itself may change its color. In addition, during use, the original form may be restored, or the form may remain unchanged.

Next, another example of the reach fueling effect will be described.

FIG. 142 (C9-2-4b) is the same state as FIG. 142 (C9-2-4a), which is a state after failing in the reach agitation effect. In this example, all the three decorative symbols do not change to low speed as they are, but instead switch to high speed fluctuation (Fig. 142 (C9-2-5b), which is shown in the notice icon YI of "reach?"). 142 (C9-2-6b) in which the circled mark disappears, the effect image EF11 is again added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" In the following Fig. 142 (C9-2-7b), Inflammation fluctuation is restarted in the first decorative symbol, and here, each of the left symbol and the right symbol in the first decorative symbol starts moving toward the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, without passing through the middle symbol. , In front of the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged and displayed (Fig. 142 (C9-2-9b)), and then temporary stop is performed to establish the reach state (Fig. 142 (C9- 2-10b)), and finally reach reach production has been successful. Incidentally, FIG. 142 (C9-2-2) to the same figure (C9-2-4a) or the same figure (C9-). 2-4b) and the leech-inspiring effect shown in FIG. 9 (C9-2-5b) to (C9-2-9b) or (C-9-2-9b') in FIG. May be a series of reach-inspiring productions.

Next, an example will be described in which in the reach agitation effect, the agitation fluctuation fails even though the agitation fluctuation is restarted.

As shown in the previous FIG. 142 (C 9-2-8b), each of the left symbol and the right symbol starts moving toward the middle symbol which continues to change at high speed, and FIG. 142 (C 9-2-9b'). In 1), both the left symbol and the right symbol have passed through the middle symbols to each other, and the enlarged display in front of the middle symbols as shown in (Fig. 143 (C9-2-9b)) is not performed. No temporary stop is performed, and all three decorative symbols change slowly (Fig. 142 (C9-2-9b'2)), and in the same figure (C9-2-9b'3), "decoration 7 The combination of the missing decorative patterns of "-"decoration 7"-"decoration 8" fluctuates and is fixedly displayed by the combination.

The effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of "reach?" each time a new fluctuation is started. However, the reach distortion effect is included as a series of effects, and the effect image EF11 is initially displayed. The notification icon YI of "reach?" may be added only once.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another effect using the roulette RLT for the notice icon stock and an example of effect accompanied by button operation.

FIG. 143 (C9-2-4c) is an example continuing from FIG. 142 (C9-2-3), and shows a successful example of reach fanching effect. Here, the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned in the vertical center, before the temporary stop, each of the left symbol and the right symbol is enlarged and displayed (FIG. 143 (C9-2-4c)), and then the temporary stop is performed. , Reach state is established (FIG. 143 (C9-2-5c)).

Also, FIG. 143 (C7-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 142 (C7), and in this FIG. 143 (C7-2-1), the right area of the roulette RLT has a red background. The exclamation mark is displayed. The result is a combination of the "reach" icon name on a green background and a surprised mark on a red background. With this combination, it is possible to obtain the notice icon YI of "reach" having higher reliability than the notice icon YI of "reach?". In addition, a combination of the icon name of "reach" on the red background and the question mark on the green background may be set so that only the notice icon YI of "reach?" can be acquired, or the notice icon YI of "reach" is acquired. May be obtained. In addition, if you reach the "Reach" icon name on the red background and the surprise mark YI on the red background and get the "Leach" notice icon YI, you will be surprised at the "Reach" icon name on the green background and the red background. The symbol variable display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be a big hit more easily than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. Also, if you reach the "REACH" notice icon YI by displaying the "REACH" icon name on the red background and the question mark on the green background, the "REACH" icon name on the green background and the question on the red background The symbol variable display using the “reach” notice icon may be configured to be a big hit more easily than when the mark is displayed and the “reach” notice icon YI is acquired. That is, the background color in which the icon name is displayed is more related to the jackpot reliability than the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed. Therefore, if you reach the "Reach" notice icon YI with the "Reach" icon name on the red background and the surprise mark on the green background, you will be surprised at the "Reach" icon name on the green background and the green background. The symbol variation display using the "reach" notice icon is more likely to be a big hit than when the mark is displayed and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired. In addition, when the "reach" icon name is displayed on the red background and the exclamation mark is displayed on the green background and the "reach" notice icon YI is acquired, and when the "reach" icon name is on the red background and the exclamation mark is on the green background. In the case where the notice icon YI of "reach" is displayed and is acquired, the symbol variation display using the notice icon of "reach" is likely to be a big hit. However, the background color in which the icon name is displayed and the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may have the same relationship with the reliability of the big hit. Alternatively, the background color in which the mark (symbol) is displayed may be more related to the jackpot reliability than the background color in which the icon name is displayed.

Note that the color names in the above description can be represented by display modes. That is, "red" is the fifth display mode and "green" is the fourth display mode (the same applies in the following description).

Also, FIG. 143 (C7-3-1) is also an example continued from FIG. 142 (C5), and in this FIG. 143 (C7-3-1), the left area of the roulette RLT has a red background. The icon name of "reach" is displayed, and in the right area, a surprise mark is displayed on a red background. With this combination, the notice icon YI of “reach” may be acquired for the first time. In other words, if the background color is neither the left area nor the right area on the red background, the notice icon YI of "reach" cannot be acquired, and if one of them is the green background, the "reach?" It becomes the notice icon YI. Further, in this case, the red background may be configured such that the red background stops first and the red background stops more easily than the green background stops, or the probability is the same. May be

Also, FIG. 143 (C7-4-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 142 (C7), and in this FIG. 143 (C7-4-1), the left area of the roulette RLT is The box icon shown in 117(a) is displayed, and the stock number is displayed in the right area. In this example, one "box" icon shown in FIG. 117(a) can be acquired. The stock number is 0 to 3. Further, either a “box” or a cross mark may be displayed in the left area, and colors (white, red, gold, rainbow) may be displayed in the right area. In this case, for example, if it is a cross mark and a rainbow, the box-shaped notice icon YI cannot be acquired, and if it is “box” and red, the “red box” notice icon YI can be acquired. it can.

Also, FIG. 143 (C 7-5-1) is another example continuing from FIG. 142 (C 5), and in this FIG. 143 (C 7-5-1), the left area of the roulette RLT is (Sixth display mode) The icon name of "reach" is displayed on the background, and the surprise mark is displayed on the gold background in the right area. With this combination, as shown in FIG. 143 (C 7-5-2), it is possible to acquire the gold “reach” notice icon YI. The gold "reach" notice icon has higher reliability than the normal "reach" notice icon. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may be high.

Even if both the left area and the right area have a gold background in this way, only the same notification icon that can be acquired when both the left area and the right area have a red background can be acquired. Even if it is not possible, the gold background may be more likely to hit the red background than the red background with respect to the change of the prefetch target.

Further, the display of the roulette RLT and the stocked notice icon YI may be inconsistent. For example, the display of the roulette RLT is "reach" and "?", but the notice icon YI is the notice icon of "reach", or the display of the roulette RLT is "reach" and "!". The notice icon YI may be a "SP" notice icon indicating super reach, or the notice icon YI may be a green icon even though the background of the roulette RLT is a gold background. Such a contradiction may be that final jackpot symbols may be more easily finalized and displayed, or conversely, the lost symbols may be more easily finalized and displayed, than when no contradiction occurs. In addition, when the background of the roulette RLT is a gold background and the advance notice icon YI is a green icon, the jackpot may be confirmed.

Further, the roulette wheel may be changed again. For example, even if the display of the roulette RLT is stopped at "reach" and "x", the combination of "reach" and "!" may be finally obtained by changing the right area again. Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT stops at "reach" and "?", the combination of "SP" and "?" may be finally obtained by changing the left area again. Further, even if the display of the roulette RLT is stopped by the “box” icon and “×1” shown in FIG. 117(a), both areas are changed again and finally the “red box” icon and the “red box” icon are displayed. It may be a combination of “×2”. Furthermore, even when only one of the left area and the right area is changing and the other is stopped, the other stopped may be changed again.

Although the roulette effect has been described above, in the example here, the icon names are all “reach”, but the same applies to the names of various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b). However, depending on the icon name, only the question mark, or the question mark or cross mark is displayed on the green background color, or only the exclamation mark or only the exclamation mark or cross mark is displayed on the red and gold background colors. Good. Further, as shown in FIG. 5 or No. 23 or No. The icon name of the notice icon that leads to the big hit confirmation such as 24 may not be combined with the question mark. That is, only the combination of “patrol lamp” and “cross mark” or the combination of “patrol lamp” and “surprise mark” may be displayed. In addition, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to a relatively high reliability of the jackpot (for example, No. 3 "red chance", No. 4 "super hot" or No. 5 "iron plate" icon In the case of (first name), it may be combined with only "surprise mark". Further, the icon name of the notice icon that leads to the jackpot confirmation may be iridescent (seventh display mode) in both the background color of the icon name and the background color of the mark (symbol).

Further, the mark (symbol) may be announced by the background color of the icon name of the notification icon (for example, the icon name of “iron plate” of No. 5) that leads to the determination of the big hit. For example, if the background color of the "iron plate" that stopped earlier was green, it would be a warning that the cross mark might be stopped, and if it was rainbow color, the stop of the surprise mark was confirmed. Good.

Furthermore, the icon name (left area in this example) may always stop first, or conversely, the mark (right area in this example) may always stop first. Further, when it is not known which will stop first, if the mark stops first, the cross mark may not stop.

Further, when the notice icon is stocked in the roulette effect, the notice icon may be used without fail.

Next, an example of effects accompanied by button operation will be described.

In FIG. 143 (d a1), the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is displayed in the state where the special map is not held, and only one notice icon YI of “box” is stocked in the stock area SS. .. In FIG. 143 (a2), the operation promotion notification image is displayed on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI. The operation promotion notification image here is also an image prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, and a button image 136a simulating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of a meter MT and. The timing shown in FIG. 121 (A31-2-2) is before the start of the operation valid period, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed before the start of the operation valid period. May be displayed at the same time as the start of.

The operation valid period is started at the timing of FIG. 143 (d3), and the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 143 (d4) shows the display mode when a little time has passed from the start of the operation valid period. Indicated by.

The timing of FIG. 143 (a5) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the operation valid period, in FIG. 143 (d6), after the notice icon YI is covered with the effect image EF13, as shown in FIG. The effect image EF13 disappears, and the notice icon YI that was the display mode in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d that is the display mode in which the box is open. The animation that pops out (box opening animation) is displayed.

Note that the change of the notice icon YI to the mode d, which is the display mode in which the box is opened, may be executed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be executed when the valid period has elapsed.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 143 (a8), the notice icon YI changes from the display mode in which the box is open to the display mode in which the box is closed and is not erased. In FIG. 143 (d9), the notice display YH of “red change” emitted from the notice icon YI is used, and the display mode of the variable icon that has been the default display mode (first display mode) is blue. The display mode (3rd display mode) has been changed.

In FIG. 143 (d a10), the operation promotion notification image is displayed again on the left side of the stocked notice icon YI, after which the operation valid period is started, and the remaining time display meter shown in FIG. MT is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started.

The timing of FIG. 143 (d12) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the valid operation period, in FIG. 143 (a13), the notice icon YI is changed to a mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed from the inside. Has been released. Then, in FIG. 143 (d14), the notice icon YI disappears without returning to the closed mode a.

In this example, the operation promotion notification image is displayed each time, but the operation promotion notification image may not be displayed and so-called back button effect may be performed.

FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display mode of the advance notice icon YI of the “button” changes according to the button operation, and other examples.

In FIG. 144 (dbl), the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is executed, and the animation of the duel scene between the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L. In addition, in FIG. 144 (Db1), No. 1 illustrated in FIG. 21 "button" notice icon YI is stocked. In FIG. 144 (Db2), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and in FIG. 144 (Db3), the effect is enlarged in the central area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The button image 136a is displayed, after that, the button image 136a becomes slightly smaller, and the remaining time display meter MT is added (FIG. 144 (d4)). In addition, in this example, the character “repeatedly hit” that requires continuous operation of the chance button 136 and the confrontation meter MTV indicating the superiority or inferiority of Yoshimune and Kengo are also displayed. The confrontation meter MTV has a blue meter on the Yoshimune side (left side) and a red meter on the swordsman side (right side). When the display of the confrontation meter MTV is started, the blue meter is half and the red meter is half. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (d4), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the button is operated, the corresponding display is not performed. Eventually, the button effect is started, and the operation valid period is started (FIG. 144 (Eb5)). The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 144 (d6) is shown in a display mode when a little time has passed since the operation valid period started. Although the confrontation meter MTV is overlapped by a part of the fluctuation icon h0, the confrontation meter MTV may be displayed so as to overlap the fluctuation icon h0, and the confrontation meter MTV is confronted at a position where it does not overlap. The meter MTV may be displayed.

The timing of FIG. 144 (d7) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (d8), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the "button", and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. However, the effect image EF11 here does not notify that the advance notice icon YI will be used.

Since the continuous hitting operation is required, the player operates the chance button 136 also at the timing of FIG. 144 (d9). Then, also in FIG. 144 (d10), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. This effect image EF11 disappears immediately (FIG. 144 (d11)), and the player operates the chance button 136 also at the timing of FIG. 144 (d12). Then, also in FIG. 144 (d13), the effect image EF11 is added to the notice icon YI of the “button”, and the display mode of the notice icon YI is changed. If the interval between button operations by the player is shortened, the effect image EF11 is added to and deleted from the notice icon YI at high speed, and the effect image EF11 appears to be constantly lit.

The blue meter of the confrontation meter MTV increases according to the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. However, in this confrontation meter MTV, when the operation effective period is started, the red meter of the swordsman automatically increases with the passage of time. If the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit so as not to lose the increasing speed of the red meter, the increase of the blue meter will win the increase of the red meter, and the blue meter will increase. When all of them are blue meters as shown in FIG. 144 (d13), the Yoshimune cut-in image CI3 appears as shown in FIG. 144 (d13). On the other hand, when all of them are red meters, a cut-in image of a swordsman (not shown) appears here.

The timing at which the effect image EF11 is added to the “button” notice icon YI may be set every time the opportunity meter 136 is operated once, and every time the confrontation meter MTV increments the blue meter by one scale.

Next, an example in which the stock number of the notice icon YI is displayed will be described.

FIG. 144 (a1) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 120 (a9-1), in which the icon of the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 144 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS is started due to the villager character of the change icon h0 winning. That is, the No. shown in FIG. 117(a), which was displayed in the appearance area AS. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is out of the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. At this stage, the display of the stock number (here, “stock×1”) is started between the second decorative symbol and the second retained number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, when the advance notice icon YI reaches the stock area SS, the display of the number of stocks is started, and it is unclear how many advance notice icons could be acquired only by looking at the appearance area AS. Can display the stock number before the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS to know the acquired number. In FIG. 144 (a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS. In FIG. 144 (a3), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS.

After that, in FIG. 144 (Oa4) showing the state in which the symbol variation is being displayed in the state where the hold is exhausted and the special figure is not held, one notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS, and the stock number is Is also displayed as "stock x 1".

In FIG. 144 (Oa5), the reach effect is started, and the "decoration 6" fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (e6), the notice icon YI has changed to the mode d in which the box is open, and the notice display YH of “change” has been released from the box. Since the notice icon YI is used in this way, the stock number is once displayed as “stock×0” (FIG. 144 (a6)), and then the stock number display itself disappears (FIG. 144). (Oa7)). Then, it continues to FIG. 121 (A33). If the same notice icon YI is repeatedly used, the display of the stock number does not change, and in this case, “stock×1” continues to be displayed. Even if the same notice icon YI is repeatedly used, if it is used once, the stock number display may be once changed to “stock×0” and immediately returned to “stock×1”. .. In addition, when the stock number of the notice icon becomes 0, “stock×0” may not be displayed and the display of the stock number itself may be erased as shown in FIG. 144 (a7).

Further, a plurality of stock areas SS may be provided. In the example shown below, two stock areas SS are provided, a first stock area SSR on the right side and a second stock area SSL on the left side.

FIG. 144 (Ob1) is also in the same state as that shown in FIG. 120 (A9-1), in which the icon of the villager character of the variable icon h0 wins the icon of the panda character of the opponent icon TI. Therefore, in FIG. 144 (Oa2), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the notice icon YI of "box" exits the appearance area AS and is once displayed in a large size. Thereafter, one advance notice icon YI of "box" is stocked in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side (Fig. 144 (Oa3). An animation in which the "box" notice icon YI splits may be displayed, but may be displayed momentarily in each of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side. The number of the notice icons YI acquired is only one.

After this, the hold is exhausted, and in FIG. 144 (Ob4) showing the state in which the symbol variation is displayed in the state where the special figure is no longer held, the left first stock area SSL and the right second stock area SSR are also shown. Also, the notice icons YI of "box" are stocked one by one.

In FIG. 144 (Ob5), the reach effect is started, and the “decoration 6” fluctuates in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Eventually, the notice icon YI displayed in stock in the reach state is used. At this time, only one of the two notice icons YI may be used. In addition, an effect of telling which of the notice icons YI is used (which box opens) or an effect of giving a notice may be performed. Here, both notice icons YI are used at the same time. That is, as shown in FIG. 144 (Ob6), both of the notice icons YI are changed at the same time to the mode d in which the boxes are opened, and the “change” notice display YH is released from each box. Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (e7), the two notice icons YI disappear at the same time.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of displaying the same advance notice icon in a plurality of modes, as in the effect example continued from FIG. 144.

In FIG. 145 (Ob8) subsequent to FIG. 144 (Ob7), the “change” notice display YH emitted to the left and right respectively is changed to a light ball YHb. Therefore, one ball YHb of light is displayed on the left and one on the right. In FIG. 145 (Ob9), both the left light ball YHb and the right light ball YHb fly toward the change icon h0, and the change icon h0 becomes one, and the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed. An animation that changes is displayed. The change icon h0 shown in FIG. 145 (Ob10) has changed from the first display mode to the third display mode. This is changed by two stages because it is based on two notice icons YI. It should be noted that only one step may be changed. Then, it continues to FIG. 121 (A37).

The reliability of the big hit may differ depending on how the notice icon YI is stocked. That is, normally, stock is sequentially carried out from a fixed position in the stock area SS. For example, the stocks are stocked in the order of the first stock position, the second stock position, and the third stock position. However, contrary to this order, the stocks may be stocked in the order of the third stock position, the second stock position, and the first stock position. In such an irregular case, In comparison, the reliability of the big hit may be higher, or on the contrary, may be lower. Also, while it is normally stocked in both the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side, irregularly, only one stock area (for example, the second stock area SSL on the left side is stocked. It may be stocked only in ). Even in such an irregular case, the reliability of the big hit may be higher than that in the normal case, or on the contrary, may be lower. Furthermore, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on which of the first stock area SSR on the right side and the second stock area SSL on the left side is stocked. For example, if the first stock area SSR on the right side is normal or prioritized, and if it is stocked on the second stock area SSL on the left side, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher. Or vice versa.

Even if the acquired notice icon YI is a “white” notice icon, when displaying the notice icon YI in white in the respective areas SSL and SSR, the case where both notice icons YI in white are displayed. The white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI may be displayed in some cases. In the latter case, the notice display YH released from the obtained notice icon YI may be expected. For example, when both of the white notice icons YI are displayed, the No. shown in FIG. Although the notice display of the "change" of the default color of 6 is released, when the white notice icon YI and the red notice icon YI are displayed, the No. 6 shown in FIG. 117(b) is displayed. There may be a case where the red “red change” notice display 7 is emitted.

145 (Oc1) to FIG. 145 (Od) are diagrams showing an example in which the same notice icon is displayed in a plurality of modes.

On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 145 (Oc1), a background screen, which has been omitted in the drawings so far, is displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 129 (1-2-1). As with, the background screen of the sea is displayed. In FIG. 145 (Oc1), the “base length” icon change notice display IYH is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and the “bank length” icon change notice display IYH is shown in FIG. As in the “bancho” icon change notice display IYH shown in a4) in FIG. It is displayed that the notice icon YI of "change" of 6 has been acquired.

In FIG. 145 (Oc2), the “change” notice icon YI has moved to the stock area SS, and in FIG. 145 (Oc3) it is displayed in the stock area SS. Further, in this example, a band icon OBI is displayed on the left side of the background screen, and the name (here, “change”) of the notice icon YI acquired is also displayed on the band icon OBI. Therefore, in this example, the display relating to the acquired notice icon YI is displayed at two places. Since the band icon OBI is an icon displayed on the background screen, any display (for example, the display of the first decorative symbol or the display of the second decorative symbol, or the second hold icon h12 to the second unillustrated here) 4 hold icon h14) and the like).

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc4), after the variable display of the symbols is finished and the combination of the decorative symbols that have been lost is stopped and displayed, in the same diagram (Oc5), the variable display of the preread target is displayed. Has been started. When the symbol variation display, which is the variation of the prefetch target, is started, the notice icon YI is used. In FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the variable icon change animation using the notice icon YI is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the effect image EF11 is added to the “change” notice icon YI. In FIG. 145 (Oc7), the stocked “change” notice icon YI is displayed. Disappear. Subsequently, in FIG. 145 (Oc8), a ball of light flies from the stock area SS toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. The variation icon h0 hit by the ball of light changes to the second display mode (white flashing display mode) as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc9). On the other hand, no effect is performed with the belt icon OBI, and no change has occurred in the display of the name of the acquired notice icon YI displayed on the belt icon OBI. However, some kind of animation such as a variable icon change animation may be executed even in the band icon OBI, and some change (for example, blinking display, display color change, etc.) may occur in the display of the name of the acquired notice icon YI.

Although the notice icon YI in the stock area SS has disappeared promptly with use, the band icon OBI is at least displayed until the change icon h0 actually changes, as shown in FIG. 145 (Oc10). In addition, the change icon h0 disappears after the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-1) and thereafter, the notice icon YI of "change" is reused. In the same figure (Oc6-2-1) continuing from FIG. 145 (Oc6-1), the notice icon YI that has been used until now is the notice display of the "change" of the mode b shown in FIG. 117(b). Although it has changed to YH, in the same figure (Oc6-2-2), it returns to the notice icon YI and is usable. In FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-3), the reach effect is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (Oc6-2-3), the display of the normal reach effect is displayed. When the normal reach effect is started, the background screen of the sea is switched to the background screen of the normal reach effect, and accordingly, the band icon OBI displaying the name of the notice icon YI acquired disappears. On the other hand, the notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS continues to be displayed even during the normal reach production.

In FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-5), the normal reach effect ends, the background screen of the sea is displayed again on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon displaying the name of the notice icon YI is displayed. The OBI display has also been restored. In this way, the display of the band icon OBI on which the name of the notice icon YI is displayed is displayed across the reach effect. After that, during swing fluctuation of the decorative pattern, in other words, before the finalized display shown in FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-7) to FIG. 145 (Oc6-2-8) is performed, the display of the band icon OBI disappears. .. The notice icon YI displayed in the stock area SS also disappears. In this example, there is no subsequent hold, and it can be seen that the display relating to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) has disappeared, but there is a subsequent hold. Also, before the confirmation display, the display relating to the notice icon YI (display of the band icon OBI, display of the notice icon YI of the stock area SS) may disappear, or conversely, when there is a subsequent hold, the notice is given. The display regarding the icon YI may be continuously displayed until the confirmation display.

FIG. 145 (d) is a diagram showing a case where a plurality of notice icons YI are stocked. In this example, in addition to displaying the notice icon YI in the stock area SS, display using the band icon OBI is also performed. That is, one notice icon YI is displayed with one belt icon OBI.

In the examples so far, the band icon OBI is displayed as the background display, but in the example shown in FIG. 146 (e), the band icon OBI narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. The display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the belt icon OBI.

In the example shown in FIG. 146 (of), the three notice icons YI, which are the maximum stock numbers, are stocked, and the three band icons OBI are displayed. Therefore, the display area of the first decorative symbol is 1 It is narrowed to about /4, and the first decorative symbol is overlapped by the notice icon YI displayed in stock. However, the first decorative symbol may be prioritized and the first decorative symbol may overlap the notice icon YI. The second hold number display does not overlap the band icon OBI. Further, both the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. In this example, the first decorative pattern, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon are narrowed, but the display of the second decorative pattern, the second hold number display, and the stock are displayed. The display of the notice icon YI is not narrowed.
As an example of the display narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, the first decorative symbol, the background display, the display of the hold frame UI, the variable icon h0, the hold icon, various notice displays (for example, the above-mentioned conversation notice (the conversation of the lord It is possible to enumerate the image CI1, the old conversation image CI2, the mini game, the icon change notice, the timer notice effect, the meter display (the white meter MW described above, the meter display MD described later, etc.), etc. That is, the band icon OBI. The display narrowed by the display may be all of those listed above, while some of the above may not be applicable, and the display not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI. As an example, the display of the second decorative pattern, the second hold number display, the stocked notice icon YI, the bar display VB for volume adjustment, the display of the mode name set to ON in the production customization (for example, the above-mentioned upper right corner of the screen). Frame RW and the mode name displayed in the frame RW), various error displays (displays related to various errors and warnings described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116), menu icon MI, volume adjustment icon VI, And the brightness adjustment icon BI, the display of "current level of Daitomo mode (here, level 1) and experience value (EXP) (here, 0)" of FIG. That is, as the displays that are not narrowed by the display of the band icon OBI, all of the above-listed ones may be used, while some of the above-listed ones may not be applied.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing an example of an effect and the like due to a configuration in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Up to now, the description centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has been described, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (same in the following description). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, and the same arrangement may be applied in the vertical arrangement. In other words, it is not the case that the technology described in this specification cannot be applied simply because the hardware configuration is different, and from a technical idea, even if the display units are arranged side by side, they can be arranged vertically. Even if there is, it is applicable. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means arranged below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M' for description.

In FIG. 146 (Ka1), the fourth display means 208M' arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. The fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 146 (a1) is in the initial position. This fourth display means 208M' is surrounded by a frame fm around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M' at the initial position is the lower end portion of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. It overlaps from the front side. The fourth display means 208M′ is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlaps the central portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side at the operating position ( It can be moved from the initial position toward the position (refer to the position of the fourth display means 208M′ in FIG. 146 (a2′)). That is, the fourth display means 208M' is also a movable means capable of moving up and down. In addition to the lifting operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. As a modification of the fourth display means 208M', the fourth display means 208M' may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

On the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (Ka1), a holding frame UI′ having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative pattern display device 208L up to now is displayed. Has been done. This hold frame UI' also has a hold icon display area HIS&', a variable icon display area CIS', and an effect icon display area DIS'. The pedestal hs0′ is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS′. The hold icon display area HIS′ is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS′, and four stages (first stage hs1′ to fourth stage hs4′) are arranged on the left base icon bIl′. The effect icon display area DIS' is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS', and the right base icon bIr' is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS'.

Further, in the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 146 (Ka1), the holding icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed on each of the first stage hs1' and the second stage hs2'. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special drawings 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, in the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS'. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

Further, a background screen is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (k a1). This background screen is a sea background screen. On the other hand, although the background screen of the fourth display means 208M' is solid white, this solid white color indicates that the background screen is omitted from illustration. The first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. Then, the first decorative pattern (third pattern) is changing at high speed. The state of FIG. 146 (a1) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a1).

In FIG. 146 (Ka2), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings of special-figure 1 is increased by one, resulting in a total of three. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (Ka2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "3". The fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146(k2a) displays the first hold, which has been the default display mode until now, in accordance with the increase in the hold of this special map, or regardless of the increase in the hold of this special map. Both the icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are No. 1 in FIG. The icon has changed to the icon a of the type of villager described in 17. Further, the third hold icon h13 is displayed on the third stage hs3'. The third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed by an increasing animation in the default display mode, but the third hold represented by the third hold icon h13 is the target hold for the prefetching notice. The state of FIG. 146 (a2) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a3-1).

In the right base icon bIr' of the effect icon display area DIS' in the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 146 (a3), as the opponent icon TI, the mode a of the panto type shown in FIG. 118(c) ( The standby mode icon is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and the inside of the No. shown in FIG. The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (a3) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a6).

In the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (ka4), the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B is performed, and the character of the villager of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI and appears. The stock animation of the notice icon YI displayed in the area AS has started. That is, the notice icon YI of “box” displayed in the appearance area AS is once displayed in a large size after exiting from the appearance area AS. The state of FIG. 146 (a4) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a10).

The fourth display means 208M' is also provided with a stock area SS in which the notice icon YI is stocked, and the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 146 (Ka5) shows a notice in the stock area SS. Icon YI is displayed. The state of FIG. 146 (a5) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a11).

In FIG. 146 (Ka6), the state in which the variation of symbols is being displayed is shown in the state in which the holding is advanced and the special figure is no longer held. The symbol variation display performed here is a symbol variation display which is a pre-reading subject variation. Note that neither the panda character of the opponent icon TI nor the appearance area AS have disappeared. The variable icon h0 is in the default display mode. The state of FIG. 146 (a6) corresponds to, for example, FIG. 120 (a24).

In FIG. 146 (a7), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is changed to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the notice display YH of “reach” is released from the box. In the figure (Ka8), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display YH of "reach" is displayed. The notice display YH disappears after a certain fixed display period has passed after the appearance, and the notice display YH of “reach” disappears in FIG. 146 (Ka 9). After that, the reach effect may or may not be performed. When the reach effect is performed, the notice display YH of “reach” may be continuously displayed until the reach effect is started.

Next, modified examples will be described. The same is true up to FIG. 146 (Ka4), and in FIG. 146 (Ka5'), the notice icon YI is displayed in the stock area SS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the stock animation of the notice icon YI here, the notice icon YI displayed in the appearance area AS of the fourth display unit 208M′ moves from the fourth display unit 208M′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The animation is played. At this time, there is a period in which the notice icon YI is displayed across the fourth display unit 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, it does not straddle the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is an animation that jumps from the fourth display means 208M' to the first decorative symbol display device 208L at once (moves momentarily). Good.

The fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (Ka2′) has moved from the initial position shown by the dotted line to the operating position, and covers the central area of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. There is. The fourth display means 208M′ may move from the initial position before the start of the mini game, at the same time as the start of the mini game, during the mini game, or in the mini game. You may move after the mini-game only if you win the game. Further, before the result of the mini game comes out, it may move as a notice of the result of the mini game. In this case, moving may be easier to win the mini game, or may be more difficult to win, rather than not moving. The fourth display means M′ may be configured to be in a stationary state at the operating position across one or a plurality of symbol variable displays during execution of the mini game. Here, when a mini game is performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, from the operation position to the initial position (or the end position of each symbol variable display after the result of the mini game in the symbol variable display comes out (or The fourth display means M′ may be configured to move to a position different from the operating position and the initial position). Further, the fourth display means M'is configured so as not to move from the operating position during the symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, the fourth display means M'may move from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, the fourth display means M′ is at least a part of the period during which the symbol variable display is fixedly displayed, or the entire period, even while moving between the initial position and the maximum movement position. In, it is configured to maintain a stationary state. Note that the movement may be continued or may be stopped in the state of temporary stop in the simulated continuous production or in the state of swing fluctuation before confirmation display. Further, the stop operation may be performed as described above only when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed on the fourth display means M'. Further, the fourth display means M′ may be configured to stop at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or a predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing of the fixed display of the symbol variable display.

FIG. 146 (cover b1) shows an example in which the initial position of the fourth display means 208M′ is above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this example, the hold frame UI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the mini game is also played on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (Kab1), the "bancho" icon change notice display IYH is displayed. Further, the background image is displayed on the fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (Cb1) without being illustrated. On the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 146 (Cab2), the name of the stocked notice icon YM (here, "change") is displayed as a band icon OBI'. That is, when the notice icon YM is stocked, its name is also displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. The display method is not limited to the band icon OBI', and may be the full screen.

In the example shown in FIG. 146 (cover b3′), a band icon OBI″ is displayed from the fourth display means 208M′ to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the band icon OBI″ indicates the stock notice. The name (here, “change”) of the icon YM is shown. The name of the notice icon YM in the band icon OBI″ is displayed across the fourth display unit 208M′ and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Note that, also in the example shown in FIG. 146 (cover b3′), the band icon OBI is displayed while narrowing the display area of the first decorative pattern described with reference to FIG. 145 (e) and FIG. 145 (f). The method is applicable. That is, the portion of the band icon OBI″ displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L narrows the display area of the first decorative symbol. In addition, when the fourth display means 208M′ moves and the area overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L is enlarged, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. The display area may be similarly narrowed in accordance with the movement of the fourth display means 208M'.

The fourth display means 208M′ described above can be replaced with the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, or other display means (for example, the light guide plate IL, It can also be replaced with a POV display 224I, etc. described later).

Next, an example of effect using another effect means will be described.

The state shown in FIG. 146 (Kc1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (A7), and in the subsequent FIG. 139 (Kc2), the mini game exclusive accessory is provided on the left and right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 225 has appeared. The rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is performed not only by the display of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and the panda character of the opponent icon TI, but also by the mini game exclusive accessory 225. In the mini-game exclusive accessory 225, the left side is the villager character with the variable icon h0, and the right side is the panda character with the opponent icon TI. The directing operation of the mini game exclusive accessory 225 may be started after the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is started, may be started at the same time as the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is started, or before the rock-paper-scissors show-up animation is started. It may be. In addition, when a mini game is won, an effect that excites the victory may be performed by the mini game exclusive accessory 225, or other movable effect means (for example, the fourth display means 208M′ or shown in FIG. 14). It may be performed by a movable effect by a thousand box box accessory 224H or the like, or by a light emission effect by a light emitting means.

Further, other display means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M, the light guide plate IL, the POV display 224I described later, etc.) is also associated with the mini game. Direction may be performed.

FIGS. 146 (d1) to (d5) are diagrams showing an example of effect using the POV display 224I.

In this example, on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as the production movable body described with reference to FIG. 15 is provided. The POV display 224I is also called a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The states shown in FIGS. 146 (d1) to (d3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 120 (a7) to 120 (d9-1), and in FIG. The state is the same as the state shown in 120 (A 9-1 ), that is, the state where the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B is performed and the character of the villager of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI. In FIG. 146 (Kd4), a POV display 224I appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and on the POV display 224I, the pattern of the notice icon YI won by winning the mini game and “GET” are displayed. Is displayed. Here, even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible and the display area is visible. You may display the effect with. Further, the display area is more visible when the POV display 224I is in the accelerating state from the stationary state to the constant speed state or in the decelerating state from the constant speed state to the stationary state than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the display area even during acceleration or deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. In the accelerating state and the decelerating state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display of the POV display 224I is conspicuous. Good. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area in the state of accelerating, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached.

In FIG. 146 (Cd5), the POV display 224I has returned from the position on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the initial position, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is easily visible. ..

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (F1) are in the initial positions of each other, and are in the open state (spaced state), and the first decorative symbol display device. The 208L display screen is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a3-1), and the state shown in FIG. 147 (e3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a4). is there.

In the state shown in FIG. 147 (e4), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Although the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 147 (Ke4) is still stopped, the second decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N The variable display is started, and in the second hold number display which is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold number in the special figure 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”.

In FIG. 147 (e5), the appearance animation of the opponent icon for the mini game B has started, and the effect image EF1′ is displayed separately on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, it is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 147 (e6), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the initial position until then, are starting to approach each other and are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap at both ends of the first decorative symbol.

In FIG. 147 (e7), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other and are in a completely closed state, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is invisible. .. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in contact with each other, the effect images EF1' that have been separated until now are displayed as one.

In FIG. 147 (e8), the effect image EF1′ disappears, the villager character of the variable icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the panda of the opponent icon TI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Character is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the appearance area AS is displayed surrounded by a frame, and inside the No. shown in FIG. 117(a). The notice icon YI of “box” 1 is displayed. On the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a display of the number of rock-paper-scissors competitions of the mini game B (here, "first time") is shown on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. It should be noted that the number of times displayed here indicates the current number of times of confrontation, but it may be a number of times display (for example, “three more times”) that gives a notice of how many times the rock-paper-scissors confrontation will be held thereafter. According to this example, the hold icon is hidden.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (Ke9) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (A3-7), and the rock-paper-scissors confrontation of the mini game B is started.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e10) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a9-1), in which the villager character of the variable icon h0 has won the panda character of the opponent icon TI. ..

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e11) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 120 (a10), the stock animation of the notice icon YI is started, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The notice icon YI is once displayed in a large size so as to straddle the device 208N. A part of the villager character of the variable icon h0 and a part of the panda character of the opponent icon TI are overlapped by a part of the notice icon YI that is displayed in a large size.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e12) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (a11), and the notice icon YI is the first stock in the stock area SS provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed at the position (stock display). In this example, the appearance area AS and the stock area SS are displayed on different symbol display devices, but they may be displayed on the same symbol display means.

In the state shown in FIG. 147 (e13), the character of the villager with the variable icon h0 disappears and the panda character with the opponent icon TI disappears due to the end of the rock-paper-scissors battle of the mini game B in the symbol variable display currently being performed Is waiting for a rock-paper-scissors showdown at the next change, and is executing a wait animation. Although the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L cannot be seen here, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N open and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. When the display screen becomes visible, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS′.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e14) is a state in which the variable display of symbols is completed, and the panda character with the opponent icon TI still continues the standby animation. Eventually, when the next change is started, the villager character of the change icon h0 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, as the character of the variation icon h0, No. shown in FIG. No. 18 grandfather character or No. It may be the character of 19 Yoshimune. And the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation will be held.

It should be noted that neither the second decorative symbol display device 208M nor the third decorative symbol display device 208N is configured so as not to move from the operating position during the symbol stop display (that is, to be stationary at the operating position). However, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be moved from the operating position during the symbol stop display. Further, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving at least between the initial position and the maximum moving position, at least during the period in which the symbol variable display is fixedly displayed. It is configured to remain stationary for some or all of the periods. Note that the movement may be continued or may be stopped in the state of temporary stop in the simulated continuous production or in the state of swing fluctuation before confirmation display. Further, only when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being displayed on the second decorative pattern display device 208M, or only when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being displayed on the third decorative pattern display device 208N. Alternatively, the stop operation may be performed. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are stopped at the initial position, the maximum movement position, or a predetermined stop position in accordance with the timing of the fixed display of the symbol variable display. It may be configured as follows.

The state shown in FIG. 147 (e15) corresponds to the No. shown in FIG. 117(a) in the appearance area AS. Although the "red box" notice icon YI of 2 is displayed, the villager character of the variable icon h0 is defeated by the panda character of the opponent icon TI in the second rock-paper-scissors confrontation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 147 (F15), “second time” is displayed as a display of the number of rock-paper-scissors competitions of the mini game B on the panda character of the opponent icon TI. ..

In FIG. 147 (e16), it is informed that the rock-paper-scissors confrontation has ended by straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 147 (e17), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that have been closed until now start to open, and the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is visible. In FIG. 147 (k e18), both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial position, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The combination of lost decorative patterns of "4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above can be replaced with the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146, or other display means (for example, a light guide plate IL, which will be described later). POV display 224I, etc.).

Further, in the above description, the notice display of the “change” of the default color shown in FIG. 117(b) is a notice display that raises the level of the display mode by one stage, and the first display mode (default display mode). If it is displayed, it is announced that the display mode will change to the second display mode (white flashing display mode), and the display mode has actually changed to the second display mode (white flashing display mode). Only in the case where the display mode is the display mode (default display mode), it is possible to change the display mode to the third display mode (blue display mode) by setting the advance notice display by two steps. In addition, when the display mode is the second display mode (white flashing display mode) or more, the display is an advance notice that is raised by one step, and only one step is actually changed.

Note that the notice icon may be stocked by a notice different from the mini game during the execution of a certain mini game. The notice icon may not be stocked.

It should be noted that it is also possible to notify in advance that another mini-game may occur (for example, by a mini-game preparing display or a telop display that says "mini-game is highly accurate").

In addition, before the mini game is started or while the mini game is running, another notice that the notice icon is likely to be obtained (for example, by a telop display saying "Preliminary icon acquisition high probability") ). Here, the situation in which the notice icon is likely to be acquired indicates that the notice icon is more likely to be obtained than when the notice is not notified by another notice.

In addition, when the notice icons are stocked in a certain combination (for example, when a maximum of three notice icons can be stocked, a combination in which “box”, “red box”, “gold box” are stocked or “gold box”) May be configured so that the big hit is settled in the symbol variable display in which all the notice icons are exhausted. In this case, the notice icon may be used as an icon regarding the prefetch notice, or may be used as an icon regarding the normal notice.

It should be noted that there may be a case where the advance notice of the change is given in the mini game that obtains the advance notice icon. For example, although the carpet shown in FIG. 126 (v 13) is in a stationary state, when an animation that the carpet escapes from an arrow is displayed, the animation is displayed, and the pattern being displayed at that time is displayed. It corresponds to a notice (normal notice) about a big hit in a variable display. Moreover, if the display of this animation is a display with a low appearance rate, it may be a notice of a big hit confirmation.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (13), when the carpet is displayed as if it escapes from the arrow, and the variation causes the super reach effect, but the variation causes a loss The mini game A may end. In this case, the Yoshimune (bow) icon that was the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the hold icon in the default display mode, or may remain the Yoshimune (bow) icon. When the icon of Yoshimune (bow) remains as it is, it becomes a hold icon corresponding to white blinking (second display mode level). Further, the change timing to the default display mode may be during the above-mentioned super reach (for example, during the wipe effect). Further, it may be displayed as the default change icon h0 at the start of the next change. Furthermore, the Yoshimune (bow) icon, which was the variable icon h0 when the animation that the carpet escaped from the arrow was displayed, may disappear during the super reach (for example, during the wipe production) or the super icon. It may disappear once during the reach (for example, during the wipe effect) and may be displayed again in the default display mode.

It should be noted that b notice (a <b) stock of advance notice icons is a big hit in the pattern variation display in which all advance notice icons are exhausted compared to a stock (a is an integer of 0 or more) It may be configured to be easy.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect using the display of the icon change notice shown in FIG. 119(b).

In FIG. 148 (A1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing rapidly for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 148(A2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon IHI of "Red bomber" of 5 appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the icon IHI of "red bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. In the icon change animation, while the "red bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, a bullet is fired at the hold icon. The "red bomber" icon IHI may be temporarily stopped before the target hold icon. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a fake that impersonates the target icon. In addition, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is performing the animation which passes through the stock area SS mentioned above. Here, when the notice icon is stocked, the "red bomber" icon IHI may be overlapped by the stocked notice icon, and conversely, the notice is stocked by the "red bomber" icon IHI. The icons may overlap.

In FIG. 148 (A3-1), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. That is, the "red bomber" icon IHI includes a red bomber icon RBI and a red bullet icon BTI. The target here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 148 (A4-1), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 148(A5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148(A6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode (fifth display mode) which is the same display mode as the “red bomber”. It is in the process of changing, and the change is completed in FIG. In this example, the icon change animation is the animation up to immediately before FIG. 148 (A2-1) to (A7) in FIG. In this example, after the icon IHI of "red bomber" has disappeared from the screen, the change in the display form of the icon has been completed, but before the icon IHI of "red bomber" disappears from the screen, The display mode change may be completed, or the icon display mode change may be completed at the same time that the “red bomber” icon IHI disappears from the screen.

The red bullet icon RBI may always fire the red bullet icon BTI, or may fire the bullet icon BTI of another color. In this case, the color of the bomber may determine the change mode of the icon, or the color of the bullet may determine the change mode of the icon. Alternatively, when the gold bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color of the upper side (here gold) or the lower side (here Then, the change mode of the icon may be determined by the color (red).

In FIG. 148 (A1′), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Of these two hold icons h11 and h12, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a default display mode (first display mode). It is displayed. Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 148(A2'), No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon IHI of "Bomber" of 4 appears (is displayed) on the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, as in the previous example, the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 (FIG. 148 (A5')). In this example, the icon IHI of "Bomber" is used as the icon change notice display, so the display mode is increased by one step with respect to the green display mode (fourth display mode). In FIG. 148(A7), the first hold icon h11 that was in the green display mode (fourth display mode) is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode). In the icon change animation by the "Bomber" icon IHI, if it is the hold icon in the default display mode (first display mode), skip the white blinking and promote it to blue only for the first attack. However, in the second and subsequent attacks, you can only raise it one step at a time, so in order to promote it to the hold icon in the red display mode (fifth display mode), you need three total attacks (default color → blue → (Green → red) is required. Note that the first attack may be configured to raise only one step (that is, default color→white blinking).

FIG. 148(A3-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 148(A2-1), and the icon change animation using the icon IHI of “red bomber” has started. In this icon change animation, the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode. In FIG. 148 (A3-2-3), the bullet icon BTI hits the variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image EF14. In FIG. 148 (A3-2-4), the variation icon h0 is red. Has changed to the display mode (5th display mode).

Although the example here is the one using the icon IHI of “red bomber”, the variation icon h0 is also used in the icon change animation using the icon IHI of “bomber” shown in FIG. 148(A2′). May be targeted. In this case, if the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the default display mode, the variable icon h0 changes to the blue display mode, but the target is the variable icon h0 displayed in the green display mode. If there is, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode.

FIG. 148(A4-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 148(A2-1), and the icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI has started. In this icon change animation, as shown in FIGS. 148 (A4-2-1) to (A4-2-3), the red bomber icon RBI is fired after the red bullet icon BTI is fired. Until the change of the display mode of the (here, the first hold icon h11) is completed, the display is paused before the target hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (A4-2-4) to FIG. 148 (A4-2-6), the red bomber icon RBI is directed toward the left end of the screen when the change in the icon display mode is completed. Fly away.

FIG. 148(A2-2-1) is a modification example continuing from FIG. 148(A1-1). However, in this modification, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a white flashing display mode (second display mode). The white flashing display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the display mode may change after the display is started. That is, the second display mode (white blinking display mode) is more likely to change the display mode after the display is started than the first display mode, and is more likely to be changed after the display is started than the third display mode. May be When the icon change notice display shown in FIG. 119(b) is displayed in a state where the icon of the second display mode (white flashing display mode) is displayed (for example, the icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed). When it appears), attention is focused on the icon in the second display mode (white flashing display mode).

In FIG. 148 (A2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11, and the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11. In the same figure (A2-2-4), The first hold icon h11 has changed to a red display mode (fifth display mode).

Note that the icon in the second display mode (white flashing display mode) does not change, but another icon (in this case, the second hold icon h12 that is the icon next to the first hold icon h11, or The variable icon h0) may change, or other icons may change along with the icon in the second display mode (white flashing display mode). Further, even if the icon in the second display mode is displayed, there may be a case where the change in the display mode of the icon does not occur (in the case of a goose effect). Alternatively, on the contrary, when the icon in the second display mode is displayed, the display mode of the icon may be changed without fail. When the icon of the second display mode is displayed, the icon next to the icon of the second display mode (for example, the second hold icon if the icon of the second display mode is the first hold icon. It may be an icon.) It may be announced that the state is easily changed. Here, based on the first hold icon h11 in the second display mode (white flashing display mode), only the adjacent icon (the second hold icon h12 or the variable icon h0) may change, or Although it has been described that the hold icon h11 and the icon next to the hold icon h11 may be changed, the display icon may not be a versatile display mode such as the second display mode, but may be another mode (for example, a tank mode). In the case of a tank, it may be announced that the icon of the tank's main gun may change. Also, instead of the mode of the tank, No. 1 shown in FIG. The display mode of the type of “timer” of No. 10 may be used. No. 8 “button A” type display mode or No. The display mode may be the type of “button B” of 9.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

FIG. 149 (A3-3-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), and is an example in which the icon change animation is not started even if the icon “Red bomber” IHI appears. That is, in this example, the icon-invariant animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber" is started. In the icon-invariant animation here, the bullet icon BTI is not fired, and the red bomber icon RBI simply flies over the holding frame UI (FIG. 149 (A3-3-1)-FIG. (A3-3-3)). Therefore, the mode of all the hold icons displayed is not changed. Further, the mode of the variable icon h0 has not changed, either. In the icon unchanged animation, the "red bomber" icon IHI may be hidden on the way.

Even when the red bomber icon RBI passes through as in this example, compared to the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear, all the hold icons (the default display mode hold (Including the icon) may be a pre-reading notice with a high degree of reliability of the big hit. Similarly, the variation icon h0 may be a regular notice with a high jackpot reliability. Or, if the displayed icons include the hold icons in the pre-reading advance notice display mode such as the white blinking display mode, those hold icons are compared with the case where the red bomber icon RBI does not appear. If the display mode of the variable icon is a normal notification display mode, the variable icon may have a red bomber icon RBI as compared with the case where the red bomber icon does not appear. , Ordinary notice with high reliability of jackpot may be used.

FIG. 149 (A3-4-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), and the icon unchanged animation is also executed here. In this icon unchanged animation, the red bomber icon RBI fires the red bullet icon BTI, but the bullet icon BTI does not hit any of the icons h0, h11, h12. That is, the red bullet icon BTI fired from the red bomber icon RBI flies over the hold icon as shown in FIGS. 149 (A3-4-2) to (A3-4-4). Then, although it disappears outside the screen or overlaps with the hold icon or the variable icon, it may be slid out as it is. Further, the fired bullet icon BTI may overlap the icon different from the target icon, but may fly off the screen without generating the effect image EF14. Furthermore, the shot bullet icon BTI is a locus that overlaps the hold icon if the hold icon is displayed, but since the hold icon is not displayed (the dotted line in FIG. 149 (A3-4-3)). In some cases, the player may fly off the screen through a trajectory that does not overlap (do not hit) the hold icon. .. In this FIG. 149 (A3-4-4), the mode of all the hold icons displayed has not changed.

Note that in FIG. 149 (A3-4-3), the red bomber icon RBI has jumped out of the screen earlier than the bullet icon BTI, but the opposite may be true, or the same. May be

In addition, examples illustrated in FIGS. 149(A3-3-1) to (A3-3-3) and examples illustrated in FIGS. 149(A3-4-1) to (A3-4-4) are Although the icon IHI of "red bomber" is used, the icon invariant animation using the icon IHI of "bomber" shown in FIG. 148(A2') may be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. There may be a case where an icon change animation or an icon non-change animation using the "gold bomber" icon of No. 6 is executed.

There is also a case where a bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the variable icon h0, but the variable icon h0 is not hit and neither of the holding icons h11 and h12 is hit.

Also, even if the icon change notice display of the "Bomber" icon IHI or the like is displayed, the animation using the icon change notice display is not performed, and the displayed icon change notice is displayed as it is still. After that, it may disappear. In addition, even if the icon change animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI or the icon unchanged animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, the "red bomber" The icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed more easily than the icon IHI of “” is not displayed. It may be configured, and the easiness of changing the display mode of the "red" may be the same as that when the icon IHI of the "red bomber" is not displayed.

Further, even if the hold change due to the display of the icon change notice fails, the hold (the hold of the first hold icon h11 in this example) for which the hold change is attempted is not the hold change target (this hold). In the example, the second holding icon h12 may be held more easily than the big holding). Further, even if the hold icon has the same display form (for example, the hold icon in the white blinking display form (second display form)), it fails to change from white blinking to blue and remains in white blinking. The icon may be a look-ahead notice having a higher reliability of the big hit than the white-blinking hold icon that was not the target of the hold change. Similarly, the variation icon h0 may be a regular notice with a high jackpot reliability.

FIG. 149 (A3-5-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, it looks like an icon-invariant animation, and finally the icon change that the bullet icon BTI hits. This is an example of animation. That is, the same scene (FIG. 149 (A3-5-2)) as the previous icon unchanged animation scene (FIG. 149 (A3-4-2)) is displayed, but the bullet icon BTI returns and the first icon is displayed. It hits the hold icon h11 (in FIG. 149 (A3-5-3), the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. After that, it is the same as in FIG. 148 (A7). In the change animation, the same scene as the icon invariant animation is played halfway, and the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI also partially coincides with the trajectory of the bullet icon BTI in the icon invariant animation. You may come back through to hit the target icon, or the bullet icon BTI may disappear from the screen and then come back and hit the target icon, as shown in FIG. 149 (A3-5-4). After that, it continues to FIG. 148 (A7).

FIG. 149 (A3-6-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the button image is added to the icon change notice display, and the combined effect with the button effect is provided.

First, the red bomber icon RBI appears, and the icon change animation or icon unchanged animation is started. Then, the red bomber icon RBI pauses before the target hold icon (FIG. 149 (A3-6-1)). Then, the button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI (FIG. 149 (A3-6-2)). Although the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added here, it may be added. Further, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 149 (A3-6-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In FIG. 149 (A3-6-4), in response to the chance button 136 being operated within the valid operation period, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. The bullet icon BTI may be fired on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or may be executed when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. .. Further, the bullet icon BTI may be fired only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Furthermore, the bullet icon BTI is fired regardless of whether the chance button 136 is operated, but when the chance button 136 is not operated, compared to when the chance button 136 is operated, It may be difficult to hit the target icon, or if the chance button 136 is not operated, the target icon may never be hit. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the target icon, another icon change animation or icon non-change animation may be performed.

149 (A3-7-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the first hold icon h11 is a button image mode. That is, No. 1 shown in FIG. It is the icon of “Button A” of No. 8. The icon of "button A" is an icon for notifying that an icon change will be announced by button operation. Subsequently, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-2), the button image 136a is added to the red bomber icon RBI, as in FIG. 149 (A3-6-2). Although the remaining time display meter MT is not added here as well, it may be added.

The timing of FIG. 149 (A3-7-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the chance button 136 being operated within the valid operation period, in FIG. 149 (A3-7-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. The bullet icon BTI flies toward the first hold icon h11 which is the icon of the "button A" (FIG. 149 (A3-7-5)). In FIG. 149 (A3-7-6), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11, which is the icon of the “button A”, is changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

FIG. 149(A3′-2-1) is a modification example continuing from FIG. 148(A2′). That is, the first hold icon h11 has a green display mode (fourth display mode), and the second hold icon h12 has a default display mode (first display mode). In this modification, as shown in FIG. 149 (A3'-2-1), the white bomber icon WBI fires a plurality of white bullet icons BTI. The plurality of bullet icons BTI may be fired at the same time, or may be fired one by one. Here, two white bullet icon BTIs are fired at the same time. The two bullet icons BTI partially overlap each other. The target icon here may be a single icon or a plurality of icons. In other words, one bullet icon BTI may attack one holding icon, and a plurality of bullet icons BTI may attack one holding icon. In this example, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are target icons. A bullet icon BTI aiming at the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the front, and a bullet icon BTI aiming at the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the back side. Note that this relationship may be reversed. Further, a plurality of bullet icons BTI may not be overlapped.

In FIG. 149 (A3′-2-3), the bullet icons BTI and BTI hit the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 one by one, and the first holding icon h11 and the second holding icon h12 are also hit. Is also covered with the effect image EF14. In FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), the first hold icon h11 that was in the green display mode (fourth display mode) changes to the red display mode (fifth display mode), and the default display mode ( The second hold icon h12 that was the first display mode) is changed to the blue display mode (third display mode).

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 150(A3-2-1) to (A3-2-4) are the example productions shown in FIG. 149(A3′-2-1) to FIG. 149(A3′-2-4). It is a modified example of. Here, the icon IHI of "Red bomber" has appeared. Further, the first hold icon has a white blinking display mode (second display mode). In FIG. 150 (A3-2-1), the red bomber icon RBI fires two red bullet icons BTI. Of the two fired bullet icons BTI, one hits the first hold icon h11 and the other hits neither icon (FIG. 150 (A3-2-3)). That is, the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice is given hits, and the hold icon (the second hold icon h12) for which the pre-reading notice is not made hits. In FIG. 150 (A3-2-3), only the first holding icon h11 on the hit side is covered by the effect image EF14, and in the subsequent FIG. 150 (A3-2-4), the effect image EF14 disappears and Only the 1-hold icon h11 has changed to the red display mode (fifth display mode).

Note that the bullet icon BTI may hit the hold icon for which the prefetching notice has not been given. In addition, the bullet icon BT is displayed only on the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice has not been given.
Sometimes I hit. Alternatively, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the hold icon for which the prefetching notice has not been given. Alternatively, on the contrary, the bullet icon BTI may always hit the holding icon for which the pre-reading notice is given.

Here, the red bullet icon BTI hits the holding icon (holding icon in the first display mode) for which the pre-reading notice has not been given, and the pre-reading notice in the white blinking display mode (second display mode) has been given. If the bullet icon BTI does not hit the reserved icon, the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice has not been given has a higher expectation of a big hit than the hold icon for which the pre-reading notice has been given so far. It has changed to a hold icon. In this way, for icons having different display modes, which of the icons changes to a red display mode, all of the icons change to a red display mode, or a plurality of red bullet icons BTI are displayed. Various patterns are conceivable, such as whether one icon does not change while being fired, and it may function effectively as a stirrer production.

The bullet icon BTI may be configured so that the bullet icon BTI is more likely to hit, that is, the pending icon is changed more easily than the pending icon for which the pre-reading notice is not given. Further, the variable icon may be configured to hit the bullet icon BTI more easily than the hold icon, that is, to change the hold icon more easily.

Further, the firing of a plurality of bullet icons BTI can be applied to the icon of “gold bomber” shown in FIG. 119(b).

FIG. 150 (A3-8-1) is also a modified example continuing from FIG. 148 (A2-1), but here, the red bomber icon RBI pauses immediately above the change icon h0. Then, while being paused, the red bomber icon RBI does not fire the bullet icon BTI, and the variable display of symbols ends (FIG. 150 (A3-8-2). Then, the next variable display of symbols is displayed. Even if started, the red bomber icon RBI remains paused right above the variation icon h0, that is, the red bomber icon RBI here is displayed across successive symbol variation displays. When the next change is started, the red bomber icon RBI fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0 as shown in FIG. 150 (A3-8-4). In this way, when the symbol variation display is straddled, the icon change may always be successful, or even when the symbol variation display is straddled, it may fail. , When crossing the pattern variable display, the hold icon may change icon and the change icon may not change icon, or vice versa, the change icon may change icon and the hold icon may not change icon. May be.

FIGS. 150(A3-9-1) to (A3-9-5) are modifications of FIGS. 149(A3-8-1) to 149(A3-8-4). This example is an example in which the icon IHI of "red bomber" flies away without performing the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI even in the case of the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display.

In addition, in the symbol variation display after straddling the continuous symbol variation display, whether to hit or not (whether the icon changes or not), the effect of firing the bullet icon BTI is always performed. May be.

FIG. 150 (A3-10-1) is also a modification example continued from FIG. 148 (A2-1). In this example, the pre-reading target variation suspension is the second suspension represented by the second suspension icon h12 shown in FIG. 150 (A3-10-1). The red bomber icon RBI, which is in front of the hold icon and paused right above the change icon h0, fires a red bullet icon BTI targeting the second hold icon h12, but does not hit (Fig. 150 (A3-10-2)), the symbol variation display ends (FIG. 150 (A3-10-3)). Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the red bomber icon RBI is temporarily stopped immediately above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 150 (A3-10-4),) of the prefetch target variation. A red bullet icon BTI is fired at the target of the first hold icon h11 to be held, but it does not hit here either (FIG. 150 (A3-10-5)), and the pattern variation display ends (FIG. 150 ( A3-10-6)). This time, the hold which was the change of the pre-reading object is consumed and the change display of the symbol is started. That is, the symbol fluctuation display started here means that the change was prefetch target fluctuation, and the red bomber icon RBI performs somersault to make the fluctuation icon h0 the target icon, and before the fluctuation icon h0. Returning to the position of, the red bullet icon BTI is fired at the change icon h0 as a target (FIG. 150 (A3-10-8)), and fly away toward the left end of the screen. The bullet icon BTI fired here hits the variation icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image EF14 (FIG. 150 (A3-10-10)). Although not shown, the change icon h0 changes to a red display mode (fifth display mode) when the effect image EF14 disappears.

It should be noted that FIG. 150 (A3-10-9') is a modification example continuing from (A3-10-8) in the same figure, but there is a case where the final change does not hit the target. As a result, all three failed. It should be noted that, in this example, the icon unchanged animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for the same icon, but the icon unchanged animation by the red bomber icon is performed multiple times for different icons. May be. Also, the icon change animation may be performed multiple times for the same icon or multiple times for different icons.

Although FIG. 150 (A2-3-1) is an example continued from the symbol variation display 160 (A1-1), a plurality of icon change notice displays may appear. That is, in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), three types of bomber icons IHI, which are all types such as “bomber”, “red bomber”, and “gold bomber”, have appeared. It should be noted that the types of display of the icon change notice that appear may all be different as in this example, or may be all the same. In addition, systems such as a bomber may or may not be aligned (for example, "red balloon", "gold bomber", "red flying boat").

In this way, when the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers have appeared, the icon change effect may be performed on all aircraft, but as shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-2), one bomber is used. Icon (here, the icon of "red bomber") IHI may perform the icon change effect, or the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers forming a part may perform the icon change effect. Good.

In FIG. 150 (A2-3-3), the variable icon, which is the default display mode, is changed to the red display mode, which means that the icon change effect has been successful. However, it may fail. Further, when the icon change effect is performed by the icons IHI of a plurality of bombers, a plurality of icons may change, or only one icon may change.

In addition, the icon may be a “bomber” or the No. shown in FIG. 119(b). In the case of the icon of "Flying boat" of 7, it is possible to change two icons with one aircraft.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a modified example such as the effect example shown in FIG. 148.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 of the special map 1 is displayed. The hold icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), there is a ball in the special-figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special-figure 1 is increased by one, and there are two in total. In the second hold number display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as "2".

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the second stage hs2. The second hold icon h12 is No. 2 shown in FIG. It is an icon in the display mode of 12 "roulette". This "roulette" display mode icon is displayed by switching the display mode of N selections selected from 2 to 5 selections (blue, green, red, gold, rainbow) in order and stopping at the roulette wheel. This hold icon itself changes to the display mode. In this example, there are three choices of blue, green, and red, and the display is switched and displayed in the order of “blue→green→red→blue→”. That is, in the second holding icon h12 in the display form of "roulette" shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3), the icon in the display form of "blue" is displayed, and in FIG. 151 (A1-2-4). In the second hold icon h12 in the "roulette" display mode, the icon in the "green" display mode is displayed, and the second hold in the "roulette" display mode shown in Fig. (A1-2-5). In the icon h12, an icon in the display mode of "red" is displayed. In the following drawings, it is indicated by an arrow mark indicating that the fluctuation is occurring. In FIG. 151 (A1-2-7), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration”). "1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the combination of lost decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. The first hold icon h11 is an icon in the display form of "roulette". Further, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is started. That is, the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, targeting the first hold icon h11.

In FIG. 151 (A1-2-10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 148 (A1-2-11), the effect image EF14 disappears, and in the first hold icon h11, the icon in the “red” display mode is visible. In FIG. 148(A1-2-11) followed by FIG. 148(A1-2-12), the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of “red”. Also, the "red bomber" icon IHI is about to disappear in the left corner of the screen. In addition, when the icon change animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, or when the icon unchanged animation is not performed by the "red bomber" icon IHI, that is, when the "red bomber" is selected. Even when the animation used is not performed, the first hold icon h11 is configured to change to the “red” display mode more easily than when the “red bomber” icon IHI is not displayed. Alternatively, the easiness of changing the display mode of “red” may be the same as that when the icon IHI of “red bomber” is not displayed.

The examples illustrated in FIGS. 151(A1-3-1) to (A1-3-7) are examples in which the telop effect described with reference to FIG. 94 is executed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-3-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the same figure (A1-3)
In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -2), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central area. In the subsequent FIG. 151 (A1-3-3), the telop effect is started. That is, the telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, the possibility that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change is displayed in characters, which corresponds to an example of the icon change notice display. In the telop display trp here, a character display such as "holding change high probability middle" continues to be flowed from right to left of the screen.

After the telop effect is started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the icon change animation is displayed. Has been started. That is, while the telop effect continues, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, targeting the first hold icon h11. When the icon (here, the icon IHI for "red bomber") is displayed as the icon change notice while the telop display trp such as "Hold change high accuracy" is displayed, "Hold change high accuracy" is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed more easily than in the state in which the telop display trp such as "medium" is not displayed.

In FIG. 151 (A1-3-7), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Eventually, when the effect image EF14 disappears, the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of “red”.

Next, an example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is executed will be described.

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-1), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols that are missing (“decoration 4”-“decoration”). "1"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second upper left decorative pattern also shows the combination of lost decorative patterns ("decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 7").

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-2), the hold that has been the first hold until now is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the first decorative symbol in the central area is still stopped and displayed, but in the second upper left decorative symbol, variable display is started, In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is decreased by 1 to “2”. Further, the effect image EF15 is generated so as to cover the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS, and neither the hold icon nor the change icon is visible.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region. When the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, the effect image EF15 disappears, and the silhouette notice is started in the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. That is, the hut sil appears in the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS. The inside of the hut sil is displayed in silhouette. In FIG. 151 (A1-4-3), the variation icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are displayed in silhouette display. In the silhouette display, the colors of the icons and the like are not the usual colors but the colors representing shadows. The silhouette notice started here is a notice indicating that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, or there is a hold icon that may change to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. It may be a notice that suggests that there is.

After the silhouette notice is started, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-4), the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the icon change animation is started. It That is, as shown in FIG. 151 (A1-4-4), the red bomber icon RBI approaches the hut sil while the silhouette notice is being given. Eventually, the red bomber icon RBI passes while hiding the hut sil, and fires a red bullet icon BTI while passing. The fired bullet icon BTI enters the hut and is displayed as a silhouette.

In FIG. 151 (A1-4-7), a state in which the bullet icon BTI is likely to hit the first hold icon h11 is displayed in silhouette. Also, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-8), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14 in a silhouette display. Then, in FIG. 151 (A1-4-9), the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a silhouette display so that it can be seen that the display mode has changed to “red”. It should be noted that the silhouette may be displayed so that the display mode is not known until the silhouette notice is finished.

FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example in which the silhouette notice of the hold icon is being executed and other effect examples.

In FIG. 152 (A1-4-10), the variable display of symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of missing decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration”). 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed, and the upper left second decorative design is also stopped and displayed with the same combination of lost decorative designs.

In FIG. 152 (A1-4-11), the stop display is in progress (during confirmation display), the change icon h0 disappears, and in FIG. 152 (A1-4-12), the stop display is in progress (during confirmation display). In the same figure (A1-4-13), the hold that has been the first hold until now, that is, the hold of the first hold icon that has changed to the display mode of "red" is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. .. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-13), the first decorative symbol in the central region is still stopped and displayed, but in the second decorative symbol on the upper left, the variable display is started, In the second hold number display on the upper right, the hold number in Toku-zu 1 is decremented by 1 to "1". Further, in the hut sil, it can be seen that the movement animation of the hold icon is displayed in a silhouette display, and the first hold icon that has changed to the display mode of “red” is displayed at the position of the variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-14), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started in the central region, and after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, The silhouette notice ends, and on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (A1-4-15), the variable icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed.

In addition, the production of the silhouette notice may itself be promoted by the production by the icon change animation using the icon IHI of "red bomber". For example, the hut sil may be promoted to become a house and the hold icon may be easily changed, or the color of the hut sil may be changed to red and the hold icon may be easily displayed in red. .. Then, the display mode of the hold icon may change after the silhouette notice ends (after the hut sil is hidden) or at the same time.

FIGS. 152(B1-1) to (B8) are diagrams showing an example in which the icon change notice display is promoted after the icon change notice display is displayed.

In FIG. 152(B1-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 152 (B2), the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber", which is an icon change notice display, appears (is displayed) at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In the icon change animation here, the icon "HIBOR" IHI pauses on the change icon h0 as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-1), and as shown in FIG. After the flashing of the change was displayed on the "Bomber" icon IHI, it was promoted to the "Red Bomber" icon IHI. In addition, in the case of promotion within the same bomber system (the icon IHI of "Bomber" is promoted to the icon IHI of "Bomber" or the icon IHI of "Red bomber" is There is a case where it is promoted to the "Bomber" icon IHI) or when it changes to a different system (the "Bomber" icon IHI is promoted to the "Flying boat" icon IHI or the "Bomber" icon IHI may be promoted to the “Red Flying Boat” icon IHI).

In FIG. 152(B6), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In FIG. 152(B7), the fired bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 152(B8), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes to the display mode of “red”.

FIG. 152 (B3-2-1) to FIG. 152 (B3-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the display of the icon change notice itself is promoted by the button effect.

FIG. 152(B3-2-1) is an example continued from FIG. 152(B2), and the state shown in FIG. 152(B3-2-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152(B3-1). is there. In FIG. 152 (B3-2-2), the button image 136a is added on the icon IHI of “bomber”, which is the display of the icon change notice. Although the remaining time display meter MT showing the remaining time of the operation valid period is not added here, it may be added. Further, the operation valid period may start from the time when the button image 136a is added, or may start after a while.

The timing of FIG. 152 (B3-2-3) is within the operation valid period, and the player operates the chance button 136 at this timing. In response to the operation of the chance button 136 within the valid operation period, in FIG. 149 (B3-2-4), the icon IHI of "Bomber" is flashed to indicate the change, and then "Red". It has been promoted to the icon IHI of "Bomber" (Fig. 149 (B3-2-5)). .. Then, continuing from FIG. 152(B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change. Note that the promotion of the “bomber” icon IHI is executed on the condition that the chance button 136 has been operated. It may be performed, or may be performed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the chance button 136. Further, although the button image 136a is added on the icon "HIB" of the bomber, the button image 136a may not be added and may be executed as a so-called back button effect.

FIGS. 152(B3-3-1) to (B3-3-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted by the notice display YH released from the notice icon YI.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-1), the notice icon YI is stocked in the stock area SS. In FIG. 152 (B3-3-2), the notice icon YI is used, the box changes to the opened state d, and from the box, the No. shown in FIG. 117(b) is displayed. The "UP" notice display YH of 20 is released, and in the figure (B3-3-3), the used notice icon YI disappears and the "UP" notice display YH is displayed. The notice display YH of “UP” is changed to a light ball YHb, and the light ball YHb is temporarily stopped on the fluctuation icon h0 as shown in FIG. 152 (B3-3-4). It flies toward the "Bomber" icon IHI and hits the "Bomber" icon IHI. Then, in FIG. 152 (B3-3-5), the icon IHI for “bomber” is promoted to the icon IHI for “red bomber”. Although FIG. 149 (B3-3-6) is followed by FIG. 152 (B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example in which the icon change notice display itself is promoted while failing to be promoted in the middle of a plurality of fluctuations.

FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is an example that continues from FIG. 152 (B2). In this example, the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-1) is used to hold the prefetch target change. It is the second hold to represent.

The state shown in FIG. 153(B3-4-1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152(B3-1), and the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber", which is a notification of the icon change notice, is a variable icon. It is paused just above h0. Further, the state shown in FIG. 152(B3-4-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 152(B4), and the icon IHI of the “bombing machine” is flashed to incite the change. In this example, in FIG. 153 (B3-4-3) in which promotion has failed and the flashing display has disappeared, the icon IHI of "Bomber" remains as it is. Eventually, in FIG. 151 (B3-4-3), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central region is a combination of the decorative symbols that are missing (“decoration 4”- "Ornament 1"-"Ornament 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second ornamental pattern at the upper left is also stopped and displayed as a combination of missing decorative symbols ("Ornament 4"-"Ornament 1"-"Ornament 7"). There is.

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the icon IHI of the "bomber" remains suspended immediately above the variation icon h0 (FIG. 153 (B3-4-5)). In the subsequent FIG. 153 (B3-4-6), the flashing display that fuels the change is displayed again on the icon “HIB”, and this time the promotion was successful, and the flashing display disappeared. ), has been promoted to the icon IHI of "Red bomber". The red bomber icon RBI that has been successfully promoted fires a red bullet icon BTI toward the first hold icon h0, but as shown in FIG. 153 (B3-4-8), it does not hit here, In FIG. 153 (B3-4-9), the variable display of symbols is finished, and the combination of lost decorative symbols (“decoration 6”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”) is stopped and displayed.

This time, the hold, which was the change in the prefetching target, is consumed, and the pattern change display is started (FIG. 153 (B3-4-10)). That is, the symbol variation display started here is the variation of the pre-reading target, and the red bomber icon RBI performs somersault to make the variation icon h0 the target icon, before the variation icon h0. Returning to the position of, the red bullet icon BTI is fired at the change icon h0 as a target (FIG. 153 (B3-4-11)). After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (A3-2-2), the display mode of the variable icon may not change.

In this example, the promotion has succeeded the second time, but the production may end without successful promotion. Also, from the icon IHI of "Red bomber" to "Gold bomber"
The icon may be changed to the icon IHI. Further, in this example, the bullet icon BTI is fired after promotion, but the bullet icon BTI may be fired even before promotion. For example, the bullet icon BTI may be fired at the timing of FIG. 153 (B3-4-3).

FIGS. 153(B1-2-1) to (B1-2-10) are diagrams showing an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the timer notice effect.

FIG. 153 (B1-2-1) shows that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-2), the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display TYH is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-2) shows the remaining time (5 seconds in this case) up to the time which is the reference for the promotion effect start. In 3), the countdown has started. The timer notice effect started here corresponds to a notice of promotion effect. After the timer notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-4), the icon IHI of the default color “Bomber”, which is a notice of the icon change notice, is displayed, and is directly above the change icon h0. It flies up to and pauses (FIG. 153 (B1-2-5)), and enters the standby state. The timer notice display TYH shown in FIG. 153 (B1-2-6) has no remaining time (0 seconds), and in the subsequent figure (B1-2-7), the timer notice display TYH is a character of “attention”. Has been switched to. At the same time as the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH disappears (becomes 0 seconds), the promotion effect is started. Note that the promotion effect may be started (when there is a time lag) after the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted.

In FIG. 153 (B1-2-8), the character “Attention” is displayed on the timer notice display TYH, and a flashing display that fuels the change is displayed on the icon IHI of the “bomber” that has been in the standby state until now. Is displayed. Eventually, the flashing display disappears, and in FIG. 153 (B1-2-9) in which the flashing display disappears, the icon has been promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. It is easier to promote the icon change notice display itself via the timer notice effect than when not passing the timer notice effect. It should be noted that the display itself of the icon change notice may be promoted without fail when the timer notice effect is passed. In FIG. 153 (B1-2-10), the timer notice effect is finished and the timer notice display TYH is hidden. It should be noted that this timer notice display TYH may be used to give notice of the type in which the icon change notice display is promoted. For example, the character display of "red" may be performed instead of the character display of "attention".

It should be noted that when the remaining time of the timer notice display TYH is exhausted (0 seconds), the display of the icon change notice (for example, the icon IHI of “Bomber”) may appear. That is, the timer notice display TYH corresponds to a notice that the icon change notice may be displayed. Furthermore, the background color of the timer notice display TYH or the like may be used to give notice of the display color of the icon change notice that appears. For example, if it is a white background, the icon IHI of "Bomber" is announced, if it is a red background, the icon IHI of "Red Bomber" is announced, and if it is a gold background, it is "Gold". The appearance of the icon "HIB" of "Bomber" may be announced. However, such a notice may not be given.

Also, this example is an example in which the timer advance notice effect and the promotion effect are combined, but both are independent, and after the timer advance notice effect starts, the icon "HIB" of the "Bomber" appears and the timer advance notice display TYH Even if the remaining time is exhausted, the promotion effect may not be started, and another notice or effect corresponding to the timer notice display TYH may be started. In this case, the promotion effect of the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" is irrelevant to the timer notice effect. Further, there may be a case where the timing when the remaining time of the timer advance notice display TYH is exhausted and the timing when the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" is changed to be held coincidentally.

Next, an example in which the display itself of the icon change notice is promoted via the meter effect will be described.

In FIG. 153 (B1-3-1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed with respect to the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. There is. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed. Further, a meter display MD similar to the meter display shown in FIG. 91 or the like is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. In the meter display MD shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-1), when the tank is full with 6 scales, 5 scales are already stored. When the meter display MD is full, the icon IHI of "Bomber", which is an icon change notice display, is promoted. It should be noted that this meter display MD may be a display that is constantly displayed, except for a specific state in which a super reach effect is being executed, or a display that is displayed when the display start condition is satisfied. May be

Eventually, in FIG. 153 (B1-3-2), the variable display of the symbols ends, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol in the central area is a combination of the missing decorative symbols (“decoration 4”- "Ornament 1"-"Ornament 7") is stopped and displayed, and the second ornamental pattern at the upper left is also stopped and displayed as a combination of missing ornamental symbols ("Ornament 4"-"Ornament 1"-"Ornament 7"). There is.

Then, even when the next symbol variation display is started, the meter display MD accumulated up to 5 scales is displayed on the right base icon bIr (FIG. 153 (B1-3-3)). When the next symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-4), the “red bomber” icon IHI appears at the right end of the screen. That is, the icon "HIB" of "red bomber" displayed here is No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b). The "up" notice display YH of 20 is mounted, and in the same figure (B1-3-5), when passing over the meter display MD, the "up" notice display YH is dropped, The notice display YH of "up" is taken into the meter display MD. As a result, as shown in FIG. 153 (B1-3-6), the meter display MD is full, and in the subsequent figure (B1-3-7), the meter display MD is changed to the character display of “promotion”. It's changing.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example in which the display of the icon change notice display itself is promoted via the meter effect, and other effect examples.

In FIG. 154 (B1-3-8) subsequent to FIG. 153 (B1-3-7), the default color “Bomber” icon IHI is changed in response to the meter display MD becoming full. In FIG. 154 (B1-3-9) in which the flashing flashing display is performed and the flashing display disappears, the icon has been promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. The changed icon change notice display color matches the background color of the character display "promotion" on the meter display MD, and the icon change notice display is changed at the stage of FIG. 153 (B1-3-7). The changing display mode is announced in advance. Subsequently, the meter display MD shown in FIG. 154 (B1-3-10) has returned to the empty state. When the meter display MD is full, the display mode of the icon change notice display may be changed (promoted) without exception, or may not be changed (promoted) (failure).

FIG. 153 (B1-4-1) to FIG. 153 (B1-4-4) describe an example in which the icon change notice display appears when the meter display in the meter effect is full.

The meter display MD is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1). The meter display MD is in a state where the scale is full at 6 scales and 5 scales are already stored. Further, in FIG. 153 (B1-4-1) during the variable display of symbols, the advance notice display YH of “UP” is displayed. In the subsequent FIG. 153 (B1-4-2), the advance notice YH of “up” is taken into the meter display MD, the meter display MD becomes full, and in the subsequent same diagram (B1-4-3), the meter is displayed. The display MD has changed to the display of "bombing" with a red background. Here, as the display of the icon change notice, it is announced that the icon of the bomber with the background color will appear. If you change the display to "Bombing" on the gold background, the "Gold bomber" icon may appear, and if you change to the "Bombing" display on the white background, the "Bomber" icon changes. It may be displayed. Further, it is not necessary to give a notice of the appearance of the icon change notice that appears, and even in this case, when the meter display MD is full, the "bomber" icon, the "red bomber" icon, Alternatively, the "gold bomber" icon may be displayed.

Then, in FIG. 154 (B1-4-4), the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears at the right end of the screen.

It should be noted that when the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is given by the meter display MD, the icon change notice display may or may not always appear.

FIG. 154 (C1) to FIG. 154 (C13) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the icon change notice display is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In FIG. 154 (C1), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. During the stop display, nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

In FIG. 154 (C2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Nothing is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS even at the time when the variable display of symbols is started, but when the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, it is displayed in FIG. 154 (C3). As shown in the figure, a smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the smoke image disappears in the figure (C4), and the effect icon display area DIS displays No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b). Thirteen red “Ikayoshi” icons IHI are displayed. This "Akayoshimune" icon corresponds to the icon change notice display, and will be described below with the same symbols as those used for the "Red bomber" icon and the like. When the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is successfully changed, the icon display mode is changed to the same display mode as itself, that is, the red display mode (fifth display mode). Therefore, if the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it corresponds to the advance notice of advance notice, and if the display mode of the variable icon is changed, it corresponds to the normal notice of advance notice.

In FIG. 154 (C5), the change effect of the variation icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is started. That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" which has been the default mode (a) shown in FIG. 119(b) has been changed to the mode (b). That is, the icon IHI of "Akayoshi Mune", which was standing upright, faces the variable icon h0, holds the sword, and vibrates from the sword. Also in FIG. 154(C6), the wave is oscillated from the sword of “Akayoshimune”, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 remains the default, and in FIG. 154(C7), the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is Returning to mode a, the change animation is finished. That is, the change effect here has failed. In FIG. 154 (C8), the variable display of symbols is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols that are lost. The icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is displayed on the right base icon bIr as the aspect a.

In FIG. 154 (C9), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is exhausted, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even if the symbol variable display is started, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed on the right base icon bIr as the mode a, and is displayed across the continuous symbol variable display. In FIG. 154 (C10), a change animation is started as a change effect of the change icon h0 using the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune”. In FIG. 154 (C11), the variable icon h0, which has been the default display mode until then, has changed to the red display mode, and the normal notice is started. In FIG. 154 (C12-1), the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” has changed from aspect b to aspect c, appealing that the change effect was successful. If the change effect is successful, the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune", which was the display of the icon change notice, disappears from the right base icon bIr.

The icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” described above is the same as the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono shown in FIG. 77, FIG. 84, etc., and is an example of effect shown in FIG. 77, FIG. 84, etc. And are mutually applicable.

When the icon IHI of "Akayoshimune" is displayed, the display form of the icon may change to a red display form without fail, or it may fail like this example, but In some cases, it may be changed to a red display mode, or it may fail in the end.

FIG. 154 (C12-2) shows the state after the change icon h0 cannot be changed to the red display mode and finally the change effect has failed, and the icon IHI of “Akayoshimune” is displayed. However, the change from the aspect b to the aspect d notifies that the change effect has failed.

Next, an example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119(b) will be described.

In FIG. 154 (D1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 154 (D2), the icon of “red thundercloud” starts to be displayed small on the hold icons h11 and h12. This "red thundercloud" icon corresponds to the icon change notice display, and will be described below with the same reference numerals as those used for the "red bomber" icon and the like. The icon of "red thundercloud" is the same as the icon of "red bomber" and the icon of "Akayoshimune" when the icon is changed successfully. It is an icon for changing to a fifth display mode).

The "red thundercloud" icon grows into a large thundercloud by the growth animation after the display is started. There may be a case where a large thundercloud does not grow, and in this case, it may be displayed as a gusset, or a large thundercloud may surely grow.

The "red thundercloud" icon IHI shown in FIG. 154 (D3) has grown to cover the area from the variable icon display area CIS to the hold icon display area HIS from above, and this "red thundercloud" icon IHI The fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed below.

In FIG. 154 (D4), thunder has fallen from the “red thundercloud” icon IHI toward the first hold icon h11, and in the following (D5), the first hold icon h11 where the thunder has fallen is the effect image. In the figure (D6) in which the effect image EF16 is covered by the EF16 and disappears, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 does not change, and the default display mode remains, and the change effect fails. The “red thundercloud” icon IHI drops lightning simultaneously or sequentially toward one or more icons of the hold icon or the variable icon, and when the change effect is successful, the display mode of the icon that has thundered is , The display mode changes to red. In FIG. 154 (D6), the symbol variable display is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed with the combination of the lost decorative symbols, but the "Red thundercloud" icon IHI is displayed. Has been done.

In FIG. 154 (D7), the suspension of the first suspension icon h11 is exhausted, and the variable display of symbols is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the "red thundercloud" icon IHI is displayed, and this "red thundercloud" icon IHI is also displayed across the continuous symbol variation display.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example using the display of the icon change notice not shown in FIG. 119(b) and another example of the effect.

In FIG. 155 (D8) subsequent to FIG. 154 (D7), the symbol variable display is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the combination of lost decorative symbols. Here, the special figure is no longer held and the next change is waiting for a prize. However, the "Red Thundercloud" icon IHI is still displayed.

When the first time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the state where the symbol variation display is not started after the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed in the state where the hold is 0, the symbol demonstration is started. (FIG. 155 (D9)). In this symbol demo, the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. Although not shown, the background screen continues to be displayed without being changed from the symbol variable display of FIG. 154 (D7). However, you may switch to the background screen of the symbol demo. Further, when the symbol demonstration is started, the display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started. The display start timing of these icons MI, VI, BI may be before the start of the symbol demo, at the same time as the start of the symbol demo, or after the start of the symbol demo. A detailed description of these icons MI, VI, BI has been given with reference to FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 155 (D9), even during the symbol demonstration, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” is still displayed.

The display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI is started in a state where the stop symbol of the special symbol is confirmed and the variable display of the symbol is not started after the hold is 0. Further, when the second time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses in that state, the pattern demo is switched to the animation demo. When the animation demo starts, the background screen changes and the animation demo screen is displayed (FIG. 155 (D10)). When switching to the demo screen of this animation, the icon IHI of "Red thundercloud" disappears. On the other hand, in this example, even when the screen is switched to the animation demo screen, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are still displayed at the same positions as before the switching. However, when the screen is switched to the animation demonstration screen, the display positions of these icons MI, VI, BI may be changed, or they may be hidden.

The animation demonstration screen may be switched to when the first time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. In this case, at the same time as switching to the animation demo screen, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” may be hidden, or the second time period may be displayed after switching.

Eventually, there is a ball in the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the number of special figure 1 is increased by one, and the variable display of symbols is started. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation demonstration screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 155 (D11). As a result, the icon IHI of the “red thundercloud” that has grown greatly is displayed again. However, the icon IHI of "red thundercloud" may not be displayed when the symbol demo or the animation demo is sandwiched.

In FIG. 155 (D8), the symbol fluctuation display started in FIG. 155 (D11) is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed, which shows a combination of lost decorative symbols. During the execution of the symbol variation display started in (D11), there is another ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the number of reservations in special figure 1 becomes 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. ing. Therefore, the next variation is started immediately, and after the symbol variation display here, the suspension of special figure 1 starts to accumulate, and the symbol variation display is continuously executed. During this time, as shown in FIG. 155 (D13), the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” continues to be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 155 (D14), the first stop is performed in the first decorative symbol, and the left symbol fluctuates. When the symbol variable display of the “red thundercloud” icon IHI is performed a predetermined number of times, the erasing animation is started. The count of the number of times here does not change even if the above-mentioned symbol demo or the above-mentioned animation demo is sandwiched. However, the number of times may be reset by sandwiching the symbol demo or the animation demo. The start timing of the deletion animation may be at the same time as the start of the next symbol variable display in which the symbol variable display is performed a predetermined number of times, after the start, or the first stop is performed. The timing may be different. In the deletion animation, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud” gradually becomes smaller, and finally disappears (FIG. 155 (D16)). In this example, after all, the change effect by the icon IHI of "Red thundercloud" is completed without success.

In this example, although not shown, lightning is dropped on any icon for each change. However, lightning may be dropped only when the icon is changed. Also, as the types of thundercloud icons, a default thundercloud icon and a gold thundercloud icon are also provided. However, the colors of clouds may be the same, and the types may be divided by the color of lightning. That is, the icon with a red thunder may change to red if the change effect is successful. In this case, it may be possible to focus on the thundercloud icon without knowing the type of display of the icon change notice until the thunder strikes. Further, it may be configured so that it is not possible to know which display mode will be changed only when the default color lightning strikes. For example, even if a default color thunder strikes the default color icon, it may change to red. On the other hand, in other colors (display mode), the color changes to the same color (display mode) as the color of lightning (display mode), so it also functions as a notice of the changing display mode.

FIG. 155 (Ea1) to FIG. 155 (Ea9) are diagrams showing an example of effect in which the icon of the display mode of “timer” and the display of the icon change notice are combined.

In FIG. 155 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. 1st reservation icon h11 of special figure 1 is No. shown in FIG. 119 (a). 10 is an icon in a display mode of “Timer” of 10. The icon in the display mode of "timer" is an icon that changes to the display mode of the fourth display mode or more when the timer becomes 0. However, it may not change even if the timer becomes 0, or may change without fail when the timer becomes 0. The mode of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of "timer" shown in 167 (Ea1) is the mode a before the start of the countdown. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), No. 1 shown in FIG. An icon in a special mode in which the character "Timer" is added to the icon of "Bomber" in the default color of No. 4 appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon is referred to as the "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI. The icon IHI for "timer-only bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The "timer-only bomber" icon IHI may appear when the hold icon or the variable icon is displayed in the "timer" display mode icon, and is displayed in the "timer" display mode icon. Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display form of "timer" is displayed, it may be displayed without fail. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-1), the icon change animation using the icon "IHI" of the appeared "timer-operated bomber" is started. Even if the icon change animation is started, the timer of the first hold icon h11 does not start the countdown, and the mode a is displayed as it is.

In FIG. 155 (Ea3), the bullet icon BTI of the default color is fired from the icon TBI of the bomber with the character "Timer". The target here is the first hold icon h11 in the display form of "timer". The bomber icon TBI with the word "Timer" does not target any icon other than the icon in the display form of "timer", but may do so. In this case, when the bullet icon BTI hits, the display mode of "timer" may be changed.

In FIG. 155 (Ea5), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 of “timer”, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 155 (Ea6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the mode a before the countdown is started to the mode b during the countdown. That is, the countdown is started only after the bullet icon BTI hits. In this example, the icon change animation is the animation up to immediately before FIG. 155 (Ea2-1) to (Ea6). It should be noted that the bullet icon BTI can be regarded as equivalent to the display of the icon change notice, and in that case, the display is started by being fired from the bomber icon TBI with the character of Timer attached, After that, the animation just before hitting and completing the change to the mode b corresponds to the icon change animation.

In FIG. 155 (Ea7), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of “timer” becomes a mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time as the timer becomes 0, as shown in (Ea8) in FIG. The icon h11 is covered with the smoke image. In FIG. 155 (Ea8), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon that was the display form of "timer" is changed to the green display form (fourth display form). The "timer" holding icon may start operating even if the timer is not attacked by the "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI. In this case, it may be a look-ahead notice with a higher jackpot reliability than when the operation was started by the "timer-only bomber" icon IHI, or conversely, with a look-ahead notice with a low jackpot reliability. There may be, and the reliability of the jackpot may be the same. Also, the "timer" hold icon may start the timer without being attacked by the "timer-operated bomber" icon IHI, or conversely, the "timer-operated bomber" icon. The timer may not fire unless it is attacked by the IHI.

In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-1), in the state where the icon of the display form of "timer" is displayed, not the icon IHI of "dedicated bomber for timer operation" but the general-purpose icon of "red bomber" IHI has appeared. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-2), the bullet icon BTI has been fired from the icon IHI of “red bomber”, and the fired bullet icon BTI becomes the first hold icon h11 in the “timer” display mode. Hit. Then, the countdown is started with the first hold icon h11 of "timer". In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-3), the mode of the first hold icon h11 of “timer” becomes a mode in which the timer becomes 0, and at the same time as the timer becomes 0, the same figure (Ea2-2-4). As shown in, the first hold icon h11 is covered with the smoke image. In this example, when the timer becomes 0, it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon changes to the same red display mode (fifth display mode) as the display mode of the "red bomber" icon IHI. .. In FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), the smoke image disappears, and the first hold icon that was the display form of “timer” has changed to the red display form (fifth display form).

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a certain type of hold icon and an icon change notice display are combined.

FIGS. 156(Eb1) to (Eb8) are diagrams showing an example in which a hold icon of a type of “bomb” not shown in FIG. 119(a) and an icon change notice display are combined.

In FIG. 156 (Ea1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is an icon of the type “bomb” not shown in FIG. 119(a). This "bomb" type icon is an icon whose display mode changes when the bomb explodes. In this respect, it is similar to the "timer" icon, but the "timer" icon does not count down. Since the display mode of the icon changes when it becomes 0, it is easy to understand the timing of the change of the display mode, while it is difficult to understand when the "bomb" explodes, and as a result, the timing of the change of the display mode. Both are different in that it is difficult to understand. The icon of the "bomb" type has a fuse, and it is necessary to ignite this fuse to fire the "bomb".

In FIG. 156 (Eb2), the icon IHI of "red bomber", which is an icon change notice display, appears at the right end of the screen, and the icon change animation is started. In FIG. 156 (Eb3), the red bomber icon RBI equipped with the ignition icon CYI is gradually approaching the “bomb” first hold icon h11. The ignition icon CYI is dropped toward the fuse of the bomb icon which is the icon h11. Note that the "red bomber" icon IHI may be an icon with a flamethrower fixedly arranged, and in this case, such icons as the bullet icon BTI and the ignition icon CYI are separated from the aircraft. Disappear. The first bomb holding icon h11 may or may not successfully ignite the fuse even if the ignition icon CYI is dropped. The squib of the bomb icon that is the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 156 (Eb5) is ignited, and in FIG. 156 (Eb6), the squib is burning and becoming shorter. Eventually, FIG. 156 (Eb7-
As shown in 1), the first hold icon h11 of "bomb" explodes, and as shown in the same figure (Eb8), the first hold icon h11 is the same as the display mode of the icon IHI of "red bomber". The display mode has changed to red.

FIG. 156(Eb7-2-1) is a modified example continuing from FIG. 156(Eb6). In FIG. 156(Eb7-2-1), although the squib is burning and shortening, FIG. 156(Eb7-2-1). Then, the fire of the squib was extinguished halfway. Therefore, the “bomb” first hold icon h11 does not explode, and the display mode does not change. The icon of the "bomb" that the fire of the squib has disappeared halfway continues to be displayed as it is. The mode of "bomb" in which the fire of the squib is extinguished halfway corresponds to the second display mode (display mode of "flashing white"). In FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-2), the variable display of symbols ends, and in FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3), the icon of the “bomb” in which the fuse has disappeared halfway is displayed as the variable icon h0. Has been done. Even if the squib disappears in the middle, the squib that disappeared in the middle may be ignited again due to a change after the next change. In FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3) followed by FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-3), a combination of lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the "bomb" icon (holding icon or variable icon) may not be attacked by the display of the icon change notice such as the "red bomber" icon IHI, or the fuse may be ignited naturally. Good. In this case, a pre-reading notice with a high jackpot reliability may be used, or conversely, a pre-reading notice with a low jackpot reliability may be used, compared with the case of being ignited by displaying the icon change notice. The reliability may be the same. Also, the "bomb" icon may always ignite the fuse if it is not attacked by the icon change notice display, or on the contrary, unless the attack is indicated by the icon change notice display, the fuse is ignited. You don't have to.

It should be noted that the icon (holding icon and/or change icon) indicates the No. shown in FIG. 2 to No. It may be announced that the icon will change to the 19 icon, the “bomb” icon described above, the VS display mode hold icon, and the “patrol lamp” icon described below.

156 (Ec1) to (Ec8) in FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example in which the “target” icon of 11 and an icon change notice display of a type not shown in FIG. 119( b) are combined.

In FIG. 156 (Ec1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at a high speed for the special figure 1, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. 1st reservation icon h11 of special figure 1 is No. shown in FIG. 119 (a). 11 is an icon in the display mode of “11”. In the icon of this "target" display mode, when the arrow is not inserted into the target icon, it remains the mode a shown in FIG. 119(a), and the reliability of the big hit in the pattern variation display corresponding to the target icon. Although the degree is about the level of the second display mode (white flashing display mode), when the arrow is stuck in the target icon, it changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 119(a), and the symbol variable display corresponding to the target icon is displayed. The reliability of the big hit in (6) rises to the level of the sixth display mode (gold color display mode). On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 156 (Ec2), the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute appears on the upper right of the display screen. The Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying this parachute is a kind of display of the icon change notice, but is an icon change notice of a type not shown in FIG. 119(b).
In FIG. 119(b), the icon change animation has started, and Yoshimune in the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute is holding a bow and arrow and aiming for the target icon which is the first hold icon h11. At Ec3), the arrow icon YYI is fired. The fired arrow icon YYI hits the target icon which is the first hold icon h11, and in FIG. 156 (Ec5-1) the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. In the subsequent FIG. 156 (Ec6), the effect image EF14 disappears, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to the mode b shown in FIG. 119(a). In this example, the reliability of the big hit in the variable display of symbols corresponding to the first hold icon h11 has risen to the level of the sixth display mode (gold display mode). In FIG. 156 (Ec7-1), Yoshimune's icon YMP carrying a parachute passes over the first hold icon h11, and eventually the icon TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 156 (Ec8)). ..

FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-1) is a modified example continuing from the same figure (Ec4), and in the same figure (Ec5-2-1), the fired arrow icon YYI is the first hold icon h11. In the same figure (Ec5-2-2) which has not hit the target icon, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is displayed as it is. And then, just as when hitting, the icon YMP of Yoshimune carrying a parachute passes over the first holding icon h11 (Fig. 156 (Ec5-2-3)), and eventually the icon. The TMP disappears from the display screen (FIG. 156 (Ec5-2-4)). In this way, within one symbol variation display, if it fails once, it is not possible to try again and it ends as it is. However, the icon YMP of Yoshimune who carries a parachute again may appear in the next change, and a change effect aiming at the target icon may be executed, or a change effect may be executed by another effect. It should be noted that, even if one failure occurs in one time, the pattern change table may be able to be retried up to a predetermined number of times (for example, two times, three times including rechallenge...), or even one failure. It may be configured so that the player can always try again up to a predetermined number of times.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing another example of the effect using a bomber-type icon as the icon change notice display.

157(Ed1) to FIG. 157(Ed5) are examples in which an icon of a type not shown in FIG. 119(a) and an icon change notice display of a type not also shown in FIG. 119(b) are combined. FIG.

In FIG. 157 (Ed1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) for the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. The first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 is an icon of the type of “patrol lamp” not shown in FIG. 119(a). When the icon of the "patrol lamp" is activated, the reliability of the jackpot in the pattern variation display corresponding to the icon of the patrol lamp is the level of the seventh display mode (rainbow display mode), that is, the jackpot is confirmed. Rise to the level of. On the other hand, the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 157 (Ed1), No. 1 illustrated in FIG. The icon of the special mode in which the patrol lamp is attached and the character pat is attached to the icon of the "Bomber" in the default color of No. 4 appears at the right end of the screen. Hereinafter, this icon will be referred to as the icon IHI for the "patrol lamp dedicated bomber". The icon "IHI" of the "patrol lamp-only bomber" corresponds to the display of the icon change notice. The "patrol lamp-operated bomber" icon IHI may appear when the hold icon or the variable icon is displayed in the "patrol lamp" display mode icon, and is displayed in the "patrol lamp" display mode icon. Even if it is done, it may not appear. However, when the icon of the display mode of “patrol lamp” is displayed, it may be displayed without fail. In FIG. 157 (Ed1), the icon change animation using the icon “IHI” of the “patrol lamp dedicated bomber” that has appeared has started.

In FIG. 157 (Ed2), the bullet icon BTI of the default color from the icon PBI of the bomber to which the patrol lamp is attached and the character pat is attached targets the first holding icon h11 in the display mode of “patrol lamp”, Has been fired. In FIG. 157 (Ed3), the bullet icon BTI hits the first holding icon h11 of “patrol lamp”, and the first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in FIG. 157 (Ea4), the effect image EF14 disappears, the icon of the patrol lamp of the first hold icon h11 is activated, and it is informed that the first hold is a jackpot confirmation hold. It should be noted that the icon IHI of the "patrol lamp dedicated bomber" has jumped to the left side of the screen and is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 157 (Ea5).

157(Fa1) to FIG. 157(Fa5) are diagrams showing an example in which the appearance notice of the icon change notice display is given using a movable accessory or the like.

In FIG. 157 (Fa1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) of the special map 1 is changing at high speed, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the default display mode (first display mode). Further, on the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS, the variable icon h0 in the default display mode (first display mode) is displayed.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-1), among the large-board behavior auditors arranged at the four corners of the first decorative pattern display device 208L described with reference to FIG. 14 and the like, the fourth large-board behavior arranged at the lower right. The accessory 224Gd starts to advance from the initial position toward the position where it overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side, and in accordance with the advance of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A red effect image EF17 is displayed around the portion of the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd that overlaps. The operation of the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd is an operation of announcing that the display of the icon change notice will appear from the vicinity of the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd. The display gives a notice as to what color of the icon change notice display will appear. That is, the appearance of the icon change notice display itself is announced by the effect and the effect image EF17, the appearance position is indicated by the effect, and the display mode of the display that appears is notified by the effect image EF17.

It should be noted that the change in the display mode of the icon may be more likely to occur when the accessory is operated than when the accessory is not operated, but the likelihood of occurrence may not be changed. Further, the icon display mode may be configured to change easily in accordance with the number of the operated accessory, but the likelihood does not need to change.

In FIG. 157 (Fa3), the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd moves to the maximum advance position, and in FIG. 157 (Fa4), the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd that has moved to the maximum advance position returns toward the initial position. Have begun. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 157 (Fa2) to (Fa4), the display position of the effect image EF17 also changes in accordance with the movement operation of the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd. When the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd that has moved to the maximum advance position starts retreating toward the initial position, the display of the "red bomber" icon IHI as the display of the icon change notice begins to appear behind it. In this way, the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears, and after FIG. 157 (Fa5), an effect similar to that after FIG. 148 (A3-1) is executed,
The display mode of the variable icon may not change in some cases.

FIGS. 157(Fa2-2-1) to (Fa2-2-5) are diagrams showing an example in which the POV display 224I is used to give notice of the appearance of the icon change notice.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-1) during the variable display of the symbols, the POV display 224I that has been hidden in the initial position until now appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and before the rotation operation. It is the state of.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-2), on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I starts rotating operation, and when it reaches a constant speed rotation, the POV display 224I has a “red bomber” icon. The IHI is displayed, and the appearance of the "red bomber" icon IHI is announced.

In FIG. 157 (Fa2-2-3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon IHI of "red bomber" is still displayed, but "Red bomber" is displayed on the back side. The icon IHI of has appeared. When the "red bomber" icon IHI appears, the POV display 224I stops rotating (Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-4)) and returns to the initial position (Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-5)). In this way, the icon IHI of "red bomber" appears, and after Fig. 157 (Fa2-2-5), the same effect as that after Fig. 148 (A3-1) is executed, but the display mode of the variable icon is changed. May not change.

Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and in that display area. A performance display may be displayed. Further, the display area is more visible when the POV display 224I is in the accelerating state from the stationary state to the constant speed state or in the decelerating state from the constant speed state to the stationary state than in the constant speed state. It is easy, and the effect display may be performed in the display area even during acceleration or deceleration. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the accelerating state or the decelerating state. In the accelerating state and the decelerating state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is darkened so that the display of the POV display 224I is conspicuous. Good. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area in the state of accelerating, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The notes described here are also applicable to the following examples of the POV display 224I.

Moreover, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon IHI of the "red bomber" may be earlier than the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or earlier than the appearance timing of the icon. Or both may have the same timing.

Further, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the fourth display shown in FIG. 146). The means 208M′, etc.) may execute the above-mentioned notice of appearance or another notice.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of various notices relating to the display of the icon change notice.

FIG. 158 (Fb1) to FIG. 158 (Fb9) are diagrams illustrating an example in which the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is announced by using the accessory effect.

The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1), and the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. The state shown in FIG. 158 (Fb2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-2), the icon IHI of “red bomber” appears, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is started.

In FIG. 158 (Fb3), the character effect is started before the red bomber icon RBI fires the bullet icon BTI. The accessory production here is, with reference to FIG. 14 and the like, among the large-panel behavioral accessories located at the four corners of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the third large-board behavioral accessory located at the lower left. 224Gc and the fourth large-scale behavior accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right start advancing from their respective initial positions toward the position overlapping the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. This character effect is continued until just before the icon display mode is changed, but the function is as a notice until before the bullet icon BTI is fired. In this accessory production, the success rate of the change in the display mode of the icon is foretold according to how many large-panel behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Gd among the four large-board behavior auditors operate. That is, if all four work, there is a 100% chance of success, if three work, there is a 75% chance of success, if only two work, there is a 50% chance of success, and only one work. If not, it predicts that it will only succeed with a 25% chance.

It should be noted that, out of the four large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Gd, the success probability is highest when the first large-board behavior auditor 224Ga operates, and the next success probability is high when the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb operates. The third success probability 224Gd may have a third highest probability of success, and the fourth success behavior 224Ge may have a lowest probability of success. Alternatively, the probability of success can be announced in advance depending on the position from the initial position. For example, the success probability may increase as the position approaches the maximum advance position.

Further, when the accessory is operated, the icon display mode may be changed more easily than when the accessory is not operated, but the ease of occurrence may not be changed. Further, the icon display mode may be configured to change easily in accordance with the number of the operated accessory, but the likelihood does not need to change.

As shown in FIG. 158 (Fb8), the accessory production ends when the change in the display mode of the icon is completed.

FIG. 158 (Fc1) to FIG. 158 (Fc6) are diagrams showing an example of notifying advancement of the icon change notice display itself.

In FIG. 158 (Fc1), the icon IHI of the default color "Bomber" appears, and the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is started. Here, the notice production is started before the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" is temporarily stopped. Here, similarly to the effects shown in FIGS. 157 (Fa2-1) to (Fa4), the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd arranged at the lower right is the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the initial position. Starting to advance toward the overlapping position from the front side, and in accordance with the advance of the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L which is overlapped with the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd The effect image EF17 is displayed in the periphery. Here, the display mode of the effect image EF17 gives advance notice of the display mode in which the icon IHI of the default color "bomber" is promoted. Here, the red effect image EF17 is displayed, and in FIG. 158 (Fc5), it has been promoted to the “red bomber” icon IHI. 158 (Fc6) is followed by FIG. 152 (B6), the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

In this example, the operation of the fourth large-board behavior auditors object 224Gd is a kind of stirrup production regardless of the advance notice, but the promotion is more likely to occur when the auditors object operates than when it does not. It may have been done. However, the likelihood of occurrence does not have to change. Moreover, it may be configured such that promotion is likely to occur depending on the number of the operated accessory. That is, it may be configured such that the greater the number of the operated accessory is, the easier the promotion is. However, here too, the likelihood of occurrence does not have to change.

FIG. 158 (Fd1) to FIG. 158 (Fd6) are diagrams showing an example of the effect of changing the display mode of the icon using the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 158 (Fa1) during the variable display of the symbols, the POV display 224I that has been hidden at the initial position until now appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which is the state before the rotation operation. .. It should be noted that the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of special figure 1 are displayed, and these two hold icons h11, h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (first display mode).

In FIG. 158 (Fd2), on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I starts rotating operation, and when it reaches a constant speed rotation, the POV display 224I displays “Red bomber icon RBI and default. The first hold icon h11 in the display mode is displayed.The rotation range of the POV display 224I completely overlaps the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12. Partially overlap.

On the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3), a state in which the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, targeting the first hold icon h11. The POV display 224I shown in Fd4) shows that the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11 and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14.

Then, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd5-1) displays the red bomber icon RBI and the first hold icon h11 changed to the red display mode.

In this example, while the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side thereof may be visible or invisible. May be While the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the "red bomber" icon IHI and/or the effect image EF14 are displayed on the display screen portion behind the POV display 224I rotating at a constant speed. It may or may not be displayed.

In FIG. 158 (Fd6), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first hold icon h11 in a red display mode and the second default display mode h11. The hold icon h12 is displayed, and the "red bomber" icon IHI is not displayed. However, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be displayed.

The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change while the POV display 224I is performing a constant speed rotation operation, or may change at the same time when the POV display 224I stops the constant speed rotation operation. Alternatively, the POV display 224I may change after the constant speed rotation operation is stopped.

Although the example using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M shown in FIG. 146). ', etc.) to display the above. That is, a part of the scene displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be enlarged and displayed on the POV display 224I. For example, the display on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd2) is shown in FIG. -1) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene between the same figure (A3-1), and the display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 158 (Fd3) corresponds to the enlarged display of the scene shown in FIG. 148 (A3-1). It may be. In this case, the enlarged display is not limited to the POV display 224I, but includes the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146, the light guide plate IL, and the like. Alternatively, it may be used in combination with the POV display 224I. Further, such an enlarged display can be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, although the notice is about the display of the icon change notice, the notice can be applied to the appearance notice of the notice icon. For example, the probability that the notice icon will appear may be expressed depending on how many large-board behavior auditors out of the four large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Gd operate. Higher).

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and another display means.

The example shown in FIGS. 159(Fd5-2-1) to (Fd5-2-2) is a modification of the previous FIGS. 158(Fd5-1) to 158(Fd6). The display of the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1) is an icon change notice display (“red bomber icon IHI”) and a display showing the changed icon display mode. It does not show how the icon has changed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-1), it is slightly visible that the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image EF14.

In FIG. 159 (Fd5-2-2), the POV display 224I has stopped rotating, and the first decorative icon h11 in the default display mode and a red display are displayed on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second hold icon h12 of the aspect is displayed. In this example, the POV display 224I indicates that the target icon is unknown, but displays whether or not the change effect of the display form of the icon is successful. Then, when the POV display 224I displays the success of the effect of changing the icon display mode, the display mode of the target icon actually changes in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In addition, the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the POV display 224I and the display of the change of the display mode of the hold icon on the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be performed at the same time, and conversely, the first decorative pattern. The POV display 224I may be performed after the display device 208L is performed first.

Further, in this example, although the target icon is unknown by the POV display 224I, it can also be used as a notice of whether or not the effect of changing the display mode of the icon is successful.

Hereinafter, in FIG. 159, an example of an effect in the device configuration in which the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 are combined will be described, but as described in FIG. However, the technology described in this specification cannot be applied only because of the difference in the configuration, and the technical idea can be applied regardless of whether the display units are arranged side by side or vertically. Is.

159 (Fe1) to (Fe6) in FIG. 159, the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is completed only in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display on the fourth display means 208M' is the fourth display means. It is a figure which shows the example which is completed only in 208M'.

The state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 146 (k1a), except for the difference whether the background screen is displayed or not. The same is true. The state of the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 159 (Fe1) is the same as the state of the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG.

In the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-1), the tip part of the icon IHI of “red bomber” as the icon change notice display appears at the right end of the screen. On the fourth display means 208M′ shown, the icon change animation using the “red bomber” icon IHI is started. In the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 159 (Fe4), the red bullet icon BTI is fired from the red bomber icon RBI, and in the fourth display means 208M′ shown in (Fe5) thereof, the bullet The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. Then, in the fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 159 (Fe6), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 159 (Fe1) to (Fe6), variable display of decorative symbols is continuously performed.

159(Fe2-2-1) to FIG. 159(Fe2-2-6) are diagrams showing an example in which a part of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L enters the fourth display means 208M'.

159 (Fe2-2-1) is a continuation from FIG. 159 (Fe2-1), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (Fe2-2-1) of FIG. "Red bomber" icon IHI has appeared at the right end of the screen, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the same figure (Fe2-2-2), an icon using the "red bomber" icon IHI The change animation has started and a red bullet icon BTI has been fired from the red bomber icon RBI. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-3), the bullet icon BTI is the lower end region where the bullet icon BTI overlaps the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M′ at the initial position. It is difficult to see for a moment because it is displayed in. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-4), the bullet icon BTI has moved to the display screen of the fourth display means 208M′ at the initial position, and the fourth display means 208M. The tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed in ". It should be noted that the rear end portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, although it is not visible because it is overlapped with the upper edge portion of the frame fm in the fourth display means 208M′ at the initial position. .. However, it may not be displayed. In the fourth display unit 208M′ shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-5), the default display mode (first display) in which the tip portion of the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the pedestal hs0′ of the variable icon display area CIS′ (Aspect), the variable icon h0 partially overlaps. In this situation, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the bullet icon BTI is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. In the fourth display unit 208M' shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. On the other hand, the icon IHI of "red bomber" is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 159 (Fe2-2-6).

The variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is enlarged beyond the size of the display screen of the fourth display means 208M' and displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be done. Moreover, the icon IHI of "red bomber" may be displayed across both the fourth display means 208M' and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 148 (A1-1). However, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208N. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff1) are in the initial positions of each other and are in the open state (spaced state), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display screen of is visible.

The state shown in FIG. 160 (Ff2) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 148 (A2-1), and here, the icon of the “red bomber” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N as a notification of the icon change notice. IHI has begun to appear, and the entire icon IHI of “red bomber” is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 160 (Ff4), the red bomber icon RBI is moving to the left, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in the same figure (Ff4) is red. Instead of the bomber icon RBI moving leftward, the third decorative symbol display device 208N itself has started moving leftward ((Ff5) to Ff6 in the same figure). That is, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved in accordance with the original movement display of the red bomber icon RBI. Eventually, the third decorative symbol display device 208N reaches the maximum movement position and cannot move further leftward. Then, this time, as shown in FIG. 160 (Ff7), the red bomber icon RBI has moved into the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, The tip portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed, and the rear portion of the red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the red bomber icon RBI is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L on the back side, the entire red bomber icon RBI may be displayed.

In FIG. 160 (Ff8), the third decorative symbol display device 208N that has reached the maximum movement position has started moving toward the initial position, and about 2/3 of the red bomber icon RBI is the first decoration. The red bullet icon BTI is being fired from the red bomber icon RBI because it has been displayed on the symbol display device 208L and has reached the position before the target first hold icon h11. In FIG. 160 (Ff9), the bullet icon BTI overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. Further, the entire red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

In FIG. 160 (Ff10), the bullet icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF14. The red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In FIG. 160 (Ff11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the red display mode. Further, the red bomber icon RBI is about to fly further left from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 160 (Ff12), the red bomber icon RBI is the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Has disappeared from.

In the example described above, one image may be displayed across a plurality of display means, but the same image is not displayed on a plurality of display means. For example, a part of the same image is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but may be displayed.

Even when the icon unchanged animation is performed, a red bomber icon RBI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M from the third decorative symbol display device 208N through the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Animation may be performed, but when the icon unchanged animation is performed, the red bomber icon RBI may be configured to be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, It may be displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 160 (Fg), the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a plurality of icon change notices as a “bomber” icon IHI, a “red bomber” icon IHI, and a “gold bomber” icon IHI. Is displayed. These bombers may start moving animations all at once as in the example shown in FIG. 150 (A2-3-1), but they are only displayed in stock and the moving animations are displayed one by one. It may be executed.

It should be noted that the hold icon or the change icon itself may also serve as the icon change notice display. In this case, the change icon itself gives a notice of change, or another icon different from the change icon (hold icon or change icon) is displayed. (Icon) will be announced in advance.

In addition, the display of the icon change notice, the notice display that notifies that any one of the pending symbol variation displays is performed in the symbol variation display, or that it is currently performed in the symbol variation display (icon A change notice preparation display) may be performed. As the icon change notice preparing display, for example, only the tip part of the "Bomber" icon IHI is visible at the right end of the screen, or the "Bomber" icon IHI appears, and it waits in a dedicated stock area (standby area). You can see the display. Alternatively, the telop display trp shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-3) may be used for advance notice. In addition, a plurality of icon change notice preparing displays may be displayed. Further, when there are a plurality of types of icon change notice display, the icon change notice preparing display may be displayed for each display mode of the icon change notice display. Further, there may be a dedicated area for displaying the stock of the icon change notice preparation display. Further, at least a part (including the entire area) of the icon change notice preparing display may be displayed in a region overlapping with the icon change notice preparing display, or may be displayed in a non-overlapping region. ..

Also, as a notice of the change and/or a look-ahead notice before the notice of the change of the icon (the notice of the change of the icon due to another notice display such as the icon of "Bomber" or the notice of the change of the icon due to the changing icon itself) is displayed , “Icon whose display mode changes after the icon change notice (holding icon and/or variable icon)” changes to a display mode (for example, enlarged display mode) different from the display mode changed by the icon change notification By doing so, it may be announced that the icon will change according to the icon change notice, or the display form of the icon will change due to another display such as a cursor display on the "icon whose display form changes after the icon change notice". By displaying a display indicating that the icon is changed, it may be announced that the icon is changed by the icon change notification.

In addition, after an icon change notice (icon change notice due to other notice display such as "Bomber" icon or icon change notice due to changing icon itself) is displayed, it is notified that the change is a big hit. Execution of advance notice (preliminary display by various display devices such as liquid crystal display device, light emission (color and light emission pattern) by various lamps (frame lamp 122, panel lamp), advance notice sound by speaker, advance notice operation of operating means and various devices, etc.) In some cases, various notices described in this specification may be given. For example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may change in a state where the speaker 120 outputs the fluctuation big hit confirmation sound. Alternatively, the icon change animation may be displayed while the jackpot confirmation sound is being output. However, the various types of advance notice may not be given during the execution of the advance notice for notifying that the change is a big hit. Further, there may be various types of advance notices that are given only while the advance notice that the change is a big hit is being executed.

While various notices may not be given during execution of the island simultaneous production, they may be given in some cases. Further, there may be various notices that are given only while the island simultaneous production is being executed.

Further, depending on the effect background or effect mode, there may be various notices to be given and various notices not to be given. For example, on the background screen of the sea, an icon change notice (icon change notice due to other notice display such as "Bomber" icon or icon change notice due to changing icon itself) is displayed, but the background screen of the castle town Then, the display of the icon change notice may not be displayed. Further, the effect background may be selectable by the player, and in this case, it is also possible to select whether or not to display the icon change notice display.

As described above, the effect examples using the various icons and displays described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119, or icons and displays other than those icons and displays have been described, but at the end, the seven effect examples will be described. To do.

FIG. 161 is a diagram schematically showing seven example effects in which various icons and displays are used. In this FIG. 161, the manner in which the production is advanced is shown stepwise from left to right in the figure. Further, also in FIG. 161, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be the decorative symbol display device 208.

161(1) and FIG. 161(2) roughly show an example of the effect of the mini game B described with reference to FIG. 118.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161(1), the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons h11 and h12 of these special drawings 1 are all No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161(1), the mini game window MGW dedicated to the mini game is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game. A mini game B (rock-paper-scissors confrontation) is being held in Windu MGW. On the left side of the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of the character of Yoshimune is displayed. The icon of the Yoshimune character is No. 1, which is a kind of the hold icon or the variable icon shown in FIG. It is the same as the icon of “Janken” in 19 and the icon of the character of Yoshimune of aspect a is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(1). On the other hand, on the right side of the mini game Windu MGW, an icon of a swordsman character as an opponent shown in FIG. 118(c) is displayed. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(1), the icon of the swordsman character of aspect a is displayed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(1) has No. 1 shown in FIG. 161(a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune same as the icon of the mode c of 19 and the icon of the character of swordsman of the mode d shown in FIG. 118(c) are displayed. In other words, in this rock-paper-scissors confrontation, Yoshimune gave a choki and a swordsman gave a par, and the word "Yoshimune victory" is also displayed in the mini-game Windu MGW. The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(1) has No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(a). The icon of the character of Yoshimune that is the same as the icon of the mode f of 19 is displayed together with the character of "Victory of Yoshimune", and the icon of the character of Yoshimune is also displayed with a balloon with "Hold change". The display mode of the first hold icon h11 that was the display mode of No. of FIG. The display mode is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161(2), the mini game window MGW is not displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS, and the mini game B (rock-paper-scissors battle). Is performed on the left base icon bI1 arranged in the hold icon display area HIS. That is, the mini game B is played using the hold icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on each of the left side and the center of FIG. 161(2), the first hold icon h11 is the icon of the swordsman character as the opponent shown in FIG. 118(c), and the second The hold icon h12 indicates the No. shown in FIG. It is the icon of 19 "Janken".

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the swordsman character icon of aspect a, and the second hold icon h12 is the Yoshimune character of aspect a. It is displayed with the icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(2), the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the icon of the character of the swordsman of aspect d, and the second hold icon h12 is the character of Yoshimune of aspect c. It is displayed with the icon. In other words, in this rock-paper-scissors confrontation, the swordsman put out a par, and Yoshimune made a choki, which means Yoshimune won. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(2), the second hold icon h12 is displayed as the Yoshimune character icon of aspect f, and the Yoshimune character icon indicates “hold change”. A written balloon is also displayed. The first hold icon h11 next to it is the icon of a swordsman character until now, but the No. 1 icon in FIG. It has changed to the third display mode (blue display mode) described in 3. In the example shown in FIG. 161(2), the mini game B using the hold icon is played, and the display mode of the hold icon used for the mini game B is changed. That is, the hold icon displayed as the opponent icon becomes the prefetch target hold icon.

As explained above, there may be a case where the mini game is played with the hold icon as shown in FIG. 161(2) and a case where the mini game is played in another area as shown in FIG. 161(1). Further, the example here is an example of a mini game in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed, but it is also a mini game in which various notice icons shown in FIG. 117 can be acquired. Good.

161(3) and FIG. 161(4), No. 1 in FIG. A change example display BCH of 16 "bancho" roughly shows an example of an effect for giving a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 161 (3) and (4), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the change icon h0 is the change icon. It is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the display area CIS. Also, FIG.
In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of (3) and FIG. 4 (4), both the first hold icon h11 and the variable icon h0 are No. 1 in FIG. It is displayed in the default display mode described in 1. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(3) and FIG. 161(4), No16 of FIG. 119(b) is provided on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display BCH of the “bancho” of the mode a described in (1) is displayed. The change notice display BCH of the “bancho” here is provided with a balloon described as “change on hold” to notify that the display mode of the hold icon changes.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(3), the change notice display BCH of "bancho" disappears from above the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the third display mode. It changes to (blue display mode). The timing at which the "bancho" change notice display BCH disappears and the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be the same, or the "bancho" change notice display BCH disappears. It may be earlier, or conversely, the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be earlier.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(4), the change notice display BCH of "bancho" does not disappear from the right base icon bIr, and the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of "bancho". Has changed to a balloon that says "again", and it is announced that the display mode of the hold icon will change again. In addition, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the third display mode (blue display mode). It should be noted that the timing at which the balloon added to the change notice display BCH of "bancho" changes (the timing of the re-notification) and the timing at which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes may be the same. The timing of starting the advance notice may be earlier, or conversely, the timing of changing the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be earlier. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(4), the change notice display BCH of “bancho” disappears from the right base icon bIr, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the fourth display mode. It has changed to (green display mode). In this example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed twice in one symbol variable display, but the display mode of the hold icon is changed once in the symbol variable display. The display mode of the hold icon may change again. In addition, the display mode of the hold icon may change three times or more in one symbol variable display. Further, the "bancho" icon used as the change notice display BCH in FIG. 161(4) is not reused for re-notice but is used again, but until the notice target icon or display disappears (non The change notice display may be used multiple times until the display. For example, if the icon subject to advance notice is a hold icon, until the hold icon becomes a change icon, or until the change icon disappears, in other words, the pattern change display of the prefetch target change is started or the symbol The change notice display may be used and the display mode may be repeatedly changed until the variable display ends. Further, the icon or display subject to the notice may be the notice icon or the notice display, and the display mode of the notice icon or the notice display may be repeatedly changed until the notice icon or the notice display disappears. Further, even if the change notice display BCH is displayed, there may be a case in which none of the display modes of the hold icon and the variable icon changes. Further, even if the change notice display BCH of the “number” shown in the center of the symbol variable display 173(4) is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon may not change again. That is, the change notice display BCH of “bancho” does not have to be used again to change the icon to be noticed.

161(5) and FIG. 161(6) show No. 119 of FIG. 119(b). By the change notice display of the bomber system of 4 and 5, the example of the effect for giving a notice of the change of the display mode of the hold icon is roughly shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 161(5) and (6), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1, and the default display mode is changed. The icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(5), the first hold icon h11 is No. 1 of FIG. 119(a). It is displayed in the fourth display mode (green display mode) described in No. 4. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(5) has No. 119 of FIG. 119(b). The default color "Bomber" icon IHI described in 4 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the "Bomber" icon IHI has started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(5), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the fourth display mode (green display mode), and the fired bullet is fired. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(5), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. Since the change of the icon display mode by the default color "Bomber" icon IHI can be increased by only one stage, it cannot be changed to the fifth display mode icon unless it is the fourth display mode icon.

On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the left side of FIG. 161(6), the first hold icon h11 is the No. 1 of FIG. 119(a). It is displayed in the first display mode (default display mode) described in 1. Further, the No. 1 in FIG. 119(b) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The red "red bomber" icon IHI described in 5 has appeared, and the icon change animation using the "red bomber" icon IHI has started. Further, a tutorial display is displayed on the right base icon bIr arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. This tutorial display is a tutorial display about a change effect of the display mode of the icon using the change notice display, and may be displayed until the change effect is started, and may be hidden thereafter, or the bullet icon BTI is displayed. It may be displayed until it is fired, and then may be hidden, or may be kept displayed until the change of the display mode of the icon is completed or the change failure is confirmed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in the center of FIG. 161(6), the bullet icon BTI is fired toward the first hold icon h11 in the first display mode (default display mode), and the fired bullet is fired. The icon BTI hits the first hold icon h11, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown on the right side of FIG. 161(6), the first hold icon h11 changes to the fifth display mode (red display mode). There is. In the change of the icon display mode by the red (fifth display mode) "red bomber" icon IHI, regardless of the level of the icon display mode before the change, the icon should be changed to the fifth display mode. You can

In FIG. 161(7), a plate full tank error occurs in the state shown in FIG. 120(12), and an error message (warning message) such as “Please remove the ball” is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “error display EWM”). The error display EWM overlaps at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side and hides at least a part of the notice icon YI. Note that the error display EWM may overlap the entire notice icon YI from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part from the front side only after the advance notice icon YI is used (for example, the display of the mode d shown in FIG. 117A), or the advance notice icon may be displayed. Only before YI is used (for example, the display of the mode a shown in FIG. 117(a)), at least a part may overlap from the front side. Further, the error display EWM may overlap at least a part of the notice icon YI from the front side over the entire display period of the error display EWM, and a part of the period (for example, the error display EWM) may be displayed. The overlap may occur only during a certain period after the start).

On the contrary, the notice icon YI may overlap at least a part of the error display EWM from the front side (for example, when the error display EWM has a low degree of importance or has a low relationship with fraud). Alternatively, this may be limited to after the advance notice icon YI is used or before the advance notice icon YI is used. Also, although the example shown in FIG. 161 (7) relates to the notice icon, the relation to the notice display is the same as that described here.

161(8), in the state shown in FIG. 148(A2-1), a plate full tank error occurs, and the error display EWM such as "please remove the ball" is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. The error display EWM does not overlap the effect of changing the icon display mode. That is, the error display EWM is displayed at a position deviated from the display position of the icon (red bomber icon RBI, bullet icon BTI, etc.) used for effecting the change in the icon display mode. More specifically, the error display EWM is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the change notice display. Further, the error display EWM does not overlap with a mini game (for example, an icon or display of a character appearing in the mini game).

However, the error display EWM is at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the icon (for example, at least a part of the change notice display) or at least a part of the mini game (for example, the icon or display of the character appearing in the mini game. May be overlapped from the front side, and may be overlapped over the entire display period of the error display EWM. Part of the period (for example, start of the error display EWM) There may be a case where they overlap only during a certain period later).

Further, although FIG. 161 (7) and FIG. 161 (8) are examples of the error display EWM such as “please pull out the ball”, the display and warning about various errors described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116 are given. The same applies to the display regarding.

In the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 161, only one notice icon is displayed in the case of loss (in the case of gambling), and in the case of a big hit, the game is heaped up, It is configured to display a plurality of notice icons.

As described above, the description using FIGS. 117 to 161 can be combined with the simultaneous effect and the volume adjustment display (for example, the above-described volume display bar display VB) described with reference to FIG. 113 and the like. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 155, it can be combined with the scene of customization by the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI.

Further, in the description using FIGS. 117 to 161, the example is applied to a pachinko machine (ball game machine), but the game table of the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a medal or a game. It is also applicable to a spinning-game machine (slot machine) that uses balls (pachinko balls). That is, the pachinko machine 100 described above is a pachinko machine (1 type+1 type), but other pachinko machines (for example, 1, 2, 3, 3 types, 1+2 types, etc.) may be used. Parrot or ball) More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the reel is rotated by operating the start lever, the winning combination is internally determined by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. In addition, when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the symbol display window according to an internal decision, a winning combination is achieved, and when a winning combination is achieved, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning drum game machine (slot machine) in which a bonus is given to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed as enclosed balls, the enclosed balls are launched into the game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the fact that the enclosed balls are won in a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball type gaming table which is circulated and can be used by firing the enclosed ball that has won a prize in the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won a prize again to the game area.

As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game consoles, for example, an enclosed pachinko machine described with reference to FIG. Z101. Further, it can be applied to the slot machine described with reference to FIG.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N all, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N One or two, fourth display means 208M', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means in which the first icon may be displayed,
The first icon is an icon relating to symbol variable display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, variable icon h0],
The display means is a means in which the second icon may be displayed,
The display means is means for displaying a notice icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b)],
The second icon is an icon of a different type from the notice icon [for example, the icon for mini game A shown in FIG. 118(a), the icon for mini game B shown in FIG. 118(c)]. The icon is not an icon that shows the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The display means is a means in which a performance display may be displayed,
The effect display is an icon of any one of the displayed first icons [for example, one or a plurality (all or a part of icons)] and an effect display in which the second icon is used. [For example, display of mini game A or B],
When the notice icon is displayed after the effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (A11), FIG. 123 (A3-2-9), the same diagram (A3-2-8c1), Fig. (A 3-2-8c7), Fig. 125 (I 11), Fig. 127 (U 34), Fig. 128 (U 15-2-17), Fig. 130 (U 1-2-24), Fig. 135 (or a8) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the player by paying attention to the process of whether or not the notice icon is acquired, triggered by the display of the effect display using the two icons.

The first icon may be an icon that may be displayed in correspondence with the number of reservations. For example, it may be a variable icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds=0, a first holding icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds=1, and displayed corresponding to the number of holds=2 2nd second hold icon, 3rd 3rd hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold=3, 4th 4th hold icon displayed corresponding to the number of hold=4 It may be. Further, the notice icon may be an icon of a different type from the variable icon and the hold icon.

Here, the number of holdings is the number of the start of the variable display of symbols being held, and the first icon can be, for example, a changing icon in addition to the holding icon. The variation icon is an icon relating to a symbol variation display that is being executed, and is an icon that represents the completed hold. That is, after the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold represented by the hold icon representing the undigested hold is started, the hold icon is displayed as the variable icon corresponding to the started symbol change display.

It should be noted that depending on the number of the displayed first icons, the hold number may be displayed, and depending on the number of the notice icons displayed, the hold number may not be displayed.

The effect display may be an effect display using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon.

The notice icon may be displayed when the effect display is performed.

One of the icons may be one first icon or a plurality of first icons (for example, all or some of the displayed first icons).

The second icon may be a production icon (for example, a character icon), a hold icon, or a variable icon. More specifically, the icon for the effect may be an icon for notifying the start of the notice effect, may be an icon dedicated to the mini game, or may be an icon that doubles as a hold icon. However, it may be an icon that doubles as a variable icon.

An example of the effect display is an effect of a mini game using any one of the displayed first icons and the second icon. That is, the notice icon may be displayed as a result of the effect of the mini game using any one of the icons and the second icon.

The phrase "the notice icon may be displayed" means that the notice icon may not be displayed in some cases. Further, "the notice icon may not be displayed" may include that the notice icon may not be displayed and another display other than the notice icon may be displayed. It may not be included. This concept also applies to the following description.

Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed (stock) by changing the display position after the display is started, or may be continuously displayed (stock) without changing the display position. It may be. For example, the display means is provided with an appearance area in which the notice icon starts to be displayed and a stock area in which the notice icon is stocked, and the appearance area and the stock area are different areas (part of which overlaps each other). Good, but not all overlap). The stock area is a display area in which the notice icon is continuously displayed. The notice icon moves from the appearance area to the stock area, is used in the stock area, disappears in the stock area, and the display mode may change. Alternatively, it may go out of the stock area and disappear, or the display mode may change.

The effect display may be an effect (for example, a mini game) in which any one of the icons and the second icon is used at the same time, or any one of the icon and the second icon. An effect (for example, a mini game) in which one icon is used first and the other icon is used after that may be used.

Further, the notice icon may be always displayed or may be displayed by the display of the effect in which only one of the displayed first icons is used. .. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed or may be displayed by the display of the effect using only the second icon.

In addition, “a plurality of types of advance notice icons are prepared as the advance notice icon [for example, various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(a), various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b)],
The display means is a means that may display a notice display,
As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117(b)],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is the first advance notice [for example, No6. "Change notice"],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the second notice [for example, No. 17 Notice display of "reach"]
A certain notice icon [for example, No. If the "box" notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A33), FIG. 126 (I14-4-3)]. ,
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (yes 15), FIG. 126 (yes 14-2-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, which notice display is displayed until the certain notice icon is used (whether the first notice display is displayed or the second notice display is displayed). Since it is not known, it may be possible to draw attention until the certain notice icon is used. That is, the relationship between the notice icon and the notice display is not predetermined in advance, and the player cannot recognize which notice display is displayed only by looking at the type of the notice icon. You may continue to look at the notice icon with interest until the display is displayed.

Here, in the first place, it may be unclear that the notice display is displayed until the certain notice display is displayed. That is, the advance notice display may be displayed and the advance notice display may not be displayed, and it may be unclear which case it is. The fact that the notice display itself is unknown is, as a result, also unknown which type of notice display among the plurality of types of notice displays is displayed.

Further, as the notice icon, only one type of notice icon may be prepared. In this case, when the notice icon is used, a notice display of a plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed, and the notice display is displayed until the notice display is displayed. The fact itself may be unknown.

The display unit may be a unit capable of displaying, when the certain notice icon is used, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the certain notice icon used. That is, it is possible to have a mode in which, when the notice icon is displayed, it is possible to know which of the plurality of types of notice displays is displayed after the notice icon is used. In short, the relation between the notice icon and the notice display may be predetermined one-on-one.

In addition, “when a certain notice icon is used” means, for example, a case where the certain notice icon is used in a presentation, and more specifically, a display mode of the certain notice icon is It may be a case where it changes, or a case where the certain notice icon disappears (when it is hidden) (the same applies to the following).

Further, the advance notice display may be displayed (stock) with the display position changed after the display is started, or may continue to be displayed (stock) without changing the display position. May be.

It should be noted that when a certain notice icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is used, one type of notice display of the plurality of types of notice displays (hereinafter, referred to as “certain notice display”) is displayed. In some cases, it may be unclear which type of advance notice display among a plurality of types of advance notice displays is displayed until the certain advance notice display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where it is not announced that the first notice display will be displayed just by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be announced in advance. Alternatively, on the contrary, there may be a case where it is announced that the first notice display is displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display is displayed. It may be announced in advance.

Further, “When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may change [for example, in the case of FIG. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the first notice display may be a display that changes the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons. For example, the display mode of any one of the first icons is changed to the notification mode. In this case, the first notice display functions as a notice of the notice by the first icon.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to focus on the first icon even after the effect display is finished.

Here, "one of the displayed first icons" may be the first icon used for the effect display, or may be used for the effect display. It may not be the first icon. Further, any one of the icons may be a plurality of icons or one icon (for example, all or some of the displayed first icons).

Further, the first icon used for the effect display may be a display mode in which the effect display is being performed, or a display mode changed from the display mode in which the effect display is performed. .. For example, if the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is different from the display mode before the effect display is used, the effect display is performed. After that, the display mode may be returned to the previous display mode, the display mode may be the same display mode without returning to the previous display mode, or the display mode in which the effect display is performed may be different. The display mode may change. Further, when the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display is the same as the display mode before the effect display is used, the effect display is performed. After that, the display mode may change, or the display mode may remain the same without changing. In any of the cases described above, when the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of the first icon used for the effect display may change.

When the first notice display is displayed, the display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may be changed without fail, or the displayed first icon may be changed. The display mode of any of the icons may not change. Further, the display mode of any one of the first icons being displayed is better when the first notice display is displayed than when the first notice display is not displayed. It may be easy to change.

Further, the effect display includes a plurality of kinds of effect display, and the effect display of any one of the first icons displayed is different from the effect display of a type that changes the display mode of the icon. The effect display of the type that does not change the display mode may have a higher application frequency, on the contrary, a lower application frequency, or both appearance frequencies may be the same. Furthermore, one kind of effect display of the plurality of kinds of effect display is the first effect display, and the case where the first effect display is displayed more than the case where the first effect display is not displayed. The display mode of any one of the displayed first icons may be changed more easily.

In addition, “the second notice display is a display for giving a notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed [for example, a notice that the reach is performed],
The symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, even if the second notice display is displayed, it does not always mean that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed, and even in the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed, the final There may be a case in which the symbol aspect of the loss is fixedly displayed. On the contrary, if the second notice display (for example, a premiere notice) is displayed, the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is finally surely confirmed and displayed as the jackpot pattern mode. May be.

The display unit is a unit that may display a third notice display, and the third notice display is a display for giving a prefetch notice (for example, a chance eye prefetch notice). It may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern when the third notice display is displayed than when the third notice display is not displayed. That is, even if the third notice display is displayed, it does not always mean that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed, and even in the symbol variation display in which the third notice display is displayed, the final There may be a case in which the symbol aspect of the loss is fixedly displayed. On the contrary, if the third notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display in which the third notice display is displayed may finally always definitely display the jackpot pattern mode.

In addition, “the first icon has a plurality of types of display modes [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 1-No. 19 types of display modes], an icon which is started to be displayed in one type of display modes,
One type of display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [eg, "default" display mode],
One type of display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode of "murajin" (janken), a display mode of Yoshimune (bow)],
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The first display mode may be a default display mode. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode used for the effect display. For example, it may be a display mode that may be used for the effect display or a dedicated display mode used for the effect display.

In addition, “the effect display is the first icon in the second display mode being displayed [for example, a hold icon or a variable icon in a display mode of “murajin” (janken), a display mode of Yoshimune (bow) Display of effect using [hold icon or variable icon] and the second icon [for example, panda opponent icon TI, icon AI for mini game A] [for example, start from FIG. 125 (8-1)) Janken Showdown Animation, Display of Yoshimune Treasure Acquisition shown in FIGS. 126 to 127]
The effect display is an effect display in which the first icon of the first display mode is not used,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "by displaying the first icon of the second display mode, it is foretold that the effect display will be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that just because it is announced that the effect display will be displayed does not mean that the notification icon is displayed during and/or after the effect display is displayed. That is, merely displaying the first icon in the second display mode does not give a notice until the notice icon is displayed during and/or after the production display is displayed.

Moreover, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display is displayed, and when the first icon is displayed in the first display mode, the effect display is displayed. However, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the advance notice icon is not notified only by displaying the first icon in the first display mode.

Here, when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode, the effect display may be always displayed, or conversely, the effect display may not be displayed.

It may be unclear whether or not the notice icon will be displayed thereafter, depending only on the display of the first icon in the second display mode.

The second icon may be displayed only when the first icon is displayed in the second display mode.

Here, the first icon and the second icon displayed in the second display mode may be simultaneously displayed, or the first icon displayed in the second display mode. May be displayed first, or the second icon may be displayed first.

The second icon may be displayed even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed. Further, if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may not be displayed. Alternatively, even if the first icon displayed in the second display mode is not displayed, the second icon may be displayed.

The second icon may be always displayed only when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed. Furthermore, when the first icon displayed in the second display mode is displayed, the second icon may also be displayed without fail.

Further, the second icon may or may not be displayed in a state where the first icon is not displayed. That is, the second icon does not have to appear as a single body, or conversely may appear as a single body.

In addition, “the display of the second icon may be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode [for example, an opponent started from FIG. 120 (A5)] Appearance animation of icon, Appearance animation of icon for mini game A started from FIG. 126 (5)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The “second icon” here is neither the hold icon nor the icon that also serves as the hold icon, the variable icon, or the icon that also serves as the variable icon. That is, the “second icon” may be a display mode used for the effect display (hereinafter referred to as “display mode for effect display”).

The display of the second icon may not be started after the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Even in the case where "display of the second icon is not started" here, the display of the second icon is started before the first icon is displayed in the second display mode. Or the first icon may be displayed at the same time as being displayed in the second display mode.

The second icon may be displayed without fail when the display mode of the first icon changes (for example, when the display mode changes to the second display mode). Alternatively, the first icon in the second display mode may be displayed after the second icon is displayed.

When the second icon is the variable icon or the hold icon (including the case of also serving as the variable icon or the hold icon), the second icon is displayed after the first icon of the second display mode is displayed. The second icon may change from the third display mode (for example, the default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, the display mode for effect display), or it may be changed. Good. Further, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is changed from the third display mode (for example, default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, performance display). Display form) may change or may always change. Alternatively, at the same time that the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, the second icon is changed from the third display mode (for example, default display mode) to the fourth display mode (for example, performance display). Display form) may change or may always change.

The timing at which the second icon is displayed is one pattern (for example, the first icon in the second display mode is displayed only after the first icon in the second display mode is displayed. There may be only before, or only at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed), or a plurality of patterns (for example, the first icon of the second display mode is displayed). A certain fixed combination of 2 or 3 after, before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, and at the same time when the first icon of the second display mode is displayed) It may be.

The second icon may be displayed before the first icon of the second display mode is displayed, or the first icon of the second display mode may be displayed. After that, the second icon may be displayed, or the second icon may be displayed at the same time when the first icon in the second display mode is displayed.

In addition, “There may be a case where a plurality of the first icons in the second display mode are displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (A3-1), FIG. 126 (U3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

There may be a case where only one of the first icons in the second display mode is displayed. In addition, a plurality of the first icons in the first display mode may be displayed, or only one may be displayed. Further, only one second icon may be displayed, or a plurality of second icons may be displayed.

Also, as the effect display, the first effect display may be displayed,
As the effect display, a second effect display may be displayed,
After the first effect display is displayed, the notice icon is displayed [for example, FIG. 120 (11)],
The notice icon is not displayed after the second effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A8-2-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

That is, the second effect display is a so-called false effect display.

In addition, “a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (I11), FIG. 128 (U15-2-17)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

For example, a plurality of notice icons may be displayed after the effect display is displayed once or a plurality of times. That is, there may be cases where a plurality of notice icons are stocked. For example, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed when the effect display is performed only once, or 0 or 1 notice icon is displayed each time the effect display is performed. A plurality of notice icons may be displayed by performing the effect display a plurality of times. Further, the notice icon may be displayed (stock) by an effect other than the effect display.

In addition, it may be easier to finalize and display the jackpot pattern mode finally when the second number of the notice icons is displayed than when the first number of the notice icons are displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Even when the second number of the notice icons are displayed, there may be a case where the symbol pattern of the final loss is finally confirmed and displayed. Alternatively, when the second number of the notice icons are displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed.

Even if the advance notice icon is displayed in the second advance notice mode rather than the advance notice icon is displayed in the first advance notice mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be more easily finalized and displayed. Good.

In addition, “operation means operable by the player [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.] is provided,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the effect display, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow of FIG. 120 (a9-1) and subsequent steps following FIG. 134 (c7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The notice icon may be displayed even if the operation unit is not operated, or conversely, the notice icon may be displayed only when the operation unit is operated.

During the display of the effect display, there may be a case where the operation means can be operated and a case where the operation means cannot be operated. When the operation means can be operated, the advance notice icon may be displayed more easily, or the opposite case. In addition, the notice icon may not be displayed easily. Further, the probability that the notice icon is displayed may be the same when it is possible and when it is not.

During the display of the effect display, a display (hereinafter, referred to as “operation display”) related to the operation unit may be displayed or may not be displayed. The operation display referred to here may be a display including an image simulating the operation means, may be a display of only the image, or a display prompting the operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). May be included in the display, may be only the operation promotion display, or may be a display including a display indicating the operation effective period of the operation means (operation effective period display), or the operation Only the valid period may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display modes of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include mode changes of the operation means itself (for example, color changes, protrusion amount changes, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

In addition, it is equipped with "production moving means [for example, FIG. 146 (C1)],
It is configured such that the effect moving means may perform an effect operation after the effect display is started [for example, the mini game exclusive accessory 225 shown in FIG. 146 (c2)].
When the effect operation is performed, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, FIG. 146 (c2)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The effect movable means may be configured to perform an effect operation after the effect display is displayed. That is, it may be configured such that the production movable means may perform a production operation after the display of the production display is finished. Alternatively, the production movable means may be configured to perform a production operation while the production display is being displayed.

When the effect operation is performed, the notice icon may be displayed more easily than when the effect operation is not performed, but the notice icon may not be displayed even when the effect operation is performed. Good. Alternatively, the notice icon may be displayed without fail when the effect operation is performed.

When the effect operation is performed, a pre-reading notice may be started, or a normal notice (a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed when the effect action is performed) may be started. It may be. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the pre-reading notice may be started more easily than when the effect operation is not performed. However, when the pre-reading notice is not started even when the effect operation is performed, There may be Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the look-ahead notice may be displayed without fail. Further, when the effect operation is performed, the normal announcement may be easier to start than when the effect operation is not performed, but when the effect operation is performed, the normal announcement is not started. There may be Alternatively, when the effect operation is performed, the normal notice may be displayed without fail.

However, during the display of the effect display, the effect moving means may never perform the effect operation, or the effect moving means may perform the effect operation irrespective of the display of the effect display. It may be done.

In addition, "the notice icon is one of a plurality of notice modes [eg, "box", "red box", "gold box", and "rainbow box" shown in FIG. 117(a)]. It is an icon that starts with
The notice icon displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] is more likely to be displayed than the notice icon displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display which is executed when the notice icon is used, the jackpot symbol aspect may be finally fixed and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117(a)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When the advance notice icon is used before the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “prediction subject change”) that is the subject of advance notice by the advance notice icon is started, the advance notice by the advance notice icon is a prefetch advance notice. In some cases, the notice may be a normal notice, but it may be unclear whether the notice was a look-ahead notice or a normal notice only by looking at the notice by the notice icon.

The notice icon may be used in the production by the end of the change of the notice subject. Also in this case, the notice by the notice icon may be used as the prefetch notice or the normal notice.

The advance notice icon may be displayed more easily in the first advance notice mode than in the second advance notice mode. In some cases, a certain display (display different from the notice display) may be easily displayed.

In addition, "the display means is a means in which a variable icon [for example, a variable icon h0] may be displayed,
The fluctuation icon is an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed,
The second icon is an icon different from the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first icon is the variable icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The first icon may be an icon dedicated to the variable icon, or may be an icon that also serves as the variable icon.

In addition, “the display means is a means that may display a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 of Tokushu 1],
The hold icon is an icon that represents the number of hold by the number displayed,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, "the first icon is the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N all, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N One or two, fourth display means 208M', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,
The hold icon is an icon displayed in correspondence with the number of holds [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 in Toku-zu 1],
The display means is a means in which a notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon is an icon of a different type from the hold icon [for example, various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(a), various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b)], and the display means is , A notice display [eg notice display YH] may be displayed,
As the notice display, a plurality of types of notice displays are prepared [for example, various notice displays YH shown in FIG. 117(b)],
When the advance notice icon is used, one type of advance notice display among the plurality of types of advance notice displays may be displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (a 32), FIG. 130 (e 13), FIG. 131 (e 1-2-18), FIG. 136 (a8-1), FIG. 136 (a8-2-1), FIG. 138 (a1-3-3), FIG. 139 (aa15), the same figure. (A28) etc.],
When the notice icon is used, the notice icon may be hidden [for example, FIG. 121 (A35), FIG. 131 (E15), FIG. 131 (E1-2-20), etc.],
Even if the notice icon is used, the notice icon may not be hidden, and the notice icon may be used again in the presentation, and a certain notice display of the plurality of types of notice displays may be displayed [eg, 136 (A11), FIG. 136 (A16), FIG. 136 (A8-2-4), FIG. 136 (A8-2-6), FIG. 138 (A1-3-9), and FIG. (A28) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to this gaming table, even after the notice icon is used, the display state of the notice icon can be paid attention to, which may entertain the player.

The “when the notice icon is used” means, for example, a case where the notice icon is used in the presentation, and more specifically, when the display mode of the notice icon is changed. It may be the case where the notice icon disappears (is hidden) (the same applies below).

If the notice icon is used once, the notice icon may be hidden, and even if the notice icon is used once, the notice icon is not hidden and the notice icon is rendered again. It may be used and a certain notice display may be displayed.

In addition, “a plurality of types of advance notice icons are prepared as the advance notice icon [for example, various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(a), various advance notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b)],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is the first advance notice [for example, No6. "Change notice"],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the second notice [for example, No. 17 Notice display of "reach"]
A certain notice icon [for example, No. When the "box" notice icon YI] is used, the first notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 136 (a8-1), FIG. 138 (a1-3-3). ), FIG. 139 (a15), the same figure (a28), etc.],
When the certain notice icon is used, the second notice display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 136 (a11) or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, before the advance notice icon is used, the fact that the advance notice display is displayed may not be given a advance notice.

Further, it may be configured such that, before the advance notice icon is used, no advance notice is given as to which type of advance notice display among the plurality of types of advance notice displays is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where it is not announced that the first notice display will be displayed just by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may not be announced in advance. Alternatively, on the contrary, there may be a case where it is announced that the first notice display is displayed only by displaying the certain notice icon, or the second notice display is displayed. It may be announced in advance.

Further, it is configured such that, when a certain type of advance notice icon among the plurality of types of advance notice icons is used, a type of advance notice display associated with the certain type of advance notice icon is displayed [ For example, the various notice icons YI shown in FIG. 117(b) are associated with the various notice displays shown in FIG. 117(b) in a one-to-one relationship],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The plurality of types of notice display and the plurality of types of notice icons may be associated with each other.

The plurality of types of advance notice display and the plurality of types of advance notice icons are associated with each other on a type-by-type basis, may be associated one-to-one, or may be associated one-to-many. May be provided, or they may be associated in a many-to-many manner.

In addition, “the certain type of notice icon is not hidden even if it is used once, and the certain type of notice icon is used multiple times until the certain type of notice icon is hidden. A type of advance notice display associated with a type of advance notice icon is displayed multiple times [for example, FIG. 139 (a15) and (a28), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second notice display is a display for giving a notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed [for example, a notice that the reach is performed],
The symbol variation display in which the second notice display is displayed is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the second notice display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the type of notice display displayed when the notice icon is first used [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 117(b)]. The type of the notice display displayed when the notice icon YH of "27" is used for the Nth time (N is a natural number of 2 or more) [for example, the third time] is used. [For example, FIG. 136 (a8-2-2) and the same figure (a8-2-6)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

However, they may be different, and different types of notice displays may be displayed without fail. Alternatively, on the contrary, it may be the same.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,
The operation display is a display including at least an image simulating the operation means [for example, an operation promotion notification image including a button image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT].
When the notice icon is used [for example, FIG. 140 (b4)], the operation display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 140 (b5)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,
The operation display is a display [for example, a display of an operation promotion notification image] including at least an image simulating the operation means [for example, a button image 136a],
The advance notice icon may be used after the operation display is displayed [for example, FIG. 121 (A 31-2-2), FIG. 143 (D a2)] [For example, FIG. -6), FIG. 143 (a7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The operation display may be a display of only an image imitating the operation means, or may be a display including a display for prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “operation promotion display”). The display may include a display indicating the operation valid period of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “operation valid period display”), the image and the operation promotion display only, or the image. Alternatively, only the operation valid period may be displayed. Further, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display modes of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include mode changes of the operation means itself (for example, color changes, protrusion amount changes, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
When the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 121 (A 31-2-5), FIG. 143 (D a5)], the advance notice icon may be used [For example, FIG. 121 (A 31-2-6). ), FIG. 143 (a7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
When the operation means is operated, a notice icon may be displayed [for example, the flow of FIG. 120 (a9-1) and subsequent steps following FIG. 134 (c7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the production movable means [for example, the family crest part 224E and the thousand box part 224H shown in FIG. 14 and the like]
Equipped with
When the notice icon is used, as the notice display, a display for giving a notice that the effect moving means performs the effect operation [for example, No. shown in FIG. 117(b)]. No. 24, “Thousand Box Operation”. 25, "Crest monument operation"] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The display for announcing that the effect moving means performs the effect operation is referred to as an effect operation notice display.

In addition, “a plurality of notice icons may be displayed [for example, FIG. 125 (I11), FIG. 128 (U15-2-17)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, it may be easier to finalize and display the jackpot pattern mode finally when the second number of the notice icons is displayed than when the first number of the notice icons are displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the notice icon is one of a plurality of notice modes [eg, "box", "red box", "gold box", and "rainbow box" shown in FIG. 117(a)]. It is an icon that starts with
The notice icon displayed in the second notice mode [for example, "red box"] is more likely to be displayed than the notice icon displayed in the first notice mode [for example, "box"]. In the symbol variation display which is executed when the notice icon is used, the jackpot symbol aspect may be finally fixed and displayed [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 117(a)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N all, or any one of these three decorative symbol display devices 208L-N One or two, fourth display means 208M', light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,
The holding icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holdings [for example, the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 of Toku-zu 1],
The hold icon is displayed in the first icon display mode [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(a)]. No. 1 "default" icon display mode, or No. No. 2 shown in FIG. 151 (A1-2-3) or the No. 2 shown in FIG. 119(a). 10 “Timer” display mode], which is an icon that may be displayed.
The hold icon is a second icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(a)]. 5 "red" icon display mode],
The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode [for example, the reliability shown in FIG. 119(a)],
The display means is a means for displaying a change notice display [for example, display of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119(b)],
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the mode of any one of the hold icons being displayed,
The change notice display is the first change notice mode [for example, No. shown in FIG. 119(b). 4 "Bomber" icon mode].
The change notice display is a second change notice mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b)]. 5 "Red bomber icon mode"],
The change notice display in the first change notice mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first change notice display”) [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b)]. The first change animation may be performed after the "Bomber icon IHI of 4" is displayed,
When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode. In some cases, for example, the display mode may be changed to a blue display mode other than the red display mode like the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149(A3′-2-4). ), it may be changed to a red display mode],
The change notice display of the second change notice mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second change notice display”) [eg, No. 1 shown in FIG. 119(b)]. The first change animation may be performed after the “Red bomber icon IHI of 5” is displayed,
When the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the displayed hold icons is changed to the second icon display mode. [For example, FIG. 148 (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), and FIG. (A3-2-4), FIG. 152 (B8), FIG. 155 (Ea2-2-5), FIG. 158 (Fd6), FIG. 159 (Fe6), and FIG. 160 (Ff11). Be sure to change],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

A fourth change animation that uses the change notice display may be performed, and the fourth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and/or the aspect of the notice icon. A fifth change animation using the change notice display may be performed, and the fifth change animation may be an animation that changes the type and/or mode of the notice display.

When the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the hold icons displayed is an icon other than the second icon display mode. The display mode (for example, one of the third to fifth icon display modes described later, or the sixth icon display mode) may be changed.

The m-th change animation using the n-th change notice display is the m-th change animation based on the n-th change notice display, and the n-th change notice display appears. It is a change animation of m (n and m are both natural numbers of 1 or more, and the same applies below).

As the change notice display, a plurality of types of change notice displays are prepared, and one kind of the change notice displays of the plurality of types of change notice displays is the first change notice display. One type of the change notice display among the change notice displays is the second change notice display. The first change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice manner, or may be displayed in the second change notice manner. Alternatively, the second change notice display may be displayed in the first change notice mode or may be displayed in the second change notice mode. Furthermore, the first change animation may be executed more easily when the first change notice display is displayed than when the second change notice display is displayed.

Note that, here, the first change animation changes the mode of any of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons, but the change notice display indicates the mode of any of the hold icons. May be interpreted as changing.

Any one of the hold icons may be a plurality of hold icons or may be one hold icon, for example, all or some of the displayed hold icons, Good (the same applies below).

The mode before the change of any of the holding icons may be the first icon display mode, the third icon display mode, or the like. That is, the mode when the display of the change notice display is started in any of the hold icons is not limited to the default mode.

Also,
"A game table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means that may display a hold icon,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first icon display mode,
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second icon display mode,
The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode,
The display means is a means that may display a change notice display,
The first change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The first change animation is an animation that changes the mode of any of the held icons among the displayed held icons,
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the first change notice manner,
The change notice display is a display that may be displayed in the second change notice mode,
The change preview display displayed in the second change preview mode is used rather than the first change animation displayed in the first change preview mode. The first change animation is easier to change the mode of any of the held icons among the displayed held icons to the second icon display mode,
A game table characterized by that. "
May be

According to this gaming table, it is possible to infer what kind of mode (here, the second icon display mode) the mode of the hold icon may be changed by the mode of the change notice display, Sometimes it can entertain the player. For example, the mode of the change notice display is related to the mode after the change of the hold icon, and if the mode of the change notice display is a red mode (here, the second change notice mode), the hold It can be inferred that the mode after the change of the icon may also be the red mode (here, the second icon display mode).

In the first change animation in which the change advance notice display displayed in the second change advance notice mode is used, one of the hold icon modes among the displayed hold icons is There may be a case where it is changed to a mode other than the first icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, the sixth icon display mode, etc.), and rather than changing to the sixth icon display mode. May be easily changed to the second icon display mode.

In the first change animation using the change notice display displayed in the second change notice mode, one of the hold icon modes among the displayed hold icons is set to the first change animation mode. There may be a case where it is changed to a mode other than the icon display mode and the second icon display mode (for example, the seventh icon display mode). This seventh icon display mode may be a mode of confirming the big hit (premier mode). That is, in the first change animation in which the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode is used, the mode of any one of the holding icons is a pre-reading notice mode but a big hit confirmation. Although it is easy to change to a mode (for example, the second icon display mode) that is not so long, in the first change animation using the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode, the big hit is confirmed. May be changed to the mode (premier mode). It should be noted that the jackpot confirmation mode (premier mode) may be always changed. Further, although the seventh icon display mode is not originally a mode for confirming a big hit, it may be treated as a form for confirming a big hit. In this case, the look-ahead notice is inconsistent with the normal time, and the contradiction becomes a premier and a big hit.

The second icon display mode may be different from the first icon display mode. The first icon display mode may be a default mode. The default mode is the mode most frequently displayed. The second icon display mode may be a look-ahead notice mode. Further, the first change animation is easier to be executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than when it is displayed in the first change notice mode. Good.

In addition, “the hold icon is a third icon display mode [for example, No. 1 shown in FIG. The display mode of the "blue" icon of 3]],
The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode [eg, reliability shown in FIG. 119(a)],
By displaying the first change notice display, if the first change animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of any of the hold icons among the hold icons is changed. It may be changed to the third icon display mode [for example, changed to a blue display mode (third display mode) like the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149 (A3′-2-4). May occur],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The third icon display mode may also be a look-ahead notice mode.

The symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the third icon display mode is finally more than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first icon display mode. The jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed.

The first change animation in which the first change advance notice display is used is one of the hold icons being displayed, and the third icon rather than the second icon display mode. The display mode may be easily changed. The probability of changing to the second icon display mode may be 0%.

In addition, "even if the first change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of all the hold icons displayed is not changed to the third icon display mode [for example, FIG. 148 (A6), FIG. 148 (A4-2-3), FIG. 148 (A2-2-4), FIG. 149 (A3-5-4), FIG. 149 (A3-7-7), and FIG. 150 (A3-2). -4), FIG. 152(B8), FIG. 155(Ea2-2-5), FIG. 156(Eb8), FIG. 158(Fd6), FIG. 159(Fe6), and FIG. 160(Ff11). There is no hold icon that has been changed in mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, there is a case where a first non-changing animation [for example, the icon non-changing animation] using the change notice display is performed.
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the first non-changing animation using the first change notice display is performed, the modes of all the held icons displayed do not change. [For example],
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, if the first non-changing animation using the second change notice display is performed, the modes of all the hold icons displayed do not change [ For example, as shown in FIG. 149 (A3-3-3) and FIG. 149 (A3-4-4), the display modes of all the hold icons do not change],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “In the first invariant animation, a scene in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons fails to be changed by the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 149 ( A3-3-2) to the same figure (A3-3-3) scene, and FIG. 149 (A3-4-2) to the same figure (A3-4-4) scene] are included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "A third change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation [e.g., FIG. 149(A3-4-1) to FIG. 149(A3-4-2)] halfway. 149 (A3-5-1) to the same figure (A3-5-2)],
The third change animation is a scene that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any of the displayed hold icons by the second change notice display [eg, FIG. 149]. (A3-5-3) to the scene of (A3-5-4) in the figure] are included in the animation.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “In the first change animation, a scene in which any one of the displayed hold icons has been successfully changed by the second change notice display [eg, FIG. 148 (A4 -1) to the scene (A5) in the figure] are included.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

here,
"There may be a first non-changing animation that uses the change notice display,
The change notice display is a display composed of a plurality of change notice icons,
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a first change notice icon,
One of the plurality of change notice icons is a second change notice icon,
The first non-changing animation includes a scene (hereinafter, referred to as “first scene”) in which changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons has failed. Is an animation
The first scene is a scene that has failed using the second change notice icon,
The first change animation includes a scene (hereinafter, referred to as a "second scene") in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons has been successfully changed. Animation,
The second scene is a successful scene using the second change notice icon.
A game table characterized by that. "
May be

In the first change animation, either one of the first scene using the first change notice icon and the second scene using the first change notice icon is displayed. It is an animation that may be displayed, the first immutable animation is also an animation that may be displayed in any one of the first scene and the second scene, The successful scene may be displayed more easily when the second scene is displayed than when the first scene is displayed. Alternatively, the ease of displaying the successful scene may not be different between the two cases.

In addition, the first change animation is an animation in which a second scene using the first change notice icon may be displayed, and the first change animation is the first change notice. The first non-change animation is an animation in which the first scene using the icon is never displayed, and the first non-change animation is the animation in which the first scene may be displayed. The change animation is an animation in which the second scene is not displayed, and when the second scene is displayed,
The successful scene may be displayed without fail, and the failed scene may be displayed with the first scene displayed.

Further, the first change animation is one of a first scene in which the first change notice icon is used and a second scene in which the first change notice icon is used. Is an animation in which the scene may be displayed, the first invariant animation is an animation in which the first scene may be displayed, and the first invariant animation is the second When the second scene is displayed, the successful scene is always displayed, and even when the first scene is displayed, the failed scene is always displayed. It may be in a mode not necessarily displayed.

There may be only one scene using the first change notice icon for the hold icon displayed at a certain position.

Also,
"A third change animation using the change notice display may be performed,
The third change animation is the same animation as the first non-change animation until the middle,
The third change animation is a scene (hereinafter, referred to as a “third scene”) that finally succeeds in changing the mode of any one of the displayed hold icons. The included animation,
The third scene is a scene that finally succeeded using the second change notice icon,
A game table characterized by that. "
May be

The third change animation is an animation that makes the change of the mode of the hold icon unsuccessful and succeeds. The third change animation has a lower appearance frequency than the first change animation. However, on the contrary, it may be higher or the same.

Corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the first change animation, rather than the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon changed to the second icon display mode by the third change animation There may be cases where the symbol variation display is more likely to be finalized and the final big hit symbol aspect is displayed (the reliability of the big hit (the degree of expectation) is higher), or conversely, the big jackpot symbol aspect is finally finalized. It may be difficult to be displayed (the reliability (expectation) of the big hit is low), or both may have the same reliability (expectation) of the big hit.

In addition, “the first change notice display used the second change notice display rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has been changed by the first change animation using the first change notice display. In some cases, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode is changed by the change animation may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed as the jackpot pattern mode. , The first change animation that uses the first change notice display changes to the third display mode (the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 149 (A3′2-4)), but the second change notice display In the first change animation in which is used, the display state changes to the fifth display mode (the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 149(A7)), so the reliability shown in FIG. 119(a)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first change notice display may change to the second change notice display [for example, FIG. 152(B4) to FIG. 152(B5), FIG. 152(B3-2-1) to FIG. Figure (B3-2-5), Figure 152 (B3-3-3) to Figure (B3-3-5), Figure 153 (B1-2-5) to Figure (B1-2-9), and Figure 153(B1-3-6) to FIG. 154(B1-3-9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mode of the change notice display started to be displayed in the first change notice mode may change to the second change notice mode, or the change changed to the first change notice mode. There may be a case where the mode of the notice display further changes to the second change notice mode. Further, in the first change animation, there may be a case where the second change notice mode is changed, and before the first change animation is started, the second change notice mode is changed. May change to the second change notice mode, or may change to the second change notice mode after the first change animation ends.

It should be noted that the change notice display mode displayed in the first change notice mode does not change and remains displayed in the first change notice mode, as compared with the frequency when the change notice display mode changes to the second change notice mode. In this case, the frequency may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of this frequency may be reversed, or both frequencies may be the same.

The mode of the change notification display displayed in the first change notification mode may be configured not to change to another mode.

Even if the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode does not change to the first change notice mode, or conversely, it may change. Good.

Even if the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode (for example, red mode) is changed to the third change notice mode (for example, gold mode or rainbow mode) Good. Also, the change notice display mode displayed in the second change notice mode does not change and remains displayed in the second change notice mode, as compared with the frequency when the change notice display mode changes to the third change notice mode. In this case, the frequency may be configured to be higher, but the relationship of this frequency may be reversed, or both frequencies may be the same.

Compared to the case where the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode from the beginning, the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. The first change animation for changing any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be easily executed. Alternatively, on the contrary, the change notice display is displayed from the beginning in the second change notice mode more than when the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode. In this case, the first change animation for changing any of the displayed hold icons to the second icon display mode may be more easily executed. Furthermore, in both cases, there is no difference in the execution probability of the first change animation that changes any of the hold icons to the second icon display mode, and the execution probabilities may be the same.

The first change notice than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose form has been changed by the first change animation using the change notice display which is displayed in the second change notice form from the beginning The pattern variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose mode has been changed by the first change animation in which the change notification display changed from the mode to the second change notification mode is finally used is the jackpot pattern mode. There is a case where it is easy to be confirmed and displayed (the reliability of the big hit (the degree of expectation) is high), or conversely, it is difficult to finally display the big hit pattern mode (the reliability of the big hit (the degree of expectation) is low). ), and the reliability (expectation) of the big hit may be the same in both cases.

Also, "the display means is a means in which a variable icon may be displayed,
The variable icon is an icon [for example, a variable icon h0] related to a symbol variable display being executed,
There may be a second change animation using the change notice display,
The second change animation is an animation [for example, an icon change animation] that changes the aspect of the variable icon,
When the second change animation using the first change notice display is performed by displaying the first change notice display, the mode of the displayed change icon is the second icon. The display may be changed,
By displaying the second change notice display, if the second change animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed change icon is the second icon. The display mode is changed to [for example, FIG. 148 (A3-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the variable icon may be an icon representing a digested hold.

The variable icon can be regarded as an icon displayed in correspondence with the number of holds=0, and can be said to be a kind of hold icon in a broad sense, but it is limited here in distinction from the hold icon. However, the mode of the variable icon is common to the mode of the hold icon and is referred to as the nth icon display mode.

In addition, the "hold icon" described so far can be replaced with a "fluctuation icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with a "second change animation". The "icon" can be replaced with the "changing icon", and the "first change animation" can be replaced with the "second change animation". These things are the same in the following.

Further, the second change animation is more likely to be executed when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode than when the change notice display is displayed in the first change notice mode. May be According to this configuration, if the second change animation is executed, a big hit can be expected in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and if the first change animation is executed, after this, You can have a big hit expectation in the symbol fluctuation display to be started, and the player is interested in which change animation of the first change animation and the second change animation is executed, The interest of the game may improve.

In addition, there is a case where a second invariant animation [for example, an icon invariant animation] using the change notice display is performed,
Even if the first change notice display is displayed, if the second invariant animation using the first change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed change icon does not change,
Even if the second change notice display is displayed, if the second invariant animation using the second change notice display is performed, the mode of the displayed change icon does not change [eg, FIG. 149(A3-3-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The second non-changing animation here is an animation in which the aspect of the variable icon does not change, and if the variation of the aspect of the variable icon is regarded as successful, when the second change animation is displayed, It corresponds to success, and when the second immutable animation is displayed, it corresponds to failure.

In addition, “operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, chance button 136, operation lever 139, transparent portion 191, second chance button 137, etc.],
The first change notice mode is a mode including a display [for example, a display of the button image 136a] regarding the operation means [for example, a mode shown in FIG. 152 (B3-2-2)].
When the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode when the operation means is operated while the first change notice display is being displayed. [For example, FIG. 152 (B3-2-5)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Depending on the first change animation, one of the hold icons may change to the eighth icon display mode, or may not change. Further, the variable icon may or may not change to the eighth icon display mode by the second change animation. The eighth icon display mode referred to here is a mode including a display relating to the operation means.

The operation means is means for setting an operation valid period, and a display (hereinafter, referred to as “operation display”) related to the operation means is displayed at least during the operation valid period, and within the operation valid period. When the operation means is operated, the mode of the change notice display changes from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode according to the operation, and within the operation effective period. When the operation is not performed, the first change notice mode may be changed to the second change notice mode after the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, when the mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes from the eighth icon display mode to the second icon display mode in response to the operation, and the operation is not performed within the operation valid period. In addition, after the operation valid period has elapsed, the eighth icon display mode may be changed to the second icon display mode.

However, when the operation is not performed within the operation valid period, the mode of the change notice display, the hold icon or the change icon changes to the second change notice mode or the second icon display mode. You don't have to. Alternatively, the change notice display may change to the second change notice mode or the second icon display form at a timing different from the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, and the change notice display may be the first change notice display. The display may be restarted in the change notice mode, or the hold icon or the variable icon may be restarted in the eighth icon display mode. Further, the change notice display may continue to be displayed in the first change notice mode until the operation is performed, and the hold icon or the change icon is the eighth icon until the operation is performed. The display may be continued in the display mode.

It should be noted that the operation display may be a display including an image simulating the operation means, may be a display of only the image, or may be a display urging operation of the operation means (operation promotion display). It may be a display including the display, only the operation promotion display, or a display including a display indicating the operation effective period of the operation means (operation effective period display), or the operation effective display. It may be only the period display. Further, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared as the display modes of the operation display, and the plurality of types of display modes include mode changes of the operation means itself (for example, color changes, protrusion amount changes, , A change in shape, a change in position, a change in posture, etc.) may be included.

Further, if the operation means is operated during the display of the change notice display displayed in the first change notice mode, the mode of the change notice display is changed from the first change notice mode. The second change notice mode may be changed without exception. Alternatively, there may be a case where there is a change from the first change notice mode to the second change notice mode and a case where there is no change (for example, the first change notice mode remains unchanged).

Further, “The change notice display may be displayed across continuous symbol variation displays [for example, FIG. 150 (A3-8-1) to FIG. 150 (A3-8-3), FIG. (A3-9-1) to the same figure (A3-9-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The term "straddle" as used herein means that a symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched therebetween. Further, the change notice display may be a display that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or a display that disappears once in the middle. Also, even during the stop display of the symbols, the display may be continuously displayed, may be a display that disappears temporarily, or a display that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be

"Display that may be displayed across consecutive symbol variable displays" is "display that is always displayed", but "display that may be erased and then redisplayed" is also included. For example, it may be erased once during the super reach effect and redisplayed when the super reach effect is finished.

In addition, “The change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud”] is a display that is displayed at least in a state in which the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed is displayed [for example, 155(D9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The change notice display may be a display that is displayed only in a state where the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative design that is stopped and displayed is displayed, or a display that is also displayed in other states. May be.

In addition, "the change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of "Red thundercloud"] is a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of symbol variation displays.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The change notice display may be a display that disappears (a display that becomes non-display) when the symbol variation display of a predetermined number of times ends.

Further, “When the change notice display [for example, the icon IHI of “red thundercloud”] disappears temporarily even during the predetermined number of symbol variation displays [for example, in FIG. 155 (D10) If the demonstration screen of the animation shown is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

For example, the change notice display may or may not disappear temporarily during the whole or part of the super reach effect.

The change notice display may be, for example, a display of a navigation character (a character performing an explanation display or the like).

Further, the change notice display may be a display which is constantly displayed for a certain period. The certain period may be a period until the hold subject to the advance notice is exhausted, or a period until the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold subject to the advance notice is completed, or a predetermined number of times. It may be a period until the symbol variable display is finished (hereinafter the same).

The change notice display may be hidden while the symbols are stopped in a state where there is no hold or during the demo display. That is, a certain period does not include a period during which the symbol is stopped in a state where there is no hold or a demo display period. However, the change notice display may be displayed even when the symbol is stopped in the state where there is no hold.

The change notice display may be a display that may disappear once during a certain period.

In addition, “When the first change animation is not displayed even if the change notice display is displayed [for example, when the first non-change animation, the second change animation, or the second non-change animation is displayed, , When the change notice display is hidden and remains hidden],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Even if the change notice display is displayed, the second change animation may not be displayed.

The change notice display may be displayed and the first invariable animation may be performed, and the first invariant animation may be the same animation as the first incomplete animation. Further, the change notice display may be displayed and the second invariant animation may be performed, and the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second incomplete animation. As described above, the case where the first invariant animation is displayed corresponds to a failure, but it is partway through (for example, at least the first part, the first half part, or the scene of whether the mode of the hold icon changes or not). Since the same animation (excluding part), the player can first distinguish whether the display of the first change animation or the display of the first non-change animation has started. It may not be possible and the interest in the game may improve.

Even if the change notice display is displayed, the first change animation and the first non-change animation may not be displayed.

In addition, “Before the display of the first change animation is started, there may be a case of notifying that the state of any one of the displayed hold icons is in a state in which it is likely to change [eg, Notification by telop display trp shown in FIG. 151 (A1-3-3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The notification that the mode of any of the holding icons is in a state in which the mode is likely to change (hereinafter, referred to as “pre-change notification”) is provided when the change notice display is displayed in the second change notice mode. You may be notified. For example, the second change notification mode may be a mode including the display of the change advance notification. That is, the change notice display may be a display that also serves as the advance change notification. Alternatively, the advance change notification may be performed separately from the advance change notification display. When the change notice display is performed, the first change animation may be executed more easily than when the advance change notification is not performed. That is, the form of any one of the displayed hold icons may be easily changed. On the contrary, it may be difficult to execute, or may be the same in easiness of execution.

Further, the advance change notification may be started or notified before the first change animation is displayed after the change advance notice is displayed. Alternatively, the advance change notification may be started or notified before the change advance notice display is displayed.

In addition, “the first change animation is an animation that may change the mode of any one or more of the held icons among the displayed held icons [for example, FIG. 149 (A3′-2-1) to The same figure (A3'-2-4)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The first change animation is an animation including a scene in which the aspect of any of the plurality of hold icons being displayed is successfully changed, and the first unchangeable animation. May be an animation including a scene in which changing the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons has failed.

The first change animation and the first non-change animation may be executed at the same time, and the aspect of any one or a plurality of the hold icons displayed may change. In this case, a scene in which one or more hold icons are changed and a scene in which one or more hold icons are not changed may be displayed.

Also, the first change animation may be an animation that necessarily changes the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons. The first non-changing animation may be an animation that does not necessarily change the mode of any one or more of the displayed hold icons.

In addition, “When the second change notice display is displayed, the first change animation is always executed [for example, No. with an icon change ratio of 100% shown in FIG. 8 "Red Flying Boat"],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

There may be a case where the first non-changing animation using the change notice display is performed. The first non-change animation here is an animation that does not change the mode of any of the hold icons among the displayed hold icons, and if the change of the mode of the hold icon is regarded as successful, then The display of the first change animation corresponds to success, and the display of the first non-change animation corresponds to failure.

Further, the first change animation is an animation including a scene in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons is successfully changed, and the first unchanged animation is included. The animation may be an animation including a scene in which the aspect of any one of the displayed hold icons has failed to be changed.

In addition, "the hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth icon display mode,
The fourth icon display mode is a mode that suggests that the mode of the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode may change [for example, the display mode of “bomb” shown in FIG. 156 (Eb1) and the like]. ],
When the mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the second icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change notice display is used. [For example, FIG. 156 (Eb8)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the holding icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth icon display mode,
The fifth icon display mode is a display mode indicating that the mode change in the hold icon of the fourth icon display mode has failed [for example, the fire of the fuse shown in FIG. 156 (Eb7-2-1) is in the middle. The display mode of the "bomb" that has disappeared]
When the mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode changes to the fifth icon display mode in the first change animation in which the second change notice display is used. [For example, the same figure (Eb7-2-1) continuing from FIG. 156 (Eb6)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mode of the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, in the first change animation using the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode, The first icon display mode may be changed.

Further, the fourth icon display mode is a display showing the length of the remaining time until the mode of the hold icon is changed (for example, a digital clock display, an analog clock display, a bar display, etc. Or a display in which the size, length, color, etc. change). ← Dynamite is a display in which the length of the squib changes. Further, in the hold icon displayed in the fourth icon display mode, the change notification display displayed in the second change notification mode was used. A display showing how the remaining time elapses when the first change animation is started (for example, a countdown display or a change in shape, size, length, color, or the like depending on the elapsed time). Display) may be performed.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that what is described as a variable display of a decorative pattern above may be a variable display of a design (more specifically, a special drawing), and a description that is displayed as a stop display of a decorative pattern means that the design (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

Further, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", etc. It may be replaced with "always do ○○".

Next, an example of effects applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described.

In the example of the effect described below, the display means (for example, any one or two or all of the first decorative symbol display device 208L to the third decorative symbol display device 208M decorative symbol display device), the notice icon, A notice display, a mini game A icon, a mini game B icon, a hold icon, a change icon, an icon change notice display, a chance up meter, a timer notice, and the like are displayed. First, these will be described in order.

First, the effect of using the various icons and displays described with reference to FIG. 162 will be described using a specific example.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of effects using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 162, it is a normal state (non-probability change state and non-electric power saving state (non-time saving state)), and also in the subsequent production examples, unless otherwise specified, the production example in the normal state. Further, FIG. 162 shows only the first decorative symbol display device 208L among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, but this first decorative symbol display device 208L is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. May be present (same for subsequent figures).

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A15), the opportunity up meter preparing display is displayed before the opportunity up meter is displayed, and an effect is given to give notice that the opportunity up meter is displayed. It is shown that it is being broken.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162(A1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A1), in the effect display area 208d,
The hold frame UI is displayed. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162(A1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. The background screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 162(A1) is solid white, but this solid white color means that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but the case of solid white indicates that the background screen is omitted as in the case of FIG. 162(A1).

In FIG. 162(A2), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, it is announced that the chance up meter (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “CUM”) ready display may be displayed. Note that the CUM preparation display may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. Further, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CPU preparing display may be displayed. Further, in this example of effect, the flame effect EF101 covers the entire hold icon display area HIS, but it may cover only a part of the hold icon display area HIS, or the entire variable icon display area CIS. Alternatively, a part or a whole of the effect icon display area DIS may be covered. Further, although the back side of the flame effect EF101 is displayed as opaque so that it cannot be visually recognized, it may be displayed semitransparently so that the image displayed on the back side is visible.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162(A3), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. The starting point SP is displayed on one end of the meter and the final point GP is displayed on the other end of the meter in the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, at the starting point SP, a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani is waiting is shown, and a balloon with the letters "STANDBY" is also displayed. That is, it is announced that the chance up meter will be displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the same position as the display position of the chance up meter. It should be noted that in this effect example, it is shown that the chance up points displayed in the chance up meter effect using the chance up meter are not notified. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY covers the entire hold icon display area HIS and hides it, while the variable icon display area CIS and the production icon display area DIS are visually recognized without changing the display mode. It is possible. The display mode of at least one of the variable icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS may change. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed during the symbol variation display before the reach, but the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed while the reach effect display after the reach is displayed. It may be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A4), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the fluctuation display is shown. ing. Here, the decorative pattern for which the swing fluctuation display is performed may overlap a part of the CUM preparing display, or the decorative pattern may be displayed at a position not overlapping the CUM preparing display.

In FIG. 162(A5), “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a before the super reach effect is moved to a position below the second ornamental symbol, and is swinging and shaking in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 7” that was being displayed moves to the bottom of the second hold number display. In addition, in this example of performance, the CUM preparation display MTY is also displayed during the transition to the super reach performance. It should be noted that the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY may be hidden when the effect that shifts to the super reach effect is started. In addition, when the effect that shifts to the super reach effect is started, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may or may not be displayed. Also, in FIG. 162(A5), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and a state is shown in which the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is left and the frame is framed out below the display screen. .. FIG. 162(A6) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left.

FIG. 162(A7) shows that the VS reach master's reach super-reach effect has started. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is also continuously displayed. Here, if the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect is not performed. Even when the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. An image of an enemy swordsman is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (A7), and the main character appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (A8). The animation of the duel scene with the enemy swordsman is displayed. It should be noted that when the super reach effect is started, all the reservation frame UIs are hidden (disappeared) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variation icon h0 does not disappear and remains displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative design and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

FIG. 162(A9) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, the chance up meter CMT is a display that is displayed at the beginning of super reach (at the time of introduction). The chance up meter CMT is, for example, a meter showing the progress status of the reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the progress status of the current reach effect is roughly indicated by the position. Information. The chance up meter CMT may be referred to as a super reach timeline. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may be referred to as an explanation effect using an effect using the chance up meter CMT. Here, the traveling speed of the character SBH of Sabohani is not constant but may vary depending on the progress situation of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162(A9), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. That is, when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are respectively reached on the way of the character SBH of Sabohani, a specific notice may be issued. In other words, it can be said that the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are the display of chance up points indicating the places where the chance up occurs, and the chance up meter CMT indicates the chance up during the reach (super reach). It can also be said that it is a meter display that suggests the location of the occurrence. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. In this example of performance, the display of the chance up meter CMT is started when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the state that has evolved into the super reach shown in FIG. 162 (A7) is started. The display may be started at different timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the variation of the decorative pattern The display may be started when the display is started. The check points CP1 to CP3 may be displayed before the chance up meter CMT is displayed, at the same time as the chance up meter CMT is displayed, or at the same time. It may be after the upmeter CMT is displayed. The timing at which the placard is displayed may be before the opportunity up meter CMT is displayed, at the same time as the opportunity up meter CMT is displayed, or at the opportunity up meter CMT. May be displayed after is displayed.

FIG. 162(A10) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani that functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. The balloon "START!!" may be displayed only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed after the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed, or whether the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed or not. Regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed, it may be always displayed or may not be displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon of "START!!", it may be announced that the chance up notice is likely to occur at the check points CP1 to CP3.

FIG. 162(A11) is the same effect example as the effect example shown in FIG. 29(2). After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 29(3) to 29(25) are performed, and thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 162(A12) are performed.

In FIGS. 162(A12) to (A13), the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 29(26) to (27) are performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 162 (A14), it is shown that the swing fluctuation is performed in a state where three “decoration 7” are arranged. At this time, a background dedicated to the big hit, which is displayed when the background becomes a big hit, is displayed. Note that the default (normal) background, the background in prefetch mode, the background that suggests the development of super reach, etc. may be displayed, and the background displayed when reaching is displayed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (A15), the combination of the decoration symbols of the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (the jackpot pattern mode) is confirmed and displayed. Here, after the super reach is completed, the chance up meter CMT is always hidden, but it may be displayed. In this case, when the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hits (the big hit pattern mode) is stopped and displayed, it may be decided to promote to the probability variation big hit. ..

In this effect example, the CUM preparation display is switched to the chance up meter CMT at the timing shown in FIG. 162(A9), but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, FIG. 162(A3) to which the symbol variation is being displayed. It may be switched at the timing of (A4) in the figure, or may be switched at the timing of (A5) to (A6) of FIG. 162, which is a period during which the normal reach is switched to the super reach, or after the super reach is started. It may switch in FIG. 162 (A7) to FIG. 162 (A13) during execution of super reach, or may switch after super reach is completed. In this case, the occurrence of the advance notice of the chance that has occurred during the super reach is notified later.

In this effect example, since the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed during the super reach effect, the reach effect display is displayed by displaying the CUM preparation display for notifying that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started. It can be said that will be displayed.

In addition, in this example of performance, a chance-up notice is generated at all check points, which is a big hit. However, if no chance-up notice is generated at any one or more check points (a chance at all check points Even if there is no advance notice or a chance up notice occurs at some check points), it may be a big hit. For example, in FIG. 30(18b), an example in which a big hit occurs even when the lever image 136Va is not displayed and a chance up notice is not generated is shown. Further, even if a large number of chance-up notices are generated at the checkpoints, it may be easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode than when the chance-up notices are not generated at all and/or some checkpoints. Good. Further, the number of occurrences of chance up notice and the likelihood of a big hit may not be related.

In the present embodiment, the case where the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed is more final than the case where the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. 162(B1) to (B8) in FIG. 162(B1) is another example of effect following FIG. 29(22), and FIG. In the lever effect shown in FIG. (22), the player operates the effect lever 136V, but the appearance is failed. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle pattern, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is notified and it is notified. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows the character “x” indicating that it is missing, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (B2), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are once displayed lighter than the normal darkness. Also, in the figure, a scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. In FIG. 162 (B3), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed in the normal darkness again, and in FIG. 162 (B4), the wipe effect is performed and the effect scene of super reach (effect). The display is switched to the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1) and the like). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 162 (B5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily becomes the wipe display of the same color with no pattern. In this wipe display, the variable icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second hold number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the lower left corner. The change icon h0 and the chance up meter CMT may also be displayed. In FIG. 162(B6), a state in which the background is returned to the normal background after the wipeout is shown. In FIG. 162(B7), the wipe effect ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shakes and displays the combination of the decorations, “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, and then FIG. As shown in B8), the display is confirmed and displayed in the lost symbol mode. Further, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are also displayed. Also, the chance up meter CMT is erased. In addition, at the time of wipeout (FIG. 162 (B6) to FIG. 162 (B7)), the chance up meter CMT and/or the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed, and when they are displayed, It may be configured such that the revival effect is more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, when it is displayed, the revival effect may be performed without fail, and when it is not displayed, the revival effect may or may not be performed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, it may be suggested that there is a possibility of shifting to the super reach after the next change.

In this production example, chance check notices are generated at all check points and are missed. However, if chance check notices are not generated at any one or more check points (chance at all check points Even if the advance notice is not issued or the chance up notice is issued at some check points), it may be lost. Further, even if a large number of chance up notices are generated at the checkpoints, it may be more difficult to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol aspect than when the chance up notices are not generated at all and/or some checkpoints. Good.

In this example of performance, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is always displayed. However, the chance up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. Good.

Further, for example, if the power failure and power recovery occur while the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed as the prefetching notice, it may be erased at the next change or may be displayed again at the start of the next change. Further, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY at the time of the start of the next change may be displayed at the time of returning the display screen after the power failure and restoration, or may be displayed again after the display screen is restored (for example, Redisplay by animation/no animation) may be performed.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The example of the effects shown in FIGS. 163(A1) to 163(A8) shows that a background change notice is being given. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163(A1), the background of the sea is displayed. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (A1), a state immediately after the symbol variable display is started during the stop display with the combination of the decorative symbols with the defect of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is shown. At this time, the second decorative pattern has begun to change.

FIG. 163 (A2) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

In FIG. 163(A3), a background change notice, which is a type of notice (variation notice), is started. The target of the background change notice here is the variable display of the symbols being executed. In the background change notice, an image of sliding doors appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes an image of sliding doors due to the animation in which the sliding doors are closed (see FIG. 163 (A4)). Therefore, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding doors and are invisible. Note that instead of the image of the sliding doors, an image that overlaps from the front side may appear in part of the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the change icon h0. Alternatively, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, and the change icon h0 may be effects in which no images overlap. It should be noted that the background change notice may be executed when a stage change effect, a pre-reading notice, or a change to a super-reach suggestive background is made in addition to the change notice.

In the background change notice, the big hit expectation degree may be represented by the display mode (for example, color, shape, pattern, etc.) of the appearance image (here, the image of the sliding door). It may also function as a notice of the background itself, such as the case where the color of the fusuma is green and the background of the mountain changes. In addition, it is possible to give advance notice that a prefetch zone will occur, depending on the display mode of the fusuma. Here, the prefetch zone refers to an effect mode in which a dedicated prefetch background is displayed when there is a prefetch target hold in the hold. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

In FIG. 163(A5), although the sliding doors are opened and the hold frame UI and the variable icon h0 are beginning to be seen, the CUM preparation display MTY appears in place of the hold icon display area HIS. At this time, the background is changed from the sea background to the super reach background. That is, the change to the background of super-reach will give advance notice that the change will shift to super-reach. As a pre-reading notice, it may be possible to give notice that the pre-reading target is changed to super reach. When multiple types of super reach are prepared, it may be suggested that the super reach is always developed corresponding to the displayed background. It should be noted that there may be a case where the super-reach does not develop, and it may be suggested that the super-reach corresponding to the background displayed on condition that the reach has been reached necessarily develops. In addition, there may be a case where the process moves to another type of super reach.

In FIG. 163(A6), the fusuma is completely opened and the fusuma image disappears. Due to the background change notice, the background of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is changed to the background of super reach. Note that the CUM preparation display MTY is completely displayed, and the display of the chance up meter CMT is announced in advance. The CUM preparation display MTY may start to be displayed after the fusuma image is completely opened. The chance up meter CMT may not be displayed even if the background of the super reach is displayed, or it may be always displayed.

In FIG. 163(A7), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the state of reaching is shown.

In FIG. 163 (A8), the "decoration 7" that was swinging in the left symbol display area 208a is moved below the second decorative symbol, and the "decoration 7" that was swinging in the right symbol display area 208c is the second. 2 It is shown that the user is moving below the display of the number of holdings. Further, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is also continuously displayed during the transition to the super reach production. Also, FIG. 163 (A8) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. This production example shows an example in which the reach transition production is special. The process may be switched to the super reach after the same process as when the normal background is displayed. At this time, animation in which the display area CIS of the variable icon moves is performed. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A8) to FIG. 162(A15) is performed.

163(B1)-(B3), as a result of performing the production of FIG. 162(A8)-(A11) through FIG. 163(A1)-(A8), Tonosama lost to a swordsman, “Decoration 6” is displayed on the middle pattern, and an example of an effect that causes a loss is shown.

FIG. 163 (B1) shows that the lord has lost to the swordsman and “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle pattern. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that a combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Also, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows the character “x” indicating that it is a loss, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression. ing. After that, after the effects of FIG. 162(B2) to FIG. 162(B5) are performed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 163(B2) wipes out, and the background is the background at the start of symbol fluctuation. It is shown returning to the background of an ocean. In FIG. 163 (B3), the wipe effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 sways and displays the combination of the decorative items, “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, and then the pattern of the loss. It is confirmed and displayed in a form. After the wipeout, the chance up meter CMT is erased. In addition, when the background is a special background (for example, a background of super reach, etc.) at the time of wipeout, the big hit may be determined.

FIG. 163(C1) to FIG. 163(C7) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A3), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 163 (C4), as a result of the decorative design being stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, it is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative designs with the missing decoration of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", and fluctuation fluctuation It is shown to be taking place. At this time, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is erased, but it may remain displayed.

After that, in FIG. 163 (C5), a state is displayed in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased. At this time as well, the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed, but the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed while the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed.

Then, after the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the flame effect EF101 is displayed again as shown in FIG. 163(C6), and is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. .. Here, when the flame effect EF101 is re-displayed, the flame effect EF101 may be displayed in the same mode as that displayed in the previous symbol variable display, or in a different display mode (animation). It may be displayed again, or the flame effect EF101 may be displayed without animation. After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 163 (C7).

That is, in this effect example, the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in FIGS. 163(C1) to (C3) function as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the next change, and FIG. It can be said that the display of the flame effect EF101 and the display of the CUM preparation display MTY in 163 (C6) to (C7) function as a notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed.

In this example of effect, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed every time the symbol variation display is started to give a pre-reading notice (continuous notice) of the effect by the chance up meter, but, for example, the effect by the chance up meter is Count down the number of symbol fluctuation display until it is performed (for example, display "2 more fluctuations", "1 more fluctuation", etc.), and the chance up meter is displayed when the symbol fluctuation display that is the target of the prefetch notice is displayed. It may be displayed. In other words, such a countdown display may provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, the pre-reading notice may be given by setting the display mode of the hold icon to a display mode that suggests that the effect is produced by the chance up meter. This may also provide the same function as the CUM preparation display MTY. Then, in the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice is displayed, and the variation icon is displayed in a display mode that suggests that the production by the chance up meter is performed, when the production by the chance up meter is started The variable icon may be deleted. In the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch notice is displayed, and the variation icon is displayed in a display mode that suggests that the production by the chance up meter is performed, when the production by the chance up meter is started The variable icon does not have to be deleted. In addition, after the chance up meter is displayed or at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the change icon is changed (for example, a display mode suggesting that an effect is produced by the chance up meter. From the default display mode).

Further, in the case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed every time the symbol variation display starts to give the advance notice notice (continuous notice) of the effect by the chance up meter, it is more than the symbol change display subject to the notice advance notice. When the production by the chance up meter is started in the previous symbol variation display, the CUM preparing display MTY may not be displayed while the chance up meter is being displayed, or the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY may or may not be displayed. Further, when the CUM preparing display MTY is hidden while the chance up meter is being displayed, the CUM preparing display MTY may be hidden before the chance up meter is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTY may be hidden at the timing when the chance up meter is displayed. When the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed even while the chance up meter is being displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed at a position overlapping the chance up meter or may be displayed at a position not overlapping. .. Also, in the type of super-reach that is performed in the symbol variation display that is the subject of prefetch notice, and in the symbol variation display that is the symbol variation display that is before the symbol variation display that is the subject of prefetch notice and the chance up meter is displayed. The type of super reach performed may be the same, may be different, or may be the same or different.

FIGS. 163(D1) to 163(D7) show that the CUM preparation display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A3), description thereof will be omitted.

163(D4) to FIG. 163(D5) are different from FIGS. 163(C4) to (C5), and the CUM preparation display MTY is continuously displayed even during the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern and the confirmation display. Is shown. An animation may be displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY. In this case, the animation may be continuously performed even while the symbol is stopped, or a different animation may be performed while the symbol is stopped. .. Further, the animation may not be performed and the still display may be performed.

After that, after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIGS. 163(D6) to (D7), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is continuously displayed.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a display start mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY.

FIG. 164(A1) to FIG. 164(A7) show another example in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Here, since the effect shown in FIG. 164(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 164 (A2), a game ball is won in the first special figure starting opening 230, one start of the symbol variable display is suspended, and the number of suspensions is 2. After that, as shown in FIG. 164(A3), the second hold icon h12 is displayed, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, the read-ahead notice by the hold display is given. Is shown. In addition, although the hold icon is displayed by the blue hold in this example of performance, the hold icon is displayed in another display mode (for example, the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 119(a)). Alternatively, the hold icon in the default display mode may be displayed.

After that, when the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 164 (A4),
It is shown that the combination of the defective decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (A5), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. After that, as shown in FIG. 164(A6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, it is announced that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. After that, in FIG. 164(A7), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed.

In this way, in this effect example, the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is not displayed in the symbol variation display being executed when the hold, which is the target of the prefetching notice, occurs, and the CUM is displayed in the symbol variation display started next. It is shown that the in-preparation display MTY is displayed. In this example of performance, the CUM preparation display MTY functions as a pre-reading notice, but when the hold that is the subject of the pre-reading notice is the first hold, the CUM preparing display is displayed in the next symbol fluctuation display. MTY functions as a notice of the chance up meter CMT in the change. It should be noted that the CUM preparation display MTY functions as a look-ahead notice and may not function as the notice. Further, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may function as the notice and may not function as the prefetch notice. Further, the CUM preparation display MTY may function as a pre-reading notice or may function as the notice.
There are cases.

FIG. 164(B1) to FIG. 164(B11) show another example in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is performed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164(B1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164(B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 164(B1), since the hold is 0, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. At the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "0" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1.

In FIG. 164(B2), a game ball is won in the first special figure starting port 230, one start of the symbol variable display is suspended, and the state in which the number of suspension is 1 is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164 (B3), the first hold icon h11 is displayed, but the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a blue display mode, that is, the prefetching notice by the hold display is performed. Is shown. Note that the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164(B4) may be displayed without displaying the hold icon. Also, the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164(B4) may be displayed during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon. 164(B4) when the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 164(B4) is displayed without displaying the hold icon and after the hold icon is displayed and/or while the increase animation of the hold icon is being executed. There may be a case where the flame effect EF101 shown in is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 164(B4), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. As a result, it is announced that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Then, in FIG. 164 (B5), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

In FIG. 164 (B6), as a result of the decorative design being stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative designs with the loss of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, and fluctuation fluctuations It is shown to be taking place. At this time, the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is maintained.

After that, in FIG. 164 (B7), a state is displayed in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the change icon is erased, but the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is still displayed.

Then, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIGS. 164(B8) to (B11), the hold digestion animation is started and hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the moving icon moving animation in which the previously held first holding icon h11 moves toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 in the moving icon display area CIS is being performed. In this example, the same moving icon moving animation is performed regardless of whether the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. However, when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed, Alternatively, a different moving icon moving animation may be performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (B9′), an animation may be performed in which the moving icon h0 comes out from the center of the pedestal hs0. Good. It should be noted that, regardless of whether or not the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is displayed, one of the plurality of variable icon movement animations may be selected and executed.

In this way, the CUM preparation display may be displayed as a pre-reading notice of the effect by the chance up meter in the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading is suspended.

FIG. 164(C1) to FIG. 164(C4) are diagrams showing a state in which a display start animation of the CUM preparing display MTY is being performed. Here, the effect shown in FIG. 164(C1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 164(C2), the display start animation of the CUM preparing display MTY is started, and the CUM preparing display MTY is shown rising from the lower part of the display screen. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS rises in a manner of being raised to the CUM preparation display MTY. Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (C3), the hold icon display area HIS is arranged above the CUM preparing display MTY so as not to affect the visibility of the CUM preparing display MTY. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (C3), there is only one hold in the special figure 1 and only the first hold icon h11 is displayed, but the second hold icons h12 to h12- The 4-hold icon h14 is indicated by a broken line.

After that, when the animation for starting the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is completed, as shown in FIG. 164 (C4), a balloon with the characters "STANDBY" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed. Is announced in advance. At this time, the balloon is displayed so as to partially overlap the hold icons (the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 in the example shown in FIG. 164 (C4)). It should be noted that at least one of the four hold icons may be displayed so that the entire hold icon overlaps the balloon, or the entire four hold icons may be displayed so as to overlap the balloon. Good. Further, in this example of effect, the balloons are arranged to overlap a part of the hold icon display area HIS, but they may overlap the whole hold icon display area HIS.

Note that the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. 164(C3′) instead of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 164(C3). Specifically, the frame of the CUM-in-progress display MTY may be extended upward, and the hold icon display area HIS may be indicated on the upper surface of the frame. The CUM preparing display MTY may have a display mode different from the CUM preparing display MTY displayed during super reach.

FIG. 164(D1) to FIG. 164(D2) are, for example, an example of effects following FIG. 162(A1), and show another display example of the flame effect that gives advance notice of the CUM preparation display MTY. There is.

FIG. 164(D1) shows a state in which a large flame effect EF102 different from the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162(A2) is displayed. The large flame effect EF102 is an effect display that is displayed so as to cover the entire holding frame UI in a visually difficult manner. It is foretold that the CUM preparation display is also displayed by the effect EF102 of this great flame. Note that when the large flame effect EF102 is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the large flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162(A2) is displayed. You may make it easy to give a chance up notice.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 164 (D2), when the large flame effect EF102 is erased, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. At this time, the holding frame UI is framed out downward leaving the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change and is the default display mode, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. Further, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed before and after the display of the large flame effect EF102. After that, for example, after the effect shown in FIG. 162(A4) to FIG. 162(A11) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 29(3) to FIG. 29(25) is performed, and thereafter, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A12). -The effect shown in the figure (A15) or the figure 162 (b1)-the figure (B8) is performed.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a display start mode of the chance up meter preparation display MTY.

FIG. 165(A1) to FIG. 165(A3) are, for example, an example of effects following FIG. 162(A1), and show an example of effects in which the CUM preparation display is displayed in silhouette while the flame effect EF101 is displayed. ..

The effect example shown in FIG. 165(A1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A2). After that, in FIG. 165(A2), while the flame effect EF101 is being displayed, the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa, which is similar to the CUM preparing display MTY, is displayed on the back side of the flame effect EF101. .. At this time, the CUM-in-progress silhouette display MTYa is entirely displayed in black, and it is as if the silhouette display is being performed. The display of the silhouette display MTYa during CUM preparation also functions as a notice that the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that it is suggested that a plurality of display modes of this CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa are prepared and the display mode is changed (promoted), thereby increasing the occurrence rate of the chance up notice in the performance by the chance up meter CMT. Alternatively, it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit increases.

After that, a reach state is formed, and FIG. 165 (A3) shows a state of transition to super reach. During this time, the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa is continuously displayed. The CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa may be deleted while the flame effect EF101 is being displayed. In this case, for example, when the CUM preparing silhouette display MTYa is hidden, a deletion animation is performed. However, it may be hidden without the deletion animation being performed. After this, for example, after the effect shown in FIG. 162(A11) is performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 29(2) to (25) is performed, and thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A12) to (A15). ) Or the effect shown in FIG. 162(B1) to FIG. 162(B8).

FIG. 165(B1) to FIG. 165(B6) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162(A1), and show another example of the effect of starting the display of the CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 165 (B1) shows that the wipe effect has started. This wipe effect is a display in which the display screen is gradually switched from the lower left corner to the upper right corner of the display screen in a display mode as if the calendar were turning. In FIG. 165(B1), the wipe effect is started in the state where the background of the sea is displayed, but the background has not changed before and after the wipe effect. However, in FIG. 165(B1), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed at the position where the hold icon display area HIS was displayed, and thereby, it is announced that the production by the chance up meter is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 165(B1), a part of the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a visually recognizable manner. The background may be changed before and after the wipe effect.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 165(B2), the display area after switching (turned back side) is enlarged, and most of the CUM preparation display MTY is visible. In the display area after switching, a notice regarding the chance up meter CMT may be given, or a look-ahead notice or a change notice relevant to the chance up meter CMT may be given.

FIG. 165(B3) shows a state in which the display area after switching is further enlarged. When the background is turned up in the wipe effect, some notices about the chance up meter CMT other than the CUM preparation display MTY and some notices not related to the chance up meter CMT may be visible, and when the background is turned off, the CUM is displayed. The in-preparation display MTY and other notices may be visible. After that, as shown in FIGS. 165(B4) to (B6), the display area after switching is enlarged so that the background is turned, and the display area after switching is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 165(B6). Are all visible. After that, for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 162(A4) to (A11) is performed, then the effect shown in FIGS. 29(3) to (25) is performed, and thereafter, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A12). )-Figure (A15) or Figure 162 (B1)-Figure (B8). In the state of FIG. 165(B1), the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed before the start of the wipe effect, and in that case, the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect. May be. Further, a rank-up CUM preparation display MTY, which will be described later, may be displayed after the wipe effect. Further, there may be a case where the CUM preparing display MTY is continuously displayed in the same display mode after the wipe effect, and a case where the upgraded CUM preparing display MTY is displayed.

FIG. 165(C1) to FIG. 165(C4) are an example of the effect following FIG. 162(A1), and show another example of the effect of starting the display of the CUM preparing display MTY.

FIG. 165(C1) shows a state where the background screen switching effect is started. As shown in FIG. 165(C1), the background image switching effect is such that after the background image before switching is reduced and displayed, the right side of the background image before switching is in the depth direction as shown in FIG. 165(C2). While moving, the right side is displayed in the depth direction, and the background image after switching appears on the right side of the display screen. The background image after this switching is displayed with the left side facing the depth direction. In the background image after switching, it is shown that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the display position of the hold icon display area HIS in the background image before switching. The background image before switching and the background image after switching may be displayed side by side without displaying the background image after switching, and the background image before switching may be displayed again. That is, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed. In this effect example, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in this background screen switching effect. However, after the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed (for example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed), the display is changed. The background image may be displayed. Further, the background image after the switching may be the background image of the notice, for example, the background image displaying the notice of intense heat may be displayed.

After that, in FIG. 165 (C3), the background image before switching is erased, and the background image after switching including the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a front facing manner. At this time, the background image after switching is reduced and displayed. After that, the background image after switching is enlarged and displayed on the entire display screen as shown in FIG. 165(C4), and thereafter, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A4) to FIG. 29(3) to FIG. 25(25), the effects shown in FIG. 162(A12) to FIG. 162(A15) or FIG. 162(B1) to FIG. Is done.

FIG. 165(D1) is an example of the effect following FIG. 162(A2), in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed, but the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed, and the notice of gasse is displayed. The situation is shown. When the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without fail. It should be noted that the symbol variation display on which the notice display of Gase is displayed may be determined to be lost. Further, in the symbol variation display in which the notice display of Gase is displayed, it may be a big hit. In addition, even if the effect EF101 of flame is displayed after the next variation after the notice display of Gase is made when there is one or more hold at the time when the symbol variation display where the notice of Gase is displayed is started. Good. In this case, a pattern in which the notice display of Gase is displayed until the pattern variation display subject to the look-ahead notice is started (a CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed until the end) and a symbol variation display subject to the look-ahead notice In, there may be a pattern in which the CUM preparation display MTY is finally displayed.

FIGS. 165(E1) to (E9) are, for example, an example of effects following FIG. 162(A1), and show a state in which a timer advance notification effect is being performed.

FIG. 165(E1) to FIG. 165(E2) show that the timer notice display TMY rises from below the hold icon display area HIS and the timer notice display TMY lifts the hold icon display area HIS. At this time, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed on the timer notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer notice is suspended. When the timer announcement display by the timer announcement display TMY in this example of the presentation is performed, it is announced that the hold icon or the variable icon changes. Compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 164 (C2), it may be possible to know whether or not the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed depending on whether or not the character SBH of Savohani appears. It may be difficult to specify whether the CUM preparation display MTY or the timer advance notice display TMY is displayed. If the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the flame effect EF101 is erased before the CUM preparing display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed, the CUM preparing display MTY and the timer notice display TMY are displayed. Either may be displayed. Note that the timer notice in this example of performance is a notice of a change in the hold icon (variable icon), but the timer notice as shown in FIGS. 20 to 27, 38, and 40 to 48 was made. It goes without saying that any notice production executed as a result can be performed. Also, the display mode of the timer advance notice display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 165, and it is applicable to any of the above-mentioned timer advance notice display display modes. Further, in this effect example, both the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparation display MTY may be performed below the hold icon display area HIS. In this case, the area where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. And the area in which the timer notice display TMY is displayed may be displayed in an overlapping manner, or may be displayed so as not to overlap.

In FIG. 165 (E3), the display on the timer notice display TMY is changed to “10:00”, and then the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon (variable icon) may change after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown in the timer notice display. The timing of starting the countdown in the timer advance notice display is not limited to the above-described timing. For example, after the display of “STANDBY” is changed to the number of seconds, the start of the countdown may be waited for a while. Further, the number of seconds may be displayed from the stage when the display of the timer notice display TMY is started. In this case, the countdown may be started after the display animation of the timer notice display TMY is completed, or the timer notice display The countdown may be started from the stage when the display of TMY is started.

FIG. 165 (E4) shows that 0.01 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. After that, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown, the timer display becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 165 (E5).

Then, as shown in FIG. 165(E6), in the timer notice display TMY, the display of “00:00” is switched to the display of “change!”, and at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is overlapped. As described above, the effect EF 103 is displayed and the change animation of the hold icon is started. This suggests that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Here, the change animation of the hold icon may be started after switching to the character display of "change !!", or "change !!" is displayed after the change animation of the hold icon is started. Alternatively, the change animation of the hold icon may be started at the timing of switching to the character display of "change!!".

After that, when the change animation of the hold icon ends and the effect EF103 is erased, as shown in FIG. 165 (E7), the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is changed to the blue hold display mode. .. That is, it is shown that the rank of the hold icon is increased by two steps. The rank of the hold icon may be increased by one step before or after the change animation of the hold icon, or may be increased by three or more steps. In addition, the rank may be lowered.

Thereafter, the timer notice display TMY is subjected to a frame-out animation in which the frame-out is displayed below the display screen as shown in FIGS. 165(E8) to (E9). Due to this frame-out animation, the hold icon display area HIS also descends and returns to the default display position.

In this example of performance, both the timer notice display TMY and the CUM preparing display may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TMY is moved further upward and displayed below the timer notice display TMY. The CUM in-progress display MTY may be displayed on the screen. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed again within the same symbol variation after the end of the timer notice effect, and the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed. Further, the hold icon display area HIS may be moved and displayed and the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed after the symbol variation that is started next after the end of the timer notice effect.

FIG. 165(F1) to FIG. 165(F2) are, for example, an example of effects following FIG. 162(A2), and show another display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY.

The effect example shown in FIG. 165 (F1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). That is, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT displays the position of the check point (in this effect example, the second check point CP2) at which the chance up notice may occur in the meter portion of the CUM preparation display MTY. It is shown that the notification is given before the notification. In this case, the advance notice of a chance may be always issued at the checkpoint previously notified by the CUM preparation display MTY. In addition, when the checkpoint is informed in advance by the CUM preparation display MTY, it is possible to make the chance advance notice more likely to occur than when the checkpoint is not informed. Further, in the CUM preparation display MTY, some or all of the check points displayed in the chance up meter CMT may be displayed without fail. In this case, the checkpoint may be displayed according to the probability of occurrence of the chance up notice, or the checkpoint may be displayed regardless of the probability of occurrence. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A4) to FIG. 162(A7) is performed, and then the effect shown in FIG. 165(F2) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 165(F2) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A8) except that the checkpoint is displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. A check point is displayed when the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is started, and is also displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, when a reach is generated or a super reach is reached) after the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is started. The number of check points may be increased.

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the opportunity up meter preparing display MTY.

FIG. 166(A1) to FIG. 166(A3) are, for example, one example of the effect following FIG. 162(A3), and at least a part of the check points are displayed during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY, and the check is performed. The point shows that the chance up notice is always executed.

The effect example shown in FIG. 166(A1) is an effect example corresponding to FIG. 165(F1). In FIG. 166(A1), the second checkpoint CP2 displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY is marked in red, and the letter “UP” indicates that the jackpot reliability has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Is displayed in the information, which is a display mode for notifying that a chance-up notice has occurred, as shown in FIG. 29(6) and described above. That is, in this example of performance, by performing this display, it is informed that the chance up notice is surely given. It should be noted that the chance up notice may not actually be given, and in this case, the game may proceed as if the chance up notice was given.

The effect example shown in FIG. 166(A2) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 165(F2). As shown in FIG. 22(A2), the second check point CP2 remains marked and displayed in red even after shifting to the super reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 166(A3), when the CUM preparing display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, other check points (first check point CP1 and third check point CP3) not displayed are displayed. Then, the production by the chance up meter is started. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 166(A3′), the display of the second check point CP2 may be cleared to the default display mode. After FIG. 166(A3) or FIG. 166(A3′), for example, FIG. 29(3) to FIG.
The effect shown in FIG. 162 (A12) to FIG. 162 (A15) or the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A1) to FIG. 162 (B8) is then performed. In addition, when a part or all of the check points are displayed by the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance up notice may not be given by the displayed check points. In this case, the chances are displayed at the displayed check points. The advance notice may or may not be given, or the chance up notice may or may not be given. In addition, when a part or all of the checkpoints are displayed by the CUM preparation display MTY, the chance up notice is not actually given, but the game may proceed as if the chance up notice was given. In this case, the checkpoint that is considered to have been given a chance up may or may not notify that the chance advance notice has occurred, and may or may not notify. Good.

FIG. 166(B1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 166(A1). In FIG. 166(B1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in a red-marked state on the CUM preparation display MTY, but the display of “UP” indicating that the notice has appeared is not displayed. It is shown. In this case, for example, "UP" may be displayed after the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2 and a chance up notice is generated.

FIG. 166(C1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 166(A1). In FIG. 166 (C1), the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, but it is not marked in red, and the characters “UP” are not displayed, and the “UP” It is shown that a "question mark" is displayed instead of the letters. This suggests that a chance-up notice may occur at some check points in the effect produced by the chance-up meter CMT. For example, the appearance rate of the chance up notice may be changed in the order of “question mark”<“!”<“UP”.

FIG. 166(D1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 166(A1). In FIG. 166 (D1), all of the check points displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY, and characters such as “question mark”, “!”, “UP” are displayed for each check point. It may be additionally noted to indicate the degree of expectation of occurrence of a chance-up notice for each checkpoint.

FIG. 166(E1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A3). FIG. 166 (E1) shows that the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is changing from “STANDBY” to “high chance of increasing chance”. When this display is made, it is suggested that the chance up notice is likely to occur at each check point in the effect produced by the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that in the balloon, "STANDBY" may be displayed once and then changed to "chance up high accuracy medium", or "STANDBY" and "chance up high accuracy medium" may be alternately switched and displayed. You may. Further, the display of "chance up high accuracy" may be displayed without displaying "STANDBY".

FIG. 166(F1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A3). FIG. 166 (F1) shows that the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY is changing from “STANDBY” to “One chance up confirmation”. When this display is performed, it is suggested that the chance up notice is always issued once in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this example of performance, it is difficult to specify at which checkpoint the chance-up notice occurs. However, the chance-up notice must always occur n times (in this example, once). Has foretold. It should be noted that the number of chance-up notices to be necessarily generated may be once or twice or more. In addition, in the balloon, "STANDBY" may be displayed once and then changed to "one chance up confirmation", or "STANDBY" and "one chance up confirmation" may be alternately displayed. You may. Further, the display of “one chance up confirmation” may be displayed without displaying “STANDBY”.

FIG. 166 (G1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (G1), a placard with “V” displayed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY is arranged to notify that the big hit is confirmed. Further, in addition to “V”, for example, a placard displaying “development” may be arranged, and in this case, it may be notified that the super-reach will be established. .. Also, by arranging the placard with the "question mark" displayed, when the character of Sabohani reaches the final point, some effect (for example, development of super-reach, development of super-reach or not) It may be suggested that the effect of the pattern) is performed. Further, even when the placard informs that some effect will be performed, there may be a case where no effect is performed and a case where no effect is performed.

FIG. 166 (H1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162 (A3). In FIG. 166 (H1), a placard with "Extreme heat" displayed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY is arranged, and (a) a preliminary notice regarding the symbol variation display with the CUM preparation display MTY displayed. In some cases, or (b) there is a case in which a pre-reading notice and/or notice is given regarding the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above (a) or may be performed only in the case of the above (b).

FIG. 166(I1) is a modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A3). In FIG. 166 (I1), a placard with “V” displayed at the final point GP in the CUM preparation display MTY is arranged, and a display that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the final point GP is displayed. So, it is announced that the big hit is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed at the start point SP and moved, or may be displayed at the final point GP. It may be left as is. Further, even when "V" is displayed on the placard, it may be a big hit or may not be a big hit. Further, (a) when the advance notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed is performed, or (b) the look-ahead notice and/or the advance notice regarding the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed. It may be performed. In addition, it may be performed only in the case of the above (a) or may be performed only in the case of the above (b).

FIG. 166(J1) is a modified example of the effect example shown in FIG. 166(I1), and shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is also displayed at the start point SP. That is, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is placed at both the start point SP and the end point GP, thereby notifying that the big hit is confirmed. In this case, when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the sabotani character SBH at the start point SP may be moved or may not be displayed. The character SBH of Sabohani at the start point SP may be erased, and only the character SBH of Sabohani displayed at the final point GP may remain displayed.

FIG. 166(K1) to FIG. 166(K2) are, for example, an example of the effect following FIG. 162(A2), and show that another notice display is being displayed even while the CUM preparation display MTY is being displayed. ing. FIG. 166(K1) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A3). After that, FIG.
As shown in 6 (K2), it is shown that the conversation advance notice is started during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. It goes without saying that a notice other than the conversation notice may be given during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY. In this example of performance, the CUM preparing display TMY is started before other notices, but other notices that are always started before the CUM preparing display TMY (for example, a hold icon or a change icon). There may be a notice that the display mode of the icon changes or a notice that is started at the time of the change), and another notice display that is always started at the same time as the CUM preparation display TMY. Further, even if another notice of the same type is given, there may be a case where the display is started at the same timing as the case where the display is started before the CUM preparation display TMY and a case where the display is started after the display. Note that other notices may not be given during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, and only a particular notice of a plurality of types of notices can be executed. It may not be executed. For example, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, the effect of changing the display mode of the non-displayed hold icon may or may not be performed. Specifically, while the CUM preparation display TMY is being displayed, a notice display of "change" appears from the notice icon YI of "box" shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, and then a hold icon and a change icon are displayed. The notice effect for changing the mode may or may not be performed. Further, during the display of the CUM preparation display TMY, an icon change notice based on the icon "HIB" of the "bomber" shown in FIGS. 148 to 161 may be executed. In this case, for example, the icon IHI of the "BOMBER" or The effect displayed on the bullet icon BTI, the bombed hold icon, or the variable icon may be displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparation display TMY, or may be displayed so as to overlap.

FIG. 166 (L1) to FIG. 166 (L2) are an example of effects following FIG. 162 (A3), for example, and as the CUM preparing display, an example of displaying only a part of the CUM preparing display MTY. Showing. In FIG. 166 (L1), only the character SBH of Savohani and the balloon of “STANDBY” in the CUM preparation display MTY are displayed, and the other configurations are hidden. Thereby, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be announced in advance. It should be noted that the configuration to be displayed is not limited to the one described above, and any of the elements constituting the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. FIG. 166 (L2) shows a state in which the process then shifts to the super reach. As shown in FIG. 166 (L2), after a part of the CUM preparation display is displayed, the display mode may be maintained until the chance up meter CMT is displayed. The display mode may be changed in such a manner that the components of the CUM preparation display are added according to the progress of.

The example effects shown in FIGS. 166(M1) to (M7) correspond to the example effects shown in FIGS. 29(3) to 29(8). That is, FIG. 29(3) shows that the character SBH of the sabotani progresses on the meter after the production by the chance up meter CMT is started. However, in FIG. 166(M1), the chance up is internally increased. Although the effect is produced by the meter CMT, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. After that, in FIG. 166 (M2) corresponding to FIG. 29 (4), the state that the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side is shown. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. However, since the chance up meter CMT is not displayed and the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed, it is difficult to recognize the progress of the production in the chance up meta CMT. In addition, in FIG. 29(5), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Boy Passed” is displayed to notify the occurrence of the chance up notice, whereas in FIG. 166(M3), CUM preparation is in progress. Since the display MTY is still displayed, such notification is not made. Thereafter, also in FIG. 166 (M4) corresponding to FIG. 29(6), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29(6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the letters "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Displayed at the top, the history of the occurrence of the notice is shown. After that, in FIG. 166 (M5), the CUM preparation display MTY is still displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 29(7) corresponding to FIG. 166(M5), the sabotani character SBH has started moving. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166 (M6), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased, and it is suggested that the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. FIG. 166(M7) corresponds to the effect example shown in FIG. 29(8). In this effect example, as described above, the effect is internally produced by the chance up meter CMT, and the first check point CP1 is marked in red as the history of the advance notice of the opportunity increase at the first check point CP1. At the same time, the letters "UP" are also displayed. It is to be noted that the position of the character SBH of Sabohani has reached near the second check point CP2, and it is informed that a chance up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 may occur.

As described above, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 166 (M1) to (M7), the effect by the chance up meter CMT is progressing at the same time as the start of the super reach, but the super reach is displayed as a display. It is shown that the CUM preparation display MTY is being switched to the chance up meter CMT during the operation. At this time, with respect to the chance up notice (appearance of a boy) corresponding to the first check point CP1 that occurs during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY, after the chance up meter CMT is displayed as the chance up notice occurs. It is displayed as a history. The history may not be displayed. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super-reach starts or may be the timing in the middle of the super-reach. When it is the start timing of the super reach, the jackpot pattern mode may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when it is the middle timing of the super reach, or vice versa. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT may be the timing at which the super-reach always starts, or may be at the timing during the super-reach.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display mode of the chance up meter preparing display.

FIGS. 167(A1) to (A9) show modified examples of the display mode of the CUM preparing display. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 167(A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A2), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 167(A3) shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is erased and a CUM preparing display MTYb having a different mode from the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162(A3) is displayed. The CUM preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 167(A3) is displayed at a position where its display position overlaps with the display position of the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed at the same position as the display position. The CUM-preparing display MTYb is displayed in a mode in which the letters "meter-preparing" are attached in a rectangular frame. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 167(A4) to (A8) are performed. The production shown in FIGS. 167(A4) to (A8) is different from that of FIG. 162(A4), except that the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYb is different from that of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162. Since the effect shown in (A8) of the same figure is the same, description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 167(A9) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYb to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, for example, a CUM preparation display MTYb may be erased and a chance up meter CMT may be displayed by a chance up meter switching animation. The chance up meter switching animation may be, for example, a mode in which after displaying the effect and hiding the CUM preparation display MTYb, the chance up meter CMT appears when the effect is erased. It should be noted that the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTYb may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without performing the chance up meter switching animation. After that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 162(A10) to FIG. 162(A15) or the effect shown in FIG. 162(B1) to FIG. 162(B8) will be performed. In the example of the effect, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, the balloon with the character "START!!" may be displayed or the balloon may not be displayed.

167(B1) to (B5) show another mode in which the CUM preparation display MTYb shown in FIG. 167(A3) appears. FIG. 167(B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 168(A1).

FIG. 167(B1) to FIG. 167(B2) show that the CUM preparing display MTYb rises from the lower side of the holding icon display area HIS and the CUM preparing display MTYb lifts the holding icon display area HIS. There is.

In FIG. 167 (B3), a state in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol and is in the reach state is shown.

In FIG. 167 (B4), “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a is moved to below the second decorative symbol before shifting to the super reach effect, and swinging is fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 7” that was being displayed moves to the bottom of the second hold number display. In addition, in this example of performance, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTYb is also displayed during the transition to the super reach performance. Also, in FIG. 167 (B4), the erasing animation is started and the holding frame UI moves downward. At this time, the hold icon display area HIS moves downward so as to be hidden behind the back side of the CUM preparation display MTYb, and then becomes difficult to visually recognize as shown in FIG. 167 (B5). The variable icon display area CIS is framed out below the display screen, leaving the pedestal hs0. That is, FIG. 167 (B5) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. In this example of the effect, the deletion animation is performed at the timing when the hold icon is hidden, but the hold icon may be displayed without performing the deletion animation.

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the opportunity up meter preparation display.

FIG. 168(A1) to FIG. 168(A11) show modified examples of the display position of the CUM preparing display MTY. Since the effect shown in FIG. 168(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 168(A2), the explosion effect EF104 is displayed in the central part on the left side of the display screen, and the state in which the CUM preparation display appearance animation is started is shown. That is, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, but is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. The explosion effect EF104 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may appear without the CUM preparing display appearing animation being performed. That is, the explosion effect EF104 is not displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.
May be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (A3), when the explosion effect EF104 is erased, the CUM preparation display MTY appears. Unlike the display position of FIG. 162 (A3), the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is substantially the center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this effect example, the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 168(A4) shows a state in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol to reach the reach state. At this time, the CUM-preparing display MTY is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which the decorative pattern is not overlapped by the CUM-preparing display MTY. ing. The CUM preparation display MTY may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative pattern and may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design.

In FIG. 168(A5), “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a is moved to below the second decorative symbol before shifting to the super reach effect, and swinging is fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The “decoration 7” that was being displayed moves to the bottom of the second hold number display. In addition, in this example of performance, the CUM preparation display MTY is also displayed during the transition to the super reach performance. At this time, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 168(A4), even if the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern, the CUM preparing display MTY is made at the timing shown in FIG. 168(A5). May be overlapped and displayed on the rear side of the decorative pattern. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. Also, in FIG. 168(A5), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and a state is shown in which the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is left and scrolled out downward of the display screen. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 168(A6) to (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 168(A6) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A6) to (A8) except that the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 168(A9) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves downward is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 168(A10), when the CUM preparation display MTY moves to the lower left corner of the display screen, the moving animation is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 168 (A11), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, the CUM preparing display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT after the moving animation is completed, and then the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move (the former), but the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. The character SBH of the sabotani may start moving (the latter) at the same time as the switching from the chance up meter CMT to the chance up meter CMT. The timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving may be the former or the latter, and may be performed only by the former or only by the latter. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162(A10) to FIG. 162(A15) or FIG. 162(B1) to FIG. 162(B8) are performed.

In addition, in this example of performance, the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT after the moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves downward (sometimes called a descending animation) is completed, and then, Although the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is started, the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, and after the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, the movement animation of the chance up meter CMT is performed. You may be allowed to.

168(B1) to FIG. 168(B5) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 168(A2).

Unlike FIG. 168(A3), FIG. 168(B1) shows that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a size smaller than the size of the chance up meter CMT. The size may be displayed larger than the chance up meter CMT. Further, the display size of the CUM preparation display MTY may be the same as or different from the display size of the chance up meter CMT. The display size of the CUM preparation display MTY and the display size of the chance up meter CMT may be the same or may be different.

FIG. 168(B2) shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY of the reduced size is displayed and the state of shifting to the super reach is performed. After that, a moving animation in which the CUM preparing display MTY moves at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (B3) is started. At this time, the balloon with "STANDBY" is erased. The balloon may be deleted before the moving animation starts, may be deleted after the moving animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the moving animation starts. Further, as will be described later, the balloon may be deleted after the CUM preparing display MTY is enlarged and displayed, or the balloon may be deleted before being enlarged and displayed.

FIG. 168(B4) shows that the moving animation is completed and the CUM preparation display MTY has moved to the display position of the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY is enlarged and displayed, and the display size becomes the same as the display size of the chance up meter CMT. The display position may be switched without performing the moving animation. In this case, the display size of the CUM preparing display MTY is reduced before and after the display position is switched to the same display size as the chance up meter CMT. You may do it. Further, the CUM preparing display MTY may be enlarged and displayed after the moving animation is completed, the moving animation may be started after the enlarged display, or the CUM preparing display MTY is moved by the moving animation. The display may be enlarged gradually while the display is being performed. When the moving animation is completed and the CUM preparation display MTY moves to the display position of the chance up meter CMT, as shown in FIG. 168(B5), the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, and then the chance up. The production by the meter CMT is started.

168(C1) to FIG. 168(C4) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 168(A2).

Unlike FIG. 168(A3), FIG. 168(C1) shows an example in which only a part of the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed as the CUM preparing display. In FIG. 168(C1), only the character SBH of Savohani and the balloon of “STANDBY” in the CUM preparation display MTY are displayed, and other configurations are hidden. Thereby, the display of the chance up meter CMT may be announced in advance. It should be noted that the configuration to be displayed is not limited to the one described above, and any of the elements constituting the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

FIG. 168(C2) shows a state in which the state then shifts to the super reach. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (C3), a switching animation that is an animation for switching from the CUM preparation display to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation starts, the explosion effect EF105 is displayed so as to overlap with the CUM preparing display, and C
The appearance that the UM preparation display disappears is displayed.

After that, when the explosion effect EF105 is erased, the CUM preparation display is also erased, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen as shown in FIG. 168(C4). The CUM preparing display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without switching animation, or the switching animation may be performed and the CUM preparing display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In some cases, the CUM preparation display may be switched to the chance up meter CMT without switching animation.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

FIG. 169(A1) to FIG. 169(A11) show modified examples of the display mode and display position of the CUM preparation display. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 169(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 169(A2), the explosion effect EF106 is displayed in the center part on the left side of the display screen, and a state in which the CUM preparation display appearance animation is started is shown. That is, in this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is not started to be displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, but is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is different, as described later. The explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern. Further, the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTYc may appear without the CUM preparation-in-progress display animation being performed. That is, the CUM preparing display MTYc may be displayed without displaying the explosion effect EF106.

FIG. 169(A3) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTYc is displayed. The display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is a display mode different from that of FIG. 168 (A3), and is a mode in which the characters for meter preparation are displayed in a rectangular frame.

In FIG. 169(A4), a state in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol and is in the reach state is shown. At this time, the CUM-in-progress display MTYc is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which the CUM-in-progress display MTYc does not overlap the decorative pattern. ing. The CUM preparation display MTYc may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative pattern and may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 169(A5) to (A8) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 169(A5) to (A8) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 168(A5) to (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYc is different. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 169(A9), a switching animation that is an animation for switching from the CUM preparation display MTYc to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the CUM preparing display MTYc, and the appearance that the CUM preparing display MTYc disappears is displayed. The display mode of this switching animation is the same as that of the CUM preparing display appearance animation shown in FIG. 169(A2) and described above, but may be a different display mode. Further, the display mode of the switching animation and the display mode of the CUM preparation display appearance animation may be the same display mode or different display modes. Also, the switching animation may not be performed.

Then, when the switching animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 169(A10), the appearance animation in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed and the chance up meter CMT appears is started. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed without performing the appearing animation. Further, the appearance animation may or may not be performed.

After that, when the appearing animation is completed and the flame effect EF101 is erased, the chance up meter CMT is displayed as shown in FIG. 169 (A11), and thereafter, the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started.

169(B1) to FIG. 169(B8) show an example in which the timer advance notice display functions as a CUM preparation display.

FIG. 169(B1) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, while the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed in the second holding number display. “1” indicating “1” is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 is also displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, in FIG. 169(B1), the timer notice effect is started, and for example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the left end of the display screen and displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "60:00". On the timer notice display TM1, thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 169(B2), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the swing fluctuation display is shown. ing. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in an overlapping manner on the front side of the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which the decorative design is not overlapped by the timer notice display TM1. .. The timer notice display TM1 may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative design and may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. Further, while the timer notice display TM1 is being displayed, another type of timer notice display disclosed in this specification may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the timer advance notice display may be the same as or different from the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 169(B2). The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be always displayed at the same position, or the display position may be different. Further, the type of the notice given as a result of the countdown of the timer display being "00:00" may be different depending on the display position of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the left side of the display screen). In this case, when the timer notice display TM1 functions as a CUM preparation display and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, even if the pseudo-link is executed as a result of the countdown of the timer display. Good). At the timing shown in FIG. 169(B2), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is “15:00”.

In FIG. 169 (B3), “decoration 7” that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a before the super reach effect is moved to a position below the second decorative symbol, and swinging is fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. The "decoration 7" that was being displayed moves to the bottom of the second hold number display. Further, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed during the transition to the super reach effect. It should be noted that when the effect that shifts to the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden, or may be displayed or may not be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 169(B3), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "10:57". Further, in FIG. 169(B3), the movement of the holding frame UI to the lower side is started, and a state is shown in which the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is left and the frame is displayed below the display screen. .. FIG. 169(B4) shows a state in which the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is “09:21”.

FIG. 169(B5) shows that the VS reach master's reach super-reach effect has started. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 is still displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (B5), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "05:53". A large image of an enemy swordsman is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 7B5, and the main character appears on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 6B6. The animation of the duel scene with the enemy swordsman is displayed. It should be noted that when the super reach effect is started, all the reservation frame UIs are hidden (disappeared) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variation icon h0 does not disappear and remains displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative design and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire hold frame UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire hold frame UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

FIG. 169(B7) shows a state in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is “00:00” during execution of the super reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (B8), a switching animation that is an animation for switching from the timer advance notice display TM1 to the chance up meter CMT is started. When the switching animation is started, the explosion effect EF106 is displayed so as to overlap the timer notice display TM1, and a state in which the CUM preparing display disappears is displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 169(A10) to (A11) are performed. In this example of performance, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", the chance up meter CMT is always displayed, but the chance up meter CMT is There may be a case where it is displayed or a case where it is not displayed (a warning notice display by a timer notice display). Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the timer notice display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", the chance up meter CMT may be displayed and another notice may be given. Good.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing a state where the chance up meter effect is being performed during the super reach effect. Here, the effects performed in the periods shown in FIGS. 170(A1) to (A5) are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 162(A1) to (A8), and FIGS. 170(A6) to (A6) are the same. Since the effect performed in the period shown in FIG. (A14) is the same as the effect performed in FIGS. 29(2) to 29(11), description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 170(A15), as shown in FIG. 170(A16), the lord's cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) is displayed. ) Is displayed. Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this rendering example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image in a display mode different from that of the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), and a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, and the reliability of the big hit increases in the order of the weak cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image. It should be noted that a cut-in image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed may be displayed. This weak cut-in image CI3b is a cut-in image of a display mode different from the cut-in image (gold cut-in image CI3) of the lord shown in FIG. 29 (13), and is longer than the gold cut-in image CI3 in the vertical direction. It is a weak cut-in image with a short frame, surrounded by a green frame, and showing how the sword is swung along with the shout of "Ikuze!" The weak cut-in image CI3b indicates that the reliability is lower than the gold cut-in image CI3 but the reliability of the big hit is high, but may indicate that the reliability does not change. .. That is, in this effect example, the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second check point CP2 is not displayed, and the chance up notice is not issued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170(A17), the red check mark is not added at the second check point CP2, and it is indicated that the chance up notice is not generated above the second check point CP2. The display of “×” is displayed, and the history that the advance notice of opportunity has not occurred is shown. When the chance up notice is not issued, it is not necessary to keep a history that the chance up notice is not issued (for example, as shown in FIG. 30(7a), the character SBH of Sabohani has the first check point). It does not have to pass through CP1 as it is, and the marking at the first checkpoint CP1 or the display of the characters “UP” may not be performed. As shown in FIG. 30(7a′), the display at the first checkpoint CP1 is erased. The history may or may not be kept when the chance up notice is not generated, which is the case in any of the embodiments described in this specification. The weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170(A16) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. The weak cut-in image CI3b shown in FIG. 170(A16) may be displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. It may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the button 136 (chance button 136), or the operation valid period without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May be displayed when the time has passed, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period has passed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136). When the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed when the operation valid period elapses.

After that, when the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the third check point CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 170(A18), the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 170(A19). Instead, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A20), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A21), in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani has started to move and is located before the final point GP. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased. The player may operate the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the sabotani character SBH may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the operation valid period elapses. In this example of performance, since the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is not displayed, the red check mark is not attached at the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT, and the third check point CP3 is above the third check point CP3. , "X" indicating that the chance up notice has not been issued is displayed, and the history that the chance up notice has not been issued is shown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (A22), the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136), but the operation of the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) is not performed. As shown in 170 (A23), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Is notified. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, but the placard shows the character “x” indicating that it is missing, and the character SBH of Sabohani has a disappointed expression. ing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 170 (A24), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are once displayed lighter than the normal darkness. Also, in the figure, a scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. In FIG. 170 (A25), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in the normal darkness. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(B4) to (B8) are performed. In this example of performance, the button up image 136a is displayed and the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated without the chance up notice being issued at the third check point CP3, but the result of the loss is derived. In this example of effect, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, and various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are operated, and the result of the big hit is derived. There may be cases. In addition, when the chance up notice is not generated at the third check point CP3, it may be suggested that the loss is confirmed. In addition, when the effect in this effect example is performed, there may be a case of finally losing and a case of a big hit, and in that case, the case of finally displaying the lose display mode, The effect of this effect example may be configured to occur more easily than when the big hit display mode is finally displayed.

In this example of performance, only one of the three check points CP1 to CP3 is given a chance up notice, and then the loss is derived. However, in all of the three check points CP1 to CP3. The chance up notice may be given and then the loss may be derived, or the loss may be derived without giving the chance up notice at any check point. In addition, when the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed, at least one chance advance notice may be issued at all times, or even once the CUM preparation in progress display MTY is displayed, one chance advance notice is given. May occur, the chance up notice may occur once or more, or the chance up notice may be issued at all check points. It goes without saying that this is applicable to any of the chance up notice effects disclosed in this specification.

FIG. 171 is a diagram showing a state in which another pattern of the chance up meter effect is performed during the super reach effect. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects performed in FIGS. 170(A1) to (A2), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 171(A3), the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 170(A3), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani is red, and the background color of the balloon is displayed in white. It is more likely that a chance-up notice will be generated, and that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. If the background color of the balloon is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this production example), or three chance check notices may be generated. The chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. In addition, even if the background color of the balloon is red, the chance up notice may not occur once. Further, when the background color of the balloon is red, the chance up notice may be generated n times (n=1 or more) without fail in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the background color of the balloon may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the big hit may be settled. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the balloon is changed, but the shape of the balloon may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A4) to (A14) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A4) to (A14) are the same as those in FIGS. 170(A4) to 170(A14), except that the background color of the balloon is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. ..

Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A15), as shown in FIG. 171 (A16), the money shown in FIG. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. At this timing, the weak cut-in image CI3b, the red cut-in image (not shown), or the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed only when the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Only when the cut-in image CI3 is displayed, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, or when it is determined that the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even if the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed A notification indicating that a chance-up notice has occurred (for example, a balloon with the letters “Chance-up gold cut-in” in FIG. 171) is displayed, and the weak cut-in image CI3b and the red cut-in image are displayed. If it is determined or displayed, the notification indicating that the chance up has occurred is not displayed, but the red cut-in image may be notified similarly to the gold cut-in image CI3. In this case, the notification indicating that the red cut-in image has been displayed and the notification indicating that the gold cut-in image has been displayed differ only in character notation, and other display modes (for example, balloons, etc.) may differ. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A16) to (A26) are performed. Note that the effects performed during the period of FIG. 171(A16) to FIG. 17(A26) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 29(13) to FIG. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A13) to (A15) are performed. In this effect example, even if the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A23), the various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 171 (A24) may not operate and the deviation may be derived. Even if it is configured in such a case, when the big hit display mode is finally displayed, the effect of this effect example is more likely to occur than when the lost display mode is finally displayed. Good.

FIG. 172 is a diagram for describing an example of a change effect of the display mode of the opportunity up meter preparation display.

172(A1) to (A3) are modified examples of FIG. 171(A3), and the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 167(A1) to (A9) is displayed in another display mode. It shows the situation.

FIG. 172(A1) is an effect following FIG. 167(A2). FIG. 172(A1) shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparation display MTYb is displayed. The CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 172(A1) is the same as the CUM preparing display MTYb shown in FIG. 167(A3), but the background color is red and the background color of the CUM preparing display MTYb is The chance up notice is more likely to occur than in the case of white, and the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. When the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, chance-up notices may be generated at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this production example). However, the chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, the chance up notice may not be issued even once. When the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. In addition, the background color of the CUM-in-progress display MTYb may be displayed in a color other than red or white. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow, the big hit may be determined. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the background color of the CUM preparing display MTYb is changed is shown, but the shape of the CUM preparing display MTYb may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 172(A2) to (A3) are performed. Note that the effects performed in the periods of FIG. 172 (A1) to (A3) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A3) to (A9), except that the background color of the CUM preparation display MTYb is different. Since it is the same as, the description will be omitted.

FIG. 172(B1) to FIG. 172(B4) are modified examples of FIG. 171(A3) and show how the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172(B1) is the same as that in FIG. 162(A3), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (B2), after the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is started, the effect EF107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in red flame is displayed, and it is notified that the CUM preparing display MTY is ranked up. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect of rank-up of the CUM-in-progress display MTY is being performed by the character SBH of Savohani, which is a component of the CUM-in-progress display MTY.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (B3), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. In this example of effect, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red according to the background color of the balloon after rank up, but it may be displayed in a color other than red. The display color of the flame effect EF107 may notify the rank of the CUM in-progress display MTY after the rank up. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow, the rank is changed. The background color of the balloon of the CUM in-progress display MTY after up may be changed to a rainbow color to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow color, it may be notified that the big hit is confirmed at that time. Further, even if the effect EF107 gives a notice of rank up of the CUM preparation display MTY, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (B4), which is a modification of FIG. 171 (A4), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed. , The fluctuation display is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY continues to be displayed in red.

172(C1) to (C6) of FIG. 172 show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 172(C1) is an effect following FIG. 162(A3), and shows that the notice icon YI is stocked. The advance notice icon YI appears, for example, by any of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147.

After that, as shown in FIG. 172(C2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is in the closed display mode is used, and the mode is changed to the mode d in which the box is in the open mode, and the rank is increased from the box. An animation that pops up the "UP" notice display for announcing is displayed. The display of "UP" that appears here is a display that gives advance notice of rank up of the CUM preparation display MTY. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the opening of the box (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 172(C3), the used notice icon YI disappears and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 172(C4), the promotion animation using the notice display of the "UP" is started. In FIG. 172 (C4), the notice display of “UP” changes to the light ball EF108 in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani in the CUM preparing display MTY. It is shown to fly away and hit a balloon. In this example of performance, the CUM preparation display MTY may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or the promotion animation may be performed and the CUM preparation display MTY may be ranked up, or the promotion animation may be performed. There may be a case where the CUM preparation display MTY ranks up without being disturbed. As described above, in this effect example, the state in which the advance notice display is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparing display MTY and the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is being increased is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (C5), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. It should be noted that after the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red and may be changed to another color. In addition, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up even though the promotion animation is performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 172 (C6), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the fluctuation display is performed. It is shown. The color of the balloon in the CUM preparation display MTY continues to be displayed in red.

172(D1) to (D3) of FIG. 172 show another effect pattern in which the background color of the balloon changes while the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172 (D1) is the same as that in FIG. 162 (A3), so description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172 (D2), after the CUM preparing display MTY is started to be displayed, the effect EF109 in which the entire CUM preparing display MTY is surrounded by a large flame is displayed, and the CUM preparing display MTY is ranked up. Has been announced. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparing display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is increased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. It should be noted that after the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red and may be changed to another color. Further, even if the effect EF109 gives a notice of rank up of the CUM preparation display MTY, the CUM preparation display MTY may not be ranked up. Also, as shown in FIG. 172 (D2′), the color of the flame effect EF109 may be the same as the background color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after the change (red in this example of performance). Thus, the rank of the CUM preparation display MTY after the rank upgrade may be announced in advance. Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (D3'), the color of the balloon of the CUM preparation display MTY after rank up may change to a rainbow color, and in this case, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. It Note that, as shown in FIG. 171(A3), the color of the balloon of the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed in a rainbow color from the beginning.

172(E1) to (E6) of FIG. 172 show effect patterns in which the background color of the balloon changes as a result of the timer notice during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 172 (E1) is the same as that in FIG. 162 (A3), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 172(E2), the timer notice effect is started, and for example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a certain notice is given 3 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is started (in this example, the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up). It has been suggested that On the timer notice display TM1, thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by an element other than the constituent elements of the CUM preparing display MTY, and the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 172 (E3) to FIG. 172 (E4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 172 (E5), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172(E6), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, and it is notified that the CUM preparation display MTY has been ranked up. It should be noted that after the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red and may be changed to another color.

FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

173(A1) to (A7) in FIG. 173(A1) to (A7) indicate that the display of the CUM preparing display MTY is a look-ahead notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed over a plurality of symbol variations. In the case, an effect pattern that ranks up is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173(A1) to (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C1) to (C6), so description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 173(A7). However, in this effect example, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed again as a result. The background color of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH is changing from white to red, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. It should be noted that after the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red and may be changed to another color. The background color of the balloon in this example of performance is prepared in three types, for example, white (default color), red (high degree of expectation), and iridescent (big hit confirmation), both before re-display and after re-display. Patterns that do not change in white, patterns that do not change in red before and after redisplay, patterns that do not change in rainbow colors before and after redisplay, and patterns that reappear in white before redisplay After that, a pattern that changes to red, a pattern that changes to white before redisplay, and a pattern that changes to rainbow after redisplay, a pattern that changes to red before redisplay and changes to rainbow after redisplay, and white at the first stage And a pattern that changes to red after the first re-display and changes to a rainbow color after the second re-display is displayed. Also, a display mode balloon that is the degree of expectation between a white background color balloon and a red background color balloon, or a degree of expectation between a red background color balloon and a rainbow-colored background color balloon. A form of speech balloon may be prepared. In addition, there may be a display mode of a balloon indicating that the background color of the balloon may change (for example, a white blinking display balloon). This is applicable in any of the embodiments described herein.

173(B1) to (B8) in FIG. 173(B8) show the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY as a look-ahead notice of the effect by the chance up meter CMT, and the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed over a plurality of symbol variations. In the case, another production pattern that ranks up is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173(B1) to (B6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163(D1) to (D6), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 173 (B7), after the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the effect EF107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in red flame is displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up. Is displayed. The timing at which the effect EF107 in which the character SBH of Sabohani is wrapped in flame is started and the rank-up effect of the CUM preparing display MTY is started is not limited to that described above, and may be started at an appropriate timing. It is possible, for example, during the temporary stop display of the decorative design, during the final display of the decorative design, or during another reach effect. Further, the timing at which the CUM preparing display MTY is ranked up may be any timing described above.

When the rank-up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY is completed as described above, the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani changes from white to red, as shown in FIG. 173 (B8). , CUM preparation display MTY is informed that the rank has been improved. In this example of effect, the color of the flame effect EF107 is displayed in red according to the background color of the balloon after rank up, but it may be displayed in a color other than red. The display color of the flame effect EF107 may notify the rank of the CUM in-progress display MTY after the rank up. For example, when the display color of the flame effect EF107 is rainbow, the rank is changed. The background color of the balloon of the CUM in-progress display MTY after up may be changed to a rainbow color to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, when the flame effect EF107 is displayed in rainbow color, it may be notified that the big hit is confirmed at that time. Further, even if the effect of the effect EF107 is to increase the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY, the CUM preparing display MTY may not be ranked up.

FIG. 173(C1) to FIG. 173(C4) show other display modes of the upgraded CUM-in-progress display MTY.

FIG. 173(C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A2), and shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 171(A3), and the color of the meter portion forming the CUM preparation display MTY is red. Therefore, it is easier to give a chance up notice than when the color of the meter portion is white, and the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. When the color of the meter portion is red, chance-up notices may occur at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this effect example), or three chance check notices may be generated. The chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the meter portion is red, the chance up notice may not occur once. Further, when the color of the meter portion is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the meter portion may be displayed in a color other than red or white, for example,
When displayed in rainbow colors, the big hit may be settled. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the color of the meter portion is changed has been shown, but the shape of the meter portion may be changed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 173(C2) to (C4) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173(C2) to (C4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171(A4) to (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 173(C4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the meter portion becomes white, which is the default display mode. The color of the meter portion may be red even after the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 173 (D1) to FIG. 173 (D4) show another display mode of the upgraded CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 173 (D1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162 (A2), and shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171 (A3), and the color of the character SBH of the sabotani forming the CUM preparing display MTY is different. Is red, the chance up notice is more likely to occur than in the case where the color of the character SBH of Savohani is the default color, and the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, a chance up notice may be issued at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of performance). The chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may not occur once. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is changed is shown, but the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. Also, a character different from the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 173(D2) to (D4) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173(D2) to (D4) are the same as FIGS. 171(A4) to (A6) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 173(D4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani becomes the default color, which is the default display mode. It should be noted that the color of the character SBH of the sabotani may be red even after being switched and displayed on the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of the change effect of the display mode of the chance up meter preparation display.

174(A1) to 174(A4) show other display modes of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 174(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A2), and shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed. In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different from the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3), and the character SBH of Sabohani forming the CUM preparing display MTY is a princess. It has been changed to the character HME, and when the big hit symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed than when the lost symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed, the princess character HME is displayed more than when the Sabohani character SBH is displayed It is easy to display. When the princess character HME is displayed, a chance-up notice may be generated at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this effect example), or 3 The chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the checkpoints. In addition, even if the princess character HME is displayed, the chance up notice may not occur once. Further, when the princess character HME is displayed, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, when the princess character HME is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, in this example of the presentation, an example in which the princess character HME is displayed instead of the sabotani character SBH is shown, but a character different from the princess character HME may be displayed. Further, the player may be allowed to select the character displayed in the CUM preparing display MTY in advance. For example, when the player has previously set the princess character HME to appear, the CUM preparing is in progress. The princess character HME may be displayed in the display MTY, or the sabotani character SBH may be displayed as the default character when the character to appear is not selected. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 174(A2) to (A4) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 174(A2) to (A4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171(A4) to (A6), except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 174 (A4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, the princess character HME is switched to the sabotani character SBH. In addition, the princess character HME may be continuously displayed even after the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 174 (B1) to FIG. 174 (B7) show another pattern of rank up effect of the CUM preparation display MTY.

FIG. 174(B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A2), and shows a state where the CUM preparation display MTY is started to be displayed.

After that, in FIG. 174 (B2), a small-sized button image 136as and a small-sized remaining time display meter MTs start to be displayed in the vicinity of the balloon displayed in the vicinity of the sabotani character SBH that constitutes the CUM preparation display MTY. Then, it is shown that the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is urged. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the operation valid period has not started yet.

Then, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B3), and in FIG. 174 (B4), the remaining time according to the elapsed time from the start of the operation valid period. It is shown that the gauge of the display meter MTs is decreasing. Note that a plurality of button images may be displayed including this small size button image 136as. In this case, the button displayed by one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). The operation corresponding to all of the images may be accepted, or only the operation corresponding to any one of the button images may be accepted. In addition, if the button effect related to the execution of the pre-reading notice and the button effect related to the execution of the notice of the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, may be referred to as “variation notice”) are performed at the same time, By operating the button 136 (chance button 136), the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect associated with the change notice may be prioritized, or the effect corresponding to the button effect associated with the look-ahead notice. The operation of the button 136 (chance button 136) may be prioritized, and one operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponds to the effect button 136 (chance button) corresponding to the button effect related to the change notice. Both the operation of (136) and the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effect related to the prefetching notice may be enabled. Further, when a plurality of button effects related to the prefetching notice are simultaneously performed, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, one of the effect buttons 136 (chance that corresponds to the button effect related to the prefetching notice) is operated. Only the operation of the button 136) may be enabled, or all the operations of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effects related to the plurality of prefetching notices that are being executed may be enabled. Further, when a plurality of button effects related to the change announcement are simultaneously performed, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, one of the effect buttons 136 corresponding to the button effect related to the change notice. Only the operation of the (chance button 136) may be valid, or all the operations of the effect buttons 136 (chance button 136) corresponding to the button effects related to the plurality of fluctuation notices being executed may be valid.

After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (B5), the effect EF110 in which the balloon explodes is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (B6). An animation has been performed, and it has been announced that the CUM preparation display MTY will be ranked up. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the rank-up effect of the CUM preparing display MTY is performed by a button effect different from the constituent elements of the CUM preparing display MTY is shown. Note that the switching animation may not be performed.

After that, when the explosion effect EF110 is erased, as shown in FIG. 174 (B7), the background color of the balloon displayed near the character SBH of the sabotani of the CUM preparing display MTY changes from white to red. The CUM preparation display MTY is ranked higher. It should be noted that after the rank of the CUM preparing display MTY is increased, the background color of the balloon is not limited to change from white to red and may be changed to another color. In this example of production, the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked higher by operating the production button 136 (chance button 136) during the operation valid period, but the production button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. The CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be ranked up even if the operation valid period has elapsed without the operation valid period, or if the operation valid period has passed without the effect button 136 (chance button 136) being operated, the CUM preparation is performed. The middle display MTY does not have to be ranked up. In addition, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), the CUM preparation display MTY may or may not be ranked up. When the button effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (B2), the CUM preparation display MTY may be upgraded.

174 (C1) to (C6) of FIG. 174 show another pattern of the effect by the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 174(C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 171(A5), and shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is different from the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171(A5) in that four check points are arranged, and the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2 are different from each other. The fourth checkpoint CP4 is arranged between the two. That is, it is informed that there is a possibility that a chance up notice may occur when the cursor SBH character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4. When the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance up that the number of check points is increased is larger than that of the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171(A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance up that the number of check points is reduced is smaller than that of the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171(A5). The meter CMT may be easily displayed. In addition, the number of check points in the chance up meter CMT is the same when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode and when the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed in a default display mode. May be. Also, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance up that the number of check points is increased is larger than that of the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171(A5). The meter CMT may be always displayed. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in a rank-up display mode, the chance up that the number of check points is reduced is smaller than that of the chance up meter CMT in the default display mode shown in FIG. 171(A5). The meter CMT may be always displayed.

FIG. 174 (C2) shows that the chance up advance notice has occurred at the first check point CP1 and the character SBH of Sabohani is moving on the meter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (C3), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4, an animation in which the blade edge of the sword held by the lord is shining brightly is started. That is, this effect is a chance-up notice at the fourth check point CP4, and this chance-up notice is more likely to occur when the big hit symbol pattern is fixedly displayed than when the lost symbol pattern is fixedly displayed. Has become.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C4), a balloon with the letters “Chance up, sharp sword” added is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and a chance up notice is given. I am informing you. It should be noted that the timing at which the anime with a shining sword starts and the timing at which the display of the balloon of the character SBOHANY SBH starts may be the same. Alternatively, an animation in which the sword tip shines may be started after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the fourth checkpoint CP4 during the animation of the shining sword, but may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (C5), the fourth check point CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice. The letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (C6) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, since the overlap of part of the display of "UP" has been eliminated, part of the display is visible.

In this production example, the display mode of the character SBH of Sabohani and the chance up meter CMT is set to the default display mode that is not ranked up, but the character SBH of the character Sabohani and the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT are displayed. There may be a case where at least one of them is displayed in a rank-up display mode. In this case, the character SBH of the sabotani or the meter portion may be ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to be displayed, or only the character SBH of the sabotani is ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT is started to display. Therefore, the meter portion may be ranked up while the effect is being produced by the chance up meter CMT. Further, only the meter portion may be ranked up at the stage when the chance up meter CMT starts to be displayed, and the character SBH of Sabohani may be ranked up during the production by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed in the rank up display mode only at the time when the display is started, and the rank up is prevented from being performed during the performance by the chance up meter CMT. Good.

FIG. 175 is a diagram showing how the chance up meter ranks up during the performance by the chance up meter. Here, since the effects shown in FIGS. 175(A1) to (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 170(A1) to 170(A5), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 175(A6) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is displayed in red, which is a color that is upgraded from white, which is the default color, at the timing when the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. This suggests that a chance-up notice is likely to occur at each checkpoint, and that the final big jackpot pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 175(A7) to (A26) are performed. The display of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT in FIGS. 175(A6) and 175(A7) has the same display mode. The effects shown in FIGS. 175(A7) to (A26) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 171(A7) to (A26) except that the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT is different. , Description is omitted. It should be noted that, when the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, the display mode of a part or all of the chance up meter CMT is the default display mode (for example, default color, sabotani The character SBH, etc.) may be displayed more easily in a display mode (for example, red, princess character HME, etc.).

FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the chance up meter whose rank has been upgraded.

FIG. 176(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 175(A5), and shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, when the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed, the color of the Sabohani character SBH itself is red, and a chance up notice is generated more than when the color of the Sabohani character SBH is the default color. In addition, it is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode. That is, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, a chance up notice may be issued at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of performance). The chance-up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. In addition, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may not occur even once. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is changed is shown, but the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. Further, a character different from the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed.

FIG. 176(B1) is an effect following FIG. 175(A5), and shows another display mode of the chance up meter CMT that has been upgraded. In FIG. 176(B1), the background color of the placard arranged at the final point GP has changed from the default color (for example, white) to red, which also increases the chance up meter CMT. Can be notified. At this time, for example, only the background color of a specific surface of the placard (for example, the surface displaying "V" or "development") is changed to red, and the surface displaying "x" is changed to the default color. It may be displayed, or the background color may be changed to red for the surface where "x" is displayed. In addition, in this production example, the display mode of the final point GP is changed, but the display mode of the start point SP may be changed to notify that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up.

FIG. 176(C1) is an effect following FIG. 175(A5), and shows another display mode of the chance up meter CMT that has been upgraded. FIG. 176(C1) shows that the second checkpoint CP2 is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (rectangular and white display mode). That is, a state is shown in which a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of part or all of the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, the display form of the second check point CP2 is a round and red display form, and, for example, it is informed that a chance up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 will always occur. Note that the display mode of other check points may be changed to a mode in which the rank is improved. Further, in this example of performance, the shape and color of the checkpoint are changed, but only the shape may be changed or only the color may be changed.

176 (D1) to (D2) in FIG. 176 show effects corresponding to the effects shown in (A10) to (A11) in FIG. 162, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT starts, and in this effect example. , The background color of the balloon of "START!!" for notifying the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani is shown to be red, whereby the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. The situation is suggested. The balloon of "START!!" is erased thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (D2). In this production example, the time period in which the balloon of "START!!" is displayed is short, so that it may be easy for the player to pay attention to the display of "START!!". In this production example, after the balloon of "START!!" is displayed, the balloon is erased after a predetermined time has passed. However, when the balloon has a rank-up display mode, it is not erased. The display may be maintained as it is. Further, in this example of effect, the background color of the balloon is changed, but the color of the character of the balloon may be changed. Further, the content of the characters displayed in the balloon may change, or the character notation may be used as it is.

176(E1) to FIG. 176(E6) show another effect example following FIG. 175(A5), and correspond to the effects shown in FIG. 170(A6) to FIG. 170(A11). ..

FIG. 176(E1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of the effect, the character SBH of Sabohani forming the chance up meter CMT is changed to the character HME of the princess, thereby notifying that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. In addition, in the vicinity of the princess character HME, a balloon displaying the characters "START!!" is displayed in a default display mode. Here, the character displayed in the CUM preparing display MTY displayed before the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (E1) may be the character SBH of Sabohani or the character of Princess. It may be HME or another character. In this effect example, the character SBH of Savohani is displayed in the CUM preparation display MTY, and it is shown that the character SBH is changed to the princess character HME when the chance up meter CMT is switched. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 176(E2) to (E6) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 176(E2) to (E6) are the same as those in FIGS. 170(A7) to (A11) except that the characters displayed on the chance up meter CMT are different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

176(F1) to FIG. 176(F7) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 175(A5), in which the chance up meter CMT ranks up during execution of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

FIG. 176 (F1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, it is shown that the notice icon YI is stocked. The advance notice icon YI appears, for example, by any of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 120 to 147.

FIG. 176 (F2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period of FIGS. 176(F1) to (F2), for example, the above-described effects shown in FIGS. 175(A6) to (A10) are excluded except that the notice icon YI is displayed. Has been done. After that, in FIG. 176 (F3), after a chance up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, the production progresses and the state of the character SBH of Sabohani is heading toward the second check point CP2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (F4), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, and the mode changes to mode d in which the box is open, and the rank is increased from the box. An animation that pops up the "UP" notice display for announcing is displayed. The display of "UP" that appears here is a display that gives advance notice of the rank up of the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the opening of the box (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 176 (F5), the used notice icon YI disappears and the notice display of “UP” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 176 (F5), the promotion animation using the notice display of the "UP" is started. In FIG. 176 (F6), the notice display of “UP” changes to a ball of light in the right symbol display area 208c, and then flies toward the chance up meter CMT and hits the chance up meter CMT. It is shown. At this time, the explosion effect EF111 is displayed so as to cover at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT may be ranked up without the promotion animation being performed, or when the chance up meter is ranked up due to the promotion animation being performed, or when the promotion animation is not being performed. There may be a case where the chance up meter CMT is upgraded. As described above, in this effect example, the state in which the advance notice is displayed by the elements other than the constituent elements of the chance up meter CMT and the rank up of the chance up meter CMT is performed is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (F7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from white to red, and it is notified that the chance up meter CMT has been ranked up. It should be noted that after the chance up meter CMT is ranked up, the meter portion may not only change from white to red but may change to another color. In addition, the chance up meter CMT may not be ranked up even though the promotion animation is performed.

FIG. 176 (G1) to FIG. 176 (G7) show another example of effects following FIG. 175 (A5), for example, and show that the chance up meter CMT ranks up due to a timer notice.

FIG. 176 (G1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT has a default display mode.

FIG. 176 (G2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175 (A10). That is, in the period of FIGS. 176 (G1) to (G2), for example, the above-described effect shown in FIGS. 175 (A6) to (A10) is performed. After that, in FIG. 176 (G3), after the chance up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, the production progresses, and the state that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading toward the second check point CP2 is shown. Further, in this example of the effect, the timer notice effect is started, and for example, the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen and displayed on the center right side of the display screen. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is "03:00", and a certain advance notice (rank up of the chance up meter CMT in this example of performance) is displayed 3 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is started. It has been suggested that it be done. On the timer notice display TM1, thereafter, the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that an advance notice is displayed by an element other than the constituent elements of the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter CMT is ranked up. The timer display countdown may be started after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, or may be started during the animation in which the timer notice display TM1 appears.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 176 (G4) to (G5), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 176 (G6), the timer notice display TM1 replaces the timer display and calls attention to the notice. Character is displayed. In this production, the chance up meter CMT is ranked up after the character "Attention" is displayed after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", but the "Attention" When the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” without displaying characters, the rank of the chance up meter CMT may be upgraded. Further, there are cases where the chance up meter CMT is ranked up after the word "attention" is displayed, and cases where the chance up meter CMT is ranked up without the word "attention" being displayed. Good.

Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (G7), the color of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT changes from white, which is the default color, to red, and it is notified that the chance up meter CMT has ranked up. After the rank of the chance up meter CMT is increased, the color of the meter portion may not be changed from white to red, but may be changed to another color.

FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining another pattern of rank up of the chance up meter.

177(A1) to FIG. 177(A7) show, for example, another effect example following FIG. 175(A5), in which the chance up meter CMT ranks up during the execution of the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown.

FIG. 177(A1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is in the default display mode.

FIG. 177(A2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 175(A10). That is, in the period of FIG. 177(A1)-(A2), for example, the above-described effect shown in FIG. 175(A6)-(A10) is performed. After that, in FIG. 177(A3), after the chance up notice is generated at the first check point CP1, the production progresses, and the state that the character SBH of Sabohani is heading toward the second check point CP2 is shown.

Then, FIG. 177 (A4) shows that the character SBH of Savohani stops on the meter and the rank-up animation is started. When the rank-up animation starts, as shown in FIG. 177(A5), the smoke effect EF112 is displayed so as to cover the entire character SBH of Savohani.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (A6), the color of the character SBH of the sabotani constituting the chance up meter CMT changes from the default color to red, and the chance up notice is likely to occur, and the big hit symbol is also generated. It is suggested that the mode is easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, a chance up notice may be issued at all of the displayed check points (for example, three check points CP1 to CP3 in this example of performance). The chance up notice may occur only at one or two of the three checkpoints. Further, even if the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may not occur once. In addition, when the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is red, the chance up notice may be issued n times (n=1 or more) in the effect by the chance up meter CMT. Further, the color of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed in a color other than red or the default color. For example, when it is displayed in rainbow color, the big hit may be determined. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the color of the character SBH of Sabohani is changed is shown, but the shape of the character SBH of Sabohani may be changed. Also, a character different from the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 177(A7), the character SBH of Sabohani resumes the progress on the meter and heads for the second checkpoint CP2. In this example of performance, the display mode of the character SBH of Sabohani may not change even though the rank-up animation is performed.

177(B1) to (B8) show another example of effects following FIG. 171(A5), for example, in which the chance up meter CMT ranks up during execution of effects by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 177(B1) to (B2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 177(A1) to (A2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177(B3) shows a state in which a speech bubble with the characters of "next point chance up performance high probability" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Savohani traveling on the meter of the chance up meter CMT. There is. This balloon display informs that the chance up notice is likely to occur at the second checkpoint CP2 at which the Sabohani character SBH will arrive next. Note that, for example, in the case of displaying a balloon with the characters "Next point chance up effect occurrence!!", as shown in FIG. 177(B3'), instead of the balloon shown in FIG. 177(B3). It may be possible to notify that the chance advance notice is always generated at the second check point CP2. Also, as shown in FIG. 177 (B3″), there may be a case where a balloon attached with the characters “Next point Opportunity improvement effect occurrence” is displayed. In this case, the second check point It can be suggested that in CP2, a chance up notice may occur, but it may not occur. When the balloon shown in FIG. 177(B3″) is displayed, for example, the chance up notice is less likely to occur at the second check point CP2 than in the case where the balloon shown in FIG. 177(B3) is displayed. Good. Further, by displaying only “high probability medium” in the balloon, it may be suggested that the chance up notice is likely to occur at any check point regardless of the specific check point. It should be noted that only the balloon with the character "Next point chance up performance high probability" in FIG. 177 (B3) may be displayed, and "Next point chance up performance occurrence!!" in FIG. 177 (B3'). Only the balloon with the character "" may be displayed. In addition, a balloon with the character "next point chance up effect high probability" in FIG. 177(B3) and/or a character "next point chance up effect occurrence!!" in FIG. 177(B3') is attached. The displayed balloon may be displayed, or the balloon with the characters in FIG. 177 (B3″) may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (B4), the display form of the second check point CP2 changes from the default display form to the chance-up display form (circular red display form). That is, a state is shown in which a display indicating that the chance up meter CMT is ranked up is performed by changing the display mode of part or all of the chance up meter CMT. It should be noted that a chance-up notice may always occur at a checkpoint whose display mode has changed and ranks up. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 177(B5) to (B8) are performed. 171 (A12) to FIG. 171 except that the display mode of the second checkpoint CP2 of the chance up meter CMT is different in the effect performed in the period of FIG. 177 (B5) to (B8). Since the effect is the same as that shown in (A17) and described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

177(C1) to (C6) show another example of effects following, for example, FIG. 170(A24), and show how a revival effect is being performed.

FIG. 177(C1) shows a state in which, as a result of the super reach, the lord was defeated by the swordsman, and all the decorative patterns of the left design, the middle design, and the right design were displayed again in the normal darkness. There is.

After that, in FIG. 177 (C2), a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani at the final point GP notices something is shown. That is, it is foretold that the revival effect will be generated by the character SBH of Sabohani.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C3), the resurrection cut-in PCI with the character “Have a good luck!!” is displayed together with the princess character, and then is displayed in a large size as shown in FIG. 177 (C4). The lord's character YMN appears with a sword. At this time, the lord's character YMN is displayed so as to overlap a part of the front surface side of the chance up meter CMT, and part of the character YMN is difficult to visually recognize. A part of the lord's character YMN may be overlapped by the chance up meter CMT, and a part of the lord's character YMN may be difficult to visually recognize. Further, the lord's character YMN may be displayed at a position not overlapping the chance up meter CMT, or the lord's character YMN and the chance up meter CMT may or may not be overlapped. Further, when the lord's character YMN appears, the lord's character YMN and the chance up meter CMN may always overlap. In this example of the effect, the revival cut-in PCI is displayed after being informed that the revival effect will be generated by the character SBH of Sabohani, but without being notified that the revival effect is generated by the character SBH of Savohani. The resurrection cut-in PCI may be displayed, or when the resurrection effect occurs after notifying that the sabotani character SBH will cause the resurrection effect, and when the sabotani character SBH causes the resurrection effect to occur. There may be a case where a revival effect occurs without it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (C5), the lord's character YMN cuts the sword from the upper left corner to the lower right corner of the display screen, and cuts off "decoration 6" as the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed. Is done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177 (C6), the middle pattern is changed from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7", and a combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is derived. Is notified. At this time, the placard at the final point GP of the chance up meter CMT is changed from the display of "x" to the display of "V", and it is informed that the big hit has been made also in this display.

In this effect example, for example, when a combination of lost decorative symbols is derived and the display is maintained without erasing the chance up meter CMT, a revival effect is performed. In this case, the revival effect may not be performed.

FIG. 178 is a diagram showing a state in which the upgraded opportunity up meter preparation display MTY continues to be displayed in the ranked up display mode even when the opportunity up meter CMT is switched.

178(A1) to (A5) are the effects following FIG. 175(A3), and are switched to the chance up meter CMT in the state where the color of the meter portion forming the CUM preparation display MTY is red. In this case, the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178(A1) to (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 173(C1) to (C3), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178(A4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT remains red. That is, when the CUM preparation display MTY has an increased chance, the chance up state is maintained even if the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 178 (A5) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 178(A5) is the same as that in FIG. 175(A7), so description thereof will be omitted.

178(B1) to (B5) are effects following FIG. 175(A3), and the chance up meter CMT is in a state where the color of the character SBH of the sabotani forming the CUM preparation display MTY is red. It shows that the character SBH of the sabotani of the chance up meter CMT continues to be red when it is switched to. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 178(B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 173(D1) to (D3), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178(B4) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of the effect, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the sabotani character SBH of the chance up meter CMT remains red. After that, as shown in FIG. 178(B5), the character SBH of the sabotani starts moving from the start point SP in the state of the red display mode.

178 (C1) to (C5) is an effect following FIG. 175 (A3), in a state in which the princess character HME is displayed instead of the Sabohan character SBH that constitutes the CUM preparing display MTY. When the chance up meter CMT is switched to, the character forming the chance up meter CMT is also a princess character HME. The effects shown in FIGS. 178(C1) to (C3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 174(A1) to 174(A3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178(C4) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, even if the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, the displayed character remains the princess character HME. After that, as shown in FIG. 178 (C5), the character configuring the chance up meter CMT starts moving from the start point SP while the princess character HME remains the character HME.

Note that it goes without saying that the effect example shown in FIG. 178 can be applied to both the CUM preparation display MTY and the chance up meter CMT effect example shown in this specification.

Further, in the present embodiment, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be easily ranked up when the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up as compared with when the rank is not ranked up. Further, when the CUM preparation display MTY does not rank up, the chance up meter CMT is more likely to be displayed in the default display mode than in the case where rank up. In addition, in the case where the big hit symbol mode is finally displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY and/or the chance up meter CMT is easier to rank up than when the lost symbol mode is finally displayed. May be configured as. For example, (1) CUM preparation display MTY is a default display mode and chance up meter CMT is a default display mode, (2) CUM preparation display MTY is a default display mode, and chance up meter CMT is a display mode in which the rank is upgraded, (3) CUM preparing display MTY is a display mode in which the rank is upgraded, and chance up meter CMT is a default display mode, and (4) CUM preparing display MTY is In the case where a pattern is prepared in which the display mode is ranked up and the chance up meter CMT is ranked up, the pattern is displayed in the pattern (2) rather than the pattern (1). In this case, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, and when the pattern (4) is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of the pattern (3). Further, the case of displaying in the pattern of (3) may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol mode than the case of displaying in the pattern of (2), or in the case of displaying in the pattern of (3). Rather than the case of being displayed in the pattern of (2), it may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the jackpot pattern mode. Further, the display in the pattern of (1) is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the lost symbol mode than the display in the pattern of (2), and is (3) more than that in the pattern of (4). When the pattern is displayed in), the fixed display may be easier to be confirmed and displayed. Further, the case of displaying in the pattern of (3) may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the lost pattern mode than the case of displaying in the pattern of (2), or in the case of displaying in the pattern of (3). Rather than the case where the pattern (2) is displayed, it may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the lost symbol mode.

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing an example of an effect for giving advance notice that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed.

179(A1) to FIG. 179(A8) show a state in which the display of the CUM-in-progress display MTY is foretold by a conversation announcement. Note that FIG. 179(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179(A2) shows that the conversation announcement has started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped.

Thereafter, in FIG. 179(A3), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the grand conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the old character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is configured by a remaining time display meter MT that indicates the remaining time. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 179(A3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the grandparent conversation image CI2 and the palace's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 179(A3), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the non-overlapping state. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the image CI1. In this effect example, the CUM preparation display MTY is easier to be displayed when the conversation notice is given than when the conversation notice is not given. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as that of FIG. 179(A2) is displayed), and the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is then started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 179(A4) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time has elapsed, and then, at a timing shown in FIG. 179(A5). When the person presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136), as shown in FIG. 179 (A6), the characters "standby!!" are displayed in the old conversation image CI2 instead of the operation promotion notification image. May be done. Thereby, it is announced that the CUM preparation display MTY will be displayed. The notice character display such as “standby!!” may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is displayed. When the operation valid period has elapsed without being operated, the characters "standby!!" due to the old conversation image CI2 may not be displayed. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY is also not displayed. Alternatively, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed. Further, even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated and the operation valid period elapses, the characters "standby!!" are displayed, and the CUM preparation display MTY is also displayed. Good. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, a character display other than “standby!!” or a notice may be given. Only when the word "standby!!" is displayed on the grandpa's conversation image CI2, even if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136), "standby!!" When a character is displayed and a character other than "standby!!" is displayed or announced by the old conversation image CI2, it is displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated within the operation valid period. Good. Further, the character display and the advance notice of the old conversation image CI2 are displayed only when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated regardless of the character display and the advance notice in the old conversation image CI2. Alternatively, even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not operated and the operation valid period elapses, the character display and the advance notice of the old conversation image CI2 may be displayed. Good. This is applicable to any of the conversation announcements mentioned herein.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179(A7), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is ended, the first decorative pattern is easily visible, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. It is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. Then, as shown in FIG. 179(A8), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179(A7) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A2) to (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179(B1) to FIG. 179(B5) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is foretold by the effect display by the notice icon YI.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(B1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(B1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(B1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special maps 1 and 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon YI appears and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 120 to 147.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179(B2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, and the display icon changes to the mode d in which the box is opened, and the box of the sabotani is displayed. An animation in which the notice display SH pops out is displayed. The notice display SH of the sabotani that appears here is a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the opening of the box (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 179(B3), the used notice icon YI disappears, and the notice display SH of Sabohani is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 179(B4), the notice display SH of the sabotani is used, the notice display SH of the sabotani is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire reserved icon display area HIS. It Then, as shown in FIG. 179(B5), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179(B4) to (B5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A2) to (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179(C1) to FIG. 179(C4) show a state in which the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is given a notice by the notice effect by the navigation character.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(C1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central area. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(C1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(C1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special maps 1 and 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. In addition, in this effect example, the navigation character YM by the lord's character is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character YM provides various effects and announcements according to the progress of the game.

FIG. 179(C2) shows a state in which the navigation character YM gives a navigation character advance notice. Specifically, when the navi character advance notice is started, a balloon with the characters “standby!!” displayed near the navi character YM is displayed to announce that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 179(C3), the navigation character YM is erased, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. The navigation character YM may not be deleted. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (C4), the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 179(C3) to (C4) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A2) to (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

179 (D1) to (D7) of FIG. 179 illustrate that the result of successful mini-game is displayed to give advance notice of the CUM preparation display MTY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179(D1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central area. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special maps 1 and 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is started in the effect icon display area DIS. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179 (D1), a rectangular mini-game display area MGD is formed in the effect icon display area DIS, and in this mini-game display area MGD, the title of the mini-game, “Jaken” is displayed. The characters "Confrontation" and the characters of the Lord and the swordsman are confronting each other. That is, in the mini-game display area MGD, a situation where the mini-game of the rock-paper-scissors confrontation is started is shown.

After that, in FIG. 179 (D2), the characters "Jakenken" are displayed to notify that the result of the mini game will be derived.

In FIG. 179 (D3), the character “Pon” is displayed, and a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character are each taking a rock-paper-scissors pose is shown. Specifically, Tonosama's character is playing "Ski" and Swordsman's character is playing "Par". Therefore, the result of the lord's character defeating the swordsman character is derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (D4), in the mini-game display area MGD, the character "Yoshimune Victory" indicating that the lord's character has won is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (D5). As the character of the swordsman is deleted, a balloon with the character "Standby!" is displayed in the vicinity of the lord's character, and it is announced that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179(D6), the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. Although the mini game display area MGD is displayed at this time, it may be erased before the display of the flame effect EF101, or at the timing when the flame effect EF101 is displayed. It may be deleted, or may be deleted after the display of the flame effect EF101. Further, the mini game display area MGD may be displayed until the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 179(D7), the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 179 (D7) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A3), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179(E1) to FIG. 179(E3) show how the result of the failure of the mini game is displayed. Here, FIG. 179(E1) is an effect following FIG. 179(D2).

In FIG. 179(E1), the character “Pon” is displayed, and the state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character are each taking a rock-paper-scissors pose is shown. In this example of the performance, the character of Tonosama is "Choki" and the character of Swordsman is "Goo". Therefore, the result of defeating the lord's character by the swordsman character is derived. Then, as shown in FIG. 179(E2), in the mini-game display area MGD, the character “Yoshimune defeat” indicating that the character of Tonosama has been defeated is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179(E3). The mini game display area MGD is erased, and the CUM preparation display MTY is not displayed. Although the flame effect EF101 is displayed here, an animation may be performed in which the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed. Further, there may be a case where the flame effect EF101 is displayed and then the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed despite the defeat of the lord's character.

In the present embodiment, these notice effects for giving notice of the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY are performed, so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed as compared with the case where the notice of the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY is not made. Suggests that they are susceptible to

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing another example of the effect of giving advance notice that the chance up meter preparation display is displayed.

FIG. 180(A1) to FIG. 180(A6) show how an example of the pending change animation is being performed. Here, FIG. 180(A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(A1), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 180(A2), No. 1 shown in FIG. The "Bomber" icon IHI of 4 appears at the right end of the screen, and the hold change animation starts. That is, the icon IHI of "Bomber" displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the hold change animation, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the hold icon while the icon “HIBON” IHI flies from right to left. The "bomber" icon IHI may be temporarily stopped before the target hold icon. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a fake that impersonates the target icon. Further, in this example of performance, the character "SP" is attached to the icon "HIB" of the bomber, and when the display form of the hold icon changes, the display form of the hold icon after the change changes to the pre-reading notice of super reach. It is suggested that the display mode will show. In addition, when the hold change animation by the "Bomber" icon IHI is performed, the hold icon may be successfully bombed and the display mode of the hold icon may change, or the hold icon may not be bombed. Therefore, the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

In FIG. 180(A3), a white bullet icon is fired from a white bomber icon. That is, the "bomber" icon IHI is composed of a white bomber icon and a white bullet icon. The target here is the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 180(A4), the bullet icon overlaps the first hold icon h11 from the front side. In FIG. 180(A5), the bullet icon hits the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image EF112. Then, in FIG. 180(A6), the effect image EF112 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of “SP” that gives advance notice that super-reach will be performed. As a result, by pre-reading that super-reach will be performed, it also indirectly pre-reads that the chance up meter CMT and/or CUM preparation display MTY will be displayed. The chance up meter CMT may not be displayed even when the super reach is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 displayed in the display mode of "SP". In this example of performance, by changing the display mode of the hold icon, advance notice of the occurrence of the super reach is given, and as a result, the advance indication of the chance up meter CMT or CUM preparation display MTY is indirectly given. However, the pre-reading notice of the super reach may be given by the hold icon or another type of pre-reading notice, and the indirect pre-reading notice regarding the display of the chance up meter CMT or the CUM preparation display MTY may be given. By the change icon or other type of change notice, it gives a notice of super reach in the symbol change display being executed, and indirectly gives a notice about the chance up meter CMT or CUM preparation display MTY. Good.

FIG. 180(B1) shows a state in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed in the conversation notification. FIG. 180(B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 179(A2).

FIG. 180(B1) shows that the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the lord's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and in this example of performance, not the grandparent's conversation image CI2 but the characters "STANDBY" together with the character Sabohani. The conversation image CIsh of Sabohani in which is displayed is displayed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284 and the second decorative symbol. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CIsh of Savohani or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 180(B1), at least part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped by the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani, and the conversation of the lord is more than in the case where the conversation image CI1 is not overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the image CI1. In this effect example, the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed by displaying the Sabohan conversation image CI1 including the Sabohan character composing the CUM preparing display MTY. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as that of FIG. 179(A2) is displayed), and the lord's conversation image CI1 is displayed. It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. In addition, in this example of performance, when the conversation image CIsh of Sabohani is displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed without fail, or the CUM preparation display MTY may not be displayed. Good.

FIGS. 180(C1) to 180(C3) show a situation in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is foretold in the conversation announcement, but the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed, and a preliminary announcement is made. Note that FIG. 180(C1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 179(A2).

FIG. 180(C1) shows that the conversation notice is being updated. Specifically, the palace's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the old conversation image CI2 is displayed. In this example, instead of displaying the effect button 136 (chance button 136)a and the remaining time meter, the grandstand conversation image CI2 is displayed with the characters "standby" and a question mark. This suggests that the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180(C2), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice is ended, the first decorative pattern is easily visible, and the flame effect EF101 is displayed. It is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS. However, in this effect example, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (C3), the flame effect EF101 is erased, but the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is not displayed. In other words, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not displayed, and a situation in which a conversation announcement of Gase is being performed is shown. The CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed in some cases. In addition, this effect example can also be applied to the pre-reading notice, and holds the pre-reading notice target of GASE (as a result, the CUM preparing display MTY is not displayed, or the chance up meter CMT is not displayed) or the CUM preparing. The pre-reading notice target pending change for displaying the display MTY may be executed for each change.

180(D1) to FIG. 180(D2), for example, following FIG. 179(A6), the timer advance notice display TM1 indicates that the timer advance notice preparation display for notifying the timer advance notice is being performed. Showing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180(D1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central area. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (D1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special maps 1 and 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which an animation (frame-in animation) in which the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right end of the display screen is being performed.

After that, when the frame-in animation is completed, as shown in FIG. 180 (D2), the timer notice is not displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and the character "STANDBY" is displayed, indicating that the timer notice is started. The display is done. It should be noted that it may be possible to give a notice that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed instead of the notice showing that the timer notice is started. After that, in the timer notice display TM1, the display of "STANDBY" is switched to the time display, and the timer notice is started. It should be noted that the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY may be displayed or the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY may be displayed without fail when a notice of "standby" is displayed by another notice display such as a conversation notice display. In some cases, there may be a case where a preparation-in-progress display indicating that preparation for another presentation such as a preparation-in-progress display for a timer notice presentation is being displayed. This also applies to the example productions shown in FIGS. 180(E1) to (E3) and FIGS. 180(F1) to (F3).

FIGS. 180(E1) to 180(E3) show a state in which the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is not displayed and the timer advance notice is started after the flame effect EF101 is displayed.

FIG. 180(E1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162(A2), and shows a state in which the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to cover the entire hold icon display area HIS.

Thereafter, when the flame effect 101 is erased, as shown in FIGS. 180(E2) to (E3), the timer notice display TMY rises from below the hold icon display area HIS, and the timer notice display TMY rises. Shows that the hold icon display area HIS is lifted. At this time, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed on the timer notice display TMY, indicating that the start of the timer notice is suspended. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 180(E2) to (E3) are the same as those in FIGS. 165(E1) to (E2), so description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 165 (E3) and thereafter are performed. In this effect example, a state in which the start of the timer advance notice is notified by the flame effect EF101 that notifies the display of the CUM preparation display MTY is shown.

FIG. 180 (F1) to FIG. 180 (F3) show a state in which a chance button preparing display for notifying that a chance button effect is to be performed is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 180 (F1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special maps 1 and 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, a state where the light effect EF113 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS and the button image display animation is started is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 180(F2), the button image 136a appears on the back side of the light effect EF113, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180(F3), the light effect EF113 is erased and rendered. The character “preparing” is displayed above the button 136 (chance button 136) a to give a notice (chance button effect notice) that the chance button effect will be started. Since the operation valid period has not started, nothing happens when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. It should be noted that after the chance button effect notice is displayed, the chance button effect is started, and the result of the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) in this opportunity button effect is that the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed. Good. Further, after the light effect EF113 is displayed, there may be a case where a display announcing that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed is displayed.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a chance up notice is given at a check point not shown in the chance up meter.

181(A1) to FIG. 181(A7) continue from FIG. 162(A11), for example, in the effect produced by the chance up meter CMT, at a checkpoint not shown on the meter, a chance up notice (a sharp sword It shows how a notice is displayed. Note that the effects performed in the periods of FIG. 181(A1) to FIG. 181(A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 170(A6) to FIG. 170(A10), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 181(A3) shows that the character SBH of the sabotani is heading from the first check point CP1 to the second check point CP2, and is at a substantially intermediate point between the first check point CP1 and the second check point CP2. There is. At this time, the blade of the sword held by the lord's character is shining brightly, showing a sharp appearance. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice (announcement of a sharp sword chance up) is being given.

Then, as shown in FIG. 181 (A4), the effect EF114 is displayed at the place where the character SBH of the sabotani is located in the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT, and the animation at which the fourth checkpoint CP4 occurs is started. Is shown. The fourth check point CP4 may be displayed without displaying the effect EF114. For example, the fourth check point CP4 may be displayed by a fade-in animation in which the fourth check point CP4 fades in. You may It is also possible to display the entire chance up meter CMT by switching and display the fourth check point CP4 on the chance up meter CMT after switching, without displaying that some check points increase. In addition, the advance notification (announcement) may be performed by displaying the fourth check point CP4 before the advance notice of the chance to increase the sharpness of the sword starts.

In FIG. 181(A5), a balloon with the characters “Chance up, sharp sword” added is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani to notify that a chance up notice has been given. The timing at which the display of the sword's blade shines may be the same as the timing at which the display of the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is started, or the timing of the display of the sword's blade shining may start after the character SBH A balloon may be displayed, or a display in which the blade edge of the sword is shining may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the fourth check point CP4 while the advance notice by the display of the sword's blade shining is being given, but it may not be stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (A6), the fourth check point CP4 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice. The letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (A7), the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move and moves toward the second check point CP2. In this example of performance, the chance up notice is given at the check points not shown on the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up notice is given only at the check points shown on the chance up meter CMT. It may have been done.

FIG. 181(B1) to FIG. 181(B7) show another production pattern in which a chance up notice (announcement display of a sharp sword) is performed at a checkpoint not shown in the meter in the production by the chance up meter CMT. Is shown. Note that FIG. 181 (B1
) To (B3) in the figure are the same as the effects shown in (A1) to (A3) in FIG. 181 and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 181(B4) shows a state in which a speech bubble with the words “Chance up, sharp sword” is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, informing that the chance up notice has been given. ing. In this example of performance, although the notification that the chance up notice is given is given, the check points corresponding to the chance up notice are not displayed. In the chance up meter CMT, when a chance up notice is given at a point other than the point where the check point is indicated in advance, the balloon for informing the occurrence of the chance up may not be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 181(B5), the balloon is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 181(B6), the character SBH of Sabohani starts to advance toward the second checkpoint CP2. In this example of performance, the check points are not displayed, but the character "UP" is displayed at the position of the meter corresponding to the timing at which the chance-up notice was given, thus increasing the reliability of the big hit. Suggests that. Here, the display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. Note that the character “UP” may not be displayed, and for example, in the chance up meter CMT, only when the chance up notice is generated at the timing corresponding to the check point previously displayed on the meter portion, this is dealt with. The character "UP" may be displayed at the position.

FIG. 181(B7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the second checkpoint CP2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29(9) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example using the chance up meter.

FIG. 182(A1) is another example of effect following FIG. 162(A8). In the effect example shown in FIG. 182(A1), the display mode of the chance up meter is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 162(A9). Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa is configured in a green bar shape, and instead of the character SBH of Savohani, the position of the marker MRKa is used to roughly notify the current progress of the reach production. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the moving speed of the marker MRKa is not constant but may change depending on the progress status of the effect, but may be constant. Further, in this effect example, unlike the chance up meter shown in FIG. 31(2f), a blank white circle display mark is displayed at each of the first check point CP1a to the third check point CP3a. Note that, as shown in FIG. 31(2f), characters and symbols such as question marks may be added to the mark and displayed. In this case, for example, by displaying characters such as "question mark", "!", and "UP", a notice related to a chance up notice, or a character such as a high probability state, the chance up notice is generated. You may make it suggest the ease. In addition, notices such as "!", "question mark", and "heat" are displayed in the mark to indicate that the chances of advance notice are likely to occur, or the chances of advance notice are likely to occur. It may be possible to give a notice of the ease of a big hit together with a suggestion of the importance. The start point and the end point are indicated by the start end and the end of the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa.

FIG. 182(A2) shows that the marker MRKa has started moving from the start point.

Then, FIG. 182(A3) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the first checkpoint CP1a. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the first checkpoint CP1a. Then, as shown in FIG. 182(A4), a state in which the boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side is shown.
Further, the mark of the first check point CP1a is erased. The mark of the first check point CP1a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the first check point CP1a. However, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a. Further, the mark may be erased before the boy character BOY appears, the mark may be erased at the timing when the boy character BOY appears, or the mark may be erased after the boy character BOY appears. May be done.

When the boy character BOY appears, as shown in FIG. 182(A5), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Boy Passes!!” is displayed near the marker MRKa, and the chance up notice is given. Is informed. As shown in FIGS. 182(A5) to (A6), the marker MRKa waits at the first check point CP1a at least while the boy character BOY appears and the balloon is displayed.

Then, FIGS. 182(A7) to (A8) show that the marker MRKa has started to move. At this time, instead of displaying the mark at the first check point CP1a, the character “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed over the gauge portion. The boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 182(A8).

Thereafter, when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a at the timing shown in FIG. 182(A9), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed in FIG. 182(A10), and the button effect is started. .. At this time, the marker MRKa is stopped and displayed at the second checkpoint CP2a. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A10), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) has not started, and no effect is produced even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. I don't know. Then, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 182(A11) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 182(A12), the player It is shown that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being pressed. Then, as shown in FIG. 182(A13), the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the gold cut-in image CI3 that may occur at the second check point CP2a is not displayed, and the chance up advance notice is not generated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 182(A13), the mark of the second check point CP2a is erased, but the character "UP" is not displayed in the gauge portion. Here, a display for notifying that the chance-up notice has not occurred may or may not be displayed. The mark of the second check point CP2a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a. However, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the second check point CP2a. The mark may be erased before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark may be erased after the button image 136a is displayed. May be. Further, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. The mark may be deleted before the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed. The mark may be erased after being deleted.

After that, when the marker MRKa starts moving from the second check point CP2a as shown in FIG. 182(A14) and the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a as shown in FIG. 182(A15), In 182 (A16), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va as a chance-up notice to notify that the notice by the button effect has started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts, the player can receive the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136). After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A17), in the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has started to move and is located before the final point. Further, the remaining time display meter MT shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased. The marker MRKa may be stopped at the third check point CP3a until the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or until the operation valid period elapses. In this example of performance, the lever image 136Va as a chance up notice is not displayed, so at the third check point CP3a on the chance up meter CMTa, the mark is erased and the character "UP" is not displayed on the gauge portion. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (A18), the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136), but the operation of the various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. As indicated by 182 (A19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Is notified. The chance up meter CMTa shows that the marker MRKa has reached the final point GP. The mark of the third check point CP3a may be erased at the timing when the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a, or the mark may be erased before the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a. However, the mark may be erased after the marker MRKa reaches the third check point CP3a. Further, the mark may be deleted before the button image 136a is displayed, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed, or the mark may be deleted after the button image 136a is displayed. May be. Further, the mark may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the mark may be deleted after the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated. Further, the mark may be erased before the middle symbol is displayed, the mark may be erased at the timing when the middle symbol is displayed, or the mark may be erased after the middle symbol is displayed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182 (A20), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are once displayed lighter than the normal darkness. Also, in the figure, a scene in which the lord has fallen is displayed. In FIG. 182 (A21), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed again in the normal darkness. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(B4) to (B8) are performed. In this example of performance, the chance image advance notice is not generated at the third check point CP3a, the button image 136a is displayed, and the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, but the result of the loss is derived. In this example of effect, the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, and various effect movable bodies as shown in FIG. 29 (23) are operated, and the result of the big hit is derived. There may be cases. Further, when the chance up notice is not generated at the third check point CP3a, it may be suggested that the loss is confirmed.

FIG. 182(B1) to FIG. 182(B6) show another effect pattern continued from FIG. 182(A1). The effect shown in FIG. 182(B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 182(A2), and the effect shown in FIG. 182(B1) is performed after the effect shown in FIG. 182(B1) is performed. The effects shown before (A2) to (A9) in FIG.

FIG. 182(B2) shows that the marker MRKa has reached the second checkpoint CP2a and the button effect has started. Further, in this effect example, the "geki" part of the display of the characters "gekiatsutsu!!" is displayed in the part corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2a of the gauge part of the chance up meter CMTa. It is shown. That is, in this production example, in addition to the display of “UP” indicating that the chance up notice has been issued, the change notice (the display of the character “Gekiatsu!!!!” is displayed in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa. ) Is displayed in some cases. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 182(A9) to (A13) are performed. In the meantime, the character "Gekiatsu!!!!!" is continuously displayed in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTa, and as the gauge changes from green to white as the marker MRKa progresses, "Gekiatsu!!!!" The word "!" gradually appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 182(B3), the characters "Gekiatsu!!!!" are completely displayed. By watching this, the player may be able to further improve his/her expectation for a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 171(A19) to (A23) are performed. Needless to say, at this time, the chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 182 (B3) is displayed instead of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 171 (A19). In addition, in the case where the chance-up notice is generated in FIG. 171 (B2), a part or all of the characters “Gekiatsu!!!!” are overlapped by the display of “UP” indicating that the chance-up notice is given. It may have been done.

When the player operates the effect lever 136V in the lever effect, as shown in FIG. 182(B4), the first large board action product 224Ga to the fourth large board action product 224Gd and the thousand-box work item 224H operate. The light guide plate IL emits light, and the effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTa is not displayed, but may be displayed.

After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first large-scale behavior component 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior component 224Gd and the thousand-box component 224H return to their initial positions, and the effect image fades out on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. Although the chance up meter CMT also fades in along with the animation display fade-in of the duel scene, the chance up meter CMT may be re-displayed after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. .. Note that this operation is performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 17(38) to (44).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 182(B5), a state is shown in which the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed and restarted. Specifically, the animation display of the duel scene shows that the enemy swordsman is in agony, and he is about to lose. In the chance up meter CMTa, the marker MRKa has reached the final point. Further, in this example of performance, since the advance notice that the lever image 136Va is displayed at the third check point CP3a has occurred, the character "UP" is displayed overlaid on the gauge portion. In this effect example, it is shown that the entire content displayed in the gauge portion of the marker MRKa is visible for the first time at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (B5). Note that, as shown in FIG. 182(B5), the display in the gauge portion of the marker MRKa may be deleted at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene is restarted, or the chance up meter CMTa itself may be deleted. This also applies when the result of loss is derived.

Then, in FIG. 182 (B6), the main character's lord wins the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is informed that it will be a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A13) to (A15) are performed.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing another pattern of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 183(A1) to FIG. 183(A6) show different effect patterns of the effects shown in FIG. 182(B1) to FIG. 182(B6).

FIG. 183(A1) shows that the marker MRKa has started moving from the start point. Unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 182(B1), this effect example shows that the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge portion changes from green to white, and not to rainbow. This iridescent display is a preliminary announcement display for confirming the big hit, and when the gauge portion changes to iridescent, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. In this production example, the advanced portion of the marker MRKa in the gauge has changed from green to iridescent, but it may change to another color, and the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the changing color. You may do so. For example, the advanced portion of the marker MRKa may not be changed from green to green so that the jackpot pattern mode can be displayed more easily than in the case of changing to white, or from green to red or gold. May be. Further, a pattern may appear in the advanced portion of the marker MRKa. Further, in this example of performance, the big hit announcement is given in the display mode of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa. However, for example, the advance notice of the chance up is announced such as suggesting the ease or frequency of occurrence of the opportunity up announcement. May be performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 183(A2) to (A6) are performed. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 183(A2) to (A6), the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRKa is different, and the character “Gekiatsu!!!!” is displayed at the second checkpoint CP2a. 182 (B2) to (B6) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 182(B2) to (B6), and the description thereof will be omitted.

183(B1) to FIG. 183(B16) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 162(A1) to FIG. 162(A15), and the timing at which a chance-up notice is generated in the chance-up meter CMTc. It is shown that the number of occurrences is informed although not explicitly stated.

The example of the effect shown in FIG. 183(B1) is, for example, an effect following the one in FIG. 162(A2), and corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 162(A3). In this effect example, the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTYa is different from the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 162(A3), and the CUM preparing display MTYa shown in FIG. 183(B1) is shown in FIG. 162(A3). The CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 2 is extended above, the gauge is also arranged above, and an information display area capable of displaying character information is formed below. It should be noted that in this information display area, the number of times the chance-up notice is generated or the big hit may be given. After that, the same effect as the effect shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A7) is performed.

FIG. 183(B2) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 162(A8). The effect shown in FIG. 183 (B2) is the same as that of FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparation display MTYa is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183(B3) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this example of performance, no checkpoint is displayed on the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMTc, and it is difficult to recognize the timing at which the chance up notice is issued or the number of times that the chance up is likely to occur. Also, the chance up meter CMTc extends upward similarly to the CUM preparation display MTYa, the gauge is also arranged above, and an information display area is formed below the gauge.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (B4), the characters "3 more places" are displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, and the occurrence timing of the chance up notice is not clear, but three chance ups are made. It has been announced that a notice may be given. In addition, FIG. 183 (B4) shows a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani that functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. This balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 183(B5).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183(B6), a character Boy of Boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY.

Then, in FIG. 183 (B7), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Boy Passed!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani to inform that the chance up notice has been given. That is, the player may understand that this timing is the first checkpoint. Further, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display is changed to the characters "two more places", and it is notified that the chance up notice may occur twice more. It should be noted that the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the appearance of the boy character BOY, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area at the timing when the boy character BOY appears. May be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed after the boy character BOY appears. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed before the balloon display of the character SBH of Savohani is displayed, or the information display is performed at the timing when the balloon display of the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed. The display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the area may be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed after the balloon display of the character SBH of Savohani is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B8), the first checkpoint CP1 marked in red is displayed at a position corresponding to the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated, and the reliability of the jackpot is improved due to the appearance of the notice. The word “UP” indicating that is displayed above it, and the history of occurrence of the chance up notice is shown. It should be noted that the display of "UP" is partially overlapped by the character SBH of Savohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize the display than in the case where they are not overlapped. Further, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

FIG. 183 (B9) is an effect corresponding to FIG. 171 (A19). In this example of performance, although not particularly shown, the gold cut-in image CI3, which is the second chance advance notice, is displayed as described above, and the position corresponding to the timing when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. The second checkpoint CP2 marked in red and the letters "UP" are displayed on the display, and the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is also changed to "1 more place". ing.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the letters “Chance Up Lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Savohani, and a chance up notice by lever production is started. I'm informing you. At this time, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is changed to "0 more places", and it is informed that there is no possibility of further chance up notice. There is. The chance up notice may be issued after the message "0 places left" is displayed. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed before the lever image 136Va is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice in the information display area may be changed at the timing when the lever image 136Va is displayed. May be changed, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area may be changed after the lever image 136Va is displayed.

Then, in FIG. 183 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. At this time, the third checkpoint CP3 marked in red is displayed at a position corresponding to the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated, and "UP" indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the chance up notice is shown. At this time, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice “0 places left” displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is erased. The display may be continued without deleting the display of "0 places left". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (B11), the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V has not started yet. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts, and the player can accept the operation of the effect lever 136V.

On the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 183 (B12), it is shown that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 183 (B13), the player When the production lever 136V is operated, as shown in FIG. 183(B14), the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd and the thousand-box box accessory 224H are activated, and the light guide plate IL emits light. The effect image is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMTc is not displayed, but may be displayed.

After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends, and the first large-scale behavior component 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior component 224Gd and the thousand-box component 224H return to their initial positions, and the effect image fades out on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To do. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. This operation is performed, for example, in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 17(38) to (44).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 183 (B15), a state in which the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted is shown. Specifically, the animation display of the duel scene shows that the enemy swordsman is in agony, and he is about to lose. Further, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SBH of the sabotani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows a character of "V" which means a big hit. In addition, in the information display area, "Congratulations!!" is displayed, celebrating that the big hit is derived. It is not necessary to display "Congratulations!!". In addition, when the result of loss is derived, for example, a character such as "sorry" may be displayed to display a game for comforting the player, or no display may be displayed in the information display area. May be. In addition, for example, when the revival effect as shown in FIGS. 177(C1) to (C6) is performed, a display such as “!! You may suggest that there is.

After that, in FIG. 183 (B16), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is notified that it is a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A13) to (A15) are performed.

FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183.

FIG. 184(A1) to FIG. 183(A3) are effects for displaying the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 183(B1) to FIG. 183(B2). An example is shown. Specifically, in the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 184(A1), the letters "3 more places" are displayed in the information display area provided below the gauge portion, and the chance up meter CMTc is used. It has been notified that the chance up notice may occur three times in the presentation. It should be noted that the number of notifications in the information display area and the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may always be the same, or they may or may not be the same. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 184(A2) to (A3) are performed. Note that the effects performed during the period shown in FIGS. 184(A1) to (A3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A8) except that the display mode of the chance up meter CMTc is different. Therefore, the description is omitted.

According to this effect example, when the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated is fixed for each super-reach, it may be possible to estimate the type of the super-reach to be developed. Further, for example, when the number of times the chance up notice is generated is configured to be displayed differently depending on the reliability of the big hit, it is possible to estimate the reliability of the big hit with respect to the symbol variation that causes the super reach. Sometimes you can.

The effect shown in FIG. 184(B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183(B4). In FIG. 184(B1), in addition to displaying the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, check points CP1 to CP3 are displayed to notify the occurrence timing of the chance up notice. There is. In this way, part or all of the timing at which the chance-up notice is generated may be notified by the chance-up meter CMTc, and the number of times the chance-up notice is generated may be notified. Instead of the display shown in FIG. 183(B4), the display shown in FIG. 184(B1) may be displayed.

FIG. 184(C1) to FIG. 184(C4) do not display the number of occurrences of the chance up notice in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc but warn that the chance up notice may occur. It shows the situation. In this case, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be displayed.

FIG. 184(C1) shows a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani who functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. This balloon is then erased as shown in FIG. 184(C2). It should be noted that this example of production is different from the production shown in FIGS. 183(B4) to (B5), and the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is not displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc.

In FIG. 184(C3), a question mark is displayed along with "Soon BOY is about to appear" in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, and the boy character COY is displayed at a timing corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1. It is informed that there is a possibility that a chance up notice will occur due to the appearance of. That is, in this example of performance, a situation is shown in which the timing is not clear, but there is a possibility that a chance-up notice may occur. It should be noted that the content of the advance notice of chance up may not be informed, and only the possibility of advance notice of chance up may be informed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 184(C4), the character Boy of Boy appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. Even if "BOY is about to appear" is displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, the boy character BOY may not be displayed and a chance advance notice may not be issued. Good. Further, at the timing when the boy character BOY is displayed, it may be notified that there is a possibility that another type of chance up notice other than the chance up notice due to the appearance of the boy character BOY may occur. In this case, for example, the big hit may be confirmed, or the advance notice of the chance may not be issued and the advance notice of the gambling may be given.

In FIG. 184(C5), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up BOY Passed!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani to notify that the chance up notice has been given. At this time, the characters "BOY is about to appear" in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc are deleted. The display in the information display area may be deleted before the Boy character BOY is displayed, may be deleted at the timing when the Boy character BOY is displayed, or the Boy character BOY may be displayed. It may be erased after being deleted. Further, the display in the information display area may be erased before the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed, may be erased at the timing when the balloon is displayed, or may be erased after the balloon is displayed. May be done. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 183(B8), the first check point CP1 or “UP” may be displayed to display the history that the chance-up notice has occurred. It should be noted that part or all of the timing at which the chance up notice is generated is notified by the chance up meter CMTc, and before the chance up notice corresponding to the timing notified by the chance up meter CMTc is given, this effect example As described above, in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc, a display may be displayed to give advance notice that a chance up notice such as "BOY is about to appear" will occur. That is, when the checkpoint is displayed, "Soon, Boy appears" may be displayed before the timing at which the boy character Boy is displayed.

FIG. 184(D1) to FIG. 184(D5) are other effect patterns of the effect following FIG. 183(B8), and notify that the number of times the chance up notice is generated increases in the effect by the opportunity up meter CMTc. It shows how the production is performed. Since the effect shown in FIG. 184 (D1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 183 (B8), description thereof will be omitted.

After that, in FIG. 184 (D2), a state is shown in which the effect of producing smoke (smoke effect EF115) is displayed in front of the sabotani character SBH advancing toward the final point GP.

After that, when the smoke effect EF115 is erased, as shown in FIG. 184(D3), the Chibihime character CHM appears, and as shown in FIG. 184(D4), “Chibihime character CHM is displayed near the character CHM. A balloon attached with the character "1UP!" is displayed, and it is informed that the number of times the chance-up notice is generated may increase by one. It should be noted that the character SBH of Sabohani is stopped and displayed while the production of increasing the number of times of advance notice of chances by the character CHM of Princess Chibi is being stopped, but the number of occurrences of advance notice of chances by character CHM of Princess Chibi is generated. May be in progress while the effect of increasing is being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 184 (D5), when the character CHM of Princess Chibi is erased, the number of occurrences of the chance up notice displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is displayed as "2 more places." From “3 more places”, and it is informed that there is a possibility that the chance up notice will occur three more times. It should be noted that the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated before the balloon "1UP!" of the princess Chibi character CHM is displayed, or the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated at the timing when the balloon is displayed. The display may be updated, or the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated after the balloon is displayed. Further, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be updated before the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted, or the display of the number of occurrences of the notice of chance-up notification may be updated at the timing when the character CHM of Princess Chibi is deleted. Alternatively, the display of the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be updated after the Chibihime character CHM is deleted. Further, since the character SBH of Sabohani was stopped and displayed while the effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance up notice by the character CHM of Chibihime was being performed, the character SBH of Sabohani was compared to the actual progress of the super reach. Since the position is on the front side and it is late, after that, the effect that the character SBH of Sabohani accelerates and is in a hurry, or the warp of the character SBH of Sabohani is responded to the actual progress of super reach. The edge of the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani may be adjusted such that the display position is changed to the position where the character SBH of Sabohani is adjusted, or the edge of the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani may not be adjusted.

In this example of the effect, the character CHM of Princess Chibi who performs only the effect related to the chance up meter CMTc is made to appear and the effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance up notice is performed. Using an element (for example, the character SBH of Savohani), for example, an effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be performed in the same manner as the rank up effect described above. Further, an effect of increasing the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be performed by another element that does not form the chance-up meter CMTc. For example, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the above-mentioned timer notice. Alternatively, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased by the effect of the notice icon YI, or the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice may be increased depending on the result of the mini game. The number of occurrences of the chance up notice may be increased by the effect using the navigation character YM shown in C1). Further, the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice to be increased is not limited to once, and may be two or more times. For example, "0UP!" or the like is displayed, and a production of a gasse that does not increase the number of occurrences of the chance-up notice. It may be performed. This can also be applied when the chance points are displayed.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing another effect pattern of effect using the chance up meter shown in FIG. 183.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185(A1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185(A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. Note that in FIG. 185(A1), the CUM preparing display MTYa shown in FIG. 183(B1) is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the hold icon display area HIS, which is difficult to visually recognize. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 185(A1), there is only one reservation in Toku-zu 1 and “1” and “0” are displayed in the second reservation number display. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the change icon h0 is No. 1 in FIG. It is the default display mode described in 1. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon YI appears and is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 120 to 147. Further, in this effect example, the character "meter x 1" is displayed in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa, which gives a notice that the effect using the chance up meter CMTc will be performed once. In this way, in this effect example, it can be said that the display in which the number of stocks of the meter is displayed in the information display area of the CUM preparing display MTYa functions as the preparing display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185(A2), the notice icon YI of the mode a in which the box is closed is used, and the mode is changed to the mode d in which the box is open and the box is ranked up. The animation that pops up the notice display of "UP" for notice is displayed. The “UP” notice display that appears here is a display that gives notice of an increase in the number of development developments using the chance up meter CMTc. It should be noted that before the notice icon YI is used, that is, before the box is opened, an effect of giving advance notice of the opening of the box (for example, an animation effect in which the box vibrates rattling) may be performed. In addition, when such an effect is performed, the box may or may not be actually opened.

In FIG. 185(A3), the used notice icon YI disappears and the notice display of "UP" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 185(A4), the promotion animation using the notice display of the "UP" is started. In FIG. 185(A4), the notice display of “UP” changes to the light ball EF116 in the right symbol display area 208c, and then flies toward the information display area of the CUM preparing display MTYa to jump to the information display area. The state of hitting the "1" portion indicating the number of times in "meter x 1" is shown. At this time, the entire CUM-in-progress display MTYa may be difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the portion of "1" in "meter x 1" is in a mode that is difficult to visually recognize. In this example of performance, the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc may be increased without the promotion animation, or the number of developments of the production using the chance up meter CMTc after the promotion animation is performed. May be increased, or the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc may be increased without the promotion animation being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 185(A5), the display of “meter×1” in the information display area becomes “meter×2”, and the effect using the chance up meter CMTc develops once and can be performed twice. It is announced that there is a possibility. After that, the same effect as the effect shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A7) is performed.

The effect shown in FIG. 185(A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 183(B2), and since the effect contents are the same except that the display in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc is different, the description will be made. Omit it.

FIG. 185(A7) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc. In this effect example, even when the CUM preparation display MTYa is switched to the chance up meter CMTc, the number of developments using the chance up meter CMTc is continuously displayed in the information display area of the chance up meter CMTc. Also, in FIG. 185(A7), at the timing when the display changes from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, the display of “meter×2” in the information display area becomes “meter×1”, and the chance up meter CMTc is changed. It is shown that execution of the first effect used has started. The display of “meter×2” in the information display area may be switched to “meter×1” before the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTYa to the chance up meter CMTc, or the chance is increased from the CUM preparation display MTYa. The display of “meter×2” in the information display area may be switched to “meter×1” after the display is switched to the meter CMTc. In addition, in this effect example, similar to the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A9), the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are displayed, and the number of times the opportunity up notice is displayed and the display timing are shown. ing.

FIG. 185(A8) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani that functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. Note that the balloon "START!!" may not be displayed. Further, "START!!" may or may not be displayed.

Then, in FIG. 185 (A9), the display of the placard at the final point GP is displayed as a "question mark", and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, the effect using the chance up meter CMTc can be developed. Suggests that there is a nature. After that, for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIGS. 29(3) to 29(16) is performed.

Then, in FIG. 185(A10), the same effect as in FIG. 29(17) is performed. The display of the placard at the final point GP on the chance up meter CMTc is still the display of "question mark".

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed instead of the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect as the advance notice of the chance is not started. The situation is shown. Therefore, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 185(A10) to (A12), the character SBH of Sabohani passes through the third checkpoint CP3 as it is and the third checkpoint. Neither the marking nor the letters "UP" are displayed in CP3. At the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A11), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is not yet started. The operation valid period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is started thereafter, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136).

Thereafter, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 185 (A12) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMTc, the character SBH of Sabohani is located in front of the final point GP.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (A13) within the operation valid period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 185 (A14) A message saying that the character of Tonosama and the enemy swordsman "Did you remove it?" is displayed along with a message that the victory or defeat is not decided. Further, the chance up meter CMTc displays the word "development" on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach production will be developed. Along with this, it is suggested that the production by the chance up meter CMTc develops and the second production is started.

After that, after the cut-in image CI4 by the lord's character shown in FIG. 185(A15) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 185(A16), the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach. Is started. Further, the chance up meter CMTc shows that the character SBH of Sabohani rides on a flying carpet and moves toward the starting point SP. At this time, the production by the chance up meter CMTc is developed, and the display of "meter x 1" in the information display area is changed to "meter x 0" assuming that the second production is performed. The display in the information display area may change before the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, the display in the information display area may change at the timing when the cut-in image CI4 is displayed, or the cut-in image CI4 may change. The display in the information display area may change after the image CI4 is displayed. Also, the display in the information display area may change before the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant starts, or the information display area may be changed at the timing when the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant starts. The display may change, or the display in the information display area may change after the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant is started. Further, the display of “meter×1” may be deleted without changing the display to “meter×0”.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 185(A16) to (A18), while the character SBH of Sabohani is heading to the start point SP, the display for changing the chance up meter CMTc while overlapping with the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed. To do. Therefore, due to the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani, for example, as shown in FIG. 185(A17), a part of the changed chance up meter CMT appears and the sixth check point CP6 appears, and FIG. 185(A18). As shown in, the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears.

FIG. 185(A18) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is again located at the start point SP. At this time, in the chance up meter CMTc, the display state before the change of the fifth check point CP5 and the sixth check point CP6 (the state in which the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed) Has become. Then, on the chance up meter CMTc, the movement of the character SBH of the sabotani is started.

After that, in FIG. 185 (A19), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach has been developed. The SP swordsman reach is a reach that develops and transitions to a swordsman reach, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into an SP swordsman reach. In the SP swordsman reach, as shown in Figure 185 (A19), the hero's lord and the enemy's swordsman face each other, which is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach, but they follow the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. The difference is that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in FIG. 185 (A19), a chance up advance notice showing that the co-panda cheering party KPD48 composed of three co-panda characters is supporting at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the fifth check point CP5. Is being conducted, and it has been announced that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach for jackpots has dramatically increased. The Kopanda supporter KPD48 may or may not always appear in the SP swordsman reach. After that, for example, the effect is performed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 30 (31b) to FIG. 30 (34b), and after that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, FIG. The effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 28, and it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. In addition, you may be notified that it will lose.

In this example of performance, an effect of increasing the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc is performed by an element different from the constituent elements of the CUM preparation display MTYa and the chance up meter CMTc. The display MTYa and the component of the chance up meter CMTc (for example, the character SBH of Savohani) may be used to perform the effect of increasing the number of developments of the effect using the chance up meter CMTc. Alternatively, the number of times the chance up meter is displayed may be stocked purely and displayed. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the number of chance up meters CMTc displayed corresponds to the number of times the super reach is developed, but the chance up meter CMTc is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the super reach is displayed. The present invention can also be applied to the case where there are a plurality of scenes in which the chance up meter CMTc is started to be displayed, such as when the display is changed to. In addition, when a plurality of executions of performance by the chance up meter are stocked, there may be a case where all of them are used or a case where only a part of them is used, and when a plurality of executions of performance by the chance up meter are stocked. In addition, it may be configured such that all of them are used.

FIG. 186 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of a pre-reading notice using the opportunity up meter preparing display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186(A1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central area. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186(A1), a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. This hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 186(A1), the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A2) to (A5) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A2) to (A5) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C2) to (C5), except that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is different. The description is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 163 (D4) to (D5), the CUM preparing display MTY may be displayed during the temporary stop display and the stop display of the symbols, or the temporary stop display and the stop of the symbols There may be both a case where the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed and a case where it is not displayed during the display. This also applies to the cases shown in FIGS. 186(A10) to (A11). This is also applicable to any of the embodiments described in this specification.

In FIG. 186 (A6), the suspension of the special figure 1 (first suspension) is exhausted, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first holding icon h11 (the holding icon that is the target of the pattern change this time) arranged on the first stage hs1 is the variable icon display area CIS. On the pedestal hs0 and displayed as a variation icon h0, and the second holding icon h12 arranged on the second stage hs2 moves to the first stage hs1 and is displayed as a first holding icon h11. In the decorative pattern display device 208,
The variable display of decorative patterns has also started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A7) to (A8) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A7) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163(C6) to (C7), except that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is different. The description is omitted.

After that, in FIG. 186(A9), a light effect EF117 is displayed at a position corresponding to the second check point CP2, and a state in which a checkpoint appearance animation is performed is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 186(A10), the light effect EF117 disappears and the second checkpoint CP2 appears. As described above, in this effect example, a state is displayed in which a check point for notifying a timing at which a chance-up notice is generated is displayed while the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. In this example of performance, only some check points (second check points CP2) of the check points displayed on the chance up meter CMT are displayed on the CUM preparation display MTY. All the check points (the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3) among the check points displayed on the CMT may be displayed on the CUM preparing display MTY. Further, in this example of the effect, the effect in which the checkpoint appears is performed by using the component (gauge portion) of the CUM preparing display MTY. The check points may be made to appear by an effect using the notice item YI, the mini game, the timer notice, etc.).

After that, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 186(A11), the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 6-decoration 4-decoration 1" is confirmed. Is displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased. Further, in this effect example, the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is hidden while the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, but the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is displayed while the decoration design is confirmed and displayed. May be.

After that, the suspension of the special figure 1 (first suspension) is exhausted, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the procedure shown in FIG. 186(A2). After the flame effect EF101 is displayed with, the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed again as shown in FIG. 186 (A12). At this time, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed in the display mode in the previous symbol variable display, that is, the mode in which the second check point CP2 is displayed. After that, for example, after the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A4) to (A7) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 186 (A13) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 186 (A13) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A8) except that the display mode of the CUM preparing display MTY is different, so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 186(A14) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. At this time, the first check point CP1 and the third check point CP3 that have been hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY appear. In addition, you may make it the production|generation which appears newly also about the checkpoint (2nd checkpoint CP2) which has already appeared in CUM preparation display MTY. It should be noted that a checkpoint that has been hidden in the CUM preparing display MTY may appear before the display is switched from the CUM preparing display MTY to the chance up meter CMT, or the chance increases from the CUM preparing display MTY. A check point that has been hidden in the CUM preparation display MTY may appear at the timing when the display is switched to the meter CMT, or the CUM is displayed after the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. A checkpoint, which has been hidden, may appear in the preparing display MTY. After that, FIG. 186 (A15) to FIG.
The effect shown in 6) is performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 186(A15) to (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 162(A10) to (A11), description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this example of performance, a continuous notice that the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays is performed, and the CUM preparing display MTY is being executed while the continuous notice is being executed by the CUM preparing display MTY. In the above, the effect of appearing the check point is performed, but the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is not performed for continuous notice, and the effect in which the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed only in the symbol variation display being executed is performed. Good. In this case, during the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, the effect that the checkpoint appears on the CUM preparation display MTY may be performed as described above. Further, in addition to the effect that the check points appear in the CUM preparation display MTY, the effect that the appeared check points are erased may be performed. In addition, in the production in which the checkpoint appears, a chance up notice corresponding to the appeared checkpoint may be given without exception, or when a chance production notice is not given corresponding to the appeared checkpoint. There may be. Also, all check points may appear. This is the effect example shown in FIG. 165 (F1) and the effect examples shown in FIGS. 166 (A1) to (A3), (B1), (C1), and (D1). Is also applicable.

FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining another display pattern of the chance up meter.

FIGS. 187(A1) to 187(A15) are another example of effects following FIG. 162(A7), in which the marker MRKb is displayed as a cursor on the chance up meter CMT in addition to the character SBH of Sabohani. Is shown.

FIG. 187(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A7), and shows a state of shifting to the super reach effect. A CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen.

After that, FIG. 187 (A2) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, in addition to the character SBH of Sabohani as the cursor, a marker MRKb formed of an inverted triangle is displayed at the feet of the character SBH of Sabohani. That is, it is shown that the progress of the super reach is displayed by two cursors. Although the character SBH of Sabohani is partially overlapped with the marker MRKb, it may be displayed at a position (for example, below the gauge) where the marker MRKb does not overlap with the character SBH of Sabohani. In this effect example, the marker MRKb moves in synchronization with the character SBH of Sabohani. After that, in the periods shown in FIGS. 187(A2) to (A15), for example, effects similar to those shown in FIGS. 29(2) to (26) are performed. Note that the effects performed in the periods shown in FIGS. 187(A2) to (A15) are shown in FIGS. 29(2) to 29(26) except that the marker MRKb is displayed on the chance up meter CMT. Since it is the same as, the description will be omitted.

In this example of the effect, the marker MRKb and the character SBH of the sabotani move in synchronization with each other. However, for example, an animation in which the character SBH of the sabotani waits at a check point during execution of the button effect or the lever effect (for example, There may be a period in which the marker MRKb is allowed to proceed while an animation or the like indicating that the player is stepping on and does not proceed, and the marker MRKb and the sabotani character SBH do not move in synchronization. Alternatively, one of the marker MRKb and the character SBH of the sabotani may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the other may be displayed at a position not corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect. Further, the marker MRKb may be displayed at a position corresponding to the progress of the super reach effect, and the character SBH of Sabohani may warp to the checkpoint to notify the occurrence of the chance up notice corresponding to the warped checkpoint. .. Further, when the chance up notice is not generated at a certain checkpoint, the Sabohani character SBH is then warped to the checkpoint at the position corresponding to the chance up notice that has not occurred, and corresponds to the checkpoint. It may be possible to indicate that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved by the fact that the advance notice of the chance increase has occurred. In addition, in this example of effect, an example of a case of a big hit has been described, but the marker MRKb can be similarly displayed in the case of a loss. In this case, for example, the revival effect may start without reaching the marker MRKb and/or the character SBH final point GP of the sabotani. In addition, in this example of performance, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed as the CUM preparing display MTY, and the marker MRK is not displayed, but the marker MRK is displayed while the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed and the character of Sabohani is displayed. The SBH may not be displayed, and the character SBH of the sabotani and the marker MRK may be displayed during the display of the CUM preparation display MTY. Further, (1) a pattern in which only the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed on the CUM preparing display MTY, (2) a pattern in which only the marker MRK is displayed in the CUM preparing display MTY, and (3) a sabotani is displayed on the CUM preparing display MTY. When there is a pattern in which both the character SBH and the marker MRK are displayed, there may be a case of (1), a case of (2), and a case of (3). Good. Further, the case (1) may be applicable and the case (3) may be applied. Further, the case (1) may be applicable and the case (2) may be applicable.

187(B1) to FIG. 187(B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 167(A7).

187(B1) to (B2) are, for example, the effects following FIG. 162(A7), and show a state of shifting to the super reach effect. A CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the lower left portion of the display screen.

After that, in FIG. 187 (B3), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this effect example, the gauge configuration in the chance up meter CMT is different from that shown in FIG. 162 (A9). Specifically, only one check point (second check point CP2) is displayed on the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 187 (B3), and the display mode of the final point GPa is also different. That is, in this production example, the final point GPa does not correspond to the timing at which the result of the symbol variation display is derived, and an example in which the production by the chance up meter CMT starts and ends during the super reach production is shown. There is. In other words, it can be said that this example of performance shows an example in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT that notifies the timing at which the chance up notice is given only during a certain period of the super reach effect.

FIG. 187(B4) shows a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani who functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to notify that the advance notice by the button effect has started. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT during the period from the start to the end of the button effect is shown. In this example of performance, the period from the start point SP to the second check point CP2 corresponds to the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is accepted. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B4), the operation valid period has not started yet, and the operation valid period starts thereafter.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 187 (B5) shows that the operation valid period has decreased. On the other hand, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of the sabotani is moving to a position corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 187 (B6), as shown in FIG. 187 (B7), the money shown in FIG. The cut-in image CI3 is displayed. At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani accelerates to the second check point CP2 regardless of the display position. In addition, you may warp to 2nd checkpoint CP2. It should be noted that the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed even after the operation valid period has elapsed, but may not be displayed. Further, in this example of performance, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period. However, for example, the character SBH of Sabohani progresses on the gauge. However, if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at the timing of reaching the check point (for example, the second check point CP2), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and the timing of reaching the check point is deviated. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated at a different timing, the gold cut-in image CI3 may not be displayed, or the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3. It may be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (B8), a balloon with the letters “Chance Up Gold Cut-In” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the cut-in surrounded by a gold frame is displayed. It informs that a notice has been given by displaying an image. Although the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, it may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, or the character SBH of Sabohani becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after reaching, or the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2 after the button effect is started. Further, in this example of performance, the point at which the chance up notice is generated by the second check point CP2 is shown, but the final point GPa may be shown as the point at which the chance up notice is generated. In that case, the final point GPa may not be reached, and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GPa, a chance up notice is generated, and when the character SBH of Sabohani does not reach the final point GPa. It is also possible that the advance notice of opportunity is not issued. Further, the final point GPa may be surely reached, and in this case, when the character SBH of the Sabohani reaches the final point GPa, a chance-up notice may be issued or even when the final point GPa is reached. It may be possible that the chance up notice is not issued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 187 (B9), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red and "UP" indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice. The letters are displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped.

After that, the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, and FIG. 187 (B10) shows that the final point GPa is reached. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (B11), the chance up meter CMT is erased and the super reach effect is continuously performed.

In this example of production, the production is performed by the chance up meter CMT in a part of the period of the super reach. However, a period other than the super reach (for example, a part of the normal reach or the reach state is not set). It may be performed during a part of the period in the variable display of symbols.

FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect of the chance up meter executed in another super reach.

FIGS. 188(A1) to (A16) are, for example, another example of effects following FIG. 16(24), and an effect of princess reach different from the swordsman reach as an example of the above-described super reach is performed. It shows the situation.

FIG. 188(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 16(24), and shows a state of shifting to super reach.

FIG. 188(A2) shows that the production of Hime Reach, which is an example of super reach, has started. Specifically, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the title "May be there..." that is a song sung by the princess character is displayed, and the first decorative pattern is in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is shown moving to the department.

After that, in FIG. 188 (A3), the appearance of the princess character is shown and dancing, and a strip-shaped lyrics display area is located slightly below the center of the display screen so as to overlap the front side of the princess character. LYC is arranged so as to extend to the left and right. In the lyrics display area LYC, the lyrics of the song sung by the princess character are displayed horizontally, and a triangular marker MRKc is displayed below the lyrics, and the marker MRKc is displayed as the song progresses. It is configured to move to the right and notifies the timing of singing. In the lyrics display area LYC shown in FIG. 188(A3), “but but true kindness” is displayed, and the character “excellent” is displayed in bold and larger size than other characters. There is. That is, this example suggests that a chance up notice may occur at the timing when the princess character sings the "Yu" portion. In other words, it can be said that the character "excellent" has the function of the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT described above. In this example of performance, the lyrics suggest the timing of the advance notification of the chance up, but for example, in the dialogue in the conversation announcement, the display mode of a specific character is made different from other characters and a voice adapted to the dialogue is output. However, it may be suggested that the chance up notice may occur at the timing when the voice corresponding to the specific character in the dialogue is output.

FIG. 188(A4) shows a state in which the marker MRKc moves in accordance with the song of the princess character. Then, in FIG. 188(A5), the upper and lower frames of the lyrics display area LYC change from white, which is the default display mode, to red at the timing when the princess character sings the "Yu" portion, and a chance up notice is given. Is shown.

Then, in FIG. 188(A6), a balloon with the characters "Chance up lyrics frame is red" is displayed near the character "Yu" to inform that the chance up notice has been given. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the lyrics display area LYC changes, or the display of the lyrics display area LYC may be displayed. A balloon may be displayed before the mode changes. The lyrics frame may be ranked in the order of white>red>gold>rainbow, or may be ranked higher by skipping one or more ranks, such as white to gold. In this case, the expectation of the big hit increases in the order of iridescent>gold>red>white, and in the case of iridescent, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, the changing aspect may be informed (for example, “excellent” is displayed in red) by a character informing the timing such as “excellent”. In addition, in this example of performance, the number of points at which a chance-up notice is issued is one. However, there may be a plurality of points at which a chance-up notice is issued. Also, the point at which the chance up notice is generated may change depending on the color of the lyrics frame even with the same reach. Further, the points at which the chance up notice is issued may be the same regardless of the color of the lyrics frame.

After that, in FIG. 188 (A7), the marker MRKc continues to move in accordance with the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase “But true kindness” ends. In this example of performance, the history of occurrence of the chance up notice is displayed only while the phrase displayed when the chance up notice is displayed is displayed. The history that the chance up notice is generated may be displayed even after the phrase displayed in is changed to another phrase. For example, the phrase for which the chance up notice is generated is referred to as the lyrics display area LYC. It may be displayed in another display area to indicate the type of the chance-up notice that has occurred, the number of times the chance-up notice has occurred, or the type of the chance-up notice that has occurred. It may be displayed explicitly or implicitly.

Subsequently, in FIG. 188(A8), the display of the lyrics in the lyrics display area LYC is switched, and the phrase “may be there” is displayed, and these characters have the same display mode.

In FIG. 188(A9), the marker MRKc is moving in accordance with the song of the princess character, and shows the timing when the phrase “may be there” is finished.

Then, in FIG. 188 (A10), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the final judge effect by the button effect is started is shown. When the button effect is started, the lyrics display area LYC is once erased. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A10), the operation valid period has not started yet, and the operation valid period starts thereafter. The lyrics display area LYC may be displayed as it is.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 188 (A11) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing.

Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A12), in FIG. 188 (A13), the lyrics display area LYC is displayed again and the lyrics display is performed. In the area LYC, the phrase "unknown" is displayed, showing that the final judge effect has been successful. After that, the marker MRKc moves in accordance with the song of the princess character, and when the phrase "unknown" finishes singing at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A14), the marker MRKc is also positioned to the right of the phrase "unknown". Like In the case of a loss, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed, for example, the screen goes dark, the song cannot be sung to the end, and an effect display in which the final judge effect fails is displayed. It will be.

FIG. 188 (A15) shows a state in which the lyrics display area LYC is erased and the song is cut out. After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A16), "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern to notify that it is a big hit.

188(B1) to (B11) show another example of effect following FIG. 162(A8), for example, in advance that a chance up notice is generated during execution of the effect by the opportunity up meter CMT. It shows how to notify.

FIG. 188(B1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 162(A8), and shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 188(B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first check point CP1 to third check point CP3 indicate that a chance-up notice may occur, and is intended to give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are respectively reached on the way of the character SBH of Sabohani, a specific notice may be issued. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. Further, in this example of production, the treasure chest TRG is displayed above the second check point CP2 in the gauge portion. This treasure box TRG indicates that the character SBH of Sabohani may be opened when the character SBH approaches, and there is a possibility that the occurrence of the chance up notice may be announced. In addition, in the period in FIG. 188 (B1) to FIG. 18 (B2), for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (2) to (7) is performed.

FIG. 188(B3) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani has started moving and then approached the treasure chest TRG. Then, as shown in FIG. 188 (B4), the treasure box TRG is opened, and the character "UP" appears in the treasure box TRG. As a result, at the second check point CP2, it is announced that the chance up notice will be generated by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. In this example of performance, the character SBH of Savohani opens the treasure box before reaching the second check point CP2 to give a notice that a chance-up notice will occur. However, when the character reaches the second check point CP2. The treasure chest TRG may be configured to open. That is, the appearance of the chance up notice may be notified by the appearance of the treasure box TRG at the second check point CP2 itself.

After that, in FIG. 188 (B5), the treasure box TRG is erased together with the character “UP”, and the character SBH of Sabohani continues to the second checkpoint CP2. Then, the effect shown in FIG. 188 (B6) to FIG. 188 (B11) is performed. Note that the effect performed in the period of FIG. 188 (B6) to FIG. 18 (B11) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 29 (9) to FIG.

In this example of performance, when the treasure box TRG is opened and the character “UP” appears, it is possible to give advance notice that a chance up notice will be generated at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the corresponding checkpoint. However, for example, it may be possible to give a notice that the mode will be more reliable with the occurrence of the chance up notice. Further, an icon indicating the content of the chance up notice that may occur at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani arrives at the checkpoint where the treasure box TRG is arranged may appear from the treasure box TRG, for example, A treasure box TRG is placed at 1 check point CP1, and when the treasure box TRG is opened, an icon of the face of the boy character BOY appears, and a chance up advance notice that the boy character BOY appears is given. You may give a notice.

FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the effect by the chance up meter.

189(A1) to FIG. 189(A6) show how a plurality of chance up notices are generated at one check point.

FIG. 189(A1) is, for example, an effect following FIG. 29(1). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 189(A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29(2) to 29(3), description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 189(A3), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the character Boy of Boyi appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. In addition, in this example of performance, the character KPD of the copanda appears from the right end of the display screen, and a chance up notice is given by the appearance of the character KPD of the copanda. Here, the Kopanda character KPD overlaps with the swordsman character in the super reach production. Note that the Kopanda character KPD may overlap with the swordsman character. Here, the Kopanda character KPD may appear after the Boy character BOY appears, the Boy character BOY may appear after the Kopanda character KPD appears, or the Boy character BOY. The co-panda character KPD may appear at the same time.

Then, in FIG. 189 (A4), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Boy Pass!!" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and the word "Chance Up Copanda Appears!!" is further above it. A balloon attached is also displayed, and it is informed that two chance-up notices have occurred at the first checkpoint CP1. In addition, the balloon of "Chance Up Boy Passed!!" and the balloon of "Chance Up Copanda Appeared!!" may be displayed at the same time, or after the balloon of "Chance Up Boy Passed!!" A speech bubble of "Chance up Copanda appears!!" may be displayed, or a speech bubble of "Chance up Boy pass!!" may be displayed after the speech bubble of "Chance up Copanda appears!!". The balloon of the sabotani character SBH may be displayed after the boy character BOY and the co-panda character KPD have appeared, or while the boy character BOY and the co-panda character KPD are appearing (for example, during the appearance animation display). It may be displayed or may be displayed before the appearance of the boy character BOY and the copanda character KPD. Further, the character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first check point CP1 while the advance notice by the display of the boy character BOY of the boy and the character KPD of the copanda is given, but may not be stopped. In addition, for example, a plurality of chance advance notices may be notified by a single balloon, such as “Chance up Boy has passed! And Kopanda appears!”.

FIG. 189(A5) shows a state in which the boy character BOY and the copanda character KPD are erased by the frame-out animation, and the balloon of the sabotani character SBH is also erased. Note that the balloon BOY and the co-panda character KPD may be erased after the balloon is erased, or the balloon BOY character and the co-panda character KPD may be erased after the balloon is erased. The balloon may be erased while the boy character BOY and the copanda character KPD are being erased (while the frame-out animation is displayed). The character Sabohani has started to move on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 189 (A6) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 189(A6) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 29(8), and therefore description thereof will be omitted. Thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29(9) and thereafter are performed. In this example of performance, even if a plurality of chance-up notices are issued, only one character “UP” indicating that the chance-up notices are generated is displayed, but a number corresponding to the number of chance-up notices that have occurred. “UP” (in this example of performance, two “UP” displays) may be displayed.

189(B1) to FIG. 189(B7), if there is a checkpoint for which no chance up notice has occurred in the production by the chance up meter during super reach, then a chance up notice is given at that checkpoint. The example of the production to be broken is shown. Note that, during the period of FIG. 189(B1) to FIG. 189(B2), for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 170(A6) to FIG. 170(A17) is performed.

After that, when the movement of the sabotani character SBH stops at the timing shown in FIG. 189(B3), the pause icon PSE overlaps part of the chance up meter CMT on the front side, as shown in FIG. 189(B4). Displayed in. That is, in this effect example, the pause icon PSE overlaps the chance up meter CMT, so that the effect by the chance up meter CMT is temporarily stopped. Note that the suspension may be displayed by some or all of the components of the chance up meter CMT.

Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (B5), the cut-in showing that the representation of the super reach is interrupted and the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach" is displayed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the big hit by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variable display has been effected with other contents. Although the cut-in display is a notice not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, it may be a notice of a chance increase directly related to the chance up meter CMT. Further, in this example of performance, the chance up meter CMT is displayed together with the pause icon PSE even during the period in which the princess cut-in display is displayed, but the pause icon PSE and the chance up meter CMT are displayed. It may be hidden. Alternatively, the pause icon PSE may be displayed to display the princess' cut-in before the production by the chance up meter CMT is paused. In this case, for example, the princess' cut-in is displayed. During the period, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and when the display of the princess's cut-in ends and the production of super reach is resumed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed with a pause icon PSE. You may make it the production|generation by CMT stop temporarily. Further, while the effect of super reach is temporarily stopped while the pause icon PSE is displayed, the effect may not be stopped by the chance up meter CMT and the character SBH of Savohani may be allowed to proceed. The effect of super reach may not be temporarily stopped, but the effect of the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily stopped. In addition, when the cut-in is displayed by the princess character, there may be a case where the pause icon PSE is displayed and the effect is temporarily stopped, and there is a case where the pause is not performed. In this case, the jackpot pattern mode may be settled more easily than in the case of not being temporarily stopped. Further, the progress of the super reach effect is progressing beyond the position of the character SBH of the sabotani shown in the chance up meter CMT, and the pause icon PSE is displayed to temporarily stop the super reach effect. An effect may be performed such that the progress and the position of the character SBH of Sabohani are aligned with each other.

FIG. 189(B6) shows a state in which the display of the cut-in by the princess character is finished and the suspended reach effect is restarted. However, the temporary stop icon PSE is displayed, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT is still stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 189 (B7), the pause icon PSE is erased, and the effect by the chance up meter CMT is restarted. At this time, the reach effect has been rewritten, and the display of the second checkpoint CP2, which has been displayed to the effect that the chance up notice has not occurred, is displayed in a mode marked in red and the chance up notice is also displayed. The character "UP" indicating that the occurrence has occurred is also displayed. That is, although the chance-up notice corresponding to the second check point CP2 has not been actually given, it is shown as being given, and the reliability of the big hit is improved. It should be noted that in this effect example, the pause icon PSE overlaps the chance up meter CMT, but, for example, when the chance up meter is provided with the above-described information display area. May display the word "temporary stop" in the information display area, or only the character "temporary stop" may be displayed on the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up meter such as the bar display or the character SBH of Sabohani. The images that make up the CMT may be hidden.

189(C1) to FIG. 189(C6) show another display mode of the chance up meter.

FIG. 189(C1) shows, for example, another effect pattern that follows FIG. 29(1). Specifically, when shifting to the super reach (swordsman reach), the chance up meter CMTx formed in a strip shape at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed extending left and right. The chance up meter CMTx changes its display in such a manner that the gauge displayed in blue decreases from left to right from the start point SPx to the final point GPx according to the progress of the production of the super reach. In addition, in the area on the left side of the start point SPx, the character "start" is displayed, and in the area on the right side of the final point GPx, the character "end" is displayed, and the start point SPx and the final point SPx of the chance up meter CMTx are displayed. The point GPx is specified. Further, a check point CPx is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance up meter CMTx, which indicates that there is a possibility that a chance up advance notice will be given at the timing when a marker MRKx described later reaches the check point CPx. The checkpoint CPx is a display mode in which a question mark is put in a white circle, which suggests that there is a possibility that some kind of chance advance notice may be given, and it may give the player a sense of expectation. Sometimes you can. The question mark does not have to be attached to the white circle, and the question mark may or may not be attached. Moreover, a mark, a character, or a symbol different from the question mark may be attached to the white circle.

In FIG. 189 (C2), the production by the chance up meter CMTx is started, and the marker MRKx moves from the start point SPx toward the final point GPx according to the progress of the production of the super reach, and the gauge decreases correspondingly. It shows how they are doing.

After that, when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx at the timing shown in FIG. 189 (C3), as shown in FIG. 189 (C4), the balloon marked with “super heat” in the elliptical frame is like that of the lord. It is displayed together with the face display YSMN, and gives a highly reliable chance up notice (big notice) of a big hit. It should be noted that even if the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, the chance-up notice may not be given, or another type of chance-up notice may be given. The marker MRKx may stand by at the position of the check point CPx while the chance-up notice is given, or may proceed toward the final point GPx without waiting.

FIG. 189 (C5) shows a state in which the display YSMN of the lord's face is erased, the chance up notice is finished, and the chance up meter CMTx progresses in accordance with the progress of the super reach production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 189 (C6), when the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is announced that it will be a big hit. To be done. In addition, when the marker MRKx reaches the final point GPx, it may be displayed that the hero's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman.

189(D1) to FIG. 189(D6) show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIG. 189(C1) to FIG. 189(C6). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1), the display at the check point CPx is a display mode in which the character “heat” is added in a white circle, and the timing when the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx. 189 (D4) gives a notice that the intense heat notice will be given. It should be noted that the occurrence of another type of chance up notice may be announced. Further, in the case of the display mode in which the character “heat” is attached in the white circle, the chance-up notice may or may not always occur. Also, as shown in FIG. 189 (D1′), a balloon may be displayed in the vicinity of the check point CPx in which the characters “A notice of “heat” is generated at this timing” are displayed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 189(D1) to (D6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 189(C1) to (C6), except that the display mode of the check points CPx is different. The description is omitted. In addition, before the marker MRKx reaches the check point CPx, the character "question mark" may be changed to the character "heat".

FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining another effect pattern of the effect by the chance up meter.

FIG. 190(A1) to FIG. 190(A4) show how, in the production by the chance up meter CMT, a notice different from the chance up notice is given by using the constituent elements of the chance up meter CMT.

FIG. 190(A1) is an effect that follows FIG. 29(2), for example. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 190(A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 29(3) to 29(4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 190(A3), since Boy's character BOY has appeared at the first checkpoint CP1, a balloon with the words "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and the chance up notice is given. It informs that it was done. At this time, the background color of the balloon is red, which suggests that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the pattern variation display being executed than when the background color of the balloon is the default color (white). ing. That is, it is shown that the background color of the balloon is red, and the advance notice is given. Then, the effect shown in FIG. 190 (A4) is performed. It should be noted that the background color of the balloon is configured to be more easily displayed in red than the default color (white) when the big hit symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed than when the lost symbol display mode is confirmed and displayed. Good.

After that, when the chance-up notice ends, as shown in FIG. 190(A4), the first check point CP1 is marked in red, and the chance-up notice is generated, which indicates that the jackpot reliability has increased. The character “UP” is displayed, and the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving.

FIG. 190(B1) to FIG. 190(B18) show an example of effect in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT during symbol fluctuation other than super reach. FIG. 190(B1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 162(A2). Since the effect shown in FIG. 190(B1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 162(3), description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 190(B2) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT in this example of performance, for example, indicates the progress of variable display of the decorative pattern, and the character SBH of Sabohani moves between the start point SP and the final point GP, and the current decoration depending on the position. The progress of variable display of symbols is roughly notified. At the final point GP in this example of performance, the placard is rotated and displayed including the display of "x" and the question mark, so that the player has a sense of expectation as to whether the game will be lost or the performance will be developed. ing. Here, the traveling speed of the character SBH of Sabohani is not constant but may vary depending on the progress situation of the effect, but may be constant. Note that in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 190(B2), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. That is, when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are respectively reached on the way of the character SBH of Sabohani, a specific notice may be issued.

FIG. 190(B3) to FIG. 190(B4) show a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani that functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani.

FIG. 190(B5) shows that the conversation announcement has started. When the conversation announcement is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the lord's character is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped.

Thereafter, in FIG. 190(B6), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the grand conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the old character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. It is configured by a remaining time display meter MT that indicates the remaining time. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 190 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284 or the second decorative symbol. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the grandparent conversation image CI2 and the palace's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 190(B6), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the lord's conversation image CI1 may not be displayed in a reduced size, and the lord's conversation image CI1 may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is then started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 190 (B7) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time has elapsed, and then the player creates an effect button 136 (chance button 136). When is pressed, as shown in FIG. 190(B8), in the grand conversation image CI2, the operation promotion notification image is replaced with a frame in which the operation promotion notification image is displayed, and the frame is gold-colored. A notice will be displayed that the characters "It's super hot!" Then, in the vicinity of Sabohani's character SBH, a balloon with the character "Chance up gold frame advance notice occurs!!" The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the grandpa conversation image CI2 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the grandpa conversation image CI2 changes. In addition, in FIG. 190 (B8), No. 1 illustrated in FIG. The icon "IHI" of "6. Gold bomber" appears at the right end of the screen, and the hold change animation starts. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the hold change animation in this example of performance, while the "gold bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the variable icon h0. The “gold bomber” icon IHI may be temporarily stopped before the target variable icon h0. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a fake that disguises the target icon. Further, in this production example, when the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed by performing the hold change animation by the icon “HIBON BOMBER” IHI, the display mode of the changed hold icon is a gold display mode. It has been suggested that In addition, when a hold change animation is performed by the icon IHI of the “gold bomber”, the variable icon h0 may be successfully bombed and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed without fail, or the variable icon h0 may be bombed. May fail and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change. In this example, after the display mode of the old conversation image CI2 has changed, the "gold bomber" icon IHI may appear to start the hold change animation, or after the hold change animation starts. The display mode of the old conversation image CI2 may change. That is, the period during which the chance-up notice regarding the first check point CP1 is given may overlap with the period during which the chance-up notice regarding the second check point CP2 is given. Further, the pending change animation may be started after the balloon of the character SBH of Savohani is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the pending change animation is started.

After that, in FIG. 190(B9), the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, and the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the advance notice. The letter “” is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the chance up notice is shown. Also, FIG. 190(B9) shows a state in which a gold bullet icon is fired from the gold bomber icon. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI is composed of a gold bomber icon and a gold bullet icon. The target here is the variation icon h0. Then, as shown in FIG. 190 (B10), the bullet icon hits the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the gold display mode. At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is moving on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second check point CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. The character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2 before the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the character SBH of the Savohani character may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. You may reach CP2. The character SBH of Sabohani is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 and is on standby.

Then, in FIG. 190 (B11), a balloon with the word "Chance Up Gold Hold" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and a chance up notice that the variable icon h0 is displayed in gold has occurred. Has been announced. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the balloon may be displayed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B12), the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, and the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot has been increased by the appearance of the notice, and thus “UP”. The character “” is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the opportunity advance notice is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 190 (B13), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and a reach state is formed, showing that the swing fluctuation display is being performed. ing. Here, the decorative symbol for which the swing fluctuation display is performed may overlap a part of the chance up meter CMT, or the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the chance up meter CMT.

In FIG. 190 (B14), before the transition to the super reach effect, the "decoration 7" that was swinging and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a is moved below the second ornamental symbol, and is swinging and fluctuating in the right symbol display area 208c. It is shown that the “decoration 7” that was being performed has moved to the bottom of the second hold number display. At this time, the character SBH of Sabohan reaches the third checkpoint CP3, and at this timing, the background image including the character CLA of the spirit is displayed. It should be noted that a background image including the spiritual character CLA may be displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3, or the spiritual image is displayed after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3. The background image including the character CLA may be displayed, or the character SBH of Sabohani may reach the third check point CP3 after the background image including the character CLA of the spirit is displayed.

Then, in FIG. 190 (B15), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Claire Background" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani, and a chance up notice that a background image including the spiritual character CLA is displayed is generated. It has been reported that you have done it. The balloon may be displayed at the timing when the background image including the spiritual character CLA is displayed, or the balloon may be displayed after the background image including the spiritual character CLA is displayed.

After that, in FIG. 190 (B16), the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, and the third checkpoint CP3 is marked in red, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved by the appearance of the notice, and "UP". The character “” is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the opportunity advance notice is shown. Also, in FIG. 190 (B16), the background image including the spiritual character CLA is switched to the default background image. The background image including the spirit character CLA may be continuously displayed until the background image of the super reach is displayed. Further, in FIG. 190(B16), the downward movement of the holding frame UI is started, and a state is shown in which the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS is left and the frame is displayed below the display screen. ..

FIG. 190(B17) shows a state where the holding frame UI is completely framed out downward with the pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS left. In addition, FIG. 190 (B17) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the final point GP. In addition, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in a form displayed as "SP", and it is notified that the placard will be moved to the super reach.

FIG. 190 (B18) shows that the VS reach master's reach super-reach effect has started. Then, the chance up meter CMT is erased as having achieved the purpose. It should be noted that after the transition to the super reach, the production with a new chance up meter may be started. The chance up meter CMT may be deleted before the super reach effect is started, may be deleted after the super reach effect is started, or may be deleted at the timing when the super reach effect is started. May be. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29(2) and thereafter are performed. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 191 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect produced by the chance up meter in the probability changing state.

FIG. 191(A1) to FIG. 191(A19) show how an effect using a chance up meter is performed as a pre-reading notice in the probability variation state.

FIG. 191(A1) shows a state in which after the big hit game is over, the symbol variation display of the first special diagram 2 is being performed. The control state shown in FIGS. 191(A1) to (A19) is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probably changed state with power support). Therefore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the probability changing state with the electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. In FIG. 191(A1), since the number of reservations in special map 2 is four, the four reservation icons (first reservation icon h21 to fourth reservation icon h24) of special map 2 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. , The hold icon on the left side becomes a hold icon with an older winning. In addition, you may make it also display the hold icon of special figure 1. In addition, in this production example, a background image of the universe in which the rocket heads toward the planet is displayed as the background image in the probability variation state with electric support. In addition, in this effect example, it is applied to a so-called ST machine in which a probability variation state with electric support of 50 rotations is given after the completion of all the jackpot games. The specification may be a positive change state with electric support until. Further, it may be a so-called V-ST machine in which a certain variation state with electric support of a predetermined rotation (for example, 50 rotations) is given when passing through a specific area provided in the variable winning port in the big hit game. In addition, the game state in this example of performance may not be the probability changing state with electric support, but may be a special map low probability general figure high probability state (electric support status) or a special map low probability general figure low probability state. Good. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold number of special figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of special figure 2 is 4. .. Then, the second decorative design is displayed in the lower left corner, and the second decorative design is also variably displayed according to the first decorative design. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen, a right-hit display for instructing the player to hit a game ball toward the right side of the game area 124 is displayed, and below that, there is a low probability of a normal figure special figure special probability. In the state, the number of consecutive hits, which is the number of big hits that occur until the ordinary figure low probability special figure low probability state again occurs, is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 191(A1), three consecutive games are displayed. “BONUS×3”, which indicates a square, is displayed. In addition, below the display of the number of consecutive holidays, the number of remaining symbol fluctuations in which the probability variation state with electric support is maintained is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. Is displayed.

In addition, in this production example, the song name display portion MN is provided in the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the song name of the song currently being output (here, the default "may be there" )) is displayed, and the music piece of the music title is output from the speaker 120. That is, the music output here is the music output in the probability changing state. Further, icons of up/down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed on the left side of the song name display portion MN, and it is informed that the songs can be selected by operating the up/down keys 137u, d.

In FIG. 191(A2), the symbol stop of the special figure 2 is performed, and the combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. In addition, the number of remaining reservations in the special figure 2 is 4, and both are in the default display mode.

FIG. 191(A3) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 has been exhausted and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has started the variable display of the decorative symbols. Even in the state of FIG. 191 (A3), the selected song is still “may be there”. It should be noted that a pre-reading notice or a change notice may be given by a song change notice, and an effect of forcibly changing the song selected by the player to another song may be given by the song change notice.

In FIG. 191(A4), a background change notice, which is a type of prefetch notice, is started. The background change notice in this example of performance is a notice that the continuous notice is started. The target of the background change notice here (pre-reading target hold) is the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon hs24 shown in FIG. 191(A2). In the background change notice, fusuma images (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes a fusuma image due to the animation in which the fusuma is closed (see FIG. 191 (A5)). Therefore, the hold icons h21, h22, h23, the first decorative symbol, and the music title display portion MN are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding doors and are invisible. At this time, the music output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then the sound is muted. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped and the sound effect may be output.

It should be noted that the background change notice may be started at the timing when the prefetch target suspension occurs. In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but it is not limited to the next change, and it may be started before the change of the prefetch target suspension ends. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target suspension.

In the background change notice, the appearance image (here, the image of the fusuma) may indicate the expectation of a big hit for the prefetch target hold. It may also function as a notice. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

FIG. 191(A6) shows a state in which an animation of opening a sliding door is performed. Thereafter, in FIG. 191(A7), the sliding doors are completely opened, and the sliding door images (FSML, FSMR) disappear. In this example of performance, the continuous notice is started by the notice of the background change. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a title of "Is it possible to perform large board" showing the content of the effect of the continuous announcement is displayed, and a chance up meter CMTy is displayed above this title. The chance up meter CMTy in this example of performance has a start point SPy, a final point GPy, and a first check point CP1y and a second check point CP2y disposed between them, and each is set as a white circle display mode, and a band is formed between the points. Are tied with a gauge. In addition, at the final point GPy, a symbol consisting of a question mark "!" is attached in a white circle, and a look-ahead notice is given regarding the symbol variation corresponding to the final point GPy. That is, it is announced that the final judgment production, which is the final production for notifying whether or not it is a big hit, will be performed after the symbol variation display is performed four times, including the symbol variation display being executed. The start point SPy corresponds to the symbol variation display being executed, the first check point CP1y corresponds to the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold, and the second check point CP2y, It corresponds to the variable display of symbols corresponding to the second hold, and the final point GPy corresponds to the variable display of symbols corresponding to the third hold which is the subject of the prefetching notice. Note that another look-ahead notice may be given to a point in which no display is performed among the points. Further, the display mode of each point does not change until the end of the effect of the continuous announcement, but the display mode may change for each symbol variation display, for example. Further, at the first check point CP1y and the second check point CP2y, it may be possible to give a notice that a chance up notice is given when the check point is reached. Further, the display in the white circle of the final point GPy is not limited to the one described above, and the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the big hit, for example, when “heat” is displayed. Is more likely to be a big hit than the symbol consisting of "!" and a question mark is displayed, and when "Hit" is displayed, the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display of the pre-reading notice. You may In addition, the ease of development into super reach and the change may be announced according to the display mode in the white circles at each point, or the type of super reach may be announced. Further, not only the final point GPy, but also the other points may be displayed in advance as a white circle. For example, even if some notice is displayed at the final point GPy, the previous check point (white circle or You may make a big hit by changing the symbol corresponding to a checkpoint that displays some sort of notice).

Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (A8), the lord's character YMy that functions as a cursor is displayed at the start point SPy.

After that, in FIG. 191 (A9), the character of the lord is carrying a thousand boxes, and an effect display is displayed in which the peasant who begs for money is just giving an award. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191(A10), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing in "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7".

FIG. 191(A11) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Toku-zu 1 shows 3 and the hold of Toku-zu 2 shows 2. Further, the display of the number of remaining symbol variations is updated to "48 more times". At this time, the lord's character YMy on the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the start point SPy to the first check point CP1y. In addition, it is shown that the character of the lord who is carrying the thousand boxes is struggling to make his face blush and throw the thousand boxes to the farmer, which fuels his expectation for a big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A12), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 6-decoration 4-decoration 1".

FIG. 191(A13) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Toku-zu 1 shows 3 and the hold of Toku-zu 2 shows 1. Further, the display of the number of remaining symbol variations is updated to "47 more times". At this time, the lord's character YMy on the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the first check point CP1y to the second check point CP2y. In addition, the character of Tonosama, who is in charge of the thousand boxes, is shown throwing the thousand boxes toward the farmer, further fueling his expectation for the big hit. After that, there is no progress in the effect display, and as shown in FIG. 191 (A14), the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 7".

FIG. 191(A15) shows that the suspension of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In the second hold display, the hold of Toku-zu 1 shows 3 and the hold of Toku-zu 2 shows 0. Further, the display of the number of remaining symbol fluctuations has been updated to "46 more". At this time, the lord's character YMy on the chance up meter CMTy is moving from the second check point CP2y to the final point GPy, and it is informed that the final judge effect is generated.

FIG. 191(A16) shows that, as a result of the final judge's presentation, the thousand boxes thrown by the lord have reached the farmer, and the small boxes are scattered from the thousand boxes. That is, it is informed that the result of the big hit will be derived assuming that the giving to the farmer was successful. In addition, you may make it the display of the appearance that the thousand boxes thrown by the lord reach the farmer and the ovals are scattered from the thousand boxes overlapping the chance up meter CMTy. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A17), a combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is derived, and a state in which swing fluctuation is performed is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A18), the combination of the decoration symbols of the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" (the jackpot pattern mode) is confirmed and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 191 (A19), a big hit start effect is performed. In this jackpot start effect, the "Super Yoshimune Bonus" indicating that the jackpot game due to the probability jackpot is started is displayed because the symbols of the probability jackpot (special jackpot) are arranged.

In this example of effect, for example, the effect may be always performed from the 50th rotation to the 53rd rotation during ST by the variation pattern table.

In addition, in this example of the effect, the continuous notice is given by the effect by the chance up meter, but such an effect by the opportunity up meter can be applied to the slot machine. For example, AT (assist time) is a slot machine that can be controlled to stop the reels in a correct order (pushing order) so that a payout of a high payout can be obtained, and is an advantageous game state in which the correct pressing order is notified. In the state, the character advances in the chance up meter according to the number of remaining AT games on the display, the final point is made to correspond to the number of remaining AT games being 0, and whether the AT state is continued by the display at the final point. Alternatively, it may be notified that there is a possibility that a final judgment effect may be performed to increase the number of remaining games in the AT state. In this case, depending on the display mode at the final point, the ease of continuing the AT state, the ease of adding the number of remaining games in the AT state, the number of games to be added, etc. should be suggested. May be. Also, at each of the start point, the end point, and one or more check points arranged between them, the winning combination is displayed or the winning combination is displayed in the corresponding white circle at the timing of the lever ON or the first stop or the second stop. The history may be displayed in a white circle.

As described above, in this effect example, the display mode of the chance up meter CMTy is changed for each symbol variation after the display is started, and is changed according to the time after the chance up meter CMTy is displayed. Can be said to be

FIG. 191(B1) to FIG. 191(B8) are effects following FIG. 191(A15) and show how the result of continuous notice and the result of loss are derived.

FIG. 191(B1) is an effect following FIG. 191(A15). In this effect example, a game ball is won in the second special figure starting port 232 between the time when the effect shown in FIG. 191 (A15) is performed and the time when the effect shown in FIG. 191 (B1) is performed. , Toku-zu 2 has been increased by one. In FIG. 191(B1), as a result of the judge's production, the lord fails to throw the thousand boxes and does not reach the farmer. Has been done. That is, it is notified that the result of the loss is derived because the application to the farmer has failed. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B2), a combination of lost decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is derived, and a state in which shake fluctuation is performed is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B3), the combination of the defective decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. In addition, after a combination of lost decorative patterns is derived, a revival effect may be performed to derive a combination of large-sized decorative patterns.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B4), after the suspension of the special figure 2 is digested and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, in FIG. 191 (B5), the background is changed to the background in the probability variation state with electric support. The background change effect is started. When the background change effect is started, fusuma images (FSML, FSMR) appear from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes a fusuma image due to the animation of closing the fusuma (see FIG. 191 (B6)). Therefore, the first decorative pattern and the chance up meter CMTy are overlapped from the front side by the image of the sliding doors and become invisible. At this time, the musical piece for continuous notice production output from the speaker 120 fades out, and then becomes a mute state. Note that the output of only the music may be stopped and the sound effect may be output.

In FIG. 191(B7), the sliding doors are opened, and the variable display of the first decorative pattern starts to be seen. In FIG. 191(B8), the sliding doors are completely opened and the sliding door image disappears. At this time, the hold icon is not displayed because the special figure 2 is on hold, but if the special figure 2 is on hold, the hold icon is visible while the fusuma animation is running. start. The hold icon may be displayed after the sliding doors are completely opened. In addition, as shown in FIG. 191 (B8), the background image after opening the fusuma is the background image of the castle town. It may be a background image of the universe.

FIG. 192 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a display of an effect by the chance up meter is performed on a display device other than the decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 192(A1) to FIG. 192(A5) are diagrams showing an example in which the POV display 224I is used to give advance notice of the CUM preparation display MTY.

In FIG. 192 (A1) during the variable display of the symbols, the POV display 224I, which has been hidden at the initial position until now, appears on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the state before rotating (still). State).

In FIG. 192(A2), on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the POV display 224I starts rotating operation, and when the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, the POV display 224I displays the “Sabohani” icon SH, and CUM preparation. The appearance of the medium display MTY is announced in advance. During acceleration of the POV display 224I, since none of the light emitting elements of the POV display 224I emit light, the variable display and the holding frame UI of the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are visually recognized. It is possible.

In FIG. 192(A3), the POV display 224I continues to rotate at a constant speed, and the icon "Sabohani" SH is still displayed, but the flame effect EF101 is displayed on the back side of the reserved icon display area HIS. It is displayed to cover the whole.

When the flame icon EF101 is displayed, the POV display 224I starts decelerating the rotation, and then, as shown in FIG. 192(A4), the POV display 224I is in a stationary state, and then in FIG. 192(A5). Return to the initial position as shown. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the flame effect EF101 is erased and the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. In this way, the appearance of the CUM preparing display MTY is announced, but the CUM preparing display MTY may not appear. The display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY after the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started, or after the display is switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparing display MTY. The deceleration operation of the POV display 224I may be started, or the display may be switched from the flame effect EF101 to the CUM preparation display MTY at the timing when the deceleration operation of the POV display 224I is started.

Even when the POV display 224I is rotating at a constant speed, the display area on the back side of the POV display 224I (the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) is visible, and in that display area. A performance display may be displayed. Further, in the acceleration state until the POV display 224I reaches from the stationary state to the constant speed state or in the deceleration state until the POV display 224I returns to the stationary state, the display area is easier to see than the constant speed state, and the acceleration state is higher. The effect display may be performed in the display area even in the deceleration state. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area only in the acceleration state or the deceleration state. Further, in the acceleration state or the deceleration state, at least the display area (which may be the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L) may be darkened to make the display of the POV display 224I stand out. Alternatively, the effect display may be performed in the display area in the accelerated state, and at least the display area may be darkened when the constant speed state is reached. The notes described here are also applicable to an example of presentation using the POV display 224I disclosed in this specification.

Further, the end timing of the constant speed rotation of the POV display 224I and the appearance timing of the icon "Sabohani" may be earlier than the end timing of the constant speed rotation, or even earlier than the appearance timing of the icon. Or both may be the same timing.

In addition, although the appearance notice using the POV display 224I has been described here, the light guide plate IL and other display means (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display device shown in FIG. 146). 208M', etc.) may execute the above-mentioned notice of appearance or another notice.

FIGS. 192(B1) to 192(B2) show an example of effect in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter due to the configuration in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

Up to now, the description centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has been described, but the contents displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It may be displayed (the same applies to the description in other embodiments herein). Further, the arrangement of the display means is not limited to the horizontal arrangement, but can be applied vertically. In other words, it does not mean that the technology described in this specification cannot be applied simply because the hardware configuration is different, and from the technical idea, even if the display units are arranged horizontally, they can be arranged vertically. Needless to say, the present invention can be applied even if the number of display means is different. Hereinafter, as an example of the vertical arrangement of the display means, an example in which the display means is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L will be described. Here, the display means arranged below is referred to as a fourth display means 208M' for description.

FIG. 192(B1) shows the fourth display means 208M' arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The fourth display means 208M' shown in FIG. 192(B1) is in the initial position. The fourth display means 208M' is surrounded by a frame around the display screen, and the upper edge of the frame of the fourth display means 208M' in the initial position is located at the lower end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the front side. Overlaps. The fourth display means 208M′ is arranged on the front side (player side) of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlaps the central portion of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side at the operating position ( For example, it can be moved from the initial position toward the position of the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 146 (Ka2′). That is, the fourth display means 208M' is also a movable means capable of moving up and down. In addition to the lifting operation, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be movable in the left-right direction. As a modification of the fourth display means 208M', the fourth display means 208M' may be fixedly arranged at the initial position.

On the fourth display means 208M′ shown in FIG. 192(B1), a holding frame having a configuration similar to the holding frame UI that has been displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so far is displayed. This hold frame also has a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and an effect icon display area. A pedestal on which the variable icon is placed is arranged in the variable icon display area. The hold icon display area is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area, and four stages (first stage to fourth stage) are arranged on the left base icon. The effect icon display area is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area, and the right base icon is arranged in the effect icon display area. In addition, the 2nd reservation number display (here "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed on the upper right of the 1st decorative design display device 208L. This basic configuration is the same in FIGS. 192(C1) to (C2) described later.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192(B1), after reaching the "decoration 7", the state is changed to the super reach effect (swordsman reach). On the other hand, the above-mentioned CUM preparation display MTY is displayed on the fourth display means 208M', and the start of the effect by the chance up meter CMT is foretold. At this time, the holding frame including the variable icon is not displayed, but the variable icon may be displayed. Moreover, you may make it display a reservation frame. Further, during the period when the CUM preparation display MTY or the chance up meter CMT is displayed on the fourth display device 208M', the variable icon may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Alternatively, the holding frame may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

The fourth display unit 208M' shown in FIG. 192(B2) shows that the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. After that, the effect by the chance up meter CMT is performed on the fourth display means 208M'.

192(C1) to FIG. 192(C2) show examples in which the effects shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A11) are realized using the fourth display means 208M'.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 192(C1), the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed at the substantially center of the left end portion of the display screen. In this effect example, the display position of the CUM preparation display MTY is different from the display position of the chance up meter CMT. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after reaching the "decoration 7", a transition to the super reach effect (swordsman reach) is shown. On the other hand, on the fourth display means 208M', "VS swordsman reach" for displaying the type of super reach effect is displayed.

After that, the moving animation in which the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY moves downward toward the fourth display means 208M' is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then the CUM preparation-in-progress display MTY is displayed on the fourth display means 208M'. When displayed, the moving animation is complete. In this case, the CUM preparation display MTY may be moved between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the fourth display means 208M'. Specifically, the CUM preparation display MTY may be displayed so as to straddle these display means, or may be displayed so as to warp between the display means without straddling these display means, The display units may be configured to be straddled or not straddled.

After that, as shown in FIG. 192 (C2), the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. In this example of performance, the CUM preparing display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT after the moving animation is completed, and then the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move (the former), but the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed. The character SBH of the sabotani may start moving (the latter) at the same time as the switching from the chance up meter CMT to the chance up meter CMT. The timing at which the Sabohani character SBH starts moving may be the former or the latter, and may be performed only by the former or only by the latter.

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of effect using the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 193(A1) to FIG. 193(A7) show a situation in which a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY occurring at the first check point CP1.

FIG. 193(A1) shows a state in which an animation of a duel scene between the main character Tonosama and the enemy swordsman is displayed, which has developed into super reach (swordsman reach). At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the animation of the duel scene and also displays the chance up meter CMT in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT, the effect has started and the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. Further, a pedestal hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS that constitutes the holding frame UI is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and the variably icon in the default display mode is placed on the pedestal hs0. In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed on the upper part, and the second number of holdings is displayed below it (here, the special symbol 1 is "1" and the special symbol 2 is "Representing "0") is displayed.

In FIG. 193(A2), the boy character BOY as the character of the chance up notice appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and proceeds toward the right end of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The situation is shown.

Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193(A3) is shown to start moving rightward as the boy character BOY moves rightward on the display screen. There is. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moving in accordance with the original movement display of the boy character BOY. At this time, in the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, of the character and chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (A4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to a position where the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M is substantially the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the second When the maximum movement position of the decorative pattern display device 208M is reached, "Chance up BOY passing!" is added near the character SBH of Savohani forming the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative pattern display device 208M. A balloon is displayed. The balloon may be displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position, or the balloon may be displayed after the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position. However, a balloon may be displayed at the timing when the second decorative symbol display device 208M reaches the maximum movement position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 193(A5), the character of Boy moves rightward so as to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and at the same time, the second decorative symbol display device. 208M starts moving toward the initial position. With the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, of the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the portions that do not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L are first to second decorative symbol display devices 208M. The display position is moved to the decorative pattern display device 208L. In addition, after the character Boy of Boy is completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position. , The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position before the boy character BOY has completely moved from the second decorative symbol display device 208M to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, Boy's character BOY is the first from the second decorative symbol display device 208M
The second decorative symbol display device 208M may start moving toward the initial position at the timing when the decorative symbol display device 208L is completely moved.

FIG. 193(A6) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M has returned to the initial position. At this time, the lord's character and the chance up meter CMT displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are completely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The boy character BOY continues to move to the right in the display screen and is displayed across the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the frame is framed out from the right end of the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In FIG. 193(A7), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of the notice is above it. It is displayed and shows the history of occurrence of the notice.

193(B1) to FIG. 193(B4) are example productions corresponding to FIG. 193(A3) to FIG. 193(A6), in which the display of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is shown. Note that FIG. 193 (B1) is an effect that follows FIG. 193 (A2).

The second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 193(B1) is shown to start moving rightward as the boy character BOY moves rightward on the display screen. At this time, in the display on the first decorative symbol display device 280L, for the portion overlapping the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the display of the overlapping portion is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the chance up meter CMT As for the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps on the front side, and therefore the chance up meter CMT displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the second. It will be hidden by the decorative pattern display device 208L. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 193(B2) to (B4) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 193(B2) to (B4) are shown in FIGS. 193(A4) to (A6) except that the chance up meter CMT is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

In the description so far, for example, when the error shown in FIGS. 111 to 116, simultaneous production, or volume/luminance adjustment is performed during the production display, it is shown in FIGS. Displayed as described above.

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, fourth display means 208M' Etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29(2)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display [eg, gold cut-in CI3 shown in FIG. 29(13)],
One of the plurality of types of display is a first notice display [for example, a CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162(3)],
The period display is a display that may be started during the display of the reach effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 162(A9), the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed during the super reach effect]. etc],
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing when the character SBH of Sabohan reaches the second checkpoint CP2, etc.] during the display of the reach effect display,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display.
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 162(3) to FIG. Before the meter CMT is displayed, etc.],
The first notice display is a display that gives notice that the period display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice display is displayed before the notification that a certain period is started by the period display, the period display is displayed, so that the certain period is started in advance. In some cases, it may be possible to understand that the display start of the period display is not overlooked.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the period display may be started only while the reach effect display is being displayed, or may be started even when the reach effect display is not being displayed. Further, the period display may be always started during the display of the reach effect display, or may not be started during the display of the reach effect display.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify other than the first timing during the display of the reach effect display. Good. Further, the period display may necessarily notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify the first timing during the display of the reach effect display.

In addition, only the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or a display other than the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may not be displayed before the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only before the period display is displayed, or the first notice display may be displayed other than before the period display is displayed. May be.

Further, the first notice display may give a notice only that the period display is displayed, or may give a notice other than that the period display is displayed. In addition, the first notice display may be a notice that the period display is displayed, or may not give a notice that the period display is displayed.

Instead of the advance notice display, the advance notice can be given by the action of the effect movable body, the voice output by the speaker, or the light emission by the light emitting means.

Further, the notice display may be started during the big hit game.

Further, the notice display may be displayed during the display of the period display, and for example, the notice display may function as a notice display for notifying that the first effect display is displayed.

Further, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is displayed, for example, the period display is performed after the notice display is performed, and then the notice display is displayed. May be.

Further, the notice display may be displayed after the period display is hidden, and may be displayed as a function of notifying that the period display was displayed, for example.

It should be noted that "a gaming machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first notice display,
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing in a certain period,
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may start,
The first notice display may be displayed before the period display is displayed,
The first notice display is a display that gives notice that the period display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. It may be.

In addition, "the period display is a display for notifying the first timing during the display of the reach effect display" means that "the period display is a timing at which a chance up notice (or a chance up effect) is given. It is a display of a meter (chance up timing meter) for informing.

In addition, as a case where it is possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance-up effect is performed is notified by the chance-up meter preparing display (that is, regardless of the display mode of the chance-up meter preparing display, the chance-up meter preparing display is If any chance up point is notified by the chance up meter just by being displayed (for example, if the chance up meter is always displayed when the opportunity up preparation display is made, or by the chance up meter at least once. For example, when notifying the opportunity up point)),
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first notice display may be a notice display for notifying the first timing.
(3) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that one or more timings of a plurality of certain effects including the first timing are notified by the period display. .. Further, there may be a timing that cannot be specified among the timings notified in the period display.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that can specify that “the timing at which all certain effects are performed” is notified in the period display.
(5) The first notice display may be "a notice display informing of one or more timings among a plurality of timings including the first timing. Further, in the period display. There may be a timing not notified in the notified timing.
(6) The first notice display may be a notice display that notifies the "timing at which all certain effects are performed" that is notified in the period display.

In addition, when it is not possible to specify that the timing at which a certain chance-up effect is performed is notified by the chance-up meter preparing display (for example, when the chance-up preparing display is unclear or the chance-up meter is displayed, Even if you do not notify the opportunity up point),
(1) The first notice display may be a notice display that cannot specify that the first timing is notified by the period display.
(2) The first notice display may be a notice display in which the first timing is not notified.
(3) The first notice display may be a notice display in which it is not possible to specify in the period display that "the timing at which all certain effects are performed" is notified.
(4) The first notice display may be a notice display that does not notify the "timing at which all certain effects are performed" that is notified in the period display.

Further, the period display may notify the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed without fail.

Further, the period display may notify the timing at which one or more certain effects are performed, or may not notify the timing at which a certain effect is performed even once.

Further, when the display of the period display is displayed, the cursor display may already move.

The cursor display may move after the period display is displayed.

In addition, “the period display is a display including a cursor display [for example, the character SBH of Sabohani forming the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162(A9)],
The period display is a certain period during the display of the reach effect display [for example, a period from the first timing in super reach shown in FIG. 162 (A9) to (A12) until the middle symbol is derived. Etc.],
From the second position [eg, the starting point SP in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162(A9)] to the first position [eg, in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162(A9)]. 2 check points CP2 and the like] to a third position [for example, the final point GP and the like in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9)] to notify the start and end of the certain period. Is configured to
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timing of the first position may be easy to understand.

Here, the period display may include only the cursor display, or may include a display other than the cursor display. Further, the period display may or may not always include the cursor display.

Further, the period display may notify only a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may notify a period other than the certain period during the display of the reach effect display. .. In addition, the period display may necessarily notify a certain period during the display of the reach effect display, or may not notify a certain period during the display of the reach effect display. ..

Further, the cursor display may be configured to move only from the start to the end of a certain period by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position. By moving the display from the second position to the third position through the first position, the display may be configured to notify other than the start to the end of a certain period. In addition, the cursor display may be configured to move from the second position to the third position and then to the third position so that the notification from the start to the end of a certain period is surely given. By moving the display from the second position to the third position to the third position, the display may not be notified from the start to the end of a certain period.

Further, the cursor display may be configured to notify from the start to the end of a certain period only by moving from the second position to the third position via the first position. The display may be configured to be notified from the start to the end of a certain period by something other than moving from the second position to the third position via the first position.

Further, when the cursor display reaches the first position, only the first timing may be notified, or when the cursor display reaches the first position, the first timing is reached. Other than this may be notified. Further, when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be informed that it is the first timing, or when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is the first timing. There may be a case where the notification is not made.

In addition, only when the cursor display reaches the first position, it may be notified that it is the first timing, or even when the cursor display reaches the first position, The timing may be notified.

The positional relationship between the first position, the second position, and the third position may be first position>second position>third position, or other positional relationship. The cursor display may be configured to move in the order of second position>first position>third position. To be more precise, "the position where the cursor display reaches first when the display moves" is the front, and "the position where the cursor display reaches the rear" is the rear.

In addition, “The period display is a chance up display [for example, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 marked in red shown in FIG. 29(15) or the appearance of a chance up notice has increased the jackpot reliability. "Displaying characters such as "UP" indicating that
The chance-up display is a display for notifying that the display of the first effect display has started at the first timing [eg, as shown in FIG. 29(15), the second check The point CP2 is marked in red and the display of the character "UP" is displayed, so that a chance up notice is displayed by displaying the gold cut-in CI3 at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2. Informing that it has started, etc.],
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position [for example, shown in FIG. 29 (15). As described above, when the chance up notice is displayed by displaying the gold cut-in CI3, the second check point CP2 is marked in red and the letters “UP” are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand that the first effect display is displayed.

Here, as the period display, only a chance up display may be displayed, or a display other than the chance up display may be displayed. Further, the period display may be one in which the chance up display is always displayed, or may be one in which the chance up display may not be displayed.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, only the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first opportunity display may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, a display other than the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position. Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display may be always displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or the first opportunity display may be displayed at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance up display may not be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display may be displayed only at the display position corresponding to the first position, or at the first timing. When the display of the effect display is started, the chance up display may be displayed at a display position other than the display position corresponding to the first position.

Further, only when the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position, or at the first timing. Even when the display of the effect display is started, the chance up display may be displayed at the display position corresponding to the first position.

When the chance up display is displayed, the chance up display may be continuously displayed until the cursor display reaches at least the third position. In this case, the chance-up display may be performed before the cursor display reaches the third position.

In addition, “the first notice display is a display that may be displayed as a movement [for example, as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the first notice display may be a moving display, it may be possible to guide the line of sight to the first notice display and pay attention to the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may display only the movement display, or may display other than the movement display. Further, the first notice display may be the one that does not always display the movement, or the one that may not display the movement.

In addition, “the display of the period display is started after the first notice display starts the movement display [for example, as shown in FIG. 168 (A8) to FIG. After the MTY is moved and displayed, the CUM preparation display MTY is switched to the chance up meter CMT, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to grasp the timing at which the display of the period display is started.

Here, only the display of the period display may be started after the first notice display starts the moving display, or the display other than the display of the period display after the first notice display starts the moving display. It may be started. Also, the display of the period display may be always started after the first notice display starts moving display, or the display of the period display may not start after the first notice display starts moving display. It may be.

The period display may be moved and displayed.

Further, it may be notified that a certain period has started after the moving display of the first notice display is finished.

Further, the timing at which the moving display of the first notice display is started can be appropriately set.

Further, “the display position of the first notice display is changed by the movement display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 168(A8) to (A10), the movement display of the CUM preparation display MTY causes the CUM to be changed. The display position of the in-preparation display MTY has been changed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to change the display of the first notice display by changing the display position of the first notice display.

Here, only the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the moving display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by the moving display. Further, the display position of the first notice display may be always changed by the moving display, or the display position of the first notice display may not be changed by the moving display.

Further, the display position of the first notice display may be changed only by the movement display, or the display position of the first notice display may be changed by a display other than the movement display.

In addition, "the first notice display is a display that may be displayed in a first display mode [eg, a default display mode of the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3)],
The first notice display is the second display mode [for example, the display mode in which the background color of the balloon forming the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 171(A3) is red, or the CUM shown in FIG. 178(A1). In the display mode in which the meter portion forming the preparing display MTY is red, the display mode in which the character SBH of the sabotani forming the CUM preparing display MTY shown in FIG. 178(B1) is red, and in FIG. 178(C1) In the display mode in which the cursor configuring the CUM-in-progress display MTY shown is the princess character HME, etc.],
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot pattern mode is finally larger than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Easy to confirm
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to expect the variable display in which the period display is displayed by looking at the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the first display mode and the second display mode may be partially different display modes or all different display modes.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, only the jackpot symbol mode is finally determined, as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to be displayed, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. A symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot pattern mode is always finalized more definitely than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easy to be displayed, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is finally more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. There may be a case where it is difficult to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode.

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed, or the jackpot pattern mode may not be finally confirmed and displayed. Good. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may not be finally definitely displayed, or the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. There may be

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in one display mode.

Further, it may be configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the order of the third display mode <second display mode <first display mode.

The first notice display may be configured to be displayed in three or more display modes.

Further, the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed may not change depending on the display mode of the first notice display.

In addition, “the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is more than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It is easy to start displaying the first effect display at a timing,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation as to whether or not the first effect display is displayed, depending on the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is the first timing at the first timing, as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Only the presentation display may be easily started, or when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. Instead, the display other than the display of the first effect display may be easily started at the first timing. Further, the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is the first effect at the first timing, as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. The display of the display may be easy to start without fail, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is better than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. In some cases, it may be difficult to start displaying the first effect display at the first timing.

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the display of the first effect display may be necessarily started at the first timing, or the first effect display may be started at the first timing. The display may not be started in some cases.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the display of the first effect display may not necessarily be started at the first timing, or the first notice display may be started at the first timing. The display of the effect display may be started in some cases.

In addition, “the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 172(B1) to (B3). In the CUM preparation display MTY displayed in the default display mode, the background color of the balloon changes to red and ranks up, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation that the first notice display is changed to the second display mode even when the first notification mode is displayed in the first display mode.

Here, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change only to the second display mode, or the first notice display displayed in the first display mode. However, it may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode. Also, the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may be changed to the second display mode without fail, and the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode. There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

Further, only the first notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode, and the first display mode other than the first display mode may be displayed. The notice display of may also change to the second display mode.

It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice display may be changed by the operation of the operation means operable by the player. For example, the display mode can be changed by displaying and operating the operation prompting display including the button image. The display mode may be changed, or the display mode may be changed by operating in the back button operation acceptance state in which the operation promotion display is not displayed.

Further, as a result of the other notice display, the display form of the first notice display may change, or the display form of the first notice display may be suddenly displayed without any particular presentation of the notice display. May change.

Further, it may be announced that the display mode of the first notice display changes depending on the period display.

Further, the display mode of the changed first notice display may be given a notice.

In addition, "the period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11)],
In the period display, a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which the meter portion forming the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175(A6) is red, or a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176(A1) is formed. 176 (C1), the display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani is red is displayed, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, and FIG. The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 forming the chance up meter CMT shown is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the balloon of "START!!" shown in FIG. 176(D1) is red, and the figure 176 (E1), the display mode in which the princess character HME as the cursor configuring the chance up meter CMT is displayed], etc., is displayed.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
In the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth state, as compared with the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 178(A1) to (A4), when the CUM preparation display MTY is ranked up, the chance up meter CMT is also likely to be ranked up],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the display mode of the first notice display.

Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. .. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

The third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes or all different display modes.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be easier to display only, or the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode is longer than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. However, a display mode other than the fourth display mode may be easily displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is in the fourth display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. It may be displayed without fail, and the period display is more displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. There may be a case where it is difficult to be displayed in the fourth display mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the fourth display mode. It may be.

When the notice of substitution is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the fourth display mode, or when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode. There may be

In addition, “when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is more than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. Easy to be displayed in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be easier to be displayed only in, and the case where the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode is longer than the case where the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. The display may be easily displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is in the third display mode more than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be displayed without fail, and the period display is more displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It may be difficult to be displayed in the third display mode.

When the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or the period display may not be displayed in the third display mode. It may be.

Also, when the first notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display may not necessarily be displayed in the third display mode, and the period display is displayed in the third display mode. There may be cases.

Further, depending on the display mode of the first notice display, it may be made unclear whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. When there is only one display mode of the notice, it is not known whether the display mode of the period display is the third display mode or the fourth display mode.

In addition, “when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed as compared to when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Cheap,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display variety of the period display may be different, so that it may be possible for a player who does not see the period display to pay attention to the period display as a notice.

Here, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, even if only the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Good, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode, finally the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode are also confirmed and displayed. May be easy. Further, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the final jackpot pattern mode may be definitely definitely displayed more easily than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Good.

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the big hit symbol may not be finally finally fixedly displayed.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not always be finally fixedly displayed, and the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed.

In addition, "the period display is a display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the default display mode of the chance up meter shown in FIG. 162 (A11)],
In the period display, a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode in which the meter portion forming the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 175(A6) is red, or a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176(A1) is formed. 176 (C1), the display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani is red is displayed, the display mode in which the background color of the placard at the final point GP constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 176 (B1) is red, and FIG. The display mode in which the second checkpoint CP2 forming the chance up meter CMT shown is round and red, the display mode in which the background color of the balloon of "START!!" shown in FIG. 176(D1) is red, and the figure 176 (E1), the display mode in which the princess character HME as the cursor configuring the chance up meter CMT is displayed], etc., is displayed.
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,
When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display mode of the period display may be different, so that it may be possible to give attention to the period display as a notice even to a player who does not see the period display.

Here, the period display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. .. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. Further, the period display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

The third display mode and the fourth display mode may be partially different display modes or all different display modes.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, only the jackpot symbol mode may be finally finalized and displayed more easily than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally finally confirm the symbol modes other than the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. May be. Further, in the case where the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the final jackpot pattern mode may be definitely definitely displayed more easily than in the case where the period display is displayed in the third display mode. However, when the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be more difficult to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when the period display is displayed in the third display mode. Good.

When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally definitely displayed, or the big hit symbol may not be finally finally fixedly displayed.

Further, when the period display is displayed in the third display mode, the big hit symbol may not always be finally fixedly displayed, and the big hit symbol may be finally fixedly displayed.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of display is a second notice display [for example, the display of the flame effect EF101 shown in FIG. 162(A2), or FIG. 163(A3) to FIG. The sliding door effect shown, the explosion effect EF104 shown in FIG. 168(A2), the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 179(A2) to (A6), and FIGS. 179(B1) to (B3). 178. Notice by the notice icon YI, notice by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 179(C1) to (C2), mini notice shown in FIGS. 179(D1) to (D5), etc.].
The second notice display may be displayed before the first notice display is displayed,
The game machine characterized in that the second notice display is a notice for notifying that the first notice display is displayed. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to gradually focus the line of sight on the period display and gradually increase the expectation.

Here, there may be a case where only the second notice display is displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or other than the second notice display before the first notice display is displayed. The display may also be displayed. Also, the second notice display may always be displayed before the first notice display is displayed, or the second notice display may not be displayed before the first notice display is displayed. Good.

Further, the second notice display may be a notice that only the first notice display is displayed, or a notice other than that the first notice display is also displayed. May be. Also, the second notice display may be a notice that the first notice display is displayed, or may not notice that the first notice display is displayed. ..

The first notice display may be displayed whenever the second notice display is displayed, or the first notice display may not be displayed even if the second notice display is displayed. ..

In addition, "When the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display is displayed when the second notice display is not displayed. Than the final big jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the second notice display will be displayed.

Here, the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display. It is possible that only the jackpot pattern mode can be easily confirmed and displayed, or if the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display is not displayed. In the end, it may be easier to finalize and display a symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect than when the one notice display is displayed. Further, the case where the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the first notice display is displayed without displaying the second notice display. The jackpot pattern mode may be easily confirmed and displayed, or if the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the first notice display is not displayed. In some cases, it may be more difficult to finally confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode than in the case where the notice display is displayed.

In addition, when the first notice display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed, or the jackpot pattern mode is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be cases.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed without the second notice display being displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may not always be finally confirmed and finally the jackpot pattern mode is finally confirmed and displayed. There may be cases where

Further, the easiness of finalizing the jackpot pattern mode may or may not be changed even if the second notice display is performed.

In addition, “the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed is more It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first notice display will be displayed.

Here, the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed is finally only the jackpot pattern mode, as compared with the case where the period display is displayed without the first notice display. May be displayed more easily, or when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. Eventually, the symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode is always guaranteed to be finally larger than when the period display is displayed without the first notice display. The confirmation display may be easier, or the case where the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed is more final than the case where the period display is displayed without the first notice display. In some cases, the jackpot pattern mode may not be fixedly displayed.

When the period display is displayed after the first notice display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed, or the jackpot pattern mode may not be finally confirmed and displayed. May be.

Also, when the first notice display is not displayed and the period display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may not always be finally confirmed and displayed, and the jackpot pattern mode may be finally confirmed and displayed. It may be.

Further, at least part of the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are the same display mode [for example, the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162(A3) and the display mode MTY shown in FIG. 162(A9). The display mode is at least the same as that of the chance up meter CMT shown in ), in that the character SBH of the sabotani is arranged.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player may be able to recall the relationship between the first notice display and the period display.

Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be a part of the same display mode, or all of them may be the same display mode.

In addition, "The display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display are different display modes [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 162 (A9) is a check point (first The display mode is at least different from the CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 162 (A3) in that the check points CP1 to CP3 are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to recognize the first notice display and the period display separately.

Here, the display mode of the first notice display and the display mode of the period display may be partly different display modes, or all may be different display modes.

In addition, by displaying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notification display, it is predicted that the reach effect display will be displayed [for example, FIG. 162 (A3 )-As shown in (A9) of the same figure, by displaying the CUM preparation display MTY, it is foretold that the production by the chance up meter CMT will be performed, so that the reach production display will be displayed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give an expectation for a big hit by displaying the first notice display.

Here, it is possible to give a notice that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, so that only the reach effect display is given a notice, or the first notice display is given. By displaying in advance that the period display is displayed by displaying, may be announced other than the reach effect display. In addition, it is possible to give a notice that the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the period indication is displayed by displaying the first notice display. It may be possible that the display of the period display is foretold, and thus the reach effect display is not displayed.

In addition, it is possible to give a notice that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, thereby giving a notice that only the reach effect display is displayed, or the first notice display is displayed. It may be announced that the display other than the reach effect display is also displayed by notifying that the period display is displayed by being displayed.

Further, it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed only by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying the first notice display, or the first notice display may be displayed. It is also possible to notify that the reach effect display is displayed, in addition to the notification that the period display is displayed.

Further, by displaying the first notice display, it is possible to give a notice that only the period display is displayed, and thus it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed. It may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the display other than the period display is also displayed.

In addition, it may be announced that the reach effect display is displayed by notifying that the period display is displayed by displaying only the first notification display, or other than the first notification display. The advance notice display may be displayed to notify that the period display is displayed, or the reach effect display may be notified to be displayed.

It should be noted that "when it is foretold that the period display will be displayed" may be "when it is foretold that the period display will be displayed from now on" or "when the period display is It is an effect that accompanies the reach effect display, and directly gives a notice of the reach effect display, and indirectly gives a notice of the period display being displayed." In the case where the period display is directly foretold, and the reach effect display is indirectly foretold."

In addition, “the first notice display and the period display may start to be displayed in the same symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A9), CUM preparation display Display of MTY and chance up meter CMT is started during execution of the same symbol variation display],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to recognize the time when the period display is displayed.

Here, the first notice display and the period display may start to be displayed only in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display may be displayed in different symbol variation displays. There may be cases. Further, the first notice display and the period display may be always started in the same symbol variation display, and the first notice display and the period display may not be displayed in the same symbol variation display. It may be.

The first notice display may be displayed before one or more decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, may be displayed before the decorative symbols are in the intelligent state, or the reach effect display is started. It may be displayed before the display, or may be displayed before the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the same symbol variation display as the period display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed in a symbol variation display different from the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed. For example, it is displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed. Alternatively, the variable display may be displayed after the variable display in which the period display is displayed.

In addition, “the first notice display may be a display that may be started in a symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the display of the period display is started [for example, FIG. 186 ( As shown in (A3) to (A14) of the same figure, the CUM preparation in-progress display MTY is displayed before the symbol variation display in which the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the first notice display may function as a look-ahead notice, and it may be possible to give an expectation to the symbol variation display to be executed later.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display is started, or may be displayed in the period display. The display may be started also in the symbol variable display other than the symbol variable display executed before the symbol variable display in which the display is started. Further, the first notice display may be always started in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display in which the period display is started, or the period display is started. The display may not be started in the symbol variation display executed before the displayed symbol variation display.

The first notice display may be always displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed during the symbol stop display, or may be always displayed during the symbol stop display.

Further, “The first notice display is a display that is displayed even during the period of the symbol stop display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (D3) to (D6), the CUM preparation display MTY is a symbol. It is also displayed during stop display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation even during the period of the symbol stop display.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during the period of the symbol stop display, or may be displayed during a period other than the period of the symbol stop display. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed during the period of the symbol stop display, or may not be displayed during the period of the symbol stop display.

Further, “The first notice display is a display that is hidden during the period of the symbol stop display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (C3) to (D7), the CUM preparation display MTY is It is hidden while the symbols are stopped, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the first notice display is hidden during the period of the symbol stop display, it may be possible to improve the game.

Here, the first notice display may be hidden only during the symbol stop display period, or may be hidden during a period other than the symbol stop display period. .. Further, the first notice display may be always hidden during the symbol stop display period, or may not be hidden during the symbol stop display period.

The first notice display may be displayed again when the symbol variable display is started.

Further, “The first notice display is a continuous notice [for example, as shown in FIGS. 186(A1) to (A16), before the symbol variation display in which the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT. CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in each of the plurality of symbol variation displays that are performed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first notice display is continuously displayed, which may increase the sense of expectation.

Further, "the first notice display is a display that may be started during the display of the reach effect display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for the reach effect display.

Here, the first notice display may be started only during the display of the reach effect display, or may be started during the display of the display other than the reach effect display. It may be one. Further, the first notice display may be displayed without fail during the display of the reach effect display, or may not be started during the display of the reach effect display.

Note that the first notice display may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display and before a certain period starts, or may be displayed before the reach effect display is started. It may be done.

In addition, "The first notice display is a display that may be displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 162(A3) to (A4). The display of the CUM preparation display MTY is started before the reach is reached, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first notice display is displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started, so that the expectation for the reach effect display in which the period display is displayed is provided. You can

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only before the display of the reach effect display is started, or other than before the display of the reach effect display is started. The display may be started in some cases. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started, or may not be displayed before the display of the reach effect display is started. It may be one.

The first notice display may be started during the display of the reach effect display, may be started before the reach effect display is started, and may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display. You may do it.

Further, the reach effect display is made up of a combination of normal reach and super reach, and the first notice display may be displayed during execution of normal reach performed before super reach is started, or reach display may be performed. The display may be started during the symbol variation display before the effect display is started, and may be displayed until the period when the normal reach in the reach effect display is being executed.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "whether the big hit symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed or the lost symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed is a big hit judgment made at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol [for example, shown in FIG. 53(b). The special jackpot lottery process], the result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the variable icon, and the jackpot hit and leave determination is provided on the game board. Acquired when a game ball enters the starting opening [eg, first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232] [eg, in the winning award receiving processing in the winning opening winning processing (step S508) shown in FIG. 51. It is configured to be determined according to the result of the jackpot lottery using the obtained random numbers [for example, special figure 1 random number value, special figure 1 random number value, special figure 2 random number value, special figure 2 random number value] The probability of being judged as a big hit in the big hit lottery (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit probability") is predetermined [for example, a high probability table for win/loss determination shown in FIG. The gaming table is defined in the low probability table for win/loss determination shown in (b)], and the jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the fluctuation icon. ]
Was also explained.

Subsequently, an example of effects applicable to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 206. Here, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 194 to 206 can be applied to the technical idea shown in FIGS. 1 to 193, and vice versa. ~ The technical idea shown in Fig. 193 and described above can be applied to the technical idea shown in Figs. 194 to 206. At that time, components having the same reference numeral may be treated as the same component and may be replaced with each other.

FIG. 194 shows a display mode (color) of the effect display in the effect device 206 and a correspondence relationship between the notations used in the present specification and the drawings, and FIG. 194 (a) shows the display color in the decorative pattern display device 208. FIG. 3B shows the correspondence relationship with the emission color of the light emitting means such as a full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 194(a), regarding the display color in the decorative symbol display device 208, the case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with "white blinking" is referred to as a "decimal point" pattern in this specification, In the drawing, it is indicated by hatching with few (coarse) dots. Similarly, the case of being displayed in “blue” on the decorative pattern display device 208 is referred to as a “slanted line” pattern in this specification, and is shown by hatching in the drawing, and is “green” on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the present specification, the case of being displayed is referred to as a “diamond” pattern, and is shown by a diamond-shaped hatching in the drawing, and the case of being displayed in “red” on the decorative pattern display device 208 is referred to as a “lattice” in the present specification. It is described as a pattern, and it is shown by hatching of a lattice on the drawing, and a case of being displayed in “gold” on the decorative pattern display device 208 is referred to as a “vertical line” pattern in this specification, and a vertical line is hatched on the drawing. In this specification, the case of being displayed in "rainbow color" on the decorative pattern display device 208 is referred to as a "multipoint" pattern, and is indicated by the hatching of many (fine) dots in the drawing? , Or a "horizontal line" pattern, and is shown by horizontal line hatching in the drawings.

Further, the case where the "default (color)" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is shown by a notation other than these (for example, no pattern and white).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 194(b), in the present specification, a case where the light emission color of the light emitting means such as the full-color LED built in the family coat emblem 224E or the like is displayed as “white lighting” in the light emitting means is referred to as “this specification”. It is described as a pattern of "small number of dots" and is indicated by hatching of few (coarse) dots (points) on the drawing. Similarly, in the present specification, the case where the light emitting means is displayed in “blue lighting” is described as a “hatched” pattern, and is shown by hatching in the drawing, and the case where the light emitting means is displayed in “green lighting”. In the present specification, it is referred to as a “diamond” pattern, and it is indicated by a diamond-shaped hatching in the drawing, and in the present specification, a case where the light emitting means is displayed in “red lighting” is referred to as a “lattice” pattern. The upper part is shown by a grid hatching, and the case where the light emitting means is displayed by "gold lighting" is described as a "vertical line" pattern in the present specification. In this specification, the case of being displayed by "lighting (rainbow flash)" is referred to as a "multipoint" pattern, and in the drawing, it is indicated by hatching of many (fine) dots, or is described as a "horizontal line" pattern. In the drawing, horizontal lines are used for hatching. In addition, the case where the light emitting means is turned off is referred to as a "white coating" pattern in the specification, and is shown in the drawing by other notation (for example, no pattern and white).

In the example of the effect described below, the display means is configured by, for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L to a third decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 14 and the like unless otherwise specified, and any one of them is used. A notice icon, notice display, icon for mini game A, icon for mini game B, hold icon, change icon, notice change icon, chance up meter, timer notice, etc. can be displayed by one or two or all decorative pattern display devices. An example of what is displayed is shown below. First, these will be described in order.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 195(A1) to (A7) are effect examples following FIG. 29(9).

FIG. 195(A1) shows a state where the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and after the button effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started. Here, the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the second check point CP2, and stops at the second check point CP2 until the button operation is performed by the player or the operation valid period elapses, but does not stop. You may

On the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 195(A2), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 195(A3), the player When the effect button 136 is pressed, a cut-in image (gold cut-in image) CI3 of the lord is displayed as shown in FIG. 195 (A4), and a notice effect is given to notify that the jackpot is highly reliable. .. In this example of performance, the gold cut-in image CI3 has a form in which the outer frame is represented by a pattern of “vertical lines”. The cut-in image CI3 displayed in this production example is different from the cut-in image CI3 of the hall shown in FIG. 29 in the display mode.
It is configured to be displayed on the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208L. Therefore, the display of the animation of the duel scene between the main character in the swordsman reach and the enemy swordsman and the chance up meter CMT are hidden because they are overlapped by the cut-in image CI3. That is, the cut-in image CI3 is displayed as an animation of a duel scene between the hero of the swordsman reach and the enemy swordsman, and overlaid on the front side of the chance up meter CMT. It can be said that it is difficult to see the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman and the chance up meter CMT. As described above, in this effect example, the opportunity up meter CMT is shown to overlap with the opportunity up notice displayed by the opportunity up meter CMT. However, the opportunity up notice is displayed on the chance up meter CMT. May be overlapped by. This is applicable in the above description and the following description. The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195(A4) may be replaced with a weak cut-in image CI3b (see FIG. 182(A13)) having a lower reliability than the gold cut-in image CI3. .. The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195(A4) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation effective period, or the effect button 136 may be operated during the operation effective period. It may be displayed without fail when it is operated inside. The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 195(A4) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, or the effect button 136. May be displayed without fail when the effective operation period has elapsed without being operated, or may not be displayed when the effective operation period has elapsed without operating the effect buttons 136. If the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the button 136, the weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3. In addition, in this example of performance, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, the chance up meter CMT is not hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3 and is visibly displayed. In this example of performance, while the gold cut-in image CI3 is being displayed, the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the layer on the back side of the gold cut-in image CI3, and in that state, the Sabohani as the cursor of the chance up meter CMT is displayed. Although the display control is performed so that the character SBH advances, the display control may be performed such that the character SBH of the sabotani does not proceed, or the chance up meter CMT is not arranged in the layer on the back side of the gold cut-in image CI3. It may be performed.

The effect shown in FIG. 195(A5) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29(14), and originally, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "chance up gold cut-in" is provided near the character SBH of Sabohani. Although a balloon with the character "" is displayed, in this example of performance, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen, and thus is hidden. In addition, in the case where the gold cut-in image CI3 is configured not to be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, even when the effect button 136 is not operated, the effect button 136 is not operated. It is also possible to notify that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, as in the case where is operated. In this case, the chance up meter CMT is not overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3, so that the opportunity up meter CMT is displayed as shown in FIG. 29(14). Further, it is not necessary to notify that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, and only a part of the advance notice of the chance increase has been informed (for example, the balloon is not displayed, only the character "UP" is displayed, etc.). ) May be.

The effect shown in FIG. 195(A6) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29(15). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, originally, the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red. At the same time, the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the history of the notice being issued is shown. Since the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen, it is also hidden.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195(A7), the gold cut-in image CI3 is erased, and the animation of the duel scene between the protagonist of the swordsman reach and the enemy swordsman and the chance up meter CMT are displayed. The situation is shown. The character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29(17) and thereafter are performed.

195(B1) to FIG. 195(B3) show another effect pattern of the effect shown in FIGS. (A4) to (A6), and the gold cut-in image CI3 is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display screen is not displayed as a whole, but is displayed with the upper and lower edge portions left.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195(B1), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is given to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. In this example of performance, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed with the upper and lower edges of the display screen left, and in the area where the gold cut-in image CI3 is not displayed, the main character in the swordsman reach and the enemy swordsman are displayed. The animation of the duel scene and a part of the chance up meter CMT are visible. In other words, it can be said that a part of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3. Therefore, it may be possible to grasp the status of the check point (whether or not the check point is filled), which is the point at which the chance-up notice is generated. In this example of performance, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the state of the character SBH of Sabohani as a cursor. However, a part or all of the character SBH of Sabohani can be visually recognized, and the chance. You may make it possible to grasp the progress of the production of the upmeter CMT. Further, part or all of the characters "UP" displayed at the check points may be made visible, and in this case, it may be possible to know whether or not a chance up notice has occurred. Further, part or all of the final point GP may be visible. Also, in the case where the progress of the opportunity advance notice production is grasped depending on the degree of gauge reduction, part or all of the meter displaying the gauge is visible and the progress is grasped. You may be able to. Further, a part or all of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be made visible, and it may be possible to grasp the type of the chance-up notice that has occurred. You may Note that while the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the chance up meter CMT may be erased so as to be hidden.

The effect shown in FIG. 195(B2) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 195(A5), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, originally, "chance up gold cut-in" is provided near the character SBH of Sabohani. Although the balloon with the character "" is displayed, it is hidden in this example of performance because it is overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3.

The effect shown in FIG. 195(B3) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 195(A6), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower part of the chance up meter CMT is partially displayed, and the chance up meter is displayed. A state in which the second checkpoint CP2 in the CMT is marked in red is displayed. However, in this example of performance, since the upper part of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by the gold cut-in image CI3, the character “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is not displayed. It is said that. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

FIG. 195(C1) to FIG. 195(C6) are examples of effects following FIG. 29(16).

The first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195(C1) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third checkpoint CP3.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(C2), in this example of effect, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 29(18), not the lever image 136Va but the deca button image 136aL is displayed and the vicinity of the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed. A balloon with the words "Chance Up Big Button" added is displayed on the screen to notify that the advance notice has been started by the button production with high reliability. However, in this effect example, the big button image 136aL occupies most of the display screen, and the big button image 136aL partially hides the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is hidden, and it is not possible to visually recognize the display of the character "Chance Up Big Button". A part of the character SBH of Sabohani is also hidden by the big button image 136aL. In this case, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed on the front side of the big button image 136aL so as to be overlapped (overlapped), and in this case, the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be visible. .. Further, only a part of the displays constituting the chance up meter CMT may be displayed so as to overlap the chance up meter CMT. For example, the character SBH of the sabotani constituting the chance up meter CMT. Alternatively, only the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be displayed so as to overlap the deca button image 136aL.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 195(C3), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the deca button image 136aL, and the button effect is started. At this time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed so as to be superimposed on the lower end portion of the big button image 136aL, but the display position is not limited to this and can be arranged at an appropriate position. Further, the remaining time display meter MT in this effect example has the same size as that in (A1) in the figure, but may be displayed in a large size corresponding to the size of the large button image 136aL. Note that the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed when displaying the decal button image 136aL, or a plurality of remaining time display meters MT can be displayed so that the plurality of remaining time display meters MT are simultaneously displayed. There may be a state of being. For example, in the case where the effect button 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed integrally, when the deca button 136aL is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is also displayed in large proportion in proportion to its size. Alternatively, in the configuration in which the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed separately, when the decal button 136aL is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is adjusted according to its size. May also be increased.

In FIG. 195(C4), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it. A part of the characters "UP" is hidden in the big button image 136aL, which makes it difficult to see. Further, the chance up meter CMT shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. It should be noted that the character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third check point CP3 until the player operates the effect button 136 or the operation valid period elapses.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 195(C5) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the character SBH of the sabotani is located in front of the final point GP, but is overlapped by the deca button image 136aL, which makes it difficult to view. Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (C6) within the operation valid period, thereafter, for example, the effect after FIG. 29 (23) is performed.

195(D1) to (D5) of FIG. 195 show another effect pattern following (C1) of FIG.

When the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third check point CP3, as shown in FIG. 195 (D1), in this effect example, a united animation of the lever image 136Va is started, and a semi-transparent image is displayed from the lower left and upper right of the display screen. The lever image 136Vq appears. At the timing shown in FIG. 195 (D1), the semi-transparent lever image 136Vq displayed at the lower left overlaps with the chance up meter CMT, and the lever image is semi-transparent, so the chance up meter CMT is visually recognized thinly. It's ready to go. Here, the united animation may be referred to as a lever effect introduction animation or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent lever image 136Vq informs that the lever image 136Va is materialized by being united and the lever effect is started. The pair of semi-transparent lever images 136Vq move toward the center while approaching each other. It should be noted that, in this effect example, an example in which the two semi-transparent lever images 136Vq are combined has been described, but, for example, an effect in which four semi-transparent lever images 136Vq are combined may be performed, and in this case, two semi-transparent lever images 136Vq may be combined. The lever image 136Va is materialized and the lever effect is more easily started when the effect of combining the four semi-transparent lever images 136Vq is performed than when the effect of combining the transparent lever image 136Vq is performed. It may be. In addition, during the display of the combined animation, the operation of the effect lever 136V is not accepted yet. Here, the lever image displayed in the IN animation may not have transparency.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 195(D2), the pair of semi-transparent lever images 136Vq are shown to be closer together.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(D3), when the pair of translucent lever images 136Vq overlap, the effect EF301 is displayed so as to cover most of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 195(D4). The effect EF301 covers at least a part of the chance up meter CMT, presumably covering the entire pair of semi-transparent lever images 136Vq. The chance up meter CMT may be displayed so as to overlap the effect EF301.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (D5), the effect EF301 is erased and the lever image 136Va appears, and a balloon with the word "chance up lever" is added near the character SBH of Sabohani. It is displayed to inform that the notice by the lever effect has started. Note that, in this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 29(18), the lever image 136Va is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the lever image 136Va causes the overlap. Although it is more difficult to visually recognize the balloon than in the non-displayed state, the lever image 136Va is displayed so as to be overlapped with the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani as in the effect shown in FIG. 29(18). Good. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29 (19) and thereafter are performed.

In this example of performance, when the display related to the chance up notice is displayed, a part or all of the chance up meter CMT is hidden by this display, or the chance up meter C is displayed.
Although the example in which MT is hidden is shown, the chance up meter CMT may be configured not to be hidden (or not hidden) by the display related to the chance up notice. It should be noted that the same can be applied to the timer notice described above or later.

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 196(A1) to (A9), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a), the sub display device 208S is below the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E. It is configured to be placed in. The sub display device 208S is arranged so that its upper end is lower than the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps the sub display device 208S. It is supposed to not. In addition, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, and the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H are not shown in the drawings for ease of explanation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196(A1), the reach reaches the second checkpoint CP2 when the character SBH of Savohani reaches the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT after developing into super reach (swordsman reach). , The operation valid period has started. That is, the effect shown in FIG. 196(A1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 29(10). Further, on the sub display device 208S, the characters "vs swordsman" are displayed to inform the type of super reach. At this time, since the decorative pattern display device 208 does not overlap the sub display device 208S, the chance up meter CMT, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT that form the button effect are easily visible.

On the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 196(A2), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 196(A3), the effect is produced by the player. When the button 136 is pressed, a gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the entire display screen of the sub display device 208S, as shown in FIG. 196(A4). Further, in FIG. 196 (A4), the sub display device 208S moves upward with the gold cut-in image CI3 displayed, and the upper half is in a state of overlapping with the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208. There is. Therefore, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub display device 208S, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the non-overlapped state. The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196(A4) may be replaced with a weak cut-in image CI3b. In this case, the sub display device 208S may or may not be raised. The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196(A4) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 has been operated. It may be displayed without fail when it is operated within the valid period. Further, the sub display device 208S may be necessarily raised when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the sub display may be performed even if the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136. The device 208S may always be raised. Also, the sub display device 208S may be raised only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 196(A4) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, or the effect button 136. May be displayed without fail when the operation valid period has passed without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period has passed without operating the effect button 136.

After that, the sub display device 208S continues to move upward, and as shown in FIG. 196(A5),
The sub display device 208S is stopped in such a manner that the sub display device 208S overlaps approximately at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208. At this time, the support member for supporting the sub display device 208S overlaps a part of the chance up meter CMT, but the main body of the sub display device 208S does not overlap the meter part of the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT is easier to see than during the raising operation of the sub display device 208S. That is, it can be said that the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to visually recognize during the raising operation of the sub display device 208S than in the sub display device 208S after the raising operation is completed. Note that at least a part of the chance up meter CMT may be overlapped by the sub display device 208S that has moved to the maximum operation position after the lifting operation is completed. Further, the display area of the sub display device 208S may be configured to be overlapped by the decorative pattern display device 208, another effect movable body, or the like. Further, after completion of the raising operation of the sub display device 208S, the area of the chance up meter CMT hidden by the sub display device 208S may be larger than that during the raising operation. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Gold Cut-in” added is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to inform that the advance notice has been given by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. However, at least a part of the display position of the balloon overlaps the sub display device 208S, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. The display position of the balloon may be a position that does not overlap the sub display device 208S. Further, the balloon may be hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 196(A6), the second check point CP2 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is increased by the appearance of the chance up notice "UP". The character “” is displayed above it, and the history of the occurrence of the chance up notice is shown. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. At this time, the balloon displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani has been erased, but the area in which the balloon was displayed overlaps the sub-display device 208S, so its mode is difficult to recognize. There is a case.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196(A7) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani has started to move. At this time, in the sub display device 208S, after the display is switched from the gold cut-in image CI3 to the character display of “vs swordsman”, the descending operation is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 196(A7), the sub display device 208S displays. The main body is positioned so as to overlap the front side of at least a part of the meter portion of the chance up meter CMT, and it is difficult to visually recognize the chance up meter CMT. The gold cut-in image CI3 may be switched to the character display of "vs swordsman" after the descending operation of the sub display device 208S is started, or the gold cut-in image may be displayed after the descending operation of the sub display device 208S is completed. You may switch to the character display of "vs swordsman" from the image CI3.

FIG. 196(A8) shows a state where the descending operation of the sub display device 208S is continuously performed. At this time, the movement display of the sabotani character SBH on the chance up meter CMT is also displayed.

FIG. 196(A9) shows a state in which the descending operation of the sub display device 208S is completed and the sub display device 208S is in the initial position. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped with the sub display device 208S, it may be easily visible. After that, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effects shown in FIG. 29(17) and thereafter are performed.

As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the sub-display device 208S as a chance-up notice. Not limited to the device 208 (first decorative pattern display device 208L to third decorative pattern display device 208N) or the sub display device 208S, it may be displayed on another type of display device, for example, FIG. 15 (C4). The POV display 224I shown in FIG. 4 may be used, or the light may be emitted from the light guide plate IL. Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the display device is constituted by a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a second decorative symbol display device 208M. The third decorative symbol display device 208N may be moved to a position close to the display device, and a chance up notice such as the gold cut-in image CI3 may be displayed across these display devices. Here, the close position may be a position where the two display devices are in contact with each other, or a position where the two display devices are close to each other but have a gap.

FIG. 196(B1) to FIG. 196(B4) are examples of effects following FIG. 20(8).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196(B1), after the character "attention" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, the pseudo symbol is displayed in the middle symbol moving at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. Is shown. The low speed movement of the pseudo continuous symbol is continuously performed until the same figure (B3), but in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 196 (B2), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. The display TM1 is not erased, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed as a continuation with the character of the lord as shown in FIG. 194(B4) after the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 196(B3). It is displayed until it switches to the cut-in display consisting of the character display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the pseudo continuous symbol as the notice effect display executed as a result of the timer notice. In addition, the pseudo continuous symbols may be overlapped by the timer notice display TM1. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 20 (13) and thereafter are performed. The pseudo-relational pattern may be framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. When the pseudo-relational pattern is framed out downward, the pseudo-relational pattern is not started, and the decorative pattern of the lost pattern is left as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be set to start the reach effect. As described above, in this example of performance, the timer is notified so that the pseudo-relation is started after the countdown is completed.

FIG. 196(C1) to FIG. 196(C4) are examples of effects following FIG. 20(6).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196(C1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(C2), in this example of production, unlike the example of production shown in FIG. 20(8), the character "Ikuze!!" is added together with the display YMF of the up of the lord's face. A balloon is displayed. At this time, in the timer notice display TM1, "00:00" is still displayed, but at least a part is hidden by the balloon, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 may overlap the balloons so that the timer advance notice display TM1 can be visually recognized. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be erased at the timing when the lord's face up display YMF and the balloon are displayed, or the lord's face up display YMF and the balloon after the timer notice display TM1 is erased. May be displayed. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 196(C2), a part of the timer notice display TM1 is covered with the balloon, but the entire timer notice display TM1 may be covered with the balloon. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be hidden by the up display YMF of the lord's face.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196(C3), the state where the timer notice display TM1 is erased is shown.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 196 (C4), the display in which the pseudo continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side is started. When the pseudo-relational pattern overlaps with the balloon, the pseudo-relational pattern is at least partially hidden by the balloon. That is, the display YMF of the up of the lord's face and the balloon are displayed on the front side rather than the pseudo continuous pattern. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous symbol may be displayed on the front side rather than the display YMF of the up of the lord's face and the balloon. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 20(10) and thereafter are performed. In this example of the effect, the timer notice display TM1 is erased during the display of the balloon with the character "Ikuze!!" displayed together with the display YMF of the up of the lord's face. The fact that the timer notice display is deleted from the display that is displayed after the countdown due to the notice display reaches 0 means that the embodiment of the timer notice effect described above or the embodiment of the timer notice effect described below. It goes without saying that it is also applicable to.

FIGS. 196(D1) to (D3) show another example of the effects shown in (C2) to (C4) of FIG.

FIG. 196(D1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196(C2), and in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed instead of the up display YMF and balloon display of the lord's face. Is displayed. This cut-in image CI7 is surrounded by a lattice-shaped outer frame to form a square shape, the upside of the lord's face is displayed in the lower left corner, and the word "Ikuze!!" is displayed in the vicinity thereof. It is notified that the pseudo continuous production may be started. Here, the cut-in image CI7 hides the entire timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is hidden by the cut-in image CI7. Note that there may be a plurality of display modes of the cut-in image CI7, and some or all of the timer advance notice display TM1 may be visible depending on the display mode. Further, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed so as to overlap the UI portion UI, and the cut-in image CI7 suppresses the reduction in the visibility of the UI portion UI. Further, the UI unit UI may be overlapped by the cut-in image CI7 and at least a part thereof may be hidden.

FIG. 196 (D2) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C3), and the timer notice display TM1 is erased, but it is difficult to recognize because it is hidden by the cut-in image CI7.

FIG. 196 (D3) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (C4), and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pseudo symbol is moving in the middle symbol at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. It is shown. At this time, the cut-in image CI7 overlaps the pseudo continuous pattern, that is, at least a part of the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden. After that, for example, the cut-in image CI7 is erased, and the effects shown in FIG. 20(10) and thereafter are performed. Note that at least a part of the UI portion UI may be overlapped at a certain timing of the cut-in image CI7.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 197(A1) to (A12) is an effect example following FIG. 20(3).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197(A1), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197(A1), the display in the timer notice display TM1 is "05". "00", indicating that 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197(A2), the cut-in image CI8 in which the characters "button STOCK!!" is displayed is displayed. That is, it is notified that the advance notice item that triggers the start of the button effect is stocked. The cut-in image CI8 is displayed so as to occupy most of the display area while leaving part of the upper and lower edges of the display area. Therefore, the first decorative symbol and the timer notice display TM1 are hidden and hidden by the cut-in image CI8. At this time, although the timer notice display TM1 is not displayed, the countdown is continuously performed. Further, the UI unit UI is displayed on the front side of the cut-in image CI8, and suppresses the reduction in visibility due to the cut-in image CI8. Instead of displaying the cut-in image CI8 or together with the display of the cut-in image CI, the effect movable body 224 such as the family crest part 224E or the effect display by the light guide plate IL may be performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by another effect display that is not related to the timer notice effect. The timer notice display TM1 may be arranged on the front side of the cut-in image CI8.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197(A3), the cut-in image CI8 is erased, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed. At this time, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "03:91". Further, a stock button image 136aST as a notice item is displayed below the timer notice display TM1 and a character "x1" is displayed above the stock button image 136aST, which indicates that the button effect is performed at least once. It has been informed. That is, it is shown that one execution of the button effect is stocked.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A4), after "decoration 7" is stopped on each of the left symbol and the right symbol and the reach state is reached, the display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00". Then, the countdown is completed, and the word "attention" indicating that the notice is to be noticed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197(A5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF302 is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the stock button image 136aST, showing that the button digestion animation is being performed. There is. This button digest animation notifies that the button effect will be started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the stock button image 136aST as an advance notice item is consumed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197(A6), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 197(A7), the stock button image displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. An animation in which 136aST moves to the center while being enlarged is displayed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (A8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A9), the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

On the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 197 (A10), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (A11), the effect is produced by the player. When the button 136 is pressed down, as shown in FIG. 197(A12), a cut-in display including a lord's character and a character display of "continue" is performed. In this example of production, in this way, it is notified that the pseudo continuous production is executed due to the success of the button production. There may be a case where the button effect fails, in which case, the pseudo continuous effect may not be started and the combination of the decorative symbols with a loss may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached. May be started. As described above, in this effect example, a state where the button notice effect is started by the timer advance notice effect and the pseudo continuous effect is started by the success of the button effect is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 197(B1) to (B10) are effect examples following FIG. 20(4).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197(B1), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197(B1), the display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00". : 01” is shown. In the first decorative symbol, all of the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are being variably displayed.

Then, in this effect example, after the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is stopped at "00:01", the timer advance notice display TM1 displays "00:01" as shown in FIG. 197(B2). Instead, a so-called “pause button” mark and a “pause display” to which the characters “pause” are attached are displayed to notify that the countdown of the timer display has been interrupted. Note that a "pause display" may be displayed separately from the timer advance notice display TM1 in which the remaining time ("00:01") is displayed. In this case, the "pause display" may be arranged above the timer advance notice display TM1 or may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the timer advance notice display TM1. In this effect example, thereafter, the first pseudo continuous effect is performed and the second variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. During that time, the "pause display" is continuously displayed. The remaining time display and the "pause display" may be alternately displayed while the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is suspended.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197(B3), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed to notify the start of the second pseudo-reproduction. Even at this time, the "pause display" is continuously displayed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197 (B4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “×3” indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-relation is started is displayed below the second decorative symbol.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 197(B5), the state where "decoration 7" is stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol is in a reach state is shown. Even at this time, the "pause display" is continuously displayed.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 197(B6), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions, respectively, and in the UI section UI, the variable icon h0 is left and the display area is left. Frame out below. It should be noted that the start of the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol and the start of the frame-out display of the UI unit UI may be at the same timing, or of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. After the moving display is started, the frame-out display of the UI unit UI may be started, or after the frame-out display of the UI unit UI is started,
The moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol may be started.

Then, in the timer notice display TM1, the "pause display" is switched to the timer display showing the remaining time, and the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Then, as shown in FIG. 197(B7), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 197(B8), the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display and the advance notice is displayed. "Attention!!" is displayed to call attention to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (B9), the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate, and overlap on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-sized board action product 224Ga and the second large-sized board action product 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, in this example of performance, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 displayed as “Attention!!” is overlapped by the second large-board behavior auditor product 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditor product 224Gd, which makes it difficult to see. There is. Note that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-scale behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate. After that, as shown in FIG. 197 (B10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 16 (23) and thereafter are performed.

It should be noted that in this production example, an example in which the "pause display" is displayed by the timer notice display TM1 is shown, but, for example, as shown in FIGS. 197(C1) to (C2), the countdown of the timer display is reduced. At the time of interruption, the pause display PAUSE may be displayed separately from the timer notice display TM1. The effect shown in FIGS. 197(C1) to (C2) is another example of the effect performed subsequent to the same figure (B1), and is the same as the effect to be performed in the same figure (B2) to (B6). It corresponds. The pause display PAUSE shown in FIG. 197 (C1) is a horizontal rectangular display with chamfered four corners, and a mode in which a "pause button" mark and a "pause" character are displayed in the frame It is displayed large in the center of the display screen. At this time, the pause display PAUSE overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 so as to hide at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 and makes it difficult to visually recognize the timer notice display TM1. When the pause display PAUSE is displayed, the timer notice advance notice display TM1 may be moved and displayed so as to move to a position where it does not overlap the pause display PAUSE. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG.

Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 197(D1) to (D2), when the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, after displaying the pause display PAUSE, the pause display PAUSE is reduced and the timer notice is displayed. An animation display for moving to the position where the display TM1 is displayed may be displayed, and then a “pause display” may be displayed on the timer advance notification display TM1. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 197(D1) to (D2) are other effect examples performed subsequent to the same figure (B1). After the effect shown in FIG. 197(D2) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 197(B3) and thereafter is performed. The pause display PAUSE may be enlarged and displayed again at the timing when the countdown of the timer display is restarted, and then the countdown may be restarted.

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect produced in the present embodiment.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 198(A1) to 198(A10), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14(a), the sub display device 208S is below the decorative pattern display device 208 in place of the family crest 224E. It is configured to be placed in. The sub display device 208S is arranged so that its upper end is lower than the lower end of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps the sub display device 208S. It is supposed to not. In addition, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd, and the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H are not shown in the drawings for ease of explanation.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 198(A1) to (A10) show an example of the timer notice effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A1), the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. The sub display device 208S can display the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A1), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the first reservation icon h11 is displayed. In this production example, these may be referred to as a UI unit. On the other hand, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of Toku-zu 1 is 1. 1” is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A2) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer notice effect is started by the timer notice display TM1 being framed in from the right side of the display screen. "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, the countdown is started when the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 198 (A3) is displayed). The countdown may be started (after that).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 198(A3) to 198(A4), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. As shown in FIG. 198 (A4), “decoration 7” is displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol before the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and the reach state is formed. ing.

Then, in FIG. 198(A5), the sub-display device 208S displays the face image YMF of the lord's character with a balloon line saying "Ikuze!!" instead of the UI display. Further, in FIG. 198(A5), the sub display device 208S moves upward from the initial position while displaying the face image YMF and the balloon of the lord's character, and at the timing shown in FIG. 198(A5), the upper half is decorated. It is in a state of overlapping on the front side of the symbol display device 208. Note that the sub-display device 208S may not perform the raising operation.

After that, the sub display device 208S continues to move upward, and as shown in FIG. 198(A6), the sub display device 208S is stopped in such a manner that the sub display device 208S overlaps approximately at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the main body of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a position that does not overlap the sub display device 208S. That is, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is more difficult to visually recognize after completion of the raising operation of the sub display device 208S, because there are more regions hidden by the sub display device 208S than during the raising operation. Note that the area of the timer notice display TM1 hidden by the sub display device 208S may be larger during the rising operation of the sub display device 208S than after the completion of the rising operation of the sub display device 208S. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 198(A7), timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be erased when the sub display device 208S is at the maximum movement position, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be erased while the sub display device 208S is moving up or down. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may not be erased during the ascending or descending operation of the sub display device 208S.

Then, as shown in FIG. 198(A8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo symbol is displayed in the middle symbol moving slowly from top to bottom. However, as shown in FIG. 198(A8), since the main body of the sub display device 208S is disposed on the front side in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device, in the area where the pseudo continuous pattern overlaps the sub display device 208S, It is hidden by the sub display device 208S and is difficult to see. After that, when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub display device 208S starts the descending operation, and at the timing shown in FIG. 198(A9), the area in which the pseudo continuous symbol and the sub display device 208S overlap is reduced, and the pseudo continuous symbol is reduced. May be easy to see. Further, when the sub display device 208S starts the descending motion, it is possible to switch from the face image YMF of the lord's character and the balloon to the display of the UI part. However, after starting the descending motion of the sub display device 208S, the sub display is performed. The display on the device 208S may be switched from the face image YMF of the lord's character and the balloon to the UI unit. Alternatively, the face image YMF and balloon of the lord's character may be switched to the UI unit after the descending operation of the sub display device 208S is completed.

FIG. 198(A10) shows a state where the sub-display device 208S has completed the lowering operation and has reached the initial position. At this time, since the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped with the sub display device 208S, it may be easily visible. After that, for example, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effects shown in FIG.

As described above, in this example of effect, an example of performing effect display (display of the face image YMF of the lord's character YMF and the balloon) informing that the pseudo continuous effect is performed on the sub display device 208S has been shown. The display device for displaying is not limited to the decorative design display device 208 (first decorative design display device 208L to third decorative design display device 208N) and sub-display device 208S described above, and is displayed on another type of display device. Alternatively, for example, the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 15C4 may be used, or the light may be emitted from the light guide plate IL. Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the display device is constituted by a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a second decorative symbol display device 208M. You may make it move to the position where the 3rd decorative symbol display device 208N approaches, and perform the above-mentioned effect display over these display devices.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 198(B1) to (B13) are effect examples following FIG. 162(A2). In this effect example, a state in which the advance look-ahead notice is given by the chance up meter CMT is shown.

As shown in FIG. 198(B1), in this effect example, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, unlike the FIG. 162(A3), the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM preparation display MTY. Is shown. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed not during the reach effect but during normal variable display of decorative symbols. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 198(B1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. That is, when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are respectively reached on the way of the character SBH of Sabohani, a specific notice may be issued. In other words, the first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 can be said to be the display of chance up points indicating the chance up occurrence points, and the chance up meter CMT indicates the chance up occurrence points in the symbol variation display. It can be said that it is a display of a meter that suggests. Also, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived, or some kind of hot performance. Suggests that it will be done. Note that a balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed before the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

FIG. 198 (B2) shows a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani who functions as a cursor starts moving. Here, the traveling speed of the character SBH of Sabohani is not constant but may vary depending on the progress situation of the effect, but may be constant. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. In addition, the balloon of "START!!" may not be displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon of "START!!", it may be announced that the chance up notice is likely to occur at the check points CP1 to CP3.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198(B3) shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is starting to move from the start point SP.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 198(B4), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first check point CP1, as shown in FIG. 198(B5), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed at the same time. Temporarily stop at the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1". That is, a chance opportunity as a pre-reading notice is displayed. It should be noted that, in this production example, a plurality of types of chance items are prepared, and in particular, the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" is a highly reliable strong chance item. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that a notice of advancement of a chance (pre-reading notice) due to the appearance of a chance eye is given. It should be noted that not only the strong chance but also the weak chance may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the chance may be increased or may not be increased.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B5), a balloon with the characters “Chance Up Strong Chance Eyes!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani, and a strong chance of a chance increase. It informs that a visual notice has been given. It should be noted that the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani may be started at the timing when the chance eye is stopped and displayed, or the balloon of the character SBH of the sabotani may be displayed after the opportunity eye is stopped and displayed. The second chance may be stopped and displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH is started. It should be noted that the character SBH of Savohani is animated while waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the chance is displayed, but may be animated without proceeding. Note that the decoration pattern is maintained in the temporary stop state by the combination of the decoration patterns “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B6), the first check point CP1 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and a “UP” sign that the reliability of the big hit has increased due to the appearance of a notice is displayed. A letter is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. It should be noted that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. The decorative pattern is maintained in a temporary stop state by a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1”.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B7), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased, and the temporary stop state is maintained by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1". .. In addition, the standby animation of the character SBH of Savohani continues.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B8), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is confirmed and displayed. In response to this, the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same combination of decorative symbols. It should be noted that in this effect example, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and it may be easily recognizable that the symbol is stopped and displayed. When the standby animation that shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is in the standby state is being performed, the standby animation may be continuously performed or may be interrupted. At this time, the placard displays the question mark in a stopped state, and suggests that the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP to perform some kind of hot performance. The animation in which the placard at the final point GP rotates may be continuously performed or may be interrupted. Then, as shown in FIG. 198(B9), the variable icon h0 is deleted. In addition, in this effect example, the animation in the chance up meter CMT may be continuously performed without being interrupted even while the symbol is fixedly displayed.

In FIG. 198 (B10), the suspension of the special figure 1 (first suspension) is exhausted, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the present pattern change) placed on the first stage hs1 is the base of the change icon display area CIS. It moves to hs0 and is displayed as a variable icon h0. In this example of performance, since the chance up meter CMT is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon display area, a part of the movement animation of the hold icon h11 cannot be visually recognized. When the hold icon h11 is moved, the hold icon h11 may be displayed in front of the chance up meter CMT so that the move animation can be visually recognized. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Further, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is restarted, and the character SBH of Sabohani is also restarted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 198 (B11), No. 1 shown in FIG. The icon IHI of "Gold bomber" of No. 6 has appeared at the right end of the screen, and the state that the hold change animation is started is shown. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI displayed here corresponds to the display of the pending change notice. In the hold change animation in this example of performance, while the "gold bomber" icon IHI flies from right to left, a bullet is fired (bombed) at the variable icon h0. The “gold bomber” icon IHI may be temporarily stopped before the target variable icon h0. In addition, this pause may be a pause of a fake that disguises the target icon. Further, in this production example, when the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed by performing the hold change animation by the "gold bomber" icon IHI, the display mode of the changed hold icon is "vertical line". It is suggested that the display mode of the pattern is displayed. In addition, when a hold change animation is performed by the icon IHI of the “gold bomber”, the variable icon h0 may be successfully bombed and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed without fail, or the variable icon h0 may be bombed. May fail and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may not change. In addition, the display mode of the changed hold icon may be a display mode other than the "vertical line" pattern.

Thereafter, in FIG. 198 (B12), it is shown that the bullet icon with the pattern of “vertical line” is being fired from the icon IHI of “gold bomber”. That is, the "gold bomber" icon IHI includes a bomber icon with a "vertical line" pattern and a bullet icon with a "vertical line" pattern. The target here is the variation icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 198 (B13), the bullet icon hits the variable icon h0, and the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the "vertical line" pattern. At this time, the character SBH of Sabohani is moving on the gauge of the chance up meter CMT, and the second check point CP2 arrives at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. The character SBH of Sabohani may reach the second check point CP2 before the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes, or the character SBH of the Savohani character may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. You may reach CP2. The character SBH of Sabohani is stopped at the second checkpoint CP2 and is on standby. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 190 (B11) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 199(A1) to (A4) show another effect pattern following FIG. 162(A2). In this effect example, a state in which the advance look-ahead notice is given by the chance up meter CMT is shown.

As shown in FIG. 199(A1), in this effect example, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, unlike the FIG. 162(A3), the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM preparing display MTY. Is shown. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed not during the reach effect but during normal variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the traveling speed of the character SBH of Sabohani is not constant but may vary depending on the progress situation of the effect, but may be constant. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199(A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard with the question mark is stopped and displayed, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, some kind of hot performance is performed. As described above, in this effect example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT, and the chance up advance notice is displayed in this chance up meter CMT. It is shown that the points (check points CP1 to CP3) indicating the timing to be performed are also displayed. Note that a balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed before the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (A2), as a result of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the decorative defect of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is lost. The combination of symbols is displayed in a stopped manner, and the fluctuation is shown. At this time, the production by the chance up meter CMT is not started, but is in a standby state.

After that, in FIG. 199 (A3), a state is displayed in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted. In this example of the effect, the animation by the chance up meter CMT is interrupted during the stop display of the symbol.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the animation in the chance up meter CMT is restarted as shown in FIG. 199 (A4). Specifically, it is shown that the animation in which the placard rotates at the final point GP is restarted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 190 (B3) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 199(B1) to FIG. 199(B2) show another example of the effects shown in FIG. 198(B8) to FIG. 198(B9).

FIG. 199(B1) corresponds to the effect shown in FIG. 198(B8), and shows a state in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is confirmed and displayed. Accordingly, the second decorative design is also stopped and displayed in the same combination of decorative designs. Note that, in this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 198 (B8), the state in which the animation in the chance up meter CMT is continuously performed without interruption is displayed during the fixed display of the symbol. There is. Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (B2), the variable icon h0 is deleted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 198 (B11) and thereafter are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 199(C1) to (C5) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20(2). In this effect example, the pre-reading notice is displayed by displaying the timer notice display TM1.

FIG. 199(C1) shows a state in which the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the frame is arranged at the right end of the center of the display screen. However, in this effect example, unlike FIG. 20(3), the countdown is not started in the state of "10:00" on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1. In other words, in this effect example, a notice relating to the timer notice effect is given during execution of the symbol variation display subsequent to the symbol variation display in which the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, that is, the timer notice notice is displayed by the display of the timer notice display TM1. It can be said that the pre-reading notice of the production is being given.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (C2), as a result of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the decoration of the "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is lost. The combination of symbols is displayed in a stopped manner, and the fluctuation is shown. At this time, in the timer notice display TM1, the start of the countdown is still reserved, and the timer display remains "10:00".

After that, in FIG. 199 (C3), a state in which fixed display is made by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is shown. At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, during the symbol stop display, the layer of the timer notice display TM1 and the layer of the decorative pattern are changed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in preference to the timer notice display TM1. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the decorative design, and at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the decorative design. The timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped as it is even when the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the decorative pattern during the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the decorative pattern even during the temporary stop display. You may do it.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 199 (C4), the timer notice display TM1 comes to be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (C4), the countdown of the timer display has not started yet.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (C5), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain notice effect is started after 10 seconds. It is suggested. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 20(3) and thereafter are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 199(D1) to (D7) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20(1). In this effect example, a state in which a pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect is displayed by displaying the timer notice display TM1 is shown.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (D1) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer notice effect is started by the timer notice display TM1 being framed in from the right side of the display screen. "30:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 20(2), the countdown is not started at the time when the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and the timer display is maintained at “30:00”. ..

After that, when the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D2), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is “29:99”. Has become.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 199 (D3), as a result of the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the decoration of the "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is lost. The combination of symbols is displayed in a stopped manner, and the fluctuation is shown. At this time, the countdown of the timer display continues on the timer notification display TM1, and the timer display on the timer notification display TM1 indicates "18:57" at the timing shown in FIG. 199(D3).

After that, at a timing shown in FIG. 199 (D4), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and the state is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Accordingly, the second decorative design is also stopped and displayed in the same combination of decorative designs. Further, in this effect example, during the symbol stop display, the layer of the timer notice display TM1 and the layer of the decorative pattern are changed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in preference to the timer notice display TM1. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the decorative design, and at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 is hidden by the decorative design. Further, in this effect example, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted, and this is continued until the next symbol variation is started. That is, during the symbol stop display, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is stopped and displayed in the state of "18:00". Even during the symbol stop display, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (D5), the variable icon h0 is deleted.

After that, when the symbol variable display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is also restarted. Then, as shown in FIG. 199 (D6), the timer notice display TM1 comes to be displayed on the front side of the decorative design. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (D6), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shows “17:53”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (D6) to FIG. 199 (D7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes “00:00”. As shown in FIG. 199 (D7), “decoration 7” is displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol before the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, and the reach state is formed. ing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 20(8) and thereafter are performed.

FIGS. 199(E1) to (E3) show another example of the effects shown in (D4) to (D6).

199(E1) to (E2) in FIG. 199 correspond to the effects shown in (D4) to (D5) in FIG. 199, respectively, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" It is shown that the display is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns that are lost. Accordingly, the second decorative design is also stopped and displayed in the same combination of decorative designs. Further, in this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 199 (D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed even during the symbol stop display. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E1), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shows “17:52”. After that, as shown in FIG. 199 (E2), the variable icon h0 is deleted. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E2), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shows “16:92”. Thus, in this effect example, an example in which the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed even during the symbol stop display is shown. It is possible not to execute it when the variable time display before the variable display changes depending on the number of holdings, or the variable display before the pre-reading notice and the variable display before the display. May be executed even when the variable time changes depending on the number of reservations. Further, the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading notice and the symbol variation display executed before that may be executed only when the variation time is determined according to the number of holdings regardless of the number of holdings.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the timer notice display TM1 comes to be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (E3), the timer display shows "15:33". After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 199 (D7) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 200 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect performed in this embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 200(A1) to FIG. 200(A5) show another effect pattern following FIG. 162(A2). In this effect example, a state in which the advance look-ahead notice of the effect by the chance up meter is displayed by the display of the chance up meter CMT is shown.

As shown in FIG. 200(A1), in this effect example, when the flame effect EF101 is erased, unlike the FIG. 162(A3), the chance up meter CMT is displayed instead of the CUM preparing display MTY. Is shown. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed not during the reach effect but during normal variable display of decorative symbols. The CUM preparation in-progress display MTY may be displayed instead of the chance up meter CMT. Further, it may not be possible to switch to the chance up meter CMT after the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed until the movement display of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 200(A1), the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP
3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP in this effect example, the placard shows a question mark and is stopped and displayed, suggesting that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, some kind of hot effect is performed. There is. Note that a balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Savohani may be displayed before the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200(A2), a state is shown in which a balloon with the characters "start from next change!" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani. There is. That is, it is announced that the production by the chance up meter CMT will be started in the next symbol variation display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200(A3), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The combination of symbols is displayed in a stopped manner, and the fluctuation is shown. At this time, the production by the chance up meter CMT is not started, but is in a standby state.

After that, in FIG. 200 (A4), a state is displayed in which the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased. In this production example, the animation by the chance up meter CMT is interrupted during the stop display of the symbol.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 200 (A5), the animation in the chance up meter CMT is restarted. Specifically, it is shown that the animation in which the placard at the final point GP rotates is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 190 (B3) and thereafter are performed.

The example productions shown in FIG. 200(B1) to FIG. 200(B3) show another production pattern that follows FIG. 200(A1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200(B1), a balloon including the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and the button effect is started. ing. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (B2), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the player is allowed to operate the effect button 136. Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 200(B3), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 200(A2) and thereafter are performed. When the effect button 136 is operated, the chance up meter CMT may be erased as the button effect is considered to have failed. Even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, the effect shown in FIG. 200(A2) or later may be performed, or the effect shown in FIG. 200(A2) or later may not be performed. For example, the chance up meter CMT may be deleted. In addition, in this example of performance, when the production button 136 is pressed after the chance up meter CMT is displayed, a balloon is displayed. However, when the CUM preparation display MTY is displayed, the production button is displayed. The operation may be changed to the chance up meter CMT when 136 is operated.

In addition, the above-mentioned button effect by the character SBH of Sabohani is performed while the character SBH of Sabohani is being displayed, to notify that a chance up notice may occur, or to notify that a chance up notice has occurred. Alternatively, a notice other than the chance up notice (for example, a change notice or a look-ahead notice) or an effect (for example, a conversation effect or a tutorial display) may be given.

In the example productions shown in FIGS. 200(C1) to (C9), a situation is shown in which the execution of the production by the chance up meter is announced by a conversation announcement.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C1), the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200(C1), the UI unit UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The UI unit UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200(C1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. That is, the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display (here, "1" and "0") of special maps 1 and 2 is displayed. Further, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the variation icon h0 is also No. 1 in FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. Note that the background screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 200(C1) is solid white, but this solid white color means that the background screen is not shown.

In FIG. 200 (C2), the situation in which the conversation announcement has started is shown. When the conversation notice is started, the lord's conversation image CI1 in which the character display of "SP reach!" is displayed together with the lord's character, and announces the transition to the super reach. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Moreover, the conversation image CI1 of this lord is overlapped with the first decorative design, and the first decorative design is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the first decorative design is not overlapped.

Thereafter, in FIG. 200 (C3), the conversation notice is updated. Specifically, the pal's conversation image CI1 is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative pattern, and the grand conversation image CI2 on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grand character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the player to press the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed by. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (C3), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. Although the first decorative symbol is hidden by the old conversation image CI2, the player may recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. Sometimes you can. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative pattern is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 200 (C3), the palace's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the grandpa's conversation image CI2, and the lord's conversation is more than that in the case where the conversation image CI2 is not overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the image CI1. In this effect example, the effect by the chance up meter CMT is more likely to be started when the conversation notice is given than when the conversation notice is not given. Also, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may not be displayed in a reduced size when the conversation notice is updated (see, for example, FIG.
While the display having the same size as that in 2) is displayed, the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation image displayed first, and the conversation notice A, which has a high degree of expectation for a big hit when displayed, is the conversation image. It may have a size (large or small) different from that of the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A. The operation valid period of the effect button 136 is then started.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 200 (C4) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time has elapsed, and then the player depresses the effect button 136. Then, as shown in FIG. 200 (C5), in the old conversation image CI2, the characters "Watch the meter during SP reach!" may be displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. As a result, it is announced that the chance up meter CMT will be displayed during super reach. The notice character display such as "Attention is paid to the meter during SP reach!" may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the effect button 136 is operated. If the operation valid period has elapsed without the operation valid character, the character "Be careful of the meter during SP reach!" in the old conversation image CI2 may not be displayed. In this case, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed. You may On the contrary, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed. In addition, even if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the character "Attention is paid to the meter during SP reach!" is displayed, and the chance up meter CMT is also displayed. Good. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated, there may be a case where a character display other than “Attention to the meter during SP reach!” or a notice is given. It should be noted that only when the character "Attention is paid to the meter during SP reach!" is displayed by the old conversation image CI2, even if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, "during SP reach" When the character is displayed or a notice other than "Attention is paid to the meter during SP reach!" is displayed by the conversation image CI2 of the grandpa, the effect button 136 is operated within the effective operation period. It may be displayed only when there is. Further, the character display and the advance notice of the old conversation image CI2 may be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated, regardless of the character display and the advance notice of the old conversation image CI2. The character display and the advance notice of the old conversation image CI2 may be displayed even after the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136. As described above, in this example of performance, the transition to SP reach is announced by a conversation notice such as “SP reach!” Further, when the chance up meter CMT is always displayed during SP reach, it is indirect. It is shown that the chance up meter CMT is displayed in advance. It should be noted that even when "SP reach!" is displayed, it is not always necessary to give notice that the chance up meter CMT will produce the effect (for example, SP reach that always displays the chance up meter CMT and chance increase). It is possible that there is an SP reach that does not display the meter CMT).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C6), the palace's conversation image CI1 and the grandpa's conversation image CI2 are erased and the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. The situation is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C7), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol to form a reach state, and a state in which the swing fluctuation display is performed is shown. ing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 16(20) to 16(21) are performed.

In FIG. 200 (C8), the state of development into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 200(C8), the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 200(C9), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. Is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (C9), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 200(C9), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is stopped and displayed with a display of "x", and the appearance by the chance up meter CMT is in a standby state. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A10) and thereafter are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 200(D1) to (D8) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20(2). In this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is being performed is shown.

FIG. 200(D1) shows a state in which the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the frame is arranged at the left end of the center of the display screen. However, in this effect example, unlike FIG. 20(3), the countdown is not started in the state of "10:00" on the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D1), the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is reserved (that is, the standby state). Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice display TM1 is set to the above-mentioned predetermined position, as shown in FIG. 200(D1) to FIG. 200(D2), "10:00" is displayed and "STANDBY" is displayed. Alternate display with the display of. This alternate display is performed during the period in which the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is in the standby state. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D3), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 200 (D4), it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 200 (D4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shows “09:99”, and 0.01 seconds has elapsed since the countdown of the timer display started. There is. The countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes "00:00". After that, for example, the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left and right symbols, respectively, and the reach state is reached, and the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the upper left and right directions. Frame out below the display screen leaving the icon h0.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 200 (D5), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 200 (D6), the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display and the advance notice is displayed. "Attention!!" is displayed to call attention to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 200 (D7), the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd operate, and each overlap on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-sized board action product 224Ga and the second large-sized board action product 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second number-of-holds display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to visually recognize. Further, in this example of performance, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 displayed as "Attention!!" is overlapped by the second large-board behavior auditor 224Gb and the fourth large-board behavior auditor 224Gd, making it difficult to see. There is. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditors 224Gd may operate, and for example, the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to the second large-board behavior auditors 224Ga to 224Ga. The reliability may be different depending on the number of the 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd operating. In addition, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224G
There may be cases where d does not operate. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 200 (D8), timer advance notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 16 (23) and thereafter are performed.

In this example of performance, the time from the countdown start to the time when a certain notice effect is performed is displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed until the countdown of the timer display is started. When the display TM1 is displayed, the countdown of the timer display is started, and before the countdown is started, the time from the start of the countdown until a certain notice effect is performed may not be displayed.

FIG. 201 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the timer notice effect. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 201(A1) to (A28) show, for example, another effect pattern following FIG. 20(1).

FIG. 201(A1) shows a state in which the frame advance of the timer advance notice display TM1 has been completed and the timer advance notice display TM1 is arranged substantially in the center of the display screen. Further, in this effect example, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is in the state of "00:00". That is, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, so that it is announced that the timer notice effect will be performed. However, when the timer notice display TM1 starts to be displayed, the remaining time when the countdown starts Can not be specified.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201(A2), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1, showing that the button effect is started. ing. Then, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201(A3), it is shown that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and then the player produces an effect at the timing shown in FIG. 201(A4). When the button 136 is pressed, high-speed scrolling of the timer display is started on the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 201 (A5). Then, as shown in FIG. 201(A6), the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 becomes “10:00”, and at least 10 seconds or more have elapsed after the countdown of the timer display has started, a certain notification effect is given. Suggested to start. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is not started, but it may be started. In addition, in FIG. 201 (A4), the production button 136 may be pressed, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the timer notice production is a false notice and the timer is not displayed. The notice production ends.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201(A7), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed again together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1, and the second button effect is started. The situation is shown. Then, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201(A8), it is shown that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and then the player produces an effect at the timing shown in FIG. 201(A9). When the button 136 is pressed, high-speed scrolling of the timer display is started on the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 201 (A10). Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A11), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is increased from "10:00" to "20:00", and at least 20 seconds or more have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display started. It is suggested that a certain notice presentation will be started when the time elapses. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is ranked up. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is not started, but it may be started. 201A (A9), the production button 136 may be pressed, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the rank of the timer notice production is not increased, and the timer notice is not displayed. The timer TM in the display TM1 may start the countdown from "10:00".

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A12), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed again together with the button image 136a on the right side of the timer notice display TM1, and the third button effect is started. The situation is shown. Then, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 201(A13), it is shown that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased, and then the player produces an effect at the timing shown in FIG. 201(A14). When the button 136 is pressed, high-speed scrolling of the timer display is started on the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 201 (A15). Then, as shown in FIG. 201 (A16), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is increased from “20:00” to “30:00”, and at least 30 seconds or more have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display started. It is suggested that a certain notice production is started when the time elapses. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is further upgraded. Note that the production button 136 in FIG. 201 (A14) may be pressed, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may not change. In this case, the timer notice production is not ranked up and the timer notice is not displayed. The countdown may be started from "20:00" on the timer display in the display TM1.

In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed in three stages, and when the three-stage rank increase is performed as described above, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17), In the 1 decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF303 is displayed so as to surround the timer notice display TM1 to notify that the rank notice effect of the timer notice is completed. After that, the effect EF303 is erased and the animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves to the center right end of the display screen is started. After that, FIG. 201 (A18) shows a state in which the movement animation of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the movement to the center right end portion of the display screen is completed.

Then, after the "decoration 7" is stopped on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the right end of the center of the display screen moves again to the substantially center of the display screen. Animation is done. FIG. 201(A19) shows a state in which the movement animation of the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the movement to the substantial center of the display screen is completed. It should be noted that the timer notice display TM1 does not have to move even during the countdown of the timer display as shown in the other effect examples. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may or may not be moved, and for example, the timer notice display TM1 may be moved and displayed to function as a chance up notice. When the moving animation of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and it is suggested that a certain notice effect is started after 30 seconds.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201(A20), it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is being counted down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 201(A20), the timer notice display is shown. The timer display in TM1 is "29:99".

When the "decoration 7" is stopped and the reach effect is started on the left and right symbols and the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved to the upper left and right respectively, and displayed in the UI section UI. , And frame out below the display screen, leaving the variable icon h0. Then, when it develops into super reach (swordsman reach), the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A21), and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 201 (A22). , The animation display of the duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman will start. During this time, the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continued, and the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "17:63" at the timing shown in FIG. 201 (A22).

Then, as shown in FIG. 201(A23), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 201(A24), the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display, and the advance notice is displayed. "Attention!!" is displayed to call attention to. Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A25), the cut-in image of the panda character is displayed on the entire display screen, and the effect that the panda character appears as an assistant in the swordsman reach is started. It After that, for example, an effect of developing into an SP swordsman reach is performed as shown in FIG. 30(30b) to FIG. 30(32b). That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, an effect that develops into SP swordsman reach is performed as a certain advance notice effect.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A26), the lever image 136Va is displayed together with the display of “one shot” to notify that the notice by the lever effect has started. At this time, the button image 136a or the big button image 136aL may be displayed to notify the start of the advance notice by the button effect. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A27), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V has started. At this time, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is also started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 201 (A28), it is shown that the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 29(22) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 202 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 202(A1) to (A4) show another effect pattern following FIG. 162(A7). In this example of the effect, it is shown that the effect of the chance up meter CMT is announced in advance. In other words, it can be said that a situation is shown in which the effect that the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is changed is announced in advance. It should be noted that the start of the effect by the chance up meter CM may be notified in advance every time, and may or may not be notified in advance.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202(A1), an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the UI unit UI is all hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variable icon h0 does not disappear and remains displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative design and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire UI unit UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire UI unit UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed. In addition, a CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and "STANDB" is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani.
A balloon with the letter "Y" is displayed.

FIG. 202(A2) shows a state in which the display is switched from the CUM preparation display MTY to the chance up meter CMT. The chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202(A2) has a first checkpoint CP1, a second checkpoint CP2, and a third checkpoint CP3. The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, so that the player can be expected. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is displayed in rotation, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, either the result of the big hit or the loss is derived. Alternatively, it may also suggest that an intense heat may be produced. Note that, in this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 162 (A9), when the display is switched to the chance up meter CMT, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani together with the characters “Sorosoro START”. The displayed balloon is displayed to notify the player that the character SBH of Savohani in the chance up meter CMT is about to start moving. That is, the start of the change in the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is foretold. As a result, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation that the production by the chance up meter CMT will be started. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the balloon of "Nearly START" is displayed, the balloon is erased as shown in FIG. 202 (A3). The state in which the balloon is displayed may be maintained until the production by the chance up meter CMT is started.

FIG. 202(A4) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani that functions as a cursor starts moving. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. It should be noted that the balloon of “START!!” may be configured not to be displayed, or may be configured to be displayed or not displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 162 (A11) and thereafter are performed.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 202(B1) to (B9) show another production pattern following FIG. 20(2), but in this production example, a frame-in animation of the timer notice display TM1 is performed. The countdown has not started while I was being told. This example of the effect shows that the timer advance notice effect gives advance notice of the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1. That is, it can be said that a state is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 is announced.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202(B1), the state where the frame of the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the frame is arranged at the right end of the center of the display screen is shown. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "10:00" and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in FIG. 202 (B2), the state of development into super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 202(B2), the image of the enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 202(B3), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, with the main character. Animation of the duel scene with the enemy swordsman begins. On the other hand, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 has not started yet.

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 202 (B4) to (B6), a swing animation in which the timer notice display TM1 swings up and down is performed, and the timer notice display TM is given to the player.
It is announced that the countdown of the timer display in 1 will start soon. That is, the start of a change in the display mode of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1 is notified. As a result, the player may be able to have an expectation that the countdown of the timer display in the timer announcement effect will be started. It should be noted that a fake timer advance notice effect in which the timer display countdown is not performed even when the swing animation is performed may be performed. When the swing animation is performed, the timer display countdown is always performed. You may do it.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (B7), a state is shown in which the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 202 (B7), the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shows “09:99”, and 0.01 seconds has elapsed since the countdown of the timer display started. There is. The countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until it becomes "00:00" as shown in FIGS. 202(B7) to (B8). The countdown may be interrupted midway.

After that, as shown in FIG. 202(B8), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 202(B9), the timer advance notice display TM1 is changed to the timer display, and the advance notice is displayed. "Attention!!" is displayed to call attention to. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 201 (A25) and thereafter are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 202(C1) to (C6) show another effect pattern following FIG. 48(A2). In this effect example, by enlarging and displaying the timer notice display TM1 while displaying "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared, it is noticed that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started. It shows how they are doing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202(C1), a state in which the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed is shown. When the frame advance of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that fact. In this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 48(A3), the display of "STANDBY" (display in preparation) is not a pre-reading notice, but a notice concerning the symbol variation display being executed (the variation notice) is given. Is shown. The advance notice may be given instead of the change notice.

After that, the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. After that, as shown in FIG. 202(C2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the super reach ( It shows that it has developed into a swordsman reach. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 202 (C3), an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. During this time, the display of "STANDBY" is continued on the timer notice display TM1.

After that, in this effect example, after the animation of moving the timer notice display TM1 to the substantially center of the display screen while expanding, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 202 (C4), and then, As shown in FIG. 202 (C5), in the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of "STANDBY" is switched to the display of "10:00" as the timer display.

Then, the timer notice display TM1 shrinks to the center right end of the display screen while being reduced, and then the timer notice display TM1 shrinks to the center right end of the display screen as shown in FIG. 202 (C6). Will be displayed. After that, for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 202 (B7) and thereafter is performed.

In this example of performance, the timer advance notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is enlarged and displayed in a reduced scale after the display is switched to "10:00" as the timer display. As shown in 202 (C4), after the timer advance notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is enlarged, as shown in FIG. 202 (C5'), the display of "STANDBY" is displayed without switching to the timer display. The display may be reduced as it is, and then the display may be switched to the timer display. In this case, after enlarging/reducing the timer notice display TM1 only once, the timer notice display TM1 may be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display to start the countdown of the timer display, or "STANDBY" may be displayed. The timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged/reduced a plurality of times in the displayed state and then the timer advance notice display TM1 may be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display to start the countdown of the timer display. Further, although the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged/reduced, there is a case where a switching display from "STANDBY" to the timer display is not performed and a fake timer notice effect in which the timer notice display TM1 is erased as it is is performed. Good. Further, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged/reduced, the symbol variation display is stopped and displayed, and the display of "STANDBY" is maintained until the next symbol variation display is started, and then the timer notice display TM1. May be switched from "STANDBY" to the timer display and the countdown of the timer display may be started. In addition, even if the timer advance notice display TM1 displaying "STANDBY" is enlarged, the countdown of the timer display may not be started as it is. If the timer advance notice display TM1 displaying "STANDBY" is enlarged, the timer is always displayed. The display countdown may be started. Further, the countdown of the timer display may be started after the timer advance notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed is always enlarged. Further, the timer notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed may or may not be enlarged. For example, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged to function as a chance up notice. Here, in the case where the chance up notice is generated, the symbol variable display in which the chance up notice is finally generated is more likely to be stopped and displayed in the final jackpot symbol display mode than when the chance up notice is not generated. It may have been done. This can be applied to the effect examples described so far and the effect examples described later.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of effects using the chance up meter. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 203(A1) to (A27) show another effect pattern following FIG. 162(A3).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203(A1), the flame effect EF101 is displayed in the center part on the left side of the display screen, and the state in which the CUM preparing display appearance animation is started is shown. As a result, in addition to the first CUM preparing display MTY1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “first CUM preparing display MTY1”) displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, the second CUM preparing is in progress. It is foretold that the display MTY2 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “second CUM preparation display MTY2”) may be displayed. In this case, the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be displayed without displaying the flame effect EF101. Further, when the flame effect EF101 is displayed, the second CUM preparation in-progress display MTY2 may be displayed. Further, the flame effect EF101 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 203(A2), when the flame effect EF101 is erased, the second CUM preparing display MTY2 appears at the position where the flame effect EF101 was displayed. As described above, in this effect example, a plurality of CUM preparation-in-progress displays are displayed. In addition, in this effect example, the example in which the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is displayed after the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is displayed, but the first CUM preparing display MTY1 and the second CUM preparing display MTY2 are simultaneously displayed. It may be displayed.

In FIG. 203(A3), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol to form a reach state, and a fluctuation display is shown. After that, for example, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 162(A5) to (A6). At this time, the two CUM preparation-in-progress displays MTY1 and MTY2 are displayed so as to overlap on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the decoration pattern is not overlapped by these CUM-in-progress displays MTY1 and MTY2. It is said that the decorative pattern is difficult to see. It should be noted that the CUM preparation-in-progress displays MTY1 and MTY2 may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative design and may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, it may not be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design.

In FIG. 203(A4), a state in which the super reach effect of VS swordsman reach is started is shown. At this time, the CUM preparation display MTY1 and MTY2 are also continuously displayed. Here, when both of the two CUM preparing displays MTY1 and MTY2 are not displayed, the chance up meter effect may not be performed, or when at least one of them is displayed, the chance is displayed. An upmeter effect may be performed. In this case, the case where two CUM preparation displays are displayed may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol mode than the case where only one CUM preparation display is displayed. Further, even when neither of the two CUM preparation displays MTY1 and MTY2 is displayed, the chance up meter effect may be performed. An image of an enemy swordsman is displayed in large size on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (A4), and the main character appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in (A5). The animation of the duel scene with the enemy swordsman is displayed. When the super reach effect is started, the UI section UI is all hidden (disappears) except for the top plate of the pedestal hs0. Also, the hold icon is hidden (disappears). However, the variation icon h0 does not disappear and remains displayed on the remaining top plate. Further, the second decorative design and the second hold number display are also continuously displayed. The entire UI unit UI may be erased, or conversely, the entire UI unit UI may be continuously displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 may be erased or the hold icon may be continuously displayed.

In FIG. 203(A6), the first CUM preparing display MTY1 and the second CUM preparing display MTY2 are switched to the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, respectively. In this case, the second CUM preparing display MTY1 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2 after the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1, or the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched. After switching to the second chance up meter CMT2, the first CUM preparing display MTY1 may switch to the first chance up meter CMT1, or the timing at which the first CUM preparing display MTY1 switches to the first chance up meter CMT1. The timing at which the second CUM preparation display MTY2 switches to the second chance up meter CMT2 may be the same. Note that, in this effect example, unlike FIG. 162 (A9), the first check point CP1 and the third check point CP3 are arranged in the first chance up meter CMT1, and the second check point CP2 is arranged in the second chance up meter CMT2. Are arranged. That is, the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 are different in the position at which the timing at which the chance up notice is issued is notified. It should be noted that it is possible to appropriately set which check point is placed in which chance up meter. Further, the checkpoint may be placed only on one of the chance up meters and the checkpoint may not be placed on the other. In addition, the same check point may be arranged on both chance up meters, for example, the third check point CP3 is arranged on both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2. In this example of performance, when one of the Sabohani character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 reaches any checkpoint, a specific notice may be issued. It is supposed to be. Further, at both the final point GP of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the final point GP of the second chance up meter CMT2, the placard is displayed in rotation, and the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. It suggests that the results of either jackpot or loss are derived. Alternatively, it may be suggested to develop into a super-hot production.

FIG. 203(A7) shows a state in which the character SBH of Sabohani that functions as a cursor starts moving. In this effect example, both the Sabohani character SBH in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 start moving at the same time. In addition, when the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani. This notifies the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. The balloon "START!!" may be displayed only when the chance up meter is displayed after the CUM preparation display is displayed, or whether the CUM preparation display is displayed or not. Instead, when the chance up meter is displayed, it may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, by displaying the balloon of "START!!", it may be announced that the chance up notice is likely to occur at the check points CP1 to CP3. Further, in this effect example, the balloon of "START!!" is displayed for both the character SBH of Savohani in the first chance up meter CMT1 and the character SBH of Sabohani in the second chance up meter CMT2. However, only one of them may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203(A8), the movement from the start point SP is performed for both the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance upmeter CMT2. It is shown to be starting.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203(A9), at the timing when the character SBH of Sabohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 reaches the first check point CP1, the character Boy of Boy is on the left side of the display screen. Appearing from and moving towards the right. That is, it is shown that a chance up notice is given due to the appearance of the boy character BOY. On the other hand, the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 moves while the chance up notice is given, but while the chance up notice is given, the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is displayed. The character SBH may also be stopped.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203(A10), a balloon with the word "Chance Up Boy Passed" is displayed near the character SBH of Savohani on the first chance up meter CMT1, and a chance is displayed. It informs that the notice has been given by displaying the character up. In addition to the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1, a balloon may be displayed for the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 or the sabotani character of the first chance up meter CMT1. The balloon may be displayed only for the character SBH of Savohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 instead of the character SBH. In addition, the balloon may not be displayed for both the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance upmeter CMT2. In this case, the larger the number of displayed balloons, the higher the reliability of the big hit. Note that the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the advance notice by the display of the boy character BOY is being given, but may not be stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 203(A11), the first check point CP1 in the first chance up meter CMT1 is marked in red, and the notice of appearance causes the reliability of the jackpot to be increased. The character "" is displayed above it to show the history of the advance notice. In addition, it is shown that the character SBH of the sabotani of the first chance up meter CMT1 is restarting the movement. At this time, the moving speed of the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 is adjusted by the sabotani of the second chance up meter CMT2 so that the moving speed of the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is vertically aligned. It is faster than the moving speed of the character SBH. That is, the moving speed is adjusted. Here, the moving speed may not be adjusted, and the moving speed may be constant. Note that the display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Savohani of the first chance up meter CMT1, and it is more difficult to visually recognize it than in the case where it is not overlapped. Further, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 203 (A12), when the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 reaches the second check point CP2, the button is pressed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A13). The image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. At this time, the second chance up meter CMT2 overlaps the button image 136a, but the second chance up meter CMT2 may be displayed so as to overlap the button image 136a. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is stopped at the second check point CP2 until a button operation is performed by the player or the operation valid period elapses, but may not be stopped. .. On the other hand, the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 continues to move while the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is stopped, but the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is displayed. The character SBH may be stopped when the movement of the character SBH is stopped.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 203(A14), it is shown that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced, and thereafter, the effect is produced by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 203(A15). When the button 136 is pressed, a gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 203 (A16), and a notice effect is given to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. The weak cut-in image CI3b may be displayed instead of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203(A16). The gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203(A16) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 has been operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be displayed within the operation valid period. It may be always displayed when it is operated in. In addition, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 203(A16) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, and the effect button 136 may be displayed. It may be displayed without fail when the operation valid period has passed without being operated, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period has passed without operating the effect button 136.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203(A17), a balloon with the words "Chance Up Gold Cut-in" added is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2, It informs that the chance up notice is given by displaying the gold cut-in image CI3. In addition to the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2, a balloon may be displayed for the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 or the sabotani character of the second chance up meter CMT2. Instead of the character SBH, the balloon may be displayed only for the character SBH of Savohani of the first chance up meter CMT1. In addition, the balloon may not be displayed for both the Sabohani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the Sabohani character SBH of the second chance upmeter CMT2. In this case, the larger the number of displayed balloons, the higher the reliability of the big hit. The sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 also stops at the second check point CP2 while the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, but may not stop. Further, in the case where the gold cut-in image CI3 is configured not to be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without the production button 136 being operated, the production button 136 is also operated when the production button 136 is not operated. Just as when is operated, it may be notified that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, it is not necessary to notify that the advance notice of the chance up has occurred, and the advance notice of the chance up occurs. Only a part of what has been done may be informed (for example, the balloon is not displayed but only the characters “UP” are displayed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 203(A18), after the second check point CP2 in the second chance up meter CMT2 is marked in red, the gold cut-in image CI3 is erased, and a chance up notice appears. The character "UP" indicating that the jackpot reliability has increased is displayed above, and a history of occurrence of a chance up notice is shown. Further, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani of the second chance up meter CMT2 is restarting the movement. At this time, the moving speed of the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 is adjusted so that the moving speed of the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 is aligned with the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 in the vertical direction. It is faster than the moving speed of the character SBH. That is, the moving speed is adjusted. Here, the moving speed may not be adjusted, and the moving speed may be constant. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Savohani of the second chance up meter CMT1 and is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case of the non-overlapping state. Further, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 203(A19), when the character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 Sabohani reaches the third check point CP3, the lever is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203(A20). The image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the word "chance up lever" is displayed near the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 to notify that the notice of the lever effect has started. ing. At this time, the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 has stopped moving, but the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 continues to move without stopping. It should be noted that while the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 is stopping the movement, the sabotani character SBH of the second chance up meter CMT2 may also be stopped. Further, in this effect example, at least a part of the balloon is overlapped with the lever image 136Va, and the display mode of the balloon is more difficult to visually recognize than when the lever image 136Va is not overlapped. Note that the balloon may display the lever image 136Va so that it overlaps.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203(A21), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136Va, and the lever effect is started. Also,
The third checkpoint CP3 in the first chance up meter CMT1 is marked in red, and the word “UP” indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has been improved due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what has occurred is shown. The display of “UP” is overlapped by the character SBH of Savohani of the first chance up meter CMT1 and is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the characters are not overlapped. Then, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the player can receive the operation of the effect lever 136V. Here, the sabotani character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 resumes the movement when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, but the lever operation is performed by the player or the operation valid period elapses. Alternatively, the vehicle may stop at the third check point CP3.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 203 (A22) shows that the operation valid period has started and the gauge has decreased. On the other hand, in both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, the sabotani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

Thereafter, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 203(A23) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 203(A24), the first large-board behavior auditors 224Ga- The 4 large-board behavior auditors 224Gd and the thousand box cabinet auditors 224H operate, the light guide plate IL emits light, and the effect image may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. At this time, both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 are hidden, but may be displayed. Note that only one of the chance up meters may be hidden. After that, for example, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H are returned to their initial positions, for example, as shown in FIG. 29(24). The effect image fades out on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. Although the opportunity up meters CMT1 and CMT2 also fade in with the fade-in of the duel scene animation display, the chance up meters CMT1 and CMT2 are displayed again after the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed. You may

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 203 (A25), a state in which the fade-in of the duel scene animation display is completed and restarted is shown. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the enemy swordsman appears to be in agony and appears to be defeated. In addition, in both the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the final point GP, and the placard shows the character "V" indicating that it is a big hit. That is, in this effect example, the display of "V" is shown at a plurality of places.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 203 (A26), the main character's lord wins over the enemy swordsman, "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle pattern, and it is notified that it is a big hit. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 17 (48) and thereafter are performed.

In this production example, the check points placed on the two chance up meters are made different, but the check placed on the two chance up meters (first chance up meter CMT1, second chance up meter CMT2) is checked. The points may be the same, and the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 may be rendered in the same display mode.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the effect performed in the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 204(A1) to 204(A16) show another effect pattern following FIG. 203(A5).

In FIG. 204(A1), unlike the case of FIG. 203(A5), the display of the first CUM preparing display MTY1 is switched to the first chance up meter CMT1, but the display of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is switched. However, the display is still in the preparation state, and the display of the balloon of "STANDBY" by the character SBH of Sabohani continues. The second CUM in-progress display MTY2 is continuously displayed until the timing shown in FIG. 204(A12). In this effect example, the first check point CP1, the second check point CP2, and the third check point CP3 are arranged on the first chance up meter CMT1, as in FIG. 162 (A9). That is, in this effect example, a state in which the first chance up meter CMT1 first notifies of the timing at which the chance up notice is issued is shown. In this case, the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2, and the first CUM preparing display MTY1 may be left as the preparing display without being switched. Further, at the final point GP of the first chance up meter CMT1, the placard is rotatably displayed, which suggests that when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, it develops into a super hot effect. .. Alternatively, it may be suggested that a jackpot or loss is derived.

FIG. 204(A2) shows a state in which the character SBH of the sabotani that functions as a cursor starts moving in the first chance up meter CMT. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. On the other hand, in the second CUM preparation display MTY2, the character SBH of Sabohani has not moved from the start point SP, is still waiting, and the balloon of "STANDBY" is still displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notification of the timing at which a certain notice effect is performed is started by the chance up meter that is switched first among the two CUM preparing displays MTY1 and MTY2. ing. After that, for example, the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 29(2) to FIG. 29(16) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 204(A3), when the character SBH of the first chance up meter CMT1 Sabohani reaches the third check point CP3, the lever is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204(A4). Instead of the image 136Va, the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, showing that the lever effect has not been started as a notice of an increased chance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 204(A4), the balloon of the character SBH of the sabotani is not displayed on the first chance up meter CMT1, and as shown in FIG. 204(A4) to FIG. The character SBH passes through the third check point CP3 as it is, and neither the marking at the third check point CP3 nor the display of the character "UP" is performed. Note that FIG. 204 (A4) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started and the player is ready to accept the operation of the effect button 136. Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204(A4), the button image 136a is displayed overlapping with the second CUM preparing display MTY2, but the button image 136a is displayed in the second CUM preparing display MTY2. They may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 204(A5) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the first chance up meter CMT1, the sabotani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

Thereafter, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 204(A6) within the operation valid period, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204(A7), A message saying that the character and the enemy swordsman have lost the battle is displayed along with a line saying "Did you remove it?". It should be noted that this display overlaps the second CUM preparing display MTY2 and is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is not displayed. In addition, in the first chance up meter CMT1, the character display "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP to notify that the reach effect will be developed.

After that, the cut-in image CI4 by the lord's character shown in FIG. 204(A8) is displayed, and after notifying that the reach effect will be developed, as shown in FIG. 204(A9), the panda of the swordsman reach is displayed. The effect that the character appears as an assistant is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 204(A10), the first chance up meter CMT1 is erased by the erasing animation (erasing animation), and then the animation (falling animation) in which the second CUM preparing display MTY2 moves downward is started. It It should be noted that the descending animation of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 is started, and the erasing animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 may be started while the descending animation is being displayed, or the erasing animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 is started. Then, the descending animation of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may be started during the display of the erasing animation. Further, the erasing animation of the first chance up meter CMT1 and the descending animation of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 may start at the same time.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (A10) to (A12), the second CUM preparing display MTY2 moves to the lower left corner portion of the display screen (that is, the position where the first chance up meter CMT1 was displayed) by the descending animation. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A13), the display of the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2. The second chance up meter CMT2 is provided with the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5, as in the effect shown in FIG. 30 (29b), and the placard indicates “V” at the final point GP. It is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that a big hit when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP. The display position may be changed by the descending animation after the display is switched from the second CUM preparation display TMY2 to the second chance up meter CMT2. This can be applied even when only one chance up meter is displayed. Further, the descending animation may not be performed and the display position may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 204 (A14), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, in the second chance up meter CMT2, the state in which the character SBH of Sabohani that functions as a cursor starts moving is shown. At this time, a balloon written “START!!” is displayed near the character SBH of Sabohani to notify the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani. As described above, in this effect example, one of the two CUM preparing displays MTY1 and MTY2 (the first CUM preparing display MTY1) is switched to the chance up meter (first chance up meter CMT1) first, After the production of the chance up meter by the switched chance up meter (first chance up meter CMT1) is completed, the other ready display (second CUM ready display MTY2) indicates that the chance up meter (second chance up meter CMT2). ), and the appearance of the chance up meter by the chance up meter (second chance up meter CMT2) is started. In the second chance up meter CMT2, the fourth check point CP4 and the fifth check point CP5 are arranged, and the timing at which a certain notice effect is performed is notified when the Sabohani character SBH reaches each check point. There is. Then, as shown in FIG. 204(A15), the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is erased.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (A16), a state in which the SP swordsman reach shown in FIG. 30 and described above is developed is shown. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 204 (A16) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 185 (A19), so description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 30 (31b) and thereafter are performed.

In this example of effect, after the first chance up meter CMT1 is erased, the second CUM preparation display MTY2 is switched to the second chance up meter CMT2. The second CUM preparation display MTY2 may be switched to the second chance up meter CMT2 during the moving display of the character SBH. In this case, while the first chance up meter CMT1 is moving and displaying the character SBH of Savohani, the second chance up meter CMT2 may start moving the character SBH of Savohani.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 204(B1) to (B11) show another effect pattern following FIG. 48(A2). In this effect example, 2 is displayed in a state where "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed in the timer notice effect display TM1 (in this effect example, "first timer notice effect display TM1"). The second timer advance notice display (second timer advance notice display TM2) is displayed, and "STANDBY" indicating that preparation for the timer advance notice is being displayed is also displayed on this second timer advance notice display TM2. It shows a state suggesting that the timer advance notice production is started.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204(B1) shows that the frame-in of the first timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the first timer notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the first timer notice display TM1 to notify that effect. In this effect example, as in the effect example shown in FIG. 48(A3), the display of "STANDBY" (display in preparation) is shown as a pre-reading notice. It should be noted that it may be given as a notice of the change.

In FIG. 204(B2), as a result of the decorative design being stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative designs with the loss of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, and fluctuation fluctuation It is shown to be taking place. At this time, the first decorative pattern is at least partially overlapped by the first timer notice display TM1 and is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which it is not overlapped by the first timer notice display TM1.

After that, in FIG. 204(B3), a state is shown in which the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased. While the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, at least a part of the first timer notice display TM1 overlaps the decorative design. The decorative pattern may be overlapped with the first timer notice display TM1 even while the decorative pattern is fixedly displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, as shown in FIG. 204 (B4), the first timer notice display TM1 comes to be displayed on the front side of the first decorative symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 204(B4), the display on the first timer advance notice display TM1 remains "STANDBY".

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204(B5), a moving animation in which the first timer notice display TM1 moves downward is started, and at the position where the first timer notice display TM1 was displayed. The animation in which the second timer notice display TM2 is framed in is started. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM2 is at least partially overlapped by the first timer advance notice display TM1 and is framed in. That is, the timer advance notice display in preparation (the first timer notice display TM1 in which "STANDBY" is displayed) displayed earlier is displayed in advance, and the timer advance notice display in preparation ("STANDBY" is displayed. It is shown that it is displayed behind the second timer notice display TM2). It is to be noted that the previously displayed timer advance notice display being prepared may be displayed behind the timer advance notice display being displayed later. Further, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 may be displayed so as not to overlap with each other. Further, in this example of performance, the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 and the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 are started at the same time, but the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 is started. After that, the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 may start, or the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 may start after the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 starts. Good. Further, after the moving animation of the first timer notice display TM1 is completed, the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 may be started, or after the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 is completed. Then, the moving animation of the first timer notice display TM1 may start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204(B6), the movement animation of the first timer notice display TM1 and the frame-in animation of the second timer notice display TM2 are shown to be completed. That is, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed below the second timer notice display TM2. In this example of performance, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed so as not to overlap each other. However, the second timer notice is displayed so as to overlap the rear side of the first timer notice display TM1. The display TM2 may be displayed. In this case, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may coincide with the display position of the first timer advance notice display TM1, or the display position may be shifted vertically or horizontally.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204(B7), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain notice effect is started after 10 seconds. Is suggested. On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM2, the in-preparation display continues and the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, for example, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 20(3) to 20(8). In the meantime, the second timer notice display TM2 continues to display the in-preparation display. The countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM1 may be started after the movement animation of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is completed, or may be started during the movement by the movement animation of the first timer advance notice display TM1. May be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 204 (B8), a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side is started. The display of "STANDBY" continues on the second timer notice display TM2. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 204(B9), after the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 204(B10), the lord's character and the character of “continuation”. And a cut-in display consisting of At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM2 displays "STANDBY" without changing the display position. The display position of the second timer notice display TM2 may be changed after the first timer notice display TM1 is erased. In this case, for example, the display position of the second timer notice display TM2 may be moved to the position where the first timer notice display TM1 was displayed. In this effect example, the pseudo-relational pattern is stopped and displayed in this manner, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. The pseudo-relational pattern may be framed out downward without being stopped and displayed. When the pseudo-relational pattern is framed out downward, the pseudo-relational pattern is not started, and the decorative pattern with the missing pattern is not displayed. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be set and the reach effect may be started. In this way, in this example of performance, the timer is notified so that the pseudo-relation is started after the countdown is completed. After that, for example, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 20(13) to 20(14). In addition, after that, one or more times of the pseudo continuous production may be further performed.

After that, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and the reach state is reached. As shown in FIG. 204 (B11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, super reach (swordsman reach) has been developed. The situation is shown. Even at this time, the second timer advance notice display TM2 continues to display "STANDBY". After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 202 (C3) and thereafter are performed.

In this example of performance, the second timer notice display TM2 is displayed after the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are simultaneously displayed. It may be done. Further, in this effect example, after the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM1 displayed earlier is completed, the countdown of the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM2 displayed later is started. However, the countdown may be started simultaneously with the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM2. In this case, both times indicated by the timer display may be the same (for example, “10:00”), and the countdown may be completed at the same time. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 differ in time indicated by the timer display at the start of the countdown, and the countdown is started at the same time, but the timing of completing the countdown may be different. Further, the second timer advance notice display TM2 displayed after the first timer advance notice display TM1 displayed earlier may start the countdown of the timer display earlier. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM1 displayed earlier starts first, the countdown of the timer display in the second timer notice display TM2 displayed later during the execution of the countdown starts, and thereafter, The countdown of both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 may be completed at the same time. Specifically, the timer display at the start of the countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM1 is "30:00", and the timer display at the start of the countdown on the second timer advance notice display TM2 is "10:00". When the timer display counts down to "10:00" on the first timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be started.

FIG. 205 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effects shown in FIG. 205(A1) to FIG. 205(A14) show another effect pattern following FIG. 20(1). In this effect example, 2 is displayed in a state where "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed in the timer notice effect display TM1 (in this effect example, "first timer notice effect display TM1"). The second timer advance notice display (second timer advance notice display TM2) is displayed, and "STANDBY" indicating that preparation for the timer advance notice is being displayed is also displayed on this second timer advance notice display TM2. It shows a state suggesting that the timer advance notice production is started.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205(A1) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, from the right side of the display screen, the first timer notice display TM1
When the frame enters, the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 204(B1), the display position when the frame-in of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is started is different. That is, a state in which the frame-in is performed at a position lower than the position of the first timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 204(B1) is shown. In this production example, the display position of the first timer notice display TM1 is different from the display position of the timer notice display TM1 in the timer notice production described above, but the production shown in this production example is another production. It goes without saying that the example is also applicable.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205(A2) shows that the frame-in of the first timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the first timer notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the first timer notice display TM1 to notify that effect. In this effect example, as in the effect example shown in FIG. 48(A3), the display of "STANDBY" (display in preparation) is shown as a pre-reading notice. It should be noted that it may be given as a notice of the change.

In FIG. 205 (A3), as a result of the decorative design being stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the defective decorative designs of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, and the fluctuation of fluctuation It is shown to be taking place.

After that, in FIG. 205(A4), a state is displayed in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased.

After that, after the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205(A5), the second timer notice display TM2 is framed in above the first timer notice display TM1. The animation to be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205(A6), the state where the animation of the frame-in of the second timer notice display TM2 is completed is shown. That is, the first timer notice display TM1 is displayed below the second timer notice display TM2. In this example of performance, the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are displayed so as not to overlap each other. However, the second timer notice is displayed so as to overlap the rear side of the first timer notice display TM1. The display TM2 may be displayed. In this case, the display position of the second timer advance notice display TM2 may coincide with the display position of the first timer advance notice display TM1, or the display position may be shifted vertically or horizontally.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 205(A7), the first timer advance notice display TM1 is switched from the display of "STANDBY" to the display of "10:00" as the timer display. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the countdown of the timer display is started. On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM2, the in-preparation display continues and the display of "STANDBY" continues. After that, for example, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 20(3) to 20(8). In the meantime, the second timer notice display TM2 continues to display the in-preparation display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205(A8), the pseudo continuous symbol, in which the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol, starts moving at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The display of "STANDBY" continues on the second timer notice display TM2. After that, the first timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 205 (A9).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205(A10), a moving animation in which the second timer notice display TM2 moves downward is started, and the second timer notice display TM2 moves to the display position of the first timer notice display TM1. After that, as shown in FIG. 205(A11), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed. At this time, the moving animation of the second timer notice display TM2 continues. The cut-in display may be performed after the moving animation of the second timer notice display TM2 is completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 205(A12), when the second timer advance notice display TM2 moves to the position where the first timer advance notice display TM1 was displayed, the moving animation is completed. In the second timer notice display TM2, “STANDBY” is continuously displayed. After that, for example, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 20(13) to 20(14). In addition, after that, one time or a plurality of times of pseudo continuous production may be further performed. Further, in this effect example, the state in which the second timer notice display TM2 moves after the first timer notice display TM1 is erased is shown, but the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are also displayed. It may be arranged so that it does not move after the completion. The first timer advance notice display TM1 and the second timer advance notice display TM2 may be displayed so as not to overlap with each other.

After that, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, and the reach state is reached. As shown in FIG. 205(A13), the first decorative symbol display device 208L has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). The situation is shown. Even at this time, the second timer advance notice display TM2 continues to display "STANDBY". In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 205 (A14) that follows, an animation of a duel scene between the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed. During this period, the display of "STANDBY" is continued on the second timer notice display TM2. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 202 (C4) and thereafter are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 205(B1) to 205(B8) show that another effect pattern of the timer notice effect is being performed, and it is not the countdown of the timer display but that of the detonator of the bomb display. It is shown that the timing of giving a certain notice effect is informed by the display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205(B1), it is shown that variable display of decorative symbols is being performed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 205(B1), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed, and in the second holding number display, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is displayed. “1” indicating that is 1 is displayed. Further, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 205(B2) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed with a fuse added, and the lord's character BYM appears and an animation (extension animation) is performed to extend the fuse. After that, as shown in FIG. 205(B3), the extension animation completes the extension of the squib of the bomb timer display BOMB, and then the extension animation is completed, and the tip of the squib ignites as shown in FIG. 205(B4). Then, the timer notice production is started. In the timer advance notice effect in this example, the start timing of a certain advance notice effect that is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is indicated by the fact that the countdown effect is performed in a mode in which the squib becomes shorter as time passes. I will inform you by the length of. The production of the countdown is performed until there is no fuse, as shown in FIGS. 205(B4) to (B6).

After that, as shown in FIG. 205(B6), when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the body of the bomb timer display BOMB, as shown in FIG. 205(B7), the first
In the decorative symbol display device 208L, after the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol in the approximate center of the display screen, as shown in FIG. The letters "Atsu!!" are displayed in large size. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display by the characters "Gekiatsu!" is displayed as a result of the timer notice effect. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 16 (16) and thereafter are performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 205(C1) to (C3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205(B5), in the case where the timer advance notice effect by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is a false effect. The situation is shown.

As shown in FIG. 205(B5), after the countdown effect by the timer display BOMB of the bomb is started, when the fuse is shortened to a certain length, as shown in FIG. 205(C1), the spark at the tip of the fuse is extinguished. It is shown that the tip of the squib is smoked. That is, the timer advance notice effect by the bomb timer display BOMB is started, but the effect is ended before the countdown effect is completed and the bomb timer indication BOMB explodes and a certain advance effect is started. It is suggested that it was a notice production. Then, as shown in FIG. 205(C2), the bomb timer display BOMB is erased.

After that, as a result of the stop display of the decorative design in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, the display is stopped by the combination of the missing decorative designs of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7", and after the shaking fluctuation is performed. As shown in FIG. 205(C3), a fixed combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is definitely displayed. At this time, the variable icon is erased.

In addition, in this production example, a state in which the production of the countdown is ended while the countdown is being performed by the bomb timer display BOMB is shown. For example, a false timer notice is shown in the mode shown in FIG. 205(D). Direction may be performed. Here, the effect example shown in FIG. 205(D) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 205(B6). In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 205(D), the spark displayed at the tip of the fuse is extinguished when the spark disappears and the spark at the tip of the fuse reaches the body of the timer display BOMB of the bomb. It is shown that the notice production ended unexploited. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 205(C2) to FIG. 205(C3) are performed.

FIG. 206 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the timer advance notice effect.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206(A1) to (A3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205(B5), and the timer notice effect is interrupted midway, but is restarted by the revival effect being performed. Is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206(A1), the state where the spark at the tip of the squib is extinguished and the tip of the squib is smoked is shown. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 206(A1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 205(C1), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206(A2), the torch character TC appears from the right end of the display screen and is flying toward the tip of the fuse of the bomb timer display BOMB. Has been done. Then, when the torch character TC overlaps the tip of the squib of the bomb timer display BOMB, the squib ignites again as shown in FIG. 206 (A3). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 205 (B6) and thereafter are performed. In this way, in this example of the effect, the fuse of the bomb timer display BOMB has been extinguished, and I think that it was a fake timer advance notice effect. It is shown to be revived. In other words, it can be said that even if the production of the countdown by the bomb timer display BOMB is stopped halfway, it may be restored again. In addition, after the countdown is interrupted, the case where a reviving effect is performed and a certain notice effect is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is determined more than when a certain notice effect is performed without the countdown being interrupted. You may make it easier to display, or if a certain notice effect is performed without interruption of the countdown, after the countdown is interrupted, a revival effect is performed and a notice effect is performed. The jackpot pattern mode may be made to be more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case, and after the countdown is interrupted, a reviving effect is performed and a certain notice effect is performed, and the countdown is not interrupted. The ease with which the jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed may be the same as when the notice production is performed. In addition, even if the torch character TC appears, the fuse may not be ignited, and a fake timer advance notice effect of an effect pattern in which the timer advance notice effect is not restarted may be performed, or when the torch character TC appears. In this case, the fuse may be ignited without fail and the timer advance notice effect may be restarted.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206(B1) to (B3) show another effect pattern following FIG. 205(B5), showing that the countdown period in the timer notice effect is added and extended. ing.

As shown in FIG. 205(B5), when the squib of the bomb timer display BOMB reaches a certain length, as shown in FIG. 206(B1), the lord's character BYM appears again on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, it is shown that the fuse is further lengthened to extend the timing at which a certain notice effect is started. That is, in this effect example, by extending the timing of starting a certain notice effect by extending the fuse during the countdown of the timer notice effect, the time until a certain notice effect is started is increased. Is shown. Thereby, it may be possible to suggest that the reliability of the big hit is improved. Before the effect of extending (adding on) the squib may be performed, a warning may be given that the squib may be extended. In addition, this notice may be a false notice.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206(B2), the squib extends as the character BYM of the lord moves from the left side to the right side of the display screen, and the squib extends to a certain length. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206(B3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tip of the squib is ignited again and the countdown is restarted. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 205 (B5) and thereafter are performed.

The effects shown in FIGS. 206(C1) to (C5) show another effect pattern of the timer advance notice effect by the bomb timer display BOMB following FIG. 205(B1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (C1), the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed, but the squib is not ignited, and the preparatory display for notifying that the timer notice effect is started is made. The situation is shown. In this example of production, a state in which the in-preparation display by the bomb timer display BOMB functions as a pre-reading notice is shown. In addition, it may function as the advance notice, may only function as the prefetch advance notice, or may be configured to function only as the advance notice.

In FIG. 206 (C2), as a result of the decorative design being stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, it is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative designs with the loss of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”, and fluctuation fluctuations occur. It is shown to be taking place.

After that, in FIG. 206 (C3), a state is shown in which the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon is deleted, but the bomb timer display BOMB is continuously displayed. While the decorative design is stopped and displayed, the bomb timer timer display BOMB may be temporarily erased.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (C4), a state in which the variable display of symbols corresponding to the hold icon h11 is started is shown. At this time, the bomb timer display BOMB is still displayed.

Then, the effect shown in FIG. 206 (C5) is performed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 206(C5) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 205(B2), and therefore description thereof will be omitted. After that, for example, the success pattern of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 205(B3) to (B8) and the failure pattern of the timer announcement effect shown in FIGS. 205(C1) to (C3) ( Fake timer advance notice production) is performed.

In addition, in this example of performance, when SP reach is performed in the symbol variation display that is being displayed in preparation by the bomb timer display BOMB, and the SP reach is a big hit, the bomb timer display BOMB is redisplayed. It may not be displayed, or may be displayed again when the SP reach ends and the normal background is restored. Also, if SP reach is performed in the symbol variation display that is being displayed by the timer display BOMB of the bomb and the SP reach is lost, the timer display BOMB of the bomb is redisplayed. It may or may not be done. It goes without saying that this can also be applied to the preparation-in-progress display of the timer advance notice effect and the preparation-in-progress display of the chance up meter described above.

In addition, in this effect example, the appearance of the countdown effect due to the appearance of the lord's character BYM is shown during the display of the in-preparation display by the bomb timer display BOMB. For example, it is shown in FIG. 206 (C4). After the effect is performed, before the effect shown in FIG. 206(C5) is started, the effect as shown in FIG. 206(D) is performed, and the fuse may be ignited to start the countdown effect. Something may be done by the bomb timer display BOMB itself. Specifically, after the effect shown in FIG. 206(C4) is performed, as shown in FIG. 206(D), the timer display BOMB of the bomb vibrates, so that the countdown effect may start. I foretell. In addition, when the timer display BOMB of the bomb oscillates but the countdown effect does not start and the timer notice effect ends, a fake timer notice effect may be performed, or when the bomb timer display BOMB vibrates. In this case, the production of the countdown may be started without fail. Further, when the countdown effect is started after the display during preparation by the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed, the bomb timer display BOMB may vibrate.

Also, for example, after the effect shown in FIG. 206(C4) is performed and before the effect shown in FIG. 206(C5) is started, the effect shown in FIG. 206(E) is performed and the fuse is ignited. It may be possible to give a notice that the production of the countdown may start. Specifically, after the effect shown in FIG. 206(C4) is performed, as shown in FIG. 206(E), a balloon of the characters “bomb ignition!!” is displayed near the navigation character YM. Will announce that the production of the countdown may start. Note that a navigator YM balloon may be displayed, but the countdown effect may not start, and a fake timer announcement effect may be performed in which the timer announcement effect ends, or the navigator character YM balloon may be displayed. In the case of hitting, the production of the countdown may be started without fail. Further, when the countdown effect is started after the display of the preparation of the bomb display by the timer display BOMB is displayed, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed without fail.

The productions shown in FIGS. 206 (F1) to (F12) show another production pattern of the timer advance notice production by the bomb timer display BOMB following FIG. 206 (C4). In this example of the effect, the timer display of the second bomb (second time) is displayed while the in-preparation display by the timer display BOMB of the bomb (in this example, referred to as “first bomb timer display BOMB”) is displayed. The bomb timer display BOMB2) is displayed, and the second bomb timer display BOMB2 also displays the in-preparation display to indicate that the timer advance notice effect is to be started twice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F1), a balloon including the display of the bomb is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed in advance. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that another type of advance notice gives an advance notice that the display during preparation will increase. The second bomb timer display BOMB2 may not be displayed even if the navigator YM balloon is displayed. If the navigator YM balloon is displayed, the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is always displayed. It may be done.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F2), a state in which the second bomb timer display BOMB2 appears above the first bomb timer display BOMB is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB displayed previously is started. In this example of the production, the lord's character BYM appears and an extension animation for extending the fuse of the first bomb timer display BOMB is performed. That is, it is shown that the previously displayed bomb timer display (first bomb timer display BOMB) is consumed first. The timer display of the bomb displayed later (second bomb timer display BOMB2) may be exhausted first, or the timer display of the bomb displayed earlier may be exhausted first or later. There may be a case where the timer display of the bomb that has been bombed is first consumed.

After that, an extension animation is performed as shown in FIGS. 205(B3) to (B4), and when the extension animation is completed, the first bomber timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The tip of the squib of BOMB is ignited, and the timer advance notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB is started.

FIG. 206 (F5) shows a state in which the countdown effect of the timer advance notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB is continuing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (F6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character BYM of the lord is again in a state where the countdown effect of the timer notice effect related to the first bomb timer display BOMB is being performed. It is shown that an extension animation that appears and that extends the squib of the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is being performed. That is, it is shown that the timer display of the bomb displayed later is consumed while the timer display of the bomb displayed earlier is being consumed.

After that, the extension animation is performed as shown in FIGS. 205(B3) to (B4), and when the extension animation is completed, the second bomb timer display is performed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 206(F7). The tip of the squib of BOMB2 is ignited, and the timer advance notice effect related to the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is started. In addition, in the first bomb timer display BOMB,
The production of the countdown is continuously performed, and the display is performed in such a manner that the squib becomes shorter as time passes.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 206 (F8), it is shown that the squib of the first bomb timer display BOMB disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the body of the first bomb timer display BOMB. There is. On the other hand, in the second bomb timer display BOMB2, the effect of the countdown in which the squib is shortened as time passes is continuously performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (F9), the first bomb timer display BOMB is erased and the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol in the approximate center of the display screen. The second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed overlapping the explosion effect EF304 related to the first bomb timer display BOMB, and the countdown effect continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F10), the character “Gekiatsu!” is displayed in large size in the approximate center of the display screen, indicating that the advance notice is being displayed. In other words, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display by the character "Gekiatsu!" is performed as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the first bomb timer display BOMB that has been digested first. There is. The character "Gekiatsu!" is then erased. It should be noted that the second bomb timer display BOMB2 displayed later does not change the display position even after the first bomb timer display BOMB that has been exhausted first is erased, but is displayed after the first bomb timer display BOMB is erased. The position may be changed. In this case, for example, you may make it move to the position where the 1st bomb timer display BOMB was displayed.

After that, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, a reach state is formed, and a fluctuation display is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 206 (F11), the fuse of the second bomb timer display BOMB2 disappears. And the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the body of the second bomb timer display BOMB2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 206 (F9), the second bomb timer display BOMB is erased, and the explosion effect EF304 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern in the approximate center of the display screen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 206 (F12), a large character "Oniatsu!" is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which a notice is displayed is shown. That is, a state is shown in which the notice display with the characters "Oni Atsu!" is performed as a result of the timer notice effect relating to the second bomb timer display BOMB2 that was digested later. The character "Oni Atsu!" is then erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 16 (18) and thereafter are performed. In addition, the character "Gekiatsu!" shown in FIG. 206 (F10) is continuously displayed until the second bomb timer display BOMB2 explodes, and the explosion effect EF304 displayed when the second bomb timer display BOMB2 is displayed. May be overlapped by.

In this example, the first bomb timer display BOMB whose countdown effect was started first exploded, but the second bomb timer display BOMB whose countdown effect was started later exploded. May be.

In the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 (first decorative symbol display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N,
A light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, etc.],
The display means is a means for displaying a first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.],
The first display is a display for notifying the timing at which execution of a certain effect is started,
The display means displays a second display as the certain effect [for example, the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29(13) or 195(A4), and the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29(18). 20(9) to FIG. 12(12) and FIG. 196(B1) to FIG. 196(B4)].
The second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display [for example, as shown in FIG. 195(A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 overlaps the chance up meter CMT, As shown in FIG. 196(B2), the pseudo continuous symbol displayed in the pseudo continuous effect is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming table, it is possible to guide the line of sight of the player who was watching the first display to the second display as it is so as not to overlook that the second display is displayed. There is.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

The first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify at a timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. Good.

Further, the display means may display only the second display as a certain effect, or may display a display other than the second display as a certain effect. Moyo. Further, the display means may always display the second display as a certain effect, or may not display the second display as a certain effect.

It should be noted that the certain effect may be the second display, and for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes a display showing “0”, a certain effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) is always displayed. The performance may be performed, but when a specific timing (for example, the timing at which the character Sabohani as the cursor reaches the second checkpoint) is reached in the performance of the chance up meter, the specific performance (for example, gold (Display of cut-in image) may be performed.

Further, as a certain effect, a display other than the second display may be displayed. For example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes a display indicating “0”, a specific effect (for example, , A pseudo-relational effect) (for example, an effect in which a large-scale behavior accessory is operated) may be performed, and there may be a plurality of patterns of an effect, and a specific timing in the effect of the chance up meter. (For example, when a character of Sabohani as a cursor reaches the second checkpoint), an effect other than a specific effect (for example, a gold cut-in image display) (for example, a deca button image display) is performed. There may be a plurality of patterns of a certain effect, such as when being displayed.

In addition, “the first display is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195(A1)],
The display of the second display is started in a certain period [for example, a period in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT shown in (29) to (27) of FIG. 29]. This is a display for notifying the timing of the operation [for example, as shown in FIGS. 195(A1) to 195(A4), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Is notified when there is a possibility that will be displayed, etc.],
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195(A1)] is changed (hereinafter referred to as “change display”). Is configured as
The change display is a display that changes according to the time from the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29(2) to (27), the character SBH of the sabotani is at the start point. The display position of the character SBH of Sabohani changes according to the time from the start of movement from SP],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani shown in FIG. 195(A1) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is informed that it is the timing to start the display of the second display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display start timing of the second display is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that there is an expectation that it will be the display start timing of the second display. You may be able to.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the display of the second display is started in a certain period, or the display of a display other than the second display is started in a certain period. The timing to be performed may also be notified. In addition, the first display may be a signal that always notifies the timing at which the display of the second display is started in a certain period, or the timing at which the display of the second display is started in a certain period. May not be reported.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the display of the second display is started only in a certain period, or the display of the second display may be displayed in a period other than the certain period. It may be one that informs the start timing.

Further, it may be notified that only the timing at which the display of the second display is started by performing the change display and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. The fact that the display of the second display is started may be notified by the display of the first display having a certain display mode. Further, it may be informed that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started by the change display being performed and the first display being in a certain display mode, or the change display is being performed. There may be a case where it is not notified that the display of the second display is started by the certain display mode of the first display.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed. It may be notified that it is the timing when the display of the second display is started, other than that the first display is in a certain display mode.

In addition, “the first display may be displayed including a third display [for example, a display of “UP” above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 195(A7)]. Is a display,
When the second display is displayed, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 195(A1) to (A7), when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, 2 "UP" is displayed above the checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the second display is displayed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including display other than the third display. May be Further, the first display may be displayed without fail including the third display, or may be displayed without including the third display.

Further, when the second display is displayed, only the third display may be displayed, or when the second display is displayed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the second display is displayed, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when the second display is displayed, the third display may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the first display is a timer display [for example, a timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(2) or 196(B1), a bomb timer display BOMB shown in FIG. 205(B2)],
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the display of the second display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 20(2) to FIG. When the timer display reaches "00:00", it notifies that the pseudo-relational effect will start, etc.],
At least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(2)] changes according to the passage of time (hereinafter, referred to as “change display”). [(2) to (7) in FIG. 20. For example, as shown in FIGS. Etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(7) is "00:00", etc.] , The display of the second display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display start timing of the second display is notified by the display change of the first display which is the timer display, so that there is an expectation that it will be the display start timing of the second display. You may be able to.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing when the display of the second display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the display other than the second display is started. It may be. In addition, the first display may be one that always notifies the timing when the display of the second display is started, or may not notify the timing when the display of the second display is started. It may be.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, only the display of the second display may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display may be changed. When the display mode becomes the display mode, the display of the display other than the second display may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, the display of the second display may be necessarily started, or the change display is performed and the first display may be changed. The display of the second display may not be started in the case where the display mode is changed.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display may be changed. The display of the second display may be started in a case other than the case where the display mode becomes the display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to (A9), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is a moving display] 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) or FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48(A8) to (A9), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed when the movement display is performed. The position is changed, and as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) and FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. And the display position changes],
After the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the change display by the first display is started in a state where the line of sight is focused on the first display in the moving display of the first display, and the timing at which the change display is started is not overlooked. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the production effect from being reduced due to the timing at which the second display is performed without realizing it. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that the second effect is performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to miss the second display.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, after the display of the first display is started, it may be possible that only the moving display is performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, a display other than the moving display may be performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The moving display may be performed before the change display is started or not.

In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed only before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, the moving display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to (A9), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is a moving display] 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) or FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48(A8) to (A9), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed when the movement display is performed. The position is changed, and as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) and FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. And the display position changes],
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by paying attention to the first display in the moving display of the first display during execution of the change display by the first display, the timing at which the second display is performed will be realized. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the production effect from decreasing. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that the second effect is performed and to pay attention to the first display so as not to miss the second display.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, only the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the moving display may be always performed during the execution of the change display, or the moving display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the moving display may be performed only during execution of the change display, or the moving display may be performed during execution of a display other than the change display.

In addition, "When the display of the second display is started, the display of the second display may be started [for example, in FIG. 20(7) to FIG. As shown, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. 29(8) to 29(13), the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed. May reach the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed, etc.],
Even when the display of the second display is started, the display of the second display may not be started [for example, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00". Even if the pseudo continuous production is not started, as shown in FIGS. 170(A11) to 170(A16), when the gold cut-in CI3 is not displayed even when the character SBH of Sabohan reaches the second check point CP2. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the second display is not always started even when the display of the second display is started, so whether or not the display of the second display is started. In some cases, you can make a sense of expectations.

Here, when it is time to start the display of the second display, there may be a case where only the display of the second display is started, and when the display of the second display is started. When it becomes, the display of the display other than the second display may be started. Further, when the display of the second display is the timing to start, the display of the second display may be always started, or when it is the timing to start the display of the second display, The display of the second display may not be started in some cases.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the timing of the display of the second display is started, and when the display of the second display is started. The display of the second display may also be started in a case other than the case.

Further, even when the display of the second display is started, it may not be the case that only the display of the second display is started, and the timing of the display of the second display is started. Even in the case of displaying, the display other than the second display may not be started in some cases. Further, even when the display of the second display is timed to start, the display of the second display does not necessarily have to be started, or when the time to start the display of the second display is reached. However, the display of the second display may start.

Further, only when the display of the second display is started, the display of the second display may not be started, and the display of the second display is started. Even in other cases, the display of the second display may not be started.

Further, "when the display of the second display is timed, the display of the second display is always started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first display may be displayed, so that the expectation for the second display being displayed may be further improved.

Here, the display of the second display may be always started only when the display of the second display is started, or the display of the second display is started. In addition to the case, the display of the second display may be always started.

In addition, “the display means displays a fourth display [for example, a CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 202(A1), a timer advance notice display TM1 in which “STANDBY” shown in FIG. 202(C1) is displayed, and FIG. B3) A timer notice stock display area TMst showing that the timer notice is in stock, and a display showing the number of meters stocked in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 185(A1) Etc.] may be displayed,
The fourth display is a display announcing that the first display will be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the fourth display may give an expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display other displays than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be a notification that only the first display is displayed, or may be a notification that a display other than the first display is displayed. .. The fourth display may be a notification that the first display is displayed, or may not be a notification that the first display is displayed. ..

Further, “When the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the second display [for example, shown in FIG. 195(A4) or FIG. Thus, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is partially or entirely overlapped by the gold cut-in image CI3, as shown in FIG. 196(C2) and FIG. , A part or all of the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the balloon attached to the display YMF of the lord's face in the pseudo continuous production and the cut-in image CI7],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a player who pays attention to the first display may be able to continue to pay attention to the second display.

Here, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, or when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed. May be overlapped by other than at least a part of the first display. Further, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, the second display may be displayed. There may be a case where at least a part of the first display does not overlap.

Further, when the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by only the second display, and when the second display is displayed, other than the second display. Also, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the display of.

Further, when only the second display is displayed, at least a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, or even if a display other than the second display is displayed, the second display May at least partially overlap the first display.

Note that when the second display is displayed, only a part of the first display may be overlapped by the second display, and when the second display is displayed, the second display causes the first display to overlap. All of the one display may overlap.

Further, “When the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in an area overlapping with the area where the first display was displayed, so that the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 195(A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed at the display position of the chance up meter CMT, so that the chance up meter CMT is hidden. ), the timer advance notice display TM1 is hidden by displaying the cut-in image CI7 at the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to draw attention to the second display.

Here, when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area overlapping with the area where the first display was displayed, so that only the first display is hidden. Good, when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area that overlaps the area where the first display was displayed, and the displays other than the first display are also hidden. May be. Further, when the second display is displayed, the second display is displayed in an area overlapping with the area where the first display was displayed, so that the first display may be always hidden. However, when the second display is displayed, the first display may not be hidden because the second display is displayed in the area overlapping the area where the first display was displayed. Good.

Further, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means [for example, a sub display device 208S or the like],
The second image display means is a means provided on the front side of the first image display means,
The first display is displayed by the first image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 196(A1), a chance up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, FIG. 198(A2). , The timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The second display is displayed by the second image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 196(A4), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, FIG. 198(A5). ), the pseudo continuous effect is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a stereoscopic effect may be possible with a plurality of image display devices.

Here, the display means may be configured by only a plurality of image display means, or may be configured by including means other than the plurality of image display means. Further, the display means may be necessarily configured to include a plurality of image display means, or may be configured to not include the plurality of image display means.

The display means may be composed of only the first image display means and the second image display means, or the image display means other than the first image display means and the second image display means. It may also be configured to include. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first image display means and the second image display means, or may not include the first image display means and the second image display means. It may be configured by.

The second image display means may be provided only on the front side of the first image display means, or may be provided on a side other than the front side of the first image display means. May be. Further, the second image display means may be necessarily provided on the front side of the first image display means, or may not be provided on the front side of the first image display means. It may be.

Further, only the first display may be displayed by the first image display means, or a display other than the first display may be displayed by the first image display means. The first display may be always displayed by the first image display means, or the first display may not be displayed by the first image display means.

Further, only the second display may be displayed by the second image display means, or a display other than the second display may be displayed by the second image display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed by the second image display means, or the second display may not be displayed by the second image display means.

In addition, “the second image display means is a means capable of changing the position by moving [for example, as shown in FIG. 196(A2) to FIG. Position can be changed by moving up and down, etc.],
At the timing when the display of the second display is started in the state where the first display is displayed on the first image display means, the second image display means moves to Display overlaps with at least a part of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 196(A2) to (A5), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed while the chance up meter CMT is displayed. At the display start timing, the sub display device 208S moves upward and the gold cut-in image CI3 overlaps a part of the chance up meter CMT, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the effect may be enhanced by dynamically performing the second effect.

Here, the second image display means may be capable of changing the position only by moving, or may be capable of changing the position by means other than moving. It may be. In addition, the second image display means may change the position without fail by moving, or may not change the position by moving.

Further, at the timing when the display of the second display is started in the state where the first display is displayed on the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display is changed. It may overlap with at least a part of the first display, or when the display of the second display is started while the first display is being displayed on the first image display means, the second display The image display means may move so that the second display overlaps with at least a part of the first display. Further, at the timing when the display of the second display is started in the state where the first display is displayed on the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display is changed. It may be overlapped with at least a part of the first display, or when the timing of starting the display of the second display in the state where the first display is displayed in the first image display means, The image display means may move and the second display may not overlap at least a part of the first display.

In addition, the second image display means moves only when the timing of starting the display of the second display is reached while the first display is being displayed on the first image display means. The second display may overlap with at least a part of the first display, and other than the timing at which the display of the second display is started in the state where the first display is displayed on the first image display means. Even at the timing, the second image display means may move so that the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display.

When the display of the second display is started while the first display is being displayed on the first image display means, the second image display means moves and the second display is changed. It may be overlapped with only a part of the first display, or at the timing when the display of the second display is started while the first display is being displayed on the first image display means, the second display is displayed. The image display means may move such that the second display overlaps all of the first display.

In addition, “operation means [for example, a production button 136, a production lever 136V, etc.] is provided,
The second display is a display relating to the operation means [for example, a large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 195(C2), a lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 195(D5), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation due to the possibility that a physical operation can be performed by the operating means.

Here, the second display may be related to only the operation means or may be related to something other than the operation means. Further, the second display may or may not necessarily be related to the operating means.

The second display may be a display of the operating means or a display prompting the operation of the operating means.

In addition, “the display means displays a fifth display [for example, a boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29(4), a cut-in image of a panda character shown in FIG. 201(A25), etc.] as the certain effect. Is a means of doing
The fifth display is a display different from the second display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give variations to the effect in the first display.

Here, the display means may display only the fifth display as a certain effect, or may display a display other than the fifth display as a certain effect. May be. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display as a certain effect, or may not display the fifth display as a certain effect.

Further, the fifth display may be different from only the second display or may be different from the display other than the second display. Further, the fifth display may be different from the second display without exception, or may be the same as the second display in some cases.

Note that the fifth display may be partially different from the second display or may be entirely different from the second display.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208 (first decorative pattern display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative pattern display device 208M, third decorative pattern display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc. ] With a game console,
The display means is a means for displaying a first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.],
The first display is a certain effect [for example, the display of the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 29(4), the display of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29(13), and the lever shown in FIG. 29(18). The display of the image 136Va, the display of notifying the timing at which the execution of the pseudo rendition shown in FIG. 20(9) to FIG.
The first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIGS. 199(A1) to (A4), the chance up meter CMT has a plurality of symbol variations. 199 (C1) to FIG. 199 (C4) are displayed over the display, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to focus attention on the first display over a plurality of symbol variable displays.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

The first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify at a timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. Good.

Further, the first display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variable displays, or may be displayed other than a plurality of symbol variable displays. .. Further, the first display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays.

In addition, “the first display is a period display [for example, the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1)],
The term display means, during a certain period [for example, a period during which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 29(2) to (27), etc.], the certain effect [for example, FIG. 4) display of the boy character BOY, display of the gold cut-in image CI3 shown in FIG. 29(13), display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 29(18), etc.] is started. This is a display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29(8) to 29(13), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 can be displayed. Such as when there is a possibility that]
At least a part of the first display (for example, the display position of the character SBH of the sabotani in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 199 (A1) and the like) is changed (hereinafter referred to as “change display”). Is configured as
The change display is a display that changes according to the time from the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29(2) to (27), the character SBH of the sabotani is at the start point. The display position of the character SBH of Sabohani changes according to the time from the start of movement from SP],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani shown in FIG. 29(8) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is informed that it is the timing to start the execution of the production,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to give an expectation for the execution start timing of a certain effect. Sometimes you can.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than a certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. In addition, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or a timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be possible.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect may be started in a period other than the certain period. The timing may be notified.

Further, it may be notified only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode to start the execution of a certain effect. When one display is in a certain display mode, it is possible to notify other than the timing at which execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be informed that it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect by performing the change display and the first display in a certain display mode, or the change display may be performed. There may be a case where it is not informed that it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect due to one display being in a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, other than that the one display is in a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may be displayed including a third display [for example, a display of "UP" above the second check point CP2 shown in FIG. 29(16), etc.]. Is a display,
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 29 (13) to (16), the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above the checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a certain effect has been executed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including display other than the third display. May be Further, the first display may be displayed without fail including the third display, or may be displayed without including the third display.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, and when a certain effect is executed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the first display is a timer display [for example, a timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(2) or 196(B1), a bomb timer display BOMB shown in FIG. 205(B2)],
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(2) to (9), the timer in the timer advance notice display TM1. When the display becomes "00:00", it notifies that the pseudo-relational production will be started, etc.],
At least a part of the first display [for example, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(2)] changes according to the passage of time (hereinafter, referred to as “change display”). [(2) to (7) in FIG. 20. For example, as shown in FIGS. Etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(7) is "00:00", etc.] , The execution of the certain effect is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display change of the first display, which is the timer display, notifies the execution start timing of a certain effect, so that it is possible to give an expectation for the execution start timing of a certain effect. Sometimes you can.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or the timing at which the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. Good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, only execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. When the display mode is set, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. In the case of the display mode, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. Execution of a certain effect may be started in a case other than the case of the display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to (A9), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is a moving display] 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) or FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48(A8) to (A9), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed when the movement display is performed. The position is changed, and as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) and FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. And the display position changes],
After the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the change display by the first display is started in the state where the line of sight is focused on the first display in the moving display of the first display, and the timing at which the change display is started is not overlooked. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the production effect from being reduced due to the timing when a certain production is performed without realizing it. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that a certain effect is performed and to focus on the first display that does not miss the certain effect.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, after the display of the first display is started, it may be possible that only the moving display is performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, a display other than the moving display may be performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The moving display may be performed before the change display is started or not.

In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed only before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, the moving display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to (A9), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is a moving display] 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) or FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48(A8) to (A9), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed when the movement display is performed. The position is changed, and as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) and FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. And the display position changes],
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by paying attention to the first display in the moving display of the first display during execution of the change display by the first display, it becomes a timing when a certain effect is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to prevent the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that a certain effect is performed and to focus on the first display that does not miss the certain effect.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, only the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the moving display may be always performed during the execution of the change display, or the moving display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the moving display may be performed only during execution of the change display, or the moving display may be performed during execution of a display other than the change display.

In addition, “the first symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199(A1) to (A2), and FIG. 199(C1) to FIG. In the symbol variation display, etc.], the display of the first display is started,
In the second symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (A4), the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (C4) to (C5), etc.], The timing at which execution of a certain effect is started is notified [for example, as shown in FIGS. 190(B3) to (B14), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third check point CP3 in the chance up meter CMT. It has been informed that the spirit character CLA may be displayed as an advance notice of a chance up. As shown in FIGS. 20(3) to 20(12), the timer display in the timer advancement display TM1 is “00”. "00", it is informed that a pseudo continuous effect may be performed as a certain notice effect, etc.],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to increase the expectation for the second symbol variation display.

Here, in the first symbol variable display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variable display, the display of a display other than the first display may be started. Further, in the first symbol variable display, the display of the first display may be always started, and in the first symbol variable display, the display of the first display may not be started.

Further, only in the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may be started, and also in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may be started. Good.

Further, in the second symbol variable display, only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or in the second symbol variable display, a timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified without fail, or in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is not informed. There may be cases.

Further, only in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or even in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variable display, the execution of a certain effect is started. The timing to be performed may be notified.

Further, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first symbol variation display may be always performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. May be.

In addition, “the first symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199(A1) to (A2), and FIG. 199(C1) to FIG. In the symbol variation display, etc.], the display of the first display is started,
In the second symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (A4), the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 199 (C4) to (C5), etc.], The timing to start the execution of a certain performance is notified,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display,
The execution of the change display is started in the second symbol variation display [for example, in the next symbol variation display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed as shown in FIGS. 199(A1) to 190(B4). The character SBH of Sabohani has begun to move, and as shown in FIGS. 199(C1) to (C5), the timer display countdown is started in the next symbol variation display in which the timer advance notice effect TM1 is displayed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to increase the expectation that the change display is executed in the second symbol variation display.

Here, in the first symbol variable display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variable display, the display of a display other than the first display may be started. Further, in the first symbol variable display, the display of the first display may be always started, and in the first symbol variable display, the display of the first display may not be started.

Further, only in the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may be started, and also in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may be started. Good.

Further, in the second symbol variable display, only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or in the second symbol variable display, a timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified without fail, or in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is not informed. There may be cases.

Further, only in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or even in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variable display, the execution of a certain effect is started. The timing to be performed may be notified.

Further, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. Good. Also,
The first symbol variation display may be always performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. Good.

Further, only the execution of the change display may be started in the second symbol variable display, or the display or the effect other than the change display may be started in the second symbol variable display. Further, the execution of the change display may be necessarily started in the second symbol variable display, or the execution of the change display may not be started in the second symbol variable display.

Further, the execution of the change display may be started only in the second symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variation display.

In addition, “the first symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 198(B1) to (B7), and FIG. 199(D1) to FIG. In the symbol variation display, etc.], the display of the first display is started,
In the second symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 198 (B10) and subsequent figures, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 199 (D6) and subsequent figures] The timing to start execution is notified,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display,
The execution of the change display is started in the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 198 (B2), the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving in the symbol variation display in which the chance up meter CMT is displayed. As shown in FIG. 199 (D1) to FIG. 199 (D2), the timer display countdown is started in the symbol variation display in which the timer advance notice effect TM1 is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the effect not only in the second symbol variation display but also in the first symbol variation display.

Here, in the first symbol variable display, only the display of the first display may be started, or in the first symbol variable display, the display of a display other than the first display may be started. Further, in the first symbol variable display, the display of the first display may be always started, and in the first symbol variable display, the display of the first display may not be started.

Further, only in the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may be started, and also in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display, the display of the first display may be started. Good.

Further, in the second symbol variable display, only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or in the second symbol variable display, a timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. May also be notified. Further, in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified without fail, or in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started is not informed. There may be cases.

Further, only in the second symbol variation display, the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started may be notified, or even in the symbol variation display other than the second symbol variable display, the execution of a certain effect is started. The timing to be performed may be notified.

Further, the first symbol variation display may be performed only before the second symbol variation display, or may be performed other than before the second symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first symbol variation display may be always performed before the second symbol variation display, or may not be performed before the second symbol variation display. May be.

Further, only the execution of the change display may be started in the first symbol variable display, or the display or the effect other than the change display may be started in the first symbol variable display. Further, the execution of the change display may be necessarily started in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may not be started in the first symbol variation display.

Further, the execution of the change display may be started only in the first symbol variation display, or the execution of the change display may be started in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display.

In addition, "in the period from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the symbol variation display next to the first symbol variation display, the variation display is interrupted [for example, FIG. As shown in (B8) to (B9) in the same figure, the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani in the chance up meter CMT is interrupted while the symbol fluctuation is stopped, as shown in (D4) to (D5) in FIG. While the symbol fluctuation is stopped, the countdown of the timer display of the timer notice effect TM1 is interrupted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand that the symbol variable display is stopped.

Here, from the end of the first symbol variation display until the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display is started, only the change display may be interrupted, or the first symbol During the period from the end of the variable display to the start of the symbol variable display next to the first symbol variable display, displays other than the variable display may be interrupted. Further, from the end of the first symbol variation display until the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display is started, the change display may be interrupted without fail, or the first symbol variation display. The change display may not be interrupted during the period from the end of the display to the start of the symbol change display next to the first symbol change display.

Further, the change display may be interrupted only during the period from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the symbol variation display subsequent to the first symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation. The change display may be interrupted even after the display ends and before the next symbol change display after the first symbol change display starts.

In addition, "from the end of the first symbol variation display until the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display is also started, the change display is continuously performed [eg, As shown in FIG. 199(E1) to FIG. 199(E2), the countdown of the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 continues even while the symbol fluctuation is stopped],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of continuity between the symbol variation displays.

Here, even from the end of the first symbol variation display until the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display is started, only the variation display may be continuously performed, Even after the first symbol variable display is finished and before the symbol variable display next to the first symbol variable display is started, a display or an effect other than the change display may be continuously performed. In addition, even after the first symbol variation display is finished until the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display is started, the variation display may be continuously performed, or The change display may not be continuously performed even after the one symbol variation display is ended and the next symbol variation display of the first symbol variation display is started.

Further, the change display may be continuously performed only during the period from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the symbol variation display next to the first symbol variation display, The change display may be continuously performed even after the symbol change display is finished and before the symbol change display next to the first symbol change display is started.

In addition, "at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(7) to 20(12)]. In some cases, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo continuous effect may be started. As shown in FIGS. 29(8) to 29(13), the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed first. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed, etc.],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", it is pseudo In some cases, continuous production may not be started, and as shown in FIGS. 170(A11) to (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, a certain effect is not always started even when the execution of the certain effect is started. Therefore, it is expected that the execution of the certain effect is started. May be able to have.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the time to start the execution of a certain effect. The execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started in some cases. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail. The execution may not be started in some cases.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or the time is when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, execution of a certain effect may be started.

Even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of only a certain effect may not be started, or even when the execution of a certain effect is started. There may be a case where execution of an effect other than a certain effect is not started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or even when it is the time when the execution of a certain effect is started, or The execution of the effect may be started in some cases.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or other than the time when the execution of a certain effect is started. In some cases, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect is always started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the first display may be displayed, so that it may be possible to further improve the sense of expectation for execution of a certain effect.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may be necessarily started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or other than the time when the execution of a certain effect is started. Also, the execution of a certain production may be started without fail.

In addition, “the display means displays a fourth display [for example, a CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 202(A1), a timer advance notice display TM1 in which “STANDBY” shown in FIG. 202(C1) is displayed, and FIG. B3) A timer notice stock display area TMst showing that the timer notice is in stock, and a display showing the number of meters stocked in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 185(A1) Etc.] may be displayed,
The fourth display is a display announcing that the first display will be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the fourth display may give an expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display other displays than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be a notification that only the first display is displayed, or may be a notification that a display other than the first display is displayed. .. The fourth display may be a notification that the first display is displayed, or may not be a notification that the first display is displayed. ..

In addition, “the fourth display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 163 (D3), a design by the chance up meter CMT is performed. The symbol before the variable display CUM preparation display MTY is displayed in the variable display, as shown in FIG. 204(B1), the symbol prior to the variable display in which the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice display TM1 is started In variable display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the fourth display may be displayed only in the first symbol variation display, or may be displayed in the symbol variation display other than the first symbol variation display. It may be one. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the first symbol variable display, or may not be displayed in the first symbol variable display.

The fourth display may be displayed in the second symbol variable display, or may be always displayed in the first symbol variable display.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208 (first decorative pattern display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative pattern display device 208M, third decorative pattern display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc. ] With a game console,
The display means is a means for displaying a first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.],
The first display is a display for notifying the timing at which execution of a certain effect is started,
At least part of the first display [for example, the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195(A1), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(2), etc.] changes. Display (hereinafter referred to as "change display") may be performed.
The change display is a display that changes according to the time until the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29(2) to (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is As shown in FIGS. 20(2) to 20(7), the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani changes according to the time from the start of the movement from the start point SP. The timer display countdown is being performed according to the time since the timer display countdown started, etc.],
After the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, a period from the start of the change display to the start of execution of the certain effect is announced in advance. There is a case where a display (hereinafter, referred to as “preliminary display”) is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 200(A2), from when the chance up meter CMT is displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani starts moving. 201A, the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are indicated, and the period from when the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move until the chance up notice is given, is shown in FIG. 201 (A17). As shown in, between the display of the timer notice display TM1 and the start of the countdown of the timer display, the period from the start of the countdown of the timer display to a certain notice effect is given. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming table, it is possible to entertain at least a part of the first display until the change of the display mode is started, and the player who was watching the notice display can display the first display. In some cases, it may be possible to keep track of the start of the change in the display mode.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

The first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify at a timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. Good.

Further, it may be configured such that only the change display may be performed, or the display other than the change display may be performed. Further, the change display may be performed without fail, or the change display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, it is possible that only the notice display is displayed after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. It is also possible that a display other than the notice display may be displayed after the change display and before the change display is started. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the notice display may be displayed without fail, or after the display of the first display is started. Thus, the advance notice display may not be displayed before the change display is started.

In addition, the advance notice display may be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. It is also possible that the notice display is displayed after the change and before the change display is started.

In addition, “the first display is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 195(A1)],
The term display is executed in a certain period [for example, a period in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT shown in (2) to (27) of FIG. 29]. This is a display for notifying the timing [for example, as shown in (A1) to (A4) of FIG. 195, when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Notifying the timing that may be displayed, etc.],
The change display is started when the certain period is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 29(3), when the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, the character SBH of Sabohani is displayed from the start point SP. Start moving, etc.],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani shown in FIG. 195(A1) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is informed that it is the timing to start the execution of the production,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to give an expectation for the execution start timing of a certain effect. Sometimes you can.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than a certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. In addition, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or a timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be possible.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect may be started in a period other than the certain period. The timing may be notified.

Further, only the change display may be started when a certain period is started, or displays other than the change display may be started when a certain period is started. Further, the change display may be always started when a certain period is started, or the change display may not be started when a certain period is started.

Further, it may be notified only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode to start the execution of a certain effect. When one display is in a certain display mode, it is possible to notify other than the timing at which execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be informed that it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect by performing the change display and the first display in a certain display mode, or the change display may be performed. There may be a case where it is not informed that it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect due to one display being in a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, other than that the one display is in a certain display mode.

In addition, “the first display may be displayed including a third display [for example, a display of “UP” above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 195(A7)]. Is a display,
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 195(A1) to (A7), the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above the checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a certain effect has been executed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including display other than the third display. May be Further, the first display may be displayed without fail including the third display, or may be displayed without including the third display.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, and when a certain effect is executed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the first display is a timer display [for example, a timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(2) or 196(B1), a bomb timer display BOMB shown in FIG. 205(B2)],
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(2) to (9), the timer in the timer advance notice display TM1. When the display becomes "00:00", it notifies that the pseudo-relational production will be started, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(7) is "00:00", etc.] , The execution of the certain effect is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display change of the first display, which is the timer display, notifies the execution start timing of a certain effect, so that it is possible to give an expectation for the execution start timing of a certain effect. Sometimes you can.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or the timing at which the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. Good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, only execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. When the display mode is set, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. In the case of the display mode, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. Execution of a certain effect may be started in a case other than the case of the display mode.

Further, “when the display of the first display is started, a display for notifying the time from the start of the change display until the first display is in the certain display mode is the notice display. Displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 199 (C1), when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, a period (“10: 00")]],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming table, when the display of the first display is started, it may be possible to recognize the time until the first display becomes a certain display mode and to give a sense of expectation.

Here, when the display of the first display is started, only the display for notifying the time from the start of the change display until the first display becomes a certain display mode is displayed as the notice display. Good, when the display of the first display is started, a display other than the display for notifying the time from the start of the change display until the first display becomes a certain display mode is also displayed as a notice display. May be. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the display for notifying the time from the start of the change display until the first display becomes a certain display mode may be always displayed as the notice display. However, when the display of the first display is started, the display notifying as the time from the start of the change display until the first display becomes a certain display mode may not be displayed as the notice display. Good.

Further, when the display of the first display is started, a display for notifying only the time from the start of the change display until the first display becomes a certain display mode may be displayed as a notice display. However, when the display of the first display is started, a display notifying a time other than the time from the start of the change display until the first display becomes a certain display mode is displayed as a notice display. Good.

Further, only when the display of the first display is started, a display for notifying the time from the start of the change display until the first display becomes a certain display mode may be displayed as a notice display. However, even when the display of the first display is not started, a display for notifying the time from the start of the change display until the first display becomes a certain display mode is displayed as a notice display. May be.

In addition, “after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display becomes the certain display mode after the change display is started. Is displayed as the advance notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed until the countdown of the timer display is started. For example, a period ("30:00") is announced from the start of the countdown of the display until a certain notice effect is performed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, when the display of the first display is started, there is an expectation as to what the time from the start of the change display to the execution of a certain effect will be. In some cases it can be done.

Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from the start of the change display to the certain display mode of the first display is notified. Only the display that is displayed may be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the display of the change is started, the first display after the display of the change is started. A display other than the display for notifying the time until a certain display mode is set may be displayed as a notice display. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from the start of the change display to the certain display mode of the first display is notified. The display may be always displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the display of the change is displayed, the first display may be displayed after the display of the change is started. In some cases, the display for notifying the time until the display mode is changed is not displayed as the advance notice display.

Further, after the display of the first display is started, but before the change display is started, only the time from the start of the change display to the certain display mode of the first display is notified. May be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the display of the change is started, the first display may be displayed after the display of the change is started. A display for notifying a time other than the time until the display mode is changed may be displayed as a notice display. After the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, a display that always notifies the time from the start of the change display until the first display becomes a certain display mode May be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the first display is a certain display after the change display is started. A display that may not notify the time until it becomes a mode may be displayed as a notice display.

Further, only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the time from the start of the change display to the certain display mode of the first display is notified. Display may be displayed as a notice display, or after the display of the first display is started and before the display of the change is started, the first display after the display of the change is started. May be displayed as a notice display for notifying the time until the display becomes a certain display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to (A9), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is a moving display] 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) or FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48(A8) to (A9), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed when the movement display is performed. The position is changed, and as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) and FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. And the display position changes],
After the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the change display by the first display is started in a state where the line of sight is focused on the first display in the moving display of the first display, and the timing at which the change display is started is not overlooked. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the production effect from being reduced due to the timing when a certain production is performed without realizing it. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that a certain effect is performed and to focus on the first display that does not miss the certain effect.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, after the display of the first display is started, it may be possible that only the moving display is performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, a display other than the moving display may be performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The moving display may be performed before the change display is started or not.

In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed only before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, the moving display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to (A9), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is a moving display] 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) or FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48(A8) to (A9), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed when the movement display is performed. The position is changed, and as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) and FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. And the display position changes],
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by paying attention to the first display in the moving display of the first display during execution of the change display by the first display, it becomes a timing when a certain effect is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to prevent the effect from being reduced. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that a certain effect is performed and to focus on the first display that does not miss the certain effect.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, only the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the moving display may be always performed during the execution of the change display, or the moving display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the moving display may be performed only during execution of the change display, or the moving display may be performed during execution of a display other than the change display.

In addition, "at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(7) to 20(12)]. In some cases, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo continuous effect may be started. As shown in FIGS. 29(8) to 29(13), the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed first. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed, etc.],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", it is pseudo In some cases, continuous production may not be started, and as shown in FIGS. 170(A11) to (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2. etc],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming machine, a certain effect is not always started even when the execution of the certain effect is started. Therefore, it is expected that the execution of the certain effect is started. May be able to have.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the time to start the execution of a certain effect. The execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started in some cases. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail. The execution may not be started in some cases.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or the time is when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, execution of a certain effect may be started.

Even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of only a certain effect may not be started, or even when the execution of a certain effect is started. There may be a case where execution of an effect other than a certain effect is not started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or even when it is the time when the execution of a certain effect is started, or The execution of the effect may be started in some cases.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or other than the time when the execution of a certain effect is started. In some cases, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect is always started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the first display, it may be possible to further improve the sense of expectation for execution of a certain effect.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may be necessarily started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or other than the time when the execution of a certain effect is started. Also, the execution of a certain production may be started without fail.

In addition, “operation means [for example, a production button 136, a production lever 136V, etc.] is provided,
The advance notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIG. 201 (A14), when the effect button 136 is operated, the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed. "30:00", etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the notice display may be recognized by the operation of the operation means, and the operation of the operation means may be promoted in some cases.

Here, only the notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated, or a display other than the notice display may be displayed when the operation means is operated. Good. Further, the notice display may be always displayed when the operation means is operated, or the notice display may not be displayed when the operation means is operated.

Further, the advance notice display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated, or even when the advance notice display is displayed when the operation means is not operated. Good.

In addition, “after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the notice display is always displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by starting the display of the first display, it may be possible to further improve the sense of expectation for displaying the notice display.

Here, after the display of the first display is started and only before the change display is started, the notice display may be always displayed, or after the display of the first display is started. In addition, the notice display may be displayed in addition to before the change display is started.

In addition, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the advance notice display may not be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a surprise to the display of the first display.

Here, after the display of the first display is started, but before the change display is started, there may be a case where only the notice display is not displayed, or the display of the first display is started. It is also possible that, after the start of the change display, no display other than the advance notice display is displayed before the change display is started. Further, after the display of the first display is started, before the change display is started, the notice display may not necessarily be displayed, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the advance notice display may be displayed before the change display is started.

In addition, the notice display may not be displayed only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. The notice display may not be displayed later than after the change display is started.

In addition, “The advance notice is displayed by the first display [for example, as shown in FIG. 200(A2), from the time the chance up meter CMT is displayed until the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move. , The first check point CP1 to the third check point CP3 are shown, and the period from the start of the movement of the character SBH of Sabohani until the advance notice of the chance is given, as shown in FIG. 201 (A17). Between the time when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and the time when the countdown of the timer display is started, a period from when the countdown of the timer display is started to when a certain notice effect is performed is notified, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the period from the start of change display to the start of execution of a certain effect may be recognized in advance by looking at the first display.

Here, the advance notice display may be performed only by the first display, or the advance notice display may be performed by a display other than the first display. Further, the advance notice may be always displayed by the first display, or the advance notice may not be displayed by the first display.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208 (first decorative pattern display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative pattern display device 208M, third decorative pattern display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc. ] With a game console,
The display means is a means for displaying a first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.],
The first display is a display for notifying the timing at which execution of a certain effect is started,
The display means displays a fourth display [for example, a first CUM preparing display MTY1 and a second CUM preparing display MTY2 shown in FIG. 203(A2), and a first timer displaying “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204(B6). Advance notice display TM1, second timer advance notice display TM2, etc.] may be displayed.
The fourth display is a display for announcing that the first display is displayed [for example, the first CUM preparing display MTY1 and the second CUM preparing display MTY2 shown in FIG. 203(A2) are the first display. The first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2, in which "STANDUP" shown in FIG. 204(B6) is displayed that gives a notice of the display of the chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2, are the first For example, the timer notice is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 or the second timer notice display TM2],
There may be a case where a plurality of the fourth displays are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 203(A2), a plurality of chance up preparation displays (first CUM preparation display MTY1, second CUM preparation display MTY2) are displayed. 204(B6), a plurality of timer advance notice displays displaying "STANDUP" (first timer advance notice display TM1 and second timer advance notice display TM2) are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to emphasize that there is a possibility that the first display is displayed by displaying the plurality of fourth displays, and to pay attention to the first display. May be possible.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

The first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify at a timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. Good.

Further, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may give a notice only that the first display is displayed, or may give a notice other than that the first display is displayed. .. The fourth display may be a notification that the first display is displayed, or may not be a notification that the first display is displayed. ..

It should be noted that a plurality of fourth displays may be displayed without exception, and a plurality of fourth displays may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIG. 203(A6)],
The period display means a certain period [for example, a period in which effects are produced by the first chance up meter CMT1 and the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in (A7) to (A26) of FIG. 203]. This is a display for notifying the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started [for example, as shown in (A12) to (A16) of FIG. 203, the character SBH of the sabotani of the second chance up meter CMT2 is the first character. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the timing at which the gold cut-in image CI3 may be displayed is notified, etc.],
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the sabotani character SBH on the first chance up meter CMT1 shown in FIG. 203(A6), the display position of the sabotani character SBH on the second chance up meter CMT2, and the like. ] Is configured to be displayed (hereinafter referred to as “change display”), and
The change display is a display that changes according to the time from the start of the certain period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 203(A7) to 203(A25), in the first chance up meter CMT1. The display position of the character SBH of each sabotani changes according to the time after the character SBH of the sabotani and the character SBH of the sabotani in the second chance up meter CMT2 start moving from the start point SP, etc.],
The change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMT2 shown in FIG. 203(A12) reaches the second check point CP2, etc. ], it is notified that the execution of the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to give an expectation for the execution start timing of a certain effect. Sometimes you can.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than a certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. In addition, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or a timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be possible.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect may be started in a period other than the certain period. The timing may be notified.

Further, it may be notified only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode to start the execution of a certain effect. When one display is in a certain display mode, it is possible to notify other than the timing at which execution of a certain effect is started. Further, it may be informed that it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect by performing the change display and the first display in a certain display mode, or the change display may be performed. There may be a case where it is not informed that it is the timing to start the execution of a certain effect due to one display being in a certain display mode.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, other than that the one display is in a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may be displayed including a third display [for example, a display of "UP" above the second checkpoint CP2 shown in FIG. 203(A18), etc.]. Is a display,
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 203 (A16) to (A18), the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above the checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the second display is displayed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including display other than the third display. May be Further, the first display may be displayed without fail including the third display, or may be displayed without including the third display.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, and when a certain effect is executed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, "the first display is a timer display [for example, a first timer advance notice display TM1 and a second timer advance notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 204(B6)],
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(2) to (9), the timer in the timer advance notice display TM1. When the display becomes "00:00", it notifies that the pseudo-relational production will be started, etc.],
A display in which at least a part of the first display [for example, a timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 204(B7)] changes with the passage of time (hereinafter, referred to as “change display”). [(2) to (7) in FIG. 20. For example, as shown in FIGS. 20(2) to 20(7), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started according to the time from the start of the countdown. Countdown is being done, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(7) is "00:00", etc.] , The execution of the certain effect is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display change of the first display, which is the timer display, notifies the execution start timing of a certain effect, so that it is possible to give an expectation for the execution start timing of a certain effect. Sometimes you can.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or the timing at which the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. Good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, only execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. When the display mode is set, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. In the case of the display mode, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. Execution of a certain effect may be started in a case other than the case of the display mode.

In addition, "The first display is a display that may be displayed as a moving display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204(B4) to (B6), the first timer advance display TM1 displays a moving display. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the second CUM preparation display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) may be moved and displayed, etc.],
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204(B4) to (B6), the moving display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is performed. The display position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 204(A10) to (A12), the display position changes when the moving display of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) is performed, etc. ],
After the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the change display by the first display is started in a state where the line of sight is focused on the first display in the moving display of the first display, and the timing at which the change display is started is not overlooked. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the production effect from being reduced due to the timing when a certain production is performed without realizing it. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that a certain effect is performed and to focus on the first display that does not miss the certain effect.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, after the display of the first display is started, it may be possible that only the moving display is performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, a display other than the moving display may be performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The moving display may be performed before the change display is started or not.

In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed only before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, the moving display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, "The first display is a display that may be displayed as a moving display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204(B4) to (B6), the first timer advance display TM1 displays a moving display. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the second CUM preparation display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) may be moved and displayed, etc.],
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204(B4) to (B6), the moving display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is performed. The display position changes, and as shown in FIGS. 204(A10) to (A12), the display position changes when the moving display of the second CUM preparing display MTY2 (second chance up meter CMT2) is performed, etc. ],
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by paying attention to the first display in the moving display of the first display during execution of the change display by the first display, it is possible to realize a certain performance without realizing it. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the production effect from decreasing. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that a certain effect is performed and to focus on the first display that does not miss the certain effect.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, only the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the moving display may be always performed during the execution of the change display, or the moving display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the moving display may be performed only during execution of the change display, or the moving display may be performed during execution of a display other than the change display.

In addition, "at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. When the timer display of the display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo continuous effect may be started, and as shown in FIGS. When the SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed, etc.],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", it is pseudo In some cases, continuous production may not be started, and as shown in FIGS. 170(A11) to (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, a certain effect is not always started even when the execution of the certain effect is started. Therefore, it is expected that the execution of the certain effect is started. May be able to have.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the time to start the execution of a certain effect. The execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started in some cases. In addition, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail. The execution may not be started in some cases.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or the time is when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, execution of a certain effect may be started.

Even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of only a certain effect may not be started, or even when the execution of a certain effect is started. There may be a case where execution of an effect other than a certain effect is not started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or even when it is the time when the execution of a certain effect is started, or The execution of the effect may be started in some cases.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or other than the time when the execution of a certain effect is started. In some cases, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect is always started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the first display may be displayed, so that it may be possible to further improve the sense of expectation for execution of a certain effect.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may be necessarily started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or other than the time when the execution of a certain effect is started. Also, the execution of a certain production may be started without fail.

Also, "When the fourth display is displayed, the first display is always displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the fourth display may give an expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, when the fourth display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed, and when the fourth display is displayed, displays other than the first display may be displayed. Good. Also, the first display may be always displayed when only the fourth display is displayed, and the first display is always displayed when a display other than the fourth display is displayed. Good.

Further, "When the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed in some cases. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the fourth display may give an expectation as to whether or not the first display is displayed.

Here, when the fourth display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed, and when the fourth display is displayed, displays other than the first display are also displayed. There may be cases where Further, when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed without fail, and when the fourth display is displayed, the first display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, when only the fourth display is displayed, the first display may be displayed, or when the display other than the fourth display is displayed, the first display is also displayed. It may be displayed.

In addition, “the first timer display in which the first preparation display [for example, the first CUM preparation display MTY1 shown in FIG. 203(A2) and “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204(B6) is displayed as the fourth display [Display TM1 etc.] may be displayed.
As the fourth display, a second in-progress display [for example, a second CUM in-progress display MTY2 shown in FIG. 203(A2), a second timer notice display TM2 in which “STANDUP” shown in FIG. 204(B6) is displayed, etc. ] May be displayed,
The display of the second in-progress display may be started during the display of the first in-progress display [for example, as shown in FIG. 203(A1) to FIG. The display of the second CUM preparation display MTY2 has started while the display MTY1 is being displayed. As shown in FIGS. "STANDUP" is displayed while the second timer notice display TM2 is being displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display of the first in-preparation display may give an expectation to the display of the second in-preparation display.

Here, only the first preparing display may be displayed as the fourth display, or even a display other than the first preparing display may be displayed as the fourth display. Good. Further, the first in-progress display may be displayed as the fourth display, or the first in-progress display may not be displayed as the fourth display.

Further, only the second in-progress display may be displayed as the fourth display, or a display other than the second in-progress display may be displayed as the fourth display. .. In addition, the second in-progress display may be displayed as the fourth display, or the second in-progress display may not be displayed as the fourth display.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the second preparing display is started during the display of the first preparing display, or the second preparing display is displayed during the display of the first preparing display. Display other than the display may be started in some cases. Further, the display of the second in-progress display may be always started during the display of the first in-progress display, or the display of the second in-progress display is not started during the display of the first in-progress display. There may be cases.

Further, the display of the second in-progress display may be started only while the first in-progress display is being displayed, and the second in-progress display is being performed in addition to the first in-progress display being displayed. The display of the display may be started in some cases.

In addition, after the display of the first in-preparation display, the first display corresponding to the first in-preparation display (hereinafter, "first correspondence display [e.g., the first display shown in FIG. 1 chance up meter CMT1, the first timer advance notice display TM1 etc. on which the timer display shown in FIG. 204(B7) is displayed.
After the second in-preparation display is displayed, a first display corresponding to the second in-preparation display (hereinafter, "second correspondence display [eg, second chance up shown in FIG. 204 (A13) Meter CMT2, second timer advance notice display TM2, etc. on which a timer display is displayed]") is displayed.
The first correspondence display is displayed before the second correspondence display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204(A1) to (A13), the first chance up meter CMT1 increases the second chance up. The first timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed before the second timer advance notice display TM2, as shown in FIG. 204(B7).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the display of the second correspondence display may be expected by the display of the first correspondence display.

Here, after the first preparation display is displayed, only the first correspondence display may be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, a display other than the first correspondence display may be displayed. It may be displayed. Also, the first correspondence display may be always displayed after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed. It may be.

Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed only after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display is displayed other than after the first preparation display is displayed. May be done. Also, the first correspondence display may be displayed after only the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display is displayed even after a display other than the first preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, only the second corresponding display may be displayed after the second preparing display is displayed, or a display other than the second corresponding display may be displayed after the second preparing display is displayed. May be done. In addition, the second correspondence display may be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display may not be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed. It may be.

Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed only after the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display is displayed other than after the second preparation display is displayed. May be done. In addition, the second correspondence display may be displayed after only the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display is displayed even after a display other than the second preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, only the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display, and displays other than the first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display. The first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed before the second correspondence display.

It should be noted that one corresponding display (such as a chance up meter or a timer notice display) may be displayed for a plurality of preparing displays. According to this, when a large number of in-preparation displays are displayed, it may be possible to display a hot correspondence display.

In addition, after the display of the first in-preparation display, the first display corresponding to the first in-preparation display (hereinafter, "first correspondence display [e.g., the first display shown in FIG. 1 chance up meter CMT1, the first timer advance notice display TM1 etc. on which the timer display shown in FIG. 204(B7) is displayed.
After the second in-preparation display is displayed, a first display corresponding to the second in-preparation display (hereinafter, "second correspondence display [eg, second chance up shown in FIG. 204 (A13) Meter CMT2, second timer advance notice display TM2, etc. on which a timer display is displayed]") is displayed.
The first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 204(A1) to (A13), the first chance up meter CMT1 is The second chance up meter CMT2 is displayed before the first timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed before the second timer advance notice display TM2 as shown in FIG. 204(B7). ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display of the second correspondence display can be expected by the display of the first correspondence display, and the display of the correspondence display can be made unexpected.

Here, after the first preparation display is displayed, only the first correspondence display may be displayed, or after the first preparation display is displayed, a display other than the first correspondence display may be displayed. It may be displayed. Also, the first correspondence display may be always displayed after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed after the first preparation display is displayed. It may be.

Further, the first correspondence display may be displayed only after the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display is displayed other than after the first preparation display is displayed. May be done. Also, the first correspondence display may be displayed after only the first preparation display is displayed, or the first correspondence display is displayed even after a display other than the first preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, only the second corresponding display may be displayed after the second preparing display is displayed, or a display other than the second corresponding display may be displayed after the second preparing display is displayed. May be done. In addition, the second correspondence display may be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display may not be displayed after the second preparation display is displayed. It may be.

Further, the second correspondence display may be displayed only after the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display is displayed other than after the second preparation display is displayed. May be done. In addition, the second correspondence display may be displayed after only the second preparation display is displayed, or the second correspondence display is displayed even after a display other than the second preparation display is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, there may be a case where only the first correspondence display is displayed before the second correspondence display, and displays other than the first correspondence display are also displayed before the second correspondence display. There may be cases. The first correspondence display may be displayed before the second correspondence display, or the first correspondence display may not be displayed before the second correspondence display.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Also, in the above description,
"Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208 (first decorative pattern display device 208L), sub display device 208S, second decorative pattern display device 208M, third decorative pattern display device 208N, light guide plate IL, POV display 224I, etc. ] With a game console,
The display means is a means for displaying a first display [for example, chance up meter, timer notice display, etc.],
The first display is a display for notifying the timing at which execution of a certain effect is started,
At least a part of the first display [for example, the display position of the character SBH of the sabotani in the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202(A4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 202(B6), etc.] changes May be displayed (hereinafter referred to as "change display"),
The change display is a display that changes according to the time until the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29(2) to (27), the character SBH of Sabohani is As shown in FIGS. 20(2) to 20(7), the display position of the character SBH of Sabohani changes according to the time from the start of the movement from the start point SP. The timer display countdown is being performed according to the time since the timer display countdown started, etc.],
After the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, a notice that the change display is started (hereinafter, "change notice [for example, FIG. 202 (A2) The balloon of "Sorosoro START" displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani in the chance up meter CMT shown in Fig. 202, the display in which the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in Figs. (C4) to (C5) the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged, etc.]”) may be performed [for example, as shown in (A1) to (A4) of FIG. After the CUM preparing display MTY is displayed and before the character SBH of the Sabohani in the chance up meter CMT starts to move, a balloon of "soon about START" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of the Sabohani. B1) to (B6) in the same figure, the timer notice display TM1 is oscillating before the countdown of the timer display is started after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed],
A game table characterized by that.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to prevent the start of the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display from being missed.

Here, the display means may display only the first display, or may display a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

The first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or may notify at a timing other than the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. Good.

Further, only the change display may be displayed, or a display other than the change display may be displayed. Further, the change display may be always performed, or the change display may not be performed.

Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the change notice may be given, or the display of the first display is started. There may be a case where an effect (notice) other than the notice of change is also given later, before the change display is started. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the change notice may be given without fail, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the change notice may not be given before the change display is started.

Further, the change notice may be given only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or the display of the first display is started. There may be a case where a change notice is given later than after the change display is started.

In addition, “the first display is a period display [for example, a chance up meter CMT or the like shown in FIG. 202(A2)],
The term display is executed in a certain period [for example, a period in which an effect is produced by the chance up meter CMT shown in (2) to (27) of FIG. 29]. This is a display for notifying the timing [for example, as shown in FIGS. 29(8) to (13), when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second checkpoint CP2, the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Notifying the timing that may be displayed, etc.],
The change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the character SBH of Sabohani shown in FIG. 29(8) reaches the second checkpoint CP2]. It is informed that it is the timing to start the execution of the production,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the execution start timing of a certain effect is notified by the display change of the first display which is the period display, so that it is possible to give an expectation for the execution start timing of a certain effect. Sometimes you can.

Here, the first display may include only the period display or may include a display other than the period display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or the execution of an effect other than a certain effect is started in a certain period. The timing may also be notified. In addition, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period, or a timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started in a certain period. It may not be possible.

Further, the first display may notify the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only in a certain period, or the execution of a certain effect may be started in a period other than the certain period. The timing may be notified.

Further, it may be notified only that it is the timing at which execution of a certain effect is started by performing the change display and the first display in a certain display mode, or by performing the change display and performing the first display. When one display is in a certain display mode, it may be notified of a matter other than the timing at which execution of a certain effect is started. Moreover, it may be informed that it is the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started by performing the change display and the first display in a certain display mode. There may be a case in which one display is in a certain display mode, and thus it is not notified that it is a timing at which execution of a certain effect is started.

Further, it may be notified that it is the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started only when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode. It may be notified that it is the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, other than that the one display is in a certain display mode.

Further, "the first display may be displayed including a third display [for example, a display of "UP" above the second check point CP2 shown in FIG. 29(16), etc.]. Is a display,
When the certain effect is executed, the third display is displayed [for example, when the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 29 (13) to (16), the second display is displayed. "UP" is displayed above the checkpoint CP2],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the second display is displayed by looking at the third display.

Here, the first display may be displayed including only the third display, or may be displayed including display other than the third display. May be Further, the first display may be displayed without fail including the third display, or may be displayed without including the third display.

Further, when a certain effect is executed, only the third display may be displayed, and when a certain effect is executed, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when a certain effect is executed, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when a certain effect is executed, the third display may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the first display is a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 20(2) or FIG. 202(B1), bomb timer display BOMB shown in FIG. 205(B2)],
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the execution of the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(2) to (9), the timer in the timer advance notice display TM1. When the display becomes "00:00", it notifies that the pseudo-relational production will be started, etc.],
When the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode [for example, a display mode in which the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 202 (B8) is "00:00", etc.] , The execution of the certain effect is started,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming table, the display change of the first display, which is the timer display, notifies the execution start timing of a certain effect, so that it is possible to give an expectation for the execution start timing of a certain effect. Sometimes you can.

Here, the first display may include only the timer display, or may include a display other than the timer display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which the execution of a certain effect is started, or the timing at which the execution of an effect other than the certain effect is started. Good. In addition, the first display may be a notification that always notifies the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started, or may not notify the timing when the execution of a certain effect is started. Good.

Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, only execution of a certain effect may be started, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. When the display mode is set, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, when the change display is performed and the first display is in a certain display mode, execution of a certain effect may be always started, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. In the case of the display mode, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the change display is performed and the first display becomes a certain display mode, or the change display is performed and the first display is performed. Execution of a certain effect may be started in a case other than the case of the display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to (A9), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is a moving display] 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) or FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48(A8) to (A9), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed when the movement display is performed. The position is changed, and as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) and FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. And the display position changes],
After the display of the first display is started, the movement display may be performed before the change display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the change display by the first display is started in a state where the line of sight is focused on the first display in the moving display of the first display, and the timing at which the change display is started is not overlooked. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the production effect from being reduced due to the timing when a certain production is performed without realizing it. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that a certain effect is performed and to focus on the first display that does not miss the certain effect.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, after the display of the first display is started, it may be possible that only the moving display is performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, a display other than the moving display may be performed before the change display is started. In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. The moving display may be performed before the change display is started or not.

In addition, after the display of the first display is started, the moving display may be performed only before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. However, the moving display may be performed other than before the change display is started.

In addition, "the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A8) to (A9), when the timer advance notice display TM1 is a moving display] 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) or FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. 204(A12), the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) may be moved and displayed. ],
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 48(A8) to (A9), the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed when the movement display is performed. The position is changed, and as shown in FIG. 168(A8) to FIG. 168(A10) and FIG. 204(A10) to FIG. And the display position changes],
The movement display may be performed during execution of the change display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by paying attention to the first display in the moving display of the first display during execution of the change display by the first display, it is possible to realize a certain performance without realizing it. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the production effect from decreasing. That is, it may be possible to prepare for the fact that a certain effect is performed and to focus on the first display that does not miss the certain effect.

Here, as the first display, only the moving display may be performed, or a display other than the moving display may be performed. In addition, the first display may be the one in which the moving display is always performed, or the moving display may not be performed in some cases.

Further, when the moving display is performed, only the display position of the first display may be changed, and when the moving display is performed, the display positions of the displays other than the first display may be changed. Further, when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may change without exception, and when the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the moving display is performed, and the display position of the first display changes even when a display other than the moving display is performed. May be.

Further, only the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display, or a display other than the moving display may be performed during the execution of the change display. Further, the moving display may be always performed during the execution of the change display, or the moving display may not be performed during the execution of the change display.

Further, the moving display may be performed only during execution of the change display, or the moving display may be performed during execution of a display other than the change display.

In addition, "at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20(7) to 20(12)]. In some cases, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the pseudo continuous effect may be started. As shown in FIGS. 29(8) to 29(13), the character SBH of the sabotani is displayed first. 2 When the checkpoint CP2 is reached, the gold cut-in CI3 may be displayed, etc.],
Even when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect may not be started [for example, even if the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", it is pseudo In some cases, continuous production may not be started, and as shown in FIGS. 170(A11) to (A16), the gold cut-in CI3 may not be displayed even if the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the second check point CP2. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a certain effect is not always started even when the execution of a certain effect is started. Therefore, there is an expectation as to whether or not the execution of a certain effect is started. It may be possible to have it.

Here, when it is time to start the execution of a certain effect, only the execution of a certain effect may be started, or when it is the time to start the execution of a certain effect. The execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started in some cases. Further, when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail. The execution may not be started in some cases.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or the time is when the execution of a certain effect is started. In other cases, execution of a certain effect may be started.

Even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of only a certain effect may not be started, or even when the execution of a certain effect is started. There may be a case where execution of an effect other than a certain effect is not started. Further, even when the execution of a certain effect is started, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, or even when it is the time when the execution of a certain effect is started, or The execution of the effect may be started in some cases.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may not be started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or other than the time when the execution of a certain effect is started. In some cases, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "at the timing when the execution of the certain effect is started, the execution of the certain effect is always started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the first display may be displayed, so that it may be possible to further improve the sense of expectation for execution of a certain effect.

Here, the execution of a certain effect may be necessarily started only when the execution of a certain effect is started, or when the execution of a certain effect is not started. Also, the execution of a certain production may be started without fail.

In addition, “the display means displays a fourth display [for example, a CUM preparation display MTY shown in FIG. 202(A1), a timer advance notice display TM1 in which “STANDBY” shown in FIG. 202(C1) is displayed, and FIG. B3) A timer notice stock display area TMst showing that the timer notice is in stock, and a display showing the number of meters stocked in the information display area of the CUM preparation display MTYa shown in FIG. 185(A1) Etc.] may be displayed,
The fourth display is a display announcing that the first display will be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the fourth display may give an expectation that the first display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the fourth display, or may display other displays than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be a notification that only the first display is displayed, or may be a notification that a display other than the first display is displayed. .. The fourth display may be a notification that the first display is displayed, or may not be a notification that the first display is displayed. ..

In addition, "A notice display can be displayed as the change notice,
The advance notice is displayed by the first display [for example, the advance notice is displayed by a balloon of "Sorosoro START" displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani constituting the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 202(A2). 202(B4) to (B5) shown in FIG. 202(C4) to (B5) in FIG. 202(C4) to (C5) shown in FIG. 202(C5) The notice display TM1 itself is enlarged to give a notice display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the change display is performed by the first display.

Here, only the notice display may be displayed as the change notice, or a display other than the notice display may be displayed as the change notice. Further, the notice display may be displayed as the change notice, or the notice display may not be displayed as the change notice.

Further, the notice display may be displayed only as the notice of change, or the notice display may be displayed as an effect (notice) other than the notice of change.

Further, the notice display may be performed only by the first display, or the notice display may be performed by a display other than the first display. Further, the advance notice may be always displayed by the first display, or the advance notice may not be displayed by the first display.

In addition, "There may be false notifications of changes,
If the false change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, the change display is not started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give an expectation that the change display may be started when the change notice is given.

Here, only a false change notice may be executed, or an effect (notice) other than the false change notice may be executed. Further, the false change notice may be executed without fail, or the false change notice may not be executed in some cases.

In addition, if a fake change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, only the change display may not be started, or it may be false after the display of the first display is started. When the change notice of is executed, the display other than the change display may not be started. In addition, when a fake change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, the change display may not necessarily be started, or the false display is started after the display of the first display is started. The change display may be started when the change notice of is executed.

In addition, the change display may not be started only when the fake change notice is executed after the display of the first display is started, or the false display is started after the display of the first display is started. The change display does not have to be started even in the case other than the case where the change notice is changed.

In addition, “after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the change notice is given [for example, in FIG. 202(A1) to FIG. As shown, after the CUM preparation display MTY (chance up meter CMT) is displayed and before the character SBH of Sabohani starts to move, a balloon of "Soro start" is displayed. As shown in (B6) of the figure, after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed and before the countdown of the timer display is started, the timer notice display TM1 swings, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the change display is started.

Here, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, only the change notice may be given, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, an effect (notice) other than the notice of change may be given before the change display is started. Further, after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, the change notice may be given without fail, or after the display of the first display is started. Therefore, the change notice may not be given before the change display is started.

Further, the change notice may be given only after the display of the first display is started and before the change display is started, or after the display of the first display is started. Thus, the change notice may be given other than before the change display is started.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 215.

207 to 215 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 207 to 215, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. 207 to 215 show a pachinko machine 100 including one decorative pattern display device 208. Note that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 207 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 207. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207(a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of missing decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the sabotani display mode. That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in this example of performance, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are not displayed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207(b), the hold (first hold) of special figure 1 is consumed, and the second hold icon h12 of special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, after the hold is exhausted and the symbol variable display is started, one variable icon corresponding to the symbol variable display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variable icon may be the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, for example.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207(c), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207(d), the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207(e), the third stop is performed, the "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then the "decoration 2" -Decoration 5-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of the decorative patterns that are lost.

Subsequently, in FIG. 207(f), the suspension of special map 1 is exhausted and the suspension display disappears, and the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the variable display of the symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display has started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207(g), the step-up notice is started. The step-up notice is a notice in which a plurality of types of display modes are sequentially switched and displayed in a predetermined display order.In the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display mode has a number indicating the number of steps of the display mode. It is displayed. The size of the number of steps indicates that the reliability of the big hit is high or low. For example, if it is displayed up to step 5, the development to super reach is confirmed and the possibility of a big hit increases. However, the reliability may not be 100% even if it is displayed up to step 5, and the reliability is not 100%. In addition, when up to step 5 is displayed, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. As the number of steps increases, the display size also increases. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 207B(g), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 207(h), the step-up notice is updated on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207(i), the step-up notice is further updated on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 207(j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 207(k), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which it has developed into a super reach (sublimation reach). In the super-reach state, the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 207(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 in which a mini game is displayed is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. This mini game display area MN1 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the effect display of the super reach, and the effect display of the super reach is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the mini game display area MN1 is not displayed. There is. The mini game in this example of the effect is a game whose mission is to repeatedly operate the effect button 136 during the effective operation period to finally derive “Daikichi”. That is, the mini game in this example of performance requires a plurality of operations of the effect button 136 to derive the result. In FIG. 207(m), a state where the mini game is started is shown, and an explanation of the play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and prompts a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, there is a text display that says "Maybe it's a big notice in Daikichi", and it is announced that a highly reliable notice may occur due to the derivation of "Dakichi". That is, the contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. The mini game display area MN1 may not be partitioned by a frame.

Then, as shown in FIG. 207(n), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(o), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daiyoshi".

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 207(p), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi".

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 207(q), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the acceptance of the repeated hitting operation by has started.

In FIG. 207(r), it is shown that the player is performing a continuous hit operation on the effect button 136.

In FIG. 208(a) subsequent to FIG. 207(r), it is shown that the player is continuously performing the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, an effect image of a star is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the number also increases as the number of operations increases due to repeated hits. In this example of effect, when the player interrupts continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the number of effect images of the star gradually decreases, but may not be decreased. At the timing shown in FIG. 208(a), four effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1.

In FIG. 208(b), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208(b), five effect images of stars are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1, and the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. Then, it is notified that the probability that “Nakichi” or “Daikichi” will be derived as a result of the mini game is high. In this example of performance, when the player interrupts the continuous production of the effect button 136, the display of "Kokichi" which has been deleted may be displayed again, but when it is deleted, it is not displayed again. Good.

In FIG. 208(c), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208(c), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and “Daikichi” and “Nakichi” are displayed continuously. Instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character "repeatedly hit", the character "2 more seconds" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

In FIG. 208(d), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208(d), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 has not been changed, and the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Nakichi” have been continued. The display for notifying the operation valid period is "1 second", and it is notified that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining.

In FIG. 208(e), it is shown that the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 208(e), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 and there is no change in the display notifying the operation valid period, but a predetermined number of effect buttons. It is informed that the display of “Nakichi” has been erased by the operation of 136 and that the possibility of “Daikichi” being derived as a result of the mini game has increased. In addition, in this example of performance, when the player interrupts continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the display of "Nakichi" once deleted may be displayed again, but if it is deleted once, it will not be displayed again. Good.

FIG. 208(f) shows that after the player continuously hits the effect button 136, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game is completed. As a result, the player is informed that there is a possibility that an intense hot notice may appear. It should be noted that, by deriving the display of "DAIKICHI", it may be possible to notify the advance notice that the intense hot advance notice is always executed.

Subsequently, when the mini game display area MN1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 208(g), the super reach effect is restarted. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 208(g), the button advance notice effect is started, the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and "Push" is displayed together with this button image 136a. Is displayed to indicate that the one-time operation of the effect button 136 is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode of only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode of only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode of neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. In this effect example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, it is more final than when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of not vibrating and/or rotating. The jackpot pattern is designed to be easily stopped. The button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode that neither vibration nor rotation occurs. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of operations of the effect button 136 is different between the mini game and the main effect (effect relating to the variable display of the decorative pattern). In addition, in this example of the effect, the effect is performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136 in the mini game and the operation is performed by operating the effect button 136 once in the main effect. However, the effect button is used in both the mini game and the main effect. You may make it produce by the continuous hit operation of 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 208(h), the state that the super reach effect is continuously performed and the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed is shown. Here, when the operation valid period is started, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in place of the character display of "Push", and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

Then, as shown in FIG. 208(h), when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 208(i), the word "Game" is displayed in the balloon together with the up image of the lord's character. A cut-in image including a balloon image with is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, 9) of face-length faces are arranged around the word "Game" in the speech bubble. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" is derived and is displayed in correspondence with the result of achieving the mission.

On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of “DAIKICHI” is not derived and the mission is not achieved, the weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 208(i′) is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image having a smaller size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the longest face is not arranged around the characters of “Game” in the balloon. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed even when the mission has not been achieved in the mini game. Note that both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap the super-reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super-reach is performed more than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The production is difficult to see. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with the decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 208(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

Then, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 208(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variation game is over.

In this example, the mini game requires continuous operation of the effect button 136 in order to achieve the mission, while the main effect requires one operation of the effect button 136 in order to make the notice appear. In the mini game, one operation of the effect button 136 may be required, and in the main effect, some operation may be required to continuously hit the effect button 136.

Further, when the result of the mini game is related to the notice relating to the variable display of symbols as in this effect example, the execution time of the mini game is shorter than the execution time of the variable display of symbols. ..

FIG. 209 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 209(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 207(j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 209(b), it is shown that the super reach (sublimation reach) has been developed. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 209(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini game in this effect example is also performed as described above with reference to FIGS. In FIG. 209(c), a state where the mini game is started is shown, and an explanation of the play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the character "repeatedly hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and prompts the user to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. In addition, below that, there is a text display that says, "Maybe it's a big notice in Daikichi", and it will be announced that a highly reliable notice may occur when "Dakichi" is derived. That is, the contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. On the other hand, a button operation effect that requires operation of an effect button is started even in the main effect. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 209(c), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and the character "Push" is displayed together with this button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is displayed once. It is shown to facilitate the operation. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode of only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode of only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode of neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases.

Then, as shown in FIG. 209(d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period in the main effect has not started and the button reception time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 and the main effect have some relation to each other.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209(e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daiyoshi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 209(f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi". On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 209(g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and in the mini game. It is informed that the acceptance of the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 has started. Then, the player sees this notification and starts hitting the production button 136 repeatedly. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed. As described above, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Furthermore, in this effect example, the button operation for the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 overlapping the main effect is preferentially accepted. The button operation for the main effect overlapping the mini game display area MN1 may be preferentially accepted.

In FIG. 209(h), a state is shown in which the player continuously hits the effect buttons 136. In the mini-game display area MN1, it is shown that the number of effect images of the star increases in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209(h), four effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

In FIG. 209(i), the player continues to continuously hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209(i), the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, and "Nakichi" or "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game. It has been announced that the possibility has increased. Note that the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

In FIG. 209(j), the player continues to continuously hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 209(j), five effect images of stars are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. Further, in place of displaying the button image 136 and the character of “continuous hit”, the character of “2 more seconds” is displayed, and it is notified that the operation effective period is 2 seconds remaining. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation valid period has not started yet, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 209(k) shows a state in which the player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is interrupted. Then, the effect images of the stars displayed in the mini game display area MN1 are gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 209(k), the number of effect images of the stars in the mini game display area MN1 is 0. The situation is shown. Also, although the display of "Daikichi" and "Nakichi" continues to be displayed, the display notifying the operation valid period is "1 second" and the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. It has been informed.

FIG. 209( l) shows that the operation valid period in the mini game has passed and “Nakichi” has been derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. That is, it is reported that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. Originally, "Daikichi" was supposed to be derived when the continuous hit operation was continuously performed, but the mission was not achieved because the number of operations of the effect button 136 was insufficient. It is due to that.

Then, as shown in FIG. 209(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game ends, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, the super reach effect is restarted, and the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is displayed. Decrease display is started. Thereby, it is notified that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect has started. When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 209(n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 209(o). This is displayed based on the fact that the derivation result of the mini game was not "Daikichi". At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. When it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is to be displayed, FIG. As shown in o'), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined, regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, if it is determined in advance that the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" may not be derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

Then, as shown in FIG. 209(p), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

Then, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 209(q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variation game is over. In this way, the result of the win/fail is predetermined, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of the win/fail is derived. Therefore, the effect in the middle may be appropriately changed, and therefore, the operation means ( The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

FIG. 210 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 210(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 207(k), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that it has evolved into super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 210(b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state where a mini game is started in this mini game display area MN1 is shown. .. Specifically, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, which prompts the effect button 136 to be operated once. In addition, below that, there is a text display that says, "Dake Daikichi and appear at Daikichi." Derivation of "Daikichi" will give notice that a highly reliable notice will be issued. The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained.

Then, as shown in FIG. 210(c), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daikichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210D, in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daiyoshi".

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 210(e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi".

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 210(f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakichi" and "Kokichi" is started. Then, the word "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, informing that the acceptance of the one-time operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, the button operation effect requesting the continuous hit operation of the effect button is started. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 210(f), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with this button image 136a, and the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode of only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode of only rotating, or may be displayed in a mode of neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. As described above, in this example of the effect, an effect of requesting a continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and an effect of requesting a single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that an example is shown in which the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is requested is smaller than the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is requested. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 210(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the reduction display of the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is started is shown. In this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are accepted at the same time. The acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. After that, acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts to continuously hit the effect button 136. In this example of the effect, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button effect in the main effect corresponds to the state of the effect button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1. The display mode of 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. As described above, in this effect example, the same operation means (effect button 136) can be operated for both the main effect and the mini game effect. Therefore, for example, when the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is an effect requiring the continuous hitting operation and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is not prioritized is an effect requiring the one-time operation, the hitting force of the operating means is high. The result may be derived for the non-priority effect, and the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is an effect that requires a single operation, and the effect for which the acceptance of the operation is not prioritized is a continuous hit operation. In the case of the requested effect, the continuous hitting operation is performed from the beginning, so it may be possible to reliably derive the result for the effect that is prioritized.

Then, as shown in FIG. 210(h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136. Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved is also displayed, and the fact is notified. That is, in this example of the effect, the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the mini game is accepted in preference to the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 210(i), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the continuous hit operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous hit operation effect in the main effect. Then, the button reception time meter MT is overlapped by the cut-in image, which makes it more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display of “Mission in progress” for notifying that the mission in the mini game has been completed is scrolling from the right end to the left end. As a result, the notification that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is provided on condition that the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is continued. The player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is still continuing.

After that, as a result of the player continuously hitting the effect buttons 136, as shown in FIG. 210(j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the weak cut-in image CI1b is replaced with the strong cut-in image CI1a. Is displayed. This is displayed as a result of achieving the mission in the mini game as described above. In this example of effect, a continuous hit gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the continuous hit gauge reaches the first amount, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed when it is displayed and full. At this time, if it is determined in advance not to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, the continuous stroke gauge may not be filled up no matter how many continuous strokes are performed.

When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 210(k), in the vicinity of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is changed to "Mission in progress" and " The display of "Geki Atsu Notice Appearance" is displayed to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a, which is a Geki Atsu notice, has been displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 210(h), the mini game mission is achieved, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 210(i′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. However, after that, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient due to, for example, the player canceling the continuous hit operation, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 210(j′). It may remain. That is, as in this example of performance, even if the mission has been achieved, there may be a case where the law breaks, in which the intense attention notice does not appear, depending on the operation status of the performance button 136. In order to match the achievement of the mini game mission, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation status of the effect button 136, or another strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. You may make it display an intense hot notice. Further, when the continuous hit operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 210(l), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

Then, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 210(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variation game is over.

As described above, in this example of performance, the fact that the mission has been achieved is strong in the cut-in image CI1.
It is one of the display conditions of a, and when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the predetermined number of times, the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is performed. When the number of times exceeds a predetermined number, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In this example of performance, it is determined in advance which of the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and when it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed, the mini cut-in image CI1a can be displayed. The display of "Daikichi" can be derived in the game. Further, when it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI 1b can be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this example of effect, in the button repeated operation effect in the main effect, the cut-in image is not displayed when the effect button 136 does not operate at least the number of times necessary to display the weak cut-in CI 1b. You may Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit in the button repeated hit operation effect in the main effect, or a weak cut-in image. The CI 1b may be displayed, but the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed.

FIG. 211 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 211(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 207(j), in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 211(b), it is shown that the super reach (sublimation reach) has been developed. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 211(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. In FIG. 211(c), a state where the mini game is started is shown, and an explanation of the play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters "take out Daikichi by repeated hits" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting a continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. The button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 211(c) has a larger size than the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 207(m). However, they may have the same size. Further, the small-sized button image 136a and the large-sized button image 136a may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of achievement of the mission may be different depending on the size of the displayed button image 136a. .. That is, when the large-sized button image 136a is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the small-sized button image 136a is displayed. In addition, below it is a text display that says "A strong cut-in occurs in Daikichi", and it is announced that a highly reliable strong cut-in notice for a big hit will be generated when "Daikichi" is derived. The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained.

After that, the explanation of the play of the mini game displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 211(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be derived as a result of the mini game. Each display of "Daikichi", "Nakichi", and "Kokichi" is displayed in this order, "Dakichi" is overlapped with "Nakichi", and "Nakichi" is displayed on "Kokichi". Is displayed so as to overlap the display of.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 211(e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character "continuous hit" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by has started. Further, a button reception time meter MT is displayed on the left side of the mini game display area MN1, and the gauge is reduced in accordance with the passage of the operation reception period of the effect buttons 136. In this effect example, it is shown that the display related to the mini game is also performed in an area other than the mini game display area MN1.

211(f) to (g) show a state in which the effect button 136 is continuously hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini game display area MN1, the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of consecutive hits of the effect button 136.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses, a result according to the number of continuous hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 211(h), “Daikichi” is derived as the result of the mini game, and the word “Mission achieved” is displayed below it to inform that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. ing.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 211(i), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a cut-in notice. This notifies that the reliability of the big hit is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result that "Daikichi" was derived and the mission was achieved as a result of the mini game described above.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 211(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 211(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variation game is over.

On the other hand, after the acceptance of the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 211(e), as shown in FIG. 211(f′) to FIG. 211(g′), the number of times the effect button 136 has been operated. However, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has elapsed in a state where the number of times is less than the number determined in advance, as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1, as shown in FIG. While "Kokichi" is derived, the word "Mission failed" is displayed below it to inform that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. Note that the result of the mini game may be determined in advance based on the result of the hit/miss judgment.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 211(i′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as a cut-in notice. This informs that the reliability of the big hit is lower than that when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the result that "Kokichi" was derived and the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini game described above.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211(j′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a screen is displayed in which it is defeated, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7". It

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 211(k′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped (fixed display). Then, the variation game of one special figure ends.

FIG. 212 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 212(a) is an effect following FIG. 207(d), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7", which is a combination of missing decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani, that is, the display mode of the prefetching notice.

Then, in FIG. 212(b), the suspension of special map 1 is exhausted and the suspension display disappears, and the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the variable display of the symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display has started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212(c), it is shown that the mission as the main effect has started. Specifically, the character "Mission activation" is displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the mission has started. At the lower edge of the display area, "take out the cut-in" and "big hit if it comes out" are displayed together with the image of the bancho face to inform the content of the mission. That is, it is informed that the mission is achieved and the jackpot is confirmed if an image of the face of the bancho appears during the mission.

Then, as shown in FIG. 212(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message "in mission" indicating that the mission is continuing is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212(e), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, the display of "during mission" continues to be performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 212(f), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a display that develops into a super reach (sublimation reach) is displayed. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. Even after developing into super reach, the display of "in mission" continues to be performed.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 212(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and the mini game is started. In this example of the effect, the mission as the main effect and the mission in the mini game are simultaneously performed. In other words, it shows that the mission of the mini game is superimposed on the mission as the main effect. Here, in this effect example, the mini game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini game is started. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 212(g) to (l) are shown in FIGS. 211(c) to 211(c) except that the display of “during mission” indicating that a mission is in progress is displayed. Since it is the same as h), detailed description is omitted. Note that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 212(j) to 212(k), a part of the display of “in mission” is overlapped with the button reception time meter MT, and the button reception time meter MT is overlapped. The display of "Mission in progress" is more difficult to see than when there is no overlap.

As shown in FIG. 212(l), "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game, and after the mission is completed, at the timing shown in FIG. 212(m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the cut-in notice. The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result that "Daikichi" was derived and the mission was achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even while the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the display of "during mission" continues, but the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It is more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the CI 1a is not overlapped.

As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a balloon formed by arranging a number of long-faced faces around the character "Game". Therefore, the appearance of the Banchou face, which is a mission in the main production, has been achieved, so that in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. Wrapped and displayed. That is, it is informed that the big hit is settled by the completion of the mission in the main effect. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 212(o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". ..

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 212(p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). The variation game of one special figure ends.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 213(a) to 213(k) are the same as FIGS. 212(a) to 212(k), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 213(l), when "Kokichi" is derived as a result of the mini game, the word "Mission failed" is displayed below it, and the mini game mission was not achieved. Is notified. In addition, in this example of performance, the result of the hit/miss judgment is a loss, and therefore, when the mission of the mini game is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a has to be displayed. Therefore, in this example of production, in the mini game, Regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated, it is determined in advance that a value other than "Daikichi" is always derived.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 213(m), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is because the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is being displayed, and the display "Mission in progress" continues to be displayed, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, it is more difficult to visually recognize it than when it is not overlapped with the CI1b. It is easier to visually recognize when the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped than when it is overlapped by the CI1a.

As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the longest face. Therefore, the appearance of the Banchou face, which is a mission in the main production, is not achieved, so that in the decorative pattern display device 208 illustrated in FIG. Displayed overlapping. That is, in this example of production, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 213(o), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and a screen is displayed in which the defeat is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7". ..

After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 213(p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). The variation game of one special figure ends.

FIG. 214 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIGS. 214(a) to 214(i) are the same as FIGS. 212(a) to 212(i), and a description thereof will be omitted.

After the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 214(i), as shown in FIGS. 214(j) to (k), the operation number of the effect button 136 is changed. When the effective operation period of the effect button 136 has elapsed in a state where the number of times is less than the number determined in advance, as shown in FIG. 214(l), in the mini game display area MN1, the result of the mini game is “Koyoshi”. Is derived, and the word “Mission failed” is displayed below it to inform that the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. In this example of the effect, the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived as the result of the mini game. However, since the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number of times determined in advance and the operation valid period has elapsed, “Daikichi” is not derived and “Kokichi” is derived. It should be noted that if the mini-game has started but the production button 136 has never been operated, the result of the mini-game may not be derived even if it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived. .. Further, when it is determined that “Daiyoshi” can be derived, “Daiyoshi” may be derived even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient or the effect button 136 is not operated. ..

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 214(m), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is because the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini game described above. Note that the mission continues even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is being displayed, and the display "Mission in progress" continues to be displayed, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Although the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, it is more difficult to visually recognize it than when it is not overlapped with the CI1b. It is easier to visually recognize when the weak cut-in image CI1b is overlapped than when it is overlapped by the CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed even when the mission result is not derived.

As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the longest face. Therefore, since the appearance of the Banchou face, which is a mission in the main production, was not achieved, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 214(n), the character display of “mission failure” is displayed in the weak cut-in image CI1b. Displayed overlapping. That is, in this example of production, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

However, in this example of performance, since the result of the hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 214(o), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character defeats the enemy swordsman, and the winning screen is displayed. At the same time, the "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed in the approximate center of the ornamental pattern display device 208, and the ornamental pattern "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is displayed. It is informed that the combination will be scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

Then, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 214(p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variation game is over. That is, in this production example, the number of times the production button 136 is operated in the mini game is insufficient, and the mini game mission fails. Therefore, the main production mission related to this mission cannot be achieved, but the success or failure is achieved. It is shown that the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed according to the result of the determination.

FIG. 215 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 215, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 215(a) is an effect following FIG. 207(k), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that it has evolved into super reach (sublimation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are respectively displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215(b), the button operation effect requesting the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is started as the main effect. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 215(b), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "repeatedly hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 is vibrating as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started. Has been done. Then, the player sees this and starts continuous hitting of the effect button 136.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 215(d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in this mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the character "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a, which prompts the effect button 136 to be operated once. In addition, below that, there is a text display that says "Maybe it's a big notice in Daikichi", and it is announced that a highly reliable notice may occur due to the derivation of "Dakichi". That is, the contents of the mission in the mini game and the result of the mission achievement are explained. As described above, in this effect example, the mission effect in the main effect is started before the mini game is started. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 215(e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215(f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Nakichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Daiyoshi". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 215(f), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 is moved and overlaps the mini game display area MN1. In this example of effect, the effect movable body 224 operates as, for example, a big hit announcement, but, for example, the effect movable object 224 operates to notify that the possibility of achievement of a mission in the mini game is high. Alternatively, it may be announced that the mission is likely to be achieved in the main production. In addition, the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215(g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kokichi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of "Kokichi" overlaps a part of the display of "Nakichi". Further, the display of “Kokichi” is overlapped with the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the effect of continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is also continuously performed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 215(g), according to the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. , A weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous hit operation effect in the main effect. In this effect example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side of the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT so as not to overlap with the button image 136a. The player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is still continuing.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 215(h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daikichi”, “Nakichi”, and “Kokichi” is started. Then, the word "push" is displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of the high-speed loop rotation, informing that the acceptance of the one-time operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. The display of the mini game is overlapped with the upper arm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 and is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, in the main effect, the button operation effect that requires continuous hit operation of the effect button continues. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promoting display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Here too, the player's continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is still continued, but when the acceptance of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is the effect button in the main effect. Since the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game has priority over the operation of 136, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line, for example. Is configured. It should be noted that one operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, and may also be accepted as the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 215(i), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game in response to one operation by the effect button 136. Is shown. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved is also displayed, and the fact is notified. However, since the mini game display area MN1 is overlapped with the forearm 224b of the production movable body 224, it is difficult to visually recognize the character “achievement”. At the timing shown in FIG. 215(i), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has passed, and the player has finished the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 215(j), when the mission in the main effect ends, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main effect. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 215(j), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. Therefore, the overlap with the mini game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the word “achievement” indicating that the mini game mission has been accomplished is easily visible. The timing at which the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area after the mission in the main effect ends and the timing at which the forearm 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position may be the same. Then, after the mission in the main effect ends and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 may move to the initial position, or the effect movable body 224. After the forearm portion 224b of the above is moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may be ended and the weak cut-in image CI1b may be moved to the center of the display area.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 215(k), a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b is shown. This is displayed as a result of achieving the mission in the mini game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even if the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although not displayed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the mission in the mini game is achieved regardless of the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. You may do it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 215(l), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7". .. After that, at the timing when the variable time elapses, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped (fixed display), and one variation game of the special figure ends.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 220.

216 to 220 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 216 to 220 also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 216 to 220 show a pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 216 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 216, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 216(a) shows that the mini game is started during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this effect example, the mini game is played without being divided into regions. When the mini game is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right below the display area. ing. Also, "SP Reach if Yoshimune comes out" is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and it is informed that when the main character's lord appears from the treasure box, it will move to super reach (SP reach). Further, "Select with the cross key" and "Decision with the button" are displayed above the display area. The treasure box selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It has been announced that it is possible. That is, in this effect example, a mini game using a plurality of operating means is played. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the mini game is performed using a region wider than the effect related to the decorative symbol variable display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216(b), it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 has started. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL, and the treasure box surrounded by the cursor CSL is shown to be the selected treasure box. Further, the remaining time of the operation valid period is shown on the right side of the center of the display area, and at the timing shown in FIG. 216(b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed. Has been done. FIG. 216(b) also shows a state where the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 216(c), the cursor CSL that surrounds the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR and surrounds the right treasure box image BXR. .. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216(d), as shown in FIG. 216(e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as the treasure box to be opened, and the right treasure box is selected. The treasure chest image BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the left treasure chest image BXL which is not selected is reduced and displayed. In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 216(d), the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "1", which shows that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. Further, after the player operates the effect button 136 to determine the treasure box to be opened, the treasure box to be opened may be confirmed when the operation valid period elapses. In addition, when the operation valid period elapses without performing the operation with the effect button 136, the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL may be determined as the treasure box to be opened, or the operation with the effect button 136 is performed. If the operation valid period has passed without any treasure box, no treasure box may be selected and the treasure box may not be opened. According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's motivation for operating the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216(f), the character YSM of the main character, Lord, appears from the right treasure box image BXR, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. As a result, it is announced that the SP reach will be started. The look-ahead notice may be given by the appearance of the character YSM of the main character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 216(g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, so that the reach state is formed. .. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 216(h), it is shown that the SP reach is developed. In this way, in this effect example, when the variation pattern of the decorative design determined based on the result of the hit determination is to shift to SP reach, in the mini game performed before shifting to SP reach, The character YSM of the protagonist, who gives a notice of the shift to SP reach, can be displayed. As a result, it may be possible to give advance notice of the shift to SP reach by causing the lord's character YSM to appear in the mini game.

In this production example, if the shift to SP reach is determined in advance, the lord's character YSM appears even if either the right treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, and it does not shift to SP reach. When it is determined in advance that the right character treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, the lord's character YSM may not appear. Further, on condition that the transition to SP reach has been determined in advance, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. In the case of, the lord's character YSM may appear. Further, in the case where a variable time capable of executing SP reach is selected, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. If the lord's character YSM appears, the SP character reaches the SP reach when the lord's character YSM appears, but if the lord's character YSM does not appear, then the SP reach is reached. It may be configured to perform a reach with a smaller jackpot reliability than a SP reach such as a normal reach until the variation time elapses. Further, whether or not the lord's character YSM appears at the timing of selecting the treasure box image may be randomly selected. In addition, even if the lord's character YSM appears, it may not be possible to shift to SP reach. In this case, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed as a break in the law.

FIG. 217 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 217, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown.

FIG. 217(a) shows that the mini game is started during the variable display of the decorative pattern. When the mini game is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right below the display area. ing. Also, "SP Reach if Yoshimune comes out" is displayed in the approximate center of the display area, and it is informed that when the main character's lord appears from the treasure box, it will move to super reach (SP reach). Further, "Select with the cross key" and "Decision with the button" are displayed above the display area. The treasure box selected with the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box selected with the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It has been announced that it is possible. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 217(a), the cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, and no treasure box image is displayed in a selected state. Has been done.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 217(b), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area. It At the timing shown in FIG. 217(b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 217(c), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. The display is "2", and the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure box image BXR and the left treasure box image BXL, since no treasure box image has been selected yet.

At the timing shown in FIG. 217(d), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. The display is “1”, and the operation valid period is 1 second remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL, without selecting any treasure chest image.

At the timing shown in FIG. 217(e), in the state where no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is set. The display becomes "0", indicating that the operation valid period has elapsed. Therefore, the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL, without selecting any treasure chest image. As a result, none of the treasure boxes is selected, and none of the treasure boxes is opened, that is, the result of the mini game is not derived, and as shown in FIG. Will be moved to.

In this example of performance, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, SP reach is executed even if no treasure box is selected, but the result of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variation time are: Since it is determined in advance based on the result of the hit/miss judgment, if no treasure box is selected, SP reach is not performed, and for example, a reach with a lower jackpot reliability than SP reach such as normal reach is executed. You may According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's motivation to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

FIG. 218 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 218, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208 is also shown. Note that FIGS. 218(a) to 218(d) are the same as FIGS. 216(a) to 216(d), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 218(d), as shown in FIG. 218(e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as the treasure box to be opened, and the right treasure box image is displayed. The BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is reduced and displayed. Further, in this example of production, as shown in FIG. 218(e), an error display of "a game ball is clogged" and "call an attendant" is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (error. (Notification) has been made, and it has been notified that a ball clogging error, which is a state where the game balls are clogged in the payout path, has occurred. Specifically, for example, a payout condition for a prize ball or a rental ball is satisfied, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 2 or the like) is driven, but a payout of a game ball is not detected, and a retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times ( Despite repeated three times, if the payout of the game ball is not detected, a ball jam error notification is given. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. In addition, when the elimination of the error which is the target of the error notification is detected (for example, when the payout device 152 normally pays out the game balls), the error notification is erased. Here, the timing at which the error display is started may be the same as the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display, or the timing after the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display. Alternatively, the timing may be before the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display.

218(f) to 218(h) are the same as FIGS. 216(f) to 216(h) except that the error display is performed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this effect example, if the game is an error that is not interrupted, the mini game is continued.

FIG. 219 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 219, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in this example of performance, a magnetic detection sensor that detects a magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100, and when the magnetic detection sensor detects the magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, the main control unit 300 determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, transmits the magnetic detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and then stops the game to disable the game. Control. After the deactivation, the main control unit main process (see FIG. 6) is configured so that it cannot be restored until the initialization process of step S113 is executed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the magnetic detection command, outputs an error sound from the speaker 120 or causes a predetermined error mode by the various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, and the game frame lamp 542, for example. It is possible to blink the lamp and display a predetermined error on the decorative pattern display device 208. Here, since FIGS. 218(a) to 218(c) are the same as FIGS. 216(a) to 216(c), description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 219(c), a state of enclosing the right treasure box image BXR is shown. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is “2”, which indicates that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

After that, for example, when a player uses a magnet to make an illegal act, and a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 219(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "Magnet" is displayed on a plain background. The magnetic error display ERR including the character "Sensor error" is displayed, for example, overlapping the display shown in FIG. 216(d), and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, subsequently, as shown in FIG. 219(d), even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased, and as shown in FIGS. 216(d) to 216(h). However, the magnetic error display ERR is continuously displayed until the power is cut off without visually confirming these effect displays (FIG. 219(d) to FIG. )). It can be said that the magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 219 is different from the error display shown in FIG. 218 in the area overlapping with the effect of the mini game. In other words, it can be said that the effect display of the mini game has a different area overlapped with the error display depending on the type of error that has occurred.

FIG. 220 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 220(a) is an effect subsequent to FIG. 207(j), in which the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, showing that the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" to notify that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 220(b), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a bowling reach which is one of the super reach. Bowling reach is a reach production performed as a main production. When moving to bowling reach, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols respectively displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c small in the upper left corner, and the ten pyramid-shaped bowlings are arranged. The effect display that the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin is displayed, and the word "Big hit by strike" is displayed in the upper right part of the display area, so if you complete the mission of strike you will be a big hit. It has been informed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 220(c), it is shown that the ball has reached a position close to the ten bowling pins and is about to fall down. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220(c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area and overlaps at least a part of the effect display of bowling reach. .. In the mini game display area MN1, an explanation display of the mini game is displayed. In the explanation display of the mini game shown in FIG. 220(c), the "1" is rolled and the "put out" is displayed below the "mini game" display. It is described that after the start of, the effect button 136 is operated to perform a mission to stop and display the result of "1" on the dice.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 220(d), a state in which nine boring pins are tilted is shown. That is, it is shown that one boring pin remains without falling. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, a button image 136a is displayed together with the display of “Push”, which notifies that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. At this time, for example, the dice symbols may be variably displayed.

FIG. 220(e) shows a state where the effect button 136 is operated and the result of the mini game is derived in the mini game display area MN1. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not strike in the bowling reach, so that the character "sorry" is displayed, and it is notified that the mission in the bowling reach cannot be achieved and the player will lose. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, the production button 136 is operated, so that the result of the mini-game is stopped and the result of the dice “1” is stopped, and the mission is achieved. "+1" is displayed to notify that the book will collapse.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220(f), the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and the result of the mini game is a roll of "1" and a reward for completing the mission. After "+1" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 220(g), one remaining boring pin that has not collapsed collapses and a strike is shown. That is, it is shown that an effect that is a revival jackpot from a loss is being performed.

Then, at the timing when the variable time elapses, as shown in FIG. 220(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). The variation game of one special figure ends.

In this way, in this example of effect, it can be said that the result of the mini game influences the result of the reach effect as the main effect.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 228.

221 to 228 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 221 to 228 also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 221 to 228 show the pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 221 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221(a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of missing decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, the first holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1, the holding icon h12 of the second special drawing 1, and the holding icon h13 of the third special drawing 1 representing the holding of the special drawing 1 are in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a multi-functional display area MF1 divided into a substantially rectangular shape is formed. The multi-function display area MF1 can display the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini game effect display, and the like. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the second hold number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are not displayed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221(b), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1. The hold icon h13 of the third special drawing 1 is displayed as the hold icon h12 of the second special drawing 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the variable icon may be displayed as described above.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 221(c), a state is shown in which the tutorial display is being performed in the multifunctional display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, a message "mini-game will start at various timings" is displayed, which suggests when the mini-game will start.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and after the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. -Decoration 5-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of missing decorative patterns.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 221(e), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is the first special figure 1 Is displayed as the hold icon h11, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221(f), a state is shown in which the tutorial display is being performed in the multifunctional display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, "Yoshimune is the 8th shogun" is displayed, and information about the hero's lord is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 221(g), the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is interrupted, and the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 together with the buncho face image BCH, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 221(h), in the multifunctional display area MF1, a display of "1" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, and a display of "reserve 1UP" is performed. It is described that, when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one stage. That is, as a result of the mini game, by deriving the result of "1" of the dice as a mission, it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will be changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead warning display mode. Becomes

Then, as shown in FIG. 221(i), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221(j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 221(j), as shown in FIG. 221(k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the dice symbol is the achievement result of the mission. The derivation display is performed in a manner showing the result of "1", and the display of "1UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the longest face is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 221(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of (3) is derived and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221(l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then " Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is a fixed combination of decorative patterns. In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. Is changed to a blue display mode. Also in this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot is high in the order of red> green> blue for the hold icon. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative design may be the same timing, or the decorative design may be fixedly displayed after the display form of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbols are fixedly displayed.

In addition, a omikuji game may be started in place of the dice game as the mini game described above with reference to FIGS. 221(g) to 221(k). Here, FIG. 221(g′) is another example of the effect following FIG. 221(f). Specifically, the tutorial display that was being displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221(f) is interrupted, and as shown in FIG. 221(g'), the mini game is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1. Be started. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the “Omikuji game” is displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as the mini game is started. To be done. In this example of performance, the image BCH of the face with the same length is displayed even when different types of mini games are started. In other words, in this effect example, the same character (image BCH of the longest face) can be made to appear and a plurality of types of mini games can be executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 221(h'), in the multi-function display area MF1, "Nakayoshi" and "Hold 1UP" are displayed on the right side of the buncho face image BCH, and in the mini game, " It is described that, when "Nakichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one step. In other words, as a result of the mini game, by drawing out the “Nakichi” fortune as a mission, it is announced that the default hold icon in the display mode will change to the look-ahead notification mode hold icon.

Then, as shown in FIG. 221(i′), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is displayed together with the longest face image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. It should be noted that the mini game in this example of performance is such that the operation by the operation means such as the effect button 136 is not performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221(j'), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of the treasure chest image BXS is changed to a display in which the image is open, and the fortune-telling of “Nakichi” is derived and displayed, showing that the mission has been achieved. In addition, the stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 221(k′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and “1UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 221(k′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward may be started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the display of the mission achievement is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221(l'), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". In addition, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. Is changed to a blue display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative design may be the same timing, or the decorative design may be fixedly displayed after the display form of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbols are fixedly displayed.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 221, there is shown an example configured so that different types of mini games can be played when the start condition of the mini game is satisfied. In the mini game (dice game), the operation of the effect button 136 is required, while in the mini game of the (omikuji game), no operation by the operating means is required, and further, the display mode in any mini game. Are the same (all of them change the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1). That is, FIG. 221 shows an example of an effect in which the objects that influence the main effect are the same in any of the mini games. In addition, in this effect example, which of the dice game and the fortune-telling game is to be executed may be determined randomly, or may be determined based on the result of the hit/miss judgment. For example, the dice game is executed. It may be configured such that the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the omikuji game is executed than when the omikuji game is executed.

In addition, as in this example of production, in a mini game, a character smaller than the character that appears during execution of variable display of decorative symbols (may be referred to as "small character"), or in production of tutorial display, for example. A character that appears (may be referred to as “navi character”) may appear. It should be noted that these characters may be configured to be displayed in the tutorial display or other notices when the mini game is not played, or may be configured to appear only in the mini game. Further, these characters may be constantly displayed. Further, it is preferable that the characters appearing in the mini game and the characters appearing during the variable display of the decorative pattern are visually different, for example, the sizes may be different, or the 3D character and the deformed shape may be different. There may be differences in terms of expression such as the character.

In this example of performance, the omikuji game (second mini game) may use a wider area than the dice game (first mini game). That is, the second mini game uses at least a certain display area (the multifunctional display area MF1 in which the first mini game is played) and further another display area (the display area of the enlarged portion of the multifunctional display area MF1). ) May also be configured to be used.

FIG. 222 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Note that FIG. 222(a) to FIG. 222(e) are the same as FIG. 221(a) to FIG.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 222(f), a state in which a mini game start notice is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is shown. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, "Attention" is displayed together with the image BCH of the longest face to give a notice that the mini game is about to start.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 222(g), the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 together with the buncho face image BCH, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222(h), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, and a display of "Hold 3UP" is displayed. It is described that, when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. That is, as a result of the mini game, by deriving the number "3" of the dice as the mission, it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will be changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead warning display mode. Becomes Moreover, in this example of performance, the content of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission are more advantageous than those of the dice game shown in FIG. 221.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222(i), in the multi-function display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222(j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 222(j), as shown in FIG. 222(k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the dice symbol is the outcome of the mission achievement. It is derived and displayed in a form showing a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the longest face is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 222(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of (3) is derived and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222(l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns that are lost. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative design may be the same timing, or the decorative design may be fixedly displayed after the display form of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbols are fixedly displayed.

Further, when the fortune game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 222(g'), in the multi-function display area MF1, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 displays The "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game will be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 222(h′), in the multifunctional display area MF1, “Daichi” is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, and “Hold 3UP” is displayed. It is described that, when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is ranked up by three steps. That is, as a result of the mini-game, the "Daikichi" fortune as a mission is derived, and it is announced that the hold icon in the default display mode will change to the hold icon in the look-ahead advance display mode. Moreover, in this effect example, the content of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission are more advantageous than those of the fortune-telling game shown in FIG. 221.

Then, as shown in FIG. 222(i′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is displayed together with the longest face image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222(j'), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of the treasure box image BXS is changed to a display in which the image is open, and the “Daikichi” fortune is displayed and displayed, showing that the mission has been achieved. In addition, the stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 222(k′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 222(k′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward may be started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the display of the mission achievement is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222(l′), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 7-decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative design may be the same timing, or the decorative design may be fixedly displayed after the display form of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbols are fixedly displayed.

As described above, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 222, an example in which the content of the mission and the reward for achieving the mission can be made different even in the same type of mini game is shown. It should be noted that the mission content may be the same and the reward for achieving the mission may be different, or the content of the mission may be different and the reward for achieving the mission may be the same.

FIG. 223 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

223(A1) to FIG. 223(A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIG. 223(B1) to FIG. 223(B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is. The auntie mode and the princess mode are names of the effect modes, and are configured so that the mode-specific effects are performed in each mode. Note that, for example, at least one of the grandmother mode and the princess mode may be the prefetch mode. In addition, whether to shift to the auntie mode or the princess mode may be determined randomly or may be determined based on the game state. For example, if it is a normal game state (special probability low probability general figure low probability state), it is easy to shift to auntie mode, and if it is a hidden probability change state (special figure high probability general figure low probability state), shift to princess mode. It may be made easy so that the player can guess the current game state.

FIG. 223(A1) shows that the effect mode is the old woman mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223(A1), while the "aunty mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the auntie character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current performance mode is the old mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 223(A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “Dice game” is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho face, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this rendering example, the dice game is more likely to be started than the fortune game in the auntie mode. Here, when executing the mini game in the old mode, the dice game may be always started and the omikuji game may not be started. Note that FIGS. 223(A2) to (A6) are the same as FIGS. 222(h) to (l) except that the auntie mode display and the auntie character BA are displayed. , Description is omitted.

FIG. 223(B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 223(B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 223(B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho's face, and it is notified that the mini game is started. In this example of performance, in the princess mode, the fortune game is more easily started than the dice game. Here, in the princess mode, when executing the mini game, the omikuji game may be started and the dice game may not be started. Note that FIGS. 223(B2) to (B6) are the same as FIGS. 222(h′) to (l′) except that the princess mode display and the princess character HM1 are displayed. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 224 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

224(A1) to FIG. 224(A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIG. 224(B1) to FIG. 224(B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 224(A1) shows that the effect mode is the old woman mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224(A1), while the display of the "aunty mode" is performed at the upper center of the display area, the auntie character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current performance mode is the old mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 224(A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “Dice game” is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho face, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this example of performance, the type of mini game to be executed is determined based on the content of the advance notice executed in the main performance. For example, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is more easily started as the mini game than the omikuji game in the symbol variable display, and it is decided to execute the pseudo-relation. In the case where the symbol variation display is performed, the omikuji game is more easily started as a mini game than the dice game. If it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variable display, and if it is decided to execute the pseudo-relation, In the variable display of symbols, a fortune-telling game may be started as a mini game without fail.
Further, in this example of effect, the type of mini game to be executed is determined without depending on the current effect mode, but the type of mini game to be executed may be determined depending on the effect mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 224(A2), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the longest face, and the display of "Hold 3UP" is displayed. It is described that, when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 224(A2), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Even if the display of the roll of "3" on the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of "Hold 3UP" are started and the display of the step-up notice SU1 is started at the same time, The step-up notice SU1 may be displayed after the display of "3" on the dice and the display of "Hold 3UP" is started in the multi-function display area MF1, or the step-up notice may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 224(A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the step-up notice is updated and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The timing at which the display of the button image 136a and "press" in the multi-function display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multi-function display area MF1. The display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started after the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, or after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF1 is displayed. The display of "press" and may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224(A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 224(A4), as shown in FIG. 224(A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the dice symbols are the achievement achievements of the mission. It is derived and displayed in a form showing a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the longest face is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 224(A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 224(A5), the step-up notice has ended. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice After the above, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224(A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns that are lost. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative design may be the same timing, or the decorative design may be fixedly displayed after the display form of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbols are fixedly displayed.

FIG. 224(B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224(B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 224(B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the bancho's face, and it is notified that the mini game is started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 224(B2), a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3". In this example of performance, for example, it is informed that the pseudo-relation may be performed by temporarily stopping with only the combination of "decoration 7" and "decoration 3". That is, there is a case where the combination of the decorative patterns of only the "decoration 7" and the "decoration 3" is the chance. In addition, you may make it notify about the start of a pseudo-relation by displaying a pseudo-relational pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Daiyoshi” and “Hold 3UP” are displayed on the right side of the bancho face image BCH, and when “Daichi” is derived and displayed in the mini game, the hold icon is displayed. It is explained that the display mode of 3 ranks up. In addition, the timing when the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 may be the same as the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, or the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Hold 3UP” in “” are started, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative design is temporarily stopped, “Daiyoshi” in the multi-function display area MF1. The display of “” and the display of “Hold 3UP” may be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 224(B3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is displayed together with the longest face image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the variable display of the decorative pattern has been started, and a state in which the pseudo variable first variable display is performed is shown. Here, the number of times the pseudo-repeating is performed may be displayed. The start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) and the start of the display of the treasure box BXS may be the same timing, or the display of the treasure box BXS after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation). May start, or after the display of the treasure box BXS starts, the variable display of the decorative symbols (pseudo-link) may start.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 224(B4), in the multi-function display area MF1, the display changes to a mode in which the image BXS of the treasure box is open, and the “Daikichi” fortune is displayed and displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved. It is shown. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops at the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3”, and gives a notice that the pseudo-repeation may be further performed. Note that the temporary stop of the decorative pattern and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derivatized and displayed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, or the result of the mini game may be displayed. The decorative design may be temporarily stopped after the result is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 224(B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the longest face image BCH is also continuously displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started, and the pseudo-variable second variable display is shown. It should be noted that the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) and the timing of starting the display of the reward for the mission achievement may be the same, or after the variable display of the decorative pattern (pseudo-relation) is started. The display of the reward for achievement of the mission may be started, or the variable display of the decorative symbols (pseudo-relation) may be started after the display of the reward for achievement of the mission is started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 224(B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special map 1 is displayed. Is changed from the default display mode to a circular and red display mode as the display mode of the third stage of the prefetching notice. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is confirmed and displayed, and it is informed that the decorative pattern has been lost. Here, after the decorative design is temporarily stopped, pseudo-linking may be further performed. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative design may be the same timing, or the decorative design may be fixedly displayed after the display form of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbols are fixedly displayed.

In this example, the result of the mini game has been described as affecting the display mode of the hold icon. However, as a result of the mini game, it may be announced that the pseudo-ream will be performed as a reward for completing the mission. Alternatively, the number of times the pseudo-relation is started may be announced in advance, or the increase in the number of pseudo-repetitions may be notified.

Further, as a result of the mini game, a step-up notice may be given as a reward for completing the mission, or the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice may be given. It may be possible to give a notice that the number will increase.

FIG. 225 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

225(A1) to (A6) show an example of an effect performed in the old lady mode, and FIG. 225(B1) to (B6) show an example of an effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 225(A1) shows that the effect mode is the old woman mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225(A1), while the "aunty mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, the auntie character BA is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current performance mode is the old mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 225(A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started. In this example of performance, the character image SBH of Savohani is displayed instead of the buncho face image BCH, and the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani. It is shown that it is informed that the dice game will be started. The sabotani character image SBH is an image that may be displayed only in the dice game, for example, and is configured not to be displayed in the fortune-telling game, but may be displayed in the fortune-telling game as well. In this effect example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the dice game is more likely to be advantageous when the sabotani character image SBH is displayed than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. That is, in this example of performance, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as the reward for accomplishing the mission than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third-stage display mode (red display mode) of the pre-reading notice, and when the buncho face image BCH is displayed, the mission is more than when the sabotani character image SBH is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the first-stage display mode (blue display mode) of the prefetching notification. More specifically, when the character image SBH of Savohani is displayed, the result of the mini game is more likely to be derived than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the result of the mini game is more likely to be derived than when the sabotani character image SBH is displayed. Furthermore, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the image BCH of the bancho face is displayed. 225(A2) to FIG. 224(A2) except that the longest face image BCH displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is replaced with the sabotani character image SBH. The description is omitted because it is similar to that of FIG.

FIG. 225 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 225(B1), “hime mode” is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the princess mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 225 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started. In this effect example, the princess character image HM2 is displayed instead of the bancho face image BCH, and the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2. It is shown that the omikuji game is being notified. The princess character image HM2 is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the fortune-telling game, and is configured not to be displayed in the dice game, but may be displayed in the dice game as well. In this effect example, the reward for achieving the mission in the omikuji game is more likely to be advantageous when the princess character image HM2 is displayed than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. That is, in this example of performance, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission than when the bancho-face image BCH is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third-stage display mode (red display mode) of the prefetch notice, and when the buncho face image BCH is displayed, the mission is more than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the first stage of the prefetching notification (blue display mode). More specifically, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, “Daikichi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed, and the bancho face image is displayed. When BCH is displayed, “Nakichi” is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini game than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. It should be noted that, as in this effect example, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the effect mode. That is, in this effect example, the character (princess character HM1) displayed in the princess mode is the same as the character (princess character image HM2) displayed in the mini game. Furthermore, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the bancho face image BCH is displayed. In addition, FIG. 225 (B2) to FIG. 224 (B6) are different from FIG. 224 (B2), except that the longest face image BCH displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 is replaced with the princess character image HM2. The description is omitted because it is similar to that of FIG.

FIG. 226 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

226(A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), and FIG. 226(B1) to (B6) show , An example of the effect performed in the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state). In this effect example, it is shown that the type of mini game to be started differs depending on the current game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, a dice game is easily started as a mini game, and in the probability variation state, an omikuji game is easily started as a mini game. It should be noted that a dice game may be started as a mini game in the normal game state, and an omikuji game as a mini game may be started in the probability variation state. In addition, the appearance frequency of the mini game may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the probability variation state, the player basically feels like waiting for a big hit, so the player is free until the big hit. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of the mini game may be higher than that in the normal gaming state. Further, the probability of mini-game occurrence in the normal gaming state may be higher than in the probability variation state. Further, the mini game may be executed only in the probability variation state, or the mini game may be executed only in the normal game state. In addition, for a certain mini game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, or may appear only in the probability change state. There may be cases where the game is played, or cases where the game appears only in the normal gaming state. Further, with respect to a certain notice, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, or may appear only in the probability change state. In some cases, it may appear only in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 226(A1) shows that the game state is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226(A1), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current game state is the normal game state. Has been done. 226(A1) to (A6) are the same as those of FIG. 225(A) except that the display of the auntie mode and the display of the auntie character BA are in the normal mode indicating the normal game state. The description is omitted because it is similar to A1) to (A6) in FIG.

FIG. 226(B1) shows that the game state is the probability change state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226(B1), the "probability variation mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current game state is the probability variation state. ing. Further, in the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, "Right Strike" is displayed and a striking suggestion display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 226(B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed is shown. In addition, the first holding icon h21 of the special drawing 2, the holding icon h22 of the second special drawing 2, and the holding icon h23 of the third special drawing 2 representing the holding of the special drawing 2 are both in the default display mode. It is displayed and is displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, the display position of the multifunctional display area MF1 is changed depending on the game state. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the “Omikuji game” is displayed together with the princess character image HM2, and it is notified that the mini game is started. 226 (B1) to (B5) in FIG. 226 (B5), the game state is in the prodigious mode of the princess mode, and the pending display of Toku-zu 1 is the pending display of Toku-zu 2. 225 (B1) to (B5) in FIG. 225 except that the number of hold displays is different, the position of the hold display and the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 are exchanged. Therefore, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 226(B5), in the multifunctional display area MF1, after the display of “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 226(B6) In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and in this effect example, the display mode of the second hold icon h22 of the special figure 2 is changed from the default display mode to the prefetch notice. Is changed to a circular and red display mode as the display mode of the third stage. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is confirmed and displayed, and it is informed that the decorative pattern has been lost. In this way, the result of the mini game may affect any of the hold icons.

FIG. 227 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

227(A1) to (A6) show an example in which the display area of the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded, and FIG. 227(B1) to (B6) show that the multifunctional display area MF1 is An example is shown in which the hold display area for displaying the hold icon is also used. Note that FIG. 227 has been described by taking a dice game as a mini game as an example, but it is also possible to apply it to the above-mentioned omikuji game.

FIG. 227(A1) shows that the game state is the normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226(A1), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current game state is the normal game state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 227(A1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. Also,
The first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. In addition, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of the sabotani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227(A2), the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and a state in which the area is enlarged is shown. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the visibility is improved. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of the sabotani, and "Hold 3UP" is displayed, and after the mini game is started, the effect button is displayed. It is explained that when the user operates 136 to stop and display the roll of "3" on the dice, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. Here, the display showing the character image SBH of the sabotani and the roll of "3" on the dice is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 227(A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping the multifunctional display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. The timing at which the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed, or the step-up notification may be performed after the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed. The notice SU1 may be displayed, or the multifunctional display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the step-up notice SU1 is displayed. In addition, even when the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 are started, and the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed, The step-up notice SU1 may be displayed after the display of "3" on the dice and the display of "Hold 3UP" is started in the multi-function display area MF1, or the step-up notice may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of “3” and the display of “Hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. Further, the timing of the expanded display of the multifunction display area MF1 is the same as the timing of the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. The multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded-displayed after the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the function display area MF1 are started. In addition, the multifunctional display area MF1 may or may not be necessarily expanded when the mini game is started. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the gaming state. For example, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded when the mini game is started in the probability variation state, and the mini game is expanded in the normal gaming state. The multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded when it is started, or the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded when the mini game is started in the normal game state and the mini game is started in the probability variation state. In this case, the multifunctional display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this production example, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative design, but the expanded multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative design, or the expanded multi-functional display area is used. It may be overlapped with the function display area MF1. Further, the non-expanded multifunction display area MF1 may overlap the decorative design, or the decoration design may overlap the non-expanded multifunction display area MF1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 227(A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the button image 136aL that is displayed in a large size is displayed together with the button image 136aL so that "press" is displayed, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It has been notified that the operation valid period has started. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the step-up notice is updated and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. The step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1 and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 overlaps the multifunction display region MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 does not overlap the multifunction display region MF1. Note that the step-up notice may be overlapped only when the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, or may be overlapped with the step-up notice even when the multifunctional display area MF1 is not expanded and displayed. Further, the timing at which the display of the button image 136aL and "press" in the multifunction display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunction display area MF1. The display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started after the display of the button image 136aL and “press” is started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136aL in the multifunction display area MF1 is displayed. The display of "press" and may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1 and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notification SU3 overlaps the multifunctional display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notification SU3 does not overlap the multifunctional display area MF1. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136aL, and the gauge is reduced in accordance with the time from when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started. Has been done. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the rate of decrease of the gauge is faster than when the button reception time meter MT is not expanded. Here, the reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect. The reduction speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be faster than the reduction speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game. The reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game may be the same as the reduction rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (A4), as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the enlarged dice pattern is the result of achieving the mission. “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the character image SBH of sabotani is also enlarged and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227(A5), the step-up notice has ended. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice After the above, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of missing decorative patterns. Further, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 has been reduced to the default size. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the prefetch notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative design may be the same timing, or the decorative design may be fixedly displayed after the display form of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative pattern, or the decorative pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbols are fixedly displayed. Further, the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size may be the same as the timing at which the result of the mini game is erased, or after the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size, the mini game The result may be deleted, or the multifunctional display area MF1 may be returned to the default size after the result of the mini game is deleted.

FIG. 227(B1) shows that the game state is the normal game state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224(B1), the display of the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is informed that the current game state is the normal game state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed is shown. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF2 is formed across the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this multi-function display area MF2, in addition to the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini game effect display, etc., a hold icon is also displayed. The holding icon of special figure 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, and the holding icon of special figure 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 227 (B1), on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in a default display mode. On the right side of the multi-function display area MF2, the mini game is started using the display area of the hold icon of the special figure 2, and the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and the mini game is displayed. Is notified that the dice game as is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227 (B2), in the multi-function display area MF2, a display of "3" on the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of the sabotani, and a display of "and hold 3UP" is performed, It is described that when the production button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the result of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 227 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. In addition, even when the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 is started and the step-up notice SU1 is displayed at the same timing, The step-up notice SU1 may be displayed after the display of "3" on the dice and the display of "Hold 3UP with" is started in the multi-function display area MF2, or the step-up notice may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the roll of "3" and the display of "Hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 227(B3), in the multi-function display area MF2, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a to notify that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the step-up notice is updated and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. The timing at which the display of the button image 136a and "press" in the multifunction display area MF2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunction display area MF2. The display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started after the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF2 is displayed. Also, the display of "press" may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (B4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 227(B4), as shown in FIG. 227(B5), in the multi-function display area MF2, the symbol of the dice is the result of achieving the mission. It is derived and displayed in the form of showing the result of "3", and the display of "3UP confirmed" showing that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF2, the character image SBH of sabotani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 227 (B5), the step-up notice has ended. In addition, the timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice After the above, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (B6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of missing decorative patterns. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF2 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice. It has been changed to a circular red display mode. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative design may be the same timing, or the decorative design may be fixedly displayed after the display form of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. The timing of erasing the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of finalizing the display of the decorative design, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased. The result of the mini game may be erased after the symbols are fixedly displayed.

FIG. 228 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 228(a) shows that the game state is the normal game state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228(a), the display in the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the current game state is the normal game state. Has been done. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed is shown. Further, the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 is displayed in the default t display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228(a), the step-up notice as the main effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 228(a), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. The step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative pattern is more difficult to visually recognize when it is overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when it is not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228(b), the step-up notice is updated and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. A mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the mini game display area MN2, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. That is, in this effect example, the appearance of the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) when the mini game is started is shown. Here, the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the mini-game is started, or the mini-game may be started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. However, the step-up notice SU2 may be displayed after the mini game is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228(c), the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, and the mini game display area MN2 is erased to produce a mini game effect. It is shown that the display is greatly enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. Specifically, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, a display of "3" on the dice and a display of "Hold 3UP" are respectively greatly enlarged and displayed, and after the mini game is started, the effect is produced. It is described that when the button 136 is operated and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three stages. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased in at least a part of the period during which the mini game is played is shown. Further, the step-up notice was supposed to be displayed until the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 when the mini game was not started. It has been discontinued. Even when the mini game is started, the step-up notice may be displayed continuously without being discontinued. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. Further, the step-up notice may be displayed overlapping the effect display of the mini game, or the effect display of the mini game may be displayed overlapping the step-up notice.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228(d), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged and displayed button image 136aL, and the gauge is reduced according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started. It is displayed in the form of. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed may be the same as the timing at which the left symbol is stopped and displayed, or after the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 228(d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228(e), the enlarged dice symbol is the achievement achievement "3". It is derived and displayed in a form showing the result of "." Further, at this time, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this mini game display area MN2, the dice symbol “3” is derived. In addition to notifying that it has been displayed, the display of "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the mini game display area MN2, a character image SBH of sabotani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 228(e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of decorative symbols continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived display after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. The timing of derivation display of the result of the mini game may be the same as the timing of re-display of the mini game display area MN2, or the mini game display area MN2 may be displayed after the result of the mini game is derived and displayed. The result of the mini game may be displayed again after the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228(f), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed. Decorative 2-decoration 7-decoration 7" is fixedly displayed by a combination of missing decorative patterns. At this time, the size of the decorative pattern is returned from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position is also returned to the default display position. Further, when the mini game ends, the mini game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of the prefetching notice from the default display mode. The display mode has been changed to. The change of the display mode of the hold icon and the fixed display of the decorative design may be the same timing, or the decorative design may be fixedly displayed after the display form of the hold icon is changed, or the decorative design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 and the timing of finalizing the decorative design may be the same, or the decorative design may be finalized and displayed after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. The mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative design is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 may be the same as the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon, or the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. Alternatively, the mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the display mode of the hold icon is changed.

In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 228, the dice game has been described as an example of the mini game, but the above-described fortune game can also be applied.

Further, although the dice game and the fortune-telling game are executed as the above-described mini game on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variable display is performed, the configuration is executed on a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. May be done.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 236.

229 to 236 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 229 to 236, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, and the general figure. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 229 to 236 show a pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be disposed on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 229 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229(a), a customer waiting demo display is displayed. The customer waiting demo display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state in which the variable display of the special figure is not displayed, and is an effect display for promoting the player's motivation for the game. In addition, in the lower part of the display area, "Display menu with push button" is displayed so as to overlap the customer waiting demo display, and in the standby state, each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is displayed. When is operated, it notifies that a menu screen will be displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229(b), as shown in FIG. 229(c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen. On the menu screen, items such as member registration, issuance of two-dimensional code, game history, mini game, and end are displayed in a vertical column, and below them, a directional key operation prompting image 137p and a "select" character display are displayed. In addition, the character string of “OK” is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b of the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL. It is shown that an item designated by the cursor CSL is executed by operating the button 137e or the effect button 136.

Here, when the item "member registration" is executed, the screen shifts to the member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for password acquisition is displayed. This two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the management server side. In this embodiment, by registering as a member, it is possible to set an original mode such as recording a game history and customizing an effect. The player, for example, uses a mobile terminal having a camera function and a barcode reader function to read the two-dimensional code and acquire the URL of the first registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile terminal. The management server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number peculiar to the mobile terminal or information input by the accessor. The password issued here includes personal identification information (ID) and initial values of history information. The history information is stored in the management server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the management server issues a password, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal.

When the "Issue 2D code" item is executed, a 2D code issuance screen is displayed. On the 2D code issuing screen, the 2D code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The issuance of this two-dimensional code is prepared on the assumption that the player will select it when the game in the state where the original mode is set is ended.
The maximum capacity of the two-dimensional code is 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size must be changed in 4 cell increments in the range of 21 x 21 [cells] to 177 x 177 [cells]. You can A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. Note that a one-dimensional barcode or an encrypted character string may be used instead of the two-dimensional code. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, the larger the amount of information included, the larger the character string, which cannot be remembered by humans and cannot be written out. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden by notifying by a two-dimensional code.
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), the result of the current game, information indicating the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. Further, the number of winnings to the special figure starting port (230, 232), the number of big hits, the number of small hits, information for store identification, information unique to the gaming machine, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. may be included. The information indicating the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, and the like correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code also includes the URL of the update reception page prepared in the management server.
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is issued, the information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is erased from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in this embodiment, a warning screen is displayed when the two-dimensional code is issued to warn the player that information such as the result of this game will be erased.
When the player shoots the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, the bar code reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the mobile terminal, the personal identification information (ID) or the personal identification information (ID) included in the two-dimensional code is included in "http://www.~/jp" representing the address of the update reception page prepared in the operation server. The URL to which the argument indicating the history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted from the read two-dimensional code by the barcode reader function, the history information stored in the operation server until now is associated with the personal identification information included in the argument portion, It is updated to the history information included in the argument part. In the present embodiment, since the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the game table as it is, the history information stored in the game table at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is erased. However, the history information is not limited to this, and the history information may be deleted based on the operation of the player after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not delete the history information, the game can be returned to the game in which the history information is reflected. It may be configured as follows.

When the item "game history" is executed, for example, the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, information indicating the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. In addition, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. to the special figure starting port (230, 232) may be displayed.

When the item "mini game" is executed, the mini game is executed. The details of the mini game will be described later.

When the item “end” is executed, the display of the menu screen is ended and the customer waiting demo display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 229(c), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", as shown in FIG. 229(d), the cursor CSL is " When issuing the "two-dimensional code" and operating the lower button 137b once more, as shown in FIG. 229(e), the cursor CSL indicates "game history" and the lower button 137b is operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 229(f), the cursor CSL points to the "mini game".

Then, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229(f), as shown in FIG. 229(g), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the mini game. Specifically, the title "Today's fortune telling" is displayed at the top of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, four treasure chests are arranged from the center to the left side of the display area, and the direction on the right side of the display area is the direction. The character "SELECT" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character "SET" is displayed below the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the direction key of the operation key unit 137. Then, one of the four treasure boxes (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) is instructed, and by operating the effect button 136, it is notified that the treasure box instructed by the cursor CSL can be opened. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 229(g), the cursor CSL points to the upper left treasure box BX1. In this mini game, the player selects from four treasure boxes and informs the contents of the selected treasure box. The contents of the treasure box are the result of the fortune-telling fortune-telling that suggests fortune (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, Kyou, etc.), and multiple types are prepared. Furthermore, in this example of performance, a word of advice is added along with the result of the fortune telling. The results of the fortune-telling fortune-telling and the one-word advice are not related to the result of the acceptance judgment. In other words, it does not at least indicate whether or not the judgment is successful. Further, which result is associated with each treasure box is randomly determined. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure box is selected, the contents will change each time the mini game is executed. That is, it can be said that the contents of the treasure box (result of the mini game) change according to the operation situation of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect button 136.

Then, when the lower button 137b is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229(h), the cursor CSL points to the lower left treasure box BX2, as shown in FIG. 229(i).

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229(i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is surrounded by the cursor CSL as shown in FIG. 229(j). The enlarged upper left treasure box BX1, the upper right treasure box BX3 and the lower right treasure box BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. This informs that the lower left treasure box BX2 has been determined as a treasure box to be opened.

After that, as shown in FIG. 229(k), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears in the treasure box and the result of the fortune telling. "Kokichi" is displayed, and "Moderate..." is displayed as one word of advice, showing that the player is alerted not to be overly absorbed in the game. That is, in this example of performance, "Kokichi" is associated with the auntie character BA, and by looking at the auntie character BA, it may be understood that the result of the fortune telling is "Kokichi".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 229(l), "other results are this."
Is displayed, warning that the contents of the treasure chest that has not been opened will be notified. Note that the content of the character display shown in FIG. 229(l) differs depending on the appearing character. Is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 229(m), the princess character HM3 appears from the upper left treasure box BX1, the leading face image BCH appears from the upper right treasure box BX3, and the lower right treasure box BX4 appears. The appearance of the image PND of the panda's face is shown. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the buncho face image BCH is a character corresponding to Nakayoshi, and the panda face image PND is a character corresponding to evil. The combination of the result of the fortune-telling and the character can be set appropriately, and the combination of the result of the fortune-telling and the character may be changed every time the mini game is played.

As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as the result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 229(k1), the princess character HM3 appears in the treasure box and the result of the fortune-telling is “Daikichi”. Is displayed, and one word of advice is displayed as "I feel like a big catch today", which gives the expectation that a large number of balls may be obtained.

Also, as shown in Fig. 229(k2), an image BCH of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box, "Nakichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, and one word of advice is "If it's sticky, it's a day to do something." "Is displayed, and there is also something that gives a sense of expectation that there may be a good thing to play while sitting down slowly over time.

Also, as shown in Fig. 229(k3), an image PND of the face of a panda appears in the treasure box, and "bad" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling fortune telling. "Is displayed, and there is also something that shows how to call attention so as not to be overly absorbed in the game.

Further, for example, the result of the mini game that can appear depending on the setting content of the DIP switch connected to the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 may be prepared. When the setting is made to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to become, as shown in Fig. 229 (k4), the display of the one-word advice "Today is the foresight of a big catch" is displayed. It is also possible to change the display to "Premier notices are likely to appear." That is, there may be a case where the presentation of the effect related to the result of the hit determination, such as the suggestion of the appearance rate of the notice, and the display of the result not related to the result of the hit determination. According to this, it may be possible to make the player think that he/she is indirectly involved in the influence of the hit/miss judgment. Note that the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 229(k4) may be displayed even if the appearance rate of the notice has not been changed. In this way, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a word of advice, may be changed.

In addition, in this effect example, a tutorial display such as a game explanation or a model character explanation may be displayed instead of a word of advice.

FIG. 230 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 230(A1) to FIG. 230(A6) show effects subsequent to FIG. 229(f) and show examples of effects of another mini game. That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 229(f), in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 230(A1), "Today's fortune-telling-draw Daikichi-" is displayed above the display area. The title is displayed, and a mini-game whose mission is to select the treasure box in the contents of "Daikichi" is started. Note that FIGS. 230 (A1) to (A4) are the same as FIGS. 229 (g) to (j) except that the display of the title is different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 230(A5) shows a state in which the lower left treasure box BX2 is opened. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 230(A5), the treasure box at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of the fortune telling. "Daikichi" is displayed. The display of "Daikichi" means that the mission of the mini game has been achieved, and accordingly, "Mission achieved" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (A6), instead of the display of “mission accomplished”, a message “Today's best feeling” is displayed as a word of advice, and the player wins the ball. I try to give a sense of expectation. It can be said that this one-word advice is also a display that is not related to the result of the success/failure determination.

FIG. 230(B1) to FIG. 230(B6) are also effects following FIG. 229(f), showing that the mission could not be achieved. Note that FIG. 230(B1) has the same display as FIG. 230(A1).

When the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 230(B2), the cursor CSL points to the upper right treasure box BX3, as shown in FIG. 230(B3).

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 230(B3), as shown in FIG. 230(B4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the upper right treasure box BX3 is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The enlarged upper left treasure box BX1, the lower left treasure box BX2, and the lower right treasure box BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. As a result, it is notified that the upper right treasure box BX3 has been determined as the treasure box to be opened.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (B5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the upper right treasure box BX3 is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears in the treasure box and the result of the fortune telling. “Kokichi” is displayed as. Since "Daikichi" was not displayed, the mission of the mini game was not achieved, and accordingly, "Not achieved..." is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 230 (B6), instead of the display of "not achieved...", a message "moderate..." It is shown that they should be careful not to be over-immersed.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231(a), the customer waiting demo display described above is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG.
As shown in 1 (c), the menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the menu screen shown in FIG. 231(c), items such as member registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end are displayed in a column, and below the items, "selection" is performed together with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. Is displayed, and the character display of "OK" is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor is operated by operating the up button 137a or the down button 137b of the operation key unit 137. It is shown that an item designated by the cursor CSL is executed by moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137.

Here, when the item “customize” is executed, various settings can be customized. Details of the customizable settings will be described later.

In addition, when the item “clear personal data” is executed, the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are deleted from the pachinko machine 100. At this time, a warning screen may be displayed to prevent data from being accidentally cleared.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231(c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", as shown in FIG. 231(d), the cursor CSL is displayed. Indicates “customization”. Then, when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", as shown in FIG. 231(e), the customization menu screen is displayed.

On the customize menu screen, various settings such as auto button mode on/off, eco mode on/off, premier notice appearance rate setting, tutorial display on/off are displayed in a column, and below the The character display of "selection" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character display of "OK" is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are displayed. By operating the cursor CSL to move the cursor CSL up and down and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting instructed by the cursor CSL can be changed.

Here, the “auto button mode” is an effect mode in which the effect buttons 136 and the buttons of the operation key unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on, and the timing of button operation is automatically determined and the operation is performed. For example, when a continuous-stroke operation effect that requires continuous-stroke operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the button operation is controlled to be automatically performed at appropriate timing (for example, every 200 ms). In addition, in this effect example, when the "auto button mode" is set to ON, the various buttons are automatically operated without operating the various buttons. It may be possible to set to long press auto in which the button is automatically operated by long pressing. Here, in the long press auto, in a production (including a mini game) that requires the operation means to be operated a plurality of times, when the long press operation is performed by the operation means, a plurality of operations are continuously performed. It is a pseudo operation that is supposed to have been done. In this case, when the operation means is operated for long pressing, it is treated as if the first manual operation was performed. For example, when the above-described continuous hitting operation effect is executed, by long-pressing the effect button 136, it is controlled to perform a pseudo continuous hitting operation. In addition, the full auto is an operation that the operation means is operated in a certain effect that requires the operation of the operation means even when the operation means is not operated.

The “eco mode” limits the driving of one or more drive devices, for example, turning off the various lamps 418 for the purpose of suppressing power consumption when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, it is a mode to stop. In the present embodiment, after the eco-mode is turned on, when the eco-mode start condition is satisfied, the various lamps 418 are turned off, and the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 is reduced. The device for which driving is limited or stopped can be set appropriately.

Also, the "premier notice appearance rate" indicates the appearance rate of the notice that is guaranteed that the jackpot symbol will be finally confirmed and displayed by the appearance, and if it is set to "normal", the first The probability of a premiere notice appears with a probability probability that a premiere notice will be drawn using the table and if it is set to "High", the premiere notice will appear with a second probability that is higher than the first probability. The high probability table is used to perform a lottery for the appearance of the premier notice.

Further, when "Tutorial" is set to OFF, it is controlled so that the above-mentioned tutorial display is not performed.

When the left button 137c is operated once while the cursor CSL is pointing to the "auto button mode" as shown in FIG. 231(f), "OFF" is displayed as shown in FIG. 231(g). The "auto button mode" setting that was instructed was changed to "on".

Then, as shown in FIG. 231(g), when the OK button 137e is operated once while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the "auto button mode" setting is "on". Will be confirmed. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once, as shown in FIG. 231(h), the screen shifts to the menu screen. If the OK button 137e is not operated and the effect button 136 is operated while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the result of the "auto button mode" setting is not reflected. The menu screen may be displayed, or the result of the setting of the "auto button mode" may be reflected (confirmed) and then the menu screen may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 231(h), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", as shown in FIG. 231(i), the cursor CSL is " "Mini game".

Then, as shown in FIG. 231(i), when the OK button 137e is operated with the cursor CSL pointing to the "mini game", the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 231(j). It Specifically, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a bancho character is displayed and the name of a mini game called "bancho awakening game" is displayed, and below that, a mission "tear off clothes with continuous button hits". Is displayed. In other words, in this mini game, if the mission is achieved on condition that the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the effect button 136 has been operated a predetermined number of times, the bancho's clothes are destroyed. Is displayed to notify that the mission has been completed.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 231(k), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed together with the banquet character, and the character "START" is displayed above them. , A state in which the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In this example of performance, as described above, the setting of “auto button mode” is set to “on” and set to full auto, but in the mini game, the setting of full auto is not effective and the effect button The automatic operation of 136 is configured not to be performed. When the “auto button mode” is set to “on” and the long press auto is set, the long press auto setting does not become effective even if the effect button 136 is long pressed, and Only the portion manually operated is effective, and thereafter, the effect button 136 is not automatically operated. In this production example, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is set to be different from the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. Alternatively, for example, as in this example of performance, it is performed during execution of the symbol variation display, rather than the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display. The change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display The change speed of the display mode may be the same. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variable display is more than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of default display mode). May be larger or smaller (for example, four types of default display mode, vibrating display mode, rotating display mode, vibrating and rotating display mode). , The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed while the symbol variable display is being executed. May be the same.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 231(l) to 231(n), when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 231(o), The display mode does not change, indicating that the mission of breaking the clothes of the Bancho character was not achieved. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231(o), "bancho awakening game" and "end" are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 231(p), the decorative pattern display device 208 shifts to the menu screen.

It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the player may be allowed to select the execution of the mini game. For example, in the customized menu screen that shifts from the menu screen, it is possible to set whether or not the mini game can be executed. May be enabled, or the type of executable mini game may be selected.

In addition, it may be configured such that a customized effect is easily executed as a result of the mini game. For example, if the effect that the appearance rate is usually extremely low is executed, the desire to participate in the mini game is high. May be able to improve.

232 and 233 are diagrams showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

232(A1) to 232(A6) are effects following FIG. 231(i), and show that the mission has been achieved as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Note that FIGS. 232(A1) to (A2) are the same as FIGS. 231(j) to (k), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (A2), the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (A3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button 1
The effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of operations of 36 are displayed. As shown in FIGS. 232(A3) to (A5), the effect images of stars increase in number as the number of operations increases, and the number of effect images of stars increases as the number of operations increases. As shown in FIG. 232(A5), a large-sized star effect image is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is further hit and the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation acceptance period elapses, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (A6), the longest character is worn. It is shown that the clothes are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in good shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 232(B1) to FIG. 232(B6) show effects subsequent to FIG. 231(i), and show an example in which long press auto is enabled in a mini game. It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo repeated hit operation. Note that FIGS. 232(B1) to (B2) are the same as FIGS. 231(j) to (k), so description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (B2), the player pushes the effect button 136 for a long time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 232 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of the star is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the pseudo continuous hitting operation has not started yet. In the present embodiment, when the long press auto is enabled, one pressing operation is desired. However, in order to prevent an erroneous operation caused by the start of pseudo continuous hits, the long press of the effect button 136 is performed. When a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed after the start of, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, as compared with the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (A3), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is small, and the effect image of the star is also in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (A3). Less than displayed. That is, the manner of changing the display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different between the case where a normal continuous stroke operation is performed by the player and the case where a pseudo continuous stroke operation is performed by long press auto. ..

When a predetermined time elapses after the long-press of the effect button 136 is started and the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started, as shown in FIGS. 232(B4) to (B5), the operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times is increased, the number of effect images of the star displayed is increased, and when the number of operations for accomplishing the mission is approached, a large-sized star effect image is displayed as shown in FIG. 232 (B5). After that, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is further performed by the effect button 136, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation acceptance period elapses, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the clothes worn by the character are broken, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today are in good shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been accomplished.

233(C1) to (C7) are effects following FIG. 231(i) and show an example in which long press auto is disabled in a mini game. It is shown that no operation was performed and as a result the mission was not achieved. Note that FIGS. 232(B1) to (B2) are the same as FIGS. 231(j) to (k), so description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 233 (C2), the player long presses the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 233 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one effect image of the star is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is disabled, even if a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 233 (C4), since the number of times the effect button 136 is operated does not increase, the effect image of the star does not increase, and the effect button 136 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). ) Has elapsed, the number of displayed effect images of the star gradually decreases, and the effect image of the star is completely erased at the timing shown in FIG. 233(C5). After that, as shown in FIG. 233(C6), when the operation acceptance period elapses, as shown in FIG. 233(C7), the display mode of the Bancho character does not change, and the mission of breaking the Bancho character's clothes is performed. It shows that it was not achieved. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 233 (C7), “bancho awakening game” and “end” are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 234, the full-auto (or long-press auto) function is effective for the effect (including the mini game) that requires one operation or multiple operations of one button, but the operation key unit 137. For effects (including mini-games) that require selection using, an example in which the full-auto (or long-press auto) function is disabled is shown.

FIG. 234(A1) to FIG. 234(A6) show an example in which full auto is enabled in a mini game in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, which is an effect subsequent to FIG. 231(i). It is shown that the mission is achieved as a result of the pseudo continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. Note that FIGS. 234(A1) to (A2) are the same as FIGS. 231(j) to (k), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 234(A2), the full-auto function is activated and the pseudo continuous hit operation is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 234 (A3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of pseudo operations of the effect button 136 are displayed. As shown in FIG. 234(A3) to FIG. 234(A5), the effect image of the star is displayed more as the number of operations by the pseudo operation is increased, and as the number of operations achieved the mission is approached. 234(A5), an effect image of a large-sized star is displayed. After that, further pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission is reached before the operation acceptance period elapses, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (A6). , The clothes worn by the Bancho character are shown to be broken, and "Bancho awakening" and "Today are in good shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 234(B1) shows an example of an effect of another mini game, which is an effect following FIG. 229(f). That is, when the mini game is started, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 234(B1), the title "Today's fortune telling-close Daikichi-" is displayed at the top of the display area, and "Daikichi" is displayed. A mini-game with the mission of selecting a treasure box inside will start. In this mini game, each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL and the effect button 136 is operated to determine the treasure box to be opened. By operating a plurality of buttons, the mini game is operated. The full-auto function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234(B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless any button is operated.

On the other hand, even in such a mini game, full auto may be made to function. For example, as shown in FIG. 234(B1′), when the mini game starts, full auto immediately works and the effect button 136 is displayed. Is pseudo-operated, and the upper left treasure box is automatically selected as shown in FIG. 234(B2′). That is, in the mini game in which the treasure box is selected by the buttons of the operation key unit 137 and the treasure box to be opened is determined by the effect button 136, when the full auto is operated, the treasure box initially designated by the cursor CSL is activated. May be arbitrarily decided as a treasure box to be opened, and the operation intention of the player may not be reflected at all.

In the present embodiment, the mini game for deriving a result irrelevant to the result of the hit/miss judgment in the standby state is performed, but, for example, in an effect that is started at a predetermined time by RTC (Real Time Clock) (standby state And, it may be executed in a mini game executed in at least one of the variable display of symbols), or may be executed at any time regardless of the game state in order to kill the player's time. ..

FIG. 235 and FIG. 236 are diagrams showing stepwise another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, it is shown that the mini game is started during the execution of the big hit game. It should be noted that the mini game may or may not always be started during the execution of the big hit game.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(a), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and a state of a big hit is shown. In addition, the holding icon h21 of the first special drawing 2, the holding icon h22 of the second special drawing 2, the holding icon h23 of the third special drawing 2, and the fourth special drawing 2 of the holding of the special drawing 2 are displayed. Each of the hold icons h24 is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, in this example of performance, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are not displayed, but these displays may be performed. ..

FIG. 235(b) shows that the big hit game is started and the game is shifted to the first round. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the "big hit start" is displayed to notify that the big hit game has started, and at the upper right of the display area, it is the first round of the big hit game. The display of "1R" shown and the display of "0GET" showing the current number of won balls in the big hit this time are also displayed. It should be noted that the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit to the end of the condominium may be displayed. As for the number of winning prize balls, the number of winning balls to the variable winning port 234 in one round becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10) and the variable winning port 234 is closed (over winning). The number of prize balls based on the game balls may or may not be included. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(b), it may be possible to entertain the player by performing a comical motion effect in which a child panda character appears. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification for instructing a right-handed operation may be performed.

FIG. 235(c) shows that the fifth round of the big hit game is being played. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "5R" indicating that it is the fifth round of the big hit game and "735 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have been won in the variable winning port 234 since the jackpot was started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(c), the display that "a mini game starts in the next round" is displayed, and the mini game starts in the next round (sixth round). I foretell.

FIG. 235(d) shows that the sixth round has started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “6R” indicating that it is the sixth round of the big hit game and “750 GET” indicating the number of winning prize balls in the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 50 game balls have been won in the variable winning port 234 since the jackpot was started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(d), a display saying "Mini game will start" is displayed, which gives advance notice that the mini game will start.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(e), it is shown that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a bancho character appears, a display showing the result of "1" on the dice and a display "If it comes out, the accessory action UP", and the mini game is executed. It is explained that if the production button 136 is operated after the start and the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the production movable body 224 is highly likely to operate. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and the display based on the winning of the 51 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is. In addition, if the effect movable body 224 operates during the execution of the big hit game, it is assured that a holding holiday is generated. That is, the operation of the effectable movable body 224 during the big hit game can be considered as an example of a pre-reading notice.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 235(f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbols on the dice start changing display, the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and “press” above them. Is displayed and the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “780 GET”, and the variable winning port 234 is displayed based on the winning of 52 game balls. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 235(g), as shown in FIG. 235(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is "3". The display is stopped in the manner shown, and it is shown that the achievement of the mission was not achieved. The number of won prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 235(h). The number of won prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 is “825 GET”.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(i), the display showing the result of "3" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mission of the mini game is not achieved. A "sorry" message is displayed to inform you. Therefore, in this production example, the production movable body 224 does not operate, and no notification is made as to whether or not the holding condominium is to be performed. In this example of performance, if the pre-reading results in a suspended holiday, the mission may be achieved in the mini game and the production movable body 224 may be operated. The movable body 224 may not operate in some cases. In addition, the effect movable body 224 may or may not always operate when the mission is achieved. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235(i) indicates “840 GET”, and 56 game balls are won into the variable winning port 234. The display is based on.

After that, when the big hit game ends, as shown in FIG. 235(j), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays "end of big hit" to notify the player that the big hit game has ended. Further, in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "16R" indicating that it is the 16th round and "2400GET" indicating that the number of won prize balls is 2400 are displayed. There is.

In the mini game of this effect example, the game is performed by operating the effect button 136 once. For example, when the “bancho awakening game” shown in FIG. 231 is started and the mission is achieved, a privilege is given. (For example, an advance notice of the effect movable body 224) may be given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 236, a situation where a mission is achieved in a mini game performed during the execution of the big hit game will be described. Note that FIGS. 236(a) to 236(d) are the same as FIGS. 235(a) to 235(d), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 236(e) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a bancho character appears, a display showing the result of "1" on the dice and a display "If it comes out, the accessory action UP", and the mini game is executed. It is explained that if the production button 136 is operated after the start and the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the production movable body 224 is highly likely to operate. Here, the bancho character is displayed in a manner in which the clothes are torn, which suggests that the mission is likely to be achieved. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and the display based on the winning of the 51 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 236(f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbols on the dice start changing display, the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and “press” above them. Is displayed and the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. In this example of effect, the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of rotating and vibrating, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. This suggests that the mission is likely to be achieved. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and the display based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 236(g), as shown in FIG. 236(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is “1”. The display is stopped in the manner shown, and it is indicated that the mission has been achieved. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236(g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 236(h). The number of won prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 is “825 GET”.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 236(i), the display showing the result of "1" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game mission is notified. The message “I did it” is displayed. In addition, “Attention to the arm” is displayed below it, and it is announced that the production movable body 224 may move. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 236(i) indicates “840 GET”, and 56 game balls are won into the variable winning port 234. The display is based on.

FIG. 236(j) shows that the seventh round has started. In the concrete period, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "7R" indicating that it is the seventh round of the big hit game and "900 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed on the upper right of the display area. The display is based on the fact that 60 game balls have been won in the variable winning port 234 since the big hit has started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 236(k), the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 operates, and the forearm portion 224b overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a large number of star effect images are displayed, and a display is performed as if the operation of the effect movable body 224 influences the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In addition, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “915 GET”, and display based on winning of 61 game balls to the variable winning port 234 is performed. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 236(l), the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the "holding condominium confirmation", and notifies that the symbol variable display that is a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading advance notice is given by the operation of the effectable movable member 224 and the display of "confirmation of reserved holidaymaker" in FIG. 236(l).

In addition, in this example of performance, it may be possible to notify that the pending condominium is determined by the achievement of the mission.

In the present embodiment, one or more of the plurality of types of mini games described above can be combined and executed.

In the embodiments described so far, the buttons (operation means) used in the mission of the main effect may be different from the buttons (operation means) used in the mission of the mini game.

Further, the result of the main effect and the result of the mini game may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed using other display means (for example, a display device dedicated to the mission). , Other effect means (for example, movable means such as effect movable body 224 and shielding device 246, sound output means such as speaker 120, light emitting means such as various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542, and the like. Other device).

Further, the mini game described above may be executed during the execution of one symbol variable display from the start to the end, or may be executed over a plurality of symbol variable displays.

Further, like the above-described mini game, it is preferable that the result is always notified when the mini game is started, but it may function as a false notice. For example, in the variable display of the special display where the number of pending variable displays is four, the variable time may be generally short, and in such a case, it looks like a mini game has started and the result is displayed. You may make it interrupt, without notifying. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to enliven the effect of the game.

Further, the mini game described above may be configured to be interrupted or stopped when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, a sudden big hit (for example, a combination of decorative symbols of big hits is displayed without going through reach production). (Variable display pattern, etc.), RTC production starts, the production display being executed switches to a display such as a wipe, and an error such as a door opening error or magnetic detection error occurs May be interrupted. For example, if a big hit suddenly occurs during the execution of a mini game and the mini game is interrupted, it suddenly becomes a big hit during the period of looking forward to the results of the mini game, giving the player unexpectedness and joy. May be able to give. If the mini game is interrupted when the RTC effect is started, it may be possible to entertain the link on the effect with the other game console by the RTC effect.

The position and size of the display area in which the mini game is executed may be changed depending on the game state, the effect mode, and the stage.

In addition, as the operation mode requested in the above-mentioned mini game, an appropriate operation mode such as one-time operation, continuous hitting operation, long-pressing operation, and timing operation can be adopted. As a result, it may be possible to change the result of the mini game depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

Further, when the mini game is executed during the variable display of the symbols, the mini game may be started before the reach. When reaching, there is a tendency to pay attention to the effect of the symbol variable display. Therefore, starting the mini game before reaching may increase the effect before reaching.

Further, as the reward for accomplishing the mission in the mini game described above, a notice is given that the notice is given, but the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game may be a notice or a look-ahead notice. For example, the variation notice or the look-ahead notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed while the symbol variation display is being executed, and the look-ahead notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed while the jackpot game is being performed.

In the above description,
“Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, a second decorative design display device 208M, a third decorative design display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display [for example, a button notice effect shown in FIGS. 208(g) to (i)] related to the decorative symbol variable display,
The second effect display is an effect display of a mini game [for example, a button notice effect shown in FIGS. 207(m) to 208(f)].
The first effect display includes a first operation promotion display [e.g., display of vibration and rotating button image 136a and "Push" shown in FIGS. 208(g) to 208(h), etc.]. It is a performance display,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 207(r) to FIG. 208(b) and a “continuous hit” display, etc.),
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation means,
The first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display are different operation prompting displays,
The first effect display is a big hit notice (hereinafter, “first notice [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 208(i) or the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 208(i′). "Preliminary notice by display, etc.") may be executed.
The second effect display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, “second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 208(f), a display of “Daikichi” causes an intense notice to appear). , Etc.]”)) may be derived.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

In addition, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to focus attention on the second notice that affects the first notice.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means in order to reach the first notice.

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a plurality of types of effect display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect display, or may not display a plurality of types of effect display.

Further, the plurality of types of effect display may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be associated with only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be associated with something other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the first effect display may be necessarily related to the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the first effect display may include only the first operation prompting display, or may include a display other than the first operation prompting display. Further, the first effect display may necessarily include the first operation prompting display, or may not include the first operation prompting display.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the second operation promotion display. In addition, the second effect display may necessarily include the second operation promotion display, or may not include the second operation promotion display.

Further, the first effect display may be that only the first notice may be executed, or may be performed other than the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

Further, the second effect display may be one in which only a notice related to the first notice may be derived, or a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be derived. It may be one. Further, in the second effect display, a notice related to the first notice may be always derived, or a notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

In addition, “a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter, “first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 209(c) to FIG. , A state in which both the button advance notice effect and the mini game are displayed, etc.]").
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the first notice and the second notice are related to each other.

Here, there may be a case where only the first state may exist, there may be a case other than the first state, may always be the first state, the first state It may not be the case.

In addition, “When the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIGS. 209(g) to 209(l), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit in a state where both the button advance notice effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, etc. ],
When the operation unit is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice is executed according to the second notice [for example, FIG. ), when the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived, a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed according to the result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to focus attention on the second notice that affects the first notice. Therefore, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means for the mini game.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in this state, a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. The configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed even when the operation means is not operated.

Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed, or the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the advance notice other than the first advance notice corresponding to the second advance notice may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed without fail. If the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the first advance notice corresponding to the second advance notice may not be executed.

The first notice may be executed according to the second notice only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started. The configuration may be such that only the first notice according to the second notice is executed even when the operation means is not operated after the start of.

Further, "when there is an operation of the operation means in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed,
After the second notice is executed, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state of 1), only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state of 1), the notice other than the 1st notice of the 1st notice and the 2nd notice may be executed, or in the 1st state When the operation means is operated, a notice other than the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. When there is an operation of the operating means in the state of, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the configuration may be such that at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. Even when the operation means is not operated in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

Further, after the second notice is executed, only the first notice executed according to the second notice may change, or after the second notice is executed, A notice other than the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change. In addition, after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change, or after the second notice is executed, the second notice may be changed. The first notice executed according to the notice may not change.

In addition, the first notice executed according to the second notice may change only after the second notice is executed, or even after the second notice is executed. The first notice executed according to the second notice may change.

Also, "in the first state, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to increase the expectation of the first notice by paying attention to the effect display on the mini game side, which is the notice of the first notice.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to prioritize the mini-game side in time series.

In addition, according to this gaming machine, a notice that influences a notice that may occur in the future is preferentially displayed, so that it may be easy to understand even if the operation means overlap.

Here, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap only with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display is an effect other than the second effect display. It may also overlap the display. Further, in the first state, the first effect display may always overlap with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display does not overlap with the second effect display. There may be cases.

Further, the first effect display may overlap the second effect display only in the first state, and the first effect display may be the second effect display in the states other than the first state. May be overlapped.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the “second effective period [for example, operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIG. 211(e) to FIG. 211(g), etc.], The second notice is started,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second effective period display [for example, button reception time meter MT and the like shown in FIG. 211(e) to FIG. 211(g) and the like],
The second valid period display is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of the second valid period [for example, as shown in FIG. 211(e) to FIG. The display form of the time meter MT changes in such a manner that the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation reception time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the second effective period, it is possible to prompt the player to derive the result of the mini game, so that the first notice may be noticed in some cases. ..

Here, when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, only the second notice may be started, or when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, The configuration may be such that a notice other than the second notice is also started. Also, the second advance notice may be configured to start without fail when the operating means is operated during the second valid period, or when the operating means is operated during the second valid period, The second notice may not be started in some cases.

Further, the second advance notice may be started only when the operating means is operated during the second effective period, or when the operating means is not operated during the second effective period. Alternatively, the second notice may be started.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second effective period display, or may include a display other than the second effective period display. The second effect display may necessarily include the second effective period display, or may not include the second effective period display.

In addition, "the first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [for example, the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 209(o)],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 208(i)],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
In the case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol than in the case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect. Is configured,
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is more likely to be executed in the second aspect than when the second effect display is not started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect the first notice by starting the mini game.

Here, the first notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the first notice may be always executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

Further, the first notice may be executable only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be executable in aspects other than the first aspect and the second aspect. Good. Further, the first notice may be always executed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be executed in the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, when the first notice is executed in the first mode, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed, or the first notice is executed in the second mode. In the case, it may be configured such that the jackpot pattern is finally definitely displayed.

Further, when the second effect display is not started, the first notice may be configured not to be executed in the second mode, and when the second effect display is started, the second mode The first notice may be executed without fail.

In addition, "The second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a third mode [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 213(l), etc.],
One of the plurality of modes is a fourth mode [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 212(l), etc.],
When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
When the first notice is executed in the second mode [for example, the display of "mission accomplished" shown in FIG. 212(n)], the second notice is executed in the fourth mode. Is configured to
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the big notice symbol is finally confirmed and displayed in the second mode with the first notice, so that the expectation of the derivation result for the second notice is further improved. You may be able to.

Here, the second notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the second notice may be always executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

Further, the second notice may be executable only in the third aspect and the fourth aspect, or may be executable in aspects other than the third aspect and the fourth aspect. Good. Further, the second notice may be always executed in the third mode and the fourth mode, or may not be executed in the third mode and the fourth mode.

Also, "The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, it is configured to display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the variable display
The first notice is a notice given by changing the display mode of the hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A game table provided with display means capable of executing decorative symbol variable display [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
It is configured to run multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a dice game shown in FIG. 221(g) to FIG. 221],
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game [for example, an omikuji game shown in FIG. 221(g′) to FIG. 221(l′)],
The first mini-game is a mini-game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 or the like shown in FIG. 221(a)],
The second mini game is a mini game displayed by using the certain display area,
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

In addition, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the display area of the mini game is fixed to "a certain display area", which may be easy for the player to understand.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display means may be one display means or two or more display means. Further, in the case of being constituted by two or more display means, the decorative symbol variable display may be performed only on some display means, or the decorative symbol variable display may be performed on all the display means. It may be something called.

Further, only a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable, or a game other than the plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini games.

Further, only the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable, or mini games other than the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable. In addition, the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executed without fail, or the first mini game and the second mini game may not be executed in some cases. ..

In addition, the first mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. In addition, the first mini game may be displayed without fail using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

The second mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. The second mini game may be displayed without fail using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

In addition, "preliminary means capable of executing a plurality of notices [eg, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
One of the plurality of advance notices is a first advance notice [for example, a prefetch advance notice in the blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 221(l) or FIG. 221(l')],
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, “first result [eg, display of “1UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 221(k)] or the like]” suggesting that the first notice is given. ) Is a mini game that can be derived,
The second mini game is a mini game capable of deriving the first result [for example, the display of “1UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 221(k′)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the relationship such as the notice can be made easy to understand while entertaining the variation of the mini game.

Here, the advance notice means may execute only a plurality of advance notices, or may execute other than a plurality of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of advance notices without fail, or may not execute a plurality of advance notices.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice.

Further, the first mini game may be one in which only the first result can be derived, or one in which results other than the first result can be derived. In addition, the first mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, the second mini game may be one in which only the first result can be derived, or one in which results other than the first result can be derived. In addition, the second mini game may always derive the first result, or may not necessarily derive the first result.

In addition, "one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a read-ahead notice in a red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 222(l) and FIG. 222(l')]. ,
The case where the second notice is given is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than the case where the first notice is given,
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter, referred to as “second result [eg, display of “3UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 222(k)]”] indicating that the second notice is given. ) Is also a derivable mini-game,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the second result [for example, the display of “3UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 222(k′) and the like] can be derived.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the expectation that the result suggesting that the second notice will be given in the mini game is derived.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the second notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the second advance notice.

Further, the first mini-game may be one in which only the second result can be derived, or one in which results other than the second result can be derived. Further, the first mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

Further, the second mini game may be one in which only the second result can be derived, or one in which results other than the second result can be derived. In addition, the second mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 221(g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [eg, the face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 221(g′)] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the same notice may be given even if the type of mini game is different, so that it may be possible to give the player various expectations.

Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. .. In the first mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. Further, in the second mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 221(g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [eg, the face-length face image BCH shown in FIG. 221(g′)] may be displayed.
The first mini game is a mini game in which a second character [for example, the character SBH of Savohani shown in FIG. 225(A1)] may be displayed.
The second mini game is a mini game in which a third character [for example, a princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 225 (B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
The second mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give an expectation for the second result depending on the type of the character that appears in each mini game.

Here, in the first mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. .. In the first mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, in the second mini game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may be displayed. Further, in the second mini game, the first character may be always displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

In the first mini game, only the second character may be displayed, or characters other than the second character may be displayed. Further, in the first mini game, the second character may be always displayed, or the second character may not be displayed.

In the second mini game, only the third character may be displayed, or characters other than the third character may be displayed. Further, in the second mini game, the third character may be always displayed, or the third character may not be displayed.

The third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

Further, in the first mini game, the second result may not be derived when the first character is displayed, or the second result is not derived when the second character is displayed. The result of may be always derived.

Further, in the second mini game, the second result may not be derived when the first character is displayed, or the second result is not derived when the third character is displayed. The result of may be always derived.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display [for example, the old mode shown in FIG. 223 (A1) to (A6)].
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display [for example, a princess mode shown in FIG. 223(B1) to FIG. 223(B6)],
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223(A1) to (A6), the old mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini game that is more easily executed during the display of the first effect display than during the display of the second effect display,
The second mini-game [for example, an omikuji game or the like] is a mini-game that is more easily executed during the display of the second effect display than during the display of the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to associate the main effect with the mini game.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect display, or may not display a plurality of types of effect display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or capable of displaying effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display. May be Further, the display means may always display the first effect display and the second effect display, or may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may be displayed other than during execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the second effect display may be displayed only during execution of the decorative pattern variable display, or may be displayed other than during execution of the decorative pattern variable display. It may be. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display.

In addition, the first mini game may not be executed during the display of the second effect display, or may be executed without fail during the display of the first effect display.

In addition, the second mini game may not be executed during the display of the first effect display, or may be executed without exception during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, "it is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of game states is a second game state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc.]
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The probability of executing the plurality of types of mini games is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the mini-game execution probability varies depending on the game state, it may be possible to change the expectation for the mini-game being executed depending on the game state.

Here, it may be configured to be able to shift only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. Further, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. Further, the first game state and the second game state may be configured to shift without fail, or the first game state and the second game state may not shift in some cases.

In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, or the second gaming state may have a higher probability. The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games may be high.

In addition, the special figure low probability general figure low probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability general figure low probability state (including latent probability variation, the same below), special figure low probability general figure low probability At least one of the state, special figure high probability general figure high probability state may be the second game state, while the special figure high probability state general figure low probability state is the first game state , Special figure high probability state Normal figure high probability state may be the second game state, special figure low probability general figure high probability state is the first game state, special figure high probability state The figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the general figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the general figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the general figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, it may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the first gaming state, or may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the second gaming state.

In addition, “the probability of executing the plurality of types of advance notice is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the probability of executing the first mini game is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, "the probability of executing the second mini game is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Also, "the probability of executing the second notice is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Also, "the probability of executing the second notice is different between the first game state and the second game state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, "it is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of game states is a first game state [for example, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of game states is a second game state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc.]
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini game that is easier to be executed in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state [eg, FIG. 226]. As shown in (A1) to (A6) of the figure, the dice game is more likely to be executed in the normal game state than in the probability variation state],
The second mini-game [for example, an omikuji game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed in the second game state than in the first game state [eg, FIG. 226]. As shown in (B1) to (B6) of the same figure, the omikuji game is more likely to be executed in the probability variation state than in the normal gaming state],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to associate the gaming state with the type of mini game.

Here, it may be configured to be able to shift only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. Further, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured to be able to shift only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be shiftable to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. Further, the first game state and the second game state may be configured to shift without fail, or the first game state and the second game state may not shift in some cases.

Also, while the special figure low probability general figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability general figure low probability state, special figure low probability general figure low probability state, special figure high probability general figure high At least one of the probability states may be the second game state, and the special figure high probability state general figure low probability state is the first game state, while the special figure high probability state general figure high The probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special figure low probability general figure high probability state is the first game state, while the special figure high probability general figure high probability state is the second game state. It may be in a state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the general figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the general figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the general figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, the first mini game may not be executed in the second gaming state, or may be executed in the first gaming state without fail. Good.

Further, the second mini game may not be executed in the first gaming state, or may be executed without fail in the first gaming state. Good.

"The first game state [eg, a normal game state (special figure low probability general figure low probability state) and the like] and the second game state [eg, probability variation state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), etc.] ], the probability of executing the plurality of types of mini games is different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the mini-game execution probability varies depending on the game state, it may be possible to change the expectation for the mini-game being executed depending on the game state.

Here, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games, and the second gaming state may have a higher probability. There is a high probability that the player executes a plurality of types of mini games.

In addition, “the first game state is a non-electric power support state [for example, a universal figure low probability state, etc.],
The second game state is a power support state [for example, a high probability probability state etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the non-electric power support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, the electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, “when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in the certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 or the like shown in FIG. 221(a)], the non-mini game effect is generated in the certain display area. Display [For example, the tutorial display that "mini-game will start at various timings" shown in FIG. 221(c) and the tutorial display that "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" shown in FIG. 221] will be displayed. May be
The non-mini game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini games,
When any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in the certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed is erased [for example, in FIG. 221(f) to FIG. As shown, if the mini-game is started while "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is displayed, the display of "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the non-minigame effect display can be performed using a certain display area from the normal time, the player may easily pay attention.

Here, there may be a case where the non-minigame effect display is displayed only in a certain display area when none of the plurality of types of minigames is displayed in a certain display area. The non-minigame effect display may be displayed in an area other than the display area in which none of the minigames is displayed. Further, when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area without fail, and any of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area. The non-minigame effect display may not be displayed in a certain display area when it is not displayed.

In addition, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area only when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a certain display area. There may be a case where a non-minigame effect display is displayed in a certain display area in a case other than when neither of the games is displayed.

Further, when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be erased, or any one of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area. When one of the displays is started, the display other than the non-minigame effect display being displayed may be deleted. Further, when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted without fail, and any one of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area. There may be a case where the non-minigame effect display being displayed is not erased when one of them is displayed.

Further, the non-minigame effect display that is being displayed may be deleted only when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, or any of the plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-minigame effect display being displayed may be erased also in the case other than the case where one of the displays is started.

As the display applicable to the non-mini game effect display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, a display of parameters in the original mode (LV display, etc.), a display of the remaining time until the start of RTC, etc. is adopted. It is possible.

In addition, “the certain display area is defined by a frame [for example, an outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 207(m), an outer frame of the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 211(a), etc.]. Is a partitioned area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be partitioned only by a frame or may be partitioned by something other than the frame.

Further, “the certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 221(a), the multi-function display area MF1 is a display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is formed on the right half of the lower end, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area which is expanded in association with the start of the first mini game [for example, as shown in FIG. 227 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is a start of the dice game Is expanded in relation to
The certain display area is an area that expands in association with the start of the second mini game,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where the player can focus on the mini game by expanding and displaying a certain display area.

Here, a certain display area may be expanded only in association with the start of the first mini game, or may be expanded in association with other than the start of the first mini game. Good. Further, a certain display area may be necessarily expanded in association with the start of the first mini game, or may not be expanded in association with the start of the first mini game.

Further, a certain display area may be expanded only in association with the start of the second mini game, or may be expanded in association with other than the start of the second mini game. .. Further, a certain display area may be always expanded in association with the start of the second mini game, or may not be expanded in association with the start of the second mini game.

In addition, a certain display area may be expanded only in association with the start of the first mini game, and may be configured not to be expanded in association with the start of the second mini game. It may be expanded only in association with the start of the mini-game, and may be configured not to be expanded in association with the start of the first mini-game.

In addition, “the certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 221(a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the mini game is executed on the display means for executing the decorative symbol variable display, it may be possible to give more attention to the mini game.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

Further, a display means different from the above-mentioned display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like] (hereinafter, referred to as “second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the like]”). Prepare,
The certain display region is a region formed in the display region of the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

Also, in the above description,
"A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
Display means capable of displaying the display of the mini game [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, a second decorative design display device 208M, a third decorative design display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 211(i′)],
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 211(i)],
The case where the second notice is given is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than the case where the first notice is given,
The mini game is a game that can derive a plurality of results,
One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the display of “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 211(h′), etc.],
One of the plurality of results is a second result [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 211(h), etc.],
It is easier to give the second notice when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notification means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the notification means.

In addition, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Further, according to this gaming table, the player may participate (attention) in the mini game in order to derive the second result.

Here, the advance notice means may execute only a plurality of advance notices, or may execute other than a plurality of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of advance notices without fail, or may not execute a plurality of advance notices.

Further, the display means may display only the display of the mini game, or may display other displays than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. .. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice.

In addition, when the first notice is given, the jackpot symbol may not be finally fixedly displayed, and when the second notice is given, the big hit symbol is always definitely displayed. It may be configured to.

In addition, “at least suggesting that the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. It is configured [for example, as shown in FIG. 211(c), when the mini game is started, the display of "strong cut-in occurred in Daikichi" is displayed in the mini game display area MN1]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to focus attention on the trend of the mini game toward the generation of an advantageous announcement.

In addition, by incorporating the so-called mission effect in the mini game, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes where the player can feel the achievement.

Here, it is configured to at least suggest that only the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. At least to suggest that it is easy to give notices other than the second notice because the derived result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. It may be configured. Further, it may be configured such that the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the derivation of the result of the mini game, so that at least the second notice is surely given. However, before the derivation of the result of the mini game, the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result, which may at least suggest that the second notice is not given. May be.

In addition, before the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured to give advance notification that the second notice is likely to be given because the derived result of the mini game becomes the second result. ..

In addition, the mode of suggestion is, for example, a mode in which at least an effect of accomplishing the mission is suggested, such as “when successful in... Any aspect can be applied.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first effect display [for example, the effect effect of the mission shown in FIGS. 212(c) to 212(n)],
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIGS. 212(c) to (n) is a decorative symbol. Is being displayed while the fluctuation of
The first effect display is an effect display capable of deriving a plurality of effect results,
One of the plurality of effect results is the first effect result [for example, the display of "Mission failed" shown in FIG. 213(n), etc.],
One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result [for example, a display of “mission accomplished” shown in FIG. 212(n)],
Before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is at least suggested that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result, which is likely to result in a big hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 212(c), when the production of the mission is started, the contents of the mission such as “put out a cut-in” and “a big hit if it comes out” are displayed, etc.],
The second effect result [eg, in the first effect display], compared to the case where the second result [eg, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 211(h)] is derived in the mini game. The display of "Mission achievement" shown in FIG. 212(n)] is derived so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to increase the number of scenes where the player's sense of accomplishment can be obtained by incorporating so-called mission effects in addition to the mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to increase the variation of the mission effect by providing a difference in the result of the mission.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the difference between the main production mission and the mini game mission may be clarified in some cases.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays, or may not display the plurality of effect displays.

The display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying effect displays other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be displayed only during execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may be displayed other than during execution of the decorative symbol variable display. It may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the first effect display may be one in which only a plurality of effect results can be derived, or one in which a result other than the plurality of effect results can also be derived. Further, the first effect display may necessarily derive a plurality of effect results, or may not necessarily derive a plurality of effect results.

Further, the first effect display may be one in which only the first effect result and the second effect result can be derived, or effect results other than the first effect result and the second effect result are also derived. It may be possible. Further, the first effect display may necessarily derive the first effect result and the second effect result, or may not derive the first effect result and the second effect result. Good.

Further, before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured in advance that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result, so that it is likely to be a big hit. May be.

In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed, or when the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. May be configured so that the jackpot pattern is finally definitely displayed. Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. When it is done, it may be configured so that the jackpot pattern may not be finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, "when the second effect result is derived, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clarify the division of the mission effect.

Here, only when the second effect result is derived, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, and also in cases other than the case where the second effect result is derived. The final jackpot pattern may be finally displayed.

In addition, “a state in which both the mini game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter, “first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 212(g) to 212(l), There is a case where both the effect and the mini game are displayed, etc.]".
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the result of the mini game and the result of the first effect display are related.

Here, there may be a case where only the first state may exist, there may be a case other than the first state, may always be the first state, the first state It may not be the case.

In addition, “the mini game is started earlier than the first effect display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that there is a relationship between the mini game and the first effect display.

In addition, “operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player is provided,
When the operating means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived [for example, FIG. 212(g) to FIG. 212(l) or FIG. 213(g). As shown in (l) of the same figure, when the production button 136 is repeatedly hit in the mini game, "Daikichi" or "Kokichi" is derived, etc.],
If the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,
If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice [eg, FIG. 213(m)] is used rather than the second notice [eg, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 212(m)]. The weak cut-in image CI1b etc.] shown in FIG.
When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so that the player may be able to positively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. ..

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the result of the mini game may be derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, and the mini game may be obtained even when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. May be configured to be derived. The result of the mini game may be always derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may not be done.

The result of the mini game may not be derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. The result of the game may not be derived. The result of the mini game may not always be derived when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is not obtained when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured so that it may be derived.

Further, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, it may be configured so that the first notice is easier than the second notice, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases, the first notice may be more easily given than the second notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is not derived, it may be configured such that the first notice is more likely to be given than the second notice, and the result of the mini game is not derived. In some cases, the first notice may be less likely to be given than the second notice.

Further, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may not be given, and if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is always issued. May be configured to be exposed.

Further, only when the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured such that the second notice is easier to be given than the first notice, and other than when the result of the mini game is derived. Also in this case, the second notice may be more easily given than the first notice. Also, when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be more easily given than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, It may be configured such that the second notice is less likely to be given than the first notice.

Further, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may not be given, and when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is always given. May be configured as.

In addition, "even if the second notice is scheduled to be given (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is given. [For example, when the result of the mini game is not derived although it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived as the result of the mini game, as shown in FIG. A weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of the in-image CI1a],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so that the player may be able to positively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. ..

Also, according to this gaming machine, the notice does not affect the success/failure determination, so even if a notice different from the scheduled one occurs, the result of the success/failure determination will not be affected, and the scheduled notice will be forced. No need to do. Therefore, it may be possible to participate in a mini game in order to make a better notice appear.

Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be provided only when the result of the mini game is not derived. The first notice may be provided even when the result of the game is not derived. Further, even in the first case, the first notice may be given whenever the result of the mini game is not derived, or even in the first case, the mini game If the result of (1) is not derived, the first notice may not be given.

In addition, “holding icon display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a first holding icon [for example, a holding icon in a blue display mode, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode, etc.],
The first notice is a notice given by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a prefetch notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a blue display mode, etc.],
The second notice is a notice given when the second hold icon is displayed [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a green display mode],
The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold icon while enjoying the mini game. For example, the button holding icon is displayed and the display mode is changed by the operation of the operation means, which is monotonous only in the conventional effect, but according to this game console, the display mode of the holding icon is changed. After that, it may change further, so that it may be possible to further increase the expectation in the change display of the hold icon.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display a hold icon other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It can be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

The first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. May be. Further, the first notice may be issued without fail by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

The second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started only while a certain symbol variable display is being executed in the state where the first hold icon is displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that, in the state in which it is performed, it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variable display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In a state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. Even in a state other than the displayed state, it may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to only the second hold icon, or in the first case, When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case, If the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon.

In the first case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived. In the first case, Even when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon. Further, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to the second hold icon, or other than the first case. In this case, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon when the result of the mini game is not derived.

In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to only the second hold icon. In the first case In, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon without fail. In, in the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon.

In the first case, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game. In the first case In, in addition to the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Further, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. In the first case In other cases, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon when the second result is derived in the mini game.

In addition, “holding icon display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of holding icons is a first holding icon [for example, a holding icon in a blue display mode, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode, etc.],
The first notice is a notice given when the first hold icon is displayed [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a blue display mode],
The second notice is a notice given when the second hold icon is displayed [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in a green display mode],
The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol During execution of the symbol variation display started after the variation display, the first suspension icon changes to the second suspension icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be changed depending on the participation status of the mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there is a case where the relationship between the advance notice and the reliability can be maintained even if the mini game is not finally participated.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display a hold icon other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It can be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

The first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. May be. Further, the first notice may be issued without fail by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

The second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started only while a certain symbol variable display is being executed in the state where the first hold icon is displayed, and the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured such that, in the state in which it is performed, it may be started other than during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In addition, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variable display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In a state, it may be configured such that it may not be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

Further, the mini game may be configured so that it may be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. Even in a state other than the displayed state, it may be configured to be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display.

In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to only the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured to do so. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is always changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variable display. May be configured as.

In the first case, only when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. In the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display, even when the second result is derived in the mini game. It may be configured as follows. Further, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. Even in cases other than the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variable display. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during execution of the variable display which is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold during the execution of the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. The icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the variable display which is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold during the execution of the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the icon may not change to the second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during execution of the symbol variable display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first variation is also performed during execution of the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. The hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variable display started later.

In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the pattern variation display that is also started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case of, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon except during the execution of certain symbol variation display, and the first variation icon is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display started after the certain symbol variation display. The hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon without fail during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Also, it may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variable display which is started later.

Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the pattern variation display that is also started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In the case other than the case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during the execution of the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon. Also, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the variable pattern display that will be started later, or in the case other than the first case, the result of the mini game If is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during the execution of the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon.

In addition, "operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player is provided,
The derivation result of the mini game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 212(i) to FIG. When the condition is satisfied, “Daikichi” is derived, but as shown in FIGS. 214(i) to 214(l), when the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not satisfy the condition, “Daikichi” is displayed. Kokichi" is derived]],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the operation of the operation means.

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, only the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operating means, or other than the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operating means. .. Further, the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operation means, or the derivation result of the mini game may not be different depending on the operation status of the operation means.

In addition, "operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player is provided,
In the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operation means is operated or not [for example, shown in FIGS. 213(i) to 213(l). As described above, when it is determined in advance that “Nakichi” is derived, “Kokichi” is derived even if the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, in the mini game, only the same result may be derived when the operation means is operated and when the operation means is not operated, or when the operation means is operated in the mini game. There may be a case where a result other than the same result is derived depending on whether the operation means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may always be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not operated, and in the mini game, the same result may be obtained when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is operated. In some cases, the same result may not be derived even when there is no such case.

Further, only in the mini game, the same result may be obtained depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, and the operating means is operated even in other than the mini game. The same result may be derived depending on whether the operation means is operated or not.

In addition, “the display means is a first display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L
Etc.] and a second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The first display means and the second display means are different display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be configured with. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to not include the first display means and the second display means. It may be one.

Also, in the above description,
“Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
The display means displays a mini game [for example, a mini game shown in FIGS. 229(g) to (m) or a mini game shown in FIGS. 231(j) to 231(o)]. Is a possible means,
The mini-game is a game that can derive multiple types of results,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 229(g) to 229(k), the operation key unit 137 is used to open the treasure box. When the selected treasure box is selected by the production button 136, the old-aged character BA appears in the treasure box, and "Kokichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune telling, or FIG. 232(A1) to FIG. As shown in (A6), when the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, it is shown that the clothes worn by the bancho character are torn, and "bancho awakening" and "today is in good shape" are displayed. ,
It is configured such that any one of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 230(A1) to 230(A6), When the lower left treasure box BX2 is selected by the key unit 137 and the production button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, but FIG. 230 (B1). As shown in (B6) of the same figure, when the upper right treasure box BX3 is selected by the operation key unit 137 and the decision is made by the effect button 136, the grandmother character BA appears and the result of the fortune telling is "Kokichi. ”Is displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 232(A1) to 232(A6), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit and the condition of the number of times of operations is satisfied, the clothes of the bancho character are worn. Is displayed, "Bancho Awakening" and "Today are in good shape" are displayed, and the production button 136 is repeatedly struck, but if the condition of the number of times of operations is not satisfied, the state shown in FIG. 233 (C7) is displayed. ), the clothes worn by the Bancho character cannot be torn, and the “bancho awakening game” ends, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of results is the third result [for example, the display of the auntie character BA and “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 229(k), and the bancho length shown in FIG. 233(C7). Indication that the clothes worn by the character are not broken, etc.]
The third result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit/fail judgment [for example, the hit judgment of at least one of the hit judgment of the special figure and the hit judgment of general figure].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

In addition, conventionally, a game table for playing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in a mini game.

Moreover, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the player other than the pure game.

Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be necessarily provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

The operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate. Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may display only the display of the mini game, or may display other displays than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, the mini game may be one in which only a plurality of types of results can be derived, or one in which a result other than a plurality of types of results can be derived. Further, the mini game may necessarily derive a plurality of types of results, or may not derive a plurality of types of results.

Further, it may be configured such that only the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operating means, or that other than the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operating means. May be done. The result of the mini game may be always derived by operating the operation means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operation means. May be.

Further, it may be configured such that only one of the plurality of types of results is derived in accordance with the operation status of the operating means, or among the plurality of types of results depending on the operation status of the operating means. It may be configured such that one other than either one is also derived. Further, it may be configured such that any one of the plurality of kinds of results is always derived in accordance with the operation status of the operation means, and any one of the plurality of kinds of results may be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means. It may be configured such that one of them may not be derived.

Further, the mini game may be one in which only the third result can be derived, or one in which results other than the third result can be derived. In addition, the mini game may always derive the third result, or may not necessarily derive the third result.

In addition, the third result does not suggest the result of the judgment of success or failure and does not give any notification.

In addition, “The mini game is a game for deriving a certain result from the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 230(A1) to (A6) is “Daikichi”. The mission is to select the inner treasure box],
The certain result is configured to be derivable according to the operation status of the operation means [for example, in the case of FIG. 230(A1) to FIG. If the effect button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune telling, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.

Here, a certain result may be only one, or may be two or more.

Further, only a certain result may be derivable depending on the operation status of the operating means, or a result other than a certain result may be derivable depending on the operation status of the operating means. Further, it may be configured such that a certain result is always derived depending on the operation status of the operating means, or a certain result may not be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means.

In addition, “decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variable display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Prepare,
In the case where the mini game is started in the first period [for example, a period of a standby state (including a state where the customer waiting demo display is displayed) where the variable display of special maps is not performed, etc. (hereinafter, "The first case".)
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variable display is not suspended [for example, a period in which the suspension of both the special diagram 1 and the special diagram 2 is 0].
The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variable display is not executed [for example, a period in which a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain a mini game during the first period.

Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the operation of the operation means can be positively performed during the original game by prompting the operation of the operation means in the mini game.

Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

The mini game may be started only in the first period, or may be started in a period other than the first period. Further, the mini game may be always started in the first period, or may not be started in the first period.

Further, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variable display is not suspended, or a period in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variable display, Good.

Further, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variable display is not executed, and other than the decorative symbol variable display (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device). 214) may be unexecuted for some periods.

In addition, "automatic operation of the operating means [for example, long press auto, full auto, etc.] is configured to be executable,
In the first case, the mini game is configured such that the auto operation cannot be executed [eg, as shown in FIG. 231(g) and FIG. 231(j) to FIG. , Even if the auto button mode is set to ON, the production button 136 is not automatically operated in the Bancho awakening game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, in the first case, since it is a mini game that is not related to the winning/non-winning judgment, it is possible to disable the automatic operation and positively allow the player to operate the operating means. There is.

Here, only the automatic operation of the operating unit may be configured to be executable, or an operation other than the automatic operation of the operating unit may be configured to be executable. Further, the automatic operation of the operation unit may be configured to be always executed, or the automatic operation of the operation unit may not be executed in some cases.

In addition, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that only the automatic operation is inexecutable, or an operation other than the automatic operation is inexecutable. Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that the automatic operation is always inexecutable, or may be configured such that the automatic operation may not be inexecutable.

In addition, the mini game may be configured such that the auto operation cannot be executed only in the first case, or in the case other than the first case, the auto operation cannot be executed. Good.

In addition, “the mini game is a game that may be started in the second period (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”) [for example, shown in FIG. 161(d) to FIG. The mini-games shown in FIGS. 207(m) to 208(f) and the mini-games shown in FIGS. 221(g) to 221(k) are started during the variable display of decorative symbols. 236(e) to FIG. 236(i), the mini-game shown in FIG.
The second period is a period that does not overlap with the first period,
The second period is a period including at least one of the execution of the decorative symbol variable display and the execution of the big hit game,
In the first case, the third result is more easily derived in the mini game than in the second case.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain a mini game during a game.

Here, the mini game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the second period, or may not be started in the second period.

Further, in the first case, the third result may be configured to be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. Good.

In addition, “the types of the mini-games started in the first case and the second case are different [for example, today's fortune shown in FIGS. 229(g) to (m)] The fortune telling and the Bancho awakening game shown in FIGS. 231(j) to 231(o) are mini-games started in the standby state, and the dice games and diagrams shown in FIGS. 221(g) to 221(l). 221(g') to (l') are fortune-telling games, which are mini-games started during variable display of decorative symbols, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be easy to identify whether it is a notice or a simple game depending on the type of mini game.

Here, only the types of mini games started in the first case and the second case may be different from each other, or in the mini games started in the first case and the second case. It may be configured such that there are different types other than types. In addition, the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different from each other, and the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be different. May be configured so that they may not be different.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, a first effective period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 231(k)] is displayed. Is configured to
In the mini game started in the second case, the second valid period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 212(i)] is displayed. Is configured,
The first valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the passage of a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 231(k) to (n). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, etc.],
The second effective period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the lapse of a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective [for example, shown in FIGS. 212(i) to 212(k). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, etc.],
In the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the changing speed of the display mode is different,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to distinguish the type of mini game by looking at the display of the effective period.

Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first effective period display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, The valid period display other than the valid period display may be displayed. In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, the first valid period display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first valid period display may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the first valid period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, and also in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. The first valid period display may be displayed.

Further, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second effective period display may be configured to be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period may be displayed. The valid period display other than the period display may be displayed. In addition, in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period display may be configured to be displayed without fail, and in the mini game started in the second case, the second effective period may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the second valid period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. The second valid period display may be displayed.

Further, the first effective period display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective. The display mode may be changed accordingly. Further, the first effective period display may be such that the display mode is always changed according to the passage of the period for which the operation of the operating means is valid, or the display state may be changed for the passage of the period of enabling the operation of the operating means. The display mode may not change accordingly.

Further, the second effective period display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is effective. The display mode may be changed accordingly. Further, the second valid period display may be such that the display mode is always changed according to the passage of the period for which the operation of the operating means is valid, or the display state may be changed for the passage of the period for which the operation of the operating device is valid. The display mode may not change accordingly.

Further, either one of the first effective period display and the second effective period display may not be displayed.

Further, in the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the first effective period display may be changed at a higher display speed, or the second effective period display may be changed in the display mode. The changing speed of may be fast.

Further, the first valid period display and the second valid period display may have different display modes or the same display mode. Further, in the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the first effective period display may be larger in size, or the second effective period display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the first effective period display and the second effective period display may have the same size.

In addition, “In the mini game started in the first case, a first operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. Etc.] is displayed.
In the mini game started in the second case, a second operation promotion display [eg,
The button image 136a displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 212(i) and the display of "continuous hit" and the like] are displayed.
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the user to operate the operation means,
The first operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a first number [eg, one, etc.] display pattern [eg, default display mode, etc.],
The second operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a second number [for example, two, etc.] display pattern [for example, a default display mode and a display mode that is vibrating and rotating],
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, in the mini game started in the second case, it may be possible to increase the expectation for a big hit by the variation of the display pattern of the operation promotion display.

Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, The operation promotion display other than the operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation The promotion display may not be displayed in some cases.

The first operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the first case. The first operation promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation An operation prompting display other than the prompting display may be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini game started in the second case, the second operation The promotion display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in the mini games other than the mini game started in the second case. The second operation promotion display may be displayed.

Further, the first operation prompting display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operating means or a display prompting other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the first operation prompting display may be a display that always prompts the user to operate the operating means, or may be a display that may not prompt the user to operate the operating means.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display that prompts only the operation of the operating means or a display that prompts other than the operation of the operating means. The second operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the user to operate the operation means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

Further, the first operation prompting display may be one that can be displayed only with the first number of display patterns, or one that can be displayed with a display pattern other than the first number of display patterns. Good. Further, the first operation prompting display may be always displayed with the first number of display patterns, or may not be displayed with the first number of display patterns.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be capable of being displayed only with the second number of display patterns, or may be capable of being displayed with a display pattern other than the second number of display patterns. Good. Further, the second operation promotion display may be always displayed with the second number of display patterns, or may not be displayed with the second number of display patterns.

Moreover, the first number may be one, or may be two or more.

Further, in the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display, the first operation promotion display may be larger in size, or the second operation promotion display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display may have the same size.

Further, the first operation prompting display and the second operation prompting display may have different display modes, or at least a part of the display modes may be the same.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is the first result [for example, the display of “Kokichi” shown in FIG. 213(l), etc.],”
The first result is a result that at least suggests the result of the hit/miss judgment [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 213(l) indicates the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. At least suggest the display, etc.],
In the second case, the first result is more easily derived in the mini game than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the mini game may be one in which only the first result can be derived, or one in which results other than the first result can be derived. The mini game may always derive the first result, or may not always derive the first result.

Further, the first result may at least suggest only the result of the hit/miss determination, or may at least suggest something other than the result of the hit/miss determination. Further, the first result may at least suggest at least the result of the hit determination, or may not at least suggest the result of the hit determination.

Further, the first result may indicate the result of the hit/miss judgment, or may notify the result of the hit/miss judgment.

Further, in the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be always derived in the mini game.

Further, “The first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display is a notice or a pre-read notice [for example, FIG. 216(a) to FIG. ), in the mini game that is performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, a notice or a look-ahead notice is given when the character YSM of the hero's lord appears from the treasure box],
The first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the mini game may be able to function as a notice.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display [eg, button operation effect shown in FIGS. 209(c) to (o), etc.] related to the decorative symbol variable display,
In the first effect display, a big hit announcement (hereinafter, referred to as “first announcement [for example, display of weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 209(o)]”) may be executed. And
As the first result derived in the case where the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, a notice related to the first notice may be executed [eg, FIG. As shown in (c) to (l) of the figure, the display of "Nakichi" derived in the mini game started during the variable display of the decorative pattern gives advance notice of the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to draw attention to the first result that affects the first notice.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect display, or may not display a plurality of types of effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be associated with only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be associated with something other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the first effect display may be necessarily related to the decorative symbol variable display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the first effect display may be that only the first notice may be executed, or may be performed other than the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

Further, as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, there may be a case where only the notice related to the first notice is executed, and the decorative symbol As a first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the variable display, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be executed. Also, as a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, a notice related to the first notice may be executed without fail, or the decorative symbol variable display is executed. As a first result derived when the mini game is started, there may be a case where the notice related to the first notice is not executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is a second result [for example, the display of “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 212(l), etc.],”
The second result is a result that at least suggests the result of the hit/miss judgment [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 212(l) is the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 212(m).
At least suggesting the display of
In the second case, the second result is more easily derived in the mini game than in the first case,
When the second result is derived rather than the first result is derived as the result of the mini game, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the plurality of types of results may include only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

In addition, the second result may be a result that suggests the result of the hit determination, or may be a result that the result of the hit determination is notified in advance.

In the first case, the second result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the second result may be derived in the mini game. Good.

Further, when the first result is derived, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the second result is derived, the jackpot symbol is definitely confirmed. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, in the case of the first case, only the third result [for example, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 229(k), FIG. 229(k1) to FIG. It is a game to derive,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of results is the fourth result [for example, the display of the princess character HM3 and “Daikichi” shown in FIG. 229(k1) and FIG. 232(A6). Is displayed, etc., the clothes worn by the Bancho character are torn]
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit determination (for example, the hit determination of at least one of the hit determination of the special map and the hit determination of the general figure).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give variations to the result of the mini game.

Further, the mini game may be one that can derive only the third result and the fourth result, or one that can derive results other than the third result and the fourth result. .. Further, the mini game may necessarily derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

In addition, the fourth result does not suggest the result of the acceptance/rejection determination and does not notify the result.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 290. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. In addition, it goes without saying that the embodiment described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far.

237 to 290 are diagrams showing, in stages, the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 237 to 290, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Note that, in FIGS. 237 to 290, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is illustrated, but as in the above-described embodiment, a device including a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. May be Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or the POV display described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 238 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 237. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(1), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth design and the second decorative design may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 237(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 237 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of special figure 1 and the second holding number display, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 turned on, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older prizes.

In FIG. 237(1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode. It is displayed in a (circular, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 237 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric choo and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 237(1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variable display of the special symbol is performed in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon→the variation symbol start of the decorative symbol, but this order is mixed Good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. Moreover, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the present pattern change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(3), it is shown that the navigation character YM gives the navigation character advance notice. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, when the navi character advance notice is started, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navi character YM together with the letters “chance”, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(6), the third stop is performed, the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-repetitive symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 237(7), the navigation is performed. The character "CONTINUE" is displayed in the vicinity of the character YM to inform that the pseudo-repeating will be performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(8), after the character "Ikuze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a state in which the second variable display of the decorative pattern by pseudo-linking is started is shown. ing. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 237(9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” indicating the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-link is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(10), the first stop is performed, and the left symbol is "
"Decorative 5" is stopped and displayed. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(11), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 237 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a notice of a sabotani group in which a large number of sabotani characters SBHN cross is given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a high expectation of a big hit. That is, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the Sabohani group notice is given than when the Savohani group notice is not given. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of Sabohani group announcements are provided according to the reliability of the big hit, and the strong Savohani group announcement that the Sabohani character SBHN is the second number and the Savohani character SBHN are the first number. A weak Savohani group notice that is (a number smaller than the second number) may be executed. The sabotani group notice shown in FIG. 237(13) is a strong sabotani group notice. Further, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(14), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 237(15), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237(16), the button advance notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In addition, in this button notice production, a button reception time meter may be displayed to notify the operation valid period.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 237 (17), as shown in FIG. 237 (18), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the image of the up of the lord's character along with a balloon saying "Game. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "Ja" are arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is the weak cut-in image CI1b in which the banjou face is not decorated around the word "Game" in the balloon, and is a big hit compared to the case where the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Suggests that the reliability of is low.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 238 (19) subsequent to FIG. 237 (18), the main character's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and the defeated screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208. , "Decoration 6", which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the middle pattern, is notified that it is planned to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 238(20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result is a loss. After that, as shown in FIG. 238(21), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 240 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example effect shown in FIG. 239. is there. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIG. 239(1) and FIG. 239(2) are the same as FIG. 237(1) and FIG.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Here, the timer advance notice display TM1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal point of less than 1 second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "04:25" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 239(4). .. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character “pseudo ream” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that the pseudo ream may be performed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239(5), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239(5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239(6), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239(6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239(7), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-repetitive symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239(7). After that, as shown in FIG. 239(8), the character "CONTINUE" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to inform that the pseudo-repeating is to be performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239(8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 239(9), when the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "go" to the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started for the second time by pseudo link. After that, as shown in FIG. 239(10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x" indicating the number of times the pseudo variable has started the second variable display of decorative symbols. 2” is displayed. Then, FIG.
The effects shown in 9 (11) to (18) of FIG. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 239(11) to (18) are the same as those in FIGS. 237(10) to (17), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 239(18), as shown in FIG. 240(19) following FIG. 239(18), in the decorative pattern display device 208, together with the up image of the lord's character. , A cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "Game" is displayed in the balloon is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of faces (for example, nine) are arranged around the word "Game" in the balloon, and a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. It suggests that the jackpot is more reliable than it is displayed. In addition, when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the big hit may be surely made (finally, the big hit symbol is finally displayed).

Then, as shown in FIG. 240 (20), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 240(21), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 240 (22), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this way, in this example effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is performed) is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-reaction is not started. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display). It should be noted that, in this example of effect, even if the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, it may be lost.

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 241(1) to 241(4) are similar to FIGS. 239(1) to 239(4), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241(5), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that the pseudo-linking will be performed was a false notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer announcement display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes “00:00” and a certain effect (pseudo-relation) is not performed. In the present embodiment, it is configured that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the true timer advance notice effect is performed than when the false timer advance notice effect is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a fake timer advance notice effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241(6) shows that the timer notice display TM1 has been completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-relation as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 241(7), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the character "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is erased.

Then, the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 241 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM is displayed. “Reach” is displayed in the vicinity to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In this example of the effect, the pseudo-reminder notice by the timer notice effect is a false notice, but it may be said that the notice is functioning as the reach notice because of the shift to the reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 241 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Savohani group announcement is made in which the number of Sabohani SBHN is smaller than that of the above-described strong Savohani group announcement. This weak Savohani group notice is more reliable than it was without the Savohani group notice, but less reliable than when the strong Savohani group notice was given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 241(10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 241 (11) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 241 (11) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 237 (15) to 238 (21), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing, step by step, another display example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 242(1) to 242(6) are the same as FIGS. 239(1) to 239(6), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 242(6), after the "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right pattern, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "00: The third stop is performed at the timing of "00", and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In this way, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 may be completed at the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", or the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed as "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. , Or the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be "00:00" and the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed.

After that, the timer notice display TM1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 242(8), and the character "CONTINUE" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pseudo-repeating will be performed. Note that the character "CONTINUE" may be displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is erased, the timer notice display TM1 may be erased after the character "CONTINUE" is displayed, and the timer notice may be displayed. The timing at which the display TM1 is erased and the timing at which the character "CONTINUE" is displayed may be the same.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (9), the character “Ikuze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the second variable display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started.

Here, as shown in FIG. 242 (7a) to FIG. 242 (9a), after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the pseudo decoration starts the second variable display of decorative symbols. Until then, the timer notice display TM1 may be maintained without being erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 242 (9b), after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer advance notice display is started at the timing when the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link starts. The character "Done" may be displayed on TM1 to notify that the timer advance notice effect has succeeded and the pseudo-relation as a certain effect has started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 242 (9c), after the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer advance notice display is started at the timing at which the second pseudo variable display of the decorative pattern starts to be displayed. It is also possible to display the characters “pseudo-relation” on TM1 to notify that the timer advance notice effect has succeeded and the pseudo-reaction as a certain effect has started. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 242 (9c), by displaying an icon BCHO of the longest face on the timer notice display TM1, it is possible to produce an indication that the pseudo-relation as a certain production has started. Good.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 243(1) to 243(3) are the same as FIGS. 239(1) to 239(3), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243(4), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is performed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "04:25". Further, in this effect example, the character "reach may" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that reach may occur.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243(5), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243(5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243(6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243(6).

After that, as shown in FIG. 243(7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 243(7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 243(8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 243(9) displays the strong sabotani group. A notice will be given. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a strong sabotani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect is shown. In other words, the strong sabotani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain effect. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 243(10) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 243(10) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 239(15) to 240(22), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, in this example of performance, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Savohani group notice is started, the symbol variation display is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Savohani group notice is not started. In the (variable display of the symbol), the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that, in this example of effect, even if the timer notice effect is performed and the strong sabotani group notice is started, it may be lost.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing in stages another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 244(1) to 244(8) are the same as FIGS. 243(1) to 243(8), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 244(8), even if the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. An example without notice is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, the notice that the notice of the strong sabotani group is given is a false notice (gase). .. In other words, it can be said that even when the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, a state in which a certain effect (strong notice of the sabotani group) is not performed is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 244(10), "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the super reach will be developed.

Subsequently, the effects shown in FIGS. 244(11) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 244(11) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 243(11) to (17), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that, in this example of the effect, an example in which the timer notification effect indicated by the timer notification display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if a certain effect is not started is shown, but it may be lost.

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 245(1) to 245(8) are the same as FIGS. 243(1) to 243(8), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 245(8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 245(9), the weak sabotani group notice is displayed. Is done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that a notification (weak Sabohani group notification) different from a certain effect is given as a result of the timer notification effect. In other words, it can be said that when the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, it is shown that a different effect (weak Savohani group notice) from a certain effect (strong Savohani group notice) is performed. This timer advance notice effect can also be called a fake timer advance notice effect.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245(10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 245(11) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 245 (11) to (17) are the same as those in FIGS. 243 (11) to (17), so description thereof will be omitted. Note that this example of performance also shows an example in which the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if an effect different from a certain effect is started, but it may be lost. is there.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 247 shows step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 246. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 246(1) and 246(2) are the same as FIGS. 237(1) and 237(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, a timer advance notice effect is started by the timer advance notice display TM1A being frame-in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode indicating that the possibility of false timer advance notice is lower than that of the default display mode. In addition, when the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown may be executed without fail. Further, when the timer advance notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than that when the timer advance notice display TM1 of the default display mode is displayed (the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. May be done). "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 3 seconds after the countdown is started.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1A is started, and "00:24" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 246(4). .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "Hold change", and the display mode of the hold icon may change as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A. It has been suggested. That is, it is indicated that this timer advance notice effect may be a prefetch advance notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(5), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1A is completed, and the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1A becomes "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 246(6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is informed that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 246(7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and the prefetch display mode is set. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notification effect by the timer notification display TM1A is shown. In addition, the character “first hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that there is a high possibility of a big hit at the next symbol variation display. In addition, the character display of "first hot" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "first hot" is performed. Alternatively, the character string “first hot” may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon which is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(8), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(9), the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 246(11), temporary stop due to shaking fluctuations. After that, as shown in FIG. 246(12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character “previously hot” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(14), a state where the navigation character YM gives the navigation character notice is shown. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, when the navigation character advance notice is started, the character “Hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(15), the timer notice display TM1A is displayed, showing that the timer notice effect has started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, in this example of performance, the timer display time displayed when the countdown is started is as long as "20:00", and the reliability of the big hit is significantly higher than when the short time is displayed. It is also suggested that it is increasing. The countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1A is then started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(16), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246(16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246(17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246(17).

After that, as shown in FIG. 246 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" near the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 246(18).

After that, as shown in FIG. 247 (19) following FIG. 246 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper right corner. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "15:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247(19). Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1A is overlapped by the character SBHN of Sabohani forming the notice of the strong Sabohani group. At the timing shown in FIG. 247 (19), in addition to the timer notice display TM1A, the second timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer advance notice displays are displayed in the timer advance notice effect is shown. The newly displayed timer preview display TM1 is in the default display mode, and "5:00" is displayed in this timer preview display TM1, and 5 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Then, it suggests that a certain production is started. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 displayed later is shorter than the timer notice display TM1A displayed earlier, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 displayed later is performed. However, it is completed before the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A which is started earlier. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later is consumed first. The countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is then started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247(20), while the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it may develop into super reach. It has been informed. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "14:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247(20). Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later continues to count down, and "4:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247(20).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 247 (21), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "10:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247(21). In addition, the timer advance notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later continues to count down, and "1:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247(20).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 247(22), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later is “0:00” and the countdown is completed, the button notice effect is started and the button image is displayed. It is shown that 136a is displayed in the default mode. As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 that is started to be displayed later is shown to be consumed before the timer advance notice display TM1A that is started to be displayed first. In this example of the effect, a certain effect that is performed as a result of the countdown of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 that is started to be displayed later is not the start of the button notice effect itself, but the operation of the effect button 136 in the button notice effect. This is an announcement effect that is started as a result of being performed. In this example effect, it is an announcement that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, but it is an announcement that the button announcement effect itself is generated. May be.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 247(23), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 247(24). On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 that has already completed the countdown continues to display "0:00" until the effect button 136 is operated and the cut-in image is displayed. It may be deleted when the countdown is completed, "0:00" is displayed and the button advance notice effect is started. In this example of performance, the notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 that is started afterwards is a false (gase) notice. It can be said that a certain situation is shown. Alternatively, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is shown. In other words, when the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”, it is shown that an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed. It can be said that the timer advance notice effect is a fake timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247(25), a state in which the timer advance notice display TM1 which was started to be displayed later is erased is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1A which has been started to be displayed first, the countdown continues, and "5:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247(25).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (26), the main character's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, a middle symbol is stopped and displayed. The "decoration 6" of the schedule is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". In the timer advance notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "3:77" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247(26).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (27) shows that the display position of the timer notice display TM1A moves from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1A is still counting down, and "2:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247 (27).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (28), it is shown that the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is temporarily stopped due to the fluctuation. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1A is still counting down, and "1:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 247(28).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 247 (29), the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes “0:00” while the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern continues, and the countdown is completed. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (30 ), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1A is erased, and the character BC3, who has broken clothes, appears with the character “Resurrection” and the navigation character YM. An exclamation mark is displayed in the vicinity, showing that the character of the Bancho is surprised to appear. Then, three decorative patterns of "decoration 5" are displayed, and it is notified that all three "decoration 5" are a big hit. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a revival effect is informed that a big hit is given as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer predictive display by the timer predictive display TM1A.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 247(31), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 247 (32 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 and the display of the characters "Yatteze" are also deleted.

As described above, in this example of effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the revival effect is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is performed) is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the revival effect is not started. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

In addition, in this effect example, when the timer notice display is displayed in the high reliability display mode, the time initially displayed on the timer display is set to "3:00" or "20:00". When displaying the notice display in the high-reliability display mode or in the special display mode, the time to be displayed first in the timer display is first displayed in the timer display when the timer notice display is displayed in the default display mode. The time (second time) may be set to be longer than the time (first time) displayed on the. As a result, depending on the display mode of the timer notice display, it may be possible to give an expectation to a certain notice display to be executed.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 248(1) and 248(2) are the same as FIGS. 237(1) and 237(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(4), a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "Hold change", and as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1, the hold is displayed. It is suggested that the display mode of the icon may change. That is, it is indicated that this timer advance notice effect may be a prefetch advance notice. On the other hand, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains "03:00".

After that, as shown in FIG. 248(5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the state where the timer notice display TM1 is erased is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that the display mode of the hold icon is changed is a false notification. In other words, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain effect (a change icon display mode change effect) is not performed. It can be said that the situation is shown.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(6) shows that the timer notice display TM1 has been completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(7), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, at this time, the character of "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(8), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248(9), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 248(10), temporary stop due to shaking fluctuations. Then, as shown in FIG. 248(11), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 249 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 250 shows step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 249. It is a figure, and FIG. 251 is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 250 in steps. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 249(1) and 249(2) are the same as FIGS. 237(1) and 237(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are respectively frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and the two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. Note that three or more timer announcement effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R are default display modes. In the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, suggesting that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. Further, "45:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 45 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. doing. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R start counting down at the same time, a certain notice effect is generated both when 10 seconds and 45 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Have been suggested to be initiated. Here, a certain notice effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and a certain notice effect that may be started when 45 seconds have elapsed may be the same, May be different. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has a long face icon BCHO added, which suggests that a strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a notice effect. .. In addition, the fact that the reliability of the big hit is increased may be notified by adding the icon BCHO of the face of this length. It should be noted that multiple types of icons added to the timer notice display may be prepared, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of the added icon, or a type of certain notice effect that may be performed. May be different.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(4), the timer advance notice display TM1L displayed on the left side displays “9: 25" is displayed, and "44:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(5), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are continuously counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(5), "9:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "44:00" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(6), "8:75" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "43:75" is displayed.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(7), the characters "Open the right" are displayed near the navigation character YM, It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(7), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "39:00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(8), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, the word "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(8), "3:67" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "38:67" is displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "effect activation" are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. Has been done. As a result, in the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is notified that a certain effect is promised when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this example of production, the appearance of the princess character HME gives a notice that a pseudo-relation will be performed as a certain production. That is, in this example of production, the princess character HME can be referred to as a pseudo-rend notice item (may be referred to as a "predictor icon"). At this time, the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added, "41:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "1:67" is displayed, and the countdown is continuing here as well. The timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side may not be added. In the present embodiment, the countdown is performed by the timer advance notice effect in this way, and it may be possible to excite the effect by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until "0:00" is reached).

After that, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(10), the characters "preparing for production" are displayed above the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, and pseudo-linking is performed. It has been announced in advance. In addition, the characters “pseudo-repeating” are displayed near the navigation character YM as well, and a notice is given here that the pseudo-repeating will also be performed. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(10), "1:33" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:33" is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(11) shows that the countdown in the timer notice effect is continuing. In addition, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is visually displayed that the princess character HME is added, that is, the pseudo-reminder item is displayed, so that the pseudo-ream is performed. It may be easier to understand. In this way, in this example of performance, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(11), "10:00" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:00" is displayed.

After that, the countdown in the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R is continuously performed, and the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1L displayed on the left side becomes “0:00” at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (12). When the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6". In the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "40:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249(12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 249(13), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is erased, and the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Here, after the timer notice display TM1L is erased, the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation may be started, or the timer after the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started. The advance notice display TM1L may be deleted, or the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link may be started at the timing when the timer advance notice display TM1L is deleted. In addition, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed, and the display of the icon notifies that the pseudo-relation has been performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "39:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249(13).

In this way, in this example effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is performed) is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-reaction is not started. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(14), a new timer notice display TM1N is started to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen, and a state in which a new timer notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the newly displayed timer advance notice display TM1N is the default display mode. For example, a frame-in animation is used to frame-in from the left side of the display screen. On the timer notice display TM1N, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this example of performance, the newly displayed timer advance notice display TM1N starts counting down after the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side where the countdown was first started, but the timer advance notice display displayed on the right side. The countdown will be completed earlier than TM1R. In the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "38:15" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 249(14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(15), the timer display countdown is performed in each of the timer advance notice displays TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 249(15), "9:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and "37:" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. 40” is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1N displayed on the left side started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (16) shows that the second mini game has started. When the mini game is started, in the same manner as described above, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. BXR and left and right are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, the characters "Select with the cross key" are displayed near the navigation character YM. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(16), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side displays “9:00”. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "37:15" is displayed.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (17). , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(17), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side displays “8:75”. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "36:90" is displayed.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (18), the characters "Open right" are displayed near the navigation character YM, It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 249(18), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "32:15" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(19) subsequent to FIG. 249(18), the effect production of the mini game is started, and the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center and is selected. The left treasure box image BXL that was not present is deleted. Then, a character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Further, the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 250(19), "3:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "31:82" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(20), the character BBA of the old woman appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. ing. As a result, it is notified that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is a false timer notice effect. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 250(20), "1:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "29:82" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(21), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the state that the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is erased is shown. In other words, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1N displayed on the left side, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect will be performed is a false notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer announcement display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes “00:00” and a certain effect is not displayed. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues counting down, and "29:49" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250(21). Further, “×2” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the number of times the decorative symbols are variably displayed by pseudo-linking is twice. In addition, when the princess character HME is displayed, the display of “×2” may not be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(22), the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-relation as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues the countdown, and "27:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250(22).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (23), "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol to form a reach state, and "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Then, it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a strong sabotani group notice is being given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper right corner. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is moved from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. Then, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1R is overlapped with the character SBOHN of Savohani forming the notice of the strong Savohani group. Note that the strong Savohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed, or the strong Savohani group notice may be started before the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong sabotani group warning may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer warning display TM1R is completed. Further, the strong Savohani group advance notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R has been started, or the movement of the display position of the timer advance notice display TM1R has been started after the start of the strong Savohani group advance notice. Alternatively, the strong sabotani group warning may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer warning display TM1R is started. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1R is still counting down, as shown in FIG.
At the timing of 50 (24), "25:25" is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250(25), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and “24:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250(25).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (26), the display screen is darkened, and a state in which a blackout effect in which lightning crosses is performed is shown. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (26).

When the blackout effect is finished, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (27) shows that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the character "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the icon of the bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, it is shown that the long-faced face icon BCHO added to the timer notice display TM1R moves to the Amida field and is located in the middle of the three options. That is, the display of the Bancho-faced icon BCHO added to the timer notice display can be said to be a notice display that the mini game by Amida lottery will be started. Further, a character "SELECT" is displayed below the Amida field, and prompts the operator to operate the operation key unit 137 to select the buncho face icon BCHO from any of the three options. .. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (27).

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (28), the bancho of the bancho located in the middle of the three options in the Amida field is displayed. The face icon BCHO moves to the right of the three options. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "18:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (28).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected and the operation effective period has elapsed, the timing of the lottery in the table of FIG. The production is started. At this time, at each of the three end points of the Amida field, either "o" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, “x” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “x” is displayed at the center end point, and “○” is displayed at the right end point. ing. It should be noted that the display number of “◯” may be two or more, or “◯” may be displayed at all the end points. At this time as well, the timer advance notice display TM1R continues to count down, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (29).

Then, as shown in FIG. 250(30), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the buncho-faced icon BCHO is moving along the line in accordance with the rule of the mid lottery. It should be noted that the timer advance notice display TM1R is still counting down, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250(30).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (31) shows that the long-length face icon BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this production example, the icon BCHO of the bancho's face reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the character "strong cut-in confirmed" is displayed, the mission succeeds, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It is informed that the CI 1a has been confirmed to be displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (31).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 250 (32), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is restarted, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area remain hidden. Then, a character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Further, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and the reliability of the big hit is improved. There is. Further, in the timer notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (32).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (33), the state in which the button notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode is shown. At this time, in the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RA is a timer notice effect related to this button effect, and is a timer notice effect about the strong cut-in image CI1a being displayed as a result of the button effect. .. The timer notice display TM1RA which has become "0:00" is maintained until the effect button 136 is operated to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, but after the countdown is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. May be deleted before is displayed.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (34), as shown in FIG. 250 (35), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. After that, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 250 (36), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a winning screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (37) following FIG. 250 (36), the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. It is shown. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (38), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the timer advance notice effect is performed to start the pseudo-relation, the timer advance notice effect is further performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed is shown. However, it is structured so that it may be lost.

FIG. 252 is a step-by-step diagram showing another example of the effect that continues from FIG. 250(24). The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIG. 252 (25a) to FIG. 252 (28a) are the same as FIG. 250 (25) to (28), but in this effect example, a countdown display is displayed in the blackout effect in FIG. 252 (26a). The difference is that the timer advance notice display TM1R is temporarily hidden.

When the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected and the operation effective period has elapsed, the effect of the lottery lottery is produced at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (29a). Be started. In this example of performance, at this time, three icons are displayed at three end points of the Amida field. Specifically, a panda icon indicating that the mini game has failed is displayed at the left end of the three end points, and a banquet icon indicating that the mini game has succeeded at the center end point. Is displayed, and at the end point on the right side, a Savohani icon indicating that the mini game has been extremely successful is displayed. Note that there may be no panda icon, two panda icons, or all panda icons. In addition, there may be a case where there is no single length icon, two icons may be provided, or all of them may be length icons. In addition, there may be no Sabohani icon, two icons, or all of them may be Sabohani icons. Even at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1R continues to count down, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (29a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the longest face moves along the line in accordance with the rules of the lottery. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1R is still counting down, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (30a).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (31a) shows that the buncho face icon BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this example of performance, the buncho's face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where the Sabohani icon is displayed, and the word "strongest cut-in confirmed" is displayed, making a great success in the mission and It is notified that the cut-in image CI1v has been confirmed to be displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (31a).

Then, as shown in FIG. 252 (32a), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is restarted, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area remain hidden. Then, a character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Further, it is shown that the display form of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display form to the high reliability display form (timer notice display TM1RA), showing that the reliability of the big hit is improved. There is. Further, in this example of performance, the character "strongest cut-in in preparation" is displayed together with the character Sabohani below the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in advance. I am informing you. In the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (32a).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (33a) shows that the button advance notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, in the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display becomes "0:00", which shows that the countdown is completed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 252 (34a), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 252 (35a). At this time, the display of the character Sabohani and the character "preparing for the strongest cut-in" is erased. The strongest cut-in image CI1v is a display mode in which a balloon image in which the character "Game" is arranged is included in the balloon along with an image of the character's close-up, and is surrounded by a large number of Sabohani characters. It is a cut-in image. When this strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the jackpot pattern is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the big hit may be determined. In this effect example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RA, the strongest cut-in image CI1v, which is a notice effect more advantageous than the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, is displayed. The situation is shown. Here, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed as a certain notice effect or may be displayed as a notice effect different from the certain notice effect. After the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 252 (36a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (37a), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is resumed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (38a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 253 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 253(1) and 253(2) are the same as FIGS. 237(1) and 237(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by the timer advance notice display TM1 being framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is not started, and the timer display remains "10:00". It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect indicating that pseudo-relation may be performed as a certain advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(5), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the letters "Open to the right" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(7). It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(8), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, the word "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “pseudo-run stock” are displayed, and the mission of the mini game is achieved, and the pseudo-run is completed. It will be announced in advance that As a result, in the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM1, it is informed that the completion of the countdown of the timer display is confirmed to be performed as a certain announcement effect. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet. In this effect example, the result of the mini game is derived and displayed before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started.

After that, the mini game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(10), the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display form to the high reliability display form (timer notice display TM1A). It is shown that the jackpot reliability is improved. That is, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is stepped up by the success of the mini game. In addition, a princess character HME as a notice item is displayed at the lower left of the display screen, and a notice is given that the pseudo-link will be performed. That is, in this example of performance, the advance notice item is displayed when the mini-game succeeds. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1A remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 253 (11), the temporary design is caused by the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". Shutdown takes place. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1A is continuously displayed even while the symbol is being fixedly displayed, and the princess character HME as the advance notice item is also displayed. That is, these displays will be displayed over the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1A and the display of the princess character HME are displayed as a pre-read advance notice of the pseudo continuous production. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1A remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1A remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1A is started, and "06:44" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1A at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (14). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 253(15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253(16), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 253(16).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", and the middle symbol is replayed as a pseudo continuous symbol. It is shown that the symbol RP is stopped and displayed. After that, the second variation display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo-linking in the manner described above.

In this way, in this example effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is performed) is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-reaction is not started. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

FIG. 254 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 253. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIG.
54(1) to (8) are the same as those in FIG. 253(1) to (8), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 254(9), the character BBA of the old woman appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “Uhihi” are displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. .. As a result, it is notified that the timer announcement effect related to the timer announcement display TM1 is a false timer announcement effect. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254(10), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain presentation effect is performed is a false (geek) notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started to show that a certain effect is not performed.

Then, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as described above, and as shown in FIG. -Ornament 6-Ornament 6 is temporarily stopped due to fluctuations in the combination of decorative patterns. Then, as shown in FIG. 254 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. As described above, in this example of performance, the mini game has failed, and the pre-reading notice by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, so the process is terminated midway, and as a result, the pre-reading notice is not issued. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254(14), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (15), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254(16), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 254(17), temporary stop due to fluctuation of movement. After that, the combination of the defective decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed.

In this example of performance, even if the mini-game fails and the pre-reading notice by the timer notice production is a false pre-announcement, there may be a big hit in the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

FIG. 255 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 256 shows step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 255. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIG. 255(1) and FIG. 255(2) are the same as FIG. 237(1) and FIG.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255(3), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255(4) shows that the timer advance notice effect is started during the period when the mini game is started and the selection operation by the player is accepted. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by the timer advance notice display TM1 being framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 255(5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 has not started, and the timer display remains "10:00".

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (6) displays the characters "Open right" near the navigation character YM, It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, the word "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (8), the icon of the face of the leader BCF appears from the right treasure chest image BXR, and the character "strong cut-in confirmed" is displayed, so that the mini game mission is achieved. , It is announced in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 255 (9), a temporary variation due to a fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" Shutdown takes place. At this time, the longest face icon BCF is reduced and displayed (stock) in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. With this stock of BCF's face icon BCF,
A pre-reading notice of the strong cut-in image CI1a will be given. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (10), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even while the symbol is being confirmed and the icon BCF of the bancho face as the notice item is also displayed. .. That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 and the display of the face length icon BCF are displayed as a prefetch advance notice. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (12), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and a notice display mode is displayed. The change of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed by, for example, the pending change animation, but the display mode may be changed by the switching display without performing the pending change animation. After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (13), the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "9:95" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (14). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (15), the disappearance animation is started during the display of the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain presentation effect is performed is a false (geek) notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer announcement display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes “00:00” and a certain effect is not displayed. Further, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice display TM1 which is a false notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays is shown. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect related to the fact that the pseudo notice is performed as a certain notice effect, that is, the timer notice notice display TM1 is erased so that the pseudo notice is generated. It may be recognized that it will not be done. It should be noted that before the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, it may be possible to perform a gazed effect to that effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (16), the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (17), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (19) following FIG. 255 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “reach” is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. It On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the strong sabotani group notice is given. Further, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 256(21), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. Here, since the buncho face icon BCF is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display of “SP development” overlaps the buncho face icon BCF, and the buncho face icon BCF is displayed. It is considered to be more difficult to see than when not.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (22), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (23) shows that the button advance notice effect is started and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256(24), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as shown in FIG. 256(25). The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a corresponds to the fact that the notice is given by the long-faced face icon BCF displayed near the navigation character YM. That is, it can be said that the result of the mini game is a look-ahead notice of the notice effect executed in the later-described symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is related to the result of the mini game and is not related to the timer advance notice effect started at the same time. That is, it is shown that the mini game and the timer advance notice effect are related to each other, but in reality, only the mini game of the strong cut-in image CI1a is the true advance notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (26 ), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a winning screen is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (27), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (28 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In addition, in this example of performance, when the icon BCF of the longest face appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mini game, the icon BCF of the longest face appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a appears. Although it is configured so that the big hit symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily than when is not displayed, it may be lost even if the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Good.

FIG. 257 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 257(1) and 257(2) are the same as FIGS. 237(1) and 237(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257(3) shows that the timer notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the longest face icon BCHO is added to the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is likely to be displayed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "0:24" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 257(4). .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of "Hold change". As a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is indicated that this timer advance notice effect may be a prefetch advance notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257(5), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 257(6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is informed that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 257(7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and the prefetch display mode is set. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is shown. In addition, the character “first hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that there is a high possibility of a big hit at the next symbol variation display.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257(8), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257(9), the second stop is performed and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 257(10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 257(11), temporary stop due to fluctuation of movement. After that, as shown in FIG. 257(12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols with the defect of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character “previously hot” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 258 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 257. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 258(1) to 258(2) are the same as FIGS. 257(1) to 257(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, this example of effect is different from the effect shown in FIG. 257(3) in that the timer notice display TM1 is not added with the longest face icon BCHO. This suggests that it is less likely that a certain notice effect will be displayed, as compared with the case where the bancho-faced icon BCHO is added.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "0:24" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 258(4). .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of "Hold change". As a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is indicated that this timer advance notice effect may be a prefetch advance notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258(5), the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is "0:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 258(6), the word "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is informed that the display mode of h11 may change.

However, as shown in FIG. 258(7), in this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed from the default display mode. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect is a fake timer advance effect that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer advance effect display by the timer advance notification display TM1 is not performed. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the timer advance notice effect was a false effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258(8), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258(9), the second stop is performed and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. At this time, the character "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 258(10), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 258(11), temporary stop due to fluctuation of swing. After that, as shown in FIG. 258 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character “previously hot” displayed near the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 259 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 259(1) to 259(6) are the same as FIGS. 241(1) to 241(6), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

After the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased in FIG. 259(6), in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 259(7), the erased timer notice display TM1 is restored and redisplayed. It is shown. In addition, at this time, the icon BCHO of the bancho's face is added, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-relation as a certain notice effect is displayed. That is, it is shown that the disappeared timer notice display TM1 is not the timer notice display TM1 related to the false timer notice effect but the true timer notice display TM1. It is also shown that the timer notice display TM1 is stepped up when the timer notice display TM1 is re-displayed. From another perspective, it can be said that a plurality of timer advance notice effects targeting the same effect are being performed. Here, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed again, execution of a certain notice effect (pseudo-relation) performed as a result of the timer notice effect may be confirmed. In addition, the characters "pseudo-renka" are displayed again near the navigation character YM. At the timing shown in FIG. 259(7), "03:00" is displayed as the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1, and it is informed that the pseudo link may be performed after 3 seconds.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259(8), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259(8).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259(9), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "01:23" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259(9).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 259(10), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259(10). After that, as shown in FIG. 259(11), the character "CONTINUE" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pseudo-repeating will be performed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 259(11).

Then, as shown in FIG. 259(12), when the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "go" to the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo link. Then, as shown in FIG. 259(13), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x" indicates the number of times the pseudo-linking starts the second variable display of the decorative symbol. 2” is displayed.

In this way, in this example effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is performed) is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-reaction is not started. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 261 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIG. 260(1) to FIG. 260(2) are the same as FIG. 237(1) to FIG.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "25:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 25 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In this effect example, a timer notice effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission effect has been started to show that the expectation of a big hit increases dramatically by developing into super reach. It is also shown to be present. In this example of the effect, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. Therefore, it may be possible to expect that the strong cut-in image CI1a appears by shifting to the super reach.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "23:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 260(4). .. That is, it is shown that two seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(5), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260(5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 260(7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260(7).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 260(8) to 260(10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal reach is performed, and the state that the middle symbol is changing at a low speed is shown. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260(10).

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(11) shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. The strong sabotani group notice is a notice that the jackpot is highly reliable, and will have a high probability of transitioning to super reach. Therefore, due to the occurrence of the notice of the strong sabotani group, the expectation for the mission achievement may increase dramatically. In this production example, at this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 260 (11), the character SBHN of Sabohani that constitutes the notice of the strong Sabohani group overlaps the timer notice display TM1, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the character SBHN of Savohani. May be. Further, the timer notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (11).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(12), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. It may be recognized that this will accomplish the mission. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 260 (13), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and urges attention to the countdown on the timer notice display TM1. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260(14), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is being performed. As a result, it is notified that the display mode of the timer notification display TM1 changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit and the execution probability of a certain notification effect are improved. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed (degraded) to a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit and the execution probability of a certain notice effect decrease.

Then, as shown in FIG. 260(15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display). TM1B) is changed and step-up is shown, and the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved. The timer advance notice display TM1B in this special display mode is a display mode in which the jackpot is more reliable than the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode, that is, when the timer advance notice display in the special display mode is displayed, it is high. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the timer notice display in the reliability display mode is displayed. In addition, when the timer advance notice display of the special display mode is displayed, the big hit may be determined. Furthermore, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has a long face icon BCHO added thereto to give notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (15).

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (16). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display, and therefore, in this example of the effect, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

Then, as shown in FIG. 260 (17), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (18), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 261 (19) following FIG. 260 (18), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 262 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 262(1) to 262(9) are the same as FIGS. 260(1) to 260(9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at “decoration 6” during normal reach, and the transition to super reach is not performed, and the decoration of the “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is lost. It is informed that the display will be stopped by a combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the transition to the super reach will not be performed. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 262(10).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (11), since the transition to the super reach is not performed, it is shown that the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. To be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain presentation effect is performed is false (gaseous). In other words, it means that the mission was not completed before the timer advance notice display TM1 became “00:00”, so that it was erased in the middle of the countdown and a certain effect was not shown. it can. In addition, the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a strong cut-in image CI as a certain advance notice effect.
There is a case where it is recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed because it is a timer advance notice effect regarding the display of 1a, that is, the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 262(12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 262(13), in the decorative pattern display device 208, “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is displayed. The temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "," and then, as shown in FIG. 262 (14), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the decorative pattern of the "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. Will be confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In addition, in this example of performance, it may be a big hit even when the timer advance notice production is finished without developing to super reach.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261, and FIG. 264 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 263. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 263(1) and 263(2) are the same as FIGS. 260(1) and 260(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. On the timer notice display TM1, "5:00" is displayed, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In this effect example, this point is different from the effect shown in FIG. 260(3). In this effect example, a timer notice effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission effect has been started to show that the expectation of a big hit increases dramatically by developing into super reach. It is also shown to be present. In this example of the effect, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. Therefore, it may be possible to expect that the strong cut-in image CI1a appears by shifting to the super reach. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 263(4) to (13) are performed. Note that the production examples shown in FIGS. 263(4) to (14) are the same as those in FIGS. 260(4) to 260(4) except that the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains “5:00”. The description is omitted because it is similar to FIG.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). It is shown that it has been changed and stepped up, and that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. Furthermore, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has a long face icon BCHO added thereto to give notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, the timer notice display TM1 has not yet started the countdown, and remains “5:00” at the timing shown in FIG. 263(15).

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1B is started, and "4:11" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1B at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (16). .. In this way, the timer advance notice effect in this effect example does not start the countdown of the timer display when started, but starts the countdown of the timer display when the mission is achieved.

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (17). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display, and therefore, in this example of the effect, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in association with each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 263 (18), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (19) subsequent to FIG. 263 (18), a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” It is shown. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 264(20), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 265 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 263 to 264. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 265(1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 263(1) to 263(9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 265(10), the middle pattern is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the transition to super reach is not performed, and the decoration of the "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is informed that the display will be stopped by a combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the transition to the super reach will not occur.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 265(11), since it does not shift to the super reach, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. To be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain notification effect is performed is false. In other words, the display of the timer notice display TM1 was started, but the mission was not completed before the countdown was started, so the display was erased before the countdown was started, and a certain effect was not performed. It can be said that it is shown. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect, that is, by deleting the timer advance notice display TM1. It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 265(12), after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 265(13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is displayed. A temporary stop due to a fluctuation is performed in a combination of decorative patterns of "," and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 265 (14), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a decorative pattern with a loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" Will be confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 266 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 to 261, and FIG. 267 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 266. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 266(1) to 146(14) are the same as FIGS. 260(1) to 260(14), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 266(15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display form of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display form to the special display form (timer notice display TM1B). , The step-up is shown, and the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved. Furthermore, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has a long face icon BCHO added thereto to give notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, this example of effect is different from the effect shown in FIG. 260 (15) in that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1B is reset to "5:00". At this time, the countdown of the timer display has not started, and the display of "5:00" is maintained. As described above, in this effect example, the time in the timer display is reset at the timing when the mission is achieved and the display mode of the timer notification display is changed, so that the change in the display mode of the timer notification display can be easily understood. ing. Also, after the mission is completed, the timer advance notice display is displayed in such a manner that the display manner is stepped up to a highly reliable display manner, and the timer indication in the timer notice display is reset to an appropriate time again. It can be said that

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1B is started, and "4:32" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1B at the timing shown in FIG. 266 (16). .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 266(17) to 267(20) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 266(17) to 267(20) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 260(16) to 261(19), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 269 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 268. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 268(1) to 269(9) are the same as FIGS. 239(1) to 239(9), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268(10), in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 due to the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1, for example, as shown in FIG. 241(5) and described above. The appearance of the disappearing animation is shown.

However, as shown in FIG. 268(11), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not erased, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and "22:35" is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 268(10) is not the disappearing animation but actually the timer advance notice addition animation which is the same animation as the disappearing animation. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer advance notice effect is started using the same timer advance notice display TM1. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation in which the timer display is added in the timer advance display is the same as a part of the animation in which the timer display is erased. Note that the timer advance notice animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variation display of the decorative design is being performed by the pseudo link. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268(12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 268(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268(14).

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 268(15) to (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. Note that the timer notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268(17).

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (18) shows that a strong sabotani group notice is given. In this production example, at this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 268(18).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (19) following FIG. 268 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously displayed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been announced that it will develop into a super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and “12:90” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269(19).

Then, as shown in FIG. 269(20), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and urges attention to the countdown on the timer notice display TM1. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and “8:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269(20).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269(21), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is being performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is the same as that of the disappearing animation described above. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display is changed is the same as a part of the animation in which the timer notice display is erased. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 269 (22), in the decorative pattern display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display. The mode is changed from the mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B), and the state of stepping up is shown, showing that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved. In addition, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed is provided with a long face face icon BCHO to give notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Note that the timer notice display TM1 is counting down, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 269(22).

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1B becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269(23). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1B in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect about the strong cut-in image CI1a being displayed as a certain advance notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 269 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (25), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed in a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 269 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hit of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this example of performance, the timer advance notice effect is performed to start the pseudo-relation, and further, the timer advance notice effect is performed to display the strong cut-in image CI1a and finally the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. Even if the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-relation is started, and the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost.

FIG. 270 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 268 to 269, and FIG. 271 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 270. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 270(1) to 270(9) are the same as FIGS. 268(1) to 268(9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 270(10), the disappearance animation described above is performed to erase the timer notice display TM1 due to the completion of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1. There is. This disappearing animation has the same display mode as that of the disappearing animation shown in FIG. 268(10) and described above. As a result, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether the timer notice display is continuously displayed or erased.

As shown in FIG. 270(11), in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variation display of the decorative design is being performed by the pseudo link.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270(13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 270(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 270 (15) to (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (18) shows that the weak Savohani group notice is given. In this production example, at this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (19) subsequent to FIG. 270 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously displayed, and “SP development” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been announced that it will develop into a super reach.

Then, as shown in FIG. 271 (20), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the type of super reach is informed, which is different from the effect shown in FIG. 269(20).

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (22), the main character's shrine is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The "decoration 6" of the schedule is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

Then, as shown in FIG. 271 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. Then, as shown in FIG. 271 (24), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the defective decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 272 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 272(1) to 272(4) are the same as FIGS. 241(1) to 241(4), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272(5), the timer notice addition animation that is the same effect as the disappearance animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice addition animation is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 similarly to the disappearance animation. The effect is displayed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that the pseudo-link will be performed may be a false notification. As a result, the player may be able to think that the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice because the timer notice display TM1 is deleted.

However, as shown in FIG. 272(6), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not erased, but the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and “20:00” is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is revealed that the animation performed in FIG. 272(5) is not the disappearing animation but the timer advance notice addition animation which is the same animation as the disappearing animation. In this way, in this example of performance, it may be possible to recognize that another certain performance will be performed by performing addition of the timer display while predicting that pseudo-relation will be performed as a certain performance. is there. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation in which the timer display is added in the timer notice display and a part of the animation in which the timer notice display is deleted are the same. Note that the timer advance notice animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272(7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, a character "Hot" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which notifies that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the timer notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272(7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272(8), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 272(9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272(9).

After that, as shown in FIG. 272(10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is being given. In this production example, at this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "13:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272(10).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272(11), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "10:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272(11).

Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 is still counting down, and "4:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 272(12).

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272(13). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

In this example of effect, addition of the timer display is performed, timer advance notice effect related to the timer display after the addition is performed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, resulting in a big hit. May be.

However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (14), the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, a defeated screen is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, the middle symbol stops. The "decoration 6" to be displayed is displayed, and it is informed that the "decoration 5"-decoration 6-decoration 5 combination is planned to be stopped and displayed. As described above, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, even if the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect, the display result may be lost.

Then, as shown in FIG. 272(15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (16), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 273 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 274 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 273. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 273(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 273 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed, and the three hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three hold icons h11 to h13 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) is displayed in the variable icon display area. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are frame-in animations to frame-in from the left and right sides of the display screen, respectively, and the two timer advance notice effects are simultaneously started. Of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is the default display mode, but the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is the special display mode. Both the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side show "03:00" as the timer display, and a certain notice is given when 3 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It suggests that the performance will start. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has a bancho-faced icon BCHO added, which suggests that a certain notice effect is likely to be performed. Further, neither of these timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB has started the countdown of the timer display, and the timer display is maintained at "03:00".

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(4) shows that the mini game is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Then, in the approximate center of the display screen, the character "strong timer is activated when princess appears" is displayed and the princess character appears from the treasure box, so that an advantageous timer notice of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is informed that the timer announcement effect will be performed by the timer announcement display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the display. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. In addition, the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(6) displays the characters "Open right" near the navigation character YM, It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. In addition, the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, the word "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. In addition, the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(8), the character BBA of the old woman appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "bad" was displayed, indicating that the mini game mission failed. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game has failed. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(9), the character "Kocchija" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right side of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, which is an advantageous timer notice display. The timer display selection animation for erasing the timer notice display TM1RB displayed in is started and the timer notice display TM1RB is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is not performed. .. Note that both of the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may be erased so that the timer advance notice effect relating to any of the timer advance notice displays may not be performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(10), the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is completely erased, and only the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Thereafter, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 273(11), a temporary change due to a fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" Shutdown takes place. After that, as shown in FIG. 273 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1L is continuously displayed even while the symbol is being confirmed and displayed. That is, the timer notice display TM1L will be displayed over the next symbol variation display. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1L is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The moving icon is moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 moves to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1L is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(14), the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1L is started and the state of the timer notice display TM1L being erased is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that, due to the failure in the mini game, a certain notice effect is not given to any of the two timer notice displays, which is a false notice.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273 (15) shows that the timer notice display TM1 has been completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(16), the first stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(17), the second stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 273(18), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 274(19) following FIG. 273(18). In 274 (20), a temporary stop is performed due to the fluctuation of the swing, and then, as shown in FIG. 274 (20), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a fixed decorative combination of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5" is fixedly displayed. To be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the example of the effect, the mini game fails, any timer notice effect ends halfway, and the lost symbol is finally displayed, but it may be a big hit.

FIG. 275 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 273 to 274, and FIG. 276 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 275. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 275(1) to 275(7) are the same as FIGS. 273(1) to 273(7), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 275(8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters "Expectation" are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. This is different from the effect shown in FIG. 273(8). In addition, the character “Chance” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game has been successful. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 275(9), the character "Kocchija" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the timer notice which is not the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side of the display is erased and the timer notice display TM1L is erased is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed. Therefore, compared with the effect shown in FIG. 273(9), the timer advance notice effect that is more likely to execute a certain effect is executed, thereby improving the expectation for the execution of the certain effect. May be possible. It should be noted that both of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may not be erased, and the timer notice effect relating to any of the timer notice displays may be performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 275(10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is completely deleted, and only the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side remains "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 275 (11), it is a temporary variation due to the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". Stopping is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even while the symbol is fixedly displayed. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB is displayed over the next symbol variation display. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The moving icon is moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 moves to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1RB is left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (14), the timer notice display TM1RB is not erased, and the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 275(14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. In addition, the character "Attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may change, so that the attention to the hold icon should be noted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (15), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1RB continues to count down, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 275(15).

Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB becomes “00:00”. It changes and becomes a prefetch display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1RB. Note that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the Savohani display mode after the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1RB becomes “00:00”. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB may be "00:00", or the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1RB may be " The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani at the timing of "00:00". It should be noted that the hold icon in the display mode of this sabotani has a higher jackpot reliability than the hold icon of the panda described above. Further, when the hold icon in the display mode of Sabohani is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the pattern variable display corresponding to the hold icon. That is, it may be a pre-reading notice of the big hit confirmation.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (17), the timer notice display TM1RB is erased due to the completion of the countdown, then the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. .. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (18), the second stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (19) subsequent to FIG. 275 (18), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 276 (20). Then, a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 276 (21), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the fixed display is made by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5". To be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 277 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 275 to 276, and FIG. 278 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 277. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 277(1) and 277(2) are the same as FIGS. 275(1) and 275(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. 275 (3) except that this example of presentation is different in that the timer display in the timer notification display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the two timer notification displays TM1L and TM1RB is "18:00". ) Is the same as the effect shown. In this way, by making the time indicated by the timer display different between the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, it is difficult to understand which notice effect corresponds to a certain notice effect and the game is monotonous. May be suppressed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 277(4) to (7) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 277(4) to (7) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 275(4) to 275(7) in the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side. Since they are the same except that they are different, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters "Super Expectations" are displayed, indicating that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. It is shown. In addition, this example of production is different from the one shown in FIG. 275(8) in that the character display "Super Expectations" suggests that a special privilege is given. In addition, the character “Chance” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mission of the mini game has been successful. Of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side remains “03:00” and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left as "18:00", and neither countdown has started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(9), the character "There are two" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is not an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. The timer advance notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, which is the timer advance notice display, is erased, and the timer display selection animation is started to erase the timer advance notice display TM1L. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is an advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed.

However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is not erased, and as a result of the timer display selection animation, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. The display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1LA), and it is shown that the user is stepping up and the possibility that a certain performance is performed is improved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "both expected" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character, which suggests that any of the two timer advance notices TM1LA and TM1RB have expectations. It should be noted that the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started counting down.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 277 (11), it is a temporary variation due to the fluctuation due to the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". Shutdown takes place. Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (12), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 and the character display displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted. In this effect example, the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are continuously displayed even while the symbol is being fixedly displayed. That is, these timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB will be displayed over the next symbol variation display. Of the timer displays in the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer advance notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is left as "03:00" and the timer advance notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left as "18:00", and neither countdown has started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The moving icon is moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 moves to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Furthermore, in this example of performance, the character "Attention to the left" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the timer display in the timer notification display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notification displays TM1LA and TM1RB is displayed. It suggests that the countdown will begin. It should be noted that the countdown has not started yet for the timer display on the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (14), the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is displayed on the timer preview display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer preview displays TM1LA and TM1RB. Be started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 277(14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1RB. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not started the countdown yet. In addition, the character “Attention to hold” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may change, so that the attention to the hold icon should be noted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(15), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side continues to count down, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 277(15). There is. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side becomes “00:00”. The display mode is changed to that of Sabohani, and the display mode of prefetching is set. That is, in this example of effect, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notification effect by the timer notification display TM1LA displayed on the left side is shown. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA becomes “00:00”. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1LA may be “00:00”, or the timer display in the timer notice display TM1LA may be “ The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani at the timing of "00:00". The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(17), the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is erased because the countdown is completed. After that, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left pattern. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timer advance notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277(18), the second stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The timer advance notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started counting down.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (19) subsequent to FIG. 277 (18), the third stop is performed, the "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 278 (20). Then, a temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 278(21), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the fixed display is made by the combination of the defective decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 5". To be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even while the symbol is being fixedly displayed. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB is displayed over the three symbol variation displays. The timer advance notice display TM1RB is still "18:00" and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (22), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Here, the display mode of the change icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, that is, the display mode of Sabohani. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The timer notice display TM1RB has not started counting down yet.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (23), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not started yet, and “18:00” remains.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (26), normal reach is performed, and the state that the medium symbol is changing at a low speed is shown. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not started yet, and “18:00” remains.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1RB is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (27), "17:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. ..

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (28) shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In the timer advance notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (28).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (29), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed. The timer advance notice display TM1RB is still counting down, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (29).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 278(30), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to urge attention to the countdown on the timer notice display TM1RB. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1RB is still counting down, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 278(30).

Then, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 278(31). That is, in this effect example, a certain notice effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB is the strong cut-in image CI1a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (32), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". The timer advance notice display TM1RB is erased because the countdown is completed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (33), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 278 (34), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

In this effect example, a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed, and each example corresponds to a different effect.

FIG. 279 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 280 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 279. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 279(1) and 279(2) are the same as FIGS. 273(1) and 273(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279(4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00" and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, FIG.
The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 5) shows that the cursor CSL that surrounds the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR and surrounds the right treasure box image BXR. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00" and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the characters "I'll open to the right" are displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 279(6). It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00" and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00" and the countdown has not started.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 279(8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "effect activation" are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the character "Yatteze" is displayed near the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279(9), the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started in the timer notice display TM1. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 279(9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 279(10), the hold change animation is started in the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, the character "Attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and urges attention to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. The timer advance notice display TM1 continues to count down, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 279(10).

Then, as shown in FIG. 279(11), at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button reservation display mode. Is changed to a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is shown. Note that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 may be "00:00" after the display mode of the hold icon h12 of No. 1 has changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, or the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when "" becomes "00:00". As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice display TM1 is first displayed, and then the mini game is started in a state where the countdown is not started. Then, when the result of the mini game is successful, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and thereafter, the countdown is completed (that is, "00:00"). It can be said that the pending change effect is being performed as an effect. In addition, the start order of each effect is not limited to the above-described one. For example, after the mini game is started, the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started. The result of the mini game may be derived, and if the result of the mini game is successful, a certain effect may be performed at the timing when the countdown is completed.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased because the countdown is completed. In addition, the character "button hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the display mode of button hold.

Thereafter, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 279 (13), a temporary change due to a fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" Shutdown takes place. After that, as shown in FIG. 279 (14), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. The second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of button suspension, does not change in display mode and remains in the display mode of button suspension.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (15), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The moving icon is moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 moves to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (16), the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the character "Hold Change Opportunity" is displayed together with the icon of the Bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, it is shown that the bancho-faced icon BCHO appears in the Amida field and is located in the middle of the three options. Further, a character "SELECT" is displayed below the Amida field, and prompts the operator to operate the operation key unit 137 to select the buncho face icon BCHO from any of the three options. .. In addition, the characters "Kanbare" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the player is encouraged.

After that, after the mini game by the Amida lottery is started, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (17) shows that a new timer notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by a new timer advance notice display TM1N being framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1N is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 5 seconds elapse after the countdown is started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1N is started, and "04:77" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1N at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (18). ..

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (19) following FIG. 279 (18), the center of the three options in the Amida field is displayed. The Bancho face icon BCHO located at is moved to the right of the three options. In the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280(19).

Thereafter, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected and the operation valid period elapses, the timing of the lottery in the lottery table shown in FIG. The production is started. At this time, at each of the three end points of the Amida field, one of "push" indicating that the button-holding operation effect is started and "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, “push” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “x” is displayed at the center end, and “push” is displayed at the right end. ing. Note that the number of "push" displayed may be one, or "push" may be displayed at all the end points. Even at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1N continues to count down, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280(20).

After that, the buncho face icon BCHO moves along the line in accordance with the rule of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 280 (21), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the buncho face icon BCHO is one of the three ending points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of has been reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this effect example, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the bancho's face has reached the end point on the right side where "push" is displayed, the mission is successful, and the button effect operation effect is started. It has been announced that it has been confirmed. In the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 280(21).

As shown in FIG. 280(22), in response to the result of the mini game, at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1N becomes “00:00”, the first hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode displays “ The word "press" is added to inform that the button-holding operation effect is started. In addition, the character "Yoshia" is displayed near the navigation character YM to congratulate the player. It should be noted that the word "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11 after the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00", or "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1N may be "00:00" after the characters "" are added, or the first hold may be performed at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N is "00:00". The character "push" may be added to the icon h11. As described above, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the timer notice effect is performed a plurality of times, and a certain notice effect that is performed as a result is performed for the same hold icon.

FIG. 280(23) shows that the timer display in the timer notice display TM1N has become “00:00” and thus the operation valid period related to the button-holding operation effect is started, and the decorative symbol display is displayed. In the device 208, the timer advance notice display TM1N is not erased, and the character "Hold change when button is pressed" is displayed to explain the game.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 280 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the sabotani display mode. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1N displays the character "Geki Atsu Suspended" to inform that the first hold icon h11 is in a highly reliable display mode. In addition, the character “next hot” is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that there is a high expectation that a big hit will occur in the next symbol variation display.

Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the button holding operation effect is started, the symbol is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the button holding operation effect is not started. In the variable display (variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon of the button hold), the jackpot pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 280 (25), it is a temporary variation due to the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shutdown takes place. At this time, the timer notice display TM1N is erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 280 (26), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the defect of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 281 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect continued from FIG. 279 (18). The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (19a) following FIG. 279 (18) shows that the buncho face icon BCHO is located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field. There is. In the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (19a).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the right side of the three choices in the Amida field is selected and the operation valid period has elapsed, the timing of the lottery of the lottery is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (20a). The production is started. At this time, “x” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “x” is displayed at the center end point, and “push” is displayed at the right end point. .. Even at this time, the timer advance notice display TM1N continues the countdown, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (20a).

After that, the longest face icon BCHO moves along the line according to the rule of the lottery, and as shown in FIG. 281 (21a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the longest face icon BCHO is one of the three ending points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of has been reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this effect example, it is shown that the bancho-faced icon BCHO has reached the end point on the right side where "x" is displayed, the mission has failed, and the button hold operation effect is not started. Is notified. In the timer advance notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 281 (21a).

As shown in FIG. 281 (22a), in response to the result of the mini game, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display in the timer notice display TM1N, and the timer notice display TM1N is erased. It is shown. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the button holding operation effect as a result of the timer notice effect is not performed. That is, the timer notice display TM
As a result of the countdown of the timer display in 1N, it is notified that the notice that the button-holding operation effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it is indicated that the timer notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes “00:00” and a certain effect (button holding operation effect) is not performed. it can.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (23a) shows that the timer notice display TM1N has been completely erased.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (24a), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (25a), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the default display mode. That is, in this effect example, since the mini game has failed, the operation effect of holding the button is not performed, and it is indicated that the game ends in failure. In addition, when the button suspension operation effect is not performed and the operation is unsuccessful, the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the target of the button suspension is likely to be lost, but it may be a big hit.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 281 (26a), a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" causes temporary fluctuation due to fluctuation Shutdown takes place. After that, as shown in FIG. 281 (27a), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the defect of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 282 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 279 to 280. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 282(1) to 28(7) are the same as FIGS. 279(1) to 279(7), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 282(8), the character BBA of the old woman appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters “Uhihi” are displayed, showing that the mission of the mini game has failed. .. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1 is a false timer notice effect. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 remains "03:00", and the countdown has not started yet.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 282(9), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain presentation effect is performed is a false (geek) notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started to show that a certain effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

After that, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 282 (11), the temporary design due to the fluctuation in the combination of the decorative design of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" Shutdown takes place. Then, as shown in FIG. 282 (12), in the decorative symbol display device 208,
It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative pattern of the decoration "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (13), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The moving icon is moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 moves to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (14), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 282 (15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Savohani, and the prefetch display mode is set. In this example of the effect, the result of the mini game is failure, and the display mode of the hold icon as a certain notice effect is not changed by the timer notice effect, but the display state of the hold icon is not changed by the timer notice effect. Even if the result of the mini game is unsuccessful, the result of the effect (the hold icon changes to the hold icon of Sabohani) may be the same. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 279 to 280 and described above, the case where the display mode of the hold icon is changed as a result of the success of the mini game is changed to the mini game as shown in FIG. 282 and described above. Although it is made to be a big hit more easily than when the display mode of the hold icon is changed, it is not limited to this.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 282 (16), a temporary variation due to a fluctuation in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" Shutdown takes place. At this time, the character “next hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the next symbol variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 282 (17), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 283 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 283(1) and 283(2) are the same as FIGS. 273(1) and 273(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the bancho character appears.
A display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and the display of "Hold change if comes out" is displayed, and when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed after the mini game is started, the display mode of the hold icon Is predicted to change. In this mini game, the result is derived without the operation of the effect button 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(5), it is shown that the symbols on the dice have begun variably displaying.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 283(6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner as to show the result of "3", and it is shown that the mission achievement result has not been obtained. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM to inform that the mini game has failed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notification display TM1, it is notified that the notification that a certain presentation effect is performed is a false (geek) notification. In other words, it can be said that the timer announcement display TM1 is erased before the countdown is started, and a state in which a certain effect is not performed is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 283(7), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. ing.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 283(8) shows that the timer notice display TM1N has been completely erased.

After that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 283(9), a combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" causes a temporary fluctuation due to fluctuation. Shutdown takes place. After that, as shown in FIG. 283(10), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols with the defect of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this example of the effect, the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, but the result may be derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. In this case In the mini game, when the result is derived by operating the effect button 136, a certain noticeable effect may be performed than when the result is derived in the mini game without operating the effect button 136. May be high, or the reliability of a big hit may be high.

FIG. 284 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(1), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 284(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 284 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing hold of special figure 1 is displayed, and three hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three hold icons h11 to h13 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the default display mode. In addition, in this example of performance, a 7-segment display device SEG including 4-digit 7-segment is shown. The 7-segment display device SEG is provided with a full-color LED for each segment, and is configured to emit light in full-color for each segment. The 7-segment display device SEG is provided, for example, on the front frame door 106, but may be provided on the ball storage plate-equipped door 108 or the game board 200. At the timing shown in FIG. 284(1), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 are moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, the timer advance notice display is started also on the 7-segment display device SEG, and “0300” is displayed in a white light emission mode.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00" and the countdown is not started.

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00" and the countdown is not started.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the characters "Open right" are displayed near the navigation character YM on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(6). It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00" and the countdown is not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Further, the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00" and the countdown is not started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the letters "effect activation" are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, a character "Yatteze" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown on the 7-segment display device SEG are started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (9), the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started in the timer notice display TM1. Further, the countdown of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is also started at the same time. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 284(9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 and "0275" is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. As described above, in this effect example, a plurality of devices each perform a timer advance notice effect. Here, when the timer advance notice effect is simultaneously performed by a plurality of devices, a certain effect may be started more easily than when the timer advance notice effect is performed by one timer advance notice display, and the reliability of the big hit is high. The degree may be high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(10), the hold change animation is started in the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, the character "Attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and urges attention to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. Note that the timer advance notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (10), "01:75" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1. “0175” is displayed on the segment display device SEG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 284 (11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode at the timing when the timer notification display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”. Is changed to a button-holding display mode, and a read-ahead display mode is set. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer advance notice display by the timer advance notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG. .. In addition, after the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button reservation display mode. Alternatively, after the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button reservation display mode, the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”. Alternatively, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button reservation display mode at the timing when the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG become “00:00”. May change. In this example of performance, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG are used to perform two timer advance notice displays, but the timer advance notice display is provided only on one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. May be performed. In this case, when the timer notice display is performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain notice effect is always performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG are performed. When the timer advance notice display is performed only on one of the above, it may be possible that a certain advance notice effect may not be performed. Further, the timer notice display may be displayed by three or more effect display devices, and the reliability of the big hit may be increased as the number of displayed timer notice displays increases. For example, if there is one timer notice display, the weak cut-in image CI1b is likely to be displayed as a certain notice effect, and if there are two timer notice displays, the strong cut-in image CI1a is given as a certain notice effect. When the number of the timer notice display is three or more, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be easily displayed as a notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed, and is turned off when the countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is also completed. In addition, the character "button hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the display mode of button hold.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

FIG. 285 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 286 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 285. FIG. 287 is a diagram showing, in stages, a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 286. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 285(1) and 285(2) are the same as FIGS. 284(1) and 284(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(3), the state after the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and the timer advance notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the timer notification display TM1 is the default display mode, and "09:75" is displayed on the timer notification display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 285(3). In this example of performance, the time set on the timer notice display TM1 is, for example, “10:00”. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer advance notice display is not started and the light is turned off.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "09:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285(4).

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "06:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285(5). At this time,
The timer advance notice display is started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and “3000” is displayed in a red light emission mode. Here, when the light emitting mode of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, a certain notice effect is more likely to be started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed than when it is white. In this example of the effect, the timer advance notice display by the 7-segment display device SEG functions as a prefetch advance notice, and a certain notice effect is different from the timer advance notice display by the timer advance notice display TM1.

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(6), the characters "Open the right" are displayed near the navigation character YM, It is informed that the right treasure box image BXR has been determined as a treasure box that can be opened. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "04:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285(6). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(7), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "03:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285(7). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(8), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "effect activation" are displayed, showing that the mini game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "Yatteze" are displayed near the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that a certain notice effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is started. .. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "03:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285(8). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(9), it is shown that the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed. On the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285(9). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(10), the hold change animation is started for the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In addition, the character "Attention to hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and urges attention to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. The timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is continuously counting down, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 285(10). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display maintains "3000".

Then, as shown in FIG. 285 (11), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”. It changes and becomes a prefetch display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is shown.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. Further, the word "hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit in the next pattern variation display.

Thereafter, the decorative design is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and as shown in FIG. 286(13) following FIG. 285(12), the decorative design of “decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7”. The temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of. Then, as shown in FIG. 286(14), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the characters displayed near the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are also erased. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started yet, and the timer display maintains "3000".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (15), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The moving icon is moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 moves to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started yet, and the timer display maintains "3000".

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the 7-segment display device SEG is started, and "2978" is displayed on the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG at the timing shown in FIG. 286 (16). ing.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286(17) shows that the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol small in the upper center. Specifically, the character "strong cut-in chance" is displayed together with the icon of the bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, it is shown that the bancho-faced icon BCHO appears in the Amida field and is located on the right side of the three options. Further, a character "SELECT" is displayed below the Amida field, and prompts the operator to operate the operation key unit 137 to select the buncho face icon BCHO from any of the three options. .. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and “2833” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286(17).

After that, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (18), the number of the bancho located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field is displayed. The face icon BCHO moves to the left of the three options. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and “2580” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286(18).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected and the operation effective period has elapsed, the effect of the Amida lottery is started. At this time, at each of the three end points of the Amida field, either "o" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, “x” is displayed at the left end of the three end points, “x” is displayed at the center end point, and “○” is displayed at the right end point. ing. It should be noted that the display number of “◯” may be two or more, or “◯” may be displayed at all the end points. Then, as shown in FIG. 286 (19), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the longest face moves along the line in accordance with the rules of the midduji. Note that the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is still counting down, and "2411" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286(19).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 286(20) shows that the buncho face icon BCHO has reached the right end point among the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji has been derived. In this example of performance, the icon BCHO of the bancho's face reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the word "Yatteze" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the mission succeeds. However, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been confirmed to be displayed. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and “2236” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286(20).

After that, the mini game ends, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (21) continues to display the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, the character “Intense hot standby” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that a strong cut-in image CI1a with high reliability of the big hit appears. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and “2185” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286(21).

After that, the "decoration 5" is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 286 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower center of the display screen is displayed. “Reach” is displayed on the screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Note that the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "2005" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286(22).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 286 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and “1927” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286(23).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 286 (24), the notice of the Savohani group is continuously given. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed from the display mode of red to the display mode of rainbow which changes to multiple colors. In the timer display in the rainbow display mode, the jackpot pattern is easier to be confirmed and displayed than in the timer display in the red display mode, and a certain effect is easily started. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the rainbow display mode, the big hit symbol may be definitely displayed or a certain effect may be always started. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "1737" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 286(24).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 287 (25) following FIG. 286 (24), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. To be done. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "1010" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (25).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 287(26), the button repeated hit effect has been started, and the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "0500" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (26). Then, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (27), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed during the execution of the button repeated hit effect. This strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in response to the success as a result of the mini game by Amida Lottery. In this example of the effect, the strongest cut-in image CI1v is more advantageous than the strong cut-in image CI1a. It is displayed, and it is reported that the expectation of a big hit has increased dramatically. At this time as well, the player continuously continues to hit the effect button 136. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is continuously counting down, and "0200" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 287 (27).

After that, at the timing when the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "0000", in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (28), the character whose length is broken and the character "premier" appears with the character. However, it is shown that the premiere notice is being given. This informs the player that the big hit has been confirmed. As described above, in this example of performance, a certain target preview effect is different between the timer preview effect by the timer preview display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the timer preview effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Is shown. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is performed in one symbol variation display from the start to the end, but the timer notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG is twice symbol variation. It is shown that it is performed across the display. The target symbol variation display may be different between the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Further, the timer advance notice effect may be performed across the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed after the end of the big hit game. In addition, in this example of performance, as the result of the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG, a premiere notice as a certain notice effect is given, but a notice with low reliability of a big hit is not a certain notice effect. A fake timer advance notice effect may be performed. Alternatively, a fake timer announcement effect may be performed in which a certain announcement effect is not performed.

As described above, in this example of effect, when the timer notice effect is performed and the premiere notice is performed, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is performed) is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the premier notice is not performed. It is easy to confirm and display the jackpot pattern in (Display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 287 (29), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to celebrate the big hit, multi-color display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments. In addition, a character “premier appearance” is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the premier notice has been given.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 287 (30), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 287 (31 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased, and the 7-segment display device SEG is also turned off.

FIG. 288 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect in the jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

The effect example shown in FIG. 288(1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 287(31), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" continues. It is shown that it is confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288(2), the state where the big hit game is started and the big hit start effect is performed is shown. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the "decoration 5", which is a jackpot pattern, is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a Kopanda character with a fan congratulates the jackpot in the center of the display screen. The situation is shown. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to improve the decoration effect in the big hit game, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments. At this time, a special effect display by the 7-segment display device SEG may be performed, and for example, “7777” or a numeric matching numeric string may be displayed. Such a display may be performed, for example, to give a notice of a holding consecutive holiday game where a big hit occurs in the hold, or to give a notice of a probability change state after the big hit game ends.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 288(3) shows that the third round has started. Then, the character "LED attention" is displayed on the right side of the Kopanda character, which suggests that the notice effect is performed.

Then, in FIG. 288(4), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off before, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 288(5), the character of the bancho appears along with the display of the character “Tear off clothes with repeated button hits”. , The mini game will start. In this mini game, it is possible to display the result according to the game state after the big hit game, and if the game state after the big hit game is a probable state (special figure high probability general figure high probability state), production As a result of repeatedly hitting the button 136, there is a case where a mini-game succeeds because the bancho's clothes are torn. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the operation valid period for accepting the button repeated hit effect is displayed. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, "1000" is displayed, and it is informed that it is possible to accept continuous hits of the effect button 136 for 10 seconds after the countdown (operation valid period) is started. This timer display starts counting down when the operation valid period starts in the fourth round. The display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is a mode in which light is emitted in white, but it may be a mode in which light is emitted in other colors. For example, the reliability of success in the mini game depends on the emission color. It may be different. Further, for example, instead of "1000" indicating 10 seconds corresponding to the operation valid period, a timer display indicating another time (for example, a display of a specific number combination such as "9999" or "7777") is performed. By doing so, a premier notice that the mini game will always succeed may be given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 288(6), the state of transition to the fourth round is shown. When the process shifts to the fourth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character “continuous hit” together with the button image 136a, prompting the effect button 136 to be hit repeatedly. Further, the operation valid period for accepting the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is started. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 288(6), "0800" is displayed, indicating that 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation valid period. As described above, in this effect example, this timer display may function as a timer notice effect, and it is shown that the timer notice effect and the mini game are started at the same time. The timer advance notice effect and the mini game may not be started at the same time.

In FIG. 288(7), a state is shown in which the player continuously hits the effect buttons 136. At this time, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is set to "0500", and it is informed that the remaining time of the operation valid period is 5 seconds.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 288(8), the characters “sorry” and “next time saving” are displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. As a result, after the jackpot game is over, it is informed that the state will shift to the time saving state (special probability low probability general figure high probability state) without shifting to the probability changing state.

FIG. 288(5a) to FIG. 288(8a) show another example of effects following FIG. 288(4). On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 288(5a), it is shown that the above-mentioned mini game is started. In this production example, the princess character HME is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the mini game is likely to succeed. When the mini game is started, the timer (“1000”) is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the operation valid period for accepting the button repeated hit effect is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 288 (6a) to (7a) are performed. Note that FIGS. 288(6a) to (7a) are the same as FIGS. 288(6) to (7), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 288 (8a), the characters “bancho awakening” and “next probability change” are displayed while the bancho character's clothes are torn, indicating that the mini game has succeeded. As a result, after the jackpot game is over, it is informed that the game will shift to the probability change state.

FIG. 289 is a diagram showing stepwise a display example when an error display is displayed in the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 289(1), a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 289(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 289 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state, and the special icon 1 is held in the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the hold icon display area, two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are displayed, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1 are in the default display mode (round shape And is displayed in a white display mode). On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed.

Further, in this example of performance, an error display of "please remove the ball" (lower plate full tank error display ERR1) is displayed above the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. It is informed that it is doing. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. In addition, when the elimination of the error which is the object of the error notification is detected (for example, when the lower plate full tank detection switch is turned off and the lower plate full tank error is eliminated), the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed. Is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. Moreover, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the present pattern change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 289(2), the lower plate full tank error has not been resolved, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation, the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 289(3), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 and the visibility of the timer notice display TM1 is deteriorated. Therefore, the player may rush to remove the ball from the lower plate, seeing this display state.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice display TM1 is started, and "04:25" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1 at the timing shown in FIG. 289(4). .. In addition, the character “pseudo ream” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that the pseudo ream may be performed as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM. There is. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 289(4), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289(5), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 289(5). Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 289(5), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 289(6), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 239(6). At the timing shown in FIG. 289(6), since the lower bowl is removed by the player, the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is erased. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 289(7) to (12) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 289(7) to (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 239(7) to 239(12), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the timer advance notice effect described above, the time until a certain effect is performed is displayed by the countdown of the timer display. However, for example, when performing the timer notice effect, the timer display in the timer notice display is changed to " Start from 00:00, and for example, display such as "May be pending change at "03:00"" or "A strong cut-in occurs at "25:00"" and count up the timer display. A certain effect may be performed when the designated time has come.

Further, in the timer notice effect described above, as the certain effects, the pending change effect, the pseudo continuous effect, the display of the cut-in image, and the big hit confirmation notification are described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, the prefetch mode, etc. It may be an effect of plunging into a specific zone, a movie insertion, a next notice effect, or the like.

Further, in the above-mentioned timer notice production, the expectation level of the big hit is changed by changing the color of the timer notice display. In this case, for example, in the order of red>green>yellow>blue>white. The start of a certain effect may be confirmed when the degree of expectation is high and the color of the timer notice display is yellow or more. Further, when it is executed by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain notice effect may be performed without fail. In this case, for example, when the color of the timer notice display displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is blue and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is white, the expectation of a big hit is obtained in the relationship of blue<white. Alternatively, if the color of the timer notice display on the decorative pattern display device 208 is red and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is a big hit. The reliability of may be increased.

Further, for example, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow, the big hit symbol is larger than when the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red. There may be one in which the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved by a combination of the color of the timer notice display in the decorative pattern display device 208 and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG, such as easy confirmation display. Further, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG may be respectively ranked, and the sum of the ranks may be compared to determine the jackpot reliability. When the white rank is 1, the yellow rank is 3, and the red rank is 5, the color of the timer notice display in the decorative pattern display device 208 is white and the light emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow. In the case of the former (former), the timer notice display is not displayed in the decorative pattern display device 208, and the timer is displayed only in the 7-segment display device SEG, and in the case where the emission color is red (the latter), the latter is displayed. You may make it the reliability of the big hit higher.

Next, with reference to FIG. 290, an example of a display mode of the timer notice display displayed when the timer notice effect starts will be described. Here, FIG. 290 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the timer notice display.

FIG. 290(a) shows an example in which "7:77" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. This timer display is a timer display that is reminiscent of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", which is a combination of jackpot decorative patterns, and the timer notice presentation TM1 shown in FIG. 290(a) has started the timer notice effect. When it is displayed at this time, it can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that the big hit is confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290(a) is displayed, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" may be displayed as a notice to be derived. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that the transition to a probable change is confirmed after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a holding holiday is generated.

FIG. 290(b) shows an example in which "99:99" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. In the embodiment described above, the time initially displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol, but at least the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290(b) is at least The time is longer than the time from the start of the display to the stop display of the symbol, and the time is recognized that the countdown is not completed during the change. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290(b) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a premiere timer display and as a notice that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a holding holiday will occur.

Also, the timer display shown in FIG. 290(b) is the maximum value that can be expressed in decimal, but as shown in FIG. 290(c), the maximum value that can be expressed in hexadecimal is displayed. You may do it. This may also be able to expect the same effect as the timer display shown in FIG. 290(b).

FIG. 290(d) shows an example in which "7:58" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. This timer display is a timer display that is reminiscent of the wording of "Nagoya", which is the prefectural capital of Aichi Prefecture, and is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290(d) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started. Can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that the jackpot will be confirmed. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a holding holiday will occur.

Also, FIG. 290(e) is a timer display (“2:23”) that is reminiscent of the word pitfall of “Mt. Fuji,” which is the highest mountain in Japan, and the timer shown in FIG. 290(d) is also displayed. In some cases, the same effect as the display can be expected. In the present embodiment, the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 displayed when the timer notification effect is started displays “0” for all digits less than 1 second. The timer display is characterized in that digits less than 1 second are also displayed. The timer display displayed as the premier timer display is not limited to the above-mentioned display, and various display can be appropriately adopted. For example, it may be a vocabulary combination such as "31:50" (sick) or "8:08" (greengrocer), or a combination of decorative patterns displayed when the power is turned on, such as "03:41". (A so-called morning hit) may be possible.

FIG. 290(f) shows an example in which "win" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 when the timer notification effect is started. When this timer display is displayed, the player may be able to easily recognize that the big hit has been confirmed. When the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290(f) is displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that a big hit is confirmed. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a hold holiday will occur.

FIG. 290(g) shows a timer notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be changed when the timer notice effect is started or changed during the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer notification display TM1 shown in FIG. 290(g) is a rainbow display mode that is displayed while changing to multiple colors. When the timer notification display TM1 is displayed in this rainbow display mode, the premium timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that the jackpot will be confirmed. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a holding holiday will occur. The display mode that can be adopted as the premier timer display is not limited to this, and can be set to an appropriate color.

FIG. 290(h) shows a timer notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be displayed when the timer notice effect is started or during the timer notice effect. The display mode of the timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 290(h) is a display mode in which the characters SBHN of Sabohani are added to the four corners. When the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed in this display form, the premier timer As a display, it can be used as a notice that the jackpot will be confirmed. The character to be added is not limited to this and can be set arbitrarily. In addition, when this timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is decided that a sudden change will occur after the end of the big hit game, or as a notice that a holding holiday will occur.

In addition, although the timer notice display TM1 described above is configured to display the timer display in a rectangular frame, the timer notice display TM1 having a different display form may be displayed as the premier timer display. For example, the timer notice display TM1 in which the timer display is displayed in the circular frame may be the premium timer display.

Further, the timer notice display TM1 of the above-mentioned premier timer display may be counted down after the display is started, or the timer notice effect may be ended without performing the countdown. The jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed during the countdown, and the timer notice effect may be finished. Further, when the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display is started, a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may not be performed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mini game for notifying whether the timer advance notice effect is true or false according to the derivation result has been described, but this mini game may be applied to any of the above timer advance notice effects. You can

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 324. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiment described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far.

291 to 324 are diagrams showing, in a step-by-step manner, modification examples of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 291 to 324, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 291 to 324 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. The width of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Note that the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbols for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it is added here to make sure that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, and perform multiple types of effect display. In the present embodiment, an example in which various images are displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is shown, but all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. .. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 291 to 324, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, FIGS. 291 to 324 show the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 has a rectangular shape. It blinks during the variable display of FIG. 1, and lights up in the lost lighting mode or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of Toku-zu 1. Further, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the variable display of the special figure 2, and lights up with a gap during the stop display of the special figure 2. Alternatively, it is lit in the manner of a big hit. In addition, FIGS. 291 to 324 show the states of the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z.

FIG. 291 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 291(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon in the center thereof. The h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 291(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 both have a default display mode (white circle display mode). Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information regarding the game and the effect is displayed (tutorial display), and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 291(a), "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord's character is explained. The tutorial display section TT1 is not limited to the explanation display but may be displayed as a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as the tutorial display, an explanation about the appearing character, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, you may comprise so that a big hit expectation degree can be alert|reported by the display mode (For example, it displays in a blue character, it displays in a red character, etc.) of a tutorial display. In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a preview display of the position of the preview display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the displayed display will be described as a tutorial display. That is, it can be said that the tutorial display unit TT1 in this production example is a region for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the decorative symbol, but may overlap with the display region of the decorative symbol. In this way, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that constitutes the hold icon display area, the variable icon display area, and the tutorial display section TT1. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(a) has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change in accordance with the progress of the game.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 291(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, a reception count display 850 indicating the reception count of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 291(a), the number of times the character string image is received 850 times is displayed, and the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 is received is 0 times. A stock button image 852 simulating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception count display 850. Three lines are drawn in the stock button image 852 at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to green, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 291(a), all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white and the meter is 0.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. This lord's character may be called a navigation character. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed. Further, the stage name display portion ST1 and the lord's character may be a display included in the Ui portion UI3, or at least a part thereof may be displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the UI portion UI3.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can move in the vertical direction and rotate according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. Further, both the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 291(b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 of the UI portion UI3 is shown to be closed by the shutter image. That is, a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (display of "preparing") is performed instead of a display (explanation display) on a certain area (tutorial display section TT1). Can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display that is displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed during the display of the shutter image.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(c), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. It can be said that this shutter image is a preliminary image advance notice display that is displayed before the display of the later-described preliminary image RDY is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed even when a preview is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and the jackpot expectation level may be different depending on the display mode of the shutter image, or the display mode of the shutter image is only one mode. You may comprise so that it does not show a big hit expectation degree only.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(d), the shutter display is shown closed in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed in an open state by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY in which the character "preparing" is displayed. In other words, it can be said that the in-preparation image RDY is displayed in an overlapping manner in the display area of the tutorial display section TT1 and overlaps the UI section UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 291(d), the background color of the in-preparation image RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the in-preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d) is the default display mode. .. The preparing image RDY can be changed to a plurality of display modes, and even if the preparing image RDY is displayed in a display mode (for example, a red background color) different from the default display mode at the start of display of the preparing image RDY. Alternatively, the display may be changed to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the above-mentioned shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, the shutter image may be related to the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easy to be displayed). In this effect example, by displaying the image RDY being prepared, a certain effect (for example, a timer notice or a mini game) may be performed in the tutorial display section TT1.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(e) shows that the UI unit UI3 is changing from the blue display mode to the gold display mode. In this effect example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to a gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 in the gold display mode functions as a pre-reading notice. In this way, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. In addition, the UI unit UI3 in the golden display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variable display, and does not function as a notice of a change in the display form of the hold icon but as a direct look-ahead notice display. It may be done. Further, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be the default mode before the hold icon whose display mode has been changed (the hold icon of the prefetch target) is consumed, or the result of the change of the prefetch target May be configured to become the default mode after a display (for example, a display of a decorative pattern indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display section TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this example of performance, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display section TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, when the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be noticed. There is.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first pending icon h11 and the first one. The state of hitting the hold icon h11 is shown. At this time, the entire first holding icon h11 is covered by the effect EF4, making it more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state in which it is not covered by the effect EF4. Note that this effect EF4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon, and as a result, as shown in FIG. 291(g), the effect EF4 is placed next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the second hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change advance effect display. It should be noted that this hold change pre-effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animation from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 until the display mode of the hold icon changes. May be used as the hold change advance effect display. Further, the pending change pre-effect display may be made only by displaying the ninja character NJ4. Further, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the pending change may or may not be included in the pending change pre-effect display. Note that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Further, the configuration may be such that the display of the in-preparation image RDY is started after the effect display regarding the ninja character NJ4. On the contrary, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the in-preparation image RDY. In addition, when the hold icon displayed in the prefetch mode is present, the preparing image RDY may be more likely to appear than when the hold icon is not present. According to this configuration, the state in which the hold icon changes after the ninja character NJ4 has appeared can be expected to appear in the preparing image RDY, so that the ninja character NJ4 has a different type of notice display (hold). In some cases, it may function as an advance notification of an icon change and a target such as the image RDY being prepared, or a pre-reading notice and a subject change such as the notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(h), the effect EF4 is erased and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state in which the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 291(h) has been changed from the default display mode to a red display mode. Further, the family crest monument 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. It should be noted that the family crest monument 224E may be emitted in red after the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the red display mode, or the first crest icon 224E may be emitted in red after the first crest symbol 224E is emitted. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the family crest monument 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 291(i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pending change animation ends and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed in the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7". The combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is a combination of loss, but it is also a combination of chances. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by deriving and displaying the combination of chances. The chance line is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the read-ahead display mode, but the chance line is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be. Further, when the chance eyes are displayed, the final big hit symbol may be more easily finalized and displayed than when the chance eyes are not displayed. It should be noted that after the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the stop display of the decorative symbols may be sequentially performed, or the ninja character NJ4 may be erased after the sequential stop display of the decorative symbols is started. Further, the sequential stop display of the decorative symbols may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Although the variable icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 291(i), the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is fixedly displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 291(j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(j), the variable display of decorative symbols is started. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. .. On the other hand, the lord's character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(k), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on each of the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right are considered to be shaking fluctuations, respectively, and the middle symbols are displayed at high speed. Although the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before the reach state is set and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden, basically, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed until the super reach is started. It is not hidden.

Then, FIG. 291(l) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the time of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for transitioning to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest monument 224E is raised and rotated, and the lower center part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to be visually recognized because they are overlapped by the family crest monument 224E. In addition, the family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the in-preparation image RDY. This family crest 224E
It is informed that the shift to super reach will be made by the ascending/rotating operation of. It should be noted that the operation of the family crest monument 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the family crest monument 224E is started, or the super reach transition display may be started. The operation of the family crest monument 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this example of performance, when at least the swordsman reach of the super reach is transitioned, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. Note that the UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super-reach transition display is started. As described above, in this effect example, when the process moves to a specific super reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden. The reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, or the UI unit UI3 may be hidden at least when the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. Further, in a configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, since the peripheral frame is not displayed when the preparing image RDY is not displayed, it can be said that in this case, all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach is different depending on whether or not the in-preparation image RDY is displayed before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image during preparation RDY is not configured so as to be able to specify a certain notice display or an aspect of a certain effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 may not be hidden even if the player moves to swordsman reach.

FIG. 291(m) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Further, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, only the image RDY being prepared is maintained and the tutorial display section TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI section UI3. That is, in the image under preparation RDY, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed is the same as the display position after being hidden. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest cast 224E may be returned to the initial position after the swordsman reach is started, the swordsman reach may be started after the family crest cast 224E is returned to the initial position, and the family crest cast 224E may be started. Swordsman reach may be started when is returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(n), the preparing image RDY is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. .. That is, it can be said that the display of the in-preparation image RDY is informed, and the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Further, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Furthermore, in this example of performance, it can also be said that the image RDY being prepared ends (is hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. This mini game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the preparing image RDY is finished, but the mini game may be started without going through the display of the preparing image RDY. In this case, the big hit symbol may be confirmed and displayed more easily through the display of the preparing image RDY than through the display of the preparing image RDY. In the example of the effect, the display of the image during preparation RDY is ended and the mini game is started, but the display of the image during preparation RDY may be ended and the timer advance notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the hit/miss judgment may be displayed suddenly, for example, the characters “iron plate” may be displayed without performing the mini game or the timer announcement effect. When the mini game is started, the mini character MC1 of the lord and the target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas that are divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the effect example shown in FIG. 291(o)) is the winning area. The hit area hits the arrow, giving a highly reliable announcement of the big hit. Note that the hit area is not limited to one, but may be a plurality of hit areas, all of the hit areas may be hit, or all the hit areas may be non-hit areas. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini-games and timer notices, a certain type of mini-games and timer notices may be configured to always go through the display of the preparing image RDY (configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both the configuration 1 and the configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(p), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord has pierced the area around the target TGT. That is, it is shown that the mini-game as a notice display has achieved great success. The display showing the result of the mini game may be displayed in a different cut from the cut shown in FIG. 291(p). The display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display portion of the mini game may be a certain effect. In the case where a certain notice display is a mini game, the display of “iron plate” may be a second certain effect, or the second certain effect may be performed after the certain effect.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 291(q), the letters "iron plate" are displayed on a square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted approximately 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. .. This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this example of performance, it is possible to say that the notice display according to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, another notice display according to the result of the notice display is performed. Further, in this example of effect, when the timer advance notice effect is performed in place of the mini game, it can be said that the advance notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. In addition, when the timer notice production is performed, another notice display may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed. (Including that another notice display has started just before it becomes 0).

FIG. 292 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step. Note that at least one example of the plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may not be provided. This also applies to the following figures.

FIG. 292(a1) is an effect following FIG. 291(l). In the description of the present embodiment, it is illustrated as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. 291, but may be an effect performed in another scene, or an effect that is performed only as a continuation of the effect example of FIG. Good. This also applies to the following figures. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 292(a1) to (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291(m) to (o), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 292(a4), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord has deviated from the target TGT and flew to an area different from the target TGT. That is, it is displayed that the mini game as the notice display has failed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 292(a5), the iron plate image TP is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a state in which the swordsman reach is continuously performed is shown. In this example of directing, when there is only a difference between failure and success of the mini game, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini game is successful. It should be noted that a timer advance notice effect may be performed instead of the mini game, for example, a fake timer advance notice effect in which nothing is displayed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed and reaches 0, or a timer display effect may be performed. When the countdown of No. is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the character of "chance" is displayed in a small size somewhere) may be performed.

FIG. 292(b1) is also an effect following FIG. 291(l). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 292(b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291(m) to (o), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292(b4), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord hits the target TGT, but is shown stuck in the non-hit area. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that the mini game is successful but not very successful.

Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the cut-in image HCI of the princess on which the characters of "Chance" and the princess character are displayed on the background of horizontal stripes. ing. In this example of directing, in comparison with whether the mini game was successful or highly successful, it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of great success than in the case of success. ..

FIG. 292(c1) is also an effect following FIG. 291(l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 292(c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291(m) to (n), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292(c3), a state where a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 291(o) is started in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 292(c3) is also an example of a notice display which is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this effect example, the case where the mini game shown in FIG. 292(c3) is started is more likely to succeed than the mini game shown in FIG. 291(o) is started. The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be more likely to succeed. Further, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the final case when the mini game shown in FIG. 292(c3) is started, than in the mini game shown in FIG. 291(o). However, the mini game shown in FIG. 291(o) may be configured such that the jackpot pattern is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 292(c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol in which the letters "iron plate" are displayed is derived, showing that the mini game has been very successful.

Then, as shown in FIG. 292 (c5), the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a state in which the big hit confirmation announcement effect is being performed is shown.

Note that, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 291, the mini game is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 291, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 292, the timer notice effect may be performed and vice versa. .. Further, both timer advance notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the time for countdown may be different.

FIG. 293 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

FIG. 293(a1) shows that the swordsman reach has started. In this effect example, unlike in FIG. 291(m), the image RDY being prepared is not displayed. Note that, in FIG. 293(a1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and accordingly, the family crest actor 224E is also set to emit red light.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293(a2) shows that the mini game is started. In this effect example, the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the big hit symbol may be confirmed and displayed more easily through the display of the preparing image RDY than through the display of the preparing image RDY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293(a3), a state in which the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord is stuck in the area around the target TGT is shown. That is, it is shown that the mini-game as a notice display has achieved great success.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293(a4), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the big hit is confirmed.

As described above, in this effect example, an example in which the mini game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY is shown, but this may be executed only during the super reach, The processing may be executed not only during the super reach, but may be executed during or without the super reach. In addition, after the third display ends in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is displayed from the first state to the second state. Good. Further, a certain notice display (certain effect) performed after the third display ends in the first state may extend to the next change. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain notice display (in particular, a certain effect) may start and end at least in the second state.

FIG. 293(b1) is an effect following FIG. 291(l). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 293(b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291(m) to (n), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293(b3), in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed, not the mini game but the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer notice effect is also an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared ends. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed, and then the countdown is started. When the result of the countdown is "0:00" indicating 0 seconds, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 293(b3), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It should be noted that there may be a case where a fake timer advance notice effect is started in which the timer advance notice effect ends after the countdown is started and before "0:00". Here, as another example of the timer notice effect, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 237 to 290 can be appropriately combined. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started. It may be easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol in the case where is started. In the timer advance notice effect according to the present embodiment, after the countdown is performed, "0:00" indicating 0 second is reached, and then a certain effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed is displayed. , The iron plate image TP) is displayed, but after "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, another effect display (for example, "iron plate") is displayed in the display area where the timer display has been performed. Is a display area that is different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after performing a display capable of specifying a certain performance display or a display related to a certain performance display such as “chance”. The effect display (for example, the iron plate image TP) may be configured to be performed. Further, the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to "0:00" indicating 0 second as a result of the countdown, but may display up to "1" indicating 1 second, or , "00:01" may be displayed. Specifically, "10" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after "1" is displayed, another effect display (for example, a certain effect display such as "iron plate" can be specified or a "chance" After performing such a display related to a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, the iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed ( Here, the countdown display may be until the display of "1", immediately before another effect display is displayed, or until the display of another effect display. ). The time from the display of "1" to the start of the display of another effect display is the same (substantially the same) as the time from the display of "2" to the start of the display of "1". It may be different (that is, displayed at the timing of “0” in “2”→“1”→“0”) or different. In addition, when a pseudo-relational pattern is displayed as a certain effect display, a display indicating "NEXT" or "continuation" may be displayed as another effect display. Further, although the timer display (for example, “10:00”) is displayed immediately after the display of the image-in-preparation RDY ends, another display is displayed after the display of the image-in-preparation RDY ends. (For example, a display showing how to count up the timer display from 0, or a display related to the timer display such as "until next chance up, after") is displayed before the timer display is displayed. May be configured as described above, or may be configured such that another display is not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293(b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00", and the countdown is completed.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293(b5), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, the timer notice effect can be a notice display of the iron plate image TP as a notice display. It should be noted that in each of the performance examples shown in this embodiment, a performance other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain performance.

FIG. 293(c1) to FIG. 293(c3) are effects following FIG. 293(b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 293(c1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 293(c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to gradually become shorter in accordance with the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, a state in which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shown by the numerical display in the timer display and the display in a display mode other than the numerical display. It should be noted that, first, only the decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 may be performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds. In this case, the decreasing speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may be changed before and after the countdown by the timer display is started. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided and displayed with lengths corresponding to the respective remaining times, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. When a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be given when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the respective decreasing speeds are different.

Further, in this example of effect, an effect of extending the execution time of the timer notice effect may be performed, and for example, in the case of extending, the number 0 may be erased and the meter may be restored again. Also, the length of the meter may be different depending on the timer advance notice time. Further, the decreasing rate of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, it may not be constant at a certain timing. Further, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of a certain meter is long, but, for example, as a result of the decrease speed increasing from the middle, the length may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, the decreasing speed may be faster or slower in the state where the numbers are also displayed.

FIG. 294 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 294(a1) shows that the swordsman reach has started. In this effect example, unlike in FIG. 291(m), the image RDY being prepared is not displayed. Then, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIG. 294(a2) to FIG. 294(a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294(a4) is performing a united animation and is displayed. A pair of translucent button images 136q is displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the united animation may be referred to as a button effect introduction animation or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136q informs that the button image 136a is materialized by being united and the button notice effect is started. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button notice presentation. The pair of semi-transparent button images 136q move toward the center while approaching each other. It should be noted that, in this effect example, an example in which two semi-transparent button images 136q are combined has been described, but for example, an effect in which four semi-transparent button images 136q are combined may be performed, and in this case, two semi-transparent buttons are combined. The button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is more easily started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the image 136q is performed. You may Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted yet while the combined animation is being displayed. Also, when the deca button image 136aL described later is displayed and the button advance notice effect is started, the same semi-transparent button image 136q may be used to perform the uniting animation, or by the semi-transparent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL. A coalescing animation may be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294(a5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q is shown to be closer.

Then, when the united animation succeeds, as shown in FIG. 294(a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is started. When the button notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, and the characters “press” are displayed together with the animation showing that the button image 136a is pressed, and further, the button image 136a remains below the button image 136a. A time meter MT is displayed to inform the remaining time of the operation acceptance period. Further, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. Note that the button advance notice effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button advance notice effect is started.

FIGS. 294(b1) to (b6) show modified examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 293(b1) to (b5). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 294(b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 293(b1) to (b3), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 294(b4) shows a state in which the above-described coalescence animation is started when the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer announcement effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is indicated that the advance notice display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the semi-transparent button images 136q are united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display becomes “0:00”, that is, the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced by and the timer advance notice effect. It should be noted that the countdown may not be started immediately after the timer notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, but the countdown of the timer display may be started at the start of the coalescence animation. According to this, it may be possible to easily specify the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Further, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be ended and the timer advance notice effect may be started during the display of the combined animation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 294(b5), the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of the combination is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. The timer display may be “0:00” after the united animation is completed, or the timer display may be “0:00” at the timing when the united animation is completed.

FIG. 294 (b6) shows a state in which the united animation has succeeded, the big button image 136aL has been materialized, the button advance notice effect has started, and the operation acceptance state has started. In this example of performance, the decal button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer advance notice effect and the united animation are performed than when only one of the timer advance notice effect and the united animation is performed. Has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the state where the big button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

FIG. 294(c1) is a modification of the effect shown in FIGS. 294(b3) to (b6). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 294(c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 294(b3) to (b4), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 294(c3), a state is shown immediately before the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other and the combination is completed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 294 (c3), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 causes at least a part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q to overlap, and more than in the non-overlapping state. It is difficult to visually recognize the semi-transparent button image 136q. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the united animation succeeds.

Then, when the united animation is successful, the button advance notice effect by the big button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 294(c4). Since the effect shown in FIG. 294(c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 294(b6), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 294 is also shown with respect to an example in which the preparing image RDY ends during execution of super reach. There may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image in preparation RDY ends and the timer advance notice starts during the display of the introduction animation.

FIG. 295 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 295(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has the variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal in the center thereof. Is displayed, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 295(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 is in a red display mode, that is, the change advance notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 295(a). The background color of the in-preparation image RDY is red, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case of the green background color that is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 295(a) has a default display mode in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 295(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 295(b), the preparing image RDY overlaps the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which the effect image EF5 does not overlap. .. That is, the end effect of the display of the image RDY being prepared is started. In this way, it can be said that in this example of performance, the display of the in-preparation image RDY is finished except for the super reach.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 295(c), the tutorial display area TT1 (that is, the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed) shows that the timer advance notice effect is started. ing. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 and then the countdown is started. In the production example shown in FIG. 295(c), "90:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this effect example, a state in which the timer advance notice effect is started before the super reach is developed is shown. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer notice effect is started is a long time of "90:00", and it can be inferred that the symbol variation display time is long, and the expectation for the big hit may be improved. In this way, in this example of performance, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as "90:00", the time is relatively short such as "10:00". Finally, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case of being displayed in (short time). Further, in this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display in the timer notice effect is likely to be started at a long time. Moreover, in this example of performance, the timer display is long time and the background is red, so that the reliability of the big hit is greatly improved.

FIG. 295(d) shows a transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for switching to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the central lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the holding icons (for example, the holding icon h11) are difficult to visually recognize because the family crest monument 224E overlaps. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It is notified that the family crest 224E will move to the super reach due to the rising/rotating operation. At the timing shown in FIG. 295(d), the timer display is "30:00".

FIG. 295(e) shows a state in which the above-described united animation is started when the timer display countdown is being performed in the timer announcement effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "2:00", and it is indicated that the advance notice display corresponding to the timer advance notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here again, the timing at which the translucent button images 136q are united by the united animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. It is shown that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced by and the timer advance notice effect.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 295(f), the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are further brought close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of the union is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. In this example of performance, the background color of the timer notice display is red, which makes it easier to confirm and display the jackpot pattern than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. Note that the jackpot reliability may be the same when the timer advance notice display is the default background color and when it is the red background color.

FIG. 295(g) shows a state in which the united animation has succeeded, the decal button image 136aL has been materialized, the button advance notice production has started, and the remaining time meter MT has been displayed to start the operation acceptance state. There is. In this effect example, the longer the time for counting down the timer in the timer display, the more likely it is for a big hit.

FIG. 296 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 296(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. Is displayed, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 296(a1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 is in a red display mode, that is, the change advance notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. The family coat emblem 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 296(a1). The background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 296(a1) has a default display mode in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 296(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296(a2), the preparing image RDY is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296(a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. When the mini game starts, the mini character MC1 of the lord and the target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas that are divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area. The arrow hits the hit area to determine the reliability of the big hit. High notices are being given. In this effect example, a state where a mini game is played before the transition to the super reach is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296(a4), a state in which the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the lord is stuck in the area around the target TGT is shown. That is, it is shown that the mini-game as a notice display has achieved great success.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296(a5), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the variable icon h0, because the mini game was a great success. It is shown that the notice by is ranked up. In addition, the family coat emblem 224E also emits gold in color in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. It should be noted that, after the change icon h0 is changed from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family crest actor 224E may be changed from the red light emitting mode to the golden light emitting mode, or the family crest actor 224E may be red emitting. The change icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the gold display mode after changing the mode to the gold light emission mode, or the change icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the gold display mode. Then, the family coat emblem 224E may be changed from a red light emission mode to a gold light emission mode. Then, in the tutorial display section TT1, the closing operation based on the shutter image is started, and the display of the mini game that has been displayed shifts to the invisible state due to the shutter image. It should be noted that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started, The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, in this example of effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game, but the hold icon may be changed in some cases.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296(a6), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. As a result, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296(a7), the shutter display is shown closed in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is in a non-display state in which no display is performed. Note that when the shutter image is released, the tutorial display may be started, or another notice display, a timer notice display, or a mini game may be started. In addition, a gray-out display may be performed after the shutter image is released.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 296(b1) to (b8), an example showing a state in which the mini game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY will be described.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296(b1), since one variable display of special figure 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and a notice is displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Panda is master of lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord's character is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 296(b1) has a default display mode in which it is displayed in blue.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296(b2), the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is shown as being closed by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296(b3), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. It can be said that the shutter image is a mini game preview display displayed before the display of the mini game described later is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 296 (b4), the shutter display is shown closed in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed in an open state by a predetermined open animation. In this example of performance, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display section TT1. That is, in this effect example, a state where the mini game is started is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 296(b4) to (b8) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 296(b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 296(a3) to (a7), and thus description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that after the mini game ends, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display an explanation or a gray-out display.

FIG. 297 is a diagram showing, step by step, a display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to this embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 297(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. Is displayed, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 297(a1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 is in a red display mode, that is, the change advance notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. The family coat emblem 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 297(a1), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character is displayed. And the relationship with Tonosama's character. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 297(a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 297(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 297(a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is shown to be closed by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (preliminary display) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain area (tutorial display section TT1). .. Note that at least a part of the character display that is displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed during the display of the shutter image.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297(a3), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. This shutter image can be referred to as a pre-notice display that is displayed before the notice display described below is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (a4), the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed in an open state by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, when the shutter image is released, not the prepared image RDY, the mini game, or the timer notice effect, but a notice display made up of the characters "intense heat" is displayed. The "super heat" notice display may be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect. In this case, even if it is displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than if it is displayed without passing through the mini game or the timer notice effect. Good. In addition, the notice display of “heat” may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect. Further, in this example of the effect, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display section TT1 by the shutter image before displaying the advance notice such as "intense heat".

FIG. 297(b1) to FIG. 297(b8) show an example of presentation showing how the notice icon appears in the tutorial display section TT1. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 297(b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 297(a1) to 297(a3), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297(b4), the shutter display is shown closed in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed in an open state by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display portion TT1, when the shutter image is opened, a timer notice notice icon I81 for notifying that the timer notice effect is performed is displayed. As a result, it is announced that the timer announcement effect will be performed. Note that other notice icons may appear.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297(b5), the timer preview notice icon I81 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 pops out of the tutorial display section TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297(b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display section TT1.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297 (b7), the shutter image shows that the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display state on the tutorial display unit TT1. In this example of performance, the state in which the timer advance notice icon I81 is displayed is maintained until the shutter image is completely closed to notify that the timer advance notice icon I81 is stocked. The shutter image may be deleted when the closing operation is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 297(b8), the shutter display is shown opened in the tutorial display section TT1 that was closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed in an open state by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display section TT1 displays the preparing image RDY. At the timing shown in FIG. 297 (b8), the preparing image RDY is in the default display mode. This in-preparation image RDY is displayed because the notice icon I81 for timer notice is stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance notice effect is informed by the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this example, the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the timer notice effect and the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but they are different. You may Further, the mini game or the timer notice effect may be started without displaying the image RDY being prepared.

FIG. 298 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start or end timing of a certain notice display, or the start or end timing of a certain effect is a different state of the subdivided states of the second state. It may be the same state.

FIG. 298(a1) is an effect following FIG. 291(l). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 292(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 291(m), so description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the effect shown in FIG. 298(a1), display may be started after the in-preparation image RDY has developed into super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298(a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 298(a3), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" is derived, and swing fluctuation is started. At this time, the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. That is, it can be said that the in-preparation image RDY is displayed in a state in which the display indicating that the big hit has been made. Also, in order to celebrate the big hit, the family crest actor 224E, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa, and the general actor 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display mode in which they emit light in multiple colors.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298(a4), the preparing image RDY is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 298(a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the in-preparation image RDY was displayed. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed, and then the countdown is started. When the result of the countdown is "0:00" indicating 0 seconds, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 298(a5), "3:00" is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. It should be noted that there may be a case where a fake timer announcement effect is started after the countdown is started and before the timer announcement effect reaches “0:00”.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298(a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298(a7), the character "Go" is displayed in the display area in which the timer display is being performed, informing that a certain notice effect is started. There is. The display of the character "Go" may or may not be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298(a8), a state in which the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol is started is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 298(a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decal button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain notice effect, that is, the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer notice effect is not performed, the jackpot pattern promotion effect may not be started. When the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started, the deca button image 136aL is not the default display. The mode button image 136a may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played in place of the timer announcement effect. In addition, the big button image 136aL may be displayed even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 298(a9), from the combination of the decorative patterns of the "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4" jackpot, the "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" jackpot It is changed to a combination of decorative patterns of, and it is notified that the probability variation big hit is confirmed. That is, it is reported that the big hit symbols have been promoted.

298(b1) to FIG. 298(b4) show a state in which the countdown of the timer display by the timer advance notice effect is started while the animation of the duel scene in the super reach is continuing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298(b1), a state in which the animation of the duel scene continues is shown. At this time, the timer notice production is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display section TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 298(b1), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer advance notice display, and then the countdown is started. The time when the countdown is started may be before the super reach is reached, after the super reach is reached, at the timing when the super reach is reached, or when the reach is reached. It may be before the shift to the state or after the shift to the reach state and before the super reach is developed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298(b2), the button advance notice effect is started, and the state in which the default time display mode button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT is shown. .. That is, it is shown that the final judge effect has been started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 298(b2), the timer display shows "9:00". That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed by the timer notice effect during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. Here, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is longer than the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer notice effect.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 298(b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 298(b4), the main character wins the enemy swordsman, -Decorative 4-decorative 4" combination of decorative patterns is derived, and swing fluctuation is started. On the other hand, with the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, that is, after that, there is a possibility that the jackpot design may be promoted. It should be noted that in this effect example, the timer display is configured not to be "0:00" even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect. This is because, for example, in the final judge effect, a combination of missing decorative symbols is displayed, and thereafter, the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. On the contrary, if the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be 0.

FIG. 299 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the timer notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 299(a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 297(a1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299(b), a state is shown in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. Only one type of display mode is prepared for the in-preparation image RDY in this effect example, and change display to another display mode is not performed. As described above, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. Further, when there are a plurality of types of certain notice display and certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or certain effect will be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299(c), the preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. In this example of performance, the background color in the timer notice display is selected from a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the big hit is indicated by the background color. In the effect example shown in FIG. 299(c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "10:00", and it is informed that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Before and after the countdown of the timer display is started, the background color of the timer advance notice display may be changed so that the reliability is improved on the way.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299(d) shows that the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed. In addition, a state in which the decoration pattern is in a reach state with "decoration 4" being stopped and displayed on each of the left pattern and the right pattern is shown. It should be noted that the reach state may be after the timer display is "0:00", the timer display may be "0:00" after the reach state, and the timer display is "0". The reach state may be set at the timing of "0:00". It should be noted that, in this effect example, there is a correspondence relationship with the display indicating that when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, the super reach is developed, and the super reach is surely developed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299(e) displays the word "Go" in place of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and displays a certain notice display. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299(f), the button advance notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is in a non-display state. In this effect example, the start of the button advance notice effect itself is not the advance notice display started as a result of the timer advance notice effect, but the advance notice displayed when the result is successful as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 in the button advance notice effect. The display corresponds to the notice display that is started as a result of the timer notice production being performed. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be in a non-display state after the button advance notice effect is started, or the button advance notice effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is in the non-display state, The tutorial display section TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button advance notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, there may be an effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299(g), it is shown that the button advance notice effect is started and the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 299(h), it is determined that the button advance notice effect has been successful, and as shown in FIG. 299(i), it shifts to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for switching to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the central lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest monument 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1. It is notified that the family crest 224E will move to the super reach due to the rising/rotating operation. Further, in this example of performance, when at least the swordsman reach of the super reach is to be transitioned to, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to the super reach.

FIG. 299(j) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Moreover, since the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display section TT1 is framed out together with the UI section UI3. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 299(k), the cut-in image HCI of the princess is displayed. The cut-in image HCI of this princess is suddenly displayed without going through the button notice effect, the timer notice effect, or the mini game, and the reliability is low, but the button notice effect or the timer notice effect or It may be displayed as a result of playing the mini game. Further, instead of the cut-in image HCI of the princess, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed.

FIG. 300 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 300(a) to 300(c) are the same as those in FIGS. 299(a) to 299(c), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 300(d), a state is shown in which an animation is being performed in which the character of the lord as a navigation character is throwing a bomb. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while screaming "I'm still", and this bomb displays the first decorative symbol from the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Move across device 208L. Then, the bomb explodes toward the tutorial display section TT1 where the timer display countdown is performed, and explodes in the vicinity above the tutorial display section TT1.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300(e), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted and the preparing image RDY is displayed again. At the time when this timer advance notice effect was started, the timer display was "10:00", and the timing at which the button advance notice effect was started was informed, but because the timer advance notice effect was interrupted, It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice production. Note that the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case where the timer advance notice effect is interrupted by the navigation character than when the timer advance effect is not interrupted by the navigation character. In addition, when the effect of interrupting the countdown of the timer display is performed, the time of the timer display is increased instead of the display of the image RDY being prepared, and the time until the countup is extended. Good or slow down the countdown. Further, for example, the timer notice has an advantage that the timing of 0 can be easily predicted because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the future can be known by the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (that is, the start timing of the timer notice). There are cases.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300(f), the state in which the button advance notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300(g), the state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the button notice effect and the start of the operation valid period is shown. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 300(h), it is determined that the button advance notice effect has been successful, and as shown in FIG. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for switching to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the central lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest monument 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1 in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is notified that the family crest 224E will move to the super reach due to the rising/rotating operation. Further, in this example of performance, when at least the swordsman reach of the super reach is to be transitioned to, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden.

FIG. 300(j) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden together with the UI section UI3, but the in-preparation image RDY is continuously displayed. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300(k) shows that the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is restarted. Specifically, the timer advance notice display after the restart is changed to a gold background color, which shows that the reliability of the big hit is improved. Also, in FIG. 300(k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates “10:00”, and there is a possibility that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed by the timer advance notice effect during the super reach (swordsman reach). In addition, the start time of the timer notice production is set to an appropriate timing, for example, before the super reach is started, after the super reach is started, before reaching the reach state, or when the super reach is started after reaching the reach state. May be started at a timing such as before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is restarted can be set to an appropriate time, and for example, it may be started from "9:00" indicating the time of interruption.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300(l), the timer display becomes "0:00", and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300(m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 300(n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to inform that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP displayed as a certain notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 299, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not the development to super reach, but the cut-in image displayed during super reach as a result of the timer notice effect being extended. The cut-in image has high reliability as a result. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown is “0:00” at a good place in super reach, and an example in which a good effect is performed is shown. Further, the expectation of the big hit is higher as the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (start timing of a certain notice display) is later in a certain change.

FIG. 301 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step. Since the effect shown in FIG. 301(a) is the same as that in FIG. 299(a), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(b), a state is shown in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. At this time, “TIMER×2” is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed, which indicates that the timer advance notice effect is performed twice. The display of “TIMER×2” may be displayed at the same time as the display of the preparing image RDY, or may be displayed after the preparing image RDY is displayed. You may make it think that it will be performed once, but will actually produce it that it is performed twice. Instead of displaying “TIMER×2”, for example, two preparing images RDY may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(c), it is shown that the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. .. The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which has a low reliability. Here, the timer preview display may have a default background color of green. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "10:00", and it is informed that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(d), the timer display becomes "0:00", and the countdown is completed. In addition, a state in which the decoration pattern is in a reach state with "decoration 4" being stopped and displayed on each of the left pattern and the right pattern is shown. Further, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER×2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer advance notice effect has been digested and ended. ing. The display of “TIMER×2” may be made difficult to visually recognize by displaying the effect when the timer display is “0:00”. Further, the display of “TIMER×2” may be kept displayed instead of being erased. Further, when a plurality of in-preparation displays are displayed, a state in which the display regarding the in-preparation display is once hidden may be provided after the first in-preparation display is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(e), the word "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(f), the button advance notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the display of "Go" is erased, and it is in a non-display state. Therefore, it may seem that there is no stock of the timer advance notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button advance notice effect itself is not the advance notice display started as a result of the timer advance notice effect, but the advance notice displayed when the result is successful as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 in the button advance notice effect. The display corresponds to the notice display that is started as a result of the timer notice production being performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time from the start of the button notice effect and the start of the operation valid period is shown. ing. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY again to notify that the second timer advance notice effect will be started, but when the preparing image RDY is displayed again, the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Is enlarged and displayed compared to when is displayed. Therefore, the changing image h0 and a part of the decorative pattern may be partially overlapped by the in-preparation image RDY. In this way, the image RDY being prepared is once hidden and further overlapped, which may bring about an effect of drawing more attention.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 301(h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and as shown in FIG. 301(i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shifts to the super reach. Displayed and developed into super reach (swordsman reach).
In addition, the family crest monument 224E rises and rotates, and overlaps with the front surface side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged image RDY being prepared, and is more difficult to visually recognize than the state in which it does not overlap the family crest monument 224E. The image RDY being prepared may be overlapped with the family coat emblem 224E only when it is enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when it is not enlarged and displayed. Further, after the super-reach shift display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to the super reach.

FIG. 301(j) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden together with the UI section UI3, but the in-preparation image RDY is continuously displayed. Since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed, part of the variation icon h0 is overlapped, and the swordsman character in the reach effect display is also overlapped. In this way, the enlarged and displayed image RDY may be displayed even during execution of the super reach. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(k), the state where the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer notice display and the second timer notice effect is started is shown. Specifically, the timer advance notice display after the start is changed to a gold background color, which shows that the reliability of the big hit is improved. Also, in FIG. 301(k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "3:00", and it is notified that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed by the timer advance notice effect during the super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer notice display is set to be the same as the size of the enlarged image RDY being prepared, and when the timer notice display is enlarged, it is a big hit compared to when it is not enlarged. It is easy to confirm and display the design. In addition, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, the enlarged display may be performed without fail. Further, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer notice effect is more reliable than that of the first timer notice effect, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the timer display time may be longer in the second timer advance notice effect than in the first timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(l) shows that the timer display is "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 301(n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to inform that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the advance notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. In this example of performance, it may be possible to dramatically improve the sense of expectation for a big hit by notifying in advance that the timer advance notice production will be performed twice.

As described above, in this effect example, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed as the number of clothes, when one image RDY being prepared is exhausted, all the images RDY being prepared are displayed in the same symbol variable display. It has been shown to be digested.

FIG. 302 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 302(a1) to (a2) are the same as those in FIGS. 298(a1) to (a2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302(a3), it is shown that the long-press effect by the long-press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long-press effect display, an area in which the lord's character is drawn is arranged in the upper part, and an area in which the swordsman character is drawn is arranged in the lower part. , The sizes of both areas are displayed so as to change relatively. The in-preparation image RDY is also displayed when the long press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 302(a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302(a4), it is shown that the acceptance of the long press operation by the long press effect is started. That is, it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer advance notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. In addition, in FIG. 302(a4), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "5:00", and there is a possibility that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, the operation valid period and the countdown time of the timer display match. Note that they do not have to match completely. In addition, the timer notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer advance notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

In FIG. 302(a5), it is shown that the player is pressing and holding the effect button 136 for a long time. At the timing shown in FIG. 302(a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is "4:00".

In FIG. 302(a6), the player continues to press and hold the effect button 136. At this time, in the long press effect display, the area in which the lord's character arranged above is drawn is enlarged, and the area in which the swordsman character placed below is drawn is reduced accordingly. Character is shown to be dominant. This suggests that favorable results are likely to occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 302(a6), the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "3:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302(a7), the timer display is "0:00", the countdown is finished, and the state of the characters "Go" is displayed. In addition, the long-press effect continues to be performed, and the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is still ongoing. That is, it can be said that the character display of “Go” is displayed during the effective operation period of the effect button 136. In the long press effect display, the area in which the lord's character arranged above is drawn is further enlarged, and the area in which the swordsman character arranged below is drawn is further reduced. It is shown that the lord's character is by far the most dominant. The long press effect may be ended after the character "Go" is displayed, or the character "Go" may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, or "Go" may be displayed. The long press effect may be ended at the timing when the character “” is displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, or the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation valid period ends, or “Go” may be displayed. The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character “” is displayed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302(a8), the character "one shot" is displayed, and the decal button image 136aL is also displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to start the button advance notice effect and the operation is effective. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance notice effect can be an example of a button operation effect that is performed subsequent to the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that an example in which a plurality (types) of button effects are continuously performed is shown. Here, the operation valid period to be set may be set again after the operation valid period in the long-press effect has once ended, or may be set continuously in the operation valid period in the long-press effect. May be.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 302(a9), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 302(a10), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, -Decorative 4-decorative 4" combination of decorative symbols is derived and swing fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest cast 224E, the Yatsushiro cast 224Fa, and the general cast 224Fb emit light in a rainbow emission mode so as to celebrate the big hit.

In this way, in this production example, the long press part ends the preparation display and starts the countdown of the timer display, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or at the end of the long press part. Then, it becomes "0:00", and an example in which the button effect performed in the next part is good is shown.

FIGS. 302(b1) to 302(b5) show a state where the long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but the timer notice effect is not performed.

Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302(b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, the acceptance of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that the long press operation of is being performed. In this example of the effect, the timer notice effect is not performed.

However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 302(b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the long press effect display, the lord's character arranged above is drawn. The area has been reduced, and the area in which the character of the swordsman placed below has been drawn has been enlarged accordingly, indicating that the lord's character is inferior (character superiority of the enemy character, swordsman). .. This suggests that it is difficult to obtain advantageous results.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 302(b3), the character "one shot" is displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to give a button advance notice effect. It is shown that the operation is started and the operation valid period is set again. In this way, when the long press effect is performed and the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the decal button image 136aL is difficult to be displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is easily displayed. In addition, when the long press effect is performed, if the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the decal button image 136aL may not be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 302(b4), FIG.
In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 02 (b5), the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, a combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is derived, and shaking fluctuation starts. To be done. It should be noted that the flow may be a case where the mini game or the timer announcement effect is not passed, and the big hit may be made.

FIG. 303 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the button repeated hit effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 303(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 303(a), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character is displayed. And the relationship with Tonosama's character. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303(a), the button repeated hit effect has been started, and the explanation of "make the meter to MAX within the time by continuous button hits" is performed. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "preparation", and the operation amount meter MT11 including five memories arranged vertically is displayed on the left side of the display screen. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 303(a), it is before the start of the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period, and the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, the display of "preparation" displayed above the button image 136a can be referred to as a display corresponding to the image during preparation RDY (preparation effect display of button repeated hit effect). It should be noted that, when the button repeated hit effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 303(a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 303(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303(b), it is shown that the acceptance of the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 has been started. Specifically, the character "preparation" displayed above the button image 136a is switched to the character "start", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to start the operation valid period. At the same time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can be said that the button repeated hit effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation valid period is started.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 303(c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is reduced according to the passage of time from the operation valid period, and is displayed on the right side of the button image 136a. A countdown display is displayed by displaying numbers. At the timing shown in FIG. 303(c), "5" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. Since a certain notice effect may be performed when the countdown in the countdown display is completed, it can be said that the countdown effect by the countdown display corresponds to the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 303(d), it is shown that the player has started the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 303(d), "4" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that it is four seconds before the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 303(e), the player continuously performs the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is red in accordance with the number of continuous hit operations. It is displayed. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 303(e), "3" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that there is another 3 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 303(f), the player continues to continuously hit the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, three operation amount meters MT11 are displayed in red in three memories. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 303(f), "1" is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that there is one second left until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 303(g), the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L becomes "0", the operation valid period ends, and the state in which the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136 is shown. The memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is in a mode in which three memory cells are displayed in red, that is, it is indicated that the button continuous hit effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation valid period ends, or before the operation valid period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

When the button repeated hit effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 303(h) displays "sorry..." to notify that the button repeated hit effect has failed. In this example of performance, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include the countdown-like display.

FIG. 304 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 304(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. , And a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 304(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 all have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the first in-preparation image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 304(a). The function of the first in-preparation image RDY is the same as that of the above-mentioned in-preparation image RDY. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 304(a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this effect example, the second in-preparation image RDY is displayed above the first in-preparation image RDY1, and a state in which a plurality of in-preparation images are simultaneously displayed is shown. For the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the second in-preparation image RDY2, respective corresponding effects (timer notice effect, mini game, etc.) are performed. It should be noted that all of these in-preparation images (the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the second in-preparation image RDY2) function as a pre-reading notice. In addition, the background color of any of the prepared images is green, which is the default display mode. Also, these preparation-in-progress images may be started to be displayed at the same time, or one may be started to be displayed after the other is to be started to be displayed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 304(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

FIG. 304(b) shows a state in which the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 304(a) is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The change icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. To do. Also, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, it can be said that the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the second in-preparation image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, these in-preparation images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 304(c), the first preliminary image RDY1 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first image in preparation RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "5:00", and it is informed that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, when one of the plurality of preparing images is activated (digested) and the effect is started, all the other preparing images are also digested. It should be noted that although all the images in preparation are consumed in one symbol variation display, the notice icon may be carried over to the next symbol variation display and displayed.

FIG. 304(d) shows that the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first image in preparation RDY1 is "0:00", and the countdown is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 304(e), the character "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first image in preparation RDY1 was displayed, and the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display is displayed. It is informed that a certain corresponding notice display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304(f), the character "Go" is erased together with its display area, and the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward and moves to the position of the tutorial display section TT1. An image moving animation is being prepared. Further, it is shown that the notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first in-preparation image RDY1 is started, and the ninja character NJ4 appears. Has been done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 291(f) is changed, but another It may be a character. In this production, the preparatory image moving animation may be started after the preceding start notice production is started, or the precedent start notice production may be started after the preparing image movement animation is started, The image moving animation during preparation may start at the timing when the preceding start notice production starts. Further, the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 304(f) overlaps the second in-preparation image RDY2, but may overlap the second in-preparation image RDY2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304(g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. Has been done. At this time, the entire change icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the change icon h0 as compared with the case where the effect icon EF4 is not covered.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304(h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice is started.

In FIG. 304(i), after the "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the state of reach is reached, transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are erased at the timing of shifting to the super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for switching to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the central lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest monument 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the second in-preparation image RDY2. It is notified that the family crest 224E will move to the super reach due to the rising/rotating operation. Further, in this example of performance, after the super-reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 and is hidden.

FIG. 304(j) shows that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden together with the UI section UI3, but the second in-preparation image RDY2 is continuously displayed. Further, the family crest monument 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304(k) shows that the second preliminary image RDY2 is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, which shows that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In addition, in FIG. 304(k), the timer display in the timer advance notice display indicates "10:00", and there is a possibility that a certain advance notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. Note that the timer advance notice display is set to the default display mode at the time of display start, and after the display start (for example, after the countdown is started), a promotion display such as a change to a gold background color may be performed. Good.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304(l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304(m), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display, and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 304(n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed to notify that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the advance notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain advance notice display. It should be noted that in this effect example, a new preparing image is not displayed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested, but a new preparing image is displayed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested. The middle image may be displayed.

FIG. 305 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect by the explanation display applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 305(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 291(a), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 305(a2), the explanation display in the tutorial display portion TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "The lord is the Yatsushiro shogun". .. In this effect example, when the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is switched, the opening/closing display by the shutter image described above is not performed, and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed. In this effect example, in one symbol variable display, when switching the explanation display, the opening/closing display by the shutter image is not performed, but the switching display is performed between the explanation displays.

FIG. 305(b1) to FIG. 305(b3) show how the open/close display is performed by the shutter image when the explanation display is switched. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 305(b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 291(a) to (b), description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 305(b3), the shutter image is opened and the explanatory display of "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed before the tutorial display section TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed. Is shown. That is, it is shown that the opening/closing display by the shutter image is not a precursory display that the advance notice is displayed but a false precursory display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. I expected that the notice display would be started by performing such an effect, but by disappointing the player because the notice display was not started and the notice display was disappointed, the opening/closing display of the shutter image is displayed. Sometimes you can have expectations.

FIG. 306 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step. FIG. 306(a1) to FIG. 306(a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 291(e). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 306(a1) to (a2) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 291(f) to (g), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 306(a3), the effect EF4 has been deleted, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged from the default display mode. .. In this way, a failure effect may be performed in which the display mode does not change even when the hold change animation described above with reference to FIG. 291 is performed. It should be noted that a plurality of types of characters that appear in the pending change animation may be prepared so that the display mode of the pending icon changes depending on the characters that appear in the pending change animation.

In addition, in the above-mentioned pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the UI unit UI3. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 306(b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI unit UI3 and the UI is displayed. It is also possible not to overlap the section UI3. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI unit UI3.

FIG. 307 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 307(a1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 both have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 307(a1), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character is displayed. And the relationship with Tonosama's character. In this example of the effect, the decorative pattern is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 307(a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 307(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a2), a state where the roulette effect as a mini game is started is shown. In this roulette effect, a circular roulette wheel RR is divided into three equal parts. The grandpa area is arranged above the three sections, the princess area is arranged on the lower left side, and the Chibihime area is arranged on the lower right side. When the roulette effect is started, each area is blinked in red to perform a variable display, and finally a notice display corresponding to the area illuminated in red is prepared. The symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts may be the same as the symbol variation display at which the in-preparation display or the like ends, or may be different. Further, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed and the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display and the like end may be the same, or separately. It may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be called a pre-reading notice display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a3), as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect, it is shown that all areas are lit in red. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the grandpa character, the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the advance notice display corresponding to the princess character are prepared.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a4), the tutorial display portion TT1 displays the first preparing image RDY1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and in the upper left portion of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third in-preparation image RDY3 is adjacent to the grand character GII, and the Chibi-hime character CHM is displayed below the third in-preparation image RDY3. That is, when a character is to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when a preparing image is displayed, the character is displayed at a position corresponding to the character. It can be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image under preparation. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1:1 or 1:N (N>1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N>1):1).

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a5) shows that the Chibihime character CHM moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner of the third in-preparation image RDY3. That is, it can be said that a certain notice display overlaps with another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the advance notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a6), the animation in which the character CHM of Princess Chibi throws an object toward the variable icon h0 is shown. Then, when the object reaches the variation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is difficult to visually recognize. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a7), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes in a state where it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, it is shown that the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notification by the variable icon h0 is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a8), display is started in a manner in which the grandfather character GII vibrates. This notifies that the advance notice display corresponding to the old character GII will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a9), the mini game is started in the area where the third in-preparation image RDY3, which is arranged adjacent to the old character GII, is displayed. Has been done. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a10), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol in which the characters "intense heat" are displayed is derived, suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit. There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is given by deriving the word “heat” from the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect that changes the display mode of something, but an effect that gives a big hit announcement.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a11), display is started in a mode in which the princess character HME vibrates. This notifies that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME will start. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to overlap the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be focused on by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(a12), the state where the timer advance notice effect is started is shown in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 was displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 was displayed, and then the countdown is started. When the result of the countdown is "0:00", a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 307(a12), “30:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a13), as a result of the countdown being performed, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME rises and moves to a position different from the position of the first image in preparation RDY1 to notify that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the display of "Go" described above with reference to FIG. 304(m) is being performed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307 (a14), super-reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into super-reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development of the swordsman reach. Although not shown, the family crest effector 224E rises and rotates, and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this example of performance, the background color of the super-reach transition display is gold, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is high. The tutorial display section TT1 is hidden because the countdown by the timer display is completed. Further, after the super-reach shift display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is hidden.

In this example of performance, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach, but at least one of them may be digested after the development of super reach, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini game or a timer notice effect to be played may be performed.

FIG. 307(b1) shows that in the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 307(a2), only the grand area of the three areas is lit in red. That is, of the notice display corresponding to the grandpa character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the chibi-hime character, only the notice display corresponding to the grandpa character may be prepared. It has been informed.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 307(b2), the third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandpa character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandpa character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandpa character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandpa character GII. Therefore, in this example of performance, only the mini game with the drum DRM is played.

FIG. 308 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment.

The effect shown in FIG. 308(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307(a3), but “×2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and the upper left portion of the display screen is displayed. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grand character GII, and two Chibihime characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. In addition, when a plurality of effects are prepared by the grandfather character GII and the princess character HME, for example, two same characters can be displayed for one preparing image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, this can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess character HMEs. Conversely, one character may be displayed and a plurality of preparing images may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(a3), one of the two Chibi-hime characters CHM1 of the Chibi-hime moves upward, and in the lower left corner of the third in-preparation image RDY3. It is shown that they overlap. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the Chibihime character CHM1 will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(a4), a state is shown in which an animation in which the Chibihime character CHM1 throws an object toward the variable icon h0 is performed. Then, when the object reaches the variation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display is started due to the change of the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH1.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(a5), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 is in a state where it is easily visible. At this time, the change icon h0
The display mode of is changed from the default display mode to a red display mode, and the change notification is started by the change icon h0.

Further, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(a6), the other little Chibi Princess character CHM2 of the two Chibi Princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third in-preparation image RDY3. It is shown that the parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second notice display corresponding to the Chibihime character CHM2 will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(a7), the animation in which the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi throws an object toward the variable icon h0 is shown. Then, when the object reaches the variation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is difficult to visually recognize. That is, it is notified that the advance notice display by the variable icon is ranked higher due to the change of the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH2.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(a8), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the notification form of gold, and the change notice h0 is ranked up.

FIG. 308(b1) to FIG. 308(b4) show another effect example following FIG. 308(a3). Since the effect shown in FIG. 308(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 308(a4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(b2), after the object thrown by the Chibihime character CHM1 reaches the change icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen goes dark. Is performed, the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed glows white, and the display is performed in a manner in which the light extends horizontally from there. At this time, the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the second in-preparation image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. It should be noted that, when another mini game is started while the change icon display of the variable icon h0 is being changed, the mini game is also temporarily hidden due to the darkness of the display screen. You may Further, when a plurality of preparing images are displayed, all the preparing images may be temporarily hidden, or only a part of the preparing images may be temporarily hidden. You may do it. In this way, the state in which the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as the fourth state. Then, in this effect example, the relationship between the first state in which the hold icon is displayed together with the UI unit UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is hidden together with the UI unit UI3 is the first From the state to the fourth state, it may be the second state after the first state again, or may be the second state from the first state, There may be a case where the first state changes to the fourth state and then the second state.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF7 was displayed is enlarged and displayed.

After that, when the dark display ends, as shown in FIG. 308(b4), the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is restarted. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 308(b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 308(a5), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 308(c1) to FIG. 308(c3) show another effect example following FIG. 307(a6). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 308(c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307(a7), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(c2), the display in a manner in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started, and "Go" is displayed in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 was displayed. Characters are displayed to inform that the mini game will be started. The display of "Go" may start after the grandpa character GII starts to vibrate, or the grandpa character GII may start to vibrate after the display of "Go" starts. The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the grandfather character GII starts to vibrate. This notifies that the advance notice display corresponding to the old character GII will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 308(c3), a state where the mini game is started in the area where the third in-preparation image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII is displayed is shown. Has been done. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the area where the third in-preparation image RDY3 was displayed is enlarged and moved to substantially the center of the display screen, and the effect of rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is played is performed in an area different from the area where the image under preparation was displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after the display of “Go” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without the display of “Go”. .. In addition, a big hit may be more likely to occur when the mini game is enlarged and displayed than when the mini game is not enlarged and displayed. Note that the display from the image in preparation to the start of the mini game, the timer notice effect, or the like may be performed in another area. If the third display and a certain notice display (some effect) are performed in the same area, the first display and the second display are performed in different places, so the third display is easier to understand. There is a case that there is an effect.

FIG. 309 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect that is applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the right effect display is performed may be different display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be displayed on the display device 2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 309(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is a change notice display mode, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 309(a). In this example of the effect, the decorative pattern is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 309(a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 309(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(b), the multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two left and right, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-side notice display area CUL, "Chibihime participates in SP Reach due to annihilation" is displayed, and Chibihime Warrior production is performed with the mission of princess annihilation of a large number of children, and right notice In the display area CUR, the display of "Toden participates in SP reach" is displayed, and the grandfather and the lord perform drinking comparisons, and the drinking comparison production is performed with the mission that the lord wins the drinking comparison. In this example of performance, the mission in the Chibihime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production are switched to super reach when at least one mission is achieved, and reliability is improved when both missions are achieved. Has been done. In addition, the drinking comparison production may be started after the Chibihime Musou production is started, the Chibihime Musou production may be started after the drinking comparison production is started, and both productions are started at the same time. May be done. In addition, in this example of performance, if at least one of the mission in the Chibihime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, a big hit may be made.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during the execution of both the Chibihime Musou effect and the drinking comparison effect. There is. When the mini game starts, the mini character MC1 of the lord and the target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas that are divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area. An arrow hits the hit area to give an opportunity advance notice. It is supposed to be. Note that the hit area is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all the hit areas may be hit, and all hit areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(d), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord has pierced the area around the target TGT. That is, the appearance of the success of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(e), the chance up cut-in image WCI in which the word "chance" is displayed in the left notice display area CUL where the Chibihime Musou production is performed is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the mission in the Chibihime Musou production corresponding to the area in which the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed is easier to achieve. As described above, in this example of performance, the area in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed does not match the area in which the advance notice is displayed, and it may be possible to give the player a feeling of strangeness and improve the interest. .. Note that the chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right-side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance-up may be increased in both the left-side notice display area CUL and the right-side notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed in some cases. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden because the mini game has ended.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(f), a state in which the minions are completely annihilated in the Chibihime Musou production displayed in the left notice display area CUL and the mission is achieved is shown.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(g), the character "Wipe out" is displayed together with the display of Chibihime in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production has been achieved. Has been announced. In the right advance notice display area CUR, the effect of drinking and comparing continues.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(h) shows that the lord has won the grandfather in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right notice display area CUR, and the mission has been achieved.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(i), the word "Victory" is displayed in the right advance notice display region CUR together with the display of the lord's up, and it is notified that the mission in the drinking comparison effect has been achieved. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(j), it is shown that the swordsman reach has started. It should be noted that when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained displayed by changing the display position downward. In this example of performance, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking and comparison production was completed, and because the mission in the Chibihime Musou production was achieved, Princess Chibi appeared as a friend of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production fails, it will move to the swordsman reach, but Chibi Princess does not appear, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production is achieved, and the drinking comparison production If the mission in fails, move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect, the contents of the effect to be subsequently developed differ depending on the success or failure of the two missions.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 309(k), the cut-in image HCI of the princess on which the characters of "Chance" and the character of the princess are displayed is displayed on the background of horizontal stripes. As a result, the reliability of the jackpot is improved, but it is not the notice display started via the mini game started from the preparing image RDY or the timer notice production, and it is suggested that the reliability is not so high. ing.

FIG. 310 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 309. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 310(a) and 310(b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 309(a) and 309(b), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310(c), the appearance of both the Chibihime Musou effect and the drinking comparison effect is shown. In this effect example, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to the super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 310(c) to FIG. 310(e). Note that, in FIG. 310(e), the chance up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 310(f) to 310(j) are performed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 310(f) to (j) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. The description is omitted since it is the same except for the above.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310(k), the preparing image RDY is overlapped with the effect EF5, the displaying of the preparing image RDY ends, and the notice display corresponding to the preparing image RDY is displayed. It has been announced that it will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310(l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY was displayed. When the mini game starts, the mini character MC1 of the lord and the target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas that are divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the hit area. An arrow hits the hit area to give a chance advance notice. It is supposed to be. Note that the hit area is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, all the hit areas may be hit, and all hit areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 310(m), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord has been shown stuck in the area around the target TGT. That is, the appearance of the success of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

Then, the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 310(n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this example performance, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than that when the mini game is started and the corresponding notice display is displayed before the transition to the super reach. The high notice is displayed.

FIG. 311 is a diagram showing another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 311(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307(a1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311(a2), "reach when caught" is displayed, showing that the chasing performance with the mission of catching Echigoya is started. There is. When the chase effect is started, a sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and a display (main display) relating to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311(a1). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variable display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311(a3), it is shown that the lord is close to the Echigoya. On the other hand, in the sub window WP3, the main display is continued.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311(a4), it is shown that the lord has captured Echigoya and the mission has been accomplished. As a result, the fact that reach is reached is notified. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the in-preparation image RDY to display that the reach is being prepared. As a result, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display will occur.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311(a5), the chase effect is finished, the main display displayed in the sub window WP3 is again displayed on the entire display screen, and then the "decoration 4" is reached. The situation is shown. In this performance example, it is shown that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase performance. When the main display is displayed on the entire screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display) or may be switched. Further, when the main display is a full screen display, the preparing image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

FIGS. 311(b1) to 3(b2) show another example of effects regarding the display of the sub-window during execution of the chase effect shown in FIGS. 311(a1) to 3(a5).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311(b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 311 (b1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, while the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 311(b1) displays a first preparing image RDY1. Further, the third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen. In this example of the effect, the decorative pattern is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 311 (b1) has a default display mode in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 309(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (b2), the chasing effect described above has been started. When the chase effect is started, a sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and a display (main display) relating to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311(b1). Is displayed. The first in-preparation image RDY1 and the third in-preparation image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, in the sub window WP3, only the first in-preparation image RDY1 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 of the two in-preparation images RDY1 and RDY3 is displayed in the sub window WP3, and the third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed. Is not displayed in the sub window WP3. In this way, even in this effect example, there are cases in which it is possible to grasp the situation of symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chase effect) is executed. In addition, in this effect example, the sub window WP3 and the preparing image are displayed at positions that do not overlap each other, but the preparing image may overlap the sub window WP3 and the preparing image may overlap the sub window WP3. You may make it overlap.

FIGS. 311(c1) to 3(c2) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 311(b1) to 3(b2). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 311(c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 311(b1), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (c2), the chasing effect described above has been started. When the chase effect is started, a sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and a display (main display) relating to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 311(c1). Is displayed. In addition, in this effect example, the first in-preparation image RDY1 and the third in-preparation image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position of the third in-preparation image RDY3. RDY1 is displayed only in the sub window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub window WP3, and the first in-preparation image RDY1 displayed at the position that has been displayed so far is deleted.

FIGS. 311(d1) to 3(d2) show the display mode of the image during preparation when the background display is tilted. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 311(d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 309(a), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 311 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is subjected to a shake vision effect in which the background image is inclined about 10 degrees counterclockwise. Is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, the in-preparation image RDY is shown in such a manner that the display does not tilt with the background display.

FIG. 312 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 312(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 307(a1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(a2), the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as if the UI unit UI3 is lifted. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, the letter "A" indicating the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. Has a mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, "strike" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the lord's character throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to strike in the bowling game.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(a4), a state in which a lord's character throws a bowling ball and heads toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(a5), a bowling ball collides with a pin, all 10 pins fall and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(a6), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. .. The background image of the preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode.

When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

FIG. 312(b1) to FIG. 312(b8) describe another example of the effect of the step-up notice. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 312(b1) to 312(b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 312(a1) to 312(a2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA are lifted. This is how it is displayed. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side and the right side thereof. Has a mini game display area for playing a mini game as a step-up notice. In this example of performance, the minigame is played on the second step-up display section SUB more easily than the minigame is played on the first step-up display section SUA. In addition, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini game succeeds on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini game succeeds on the first step-up display unit SUA.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(b4), a state where the mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini game is started, the display of "Let me cup in" is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the lord's character is putting is displayed. That is, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(b5), a state in which the lord's character is putting and the golf ball is moving toward the cup is shown.

Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(b6), the golf ball is cup-in, and the state where the mission is achieved is shown.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(b7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 to notify that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. .. The background image of the image RDY being prepared is red, and it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is high.

When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 312(b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

It should be noted that, in this example of performance, an example in which the bowling chance game and the golf game are successful has been described. Alternatively, in the golf game, a display indicating that the player has not cupped in may be displayed to notify the mission failure. Further, in this example of performance, the lord's character appears in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear, for example, when the princess character appears, the lord's character appears. You may make it suggest that the reliability of the big hit is higher than the case.

FIG. 313 is a diagram for describing another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 312. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 313(a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 312(a1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313(a2), the first step-up display unit SUA is raised from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as if the UI unit UI3 is lifted. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a certain object in the UI unit UI3 is hidden when the first step-up display unit SUA appears is shown. The explanation display may be erased after the first step-up display unit SUA starts displaying, the first step-up display unit SUA may be displayed after the explanation display is deleted, or The explanation display may be erased at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 313(a3) to (a5) are performed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 313(a3) to (a5) are not shown in the tutorial display section TT1 and the effects shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a5), and The description is omitted because it is the same except that the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313(a6), the state in which the mission is achieved is continuously shown.

When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313(a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and frames out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the variation icon h0 remain hidden.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313(a8), the variable icon h0 is displayed again in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the change notice display mode and is displayed again. It should be noted that the preparing image RDY may be displayed before the display of the variable icon h0 is changed and displayed again, and the mini game, the timer notice effect, or the like may be passed through.

313(b1) to 313(b3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 313(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 313(a1), except that four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 313(b2), the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as if the UI unit UI3 is lifted. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variation icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the hold icon h11 is not changed despite the upward movement of the UI unit UI3, and therefore, the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. Is shown. In other words, it can be said that when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a certain display (holding icon h11) does not move even if the UI unit UI3 moves.

313(b3) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area is shown. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of “strike” is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

FIG. 314 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 314(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is reserved, one reserved icon h11 is displayed in the reserved icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is a change notice display mode, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 314(a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 314(a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314(a), a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for switching to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the central lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest monument 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1. It is notified that the family crest 224E will move to the super reach due to the rising/rotating operation.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 314(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 314(b) shows a state in which the family crest monument 224E has returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314(c), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 314(d) to 314(f), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG. 314(f).

FIG. 314(g) shows that the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314(h), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and the variable icon h0 is displayed so as to be lifted. That is, in this effect example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. You can

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314(i), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the lord's character throws a bowling ball is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314(j), a state in which a lord's character throws a bowling ball and heads toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314(k), the bowling ball collides with the pins and all 10 pins fall to strike, showing that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 314(l), the in-preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. To be done. The background image of the preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. Further, FIG. 314(l) shows that the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and frames out. At this time, the in-preparation image RDY is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 314(m), at least one image is displayed until the frame-out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 315(a1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, while the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 315(a1) displays the first in-preparation image RDY1. The background color of the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 315(a1) has a default display mode in which it is displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(a1), a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display for switching to super reach (super reach transition display) is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E is raised and rotated, and the central lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Overlaps with the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and a part of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are made difficult to visually recognize because they are overlapped by the family crest monument 224E. The family crest monument 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display section TT1. It is notified that the family crest 224E will move to the super reach due to the rising/rotating operation. In this effect example, an example in which the first in-preparation image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach is shown.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 315(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 315(a2) shows a state in which the family crest monument 224E has returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(a3), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is erased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 315(a4) to 315(a6), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 and the first in-preparation image RDY1 do not frame out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 315(a6), the variable icon h0 is displayed at the lower display position. The display state of the first in-preparation image RDY1 is maintained without changing the display position.

FIG. 315(a7) shows that the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(a8), the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and the variable icon h0 is displayed as if it is raised. That is, in this effect example, since the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. You can Further, the first in-preparation image RDY1 is displayed overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first image in preparation RDY1 may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. Note that the first step-up display unit SUA may rise and the first in-preparation image RDY1 may also move upward.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(a9), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the lord's character throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini-game display area of the first step-up display SUA overlaps the first in-preparation image RDY1 and is more difficult to visually recognize than the non-overlapping state. The same applies to the following effects.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(a10), a state in which a lord's character throws a bowling ball and heads toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins fall and become strikes, and it is shown that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(a12), the third in-preparation image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. In other words, when a certain number of preparing images are displayed in a certain area and a new preparing image is displayed, the new preparing image is displayed in another area. You can The background color of the third in-preparation image RDY3 is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 315(a12) to 315(a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and frames out.

FIG. 315(b1) to FIG. 315(b2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI part FO animation. Note that FIG. 315(b1) is an effect following FIG. 315(a3). Further, the effect shown in FIG. 311(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 315(a4), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315(b2), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started after the UI part FO animation is completed. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but only the pedestal on which the variable icon h0 is placed is kept displayed with the display position lowered. That is, even if the UI unit UI3 is framed out, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

FIG. 316 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the pseudo continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 316(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 have default display modes. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 316(a1), a preparing image RDY is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 316(a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 309(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316(a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and "decoration 6" is on the left symbol and "decoration 7" is on the right symbol, respectively. It is shown that the display is stopped. The middle symbols are being displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316(a3), the change speed of the middle symbol becomes low, and the pseudo continuous symbol composed of the pattern of the lord is scrolling in from above the display screen. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316(a4), it is shown that the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316(a5), a pseudo-relational symbol stop animation for producing whether or not to start the pseudo-repetition is started. When the pseudo-relational pattern stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variable icon h0 and the preparing image RDY. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-relational stop animation is started, or the pseudo-relational stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is started, or the pseudo-relational pattern is started. The UI part FO animation may start at the timing when the stop animation starts. Further, the pseudo-relational pattern stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is completed. As described above, in this effect example, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in a certain state such as when the pseudo-relation effect is performed or when the pseudo-relation effect is established. When the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo continuous symbol expands laterally as shown in FIGS. 316(a5) to (a7).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316(a6), the pseudo continuous symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, making the left symbol and the right symbol difficult to visually recognize. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316(a7), the pseudo continuous symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is displayed throughout. At this time, the pseudo continuous pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of the pseudo continuous pattern is overlapped by the in-preparation image RDY. In addition, the pseudo-relational pattern is also overlapped with the stage name display section ST1, the acceptance number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It is also overlapped with the lord's character displayed in 208N and the second hold number display. In addition, at this time, the family crest monument 224E starts to rise, and a part of the pseudo continuous symbol overlaps.

Then, as shown in FIG. 316(a8), the family crest monument 224E rotates, the voice “don” is output from the speaker 120, and the fact that the pseudo-relation is performed is notified.

FIG. 316(a9) shows a state in which the pseudo-relational stop animation ends and the pseudo-relational pattern is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been done. In addition, the UI part FI animation may be started after the pseudo-relational stop animation is finished, the UI part FI animation may be started before the pseudo-relational stop animation is finished, or the pseudo-relational pattern stop The UI part FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. In addition, the decorative pattern is in a temporary stop state due to a fluctuation in the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-pseudo-relational pattern-decoration 7", and thereafter, the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-relation is started. It

FIG. 316(b1) to FIG. 316(b3) show an example of the display before and after the production of the Stetchen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 316(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 316(a1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 316(b2), the Stechen effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed in the dark, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. It is shown that the light is emitted at approximately the center and light rays extend from the center to the left and right. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 is hidden during the dark display by the Stetchen effect. Further, in this effect example, it is also shown that the in-preparation image RDY is not displayed at the time of the dark display by the Stetchen effect. Further, the preparation image RDY may be ended and the mini game or the timer notice effect may be started during the dark display.

FIG. 316(b3) shows a state in which the Stechen effect has ended. In this example of performance, the same display as before the start of the Stetchen effect is displayed after the end of the Stetchen effect. In other words, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen production in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

FIG. 317 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of the button advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317(a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 317(a), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 has a red display mode, which is a change notice display mode, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 317(a). Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 317(a) is in a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317(a), it is shown that the swordsman reach has started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The "decoration 4" forming the reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the reach state is the "decoration 4". In this effect example, the UI unit UI3 is displayed even while the swordsman reach is being executed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display portion ST1, the number-of-acceptance display 850, and the stock button image 852 are deleted, and the background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the lord's character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

The family crest 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317(b), a united animation is started, and a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from above and below the display screen, and the one approaches the center while approaching each other. Are moving. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted yet while the combined animation is being displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317(c), a state is shown immediately before the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other and the combination is completed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 317(c), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 causes at least a part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q to overlap with each other, as compared with the state where they do not overlap. It is difficult to visually recognize the semi-transparent button image 136q. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the united animation succeeds. Further, FIG. 317(c) shows a state in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. The effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is framed out, or the effect EF6 may be displayed at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 317(d), the united animation is successful, the decal button image 136aL is materialized, and the button advance notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed to indicate the operation acceptance state. It has been shown to have started. As described above, in this effect example, the UI unit UI3 is hidden at least during the period in which the button advance notice effect is being performed using the button image 136a (the large button image 136aL).

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 318(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 318(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 have default display modes. A tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 318(a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character is displayed. And the relationship with Tonosama's character. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 318(a1), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a lost design, and the first decorative pattern display device 208L displays the "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6" loss. It is displayed as a stop with a combination of decorative patterns. Further, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol 284a1 is also lit in the display mode of the loss. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 316(a1) is in the advance notice display mode displayed in red.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 309(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In FIG. 318(a2), the state in which the symbols are still displayed is shown. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 that covers the entire UI portion UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318(a3). , A character riding a motorcycle frame-in from the left side of the UI wipe display unit WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 318(a3) to 318(a5), it is shown that the character runs toward the right end. .. That is, in this effect example, the UI part wipe display part WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI part UI3 from the notice display mode to the default display mode, and the effect display is performed on the UI part wipe display part WP4. In some cases, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 can be changed naturally. In addition, for example, when the display is returned to the original display due to a loss in the super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered with the wipe display section and the effect display may be performed on the wipe display section.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318(a6), the appearance by the character of the lord on the UI wipe display portion WP4 is finished, and the UI wipe display portion WP4 is erased. When the UI section wipe display section WP4 is deleted and the UI section UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. It becomes h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation display is changed before and after the UI wipe display section WP4 is displayed.

In addition, in this effect example, the UI wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be displayed while the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the UI wipe display unit WP4 is displayed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is hidden during that time, and as a result, the preparing image RDY is displayed unintentionally. The mini game and the timer announcement effect may be started after the end.

FIG. 318(b1) to FIG. 318(b4) show an example of the display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318(b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged in the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 318(b1), since one variable display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, one suspension icon h11 is displayed in the suspension icon display area. The change icon h0 is displayed in gold and is a display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 is a default display mode. The family coat emblem 224E also emits gold in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 318(b1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 318(b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 318(b1), “Castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest actor 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa, which is one of the production movable bodies. And a general character object 224Fb are arranged.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 318(b2) to FIG. 318(b4), in the tutorial display section TT1, the swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves the line of sight from the crown to the feet. Shows that the swordsman character is scrolled. Further, as shown in FIG. 318(b4), after the swordsman character's feet are displayed, the swordsman character is scroll-displayed in such a manner that the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the crown. That is, a continuous scroll display between the top of the swordsman's character and his feet is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 shows an example of displaying the entire character by continuously scrolling a part of the character.

In the example of the effect, when the explanation display is not restarted or only the hold icon is hidden (the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display is performed using a part of the UI unit UI3. It can be said that an example of doing is shown.

FIG. 319 is a diagram showing another example of the effects applicable to the present embodiment step by step. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 319 can be applied, for example, can be divided into a first special figure starting port and a second special figure starting port for one starting port, and a symbol in a normal game state. There is a so-called MAX 8 machine (may be referred to as 8 maintenance order machine) capable of holding 8 variable displays. Here, a description will be given by taking eight MAX machines as an example.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319(a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0 so that eight hold icons can be displayed and four pedestals are arranged in the front and rear in a staggered arrangement. At the timing shown in FIG. 319(a1), since seven variable displays in special figure 1 and special figure 2 are reserved in total, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 all have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 319(a1), “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is displayed. It is being appreciated. In this example of the effect, the decorative pattern is moved to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is reduced and displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 319(a1) has a default display mode in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 319(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second hold number display, at the timing shown in FIG. 319(a1), it is notified that four special maps 1 are held and three special maps 2 are held.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yashiro actor 224Fa and a general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 319(a2) shows that the game balls have entered the second special figure starting port and the total of eight special figure 1 and special figure 2 reservations have been reserved. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the variable icon h0 which are already displayed. The display state of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of a grandfather that imitates the face of a grandfather. Also, the UI unit UI3 has changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Pong” to notify that the hold is full. In this example of effect, an example of effect in which the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed all at once when the hold is full. In addition, in this effect example, the number of times of variable display of symbols corresponding to the hold icon in which the grandfather's display mode is displayed may be notified.

In FIG. 319(b1), a state in which a swordsman reach is being performed is shown. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 319(b1), the second hold number display is displayed, and according to the second hold number display, at the timing shown in FIG. 319(b1), the special figure 1 is displayed. It is informed that four are reserved and three special maps 2 are reserved.

FIG. 319(b2) shows that the game balls have entered the second special figure starting port and the total of eight special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held. Specifically, in the second hold number display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is informed that four special maps 1 are held and four special maps 2 are held, and the speaker 120 is also held. From this, the sound "Pong" is output to notify that the hold is full.

In FIG. 319(b3), it is shown that the game was lost in the super reach, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is finished and the player returns to the castle town stage, a combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. A temporary stop display due to fluctuation is displayed. Also, because the holding tank is full while the production of Swordsman Reach is being executed, the UI section UI3 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all the change icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed. Has changed from the default display mode to the old display mode. In this example of performance, if the UI section UI3 is hidden while the UI section UI3 is hidden by super reach, when the UI section UI3 is re-displayed, the UI section UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed. An example of the effect of changing the display mode is shown.

319(c1) to FIG. 319(c4) are diagrams illustrating another aspect of the effect example shown in FIG. 319(b1) to FIG. 319(b3). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 319(c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 319(b1) to (b2), so description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 319(c3), it is shown that the game was lost in the super reach, the production of the swordsman reach was finished, and the display returned to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is finished and the player returns to the castle town stage, a combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. A temporary stop display due to fluctuation is displayed. In addition, in this example of performance, while the production of the swordsman reach is being executed, the holding tank is full, but the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0 and the holding icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the holding tank is full. The character "MAX" indicating that it has been displayed is displayed above the variable icon h0. After that, the symbols are confirmed and displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 do not change.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 319(c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display aspect to the special display aspect displayed in gold, and changes. All of the icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed from the default display mode to the grandpa display mode. After that, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 319 (c4), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed and an explanation is displayed.

FIG. 320 is a diagram showing another example of the effects applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

In the effect examples shown in FIG. 320(a1) to FIG. 320(a3) and FIG. 320(b1) to FIG. 320(b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display section TT4, and a stage name. The display portion ST2 is integrally displayed with the lower portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Even in this example of performance, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed without being framed out even when the super reach is reached. You can leave it alone. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Further, in this example of production, the image in preparation can be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 or the stage name display section ST2.

As shown in FIG. 320(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. A UI icon UI4 shown in FIG. 320(a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided into four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and the variable icon is displayed in such a manner that it is placed on the frame formed by the UI unit UI4. At the timing shown in FIG. 320(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 have default display modes. Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. Note that the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 320(a1) displays "Due to the completion of the notice icon...", and the stage name display section ST2 displays "Castle town stage". It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is also displayed.

Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224F and the general officer substance. 224Fb is arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320(a2), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is switched to the first in-preparation image RDY1 is shown. The first preparing image RDY1 has a background color of green and has a default display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320(a3), the state in which the stage name displayed in the stage name display portion ST2 is switched to the fourth in-preparation image RDY4 is shown. The fourth in-preparation image RDY4 has a background color of green and has a default display mode. As described above, in this effect example, an example in which the in-preparation image is displayed in each of the plurality of explanation display portions is shown.

FIG. 320(b1) and FIG. 320(b2) are views showing another example of effect following FIG. 320(a1). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 320(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 320(a2), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 320(b2), the stage name displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 is continuously displayed, and the fourth preparation image RDY4 is displayed on the stage name display portion ST2. It is shown that it is displayed at a position shifted upward. That is, it is shown that the image under preparation overlaps a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode in the tutorial display unit TT4.

FIGS. 320(c1) to 320(c7) are diagrams showing another aspect of the effect in which the in-preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

As shown in FIG. 320(c1), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the balloon GOT1 and the balloon portion TT3 as the third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) are displayed on the right side of the display screen. .. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (description display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 320(c1), in response to the dialog display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech display "here" is displayed in the speech bubble portion TT3, and the conversation announcement continues. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the speech balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the speech balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the grandparent character GY1 is displayed, or the speech balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The grandfather character GY1 may be displayed later. In addition, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandpa character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display section TT1. Note that the tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at a timing after the grandpa character GY1 is displayed, or at a timing before the grandpa character GY1 is displayed. Good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and the timing at which the grandpa character GY1 is displayed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be stuck on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 320(c2), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is raised from the initial position and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. More specifically, the family crest monument 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after moving, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the balloon part TT2. Each part is covered.

Then, as shown in FIG. 320(c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extension animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, and the hold display frame FL1 is extended upward, and the family crest actor 224E. It is shown to appear above. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 shows a portion that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. Further, the expanded reserved display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon TT2 and overlaps the balloon TT2, but does not overlap the balloon TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the dialogue display (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. In this way, the display mode of the pending display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expanded display mode. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, a drawing of the pending display frame FL1 before expansion and the pending display frame FL1 after expansion is shown, but the extended animation also includes the expansion of the pending display frame FL1 step by step.

Then, as shown in FIG. 320(c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is shown. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E.

In FIG. 320(c5), the state that the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

After that, FIG. 320(c6) shows that the family crest monument 224E has returned to the initial position. Further, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display section TT1 explodes is displayed. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display section TT1. As a result, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the notice display may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 and the reliability of the big hit may be increased.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 320(c7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 to notify that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. .. The background color of the in-preparation image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY being prepared, a timer notice display may be displayed to start the timer notice effect, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. ..

FIG. 321 is a diagram illustrating an effect in which the hold display frame accommodating the hold icon is expanded and displayed to change the display mode of the hold icon.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321(a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this example of performance, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided into four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 321(a1), the four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second hold icon among the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 is stored. The hold icon h12 is a display mode of the pre-reading notice (for example, a display mode that lights in blue), and the other hold icons are default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame accommodating the first hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area during the symbol variable display. Here, the area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 321(a1), the image in preparation RDY is displayed on the tutorial display section TT7. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. It should be noted that neither the variation icon h0 nor the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are displayed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the lord's character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 321(a1), the family crest monument 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321 (a2), the state in which the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed is shown. The hold icon display area can be enlarged and displayed by, for example, an animation display that gradually enlarges. At the timing shown in FIG. 321(a2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12 is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is off the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. , Is displayed in the lower right part of the display screen separately from the tutorial display section TT7. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may overlap a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 321 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 321(a3), the emission color of the family crest monument 224E, which was emitting blue light, changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is predicted to change from blue to green.

Then, as shown in FIG. 321 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase his/her expectation of a big hit for the variable display of symbols relating to the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

Then, as shown in FIG. 321(a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and the default display mode is restored. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display effect of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. In addition, in this effect example, the image RDY being prepared is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

321(b1) to FIG. 321(b2) show another form of the effect example shown in FIG. 321(a1) to FIG. 321(a5). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 321(b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 321(a1), so description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 321(b2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 321(a2). At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped with the enlarged hold icon by the preparing image RDY. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 321(b2), the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 321(b1). The display (main display) is displayed. Although the UI unit UI2 is not displayed in the display in the sub window WP3, it may be displayed. Further, the sub window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged and displayed hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variable display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

Next, a display example of a warning display when a ball-squeezing error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 322 to 324. Here, FIG. 322 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 323 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 324 is a display example of a ball removal error display. It is a figure. It should be noted that the display position of the warning message for the ball-out error (hereinafter referred to as “ball-out error display”) is set to a fixed place, but which position is set as the display position can be set appropriately. is there. In the following description, a display example including variations of the display position of the ball-out error display is shown below. It should be noted that this ball removal error display is erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated and the lower plate full state is resolved and the ball removal error is resolved. In addition, in the example of the effect described below, a display example of the ball removal error display is shown, but the present invention can be applied to, for example, a door opening error that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. Further, while displaying the ball-out error display, the error sound may be output together or not output.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322(a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 291(c) to (d). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322(a1), a state is shown in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, a message "Please remove the ball" is displayed to prompt the player to produce a game ball stored in the lower plate to eliminate the lower plate full condition.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322(a2), a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the preparing image RDY is displayed. It is shown as being displayed. As a result, it may be possible to notice the in-preparation image RDY by looking at the ball-out display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the in-preparation image RDY is finished by viewing the ball-out error display ERR1 and the in-preparation image RDY at the same time.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 322(b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball-out error occurs in the example productions shown in FIGS. 293(c1) to (c2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322(b1), it is shown that the remaining time display meter MT4 partially overlaps the ball-out error display ERR1. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices made up of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball-out error display ERR1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 322(b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display becomes shorter, the overlapped state due to the ball-out error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter is MT4 becomes easy to visually recognize. As a result, the remaining time display meter MT4 may be noticed by looking at the ball-out error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is completed by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 322(c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball-out error occurs in the example productions shown in FIGS. 294(b4) to (b5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322(c1), the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the enemy swordsman character, but the semi-transparent button image 136q related to the coalescence animation overlaps. It is shown that it is not. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 may overlap the semi-transparent button image 136q in the united animation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 322(c2), when the semi-transparent button image 139q approaches, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps. This may allow the coalescing animation to be noticed by looking at the ball-out display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by watching the united animation. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to look at the ball-out error display ERR1 and the united animation at the same time, and to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the united animation ends.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 322(d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of the warning display when the ball removal error occurs in the example productions shown in FIGS. 301(f) to (g). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322(d1), part of the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT, but the tutorial display unit It is not overlapped with the UI unit UI3 including the TT1.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 322(d2), the tutorial display portion TT1 displays the preparing image RDY again, and it is informed that the second timer advance notice effect will be started, but the preparing image RDY is redisplayed. At times, the image RDY being prepared is displayed in an enlarged scale as compared with the case where the first preparation image RDY is displayed. Therefore, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 which has not been overlapped with the tutorial display section TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the enlarged in-preparation image RDY by looking at the ball-out display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the in-preparation image RDY is finished by viewing the ball-out error display ERR1 and the enlarged in-preparation image RDY at the same time.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 322(e1) to (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball-out error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 302(a5) to (a6). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322(e1), a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area in which the character of the swordsman is drawn, but the lord's character is drawn. Area does not overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 322(e2), as a result of the player's long-pressing operation of the effect button 136, the region in which the lord's character arranged above is drawn is enlarged, and then the lord's character is drawn. A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority between the lord's character and the enemy swordsman character by looking at the ball-out display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by seeing the superiority or inferiority of the lord's character and the enemy swordsman character. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, seeing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the superiority or inferiority of the lord's character and the enemy swordsman character at the same time, and giving an opportunity to remove the ball when the superiority or inferiority of the lord's character and the enemy swordsman character is finished. May be possible.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 322(f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of the warning display when the ball removal error occurs in the example productions shown in FIGS. 304(e) to 304(f). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322(f1), it is shown that a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the second in-preparation image RDY2. On the other hand, the display area in which the character “Go” is displayed (the display area in which the first in-preparation image RDY was displayed) does not overlap.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 322(f2), the character “Go” is erased together with its display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. Image moving animation is being prepared. Further, it is shown that the notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first in-preparation image RDY1 is started, and the ninja character NJ4 appears. Has been done. At this time, the overlapping state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second in-preparation image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 may not overlap the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second in-preparation image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by looking at the second in-preparation image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it is possible to give a trigger to remove the ball when the display of the second in-preparation image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball-out error display ERR1 and the second in-preparation image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4. There are cases.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323(a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 307(a3) to (a4). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(a1), the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and the upper left portion of the display screen is displayed. Is displayed such that the third in-preparation image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandpa character GII, and the Chibihime character CHM is displayed below the third in-preparation image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 is overlapped with the princess Chibi character CHM. That is, it can be said that in this effect example, at least a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps with a part of the plurality of preparing images. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of in-preparation images (including characters) by looking at the ball-out error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by looking at a plurality of preparing images. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball-out error display ERR1 and a plurality of preparing images are viewed at the same time and the display of the preparing image is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323(b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 307(b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(b1), the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(b2), the third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandpa character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandpa character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandpa character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandpa character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 323(a2), the in-preparation image (princess Chibi character CHM) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed. Is also not overlapped against.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323(c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 309(b) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 309(b), it is shown that the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed substantially at the center of the left notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(c2), FIG. 309(e)
In the effect shown in (1), the chance that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left notice display area CUL as a result of the success of the mini game executed based on the in-preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. It is shown. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut-in image WCI. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball-out error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the chance up cut-in image WCI. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the chance up cut-in image WCI is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball out error display ERR1 and the chance up cut-in image WCI.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323(d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 311(b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(d1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 311(b1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. .. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(d2), the chase effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, a sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and a display (main display) relating to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 323(d2). Is displayed. The first in-preparation image RDY1 and the third in-preparation image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two in-preparation images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first in-preparation image RDY1 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed in the sub-window WP3 in the sub-window WP3, and the third in-preparation image RDY3 is displayed. Is not displayed in the sub window WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323(e1) to (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 311(d1) to 3(d2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(e1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 311(d1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. .. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is shaken to produce about 10 degrees counterclockwise. It is shown that it is being broken. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, the in-preparation image RDY is shown in such a manner that the display is not tilted together with the background display. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 does not change the display position and does not tilt even when the shake vision effect is being performed, and the display state is maintained. At this time, the background image is inclined, so that the margin portion is expressed in black. Then, a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps this margin part. For example, when the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated to the color of the margin part, and a part of it. It may be difficult to see.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 323(f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball-out error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 312(a1) to (a2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(f1), in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 312(a1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1. .. At this time, the ball-out error display ERR1 does not overlap any display.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 323(f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is raised from below the UI unit UI3, and the UI unit UI3 is displayed as if it is lifted. Has been done. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is at least partially overlapped with the tutorial display section TT1 because the UI section UI3 is raised. That is, the enlargement of the display area of the UI unit UI3 causes the ball-out error display ERR1 to overlap the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect on the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by seeing the UI portion UI3 rising. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display on the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball-out error display ERR1 and the effect on the first step-up display unit SUA.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 324(a1) to FIG. 324(a2) show, for example, display examples of the warning display in the case where a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIG. 314(d) to FIG. Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324(a1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 314(d), a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the upper part of the tutorial display section TT1. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, before the UI section UI3 is framed out by the UI section FO animation, the ball-excluding error display ERR1 overlaps the UI section UI3.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324(a2), the UI part UI3 is shown to be framed out by the UI part FO animation. In this effect example, a state in which the overlapping state of the ball removal error display ERR1 on the UI unit UI3 is canceled while the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward by the UI unit FO animation is shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324(b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 318(a3) to (a5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324(b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 318(a3), a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the UI wipe display part WP4. It is shown. At this time, it does not overlap with the character of the lord on the motorcycle displayed in the UI wipe display portion WP4.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324(b2), it is shown that the character of the lord on the motorcycle is moving to the right end of the UI wipe display portion WP4. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI wipe display portion WP3 on the character of the lord on the motorcycle. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 by seeing the ball-out error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by seeing the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3 is finished by simultaneously viewing the ball removal error display ERR1 and the effect display on the UI wipe display unit WP3.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324(c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 321(b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324(c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 321(b1), the ball-out error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and part of the decorative symbol is overlaid. It is shown to be wrapped. In addition, it does not overlap with other displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 324(c2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped with the enlarged hold icon by the preparing image RDY. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 324(c2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 324(c1). The display (main display) is displayed. Note that the UI unit UI2 is hidden when the sub window WP3 is displayed. Further, the sub window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged and displayed hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball-out error display ERR1 overlaps the sub window WP3, and another part overlaps the hold icon display area. The ball-out error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, it may be possible to notice the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area that is enlarged and displayed by looking at the ball-out error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball-out error display ERR1 by seeing the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, it may be possible to entertain the effect display that is being performed by quickly removing the ball and deleting the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, by simultaneously viewing the ball dropout error display ERR1 and the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon in the hold icon display area, when the change effect of the display status of the hold icon in the hold icon display area is finished, an opportunity to remove the ball is given. May be possible.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (d1) to (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball-out error display ERR1.

In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324(d1), the display of "please remove the ball" is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous, and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There are cases.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324(d2) has the same form as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324(d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to view.

The ball-out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324(d3) is another display mode of the ball-out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 324(d2). The mode is represented by.

In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices, that is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are used, but the decorative symbol display device. It is needless to say that the pachinko machine 100 including only one is applicable. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative pattern display devices, or even a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative pattern display devices.

325 to 371 are diagrams showing, in stages, the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 325 to 371, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Note that, in FIGS. 325 to 371, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is provided. May be Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or the POV display described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 325 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 326 is a figure showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 325. 327 is a diagram showing step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 326. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(1), a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth design and the second decorative design may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 325(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 325 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of special figure 1 and the second holding number display, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 turned on, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older prizes.

In FIG. 325(1), three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and all of these three hold icons h11, h12, h13 of special figure 1, It is displayed in a default display mode (a circular non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 325 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric Chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 325(1), the hold icon of special map 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special map 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variable display of the special symbol is performed in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon→the variation symbol start of the decorative symbol, but this order is mixed Good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the hold icons h11 to h13 of special figure 1 are moved, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the subject of the design change this time) is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by, for example, a frame-in animation causing the first timer advance notice display TM11 to frame in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal point of less than 1 second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "09:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 325(4). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "timer activated" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(5), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal point of less than 1 second. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325(5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and "01:25" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 325(6). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "07:25" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(7), when the countdown on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , "Attention on hold" is displayed to call attention to the hold change, the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 can be changed. It is announced that there is a possibility. In addition, the hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation is started. May be "00:00", or the pending change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is "00:00". Note that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "06:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325(7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 325(8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and the prefetch display mode is set. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the second timer advance notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, a character "Hold change" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pre-reading notice has been given due to the hold change. In addition, the character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "hold change". Alternatively, the characters "Hold change" may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still continuing, and "05:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325(8). The second timer notice display TM12 is erased. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change at the timing when the second timer notice display TM12 is erased.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than when not.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(9) shows that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325(9), "05: 11” is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Hold change completed" indicating that the hold change has been made is displayed together with the panda icon PND. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the effect (advance effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect is notified by the icon is shown. Furthermore, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "I'm still there" is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that further notice display by the timer notice effect may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(10), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325(10). In addition, a question mark is displayed along with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which fuels an expectation as to which warning display will be displayed when the countdown on the first timer warning display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(11), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325(11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(12), the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop occurs at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". Done, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “pseudo-repeating!” is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-repeating will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and one timer notice display (second timer notice display TM12) functions as a prefetch notice. Further, in this effect example, a plurality of timer notification effects show different timings at which the timer notification display is started to be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325 (13), the second variable display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo link. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started. Then, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be deleted, or the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link may be started at the timing when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(14), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by pseudo-linking is being performed. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed below the panda icon PND displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, informing that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325(16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 325 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325(18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and a state in which the medium symbol is changing at a low speed is shown. In addition, the characters "timer advance notice due to SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the mission effect indicating that the timer advance effect is started by developing into super reach is started. Are also shown. In this example of performance, when the mission is completed, the timer advance notice effect is started, and the reliability of the big hit is increased. Therefore, it may be possible to expect that the timer advance notice effect is started by shifting to the super reach.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (19) following FIG. 325 (18) shows that normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (20), the middle pattern is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the transition to super reach is not performed, and the decoration of the "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is informed that the display will be stopped by a combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the transition to the super reach will not occur.

Then, as shown in FIG. 326(21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are erased, and the character "sorry" displayed near the navigation character YM is also erased. The panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted after the fluctuation of the decorative pattern starts, or the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern after the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are deleted. It may be started, or the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern starts. Further, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted one by one.

Then, as shown in FIG. 326(22), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (23), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326(24), two timer notice effects are started at the same time. In this effect example, the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are respectively frame-in by the frame-in animation from the left and right of the display screen, and two timer advance notice effects are simultaneously started. Both the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are default display modes. On the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and a certain effect is started when 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. It suggests. Further, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Suggests that. In this example of production, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start counting down at the same time, there is a certain production both when 10 seconds and 30 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Have been suggested to be initiated. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and a certain effect that may be started when 30 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Good.

After that, the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the timer display in the fourth timer advance notice display each start counting down (subtraction display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (25), the third timer advance notice display TM13 displays "29:45" is displayed, and "09:45" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a character "Attention to the timer" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (26), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (26), "28:02" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "08:02" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (27), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. It should be noted that the countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (27), "27:75" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "06:75" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

Then, as shown in FIG. 326 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Note that the countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (28), "25:23" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "05:23" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (29), normal reach is started, and a state in which the medium symbol is changing at a low speed is shown. In addition, the character "It's about to come" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 may count up and the notice effect may be started soon. Has been done. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (29), "23:16" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "03:16" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (30) shows that normal reach is continuously performed. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 326(30), "21:80" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. “01:80” is displayed in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

Then, as shown in FIG. 326(31), when the countdown in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", a large number of Sabohani characters SBHN cross on the decorative pattern display device 208. Sabohani group notice is given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a high expectation of a big hit. That is, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the Sabohani group notice is given than when the Savohani group notice is not given. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326(31), the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong sabotani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14. In other words, the strong sabotani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain effect. Note that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the fourth timer notice display TM14 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326(31).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (32), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced. At this time, the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "18:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (32).

Subsequently, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (33) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. A sabotani icon SBH is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the sabotani group notice has been executed. Also, the third timer notice display T
In M13, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (33).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (34) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. Then, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the third timer advance notice display TM13. The third timer advance notice display TM13 continues to count down, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (34).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326(35), the timer preview shortened animation is started during the countdown display on the third timer preview display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer preview display TM13. Has been done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (36), the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is reduced, and “03:00” is displayed in the third timer advance notice display TM13. As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect executed by the timer notice effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (37) following FIG. 326 (36). .. In addition, a character “strong cut-in” is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects are overlapped, and both the timer notice displays (the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14) are all in effect during the symbol variation. It is shown that the display is functioning as an advance notice (announcement of the change).

Then, as shown in FIG. 327 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". It should be noted that in this effect example, there is a case where the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer notifying effect may not be notified by an icon. Here, the fact that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a has been executed may be notified by an icon.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (39), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 327 (40 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 328 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 329 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 328. is there. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 328(1) to 328(2) are the same as FIGS. 325(1) to 325(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(3) shows that the timer notice effect has started. In this example of performance, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer notice productions are started at the same time. To be done. Note that three or more timer announcement effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 are default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "16:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 16 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "03:00" is displayed as the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Suggests. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 3 seconds have elapsed and 16 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It has been suggested to start. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 3 seconds have elapsed and a certain effect that may be started when 16 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 is started, and “14:75” is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 328(4). Further, "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 1.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 328(5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed, and the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00” In the figure, the character "pre-reading mode entry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, indicating that the pre-reading mode is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the prefetch mode is executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer predictive effect on the second timer predictive display TM12 being performed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 328(6), the second timer notice display TM12 is erased, and the "prefetch mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the prefetch mode is displayed. It has been notified that it has entered. Further, at this time, the characters "prefetch mode entry" displayed near the navigation character YM are erased. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "12:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328(6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(7), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "08:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328(7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(8), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and "07:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328(8).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(9), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is displayed as a stop in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 328(10). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328(10).

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(11), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The hold icon that has moved and is displayed as the variable icon h0, which was at the display position of the second hold icon h12, moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328(11). The look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variable display is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(12), the characters “Attention on hold” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started with the first hold icon h11. It is informed that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 328(12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 328(13), when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of pandas. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11. In addition, the character "Hold change" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. As described above, in this effect example, in addition to the pre-reading notice in the pre-reading mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect, a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon is given as a result of another timer notice effect. An example is given. Further, in this effect example, the look-ahead notice in the look-ahead mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the subject of the look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon performed as a result of another timer notice effect are the same symbol variation An example of what is being displayed is shown. In this example of performance, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", but the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 changes. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the first timer notice display TM11 after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 328(14), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. Further, the characters of "hold change" displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(16), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328(17), the third stop is performed, “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed, and then in FIG. 328(18). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (19) subsequent to FIG. 328 (18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the first special diagram. The variable display of symbols on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. The look-ahead mode continues even after this symbol variable display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (20), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (23) shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice has been given.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 329 (25), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (26), a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "Game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with the up image of the character of Tonosama. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the banchou face is not arranged around the word "Game" in the balloon.
It suggests that the reliability of the big hit is higher than that when the cut-in image is not displayed, but the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, a question mark is added to the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the "chance", which suggests that the expectation of a big hit is improving.

After that, as shown in FIG. 329 (27), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and a screen is displayed in which the victory is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (27), the game ball is won at the special opening 1 starting opening 230, the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is increased by 1, and the holding of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the second holding number display. The number display is "1".

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (28), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice display of a plurality of timer notice effects is started at the same time, and both timer notice displays (the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12) both function as prefetch notices. The situation is shown. Furthermore, it is also shown that both timer advance notice displays (first timer advance notice display TM11 and second timer advance notice display TM12) both function as prefetch advance notices for the same symbol variation display.

Further, in this effect example, the start timing of the hold change animation does not start at the timing when the timer notice display becomes "00:00", but "00:00" at the time when the display mode of the hold icon changes. Therefore, the change itself in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect is consistent with the completion of the countdown of the timer notice display, and the change in the display mode of the hold icon and the timer notice production as a certain effect. It may be possible to clarify the relationship with.

In addition, in this effect example, the countdown in the timer notice display of the two timer notice effects is started at the same time, but the start timing of the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed to the variable display pattern of the hold icon. It may be started after the start. That is, although the display start timings of the timer notice displays of the plurality of timer notice effects are the same, the countdown start timings may be different. In this case, the countdown may be started in the different symbol variable displays.

Further, in this effect example, the pre-reading notice (display of the hold icon according to the pre-reading mode and the display mode of the pre-reading) is started as a certain effect in each of the different symbol variable displays, but each pre-reading is performed in the same symbol variable display. The notice may be started.

FIG. 330 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 331 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 330. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Since FIGS. 330(1) and 330(2) are the same as FIGS. 325(1) and 325(2), description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer notice productions are started at the same time. To be done. Note that three or more timer announcement effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 are default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 6 seconds and 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It has been suggested to start. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 6 seconds have passed and a certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have passed may be the same or different. Good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330(4). , "05:75" is displayed, and "09:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(5), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small on the upper center of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed on the left and right of the center of the display screen. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. Further, in the center of the display screen, the characters "Item get on princess appearance" are displayed, and when the princess character appears from the treasure box, a notice item (sometimes referred to as a "preview icon") can be obtained. It has been suggested that it can. In addition, a character "select with the cross key" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. Further, the countdown is continued in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330(5), "05:60" is displayed in the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "09:60" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

Thereafter, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. In addition, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM11, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330(6), “04:37” is displayed in the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer The notice display TM12 displays "08:37".

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(7), the character "decide right" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right It is reported that the treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. In addition, the countdown continues in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330(7), the first timer advance notice display TM1.
In "1", "03:00" is displayed, and in the second timer advance notice display TM12, "07:00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(8), the effect production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved to the center, and the left treasure box image BXL not selected is displayed. Erased. Then, a character "Open" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the countdown is continued in each of the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330(8), "02:50" is displayed in the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "06:50".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(9), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR, the characters "Item Get" are displayed, and "Now" is displayed near the navigation character YM. The word “Taze” is displayed to inform that the mini game was successful and the advance notice item was acquired. This suggests that, in the timer preview effect related to the first timer preview display TM11, it is guaranteed that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this example of production, the appearance of the princess character HME announces the acquisition of a notice item as a certain production. At this time, the countdown continues in each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330(9), "01:50" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. In the second timer notice display TM12, "05:50" is displayed. In the present embodiment, the countdown is performed by the timer advance notice effect in this way, and it may be possible to excite the effect by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until "00:00" is reached).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(10), at the timing when the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays the super reach advance notice item. Swordsman character KNG is added to the first timer notice display TM11. As described above, displaying the notice item of super reach may make it easy to visually understand that the super reach is performed. In addition, in this example of production, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect being displayed, a notice item is displayed as a certain effect. Note that the swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00", or after the swordsman character KNG is displayed. The timer display may be "00:00". The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues counting down, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330(10).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(11), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is changed from "00:00" to "SP standby", and this display starts super reach. Continue until. In other words, whether the super reach corresponding to the display of "SP waiting" and the display of the swordsman character KNG as the notice item in the first timer notice display TM11 occurs at this time in the symbol variable display, It is difficult to determine whether or not it will occur in the symbol variation display after the next time. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues counting down, and "03:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330(11).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(12), the characters “Attention on hold” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started with the first hold icon h11. It is informed that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330(12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 330(13), when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. In addition, the character "Hold change" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(14), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "hold change", and the panda character PND is further added to display the hold icon. It is shown that the display mode has been notified. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer predictive effect is informed in the timer predictive display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the characters of "hold change" displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (16), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (17), the third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is displayed as a stop in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 330 (18). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (19) subsequent to FIG. 330 (18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the first special diagram. The variable display of symbols on the display device 212 is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. The second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased when the symbol variation display is started, but the first timer advance notice display TM11 in which the character of the swordsman KNG is added and the characters "SP standby" is displayed is displayed. Is being continued. That is, it can be said that the timer announcement effect on the first timer announcement display TM11 was a look-ahead announcement that the super reach will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331(20), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. At this time, the character "Hot" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit has been dramatically increased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331(21), the second stop is performed, and the right symbol is "
"Decorative 5" is stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, at this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 notifies that the digestion animation is started and the swordsman character KNG as the advance notice item is digested and moves to the super reach. It should be noted that the digested animation of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the reach state is formed, or the reach state may be formed after the digested animation of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. However, the digestion animation of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the reach state is formed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (23) shows that the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice has been given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 331(25), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (26), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It notifies that CI1a has been displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (27), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (28), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (29 ), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5—decoration 5—decoration 5” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which all of the plurality of timer notice effects are executed as prefetch notice, and at least one timer notice effect is executed as a result. An example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether the effect is a notice in the symbol variation display or a prefetch notice. Moreover, in this effect example, it is found out when the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch is performed that any timer notice effect is a prefetch notice for the same symbol variation display, so the same symbol variation display is performed. It may be possible to dramatically increase the expectation of a big hit by compounding pre-reading notices targeted.

FIG. 332 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 333 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 332(1) to (15) are the same as FIGS. 330(1) to (15), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (16) is subjected to the second stop, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. It Then, as shown in FIG. 332(17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (18), the digestion animation is started on the first timer notice display TM11, and it is announced that the swordsman character KNG as the notice item will be digested and will shift to super reach. To be done. That is, it can be said that the swordsman character KNG in this production example was functioning as a notice that the super reach was executed in the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, an example in which at least one of the two timer notice effects functions as a prefetch notice is shown. Further, in this effect example, an example in which it is difficult to determine whether a certain effect executed as a result of each of the plurality of timer notice effects is a look-ahead notice or a notice in the symbol variation display is difficult. ing.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (19) following FIG. 332 (18), “SP development!” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the super reach will be developed. There is. In addition, in this example of performance, no notice of the Savohani group is given.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 333 (20), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Further, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is quietly erased as it shifts to super reach.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 333(21), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with “chance”, and the expectation of a big hit is high. Suggests that you are up.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333(22), the main character's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The "decoration 6" of the schedule is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

Then, as shown in FIG. 333 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (24), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thus, in this effect example, one of the plurality of timer notice effects is executed as a look-ahead notice, and the other is a notice in the symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display targeted for the timer notice effect is different. Therefore, it may be possible to increase the expectation for a big hit in any of the variable display of symbols that is the target of the timer notice effect.

FIG. 334 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 334(1) and 334(2) are the same as FIGS. 325(1) and 325(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer notice productions are started at the same time. To be done. Both of these two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 are default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "02:00" is displayed as the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Suggests. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start counting down at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 2 seconds have elapsed and 6 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It has been suggested to start.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 is started, and "05:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 334(4). Further, "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334(5), the hold change animation is started for the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 334(5), "05:20" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:20" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 334(6), when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the second timer advance notice display TM12 is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 334(7), in the second timer advance notice display TM12, “0+1” is displayed instead of “00:00”, and the display mode of the first holding icon h11 is changed. It is informed that the display mode of the prefetch notice has changed. Note that the countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "03:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334(7).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334(8), the hold change animation is further started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may further change. It The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334(8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 334(9), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of panda to the display of the length. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode stepped up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is performed. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect that is executed as a result of the two timer advance notice effects is performed on the same symbol variable display. In addition, in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon, which has changed from the default display mode, is further changed as a result of the timer notification effect on the first timer notification display TM11, but it may not change. It may be. Further, the hold icon that changes the display mode as a result of the timer preview effect on the first timer preview display TM11 and the display mode as a result of the timer preview effect on the second timer preview display TM12. The hold icons may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 334(10), in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the display of "Hold+1UP" is displayed instead of the display of "00:00", and the notification in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is displayed. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two steps.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334(11), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334(12), the second stop is performed and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334(13), the third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and then in FIG. 334(14). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 4". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this example of effect, a change effect of the display form of the hold icon is performed for the same symbol variable display, but, for example, as shown in (8') of FIG. 334 (7), The hold change animation may be started for the second hold icon h12 in addition to the first hold icon h11, and the display modes of both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may change. May be notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (9′), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of panda to the longest length. While changing to the display mode, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 may be changed from the default display mode to the panda display mode. That is, as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11, an effect that further changes the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is performed, and a display mode of another hold icon. An example is shown in which an effect of changing is performed.

In this effect example, in the same symbol variable display, the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon is performed in two stages as a result of each of the two timer notice effects, but in different symbol variable displays, for the same hold icon. You may make it perform the change production of a display mode.

FIG. 335 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 336 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 335. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 335(1) and 335(2) are the same as FIGS. 325(1) and 325(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(3) shows that the timer notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by the frame-in animation causing the first timer advance notice display TM11 to frame in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the pseudo continuous effect is likely to be started as a certain effect. As described above, in this effect example, the content of a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect is suggested by adding identification information such as an icon to the timer notice display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "09:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 335(4). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "timer activated" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change as a certain effect. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuing, and "09:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335(5). In addition, a character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and "03:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 335(6). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "08:75" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(7), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a small size in the upper center, and displays a "1" on the dice and a display of "change with hold". Is performed, and the production button 136 is operated after the mini game is started, and as a result, when the result of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is predicted to change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "mini game start" is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335(7), "08:60" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "03:60".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(8), the variable display of symbols on the dice is started, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT, and acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. This is informed and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter MT may not be displayed. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335(8), "08:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "03:12".

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 335(9), as shown in FIG. 335(10), the decorative symbol display device 208 causes the symbols on the dice to be stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 335(10), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in such a manner as to show the result of "1" and the word "success" is displayed, which is the result of achievement of the mission in the mini game. Has been announced. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yatteze" is displayed to inform that the mini game has been successful. That is, it is determined that the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed according to the result of this mini game. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335(10), "06:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(11), the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started with the first hold icon h11, It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335(11), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays "05:88" and the second timer. In the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 335(12), when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the length display. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. In addition, the character “Hot” is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with high reliability. It should be noted that the countdown is still continuing on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335(12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon indicates the reliability of the big hit. It is shown that the notification of the change to the high display mode is given. Note that the countdown is still continuing on the first timer notice display TM11.
"04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in 5 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "04:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335(14). .. At this time, the character "Attention of the right timer" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen is alerted.

Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(15) shows that the mini game is started. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. ing. In addition, the character "SELECT BY CROSS-KEY" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. In addition, the character “put out the princess” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that a notice display may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure box. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335(15).

Then, when the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137, the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(16). , The right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "02:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335(16).

After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335(17), the character of "right selection" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right treasure box. It is reported that the image BXR has been selected as a treasure box to be opened. Further, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved to the center and displayed, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is deleted. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is temporarily stopped and remains "02:50", but the countdown may be continued.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (18), the character HME of the princess appears from the right treasure box image BXR, the characters "pseudo-renyo" are displayed, and "next" is displayed near the navigation character YM. The word "success" is displayed to inform that the mini game has been successful. In other words, the result of this mini game determines that a pseudo continuous effect is performed as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335(18).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (19) subsequent to FIG. 335 (18), the character “Pseudo-repeated” is displayed near the navigation character YM to give a notice that the pseudo-repeation is started. .. At this time, the decorative design is enlarged and moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 336(19).

Then, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 336(20) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the "decoration 5 -Replay symbol RP-decorative 6" combination of decorative symbols is displayed. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". Thus, in this effect example, for example, when it is decided that the pseudo-relation is to be performed, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, but the three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, thereby smoothing the game. You may be able to proceed to. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 336(21), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, instead of the display of "00:00", "x2" indicating the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started is displayed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(22), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (23), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 336 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 336(25), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach, and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 336(26), the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (27), the middle pattern is stopped and displayed as "decoration 6" during the normal reach, and the variation of the shake is caused by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" Temporary suspension is in progress. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that it will be lost.

Then, as shown in FIG. 336 (28), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first timer advance notice display TM11, which has notified that the pseudo-linking has been performed, is also deleted. In addition, since the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the guard length, the display of "remarkably hot hold" is maintained in the second timer notice display TM12.

As described above, in this effect example, the state of giving a timer notice according to the result (success) of the mini game is shown.

FIG. 337 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 338 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 337. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 337(1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 335(1) to 335(9), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 337(9), as shown in FIG. 337(10), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the symbols on the dice in a stopped state. In the example shown in FIG. 337(10), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in such a manner as to show the result of "3", and the character "regretful" is displayed, which does not result in the achievement of the mission in the mini game. It has been reported. That is, it is reported that the mission has failed. In addition, the character "regrettable" is displayed near the navigation character YM. That is, the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed depending on the result of the mini game. Gives different results. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (10), "06:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(11), the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started with the first hold icon h11, It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 337(11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 337 (12), when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of pandas. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. In addition, the characters “a little heat” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which suggests that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with a slightly higher degree of reliability. That is, it can be said that the reliability is lower than the display mode of the guard length, but the reliability is higher than that of the default display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "chance hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is slightly higher in reliability. It is shown that the notice of the change to the display mode of the prefetch notice is given. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337(13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337(14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "04:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337(14). .. At this time, the character "Attention of the right timer" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen is alerted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (15), it is shown that the mini game is started. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 337(15) to (17) are different from the effect examples shown in FIG. 335(15) to (17) in the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Since the second timer notice display TM12 is the same except that the display content is different, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (18), the character BBA of the old woman appears from the right treasure box image BXR, the characters of "Uhihi" are displayed, and the "sorry" character appears near the navigation character YM. Characters are displayed to inform that the mini game has failed. That is, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 335, it is indicated that the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is a false advance notice effect due to the failure of the mini game, or It has been suggested that the pseudo-relational production as a production is not performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 337(18). In addition, when the mini game fails, the reach effect may be performed instead of the pseudo continuous effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 338 (19) subsequent to FIG. 337 (18), the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed to be moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 338(19).

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 338(20) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the "decoration 5 -Decorative 4-decoration 4" is displayed as a combination of decorative patterns, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 338 (21), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays "decoration 5-decoration 4". -It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the "decoration 4". The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". In this way, in this effect example, for example, when pseudo-relation is not performed and it is determined that the game will be lost, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, but three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time. In some cases, the game can be smoothly progressed. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

FIG. 339 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 340 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 339. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 339(1) to 339(2) are the same as FIGS. 325(1) to 325(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by the frame-in animation causing the first timer advance notice display TM11 to frame in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "08:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 8 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that pseudo-relation is likely to be started as a certain effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "07:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 339(4). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "timer activated" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change as a certain effect. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "07:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339(5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and "03:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 339(6). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "06:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(7) shows that a mini game of dice is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a small size in the upper center, and displays a "1" on the dice and a "change with hold" display. Is performed, and the production button 136 is operated after the mini game is started, and as a result, when the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is predicted to change. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339(7), "06:60" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "03:60".

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(8), the variable display of symbols on the dice is started, the button image 136a is displayed, and it is notified that the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and the game is played. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the person. Although the button reception time meter MT is not displayed in this example of performance, it may be displayed. Note that the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339(8), "06:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice is displayed. In the display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

FIGS. 339(9) to 339(10) show that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game of dice continues. That is, it is shown that the mini game of the dice has started but the operation of the effect button 136 has not been performed yet. Note that the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339(10), "04:35" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice is displayed. In the display TM12, "01:35" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(11), the pattern of the dice that is being variably displayed and the button image 136a are shown moving to the lower left of the display screen. This suggests that another effect is performed overlapping with the mini-game of the dice being executed. It should be noted that the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339(11), "04:22" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:22" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(12), another mini game (mini game of treasure chest) is started while the mini game of the dice is being executed. When the mini game of the treasure box is started, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL. In addition, the character "SELECT BY CROSS-KEY" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and a navigation display for operating the operation key unit 137 to move the cursor CSL to select a treasure box is displayed. In addition, the character “put out the princess” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that a notice display may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure box. In addition, the mini game of the dice is continuously played, and the operation of the effect button 136 is also valid. Further, the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339(12), "04:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:00" is displayed.

As described above, in this example of performance, while one mini game related to one of the two timer notice effects is being played, one mini game related to another timer notice effect is being played. It has been shown that there are periods during which multiple mini-games are played simultaneously, as a result. That is, at least the period during which one mini-game related to one timer notice effect is being played and the one during which one mini-game related to another timer notice effect is being played. It is shown that some overlap.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 339(13), as shown in FIG. 339(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbols on the dice are stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 339(14), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a form showing the result of "1", and it is informed that it is the result of the mission achievement in the mini game of the dice. That is, it is determined that the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is changed according to the result of this mini game. In addition, in this example of performance, the result of the mission achievement is notified only by the stop display of the symbols on the dice, but the character display of “success” and the navigation character YM “Done” in the manner described above in FIG. 335. Characters may be displayed. On the other hand, the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are still counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339(14), "03:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "00:75" is displayed. At this time, the treasure chest mini-game is also continuously played, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is valid.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(15), the hold change animation is started for the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Note that the countdown is interrupted in the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (15), the first timer advance notice display TM11 remains "03:75" and the second timer The notice display TM12 remains "00:75". Even at this time, the treasure chest mini-game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is valid.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display in the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 is restarted and the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the number length display mode, and the prefetch display mode with high reliability is achieved. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuously performed, and is "03:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 339(16). Even at this time, the treasure chest mini game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is valid.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339(17), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon indicates the jackpot reliability. It is shown that the notification of the change to the high display mode is given. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339(17). Also, at this time, the left treasure box image BXL and the right treasure box image BXR are moving to the left with the end of the mini game of dice. In addition, the mini game of the treasure box continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is valid. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 339(18) to 340(26) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 339(18) to 340(26) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 335(16) to 336(24), so description thereof will be omitted.

After the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 340(26), a strong sabotani group notice is given in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 340(27). At this time, the reach symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice has been given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (28), the Sabohani group notice is continuously displayed, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 340 (29 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (30), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed near the navigation character YM, which notifies that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 340 (31 ), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (32), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 340 (33), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 341 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 342 shows step by step the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 341. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 341(1) to (9) are similar to FIGS. 325(1) to 325(9), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341(10), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "04:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341(10). Further, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters “pseudo-repeating”, which fuels the expectation that the pseudo-reproduction will be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341(11), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341(11). In addition, the character “No!” is displayed near the navigation character YM, denying that a pseudo-relation will be performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11. Have been suggested.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (12), the timer preview change animation (timer preview addition animation) is started while the countdown is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11. Is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters "group notice?", and as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, It has been suggested that Sabohani group notices may be given instead of pseudo-relationships. As described above, in this effect example, it is notified that a certain effect, which is performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, is not the pseudo-relation but another effect. As a result, the player may be able to expect that the effect performed after the countdown of the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed is an effect having a higher jackpot reliability than the pseudo-relation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 341 (13), the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is added, and “15:03” is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, a question mark is added to the characters "group notice" near the navigation character YM, which suggests that the Sabohani group notice may be given. In this way, in this example of performance, it may be possible to recognize that another certain performance will be performed by performing addition of the timer display while predicting that pseudo-relation will be performed as a certain performance. is there. In addition, even if the timer advance notice change animation is performed, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer advance notice display may not be changed, and eventually the pseudo-relation may be performed as a certain effect. Further, in this effect example, the example in which the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is added has been described, but the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be added in some cases. Further, the timer display may not only be added but may be subtracted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (14), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In this production example, the pseudo-relation production that is started after the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed is different from a certain production that is executed as a result of the timer notice production on the first timer notice display TM11. It is said that. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yes!" is displayed in response to the display of "group notice" in FIG. 341 (13), and the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. It is informed that a certain effect that is executed as a result of the above is a notice of the Savohani group. In this example of the effect, although the pseudo effect is performed even though the effect is not the pseudo effect, the pseudo effect may not be performed. ), and the pseudo continuous production may be always performed. In addition, a certain effect may be a pseudo-relational effect, and by additionally adding a timer display, another effect (sabohani group notice) may also be a certain effect, which corresponds to one timer notice effect. There may be a plurality of certain effects to be performed. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:60" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341(14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 341(15), the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo link. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341(15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341(16), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "06:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341(16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 341 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:13" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 341(18).

Then, as shown in FIG. 342 (19) following FIG. 341 (18), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong Savohani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11 instead of the pseudo-relation. It should be noted that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer notice display TM11 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". Also, as shown in FIG. 342 (19), when the notice of the Savohani group is started, the display of the panda icon PND is ended.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (20), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been announced.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 342 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the type of super reach. In addition, a sabotani icon SBH is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to notify that the sabotani group notice has occurred.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (22), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It notifies that CI1a has been displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 342 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 342 (24), a state in which the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is shown. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (25), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 343 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 343(1) and 342(2) are the same as FIGS. 325(1) and 325(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are respectively frame-in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer notice productions are started at the same time. To be done. Both of these two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 are default display modes. In the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "60:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 60 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. ing. In this example of performance, by displaying "60:00" on the first timer notice display TM11, it is possible to indicate the occurrence of super reach, and for example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect is displayed as a cut-in image. Suggests that. That is, the external appearance of the timer announcement effect related to the first timer announcement display TM11 makes it appear that it is functioning as an announcement regarding the symbol variation display being executed. Further, "02:00" is displayed as the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Suggests. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 343(4) to (7) are performed. The effect shown in FIGS. 343(4) to (7) is different from the effect shown in FIGS. 334(4) to (7) in that the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is 54 seconds different. The description is omitted because it is the same except for.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 343(8), the characters "timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the first timer advance notice display TM11 is alerted. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues counting down, and "56:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343(8).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343(9), the timer preview shortened animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer preview display TM11. It is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 343(10), the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is reduced, and “02:00” is displayed in the first timer advance notice display TM11. At this time, the panda icon PND is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change as a certain effect. Thus, in this effect example, by changing the timer display during the countdown display, it is pretended that the timer advance notice effect is being executed as a look-ahead notice, and in reality, the symbol variation display being executed is changed. The production is performed to make it clear that it was executed as a notice.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 343(11), the hold change animation is further started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may further change. It The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "01:20" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343(11).

Then, as shown in FIG. 343 (12), at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of panda to the display of the length. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode stepped up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is performed. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect that is executed as a result of the two timer advance notice effects is performed on the same symbol variable display. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice effect concerning the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect concerning the second timer notice display TM12 are executed as notice effects for different symbol variation displays at the beginning of the effect. It should be assumed that, after that, a certain effect corresponding to the second timer advance notice display TM12 and a certain effect corresponding to the first timer advance notice display TM11 that were initially performed targeted the same symbol variable display. Since the game is found to be a thing, it may be possible to make the game surprising. In other words, from the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the first timer notice display TM11 was started, at the beginning of the display, it was suggested that the notice given during the super reach was generated, but the timer display was shortened. In addition, the read-ahead notice for the same symbol variation display as the second timer notice display TM12 is given by the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon, so that the read-ahead notice for the same symbol variation display is combined. As a result, the expectation for a big hit may be dramatically improved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 343 (13), in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the display of "Hold+1UP" is performed instead of the display of "00:00", and the notification in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is displayed. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two steps. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 343(14) to (17) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 343(14) to (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 334(11) to (14), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this example of performance, the timer notice effect of the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect of the second timer notice display TM12 both function as a look-ahead notice for the same symbol variation display. Any of them may function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. In any case, since a composite notice is given for the same variable display of symbols, it may be possible to further increase the reliability of the big hit.

In addition, there may be a case where the timer advance notice effect for the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer change notice effect for the second timer notice display TM12 are different from each other, and may be executed, for example, one timer notice effect. It may function as a look-ahead notice, and the other timer notice effect may also function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display that is being executed. In this case, expectations for a big hit are greater than when the same symbol variation display is combined and performed. May be dispersed. Further, there may be a case where either one of the timer notice effect for the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect for the second timer notice display TM12 is a false timer notice effect.

FIG. 344 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 344(1) and 344(2) are the same as FIGS. 325(1) and 325(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 344(3), it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344(4) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. On the first timer notice display TM11, "60:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 60 seconds after the countdown is started.

Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "58:12" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 344(5). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.88 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344(6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) with the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, and the bomb effect is started. Has been done. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is more difficult to visually recognize than when the bomb image BOM does not overlap. When the bomb effect is started, a display for igniting the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed, and according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect, the squib is shortened.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344(7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 344(7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added to the characters near the navigation character YM along with the character "what", which suggests that some effect will be started as a result of the bomb effect.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 344(8), the bomb image BOM explodes, and the effect image is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first timer notice display TM11. .. In this case as well, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is difficult to visually recognize because it is overlapped by the effect image.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344(9), the first timer notice display TM
In addition to 11, a second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, showing that two timer notice effects are started. Further, the characters "timer increase" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the two timer advance notice effects have started. Here, the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is reset to “60:00”, and the second timer advance notice display TM12 displays “02:00” as the timer display. Further, both the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are default display modes. That is, in this effect example, the timer notice display is divided and displayed during execution of the timer notice effect, and a new timer notice effect is started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 344(10) to (12) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 344(10) to (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 343(4) to 343(6), description thereof will be omitted.

After that, for example, in a manner as shown in FIG. 325(9) to FIG. 326(36), the symbol variation display is ended, the next symbol variation display is started, and then, after the super reach is performed, the diagram In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 344(13), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. In addition, a character “strong cut-in” is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain notice effect. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 344(14) to (16) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 344(14) to (16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 327(38) to (40), so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 345 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 346 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 345. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 345(1) to 345(3) are the same as FIGS. 344(1) to 344(3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345(4) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. On the first timer notice display TM11, "03:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and “02:12” is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 345(5). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.88 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345(6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) with the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, and the bomb effect is started. Has been done. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is more difficult to visually recognize than when the bomb image BOM does not overlap. When the bomb effect is started, a display for igniting the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed, and according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect, the squib is shortened.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345(7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 345(7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added to the characters near the navigation character YM along with the word "what", which suggests that some effect will be started as a result of the bomb effect. In the first timer notice display TM11, it is difficult to visually recognize the bomb image BOM, but the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345(8), the bomb image BOM is shown to explode.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345(9), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, and two timer notice effects are started. .. In addition, the characters "timer increase" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the two timer advance notice effects have started. Here, the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is reset to “60:00”, and the second timer advance notice display TM12 displays “02:00” as the timer display. Further, both the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 are default display modes. That is, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, as a certain effect, the bomb image BOM explodes and two timer advance notice effects are newly started. There is.

In this production example, after the bomb image BOM explodes, as shown in FIG. 345(9'), the characters "SP waiting" are displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the notice of super reach is displayed. The effect of adding the character KNG of the swordsman as an item and the effect of starting a new timer notification effect on the second timer notification display TM12 may be performed. At this time, the character "Item Get" is displayed near the navigation character YM to inform that the advance notice item has been acquired. That is, as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, two advance notice effects are performed as a certain effect, one is an effect in which the advance notice item is displayed, and the other is a new timer advance effect. May be started.

In addition, when the lower plate full tank error occurs after the bomb image BOM explodes and the two timer advance notice effects are started as described above, a new display is made as shown in FIG. 345 (9″). Even if the ball-out error display "Please remove the ball" is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM12 that have started Good. According to this, in order to make it easy to visually recognize the timer notice display, it may be possible to quickly eliminate the ball removal error. The ball-out error display may be overlapped with the first timer advance notice display TM11 or the second timer advance notice display TM12.

In addition to the ball-out error display, another error display such as a door opening display may be overlapped with the timer notice display. This is because the error display is an important notification content for the player, so it may be possible to focus on the occurrence of the error by deteriorating the visibility of the timer notice display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346(10) subsequent to FIG. 345(9), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. , "01:50" is displayed. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display is not started, and the display of "60:00" remains. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started only for one of the two timer notice effects. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed,
A warning is given to the second timer notice display TM12.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 346(11), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "01:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346(11). On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (12), at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The display mode is changed to a pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the second timer advance notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, the word “hot” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, and the reliability of the big hit with respect to the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is increased. Suggests an improvement. In this example of performance, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, but the timer on the second timer advance notice display TM12 changes. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the second timer notice display TM12 after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". After that, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (13), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are each stopped and displayed, and after the temporary stop by the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2" , The state of confirmation display is shown. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (14), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the prefetching notice becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "59:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (15). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

That is, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

FIG. 347 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 348 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 347. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 347(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 347 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 347(1), one hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and is displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special symbol 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. Further, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the pattern change this time) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as the variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In FIG. 347(3), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the holding number of the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode composed of one bomb, and the character "TIMER" is added above. In addition, a character "timer is on hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM. In this effect example, a state in which the notice icon of the timer notice effect is displayed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and then in FIG. 347(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which has been in the display mode of the bomb, is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and the variable icon h0 is the notification display mode of the timer notification effect related to the symbol variation. Become.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by, for example, a frame-in animation causing the first timer advance notice display TM11 to frame in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "07:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In addition, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb shows that the display of "TIMER" is erased and the head of the fuse is ignited. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "something will happen after 7 seconds. "..." is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that a certain effect will be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 7 seconds later. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "06:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 347(10). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, the length of the squib of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(11), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(11). In addition, a question mark is displayed along with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which fuels an expectation as to which warning display will be displayed when the countdown on the first timer warning display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(12), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347(12). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters “pseudo-relation”, suggesting that the pseudo-relationship may be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(13), the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed, and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is "0.
The third stop is performed at the timing when it becomes "0:00", and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Also, the variable icon h0, which is the display mode of the bomb, exploded and the effect is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Pseudo-repeating" is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-repeating will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 347(14), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the default display mode, and the variable icon h0 indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-link "2". Is displayed. As described above, in this example of performance, when the pseudo notice effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the change icon h0 informs that the pseudo effect is performed. The situation is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 347 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 347(18), the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (19) following FIG. 347 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and “SP development!” is displayed near the navigation character YM. , Has been informed that it will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 348 (20), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 348(21), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to display the strong cut-in image. It notifies that CI1a has been displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 348(22), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (23), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (24), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this example, the timer advance notice effect is executed only once for each bomb display. However, even if only one bomb is displayed, the timer advance notice effect may be executed multiple times. Good. Further, a plurality of display modes (for example, color and shape) of the bomb may be prepared, and the number of times of the timer notice effect executed may be different depending on the display mode. In this case, it is not necessary to perform the timer announcement effect for the number of times corresponding to the display mode, and for example, the configuration may be such that the maximum three times, but only once.

FIG. 349 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 350 shows stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349. It is a figure. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(1), a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 349(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 349 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 349(1), the two hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. Moreover, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the present pattern change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by, for example, the first timer notice display TM11 being framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(3), a mini game is also started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, the display of the roll of "1" on the dice and the display of "Hold change" are performed, and the mini game is After the start, the production button 136 is operated, and as a result, when the result of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed in advance. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "mini game start" is displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified. It should be noted that the mini game may start after the timer notice effect starts, the timer notice effect may start after the mini game starts, the timing when the timer notice effect starts, and the mini game starts. The timing to do may be the same.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(4), the variable display of the symbols of the dice is started, the decal button image 136aL is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter MT, and the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 is started. In addition, the word "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to prompt the player to operate the effect button 136. Here, when the big button image 136aL is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the button image 136a of the normal size is displayed, that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. Further, on the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349(4), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays “04: 37” is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.63 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 349(5), as shown in FIG. 349(6), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the symbols on the dice stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 349(6), the symbol of the dice is stopped and displayed in a form showing the result of "1" and the character of "Yoshi" is displayed, which is the result of achievement of the mission in the mini game. Has been announced. That is, the result of this mini game determines that a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is still counting down, and "02:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349(6).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(7), the hold change animation is started for the first hold icon h11, and the fact that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed is notified. Note that the countdown is still continuing on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349(7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 349(8), when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the bomb display. Change to the mode, the character "TIMER" is added above it, and the character "Timer hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the first hold icon h11 becomes the display mode of the bomb. It has been announced that it has changed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the display of the hold icon that changes to the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb that gives a notice of the execution of the timer notice effect It is shown that a mode change effect is being performed. Also, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 347, instead of displaying the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb at the time of starting winning, the display mode of the bomb is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display after winning. An example in which the display mode is changed to the hold icon is shown. A replay icon is displayed in the first hold icon h11 in the bomb display mode, and the result of the timer advance notice effect executed in association with the first hold icon h11 in the bomb display mode is performed. It has been suggested that a pseudo-relationship may be performed as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that a preliminary announcement (prefetching announcement) is being given. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 was changed to display bombs at the timing when the timer display became "00:00", but the timer display became "00:00". The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed to a bomb display mode later, or the timer display may be changed to "00:00" after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a bomb display mode. It may be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(9), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(10), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, a third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to swing fluctuation, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 349 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative pattern of the decoration "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (12), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which has been in the display mode of the bomb, moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, and the variable icon h0 which is the notification display mode of the timer notification effect related to the symbol variation. Become. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 349(13) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 349(13) to (17) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 347(9) to (13), except that the replay icon is displayed on the variable icon h0. The description is omitted because it is the same. Here, the timer advance notice effect executed in FIGS. 349(13) to (17) is a timer advance notice effect concerning the second timer advance notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349(18), after the variable icon h0 that is the bomb display mode has exploded, the display mode is changed to the replay display mode. As described above, in this example performance, when the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous effect is performed as a certain effect, the display mode of the change icon h0 is a specific display mode (replay display mode). By doing so, it is shown that the pseudo continuous production is informed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(19) subsequent to FIG. 349(18), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by pseudo-linking is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(20), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 350(22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(23), the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner and the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area remains displayed together with the variable icon h0. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. Further, in this example of performance, one Savohani character making up the notice of the strong Savohani group stumbled on the variation icon h0, and a variation animation of the display mode of the variation icon h0 was performed. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that the variation icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Savohani group.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(24), the notice of the sabotani group is continuously given, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the replay to the display mode of the large-sized bomb. However, the characters "new timer!" are displayed near the navigation character YM. That is, the change icon h0 is used to give a notice that the timer notice effect of the third timer notice display TM13 is started. In addition, the character "hot" is displayed above the change icon h0 after this change, which suggests that a highly reliable production of a big hit may be performed as a certain production. .. Then, a cut-in icon is displayed on the variable icon h0, and as a result of the timer advance notice effect that is predicted to be executed, a cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. Is suggested. In addition, in this example of performance, since the character "Hot" is displayed, it can be said that it is predicted that the strong cut-in image CI1a is likely to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 350(25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (26) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the third timer notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which suggests that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is started, and "01:25" is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13 at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (27). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(28). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 350 (29), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that the decoration is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350(30), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is re-displayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect concerning the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 350 (31 ), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols for the big hit of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 351 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 351(1) to (12) are the same as FIGS. 347(1) to (12), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 351 (13), the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop occurs at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. It is performed, instead of the replay symbol RP in the middle symbol, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Failure" is displayed, and the timer for the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. It is shown that the notice production was a fake timer notice production. The timer display may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is "00:00". The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display becomes “00:00”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 351(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. The change icon h0 has changed from the bomb display mode to the default display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (15), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, but an example in which a fake timer advance notice effect is performed is shown, but a fake timer advance notice effect may not be performed, That is, when the hold icon is displayed in the bomb display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be always performed.

FIG. 352 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 353 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 352. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 352(1) and 352(2) are the same as FIGS. 347(1) and 347(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 352(3), a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display is displayed.
The display of the number of reservations of “1” becomes “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode in which three bombs are represented as one lump, and the character "TIMER x 3" is added above. Further, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed near the navigation character YM. In this effect example, a state in which a hold icon in a display mode in which three bombs are collected into one block is displayed, and a notice display that the timer notice effect is executed three times is displayed. .. It should be noted that the display mode of the bombs is not limited to one or three, and may be displayed in a display mode in which two bombs are in one block, or a display mode in which four or more bombs are in one block. May be displayed in.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and then in FIG. 352(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are a lump is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that three timer notice effects regarding the symbol variation are executed. The change icon h0, which is a notice display mode of the fact, is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by, for example, the first timer notice display TM11 being framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "07:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the pseudo-relation is likely to be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variable icon h0 in a display mode in which three bombs are a lump, the display of “TIMER×3” is erased and the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. The state is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something is... in 7 seconds" is displayed, and a certain effect can be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed in 7 seconds. It has been suggested that there is sex. Further, in this effect example, a state in which the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center is shown. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, the first timer notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display position of the decorative pattern is changed, or the display position of the decoration pattern is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative design is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "06:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 352(10). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the first timer notice display TM11. Further, the length of the squib of the bomb arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0 is also shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(11), it is shown that the second timer notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect will be started when 20 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of the sabotani is added to the second timer notification display TM12, which suggests that the sabotani group notification is likely to be started as a certain effect. In addition, the variable icon h0 in a display mode in which three bombs are collected as one lump shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the squib of the bomb arranged on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time after the countdown on the timer display starts. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352(11). In addition, the word "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (12), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04:95" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(12), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Short notice is confirmed" appears with the character of Sabohani on the right side of the treasure box image BOX. It is informed that when the character SBHN of Sabohani appears from the treasure box, a notice of the Sabohani group will be given. In addition, the characters "Attention to the mini game" are displayed near the navigation character YM to alert the mini game together with the timer notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(13), the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the character SBHN of Sabohani appears from the inside, and the character "Success!" is displayed in the vicinity thereof. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yatteze" is displayed, indicating that the mini game has succeeded. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (13), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "17:76".

Then, as shown in FIG. 352 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notification display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notification display TM12 is displayed. The added icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice will be executed. It should be noted that when the high reliability display mode is changed, the strong sabotani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak sabotani group notice may be executed in some cases. , Strong Savohani group notice is always executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with “pseudo-relation”, and as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, the pseudo-relation effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 352(14), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (15) and "00:00" is displayed, the right side of the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are in one The bomb explodes and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “pseudo-relation!” is displayed to notify that the pseudo-relational effect will be performed. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352(15).

After that, as shown in FIG. 352(16), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo link. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. It should be noted that the replay icon RPL may be started to be displayed after the second variation display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo-link, or the second decoration by the pseudo-link after the replay icon RPL is started to be displayed. The variable display of the symbols may be started, or the replay icon RPL may be displayed at the timing when the second variable display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-link is started. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is deleted. As described above, in this effect example, the bomb is reduced by one each time the timer advance notice effect is performed once. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352(16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(17), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352(17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 352 (18) following FIG. 352 (18 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. It On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353(19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 353(20), when the countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the change icon h0 in the display mode in which the two bombs are in one lump is displayed. The bomb on the left side explodes, the effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong sabotani group. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, although the hold icon display area is erased, the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong Savohani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. Note that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00".

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(21) shows that the Sabohani group notice is continuously given. At this time, a sabotani icon SBH is displayed below the replay icon RPL icon to notify that the sabotani group notice has been given. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Furthermore, in this example of effect, since the effect display is switched to the display of super reach, the change icon h0 displayed in the change icon display area is erased. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted, or the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the change icon h0 is deleted. The timing at which the timer notice display TM12 is deleted and the timing at which the change icon h0 is deleted may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 353(22), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased. In addition, in this example of production, in correspondence with the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb which is the remaining one of the three, "standby" together with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Is displayed to inform that the third timer notice effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, the display that the timer notice effect is waiting is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (23) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the third timer notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which suggests that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is erased. The replay icon RPL is overlapped on the front side of the third timer notice display TM13 and is more difficult to visually recognize than in the non-overlapped state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (24). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 353(25). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 353 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (27), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is re-displayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect concerning the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 353 (28), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the timer notice effect is executed a number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon, but not the same number of times as the number corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon. The displayed number of bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times that the timer advance notice effect is executed or the maximum executable number of times.

Also, as a mission, when the timer notice production is executed a number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon (that is, when the mission is achieved), the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. May be configured as.

FIG. 354 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 354(1) to (10) are the same as FIGS. 347(1) to (10), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “06:36”, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354(11) shows that the second timer advance effect has started. Has been done. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "02:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect will be started when 2 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and “01:00” is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (12). It is displayed. That is, one second has elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "05:36" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 354 (12), the explosive effect starts even though the variable icon h0 of the bomb display mode does not show "00:00" in any timer notice display. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 354 (13), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the panda at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. Then, the display mode of prefetching is set. In addition, the character "icon change" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed. Then, as shown in FIG. 354(14), the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Further, the characters of "hold change" displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354(14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354(15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354(15). In addition, a question mark is displayed along with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which fuels an expectation as to which warning display will be displayed when the countdown on the first timer warning display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354(16), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 354(16). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters “pseudo-relation”, suggesting that the pseudo-relationship may be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354(17), the countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed, and the third stop occurs at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". Done, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “pseudo-repeating!” is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-repeating will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed a plurality of times by the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb that suggests the timer notice effect once is shown.

FIG. 355 is a diagram showing, step by step, another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 356 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 355. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 355(1) and 355(2) are the same as FIGS. 347(1) and 347(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 355(3), a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "1". Here, the first hold icon h11 has a display mode of a bomb, but has a display mode of a large bomb having a size larger than that shown in FIG. 347(3). In addition, a replay icon, a sabotani icon, and a Bancho icon are displayed in the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb is displayed. It has been suggested that, as a result of the timer advance notice effect executed in relation to, the pseudo continuous effect, the Sabohani group advance notice, and the cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that the pseudo-relational production, the Sabohani group notice, and the notice of the cut-in image (prefetch notice) are given. In addition, a character "Large timer is on hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM. In this example of the effect, three icons indicating an effect to be executed as a certain effect are displayed on the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb, thereby displaying a notice that the timer notice effect is executed three times. Is shown. The number of icons shown in the hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the large bomb is not limited to one or three, and may be a mode in which two icons are displayed, or four icons may be displayed. There may be a case where the above icons are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Onihi" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability of the pattern variation display of the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the large bomb, is extremely high. doing.

In FIG. 355(5), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "2". Here, the second hold icon h12 is partially overlapped with the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of the large bomb, and it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold icon h12 as compared with the case where the second hold icon h12 is not overlapped. There is. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "oni heat standby" is displayed, and the start of the variable display of symbols relating to the first hold icon h11, which is suggested to have extremely high reliability of the big hit. It informs that it is waiting.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(7), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed, and then in FIG. 355(8). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (9), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The moving icon is moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 moves to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb moves to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, thereby displaying a notice that three times the timer notice effect regarding the symbol change will be executed. It becomes the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb which is the mode. In addition, in response to the start of the pattern variation display for the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, the characters “Demon heat fluctuating” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a big hit announcement is given. Has been done.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(10) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by, for example, a frame-in animation causing the first timer advance notice display TM11 to frame in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "07:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the pseudo continuous effect is likely to be started as a certain effect. In addition, the change icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb shows that the tip of the squib is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “something is happening after 7 seconds” is displayed. It is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed after 7 seconds. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the first timer notice display TM11 may be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative design is changed.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "06:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 355(11). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the first timer notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started. At this time, for example, the replay icon displayed in the variable icon h0 may be changed in display form by blinking or the like to notify that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the replay icon is started. ..

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (12) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect will be started when 20 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of the sabotani is added to the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that the sabotani group notice is likely to be started as a certain effect. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355(12). Further, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect. At this time, for example, the display mode of the sabotani icon displayed in the variation icon h0 may be changed by blinking or the like to notify that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the sabotani icon has started. ..

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (13), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04:95" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(13), it is shown that the mini game is started. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Short notice is confirmed" appears with the character of Sabohani on the right side of the treasure box image BOX. It is informed that when the character of Savohani appears from the treasure box, a notice of the Savohani group will be given. Here, a part of the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb is overlapped with the character display of “group notice is confirmed when appears”, but the character display may be overlapped with the variable icon h0. .. In addition, the characters "Attention to the mini game" are displayed near the navigation character YM to alert the mini game together with the timer notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(14), the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure chest image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the character Sabohani appears from the inside, and the character "Success!" is displayed in the vicinity thereof. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yatteze" is displayed, showing that the mini game has been successful. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355(14), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "17:76".

Then, as shown in FIG. 355(15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notification display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notification display TM12 is displayed. The added icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is informed that the Sabohani group notice will be executed. It should be noted that when the high reliability display mode is changed, the strong sabotani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak sabotani group notice may be executed in some cases. , Strong Savohani group notice is always executed. In addition, in the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb, since the mini-game is successful and the execution of the notice of the Savohani group has been confirmed, the mark “done” is displayed so as to overlap the icon of the Savohani. The “Done” mark may be displayed after the notice of the Savohani group is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with “pseudo-relation”, and as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, the pseudo-relation effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355(15), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

Then, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 355(16) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5 -Replay symbol RP-decorative 6" combination of decorative symbols is displayed. The variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb is partially overlapped with the replay symbol RP, but the replay symbol RP may be overlapped with the variable icon h0. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “pseudo-relation!” is displayed to inform that the pseudo-relational effect will be performed. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355(16).

Then, as shown in FIG. 355(17), the second variable display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-linking is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo link. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. Further, in this example of performance, since the pseudo-relational effect is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the effect of overlapping is displayed on the replay icon displayed on the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb. Mark is displayed. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355(17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355(18), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 355(18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (19) subsequent to FIG. 355 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356(20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 356(20).

Then, as shown in FIG. 356(21), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong sabotani group. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, although the hold icon display area is erased, the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong Savohani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356(22) shows that the Sabohani group advance notice is continuously given. At this time, a sabotani icon SBH is displayed below the replay icon RPL icon to notify that the sabotani group notice has been given. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased. Further, in this example of effect, after that, the effect display is switched to the display of super reach, but when the change icon h0 is in the display mode of the large bomb, the change icon h0 is not erased, and even if the change to super reach is performed. The displayed state is maintained, but the variable icon may be deleted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 356 (23), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (24) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the third timer notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which suggests that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. The replay icon RPL is overlapped on the front side of the third timer notice display TM13 and is more difficult to visually recognize than in the non-overlapped state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (25). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 356(26) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a, and then FIG. 356(27). As shown in, the third timer advance notice display TM13 is erased. Further, in this effect example, since the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a is overlapped with the bang length icon displayed in the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb. “Completed” mark is displayed. In this way, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (28), since the corresponding effects are performed for all the icons shown in the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, the variation icon h0 starts to explode. Has been done. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (29), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the large bomb to the display mode of the panda, and the advance notice display by the variable icon h0 is performed. Here, the variation icon h0 may be changed to a display mode other than the display mode of the panda, for example, when the display mode of the bancho is changed, the jackpot pattern is larger than when the display mode of the panda is changed. May be easily confirmed and displayed. In addition, the default display mode may be changed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (30), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the substantially center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area, but it may not be erased.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (31 ), it is shown that the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is temporarily stopped due to the fluctuation. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. At this time, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also displayed again. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (32 ), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 357 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the pending notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 357(1) and 357(2) are the same as FIGS. 347(1) and 347(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 357(3), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the holding number of the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of the Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the prefetching notice. When the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of this Yoshimune hold, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally fixed and stopped than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the character “I appeared!” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold has been displayed. It should be noted that the display of the character "I'm here!" may be started after the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is started, or the display of the character "I'm here!" After the start, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold may start to be displayed, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold starts to display, "I'm here! The display of the character "" may be started. Further, in addition to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the character of Tonosama, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of grandpa hold representing the character of grandpa or the display mode of grandpa hold representing the character of grandma. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Next change expectation" is displayed, and it is possible that the expectation of the big hit in the pattern change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold is high. Has been suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The characters displayed near the navigation character YM have been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 357(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "SP confirmed!" is displayed, and the advance notice is given that the super reach will be reached. In this way, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold serves as a pre-reading notice of the big hit and also as a pre-reading notice of super reach. The display of the character "SP confirmed!" may be started after the symbol variable display is started, or the character "SP confirmed!" may be displayed at the timing when the symbol variable display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(9), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 357(11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Savohani group announcement is made in which the number of Sabohani SBHNs is smaller than that of the strong Savohani group announcement described above. This weak Savohani group notice is more reliable than it was without the Savohani group notice, but less reliable than when the strong Savohani group notice was given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 357(14), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (15), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357(16), the main character's shrine is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The "decoration 6" of the schedule is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (17), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are re-displayed, and the variable icon h0 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is also re-displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (18), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 358 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 359 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 358. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 358(1) and 358(2) are the same as FIGS. 347(1) and 347(2), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 358(3), a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the holding number of the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode that is common to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the character of the lord mentioned above, but the character of the lord holding a bomb is displayed. The display mode of the held Yoshimune bomb is shown, and the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice production is shown. In addition, the character "group" is displayed on the bomb held by the lord's character, and there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be given as a certain effect that will be executed as a result of the timer notice effect. It suggests. In addition, the character “I appeared!” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed. It should be noted that the display of the character "I appeared!" may be started after the display of the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb is started, or the display of the character "I appeared!" The first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be started after the start of, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed. The display of the characters "Mr. Appears!" may be started. Further, in addition to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold representing the lord's character, for example, the display icon of the grand bomb hold representing the grandpa character or the display icon of the grand bomb reserve representing the grandmother character is displayed. May be displayed, and the possibility of a true timer advance notice effect may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Next change expectation" is displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the pattern change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In addition, the character “something” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which shows that a certain message is being displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and then in FIG. 357(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" is switched to the character display of "I have it", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. Can be said to be This message is a message corresponding to the display of the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and suggests that the timer advance notice effect may be started.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which has been the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Onihi" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display of the variation icon h0 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension is extremely high. ing. The display of the character "Onihi" may be started after the symbol variable display is started, or the display of the character "Onihi" may be started at the timing when the symbol variable display is started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. On the first timer notice display TM11, "12:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect will be started when 12 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the timer notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "11:86" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 358(10). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(11), the first timer advance notice display TM11 shows that the timer display is switched to the character display of “waiting for group occurrence”. At this time, the icon of Sabohani is added to the left side of the character display of "waiting for group occurrence", and it is notified that the Sabohani group notification will be executed as a result of the timer announcement effect. That is, in this effect example, the explanation display (tutorial display) is displayed in the timer advance notice display while the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is being executed (during subtraction). Then, as shown in FIG. 358(12), the character display of "waiting for group occurrence" is switched to the timer display again. In this example of performance, the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the character display of "waiting for group occurrence" are alternately switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds) to be displayed. It is performed after the countdown is started until the reach state described later is reached. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358(12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(13), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the alternate display described above also continues, and "04:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358(13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(14), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 358(15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 358(16), the alternate display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends and the timer display is continuously displayed. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 358(16).

Then, as shown in FIG. 358(17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of a strong sabotani group. At this time, although the hold icon display area is erased, the variable icon display area is still displayed and the variable icon h0 is also continuously displayed. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. That is, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, the Sabohani group advance notice is given as a certain effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(18), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously given. Then, the variable icon h0, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold that the bomb has been deleted. In other words, in this example of performance, the variable icon (hold icon) in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the notice of success/failure determination (prefetch notice) and the notice of timer notice production (prefetch notice), is executed by the timer notice production. An example in which the display mode is changed to the Yoshimune hold, which has a function of only the advance notice of advance/rejection determination (prefetch advance notice) after the function is performed, is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358(18), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is also deleted. It should be noted that the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be deleted after the change icon h0 display mode is changed, or the change icon h0 display mode may be changed after the first timer advance notification display TM11 is deleted. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 erases may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 359 (19) following FIG. 358 (18), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. To be done. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after shifting to the super reach, the variable icon h0 may be shifted to the super reach after being deleted, or the variable icon h0 may be changed at the timing of shifting to the super reach. It may be erased.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to display the strong cut-in image. It notifies that CI1a has been displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 359 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (22), a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is shown. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed, and the change icon h0 is also redisplayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold. Then, as shown in FIG. 359 (23), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 360 is a diagram showing stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 361 is a figure showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360. Is. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(1), a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 360(1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 360 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 360(1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(2), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. Moreover, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the present pattern change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In FIG. 360(3), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 is newly displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is a display mode in which three bombs are represented as one lump, and the character "TIMER x 3" is added above. In addition, a character "timer is on hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM. In this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 352, a notice icon indicating that three timer notice effects are executed is displayed by displaying the hold icon in a display mode in which three bombs are in a lump. Is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 360(7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted, and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area. The moving icon is moved and displayed as the variable icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 moves to the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352(9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by, for example, a frame-in animation causing the first timer advance notice display TM11 to frame in from the left side of the display screen. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. In addition, in this example of performance, the icon SBH of Sabohani is added to the first timer notice display TM11. In this example of effect, as a result of the timer notice effect of the first timer notice display TM11 being performed, as will be described later. , It is suggested that a character of Sabohani may appear from the treasure chest image BOX in the mini game. In addition, the first hold icon h11 in a display mode in which three bombs form a lump indicates that the tip of the fuse of the bomb located in the center of the three bombs is ignited, and the navigation character YM is displayed. In the vicinity of, the character “something is... after 5 seconds” is displayed, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 5 seconds later. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the first timer notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed, or the first hold icon is displayed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. The display mode of h11 may change, or the first timer advance notification display TM11 may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative pattern is changed, or the display position of the decoration pattern is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative design is changed. In this example of the effect, the character display of "TIMER x 3" additionally displayed above the first hold icon h11 is continuously displayed.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "04:06" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (10). It is displayed. That is, 0.94 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, the length of the squib of the bomb arranged in the center of the first hold icon h11 is also shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display is started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (11) shows that the mini game is started. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Sudden hot notice when "is displayed" is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It is informed that when a character of Sabohani appears from the treasure box, a notice of extremely high reliability of the big hit is executed. In addition, the characters "mini game" are displayed near the navigation character YM to alert the mini game.

Then, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (12) and "00:00" is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the result of the mini game. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 moves to the center and then opens, and the character SBHN of Sabohani appears in a large size from the inside, and " The character "group notice confirmed" is displayed, and the character "yetaze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to inform that the mini-game is successful and the Sabohani group notice is executed. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the result of the mini game is derived as a certain effect. It can also be said that, as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, a look-ahead advance notice that the Sabohani group advance notice is given is shown as a certain effect.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (13), the character "in preparation" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the icon SBH of Sabohani, and it is informed that the Sabohani group will be announced. There is. Further, at this time, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged in the center is erased and two bombs are represented as one lump. Here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display of the characters SBH of Sabohani and “in preparation” is started, or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. After that, the display of the icon SBH of the sabotani and the character display of "preparing" may be started, or the first hold icon h11 may be displayed at the timing when the display of the icon SBH of the sabotani and the character display of "preparing" is started. The display mode may change. It should be noted that if the mini game is successful, the strong Savohani group notice may be surely executed or the weak Savohani group notice may be executed. The group notice is always executed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 360(14), after the first stop to the third stop are sequentially performed, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation in the swing is caused by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 5". It is shown to be taking place. Then, as shown in FIG. 360 (15), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the missing “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (16), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 after the display mode is changed as described above is moved to the change icon display area in the changed display mode, and the remaining two timer notices regarding the symbol change are displayed. The variable icon h0 is a notice display mode that the effect is executed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (17) shows that two timer notice effects are started at the same time. In this effect example, the second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are respectively frame-in from the left and right of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and two timer notice effects are simultaneously started. The second timer advance notice display TM12 and the third timer advance notice display TM13 are both default display modes. A replay icon RPL is added to the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a question mark icon is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the left side of the display screen. QST is added. Then, "07:00" is displayed as the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started, That is, it is suggested that the pseudo-relational effect may be started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown of the timer display was started. Further, "08:00" is displayed as the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 8 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. It should be noted that it is not clear which effect is a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance effect produced on the third timer advance notice display TM13. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM12 and TM13 start counting down at the same time, a certain performance starts both when 7 seconds and 8 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It is suggested to be done. In addition, in the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which two bombs are in a lump, the heads of both fuses of the two bombs are respectively ignited in response to the start of the two timer advance notice effects.

After that, the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 and the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 each start counting down (subtraction display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (18), the second timer advance notice display TM12 displays. , "04:27" is displayed, and "05:27" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. That is, 0.73 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (19) following FIG. 360 (18), the display that two bombs have become one lump Both bombs in the variation icon h0 of the mode explode, and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "01:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 361 (19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 361(20), the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "00:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 361(20).

After that, at the timing when the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and becomes “00:00”, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (21), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is two bombs in one block. The display mode is changed to the display mode of the panda, and the display mode of the notice related to the symbol variable display is displayed. That is, in this effect example, an example in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the third timer advance notice display TM13 is shown. Further, in this example of the effect, the content of the certain effect was not clear due to the question mark icon QST, but the content of the certain effect was revealed for the first time because the countdown was completed and the certain effect was performed. Is shown. Further, in this effect example, when the hold icon that is started to be displayed in the display mode in which three bombs are collected as one lump is displayed as the hold icon, the timer notice effect is performed as the prefetch notice and is displayed as the variable icon. After that, it is shown that a timer notice effect is also given as a notice regarding the symbol variation display. That is, when the hold icon in the display mode for notifying that the timer advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times is displayed, the state in which the timer advance notice effect is executed in each of the plurality of symbol variable displays is shown. Specifically, it is shown that the Sabohani group notice, the pseudo-relation effect, and the change effect of the change icon h0, which are performed as a result of the execution of the timer notice effect, are performed in different symbol variation displays. Further, in this effect example, the look-ahead notice given as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the subject of the notice relating to the symbol change display given as a result of another timer notice effect are the same symbol change display. An example is given. Further, in this effect example, two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time, but the contents of the effect performed as a result of execution of the respective timer advance effects are different.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (22), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and below the replay icon RPL, the panda icon PND is displayed and the change icon h0 is used as a notice. It has been notified that notification has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (23), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 361 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the upper center part of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Further, the icon SBH of the sabotani and the display of "preparing" which were displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are erased.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (26), the strong sabotani group notice is given so as to correspond to the display of the icon SBH of the sabotani and the "preparing" which were displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. .. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, although the hold icon display area is erased, the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. In addition, in this example of performance, one Sabohani character SBHN composing the strong Sabohani group notice stumbles on the variable icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed. That is, in this example of performance, it is shown that the variation icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Savohani group.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (27), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the bancho displayed in large size. However, it is shown that the mode of the advance notice display by the variable icon h0 is stepped up to the one with higher reliability.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 361 (28), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (29), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 361 (30), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 361 (31), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Further, it is also shown that the variable icon h0 is also re-displayed in a display mode of a large size and a long length. Then, as shown in FIG. 361 (32 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 362 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figures show how the production progresses in the order of parenthesized numbers. Note that FIGS. 362(1) and 362(2) are the same as FIGS. 349(1) and 349(2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 362(3), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 is newly displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is in the button hold display mode, and the effect of changing the hold icon display mode is started by the operation of the effect button 136.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 362(4), the character "PUSH" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notification is given to promote the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 362(5), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362(6), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the button hold display mode. The display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the bomb, and the appearance of the timer display is shown above the second hold icon h12 whose display mode is changed. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice display is displayed on the hold icon is shown. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 362(6), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. That is, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display can be specified by the hold icon. In this example of effect, the start of the countdown is held until the symbol variable display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is started, but the symbol variable display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is displayed. The countdown may be started in the suspended state, that is, in the state displayed as the suspended icon. In this case, for example, when the timing at which a certain effect is started, such as the timing after the symbol variable display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is started, the timer display is reset and the countdown is restarted. You may do so. Further, a question mark is added to the characters near the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-relation", and as a result of the timer advance notice production, the pseudo-reproduction may be executed as a certain production. Is suggested. At the timing shown in FIG. 362(6), a lower plate full tank error has occurred, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with a part of the front surface side of the second hold icon h12 (so as to overlap). In), the ball removal error message "Please remove the ball" is displayed. According to this, in order to make it easy to visually recognize the timer notice display, it may be possible to quickly eliminate the ball removal error.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 362(7), the game progresses from the timing shown in FIG. 6(6), and the hold is applied to the second hold icon h12 in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 6(6). It is shown that the symbols have been digested and the variable display of the symbols has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362(7), the countdown of the timer display is started in the timer notice display displayed in the variable icon h0, and at the timing shown in FIG. 362(7), "07 : 32” is displayed. That is, it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed after 7.32 seconds. As described above, in this effect example, the timer icon is displayed by the variable icon h0. It can also be said that the variable icon display area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed also functions as a display area for displaying the timer notice display. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed, and attention is given to the timer notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the timer notice display displayed in the variable icon h0 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 362(8) and "00:00" is displayed, "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" The combination of decorative patterns is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed.

Also, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 362(5), as shown in FIG. 362(6'), "30:00" may be displayed as the timer display. Has been done. That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 362 (6′), it is suggested that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "group notice", and as a result of the timer notice effect, there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice is executed as a certain effect. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (7′), the game progresses from the timing shown in FIG. 6(6), and the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the hold related to is exhausted and the variable display of the symbols is started. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 362 (7′), the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the variation icon h0 is “30:00” which is the timer display at the start of the countdown continuously displayed. Therefore, when the countdown of the timer display is started, after the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, the countdown of the timer display is performed on the first timer notice display TM11. Be seen. That is, in this effect example, the time (initial value) at the start of the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display can be specified by the hold icon (variable icon), and the timer advance notice display can be displayed separately. The timer advance notice display shows that the timer display is counting down. It should be noted that "27:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 362(7'), suggesting that a certain effect may be performed 27.32 seconds later. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the "attention" character is displayed, and attention is given to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 362(8′) and “00:00” is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of a strong sabotani group. Is shown. In this effect example, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are displayed without being erased. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given.

In this way, the hold icon may be first displayed in the button hold display mode, and changed to the bomb display mode by operating the effect button 136.

In addition, in the effects described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 48 and FIGS. 65 to 362, a certain effect type, effect content of the timer effect effect, and content of the mini game performed as a result of execution of the timer effect effect. Needless to say, various effects described with reference to the drawings before FIG. 325 and various effects described with reference to FIGS. 363 to 371 described later can be applied.

363 to 371 are diagrams illustrating an example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

FIG. 363(A1) to FIG. 363(A18) show how the hold announcement effect is being performed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 363(A1), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth design and the second decorative design may be displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 363(A1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIGS. 363(A1) to (A18) is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of special figure 1 and the second holding number display, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 turned on, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older prizes.

In FIG. 363(A1), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white pattern). Display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round white hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed. This is because the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 363(A1) is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state) as described above, and thus it is difficult to open the electric choo and the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is made. This is because it is in a difficult state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, according to the control state (game state), special figure 1 and special figure 2
The special icon for the special prize that is easy to win is displayed, and the special icon for the other special icon is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 363(A1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variable display of the special symbol is performed in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon→the variation symbol start of the decorative symbol, but this order is mixed Good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. Further, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the pattern change this time) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as the variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In FIG. 363(A3), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the holding number of the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of the Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the prefetching notice. When the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of this Yoshimune hold, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the character “I appeared!” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold has been displayed. It should be noted that the display of the character "I'm here!" may be started after the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is started, or the display of the character "I'm here!" After the start, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold may start to be displayed, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold starts to display, "I'm here! The display of the character "" may be started. Further, in addition to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the character of Tonosama, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of grandpa hold representing the character of grandpa or the display mode of grandpa hold representing the character of grandma. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A4), the first stop is performed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Next change expectation" is displayed, and it is possible that the expectation of the big hit in the pattern change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold is high. Has been suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The characters displayed near the navigation character YM have been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A6), the third stop is performed, and the middle symbol "
"Decorative 2" is stopped and displayed, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuations. After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A7), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a decorative decoration with a "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2" is lost. The combination of symbols is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "SP confirmed!" is displayed, and the advance notice is given that the super reach will be reached. In this way, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold serves as a pre-reading notice of the big hit and also as a pre-reading notice of super reach. The display of the character "SP confirmed!" may be started after the symbol variable display is started, or the character "SP confirmed!" may be displayed at the timing when the symbol variable display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A9), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 363 (A11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Savohani group announcement is made in which the number of Sabohani SBHN is smaller than that of the above-described strong Savohani group announcement. This weak Savohani group notice is more reliable than it was without the Savohani group notice, but less reliable than when the strong Savohani group notice was given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been informed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 363 (A14), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character Tonohama and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A15), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (A16), the main character's shrine is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and a defeated screen is displayed, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The "decoration 6" of the schedule is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result will be lost. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are re-displayed, and the variable icon h0 in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is also re-displayed. The variable icon h0 may be re-displayed in the default display mode instead of the Yoshimune reservation display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (A18), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. It should be noted that, in this effect example, an example in which the display result of the loss is displayed is shown, but it may be a big hit.

FIGS. 363(B1) to (B12) illustrate an example of an effect in which the hold display displayed in the Yoshimune hold display mode is changed to the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 363(B1) to (B3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 363(A1) to (A3), description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B4), a state where the mini game is started is shown. At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the bomb icon BOMB is displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX along with the words "If there is a timer advance notice stock" Is displayed, and when the bomb icon BOMB appears from the treasure box, it is informed that execution of the timer advance notice effect will be stocked. The mini game may be started after the display position of the decorative pattern is changed, the display position of the decorative pattern may be changed after the mini game is started, or the display position of the decorative pattern is changed. The mini game may be started at the timing of change.

After that, the result of the mini game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B5). Specifically, the treasure chest image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the bomb icon BOMB appears in a large size from the inside, and the word "stock confirmed" is displayed in the vicinity thereof. Is displayed to inform that the execution of the timer notice effect is stocked.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B6), the bomb icon BOMB hits the first hold icon h11 displayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold, and the hold change animation is displayed in the first hold icon h11. It is started and notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 363(B7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of Yoshimune hold to the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and the display mode of the prefetch notice of the timer notice effect is displayed. .. That is, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is a display mode in which the bomb icon BD is integrally added to the Yoshimune hold display mode. In addition, the word "timer hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM, the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and execution of the timer notice effect has been stocked. It has been informed. The display of the characters "timer hold" may be started after the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb is changed, or the first hold icon h11 may be displayed after the display of the characters "timer hold" is started. The display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold may be changed, or the display of the character "timer hold" may be started at the timing when the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. Further, when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes, it may change from the lord's character to another character. For example, the display mode of the grand bomb hold representing the grandpa character or the grandmother's character may be changed. You may change to the display mode of the displayed bomb suspension. Also, the display color of the Yoshimune hold display mode or the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode consisting of the lord's character is changed from the default color to another color (for example, red), and the jackpot reliability is improved (rank up). You may do it.

In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 363 (B8), the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed to be moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. Further, the characters "timer hold" displayed near the navigation character YM are also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B9), the first stop is performed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Next change expectation" is displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the pattern change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B10), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The characters displayed near the navigation character YM have been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (B11), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 363 (B12). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Hereinafter, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 358(8) to 359(23) are performed. Note that in this case, the result of the loss may be displayed.

As described above, in this example of performance, the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode is changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect in the result of the mini game, and the timer notice effect is performed in addition to the look-ahead notice of the big hit. It is shown that the pre-reading notice is being made.

It should be noted that, in this production example, an example in which the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold in which the bomb icon BD is integrally added to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold is displayed is shown, for example, as shown in FIG. 363 (B7′). Thus, the bomb icon BD′ may be arranged and displayed above the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold, and may be displayed separately from the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold. In this case, the bomb icon BD' is displayed at a position corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11, so it is easy to recognize which hold icon the bomb icon BD' corresponds to. Sometimes you can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 363 (B7″), a bomb icon BD′ may be arranged and displayed above the change icon h0. In this case, it may be difficult to understand which of the hold icon and the variable icon the bomb icon BD′ corresponds to.

Further, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as shown in FIG. 363 (B7″″). Specifically, the BD display of the bomb is displayed to exert the function as a pre-reading notice of the timer notice production, and as a pre-reading notice regarding the big hit, a character icon (for example, a panda icon different from the lord's character is displayed). The hold icon may be displayed in such a manner that (PD) is displayed in association with the display of the bomb.

FIG. 364 (B3a) and FIG. 364 (B7a) are respectively FIG. 363 (B3) and FIG.
7 shows another effect pattern of 7). That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), when the game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is increased by 1, it is not the display mode of Yoshimune holding. , Is displayed in a display mode different from that of the hold icon in the default display mode. It should be noted that a display mode in which the color is different from the default display mode may be used. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), it is displayed in a round and blue display mode. As a result, a look-ahead notice regarding the big hit is given. In addition, when a pre-reading notice is given based on a change in the color of the hold icon, the reliability may be different depending on the color. Is high, and in this case, in the case of a rainbow color, a big hit confirmation may be notified. After that, when a mini game is played as shown in FIGS. 363(B4) to (B6) and the bomb icon BOMB is displayed in the treasure box image BOX as a result of the mini game, the mini game is shown in FIG. 363(B7a). ), a fuse may be added to the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 364 (B3a) to change the display mode of the timer notice to the display mode of the bomb. In this case, the form of the hold icon may also be changed, and for example, the circular blue display form may be changed to the circular red display form. That is, the reliability of the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit may be increased (up by 2 steps). In this case, the reliability may be increased by one step, the reliability may be increased by two or more steps, the reliability may be increased by only one step, or twice. The number may be increased only by the above specific number of steps. In this way, the display mode of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon may be increased.

FIG. 364 (B3b) and FIG. 364 (B7b) show different effect patterns of FIG. 363 (B3) and FIG. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), when a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 increases by one, it is not the display mode of Yoshimune holding. , Is displayed in a display mode different from that of the hold icon in the default display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), it is displayed in a round shape in a red display mode, and shows that a pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is being given. After that, when a mini game is played as shown in FIGS. 363(B4) to (B6), and as a result of the mini game, the bomb icon BOMB is displayed in the treasure box image BOX, FIG. 363(B7b). ), a fuse may be added to the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 364 (B3b) to change the display mode to the timer hold display mode. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 364 (B3b), the form of the hold icon does not change, and the reliability of the prefetch notice regarding the big hit is maintained as it is. In this example of production, in addition to the pre-reading notice of the big hit, the pre-reading notice of the timer notice production is added, and it can be said that the display mode of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon is upgraded.

FIG. 364(B3c), FIG. 364(B7c), and FIG. 368(B8c) show different effect patterns of FIG. 363(B3), FIG. 363(B7), and FIG. 36(B8), respectively. Since the effect shown in FIG. 364 (B3c) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 364 (B3a), description thereof will be omitted. After that, when the mini game is played as shown in FIGS. 363(B4) to (B6), and as a result of the mini game, the bomb icon BOMB is displayed from the treasure box image BOX, FIG. 364(B7c). ), the display mode of the hold icon does not change, the first timer notice display TM11 may be displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the timer notice effect may be started. At this time, "30:00" is displayed as the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, suggesting that a certain effect may be started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. In addition, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is not started, the character "standby" is displayed below the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the countdown of the timer display is started. Have been reserved. In this way, the present invention can be realized by displaying the timer advance notice display in a region other than the hold icon display region in a mode in which the countdown is not performed. After that, FIG. 364 (B8c)
In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in (1), the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed to be moved and displayed in the center of the display screen. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still in a standby state. Note that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice advance display TM11 is started in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the target of the prefetch advance notice.

In this example of performance, as a result of the mini game being performed, a display mode that does not include the notification display of the timer notification effect (such as the display mode of Yoshimune hold or the display mode of blue hold) includes the notification display of the timer notification effect. Although a mode (a display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, a display mode of the red timer hold, etc.) is shown, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by performing the hold change animation described above. ..

FIG. 364 (C1) to FIG. 365 (C23) are diagrams showing stepwise another effect example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 364(C1) to (C2) are similar to FIGS. 363(A1) to (A2), and thus description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 364 (C3) shows that the game balls are won in the special-figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings of the special-figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h11 of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the holding number of the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and is a display mode of the prefetch notice of the timer notice effect. In addition, the character “I appeared!” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Next change expectation" is displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the pattern change display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In addition, the character “something” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which shows that a certain message is being displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the swing fluctuation, and then in FIG. 364 (C7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" is switched to the character display of "I have it", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. Can be said to be This message is a message corresponding to the display of the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, and suggests that the timer advance notice effect may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 in the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which has been the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Onihi" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display of the variation icon h0 which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension is extremely high. ing. The display of the character "Onihi" may be started after the symbol variable display is started, or the display of the character "Onihi" may be started at the timing when the symbol variable display is started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is frame-in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. On the first timer notice display TM11, "12:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect will be started when 12 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the timer notice effect.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "11:86" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C10). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C11), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is shown switching from the timer display to the character display of “waiting for group occurrence”. At this time, the icon of Sabohani is added to the left side of the character display of "waiting for group occurrence", and it is notified that the Sabohani group notification will be executed as a result of the timer announcement effect. That is, in this effect example, the explanation display (tutorial display) is displayed in the timer advance notice display while the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is being executed (during subtraction). After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (C12), the character display of “waiting for group occurrence” is switched to the timer display again. In this example of performance, the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the character display of "waiting for group occurrence" are alternately switched at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds) to be displayed. It is performed after the countdown is started until the reach state described later is reached. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C13), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and the alternate display described above also continues, and "04:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C14), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 364 (C15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C16), the alternating display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. The first timer advance notice display TM11 continues to count down, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 364 (C16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (C17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong sabotani group notice. At this time, although the hold icon display area is erased, the variable icon display area is still displayed and the variable icon h0 is also continuously displayed. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. That is, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer advance notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, the Sabohani group advance notice is given as a certain effect.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C18), it is shown that the notice of the sabotani group is continuously given. Then, the variable icon h0, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold that the bomb has been deleted. In other words, in this example of performance, the variable icon (hold icon) in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the notice of success/failure determination (prefetch notice) and the notice of timer notice production (prefetch notice), is executed by the timer notice production. An example in which the display mode is changed to the Yoshimune hold, which has a function of only the advance notice of advance/rejection determination (prefetch advance notice) after the function is performed, is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (C18), the first timer advance notice display TM11 is also deleted. It should be noted that the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be deleted after the change icon h0 display mode is changed, or the change icon h0 display mode may be changed after the first timer advance notification display TM11 is deleted. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 erases may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 365 (C18) following FIG. 364 (C18), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. To be done. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after shifting to the super reach, the variable icon h0 may be shifted to the super reach after being deleted, or the variable icon h0 may be changed at the timing of shifting to the super reach. It may be erased.

Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (C20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It notifies that CI1a has been displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 365 (C21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (C22), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed in a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Further, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also re-displayed, and the change icon h0 is also re-displayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 365 (C23), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decoration decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the character of the lord displayed the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a display mode in which a bomb was held, but the character of the lord was not a bomb (for example, a replay icon or a sabotani icon). ) May be displayed in a held manner, and a pre-reading notice of the notice effect to be executed may be given.

FIG. 365 (D1) to FIG. 365 (D18) are diagrams showing step by step another example of the pending notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 365 (D1) to (D7) are similar to FIGS. 363 (A1) to (A7), and thus description thereof is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D8), the suspension (first suspension) of the special symbol 1 is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0 which is the notice display mode regarding the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Onihot" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display of the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of Yoshimune reservation, is extremely high. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365(D9), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 365 (D11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (D12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (D13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously displayed, and "SP reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into a super reach. Has been announced. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 365(D14) to FIG. 365(D18) is performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 365(D14) to (D18) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 363(A14) to (A18), description thereof will be omitted. In this case, it may be a big hit.

As described above, in this production example, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of Yoshimune hold, the display mode with the bomb added (the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect) When it is displayed in, the timer notice production is easier to perform, and when the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed, it is displayed in a display mode with a bomb added (display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold) An example in which the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than in the case where the bomb mode is not displayed (the display mode of Yoshimune hold).

FIG. 365(E1) to FIG. 366(E19) are diagrams showing in stages an example of the pending change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 365(E1), the combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 365(E1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable icon h0 is not displayed.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 365 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 365(E1), the two hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is started. Moreover, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the present pattern change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11. Is displayed as. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In FIG. 365 (E3), a state in which a game ball is won at the starting point 230 of the special map 1 and the number of holdings of the special map 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 is newly displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in a round and blue display mode, that is, in a display mode of a pre-reading notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E5), the second stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 365 (E7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (E8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365(E9), the roulette effect is started and the start effect is being performed. In this effect example, when the roulette effect is started and the start effect is started, three icons (for example, a timer notice icon, a replay icon, and a sabotani icon) are arranged in a triangle above the first hold icon h11. , And any one of the three icons is displayed in a state surrounded by an elliptical cursor. At the timing shown in FIG. 365(E9), the cursor surrounds the timer advance notice icon, and correspondingly, the character "timer" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is performed. As a result, it suggests that the timer notice icon may be stopped and the timer notice effect may be performed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E10) shows that the start effect is being continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 366 (E10), the cursor moves to surround the icon of Sabohani, and correspondingly, the character of “icon” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM and the roulette effect is displayed. As a result, it suggests that the icon of Sabohani may stop and a notice effect corresponding to the stopped icon may be performed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E11) shows that the starting effect is being continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 366 (E11), the cursor moves and surrounds the replay icon. Correspondingly, the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the roulette effect is produced. As a result, the replay icon is stopped, which suggests that the pseudo-relationship may be performed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E12) shows that the start effect has ended and the cursor has started high-speed movement (high-speed fluctuation). In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “what comes out” is displayed to give an expectation as to which of the three icons will stop.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13), the characters "koreda" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the timer advance notice icon to produce the roulette effect. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice icon has been derived and displayed. Note that the result of the roulette effect may be derived and displayed after the character "koreda" is displayed, or the character "koreda" may be displayed after the result of the roulette effect is derived and displayed. However, the result of the roulette effect may be derived and displayed at the timing when the character "koreda" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15), from the display mode of the first holding icon h11 that is round and blue (that is, the display mode of the prefetching notice), a fuse is added to the display mode of the prefetching notice. Then, the display mode of the bomb is changed. In other words, the display mode of the blue timer is changed to the display mode of the blue timer, which is the display mode of the bomb in blue. In addition, the characters "timer hold" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect has been given. The character display of "timer hold" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "timer hold" is performed. Alternatively, the characters "timer hold" may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E16), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E17), the second stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 366 (E19). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 347(8) and after, the effect shown in FIG. 349(12) and after, the effect shown in FIG. 351(8) and after, the effect shown in FIG. The effects and the like shown after 355(9) are performed.

FIGS. 366(E13a) to (E15a) show other patterns of the effect shown in FIGS. 366(E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13a), the character "koreda" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the icon of Sabohani to produce a roulette effect. As a result, it is notified that the icon of Savohani has been derived and displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14a), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the round and blue display mode (prefetch advance display mode) to the display mode of the character Sabohani. That is, it is shown that a pre-reading notice of the Sabohani group notice is being made. After that, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the character of Sabohani, it is notified that the strong Sabohani group notice may be given. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the character of Sabohani, as a result of the timer announcement effect, the Sabohani group announcement may be made (for example, FIG. 239 to FIG. 240, etc.), the Sabohani group notice may be given without the timer notice effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 237 to 238). In addition, in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the character of Savohani, the weak Savohani group notice may be given, or the Savohani group notice itself may not be given. May be. Then, in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 that is the display mode of the character of Sabohani, since there is a possibility that a Sabohani group notice will be given, it is possible to give an expectation for the transition to the super reach. Sometimes you can.

FIGS. 366(E13b) to (E15b) show other patterns of the effect shown in FIGS. 366(E13) to (E15). That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E13b), the character "koreda" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the cursor is stopped and displayed around the replay icon to produce a roulette effect. As a result, it is notified that the replay icon has been derived and displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E14b), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 366 (E15b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains the round and blue display mode, but the replay icon appears above the variable icon h0. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the pseudo-reading is being performed, and the pseudo-playing effect may be performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first holding icon h11 which is the display mode of the pre-reading announcement. Be informed. In addition, in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, the pseudo notice effect may be performed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed (for example, FIGS. 239 to 240). , Etc.), the pseudo continuous effect may be performed without the timer advance notice effect (for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 237 to 238). Further, in the symbol variable display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the prefetching notice, the pseudo continuous effect may not be performed.

FIG. 366(E8c) to FIG. 366(E12c) show another effect pattern following FIG. 365(E7). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 366 (E8c) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 365 (E8), so description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E9c) shows that the present hold effect has been started. In the present hold effect, a small treasure box TRG, which is a small treasure box, is displayed above the hold icon (or the change icon), and one of the plural kinds of results (contents or options) is derived, and the hold icon (change) is displayed. This is an effect in which the display mode of (icon) may change.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E10c), it is shown that the result of the gift holding effect is derived. Specifically, the petit treasure box TRG is opened, a timer advance notice icon appears from the inside, and it is notified that the timer advance notice effect may be performed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E11c), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. It

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (E12c), a fuse is added to the display mode of the prefetch notice shown in FIG. 366 (E8c) to change the display mode to the timer hold mode, and the color thereof is changed from blue to red. It is shown that it is changing to. In addition, the characters "timer hold" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect has been given. That is, it is shown that the addition of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice and the rank-up of the pre-reading notice are performed by the same effect. Furthermore, in this example of performance, a timer display icon, which is displayed as "10:00" as an initial display time, is added above the bomb, and a certain effect is produced when 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display was started. It has been suggested that Note that, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c′), a fuse is added to the display mode of the prefetch notice to change to the display mode of the timer notice, but the color of the hold icon may remain blue and may not change. .. In addition, the countdown time of the timer display may be different, for example, in FIG. 366 (E12c″), the timer advance notice icon displayed as “60:00” as the initial display time is added, It is suggested that a certain effect is performed 60 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is started. In this case, for example, the higher the rank of the hold icon, the easier it may be to display the timer display icon indicating a longer time. When the icon is displayed, "60:00" may appear more easily than "10:00" as the initial display of the time indicated by the timer display. At this time, in the opening scene of the petit treasure box TRG shown in FIG. 366 (E10c), the time may be different from the initial display time indicated by the timer advance notice icon (for example, “10:00” from the petit treasure box TRG). Although a timer notice icon indicating "appears" appears, a timer display icon indicating "60:00" may be added after the change in the display mode of the hold icon), or may be the same (for example, Petit Treasure Box). The timer display icon indicating “60:00” may appear from the TRG).

In this production example, the appearance of the timer advance notice icon from the petit treasure box TRG shows that the advance notice advance notice function of the timer advance effect is added to the preemptive advance notice hold icon for the jackpot. Other than the timer advance notice icon may appear, for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E10c′), the replay icon may appear from the petit treasure box TRG, and the pseudo-reading advance notice may be given. May be.

As described above, in this effect example, if one of the contents (one of the options) appearing from the petit treasure box TRG includes the one related to the timer notice effect, the hold icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 366 (E9c). It can be said that the state in which the small treasure box TRG is displayed incidentally is also an example of the timer hold functioning as a pre-reading notice of the timer notice production.

FIG. 367 (F1) to FIG. 367 (F22) are diagrams showing stepwise an example of the pending change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 367 (F1) to (F8) are similar to FIGS. 365 (E1) to (E8), and thus description thereof is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is shown that one of the mini games, “Yoshimune Kankan Game”, has started. When the "Yoshimune Kankan game" is started, the dice symbol DC is displayed as a symbol "1" on the right side of the navigation character YM, and the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, in the upper center part of the display screen, an explanation display of “Attention to Yoshimune!” and “Tear off with repeated hits” is displayed, and you can hit the production button 136 repeatedly within the effective operation period to make the dice roll (design) more advantageous. It is shown that the mission is to make a large number (large number), and the display mode of the hold icon may change to a more advantageous mode depending on the achievement level of the mission. Specifically, in the effect example shown in FIG. 367 (F9), when the roll of the dice remains “1” and there is no change, the display mode of the hold icon is a look-ahead notice regarding the big hit and the blue display mode remains. If there is no change (no change) and the die roll is increased by one rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is the display mode of the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit, but there is no change in the hold icon. When the color is upgraded from blue to red (changed from blue hold to red hold) and the die roll is increased by 2 ranks to "5", the display mode of the hold icon is a look-ahead notice regarding the big hit. In addition to this, a pre-reading notice of the timer notice is added, and further, it is notified that the color of the hold icon is upgraded from blue to red (change from blue hold to red timer hold).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F10), the display showing the result of the dice and the corresponding result (that is, the display mode of the changed hold icon) moves to the left side of the display screen. In addition to being displayed, the character "READY" is displayed along with the button image 136a in the center of the display screen to notify that the continuous tapping operation acceptance is started. Also, the navigation character YM is shown to be ready to pull out the sword.

FIG. 367 (F11) shows that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. When the operation valid period is started, the character "READY" displayed along with the button image 136a is changed to "GO!", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. , It is shown that they are promoting repeated hits.

FIG. 367 (F12) shows a state where the player continuously hits the effect button 136 during the operation valid period of the effect button 136. It is shown that the navigation character YM sharply cuts the pattern of the dice in response to the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 by the player. The remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge is reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

FIG. 367 (F13) shows that the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F13), since the number of operations of the effect button 136 has reached the predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the roll of the dice is upgraded from "1" to "3". That is, it is shown that it is determined that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from blue hold to red hold.

FIG. 367 (F14) shows that the production button 136 is continuously hit continuously, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM moves to the right side of the symbol of the dice, and the effect by the player. It is shown that the pattern of the dice is slashed with a small sword in response to the continuous operation of the button 136.

FIG. 367 (F15) shows that the consecutive hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM moves to the left side of the symbol of the dice, and is determined by the player. It is shown that the pattern of the dice is slammed with a spear in response to the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the character “GO!” displayed in association with the button image 136a is changed to “continuous hit!”, prompting further continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

FIG. 367 (F16) shows that the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16), the character “repeatedly hit!” displayed along with the button image 136a is changed to “another breath!”, and the die roll is the highest rank “5” soon after. Has been suggested.

After that, after continuously performing the streak operation of the effect button 136, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F17), the die roll is ranked up from “3” to “5” and displayed along with the button image 136a. The word "Ippai!" that was displayed changes to "I did it!" and the button operation animation ends. That is, it is shown that the continuous rolling operation in the “Yoshimune Kankan game” raises the number of dice to the highest rank of “5” and the desired purpose is achieved. At this time, although the navigation character YM is erased, it may remain displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18), the dice showing the finally derived “5” is displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The letters "GET!" are displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of blue hold to the display mode of red timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is upgraded and the pre-reading notice of the timer notice production is added.

After that, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in that order, as shown in FIG. 367 (F21), the third stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to fluctuations in swing. After that, as shown in FIG. 367 (F22), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the defective decorative symbols “decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 347(8) and after, the effect shown in FIG. 349(12) and after, the effect shown in FIG. 351(8) and after, the effect shown in FIG. The effects and the like shown after 355(9) are performed.

It should be noted that in this effect example, a predetermined result (roll of the dice) is derived by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, but, for example, within the operation valid period. Even when the effect button 136 is not operated a predetermined number of times and the predetermined result is not derived, the predetermined result (the result of the dice) is finally derived (rewritten). Alternatively, a result different from a predetermined result (a result corresponding to the number of times the effect button 136 is operated) may be derived. For example, as a result of the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, the result of the dice is “1” without being ranked up, but the predetermined result is the result of “5” which is up by 2 ranks. In the case where the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, the dice roll may be "5"), in response to the red timer hold, the timer is displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. The notice effect may be performed, or if the result of the derivation is, for example, the result of the dice is “1”, the timer notice effect is performed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. You may not be discouraged.

It should be noted that, in this example of performance, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded due to the "Yoshimune Kankan game" being executed, but any of the mini games shown so far in this specification is shown. The display mode of the hold icon may be ranked up by.

In addition, in this production example, when the result is derived with the result of the dice being “1” without change, the display mode of the hold icon remains in blue hold and the rank is not increased. For example, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9′), regardless of which result is derived, the display mode of the hold icon is always upgraded (that is, the hold icon is displayed when the “Yoshimune Kankan game” is executed). The promotion of the mode may be confirmed). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 367 (F9′), when the result of the dice remains “1” and there is no change, the default display mode is the display mode of the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit (blue display mode). When the pre-reading notice of the timer notice is added (changes from the default to the blue timer hold) and the result of the die rolls up by one rank to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is The default display mode has changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit, and the color of the hold icon is also red, and the pre-reading notice of the timer notice is added (change from the default to the red timer hold), and the roll of the dice When the rank is increased by 2 to "5", the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode regarding the big hit, and the color of the hold icon is also red, and the timer is displayed. A pre-reading notice of a notice is added, and it is further notified that the size of the hold icon changes to a large size (changes from default to Decatimer hold).

FIG. 367 (F8a) to FIG. 3(F20a) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7). However, in this effect example, in FIG. 367 (F3), it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the blue timer hold display mode instead of the blue hold display mode when the hold is increased. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 367 (F8a) is the same as that in FIG. 367 (F8), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the blue timer hold display mode, and therefore a description thereof is omitted. To do.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9a) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has started. In the example of production shown in FIG. 367 (F9a), when the roll of the dice remains “1” and does not change, the display form of the hold icon does not change and remains the display form of the blue timer hold, and the roll of the dice shows. When is increased by 1 rank to become "3", the display mode of the hold icon is increased from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold, and the die roll is increased by 2 ranks. When it is "5", it is informed that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the deca timer hold. It should be noted that the display mode of the big timer hold is a display mode in which the reliability of the big hit is higher than that of the red timer hold display mode. After that, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (F15).

FIG. 367 (F16a) shows a state in which the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16a), the character “repeatedly hit!” displayed along with the button image 136a is changed to “another breath!”, and the die roll is the highest rank “5” soon after. Has been suggested.

However, after that, when the operation valid period elapses without the rank of the dice being raised from “3” to “5”, as shown in FIG. 367 (F17a), it is displayed in association with the button image 136a. The character of "Another breath!" switches to "Chance!", and the button operation animation ends. That is, it is shown that the number of rolls of the dice is increased by one rank from "1" to "3" by the continuous hit operation in the "Yoshimune Kankan game". At this time, the navigation character YM is displayed, but it may be deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18a), the dice showing the finally derived “3” is displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The letters "GET!" are displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19a), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20a), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up while the pre-reading notice of the timer notice production by the hold icon is being given. In other words, it can be said that the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect by the hold icon is changed to the look-ahead notice of another timer notice effect. After that, for example, the effect is performed as shown in FIG. 367 (F21) to FIG.

It should be noted that, in this example of performance, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded due to the "Yoshimune Kankan game" being executed, but any of the mini games shown so far in this specification is shown. The display mode of the hold icon may be ranked up by.

FIG. 368 (F8b) to FIG. 368 (F20b) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7). However, in this effect example, in FIG. 367 (F3), it is assumed that the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the blue timer hold display mode instead of the blue hold display mode when the hold is increased. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 367 (F8b) is the same as that in FIG. 367 (F8), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the blue timer hold display mode, and therefore a description thereof is omitted. To do.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9b) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has started. In the example of production shown in FIG. 367 (F9b), when the roll of the dice remains “1” and does not change, the display mode of the hold icon does not change and remains the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the roll of the dice rolls. When is increased by 1 rank to become "3", the display mode of the hold icon is increased from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the red timer hold, and the die roll is increased by 2 ranks. In the case of "5", the display mode of the hold icon is a display mode in which two bombs are displayed as one block from the display mode of the blue timer hold, and the bomb arranged on the left side is blue. It is notified that the bomb placed on the right side will be ranked up to the display mode of the double timer hold, which is the display mode of red. When the hold icon is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, it is suggested that the timer advance notice effect may be performed at least twice. After that, the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (F15).

FIG. 367 (F16b) shows a state in which the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F16b), the character “repeatedly hit!” displayed along with the button image 136a is changed to “another breath!”, and the die roll is the highest rank “5” soon after. Has been suggested.

After that, after the production button 136 has been repeatedly hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F17b), the die roll is upgraded from "3" to "5" and displayed along with the button image 136a. The word "Ippai!" that was displayed changes to "I did it!" and the button operation animation ends. In other words, it is shown that the continuous rolling operation in the “Yoshimune Kankan game” raises the number of dice to “5”, which is the highest rank, and the desired purpose is achieved. At this time, although the navigation character YM is erased, it may remain displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F18b), the dice showing the finally derived “5” is displayed in the center of the display screen in an enlarged manner, and on the right side thereof. The letters "GET!" are displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F19b), the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 367 (F20b), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the blue timer hold to the display mode of the double timer hold. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up and the pre-reading notice that the timer notice production is performed at least twice is shown. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice of the timer notice production is also ranked up. After that, for example, the effect is performed as shown in FIG. 367 (F21) to FIG. After that, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 325 to 327 and the effects shown in FIGS. More than one timer announcement production will be performed. It should be noted that which effect is to be executed as a certain effect executed by the timer effect can be appropriately set, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in this specification can be applied. Needless to say. Even when the hold icon (or the variable icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be executed only once.

In the example of the effect, for example, as a result of the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, the result of the dice is not ranked up and is “1”, but the predetermined result is up by 2 ranks of “5”. If it is a roll (if the dice roll is "5" when the production button 136 is repeatedly pressed with all one's might), the corresponding hold icon is displayed in response to the double timer hold. The timer advance notice effect may be performed at least twice in the corresponding symbol variation display, and if the result of the derivation is, for example, the result of the dice is “1”, it corresponds to the hold icon. The timer advance notice effect may be performed only once in the symbol variable display.

It should be noted that, in this example of performance, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded due to the "Yoshimune Kankan game" being executed, but any of the mini games shown so far in this specification is shown. The display mode of the hold icon may be ranked up by.

FIG. 368 (F8c) to FIG. 368 (F20c) show another effect pattern following FIG. 367 (F7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (F8c), the suspension (first suspension) of the special symbol 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the symbol variable display on the first special symbol display device 212. Is shown to have started. At this time, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) moves to the variable icon display area. Then, the variable icon h0 is displayed, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (F8c) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen by frame-in animation from the right side of the display screen. The first timer advance notice display TM11 is a default display mode. On the first timer notice display TM11, "30:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. The countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started thereafter.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F9c) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has started. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is moved and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 may be moved and displayed before the "Yoshimune Kankan Game" starts, may be moved and displayed after the "Yoshimune Kankan Game" starts, and the "Yoshimune Kankan Game" may be displayed. It may be moved and displayed at the timing when "" starts. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 367 (F9c), “27:60” is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. That is, it is shown that 2.4 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Since other effects are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 367 (F9b), description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that the first timer advance notice display TM11 moves and displays the display position from the upper left corner portion to the upper right corner portion again when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, but may not be moved and displayed. After that, after the effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 367 (F10) to (F15), FIGS. 368 (F16c) to (F19).
The effect shown in c) is performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 368 (F16c) to (F19c) are different from each other except that the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed and the timer display countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is performed. Since it is the same as FIG. 368 (F16b) to FIG. 368 (F19b), description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 367 (F20c), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the blue timer hold at the timing when the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. The display state of the double timer hold is changed to a state in which the hold icons are ranked up. That is, it is shown that the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up, the pre-reading notice about the fact that the timer notice production is performed at least twice, and the pre-reading notice of the timer notice production is also ranked up. .. It should be noted that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”, or after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display on the timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00", or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". You may. After that, for example, the effect is performed as shown in FIG. 367 (F21) to FIG. Then, when the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 325 to 327, the effects shown in FIGS. 328 to 329, and the like in one symbol variation display 2 More than one timer advance notice will be performed. It should be noted that which effect is to be executed as a certain effect executed by the timer effect can be appropriately set, that is, any of the embodiments disclosed in this specification can be applied. Needless to say. Even when the hold icon (or the variable icon) is displayed in the double timer hold display mode, the timer advance notice effect may be executed only once.

As described above, in this effect example, an example in which the timer notice display is moved and displayed is shown, and as a result of the timer notice effect being performed, a notice that the new timer notice effect is started is given as a certain effect. It is shown.

In addition, in this example of the effect, the effect of increasing the timer hold of the display mode of the bomb from one to a plurality is performed. For example, as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game in which the bombs included in the Yoshimune bomb hold are displayed. An effect that increases from one to three may be performed.

FIG. 368 (G1) to FIG. 369 (G22) are diagrams showing another effect pattern of the pending change effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 367 (G1) to (G2) are similar to FIGS. 365 (E1) to (E2), and thus description thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 368 (G3), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting opening 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icon h12 of the special drawing 1 is newly displayed in the holding icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 in the second holding number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is in a display mode in which the panda icon PD is added together with the display BD″ of the bomb, and the pre-reading notice of the timer notice production is given and also as the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit. It is functioning. The reliability of the big hit when the panda icon PD is displayed is, for example, "2", which means that the reliability of the big hit is slightly higher. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 368(G4) to (G8) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 368(G4) to (G8) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 365(E4) to (E8), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (G9) shows that the “Yoshimune Kankan game” has started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 368 (G9), when the roll of the dice remains “1” and there is no change, the display mode of the hold icon remains the icon PD of the panda whose jackpot reliability is “2”. If the dice roll does not change and the rank is increased by 1 to "3", the display mode of the hold icon is increased from the panda icon PD to the lord's icon TS, and the dice roll is When the rank is increased by 2 to “5”, the display mode of the hold icon is informed that the panda icon PD is upgraded to the sabotani icon SH. Note that the rank of the jackpot reliability when the lord's icon TS is displayed is, for example, “4”, which is higher than the panda icon PD. Moreover, the rank of the reliability of the big hit when the icon SH of Sabohani is displayed is, for example, "infinity", and the reliability of the big hit is extremely high. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 368 (G10) to FIG. 369 (G19) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 368(G10) to 369(G19) are the same as those in FIGS. 367(F10) to (G19), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Therefore, the description is omitted. At this time, as shown in FIG. 368 (G11), the panda icon PD is displayed overlapping with the remaining time meter MT, but is displayed overlapping with the remaining time meter MT. Good. Further, as shown in FIG. 368 (G18), the panda icon PD is displayed so as to be overlapped with the outcome of the dice that is derived and displayed, but is displayed with being overlapped with the outcome of the dice. May be done.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (G20), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode in which the panda icon PD is added to the bomb display BD″ to the display mode in Savohani. Is shown. That is, the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice production is no longer displayed, but the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit is ranked up.

After that, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in that order, as shown in FIG. 369 (G21), the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to fluctuations in swing. Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (G22), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 237 to FIG. 238 or the like, a symbol variation display in which the Sabohani group notice is given may be displayed without the timer notice production, or as shown in FIG. 243 or the like. A design variable display may be performed in which an effect is performed and as a certain effect, a notice of the Savohani group is given. Further, the notice of the sabotani group to be given may be the notice of the strong sabotani group or the notice of the weak sabotani group in some cases.

In this example of the effect, the display mode in which the panda icon PD is added to the display BD″ of the bomb is changed to the display mode of Sabohani, so that the pre-reading of the pre-notification of the pre-notification of the pre-notice of the pre-notice of pre-notice of the pre-notice of pre-notice Although the display mode has changed to a display mode other than the notice display mode, for example, the hold icon, which is the display mode of the blue timer hold mode, changes to the red hold mode as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game being executed, so The display mode may be changed to a display mode other than the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the timer notice effect, and the pre-reading notice regarding the big hit may be ranked up.

FIG. 369 (H1) to FIG. 370 (H38) are diagrams showing in stages an example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 369(H1) to (H2) are the same as FIGS. 363(A1) to (A2), and thus description thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 369 (H3), a state in which a game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of special figure 1 is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area, and the number of hold of special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. Is displayed as "2". Here, the second hold icon h12 has a display mode made up of one bomb, and the character "TIMER" is added above. In addition, a character "timer is on hold" is displayed near the navigation character YM. In this effect example, the hold icon in the display mode of the timer hold, which is the display mode of the bomb, is displayed to show that the notice display (prefetch notice) of the timer notice effect is being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H4), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In addition, in the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H5), the second stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H6), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 369 (H7). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H8), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H9) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the character "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb in the first hold icon h11 is switched to the timer display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. "03:00" is displayed on the timer display displayed on the first hold icon h11, suggesting that a certain effect will be started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. In addition, the character "timer start" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 3 seconds later. In addition, "timer start" may be displayed after the character "TIMER" in the first hold icon h11 is switched to "03:00", or the first timer may be displayed after "timer start" is displayed. The character "TIMER" in the hold icon h11 may be switched to "03:00", or the character "TIMER" in the first hold icon h11 may be changed to "03:00" at the timing when "start timer" is displayed. You may switch to.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and the timer display shows “02:75” at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H10). That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Further, the display of "timer start" displayed near the navigation character YM is switched to "focus on hold", and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H11) shows that the lord's character YMN appears and shoots a bow toward the first hold icon h11. Further, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "00:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H11).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H12), when the countdown of the timer display is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the arrow shot by the lord's character YMN becomes the first hold icon h11. A hit is made, the hold change animation is started, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. It should be noted that the hold change animation may be started after the timer display is "00:00", or the timer display may be "00:00" after the hold change animation is started. The hold change animation may be started at the timing when the display becomes “00:00”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (H13), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one lump, and above it. Is added with the characters "TIMER x 3". In addition, the character "timer increase" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is shown that a notice display (prefetch notice) that the timer notice effect is executed three times is displayed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed, the number of times of execution of the timer advance notice effect displayed in advance by the hold icon is increased as a certain effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H14), the first stop is performed and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H15), the second stop is performed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H16), the third stop is performed, “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed, and then in FIG. 369 (H17). As shown in the figure, the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H18), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212. The variable display is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. And is displayed as a variable icon h0. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which three bombs are in a lump is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that at least three times of the timer advance notice effect regarding the symbol variation is executed. The change icon h0, which is a notice display mode of being performed, is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H19) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by, for example, the first timer notice display TM11 being framed in from the right side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "07:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that the pseudo-relation is likely to be started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variable icon h0 in a display mode in which three bombs are a lump, the display of “TIMER×3” is erased and the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. The state is displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something is... in 7 seconds" is displayed, and a certain effect can be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed in 7 seconds. It has been suggested that there is sex. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center part. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, the first timer notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed after the display position of the decorative pattern is changed, or the display position of the decoration pattern is changed after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be displayed at the timing when the display position of the decorative design is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and "06:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H20). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the first timer notice display TM11. Further, the length of the squib of the bomb arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0 is also shortened according to the time after the countdown of the timer display is started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H21) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect will be started when 20 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the icon SBH of the sabotani is added to the second timer notification display TM12, which suggests that the sabotani group notification is likely to be started as a certain effect. In addition, the variable icon h0 in a display mode in which three bombs are collected as one lump shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the squib of the bomb arranged on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time after the countdown on the timer display starts. Further, the countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H21). In addition, the word "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

Thereafter, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and "19:20" is displayed on the second timer advance notice display TM12 at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H22). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "04:95" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H22), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the character "Short notice is confirmed" appears with the character Sabohani on the right side of the treasure box image BOX. It is informed that when the character SBHN of Sabohani appears from the treasure box, a notice of the strong Sabohani group will be given. It should be noted that it may be possible to notify that the notice of the Savohani group will be given including the notice of the weak Savohani group. Further, when the character SBHN of Sabohani does not appear from the treasure box, the weak Savohani group notice is given as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12. Alternatively, the Sabohani group notice may not be given (a certain effect is not executed, that is, a geek timer notice effect is executed). In addition, the characters "Attention also to the mini game" are displayed near the navigation character YM to alert the mini game together with the timer notice effect.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H23), it is shown that the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the character SBHN of Sabohani appears from the inside, and the character "Success!" is displayed in the vicinity thereof. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Yatteze" is displayed, indicating that the mini game has succeeded. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H23), "03:51" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The notice display TM12 displays "17:76".

Then, as shown in FIG. 369 (H24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notification display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notification display TM12 is displayed. The icon SBH of the added sabotani is displayed in a mode of increasing to four, and it is informed that the strong sabotani group notice will be executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with “pseudo-relation”, and as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, the pseudo-relation effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 each continue counting down, and at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H24), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed and "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H25), the right side of the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which three bombs are bundled together. The bomb explodes and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “pseudo-relation!” is displayed to notify that the pseudo-relational effect will be performed. The decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative design is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative design may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H25).

After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (H26), the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo link. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to inform that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. It should be noted that the replay icon RPL may be started to be displayed after the second variation display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo rendition, or the second decoration by the pseudo ream is started after the replay icon RPL is started to be displayed. The variable display of the symbols may be started, or the replay icon RPL may be displayed at the timing when the second variable display of the decorative symbols by the pseudo-link is started. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is deleted. As described above, in this example of the effect, the bombs are reduced by one each time the timer notice effect is performed once. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:00” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H26).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (H27), the first stop is performed and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (H27).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H28) subsequent to FIG. 369 (H27), the second stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H29), "reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. The second timer advance notice display TM12 continues to count down, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 370 (H29).

After that, as shown in FIG. 370 (H30), when the countdown in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the change icon h0 in the display mode in which two bombs are in one lump is displayed. The bomb on the left side explodes, the effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong sabotani group. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, although the hold icon display area is erased, the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong Savohani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. Note that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00".

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H31) shows that the Sabohani group notice is continuously given. At this time, a sabotani icon SBH is displayed below the replay icon RPL icon to notify that the sabotani group notice has been given. At this time, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 370 (H32), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen is displayed in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased. In addition, in this example of production, in correspondence with the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb which is the remaining one of the three, "standby" together with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Is displayed to inform that the third timer notice effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, the display that the timer notice effect is waiting is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H33) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the third timer notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen to start the timer notice effect. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, which suggests that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen is erased. The replay icon RPL is overlapped on the front side of the third timer notice display TM13 and is more difficult to visually recognize than in the non-overlapped state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 at the timing shown in FIG. 370 (H34). It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H35). That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 370 (H36), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H37), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5”. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is re-displayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect concerning the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 370 (H38), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this effect example, the timer notice effect is executed a number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon, but not the same number of times as the number corresponding to the number of bombs displayed in the hold icon. The displayed number of bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times that the timer advance notice effect is executed or the maximum executable number of times.

In addition, in this effect example, in FIG. 369 (H13), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the display mode of one bomb to the display mode of three bombs in one block. As shown in FIG. 370 (H13′), the character of the lord may be displayed in an additional display mode (display mode of Yoshimune triple bomb hold), that is, the display mode of Yoshimune triple bomb hold is as described above. It is informed that the number of times the timer advance notice effect is executed is greater than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, and it can be said that the display mode is ranked higher than the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. In other words, it can be said that the hold icon (variable icon) in the character display mode suggests that the timer advance notice effect is executed a plurality of times.

Further, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed by performing the timer advance notice effect, the display mode of one bomb is changed to the display mode of three bombs in a lump, but the display mode of each bomb is Although it is the same before and after the change, the display mode of each bomb may be different before and after the change, for example, a round display part (a part excluding the fuse part) included in the display mode of one bomb ) Is a display mode (a display mode of triple red timer hold) from a default display mode (round white display mode: normal timer hold display mode) to a red hold mode before and after a certain effect is performed. ) May be changed to a triple red timer hold display mode including a blue hold display mode including a blue hold display mode before and after a certain effect is performed. Good.

370 (H7a) to 371 (H34a) show another effect pattern following FIG. 369 (H6). However, in this effect example, in FIG. 369 (H3), when the number of holdings is increased, the second holding icon h12 is displayed in a display mode in which three bombs are displayed as one lump instead of a display mode including one bomb. It is supposed to be displayed. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 370 (H7a) to (H12a) are different except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a display mode in which three bombs are represented as one lump. The effect is the same as the effect shown in 369 (H7) to (H12) in FIG.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H13a), as a result of the pending change animation, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is one bomb from the display mode in which three bombs are represented as one lump. The display mode is changed to, and the character "TIMER" is added above it. On the other hand, although the display mode has changed to one bomb, the color has changed from the default color (white) to red, and it also has the function of pre-reading notice regarding the big hit. That is, the notice display (prefetch notice) that the timer notice effect is executed three times is changed to the notice display (prefetch notice) that the timer notice effect is executed once. Although the number of executions of the timer advance notice effect indicated by the hold icon is reduced, the reliability of the big hit is improved, and it is shown that the rank is substantially improved. After that, the effect shown in FIG. 370 (H14a) to FIG. 370 (H18a) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 370(H14a) to (H18a) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 369(H14) to (H18), except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H19a), a state where the mini game is started is shown. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, three treasure boxes BX1 to BX3 are arranged in a triangle, and the contents are displayed in each treasure box. That is, the treasure box BX1 displays a timer advance notice icon that is a display mode of a bomb, the treasure box BX2 displays a length icon, and the treasure box BX3 displays a sabotani icon. .. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed, and the start of the mini game is notified.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H20a), the animation in which the treasure chest shuffles is started, and a state in which three treasure chests move in a ring at a high speed is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "SELECT" is displayed, which prompts the player to select one of the three treasure boxes that move at high speed by operating the effect button 136.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H21a), the button image 136a is displayed along with the remaining time meter MT at the upper left of the display screen to notify that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has been started, and the game is played. The person is prompted to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the remaining time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the operation reception period.

FIG. 370 (H22a) shows a state in which the effect button 136 is operated at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation acceptance period started. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H23a), the treasure box BX3 is selected from the three treasure boxes, and the treasure box BX3 is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM, which urges attention to the result of the mini game.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (H24a), the treasure box BX3 is opened, and the appearance of the icon SBOHN of sabotani appears from the inside. That is, it is announced that the strong Sabohani group will be announced. In the vicinity of the character YM, the character "It is a group notice" is displayed, which gives a notice that the Sabohani group notice will be given.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H25a) subsequent to FIG. 370 (H24a) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the character "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb in the variable icon h0 is switched to the timer display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. "05:00" is displayed on the timer display displayed on the variable icon h0, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer activated" is displayed, and it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 5 seconds later. Note that "timer activated" may be displayed after the character "TIMER" in the variable icon h0 is switched to "05:00", or "TIMER activated" in the variable icon h0 after "timer activated" is displayed. The character "" may be switched to "05:00", or the character "TIMER" in the change icon h0 may be switched to "05:00" at the timing when "timer activated" is displayed. After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H26a), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:41" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 371 (H26a). That is, it is shown that 1.59 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H27a), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (H28a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. Note that the countdown of the timer display continues, and "01:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 371 (H28a).

Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (H29a), when the countdown of the timer display is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong sabotani group. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, although the hold icon display area is erased, the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect, a strong notice of the strong sabotani group is shown as a certain effect.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H30a), it is shown that it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). When it develops into a swordsman reach, a screen is displayed in which the protagonist Tonosama and the enemy swordsman face each other. At this time, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H31a) shows that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (H32a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative pattern display device 208, The "decoration 5" scheduled to be stopped and displayed on the design is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H33a), a state is shown in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed in a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (H34a), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed, an effect is shown in which the number of executions of the timer advance notice effect that has been notified is reduced. .. Further, in this effect example, an example in which an option for performing timer advance notice effect is included in a mini game in which any one is selected from a plurality of options is shown. In addition, in this example of performance, the number of times of execution of the foretold timer notification effect is reduced, but the reliability of the big hit is improved and the content of the notification is practically upgraded.

371 (H24a') to FIG. 371 (H27a') show another effect pattern following that of FIG. 370 (H23a). However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the treasure box BX2 of the three treasure boxes is selected in FIG. 370 (H23a).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H24a′), the treasure box BX2 is opened and the icon BCHO having the longest length from the inside appears. That is, it is announced that the display mode of the variable icon (or the hold icon) will be changed. In the vicinity of the character YM, the character "icon change" is displayed, and the change of the display mode of the variable icon (holding icon) is foretold.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (H25a') shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the character "TIMER" displayed above the display of the bomb in the variable icon h0 is switched to the timer display, and the timer advance notice effect is started. In this example of effect, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 371 (H25a) (that is, different from the case where the icon SBHN of Sabohani appears from the treasure box), the timer display displayed on the variable icon h0 shows “02: 00” is displayed, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. That is, in this effect example, a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not the Sabohani notice, but the change effect of the variable icon (holding icon). Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer activated" is displayed, which suggests that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed 2 seconds later. After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (H26a′), when the countdown of the timer display is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the hold change animation and the first hold. It is notified that the display mode of the icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 371 (H27a'), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of the length, and the notification display mode with high reliability is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, an example in which the initial value of the timer display displayed in the timer advance notice effect is different according to the result selected in the mini game is shown.

In this example of performance, for example, when the treasure box BX1 is selected in FIG. 370 (H23a) and the timer notice icon appears, the variable icon displayed in the bomb display mode is ranked up and the jackpot The display mode changes to increase the reliability.

Further, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the display mode including the increase/decrease of the bomb display and the bomb display in the hold icon (change icon) is changed to the bancho display mode. Although the situation is shown, for example, the display mode may be changed with the increase or decrease of the display of the bomb on the hold icon (variable icon). In addition, in this effect example, as the result of the timer advance notice effect, it is shown that the increase/decrease of the icon and the change of the icon display mode are performed in the hold icon (variable icon). An increase/decrease of the notice icon (preliminary item) and a change in the display mode of the notice icon may be performed.

In the present embodiment, the timer notice effect is performed when the hold icon (variable icon) is displayed in the timer hold display mode, but when the hold icon (variable icon) is not displayed in the timer hold display mode (for example, The timer advance notice effect may be performed even when the hold icon (variable icon) is displayed depending on the guard length display mode, the sabotani display mode, or the replay display mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to say that the notice effect may be performed or the chance-up effect may be performed as the effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Here, the "preliminary notice effect" is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit or that a reach effect (a specific reach effect) may be performed. There are notices etc. Further, the "chance up effect" is (1) a specific effect that improves the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display by being executed, and includes, for example, a pseudo continuous effect. Alternatively, (2) is a notice effect that is executed in a specific manner to further improve the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display, for example, a notice effect of cut-in, While the normal mode is displayed in a blue frame, there is a mode displayed in a red frame (displayed in a chance up display mode). That is, the chance-up effect is an effect in which the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed.

In the above description,
[A game table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 239(3)],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the like],
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, pseudo rendition, notice of strong sabotani group shown in FIG. 243(9), revival effect shown in FIG. 247(30), or FIG. 250(35) The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 6 and the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 246(6) to (7), etc.] may be started.
It is configured such that the certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 241 (5) to (6), the timer is displayed). Although the notice display TM1 is displayed, it is erased before the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", and a certain effect is not performed, etc.],
The certain effect is started when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time becomes a certain time [for example, the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 is “00:00” or the like]. In some cases, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 239(9), the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-link is displayed. Etc.],
When the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed, the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, as compared with the case where the display of the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed. Prone to
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Conventionally, the display effect on the display means tends to be diversified. However, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect to start a certain effect by starting the timer display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display or may not include the time display.

Further, it may be configured such that only a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started, or an effect other than the certain effect is started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be performed. Further, the certain effect may be configured to be started without fail after the display of the timer display is started, and the certain effect may not be started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured.

Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is not started. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may be generated even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that other effects may not be started. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is not necessarily started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. May be configured in some cases.

Further, it may be configured such that only a certain effect may be started in response to the display of the timer display being started and the display of the time being a certain time, or the display of the timer display may be started. It may be configured such that an effect other than a certain effect may be started in response to a certain time being displayed. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time becomes a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started and the time is displayed. May be configured such that a certain effect may not be started even when a certain time is displayed.

Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time becomes a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect may be started in response to something other than the fact that the displayed time has reached a certain time.

Further, when the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is executed, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, or the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed. May be configured as.

In addition, “the certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started and when the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. 239(3) to As shown in FIG. 9 (9), after the timer notice effect is started, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started. etc],
If the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started [eg, FIG. As shown in (3) to (6) of the figure, if the timer display in the timer notification display TM1 is erased before the timer display becomes "00:00" after the fake timer notification production is started, the pseudo-link is generated. The variable display of the decorative pattern for the second time does not start, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the fact that the timer display reaches a certain time.

Here, after the display of the timer display is started, when a time display reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may be started, or the display of the timer display is started. After a certain time, when the time display reaches a certain time, an effect other than the certain effect may be started. Also, after the display of the timer display is started, and when the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be started without fail, or after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where a certain effect is not started when the time display reaches a certain time.

Further, after the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started only when the time display reaches a certain time, or the timer display is started. There may be a case where a certain effect is started in a case other than when the time display has reached a certain time later.

Further, when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may not be started. When the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, the effects other than the certain effect may not be started. Further, if the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, and the timer is not necessarily started. A certain effect may be started after the display of the display is started and before the display of the timer is finished before the display of the time reaches a certain time.

Also, a certain effect may not be started only when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time. Even when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of is started and before the display of the time reaches the certain time, the certain effect may not be started.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a mini game [for example, a mini game shown in (3) to (9) of FIG. 253].
When the first result [for example, the result of the appearance of the princess character HME from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 253(9)] is derived as a result of the display of the mini game, the display of the time is the certain result. When the time is reached, the certain effect is started [for example, when the princess character HME appears from the treasure box image as shown in FIG. 253(9), it is shown in FIG. 253(17). In this way, the replay symbol RP is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to excite the trend of the timer announcement by the mini game.

Here, the display means may display only the display of the mini game, or may display other displays than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may reach a certain time and only a certain effect may be started. As a result, when the first result is derived, the display of the time may reach a certain time and an effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started without fail, or the display of the mini game may be performed. As a result, when the first result is derived, the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain presentation may not be started.

The display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started only when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, or the display of the mini game may be displayed. As a result, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started in a case other than the case where the first result is derived.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying an advance notice item [for example, a princess character HME or the like displayed at the lower left of the display screen shown in FIG. 253(10)],"
The advance notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 253(5) to FIG. When the character HME appears, as shown in FIG. 253(10), the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item at the lower left of the display screen, etc.],
The notice item includes a display that suggests that the certain effect is executed [eg,
By displaying the princess character HME as an advance notice item, advance notice is given that the pseudo-relation will be performed, etc.],
After the display of the notice item is started, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 253(10). , After the princess character HME is displayed as an advance notice item, the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-link is started at the timing when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", etc.] ,
When the advance notice item is not displayed, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is not started [for example, in FIG. 254(5) to FIG. 9(9). When the old lady BBA (10) appears from the treasure chest image in the mini game shown, the advance notice item is not displayed and the pseudo-repeating is not performed as shown in FIG. 254 (10)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the display of the advance notice item.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to recognize by the notice icon as a result display while paying attention to the mini game that a certain effect by the timer display is started.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to excite the effect in a period until the timer display reaches (or does not reach) a certain time.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the advance notice item or may be capable of displaying other than the advance notice item. Further, the display means may always display the advance notice item, or may not display the advance notice item.

Further, it may be configured such that only the advance notice item may be displayed depending on the result of the display of the mini game, or something other than the advance notice item may be displayed depending on the result of the display of the mini game. It may be configured to be. Further, the notice item may be always displayed according to the result of the mini game display, or the notice item may not be displayed depending on the result of the mini game display. Good.

In addition, the notice item may include only a display that suggests that a certain effect is executed, or may include a display other than a display that suggests that a certain effect is executed. Further, the notice item may always include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed, or may not include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed.

Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may reach a certain time and only a certain effect may be started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, The time display may reach a certain time, and an effect other than the certain effect may be started. Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may reach a certain time so that a certain effect is always started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed, The time display may reach a certain time and a certain presentation may not be started.

Further, it may be configured such that the time display reaches a certain time and a certain effect is started only after the notice item is started to be displayed, and other than after the notice item is started to be displayed. Also, the display of time may reach a certain time and a certain effect may be started.

Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may reach a certain time so that only a certain effect is not started. When the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be changed. It may be configured such that a certain amount of time is not reached and effects other than a certain effect are not started. Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may reach a certain time so that a certain performance is not always started. When the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be changed. It may be configured such that a certain effect is reached and a certain effect is started.

In addition, the display result of the mini game is derived after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display is started to change [for example, FIG. ), after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 253(14), before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is started, as shown in FIG. 253(9). , The results of the mini-game display are derived, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to focus attention on the display result of the mini game.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to impress the relation between the timer display and the mini game.

Here, after the display of the timer display is started, it may be configured such that only the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that, after being displayed, a result other than the display result of the mini game is derived before the display of the time display starts to change. Further, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. After that, the result of the display of the mini game may not be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. After that, the result of the mini game display may be derived other than before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, the result of the mini game display may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display may be started. Other than after the start, the display result of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, it is configured such that after the display of the display of the time starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, FIG. As shown in 249(4), after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L is started, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1L becomes “0:00” at the timing shown in FIG. Is completed, the result of the mini game display is derived as shown in FIG. 249(9)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to focus attention on the result when the mini game is voted.

Here, after the display of the time display starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time. After the display starts to change, it may be configured to derive other than the display result of the mini game before the time display reaches a certain time. Further, after the display of the time display starts to change, the result of the display of the mini game may be always derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time. May be configured such that the result of the display of the mini game may not be derived after the display of time starts to change before the display of time reaches a certain time.

Further, the result of the mini game display may be derived only after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time display may be displayed. After the start of change, the result of the mini game display may be derived other than before the time display reaches a certain time.

Further, the result of the mini game display may be derived only after the display of the time display starts to change before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time display may be displayed. In addition to after the start of change, the result of the mini game display may be derived before the time display reaches a certain time.

In addition, "the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 255(3) to (4), the timer advance notice effect is displayed. Mini-game has started before, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is not possible to know whether or not the timer display will be started at the time when the display of the mini game is started, so that it may be possible to focus on the trend of the mini game.

Here, there may be a case where only the mini game display is started before the display of the timer display is started, and the display of the mini game other than the display of the mini game is started before the display of the timer display is started. The display may also be started. In addition, the display of the mini game may always start before the display of the timer display starts, or the display of the mini game may not start before the display of the timer display starts. Good.

In addition, the mini game may be displayed only before the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may be displayed before the display of the timer display is started. It may be started.

In addition, the mini game may be displayed before the display of the timer display only is started, or the display of the mini game may be displayed before the display other than the display of the timer display is started. May be started.

In addition, as a result of the display of the mini game, a second result [for example, a result of appearance of the bancho-faced icon BCF from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 255(8)] may be derived,
The second result is a result that is not related to the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 255 (8), when the result in which the longest face icon BCF appears is derived from the treasure box image, It is not related to the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 255(4), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 256(25) is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to draw attention to whether or not the result of the mini game display is related to a certain effect.

Here, only the second result may be derived as the display result of the mini game, or the result other than the second result may be derived as the display result of the mini game. Good. Further, the second result may be always derived as a result of the display of the mini game, or the second result may not be derived as a result of the display of the mini game.

Further, the second result may not be related only to a certain effect, or may be not related to an effect other than the certain effect. Further, the second result may not necessarily be related to a certain performance, or may be related to a certain performance.

In addition, "a first notice [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in Fig. 246(6) to Fig. 246(7)] may be executed as the certain effect."
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect that the timer display is displayed and the prefetching notice is given.

Here, only a first notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the first notice may be executed as a certain effect. Further, the first notice may be executed as a certain effect, or the first notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, there is a case where a second notice [for example, pseudo-relationship] is executed as the certain effect,
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the timer display is displayed, and it may be possible to give an expectation to the big hit by lengthening the execution time of the symbol variation display.

Here, only a second notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the second notice may be executed as a certain effect. In addition, the second notice may be executed as a certain effect, or the second notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, the second notice may be such that only the execution time of the symbol variable display becomes longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed. The time other than the execution time of the symbol variation display may be long. In addition, the second notice may be that the execution time of the symbol variable display is always longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. The execution time of the symbol variable display may not be long.

Further, there is a case where a third notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250(35)] is executed as the certain effect.
The third notice is a notice that the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the timer display will be displayed to give a big hit announcement.

Here, only a third notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the third notice may be executed as a certain effect. Also, the third notice may be executed as a certain effect, or the third notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

Also, the third notice may be such that only the big hit symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, and when it is executed than when it is not executed In this case, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. In addition, the third notice may be that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display when it is executed rather than when it is not executed, or when it is executed rather than when it is not executed In some cases, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, the third notice may be one in which the big hit symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed, or when it is executed, the jackpot symbol may not be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display. It may be.

In addition, as the certain effect, a fourth notice [for example, a revival effect shown in FIG. 247(30)] may be executed.
The fourth notice is a notice that a big hit will be announced.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the timer display is displayed and a big hit occurs.

Here, only a fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect, or a notice other than the fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect. Further, the fourth notice may be executed as a certain effect, or the fourth notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, the fourth notice may notify only that it is a big hit, or may notify other than that it is a big hit. Further, the fourth notice may be a notification that the big hit will be surely given, or may not notify that the big hit will be given.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, lower plate full tank error display ERR1 etc. shown in FIG. 289(1)],
The ball-out error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [eg, lower plate full tank error state, etc.],
The timer display may be overlapped with the ball-out error display [for example, as shown in FIG. 289(3), the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to motivate the user to quickly cancel the plate full error state in order to see the effect displayed by the timer.

Here, the display means may display only the ball-out error display, or may display a display other than the ball-out error display. Further, the display means may display the ball-out error display without fail, or may not display the ball-out error display.

Further, the ball-out error display may be displayed only in the plate full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the plate full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the plate full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the plate full tank error state.

Also, the timer display may be configured to be overlapped only with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may be configured to be overlapped with a display other than the ball removal error display. May be. Further, the timer display may be configured to always overlap the ball removal error display, or the timer display may not be overlapped with the ball removal error display in some cases.

In addition, "the timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of types of modes is a first mode [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 248(3)],
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [for example, a high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)],
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
When the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the timer display is displayed in the first aspect, the certain effect is configured to be easily started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to have an expectation that a certain effect is started depending on the mode of the timer display.

Further, according to this gaming machine, when a mini game is played, the possibility of success of the mini game may be expected depending on the mode of the timer display. That is, first, it is expected that a certain effect is executed by expecting the player to succeed in the mini game, but the mode of the timer display which is started to be displayed in the middle is indirectly started first. In some cases, the results of the game display can be expected. That is, there are cases where the effect (timer display) started later functions as a notice of the effect (mini game etc.) started earlier, and the player can be entertained.

Here, the timer display may be displayed only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in the modes other than the first mode and the second mode. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects, or may be entirely different aspects.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, it may be configured so that only a certain effect is started more easily than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. The effect other than a certain effect may be more easily started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the display is displayed in the first mode. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect may be configured to be started without fail when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. It may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the display is displayed in the first mode.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, a certain effect may be configured to be started without fail, and when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, the certain effect may be started. May not be started in some cases.

The timer display may be changed to the second mode after being displayed in the first mode, or the timer display may be changed to the first mode after being started to be displayed in the second mode. Good. When the timer display is started in the first mode, it may be configured not to change to the second mode, or when the timer display is started in the second mode, It may be configured so as not to change to the first aspect.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of modes is the third mode [for example, the timer display of “7:77” shown in FIG. 290(a) or “99:99 shown in FIG. 290(b)”. And the rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 290(g)].
The third aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect different from the second aspect,
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player have expectations at the time when the display of the timer display is started.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the game is displayed in the third mode.

Here, the third aspect may be partially different from the first aspect, or may be wholly different from the first aspect.

Further, the third aspect may be partially different from the second aspect, or may be wholly different from the second aspect.

When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, only the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. The symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be definitely displayed in the symbol variable display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. The jackpot design may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, except when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. Also in the case, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, "when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, a state advantageous to the player, which is different from the jackpot game performed in response to the jackpot symbol being confirmed and displayed (hereinafter, "First state") is added,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the timer display may be able to further enhance the sense of expectation for the third mode.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, only the first state may be configured to be given, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, A state other than the one state may be provided. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be configured to be always provided, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be set. The state may not be given in some cases.

Further, the first state may be provided only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, or when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode. Also, the first state may be added.

In addition, "the first state is a probability change state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the probability variation state may or may not be provided with the electric support state. Further, the probability variation state may be a probability variation state in which the state is maintained until the next big hit, or a probability variation state (ST) in which the state ends when the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times. Good.

Further, instead of the probability change state, a power support state (special figure low probability general figure high probability state) may be used.

In addition, "the first state is a pending holiday home,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the pending game may be a pending game in which the probability variation big hit is confirmed, or a holding game in which a big hit that is not the probability variation big hit is determined.

Further, "When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the display of the time in the symbol variation display. Is configured as
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player expect even when the timer display does not reach a certain time.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, it is configured such that only the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variable display. However, if the timer display is displayed as the third display, the display other than the timer display is deleted before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows. Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is always erased before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. If the timer display is displayed as the third display, the timer display may not be erased before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased only before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variable display. If the timer display is displayed as the third display, the timer display may be erased except before the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

Further, only when the timer display is displayed as the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variable display. Even if the timer display is not displayed in the third display, the timer display is erased before the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

Note that the timer display may be erased before the time display changes and reaches a certain time.

In addition, “when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is confirmed even when the display of the time reaches the certain time. Configured to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, advantageous development may be expected even when a certain effect is not started.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and only the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. May be configured, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, some production is not started and symbols other than the jackpot symbol are also displayed. It may be configured to be confirmed and displayed. Also, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is definitely displayed. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, some performance is not started and the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed. May be configured.

Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. May be done. Also, in cases other than the case where the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even when the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. It may be configured as follows.

The time display may reach a certain time, a certain effect may be started, and the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed.

In addition, “the first aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first time [for example, a timer display of “5:00” or the like],”
The second aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the second time [for example, a timer display of “20:00”, etc.],
The third aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the third time [for example, a timer display of “7:77”, etc.],
In the first time and the second time, the second time is a longer time,
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,
The third time is a time displayed only when the first state is given,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.

Here, the first mode may be a mode in which the first time displayed in the timer display is only the first time, or the first time displayed in the timer display is the first time. It may be a mode other than the above time. Further, the first mode may be a mode in which the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is always the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the first display. It may be possible that the time may not be reached.

The second mode may be a mode in which the first time displayed in the timer display is only the second time, or the first time displayed in the timer display is the second time. It may be a mode other than time. The second mode may be a mode in which the first time displayed in the timer display is always the second time, and the first time displayed in the timer display is the second time. There may be a mode in which the time may not be reached.

The third mode may be a mode in which the first time displayed in the timer display is only the third time, or the first time displayed in the timer display is the third time. It may be a mode other than time. The third mode may be a mode in which the first time displayed in the timer display is always the third time, or the first time displayed in the timer display is the third time. There may be a mode in which the time may not be reached.

Further, between the first time and the second time, the second time may be always longer, or the second time may not be longer.

The third time may be different from only the first time or may be different from the time other than the first time. The third time may be different from the first time, or may be the same as the first time.

The third time may be different from only the second time or may be different from the time other than the second time. The third time may be different from the second time, or may be the same time as the second time.

Further, the third time may be the time displayed in a case other than the case where the first state is given, or is the time always given when the first state is given. Alternatively, the time may be the time when the first state is not given and the time when the first state is not given.

In addition, "The time display that is displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and is also configured to be able to display a decimal point display [for example, a timer advance notice display shown in FIG. 239(3)]. The decimal point can be displayed in the timer display of TM1.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player may recognize at a glance that it is the premier timer.

Here, the time display that is displayed first in the timer display may be configured to display the number of seconds and only the display after the decimal point, or the time display first displayed in the timer display. The display may be a display of the number of seconds and may be configured to display a display other than the display below the decimal point. In addition, the time display that is displayed first in the timer display may be configured to display the number of seconds and the decimal point display, and the time displayed first in the timer display may be displayed. The display of may be configured to display the number of seconds and may not display the display below the decimal point.

Further, "The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variable display for which the timer display gives a notice, A gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player may recognize at a glance that it is the premier timer.

Here, the “time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds, and is also configured to be able to display a decimal point display [for example, a timer notice shown in FIG. 239(3)]. With the timer display in display TM1, decimal points can be displayed, etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is 0,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0,
The display of the first time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the second time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice,
The display of the third time as the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variable display for which the timer display gives a notice, A gaming table. ]
May be

In addition, “provided with effect display means [eg, 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 284] capable of executing effect display,
The effect display means is a means provided separately from the display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display,
When the timer display is displayed by any one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, “first case [for example, one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG Only when the timer advance notice is displayed, etc.]”).
When the timer display is displayed on both the display unit and the effect display unit (hereinafter, “second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 284(3) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. And the timer advance notice display in the 7-segment display device SEG are both performed.]").
In the first case, it is configured so that the certain effect may not be started,
In the second case, the certain effect is configured to be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect the start of a certain effect depending on the number of timer displays for one certain effect.

Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing only effect display, or may be capable of executing display other than effect display. Further, the effect display means may be one that always executes the effect display, or may not execute the effect display.

Further, the effect display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the effect display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, in the first case, it may be configured such that only a certain effect may not be started, and in the first case, an effect other than the certain effect may not be started. Good. Further, in the first case, it may be configured such that a certain effect is not always started, or that a certain effect may be started.

Further, in the second case, only a certain effect may be started, and in the second case, an effect other than the certain effect may be started. In the second case,
It may be configured such that a certain effect is always started, or may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, rather than when the timer display is displayed only by the display means of the effect display means and the display means, the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means, Finally, the jackpot pattern may be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed. Further, the case where the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means is finally a big hit, as compared with the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means of the effect display means and the display means. The symbols may be configured to be easily displayed in a fixed manner.

Further, when the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, the timer display of either one of the effect display means and the display means may end halfway.

Further, the effect display means and the display means display different times, and when a certain time is reached on the timer display of one of the effect display means and the display means, a certain effect is started. May be done.

In addition, “The timer display is a display in which the display of the time is counted down [for example, as shown in FIG. 239(3) to FIG. Etc.],
The certain time is 0 [for example, a timer display of "00:00" shown in FIG. 239(9), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that a certain time has been reached.

It should be noted that the certain time may include 0 including decimal places, and may be, for example, a display of “0.00” or “00.00”, or “0:00” or The display may be "00:00".

In the above description,
A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is the first display [for example, a change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 291(f) to (g) (hold change). Prior production display) etc.],
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a hold icon or the like in a red display mode shown in FIG. 291(h)],
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d)],
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that a certain notice display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291(o) to (p)] is waiting for display.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 291(f) to (h), a ninja character NJ4 is displayed. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to a red display mode after the hold change pre-effect display is performed]
The third display may be started in the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 291(d), the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is being prepared. The display of the image RDY has started, etc.],
There is a case where the display of the third display started in the first state ends in the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to (n), UI The preparation-in-progress image RDY started to be displayed in the state in which the section UI3 is being displayed is finished in the state in which the UI section UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIG. 291(n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, the display of the mini game is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291(q)] may be started [for example, FIG. 291(o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291(q) is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed, etc.],
There is a case where the second state is brought after the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 291(l) to (m), it is displayed when transitioning to the swordsman reach. UI section UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in Swordsman Reach].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Although there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game table, this game table can realize a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, so that the user can concentrate on the fluctuation. Sometimes it can be entertained.

Also, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to entertain the beginner with a preparatory display to make it entertaining or not, and for some experienced users, the preparatory display will be displayed. In some cases, it may be easier to understand if it is displayed, and it is possible to clarify the expectations.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be easier to understand which advance notice will be given depending on the timing of ending the display during preparation.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or the display other than the third display may be started in the first state. Further, the third display may be always started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display may be displayed in the first state. However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display started to be displayed in the first state is In some cases, the display may not end in this state.

In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, there may be a case where only the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of the display other than the certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. There may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state after the completion of.

Further, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state. The display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state other than after the display of the display is finished.

Further, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the states other than the second state.

Further, there may be a case where only a certain effect is started after a certain notice display is displayed, and after the certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be always started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is not displayed. It may be.

Further, the certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to the symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that does not relate to the symbol change display being executed.

Further, the second state may be set only after the first state, or the second state may be set even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may be always set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or one of the states in which displays other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

In addition, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed or one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon, or an effect display in the calibration of the character (navi character) that is constantly displayed. ..

In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the hold icon in the default display mode to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

The third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

Further, the certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least behind the hold icon,
The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed while the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [for example, when the UI unit UI3 is hidden as shown in FIG. 291(m), the hold icon is displayed. Icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side only of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of the display other than the hold icon. The sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back side of the hold icon, or may be a display of at least an image that is not displayed on the back side of the hold icon.

Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed, or display other than the hold icon may be configured to be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. May be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be configured to be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. May be.

Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon is not displayed in the state where the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon is not displayed in the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed without the sixth display being displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed without the sixth display being displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In addition, "in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the display of the third display [for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in d), the in-preparation image RDY is overlaid and displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in the UI section UI3],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the in-preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d). And the display position of the image in preparation RDY shown in FIG. 291(m) are the same],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent the user from overlooking by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being given.

Here, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display only, or in the first state, The display of at least a part of the six displays may be configured to be overlapped with the displays other than the third display. Further, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display without fail, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display.

In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291(a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 291(e)],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in a gold display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, It
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display has not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of only the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed, the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode rather than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to the mode, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, the case where the sixth display has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display has not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may be definitely displayed in, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, only when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display, and the sixth display is the first aspect. Even in the case other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291(a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 291(e)],
The case where the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is easily started [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in a gold display mode, the hold icon in a red display mode is easily displayed. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. Only the display of the display may be easily started, and the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the display is changed to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the display may be always started, and the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may not start when the display has changed.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in the case other than the case where the mode is changed.

Further, “at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 291(f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed on the UI unit UI3. They overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, various information can be obtained by focusing on the sixth display, and the game can be easily understood in some cases.

Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. May be configured to do so. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display without fail, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured as.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

Further, “the first display and the sixth display are configured not to overlap [for example, as shown in FIG. 306(b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. No, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, if the sixth display is focused on, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. Good. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap with each other, or may be configured so that the first display and the sixth display may overlap with each other. ..

In addition, “a certain reach effect [eg, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)] is configured to be executable,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, the super reach (swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)). ), etc. before the start],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 291 (m) to (q) is being executed]. , A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than the certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or may be configured not to execute a certain reach effect.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the above states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of the certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a mini game display shown in FIGS. 291(o) to (p), etc.],”
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, a display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291(q)],
The certain notice display is a notice that the certain effect is started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIGS. 291(o) to (p), the arrow released by the mini character MC1 of the lord. Has foretold to display the iron plate image TP by sticking in the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the certain notice display may give a notice only when a certain effect is started, or may give a notice other than a certain effect being started. Further, a certain notice display may be a notice that a certain effect is started, or may not be a notice that a certain effect is started.

Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

In addition, as a certain effect, only the fifth display may be displayed, or as a certain effect, a display other than the fifth display may be displayed. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, there is a case where the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, is continuously displayed even after the symbol variable display to be started next is started [for example, FIG. 291 ( i) to (j) of the same figure, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and the goal is easy to understand, so the period of giving a sense of expectation may be clear.

Here, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol variable display to be started next is started, or The third display started to be displayed in the symbol variable display may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variable display is started. In addition, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display, which is started to be displayed, may not be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variable display is started.

In addition, "the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 291(f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be erased only before the next symbol variable display is started, or the display in a certain symbol variable display is The started first display may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the first display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be erased before the next symbol variable display is started, or the display is started in a certain symbol variable display. The displayed first display may not be erased before the next symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [for example, as shown in FIG. 297 (a4), the characters of “super heat” are displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. There may be a notice display consisting of],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than a certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where In addition, a certain effect may be necessarily executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is also executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where

In addition, "operating means [for example, effect button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [for example, the large button image 136aL or the like shown in FIG. 294(b6)],
The seventh display is a display urging the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b1) to (b6), the decal button image 136aL is not prepared. After the display of the middle image RDY is started, the display is started, etc.],
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the display of the large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6), the iron plate is operated. Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294(b1) to (b6), the preparing image RDY is displayed. Is displayed before the display of the big button image 136aL is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may prompt other operations than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may be a message that always prompts the user to operate the operating device, or may not prompt the user to operate the operating device.

Further, the seventh display may be a display which is started only after the third display is started, or is a display which is started even after the third display is started. It may be. Further, the seventh display may be that the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. Good.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is not started. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is being displayed, and a certain effect may be generated when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is not being displayed. It may be started. Also, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and a certain effect may be generated when the operation means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is being displayed. May be started.

In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display starts. It may be one that does. In addition, the third display may be the display that is always finished before the display of the seventh display is started, or when the display is not finished before the display of the seventh display is started. There may be

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display [for example, a united animation or the like shown in FIG. 294 (b4) to (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for announcing that the display of the seventh display will be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button advance notice effect is produced by a united animation. ], that is, the display of the big button image 136aL is foretold],
The third display is a display that is terminated during the display of the eighth display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may give a notice only when the display of the seventh display is started, or may give a notice other than that the display of the seventh display is started. May be Further, the eighth display may be a notification that the display of the seventh display is started, or may not notify that the display of the seventh display is started. It may be.

Further, the third display may be finished only while the eighth display is being displayed, or may be finished while the display other than the eighth display is being displayed. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301(a)],
The ninth display is a variable icon display,
The third display may be displayed two times (eg, two preparing images RDY1 and RDY2 may be displayed as shown in FIG. 304(a)),
After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 301(g), the preparing image RDY is enlarged and displayed]. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 301(g), the enlarged ready image RDY overlaps the variation icon h0. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

Further, only one of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed, or the other display mode may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed. The display modes other than the display modes of No. may be changed. Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is ended, or the display mode of the other of the two may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is ended. The display mode of may not change.

Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may change only after the display of one of the three third displays ends, or even after the display of one of the three third displays ends. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when the third display is displayed two times, all the display of the third display ends in one symbol variable display [for example, in FIG. 301(b) to FIG. As shown, the two in-preparation images RDY are all consumed in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, all three third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. May terminate the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variable display. In addition, when the third display is displayed twice, all the display of the third display may be ended without fail in one symbol variation display, or when the third display is displayed two The display of all the third displays may not end in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, when three third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may be ended in the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended in one symbol variable display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display [for example, “Panda is master of lord” displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 291(a) is displayed. Explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanation display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), the explanation display is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. Etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 291(d), the preparing image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may be displayed in addition to the above. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. May be

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIG. 291(f) to FIG. ) Character NJ4 etc.]]
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice, for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 291(h), etc.],
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [preparation display, for example, preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d)],
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a notice display [a mini game or a timer notice, for example, a mini game display shown in FIGS. 291(o) to (p), or FIGS. 293(b3) to (b4). [Timer notice effect, etc.] shown in FIG.
It is configured such that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started. [After the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started, the hold icon is displayed. Is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice, for example, as shown in FIGS. 291(f) to (h), the first hold icon is displayed after the hold change pre-effect display is performed by the ninja character NJ4. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
It is configured such that the third display may be started in the first state. [The display of the preparing display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 291(d). , The display of the preparing image RDY is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],
The third display started to be displayed in the first state is configured so that the display may be ended in the second state, and [the display is started while the hold icon is displayed. The display in preparation ends in the state where the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291(d) to (n), the display is started in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The preparation-in-progress image RDY has finished being displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
The display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state after the display of the third display is finished in the second state. In the display state, after the display of the in-preparation display is finished, the mini game or the timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291(n) to (o), the display of the in-preparation image RDY is displayed. After the end, the display of the mini game is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden, or, as shown in FIGS. 293(b1) to (b4), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed. After the display is finished, the timer advance notice effect is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the relevant notice, for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291(q), button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294(c4), etc.] [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or when the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started, for example, in FIG. 291(o) to FIG. As shown in the drawing, when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 294(c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. The button advance notice effect by the big button 136aL is started],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The second state may be changed to the second state after the first state. [There is a case where a state in which the hold icon can be displayed is changed to a state in which the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in (l) to (m) of the same figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden and shifts from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed to the state in which it is hidden. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 before transitioning to Swordsman Reach is displayed, etc.],
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Although there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game table, this game table can realize a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, so that the user can concentrate on the fluctuation. Sometimes it can be entertained.

Also, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to entertain the beginner with a preparatory display to make it entertaining or not, and for some experienced users, the preparatory display will be displayed. In some cases, it may be easier to understand if it is displayed, and it is possible to clarify the expectations.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be easier to understand which advance notice will be given depending on the timing of ending the display during preparation.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or the display other than the third display may be started in the first state. Further, the third display may be always started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display may be displayed in the first state. However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display started to be displayed in the first state is In some cases, the display may not end in this state.

In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third display may be displayed in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of the display other than the certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. There may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state after completion of.

Further, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state. The display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state other than after the display of the display is finished.

Further, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the states other than the second state.

Further, there may be a case where only a certain effect is started after a certain notice display is displayed, and after the certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be always started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is not displayed. It may be.

Further, the certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to the symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that does not relate to the symbol change display being executed.

Further, the second state may be set only after the first state, or the second state may be set even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may be always set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or one of the states in which displays other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

In addition, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed or one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon, or an effect display in the calibration of the character (navi character) that is constantly displayed. ..

In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the hold icon in the default display mode to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

The third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

Further, the certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may be terminated in the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end in the third state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end in the fourth state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Further, the first state may be a state including that the symbol variable display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

Further, "a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Note that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a false notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when the certain notice display is the mini game, the certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

Further, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a mini item display such as a notice item.

In addition, “the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started” is “the second display after the display of the first display is started”. There may be a case where the display for starting the display of is displayed.” Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. The second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

Further, "it is configured so that it may be in the second state after the first state" is "may be in the second state following the first state It is also configured to be “.

In addition, after the first state, there may be a case where the state shifts to the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, the third state or the third state) and then the second state is entered. Further, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where the one symbol variable display is performed.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display is faded out.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a hold icon display area, for example, UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least behind the hold icon,
The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed [the hold icon is displayable while an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed while the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. ), the hold icon is not displayed when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side only of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of the display other than the hold icon. The sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back side of the hold icon, or may be a display of at least an image that is not displayed on the back side of the hold icon.

Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed, or display other than the hold icon may be configured to be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. May be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be configured to be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. May be.

Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon is not displayed in the state where the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed without the sixth display being displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed without the sixth display being displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

Note that the sixth display may be a display that does not overlap the changing decorative pattern.

Further, in the configuration in which a part of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the third display is overlapped with the decorative pattern. May be.

Further, the sixth display may include a display of the base of the hold icon.

Further, the sixth display may include a display of the base of the variable icon.

Further, the sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

Further, in the “first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display, and the [hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed so as to overlap the preparation display. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 291(d), the preparation image RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in an overlapping manner on the display unit TT1],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position. [Display of the display during preparation in the state where the hold icon is displayed] The position and the display position of the in-preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the in-preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d) and the in-preparation image shown in FIG. 291(m). The display positions of RDY are the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent the user from overlooking by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being given.

Here, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display only, or in the first state, The display of at least a part of the six displays may be configured to be overlapped with the displays other than the third display. Further, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display without fail, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display.

In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [default display aspect, for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291(a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [a display mode of an advance notice or a pre-reading advance notice, for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 291(e)],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The second display is configured to be easily started [the hold icon display is performed as compared with the case where the image including the hold icon display area is not changed from the default display mode to the prefetch advance notice display mode. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the pre-reading notice display mode, the hold icon of the pre-reading notice display mode is more easily displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed. When displayed in a gold display mode, it is easy to display a hold icon in a red display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. Only the display of the display may be easily started, and the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. When the display is changed to, it may be easier to start the display other than the second display. Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the display may be always started, and the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may not start when the display has changed.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in the case other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth mode is not changed from the first mode to the second mode" Is configured so that the display of the second display is more easily started", "in a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode." It is configured such that the display of the second display is easier to start when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when it does not change. It is also possible.

In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [default display aspect, for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291(a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [a display mode of an advance notice or a pre-reading advance notice, for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 291(e)],
The case where the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be easily confirmed and displayed in the variable display of the symbols [Hold icon display than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the prefetch notice display mode. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, it is more likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in a gold display mode. , The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, so that the jackpot pattern is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the pattern variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display has not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of only the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed, the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode rather than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to the mode, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, the case where the sixth display has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display has not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may be definitely displayed in, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, only when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display, and the sixth display is the first aspect. Even in the case other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, "when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth mode is not changed from the first mode to the second mode" Is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display," "in a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display than when it is not changed. It is also possible.

In addition, “at least a part of the image including the hold icon display area is configured such that at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap with the first display. It is overlapped with the character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change change advance effect display). For example, as shown in FIG. 291(f), a part of the UI unit UI3 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. Wrapped, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, various information can be obtained by focusing on the sixth display, and the game can be easily understood in some cases.

Here, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the first display only, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. The display other than the first display may be overlapped and displayed. Further, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be always overlapped with the first display, and at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. The display may be overlapped with one display and may not be displayed.

Further, it may be configured such that at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display other than the display. The display may also be configured so that it may be displayed so as to overlap the first display.

Further, it may be configured such that a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be displayed as the first display. It may be configured so that they may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display without fail, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured as.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. In the state where both the configured image including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display of the hold icon display mode (hold change advance effect display) are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. It is not overlapped with the character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, as shown in FIG. 306(b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the ninja character NJ4. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, if the sixth display is focused on, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be understood that this is not the case.

Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed only without overlapping with the first display. It is also possible that the 6th display may be displayed on the display other than the 1st display without overlapping when both the 1st display and the 6th display are displayed. May be configured as. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without necessarily overlapping the first display, In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without overlapping the first display.

Further, even when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. It is good to configure so that when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, displays other than the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. May be done. In addition, even when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. Even if both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. It may be configured.

Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. .. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap with each other, or may be configured so that the first display and the sixth display may overlap with each other. ..

In addition, “a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 291(m) to FIG.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [a state before a specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. Before the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Figure (q) is started, etc.],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, the super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 291(m) to (q). Reach) is being executed], etc.,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than the certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or may be configured not to execute a certain reach effect.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the above states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of the certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before the SP reach is developed in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which the SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

Further, the first state is a state before the SP reach in a certain variation is developed, and further, a certain state before the reach state is established, and the second state is an SP in the certain variation. It may be in a state where the reach is being executed.

That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

Further, “the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, display of timer notice effect shown in FIG. 294(b3) to FIG. 294(b5)].
A gaming table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The timer advance notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice display, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

Further, “the certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291(o) to (q) and the like],”
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini game.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, display of button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6)].
It is configured such that the fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only a fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect without fail, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291(q)],
It is configured such that the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect without fail, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Note that the fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be easier to be confirmed and displayed, or more than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the case where the fifth display is a display that appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode There may be

In addition, “the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variable display is started. [In-preparation display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variable display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 291(i) to (j). , The in-preparation image RDY is displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and the goal is easy to understand, so the period of giving a sense of expectation may be clear.

Here, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol variable display to be started next is started, or The third display started to be displayed in the symbol variable display may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variable display is started. In addition, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display, which is started to be displayed, may not be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variable display is started.

In addition, “the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be erased before the symbol variable display to be started next may be deleted [a symbol The character relating to the change effect display (hold change change advance effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display is started in the variable display is erased before the next symbol variable display is started, for example, FIG. )-(H) of the figure, the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be configured to be erased only before the symbol variable display to be started next is started, The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, may be erased other than before the next symbol variable display is started. Further, the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be surely deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation display. In the display, the first display started to be displayed may be configured not to be deleted before the next symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may be performed across the symbol variable display, or may not be performed. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may be performed across the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state), or may not be performed.

In addition, “in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect is configured to be executed [in the area where the in-preparation display is displayed, the notice is executed, For example, as shown in FIG. 297(a4), there may be a case where a notice display composed of the characters "intense heat" is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 in which the preparing image RDY is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than a certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where In addition, a certain effect may be necessarily executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is also executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where

In addition, "operation means [buttons and levers, for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6)],
The seventh display is a display urging the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is displayed after the third display is started [the display of the image of the button or lever is started after the preparation display is started, For example, as shown in FIGS. 294(b1) to (b6), the deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed.],
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated during the display of the image of the button or lever, the notice is given. When the production button 136 is started, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed when the production button 136 is operated while the large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6) is being displayed],
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started [The display during preparation is terminated before the image of the button or lever is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 294(b1) to FIG. 294(b6), the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed before the deca button image 136aL is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may prompt other operations than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may be a message that always prompts the user to operate the operating device, or may not prompt the user to operate the operating device.

Further, the seventh display may be a display which is started only after the third display is started, or is a display which is started even after the third display is started. It may be. Further, the seventh display may be that the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. Good.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is not started. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated only while the seventh display is being displayed, and a certain effect may be generated when the operation means is operated while the seventh display is not being displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, or a certain effect may be generated when the operation means is operated during the display other than the seventh display. May be started.

In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display starts. It may be one that does. In addition, the third display may be the display that is always finished before the display of the seventh display is started, or when the display is not finished before the display of the seventh display is started. There may be

The seventh display may be a big button image of the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the big button image is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

The seventh display may be a special color button image of the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, in the case where the button image of the normal color is displayed and the case where the button image of the special color is displayed, the case where the special color button image is displayed is easier to confirm the jackpot pattern. Good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means of the images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot pattern is better when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. The confirmation display may be easy.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display [for example, a united animation or the like shown in FIG. 294 (b4) to (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for announcing that the display of the seventh display will be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button advance notice effect is produced by a united animation. ], that is, the display of the big button image 136aL is foretold],
The third display is a display that is terminated during the display of the eighth display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may give a notice only when the display of the seventh display is started, or may give a notice other than that the display of the seventh display is started. May be Further, the eighth display may be a notification that the display of the seventh display is started, or may not notify that the display of the seventh display is started. It may be.

Further, the third display may be finished only while the eighth display is being displayed, or may be finished while the display other than the eighth display is being displayed. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301(a)],
The ninth display is a variable icon display,
The third display may be displayed two times. [Two preparations may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 304(a), two preparations RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. Etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes, and [the display of one of the two preparing displays ends and the other preparing The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 301(g), the preparing image RDY is enlarged and displayed, etc.],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display. [The in-preparation display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the variable icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The displayed in-preparation image RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

Further, only one of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed, or the other display mode may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed. The display modes other than the display modes of No. may be changed. Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is ended, or the display mode of the other of the two may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is ended. The display mode of may not change.

Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may change only after the display of one of the three third displays ends, or even after the display of one of the three third displays ends. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, it is configured such that all the displays of the third display are ended in one symbol variation display [Two ready displays are displayed. In this case, all of the images in the same symbol variation display are consumed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 301(b) to (k), the two preparation images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, all three third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in the one symbol variable display. In addition, when the third display is displayed twice, all the display of the third display may be ended without fail in one symbol variation display, or when the third display is displayed two The display of all the third displays may not end in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, when three third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may be ended in the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended in one symbol variable display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display [explanatory display, for example, “Panda is master of lord” displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 291(a). The displayed explanation, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanation display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [the explanation display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, , The explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 as shown in FIG.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area. [The in-preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which an explanation display is displayed, for example, FIG. ), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may be displayed in addition to the above. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. May be

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, "the display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to start" means "a character display in preparation [for example, a "preparation" in the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d). Character display, etc.”,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is an eleventh display [ball-out display, for example, ball-out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 322(a1)],
The eleventh display is a display that prompts the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, a character display "Please remove the ball" prompts the player to remove the ball, etc.],
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. [In the state where both the in-preparation display and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the in-preparation display overlaps the ball-out display, for example, as shown in FIG. 322(a2). , The image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display urging only to eject the game ball or may be a display urging to do something other than ejecting the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the player to eject the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the player to eject the game ball.

The eleventh display may be a display prompting to eject only the game ball or a display prompting to eject other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed only on the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the eleventh display. It may be configured to be performed. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or when both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in a state other than the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed as.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the third display is configured to be overlapped with the eleventh display. The third display and the eleventh display are both displayed, and the entire third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be.

In addition, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. In the state where both the mini game and the timer notice and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game and the timer notice overlaps the ball-out display, for example, 322(b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display and is displayed. Alternatively, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are being displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed as.

Further, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. It may be configured such that, while both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are being displayed, the entire display of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],"
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "The gaming table is a slot machine [revolving type gaming machine],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Note that the hold icon may be used in a display indicating that the start of a certain effect is held on the slot machine, but this game table can realize this.

Also, in the above description,
"Demonstration means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of holding icons [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A gaming machine equipped with
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. If, for example, as shown in FIGS. 347(9) to (13) in FIG. 347, the timer display becomes “00:00” after the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed, the pseudo continuous production is performed. Is started],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [eg, FIG.
A hold icon in the display mode of the bomb shown in (3), etc.],
The second hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon,
The second hold icon is a hold icon indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, in FIG. 347(3) to FIG. As shown, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb suggests that the timer advance notice effect will be started in the next symbol variation display],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the contents of the effect (timer effect is performed) may be known by the hold icon.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. Further, the effect production may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of holding icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of holding icons. Further, the display means may display a plurality of types of holding icons without fail, or may not display a plurality of types of holding icons.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started in some cases. The timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the display is started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time only after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time other than after the display of the timer display is started.

The timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect may be started only when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured such that a certain effect may be started even when the timer display has reached a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the second hold icon may only indicate that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also indicate something other than that the presentation may be started. Further, the second hold icon may always indicate that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer may be displayed during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In some cases, it may not indicate that the presentation may be started.

Hereinafter, the term “at least suggest” includes not only an implied suggestion but also an explicit notice.

Further, the second hold icon may always start the timer effect when displayed, for example, the timer effect may not be started even if the second hold icon is displayed, For example, there may be a case where a fake second hold icon in which the timer effect is not started is displayed, or a big hit occurs after the second hold icon is displayed and before the timer effect is started. There may be a case where the timer effect is not performed after the jackpot game has been completed and the default display mode is the hold icon.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests the content of the certain effect [for example, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb is a certain effect as shown in FIG. 349(8). It suggests that pseudo-relational production may be performed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to make the effect contents executed in the symbol variable display that is the subject of the prefetching notice interesting.

Here, the second hold icon may be capable of suggesting only the content of a certain effect, or may be capable of suggesting something other than the content of a certain effect. Further, the second hold icon may always indicate the content of a certain effect, or may not indicate the content of a certain effect.

In addition, "the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which three bombs are shown as one lump shown in FIG. 352(3)]. ,
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 352(3) to 353(23). As shown in, the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are in a lump suggests that the timer advance notice effect is started three times in the next symbol fluctuation display],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer effect is performed a plurality of times by displaying one holding icon.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May be. The second hold icon may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

In addition, the second display mode may only indicate that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also indicate something other than the start of the one-time timer effect. Further, the second display mode may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where it is not suggested that the timer effect of the second time is started.

Further, the second display mode may indicate that only a plurality of timer effects are started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may be indicated during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may indicate that an effect other than the one-time timer effect is also started.

Further, the second display mode may suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. May also indicate that the timer effect is started a plurality of times.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a display mode including one bomb shown in FIG. 347(3)],
The first display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started at least once before the certain symbol variation display is ended [for example, FIG. 347(3)- As shown in (9) of the same figure, the hold icon in the display mode consisting of one bomb suggests that one timer advance notice effect will be started in the next symbol fluctuation display],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the number of times of the timer effect can be expected by the hold icon in some cases.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be. The second hold icon may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variable display is ended, or a certain symbol variable display is displayed. It may also suggest something other than the fact that the timer effect is started once before it is ended. Further, the first display mode may necessarily indicate that one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variable display is ended, or a certain symbol variable display is displayed. There may be a case where it is not suggested that one timer effect is started before it is ended.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started until a certain symbol variable display is finished, or a certain symbol variable display is displayed. It may indicate that an effect other than the one timer effect is started before the end.

Note that the second display mode may be configured such that the number of times the timer effect is executed is greater than that in the first display mode.

Further, as the display of the second hold icon, there are a plurality of display patterns (for example, pattern 1, pattern 2, etc.) suggesting one timer effect, and the jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed more in the pattern 2 than in the pattern 1. It may be configured to be easy. Here, the pattern may be a color pattern, a size pattern, a shape pattern, or the like.

Even in the first display mode, the timer effect may be started a plurality of times.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a third holding icon [for example, a holding icon in a display mode of Yoshimune holding shown in FIG. 357(3)],
The third hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon,
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons,
The third hold icon is a hold icon on which a certain character [for example, a lord's character or the like] is displayed,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display that suggests that the timer effect may be started during execution of the certain symbol variation display [eg, shown in FIG. 357(3). As described above, the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is a pre-reading notice of the big hit (super reach), and does not suggest that the timer notice production is started, etc.],
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3)].
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started during execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character [for example, FIG. 358(3) to As shown in FIG. (9), the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is configured to include the lord's character, suggests that the timer advance notice effect will be started in the next symbol fluctuation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give an expectation of the reliability of the prefetching notice.

Here, the third hold icon may be one in which only a certain character is displayed, or one other than a certain character may be displayed. The third hold icon may be one in which a certain character is always displayed, or may be one in which a certain character may not be displayed.

Further, the third hold icon may not include only a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display. It may not include any display other than the display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution. Further, the third hold icon may not necessarily include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display It may include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started during the execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display that suggests that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a certain symbol variation display It may not include a display that indicates other than that the timer effect may be started during execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started only while a certain symbol variable display is being executed, or a certain symbol variable display It may not include a display indicating that the timer effect may be started other than during execution.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Good. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

In addition, the third display mode may indicate that the timer effect is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may also indicate something other than that the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variable display. Further, the third display mode may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is started during execution of a certain symbol variable display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. In some cases, it may not be suggested that the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variable display.

The third display mode may suggest that only the timer effect is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or including a certain character. It may be suggested that an effect other than the timer effect is also started during the execution of the symbol variable display.

The third display mode may suggest that the timer effect is started only while the certain symbol variable display including the certain character is being executed, or may include the certain character. It is also possible to suggest that the timer effect is started other than during the execution of the symbol variable display.

Note that the timer effect may be started in the symbol variable display before the certain symbol variable display is started. For example, the timer effect in which the second hold icon suggests execution may be performed in another symbol variation display before a certain symbol variation display. According to this, there may be a case where the player can pay attention to the game while expecting that the timer effects are collectively performed in the one-time symbol variable display.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute a notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 352 (16), the replay icon RPL indicates that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. Is displayed on the display],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player can grasp the type of a certain effect, and thereafter, it may be possible to see the timer effect while imagining the content of the certain effect.

Here, it may be configured to be able to execute only the notification related to a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or to be able to execute a notification other than the notification related to the certain effect performed by the timer effect. It may be one. Further, it may be configured to always execute the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or may be configured such that the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect may not be executed. It may be one that has been created.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a variable icon [for example, a variable icon h0],
The second hold icon that has been displayed as a hold icon may be displayed as a change icon (hereinafter, referred to as “first change icon”) in association with the start of the certain symbol change display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 352 (7) to (8) in FIG. 352, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which three bombs are in one block is displayed as the next variable display. When started, it is displayed as a variable icon h0 having the same display form, etc.],
A display in which the display mode of the first variable icon changes in association with the execution of the timer effect once during execution of the certain symbol variable display (hereinafter, "first display [eg, figure 352 (9) to (16) in the same figure, the change icon h0 that changes from a display mode in which three bombs are in one block to a display mode in which two bombs are in one block]". Is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 352(8) to (16), when one timer advance notice effect is executed, a display mode in which three bombs are bundled together is displayed. Fluctuating icon h0 changes to a display mode in which two bombs are in one block],
The first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display is a variation icon capable of suggesting the remaining number of times of the timer effect that can be started during execution of the certain symbol variation display [eg, As shown in FIG. 352(16), the change icon h0 that has changed to a display mode in which two bombs are in one lump suggests that the timer advance notice effect will be executed twice more, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where the variable icon can function as a timer effect number notification means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the variable icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable icon. Further, the display means may always display the variable icon or may not display the variable icon.

In addition, the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only as the first variable icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon. The icon may be configured to start being displayed as something other than the first variable icon. In addition, the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon may be configured to always start displaying as the first variable icon, or the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon, The display may not be started as the first variable icon in some cases.

Further, only the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to be displayed as the first variable icon in some cases, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon. Other than the icon, the display may be started as the first variable icon in some cases.

Further, it may be configured such that only the first display is displayed in association with the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variable display, or the execution of a certain symbol variable display. The display other than the first display may be displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect once. Further, the first display may be configured to be displayed without fail in connection with execution of one timer effect during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the first display may not be displayed in connection with the execution of the timer effect once.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in relation to the fact that the timer effect has been executed once during the execution of a certain symbol variable display, or the execution of a certain symbol variable display. The first display may be configured to be displayed in relation to the fact that the timer effect has been executed once.

Further, the first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may be able to suggest only the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It is also possible to suggest something other than the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may necessarily indicate the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, The number of remaining timer effects that can be started during execution of a certain symbol variable display may not be suggested.

In addition, “the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a mode that can suggest a time displayed when the display of the timer display is started [eg, FIG. 362 (6). A timer display is displayed above the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb shown in.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to imagine the content of a certain effect executed by suggesting the display of the initial value of the time on the timer display.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in a mode in which the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be suggested, or the display of the timer display may be displayed. The time displayed at the start may be displayed in a mode other than the mode in which the time can be suggested. In addition, the second hold icon may be always displayed in a mode in which the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started can be suggested, or when the display of the timer display is started. The time displayed in may not be displayed in a suggestable manner.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed in such a manner that only the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started may be displayed, or the display of the timer display is started. The time other than the time displayed at the time of being displayed may be displayed in a suggestable manner.

In addition, "a plurality of the timer effects (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of timer effects") may be simultaneously started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 360(17). Two timer notice effects are started at the same time],
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect related to the second timer notification display TM12 shown in FIG. 360(17)],
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect related to the third timer notification display TM13 shown in FIG. 360(17)],
Displayed when the display of the timer in the first timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display [eg, second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 360(17)]”) is started. The time [for example, 7 seconds (“07:00”)] and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter, “second timer display [for example, the third shown in FIG. 360(17)] "Timer notice display TM13 etc.]") is displayed when the display is started [for example, 8 seconds ("08:00"), etc.] is a different time,
When the first timer display reaches the certain time, there is a case where a first effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 361(19)] is performed as the certain effect.
When the second effect [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the variable icon h0 illustrated in FIG. 361(21)] is performed as the certain effect when the second timer display reaches the certain time There is
The first effect and the second effect are different effects,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be expected that a plurality of certain effects (announcements) will be performed by combining timer effects.

Here, there may be a case where a plurality of timer effects are simultaneously started only during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and a plurality of timer effects are simultaneously started other than during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases. Further, a plurality of timer effects may always be started simultaneously during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may not be simultaneously started during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, there may be a case where only a plurality of timer effects are simultaneously started during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and effects other than the plurality of timer effects are simultaneously started during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases.

Note that the start times of a plurality of timer effects may be shifted, and at least some of the execution periods of the respective timer effects may overlap.

Further, the time displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be always different times, It may be the same time.

Further, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, only the first effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display reaches a certain time. There may be a case where an effect other than the first effect is performed as a certain effect. In addition, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, the first effect may be necessarily performed as a certain effect, and when the first timer display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be performed. There may be a case where the first effect is not performed.

In addition, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the first timer display reaches a certain time, or other than when the first timer display reaches a certain time. However, there may be a case where the first effect is performed as a certain effect.

Further, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, only a second effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display reaches a certain time. There may be a case where an effect other than the second effect is performed as a certain effect. Further, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, the second effect may be necessarily performed as a certain effect, and when the second timer display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is performed. There may be a case where the second effect is not performed.

Further, the second effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the second timer display has reached a certain time, or except when the second timer display has reached a certain time. However, there may be a case where the second effect is performed as a certain effect.

Further, the first effect and the second effect may be different from each other or may be the same.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display etc. shown in FIG. 345 (9")],
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full tank error state. Display is displayed, etc.],
One of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be overlapped with the other display [for example, as shown in FIG. 345(9″), the ball removal is displayed]. The error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expedite the ball removal operation by the timer display.

Here, the display means may display only the ball-out error display, or may display a display other than the ball-out error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball-out error display or may not display the ball-out error display in some cases.

Further, the ball-out error display may be displayed only in the plate full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the plate full tank error state. The ball-out error display may be always displayed in the plate full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the plate full tank error state.

Also, one of the timer display and the ball-out error display may be configured to overlap only with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball-out error display may be displayed. May be configured to be overlapped with a display other than the other display. Further, one of the timer display and the ball-out error display may be configured to overlap the other display without fail, and one of the timer display and the ball-out error display may be configured to overlap with the other display. It may be configured so that the display may not overlap.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A game table provided with a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of timer productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is the first timer effect [for example, the timer notification effect related to the first timer notification display TM11 shown in FIGS. 325(3) to (12) in FIG. 325]. ,
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer notification effect related to the second timer notification display TM12 shown in FIGS. 325(5) to (7)]. ,
In the first timer effect, after the display of the first timer display [for example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 325(3)] is started, the first timer display is the first The first effect [for example, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 325(13)] may be started in response to the display of time [for example, "00:00" or the like]. It is a composed performance,
In the second timer effect, after the display of the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 325(5)] is started, the second timer display is changed to the second timer display. In response to the display of time [eg, "00:00", etc.], a second effect [eg, effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 325(8)] is started. It is a performance that is configured to be
During the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, the period in which the first timer display is displayed [for example, the period shown in FIG. 325(3) to (12), etc.] and the second timer display are A period (hereinafter, referred to as "first period [e.g., FIG. 325(5) to FIG. 7(7)] in which the displayed period [e.g., period shown in FIG. 325(5) to (7) in FIG. , Etc.]”) may occur.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table characterized by the rendering means.

Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the effect of a certain decorative symbol variable display can be excited by the timer effects being overlapped.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of timer effects, or may be capable of executing effects other than the plurality of types of timer effects. In addition, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of timer productions, or may not execute a plurality of types of timer productions.

Further, in the first timer effect, only the first effect may be started in response to the first timer display reaching the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as there is, or after the display of the first timer display is started, the first timer display becomes the first time The effect may be configured to be started in some cases. In addition, the first timer effect is always started in response to the first timer display reaching the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured, or the first effect may not be started when the first timer display reaches the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as is.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only when the first timer display reaches the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. The first timer display may be configured to have a certain configuration, or the first timer display may be the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured such that the effect may be started.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only when the first timer display reaches the first time only after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as there is, or even after the display of the first timer display is not started, the first effect is displayed in response to the first timer display reaching the first time. It may be configured to be started in some cases.

Further, in the second timer effect, only the second effect may be started in response to the second timer display reaching the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as there is, or after the second timer display is started after the display of the second timer display is started, other than the second effect The effect may be configured to be started in some cases. Also, the second timer effect, so that the second effect is always started when the second timer display reaches the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured, or the second effect may not be started in response to the second timer display reaching the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as is.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started only when the second timer display reaches the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. The second timer display may be configured to have the second timer display after the second timer display is started, and the second timer display may be the second time. The effect may be started in some cases.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started only when the second timer display reaches the second time only after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as there is, or even after the display of the second timer display is not started, the second effect is displayed in response to the second timer display reaching the second time. It may be configured to be started in some cases.

Further, during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, it may be configured so that only the first period may occur, or during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, a period other than the first period. May also occur. Further, the first period may be configured to always occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, or the first period may not occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the first period may be generated only during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, and the first period may be set even during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display. It may be configured to occur.

In addition, "at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period is configured to be executed as a prefetching notice [ For example, as shown in FIGS. 325(5) to (8), the second timer notice display TM12 is selected from among the timer notice productions for the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice productions for the second timer notice display TM12. Timer advance notice effect according to the above is an effect executed as a pre-reading notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the pre-reading notice],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there is a case where the effect of a certain decorative symbol variable display can be excited by using the timer effect as a pre-reading notice.

Here, it may be configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed only as a prefetch notice. However, it is configured such that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed as something other than the prefetch notice. Good. In addition, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed as a prefetch notice without fail. The timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect which is being executed during the period may be configured not to be executed as the prefetching notice.

Further, it may be configured such that only the timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed as the prefetch notice. , The effect other than the timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as the prefetching notice. ..

Further, it may be configured such that one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that is being executed in the first period may be executed as a pre-reading notice. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed during the period may be configured to be executed as a pre-reading notice.

In addition, "one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed as a prefetch notice. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 325 (3) to (13) in FIG. 325, of the timer notice effects for the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effects for the second timer notice display TM12, The timer notice effect on the 1-timer notice display TM11 is an effect for executing the pseudo continuous effect that is a notice of the symbol variation display, and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is the display mode of the hold icon. Is a production for executing the change production of
Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect which are being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variable display [for example, FIG. 326(24 )- As shown in FIG. 327 (37), among the timer notice effects for the third timer notice display TM13 and the timer notice effects for the fourth timer notice display TM14, the timer notice effect for the third timer notice display TM13 is , The effect for executing the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as the notice effect, and the timer notice effect on the fourth timer notice display TM14 is the effect for executing the notice of the Sabohani group as the notice effect, etc. ],
There is a case where both of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period are executed as a prefetch notice (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) [eg, As shown in FIGS. 328(3) to (13), the first timer notice display TM11 is selected from among the timer notice productions for the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice productions for the second timer notice display TM12. The timer advance notice effect is an effect for executing a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, the timer advance effect for the second timer notice display TM12 is an effect executed for starting the prefetch mode, and the like. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect that the effect which is started later will be targeted for the same decorative symbol variable display as the object of the effect which is started first.

Here, in the case where one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period is executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed only as a prefetch notice. There may be, and one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period is also executed as something other than a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, and the other is prefetched. It may be executed as something other than a notice. In addition, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may be executed as a look-ahead notice. However, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may not be executed as a prefetch notice. Good.

Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or the first timer effect may be executed. There may be a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed during the period are executed as something other than a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display. In addition, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or are being executed in the first period. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display.

Further, there may be a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect which are being executed in the first period are executed only as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect which is being executed in the first period. Both the one timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as something other than the pre-reading notice. Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed in the first period may be necessarily executed as a prefetch notice, or the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period. There is a case where both of the second timer effect and the second timer effect are not executed as the prefetching notice.

Further, in the "first case, the first effect [eg, the prefetch mode shown in FIG. 328(6)] may be started during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display. Has been done,
In the first case, a decorative pattern that is started after the certain decorative pattern variation display [for example, a decorative pattern variation display executed in the period shown in (328) to (10) of FIG. 328] The variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative symbol variable display [for example, decorative symbol variable display executed in the period shown in Fig. 328 (11) to Fig. 328 (18)]") is displayed. The second effect [for example, change effect of display mode of hold icon shown in FIG. 328(13)] is configured to be started in some cases,
In the first case, the first timer effect [for example, the timer notification effect related to the second timer notification display TM12 shown in FIG. 328(3) to (5)] and the second timer effect [ For example, the timer advance notice effect of the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 328(3) to (13)] is the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display [FIG. For example, the effect is executed as a pre-reading notice for the decorative pattern variation display etc. executed during the period shown in FIG. 329 (19) to (29).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect a certain decorative symbol variable display as a pre-reading notice while raising a certain decorative symbol variable display by the timer effect.

Here, in the first case, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, and in the first case, a certain decorative pattern. The effect other than the first effect may be started during the display of the variable display. Further, in the first case, the first effect may be configured to start without fail during display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, and in the first case, display of a certain decorative symbol variable display. The first effect may not be started in some cases.

Further, in the first case, the first effect may be started only during the display of a certain decorative pattern variation display, and in the first case, a certain decorative symbol variation The first effect may be started other than during the display of the display. Further, only in the first case, the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, or in a case other than the first case, or The first effect may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display.

Further, in the first case, it may be configured such that only the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variable display, and in the first case, the first decoration It may be configured such that an effect other than the second effect may be started during the display of the symbol variable display. In the first case, the second effect may be configured to start without fail during the display of the first decorative symbol variable display, and in the first case, the first decorative symbol variable display. The second effect may not be started during the display of.

In the first case, the second effect may be started only while the first decorative symbol variable display is being displayed, or in the first case, the first decoration The second effect may be started other than during the display of the variable display of symbols. Further, only in the first case, it may be configured such that the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variable display, or in cases other than the first case, The second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variable display.

Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed only as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variable display that is started after the first decorative symbol variable display. It may be a thing, or may be executed as something other than the pre-reading notice for the same decorative symbol variable display started after the first decorative symbol variable display. Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are always executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variable display started after the first decorative symbol variable display. It may be one that may not be executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variable display started after the first decorative symbol variable display.

Further, "in the first case, at least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed [for example, FIG. 328(3)- A certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in (13) of the figure is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of pandas, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, one of the effects is a hold change, and therefore, it may be possible to expect that the other effect is performed for the decorative symbol variable display that is the target of the hold change.

Here, in the first case, one of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or in the first case, the first effect Both the effect and the second effect may be effects in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.

Note that a pre-reading notice other than the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon may be given.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 334(9)],
The second effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 334(6)],
The hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 334(9), As a result of performing the timer notice effect on the 1-timer notice display TM11, as a certain effect, an effect of changing the hold icon in the display mode of the panda to the bancho display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to raise the rank of the hold icon in multiple stages by timer effects.

Here, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed only by the other effect, or between the first effect and the second effect. The hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the effects may further be changed by effects other than the other effect. Moreover, the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be changed by the other effect without fail, and the hold icon may be changed by the other effect. The hold icon whose display mode is changed by one effect may not be changed by the other effect.

In addition, only the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect, or between the first effect and the second effect. Items other than the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one of the effects may be further changed by the other effect. In addition, the hold icon whose display mode is changed only by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect, or between the first effect and the second effect. The hold icon whose display mode is changed by an effect other than one effect may be further changed by the other effect.

In addition, "the timing when the first effect according to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the timing related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period" The second presentation may be started at different timings [for example, as shown in FIGS. 325(5) to (13), the timer announcement presentation on the first timer announcement display TM11 is performed. Is different from the timing at which the pseudo-relation effect is executed, and the timing at which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon executed by the timer notice effect of the second timer notice display TM12 is started, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, there are cases where variations are provided in the start timing of the effect related to the timer effect.

Here, the timing when the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period is started. It may be configured such that only the timing that is performed may be different, and the timing when the first effect related to the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period is started and the time when the first effect is performed in the first period. The timing other than the timing at which the second effect related to the second timer effect in the middle is started may be different. Also, the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period is started. The timing may be configured to be different without fail, and the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect that is being executed in the first period is started and the second effect that is being executed in the first period The timer production may be configured so that the second production may start at the same timing.

Further, it is configured such that a "first notice icon [for example, a swordsman character KNG shown in FIG. 330(10)] may be displayed as the first effect [for example, FIG. )-(10) (FIG. 332(3)-(10) in the same figure), as a result of performing the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, as a certain effect, the swordsman character KNG. Is displayed, etc.],
In the case where the first timer effect [for example, the timer notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 332(3) to (10)] is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variable display. Is displayed after the first notice icon is displayed during display of the certain decorative pattern variable display [for example, decorative pattern variable display performed in the period shown in FIGS. 332(2) to 333(24)] Then, during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon [for example, the effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 333 (20) to (22)] is Is configured to get started,
When the first timer effect [for example, timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 330(3) to FIG. 10(10)] is executed as a prefetch notice, the certain decorative symbol After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of variable display [for example, decorative pattern variable display performed in the period shown in FIG. 330(2) to FIG. 18(18)], the certain decorative pattern According to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative pattern variable display that is started after the variable display [for example, the decorative pattern variable display performed in the period shown in FIG. 331 (19) to (29)] The production [for example, production of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 331 (25) to (27) in the figure] is configured to be started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to draw attention to whether the notice icon displayed as the first effect is given as a notice or as a prefetch notice.

When the second effect is started first, the notice effect corresponding to the first notice icon is the same target as the second effect, depending on whether the second effect is a notice or a prefetch notice. It may be possible to expect to start with the decorative pattern variable display that becomes

Here, it may be configured such that only the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect, or something other than the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect. It may be configured as follows. Moreover, the first notice icon may be configured to be always displayed as the first effect, or the first notice icon may not be displayed as the first effect.

The first notice icon may be displayed only as the first effect, or the first notice icon may be displayed as an effect other than the first effect. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, after a first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation It may be configured such that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice concerning a certain decorative symbol variable display, or After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, a configuration other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is also displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern variation display May be done. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, after a first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation It may be configured such that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is always started during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, it is configured such that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may not be started during the display of the certain decorative pattern change display. May be.

In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, after a first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be configured to be started only while the display is being displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is displayed in addition to the display of the certain decorative pattern change display. May be. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, a certain decorative symbol It may be configured such that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative pattern change display. May be.

In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, it is started after a certain decorative symbol variable display. It may be configured such that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as the prefetch notice, a certain decoration is performed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display of symbols, other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon during the display of the variable display of decorative patterns that is started after a certain decorative pattern change display. The production may also be started. In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, it is started after a certain decorative symbol variable display. It may be configured that the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is always started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as the prefetch notice, a certain decoration is performed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display of symbols, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the change of decorative pattern that is started after a certain decorative pattern change display. It may be configured so as not to be performed.

In addition, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, it is started after a certain decorative symbol variable display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as the prefetch notice, a certain decoration is performed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display of symbols, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon other than during the display of the variable display of decorative patterns that is started after a certain decorative pattern change display May be configured to be started. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern variation display, it starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be configured to be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as the prefetch notice, a certain decoration is performed. In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display of symbols, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display of decorative patterns that is started after a certain decorative pattern change display. May be configured to be started.

In addition, "It is configured so that a second notice icon may be displayed as the second effect,
When the second timer effect is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variable display, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display, the certain It is configured such that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display,
When the second timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display, after the certain decorative symbol variable display It is configured such that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display to be started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Further, when one of the first effect and the second effect is a notice regarding a certain decorative pattern variation display, and the other is a look-ahead notice, the notice icon displayed as the first effect and the second notice are displayed. The notice icon displayed as an effect may be the same notice icon.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to run multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a first mini-game [for example, a treasure chest mini-game shown in FIGS. 335(15) to (18)].
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game [for example, a mini game of dice shown in FIGS. 335(7) to (10)].
In the first mini-game, the first timer display [eg, the first timer advance notice display TM11 or the like shown in FIG. 335(3)] becomes the first time [eg, “00:00” or the like]. This is a mini game for which the result is derived before [for example, in the treasure chest mini game shown in FIGS. 335(15) to (18), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is “00:00”. Results have been derived before],
In the second mini game, the second timer display [eg, second timer advance notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 335(5)] becomes the second time [eg, “00:00” or the like]. This is a mini game for which the result is derived before. [For example, in the mini game of the dice shown in FIGS. 335(7) to (10), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00". Results have been derived before],
The first effect is configured to be an effect corresponding to the result of the first mini game [for example, the result of the treasure chest mini game shown in FIGS. 335(15) to (18) is successful. 336 (21), the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 336 (21) is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11],
The second effect is configured to be an effect corresponding to the result of the second mini game [for example, the result of the dice mini game shown in FIGS. 335(7) to (10) is successful. 335 (12), the effect that the hold icon shown in FIG. 335 (12) is changed to the display mode of the length is executed as a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible not only to wait for the timer display time but also to pay attention to the result of the mini game during that time.

Here, only a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable, or a game other than a plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini games.

Further, in the first mini game, only the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or the first timer display before the first timer display reaches the first time. Other than the result may be derived. In addition, in the first mini game, the result may be always derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. The result may not be derived in some cases.

In addition, the first mini game may be such that the result is derived only before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Besides, the result may be derived.

In the second mini game, only the result may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Other than the result may be derived. In the second mini game, the result may be always derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. The result may not be derived in some cases.

In addition, the second mini game may be such that the result is derived only before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Besides, the result may be derived.

In addition, the first effect may be configured to be an effect corresponding to only the result of the first mini game, or the first effect may be an effect corresponding to a result other than the result of the first mini game. May be configured to be. In addition, the first effect may be configured to be an effect that always corresponds to the result of the first mini game, or the first effect may not be an effect that corresponds to the result of the first mini game. It may be configured to be.

Further, the second effect may be configured to be an effect corresponding only to the result of the second mini game, or the second effect may be an effect corresponding to a result other than the result of the second mini game. May be configured to be. In addition, the second effect may be configured to be an effect that always corresponds to the result of the second mini game, or the second effect may not be an effect that corresponds to the result of the second mini game. It may be configured to be.

The type of mini game may be the same or different between the first timer effect and the second timer effect. In addition, the starting order and the type of the mini game may be associated with each other.

Further, it may be configured to suggest the first effect or the second effect during execution of the mini game. For example, when the mini game is successful, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed. You may make it produce such as being suggested.

In addition, "When the result of the first mini-game becomes the first result, the first effect is performed in the first mode [for example, FIG. 335 (15) to FIG. When the result of the treasure chest mini game shown in (18) is a success result, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 336 (21) is performed as a result of the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. Is executed as a production, etc.],
The first effect is configured to be performed in the third mode when the result of the first mini game is the third result [for example, FIG. 337(15) to FIG. 18(18)]. If the result of the mini game of the treasure box shown in FIG. 3 is a failure result, the lost effect shown in FIG. 338(20) is a certain effect that is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Etc.],
When the result of the second mini game is the second result, the second effect is performed in the second mode [for example, FIG. 335(7) to FIG. When the result of the mini game of the dice shown in FIG. 3 is a successful result, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. Executed as a result that is performed as a result, etc.],
The second effect is configured to be performed in the fourth mode when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result [for example, FIG. 337(7) to FIG. 10(10)]. When the result of the mini game of the dice shown in FIG. 3 is a failure result, the effect that the hold icon shown in FIG. 337 (12) is changed to the display mode of panda is the effect of the timer notification effect on the second timer notification display TM12. Executed as a result that is performed as a result, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, there are cases in which variations in the effects due to the combination of the mini game and the timer effects are increased and the interest can be enhanced.

Here, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the first mode when the result of the first mini game is the first result, or the result of the first mini game is the first result. The first effect may be performed in a mode other than the first mode when the first result is obtained. Further, when the result of the first mini game is the first result, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode without fail, and the result of the first mini game is the first result. The first effect may not be performed in the first mode when the above result is obtained.

In addition, when the result of the first mini game is the first result, only the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the first result. In the case of the above result, effects other than the first effect may be performed in the first aspect. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode only when the result of the first mini game is the first result, or the result of the first mini game is the first result. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect in a case other than the case of the result.

Further, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the third aspect, and the result of the first mini game may be the third result. In the case of the above result, the first effect may be configured to be performed in a mode other than the third mode. Further, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode without fail, or the result of the first mini game may be the third result. It may be configured such that the first effect may not be performed in the third aspect in the case of the above result.

Further, when the result of the first mini game is the third result, only the first effect may be performed in the third mode, or the result of the first mini game may be the third result. When the result is, the effect other than the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode only when the result of the first mini game is the third result, and the result of the first mini game is the third result. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode in a case other than the case of the result.

Further, when the result of the second mini game is the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the second mode, and the result of the second mini game may be the second result. The second effect may be performed in a mode other than the second mode when the above result is obtained. Further, when the result of the second mini game is the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode without fail, and the result of the second mini game may be the second result. The second effect may not be performed in the second mode when the above result is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini game is the second result, only the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode, or the result of the second mini game may be the second result. In the case of the above result, effects other than the second effect may be performed in the second mode. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode only when the result of the second mini game is the second result, and the result of the second mini game is the second result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode in a case other than the case of the result.

Further, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the fourth mode, or the result of the second mini game may be the fourth result. The second effect may be performed in a mode other than the fourth mode when the above result is obtained. In addition, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, or the result of the second mini game is the fourth result. It may be configured such that the second effect may not be performed in the fourth mode in the case of the above result.

Further, when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, only the second effect may be performed in the fourth mode, or the result of the second mini game may be the fourth result. When the result is, the effect other than the second effect may be performed in the fourth mode. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode only when the result of the second mini game is the fourth result, or the result of the second mini game is the fourth result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth mode also in a case other than the case of the result.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of mini games is a third mini game,
When the result of the third mini game is the fifth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the fifth aspect,
When the result of the third mini game is a sixth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in a sixth aspect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, the time display [for example, "10:00" or the like] of the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 or the like shown in FIG. 341(3)] is the first time. Is a display showing the time until, for example, 10 seconds,
It is configured such that the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time is reached [for example, the time displayed as “10:00” in FIG. 341(3)]. As shown in FIGS. 341 (12) to (13) in FIG. 341 (12) to FIG. 341 (1), the 1-timer advance notice display TM11 is added with the time shown in the timer display before becoming “00:00”, etc.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player act as an effect that changes the mode of the first timer effect, and make the player have expectations.

Here, the time display of the first timer display may indicate only the time until reaching the first time, or may indicate the time other than the time until reaching the first time. May be. In addition, the time display of the first timer display may necessarily indicate the time until reaching the first time, or may not indicate the time until reaching the first time. May be.

The time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed only before the first time is displayed, or the time display of the first timer display may be the first time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. Further, the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time. It may be configured so as not to be performed.

Further, it may be configured such that only the time display of the first timer display may be changed before it becomes the first time, and the time display other than the time display of the first timer display may be the first time display. It may be configured so that it may be changed before the time.

Further, "the time display of the second timer display is a display showing the time until it becomes the second time,
It is configured such that the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player act as an effect that changes the aspect of the second timer effect, and make the player have expectations.

Here, the time display of the second timer display may indicate only the time until reaching the second time, or may indicate the time other than the time until reaching the second time. May be. In addition, the time display of the second timer display may necessarily indicate the time until reaching the second time, or may not indicate the time until reaching the second time. May be.

Further, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed only before the second time, and the time display of the second timer display may be the second time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. The time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time. It may be configured so as not to be performed.

Further, it may be configured such that only the time display of the second timer display may be changed before it becomes the second time, and the time display other than the time display of the second timer display may be changed to the second time display. It may be configured so that it may be changed before the time.

In addition, the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed in the period shown in FIG. 325(2) to FIG. 326(22) or the like] while the first timer display [eg, The first timer advance notice display TM11 etc. shown in 325(3)] is configured so that it may be the first time [for example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIG. "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in Fig. (12)],
The second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 325(5)] may be configured to be the second time during the display of the certain decorative symbol variable display. [For example, in the second timer advance notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 325(5), "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325(7)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only the first timer display may be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, or the first time may be set during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display. The display other than the timer display may be configured such that the first time may be displayed. Further, the first timer display may be configured to always be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, or the first timer display may be displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display. It may be configured such that the first time may not be reached.

Further, the first timer display may be configured to be the first time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, and the first timer display may be the time other than during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display. The one timer display may be configured to be the first time.

In addition, it may be configured such that only the second timer display may be the second time during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display, or the second time may be displayed during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display. The display other than the timer display may be configured so that it may be the second time. Also, the second timer display may be configured to be the second time without fail while displaying a certain decorative pattern variable display,
The second timer display may not be the second time during the display of a certain decorative pattern variable display.

Further, the second timer display may be the second time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variable display, and the second timer display may be the second time other than during display of the certain decorative symbol variable display. The second timer display may be configured to be the second time.

In addition, “the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started [for example, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is shown in FIG. ), the second timer advance notice display TM12 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 325(5), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the start timing of the timer display is diversified, it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, only the timing when the display of the first timer display is started and the timing when the display of the second timer display is started may be different, or the display of the first timer display is started. The timing other than the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may be different. Further, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started, or the timing when the display of the first timer display is started and the timing when the display of the second timer display is started. There may be a case where the display timing of the timer display is started at the same time.

In addition, "the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started [eg, As shown in FIG. 325(3), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays “10:00” when the display is started, and the second timer advance notice display TM12 changes to FIG. 325(5). As shown, "03:00" is displayed when the display is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the time displayed when the timer display is started is diversified, it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, only the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started. The time display other than the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. .. Further, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different from each other. The time display displayed when the display of the timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be the same.

In addition, “the first time and the second time are the same time [for example, “00:00” or the like],”
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the start timing of the effect may be easily recognized in some cases.

The first time and the second time may be different.

In addition, "the first time is 0,
The second time is 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the start timing of the effect may be more easily grasped.

The first time may be other than 0. Also, the second time may be other than zero.

In addition, it is configured to be able to display a “ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display etc. shown in FIG. 345 (9″)],
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a dish full tank error state. Display is displayed, etc.],
The display of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped with the ball-out error display [for example, FIG. 345 (9″)). , The ball-out error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expedite the ball removal operation by the timer display.

Here, only the ball-out error display may be displayed, or a display other than the ball-out error display may be displayed. Further, the ball-out error display may be displayed without fail, or the ball-out error display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the ball-out error display may be displayed only in the plate full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the plate full tank error state. The ball-out error display may be always displayed in the plate full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the plate full tank error state.

Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to be overlapped only with the ball-out error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. At least one of the second timer displays may be overlapped with a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to be overlapped with the ball-out error display without fail, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured. It may be configured so that at least one of the displays may not overlap the ball-out error display.

Also, it may be configured such that only one of the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap the ball-out error display, and the first timer display and the second timer display may overlap. Both displays of the timer display may be overlapped with the ball-out error display.

In addition, "the production means is a display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Demonstration means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like shown in FIG. 358 (9) to (17)]
A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
In the timer effect, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a strong sabotani group notice shown in FIG. 358(17)] is displayed. The effect is configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17), after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, the timer display is "00:00". ], the notice of strong sabotani group is started],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is the first advance notice display [for example, the advance notice advance notice (the change advance notice) by the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3) and FIG. F20) shows a pre-reading notice (a notice of the change) by the hold icon in the display mode of the red timer hold, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is a second advance notice display [for example, a pre-read advance notice (preliminary change notice) by a hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357(3) or FIG. 367 (F9). ), the read-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon in the red hold display mode],
The first notice display is a notice display of a certain type [for example, a notice display when a lord's character is displayed or a notice display when the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle changes. Etc.] is displayed as a notice and is displayed as a notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(3), the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold (variable icon including a character of Tonosama). ) Foretells that the corresponding symbol variation display may be a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a red timer hold display configured to include a red display in a round shape. The hold icon (variable icon) of the form gives a notice that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding variable symbol display],
The second notice display is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including the certain type of notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 357(3), it is configured to include a lord's character. The hold icon (fluctuation icon) in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold that has been announced indicates that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of red pending, which includes the display of, indicates that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display indicating that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter, “first display [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3) hold). Display of a bomb included in the icon, and display of a fuse included in the hold icon in the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)].
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified to the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to anticipate and enjoy the effect to be executed along with the execution of the timer effect.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. In addition, the production means may be one that always executes the timer production, or may not execute the timer production.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display showing a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display is not a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

The first notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice other than a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may also be displayed as a thing. The first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may not be done.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain type of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice without including a notice of a certain type. It may be done.

The second notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice other than a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may be displayed as a thing. The second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may not be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain type of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice without including a notice of a certain type of notice. It may be done.

Here, the “preliminary notice” is a concept that includes both the “variable notice” and the “prefetch notice”.

Further, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect may be started, or may indicate that there is a case other than when the timer effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect may be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect may be started. Good.

The first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than that the timer effect is (always) started. Good. Further, the first display may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is (necessarily) started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is (inevitably) started. Good.

The first notice display may include only the first display or may include a display other than the first display. Further, the first notice display may necessarily include the first display, or may not include the first display.

In addition, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. Moreover, the second notice display may not necessarily include the first display, or may include the first display in some cases.

The display mode of the first display included in the first notice display and the display mode of the first display included in the second notice display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. Further, the first display included in the first notice display and the first display included in the second notice display may have different functions.

In addition, "the display of the certain type of advance notice is a display of the advance notice by an icon,
The icon is a hold icon or a variable icon,
The first notice display is a notice display including the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(3), Yoshimune The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the bomb hold is configured by adding a display of the bomb to the lord's character],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the hold icon and the variable icon may be easy to identify the symbol variable display that is the target of the prefetching notice, and may be easy for the player to understand.

Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only an icon and the first display displayed in correspondence with the icon, or the icon and the first display in correspondence with the icon. It may be configured to include a display other than the first display to be displayed. Further, the first notice display may be configured to necessarily include an icon and a first display displayed in correspondence with the icon, or the icon and the display corresponding to the icon. The first display may not be included in some cases.

The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon and the change icon.

In addition, there may be a case where the pre-reading notice is given by the variable icon. That is, whether or not a certain type of notice display is displayed on either the hold icon or the variable icon, whether or not the symbol variable display is on hold at the time when the display is started (whether there is one or more hold or 0) ), the display of a certain type of advance notice by the variable icon can be considered as a prefetch advance notice. For example, in general, when a certain type of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a prefetch notice, and in the case of a change icon, it is often the change notice. In the case where the number of holdings is 0 and there is a start winning, the look-ahead may be performed before the determination of win/fail, and as a result, a certain type of advance notice may be displayed by the variable icon. In such a case In some cases, it can be said that it is functioning as a look-ahead notice instead of the change notice.

Further, “The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are integrally displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(3), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension is displayed. The hold icon (variable icon) has a display mode in which the display of the bomb is integrally added to the lord's character, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand whether or not the display is for a timer effect.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is easy to understand the symbol variation display which is the subject variation of the notice.

Here, the first notice display may be the one in which only the icon and the first display are integrally displayed, or may be integrally displayed including the icon, the first display, and the display other than these. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first notice display may be the one in which the icon and the first display are always displayed integrally, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed integrally. Good.

In addition, "The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately. The display mode is configured by arranging a bomb icon BD' on the
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the notice by the icon and the notice added may be easy to understand.

Here, in the first notice display, only the icon and the first display may be displayed separately, or the icon, the first display, and the display other than these may be displayed separately. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first notice display may be that the icon and the first display are always displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. Good.

In addition, “the icon is configured to be displayed in a default display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(1), the first hold icon h11 has a default display mode (a round white display Mode)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, the icon may be configured to be displayable only in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the default display mode. Further, the icon may be configured to be always displayed in the default display mode, or may be configured such that the icon may not be displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, “a display of the certain type of advance notice is performed by changing the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 365(E3), the second hold icon h12 is a circular blue display mode]. Read-ahead notice is displayed by displaying
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, a certain type of notice display may be displayed only by changing the color of the icon, or a certain type of notice display may be displayed by a change other than the change of the icon color. It may be. Further, a certain type of advance notice display may be displayed without fail due to a change in icon color, or even if a certain type of advance notice display may not be performed due to a change in icon color. Good.

In addition, "the second notice display is a notice display that may include a notice display of a different type from the notice display of a certain type [for example, in the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold. Character holding a pseudo-ren icon or a sabotani icon and a pre-read warning of the pseudo-ren or sabotani group notice may be given.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to make expectations other than the timer effect.

Here, the second notice display may include only a notice display of a different type from a notice display of a certain type, or may be different from a notice display of a certain type. The display may include a display other than the display of the type of notice. In addition, the second notice display may include a notice display of a different type from a notice display of a certain type, or a notice of a different type from a notice display of a certain type. May not be included.

In addition, "the display of the certain type of advance notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a circular blue display mode shown in FIG. 367 (F9)]
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a circular red display mode shown in FIG. 367 (F9)]
When the display of the certain type of advance notice is displayed in the second mode rather than when it is displayed in the first mode, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. Is composed of
When the aspect of the certain type of notice display in the first notice display and the aspect of the certain type of notice display in the second notice display are the same aspect (hereinafter, "the first case [ For example, both the red timer hold display mode and the red hold display mode hold icon include a circular red display, etc.]").
In the first case, the timer effect is more easily started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. A gaming table characterized by. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation for a big hit as well as a sense of expectation for the timer effect to be started, depending on the display mode of a certain type of notice display. ..

Here, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be able to be displayed only in one of the plurality of modes, or in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. It may be configured to be displayable. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in one of the plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in one of the plurality of modes. In some cases, it may be configured in some cases.

Further, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the first mode. Good. Further, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be configured to be always displayed in the first mode, or may be configured not to be displayed in the first mode. It may be.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the second mode. Good. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second mode, or may be configured not to be displayed in the second mode. It may be.

Further, when a certain type of notice display is displayed in the second mode rather than in the first mode, only the big hit symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the certain pattern variation display. May be configured, when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode rather than in the first mode, except for the jackpot pattern mode in a certain symbol variation display The symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed in a confirmed manner. Further, when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode rather than in the first mode, the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be definitely displayed in the certain pattern variation display. May be configured, when the display of a certain type of advance notice is displayed in the second mode than in the case of being displayed in the first mode, the jackpot pattern mode in a certain symbol variation display is It may be configured such that the finalized display may not be easy.

Further, when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode rather than when it is displayed in the first mode, the big hit symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed only in a certain symbol variation display. May be configured, when the display of a certain type of advance notice is displayed in the second mode rather than when it is displayed in the first mode, a symbol variable display other than a certain symbol variable display Even in, the jackpot pattern mode may be configured to be easily displayed in a confirmed manner.

Further, when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode only, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be fixedly displayed in the certain pattern variation display than in the case of being displayed in the first mode. May be configured, even when the display of a certain type of notice is displayed in the second mode rather than in the first mode, the jackpot pattern mode in a certain symbol variation display May be configured to be easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, when a certain type of notice display is displayed in the second mode, the big hit symbol mode may be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variable display. Further, when a certain type of notice display is displayed in the first mode, the jackpot symbol may not be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variable display.

Further, it may be configured such that there is only a case where the display mode of a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the display form of a certain type of notice in the second notice display are the same mode. The display mode of a certain type of advance notice in the first advance notice display and the display form of a certain type of advance notice in the second advance notice display may be the same as in other cases. .. Further, it may be configured such that the display mode of a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the display mode of a certain type of notice in the second notice display may be the same mode. The display mode of a certain type of notice in the first notice display and the display mode of a certain type of notice in the second notice display may or may not be the same. ..

Further, in the first case, it may be configured such that only the timer effect is more easily started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed, In the first case, the effect other than the timer effect may be more easily started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. Further, in the first case, the timer effect may be configured to be more easily started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed, In the first case, the timer effect may be more difficult to start when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed.

Only in the first case, the timer effect may be more easily started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed. In cases other than the above case, the timer effect may be more easily started when the first notice display is displayed than when the second notice display is displayed.

Further, in the first case, when the first notice display is displayed, the timer effect may be started without fail. Further, in the first case, the timer effect may not necessarily be started when the second notice display is displayed.

In addition, “After the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display [for example, in FIG. 363(B3) to FIG. As shown, the display form of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the display form of Yoshimune hold to the display form of Yoshimune bomb hold, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation for changing to the first notice display.

Here, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change only to the first notice display, or after the second notice display is displayed, The second notice display may change to a display other than the first notice display. In addition, after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display without fail, or after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed. The display may not change to the first notice display.

Also, the second notice display may change to the first notice display only after the second notice display is displayed, or even after the second notice display is displayed, The second notice display may change to the first notice display.

In addition, “the display means displays a change effect display [for example, a mini game display shown in FIGS. 363(B4) to (B5) and a roulette effect display shown in FIGS. 365(E9) to 366(E13). 367 (F9) to FIG. 3 (F18), the display of the Yoshimune Kankan game, the pending change animation, etc.] can be displayed.
When the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change to the first notice display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the change effect display may give an expectation that the second notice display changes to the first notice display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the change effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the change effect display. Further, the display means may always display the change effect display, or may not display the change effect display.

Further, when the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may change only to the first notice display, or the second notice display may be displayed. When the change effect display is displayed after is displayed, the second notice display may be changed to a display other than the first notice display. Further, when the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display without fail, or the second notice display is displayed. After the change effect display is displayed, the second notice display may not change to the first notice display.

Also, the second notice display may change to the first notice display only when the change effect display is displayed after the second notice display is displayed. In a case other than the case where the change effect display is displayed after the display is displayed, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display.

Note that the display mode of the target hold icon may be changed by a change effect display on a hold icon different from the target hold icon.

In addition, “the change effect display is a display including a mini game [for example, display of Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIG. 367 (F9) to FIG. 3F18]”,
When the first result [for example, the display result in which the die roll is "5" or the like] is derived as a result of the mini-game, the second notice display becomes the first notice display. Configured to change,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first notice display is changed by the mini game being played.

Here, the change effect display may include only the mini game, or may include displays other than the mini game. Further, the change effect display may necessarily include the mini game, or may not include the mini game.

Moreover, when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game, the second notice display may be changed to only the first notice display, or the mini game is performed. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second notice display may be changed to a display other than the first notice display. Further, when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display, or the mini game is performed. As a result, when the first result is derived, the second notice display may not change to the first notice display.

Further, the second notice display may be changed to the first notice display only when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game being executed, or the mini game may be executed. The second notice display may be configured to change to the first notice display even when the first result is derived as a result of the disclosure.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a selection effect display [for example, display of roulette effect shown in FIG. 365(E9) to FIG. 366(E13)].
The selection effect display is an effect display for selecting one from a plurality of options,
In some cases, one of the plurality of options includes the first option [for example, a timer advance notice icon shown in FIG. 365(E9)],
The selection effect display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 365(E9), the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the blue hold display mode. Display of roulette effect has started, etc.],
As a result of the display of the selection effect display, when the first option is selected, the second notice display is changed to the first notice display [for example, FIG. 366 ( As shown in E13) to (E14), when the timer advance notice icon is derived and displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first hold icon h11 changes from the blue hold display mode to the blue timer hold display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation that the first option is selected in the selection effect display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the selection effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the selection effect display. Further, the display means may display the selection effect display without fail, or may display the selection effect display in some cases.

Also, it is possible that one of the multiple options may include only the first option, or one of the multiple options may include options other than the first option. Good. In addition, one of the plurality of options may include the first option without exception, or one of the plurality of options may not include the first option.

Further, only the selected effect display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display, or a display other than the selected effect display may be displayed during the display of the second notice display. Good. Further, the selection effect display may be always displayed during the display of the second notice display, or the selection effect display may not be displayed during the display of the second notice display.

In addition, the selection effect display may be displayed only while the second notice display is being displayed, or the selection effect display may be displayed while a display other than the second notice display is being displayed. May be.

In addition, "a second option [for example, the icon of sabotani shown in FIG. 365(E9)] may be included in one of the plurality of options,
When the second option is selected as a result of the selection effect display being displayed, the display mode of the second notice display is configured to change to another display mode [for example, FIG. 366 ( As shown in (E14a) to (E14a), when the icon of Sabohani is derived and displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of blue hold to the display mode of Sabohani. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the expectation for the second notice display itself may be improved.

Here, it is possible that one of the plurality of options includes only the second option, or one of the plurality of options includes options other than the second option. May be. In addition, one of the plurality of options may include the second option without exception, and one of the plurality of options may not include the second option.

Further, when the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to only another display mode. When the second option is selected as a result of being displayed, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to a display mode other than another display mode. Further, when the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to another display mode without fail. When the second option is selected as a result of being displayed, the display mode of the second notice display may not be changed to another display mode.

Further, when only the second option is selected as a result of displaying the selection effect display, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to another display mode. Even if an option other than the second option is selected as a result of being displayed, the display mode of the second notice display may be changed to another display mode.

In addition, “the display of the certain type of advance notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a lord's character shown in FIG. 357(3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the decorative effect may be improved in some cases.

Here, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display only by the character, or the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display including a display other than the character. Further, a certain type of advance notice display may necessarily include a character, or a certain type of advance notice display may not include a character.

Further, “The first display is a display that suggests that the timer effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(3) to FIG. The hold icon indicates that the timer advance notice effect will be started because the display of the bomb is included.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the first display may further enhance the sense of expectation that the timer effect will be started.

Here, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect is started, or may indicate something other than the timer effect being started. Further, the first display may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is started.

Also, in the above description,
"Demonstration means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like shown in FIG. 358 (9) to (17)]
A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
In the timer effect, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, a strong sabotani group notice shown in FIG. 358(17)] is displayed. The effect is configured to be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 358 (9) to (17), after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, the timer display is "00:00". ], the notice of strong sabotani group is started],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a first advance notice display [for example, a pre-read advance notice by the hold icon in the display form of the blue timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c') (the relevant advance notice)). ,
One of the plurality of types of advance notice display is a second advance notice display [for example, a pre-read advance notice by the hold icon in the display mode of red timer hold shown in FIG. 366 (E12c″) (the relevant change notice), etc.]. Yes,
The first notice display includes a notice display of a certain type [for example, a notice display due to a change in the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle] and is displayed as a notice in advance. It is a display [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c'), the hold icon (variation icon) in the display mode of the blue timer hold configured to include a blue display in a circle is For example, it has been announced that there is a possibility of a big hit],
The second notice display is a notice display that is displayed as a read-ahead notice by including the notice of a certain type [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c″), it is a red circle). The holding icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the red timer pending configured to include the display of "is a warning that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.",
The first notice display includes a display indicating that the timer effect is started [for example, a display of a fuse included in the hold icon in the blue timer hold display mode shown in FIG. 366 (E12c')]. It is a notice display,
The second notice display is a display indicating that the timer effect is started [for example, a display of a fuse included in the hold icon in the red timer hold display mode shown in FIG. 366 (E12c″)]. It is a notice display including
The mode of displaying the certain type of the notice in the first notice display and the mode of displaying the certain type of the notice in the second notice display are different,
The initial display of the timer display when the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started is the first time [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c′), the hold icon is When it is displayed in the blue timer hold display mode, "10:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display, etc.],
The initial display of the timer display when the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started is the second time [for example, as shown in FIG. 366 (E12c″), the hold icon is displayed. Is displayed in a red timer hold display mode, "60:00" is displayed as the initial display of the timer display, etc.],
It is configured such that the first time is longer than the second time and the time is easily selected.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified to the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to predict and entertain the contents of the effect to be executed as the timer effect is executed.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. In addition, the production means may be one that always executes the timer production, or may not execute the timer production.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display is not a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only as a prefetch notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice of a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may be displayed as something other than. In addition, the first notice display may be always displayed as a prefetch notice by including a notice display of a certain type, or may be displayed by a notice notice of a certain kind. May not be displayed as.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a prefetch notice by including only a certain type of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain type of notice display. May be displayed as a pre-reading notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a prefetch notice by always including a notice of a certain type, or may not be displayed as a notice of a notice. May be displayed as.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only as a prefetch notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice of notice by a certain type. It may be displayed as something other than. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice by including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed by a certain type of notice display. May not be displayed as.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a prefetch notice by including only a certain type of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain type of notice display. May be displayed as a pre-reading notice. The second notice display may be displayed as a prefetch notice by always including a notice of a certain type, or may not be displayed as a notice of a notice. May be displayed as.

Further, the first notice display may include only a display that indicates that the timer effect is started, or may include a display other than a display that indicates that the timer effect is started. May be. Further, the first notice display may necessarily include a display indicating that the timer effect is started, or may not include a display indicating that the timer effect is started. It may be.

Note that the first notice display may include a display indicating that the timer effect is (always) started.

Further, the second notice display may include only a display indicating that the timer effect is started, or may include a display other than the display indicating that the timer effect is started. May be. In addition, the second notice display may necessarily include a display indicating that the timer effect is started, or may not include a display indicating that the timer effect is started. It may be.

Note that the second notice display may include a display indicating that the timer effect is (always) started.

Further, only a mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the first notice display and a mode of displaying a certain type of notice in the second notice display may be different from each other. An aspect other than the aspect of displaying a certain type of advance notice may be different from the aspect of displaying a certain type of advance notice in the second type of advance notice display. In addition, the display mode of a certain type of notice in the first notice display may be different from the display form of a certain type of notice in the second notice display. There may be a case where the display mode of a certain type of advance notice does not differ from the display mode of a certain type of advance notice in the second advance notice display.

When the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display may be only the first time or a time other than the first time. Further, the initial display of the timer display when the first notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be always the first time or may not be the first time.

When the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started, the initial display of the timer display may be only the second time or a time other than the second time. Further, the initial display of the timer display when the second notice display is displayed and the timer effect is started may be the second time without fail, and may not be the second time.

Further, it may be configured so that only the time when the first time is longer than the second time may be easily selected, or the time other than the time when the first time is longer than the second time. It may be configured to be easily selected. Also, the first time may be configured to be always selected longer than the second time, or when the first time is longer than the second time is not selected. May be configured.

In addition, “the certain effect is a notice effect [for example, notice of a strong cut-in shown in FIG. 370 (H35)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the sense of expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

Here, the certain effect may include only the notice effect or may include an effect other than the notice effect. In addition, a certain presentation may necessarily include the advance presentation, or may not include the advance presentation.

In addition, "the certain effect is a chance-up effect [for example, pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 369 (H25) to (H26)],
The chance up effect is an effect in which the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a big hit by performing a certain effect.

Here, the certain effect may include only a chance-up effect, or may include an effect other than the chance-up effect. Further, a certain effect may include a chance-up effect without fail, or may not include a chance-up effect.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Demonstration means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like shown in FIG. 358 (9) to (17)]
A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The timer effect is an effect (hereinafter, “a certain effect [for example, a strong sabotani shown in FIG. 358 (17)] when the timer display indicates a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Group notice, etc.]”) is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 358(9) to (17), the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Later, when the timer display reaches "00:00", the strong Savohani group notice will start, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is the first advance notice display [for example, the advance notice advance notice (the change advance notice) by the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3) and FIG. F20) shows a pre-reading notice (a notice of the change) by the hold icon in the display mode of the red timer hold, etc.],
The first notice display is a notice display of a certain type [for example, a notice display when a lord's character is displayed or a notice display when the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle changes. Etc.] is displayed as a notice and is displayed as a notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(3), the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold (variable icon including a character of Tonosama). ) Foretells that the corresponding symbol variation display may be a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a red timer hold display configured to include a red display in a round shape. The hold icon (variable icon) of the form gives a notice that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding variable symbol display],
The first notice display is a display indicating that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter, “first display [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3) hold). Display of a bomb included in the icon, and display of a fuse included in the hold icon in the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)].
Effects using a certain character [for example, navigation character YM shown in FIG. 367 (F9)] (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect [for example, Yoshimune Kankan game shown in FIG. 367 (F9) to FIG. ]] is executed to execute one of the plurality of types of displayed previews (hereinafter, “preliminary display [for example, a blue pending display shown in (F9) in FIG. 367). "The first hold icon h11 etc. of display mode]" is displayed as the first notice display [for example, the first hold icon h11 etc. of red timer hold display mode shown in FIG. 367 (F20)]. May be configured to
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified to the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to anticipate and enjoy the effect to be executed along with the execution of the timer effect.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. In addition, the production means may be one that always executes the timer production, or may not execute the timer production.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display showing a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display is not a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

The first notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice other than a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may be displayed as a thing. The first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may not be done.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain type of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice without including a notice of a certain type. It may be done.

Here, the “preliminary notice” is a concept that includes both the “variable notice” and the “prefetch notice”.

Further, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect may be started, or may indicate that there is a case other than when the timer effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect may be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect may be started. Good.

The first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than that the timer effect is (always) started. Good. Further, the first display may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is (necessarily) started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is (inevitably) started. Good.

The first notice display may include only the first display or may include a display other than the first display. Further, the first notice display may necessarily include the first display, or may not include the first display.

Further, it may be configured such that a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed only as the first notice display by executing the first notice. May be configured such that a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, by executing the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be always displayed as the first notice display, or the first effect is performed. By doing so, it may be configured such that the displayed certain notice display may not be displayed as the first notice display.

Further, it may be configured such that only the certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display by executing the first notice. By executing the above, the warning display other than the displayed certain warning display may be displayed as the first warning display in some cases.

Further, it may be configured such that a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display only by executing the first notice. It may be configured such that a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display even when effects other than the above are performed.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a prefetch notice (the notice of the change) by the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 367 (F9), the read-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon in the red hold display mode],
The second notice display is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including the certain type of notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 357(3), it is configured to include a lord's character. The hold icon (fluctuation icon) in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold that has been announced indicates that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of red pending, which includes the display of, indicates that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first display,
By executing the first effect, the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display [for example, FIG. 367 (F9)- As shown in (F20) of the figure, the execution of the Yoshimune Kankan game causes the displayed first hold icon h11 in the blue hold display mode to change to the red timer hold display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this amusement machine, even if the prefetching notice does not suggest the start of the timer effect, it may change to the first notice display when the first effect is executed, so that it can be expected There is.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

The second notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice other than a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may be displayed as a thing. The second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may not be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain type of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice without including a notice of a certain type of notice. It may be done.

Here, the “preliminary notice” is a concept that includes both the “variable notice” and the “prefetch notice”.

In addition, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. Moreover, the second notice display may not necessarily include the first display, or may include the first display in some cases.

Further, it may be configured such that the second notice display that has been displayed may change to only the first notice display when the first effect is executed. The execution may be configured such that the displayed second notice display may change to a notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the first notice may be executed so that the displayed second notice display is always changed to the first notice display, or the first notice is executed. As a result, the displayed second notice display may not be changed to the first notice display.

Further, it may be configured such that only the displayed second notice display may be changed to the first notice display by executing the first production, or the first production is performed. The execution may be configured such that a notice display other than the displayed second notice display may change to the first notice display.

Further, the second notice display that has been displayed may be changed to the first notice display only by executing the first notice, or other than the first notice. The second notice display that has been displayed may be changed to the first notice display even when the effect is executed.

In addition, the "second notice display is a notice display that may include a notice of a different type from the notice of a certain type [for example, the Yoshimune reservation shown in Fig. 357(3)]. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode may be displayed with the icon of Savohani or the icon of replay added, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even when the second notice display is displayed, it may be possible to make expectations other than the timer effect.

Here, the second notice display may include only a notice display of a different type from a notice display of a certain type, or may be different from a notice display of a certain type. The display may include a display other than the display of the type of notice. In addition, the second notice display may include a notice display of a different type from a notice display of a certain type, or a notice of a different type from a notice display of a certain type. May not be included.

In addition, it is configured such that the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display by executing the first effect. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 367 (F8a) to (F20a), when the Yoshimune Kankan game is executed, the first hold icon h11 displayed in the blue timer hold display mode is red. Change to display mode of timer hold, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect an upgrade of the first notice display.

Here, it is configured such that the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed only to the display mode of another first notice display by executing the first effect. However, the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed to a display mode other than the display mode of the other first notice display by executing the first effect. It may be configured as follows. Further, the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display by executing the first effect. The display mode of the displayed first notice display may not be changed to another display mode of the first notice display by executing the first effect. ..

In addition, by executing the first effect, only the display mode of the displayed first notice display may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display. When the display mode of the notice display other than the display mode of the displayed first notice display is changed to another display mode of the first notice display by executing the first effect May be configured to have.

Further, the display mode of the first notice display that has been displayed may be changed to another display mode of the first notice display only by executing the first effect. The display mode of the displayed first notice display may change to the display mode of another first notice display even when the production other than the first production is executed. May be configured.

It should be noted that the display mode of the display of a certain type of advance notice among the displayed first advance notice displays may be changed by the execution of the first effect, or the display mode of the first display may be changed. May change, or both the display mode of a certain type of advance notice display and the display mode of the first display may change.

In addition, "the display of the certain type of advance notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect [eg, a round and blue aspect, etc.],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a round and red mode, etc.],
From the case where the first notice display including the display of the certain kind of notice of the first aspect [for example, the hold icon in the blue timer hold display manner shown in FIG. 367 (F8a)] is displayed Also when the first notice display including the display of the certain type of notice in the second mode [for example, the hold icon in the display mode of red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20a)] is displayed Is configured so that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display,
By the execution of the first effect, the display of the certain type of advance notice in the displayed first advance notice display may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 367 (F8a) to (F20a), the Yoshimune Kankan game is executed to display the first hold icon in the blue timer hold display mode. h11 changes to the display mode of red timer hold, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand that the upgrade has been made.

Here, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be able to be displayed only in one of the plurality of modes, or in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. It may be configured to be displayable. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in one of the plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in one of the plurality of modes. In some cases, it may be configured in some cases.

Further, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be configured to be displayable only in the first mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the first mode. Good. Further, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be configured to be always displayed in the first mode, or may be configured not to be displayed in the first mode. It may be.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the second mode. Good. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second mode, or may be configured not to be displayed in the second mode. It may be.

Further, the first notice display including the display of the certain type of notice of the second mode is more than the case of the first notice display including the display of the certain type of notice of the first mode being displayed. In the case where it is displayed, it may be configured such that only the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and the first mode including the display of a certain kind of notice of the first mode is included. The case where the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the second mode is displayed, rather than the case where the notice display is displayed, is a symbol other than the jackpot symbol mode in a certain symbol variation display. The mode may also be configured so that it is easy to be confirmed and displayed. Further, the first notice display including the display of the certain type of notice of the second mode is more than the case of the first notice display including the display of the certain type of notice of the first mode being displayed. The displayed case may be configured such that the big hit symbol mode is surely confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variable display, and the first mode including the display of a certain kind of notice in the first mode is included. When the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the second mode is displayed than when the notice display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be easily performed.

Further, the first notice display including the display of the certain type of notice of the second mode is more than the case of the first notice display including the display of the certain type of notice of the first mode being displayed. The displayed case may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed only in a certain symbol variation display, and the first mode including the display of a certain type of notice in the first mode is included. The case where the first notice display including the indication of a certain type of notice in the second mode is displayed is also displayed in the symbol variation display other than the certain symbol variation display than the case where the notice display is displayed. It may be configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, when the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the second aspect is displayed, the jackpot symbol aspect may be configured to be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. Good. Further, when the first notice display including the display of a certain type of notice of the first aspect is displayed, the big hit symbol aspect may not be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. ..

Further, when the first effect is executed, the display of a certain type of advance notice in the first advance notice display that has been displayed may change from the first aspect to only the second aspect. Alternatively, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display is changed from the first aspect to an aspect other than the second aspect by executing the first effect. May be configured. Further, even if the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect by executing the first effect, the display may be changed. It is good that the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect by executing the first effect. May be done.

Further, when the first effect is executed, only a certain type of notice display in the displayed first notice display may change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Alternatively, when the first effect is executed, the display other than the display of a certain type of notice in the first notice displayed is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, the display of a certain type of advance notice in the first advance notice display that has been displayed may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect only when the first effect is executed. Alternatively, the display of a certain type of notice in the displayed first notice display may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect by performing an effect other than the first effect. May be configured.

It should be noted that "the display of the certain type of advance notice of the second aspect is included more than the case of the display of the first advance notice display that includes the display of the certain type of advance notice of the first aspect. The case where the first notice display is displayed is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The case where the second notice display including the certain type of notice display of the second aspect is displayed is more than the case where the second notice display including the notice display is displayed. , It is configured such that the jackpot pattern mode is easily confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variable display." In addition, “a plurality of notices of the certain type of the second aspect are displayed than a plurality of notices of the first aspect including the notice of the certain notice are displayed. The case where the notice display is displayed is configured so that the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a certain symbol variation display."

In addition, “The first display is a display that suggests that the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times [for example, shown in FIG. 363 (B7) or FIG. 370 (H13′). The number of bombs included in the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune bomb hold suggests the number of times the timer advance notice production is started, etc.],
By the execution of the first effect, the number of executions of the timer effect indicated by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first The number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice displayed after the effect of is executed may be different [for example, by executing the Yoshimune Kankan game, The number of bombs included in the bomb hold has been increased from one to three, suggesting the execution of one timer notice production, but suggesting the execution of three timer notice productions.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect an increase in timer effects.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where the remaining guaranteed number of times of the timer effect can be easily informed.

Here, the first display may be a display that only suggests that the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times, or when the timer effect is started once or a plurality of times. The display may indicate something other than the presence. Further, the first display may be a display that always indicates that the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times, or the timer effect may be started once or a plurality of times. It may be a display that may not suggest that there is.

In addition, by executing the first effect, the number of times of execution of the timer effect indicated by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first effect are executed. There may be a case where only the number of times of execution of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice displayed after being displayed is different, or the first effect is executed, whereby the first effect is performed. The execution count of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display that was displayed before the execution of and the first display in the first notice display that is displayed after the first effect is executed are Other than the suggested number of executions of the timer effect, the number may be different. In addition, by executing the first effect, the number of times of execution of the timer effect indicated by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect and the first effect are executed. The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice displayed after the execution may be different, or the first effect may be executed before the execution of the first effect. The timer indicated by the first indication in the first notice displayed on the first suggestion indicated by the first indication and the timer indicated by the first indication in the first notice displayed after the first indication is executed In some cases, the number of times the performance is performed does not differ.

In addition, only when the first effect is executed, the number of executions of the timer effect and the first effect indicated by the first display in the first notice display displayed before the execution of the first effect are The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display displayed after the execution may be different, or by performing an effect other than the first effect, The number of executions of the timer effect suggested by the first display in the first notice display that was displayed before the execution of the first effect and the number in the first notice display that is displayed after the first effect is executed There may be cases where the number of executions of the timer effect indicated by one display is different.

In addition, “the first effect may be started during execution of the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 368 (F8c) to FIG. The game has started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation that the first effect is started by executing the timer effect.

Here, only the first effect may be started during execution of the timer effect, or effects other than the first effect may be started during execution of the timer effect. Further, the first effect may be necessarily started during execution of the timer effect, or the first effect may not be started during execution of the timer effect.

Further, the first effect may be started only while the timer effect is being executed, or the first effect may be started even when the timer effect is not being executed.

In addition, "the display of the certain type of advance notice is a display of the advance notice by an icon,
The icon is a hold icon or a variable icon,
The first notice display is a notice display including the icon and the first display displayed corresponding to the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(3), Yoshimune The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the bomb hold is configured by adding a bomb display to the hold icon (variable icon), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the hold icon and the variable icon may be easy to identify the symbol variable display that is the target of the prefetching notice, and may be easy for the player to understand.

Here, the first notice display may be configured to include only an icon and the first display displayed in correspondence with the icon, or the icon and the first display in correspondence with the icon. It may be configured to include a display other than the first display to be displayed. Further, the first notice display may be configured to necessarily include an icon and a first display displayed in correspondence with the icon, or the icon and the display corresponding to the icon. The first display may not be included in some cases.

The icon may be a notice icon other than the hold icon and the change icon.

In addition, there may be a case where the pre-reading notice is given by the variable icon. That is, whether or not a certain type of notice display is displayed on either the hold icon or the variable icon, whether or not the symbol variable display is on hold at the time when the display is started (whether there is one or more hold or 0) ), the display of a certain type of advance notice by the variable icon can be considered as a prefetch advance notice. For example, in general, when a certain type of notice in the first notice display is a hold icon, it is a prefetch notice, and in the case of a change icon, it is often the change notice. In the case where the number of holdings is 0 and there is a start winning, the look-ahead may be performed before the determination of win/fail, and as a result, a certain type of advance notice may be displayed by the variable icon. In such a case In some cases, it can be said that it is functioning as a look-ahead notice instead of the change notice.

Further, “The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are integrally displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(3), the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb suspension is displayed. The hold icon (fluctuation icon) is such that the display of a bomb is integrally added to the hold icon (fluctuation icon) in the display form of the lord's character],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to understand whether or not the display is for a timer effect.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is easy to understand the symbol variation display which is the subject variation of the notice.

Here, the first notice display may be the one in which only the icon and the first display are integrally displayed, or may be integrally displayed including the icon, the first display, and the display other than these. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first notice display may be the one in which the icon and the first display are always displayed integrally, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed integrally. Good.

Further, “The first notice display is a notice display in which the icon and the first display are displayed separately [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 363 (B7′) is a display mode of Yoshimune hold]. The bomb icon BD' is arranged above the hold icon (variable icon) which is
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the notice by the icon and the notice added may be easy to understand.

Here, in the first notice display, only the icon and the first display may be displayed separately, or the icon, the first display, and the display other than these may be displayed separately. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first notice display may be that the icon and the first display are always displayed separately, or the icon and the first display may not be displayed separately. Good.

In addition, “the icon is configured to be displayed in a default display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(1), the first hold icon h11 has a default display mode (a round white display Mode)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, the icon may be configured to be displayable only in the default display mode, or the icon may be configured to be displayable in a display mode other than the default display mode. Further, the icon may be configured to be always displayed in the default display mode, or may be configured such that the icon may not be displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, “a display of the certain type of advance notice is performed by changing the color of the icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 365(E3), the second hold icon h12 is a circular blue display mode]. Read-ahead notice is displayed by displaying
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the notice may be easy to understand.

Here, a certain type of notice display may be displayed only by changing the color of the icon, or a certain type of notice display may be displayed by a change other than the change of the icon color. It may be. Further, a certain type of advance notice display may be displayed without fail due to a change in icon color, or even if a certain type of advance notice display may not be performed due to a change in icon color. Good.

In addition, “The first effect is an effect in which one of a plurality of results is derived [for example, in the Yoshimune Kankan game, as shown in FIG. Either a roll of "3" or a roll of "5" on the dice is derived, etc.],
One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the result of "5" on the dice shown in FIG. 367 (F18)],
When the first result is derived as a result of performing the first effect, the certain advance notice display that has been displayed is displayed as the first advance notice display [for example, As shown in FIGS. 367 (F18) to (F20), when the die roll of the Yoshimune Kankan game is “5”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the blue hold display mode to the red timer. Change to display mode of hold, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the first result will be derived.

Here, the first effect may be one in which only one result of the plurality of results is derived, or a result other than one result of the plurality of results is also derived. May be. Further, the first effect may be one in which one of the plurality of results is always derived, or may be one in which one of the plurality of results may not be derived. Good.

Further, the first effect may be one in which only the first result is derived, or one in which results other than the first result are also derived. The first effect may be one in which the first result is always derived, or may be one in which the first result may not be derived.

Further, when a first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed only as the first notice display. , When the first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed is also displayed as a notice display other than the first notice display. Good. Further, when a first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be always displayed as the first notice display. Alternatively, when a first result is derived as a result of the first effect, a certain notice display that has been displayed may not be displayed as the first notice display.

Further, when the first effect is derived as a result of the first effect, only a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display. If the first result is derived and the first result is derived, a notice display other than the certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display. Good.

Further, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the first notice display only when the first result is derived as a result of the first effect. In a case other than the case where the first effect is derived and the first result is derived, a certain notice display that has been displayed may be configured to be displayed as the first notice display. Good.

In addition, “the display of the certain type of advance notice is a display by a character [for example, a display by a lord's character shown in FIG. 357(3)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the decoration effect may be improved in some cases.

Here, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display only by the character, or the display of a certain type of advance notice may be a display including a display other than the character. Further, a certain type of advance notice display may necessarily include a character, or a certain type of advance notice display may not include a character.

Further, “The first display is a display that suggests that the timer effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(3) to FIG. The hold icon indicates that the timer advance notice effect will be started because the display of the bomb is included.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the first display may further enhance the sense of expectation that the timer effect will be started.

Here, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect is started, or may indicate something other than the timer effect being started. Further, the first display may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is started.

Also, in the above description,
"Demonstration means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like shown in FIG. 358 (9) to (17)]
A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The timer effect is an effect (hereinafter, “a certain effect [for example, a strong sabotani shown in FIG. 358 (17)] when the timer display indicates a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Group notice, etc.]”) is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 358(9) to (17), the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed. Later, when the timer display reaches "00:00", the strong Savohani group notice will start, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is the first advance notice display [for example, the advance notice advance notice (the change advance notice) by the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3) and FIG. F20) shows a pre-reading notice (a notice of the change) by the hold icon in the display mode of the red timer hold, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is a second advance notice display [for example, a pre-read advance notice (preliminary change notice) by a hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 357(3) or FIG. 367 (F9). ), the read-ahead notice (the change notice) by the hold icon in the red hold display mode],
The first notice display is a notice display of a certain type [for example, a notice display when a lord's character is displayed or a notice display when the color of the hold icon displayed in a circle changes. Etc.] is displayed as a notice and is displayed as a notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 358(3), the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold (variable icon including a character of Tonosama). ) Foretells that the corresponding symbol variation display may be a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F20), a red timer hold display configured to include a red display in a round shape. The hold icon (variable icon) of the form gives a notice that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding variable symbol display],
The second notice display is a notice display that is displayed as a notice by including the certain type of notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 357(3), it is configured to include a lord's character. The hold icon (fluctuation icon) in the display mode of the Yoshimune hold that has been announced indicates that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variation display, and as shown in FIG. 367 (F9), it is round and red. The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of red pending, which includes the display of, indicates that there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display indicating that the timer effect may be started (hereinafter, “first display [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3) hold). Display of a bomb included in the icon, and display of a fuse included in the hold icon in the display mode of the red timer hold shown in FIG. 367 (F20)].
The second notice display is a notice display that does not include the first display,
The certain effect is configured to be started in a state in which the first notice display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 371 (H28a) to (H29a), a timer hold display is displayed. In the state where the variable icon h0 is displayed in the form, the notice of the strong sabotani group is started, etc.],
When the effect using a certain character is executed, the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display [for example, FIG. 368 ( G9) to FIG. 369 (G20), as a result of the Yoshimune Kankan game, the first hold icon h11 of the timer hold display mode to which the panda icon PD is added is changed to the Sabohani display mode. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, even if the expectation of the big hit is the same, the expectation may be amplified to the start of the timer effect.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to anticipate and enjoy the effect to be executed along with the execution of the timer effect.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. In addition, the production means may be one that always executes the timer production, or may not execute the timer production.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may display a plurality of types of displays without fail, or may display a plurality of types of displays in some cases.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display showing a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display is not a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display, or may be capable of displaying the notice display other than the first notice display. Further, the display means may always display the first notice display, or may not display the first notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

The first notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice other than a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may be displayed as a thing. The first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may not be done.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain type of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the first notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice without including a notice of a certain type. It may be done.

The second notice display may be displayed only as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice other than a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may be displayed as a thing. The second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice by including a notice of a certain type. It may not be done.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by including only a certain type of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain type of notice display. It may be displayed as a notice. Further, the second notice display may be displayed as a notice by always including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed as a notice without including a notice of a certain type of notice. It may be done.

Here, the “preliminary notice” is a concept that includes both the “variable notice” and the “prefetch notice”.

Further, the first display may indicate only that the timer effect may be started, or may indicate that there is a case other than when the timer effect is started. Good. Further, the first display may always indicate that the timer effect may be started, or may not indicate that the timer effect may be started. Good.

The first display may indicate that the timer effect is (always) started, or may indicate something other than that the timer effect is (always) started. Good. Further, the first display may necessarily indicate that the timer effect is (necessarily) started, or may not indicate that the timer effect is (inevitably) started. Good.

The first notice display may include only the first display or may include a display other than the first display. Further, the first notice display may necessarily include the first display, or may not include the first display.

In addition, the second notice display may not include only the first display, or may not include any display other than the first display. Moreover, the second notice display may not necessarily include the first display, or may include the first display in some cases.

The display mode of the first display included in the first notice display and the display mode of the first display included in the second notice display may be the same or different. That is, if the function as the first display is common, it is included in the present invention. Further, the first display included in the first notice display and the first display included in the second notice display may have different functions.

Further, it may be configured such that only a certain effect is started in a state where the first notice display is displayed, and effects other than a certain effect are also performed in the state where the first notice display is displayed. It may be configured to be initiated. Further, it may be configured such that a certain effect is always started in a state where the first notice display is displayed, or when a certain effect is not started in a state where the first notice display is displayed. May be configured.

In addition, a certain effect may be configured to be started only in a state where the first notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be generated in a state other than the state in which the first notice display is displayed. It may be configured to be initiated.

Further, it may be configured such that, by performing an effect using a certain character, the displayed first notice display may be displayed only as the second notice display. By executing the effect using the character, the displayed first notice display may be displayed as a notice display other than the second notice display. In addition, by executing the effect using a certain character, the displayed first notice display may be configured to be always displayed as the second notice display. It may be configured such that the displayed first notice display may not be displayed as the second notice display by executing the effect.

Further, it may be configured such that only the first notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the second notice display by performing an effect using a certain character. By executing the effect using the character, the notice display other than the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display in some cases.

Further, it may be configured such that the displayed first notice display may be displayed as the second notice display only by performing an effect using a certain character. The first notice display that has been displayed may be displayed as the second notice display even when a production other than the production using the character is executed.

In addition, “the certain effect is a notice effect [for example, notice of a strong cut-in shown in FIG. 370 (H35)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the sense of expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

Here, the certain effect may include only the notice effect or may include an effect other than the notice effect. In addition, a certain presentation may necessarily include the announcement presentation, or may not include the announcement presentation.

In addition, "the certain effect is a chance-up effect [for example, pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 369 (H25) to (H26)],
The chance up effect is an effect in which the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed than when it is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a big hit by performing a certain effect.

Here, the certain effect may include only a chance-up effect, or may include an effect other than the chance-up effect. Further, a certain effect may include a chance-up effect without fail, or may not include a chance-up effect.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"Demonstration means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a timer notice effect or the like shown in FIG. 358 (9) to (17)]
A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The timer effect is an effect (hereinafter, “a certain effect [for example, a strong sabotani shown in FIG. 358 (17)] when the timer display indicates a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Group notice, or hold change animation etc. shown in FIG. 369 (H12) or FIG. 370 (H12a)]” is started [for example, FIG. 358(9) to FIG. As shown in 17), when the timer display becomes “00:00” after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, the strong sabotani group notice is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a look-ahead notice (a notice of the change) by a hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3), and FIG. H3) is a read-ahead notice (preliminary notice of change) by a hold icon in the display mode of one bomb, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is a third advance notice display [for example, a pre-read advance notice (preliminary change notice) by a hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 358 (18) or FIG. 369 (H13). ), the pre-reading notice (preliminary notice of change), etc. by the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are displayed as a single block],
The second notice display is a notice display including a display indicating that the timer effect may be started at least once [for example, in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3). At least one timer notice effect is started for the look-ahead notice with the hold icon (the change notice) and the read-ahead notice with the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb shown in FIG. 369 (H3) (the change notice). Etc.],
The third notice display is a notice display that may be displayed differently from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect [for example, shown in FIG. 358 (18). Pre-reading notice by the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold (the change notice) or pre-reading notice by the hold icon in the display form in which three bombs shown in FIG. 369 (H13) are shown as one block , It is changed and displayed in relation to the fact that the timer notice production was performed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the notice display while expecting a certain effect.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. In addition, the production means may be one that always executes the timer production, or may not execute the timer production.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice displays.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display showing a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display is not a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice displays other than the second notice display. Further, the display means may always display the second notice display or may not display the second notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third notice display, or may be capable of displaying notice notices other than the third notice display. Further, the display means may always display the third notice display, or may not display the third notice display.

Further, the second notice display may include only a display indicating that at least one timer effect may be started, or at least one timer effect may be started. It may include a display other than the display indicating that there is. In addition, the second notice display may always include a display indicating that at least one timer effect may be started, or at least one timer effect may be started. It may not include a display indicating that there is.

In addition, the second notice display may include a display that suggests that at least one timer effect may be started, or at least one timer effect may be started. It may include a display that suggests something other than what is present. Further, the second notice display may include a display that always indicates that at least one timer effect may be started, or at least one timer effect may be started. It may include a display that does not indicate that there is.

The second notice display may include a display that suggests that only at least one timer effect may be started, or an effect other than at least one timer effect is started. It may include a display indicating that there are cases where Further, the second notice display may include a display indicating that at least one timer effect is always started, or suggests that at least one timer effect may not be started. The display may be included.

Further, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display only in connection with the execution of the timer effect, or may be displayed. In connection with this, the warning display other than the second warning display may be displayed in some cases. In addition, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display in connection with the execution of the timer effect, or may be displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect. Then, it may be displayed without changing from the second notice display.

Further, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display and may be displayed only in connection with the fact that the timer effect has been executed, or the timer effect has been executed. In some cases, the second notice display may be changed and displayed in association with other things.

Further, the third notice display may be changed from the second notice display in relation to the fact that only the timer effect is executed, and may be displayed other than the timer effect. It may be changed from the second notice display and displayed in association with the execution.

In addition, "the second notice display is a notice display including a display indicating that the timer effect may be started a second number of times [e.g., once, etc.] [e.g., FIG. At least the advance notice (preliminary change notice) by the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in 3) (the change notice) and the advance notice notice (change notice) by the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb shown in FIG. It suggests that one timer notice production will be started, etc.],
The third notice display is a notice display including a display indicating that the timer effect may be started a third number of times [eg, 0 times or 3 times] [eg, FIG. The pre-reading notice (the change notice) by the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in 18) does not have a bomb display and does not function as a notice for performing timer notice production (that is, 0 times It is suggested that the timer notice effect may be started), and the look-ahead notice (the notice of the change) by the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs shown in FIG. , Suggesting that at least three timer notice productions will be started],
The second number and the third number are different numbers,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the change in the number of times the timer effect is started may be noticed.

Here, the second notice display may include only a display indicating that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects may be started. It may also include a display other than the display indicating that there is a case where Further, the second notice display may necessarily include a display indicating that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects are started. In some cases, it may not include a display indicating that there is a case.

Further, the second notice display may include a display that only indicates that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects are started. It may include a display that suggests things other than the case. In addition, the second notice display may include a display that necessarily indicates that the second number of timer effects may be started, or the second number of timer effects is started. It may include a display that may not indicate that there is a case.

In addition, the second notice display may include a display that suggests that only the second number of timer effects may be started, and effects other than the second number of timer effects are also included. It may include an indication that it may be initiated. Further, the second notice display may include a display indicating that the second number of times of timer effect is surely started, or the second number of times of timer effect may not be started. It may include a display indicating.

Here, the third notice display may include only a display indicating that the third number of times of timer effect may be started, or the third number of times of timer effect may be started. It may also include a display other than the display indicating that there is a case where Further, the third notice display may necessarily include a display indicating that the third number of times of timer effect may be started, or the third number of times of timer effect may be started. In some cases, it may not include a display indicating that there is a case.

Further, the third notice display may include a display indicating only that the third number of times of timer effect may be started, or the third number of times of timer effect may be started. It may include a display that suggests things other than the case. Further, the third notice display may include a display that always indicates that the third number of times of timer effect may be started, or the third number of times of timer effect may be started. It may include a display that may not indicate that there is a case.

In addition, the third notice display may include a display that suggests that only the third number of timer effects may be started, and effects other than the third number of timer effects may also be displayed. It may include an indication that it may be initiated. Further, the third notice display may include a display indicating that the third number of times of timer effect is surely started, or the third number of times of timer effect may not be started. It may include a display indicating.

The second number and the third number may be different from each other or may be the same number.

In addition, "the certain effect [for example, the strong sabotani group notice shown in FIG. 358(17) or the pending change animation shown in FIG. 370(H12a)] is from the second notice display to the third notice display. It is a production that changes to
The second number of times [eg, once or three times] is more than the third number of times [eg, zero or one time].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the remaining number of timer effects while expecting a certain effect.

Here, a certain presentation may change only from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may change from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display. It may be one. In addition, a certain presentation may always change from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may not change from the second notice display to the third notice display. May be.

Further, the second number may be always larger than the third number, may be the same number in some cases, and the second number may be smaller than the third number. There may be cases.

In addition, “the certain effect [for example, the pending change animation shown in FIG. 369 (H12)] is an effect that changes from the second notice display to the third notice display,
The third number of times [eg, 3 times, etc.] is larger than the second number of times [eg, 1 time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, as a result of a certain performance, it may be possible to expect an increase in the number of timer performances.

In addition, for a certain effect, a timer display generally indicates a certain time at a predetermined timing such as pseudo-run or cut-in, but when used for changing the number of times of the timer effect itself, there are few timing restrictions. Therefore, in this gaming machine, since the timing at which the timer display indicates a certain time (that is, the timing at which a certain production can be started) can be varied, the interest in the timer production may be improved.

Here, a certain presentation may change only from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may change from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display. It may be one. In addition, a certain presentation may always change from the second notice display to the third notice display, or may not change from the second notice display to the third notice display. May be.

Also, the third number may be always larger than the second number, or the third number may be smaller than the second number. In addition, the second number and the third number may be the same. For example, the timer effect is executed and the number is exhausted once, and as a certain effect, the timer effect is started once. You may perform what is called a HOLD production|presentation which performs a display to suggest.

In addition, the “second notice display is a notice display that includes a certain kind of notice display [for example, a bomb display, etc.] [for example, as shown in FIG. 370 (H7a), The hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode configured to include the display of the three bombs of the default color gives a notice display in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The third notice display is a notice display that includes the certain type of notice display [for example, a display configured to include a red bomb display as shown in FIG. 370 (H13a). The hold icon (variable icon) of the aspect is a notice display in the corresponding symbol variable display, etc.],
The display of the certain type of advance notice is a display configured to be displayable in one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, the display of a bomb in the default color shown in FIG. 370 (H7a), etc.],
One of the plurality of modes is a third mode [for example, a display of a red bomb shown in FIG. 370 (H13a)],
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects,
In connection with the execution of the timer effect, the display of the certain type of notice from the second type of notice display including the display of the type of advance notice according to the second mode. It is configured so that it may be changed and displayed to the third notice display including "[For example, as shown in FIGS. 370 (H8a) to (H13a), the timer notice effect is performed. As a result, the display has changed from the hold icon containing the display of the three bombs in the default color to the hold icon containing the display of the red bomb],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation to rank up when the second notice display changes to the third notice display.

Further, the second notice display may include only a certain type of notice display, or may include a display other than a certain type of notice display. May be Further, the second notice display may be displayed without fail including a notice of a certain type, or may be displayed without including a notice of a certain type of notice. It may be one.

Further, the third notice display may be a display that includes only a certain type of notice display, or may be a display that also includes a display other than a certain type of notice display. May be Further, the third notice display may be displayed without fail including a certain type of notice display, or may be displayed without including a certain type of notice display. It may be one.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be able to be displayed only in one of the plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than one of the plurality of modes. It may be configured as possible. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to always be displayed in one of the plurality of modes, or when not displayed in one of the plurality of modes. May be configured to have.

Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be displayable only in the second mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the second mode. Good. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the second mode, or may be configured not to be displayed in the second mode. It may be.

Further, the display of a certain type of advance notice may be configured to be displayable only in the third mode, or may be configured to be displayable in a mode other than the third mode. Good. Further, the display of a certain type of notice may be configured to be always displayed in the third mode, or may be configured not to be displayed in the third mode. It may be.

In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, a second notice display including a notice display of a certain type according to the second aspect to a third notice display of a notice of a certain type according to the third aspect. May be configured to be changed and displayed only on the notice display of, and in connection with the execution of the timer effect, a display including a notice of a certain type according to the second aspect. It may be configured to change and display from the second notice display to a notice display other than the third notice display including a certain type of notice display according to the third aspect. In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, a second notice display including a notice display of a certain type according to the second aspect to a third notice display of a notice of a certain type according to the third aspect. May be configured to be always changed and displayed, and in connection with execution of the timer effect, the second notice including a display of a certain type of notice according to the second aspect. It may be configured such that the display may be displayed unchanged from the display to a third notification display including a display of a certain type of notification according to the third aspect.

In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, a second notice display including a notice display of a certain type according to the second mode to a notice display of a certain type according to the third aspect is included. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in a changed manner to the third notice display, and in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the first notice including a certain notice display according to the second aspect is included. It may be configured such that the second notice display may be changed to the third notice display including a display other than the display of a certain type of notice according to the third mode. In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, a second notice display including a notice display of a certain type according to the second mode to a notice display of a certain type according to the third mode is always included. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in a changed manner to the third notice display, and in connection with the execution of the timer effect, the first notice including a certain notice display according to the second aspect is included. It may be configured to change and display from the second notice display to the third notice display that does not include the display of a certain type of notice according to the third mode.

In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, only the second notice display including the notice display of a certain type according to the second aspect to the first notice display of a certain type according to the third aspect is included. It may be configured to change and display the third notice display, and in connection with execution of the timer effect, a first notice display including a certain notice display according to the second aspect. It may be configured such that the notice display other than the notice display of the second type may be changed and displayed to the third notice display including the display of a certain type of notice according to the third mode.

In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, a second notice display including only a notice of a certain type according to the second mode to a notice of a certain type according to the third mode is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be changed to the third notice display, and in connection with the execution of the timer effect, a display other than the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect. It may be configured to change and display the second notice display including a display of a certain type of notice according to the third aspect. In addition, in connection with the execution of the timer effect, a second notice display including a certain notice display according to the second aspect to a first notice display according to the third aspect is included. It may be configured so that it may be changed to the third notice display, and does not include the display of a certain kind of notice according to the second aspect in relation to the execution of the timer effect. It may be configured such that the second notice display may be changed and displayed to the third notice display including the display of a certain type of notice according to the third mode.

Further, only in connection with the execution of the timer effect, from the second notice display including the display of the certain type of notice according to the second mode to the first type including the display of the certain type of notice according to the third mode. It may be configured so that it may be changed to the third notice display, and in connection with something other than the execution of the timer effect, a notice of a certain type according to the second aspect is given. It may be configured such that the second notice display including the display may be changed to the third notice display including the display of a certain type of notice according to the third mode.

In addition, the "third notice display is a notice display including a notice display by an icon [for example, a hold icon, a change icon, a notice icon, or the like],"
The third notice display changes the icon from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIGS. 371 (H25a′) to (H27a′). In addition, the display mode of the timer notification has changed from the display mode of the timer notification to the display mode of the bancho, etc.] and increase/decrease [for example, as shown in FIG. 369(H9) to FIG. The number of bombs has increased due to the advance notice effect, or as shown in FIG. 370 (H9a) to (H13a), the number of bombs has decreased due to the timer advance notice effect. Etc.] is a notice display that is displayed after at least one of the
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect the change of the icon due to the timer effect.

Here, the third notice display may include only the notice display by the icon, or may include a display other than the notice display by the icon. In addition, the third notice display may include a notice notice displayed by an icon, or may not include a notice notice displayed by an icon.

Further, the third notice display may be displayed by changing and/or increasing/decreasing the icons from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect. However, in addition to the change and/or increase/decrease of icons, the second notice display may be performed and displayed in association with the execution of the timer effect. Further, the third notice display may be displayed with at least one of change and increase/decrease of the icon always performed from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect. However, it may be displayed without changing and/or increasing/decreasing the icon from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect.

Further, the third notice display may be displayed by changing and/or increasing/decreasing the icon from the second notice display only in association with the execution of the timer effect. However, at least one of the change and increase/decrease of the icon from the second notice display may be displayed in association with the fact that the timer effect is not executed.

The third notice display may be displayed by changing only the icon from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect. Further, the third notice display may be displayed by only increasing the icons from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect. Further, the third notice display may be displayed by only reducing the icons from the second notice display in association with the execution of the timer effect.

Further, "the above-mentioned icon is an icon displayed corresponding to a certain symbol variable display, a gaming table characterized in that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the expectation for a certain symbol variation display.

Here, the icon may be displayed only corresponding to a certain symbol variable display, or may be displayed corresponding to something other than a certain symbol variable display. Further, the icon may be displayed without fail corresponding to a certain symbol variable display, or may be displayed without corresponding to a certain symbol variable display.

Further, "the icon is a hold icon, a change icon or a notice icon,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “It is configured such that the timer effect can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the one-time symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 369 (H8) to 370 (H38), one time of the symbol). While the variable display is being executed, the timer announcement effect is being executed three times, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer effect is performed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display.

Here, it may be configured such that only a plurality of timer effects can be executed during the execution of the one-time symbol variation display, and effects other than the plurality of timer effects are also performed during the one-time symbol variation display. It may be configured to be executable. In addition, the timer effect may be configured to be executed a plurality of times without fail during the execution of one symbol variation display, or when the timer effect is not performed a plurality of times during the execution of one symbol variation display. May be configured to have.

Further, the timer effect may be configured to be able to be executed a plurality of times only while the symbol variable display is being executed once, and the timer effect may be executed a plurality of times even when the symbol variable display is not being executed once. May be configured.

In addition, “The second notice display is a notice display including a display indicating that the timer effect is started at least once [for example, in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 358(3). At least one timer notice effect is started for the look-ahead notice with the hold icon (the change notice) and the read-ahead notice with the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb shown in FIG. 369 (H3) (the change notice). Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the expectation for the timer effect being started may be further enhanced by the second notice display.

Here, the second notice display may indicate only that at least one timer effect is started, or may indicate something other than at least one timer effect being started. It may be one. Further, the second notice display may necessarily indicate that at least one timer effect is started, or may not indicate that at least one timer effect is started. May be

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

372 to 383 are diagrams showing, in stages, the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 372 to 383, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220 and the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Note that, in FIGS. 372 to 383, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, a device including a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. May be Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or the POV display described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 372 is a diagram showing in stages an example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 372(A1) to (A18) show that the button effect is started as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the combination of decorative symbols whose first decorative symbol is "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the central area. Further, in the upper left, the second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the right base icon bIr is arranged in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1), the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1 and the second stage hs2. That is, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is No. 1 of FIG. This is the default display mode described in 1. On the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second number-of-holds display (here, "2" and "0") of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 372(A1), since the symbol is stopped, the variable icon h0 is not displayed on the pedestal hs0 in the variable icon display area CIS. Note that the background screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A1) is solid white, but this solid white color means that the background screen is not shown. In the following figures, the background screen may be shown, but the case of solid white indicates that the background screen is omitted as in the case of FIG. 372(A1).

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 372 (A1) is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 372(A1), the hold icon of special map 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special map 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variable display of the special symbol is performed in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon→the variation symbol start of the decorative symbol, but this order is mixed Good.

In FIG. 372(A2), a state in which the variable display of symbols corresponding to the first hold icon h11 is started is shown. Then, the hold digestion animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0 by performing the change icon moving animation in which the first hold icon h11 moves toward the center of the upper surface of the pedestal hs0 in the change icon display area CIS. To be done. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and is the default display mode. The second hold icon h12 also moves to the first stage hs1 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A2), the second decorative symbol has started variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started variable display.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A3) shows that the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the central region.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A4), the flash effect EF401 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the appearance of the appearance of the timer button is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (A5), after the flash effect EF401 is erased, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed. In the button timer advance notice display BTM1, a timer icon of "10:00" indicating time is displayed above the button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the timer advance notice effect (button timer advance notice effect) is started. I am informing you. That is, in this example of effect, it is suggested that the button effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown. In this example, when the button timer advance notice effect is performed, the timer button appearance animation is always performed, but when the button timer advance notice effect is performed, the timer button appearance animation is not performed. It may or may not be performed. In addition, although the appearance animation of the timer button is performed, another advance notice effect may be started without starting the button timer advance notice effect. In addition, in this effect example, the countdown is started after the timer display is temporarily stopped and displayed as "10:00", but the timer display is not temporarily stopped and the button timer advance notice effect is displayed. It may be configured to start the countdown when started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A6), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows "09:99".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A7), “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the fluctuation display is displayed. .. Further, the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 indicates "00:01".

Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (A8), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased and the button icon emits light, as shown in FIG. 372 (A9). The effect EF402 is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (A10), after the effect EF402 is erased, as shown in FIGS. 372 (A11) to (A12), a button icon is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move towards.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A13), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this example of performance, it is announced in this manner that the button performance will be started. In this example of effect, when the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00", the button effect is started after performing the IN animation of the operation display, but without performing the IN animation. The button effect may be started. Further, in this effect example, the IN animation of the operation display is started from the state shown in FIG. 372(A9), but the effect shown in FIG. 372(A9) to FIG. This is a prior notice for paying attention, and the actual IN animation may start from FIG. 372 (A11). Further, the start timing of the IN animation of the operation display is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set at an appropriate timing. Further, the form of the IN animation is not limited to that shown in this example of production, and other types of IN animation described above or the IN animations shown in the following examples may be adopted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A14), the enlarged and displayed button icon is reduced and changed to the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the button effect is displayed. Has announced that the notice has been started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started. In this example of effect, when the button effect is performed with respect to the button timer notice effect, if the mode of the effect button 136 is, for example, the default mode (light emission in blue), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode. In the case of the red button mode (light emission in red), the button image 136a is displayed in the red display mode. In this case, when the button image 136a is displayed in the red display mode, the jackpot pattern mode may be finalized and displayed more easily. Further, the light emitting mode of the effect button 136 and the display mode of the button image 136a may not match. For example, while the effect button 136 is emitting light in red, a mode in which a button image on which a character's design is drawn may be displayed, or while the effect button 136 is emitting light in white The button image 136a may be displayed in red (a red button image 136aR described later is displayed). Further, for example, while the effect button 136 is emitting red light, the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed, or the effect button 136 is emitting white light, whereas the red button image 136aR is It is also possible to perform a highly noticeable presentation effect that is displayed and the effects do not match. In addition, the light emitting mode of the effect button 136 and the display mode of the button image 136a to be displayed may always correspond to each other. For example, when the effect button 136 emits red light, red light is emitted. The button image 136aR may be displayed, and when the effect button 136 emits red light, the button image may be displayed in a character pattern.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A15), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 (chance button 136) at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (A16), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (A17), " A lord's character holding a placard with the letters "Chance" has appeared, and it is shown that a notice is given. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display being “00:00”, the button effect is started and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect. , A certain production (in this production example, a notice production in which the lord's character appears) is being performed. It should be noted that the notice by the display of the lord's character holding this placard is less reliable than the notice by the background image including the spiritual character CLA shown in FIG. 373 (A14) described later, For example, the reliability of the jackpot may change depending on the letters on the placard, and in addition to “Chance”, “Gekiatsu” or “Iron plate” may be displayed. The reliability of the jackpot may be different even when the notice is displayed. Further, in this example of performance, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, the notice effect is performed, but when the operation effective period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136, The notice effect may not be performed, may be performed, and may or may not be performed. Further, a notice other than the notice by displaying the character of the lord holding the placard may be given, for example, a notice may be given by displaying a background image including the spirit character CLA. Good. In addition, the advance notice effect may not occur even if the effect button 136 is operated. In this case, for example, only a button erasing animation in which the button image 136a is erased may be performed, or a display mode may be performed in which the button erasing animation is not performed and the button image 136a is erased in one frame.

In FIG. 372 (A18), an image of an enemy swordsman is displayed in a large size, and a state is shown in which the super reach (SP reach) effect of the VS swordsman reach is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 17 (27) and thereafter are performed.

In this example of effect, when the timer display in the button timer notice effect in FIG. 372 (A8) is "00:00", the button effect is started after performing the IN animation, but the IN animation is omitted. After the effect shown in FIG. 372(A8) is performed, the effect shown in FIG. 372(A14) may be suddenly started, or after the effect shown in FIG. 372(A9) is performed. It is borne even if the effect shown in 372 (A14) is started.

FIG. 373 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 373(A1) to (A14) show a case where the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is longer than the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 372. Note that FIG. 373 (A1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(A1), the state where the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased is shown. In the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373(A1), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 372, the initial value of the timer display is “60:00”, and 60 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. Then, it is suggested that the button presentation is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A2), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows “59:99”. After that, in this example of effect, one pseudo continuous effect is performed, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed twice.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373(A3) shows that the second pseudo-reproduction is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (A4), the variable display of the decorative pattern for the third time based on the second pseudo-reproduction is started. Therefore, "x3" indicating that is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. It should be noted that the countdown of the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 continues while the above-mentioned presentation is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 373 (A4), the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is "21: 28" is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A5), the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the fluctuation display is displayed. .. Further, the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 indicates "00:01".

Then, as shown in FIG. 373(A6), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 373(A7), after the effect EF402 is erased, as shown in FIG. 373(A8) to FIG. 373(A9), a button icon is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move towards.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A10), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A11), the enlarged and displayed button icon is reduced and changed to a button image, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image, and the button is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. That is, it is informed that the button presentation by the timer notice presentation has started. Here, in this effect example, the red button image 136aR is displayed instead of the default button image 136a. That is, in this production example, in the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon is the default display mode, but the button image 136a which is the default display mode is changed at the timing when the button image is displayed. The red button image 136aR in the upgraded mode is displayed. In addition, in the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon may be changed to the display mode of the red button. Further, in the IN animation of the operation display, the display mode of the button icon may be displayed in the default display mode, and the display mode of the red button may not be changed. Further, in this effect example, the display of the button icon may be changed to the display mode of the red button when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”. The timing at which the display mode of the button icon changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button is not limited to the above-mentioned timing, but may be an appropriate timing. Further, the button icon may be displayed in a red button display mode at the time of starting the display of the button timer advance notice display BTM1. In addition, the appearance of the red button is less frequent than the default appearance, and when the button icon or button image (red button image 136aR) is displayed in the red button appearance, the red button is displayed. In the final display mode, it may be easier to stop and display the jackpot pattern than when the button icon or the button image is not displayed in the display mode. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started. In this example of effect, when the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is a certain time or more (for example, “60:00” or more), the red button image 136aR is always displayed. The button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed, but the red button image 136aR may be displayed more easily.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A12), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that it is the operation valid period of the effect button 136. After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 373 (A13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (A14) displays a background image including the spiritual character CLA, A notice display with a high degree of reliability for jackpots is displayed. As described above, in this example effect, the button effect is started as a result of the timer notice effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display being “00:00”, and the effect button 136 being operated in this button effect, It is shown that a certain effect (in this example of the effect, a background image including the spirit character CLA is displayed) is being performed. In this example of performance, the notice effect is performed when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, but when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, The notice effect may not be performed, may be performed, and may or may not be performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 372 (A18) and thereafter are performed. In this example of performance, even if the length of the initial value of the timer display is different, a certain performance to be executed may be the same, for example, the initial value of the timer display is “30:00”, A background image including the spirit character CLA may be displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect started after the countdown of the timer display is completed, and the initial value of the timer display is “60:00”. The background image including the spiritual character CLA may be displayed even when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect started after the countdown of the timer display is completed. Moreover, when the length of the initial value of the timer display is different, the same effect may be performed as a certain effect, and the same effect may not be performed.

In this example of effect, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 372 (A5) whose initial value is “10:00” is the default timer display value shown in FIG. 373 (A1). Is set to "60:00", the countdown is started at an earlier timing after the symbol variation display is started than the button timer advance notice display BTM1. However, the countdown is not limited to this and, for example, the initial timer display is displayed. The button timer advance notice display whose value is “10:00” and the button timer advance notice display whose initial value is “60:00” may start counting down at the same time, or the initial value of the timer display is “60”. After the countdown of the button timer notice display of "0:00" starts, the countdown of the button timer notice display of "10:00" may start, or the countdown of the timer display of "60" may start. After the countdown of the button timer advance notice display of "0:00" is completed and becomes "00:00", the countdown of the button timer advance notice display of which the initial value of the timer display is "10:00" is completed and "00" is reached. May be set to ":00" (for example, when the initial value of the timer display is "60:00" and the timer display of the button timer advance notice display is "02:00", the initial value of the timer display is "10:00". The countdown of the button timer advance notice display may start, or the countdown of the button timer advance notice display with the initial value of the timer display of “60:00” is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”. After that, the countdown of the button timer notice display whose initial value of the timer display is "10:00" may start.), and the countdown of the button timer notice display whose initial value of the timer display is "60:00" After the start of, the countdown of the button timer advance notice display whose initial value of the timer display is "10:00" is started, and both countdowns may be completed at the same time to "00:00".

FIGS. 373(B1) to (B5) show another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 373(A1) to (A14). Note that FIG. 373 (B1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (B1), it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased. In the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373 (B1), unlike the example of the effect shown in FIG. 373 (A1), the display mode of the button icon of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is not the default display mode but the red button display mode. Has become. That is, in this effect example, the button icon is displayed in the display mode of the red button in the button timer notification display BTM1 when the button timer notification effect is started. Moreover, the initial value of the timer display is “60:00”, which suggests that the button effect is started when 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 373(B2) to (B5) are performed. Note that the effect performed during the period of FIG. 373 (B2) to (B5) is the same as the effect performed during the period of FIG. 373 (A2) to (A10), but during this period as well. The display mode of the button icon on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is the display mode of the red button. After the effect shown in FIG. 373 (B5) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 373 (A11) and thereafter is performed.

It should be noted that, in this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 remains the display mode of the red button and then the red button image 136aR is displayed in the button effect. The display mode of the button icon may change (rank down) from the display mode of the red button to the default display mode, and the display mode of the button icon may be the display mode of the red button at the start of the button timer advance notice effect. However, when the button effect is performed, the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed and the effect of ranking down may be performed. Further, when the button icon is in the default display mode or the red button display mode, the lever icon may be changed to a lever icon imitating the shape of the lever 136V to rank up.

FIGS. 373(C1) to (C3) show other effect patterns of the IN animation of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373(A8) to (A10). Note that FIG. 373 (C1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 373 (A7).

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (C1), it is shown that another effect pattern of the IN animation of operation display (combined IN animation) has started. When this combined IN animation is started, a button icon 136qL in a display mode of a semi-transparent red button appears from the left end of the display screen, and a button icon 136qR in a default display mode also displayed in a semi-transparent state. Appearing from the right end of the display screen and heading toward the center of the display screen so as to approach each other. In this effect example, by displaying both the display mode of the red button and the default display mode as the semitransparent button icon, either the red button image 136aR or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed. Suggests that it may be. Even while the combined IN animation shown in this effect example is being displayed, the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed as it is in the effect icon display area DIS, and the button timer notice display BTM1 is deleted after the combined IN animation ends. Good. Further, by displaying both the display mode of the red button and the button image 136a of the default display mode as the semitransparent button icon, it is confirmed that the red button image 136aR is confirmed to be displayed. Alternatively, it may be determined that the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (C2), the button icon 136qL in the display mode of the semitransparently displayed red button and the button icon 136qR in the default display mode of the semitransparent display are displayed in the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap with each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 373 (C3), the bursting effect EF403 is displayed, and thereafter, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A14) and after, and the effect shown in FIG. 373 (A11) and after.

FIG. 374 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 374(A1) to 374(A15) show how the button timer advance notice effect is being performed during execution of the SP reach. Note that FIG. 374 (A1) is, for example, an effect continued from FIG. 17 (26).

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374(A1), animation of a duel scene between the main character, Tonosama, and the enemy, the swordsman, is displayed. Note that the button timer advance notice effect described in the present embodiment may show an example of effect that is executed only during the decorative symbol variable display or an example of effect that is executed only during SP reach. However, it is needless to say that it may be executed in a scene other than the decorative pattern variation display and the SP reach, for example, even during the normal reach effect or during the big hit game. It may be performed, or may be executed across the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed before and after the big hit game.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374(A2), the flash effect EF401 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the appearance of the appearance animation of the timer button is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (A3), a state in which the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased is shown. In the button timer advance notice display BTM1, a timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is displayed above the button icon to notify that the button timer advance notice production is starting.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A4), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows "09:99".

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A5), the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is "00:01". Showing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (A6), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased and the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon. , IN animation of operation display is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 374 (A7), after the effect EF402 is erased, as shown in FIGS. 374 (A8) to (A10), a button icon is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move towards.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A11), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this example of performance, it is announced in this manner that the button performance will be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A12), the enlarged button icon is reduced and changed to the button image 136a which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT is below the button image 136a. Is displayed to notify that the notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A13), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 374 (A14), in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (A15), the lord's cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI3b) is displayed. Is displayed. In this effect example, since the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is a short time of "10:00", the effect that the reliability is not high is likely to appear. Here, the cut-in image CI3b in this rendering example is a weak cut-in image, a red cut-in image (not shown) (a cut-in image in a display mode different from that of the weak cut-in image and the gold cut-in image), and a gold cut-in image CI3. There are three types, and the reliability of the big hit increases in the order of the weak cut-in image, the red cut-in image, and the gold cut-in image. In addition, a cut-in image suggesting that the big hit is confirmed may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 17 (33) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 374 (B1) to FIG. 374 (B11) show another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect performed during execution of SP reach. Note that FIG. 374 (B1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 374 (A2).

As shown in FIG. 374 (B1), a state in which the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased is shown. Button timer notice display B
The TM1 displays a timer display of "60:00" indicating the time together with the button icon, and notifies that the button timer advance notice effect is starting. That is, in this effect example, a time longer than the initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372 (A3) is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B2), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows “59:99”.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B3), the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is "00:01". Showing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 374 (B4), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased. After that, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started. After that, after the effect EF402 is erased, as shown in FIGS. 374(B5) to (B6), the button icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B7), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this example of performance, it is announced in this manner that the button performance will be started.

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B8), the enlarged button icon is reduced and changed to a button image, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image, and the button is displayed. It informs that the notice by the production has started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. Here, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image is not the default button image 136a, but the red button image 136aR is displayed, showing that the rank has been improved. In this effect example, since the initial value shown by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is “60:00”, it is shown that the red button image 136aR is easily displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (B9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is shown to be decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 374 (B10), as shown in FIG. 374 (B11), the first large-board behavior auditor product 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior auditor goods 224Gd and The Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the light guide plate IL emits light, and an effect image may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. After that, for example, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, and the first large-board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H are returned to their initial positions, for example, as shown in FIG. 29(24). The effect image fades out on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. As described above, in this effect example, the button effect is started as a result of the button timer advance notice effect being performed and the countdown of the timer display being "00:00", and the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect. As a result, it is shown that a certain effect (in this example effect, an effect based on a character action) is being performed. In this example of performance, the notice effect is performed when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, but when the operation effective period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, The notice effect may not be performed, may be performed, and may or may not be performed. It goes without saying that this can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can be applied to the effect examples described below. Further, when the red button image 136aR is displayed after the button timer notice display is displayed, it may be a big hit without fail, may be always lost, or may be a big hit. There may be Further, the button timer advance notice display itself may be used to indicate the confirmation of the big hit. In such an effect, the content of the effect is determined by an effect lottery according to the result of the hit/miss determination.

374(C1) to FIG. 374(C2) show other effect patterns of the effects shown in FIG. 374(B8) to FIG. 374(B9). Note that FIG. 374 (C1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 374 (B7).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (C1), the enlarged button icon is reduced and changed to the button image 136a, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the button effect is displayed. Has announced that the notice has been started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. Here, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 374 (B8), and is displayed as the default button image 136a. In this effect example, the initial value shown by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is “60:00”, but the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed instead of the red button image 136aR. It is shown. In this way, the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, may be displayed even if the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00". In addition, when the initial value indicated by the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is "60:00", the red button image 136aR may be displayed without fail. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 374 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is shown to be decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B10) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 375 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

In FIGS. 375(A1) to (A8), unlike the effects shown in FIGS. 373(A1) to (A14), the display mode of the button timer notification display in the button timer notification effect is not the button icon but the lever icon. Is shown. Note that FIG. 375 (A1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A1), the state in which the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed instead of the button timer notice display BTM1 after the flash effect EF401 is erased is shown. In the lever timer advance notice display LTM1, a timer icon of "60:00" indicating time is displayed above the lever icon simulating the shape of the effect lever 136V, and the timer advance notice effect (lever timer advance notice effect) is started. I am informing you. That is, in this example of effect, it is suggested that the lever effect is started when 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the countdown. The lever timer advance notice effect by the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is an effect in which the button timer advance notice effect is upgraded, and the case where the lever timer advance notice effect is executed is a big hit compared to the case where the button timer advance notice effect is executed. The symbol mode is easily fixed and displayed. After that, effects similar to those in FIGS. 373(A2) to (A5) are performed, except that the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed to the lever timer notice display LTM1. Even if the effect lever 136V is operated while the lever timer notice display LTM1 is displayed, a certain effect is not started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375(A2) shows that the timer display in the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is "00:00". Then, the effect EF402 in which the lever icon emits light is displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (A3), after the effect EF402 is erased, the lever icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 375 (A4).

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A5), the lever icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A6), the enlarged lever icon is reduced and changed to the lever image 136Va, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136Va. , Informing that the notice by the lever effect has started. That is, it is informed that the lever presentation by the timer announcement presentation has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started. In this example of performance, the lever image 136Va is always displayed when the countdown of the timer display in the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is completed, but it may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (A7), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that it is the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V. Then, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (A8), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 373 (A14) and thereafter are performed.

In addition, in this effect example, when the lever image 136Va is displayed in the button effect, the final jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed than when the button image 136a is displayed. .. Further, when the lever image 136Va is displayed, it may be a big hit without fail, may be missed without fail, or may be a big hit and may be missed.

FIGS. 375(B1) to (B4) show another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 372(A4) to (A12). Note that FIG. 375 (B1) is an effect continued from FIG. 372 (A3).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (B1), a large-sized flash effect EF404 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the appearance of the timer button appearance animation is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (B2), after the flash effect EF404 is erased, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed in the center of the display screen. The button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed in a size larger than that shown in FIG. 372 (A5). That is, in this effect example, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed at the position where the button effect 136 is started and the button image 136a is displayed, and the button image 136a is substantially the same size as the button image 136a. Here, the size of the button image 136a and the image of the button in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be the same size or different sizes. Further, the display position of the button image 136a and the display position of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be the same, may be substantially the same, or may be different. Also in this effect example, the button timer notice display BTM1 is the effect button 136.
A timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is displayed above the button icon imitating the shape of "," informing that the button timer advance notice effect will start. That is, in this example of effect, it is suggested that the button effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. After that, in the button timer advance notice display BTM1, the countdown of the timer display starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (B3), it is shown that the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows "00:01".

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (B4), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, thereafter, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A13) or the subsequent figures (A14) or later. The effect shown in is performed. In this example of performance, it is suggested that the operation of the effect button 136 is valid by displaying, for example, “PUSH!” after the timer display becomes “00:00”. You may do so. At that time, the remaining time display meter MT may or may not be displayed. In addition, a mode in which the display such as “PUSH!” or “Press!” and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed without displaying the button image 136a may be adopted.

FIGS. 375(C1) to (C4) show a state in which the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 372(A4) to (A12) is temporarily interrupted. Note that FIG. 375 (C1) is an effect continued from FIG. 372 (A7).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (C1), the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is switched from “00:01” to “pause”, and the countdown of the timer display is paused (temporarily suspended). The situation is shown. Then, at this time, it is shown that the pseudo symbol is displayed in the middle symbol moving at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. The low speed movement of the pseudo continuous symbol is continued until the same figure (C3), but during this time, the button timer notice display BTM1 is not erased and the button timer notice display BTM1 continues with the timer display showing "pause". Will be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (C3), after the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 375 (C4), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is displayed. It is informed that the first pseudo continuous effect is started. Then, for example, after the pseudo continuous effect is performed once again, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 373 (A5) and thereafter are performed. In this example of the effect, the countdown is temporarily performed when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displaying "00:01" indicating that there is a remaining time until the button effect is started. Although it showed how to stop, when the timer display is "00:00" and the display showing that there is no time left until the button effect is started, it is switched to the "pause" display. Alternatively, an effect of delaying the start of the button effect may be performed.

FIGS. 375(D1) to (D2) show how another effect pattern of the button effects shown in FIGS. 373(A11) to (A12) is being performed. Note that FIG. 375 (D1) is an effect continued from FIG. 373 (A10).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (D1), when the enlarged and displayed button icon is reduced and displayed, the red button image 136aR is replaced by the deca button image 136aL together with the remaining time display meter MT. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that a button image (a large button image 136aL) having a display mode different from that of the button icon displayed in the timer button advance notice display BTM1 is displayed.
It should be noted that the display of the big button image 136aL may be indicated by a button icon display and/or an IN animation of an operation display. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started. In this effect example, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be finally stopped and displayed more easily when the big button image 136aL is displayed than when the red button image 136aR is displayed. When 136aR is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be more likely to be stopped and displayed finally, and even if either of them is displayed, there is no difference in the ease of stop display of the jackpot pattern mode. Good. Further, when the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, a character display prompting an operation such as "PUSH!" or "press!" may be displayed, and the remaining time display meter MT may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (D2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is shown to be decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 373 (A13) and thereafter are performed.

375(E1) to (E3) in FIG. 372(A5) to (A8) in FIG. 372(A8), the effect pattern in which the timer is added in the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect is performed. It is shown. Note that FIG. 375 (E1) is an effect continued from FIG. 372 (A8).

In this effect example, when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display displayed above the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is changed as shown in FIG. 375 (E1). It is changed to "No!!", and the end of the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is denied. That is, it indicates that the timer displayed on the timer is added and the countdown continues. It should be noted that an effect that suggests addition of the timer displayed in the timer on the button timer notification display BTM1 may be performed by another notification effect. Further, in this example of effect, after the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is changed to the display of “No!”, but in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. When the timer display is "00:01" and the display indicating that there is the remaining time until the button effect is started is displayed, the timer display is changed to the display of "No!". Good.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375(E2), the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed at high speed, and then a new timer is displayed as shown in FIG. 375(E3). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the addition for 45 seconds is performed, and as a result, "45:00" is displayed as the timer display. Note that this additional effect may be performed only once or may be performed multiple times. Further, the timer is not limited to the addition of the timer, and the timer may be decreased by the same effect in the middle of the countdown of the timer display, and when the timer display becomes "00:00", the addition effect is performed and the case of the timer display. There may be a case where an additional effect is performed during the countdown. In that case, the additional effect may be different or the same depending on the timing at which the additional effect is performed. In that case, the reliability of the big hit may be different or the same depending on the timing at which the additional effect is performed. After that, the countdown of the timer display is continued, and thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 373 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 376 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

376(A1) to (A5) are different effect patterns following FIG. 372(A12), and show a state in which the lever effect is replaced with the lever icon when the button icon is enlarged. .. Note that FIG. 376 (A1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 372 (A12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376(A1), when the button icon is enlarged and displayed in the IN animation of the operation display, it is replaced with the lever icon. That is, it is shown that the button timer advance notice effect is ranked higher than the lever timer advance notice effect. In this way, an animation in which the operation display changes to another type of operation display during the IN animation of the operation display may be performed. In this example of effect, the variation icon h0 is displayed at a position overlapping the lever image 136Va and the remaining time display meter MT, but the variation icon h0 is displayed so as to overlap the lever image 136Va and the remaining time display meter MT. May be displayed or may be displayed so as to overlap. Further, the variation icon h0 may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the lever image 136Va or the remaining time display meter MT, or may be displayed at an overlapping position ch. It goes without saying that this can be applied to the performance examples described so far and the performance examples described below.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A2), the enlarged lever icon is reduced and changed to the lever image 136Va, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136Va. , Informing that the notice by the lever effect has started. That is, it is notified that the lever effect has been started by the lever timer advance notice effect. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A3), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that it is the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V. Thereafter, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 376 (A4), the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (A5) displays a background image including the spiritual character CLA, It shows that the notice display with high reliability of the big hit is displayed. Although the background image including the spirit character CLA is not displayed even if the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V, it may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 372 (A18) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 376(B) shows another mode in which the button timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 376(A1) to (A3) is upgraded to the lever timer advance notice effect. FIG. 376(B) is an effect following FIG. 372(A13). After the button icon is enlarged and the IN animation of the operation display is finished, the enlarged button icon is reduced and displayed on the button image 136a. It is shown that the button image 136a is replaced with the lever image 136Va at the changing timing. In this way, the lever image 136Va may be displayed as the operation display after the IN animation of the operation display is completed. Note that, after the effect shown in FIG. 376(B) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 376(A3) or later is performed.

FIGS. 376(C1) to (C3) show other effect patterns of the IN animation (combined IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373(C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 376 (C1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 372 (A9).

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (C1), it is shown that another effect pattern of the united IN animation has started. When the combined IN animation in this example of performance is started, a button icon 136qL of the display mode of the effect lever displayed in a semitransparent state appears from the left end portion of the display screen, and a default display mode of the same semitransparent mode is also displayed. It is shown that the button icon 136qR appears from the right end portion of the display screen and heads toward the center of the display screen so as to be close to each other. In this effect example, by displaying both the effect lever display mode and the default effect button display mode as a semi-transparent button icon, either the lever image 136Va or the default display mode button image 136a is displayed. Suggests that may be displayed. It should be noted that it is determined that the lever image 136Va is displayed by displaying both the button icon 136qL in the display mode of the effect lever and the button icon 136qR in the default display mode as the button icon displayed semitransparently. It may be suggested that the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376(C2), the button icon 136qL in the display mode of the effect lever displayed in semitransparent and the button icon 136qR in the default display mode in semitransparent are displayed in the center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap with each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (C3), the bursting effect EF403 is displayed, and thereafter, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A14) and subsequent figures and the effect shown in FIG. 376 (A2) and subsequent figures are performed.

FIGS. 376(D1) to (D6) show another effect pattern of the IN animation (combined IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373(C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 376 (D1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 372 (A9).

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D1), it is shown that another effect pattern of the combined IN animation is starting. When the combined IN animation in this example of performance is started, a button icon 136qL of a display mode of a semi-transparent red button appears from the left end portion of the display screen, and a default display mode of the same translucent display is also displayed. The button icon 136qR appears from the right end of the display screen, and the button icon 136qC of the display mode of the effect lever, which is also displayed in a semi-transparent manner, appears from the upper end of the display screen, so that the button icons 136qR are close to each other. It is shown to be facing the center. In this effect example, the lever image 136Va and the red button image 136aR are displayed by displaying three display modes of the effect lever, the display mode of the red button, and the display mode of the default effect button as the semitransparent button icons. And that any of the button images 136a in the default display mode may be displayed. In this way, in the combined IN animation, three or more lever images and button images may be displayed to indicate that the operation display in any one of these display modes is displayed. It should be noted that, in this example of the effect, there are two types of operation devices, that is, the effect button 136 and the effect lever 136V, but it is also applicable to the case where there are three or more kinds. Note that the lever image 136Va is confirmed to be displayed by displaying three display modes of the effect lever, the red button, and the default effect button as semi-transparent button icons. That the red button image 136aR is confirmed to be displayed, or that the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed. It may be fixed. Further, it may be determined that two images of the lever image 136Va, the red button image 136aR, and the button image 136a in the default display mode are displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D2), the button icon 136qL in the display mode of the red button displayed in a semitransparent state, the button icon 136qR in the default display mode in a translucent state, and the translucent mode. It is shown that the displayed button icon 136qC of the effect lever is overlapped with the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (D3), the bursting effect EF403 is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D4), the red button image 136aR is displayed. Note that, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 372 (A14) or later and the effect shown in FIG. 376 (A2) or later may be performed. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (D5), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is shown to be decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 376 (D6), for example, the effects shown in FIG. 376 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

FIGS. 376(E1) to (E4) show other effect patterns of the IN animation (combined IN animation) of the operation display shown in FIGS. 373(C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 376 (E1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 372 (A9).

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E1), a state in which the united IN animation is started is shown. When this combined IN animation is started, a button icon 136qL in a display mode of a semi-transparent red button appears from the left end of the display screen, and a button icon 136qR in a default display mode also displayed in a semi-transparent state. Appearing from the right end of the display screen and heading toward the center of the display screen so as to approach each other. In this effect example, by displaying both the display mode of the red button and the default display mode as the semitransparent button icon, either the red button image 136aR or the button image 136a of the default display mode is displayed. Suggests that it may be.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E2), the button icon 136qL in the display mode of the translucent red button and the button icon 136qR in the default display mode in the translucent center of the display screen. It is shown that they overlap with each other. Then, the bursting effect EF403 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 376 (E3), in this effect example, the decal button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time display meter MT, instead of displaying the button image corresponding to the button icon of any display mode displayed semi-transparently. It is shown as being displayed. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the operation display (the big button image 136aL) not suggested in the combined IN animation is displayed. In this case, the lever image 137Va different from the semi-transparently displayed button icon in any display mode may be displayed. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (E4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is shown to be decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 376 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

In addition, the combination of the button icons displayed in the combined IN animation executed in this example of performance is not limited to the above-described one.
(1) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the default display mode, the button image 136a or the deca button image 136aL in the default display mode may be displayed, or the button image 136a is always displayed. Alternatively, the button image 136a may be displayed or the decal button image 136aL may be displayed.
(2) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the red button display mode, the button image 136a or the red button image 136aR in the default display mode may be displayed, and the red button image 136aR is always displayed. The button image 136a may be displayed, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, the button image 136a may be displayed, and the big button image 136aL may be displayed. The red button image 136aR may be displayed, the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, the button image 136a may be displayed, the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, or the red button may be displayed. The image 136aR may be displayed in some cases.
(3) With the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the deca button display mode, the deca button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, or the case where the button image 136a is displayed and the deca button image 136aL are displayed. There may be cases. (4) In the combination of the button icon in the default display mode and the button icon in the effect lever display mode, the lever image 136Va may be displayed without fail, or the button image 136a may be displayed and the lever image 136Va may be displayed. There may be cases where
(5) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the red button+the button icon in the display mode of the red button, the red button image 136aR or the big button image 136aL may be displayed, or the red button image 136aR may be displayed without fail. However, the red button image 136aR may be displayed or the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, or the red button image 136aR may be displayed, the deca button image 136aL may be displayed, or the lever image 136Va may be displayed. It may be displayed.
(6) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the red button and the button icon in the display mode of the big button, the red button image 136aR or the big button image 136aL may be displayed, or the red button image 136aR may be always displayed. The big button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, and the big button image 136aL may be displayed.
(7) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the red button and the button icon in the display mode of the effect lever, the red button image 136aR or the lever image 136Va may be displayed, or the red button image 136aR may be always displayed. However, the lever image 136Va may be displayed without fail, the red button image 136aR may be displayed, and the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(8) In the combination of the button icon in the deca button display mode and the button icon in the deca button display mode, the deca button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, or the deca button image 136aL may be displayed and the lever image 136Va may be displayed. There may be cases.
(9) In the combination of the button icon in the display mode of the deca button + the button icon in the display mode of the effect lever, the deca button image 136aL may be displayed without fail, the lever image 136Va may be displayed without fail, or the deca button image 136aL may be displayed. May be displayed and the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(10) In the combination of the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever + the button icon of the display mode of the effect lever, the lever image 136Va may be always displayed, or the lever image 136Va may be displayed and the deca button image 136aL may be displayed. It may be done. (99) Also, a deca lever image having a size larger than the lever image 136Va may be displayed.
(100) The above describes a combination of two semi-transparent button icons, but when three or more semi-transparent button icons appear, the display mode of the button image or lever image to be displayed is appropriately set. be able to.
(101) Furthermore, when the types of button icons appearing from the left end and the types of button icons appearing from the right end are exchanged, the appearance and appearance ratio of the appearing button image or lever image may be different.
Further, in the present embodiment, the reliability of the big hit increases in the order of lever image 136Va> big button image 136aL> red button image 136aR> button image 136a (default), but the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

377 (A1) to (A6) of FIG. 37 show the contents of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 377 (A1) is an effect continued from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377(A1), after the flashing effect EF401 is erased, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed. In the button timer advance notice display BTM1, a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time is displayed above the button icon to notify that the button timer advance notice production is starting.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A2), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows “29:99”.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (A3), the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is "19:57". Showing.

Then, at this timing, when the effect button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 377 (A4), as shown in FIG. 377 (A5), the area around the button icon of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 emits white light. The light emission effect EF405, which is a mode display, is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) to notify that the effect button 136 has been operated. At this time, the display color of the light emission effect EF405 may be different, and in this case, for example, it may function as a big hit notice for the symbol variation display being executed. Specifically, for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be made higher in the order of emission colors of red>green>blue>white. Further, the light emission effect EF405 may have only one type of light emission color (for example, only white color), and the light emission color may not be changed even if the effect button 136 is operated. Also, the effect button 136 may be displayed in a color other than white (for example, start from blue) after the first operation. In addition, in the first operation of the effect button 136, the white color (default color) may be displayed. Further, the stage of the emission color may be skipped in the middle, for example, white may be emitted and then red may be emitted. Further, the emission color may be changed in the order of white>blue>green>red. Further, it may be possible to emit light in a color determined to be a big hit (for example, rainbow color). For example, the light may be emitted in red and then in rainbow, or may be emitted in white. The light may be emitted in rainbow color later. Further, the chance button lamp 138 may be made to emit light in a color matched with the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405, or a game board lamp 442 or a game underframe lamp 452 may be made in a color matched with the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405. May be made to emit light. In this case, the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405 and the light emission color of various lamps may be different, the same, or may be the same or different. When the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of various lamps are the same or different, the reliability of the big hit may be higher or different than the case of the same. The reliability of the big hit may be higher than that of the same case. Further, a sound effect corresponding to the emission color of the light emission effect EF405 may be output from the speaker 120. Further, the effect movable body 224 may be operated by an operation corresponding to the emission color of the light emission effect EF405. Further, when the emission color of the light emission effect EF405 is a color of a certain rank or higher (for example, red or higher (red or iridescent)), other effect means (for example, the speaker 120, the effect movable member 224, various lamps 442). , 452. In this case, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission colors of the various lamps may be different, the same, or different from the case of being the same. In some cases, the emission color of the light emission effect EF405 and the emission color of various lamps may be the same or different, the reliability of the big hit may be higher than the case of the same. It may be higher, or the reliability of the big hit may be higher than in the case of being different in the same case, and when the light emission effect EF405 emits light in a color determined to be a big hit, another effect means (for example, An effect (for example, outputting a big hit confirmation sound) may be performed by the speaker 120. It is said that this is applicable to the effect examples described above and the effect examples described below. Not too long.

After that, when the display time of the light emission effect EF405 elapses, the light emission effect EF405 is erased as shown in FIG. 377 (A6). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

FIGS. 377(B1) to (B7) show the contents of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 377 (B1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 377 (A6).

FIG. 377 (B1) shows a state in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. FIG. 377 (B1) shows that the effect button 136 is operated ten times by repeated hits.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B2), it is shown that the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is changing from white to blue. Even if the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may not change from white to blue. That is, whether or not the light emission color of the light emission effect EF405 changes is determined by the reliability of the big hit in the pattern variation display being executed, and it can be said that the larger the light emission color, the higher the reliability of the big hit. is there.

FIG. 377 (B3) shows a state in which the effect button 136 is further continuously hit. In FIG. 377 (B3), a state is shown in which the effect button 136 is operated 10 times by repeated hits.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B4), it is shown that the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is changing from blue to green. Also in this case, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may not change from blue to green.

FIG. 377 (B5) shows a state in which the effect button 136 is further repeatedly hit. In FIG. 377 (B5), a state is shown in which the effect button 136 is operated 10 times by repeated hits.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (B6), it is shown that the emission color of the emission effect EF405 is changing from green to red. Also in this case, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 may not change from green to red.

After that, when the display time of the light emission effect EF405 elapses, the light emission effect EF405 is erased as shown in FIG. 377 (B7). After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

As described above, in this effect example, the light-emission effect E is generated according to the number of operations of the effect button 136.
By changing the emission color of F405, a big hit is announced. In this example of effect, the effect button 136 is repeatedly struck while the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is being performed, and the display color of the light emission effect EF405 is changed according to the number of times of operation. Alternatively, a long press operation may be performed, and the display color of the light emission effect EF405 may be changed according to the time of long press. Further, the emission color of the effect button 136 may be changed along with the change of the display color of the light emission effect EF405 depending on the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. Also, the number of times the effect button 136 is operated until the emission color changes may be determined by an effect lottery. For example, when the effect button 136 is emitting white, the effect button 136 changes to blue only once. In some cases, it may change to blue when operated 10 times. Further, the number of times the effect button 136 is operated until the emission color changes may be constant. In addition, the number of operations that triggers the color change of the light emission effect EF405 may change depending on whether the color finally changes to red or blue. In addition, the light emission mode of other lamps (for example, some or all of the frame lamps, the chance button lamp 138, some or all of the lamps on the game board) may be changed according to the operation of the effect button 136. Further, the light emission effect EF405 and the light emission color of the lamp may be matched. Further, the emission color of the emission effect EF405 and the emission color of the lamp may be different.

Further, in this effect example, the big hit announcement is made by changing the emission color of the light emission effect EF405. However, for example, in the button effect executed as a result of the button timer announcement effect, it is executed by a button operation. It may be possible to suggest that the effect is a big hit with high reliability by the emission color of the light emission effect EF405. For example, when the emission color of the emission effect EF405 changes to red, the advance notice by the accessory may be given by a button operation in the button effect.

377 (C1) to (C8) of FIG. 37 show another pattern of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 377 (C1) is an effect continued from FIG. 377 (A4).

When the effect button 136 is operated during execution of the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377(C1) displays a flame so as to cover the entire button timer advance notice display BTM1. It is shown that the promotion animation in which the effect EF406 is displayed is started. The promotion animation may not be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (C2), when the flame effect EF406 is deleted, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 changes from the default display mode to the red button display mode. It is shown. That is, this effect can be referred to as a back button effect for increasing the rank of the button timer advance notice display BTM1. In this example of performance, the period for accepting the operation of the back button is set, and if the production button 136 is not operated within the period for accepting the back button, the display mode of the button icon does not change. The display mode of the button icon may change when the back button operation acceptance period ends, the display mode of the button icon may change during the IN animation of the operation display, or the IN animation ends. The red button image 136aR may be replaced at the timing when the button image 136a is displayed.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377(C3), the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is "00:01". Showing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (C4), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased. After that, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display is started. After that, after the effect EF402 is erased, the button icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 377(C5) to (C7).

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (C8), the button icon in the display mode of the red button is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this example of performance, it is announced in this manner that the button performance will be started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B8) and thereafter are performed. When the effect EF402 turns red, the display color of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may also be upgraded to red. Further, if the display mode of the button icon of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes the display mode of the red button and the production button 136 is further operated, the display mode of the button icon may further change. The display mode of the red button may change to the display mode of the gold button or the rainbow button. Here, in addition to the default display mode and the display mode of the red button, for example, the display mode of the gold button and the display mode of the rainbow button are the display correspondences of the button icons of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 displayed in the present embodiment. It may be displayed.

377 (D1) to (D3) in FIG. 377 (D1) to (D3), the button effect is started while the button effect is started during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer announcement display BTM1 and the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect. The example of the production which BTM1 ranks up is shown. Note that FIG. 377 (D1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 377 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 377 (D1), the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D1), the button timer advance notice display. The timer display in BTM1 indicates “20:24”.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D2), it is shown that the small-sized button image 136a is displayed on the left side of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below it. .. That is, it is notified that the button effect is started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (D3), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is shown to be decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated in the mode shown in FIG. 377 (A4), thereafter, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 377 (C1) and thereafter are performed (the button timer advance notice display BTM1 ranks up). is there. If the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the button timer advance notice BTM1 may not be ranked up. If the operation valid period elapses, the rank is upgraded. In some cases, the rank may be updated when the operation valid period has elapsed.

Further, when the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 377(E), instead of FIGS. 377(D2) to (D3), “PUSH! The character “” may be displayed to promote the operation of the effect button 136. That is, the operation of the effect button 136 may be prompted by the button timer advance notice display BTM1 itself. In this case, the light emission mode of the effect button 136 may be changed (for example, light emission in a white blinking light emission mode) to prompt the operation of the effect button 136.

FIG. 378 is a diagram showing step-by-step an effect pattern in which the mini game is executed in the button timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 378(A1) to FIG. 378(A18) show a state in which the type of button image (or lever image) finally displayed during execution of the button timer advance notice effect is selected by the mini game. .. Note that FIG. 378 (A1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 374 (A2).

When the flash effect EF401 is erased, as shown in FIG. 378(A1), a mini game button timer advance notice display MTM1 is displayed to direct the start of the mini game. That is, when the mini game button timer advance notice display MTM1 is displayed and the mini game is started, a lever icon imitating the effect lever 136V is first displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen as shown in FIG. 378(A1). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378(A2), a button icon in a display mode of a red button is displayed so as to overlap the lever icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 378(A3), the button icon in the default display mode is displayed so as to overlap the button icon in the red button display mode. In this way, the button image (lever image) displayed as a result of the button timer advance notice display BMT1 is selected from a plurality of types depending on the result of the mini game. A button timer advance notice display such as roulette hold or selection hold may be displayed. In this case, for example, it may be determined by the operation of the player or may be arbitrarily determined at a certain timing.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A4), a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time is displayed on the upper portion of the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, and further, the mini game button timer notice display MTM1. The character "PUSH!!" is displayed overlaid on the screen, indicating that the continuous pressing operation of the effect button 136 is prompted. The operation valid period starts after that.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378(A5), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the state in which the timer display in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 shows “29:99” is shown. .. The start timing of the operation valid period and the countdown timing of the timer display in the mini game button timer advance notice display MTM1 may be the same, the start timing of the operation valid period may be earlier, or the timer display The countdown start timing may be earlier.

After the operation valid period is started, the continuous striking of the effect button 136 is started in the mode shown in FIG. 378(A6), and when the effect button 136 is operated a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times), the operation button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 378(A7). As shown in, in the mini-game button timer notice display MTM1, the lord's character appears, and among the three button icons (lever icon, red button display mode button icon, default display mode button icon), There may be a case where a button icon in the default display mode is cut and an effect of denying the appearance of the button image 136a in the default display mode is performed as a result of the button timer advance notice effect being performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A8), in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, the button icon in the default display mode is erased, and the button icon in the red button display mode appears on the forefront side. Note that the timer display continues to count down, and the timer display shows "24:55" at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (A8).

Further, as shown in FIG. 378(A9), when the streak operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed and the effect button 136 is further operated a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times), the result is displayed in FIG. 378(A10). As shown, in the mini-game button timer advance notice display MTM1, the lord's character appears again, and this time, of the two button icons (lever icon, red button display mode button icon), the red button display mode There is a case where the effect of denying the appearance of the red button image 136aR is performed as a result of the button timer notice effect being performed by cutting off the button icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (A11), in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1, the button icon in the display mode of the red button is erased, and the lever icon appears on the forefront side. The timer display continues to count down, and the timer display indicates "12:31" at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (A11). When only the lever icon remains as the final form of the mini game, the character "PUSH!!" is not displayed because the mini game has succeeded, but it may remain displayed.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A12), the timer display in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 is "00." : 01”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 378(A13), when the timer display in the mini game button timer advance notice display MTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased and the effect EF402 in which the lever icon emits light is displayed around the button icon. The IN animation of the operation display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 378(A14), after the effect EF402 is erased, the lever icon moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 378(A15).

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A16), the lever icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A17), the enlarged lever icon is reduced and changed to the lever image 136Va, and the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the lever image 136Va. , Informing that the notice by the lever effect has started. That is, it is informed that the lever effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started. Even when the effect button 136 is not operated, or when the lever icon is not reached due to the insufficient number of operations, the lever image 136Va may be displayed when the timer display reaches “00:00”. For example, if the timer display is "00:00" while the button icon is displayed, the IN animation of the operation display is not the IN animation by the lever image shown in FIGS. 378(A14) to (A15). Alternatively, the lever image 136Va may be displayed after the display shown in (B5) of FIG. 378 (B2) to (B4) of FIG. 378 is performed. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated or when the lever icon is not reached due to the insufficient number of operations, the lever image 136Va is not displayed and a display corresponding to the displayed button icon is displayed. You may

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (A18), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that it is the operation effective period of the effect lever 136V. After that, when the effect lever 136V is operated, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B11) and thereafter are performed.

FIGS. 378(B1) to (B5) show another effect pattern in which the type of button image (or lever image) finally displayed during execution of the button timer advance notice effect is selected by the mini game. It shows the situation. Note that FIG. 378 (B1) is an effect continued from FIG. 378 (A6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378(B1), the timer display is "00: 00” is displayed. As a result, the three button icons (lever icon, button icon in the display mode of the red button, and button icon in the default display mode) remain in the mini game button timer preview display MTM1, and any one of these button icons Is notified that the operation display will be displayed as a result. Actually, when it is determined by the effect lottery that the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed as the operation display, the button icon in the default display mode is operated no matter how many times the production button 136 is operated. Is not erased. Further, when it is determined that the red button image 136aR is displayed as the operation display by the effect lottery, the button icon in the default display mode may be deleted, but the button icon in the red button display mode is Not erased. Even when the lever image 136Va or the red button image 136aR is displayed as the operation display by the effect lottery, the button icon in the default display mode may not be deleted.

Then, when the timer display in the mini game button timer notice display MTM1 becomes "00:00", the timer display is erased, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits is displayed around the button icon, and the IN animation of the operation display starts. To be done. After that, as shown in FIG. 378(B2), after the effect EF402 is deleted, as shown in FIGS. 378(B3) to (B4), the button icon in the default display mode among the three button icons. Moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (B5), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends. In this example of performance, it is announced in this manner that the button performance will be started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A12) and thereafter are performed.

FIG. 379 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

379(A1) to (A5) show that the button timer advance notice display BTM1 ranks up during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 379 (A1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 374 (A2). Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 379(A1) to (A3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 377(A1) to (A3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (A4), a state where the promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1 is started is shown. It should be noted that there may be a case where a promotion animation of Gase is performed in which the button timer advance notice display BMT1 is not ranked up even though the promotion animation is performed. In addition, the display mode of the promoted animation may indicate the ease of rank up of the button timer notice display BTM1. For example, when a red promoted animation in which the flame effect EF406 is red is performed. The button timer advance notice display BTM1 may always be upgraded. In addition, when the promotion animation is performed, a stirrup production may be performed to fuel whether or not to step up. Further, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be ranked up by another advance notice effect. It goes without saying that this can be applied to the timer advance notice effect described above and the timer advance notice effect described below.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 379(A5), when the flame effect EF406 is erased, the display mode of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is changed from the default display mode to the red button display mode. It is shown. In addition to the display form of the red button, there may be a case where the step up to the display form of the lever icon is performed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 377 (C3) and thereafter are performed. After the button icon display mode has changed from the default display mode to the red button display mode, it may be upgraded to the lever timer notice display, or from the default display mode button timer notice display to the lever timer notice display. You may rank up to.

In this production example, when the display mode of the button icon in the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the red button, the display mode of the button icon is changed from the default display mode. Finally, the jackpot pattern mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed than when it is not.

FIGS. 379(B1) to (B3) show how the button timer advance notice display BTM1 further ranks up during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Note that FIG. 379 (B1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 379 (A5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(B1), the countdown of the timer display is continued in the button timer advance notice display BTM1, and at the timing shown in FIG. 379(B1), the timer display is “11:57. Is shown. Further, the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 has a display mode of a red button.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (B2), the flame effect EF406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1, and it is shown that the second promotion animation is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 379 (B3), when the flame effect EF406 is erased, the display state of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is changed from the display state of the red button to the lever icon. It is shown. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 378 (A12) and thereafter are performed.

FIGS. 379(C1) to (C4) show that after the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed, the fact that preparation is in progress is displayed before the countdown of the timer display is started, and the start of the button timer advance notice effect is displayed. It shows the situation of giving a notice. Note that FIG. 379 (C1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(C1), the state where the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased is shown. In this effect example, the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is not displayed together with the button icon, and the display of "preparing" indicating that the button timer advance notice effect is started is displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C2) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since "preparing" is displayed on the button timer notice display BTM1. Even at this time, the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to display "preparing".

Then, at the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 379(C3), the timer display is switched from the display of "preparing" to the display of "30:00" indicating the time, and then the countdown is started. Be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (C4), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows “29:99”. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A5) and thereafter are performed.

In this example of production, in order to suggest that the timer advance production is started, the display of "preparing" is displayed instead of the display of time in the timer display. However, for example, FIG. Instead of the effect shown in FIG. (C2), the characters "STANDBY" may be displayed as shown in FIGS. 379(D1) to (D2). Also, needless to say, the present invention is also applied to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below that perform a notice display (preparation display) for indicating that the timer notice effect is started. can do.

FIGS. 379(E1) to (E4) show how the button timer advance notice display BTM1 ranks up while the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displaying that it is being prepared. Note that FIG. 379 (E1) is an effect continued from FIG. 379 (C2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 379(E1), the promotion animation in which the flame effect EF406 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer notice display BTM1 for which "in preparation" is displayed has started. The situation is shown. It should be noted that there may be a case where a promotion animation of Gase is performed in which the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is not ranked up although the promotion animation is performed. In addition, the display mode of the promoted animation may indicate the ease of rank up of the button timer notice display BTM1. For example, when a red promoted animation in which the flame effect EF406 is red is performed. The button timer advance notice display BTM1 may always be upgraded. In addition, when the promotion animation is performed, a stirrup production may be performed to fuel whether or not to step up. Further, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be ranked up by another advance notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 379 (E2), the display mode of the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is changed from the default display mode to the red button display mode, and the rank is improved.

Then, at the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 379 (E3), the timer display is switched from the display of "preparing" to the display of "30:00" indicating the time, and then the countdown is started. Be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (E4), the countdown of the timer display has started and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows "29:99". After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 377 (C3) and thereafter are performed.

In addition, in this example of performance, the start of the button timer advance notice effect is suggested by displaying "preparing" on the button timer advance notice display BTM1, but, for example, FIG. 379 (F1) to FIG. As shown in ), a swing animation in which the button timer advance notice display BTM1 swings up and down may be performed to notify the player that the countdown of the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is about to start. This may allow the player to have an expectation that the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice effect will be started. In addition, a fake button timer advance notice effect in which the countdown of the timer display is not performed even if the rocking animation is performed may be performed. You may be allowed to. Note that, after the effect shown in FIG. 379 (F2) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 379 (C3) or later is performed. Needless to say, it is also possible to apply the swing animation of the embodiment described above and the example of the production example described below.

FIG. 380 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 380(A1) to FIG. 380(A3) show how the effect of switching to the timer display is performed when the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is being displayed. Note that FIG. 380 (A1) is an effect continued from FIG. 379 (C2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380(A1), the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed, and in the button timer advance notice display BMT1, "preparing" is displayed above the button icon. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (A1), the character CHM of Princess Chibi with a 10t iron mallet appears, and the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is shown to be hit.

FIG. 380(A2) shows a state after Princess Chibi's character CHM has hit the button timer advance notice display BTM1. The character CHM of Princess Chibi may hit the button timer advance notice display BTM1 once or a plurality of times, or may be struck rarely.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380(A3), the exploding effect EF407 is displayed so as to cover the entire button timer advance notice display BTM1. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 379 (C3) and thereafter are performed. Alternatively, when the effect EF407 disappears, there may be a case in which the button timer notice display BTM1 also disappears.

FIGS. 380(B1) to 380(B5) show how the display position of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is changed before the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 starts. Note that FIG. 380 (B1) is an effect continued from FIG. 379 (C2).

In this example of performance, when the button timer notice display BTM1 is changed from the "preparing" display to the timer display, a moving animation in which the button timer notice display BTM1 moves to the center of the display screen is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 380(B1), when the button icon of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 moves to the center of the display screen, the button icon is enlarged and displayed above it as shown in FIG. 380(B2). The timer display of "30:00" showing the time is displayed, and then the countdown is started. That is, in this effect example, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is moved and displayed before the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 starts. Further, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation display is displayed in substantially the same size, but the timer display countdown may be performed in the size shown in FIG. 380(B1) without enlarging. However, the button icon may be displayed in a size different from that of the button image 136a to count down the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380(B3), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the state in which the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows “29:99” is shown.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380(B4), the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is "00:01". Showing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (B5), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, thereafter, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 374 (A11) or the same as (A12) The effect shown in is performed.

Further, in FIG. 380(B1), when the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is moved and displayed in the center of the display screen, the display of "preparing" is erased, but as shown in FIG. 380(C1), The button timer notice display BTM1 is moved to the center of the display screen while the display "Preparing" is displayed, and then the button timer notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 380(B2) as shown in FIG. 380(C2). ) The following effects may be performed. In this case, the display of "preparing" may be erased during the moving display of the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Further, the display position of the button timer notice display BTM1 may be changed without moving the button timer notice display BTM1.

FIG. 380(D1) to FIG. 380(D16) show a state in which a plurality of button timer advance notice displays are displayed and the display of “preparing” is performed in each of them. Note that FIG. 380 (D1) is an effect continued from FIG. 379 (C1). It is needless to say that this effect example can be applied to an effect example in which the in-preparation display is performed in each of the plurality of timer advance notice displays described above.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D1), the flash effect EF401 is provided above the button timer notice display BTM1 in which the display of "preparing" is being displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is suggested that a further button timer notice display will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 380(D2), after the flash effect EF401 is erased, the button timer advance notice display BTM2 is displayed. The newly displayed button timer advance notice display BTM2 also displays "in preparation" instead of the timer display to give notice that the button timer advance notice production is started.

After that, at the start timing of the first button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 380 (D3), in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 displayed below the two button timer advance notice displays displayed above and below. The timer display switches from the display "preparing" to the display "10:00" indicating the time, and then the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D4), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows "00:99".

Then, as shown in FIG. 380 (D5), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased and the IN animation of the operation display is displayed as shown in FIG. 380 (D6). Is started. At this time, the effect EF402 in which the button icon emits light may be displayed around the button icon before the start of the IN animation. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 380(D7) to (D9), the button icon related to the button timer advance notice display BTM1 moves toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the button timer advance notice display BTM2 moves downward during the IN animation of the button timer advance notice display BTM1, and moves to the position where the button timer advance notice display BTM1 was displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D10), the button icon is enlarged and displayed, and the IN animation of the operation display ends, and it is announced that the button effect will start.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D11), the enlarged button icon is reduced and changed to the button image 136a which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT is below the button image 136a. Is displayed to notify that the notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D12), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (D13), the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (D14), and then the figure. As shown at 380 (D15), the weak cut-in image CI3b is erased. At this time, the second button timer advance notice display BTM2 remains displayed as "preparing".

Then, at the start timing of the second button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 380 (D16), the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM2 is changed from the display of "preparing" to "30:00" indicating the time. The display switches to the display, and then the countdown is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B3) and thereafter are performed. Note that the countdown of the timer display of the other button timer advance notice display may be started during the countdown of the timer display of the one button timer advance notice display, or the countdown of the timer display in the one button timer advance notice display may be started. If the countdown of the timer display in the other button timer advance notice display is completed while the other button timer advance notice is being displayed, the animation that moves downward while the countdown of the timer display in the other button timer advance notice display is performed is performed. Alternatively, the countdown may be interrupted to move downward. Further, regardless of the interruption or movement of the countdown of the timer display, the remaining time displayed on the timer display may be adjusted after the movement. It goes without saying that this is applicable to the effect examples described so far and to the embodiments described below. Further, there is a case where the symbol variation display ends without starting the countdown in the preparation display, and the next symbol variation display may be displayed.

FIG. 381 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

381(A1) to (A15) in FIG. 381 show another pattern of the effect shown in (D1) to (D16) in FIG. 380, and the second button corresponding to the second button timer notice effect. It shows that the lever timer advance notice display LTM2 appears in place of the timer advance notice display BTM2. It should be noted that in the first button timer advance notice display BTM1 and/or the second button timer advance notice display BTM2, a button icon in a red button display mode or a deca button display mode is displayed in place of the default display button icon. It may be done. Here, FIG. 381 (A1) is an effect continued from FIG. 380 (D1). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 381(A1) to (A15) are shown in FIGS. 380(D2) to (380) except that the second button timer advance notice display BTM2 is changed to the lever timer advance notice display LTM2. The description is omitted because it is the same as D16). Moreover, after the effect of FIG. 381 (A15) is performed,
For example, the effects shown in and after FIG. 378 (A12) are performed. In this case, the first button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be always exhausted first, or the lever timer advance notice display LMT2 may be exhausted first. Further, the first button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be exhausted first, or the lever timer advance notice display LMT2 may be exhausted first. It goes without saying that this is applicable to the effect examples described so far and the effect examples described later. Further, the symbol variation display may be terminated without starting the countdown of the timer display while the in-preparation display is being performed, and the in-preparation display may be carried over to the next symbol variation display. It goes without saying that this can also be applied to the effect examples described above and the effect examples described below.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 381(B1) to (B10), it is shown that another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect is performed, and not the countdown of the timer display, but the firing line in the display of the bomb. The state of notifying the timing at which the button effect is started is shown in the display mode. Note that FIG. 381 (B1) is an effect continued from FIG. 205 (B1).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (B1) shows that the button timer advance notice effect has started. In this example of performance, the bomb timer display BOMB is displayed with a fuse added, and the lord's character BYM appears and an animation (extension animation) is performed to extend the fuse. In this example of the effect, a button icon is also displayed on the bomb timer display BOMB, which suggests that the button effect is started when the bomb timer display BOMB explodes. After that, as shown in FIG. 381(B2), the extension animation completes the extension of the fuse of the bomb timer display BOMB, and then the extension animation is completed, and as shown in FIG. 381(B3), the tip of the ignition line is ignited. Then, the button timer advance notice effect is started. In the button timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the start timing of the button effect that is executed as a result of the button timer advance notice effect is performed by performing the countdown effect in a mode in which the fuse becomes shorter as time passes. I am trying to inform you by the length of the squib. The production of the countdown is performed until there is no fuse, as shown in FIGS. 381(B3) to (B5).

Then, as shown in FIG. 381 (B5), when the squib disappears and the spark at the tip of the squib reaches the body of the bomb timer display BOMB, as shown in FIG. 381 (B6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, After the explosion effect EF304 is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen so as to overlap the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 381(B7), the remaining time display meter MT together with the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed. Is displayed to notify that the notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (B8), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 381(B9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381(B10) displays “Gekiatsu!!” at the approximate center of the display screen. Is displayed in large size. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display by the characters "Gekiatsu!" is displayed as a result of the button effect related to the button timer notice effect. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 16 (16) and thereafter are performed.

It is needless to say that this effect example can be applied to any of the timer advance notice effects using the bomb timer display BOMB described above. Further, similarly to an example of a timer advance notice effect different from the button timer advance notice effect described later, the same can be applied to the case where the timer display BOMB of a bomb that does not suggest the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. .. Also, the combination with the effects described so far can be appropriately performed.

FIG. 382 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 382(A1) to (A9), it is shown that a new button timer advance notice effect is started as a result of the button timer advance notice effect being performed. Note that FIG. 382 (A1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 374 (A2). In addition, the effect in the period of FIG. 382 (A1) to (A5) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 374 (A3) to (A13) of FIG.

When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 382(A6) during the operation valid period of the effect button 136, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 382(A7) changes the button image 136a. A new button timer notice display BTM2 is displayed in the center of the display screen. The button timer advance notice display BTM2 is displayed in a size larger than that shown in FIG. 382(A1). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button timer advance notice display BTM2 is displayed at the position where the button image 136a has been displayed and the button image 136a is substantially the same size as the button image 136a. .. Also in this effect example, in the button timer advance notice display BTM2, a timer icon of "30:00" indicating the time is displayed above the button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the button timer advance notice effect is started. Is informed. In the example of the effect, the button timer advance notice effect is performed and the button effect is performed. As a result, a new button timer advance notice display BTM2 is displayed, and a new button timer advance notice effect is performed. Instead of the button timer advance notice display BTM2, for example, a timer advance notice display TM as shown in FIG. 201 may be displayed. In addition, as a result of counting down the timer display of the timer notification display TM1 in the above-mentioned timer notification effect (not after the button timer notification effect) (further, after "Attention!" is displayed), the timer notification effect (or, A button timer advance notice effect) may be performed.

After that, the button timer notice display BTM2 displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is once erased, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (A8), a flashing light is emitted at the lower right corner of the display screen. The effect EF401 is displayed, showing that the appearance animation of the timer button has started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 382(A9), after the flash effect EF401 is erased, the erased button timer advance notice display BTM2 is displayed in a reduced size. In the button timer advance notice display BTM2, a timer display of "30:00" indicating the time is displayed above the button icon to notify that the button timer advance notice production is starting. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B3) and thereafter are performed.

The example productions shown in FIGS. 382(B1) to (B5) show that the button effect is started as a certain notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect. Note that FIG. 382 (B1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 374 (A2).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B1) shows that the timer notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by the timer advance notice display TM1 being framed in from the right side of the display area. "10:00" is displayed on the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B2), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shows “09:99”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 382(B3), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382(B4), the explosion effect EF407 is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed in the approximate center. After that, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (B5), the enlarged button icon is displayed, and it is announced that the button effect will be started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (A12) and thereafter are performed.

In addition, in this example of the effect, the example in which the button effect is performed as a certain notification effect as a result of the timer notification effect is displayed, but another notification (for example, "Ikuze!" “Atsushi!”, etc.) may be displayed. In addition, in this example of the effect, the button effect may be always performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed.

Also, in this effect example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, the explosion effect EF407 is displayed, and then the button icon is displayed, but, for example, FIG. As shown in (B3), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 382(C), in the timer advance notice display TM1, attention is paid to the advance notice instead of the timer display. You may make it display the character of "attention!!" of urging. After this "Attention!!" character is displayed, the button icon may be displayed to start the button effect, or after the "Attention!!" character is displayed, the button effect may be changed. It may or may not be started. Note that, after the effect shown in FIG. 382(C) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 201(A25) or later, the effect shown in FIG. 382(B4) or later, or the effect shown in FIG. 382(B5) or later. And so on. In this case, the button effect may be displayed without fail, or the button effect may be displayed and the effect different from the button effect may be displayed.

Further, instead of the display of "attention!!" shown in FIG. 382(C), the effects shown in FIG. 382(D1) to (D2) may be performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 382(B3), when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”, as shown in FIG. 382(D1), the “Yuuze” is displayed together with the up display YMF of the lord's face. A balloon with the characters "!" is displayed. At this time, in the timer notice display TM1, "00:00" is still displayed, but at least a part is hidden by the balloon, which makes it difficult to visually recognize. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap the balloons so that the timer notice display TM1 can be visually recognized. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be erased at the timing when the lord's face up display YMF and the balloon are displayed, or the lord's face up display YMF and the balloon after the timer notice display TM1 is erased. May be displayed. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 382 (D1), a part of the timer notice display TM1 is covered with the balloon, but the entire timer notice display TM1 may be covered with the balloon. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be hidden by the display YMF of the close up of the lord's face. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (D2), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 201 (A25) and after, the effects shown in FIG. 382 (B4) and after, and the effects shown in FIG. 392 (B5) and after are performed. In the case where two or more effect displays are performed, overlapping of one effect display with the other effect display is appropriately performed in the effect examples described so far or in the effect examples shown below. There is.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 382(E1) to (E4) show another display mode of the button timer advance notice display. Note that FIG. 382 (E1) is, for example, an effect continued from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (E1), after the flash effect EF401 is erased, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed. In the button timer advance notice display BTM1 in this effect example, a timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is displayed together with the button icon so as to be superimposed on the button icon to notify that the button timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 382(E1) can be applied to other example of performing the button timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (E2), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows "09:99".

After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (E3), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased and the IN animation of the operation display is started. The IN animation may be performed while the timer display is being displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 382(F1) to (F2) show another display mode of the button timer advance notice display. Note that FIG. 382 (F1) is, for example, an effect continued from FIG. 374 (A3).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (F1), the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed. After that, the countdown of the timer display is started. In addition, when the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is enlarged and displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally stopped and displayed more easily than when it is not enlarged and displayed. Further, the timing at which the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed in an enlarged manner is not limited to the one shown in this example of performance, and can be performed at an appropriate timing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (F2), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased, and after the IN animation of the operation display is performed, the default operation display is displayed. The button image 136a, the red button image 136aR, the lever image 136Va, or the large button image 136aL, which are the display modes, are displayed and the button effect is started.

FIG. 383 is a diagram showing, in stages, another effect pattern of the button timer advance notice effect.

FIGS. 383(A1) to (A3) show another display mode of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIGS. 379(C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 383 (A1) is an effect that continues from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383(A1), after the flashing effect EF401 is erased, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed. In this effect example, the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is not displayed together with the button icon, and the display of "preparing" which indicates that the button timer advance notice effect is started is made. The display of “” is superimposed on the button icon. Note that FIG.
379 (C1) to (A1) to FIG. 379 (C1) to the effect shown in FIG. The effect is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 13C, so description thereof will be omitted. After the effect shown in FIG. 379(C3) is performed, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 382(E2) or later is performed.

383(B1) to (B3) show another display mode of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIGS. 379(C1) to (C3). Note that FIG. 383 (B1) is an effect continued from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (B1), a state in which the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased is shown. In this example of performance, "Preparing" is displayed above the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1, and the timer display of "10:00" indicating the time is displayed so as to be superimposed on the button icon. According to this effect example, it may be possible to easily grasp how many seconds the timer is during the display of the display "preparing". Further, in this case, an effect of increasing or decreasing the number of seconds of the timer displayed on the button icon during the display of "preparing" or increasing the rank of the button timer advance notice display BTM1 may be performed. .. Needless to say, such an effect can be applied to other effect examples.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (B2), a state is shown in which a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after “preparing” is displayed on the button timer advance notice display BTM1. At this time as well, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 continues to display "in preparation", and the timer display on the button icon remains "10:00".

Then, at the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 383 (B3), the display of "preparing" is erased, and then the countdown is started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 382 (E2) and thereafter are performed.

FIGS. 383(C1) to 383(C3) show a state in which the countdown is not started immediately even when the timer display is displayed on the button timer advance notice display BTM1, and a preparation is made. Note that FIG. 383 (C1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 374 (A2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (C1), the state where the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased is shown. In this effect example, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display above the button icon in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. In this effect example, the countdown is not started for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the timer display is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (C2), a state is shown in which a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since “10:00” was displayed on the button timer advance notice display BTM1. At this time as well, the timer display remains "10:00". It should be noted that, for example, the various effects described above may be performed during the period in which the timer display is "10:00" and the display is continued. May be. After that, the countdown of the timer display starts.

FIG. 383 (C3) shows a state in which 10 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 374 (B5) and thereafter are performed. As in this example of performance, performing the countdown of the timer display after a certain period of time has elapsed after the button timer notice display BTM1 is displayed is applicable to the example of effect described so far and the example of effect described below. It goes without saying that it is possible.

383(D1) to (D8) in FIG. 383(D1) to (D8), the button timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative pattern and continues until the SP reach is reached. It shows how it is being done. Note that FIG. 383 (D1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 372 (A4).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D1), a state in which the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed after the flash effect EF401 is erased is shown. In the button timer advance notice display BTM1, a timer icon of “90:00” indicating time is displayed above the button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136, and the timer advance notice effect (button timer advance notice effect) is started. I am informing you. That is, in this effect example, it is suggested that the button effect is started when 90 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D2), the countdown of the timer display has started, and the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shows “89:99”.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D3) shows a state of shifting to SP reach via the reach effect. At this time, the timer display on the button timer advance notice display BTM1 indicates “31:48”. In this effect example, the display color of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 changes at the timing shown in FIG. 383(D3), but it may be a constant color without change. Further, the display color of the timer display may change according to the background color, or may change according to the progress of the game. Also, the timer preview effect by the button timer preview display BTM1 may be increased by changing the display color of the timer display. In the case of changing the display color of the timer display for a certain period of time to produce a chance increase of the timer advance notice effect, only the player who knows the timing when the chance increase effect is performed may be able to enjoy the effect. is there.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D4), the SP reach animation is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D4), when the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 becomes “00:00”, the timer display is erased and the IN animation of the operation display is started as described above.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D5), the enlarged button icon is reduced and changed to the button image 136a which is the default display mode, and the remaining time display meter MT is below the button image 136a. Is displayed to notify that the notice by the button effect has started. That is, it is informed that the button effect by the button timer advance notice effect has started. After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of decreasing the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D6), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that the operation button 136 is in the operation valid period. Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 383 (D7), the gold cut-in image CI3 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (D8). In this effect example, since the initial value of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is a long time of "90:00", a highly reliable effect is easily produced. Here, a weak cut-in image or a red cut-in image may be displayed. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 17 (33) and thereafter are performed. It should be noted that there may be a case where the example of production other than FIG. 17 (33) is continued.

FIGS. 383(E1) to (E7) show a state in which the button timer advance notice effect is performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays. Note that FIG. 383 (E1) is, for example, an effect that continues from FIG. 372 (A3).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E1), a game ball enters the first special symbol starting opening 230 and the hold is increased by 1 during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E2), the flash effect EF401 is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the appearance of the appearance of the timer button is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 383(E3), after the flash effect EF401 is erased, the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed. The button timer advance notice display BTM1 displays a button icon imitating the shape of the effect button 136 together with a display of "preparing" indicating that it is being prepared, and gives an advance notice of the start of the button timer advance notice effect.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E4), the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design. As a result, the missing decorative design of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” The combination is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation is shown. At this time, the button timer notice display BTM1 continues to display "preparing".

After that, in FIG. 383 (E5), a state is displayed in which the combination of the defective decorative patterns “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (E6), it is shown that the variable display of symbols corresponding to the hold icon h11 has started. Then, at the start timing of the button timer advance notice effect, as shown in FIG. 383 (E7), the timer display is switched from the display of "preparing" to the display of "10:00" showing the time, and then the countdown is started. Be started. After that, for example, the effects shown in FIG. 372 (A6) and thereafter are performed.

In addition, in this production example, the example in which the symbol variation display is crossed while the display of "preparing" is being displayed in the button timer notice display BTM1 is shown, but the symbol is displayed while the countdown of the timer display is being performed. There may be a case where the variable display is straddled. It should be noted that there may be a case following another example of performance.

According to the above description,
"Display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
Operation means [for example, the production button 136, etc.],
A gaming machine equipped with
The display unit is a unit that may display an operation display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 374 (A12)].
The operation display is a display indicating that the operation by the operation means is effective,
The display unit is a unit that may display a timer display [eg, button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 374(A3)].
The timer display is a display that gives advance notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed [for example, the button timer advance display BTM1 shown in FIG. 374(A3) is 10 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is started. Afterwards, it is announced that button production will start],
The timer display is a display whose display mode changes according to the lapse of time until the display of the operation display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 374 (A3) to FIG. In the timer notice display BTM1, the timer display is counted down until "00:00" indicating the timing at which the button effect is started after the countdown is started, etc.],
When the timer display becomes a certain display mode after the timer display is displayed (hereinafter, “first case [eg, as shown in FIGS. 374 (A3) to (A6), button timer "When the timer display in the button timer notice display BTM1 becomes "00:00" after the notice display BTM1 is displayed]"), the operation display may be displayed.
When the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 374 (A12) to FIG. When the effect button 136 is operated after the image 136a is displayed, the weak cut-in image CI3b is displayed, etc.],
Even if the operating means is operated during the display of the timer display, the execution of the certain effect does not start [for example, as shown in FIGS. 377(A1) to (A6), in the button timer advance notice display BTM1. Even if the effect button 136 is operated during the countdown of the timer display, the weak cut-in image CI3b is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

In addition, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to enhance the effect by not missing the timing at which the operation display is displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the operation display, or may display a display other than the operation display. Further, the display means may always display the operation display, or may not display the operation display.

Further, the operation display may indicate only that the operation by the operation means is effective, or may indicate something other than that the operation by the operation means is effective. In addition, the operation display may necessarily indicate that the operation by the operation means is valid, or may not indicate that the operation by the operation means is valid. The operation display is displayed before the period for validating the operation of the operating means is started, and after the operation display is displayed, the period for validating the operation of the operating means is started. Good.

In addition, when there is an operation during the operation valid period, the operation valid period may be ended (for example, one push/push button displays one timer notice display). If so, etc.). This means that the embodiments described so far can be applied to the embodiments described below.

Further, even if there is an operation during the operation valid period, it may be configured such that the valid period does not end until the preset valid period ends, until the valid period ends (for example, a plurality of Press twice, hit repeatedly, press and hold). This means that the embodiments described so far can be applied to the embodiments described below.

Further, even when there is no operation of the operation means before the expiration of the operation valid period, the display may be displayed according to the operation. This means that the embodiments described so far can be applied to the embodiments described below.

Also, when the decorative design is stopped (or only the design is stopped), the hold display area, the resident display character (if displayed), etc. are displayed and the animation (for example, a movie including a model title) is displayed. Etc.) may be displayed, and it may be configured such that the stop display of the decorative pattern, the hold display area, and the like are not displayed in the display sky of the anime demo.

Further, the display means may display only the timer display, or may display a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may be one in which the timer display is always displayed, or may be one in which the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, the timer display may give a notice only when the operation display is displayed, or may give a notice other than a timing when the operation display is displayed. Further, the timer display may always give a notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed, or may not give a notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed.

Further, the timer display may be one in which the display mode changes only according to the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started, or other than the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started. The display mode may be changed accordingly. Further, the timer display may be one in which the display mode always changes according to the passage of time until the display of the operation display is started, or the time display until the display of the operation display is started may be changed. The display mode may not change accordingly.

Further, the operation display may be displayed only in the first case, and the operation display may be displayed in the cases other than the first case. Further, in the first case, the operation display may be displayed without exception, and in the first case, the operation display may not be displayed.

Further, when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, only a certain effect may be executed, or the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started. Then, there may be a case where an effect other than a certain effect is also executed. Further, when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed without fail, or when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, There may be a case where a certain effect is not executed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only when the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started, or the operation means is operated after the display of the operation display is started. In some cases other than the case of being operated, a certain effect may be executed.

Further, if the operation means is operated only after the display of the operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed, or the operation means may be operated even after the display of the operation display is not started. When operated, a certain effect may be executed.

Further, even if the operating means is operated during the display of the timer display, only execution of a certain effect need not be started, or even if the operating means is operated during the display of the timer display, it is not possible to perform other than the certain effect. The performance does not have to be started. Further, even if the operating means is operated during the display of the timer display, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, and even if the operating means is operated during the display of the timer display, a certain effect is executed. May be started.

Further, the execution of a certain effect does not have to be started only when the operating means is operated during the display of the timer display, and also in cases other than the case where the operating means is operated during the display of the timer display. The execution of a certain effect may not be started.

Further, even if the operating means is operated only while the timer display is displayed, execution of a certain effect does not have to be started, and even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is not being displayed, a certain effect is not produced. The execution does not have to start.

The timer display may be a display including an image of the appearance of the operating means.

Further, the operation display may be a display including an image of the appearance of the operation means.

Further, while the operation display is being displayed, if the operation means is operated during a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid (operation valid period), a certain effect may be executed.

Further, the operation display may be always displayed after the timer display is displayed.

In addition, after the timer display is displayed, the operation display may or may not be displayed.

Further, the operation display may be a display for prompting the operation of the operation means. According to this, it may be possible to improve the motivation for operating the operation unit by not missing the timing at which the operation display is displayed.

Further, the timer display may be in a certain display mode in association with the start of the display of the operation display.

Further, "the execution of the certain effect is not started even if the operating means is operated while the timer display is being displayed" means that "the timer display is displayed after the timer display is displayed. The execution of the certain effect is not started even if the operation means is operated until the time becomes”.

The timing at which the operation display is displayed may include the IN animation portion of the operation display.

Further, as the timer display, a first timer display [for example, a button timer advance notice display BTM1 whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 372(A5) is "10:00" etc.] may be displayed. ,
The operation display may be displayed in the first display mode when a first time [for example, 10 seconds] elapses after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started [for example, , The button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 372 (A14), etc.],
As the timer display, a second timer display [for example, a button timer advance notice display BTM1 or the like whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373(A1) is “60:00”] may be displayed,
After the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started, the second time [for example, 60
Seconds, etc., the operation display may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 373(A11), the red button image 136aR in the red button display mode is displayed. Etc.],
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display mode of the operation display may differ depending on the length of the timer, so that the player may be able to pay attention to both the timer display and the operation display.

Here, as the timer display, only the first timer display may be displayed, and as the timer display, a display other than the first timer display may be displayed. Further, the first timer display may be displayed as the timer display without fail, or the first timer display may not be displayed as the timer display.

In addition, the operation display may be displayed only in the first display mode when the first time elapses after the change of the display mode of the first timer display is started. The operation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode after the first time has elapsed from the start of the change of the display mode of the timer display. In addition, the operation display may be always displayed in the first display mode after the first time has elapsed from the start of the change in the display mode of the first timer display, or the display of the first timer display may be displayed. The operation display may not be displayed in the first display mode when the first time has elapsed since the change of the mode was started.

In addition, the operation display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the first time period has elapsed since the change of the display mode of the first timer display was started. The operation display may be displayed in the first display mode also in cases other than the case where the first time has elapsed since the change of the display mode of the first timer display was started.

Further, as the timer display, only the second timer display may be displayed, and as the timer display, a display other than the second timer display may be displayed. Further, the second timer display may be always displayed as the timer display, or the second timer display may not be displayed as the timer display.

Further, after the change of the display mode of the second timer display is started, when the second time has elapsed, the operation display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or the second display mode may be displayed. The operation display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode when the second time has elapsed since the change of the display mode of the timer display was started. In addition, the operation display may be always displayed in the second display mode after the second time has elapsed from the start of the change in the display mode of the second timer display, or the display of the second timer display. There may be a case where the operation display is not displayed in the second display mode after the second time has elapsed since the mode change was started.

In addition, the operation display may be displayed in the second display mode only when the second time has elapsed from the start of the change in the display mode of the second timer display. The operation display may be displayed in the second display mode also in cases other than the case where the second time has elapsed since the change of the display mode of the second timer display was started.

Also, the second time may be always longer than the first time, the second time may be shorter than the first time, and the first time and The two times may be the same.

The operation display in the second display mode may be displayed when the first time has elapsed.

Further, when the first time has elapsed, the operation display in the first display mode may be displayed without fail.

Further, the operation display may not be displayed even after the first time has elapsed.

In addition, the operation display in the first display mode may be displayed after the second time has elapsed.

Further, the operation display in the second display mode may be displayed without fail after the second time has elapsed.

Also, the operation display may not be displayed even after the second time has elapsed.

In addition, “when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, the final jackpot pattern mode is easier to be finalized and displayed than when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the operation display in the second display mode is displayed.

Here, when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally definitely displayed, or when the operation display is displayed in the second display mode, In some cases, the symbol pattern mode may be fixedly displayed. Further, when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode, the deviating symbol mode may always be finally confirmed and displayed, or when the operation display is displayed in the first display mode, There may be a case where the jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed.

In addition, “the first timer display is started to change the display mode earlier after a certain symbol variable display is started than the second timer display [for example, in FIG. 372 (A5) The button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373(A1) whose initial value of the timer display shown in FIG. 373 is “10:00” is more than the button timer advance notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 373(A1). , The countdown starts soon after the symbol variation display starts],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to give variations to the timing at which the timer display starts changing.

Here, in the first timer display than in the second timer display, after a certain symbol variation display is started, only the change of the display mode may be started earlier, or the second timer display is displayed. Also, the first timer display may start earlier than a change in the display mode after a certain symbol variation display is started. Further, the first timer display than the second timer display, the change of the display mode may always start earlier after a certain symbol variation display is started, and it is more than the second timer display. The first timer display may not start changing the display mode earlier after a certain symbol variation display is started.

Further, the first timer display than the second timer display, the change of the display mode may be started earlier only after a certain symbol variable display is started, and the second timer display is Also, the first timer display may start the change in the display mode earlier than after the certain symbol variable display is started.

Note that the second timer display may start a part of the change in the display mode before the first timer display.

In addition, "a second operating means [for example, the production lever 136V, etc.] is provided,
The operation means is the first operation means [for example, the effect button 136 or the like],
The operation display is the first operation display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 374 (A12)],
The display unit is a unit that may display a second operation display [for example, the display of the lever image 136Va shown in FIG. 378(A17)].
The second operation display is a display showing that the operation by the second operation means is effective,
In the first case, the second operation display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A6), after the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is displayed. When the timer display in the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is "00:00", the lever image 136Va is displayed, etc.],
When the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, the certain effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 375 (A6) to FIG. ) And FIG. 373 (A14), when the production lever 136V is operated after the lever image 136Va is displayed, a background image including the spiritual character CLA is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to surprise the player who was paying attention to the timer display and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this gaming table, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension until the operation display is displayed, which may improve the interest of the game.

Here, the display means may display only the second operation display, or may display a display other than the second operation display. Further, the display means may always display the second operation display, or may display the second operation display in some cases.

Further, the second operation display may indicate only that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may indicate something other than that the operation by the second operation means is effective. May be Further, the second operation display may necessarily indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be one.

Further, in the first case, only the second operation display may be displayed, and in the first case, a display other than the second operation display may be displayed. .. Further, the second operation display may be displayed without fail in the first case, and the second operation display may not be displayed in the first case.

Further, when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, only a certain effect may be executed, or the second operation display is not displayed. When the second operation means is operated after being started, there may be a case where something other than a certain effect is executed. Further, when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed without fail, or after the display of the second operation display is started. When the second operation unit is operated, a certain effect may not be executed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, or the display of the second operation display is performed. There may be a case where a certain effect is executed in a case other than the case where the second operation means is operated after the start of.

Note that the first operation display may be displayed without fail when a certain time elapses before the operation display is displayed while the timer display is being displayed.

Further, the second operation display may be a display including an image of the appearance of the second operation means.

Further, the second operation display may be a display for prompting the operation of the second operation means. According to this, there is a possibility that the player is prompted to operate the second operation means, so that it may be possible to draw attention to the timer notice until the operation display is displayed.

In addition, "when the first operation display is displayed in the first case, the case where the second operation display is displayed in the first case is finally a jackpot pattern mode Is easily confirmed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation that the second operation display is displayed in the first case.

Here, when the second operation display is displayed in the first case, the jackpot symbol lending may be finally confirmed and displayed, or the second operation display is displayed in the first case. In the case of, there may be a case where the deviating symbol form is finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the first operation display is displayed in the first case, the deviating symbol aspect may always be finally confirmed and displayed, or when the first operation display is displayed in the first case. In some cases, the jackpot pattern mode may be finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "in the first case, after the display of the second operation display is started, a period during which the operation of the second operation means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation valid period". ) Is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 375 (A1) to FIG. When the lever image 136Va is displayed, the effective operation period of the effect lever 136V is started, etc.],
In the second operation valid period, the certain effect is not started even if the first operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 376(A2) to (A5), the effect lever 136V is used. , The background image including the spiritual character CLA is not displayed even when the effect button 136 is operated, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the player is not provided with an incorrect operation.

Here, in the first case, only the second operation valid period may be started after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display is displayed. A period other than the second operation effective period may be started after the start of. In the first case, the second operation valid period may be started without fail after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display is There may be a case where the second operation valid period is not started after being started.

Further, in the first case, the second operation valid period may be started only after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the first case, the display of the second operation display is The second operation valid period may be started other than after the start.

Further, only in the first case, the second operation valid period may be started after the display of the second operation display is started, and in the cases other than the first case, the second operation is also performed. The second operation valid period may be started after the display of the display is started.

Further, during the second operation effective period, even if there is an operation of the first operation means, only a certain effect does not have to be started, and during the second operation effective period, the operation of the first operation means is Even if there is, a performance other than a certain performance may not be started. Further, during the second operation effective period, a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started even if the first operation means is operated, and during the second operation effective period, the operation of the first operation means is There may be a case where a certain effect is started.

Further, only during the second operation effective period, a certain effect may not be started even if the first operation means is operated, and even during the period other than the second operation effective period, the first operation is performed. Even if the operation of the means is performed, a certain effect may not be started.

The second operation valid period may be a period during which only the operation of the second operating means is valid. According to this, it may be possible for a player who has prepared for the operation of the first operation means in advance to be careful until the operation display is displayed.

Further, the operation may be validated when the operation of the first operating device is performed during a period in which the operation of the second operating device is valid (second operation valid period).

In addition, there may be a case where a reaction display [for example, the light emission effect EF405 or the like shown in FIG. 377 (A5)] is displayed in response to the operation of the operation unit during the display of the timer display [for example, FIG. 377 (A3) to (A5) in the figure, when the effect button 136 is operated while the button timer advance notice display BTM1 is displayed, the light emission effect EF405 is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to allow a time until the operation display is displayed.

Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the motivation for operating the operating means.

Here, depending on the operation of the operating means during the display of the timer display, only the reaction display may be displayed, or that the operating means is operated during the display of the timer display. Accordingly, a display other than the reaction display may be displayed. In addition, the reaction display may be always displayed in response to the operation of the operating means during the display of the timer display, or the reaction display may be displayed in response to the operation of the operating means during the display of the timer display. The display may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, the reaction display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the operating means during the display of the timer display, or other than the operation of the operating means during the display of the timer display. In some cases, the reaction display may be displayed.

In addition, the reaction display may be displayed in response to the operation of the operating means only during the display of the timer display, and the operation of the operating means may be performed during the display of the display other than the timer display. In some cases, a reaction display may be displayed depending on the fact.

Here, the reaction display may be one in which the display mode of the timer display itself changes, or one in which the display mode of something other than the timer display changes.

The timer display may prompt the operation of the operating means.

The operation display may be displayed separately from the timer display.

Further, the reaction display may be a back button.

In addition, “The reaction display is a display performed by changing the display mode of the timer display [for example, as shown in FIG. 377 (A5), the light emission effect EF405 displays the button timer advance notification display BTM1. Displayed in a changing manner, etc.],
The reaction display is a display different from the display in the display mode according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed [for example, the light emission effect EF405 shown in FIG. It is a display different from the countdown display of the timer display in the display BTM1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give variations to the display of the timer display.

In addition, “The timer display is in a third display mode during a period in which the display mode is changed according to the lapse of time until the operation display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 379(A1). Button timer advance notice display BTM1 including button icon in default display mode] to fourth display mode [for example, button timer advance notice display BTM1 including button icon in red button display mode shown in FIG. 379(A5)] The display mode of the button icon during the countdown of the timer display in the button timer advance notice display BTM1 as shown in, for example, FIG. 379(A2) to FIG. Has changed from the default display mode to the red button display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the display mode may change during the display of the timer display, so that the timer display may be able to be noticed even during the period until the operation display is displayed.

Here, the timer display may change only from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during a period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. There may be some, in the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed, the display mode other than the third display mode to the fourth display mode It may also change. In addition, the timer display always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode during a period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. Alternatively, in the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed, the third display mode may not change to the fourth display mode. It may be.

In addition, the timer display may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode only during a period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed. It may be one, even in a period other than the period in which the display mode is changed according to the passage of time until the operation display is displayed, from the third display mode to the fourth display mode. It may be changed.

The timer display may be displayed in the fourth display mode from the beginning.

In addition, “when the timer display is changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, than when the timer display is not changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, Eventually the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation that the timer display will change to the fourth display mode.

Here, when the timer display is changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally definitely displayed, or the timer display is changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode. When the display mode is changed to, the off symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the timer display has not changed from the third display mode to the fourth display mode, the final symbol mode may be definitely displayed, or the timer display may change from the third display mode to the third display mode. When the display mode does not change to the fourth display mode, the big hit symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, “the display means may display a notice display [for example, a “preparing” display or the like displayed above the button icon of the button timer notice display BTM1 shown in FIG. 379(C1)]. And
The advance notice display is a display that gives advance notice that the timer display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that the timer display will be displayed.

Here, the display means may display only the advance notice display or may display other displays than the advance notice display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the notice display, or may be one that may not display the notice display.

Further, the notice display may give a notice only that the timer display is displayed, or may give a notice other than that the timer display is displayed. Further, the notice display may be a notice that the timer display is displayed, or may not give a notice that the timer display is displayed.

The timer display may be always displayed after the notice display is displayed.

Further, the timer display may or may not be displayed after the notice display is displayed.

Further, the notice display may be a display including an image of the appearance of the operation means.

Further, the notice display may be a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed (the variation notice).

Further, the notice display may be a prefetch notice.

In addition, "whether the big hit symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed or the lost symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed is configured to be determined by a big hit judgment performed at the start of fluctuation of the symbol. ,
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the timer display,
The jackpot determination is configured to be determined according to a jackpot lottery result using a random number obtained when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board,
The probability that the jackpot is determined in the jackpot lottery (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot probability") is predetermined.
The jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the timer display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The display positions of the timer display and the operation display may be different or the same.

Further, a plurality of timer displays may be displayed, and in this case, the timer display may be exhausted in the order in which the timer display is started, or in the order in which the timer display is not started. Good.

Further, when a plurality of button effects are duplicated and the operation effective period overlaps, the operation effective period in the button effect relating to the button timer advance notice effect may be prioritized, or the button timer advance notice effect may be given. The operation valid period in the button effect may be given priority. When the button hold is included, the operation valid period in the button hold may be prioritized. When the button effect related to the change notice and the button effect related to the prefetch notice overlap, and the operation effective period overlaps, the operation effective period in the button effect related to the change notice is prioritized. Alternatively, the operation valid period in the button effect related to the prefetch notice may be prioritized.

Further, the countdown of the timer display may be started after the timer display moves.

Further, the countdown of the timer display may be temporarily stopped.

Further, the button timer advance notice effect may be performed across a plurality of symbol change displays, or the button timer advance notice effect may not be performed across a plurality of symbol change displays.

In addition, "a second operating means [for example, the production lever 136V, etc.] is provided,
The operation means is the first operation means [for example, the effect button 136 or the like],
The operation display is a first operation display [for example, the button image 136a or the like],
The timer display is a third timer display [for example, a button timer advance notice display BTM1, etc.],
The display unit is a unit that may display a second operation display [for example, a lever image 136Va or the like],
The second operation display is a display showing that the operation by the second operation means is effective,
The display means is a means for displaying a fourth timer display [for example, a lever timer advance notice display LTM1 shown in FIG. 375(A1)],
The fourth timer display is a display that gives advance notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed [for example, the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 shown in FIG. 375 (A1) shows a countdown of the timer display. It has been announced that the lever production will start 60 seconds after the start],
The fourth timer display is a display whose display mode changes according to the lapse of time until the display of the second operation display is started [for example, FIG. 375 (A1) to FIG. As shown in, the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is counted down from the timer display until "00:00" indicating the timing at which the button effect is started, etc.],
When the fourth timer display is in a certain display mode after the fourth timer display is displayed (hereinafter, “second case [for example, in FIG. 375 (A1) to FIG. As shown, when the timer display in the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 becomes "00:00" after the lever timer advance notice display LTM1 is displayed ]"), the second operation display is displayed. Sometimes,
When the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, the certain effect may be executed [for example, FIG. 375 (A6) to FIG. ) And FIG. 373 (A14), when the production lever 136V is operated after the lever image 136Va is displayed, a background image including the spiritual character CLA is displayed, etc.],
Even if the second operation means is operated during the display of the fourth timer display, the execution of the certain effect is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 375 (A1) to (A2), Even if the production lever 136V is operated during the countdown of the timer display in the lever timer notice display LTM1, the background image including the spirit character CLA is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the effect by not missing the timing at which the second operation display is displayed.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to surprise the player who was paying attention to the timer display and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this gaming table, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension until the operation display is displayed, which may improve the interest of the game.

Here, the display means may display only the second operation display, or may display other displays than the second operation display. Further, the display means may always display the second operation display, or may display the second operation display in some cases.

Further, the second operation display may indicate only that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may indicate something other than that the operation by the second operation means is effective. May be Further, the second operation display may necessarily indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective, or may not indicate that the operation by the second operation means is effective. It may be one.

Further, the display means may display only the fourth timer display, or may display a display other than the fourth timer display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth timer display. Further, the fourth timer display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the fourth timer display may give a notice only when the second operation display is displayed, or may give a notice other than the timing when the second operation display is displayed. May be. Further, the fourth timer display may always give a notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed, or may not give a notice of the timing at which the second operation display is displayed. May be.

Further, the fourth timer display, the display mode may change only in accordance with the passage of time until the display of the second operation display is started, the display of the second operation display The display mode may be changed according to things other than the passage of time until the start. Further, the fourth timer display may be one in which the display mode always changes according to the lapse of time until the display of the second operation display is started, or the display of the second operation display is The display mode may not change depending on the time elapsed until the start.

Further, only in the second case, the second operation display may be displayed, and in the cases other than the second case, the second operation display may be displayed. Good. Further, in the second case, the second operation display may be displayed without fail, and in the second case, the second operation display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, only a certain effect may be executed, or the display of the second operation display may be performed. When the second operation means is operated after the start, an effect other than a certain effect may be executed. Further, when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed without fail, or after the display of the second operation display is started. When the second operation unit is operated, a certain effect may not be executed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only when the second operation means is operated after the display of the second operation display is started, or the display of the second operation display is performed. There may be a case where a certain effect is executed in a case other than the case where the second operation means is operated after the start of.

Further, if the second operation means is operated only after the display of the second operation display is started, a certain effect may be executed, or the display of the second operation display may be performed. There may be a case where a certain effect is executed when the second operation means is operated even after it is not started.

Further, even if the second operation means is operated during the display of the fourth timer display, only the execution of a certain effect need not be started, and the second operation is performed during the display of the fourth timer display. Even if the means is operated, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. Further, even if the second operation means is operated during the display of the fourth timer display, the execution of a certain effect does not necessarily start, and the second operation is performed during the display of the fourth timer display. Even if the means is operated, execution of a certain effect may be started.

Further, only when the second operation means is operated during the display of the fourth timer display, execution of a certain effect does not have to be started, and the second effect is displayed during the display of the fourth timer display. Execution of a certain effect does not have to be started even when the operation means is not operated.

Further, even if the second operation means is operated only while the fourth timer display is being displayed, execution of a certain effect does not have to be started, and the second operation is not performed while the fourth timer display is being displayed. Even if the operation means is operated, execution of a certain effect may not be started.

In addition, in the second case, the second operation display is configured to be displayed without fail.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

FIG. 384 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 384(a) is a flow of the variable display of the decorative symbols which is not reached but reaches the end. FIG. 6B is a timing chart for explaining the flow of variable display of a decorative pattern that is a big hit or loses after reaching the reach state.

In FIG. 384(a), after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started (variation start), the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped after the first stop of the decorative pattern, the second stop of the decorative pattern, and the third stop of the decorative pattern. It shows the flow. In the following description, the stop order of the decorative symbols is, in principle, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol in that order, but the invention is not limited to this. Also, there may be a case where the first stop and the second stop are performed at the same time depending on the notice (the advance notice of the change or the advance notice), the production of the mini game and the pseudo-relation, or the number of holdings, or the first stop. The second stop and the third stop may be performed at the same time. Here, the period from the fluctuation start to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the fixed stop are respectively represented by "( 11)” in some cases. In the following description, regarding the effect performed in the effect example that is not in the reach state but is in the out-of-reach state, “FIG. XX(A(11)-1)” and “FIG. XX(A(11)- 2)”, etc. may be used. Further, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 384(a), there are cases where effects that can be combined as various effects can be performed during the period indicated by "(11)" (for example, a preliminary announcement). Also, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, or during the period from the third stop to the final stop, the pseudo-relational gaze effect and the opportunity announcement (pre-reading notice) by the same color (same type) symbol stop should be given. You may also be able to. This is a concept that can be applied to each of the performance examples of the embodiments described above.

In FIG. 384(b), after the start of variable display of the decorative pattern (start of fluctuation), the decorative pattern is removed or a big hit after forming the reach state, shifting to the super reach (SP reach), and deriving the result of the reach effect. It shows the flow until the big hit game is finished after the fixed stop in the mode of. Here, the period from the start of fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by the period of “(1)”, and the period from the formation of the reach state to the transition to the SP reach is represented by the period of “(2)”. The period from the transition to SP reach until the result of the reach effect is derived is represented by the period “(3)”, and the period from the derivation of the result of the reach effect to the fixed stop is “(4)”. In some cases, the period from the fixed stop to the end of the big hit game can be represented by the period of “(5)”. In the following description, with regard to the effect performed in the effect example in which the jackpot or the out-of-court is achieved after the reach state is reached, “Figure XX(A(2)-1)” and “Figure XX(A(2 )-2)", "Fig. XX(A(3)-1)", "Fig. XX(A(3)-2)", etc. may be used. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, during the period of “(1)”, various notices including mini-games, prefetch notices, and the like, and effects such as pseudo-relation may be performed, and during the period of “(2)”, In some cases, advance notice, group notice, etc. may be given by displaying normal reach or cut-in image, and during the period of "(3)", advance notice of chance up during SP reach or notice by displaying cut-in image etc. will be given. In the period of "(4)", swing fluctuation, rejuvenation jackpot effect, wipe display, etc. may be performed. There is a case where a probability change notification during a game, a suspension holiday notification, or the like is performed. It should be noted that in the above-described embodiment and the embodiments described below, each executed notice or effect may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is executed. Further, it may be configured such that these notices and effects may be combined, and in this case, one notice (effect) may overlap with the other notice (effect). Good. Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the portions described by the same branch numbers can be appropriately replaced.

385 to 407 are diagrams showing, in stages, the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Note that in FIGS. 385 to 407, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the general figure hold device. Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Note that, in FIGS. 385 to 407, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is provided. May be Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or the POV display described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

385 to 407 are diagrams showing in stages an example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

385(A(1)-1) to 386(A(4)-66) show that the timer advance notice effect is executed during the big hit game in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. ..

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(A(1)-1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. That is, the state before the start of fluctuation is shown. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. It should be noted that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to modes) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Furthermore, you may make it display a 4th design and a 2nd decorative design. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 385(A(1)-1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 385 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state (non-electric power support state). On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state, the hold icon of the special map 1 is displayed. In addition, the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the number of holding icons of special figure 1 and the second holding number display, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is In addition to the number of holding lamps 220 turned on, the number of holding icons and the second holding number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the hold icon display area, hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become the hold icons with older prizes.

In FIG. 385(A(1)-1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. These hold icons h11, h12, and h3 of special figure 1 are displayed. All h13 are displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons of special figure 2 are displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 385 is the non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult for the electric Chu to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon holding icon of the special drawing which is easier to win in special maps 1 and 2 is displayed, and the holding icon of the other special map is displayed. I try not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 385(A(1)-1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold of the special figure 2 is held. No icon is displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed and the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed. Note that the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variable display of the special symbol is performed in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device→the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon→the variation symbol start of the decorative symbol, but this order is mixed Good. This also applies to the following description.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(A(1)-2), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the first special symbol display device. The variable display of symbols at 212 is started. Moreover, the moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the pattern change this time) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 by moving to the change icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and displayed as the change icon h0, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Is displayed, the third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12, and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-3) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, the timer advance notice effect is started by, for example, a frame-in animation causing the first timer advance notice display TM11 to frame in from the right side of the display screen. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is a default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal point of less than 1 second.

Then, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-4), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays “ 09:75" is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "timer activated" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-5), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by the frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen to start the second timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display a decimal point of less than 1 second. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-6), the second timer advance notice display TM12 displays “ 01:25” is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the countdown of the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 was started. On the other hand, also in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "07:25" is displayed in the first timer notice display TM11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-7), when the countdown on the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, In the vicinity of the character YM, the character "Attention to hold" is displayed to call attention to the hold change, and the hold change animation is started in the first hold icon h11 to display the first hold icon h11. It is informed that the mode may change. In addition, the hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”, or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation is started. May be "00:00", or the pending change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display in the second timer advance notice display TM12 is "00:00". It should be noted that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "06:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the bomb display mode, and the word "TIMER" is above it. In addition, in addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "Hold change" is displayed, and it is informed that the look-ahead notice that the first hold icon h11 changes to the bomb display mode has been given. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer notice effect related to the second timer notice display TM12 being displayed, a hold icon that changes into a hold icon in a display mode of a bomb that notices the execution of the timer notice effect as a certain effect is displayed. It is shown that a mode change effect is being performed. In addition, the character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "hold change". Alternatively, the characters "Hold change" may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is still continuing, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-8). The second timer notice display TM12 is erased. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the second timer notice display TM12 is deleted. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change at the timing when the second timer notice display TM12 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385(A(1)-9), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and FIG. 385(A(1)- At the timing shown in 9), "05:11" is displayed. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "stock" is displayed together with the bomb icon BOM to notify that the timer advance notice effect may be started. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the effect (advance effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect is notified by the icon is shown. Furthermore, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "I'm still there" is displayed, suggesting that there is a possibility that further notice display by the timer notice effect may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-10), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-10). In addition, a question mark is displayed along with the character "what" near the navigation character YM, which fuels an expectation as to which warning display will be displayed when the countdown on the first timer warning display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-11), the second stop is performed and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-12), the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" The third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “pseudo-repeat!” is displayed, and it is informed that the pseudo-repeat will be performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00" May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display in the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and one timer notice display (second timer notice display TM12) functions as a prefetch notice. Further, in this effect example, a plurality of timer notification effects show different timings at which the timer notification display is started to be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-13), the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-linking is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates the number of times the second variable display of the decorative pattern is started by the pseudo link. At this time, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started. Then, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be deleted, or the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-link may be started at the timing when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-14), it is shown that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by pseudo link. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed below the bomb icon BOM displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, informing that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-15), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and a state in which the medium symbol is changing at a low speed is shown. In addition, the characters "timer advance notice due to SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the mission effect indicating that the timer advance effect is started by developing into super reach is started. Are also shown. In this example of performance, when the mission is completed, the timer advance notice effect is started, and the reliability of the big hit is increased. Therefore, it may be possible to expect that the timer advance notice effect is started by shifting to the super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-19), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(3)-20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as "decoration 6" during the normal reach, and it does not shift to the super reach, but "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" It is informed that the display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the transition to the super reach will not be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A(3)-21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". .. At this time, the replay icon RPL is erased. On the other hand, the bomb icon BOM is still displayed. It should be noted that the replay icon RPL may be deleted after the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern is started, the fluctuation fluctuation of the decorative pattern may be started after the replay icon RPL is deleted, or the fluctuation of the decorative pattern may be started. The replay icon RPL may be erased at the timing when the swing fluctuation starts.

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A(4)-22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the defective decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-23), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 1 is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, and the first special symbol. The variable display of symbols on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the bomb becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. That is, the change icon h0 notifies the advance notice that the timer advance notice effect is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-24), the word "stock activated" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen in correspondence with the display of the variable icon h0, and two timer notice effects are displayed. Are shown to be starting at the same time. At this time, the bomb icon BOM has been erased. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a plurality of timer advance notice effects are started by the display of one bomb icon BOM or the variation icon h0 in the bomb display mode is shown. It should be noted that the two timer notice effects may be started after the word "stock activated" is displayed, or the characters "stock activated" may be displayed after the two timer notice effects are started, Two timer advance notice effects may be started at the timing when the word "stock activated" is displayed. In this effect example, the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are respectively frame-in by the frame-in animation from the left and right of the display screen, and two timer advance notice effects are simultaneously started. Both the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are default display modes. On the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and a certain effect is started when 30 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. It suggests. Further, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Suggests that. In this example of production, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start counting down at the same time, there is a certain production both when 10 seconds and 30 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Have been suggested to be initiated. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and a certain effect that may be started when 30 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Good.

After that, the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM
Each timer display in 14 starts countdown (subtraction display), and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-25), "29:45" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Further, "09:45" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "timer attention" is displayed near the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer notice effect. In addition, in this example of production, a change animation is started for the variable icon h0, and it is notified that the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 385(A(1)-26), the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the display mode of the bomb to the display mode of panda, and the display mode of the advance notice is displayed. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 is still continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-26), the third timer notice display TM13 displays " 09:10" is displayed, and "29:15" is displayed on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-27), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown continues in the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-27), the third timer advance notice display TM13 displays "28". :02" is displayed, and "08:02" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-28), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(1)-28), the third timer notice display TM13 displays "26. :75" is displayed, and "06:75" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-29), the third timer notice display TM13 displays "25". :23" is displayed, and "05:23" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-30), normal reach is started, and a state in which the medium symbol is changing at a low speed is shown. In addition, the characters "It's Coming Soon" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 may be "00:00", and the notice effect may be started soon. It is suggested that there is. Note that the countdown continues in the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-30), the third timer advance notice display TM13 displays "23". :16" is displayed, and "03:16" is displayed on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-31), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed. In addition, in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, the countdown is still continuing, and FIG. 385(A(
At timings 2) to 31), “21:80” is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, and “01:80” is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-32), when the countdown in the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character of Sabohani. A notice will be given to the Savohani group that will cross a large number of SBHNs. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with a high expectation of a big hit. That is, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the Sabohani group notice is given than when the Savohani group notice is not given. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-32), the strong sabotani group notice is given. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, a character "group occurrence" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the Sabohani group notice is being given. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the strong sabotani group notice is given as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14. In other words, the strong sabotani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain effect. Note that the Savohani group notice may be started after the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes "00:00", or the timer on the fourth timer notice display TM14 after the Savohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-32).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-33), the Sabohani group notice is continuously given, and "SP development!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the supermarket is displayed. It has been announced that it will reach. At this time, the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "18:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(2)-33).

Subsequently, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(3)-34), the screen is developed into a super reach (swordsman reach), in which the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other. A sabotani icon SBH is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the sabotani group notice has been executed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(3)-34).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(3)-35), it is shown that the swordsman reach is continuing. Then, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the third timer advance notice display TM13. The third timer advance notice display TM13 continues to count down, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (A(3)-35).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (A(3)-36), the timer notice shortening animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Is shown.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 386(A(3)-36) followed by FIG. 385(A(3)-36), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is decreased, and the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed. Indicates "03:00". As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect executed by the timer notice effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(3)-38). In addition, a character “strong cut-in” is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be regarded as an example of a certain effect.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects are overlapped, and both the timer notice displays (the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14) are all in effect during the symbol variation. It is shown that the display is functioning as an advance notice (announcement of the change).

Then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A(3)-39), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed and the decorative pattern display device 208 is omitted. In the center, "decoration 5", which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern, is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(4)-40), a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is shown. Has been done. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 386(A(4)-41), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative symbols "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thus, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the symbol is more than when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. In the variable display (variable display of the symbol), the big hit symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A(5)-42), a state in which a big hit start effect is being performed is shown. When the big hit start production is started, a production in which a character MCK of Ms. Machiko (Ms. Ms. Wedding) in a wedding dress celebrates the big hit with four Kopandas. Further, when the big hit start effect is started, a right-hit display for promoting right-hit to the player is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

In FIG. 386 (A(5)-43), the state where the big hit game is started and the game is shifted to the first round is shown. In this example of the effect, the effect of introducing the effect during the big hit game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "introduction effect from the next round" are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and that effect is notified.

FIG. 386 (A(5)-44) shows the state of transition to the second round. When the process moves to the second round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "When comes out..." together with the icon of Sabohani, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 386 (A(5)-45). Along with the demo display of the strong Sabohani group notice, the text "Expect the group notice!" will be displayed to explain the Savohani group notice.

FIG. 386 (A(5)-46) shows the state of transition to the third round. When the process moves to the third round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a bomb icon and a character "When comes out..." After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (A(5)-47), Along with the demonstration display of the timer advance notice effect, the characters "Timer advance notice will be activated" are displayed to explain the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 386 (A(5)-48) shows the state of transition to the fourth round. In this effect example, when the fourth round is started, the character "Attention!" is displayed together with the character of Copanda, which suggests that the timer notice effect is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice effect is performed during the big hit game.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (A(5)-49), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer is activated!" The characters are displayed to inform that the timer advance notice effect has started. Here, the first big hit timer preliminary announcement display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "03:00" indicating 3 seconds, which is shorter than 29 seconds which is the maximum opening time of the variable winning port 234 in one round, is displayed as the timer display, and the countdown is performed. It suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-50), the character "timer activated!" is erased together with the character of the co-panda, and the first big hit mid-time timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen. Enlarged display while moving to. Then, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started on the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-51), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-51). At the timing, "02:66" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-52), the timer display countdown in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues to be performed, and FIG. 386(A(5)-52). At the timing shown, "00:35" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-53), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 386(A( The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5)-54) shows the appearance of the family crest character CMON. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-55), the characters of "holding consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the family crest character, and execution is suspended (pending) symbol variation. It is announced that the display includes a variable display that is a big hit. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer advance notice effect by the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21, a state in which the holding consecutive chan announcement effect is performed as a certain effect is shown. It should be noted that, instead of the appearance of the family crest character CMON, the family crest cast 224E may be operated to notify the suspended consecutive chan.

In this way, when the suspended consecutive chan announcement effect ends, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-56), the character of Kopanda appears again and the character "Next land effect introduction continuation" appears. It is displayed and it is informed that the continuation of the effect explanation that has been interrupted due to the timer advance effect is started. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the determination of the holding consecutive chan has been made is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started in one round of the big hit game, and a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed.

FIG. 386 (A(5)-57) shows the state of transition to the fifth round. When the process moves to the fifth round, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the replay icon together with the characters "when "...", and then, as shown in FIG. 386 (A(5)-58). The replay icon to which the character "NEXT" is attached is displayed together with the character "Pseudo ream", and the pseudo rendition is explained.

FIG. 386 (A(5)-59) shows the state of transition to the 16th round. When the game shifts to the 16th round, the character of "copanda" appears again and the character "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round.

In FIG. 386 (A(5)-60), the 16th round ends and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-61), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest character CMON reappears from the upper part of the display screen, and the notification that the holding consecutive chan is performed is performed here as well. It is being appreciated.

FIG. 386 (A(1)-62) shows that the big hit game is over and the state changes to the positive change state (electric power support state). At this time, the hold is not exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(1)-63), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the first special symbol display device. The variable display of symbols at 212 is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the target of the pattern change this time) moves to the change icon display area. Then, the variable icon h0 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(1)-64), the family crest character CMON descends from the upper part of the display screen and is notified that the big hit is confirmed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386(A(1)-65), the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 386(A(4)-66), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is executed during the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during one round of the big hit game, and a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is being performed. Then, in this example of production, a state in which the pending consecutive-chan notification production is performed as a certain production is shown.

It should be noted that a new timer advance notice effect may be started when the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display is “00:00”.

In addition, the display of the bomb icon BOM indicating that the timer advance notice effect starts or the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb may indicate that the timer advance notice effect starts once, or twice. There may be a case where the start of the above-mentioned timer advance notice effect is suggested.

Further, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the symbol variation display whose start is suspended, the above-mentioned holding consecutive chan announcement effect is performed, but further, the symbol variation display However, for example, it may be possible to perform a holding consecutive Chan notification effect on the condition that it is determined by pre-reading that an ultra-shortening change (for example, a change without reach or a change at which all symbols stop) is executed. The form-restricted continuous ream notification may be performed depending on the variation time, the type of reach, or the like, or may be a large-retention continuous renewal notification.

In addition, in this example of production, the pending consecutive-chan notification production is performed as the look-ahead notice in special figure 1, but it can be performed in the same manner for special figure 2.

The effect contents introduced by the effect explanation performed during the big hit game are not limited to those described above, and may be other effect contents.

Further, the round in which the timer advance notice effect is started is not limited to the one described above, and can be started in an appropriate round. Also, the timer advance notice effect may be performed multiple times in one big hit.

387(B(1)-1) to FIG. 387(B(4)-36) show another effect pattern of the timer notice effect executed during the big hit game.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 387(B(1)-1), the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. That is, the state before the start of fluctuation is shown. A navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 387(B(1)-1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 387 is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probably changed state with electric support). On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the probability variation state with the electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed. In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold icon representing the hold of special figure 2 is displayed. Since the game state in FIG. 387 is the electric support state, a right-handing promotion display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 387 (B(1)-1), the three hold icons h21, h22, and h23 of special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and these three hold icons h21, h22, and h23 of special figure 2 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of special figure 2 is also a round hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(1)-2), the suspension of the special diagram 2 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started, and the second special symbol display device. The variable display of symbols at 214 is started. In addition, the moving icons of the holding icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first holding icon h21 is the variable icon display area. The second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 displays the third hold icon h23. It moves to the display position of the second hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h21, but may be different.

In FIG. 387 (B(1)-3), a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is increased by 1 is shown. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h23 of the special drawing 2 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 in the second holding number display becomes “3”. .. Here, the hold icon h23 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-4), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the fluctuation of the swing is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 2". Has been temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-5), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(1)-6), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the special figure 2 is started, and the second special figure. The variable display of symbols on the display device 214 is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, and is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold icon. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(1)-7), the family crest character CMON descends from the upper part of the display screen and is notified that the big hit is confirmed. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-8), temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed with a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. Then, as shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-9), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. After that, a big hit occurs, and the effect shown in FIG. 387(B(5)-10) to (B(5)-15) is performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 387(B(5)-10) to (B(5)-15) are shown in FIGS. 386(A(5)-42) to (A(5)-47). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

In FIG. 387 (B(5)-16), the state of transition to the fourth round is shown. In this effect example, when the fourth round is started, the character "Attention!" is displayed together with the character of Copanda, which suggests that the timer notice effect is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-17), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer is activated!" The characters are displayed to inform that the timer advance notice effect has started. Here, the first big hit timer preliminary announcement display TM21 is a default display mode. Unlike the timer display shown in FIG. 386 (A(5)-49), the first big hit timer notice display TM21 displays "30:00" as the initial value of the timer display, and the countdown is started. It suggests that a certain effect will be started after 30 seconds have passed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-18), the character "timer activated!"
M21 is enlarged and displayed while moving to the approximate center of the display screen. Then, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started on the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387(B(5)-19), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 387(B(5)-19). At the timing, "29:66" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-20), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuously performed, and in FIG. 387 (B(5)-20). At the timing shown, "13:75" is displayed.

In FIG. 387 (B(5)-21), the state of transition to the fifth round is shown. In this example of the effect, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues to be performed even after shifting from the fourth round to the fifth round. The timer display in the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21 is "12:96" at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-21).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-22), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuously performed, and in FIG. 387 (B(5)-22). At the timing shown, "00:35" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-23), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 387(B( In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5)-24), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-25), the characters of the family crest are displayed together with the characters of "pending consecutive chan confirmation", and execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a variable display that is a big hit.

In this way, when the suspended consecutive-chan announcement effect is completed, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-26), the character of Kopanda appears again and the characters "Next round effect introduction continuation" are displayed. It is displayed and it is informed that the continuation of the effect explanation that has been interrupted due to the timer advance effect is started. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the determination of the holding consecutive chan has been made is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the state in which the timer notice effect is performed over a plurality of rounds of the big hit game is shown.

FIG. 387 (B(5)-27) shows the state of transition to the sixth round. When the process moves to the sixth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the replay icon together with the characters "When comes out..." After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-28), The replay icon to which the character "NEXT" is attached is displayed together with the character "Pseudo ream", and the pseudo rendition is explained. As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is performed over a plurality of rounds, so the round in which the continuation of the effect explanation is started is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 386. That is, it is shown that the correspondence relationship between the contents of the effect explanation and the round in which the effect explanation is performed may be different depending on the period in which the timer notice effect is performed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 387(B(5)-29) to (B(4)-36) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 387(B(5)-29) to (B(4)-36) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 386(A(5)-59) except that the pending display is different. Since the effect is the same as that shown in FIG. (A(4)-66), description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 388(C(5)-1) to (C(4)-28) show other effect patterns of the timer notice effect executed during the big hit game. Note that FIG. 388 (C(5)-1) is an effect subsequent to the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-9), showing a state in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 388(C(5)-1) to (C(5)-10) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 388(C(5)-1) to (C(5)-10) are shown in FIGS. 387(B(5)-10) to (B(5)-19). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 388(C(5)-11), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuously performed, and FIG. 388(C(5)-11) is shown. At the timing shown, "19:75" is displayed.

FIG. 388 (C(5)-12) shows the state of transition to the fifth round. In this example of the effect, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues to be performed even after shifting from the fourth round to the fifth round. The timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is "18:86" at the timing shown in FIG. 388 (C(5)-12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388(C(5)-13), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuously performed, and in FIG. 388(C(5)-13). At the timing shown, "07:21" is displayed.

In FIG. 388 (C(5)-14), the state of transition to the sixth round is shown. In this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues to be performed even after shifting from the fifth round to the sixth round. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit mid-time timer notice display TM21 may be performed from the fourth round to the sixth round. This is due to the difference in the digestion time of the round game depending on the skill of the player. Note that the timer display in the first big hit timer notification display TM21 is "04:21" at the timing shown in FIG. 388 (C(5)-14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 388(C(5)-15), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 388(C( In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5) to 16), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C(5)-17), the characters of "holding consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the family crest character, and execution is suspended (pending) symbol variation. It is announced that the display includes a variable display that is a big hit.

In this way, when the suspended consecutive chan announcement effect ends, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (C(5)-18), the character of Kopanda appears again and the characters "Next round effect introduction continuation" appear. It is displayed and it is informed that the continuation of the effect explanation, which has been interrupted by the timer advance effect, is started. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the family crest character CMON has appeared and the notification of the determination of the holding consecutive chan has been made is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, even if the initial value of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is the same, the round being executed may be different when the countdown of the timer display ends. It is shown. The timing at which the countdown of the timer display ends and a certain effect starts is not limited to during the round, but may be an interval between rounds. In this case, a certain effect is performed in the interval between rounds. However, a certain effect may start after the next round starts.

FIG. 388 (C(5)-19) shows the state of transition to the seventh round. When the process moves to the seventh round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the replay icon together with the characters “when “...”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 388 (C(5)-20). The replay icon to which the character "NEXT" is attached is displayed together with the character "Pseudo ream", and the pseudo rendition is explained. In this way, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is performed for three rounds, so the round in which the continuation of the effect explanation is started is different from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 386 and 387. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 388(C(5)-21) to (C(4)-28) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 388(C(5)-21) to (C(4)-28) are shown in FIGS. 387(B(5)-29) to (B(4)-36). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

FIGS. 389(D(5)-1) to (D(4)-17) show the effect patterns in which the timer notice is not executed during the big hit game. Note that FIG. 389 (D(5)-1) is an effect subsequent to the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-9), showing a state in which a big hit has occurred and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 389(D(5)-1) to FIG. 389(C(5)-6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 389(D(5)-1) to (D(5)-6) are shown in FIGS. 387(B(5)-10) to (B(5)-15). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

In FIG. 389 (D(5)-7), the state of transition to the fourth round is shown. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is not started even after the fourth round, and the effect explanation is continued. That is, in this example of effect, when the process shifts to the fourth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the replay icon together with the character "When comes out...", and then FIG. 389 (D(5)- As shown in 8), the replay icon having the character "NEXT" is displayed together with the character "Pseudo-ream" to explain the pseudo-reproduction. As described above, in this effect example, since the timer notice effect is not performed, the round in which the pseudo continuous effect is explained is different from the effect examples shown in FIGS. 386 to 388.

In FIG. 389 (D(5)-9), the state of transition to the 16th round is shown. When the game shifts to the 16th round, the character of "copanda" appears again and the character "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round.

In FIG. 389 (D(5)-10), the 16th round ends and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 389 (D(5)-11), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a grand V formation display, which is a display in which four grandpa characters form a V formation, is displayed. GYV is displayed, and the notification that the holding consecutive chan is performed is given. That is, a state is shown in which the pending consecutive-chan notification is performed in a manner different from the appearance of the family crest character CMON. Note that, as shown in FIG. 389(D(5)-11′), the family crest character CMON may appear. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (D(5)-12), in response to the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV, the characters "one more time" are displayed, and a suspended consecutive chan occurs. Is informed. After that, when the big hit game ends, the effects shown in FIG. 389(D(1)-13) to (D(4)-17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 389(D(1)-13) to (D(4)-17) are shown in FIGS. 387(B(1)-32) to (B(4)-36). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

As described above, in this example of performance, as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed, the holding consecutive chan notification (display of the character CMON of the family crest) which is performed as a certain effect and the timer consecutive notice effect which is a separate consecutive holding effect. It is shown that the mode is different from that of Chan notification (display by Grandpa V formation display GYV).

In addition, in this example of performance, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of held consecutive chan notifications, but at least one of the held consecutive chan notifications is shown in, for example, FIG. 14A or FIG. In the case of a game board configuration, it may be a notification by a movable effect by the effect movable body, may be a notification by voice, may be a notification by a light emitting body, or a part or all of these. It may be a notification by a combination of.

389(E(5)-1) to 390(E(1)-18) show another effect pattern of the timer notice effect executed during the big hit game. Note that FIG. 389(E(5)-1) is an effect that follows the effect shown in FIG. 386(A(4)-41), and shows how a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. There is. However, in this example of performance, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" have been completed and have been a big hit. Then, the effect shown in FIG. 389(E(5)-1) to FIG. 390(E(5)-12) is performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 389(E(5)-1) to 390(E(5)-12) are shown in FIGS. 386(A(5)-42) to (A(5)-53). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 390(E(5)-12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the state shown in FIG. 390(E(5)-12) is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), it is shown that the bancho character TDR wearing a school run (clothes) appears instead of the family crest character CMON. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390(E(5)-14), the display changes to a mode in which the clothes of the bancho character TDR are torn and naked, and the character “probably strange” is displayed. , It is informed that the game state after the jackpot will shift to the special figure high probability general figure high probability (that is, the probability variation state with electric support). As described above, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer advance notice effect by the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21, the certainty change notification effect is performed as a certain effect. After that, up to the 16th round, which is the final round, the effect description is continued as described above.

In FIG. 390 (E(5)-15), the state of transition to the 16th round is shown. When the game shifts to the 16th round, the character of "copanda" appears again and the character "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round. In the lower left corner of the display screen, a length icon TDRK indicating that the length character TDR has appeared and the confirmation of the probability change confirmation has been performed is displayed.

In FIG. 390 (E(5)-16), the 16th round ends, and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390(E(5)-17), the character length "TDR" appears again along with the character display of "Next Probability Change", and the notification of the transition to the Probability Change state is performed here as well. ing.

FIG. 390 (E(1)-18) shows a state in which the big hit game is over and the state changes to the positive change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not yet exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination of the big hits of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

In this example of performance, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the certainty change confirmation notification is performed as a certain effect, but the certainty change confirmation notification may be performed without the timer notice effect.

390 (F(5)-1) to 391 (F(1)-29) show another effect pattern of the timer notice effect executed during the big hit game. Note that FIG. 390 (F(5)-1) is an effect that follows the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A(4)-41), and shows how a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. However, in this example of performance, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" have been completed and have been a big hit. In addition, the big hit in this example of performance is a rank-up bonus, and it is a big hit that makes it difficult to recognize which of four rounds, eight rounds, twelve rounds, and sixteen rounds when the big hit occurs. Then, thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 390(F(5)-1) to FIG. 390(F(5)-12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 390(F(5)-1) to 390(F(5)-12) are shown in FIGS. 386(A(5)-42) to (A(5)-53). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 390(F(5)-12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the state shown in FIG. 390(F(5)-12) is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), the appearance of the character HSG of the lord appears, and the inspirational effect is started whether the big hit game continues after the fifth round or ends in the fourth round. Has been done. As a result, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F(5)-14), the character HSG of the lord's character is shown to stand out, and the character "I'm still going on" is displayed, and the jackpot game is in the fifth round. It is informed that it will continue thereafter. That is, it is shown that the round continuation effect is being performed. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21, the round continuation effect is performed as a certain effect.

FIG. 390 (F(5)-15) shows the state of transition to the fifth round. When the process moves to the fifth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the replay icon and the character "When comes out..." After that, as shown in FIG. 390 (F(5)-16). The replay icon to which the character "NEXT" is attached is displayed together with the character "Pseudo ream", and the pseudo rendition is explained.

FIG. 390 (F(5)-17) shows the state of transition to the eighth round. In this example of performance, when moving to the eighth round, the character "Attention!" is displayed together with the character of Copanda, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 390 (F(5)-18), the character "Round continuation chance" is displayed. Is displayed. That is, in this effect example, in the eighth round, it is informed that the round judge effect is started to fuel whether to continue after the ninth round or end in the eighth round. Then, when the round judge effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F(5)-19), the lord's character HSG appears, and the jackpot game continues after the ninth round, A situation is shown in which a stirrup production is being started as to whether it will end in the eighth round. As a result, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F(5)-20), the character HSG of the lord shows a striking expression, and the characters "I'm still going on" are displayed, and the jackpot game is the ninth round. It is informed that it will continue thereafter. That is, it is shown that the round continuation effect is being performed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the round continuation effect may be performed without passing through the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 390 (F(5)-21), the state of transition to the ninth round is shown. When the process moves to the ninth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the timer notice display as an explanatory display and the character display of "timer display time... ", and then FIG. 390 (F(5)-22). As shown in (), the character "Super-super hot" is displayed together with the display of "77:77" as the initial value of the timer advance notice display, and the highly reliable timer advance effect is explained.

In FIG. 390 (F(5)-23), the state of transition to the 12th round is shown. In this example of performance, when moving to the 12th round, the characters "Attention!" are displayed together with the Kopanda character, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 390 (F(5)-24), the characters "Round continuation chance" are displayed. Is displayed. That is, in this effect example, in the 12th round, it is informed that the round judge effect that starts after the 13th round or ends in the 12th round is started. Then, when the round judge effect is started, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F(5)-25), the lord's character HSG appears, and the jackpot game continues after the 13th round, A situation is shown in which a stirrup production is being started as to whether or not it will end in the 12th round. As a result, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 390 (F(5)-26), the character HGS of the lord is displayed in a flapping manner, the character “sorry!” is displayed, and the jackpot game is 12 rounds. You will be notified that you will finish it with your eyes. In addition, there may be a case where the revival effect is performed and the fact that it will be continued after the 13th round is notified.

In FIG. 390 (F(5)-27), the twelfth round ends and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 391 (F(5)-27) subsequent to FIG. 390 (F(5)-27), the character "next right hit" is displayed, and after the jackpot game is over. Notification of transition to special probability low probability general probability high probability state (that is, time saving state) has been made.

FIG. 391 (F(1)-29) shows that the big hit game is over, and the state shifts to a time saving state (electric power support state). At this time, the hold is not yet exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination of the big hits of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

Thus, in this example production, the timer notice production is performed during the big hit game, and as a result, as a certain production, a confirmation notification (probability change notification, round continuation notification, etc.) advantageous to the player other than the notification of the holding consecutive chan is given. It is shown to be taking place.

In the example of the effect described above, a plurality of timer notice effects having different types of effect may be performed in one big hit game. For example, in one big hit game, the first timer advance notice effect is performed, as a result, a holding consecutive chan announcement is performed as a certain effect, and then the second timer advance notice effect is performed, resulting in a certain effect. Probability change confirmation notification may be performed as an effect.

391 (G(5)-1) to 393 (G(5)-64) show examples of effects in the case where a plurality of symbol variable displays that are big hits are included in the symbol variable displays whose execution is suspended. ing. Note that FIG. 391 (G(5)-1) is an effect that follows the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-9), and shows how a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 391(G(5)-1) to 391(G(5)-21) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 391(G(5)-1) to 391(G(5)-21) are shown in FIGS. 387(B(5)-10) to (B(5)-30). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

In FIG. 391 (G(5)-21), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 391 (G(5)-22), the family Crest character CMON does not appear, and the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed. The display of the grandfather V formation display GYV is a display different from the display corresponding to the family crest character CMON that appears during the big hit game, that is, the event of the suspended consecutive chan notified by the appearance of the family crest character CMON. Separately, it is informed that an event of a holding consecutive chan will occur. In other words, the big jackpot of three consecutive chan including this big jackpot has been confirmed. In this case, the family crest character CMON may appear instead of the grandfather V formation display GYV. After that, when the big hit game ends, the effects shown in FIG. 391 (G(1)-23) to (G(4)-27) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 391(G(1)-23) to (G(4)-27) are shown in FIGS. 387(B(1)-32) to (B(4)-36). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(4)-27) followed by FIG. 392(G(5)-28), a state in which the big hit start effect related to the big hit of the second consecutive Chang is performed is shown. Has been done. When the jackpot start effect is started, the character MCK of Dr. Wedding Machiko celebrates the jackpot with four Kopandas. Further, in this example of effect, when the big hit start effect is started, the grandfather V icon GV is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and in the pattern change display of which the start is suspended, there is already a big change in the pattern. It is informed that one is included. The big hit this time corresponds to the appearance of the family crest character CMON executed as a certain result as a result of the timer advance notice effect executed in the last big hit game. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 392(G(5)-29) to (G(5)-37) are performed. Here, in the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (G(5)-29) to (G(5)-37), the point that the grandfather V icon GV is displayed and the number of holdings of special figure 2 are different. 389 (D(5)-2) to (D(5)-10) in FIG. 389 (D(5)-2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG.

In FIG. 392 (G(5)-37), the 16th round ends and the jackpot end effect is started. Then, in this example of performance, the announcement of the grandfather V icon GV has already given notification of the pending consecutive chan, so as shown in FIG. 392 (G(5)-38), the word "again" is displayed. It is displayed to notify that a pending ream chan will occur.

FIG. 392 (G(1)-39) shows that the big hit game is over and the state changes to the positive change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-40), the suspension of the special diagram 2 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 2 is started, and the second special symbol display device. The variable display of symbols at 214 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the variable icon display area. Then, the variable icon h0 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-41) shows that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, a timer advance notice effect is started by the timer advance notice display TM11 being framed in from the left side of the display screen by a frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 5 seconds after the countdown is started.

Thereafter, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-42), the timer advance notice display TM11 displays “04
: 25” is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character “pseudo-relationship” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is suggested that pseudo-reconnection may be performed as a result of counting down the timer display in the timer notice display TM11. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-43), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-43).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-44), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-44).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-45), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-repetitive symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-45). After that, as shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-46), the character "CONTINUE!" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-46).

Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-47), when the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the vicinity of the navigation character YM is reached. The character "Ikuze" is displayed on the screen, and the second variable display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-48), since the countdown in the timer notice display TM11 is completed, the disappearance animation of the timer notice display is performed in order to erase the timer notice display TM11. Is shown.

However, as shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-49), not only the timer notice display TM11 is not erased, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM11 is added, and the timer notice display TM11 shows " 22:35” is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the outer frame of the timer advance notice display TM11 changes to red to notify that the timer display has been added. This timer advance notice display TM11 then returns to the default display mode, but the display mode may remain changed. As described above, it is revealed that the animation performed in FIG. 392 (G(1)-48) is not the disappearing animation but the timer advance notice addition animation that is the same animation as the disappearing animation. .. In this way, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer advance notice effect is started using the same timer advance notice display TM11. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that a part of the animation in which the timer display is added in the timer notice display and a part of the animation in which the timer notice display is deleted are the same. Note that the timer advance notice animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-50), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, “×2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variation display of the decorative design is being performed by the pseudo link. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-50).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(1)-51), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (G(2)-52), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "reach" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen to notify that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(2)-52).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 392 (G(2)-53) to (G(1)-54), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs normal reach and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. It is shown. Note that the timer advance notice display TM11 is still counting down, and "16:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(2)-54).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(2)-55), the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed during the execution of the normal reach, and a state in which a big hit confirmation notice is given is shown. At this time, the timer notice display TM11 is still counting down, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(2)-55), but the grand V formation display GYV indicates Part of them overlap, which makes it more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the grand V formation display GYV is not displayed. The grandfather V formation display GYV may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM11.

Thereafter, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 392 (G(2)-56), the Echigoya group is a notice effect in which a large number of Echigoya character ECGs are chased by the lord's character instead of the Sabohani group notice. It is shown that the notice is given. This Echigoya group notice is an example of a premier notice, and the arrival of the Echigoya group notice notifies the big hit confirmation. At this time, the reach pattern is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In the timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(2)-56).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(2)-57), it is shown that the captured cut-in image HBK showing how the character ECG of Echigoya is captured by the lord's character is displayed. There is. The captured cut-in image HBK partially overlaps the timer notice display TM11, which makes the visual confirmation more difficult than when the captured cut-in image HBK is not displayed. The captured cut-in image HBK may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM11. Further, "SP development!" is displayed near the navigation character YM to inform that the super reach is being developed. Note that the timer notice display TM11 is still counting down, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(2)-57).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 392 (G(3)-58), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into a SP reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. .. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to urge attention to the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM11. Note that the timer advance notice display TM11 is still counting down, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(3)-58).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(3)-59), the timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM11 changes is being performed. This timer display step-up animation effect is also displayed in the same manner as the above-described disappearing animation. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display is changed is the same as a part of the animation in which the timer notice display is erased. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 392 (G(3)-60), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the timer notice display TM11 as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed. It is shown that the mode is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer advance notice display TM11B) and the step up is shown, and the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved. Further, the timer notice display TM11B whose display mode has been changed is provided with a long face face icon BCHO to give notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The timer notice display TM11B is counting down, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 392 (G(3)-60).

Then, when the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM11B becomes “0:00”, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(3)-61). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM11B in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 392 (G(3)-62), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In the center, "decoration 5", which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern, is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 392 (G(4)-63), a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is shown. Has been done. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (G(5)-64) following FIG. 392 (G(4)-63), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the jackpot decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of symbols. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this example of performance, both the held consecutive chan notification that is performed in the timer notice production and the held consecutive chan notification that is performed without the timer notice production are performed, and the held consecutive chan occurs twice. The state of notification is shown.

Further, in this effect example, a state in which the timer advance notice display overlaps with other advance notice displays and the visibility of at least a part of the timer advance notice display is reduced is shown. Note that the timer advance notice display may be overlapped by the production movable body.

Further, in this example of performance, it is shown that the Echigoya group notice for notifying the big hit confirmation is given instead of the Sabohanii group notice.

In addition, in this effect example, not only during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, but also during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the state of the timer notice effect is shown.

393 (H(5)-1) to 394 (H(1)-40), button stock is performed in the timer notice production executed during the big hit game, and the number of button stocks is increased during the big hit game. It shows how a corresponding mini game is played. Note that FIG. 393 (H(5)-1) is an effect that follows the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A(4)-41) and shows a state in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 393(H(5)-1) to 393(H(5)-12) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 393(H(5)-1) to 393(H(5)-12) are shown in FIGS. 386(A(5)-42) to (A(5)-53). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-12), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. 393 (H(5)-12) In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13), the button image 136a appears instead of the family crest character CMON and the character "x1 stock" is displayed, and the button effect is performed at least once during the big hit game. It is announced. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21, the button stock announcement effect is given to notify that the button effect is performed as a certain effect. Has been done. The button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode, and the reliability of the button effect is low. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-14), the character "x1" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen together with the button icon, and the button effect is performed at least once. I am informing you.

In FIG. 393 (H(5)-15), the state of transition to the eighth round is shown. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-16), the characters “Attention!” are displayed together with the character of the copanda, indicating that the timer advance notice effect is started. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the big hit game is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-17), the second big hit medium timer notice display TM22 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer is activated!" Characters are displayed to inform that the second timer advance notice production has started. Here, the second big hit timer advance notice display TM22 is a special display mode having higher reliability than the default display mode. In the second big hit timer notice display TM22, "05:55" is displayed as the timer display, suggesting that some production is started when 5.55 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. There is. In this effect example, the initial value of the timer display of the second big hit mid-time timer notification display TM22 is set to three "5", and the reliability with respect to the addition of the privilege can be further increased. There are cases.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-18), the second big hit medium timer notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while moving to the approximate center of the display screen. After that, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started on the second big hit timer notice display TM22.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-19), the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22 continues, and is shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-19). “04:85” is displayed at the timing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-20), when the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 393(H( In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5)-21), the vibration/rotation button image 136aV, which is a mode in which the button image vibrates/rotates, appears, and the character "x1 stock" is displayed, during the big hit game. It is announced that the button effect will be additionally performed at least once. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the second big jackpot timer advance notice display TM22, a button stock announcement effect is given to notify that the button effect is performed as a certain effect. Has been done. The vibration/rotation button image 136aV has higher reliability than the default display mode. Thereafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-22), this vibration/rotation button icon is displayed together with the character "x1" below the button icon in the default display mode. The button icon indicates that the button effect will be performed at least twice.

FIG. 393 (H(5)-23) shows the state of transition to the 12th round. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-24), it is shown that the mini game of button effect is started. In this example of performance, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the “change button PUSH” and “the button PUSH” appear above the treasure box image BOX along with the Bancho face icon. Is displayed, and it is informed that the gaming state after the big hit game will be in a probable state when a bancho face appears from the treasure box.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-25), a digestion animation showing that the button icon of the default display mode that appears first among the two button icons is digested is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-26), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a in the default display mode, the text “Press!” is displayed, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Is urging the operation of. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-26), the operation valid period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation valid period is then started.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-27), it is displayed in FIG. 393 (H(5)-27). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H(5)-28), the appearance of the panda's face PND from the treasure chest image BOX and the word “chance” are displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. ing. However, since the appearance of the panda's face PND has not been denied to grant the privilege, the reliability may be low, but the expectation for granting the privilege may still be maintained. After that, when the mini game of button effect ends, as shown in FIG. 394 (H(5)-29), the effect in the jackpot game is restarted.

In FIG. 394 (H(5)-30), the state of transition to the 14th round is shown. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H(5)-31), it is shown that the second mini game of the button effect is started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed in the center of the display screen and the upper side of the treasure box image BOX is displayed as described above with reference to FIG. 393 (H(5)-24). In addition to the icon of the bancho's face, the characters "With the button PUSH" and "If it appears, it is a certain change" are displayed, and when the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box, the gaming state after the jackpot game will be changed to a certain state. Has been done. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H(5)-31), the letters "last chance" are also displayed in response to the remaining one button icon in stock. There is.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (H(5)-32), a digest animation showing how the last remaining button icon is digested is performed, and then, in FIG. 394(H(5)-. As shown in FIG. 33), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the vibration/rotation button image 136aV, and the characters “press!” are displayed to prompt the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the effect button 136 is also vibrating and rotating, but it may not be performed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT changes in a mode in which the gauge decreases in accordance with the time from the start of the operation valid period. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 394 (H(5)-33), the operation valid period has not started yet, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. The operation valid period is then started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 394 (H(5)-34) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, it is displayed in FIG. 394 (H(5)-35). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown, the character "probable change!" is displayed as the banchou face TRF appears from the treasure chest image BOX, and the character "probable change!" After that, when the mini game of button effect ends, as shown in FIG. 394 (H(5)-36), the effect in the jackpot game is restarted. At this time, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a long-length face icon TDRF is displayed together with the characters "Next Probability Change" to notify that the transition to the Probability Change state will occur after the end of the big hit game.

In FIG. 394 (H(5)-37), the state of transition to the 16th round is shown. When the game shifts to the 16th round, the character of "copanda" appears again and the character "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round.

In FIG. 394 (H(5)-38), the 16th round ends, and the big hit end effect is started. In this effect example, when the jackpot end effect is started, an animation is performed in which the character of the copanda and the icon TDRF of the longest face displayed in the lower left part of the display screen are erased, and then FIG. 394(H(5 )-39), the character TDR of the length appears along with the character display of "Next Probability Change", and the notification of the transition to the Probability Change state is given here as well.

FIG. 394 (H(1)-40) shows a state in which the big hit game ends and the state changes to the probability changing state. At this time, the hold is not exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the effect of stocking the execution of a certain effect (a mini game of button effect) is shown.

In addition, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, a chance-type effect that suggests that some kind of privilege may be given is shown. ..

In this example of effect, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, button stock is performed as a certain effect, and during the jackpot game, a mini game of button effect is performed a number of times corresponding to that number. A mini game of button effect corresponding to the button stock may be played during the symbol variation display after the end of the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is performed during the big hit game, and the button stock effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result, but the timer advance notice is displayed during the symbol variation display before the start of the big hit game. The production is started, the button stock production related to the timer notice production may be performed during the big hit game, or the timer notice production is started during the big hit game, and the symbol variation display is executed after the big hit game is finished. A button stock effect related to the timer notice effect may be performed. In addition, the timer notice production is started during the symbol variation display before the start of the big hit game, the timer notice production is continuously performed during the big hit game, and thereafter, during the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game ends. A button stock effect related to the timer notice effect may be performed.

394 (I(5)-1) to 395 (I(1)-31), button stock is performed in the timer notice production executed during the big hit game, and the number of button stocks is increased during the big hit game. The other production pattern in which the corresponding mini game is played is shown. Note that FIG. 394 (I(5)-1) is an effect that follows the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A(4)-41), and shows a state in which a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 394(I(5)-1) to 394(I(5)-16) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 394(I(5)-1) to 394(H(5)-16) are shown in FIGS. 383(H(5)-1) to (H(5)-16). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (I(5)-17), the second big hit medium timer notice display TM22 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and the word "timer activated!" It is displayed to inform that the second timer notice effect has started. Here, the second big hit midtime timer notice display TM22 has a default display mode. In the second big hit timer notice display TM22, "03:00" is displayed as a timer display, which suggests that a certain effect may be started 3 seconds after the countdown is started. ing.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 394 (I(5)-18), the second big hit medium timer notice display TM22 is enlarged and displayed while moving to the approximate center of the display screen. After that, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started on the second big hit timer notice display TM22.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I(5)-19) following FIG. 394 (I(5)-18), the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22 continues, At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (I(5)-19), "02:77" is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I(5)-20), the disappearing animation is started during the countdown display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22, and the second big hit medium timer notice display TM22 is erased. Is shown. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the second big hit timer notice display TM22, it is notified that the notice that a certain effect is performed is a false (geek) notice. In other words, it means that the second preliminary jackpot timer notice display TM22 is erased in the middle of the countdown before it becomes "00:00" and a certain effect (button stock) is not displayed. You can

When the disappearance animation is completed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I(5)-21), the character BBA of the old woman appears and the characters of "Heehi sorry" are displayed, and the timer advance notice effect is Gase's effect. Then, it is notified that the button stock has not been performed.

In FIG. 395 (I(5)-22), the state of transition to the 14th round is shown. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 395(I(5)-23) to (I(5)-27), a state where the mini game of button effect is started is shown. The effects shown in FIGS. 395(I(5)-23) to (I(5)-27) are shown in FIGS. 393(H(5)-24) to 394(H(5)-28). Since it is performed in the same manner as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

In FIG. 395 (I(5)-28), the state of transition to the 16th round is shown. When the game shifts to the 16th round, the character of "copanda" appears again and the character "final round" is displayed to inform the player of the final round.

In FIG. 395 (I(5)-29), the 16th round ends, and the jackpot end effect is started. In this effect example, a banchou character TDR wearing a school run (clothes) appears in place of the jackpot end effect by Copanda. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (I(5)-30), the display changes to the mode in which the clothes of the bancho character TDR are torn and naked, and the characters "Next time probability change" are displayed. , It is notified that the game state after the big hit is in a certain change state. In this example of performance, when the banchou character TDR appears, the player is definitely notified that the banquet character TDR will enter the probable state after the big hit game, but when the banchou character TDR appears, the probable character will transition to the probable state. May not be determined, and it may be determined to shift to the definite change state when the clothes are torn and naked.

FIG. 395 (I(1)-31) shows that the big hit game is over and the state changes to the probability changing state. At this time, the hold is not exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, an effect suggesting the possibility of a privilege being given is performed, while an advantageous privilege is given to the player. It is shown that the effect (probability change finalizing effect) for notifying that it is performed is being executed without the timer notice effect.

Further, in this effect example, even if the timer advance notice effect is performed in one big hit game, it is definitely announced that the advantageous privilege is given to the player without the timer advance notice effect being performed. It is shown that the effect to be performed is being executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where the holding consecutive chan notification and the probability variation confirmation production are performed without the timer preliminary production, but when the timer preliminary production is not performed, the confirmation change confirmation is performed more than the holding consecutive chan notification. Although the effect is configured to be executed more easily, the suspended holiday notice may be configured to be executed more easily.

In addition, in the example of the effect, the button stock effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect, and the example in which the mini game of the button effect is performed by the number of the stocked buttons has been shown. For example, when a mission for winning a plurality of balls to the second special figure starting port 232 is performed, if one ball or a predetermined number (for example, three balls) is won, a mini game of button effect may be performed. ..

395 (J(1)-1) to 397 (J(1)-67) are continued after the timer notice effect started during the variable display of the decorative pattern shifts to the big hit game, and the big hit game It shows how a certain effect is performed during execution. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 395(J(1)-1) to 396(J(4)-22) are shown in FIGS. 385(A(1)-1) to (A(4)-22). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J(1)-23), the suspension of the special diagram 1 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the first special symbol display device. The variable display of symbols at 212 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h11 of special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11 that has been the display mode of the bomb becomes the change icon h0 that is the notice display mode related to the symbol change by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. That is, the change icon h0 notifies the advance notice that the timer advance notice effect is started. The symbol fluctuation display this time is a symbol fluctuation display that is a big hit, and the fluctuation time is 30 seconds.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J(1)-24), the word "stock activated" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen in correspondence with the display of the variable icon h0, and two timer advance notice effects are displayed. Are shown to be starting at the same time. At this time, the bomb icon BOM has been erased. In this effect example, the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 are respectively frame-in by the frame-in animation from the left and right of the display screen, and two timer advance notice effects are simultaneously started. Both the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are default display modes. On the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, "90:00" is displayed as a timer display, and a certain effect is started when 90 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. It suggests. That is, it is shown that the time longer than the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display this time is set to the initial value of the timer display. Further, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started when 10 seconds have elapsed after the countdown was started. Suggests that. In this example of performance, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start counting down at the same time, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have elapsed and when 90 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was started. Have been suggested to be initiated. Here, a certain effect that may be started when 10 seconds have elapsed and a certain effect that may be started when 90 seconds have elapsed may be the same or different. Good. After that, as shown in FIGS. 385(A(1)-25) to (A(3)-34) and described above, FIGS. 396(J(1)-25) to (J(3)). -34) is performed. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 396(J(1)-25) to (J(3)-34) are different from those shown in FIG. 385 except that the time indicated by the timer display of the third timer advance notice display TM13 is different. Since it is the same as (A(1)-25) to (A(3)-34) in FIG.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J(3)-35), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a displayed in FIG. 386(A(3)-38) is displayed as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance notice effect, but in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is performed. The appearance is displayed as an effect different from a certain effect executed as a result of performing. That is, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed without the timer advance notice effect. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "68:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J(3)-35).

Then, as shown in FIG. 396 (J(3)-36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In the center, "decoration 5", which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern, is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, and "66:21" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J(3)-36).

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J(4)-37), a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5” is shown. Has been done. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. At this time, the display position of the third timer notice display TM13 is moved from the upper right corner to the upper left corner. The movement of the third timer notice display TM13 may be performed by moving animation or may be performed by switching display. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed, and "64:30" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J(4)-37).

Then, as shown in FIG. 396 (J(4)-38), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, and "62:30" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J(4)-38). It should be noted that the countdown of the timer display may be temporarily interrupted during the fixed display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J(5)-39), a state in which a big hit start effect is being performed is shown. When the jackpot start effect is started, the character MCK of Dr. Wedding Machiko celebrates the jackpot with four Kopandas. Further, when the big hit start effect is started, a right-hit display for promoting right-hit to the player is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. Further, in this effect example, the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 that has been performed before the big hit game of this time is continuously performed even after the big hit game is started. "62:11" is displayed at the timing shown in J(5)-39). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice effect started during the symbol variation display continues after the big hit game. In the example of the effect, the third timer notice display TM13 is moved slightly downward at the timing when the big hit start effect is started.

In FIG. 396 (J(5)-40), the state where the big hit game is started and the game is shifted to the first round is shown. In this example of the effect, the effect of introducing the effect during the big hit game is performed, and in the first round, the characters "introduction effect from the next round" are displayed together with the character of Copanda, and that effect is notified. At this time, the third timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the Kopanda character appearing in the performance during the big hit game, and it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the third timer notice display. It may be overlapped with the display TM13. Further, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "60:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J(5)-40).

FIG. 396 (J(5)-41) shows the state of transition to the second round. When the process moves to the second round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "When comes out..." together with the icon of Savohani, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 396 (J(5)-42). Along with this, a display of the strong Sabohani group notice will be displayed, and the text "Expect the group notice!" will be displayed to explain the Savohani group notice. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, and "44:24" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J(5)-42). In addition, in FIG. 396 (J(5)-41) and FIG. 396 (J(5)-42), the third timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the character of Sabohani that appears in the explanation of the production, and the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed. Part of the timer notice display TM13 is difficult to see. Here, the character of Sabohani appearing in the presentation explanation may be overlapped with the third timer notice display TM13.

FIG. 396 (J(5)-43) shows the state of transition to the fourth round. When the process shifts to the fourth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the replay icon together with the characters "When comes out..." After that, as shown in FIG. 396 (J(5)-44). The replay icon to which the character "NEXT" is attached is displayed together with the character "Pseudo ream", and the pseudo rendition is explained. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, and "06:33" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (J(5)-44). At least a part of the timer notice display TM13 is overlapped by the replay icon, and it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the third timer notice display TM13. Here, the replay icon may be overlapped with the third timer notice display TM13.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “01:00”, the display position of the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 396 (J(5)-45). It is shown that the icon moves to the lower center of the screen and is displayed on the front side of the replay icon, so that the remaining time on the timer display can be easily viewed.

After that, when the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes “00:00”, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-46) following FIG. 396 (J(5)-45). , A cut-in image (dramatic image grandpa image) 565G of a dramatic character that is a smoked cigarette is displayed. At this time, the graphic image 565G is displayed on the back side of the third timer notice display TM13. Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-47), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the character display of "probably strange" is displayed instead of the timer display. That is, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed using the timer display area.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-48), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is switched to the character display "Yes!". That is, after the jackpot game is over, it is informed that the game will shift to the probability changing state. It should be noted that FIG. 397 (J(5)-48) shows a state in which the transition from the fourth round to the fifth round is performed during the execution of the effect by the dramatic image grandfather image 565G.

Further subsequently, as shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-49), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of "that is it", which is advantageous to the player in addition to the probability change state. Is suggested to be given.

Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-50), the third timer advance notice display TM13 is switched to the character display of "No!". That is, in addition to the probability change state, it is informed that it has been decided that some advantageous privilege is given to the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-51), in the third timer notice display TM13, the display is switched to the character display of "Hold within hot", and in addition to the probability change state, the execution is suspended. In the variable display, it is notified that a symbol variable display that is a big hit is included (that is, a pending consecutive chan occurs). That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the effect display by the dramatic image grandfather image 565G is performed as a certain effect.

In addition, when the game state after the big hit game is a probable state and a pending consecutive chan occurs, the production by the dramatic image grandfather image 565G is performed, and when the big hit by the pending consecutive chan is a probable strange jackpot. It may be executed only in the.

When the effect by the dramatic image grandpa image 565G is completed as described above, the oversized family crest character BCMN appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-52). The appearance of the character BCMN of the oversized family crest notifies the transition to the probable variation state and the occurrence of the pending consecutive chan.

FIG. 397 (J(5)-53) shows the state of transition to the sixth round. When shifting to the sixth round, a character-length character TDR whose clothes are torn out appears, and it is notified that the character TDR will shift to the probability change state after the jackpot game is over. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, a family crest icon CMN indicating that the character BCMN of the oversized family crest has appeared and the notification of the determination of the holding consecutive chan has been made is displayed. This effect is continuously performed until the 16th round ends, as shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-53) to (J(5)-54).

In FIG. 397 (J(5)-55), the 16th round ends, and the jackpot end effect is started. In this example of effect, even if the big hit end effect is started, the longest character TDR is continuously displayed, and further, the characters of "next probability change" are displayed, and the notification of the shift to the probability change state is given. Then, as shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the family crest character CMON appears again from the upper part of the display screen, and it is also notified that the pending consecutive chan will be performed. Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-57), the character of "next probability change" displayed together with the bancho character TDR is switched to "next big hit". There is. After that, when the big hit game ends, the effects shown in FIG. 397 (J(1)-58) to (J(4)-62) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 397(J(1)-58) to (J(4)-62) are shown in FIGS. 386(A(1)-62) to (A(4)-66). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (J(5)-63), it is shown that the big hit start effect related to the second big hit by the holding consecutive chan is being performed. When the jackpot start effect is started, the character MCK of Dr. Wedding Machiko celebrates the jackpot with four Kopandas.

In FIG. 397 (J(5)-64), the big hit game is started, and the state of shifting to the first round is shown. In this example of performance, a character-length character TDR whose clothes are torn off appears from the first round, and it is informed that the big hit this time is a definite strange big hit. This effect is continuously performed until the 16th round starts. As described above, the presentation explanation may be given during the round game.

FIG. 397 (J(5)-65) shows the state of transition to the 16th round. When the process shifts to the 16th round, the character “probably strange big hit” is displayed in addition to the bancho character TDR, and it is informed that the probability is a big jackpot.

In FIG. 397 (J(5)-66), the 16th round ends and the jackpot end effect is started. In this example of effect, even if the big hit end effect is started, the longest character TDR is continuously displayed, and further, the characters of "next probability change" are displayed, and the notification of the shift to the probability change state is given.

FIG. 397 (J(1)-67) shows that the big hit game is over and the state changes to the positive change state (electric support state). At this time, the hold is not exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed across the symbol variation display and the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display may be overlapped with other effect display, and at least a part thereof may be difficult to visually recognize.

Further, in this effect example, a state is suggested in which a plurality of advantageous benefits are given in a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a time longer than the variation time, which is the time for executing the symbol variation display, may be displayed as the initial value of the timer display.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the initial value of the timer display is set so that the timer display will be “00:00” during the big hit game with physical calculation. The time indicated by the initial value of the timer display in the timer notice display is longer than the fluctuation time, and the shortest time in the big hit game (for example, in the case of a pachinko machine with 16 rounds and 10 counts, if all the shot balls win the attacker) , The shortest time is about 1 minute and 30 seconds).

397(K(5)-1) to 398(K(4)-30), the timer notice production is started during the big hit game, but the timer notice production is not finished during the big hit game, and thereafter. It shows that a certain effect related to the timer notice effect is performed in the symbol variation display started at. Note that FIG. 397 (K(5)-1) is an effect that follows the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-9), and shows how a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 397 (K(5)-1) to (K(5)-6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 397(K(5)-1) to (K(5)-6) are shown in FIGS. 387(B(5)-10) to (B(5)-15). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

FIG. 397 (K(5)-7) shows the state of transition to the 15th round. In this effect example, when the process moves to the 15th round, the character "Attention!" is displayed together with the character of Copanda, which suggests that the timer notice effect is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (K(5)-8), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen, and "Timer is activated!" The characters are displayed to inform that the timer advance notice effect has started. Here, the first big hit timer preliminary announcement display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "40:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 40 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. That is, in this effect example, the big hit game may end within 40 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is started, and a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is performed during the big hit game. It indicates that there is a possibility that they will not be missed. That is, when the big hit game is quickly digested, a certain effect may not be performed during the big hit game.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 397 (K(5)-9), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is enlarged and displayed while moving to the approximate center of the display screen. Then, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started on the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K(5)-10) subsequent to FIG. 397 (K(5)-9), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K(5)-10), "39:52" is displayed.

In FIG. 398 (K(5)-11), the state of transition to the 16th round is shown. In this example of the effect, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed over a plurality of rounds. That is, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues to be performed even after shifting from the 15th round to the 16th round. The timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is "24:33" at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K(5)-11).

In FIG. 398 (K(5)-12), the 16th round ends and the jackpot end effect is started. However, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and "10:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K(5)-12). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed even after the 16th round ends and the jackpot game ends. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K(5)-13), the characters "next electric sapo" are displayed, and after the jackpot game, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (that is, Notification of the shift to a time saving state has been given. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K(5)-13), "08:77" is displayed as the timer display in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21.

FIG. 398 (K(1)-14) shows a state in which the big hit game is over and the state shifts to the electric support state. At this time, the hold is not exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". Note that in FIG. 398 (K(1)-14), there are two holdings of special figure 2, and the first holding icon h21 and the second holding icon h22 are displayed. Further, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues even after the big hit game ends and the game state shifts to the electric support state, and FIG. 398 (K(1)) At a timing shown in -14), "06:10" is displayed as the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21. In this example of performance, when the big hit game ends and the game state shifts, the first big hit mid-timer timer notice display TM21 is reduced and moved to the upper left corner of the display screen.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K(1)-15), the suspension of the special diagram 2 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 2 is started, and the second special symbol display device. The variable display of symbols at 214 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the variable icon display area. Then, the second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and is displayed as the first hold icon h21. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "05:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K(1)-15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398(K(1)-16), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is continuing, and FIG. 398(K(1 )-16), "03:00" is displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "timer attention" is displayed, which suggests that a certain effect may be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K(1)-17), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown continues in the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21, and "01:06" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (K(1)-17).

After that, as shown in FIG. 398(K(1)-18), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 398(K(K( In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 1) to 19), the family crest character CMON appears so as to overlap the decorative pattern, and the characters "family crest advent" are displayed near the navigation character YM to confirm the big hit. It is shown that the notification is being performed. That is, it is informed that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. Further, at this time, the first big hit midtime timer notice display TM21 is erased. At this time, the right symbol is changing at a low speed, and it is shown that it is stopped and displayed at "decoration 5." In this way, in this effect example, the timer notice effect started during the big hit game continues even after the end of the big hit game, and is executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed in the symbol variation display executed thereafter. As a certain effect, a state in which the big hit confirmation notification is performed by the display of the family crest character CMON is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K(1)-20), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. At this time, the character "big hit" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the big hit confirmation is given. Then, as shown in FIG. 398 (K(2)-21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the letters “reach” near the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. After that, the family crest character CMON is erased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 398(K(2)-22) to (K(1)-23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed and the middle symbol is changing at a low speed. It is shown.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K(2)-24) shows that the Echigoya group notice is given. At this time, the character "premier appearance" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to inform that the premier notice is being given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K(2)-25), a state in which the captured cut-in image HBK is displayed is shown. Further, "SP development!" is displayed near the navigation character YM to inform that the super reach is being developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 398 (K(3)-26), the decorative pattern display device 208 develops into an SP reach (swordsman reach), and a screen where the main character's lord and the enemy swordsman face each other is displayed. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K(3)-27), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed near the navigation character YM to inform the content of the executed notice. The display of today's cut-in image CI1a in this example of performance is executed as a different effect from a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 398 (K(3)-28), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and the screen that won is displayed, and at the same time, the decorative pattern display device 208 is omitted. In the center, "decoration 5", which is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle pattern, is displayed, and it is informed that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 398 (K(4)-29), a state in which temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is shown. Has been done. At this time, the character "Yatteze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is informed that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 398 (K(4)-30), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the large-decorative decorative patterns of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, the state in which the timer notice effect is performed across the big hit game and the display of the symbol variation display after the end of the big hit game is shown.

398(L(5)-1) to 399(L(4)-30) are different from the effects shown in FIGS. 397(K(5)-1) to 398(K(4)-30). The pattern is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 398(L(5)-1) to 399(L(5)-10) are shown in FIGS. 397(K(5)-1) to 398(K(5)-10). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

In FIG. 399 (L(5)-11), the state of transition to the 16th round is shown. The timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is "12:52" at the timing shown in FIG. 399 (L(5)-11).

FIG. 399 (L(5)-12) shows that the 16th round continues. At this time, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and becomes “00:00”. In this example of performance, it takes a longer time to complete the jackpot game in the fifteenth to sixteenth rounds than in the example of effects shown in FIGS. 397(K(5)-8) to 398(K(5)-11). It is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed by the time the big hit game ends.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L(5)-13), the family crest character CMON appears. That is, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display on the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed by the end of the big hit game, and as a certain effect, the pending consecutive chan notification is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON. Is shown. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L(5)-14), the characters "super-heat in the hold" are displayed together with the family crest icon CMN, suggesting that the hold consecutive chan is performed. ing.

In FIG. 399 (L(5)-15), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 399 (L(5)-16), the characters "next consecutive chan" are displayed in response to the notification of the pending consecutive chan during the big hit game, In this case, too, notification is given that the holding consecutive chan will be held. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 399(L(1)-17) to (L(4)-30) are performed. In the effect shown in FIGS. 399(L(1)-17) to (L(4)-30) in the figure, the timer notice effect is completed during the big hit game, and the notification of the pending consecutive chan has already been made. As shown in 388 (K(1)-14) to (K(4)-30) in the figure, the timer advance notice effect is not performed during the symbol variation display. In other words, the effects shown in FIGS. 399(L(1)-17) to (L(4)-30) are not shown in FIG. 388(K(1)-, except that the timer notice effect is not performed. 14) to (K(4)-30) in the figure, the same effect is performed. Therefore, description of the effects shown in FIGS. 399(L(1)-17) to (L(4)-30) is omitted.

Thus, in this example of performance, even if the contents of the timer notice effect are the same, due to the difference in the progress of the game (digest speed of the big hit game), when the timer notice effect is completed during the big hit game, and when the big hit It is shown that there are cases where it is completed during the symbol variation display that is performed after the end of the game.

In FIGS. 400(M(1)-1) to 401(M(11)-68), the timer notice production is started during the symbol variation display which is a big hit, but is started during and after the symbol variation display. The timer advance notice effect does not end even during a big hit game, and a certain effect related to the timer advance notice effect is performed in the symbol variation display started thereafter. The effects shown in FIGS. 400(M(1)-1) to 401(M(5)-42) are shown in FIGS. 395(J(1)-1) to 396(J(5)-42). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

In FIG. 401 (M(5)-43), the state of transition to the fourth round is shown. When the process shifts to the fourth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the replay icon and the character “When comes out... ”, and the description of the pseudo continuous production is started. However, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-44), the description of the pseudo-relation production is interrupted, and the character HSG of the lord who has made a thumb-up pose appears and "Emergency notification!" The characters are displayed. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "09:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-44).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-45), the characters "timer extension" are displayed and the timer notice is displayed during the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13. It is shown that the addition animation is started. As a result, the player may be able to expect that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 will be added.

When the timer advance notice addition animation ends, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-46), it is shown that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is updated to “99:99”. Has been done.

FIG. 401 (M(5)-47) shows a state where the fifth round is entered. When the process moves to the fifth round, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the suspended description of the pseudo-reproduction is resumed, and the replay icon is displayed together with the character "When comes out..." As shown in M(5)-48), a character of "pseudo-ream" is displayed together with the replay icon to which the character of "NEXT" is attached, and the pseudo-reproduction is explained. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "90:26" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-48). However, the third timer notice display TM13 is at least partially overlapped with the pseudo-relationship icon relating to the description of the pseudo-reproduction, and it is difficult to visually recognize the third timer notice display TM13.

In FIG. 401 (M(5)-49), the state of transition to the ninth round is shown. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-50), the character HSG of the lord who has made a thumb-up pose appears again and the characters "emergency notification!" are displayed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "13:58" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-50). In addition, in FIG. 401 (M(5)-48) to FIG. 401 (M(5)-49), two game balls are won in the special figure 2 starting opening 232 between the fifth round and the ninth round. Therefore, the number of reservations for special figure 2 has increased by two.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-51), the characters "timer extension" are displayed and the timer notice is displayed during the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13. It is shown that the addition animation is started. This may allow the player to expect that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 will be further added.

When the timer advance notice addition animation ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-52) shows that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is updated to a display indicating infinity. Has been done. That is, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is extended by updating the timer display to a display indicating infinity. At this time, the countdown of the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is suspended.

In FIG. 401 (M(5)-53), the state of transition to the 10th round is shown. The timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 remains the display indicating infinity and remains unchanged. This state is continued until the 16th round ends, as shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-54).

In FIG. 401 (M(5)-55), the 16th round ends and the jackpot end effect is started. Also here, the lord's character HSG is displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 is still a display indicating infinity. Then, when the big hit end effect is started, the characters "timer is..." are displayed to notify that the display of the third timer notice display TM13 changes.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-56), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 changes to “10:00”, and 10 seconds after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. It suggests that a certain performance is started when the second elapses. Further, at this time, the character "next power support" is displayed to inform that the gaming state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (time saving state). Actually, as will be described later, the game state after the big hit game is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probability change state), but here, it is not notified that it is a probability change state, It informs that it is a time saving state, and shifts to a so-called latent state.

FIG. 401 (M(11)-57) shows a state in which the big hit game is over and the state shifts to the electric support state (latent probability state). At this time, the hold is not exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is not restarted, and the display of "10:00" remains.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-58), the suspension (first suspension) of the special symbol 2 is exhausted, and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started, and the second special symbol display device. The variable display of symbols at 214 is started. In addition, the moving icons of the hold icons h21 and h22 in the special figure 2 are performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, and is displayed as the first hold icon h21. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not started yet and remains “10:00”, but after that, the countdown starts.

FIG. 401 (M(11)-59) shows that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-59) "09:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.23 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was restarted.

In FIG. 401 (M(11)-59) to FIG. 401 (M(11)-60), two game balls are won in the special figure 2 starting opening 232, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is increased by two. It is shown. Here, the holding icons h22 and h23 of the special figure 2 are both in the default display mode. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "07:44" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-60).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-61), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the swing fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5". Has been temporarily stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-62), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Also at this time, the countdown of the timer display continues on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-62).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-63), the suspension (first suspension) of the special diagram 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 2 is started, and the second special symbol. The variable display of symbols on the display device 214 is started. In addition, a moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the variable icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, and is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second hold icon. It moves to the display position of the icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Also at this time, the third timer advance notice display TM13 continues to count down the timer display, and "02:54" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-63).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-64), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00". It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-65), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the characters “probable change confirmation” are displayed in the area where the timer display was displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probability changing state. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the probability change notification is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-66), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the character "probably changing" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, so that the game is played. It is notified that the state is the probable state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-67), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the shaking fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5". Has been temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-68), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns with the loss of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, the state in which the timer notice effect is performed including the symbol variation display performed before and after the big hit game is shown.

Further, in this effect example, while the timer notice effect is being executed, the countdown of the timer display is paused by performing a predetermined display (for example, an infinite display), and then restarted.

Further, in this effect example, a state in which the time shown in the timer display is added during execution of the timer notice effect is shown.

In addition, in this example of performance, there is a case where there is a case where it is not notified whether or not the game state after the big hit game is the probability change state (so-called "substantiation"), the pachinko machine having the game property, the timer notice production is performed. It is shown that a certain effect executed as a result of the notification is informed that the state is the probable change state.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the display position of the timer notice display is likely to be changed (is likely to be moved and displayed) when the timer notice effect extends over the big hit game and the symbol variation display performed before and after the big hit game.

Further, in this effect example, for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-55), it is preferable that a long timer display (infinity display) is expected to have a certain effect content. It is shown that there are cases where This may allow the player to expect that a long timer display will be performed.

In the present embodiment, a pachinko machine capable of executing a small hit game is configured such that such a timer notice effect is not displayed in the symbol variation display that is the small hit, but is performed in the symbol variation display that is the big hit. Good.

FIGS. 402(N(5)-1) to (N(11)-11) show the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 400(M(1)-1) to 401(M(11)-68). The other production pattern is shown. Note that FIG. 402 (N(5)-1) is an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 401 (M(5)-54), and shows that the 16th round has ended and the jackpot end effect has started. Showing. It should be noted that in the effect example shown in FIG. 402(N(5)-1), the number of holdings is different from that in the effect example shown in FIG. 401(M(5)-55). In the effect shown in 1), the special figure 1 is 0 and the special figure 2 is 1.

In FIG. 402 (N(5)-1), a state in which the 16th round ends and the jackpot end effect is started is shown. Also here, the lord's character HSG is displayed, and the third timer notice display TM13 is still a display indicating infinity. Then, when the big hit end effect is started, the characters "timer is..." are displayed to notify that the display of the third timer notice display TM13 changes.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402(N(5)-2), the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 changes to "30:00", and the timer display countdown restarts 30 It suggests that a certain performance will be started when the second elapses. Further, at this time, the character "next power support" is displayed to inform that the gaming state after the big hit game is the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (time saving state).

FIG. 402 (N(11)-3) shows that the big hit game is over and the electric power support state (latent probability state) is entered. At this time, the hold is not exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is not restarted, and the display of "10:00" remains.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-4), the suspension of the special diagram 2 (first suspension) is exhausted and the variable display of the special diagram 2 is started, and the second special symbol display device. The variable display of symbols at 214 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the variable icon display area. Then, the variable icon h0 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown of the timer display has not started yet and remains at "30:00", but after that, the countdown starts.

402(N(11)-5) shows that the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. "29:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.23 seconds have elapsed since the countdown was restarted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-6), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the swing fluctuation is caused by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5". Has been temporarily stopped. After that, as shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-7), the decorative pattern display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative patterns that are missing "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Also at this time, the countdown of the timer display continues on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and "21:45" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-7). In this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-7), both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the standby state because the suspension is 0.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-8), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the third timer advance notice display TM13 is performed in the standby state. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-8), "20:19" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-9), the countdown on the third timer notice display TM13 is completed in the standby state, and the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is “00:00”. Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-10), in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the characters “probable change confirmation” are displayed in the area where the timer display was displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probability changing state. As described above, in this effect example, even when the symbol variation display is not performed and the hold is also 0, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed, the certain change notification is given as a certain effect. Is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (N(11)-11), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the character "probably changing" is displayed in the upper center part of the display screen. It is notified that the state is the probable state.

FIG. 402(O(5)-1) to FIG. 402(O(99)-13) show the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 402(N(5)-1) to FIG. 402(N(11)-11). Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 402(O(5)-1) to (O(11)-8) are shown in FIGS. 402(N(5)-1) to (N(11)-8). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

When a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses from the standby state, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O(99)-9) shows that the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed. There is. At this time as well, the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM13 continues, and "14:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (O(99)-9). At this time, the customer waiting demonstration display is overlapped with the timer announcement display TM13, but the timer announcement display TM13 may be overlapped with the customer waiting demonstration display. Further, the time from the standby state to the start of the customer waiting demo display is not limited to the above-mentioned time, and can be set to an appropriate time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O(99)-10), the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed in the state where the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed, and the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13. Is "00:00". Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O(99)-11), the display returns from the customer waiting demo display to the display showing the state in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, and in the third timer notice display TM13, In the area where the timer display was displayed, the characters “determined change confirmation” are displayed. That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probability changing state. In this way, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed during the customer waiting demo display, the customer waiting demo display returns to the display showing the state in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, It is shown that the probability change notification is being performed as a certain effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O(99)-12), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the character "probably changing" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen, and the game is played. It is notified that the state is the probable state.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 402 (O(99)-13) shows that the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed again.

403(P(5)-1) to (P(99)-12) of FIG. 402(O(5)-1) to (O(99)-13) of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 403(P(5)-1) to (P(99)-10) are shown in FIGS. 402(O(5)-1) to (O(99)-10). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 403 (P(99)-10), the countdown on the third timer notice display TM13 is completed in the state where the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed, and the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is "00: When it becomes "00", as shown in FIG. 403 (P(99)-11), in this effect example, the character "probable change confirmation" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13 in the state where the customer waiting demo display is displayed. It That is, it is notified that the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probability changing state. As described above, in this production example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed during the customer waiting demo display, the certainty change notification is performed as a certain production while the customer waiting demo display is displayed. Is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (P(99)-12), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased and the upper center part of the display screen is displayed while the customer waiting demonstration display is continuously displayed. The character "probably changing" is displayed on the screen to inform that the gaming state is the probable changing state.

403(Q(5)-1) to (Q(11)-16) of FIG. 402(O(5)-1) to (O(99)-13) of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. Another example is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 403(Q(5)-1) to (Q(99)-10) are shown in FIGS. 402(O(5)-1) to (O(99)-10). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 403 (Q(99)-10), the countdown on the third timer notice display TM13 is completed in the state where the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed, and the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is "00: 00", in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 403 (Q(99)-11), the start of execution of a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect is suspended, and the timer display is displayed. It stands by in the state of "00:00". That is, in this effect example, in the standby state, even if the countdown of the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the start of execution of a certain effect is suspended. Is shown.

After that, when the customer waiting demonstration display ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q(11)-12) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is returned to the display showing the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. However, even in this case, the start of execution of a certain effect is reserved, and the timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13 remains "00:00".

After that, when the game ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 232, as shown in FIG. 403 (Q(11)-13), the variable display of the special figure 2 is started, and the symbol in the second special figure display device 214. The variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q(11)-14), a change animation that suggests that the timer display in the third timer notice display TM13 changes is started, and when the change animation is completed, the figure As shown in 403 (Q(11)-15), in the third timer notice display TM13, the character "probability change confirmation" is displayed instead of the timer display, and the current gaming state is not the time saving state but the probabilistic state. You will be notified that there was. As described above, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed in the standby state where the symbol variation display is not performed, the start of the symbol variation display is waited for, and a certain variation notification is given as a certain effect. Is shown. In other words, when the timer display in the timer notice production becomes “00:00”, the customer waiting demo display is being displayed or the decorative design is being displayed in a standby state where the decorative design is being stopped. It can be said that it is shown that a certain effect is delayed and executed until the display is started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 403 (Q(11)-16), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the character "probably changing" is displayed in the upper center part of the display screen. It is notified that the state is the probable state.

FIG. 404 (R(5)-1) to FIG. 404 (R(4)-25) show a production pattern in which a mission is started during the big hit game and the timer advance notice production is started when the mission is achieved. It shows the situation. Note that FIG. 404 (R(5)-1) is an effect subsequent to the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-9), showing a state in which a big hit has occurred and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. However, in this example of performance, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are set to be a big hit, and the number of holdings when the big hit occurs is 0 in Toku-zu 1 and 4 in Toku-zu 2. .. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 404(R(5)-1) to FIG. 404(R(5)-6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 404(R(5)-1) to (R(5)-6) are shown in FIGS. 389(E(5)-1) to (E(5)-6). Since it is the same as the effect shown in, the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 404 (R(5)-7), the state of transition to the fourth round is shown. In this example of performance, when the game shifts to the fourth round, the character KGG of the god with a cane appears, and the characters "emergency mission" and "let Den-chu win 3 balls" are displayed and the mission production is started. I am informing you. In this mission effect, the purpose of the mission is to win three game balls to the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the big hit game, and when the mission is achieved, the timer notice effect is started. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-8), the mission effect is started. When the mission effect is started, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "let the electric chu win 3 balls" in the upper center of the display screen, and the characters "remaining 3 balls" below it. Is displayed and the remaining quota until the mission is completed is displayed.

FIG. 404 (R(5)-9) shows that the sixth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-9), one game ball has won in the special map 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to "2 more balls". ..

FIG. 404 (R(5)-10) shows that the seventh round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-10), one more game ball has won in the special map 2 starting opening 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to "1 more ball". There is.

FIG. 404 (R(5)-11) shows that the tenth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-11), one more game ball has been won in the special map 2 starting opening 232, so the mission is achieved and the word "mission accomplished" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-12), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and "Expect after 30 seconds" below it. Is displayed to inform that the timer advance notice effect has been started due to the achievement of the mission. Here, the first big hit timer preliminary announcement display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "30:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Then, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started on the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 404(R(5)-13), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 404(R(5)-13). At the timing, "29:76" is displayed.

In FIG. 404 (R(5)-14), the state of transition to the 11th round is shown. It should be noted that the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is still continuing, and "12:92" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-14).

Then, as shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-15), the first big hit medium timer notice display TM
When the countdown of the timer display in 21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-16) shows the appearance of the family crest character CMON. Has been done. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-17), the characters of "holding consecutive chan confirmation" are displayed together with the family crest character, and execution is suspended (pending) symbol variation. It is announced that the display includes a variable display that is a big hit. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 404(R(5)-18) to (R(4)-25) are performed. Note that the effects shown in FIG. 404(R(5)-18) to FIG. 404(R(4)-25) are different from those of FIG. 29) to (B(4)-36) in the figure, the description is omitted.

In addition, in this effect example, the mission effect is achieved in which the mission is achieved by winning a predetermined number of prizes at the special figure 2 starting port 242 during the big hit game, but the conditions for achieving the mission are not limited to those described above. The mission may be achieved when there is a game ball winning (over winning) in the variable winning port 234 that exceeds the specified number (for example, 10) in one round. In this case, the mission may be achieved when the number of over-winning prizes is a predetermined number (for example, 3). Further, the mission may be achieved when the digestion speed of one round is within a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds). In addition, success in the button repeated hit effect, long press button effect, or single button press effect may be a condition for achieving the mission. Alternatively, the mini game may be played, and the result of the mini game may be a certain result (for example, a success result) as a condition for achieving the mission.

404 (S(5)-1) to 405 (S(4)-24) show another effect pattern in which the mission is started during the big hit game and the timer advance notice effect is started when the mission is achieved. It shows how it is being done. The effects shown in FIGS. 404(S(5)-1) to (S(5)-9) are shown in FIGS. 404(R(5)-1) to (R(5)-9). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

FIG. 405 (S(5)-10) following FIG. 404 (S(5)-9) shows that the eleventh round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S(5)-10), one more game ball has won in the special map 2 starting port 232, so the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to "1 more ball". There is.

FIG. 405 (S(5)-11) shows that the fifteenth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S(5)-11), one more game ball has been won in the special figure 2 starting opening 232, so the mission is achieved and the word "mission accomplished" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S(5)-12), the first big hit mid-timer timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and below it, "Expect 30 seconds later." Is displayed to inform that the timer advance notice effect has been started due to the achievement of the mission. Here, the first big hit timer preliminary announcement display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "30:00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect will be started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Then, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started on the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S(5)-13), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 405 (S(5)-13). At the timing, "29:76" is displayed.

FIG. 405 (S(5)-14) shows that the 16th round is being performed. That is, it is shown that the final round is being performed. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is still continuing, and "15:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S(5)-14).

In FIG. 405 (S(5)-15), the 16th round ends and the jackpot end effect is started. However, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and "12:09" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S(5)-15). That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed even after the 16th round ends and the jackpot game ends. In this example of effect, when the big hit end effect is started, the display position of the first big hit mid-time timer notice display TM21 is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S(5)-16), the characters "next electric sapo" are displayed, and after the jackpot game, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (ie, Notification of the shift to a time saving state has been given. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S(5)-16), "10:88" is displayed as the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

FIG. 405 (S(1)-17) shows a state in which the big hit game is over and the electric power support state is entered. At this time, the hold is not exhausted, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of the big hits of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". In addition, in FIG. 405 (S(1)-17), there are four holdings of the special figure 2, and the first holding icon h21 to the fourth holding icon h24 are displayed. Also, in this example of performance, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues even after the big hit game is over and the game state shifts to the electric support state, as shown in FIG. 405 (S(1)). At the timing shown in -17), "09:10" is displayed as the timer display in the first big hit timer notification display TM21. In addition, in this example of performance, when the big hit game ends and the game state shifts, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is moved and displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S(1)-18), the suspension (first suspension) of the special symbol 2 is exhausted and the variable display of the special symbol 2 is started, and the second special symbol display device. The variable display of symbols at 214 is started. In addition, the moving animation of the hold icon h21 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the current pattern change) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 moves to the variable icon display area. The second hold icon h22 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h21 and is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is displayed as the variable icon h0. It moves to the display position of the hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22, and the fourth hold icon h24 moves to the display position of the third hold icon h23 and is displayed as the third hold icon h23. To be done. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is also started. Further, in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "08:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S(1)-18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S(1)-19), the first stop is performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Further, the countdown continues on the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21, and "01:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 405 (S(1)-19).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S(1)-20), it is shown that the right symbol is changing at a low speed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed, and the timer display becomes "00:00". Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S(1)-21), the grandfather V formation display GYV appears so as to overlap the decorative pattern, and a big hit confirmation notification is shown. Has been done. That is, it is informed that the symbol variation display being executed is a symbol variation display that is a big hit. Further, at this time, the first big hit midtime timer notice display TM21 is erased. At this time, the right symbol is still changing at low speed. In this way, in this example of performance, the result of the timer notice effect that was started during the big hit game due to the achievement of the mission continued after the end of the big hit game, and the timer notice effect was performed in the symbol variation display executed thereafter. As a certain effect to be executed, it is shown that the big V confirmation display is performed by displaying the grandfather V formation display GYV. After that, as shown in FIG. 405 (S(1)-22), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right design, and the reach state is reached. In the middle pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (S(4)-23), the third stop is performed without the reach effect being performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to display "decoration 5-decoration". It is shown that the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "5-decoration 5". Then, as shown in FIG. 405 (S(4)-24), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this way, in this example of performance, depending on the time when the mission was achieved in the mission effect in the big hit game, the timer notice effect started during the big hit game is performed over the symbol variation display started after the end of the big hit game. Is shown.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the aspect of a certain effect is different depending on the time when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice effect which has been started after the mission is completed is completed. Specifically, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display started after the mission is completed is completed during the big hit game, the family crest character CMON appears, and it is not completed during the big hit game, and after the big hit game. If completed during the symbol variation display, the grand V formation display GYV is displayed.

405 (T(5)-1) to (T(4)-18) in the same figure show that the mission is started during the big hit game, and the mission fails and the timer advance notice effect is not started. The effects shown in FIGS. 405(T(5)-1) to (T(5)-9) are shown in FIGS. 404(R(5)-1) to (R(5)-9). Since it is the same as the effect shown, the description is omitted.

FIG. 405 (T(5)-10) shows that the 14th round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 405 (T(5)-10), since one more game ball has won in the special map 2 starting port 232, the display of the remaining quota until the mission is completed is updated to "1 more ball". There is.

FIG. 405 (T(5)-11) shows that the 16th round (final round) is being performed. As for the degree of achievement of the mission, one more ball is left in the starting point 242 of the special map 2 and the remaining quota until the mission is completed is still "one more ball".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (T(5)-12), the state when the 16th round is completed is shown. However, by the end of the 16th round, the mission of winning three game balls to the special map 2 starting opening 242 could not be achieved, so the characters "Mission not achieved" and "Sorry" are displayed, and the timer advance notice effect is displayed. Is not started.

In FIG. 405 (T(5)-13), the 16th round has ended, and the jackpot end effect has been started. After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 405 (T(5)-14), the character "next electric sapo" is displayed, and after the jackpot game, the special figure low probability general figure high probability state (ie, Notification of the shift to a time saving state has been given.

In this example of the effect, the timer advance notice effect was not started because the mission was not achieved, and as a result, the holding consecutive chan notification was not performed. However, in reality, FIG. 404 (R(5)-1) to Similar to the above-described effect example shown in FIG. (R(4)-25), the variable display is such that the first hold of special figure 2 is a big hit. Therefore, when the big hit game ends, the effects shown in FIG. 405 (T(1)-15) to (T(4)-18) are performed. That is, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is shown in FIGS. 404(R(1)-21) to FIG. 404(R(4)-25) except that the family crest character CMON does not appear during the symbol variation display. It will be done in the same way as it was done. Therefore, description of the effects shown in FIGS. 405(T(1)-15) to (T(4)-18) is omitted.

406 (U(5)-1) to (U(5)-6) in FIG. 406 (U(5)-6), an event occurs in which the number of songs that can be selected as a certain effect increases as a result of the timer notice effect during the big hit game. The situation is shown. Note that FIG. 406 (U(5)-1) is, for example, an effect following the effect shown in FIG. 386 (A(4)-41), and shows how a big hit occurs and a big hit start effect is performed. Showing. However, in this example of performance, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" have been completed and have been a big hit.

In FIG. 406 (U(5)-2), the big hit game is started, and the state of shifting to the first round is shown. In this effect example, the effect explanation is not started, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the word "timer activated" is displayed below the display, and the timer notice effect is started. It is informed that it was done. Here, the first big hit timer preliminary announcement display TM21 is a default display mode. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. Then, the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started on the first big hit timer notice display TM21.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (U(5)-3), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 406 (U(5)-3). At the timing, "09:77" is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 406(U(5)-4), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, FIG. 406(U( In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in 5)-5), a princess character appears, and in the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the characters "new song get" are displayed instead of the timer display. It has been announced that the lineup of songs played during the game will increase. That is, it has been notified that the lineup of songs that the player wants to play increases during the big hit game.

FIG. 406 (U(5)-6) shows the state of transition to the second round. When moving to the second round, the title of the song to be added to the lineup is displayed on the first big hit mid-timer timer notice display TM21. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the number of songs is increased is shown as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed.

As described above, in this effect example, as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, such as a notification that a holding consecutive chan is generated or a notification that the probability change is a big hit, In addition to the effect of notifying or notifying the contents directly related to the profit, it is shown that the effect of giving a privilege for enlarging the effect of the effect is performed, though it is not related to the profit of the player.

In this example of the effect, an effect of increasing the number of songs is performed as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. However, for example, an effect of increasing the premium effect in which the restriction on appearance is released is performed. It may be displayed, or an effect may be performed to increase the number of characters whose appearance is released.

FIG. 406(V(5)-1) to FIG. 406(V(5)-14) show how a mission is started during a big hit game and a certain privilege is notified when the mission is achieved within the time limit. Showing. Note that FIG. 406 (V(5)-1) is an effect that follows the effect shown in FIG. 387 (B(4)-9), and shows a state in which a big hit has occurred and a big hit start effect is being performed. There is. However, in this example of performance, it is assumed that three "decorations 2" are set to be a big hit, and the number of holdings when the big hit occurs is 0 in Toku-zu 1 and 4 in Toku-zu 2. .. After that, the effects shown in FIG. 406(V(5)-1) to (V(5)-6) are performed. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 406(V(5)-1) to (V(5)-6) are shown in FIGS. 404(R(5)-1) to (R(5)-6). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

FIG. 406 (V(5)-7) shows the state of transition to the fourth round. In this example of performance, when the game shifts to the fourth round, the character KGG of the god with a cane appears, and the words "emergency mission" and "let's win Den Chu within 30 seconds" are displayed, and the mission production starts. It is informed that it will be done. In this mission effect, the purpose of the mission is to put one game ball into the special figure 2 starting opening 232 within a predetermined time (30 seconds) after the mission starts. Is configured to start. After that, as shown in FIG. 404 (R(5)-8), the mission effect is started. When the mission effect is started, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "Let's win Den Chu within 30 seconds" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the first jackpot timer notice display TM21 is displayed below it. Is displayed, the characters "30:00" are displayed as the initial display of the timer display on the first jackpot timer advance notice display TM21, and then the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V(5)-9), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 continues, and is shown in FIG. 406 (V(5)-9). At the timing, "29:76" is displayed.

FIG. 406 (V(5)-10) shows that the fifth round is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 406 (V(5)-10), one game ball has been won in the special map 2 starting opening 232, so the mission has been achieved, and the word "achieve!" indicating that fact is displayed. The timer display of the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is "13:44".

Then, as shown in FIG. 406(V(5)-11), in the first big hit medium timer notice display TM21, the character "Attention" is displayed in place of the timer display, and thereafter, in FIG. 406(V(5)-11).
The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in -13) shows the appearance of the family crest character CMON. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V(5)-14), the characters of the family crest are displayed together with the characters of "pending consecutive chan confirmation", and execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the display includes a variable display that is a big hit.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice display used in the timer notice effect may be used as a display indicating the remaining time of the mission.

In this example of performance, when the mission is completed, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is stopped and the family crest character CMON is displayed. No character CMON is displayed, and, for example, as shown in FIGS. 406(V(5)-11′) to (V(5)-14′) in FIG. 406, after the countdown of the timer display is completed, the family crest character is displayed. CMON may be displayed.

Specifically, FIG. 406(V(5)-11') is an effect following FIG. 406(V(5)-10), and in this effect example, the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21. The countdown is continuously performed without being stopped, and "13:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 406 (V(5)-11'). Then, above the first big hit timer notice display TM21, the characters "with timer 0..." Are displayed, suggesting that some kind of effect (certain effect) will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. doing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 406 (V(5)-12'), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", FIG. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in (5)-13'), the appearance of the family crest character CMON is shown. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 406 (V(5)-14'), the characters of the family crest are displayed together with the characters of "pending consecutive chan confirmation", and execution is suspended (pending). It is announced that the variable display, which is a big hit, is included in the variable display.

In this way, in this example performance, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is continued as it is after the mission is completed, and when the countdown is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", a certain effect of the family crest is displayed. It is shown that the character CMON is displayed to notify the occurrence of the holding consecutive chan.

407(X(5)-1) to (X(5)-11) in FIG. 407, the mission is started during the big hit game, the mission is not achieved within the time limit, and no privilege is obtained. Is shown. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 407(X(5)-1) to (X(5)-9) are shown in FIGS. 406(V(5)-1) to (V(5)-9). Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

FIG. 407 (X(5)-10) shows that the fifth round is being performed. In this production example, during the execution of the game of the fifth round, even if no game ball wins in the special figure 2 starting port 232 after the mission starts, the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is displayed. The state where the countdown is completed and the timer display has become “00:00” is shown. Therefore, the character "sorry" is displayed above the first big hit timer notice display TM21 to inform that the mission has failed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 407 (X(5)-11), the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21 is erased, the characters "Introduction from the next round" are displayed together with the characters of Copanda, and the mission effect is performed. It is informed that the continuation of the presentation explanation that has been interrupted due to being broken will be started.

As described above, in this effect example, if the mission is not achieved before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed in the mission in the mission effect, the timer notice display is erased without performing a certain effect. Then, it is shown that the mission effect is completed.

FIG. 407(Y(5)-1) to FIG. 407(Y(5)-3) show modified examples of the effect following FIG. 406(V(5)-10). In the production example shown in FIGS. 407(Y(5)-1) to (Y(5)-3), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208, and the game progresses. The display state can be changed or the position can be changed by moving the display state. Note that such a configuration can be applied to the other embodiments described so far.

FIG. 407 (Y(5)-1) shows that the fifth round is being performed. In the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 407 (Y(5)-1), since the mission has been achieved, it is shown that the word "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display. .. In addition, the character "Achievement!" is displayed above the first big hit timer advance notice display TM21 to inform the achievement of the mission.

Then, as shown in FIG. 407 (Y(5)-2), the sub-display device 208S disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 rises and overlaps with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 substantially at the center thereof. It is shown moving to the position. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least partially overlapped with the sub-display device 208S, and the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is more difficult to visually recognize than in the non-overlapped state. Then, on the sub-display device 208S, the character "Hold in the super-super hot" is displayed together with the character of the lord on the motorcycle, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a pending rendezvous will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 407 (Y(5)-3), the sub display device 208S starts to descend and returns to the reference position. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first big hit mid-time timer notice display TM21 is erased, and the characters "Introduction from the next round" are displayed for both the Kopanda characters and the mission effect has been interrupted. It is informed that the continuation of the effect explanation will be started.

As described above, in this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the movable body such as the sub display device 208S operates as a certain effect.

In this example of effect, the sub-display device 208S is applied as an example of the movable body, but, for example, one or more of various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 14 may be operated. Good.

It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the purpose of the mission is to win a predetermined number of prizes to the second special figure starting port 232, but the contents of the mini game and the mission explained so far are applied to this example of performance. It is also possible to do so. In addition to this, for example, the purpose of the mission may be to pass through an effect gate that is arranged on the game board and through which game balls can pass, or the purpose of the mission can be increased by repeatedly hitting or long-pressing the effect button 136. It may be achievable.

Further, in the present embodiment, one or two or more of the effect movable bodies (for example, various effect movable bodies shown in FIG. 14) are operated as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Good. In this case, for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display is “00:00” and a certain effect movable body (first effect movable body) is operated, another certain effect movable body (second When the second effect movable body is in operation, in order to avoid interference between the first effect movable object and the second effect movable object, The one effect movable body may be operated to delay the start of a certain effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display is "00:00" in the timer advance notice effect, a predetermined effect is performed as a certain effect. A configuration may be provided in which when there are a plurality of effects and the timer display is "00:00", one of them is selectively selected and executed. For example, when the timer display is "00:00". In this case, it is possible to select which one of the holding consecutive-chang notification effect and the probability change notification effect is to be performed, and the selected effect may be executed. In the case of such a configuration, it is difficult to specify which privilege is notified even when the timer display is "00:00", so that it may be possible to give an impression to the effect.

Further, the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect may be randomly selected from a plurality of types according to the condition, in which the increase notification of the song, etc. You may make it include what is not directly related to the privilege of a game, and by doing so, it may be possible to widen the range of the timer effect. In addition, it may be possible to improve the frequency of appearance of the timer notice effect and reduce the value of the privilege.

Further, for example, when the lower plate full tank error occurs during the display of the timer notice display, the ball-out display may be displayed so as to overlap the timer notice display. By doing so, attention is paid to whether or not the timer advance notice display indicates a certain time, and thus it may be possible to prompt the player to perform the ball removal operation. The display example of the ball-out display can be applied to any of the display modes described so far.

Further, in the example of the effect in which the timer notice display overlaps with the other effect display in the above-described embodiment, the other effect display may be configured to overlap with the timer notice display. In addition, in the example of the effect in which the other effect display overlaps the timer notice display in the above-described embodiment, the timer notice display may overlap the other effect display.

Or, the example of the effect where other effect display overlaps the timer notice display was shown as appropriate.
In the above description,
"Delivery means capable of executing "timer effect [for example, timer notice effect related to first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-49) to FIG. 386(A(5)-55)]" A gaming table provided with, for example, a decorative pattern display device 208,
The timer effect is a display that indicates a certain time after the display of the timer display [for example, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 or the like shown in FIG. 386 (A(5)-49) is started]. When [for example, "00:00" or the like] is reached, a certain effect [for example, a reserved consecutive chan notification effect or the like due to the appearance of the family crest character CMON shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-54]] is started. It is a production configured to
It is configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game [for example, in FIGS. 386(A(5)-49) to (A(5)-55). The timer preview effect related to the first big hit timer preview display TM21 shown is being performed during the big hit game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

In addition, according to this game table, it may be possible to expect the timer effect even during the big hit game.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. In addition, the production means may be one that always executes the timer production, or may not execute the timer production.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display showing a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display is not a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

It may be configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or an effect other than at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. May be configured as. Further, it may be configured such that at least a part of the timer effect is always performed during the execution of the big hit game, or at least a part of the timer effect is not performed during the execution of the big hit game. May be.

Also, it may be configured such that only part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or it may be configured such that all of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. Good.

It should be noted that only some of the timer effects may be performed during execution of the big hit game, or may be performed during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the end of the big hit game.

Further, "the timer display may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the big hit game. As shown in, for example, FIG. 396 (J(1)-24) to FIG. 397 (J(5)-52), the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed during the symbol variation display which is a big hit. The timer advance notice effect is started, and an effect display by a dramatic image grandfather image 565G as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed is being performed during the jackpot game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the fact that the timer display shows a certain time.

Further, according to this gaming machine, a big hit occurs before the timer display reaches a certain time, which can give a surprise, and another big hit can be generated by the timer effect started during the execution of the variable display of symbols. In some cases, you can expect the score.

Here, the timer display is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating a certain time only during the execution of the big hit game. May be, the timer display is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display that is performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may also be a display showing a certain time during the execution of games other than the big hit game. It may be configured to be. Further, the timer display may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be configured to always show a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. The timer display may be displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may not be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. ..

Also, only the timer display is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. It may be good, while displaying the display other than the timer display during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, the timer display may be a display showing a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. May be configured as.

Further, the timer display is displayed only during the execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. The timer display may be displayed other than during execution of the symbol variation display that is performed before the start of the big hit game, so that the timer display may be a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the big hit game. It may be configured.

In addition, it may be a gaming machine characterized in that the timer effect is executed over the big hit game and the symbol variation display executed before and/or after the big hit game is finished.

In addition, "the timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and it may be a display indicating the certain time during execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the big hit game is finished. [For example, as shown in FIG. 397 (K(5)-8) to FIG. 398 (K(1)-19), the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 during the big hit game is displayed. The effect of the big hit confirmation notification by the appearance of the family emblem character CMON as a certain effect that is started as a result of the timer advance notice effect being started is being performed during the symbol variation display that is performed after the end of the big hit game. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a timer display may be displayed as a pre-reading notice during a big hit.

Here, the timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and it may be configured such that the display may show a certain time only during the execution of the symbol variation display which is executed after the big hit game ends. Good, the timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and it is configured so that it may be a display that shows a certain time other than during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the big hit game ends. Good. In addition, the timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and it may be configured such that the display always shows a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the big hit game is finished. The timer display may be displayed during the execution of the game, and it may be configured such that the display of a certain time may not be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is over.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only during the execution of the big hit game, and the display may show a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game ends. However, the timer display is also displayed during the execution of games other than the big hit game, and there is a case where it becomes a display indicating a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the big hit game ends. May be.

Further, only the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and there may be a case where a display showing a certain time may be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game ends. However, the display other than the timer display is also displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and the display may be a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the big hit game ends. Good.

In addition, "The timer effect is an effect that may be started when a certain condition regarding a game is achieved [for example, FIG. 404 (R(5)-7) to the same figure (R(5). As shown in -12), when the mission to win three game balls to the special figure 2 starting port 232 is achieved during the big hit game, the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is started, etc. ],
Depending on the timing when the certain condition is achieved, it may be displayed such that the certain time is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the jackpot game is finished [eg, As shown in FIGS. 405 (S(5)-12) to (S(5)-21), the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is a big hit game depending on the timing when the mission is achieved. The timer display becomes "00:00" when the symbol variation display is completed after the completion, and during the symbol variation display, the big V confirmation display GYV is displayed to notify the big hit confirmation, etc.],
Depending on the timing when the certain condition is achieved, the certain time may be displayed during execution of the big hit game [eg, FIG. 404 (R(5)-12). As shown in the figure (R(5)-16), depending on the timing when the mission is achieved, the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed during the big hit game and the timer display is "00". "00", and the pending consecutive chan notification is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON during the big hit game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to have the motivation to start the timer effect.

Here, the timer effect may start executing only when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved, or starts executing other than when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved. It may be possible to do. Further, the timer effect may be one that always starts execution when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved, or may not start execution when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved. It may be.

Further, it may be configured such that the display may show a certain time only during the execution of the symbol variation display which is executed after the jackpot game is finished according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, It may be configured such that the display may show a certain time other than during the execution of the symbol variation display which is executed after the big hit game ends according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. Further, it may be configured such that the display always shows a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display which is executed after the big hit game is finished in accordance with the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or a certain condition. It may be configured such that the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display which is executed after the big hit game is finished in accordance with the timing at which is achieved.

In addition, it may be configured such that a display may show a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is finished only in accordance with the timing when a certain condition is achieved, It may be configured such that the display may show a certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display which is executed after the jackpot game is finished according to the timing other than the timing when the certain condition is achieved.

In addition, depending on the timing when a certain condition is achieved, it may be configured such that a certain time may be displayed only during the execution of the big hit game, or depending on the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during the execution of a game other than the big hit game. Further, it may be configured such that a certain time is always displayed during execution of the big hit game according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or the big hit game is shown according to the timing when a certain condition is achieved. It may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may not be displayed during execution of.

In addition, it may be configured such that a certain time may be displayed during execution of the big hit game only in accordance with the timing when a certain condition is achieved, or other than the timing when the certain condition is achieved. It may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time may be displayed during execution of the big hit game depending on the timing.

In addition, “As the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is finished (hereinafter, “11th effect [for example, FIG. 390(E(5)-13) to FIG. (5)-14)”).) is executed [for example, shown in FIG. 389(E(5)-8) to FIG. 390(E(5)-14). In this way, it is suggested that the character TDR of the bancho appears as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21, so that the probability change game state is shifted to after the big hit game ends. Etc.],
As the certain effect, an effect that informs that the symbol variable display that is a big hit is included in the symbol variable display whose execution is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “twelfth effect [for example, FIG. 386(A(5 )-54) to (FIG. 386(A(5)-49) to FIG. 386(A(5)-55)). As shown in the figure (A(5)-55), the family crest character CMON appears as a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect related to the first big hit mid-time timer notice display TM21. Informing that a Chan will occur, etc.],
The certain effect is an effect configured to be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time [for example, FIG. 389(D(5)-11). ′) and FIGS. 395(I(5)-29) to (I(5)-30) in the same figure, the pending consecutive chan notification and bancho due to the appearance of the family crest character CMON without the timer advance notice effect. Of the character TDR appearing, a notification may be given to the effect that a transition to the probability variation gaming state is performed, etc.],
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, so-called holding consecutive chan actually hit big without notifying, but so-called probability change notification is important as notification of the game state, so if it is easier to understand while informing the big hit game There is.

Here, only the eleventh effect may be executed as a certain effect, or an effect other than the eleventh effect may be executed as a certain effect. In addition, the eleventh effect may be necessarily executed as a certain effect, or the eleventh effect may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, only the twelfth effect may be executed as a certain effect, or an effect other than the twelfth effect may be executed as a certain effect. In addition, the twelfth effect may be always executed as a certain effect, or the twelfth effect may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, a certain effect may be configured so that it may be executed even when the timer display does not show a certain time, or the timer display may show a certain time. It may be configured so that it may be executed even in cases other than the case where the display is not shown. Further, the certain effect may be configured to be executed without fail even if the timer display does not indicate a certain time, or the timer display may be a display indicating a certain time. It may be configured so that it may not be executed even if it does not occur.

Further, only when the timer display does not display a certain time during the execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh production may be configured to be executed more easily than the twelfth production, Besides the case where the timer display does not display a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be more easily executed than the twelfth effect. Further, when the timer display does not display a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh production may be configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth production, When the timer display does not display a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be more difficult to be executed than the twelfth effect.

Further, if the timer display does not display a certain time during the execution of the big hit game, the eleventh effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the timer display may be displayed during the execution of the big hit game. The twelfth effect may be configured not to be executed when the display indicating a certain time is not displayed.

In addition, "when the timer display becomes a display indicating the certain time and the certain effect is started (hereinafter, "the first case [e.g., FIG. 386(A(5)-49) to FIG. (A(5)-55) As shown in (A(5)-55), when the countdown of the timer display in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 is completed, the timer display becomes "00:00", and the suspended consecutive chan notification effect is performed. Etc.]”).
When the certain effect is started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, “second case [eg, as shown in FIG. 389(D(5)-11), the timer advance notice effect is performed. If there is a pending rendezvous announcement, etc.]”).
The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect [for example, FIG. 386(A(5)-54) to FIG. -55), which shows the family crest character CMON, and the like).
The certain effect in the second case may be executed in the second mode (hereinafter, “second effect [for example, grandfather V formation shown in FIG. 389(D(5)-11). Displayed GYV display, etc.]”).
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The type suggested by performing the first effect and the type suggested by performing the second effect are the same type [for example, FIGS. 386(A(5)-54) to The display of the family emblem character CMON shown in FIG. (A(5)-55) and the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV shown in FIG. 389(D(5)-11) are also pending rendition announcement presentation effects, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to increase the variation of a certain performance.

Here, the certain effect in the first case may be only the first effect or an effect other than the first effect. Further, the certain effect in the first case may be the first effect, or may not be the first effect.

Further, a certain effect in the second case may be only the second effect or an effect other than the second effect. In addition, a certain effect in the second case may be the second effect, or may not be the second effect.

Note that a certain effect in the first case and a certain effect in the second case may be the same effect (first effect or second effect).

In addition, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects, or may be entirely different aspects.

Further, the type suggested by performing the first effect and the type suggested by performing the second effect may be the same type or may be different types. Good.

In addition, “a timing at which the first effect can be started is configured to be earlier than a timing at which the second effect can be started [for example, FIG. 389 (D(5)-11). The pending consecutive chan notification effect by the display of the grandfather V formation display GYV shown in FIG. 6 is started during the jackpot end effect, but is shown in FIGS. 386(A(5)-54) to (A(5)-55). The presentation effect of the holding consecutive chan by displaying the character CMON of the family crest is likely to be started during the big hit game round, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect the appearance of the timer effect and to expect that a certain effect is executed remedially without going through the timer effect.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to have a long time display.

Here, the timing at which the first effect can be started may be configured to be earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started, or the timing at which the first effect can be started is set to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started. The timing at which the second effect can be started may be always delayed.

Further, when the first effect is started, the second effect may not be started, and when the second effect is started, the first effect is not started. May be done.

Further, it may be configured such that the timing at which the second effect can be started and the timing at which the first effect can be started are the same, or the first effect is more than the timing at which the second effect can be started. May be configured so that the timing at which the can start can be later.

In addition, "in the second case, the certain effect may be executed in the first aspect as the second effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 389(D(5)-11'). , There may be a case where a pending consecutive-chan announcement effect is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON without performing the timer announcement effect],
In the first case, the timing at which the certain effect is executed as the first effect in the first aspect, and in the second case as the second effect, the certain effect in the first aspect. As shown in FIGS. 386(A(5)-49) to (A(5)-54) in FIG. 386(A(5)-49), the timing at which the effect is executed is different. Although the suspended consecutive-chan announcement effect by displaying the character CMON of the family crest as an effect is started during the big hit game round, as shown in FIG. 389 (D(5)-11′), it does not go through the timer advance effect. The pending rendezvous chan announcement effect executed by the display of the family crest character CMON is started during the big hit end effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect the first effect even if the timer effect is not started.

Here, in the second case, only a certain effect may be executed as the second effect in the first mode, or in the second case, the first mode as the second effect. There may be a case where an effect other than a certain effect is executed. Further, in the second case, a certain effect may be executed as the second effect in the first mode, and in the second case, a certain effect may be performed as the second effect in the first mode. It may not be executed.

Further, in the second case, a certain effect may be executed only in the first aspect as the second effect, and in the second case, other than the first aspect as the second effect. There may be a case in which a certain effect is executed.

Further, in the second case, a certain effect may be executed in the first mode only as the second effect, and in the second case, as an effect other than the second effect, the first effect may be performed. There may be a case in which a certain effect is executed.

Also, only in the second case, there may be a case where a certain effect is executed as the second effect in the first aspect, and also in the cases other than the second case, the second effect is the second effect. There may be a case where a certain effect is executed.

Further, in the first case, a timing when a certain effect is executed as the first effect in the first mode, and in a second case when a certain effect is executed as the second effect in the first mode. Only the timing may be different in the first case, when a certain effect is executed as the first effect in the first aspect, and in the second case is the first effect as the second effect. The timing other than the timing at which the effect is executed may be different. Further, in the first case, a timing when a certain effect is executed as the first effect in the first mode, and in a second case when a certain effect is executed as the second effect in the first mode. May be different from each other, and in the first case, a timing when a certain effect is executed as the first effect in the first aspect, and in the second case as the second effect as the first aspect. There may be cases where the timings at which the effects are executed are the same.

In addition, “the certain effect is a finalized effect that informs the player that an advantageous privilege is granted [for example, FIG. 386(A(5)-54) to FIG. ), the display of the family emblem character CMON indicates that a pending ream chan will occur, or FIG. 390 (E(5)-13) to FIG. 390(E(5)-14). , The probability change confirmation is notified by the appearance of the length character TDR],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to easily recognize what kind of privilege is given by performing a certain effect, and to play the game with peace of mind.

Here, the certain effect may notify only that the advantageous privilege is given to the player, or may notify other than that the advantageous privilege is given to the player. It may be. In addition, a certain presentation may necessarily notify that the advantageous privilege is given to the player, or may not notify that the advantageous privilege is given to the player. May be.

As a privilege advantageous to the player, for example, a probability change confirmation notification, a notification of the number of times saved, a notification including any one or two or more of notifications of an increase in the number of rounds in the jackpot game can be given, It is not limited to these.

In addition, "The certain effect is a confirmed effect that notifies that a privilege advantageous to the player is given [for example, in FIG. 386(A(5)-54) to FIG. Showing the family crest character CMON, etc.]
The fixed effect is an effect that notifies that the symbol variable display that is a big hit is included in the symbol variable display whose execution is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “held symbol variable display”),
If the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is one, one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed [For example, in the case of notifying that one holding consecutive chan is generated, as shown in FIGS. 386(A(5)-49) to (A(5)-55) in FIG. Whether or not the timer notice display effect related to the timer notice display TM21 is performed, and as a result, a holding consecutive chan notification notice is performed by displaying the family crest character CMON, as shown in FIG. 389(D(5)-11). , In the big hit end production, the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed and the suspended consecutive chan notification production is performed, etc.],
If the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, it is configured so that both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. [For example, in the case of notifying the occurrence of two consecutive holding chans, as shown in FIG. 391 (G(5)-6) to (G(5)-16), first, The timer advance notice effect concerning the first timer advance notice display TM21 is performed, and as a result, as a certain effect, the suspended consecutive chan announcement effect is performed by the display of the family crest character CMON, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the big hit end effect, the grandfather V formation display GYV is displayed, and the suspended consecutive-chan notification effect is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to eliminate the ambiguity of the effect and to give a great sense of expectation when both the first effect and the second effect are executed.

Here, the certain effect may notify only that the advantageous privilege is given to the player, or may notify other than that the advantageous privilege is given to the player. It may be. In addition, a certain presentation may necessarily notify that the advantageous privilege is given to the player, or may not notify that the advantageous privilege is given to the player. May be.

Further, the final effect may be a notification that only the symbol variation display that is a big hit is included in the pending symbol variation display, or the pending symbol variation display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit. Information other than the presence may be notified. Further, the final effect may be one that always informs that the pending symbol variation display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit, or the reserved symbol variation display includes a symbol variation display that is a big hit. There may be a case where the fact that there is no notification is given.

In addition, when the number of symbol variation displays that is a big hit included in the pending symbol variation display is one, only one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed. May be done, if the number of symbol fluctuation display that is a big hit included in the pending symbol fluctuation display is one, execute an effect other than one of the first effect and the second effect It may be configured in some cases. In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuation displays that are a big hit included in the pending symbol fluctuation display is one, even if it is configured to always execute one of the first effect and the second effect Good, if the number of symbol fluctuation display that is a big hit included in the pending symbol fluctuation display is one, it is configured so that one of the first effect and the second effect may not be executed. May be done.

Further, when the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is one, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be executed, or in the pending symbol variation display. When the number of symbol fluctuation displays included in the big hit included is one, the first effect may be executed without fail. Further, when the number of the symbol variation display which is a big hit included in the pending symbol variation display is one, it may be configured such that only the second effect may be executed, or in the pending symbol variation display. When the number of included symbol variation displays that are big hits is one, the second effect may be executed without fail.

In addition, when the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is one, it may be configured not to execute the first effect, or included in the pending symbol variation display. If the number of symbol variable displays that are a big hit is one, the second effect may not be executed.

Further, when the number of the symbol variation display that is a big hit included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, it is configured such that only the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Or, if the number of symbol fluctuation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol fluctuation display is two or more, a case other than both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. It may be configured to be. In addition, when the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, both the first effect and the second effect may be configured to be executed without fail. However, if the number of symbol fluctuation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol fluctuation display is two or more, it is configured so that both the first effect and the second effect may not be executed. Good.

In addition, when the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured such that only the first effect may be executed, or the pending symbol variation display. When the number of symbol fluctuation displays included in the jackpot is two or more, the first effect may be executed without fail. In addition, when the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured such that only the second effect is executed, or the pending symbol variation display. When the number of symbol variation displays that are a big hit included in is 2 or more, the second effect may be configured to be executed without fail.

In addition, when the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, it may be configured not to execute the first effect, or included in the pending symbol variation display. When the number of symbol variable displays that are big hits is two or more, the second effect may not be executed.

In addition, when the number of symbol variable displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variable display is 1, only the first effect may be executed, and both the first effect and the second effect. It may not be executed.

In addition, when the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, the second effect may be performed more easily than the first effect, or The first effect may be executed more easily than the second effect, only the second effect may be executed in some cases, or only the first effect is executed. In some cases, the first effect and the second effect may not be executed.

Further, when the first effect is performed, two or more holding consecutive chans may be generated, and when the second effect is performed, only one holding consecutive chan may be generated.

In addition, when the timer effect is performed and the first effect is started, two or more holding consecutive chan is more likely to occur than when the first effect is started without the timer effect. However, when the first effect is started without the timer effect being generated, two or more pending consecutive chans are generated than when the timer effect is performed and the first effect is started. You may make it easy.

In addition, when the timer effect is performed and the second effect is started, two or more holding consecutive chan is more likely to occur than when the second effect is started without the timer effect. However, when the second effect is started without the timer effect being generated, two or more pending consecutive chans are generated than when the timer effect is performed and the second effect is started. You may make it easy.

In addition, "the big hit game is configured by a plurality of round games [for example, 16 round games and the like],
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game of the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 386(A(5)-49) to FIG. ), the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 may be started after the fourth round is started and may be ended during the execution of the fourth round, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to reliably show the timer effect during the big hit.

Here, it may be constituted only by a big hit game by a plurality of round games, or may be constituted by including a big hit game by one round game.

Further, the timer effect may be executed only in one round game of the plurality of round games, or may be executed in other than one round game of the plurality of round games. There may be cases. Further, the timer effect may be always executed in one round game of the plurality of round games, or may not be executed in one round game of the plurality of round games. May be.

Also, "The big hit game is composed of multiple round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games of the plurality of round games [for example, FIG. 387 (B(5)-17) to FIG. )-25), the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 may be performed over the fourth round to the fifth round, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Also explained differently.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to entertain the timer effect for a long time.

Here, it may be constituted only by a big hit game by a plurality of round games, or may be constituted by including a big hit game by one round game.

Further, the timer effect may be executed only over two or more round games of the plurality of round games, or other than two or more round games of the plurality of round games. May also be executed over time. Further, it may be always executed over two or more round games of a plurality of round games, or may not be executed over two or more round games of a plurality of round games. May be

In addition, the "timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and then subtract from the initial value to display a display indicating the certain time [for example, FIG. 387(B( 5)-17) to (B(5)-23) in the same figure, after displaying "30:00" as the initial value of the timer display on the first big hit timer notice display TM21, "00:00" is displayed. "Countdown until" is displayed, etc.],
The display indicating the certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, "00:00" in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-23). Timer display, etc.]
Certain timer effect (hereinafter, “first timer effect [for example, FIG. 387(B(5)-17) to FIG. 387(B(5)-25) or FIG. 388(C(5)-8) to same. The timer display displayed during execution of the first big hit timer preview display TM21 shown in FIG. (B(5)-17)]” is the first time as the initial value. A display indicating [for example, 30 seconds, etc.] [for example, a timer display of “30:00” in the first jackpot timer notification display TM21 shown in FIG. 387 (B(5)-17), etc.],
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over a first number of round games [eg, “2”, etc.] among the plurality of round games [eg, FIG. 387 (B. In the case shown in (5)-17) to (B(5)-25) in the same figure, the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 started in the fourth round is performed over the fifth round. Etc.],
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over a second number of round games [eg, “3”, etc.] among the plurality of round games [eg, FIG. In the cases shown in (5)-8) to (C(5)-17) in the same figure, the timer notice effect related to the first big hit timer notice display TM21 started in the fourth round is performed over the sixth round. Etc.],
The second number is a number more than the first number,
The first number is one or more times,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even with the same timer effect, the number of rounds straddling varies depending on the situation of the game (the winning of the game ball into the variable winning port, the type of jackpot, etc.), so that variations in the effect may be increased.

In addition, in the conventional game console, the production during the execution of the big hit game was mainly related to the round game, but according to this game console, the timer production performed according to the elapsed time is incorporated. This may improve the interest in jackpot games.

Here, the timer display may be configured such that after displaying the initial value, the display is subtracted from the initial value and only the display indicating a certain time is displayed, or the initial value is displayed. The display may be configured such that a display other than the display indicating a certain time is displayed after subtraction display from the initial value later. Further, the timer display may be configured such that after displaying the initial value, the display is subtracted from the initial value and the display indicating a certain time is always displayed, or after the initial value is displayed. The display may be subtracted from the initial value and the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed.

Further, the timer display may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value only after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. Alternatively, the display may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting the display from the initial value.

Further, the display indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer display becomes 0, or the display indicating a certain time may indicate other than the time when the timer display becomes 0. It may be. Further, the display indicating a certain time may necessarily indicate the time at which the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time may not indicate the time at which the timer display becomes 0. May be

Further, the timer display displayed during the execution of the first timer effect may show only the first time as an initial value, or may show a time other than the first time as an initial value. It may be. In addition, the timer display displayed during execution of the first timer effect may always indicate the first time as an initial value, or may not indicate the first time as an initial value. May be

In addition, the first timer effect may be executed over only the first number of round games of the plurality of round games, or the first of the plurality of round games. It may be executed over a number of times other than the round game. In addition, the first timer effect may be always executed over the first number of round games of the plurality of round games, or the first number of times of the plurality of round games. It may not be executed over the round game.

Further, the first timer effect may be executed over only the second number of round games of the plurality of round games, or may be executed over the second number of the plurality of round games. It may be executed over a number of times other than the round game. Further, the first timer effect may be executed over the second number of round games of the plurality of round games without fail, or may be executed over the second number of times of the plurality of round games. It may not be executed over the round game.

In addition, the second number may be always greater than the first number, may be the same number as the first number, or may be less than the first number. It may be.

The first number of times may be one time, or may be more than one.

In addition, the round game, when the condition of any one of the passage of time (for example, the passage of 29 seconds) and the winning of the game ball into a certain number (for example, 10) of the variable winning a prize holes is satisfied. It ends.

In addition, "One round game is configured to end when a second time [eg, 29 seconds] has elapsed,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and then subtract from the initial value to display the display indicating the certain time [for example, FIG. 386 (A(5)- 49) to (A(5)-53) in the same figure, the first big hit timer notice display TM21 displays "03:00" after displaying "03:00" as the initial value of the timer display. Count down to, etc.],
The display indicating the certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0 [for example, "00: in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-53). 00" timer display, etc.],
A display indicating a third time [for example, 3 seconds, etc.] as the initial value [for example, a timer of "03:00" in the first big hit timer notice display TM21 shown in FIG. 386(A(5)-49). Etc.] may be displayed,
The third time is shorter than the second time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer effect may be able to be executed during one round game.

Here, the one round game may be configured to end only when the second time has elapsed, or may be configured to end when the second time has not elapsed. Good. Further, the one round game may be configured to always end when the second time elapses, or may be configured to not end when the second time elapses. ..

Further, the timer display may be configured such that after displaying the initial value, the display is subtracted from the initial value and only the display indicating a certain time is displayed, or after the initial value is displayed. The display may be configured to display a display other than the display indicating a certain time by subtracting the display from the initial value. Further, the timer display may be configured such that after displaying the initial value, the display is subtracted from the initial value and the display indicating a certain time is always displayed, or after the initial value is displayed. The display may be subtracted from the initial value and the display indicating a certain time may not be displayed.

Further, the timer display may be configured such that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting from the initial value only after displaying the initial value, or after displaying the initial value. Alternatively, the display may be configured so that a display indicating a certain time is displayed by subtracting the display from the initial value.

Further, the display indicating a certain time may indicate only the time when the timer display becomes 0, or the display indicating a certain time may indicate other than the time when the timer display becomes 0. It may be. Further, the display indicating a certain time may necessarily indicate the time at which the timer display becomes 0, and the display indicating a certain time may not indicate the time at which the timer display becomes 0. May be

Further, only the third time may be displayed as the initial value, or the time other than the third time may be displayed as the initial value. Further, the third time may be always displayed as the initial value, or the third time may not be displayed as the initial value.

The third time may be shorter than the second time, may be the same as the second time, or may be longer than the second time. ..

In addition, "When the timer effect is executed in one-time symbol variation display (hereinafter, "third case [eg, FIG. 385(A(1)-24) to FIG. 385(A(2)-33)]" As shown in FIG. 5, when the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 starts and ends in one symbol variable display, the timer advance notice effect is performed, etc.]”).
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the strong sabotani group shown in FIG. 385(A(2)-32) to (A(2)-33). Notice]],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the effect of the timer may be improved because the variation of the timer effect is increased.

Here, it may be configured to have only the third case, or may be configured to have a case other than the third case. Further, the third case may be configured so that it always exists, or the third case may not be configured. Further, the third case may be omitted.

Further, a certain effect in the third case may be a notice effect only regarding the symbol variation display being executed, or a notice effect other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect in the third case may be a notice effect that is necessarily related to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice effect that may not be related to the symbol variation display being executed.

It should be noted that the certain effect in the third case may be a look-ahead notice.

In addition, "timer effect [for example, timer notification effect related to the first big hit timer notification display TM21 shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-8) to (H(5)-13) in FIG. 393] can be executed. A gaming table provided with a rendering means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The timer effect is a display that indicates a certain time after the display of the timer display [for example, the first big jackpot timer notification display TM21 or the like shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-8)] is started. With an effect configured to start a certain effect [for example, button stock notification effect shown in FIG. 393 (H(5)-13], etc.] when [for example, “00:00” etc.] Yes,
It is configured such that at least part of the timer effect may be performed during execution of the big hit game [for example, in FIG. 393 (H(5)-8) to FIG. The timer preview effect relating to the first big hit timer preview display TM21 shown is being performed during the big hit game, etc.],
Production suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player is given during the execution of the jackpot game (hereinafter, referred to as "third production [for example, FIG. 393 (H(5)-24) to FIG. 394 (H(5 )-28) button effect mini-game, etc.]”).
The third effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once or more [for example, FIG. 393(H(5)-24) to FIG. 394(H(5 )-28), the mini game of the button effect is executed when a button stock notification effect is performed as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the rendering means, but according to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a gaming table having a feature in the rendering means.

In addition, according to this game table, it may be possible to expect the timer effect even during the big hit game.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the timer effect. In addition, the production means may be one that always executes the timer production, or may not execute the timer production.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that only a certain effect is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display showing a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is always started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. Alternatively, when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured such that a certain effect is started only when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured such that a certain effect is started even when the timer display is not a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started.

It may be configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or an effect other than at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. May be configured as. Further, it may be configured such that at least a part of the timer effect is always performed during the execution of the big hit game, or at least a part of the timer effect is not performed during the execution of the big hit game. May be.

Also, it may be configured such that only part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game, or it may be configured such that all of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game. Good.

Further, it may be configured such that only the third effect may be executed during the execution of the big hit game, or an effect other than the third effect may be executed during the execution of the big hit game. May be configured as. Further, the third effect may be configured to be executed without fail during execution of the big hit game, or the third effect may not be executed during execution of the big hit game.

Further, the third effect may be executed only while the big hit game is being executed, or the third effect may be executed even while a game other than the big hit game is being executed. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the third effect may be executed only when a certain effect is executed at least once or more, and other than when a certain effect is executed at least once or more. In some cases, it may be executed. Further, the third effect may be always executed when a certain effect is executed at least once or more, and is executed when a certain effect is executed at least once or more. It may not be done.

The third effect may be executed when a certain effect is executed once, or may be executed when a certain effect is executed a plurality of times. It may be one.

It should be noted that only some of the timer effects may be performed during execution of the big hit game, or may be performed during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the end of the big hit game.

In addition, "the effect means is a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], a game table. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to improve the visual effect.

Here, the rendering means may be composed of only the display means, or may include means other than the display means. Further, the rendering means may necessarily include the display means, or may not include the display means.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, a production means capable of executing "timer production [for example, timer advance production on the third timer advance display TM13 shown in FIGS. 400(M(1)-24) to 401(M(11)-65)]" A gaming table provided with, for example, a decorative pattern display device 208,
In the timer effect, after the display of the timer display [for example, the third timer notice display TM13 or the like shown in FIG. 400 (M(1)-24)] is started, the timer display indicates a certain time [for example, , "00:00", etc.], the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "certain effect [for example, probability change notification shown in FIG. 401 (M(11)-65)]") is started. It is a composed performance,
At least some symbol variation display (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display executed in the period of Fig. 402 (N(11)-4) to (N(11)-7)) ]”) is executed during execution of the timer effect, and a period in which a new symbol variation display is not performed after the first symbol variation display is finished [for example, FIG. 402 (N(11)- 8) to standby period shown in (N(11)-11) of the same drawing], the certain effect may be performed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that what is described as a variable display of a decorative pattern above may be a variable display of a design (more specifically, a special drawing), and a description that is displayed as a stop display of a decorative pattern means that the design (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

Below, based on the effect examples described so far, other effect patterns of the timer notice effect will be described while appropriately showing the above-mentioned drawings.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 247, for example, the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3) and the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19) are displayed. Has been done. The timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode and the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode can be distinguished from each other in that the background color of the timer notice display is different. For example, in the high-reliability display mode timer advance notice display TM1A, the background color of the timer advance notice display TM1A is red, whereas in the default display mode timer advance notice display TM1 is white. Note that the color and shape of the frame portion (frame display) forming the timer preview display may be different between the high-reliability display mode timer preview display TM1A and the default display mode timer preview display TM1. For example, in the high-reliability display mode timer notice display TM1A, the frame display color may be red, and in the default display mode timer notice display TM1, the frame display color may be white. Further, the timer preview display TM1A in the high reliability display mode and the timer preview display TM1 in the default display mode may be different in display color of the timer display so that they can be distinguished from each other. The display color of the timer display of the timer notice display TM1A in the degree display mode may be red, and the display color of the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode may be black. In this case, the colors may be different for all the digits of the numerical value displayed on the timer display, or some of the digits (one digit or a plurality of digits may be displayed on the timer display). The color may be different. Further, the display size of the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode and the display size of the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode may be made different from each other. For example, the default display The display size of the timer notification display TM1A in the high reliability display mode may be larger than the display size of the timer notification display TM1 in the mode. Here, although the display size of the timer notice display is the same for both, the display size of the timer display displayed in the timer notice display may be different, for example, the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode. The display size of the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode may be larger than the display size of the timer display. As described above with reference to FIGS. 246 to 247, the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high-reliability display mode has been described as indicating that it is less likely to be a false timer advance notice than the default display mode. When the timer advance notice display is displayed in the high reliability display mode, the advance notice effect (prefetch advance notice) may be always performed when the timer display becomes "00:00". In this case, for example, like the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3), the high reliability display mode may be set at the time when the timer notice display TM1A is started to be displayed. As shown in 253(3) to (10) in FIG. 25, the timer advance notice display (timer advance notice display TM1) is displayed in the default display mode when the display is started, and then the countdown of the timer in the timer display is started. You may change to a high reliability display mode before.

Further, when the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 290(a) to 290(e), a value below the decimal point (a value of a digit less than 1 second) is When the value is other than 0, a notice effect for confirming a big hit (for example, displaying the strongest cut-in image CI1v) may be performed as a result of the countdown in the timer display. On the other hand, when the timer notice display is displayed in the default display mode, for example, "10:00" or "0"
A timer display in which the value after the decimal point is always 0, such as "5:00", is displayed. However, as shown in FIGS. 290(a) to 290(e), the value after the decimal point is It may be displayed with a value other than 0. Further, even if the timer display when the timer notice display is displayed is, for example, "10:00" or the like, and the value after the decimal point is 0, when the countdown is stopped after the countdown of the timer display is performed. Even if the time indicated by the timer display displayed in is a special result such as "7:77" or a special word combination such as "2:23", the timer display is counted down. As a result, a notice effect for confirming the big hit may be performed. Further, the value after the decimal point of the timer display in the timer advance notice display of the high reliability display mode is 0 (for example, the timer display is "10:00", etc.), and the countdown of the timer display starts and "00:00". When it comes to, the notice production of the big hit confirmation may be performed.

Also, the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode may be displayed to function as a big hit confirmation notice. In this case, for example, the timer notice display may be displayed and erased before the countdown of the timer display is started, and then the jackpot pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed. At this time, for example, the color, pattern, or shape of the display frame of the timer notice display may change (for example, the color of the display frame changes from red to rainbow). There may be a case where the timer notice display is displayed and the countdown of the timer display is started. In this case, when the timer display is "00:00", the notice effect (for example, FIG. 252 (35a)). (A notice effect for confirming a big hit such as displaying the strongest cut-in image CI1v) may be performed. Further, the timer notice display is displayed and is erased before the countdown of the timer display is started, but after that, the notice effect (for example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) is displayed and the big hit is confirmed. It is also possible to confirm and display the jackpot pattern mode after the (preliminary notice effect). In addition, when the big notice is not confirmed even if the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode is displayed, it is deleted before the timer notice display is displayed and the countdown of the timer display is started, and the notice effect is started. It may or may not start. In this case, the notice production is started when the timer notice display is started and the timer display countdown is started, rather than when the timer notice display is displayed and erased before the timer display countdown is started. You may want to make it easier to do so, or when the timer notice display is displayed and it is erased before the countdown of the timer display is started, rather than when the timer notice countdown is started. However, the notice production may be started easily. On the other hand, when the timer notice display of the default display mode is displayed, the timer display of the timer notice display is counted down, and when the timer display is "00:00", the high reliability display mode is displayed. It may be configured such that an effect different from the announcement effect that is performed when the timer display in the timer announcement display of is "00:00" is performed.

Further, when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, for example, the big hit confirmation notice display such as the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) is always displayed, while the default display. If the timer advance notice display of the aspect is displayed, the big hit confirmation notice display is not displayed, and, for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 239(9) or a strong sabotani group advance notice shown in FIG. 243(9). A notice effect may be performed to increase the reliability of the variable display. Further, although the timer advance notice display of the default display mode is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 241 (3) to (6) and 244 (3) to (9), the timer display is “00: There may be a case in which a fake timer advance notice effect is performed in which "00" is not displayed, or the advance notice effect is not performed by deleting without "00:00". Also, even when the timer advance notice display in the default display mode is displayed, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) may be displayed. In other words, even if the content of the notice production performed by displaying the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode and the content of the notice production performed by displaying the timer notice display in the default display mode are the same, Good.

Further, even when the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode is displayed, a notice display other than the big hit confirmation notice display may be displayed. For example, the change of the hold icon by the hold change animation shown in FIG. 246(6). Alternatively, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250(35) may be displayed, or the pseudo continuous effect may be performed by stopping the replay symbol RP shown in FIG. 253(17). In addition, for example, an effect may be performed in which a notice item (preliminary icon) that notices that the princess character HME shown in FIG. Further, for example, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237(15) to 238(19) may be started. In addition, when the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode is displayed, the notice effect is not performed as a result of the countdown of the timer display, and when the timer display becomes "00:00", the jackpot pattern The mode may be fixedly stopped. In this case, the timer display in the timer notification display is "00:00" when the timer notification display in the default display mode is displayed, as compared with the case where the timer notification display in the high reliability display mode is displayed. It can be said that the notice production that will be performed is easily executed.

Further, in the embodiment described so far, an example will be described in which, when a timer advance notice effect is performed, a certain advance notice effect is performed when the timer display of the timer advance notice display is “00:00”. However, there may be a case where two or more notice effects are performed when the timer display becomes "00:00". For example, a pseudo-reaction effect, a change effect of the hold icon, and a notice item stock. There may be a case where two or more effects of the effect, the transition to the super reach, and the big hit confirmation effect such as the strongest cut-in image CI1v are performed by one timer notice effect. It goes without saying that these effects may be executed without the timer advance notice effect being performed.

Further, in the effect examples described so far, the timer notice display of the high reliability display mode or the default display mode is displayed, and after the countdown of the timer display of the timer notice display is started, the timer display is "0:00. The example in which the notice effect is performed is shown. However, the time until the timer notice becomes "00:00" and the timer notice display is erased depends on the high reliability display mode and the default display mode. The timer display may be different. For example, the time until the timer display in the timer notification display in the high reliability display mode becomes “00:00” and then is deleted is the timer notification display in the default display mode. It may be set longer than the time until the time is erased after the timer display at “00:00” becomes “00:00”, may be shorter, or may be the same. In particular, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display of the high reliability display mode is "00:00", the timer display can be made to appear longer and the staging effect is enhanced when the jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed. There are cases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 253(3) to FIG. 13(13), since the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is started to be displayed, the symbol variation is repeated a plurality of times before the countdown of the timer display is started. The display may be crossed, and in FIGS. 253(3) to (13), after the timer notice display TM1A is displayed, the countdown of the timer display is started after the next symbol variation display is started. Although it is made to start, for example, after the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is started to be displayed, the countdown of the timer display is not started continuously from the start to the end of the next symbol variation display, There may be a case where the countdown of the timer display is started after the next symbol variation display is started. That is, a pre-reading notice that the notice production to be executed by executing the timer notice production related to the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display related to the second hold icon is performed. You may be told. In this case, it can be said that the period from the display of the timer notice display to the start of the countdown of the timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display.

Further, even if the timer display time TM1 in the default display mode or the timer warning display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the time indicated by the timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variable display. Good. That is, in the state where the timer display countdown in the timer notice display is being performed, the symbol variation display may be terminated, and the timer display countdown may be continued from the start to the end of the next symbol variation display. For example, the timer display at the time when the timer notice display is started is “30:00”, and after the countdown is started, the symbol variation display is ended. At this time, for example, it is assumed that the timer display shows "25:00". After that, for example, when the symbol variation display having a variation time of 10 seconds is started, the countdown of the timer display is not finished in the period from the start to the end of the symbol variation display. In this way, the time indicated by the timer display may be longer than the time varying in the symbol variable display. ,
Further, in this effect example, the display position of the timer notice display may be changed in the period from the display of the timer notice display to the start of the countdown of the timer display. The display may be enlarged or may be reduced. Further, the display position of the timer notice display may be changed after the countdown of the timer notice in the timer notice display is started, the timer notice display may be enlarged, or the display may be reduced. Good.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, a 7-segment display device SEG is provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the timer advance notice display is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. In this case, for example, the default notice display of the timer notice display is easier to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 than the 7-segment display device SEG, and the high-reliability display form of the timer notice display is a decorative pattern. The 7-segment display device SEG may be displayed more easily than the display device 208. In this case, when the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, for example, as shown in FIG. 285(5), the timer display is displayed in a red light emission mode. You may make it distinguish from the timer display of a default display mode.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 284, the timer notice display is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. An example is shown in which the indicated time is the same as the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, but in this case, the countdown in the timer display of each timer notice display is performed. When the timer display is “00:00”, for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250(35) is likely to be displayed, while either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the 7-segment display device SEG is displayed. There is a case where the timer notice display is displayed only on one side, and in this case, when the timer display is counted down in the timer notice display and the timer display becomes “00:00”, for example, as shown in FIG. The weak cut-in image CI1b shown in (14) may be easily displayed. That is, the timer notice display is displayed only on one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the decorative symbol is more preferable than the aspect of the notice effect performed when the timer display is "00:00". A timer advance notice display is displayed on both the display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the advance notice effect mode performed when the timer display is "00:00" is a mode with higher reliability. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot pattern mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 284, the time indicated by the timer display when the display is started in the timer notice display displayed on both the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG is the same, and the countdown The time indicated by the timer display displayed during execution is also the same, and the timing when the timer display is "00:00" is also the same.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 284, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a case where another timer notice display is displayed (that is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, two timer notice displays are displayed) There may be, in this case, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer display of one of the two timer notice displays (timer notice display A) displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 7-segment display device. And the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display is the same as the time indicated by the timer display in the other timer display (timer notice display B) of the two timer notice displays displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The time displayed in the timer display displayed on the 7-segment display device may be different from the time shown in some cases. In other words, it can be said that the time indicated by the timer display in the two timer advance notice displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is different from each other. In this case, if the timer notice display B has a longer time than the timer notice display A, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device is the same as the timer notice display B. It may be the same as (the one with the longer time indicated by the timer display) or the same as the timer advance notice display A (the one with the shorter time indicated by the timer display). Further, when the timer display of the timer notice display B is counted down and the timer display becomes "00:00", the notice effect produced when the timer notice is displayed on the timer notice display A and the 7-segment display device SEG is displayed. It may be different from the notice effect performed when the countdown is performed in each timer display and the timer display becomes “00:00”. Even if the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display A, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display B, and the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG are different from each other. Good. Further, it is possible to display one timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and display two timer notice displays on the 7-segment display device SEG. Further, in this effect example, an example in which the timer notice display is displayed on both the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG is shown, but for example, the decorative pattern display devices 208 and 7 even if the same variation pattern is displayed. There may be a case where only one of the timer advance notice display of the segment display device SEG is displayed, or even if neither of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 7 segment display device SEG shows the timer advance notice display. Good.

Also in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, the timer notice display is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in Fig. 285(3) to Fig. 285(11), the time indicated by the timer display in Fig. 2 and the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG are different. ), when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is counted down and the timer display becomes “00:00”, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the default. While changing from the display mode of No. 1 to the display mode of Sabohani (display mode of prefetch notice), as shown in FIGS. 285(5) to 287(28), the timer of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG When the countdown in the display is performed and the timer display becomes “00:00”, it is shown that the premier notice that the character whose length is broken appears appears. That is, the notice effect displayed when the timer display is counted down in the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the timer display becomes "00:00", and the 7-segment display device SEG is displayed. It can be said that the timer display in the displayed timer advance notice display TM1 is different from the advance notice effect displayed when the timer display reaches "00:00". Note that the notice effects of both may be the same. Further, in this effect example, a time (for example, "10:00") indicated by the timer display at the time when the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed and the 7-segment display device SEG displays it. The timer display time when the displayed timer advance notice display is different from the time indicated by the timer display (for example, “30:00”), and the timer when the display is started in the timer advance notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is displayed. Although the time indicated by the display is longer, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208
There may be a case where the time indicated by the timer display at the time of starting the display in is longer. Further, the timing at which the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is started and the timing at which the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is started are different, but they may be the same. May be. In addition, as for the mode of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIGS. 285(5) to 287(28), as shown in FIG. 286(24), the display mode is rainbow during the countdown. It may be notified that the display mode is changed and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that in this effect example, an example is shown in which the timer notice display is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG. There may be a case where only one of the timer advance notice displays of the segment display device SEG is displayed, or even if neither of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 7 segment display device SEG shows the timer advance notice display. Good.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 285 to 287, after the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the timer display is started to be displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG and is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. After the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the notice effect is performed, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". Although an example in which the notice effect is performed is shown, for example, after the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 after the timer notice display is started to be displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, the decorative pattern display device is displayed. The timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed at 208 becomes "00:00" and the advance notice effect is performed, and thereafter, the timer display in the timer advance notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". There may be a case where the notice production is performed. Specifically, the timer advance notice display whose timer display is "30:00" is first displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the countdown of the timer display is started. After that, the timer notice display TM1 whose timer display is "05:00" is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the countdown of the timer display is started. Then, the timer notice display TM1 on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes “00:00” earlier than the timer notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the notice effect related to this is started. At this time, in the timer advance notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown of the timer display continues. After that, the timer display of the timer notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”, and the notice effect related to this is started. In addition, after the timer notice display TM1 is first displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, the timer notice display is displayed on the 7-segment display device, and then the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is " The timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 after the notice production is performed as "00:00" may be performed as "00:00". Further, after the timer notice display is first displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and then the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is displayed. The notice display may be performed by changing the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to "00:00" after the notice production is performed as "00:00".

In addition, in the example of the effect, an example in which the notice effect is performed when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is “00:00” as a result has been described. In the case where the timer preview effect is performed by the timer preview display of the aspect, the preview effect is started during the countdown of the timer display in the timer preview display (that is, before the timer display becomes “00:00”), and the timer display is started. There may be a case where the timer advance notice display ends before "00:00". Further, after the timer notice display is displayed, the notice production may be started before the countdown of the timer display is started, and the timer notice display may be ended before the countdown of the timer display is started. This may be particularly effective when a big hit confirmation effect is performed. Further, even in the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display in the default display mode, the advance notice effect may be started during the countdown of the timer display. Further, after the timer notice display is started to be displayed, the timer notice display may be deleted during the countdown of the timer display and the notice production may not be performed, or after the timer notice display is started to be displayed, The timer notice display may be erased before the countdown of the timer display is started, and the notice effect may not be performed. That is, there is a fake timer announcement effect in which the timer announcement display in the high-reliability display mode is displayed, but the timer announcement is not performed before or during the countdown of the timer display in the timer announcement display and the announcement effect is not performed. It may be performed. In this case, the countdown is performed in the timer display in the timer advance notice display, and the advance notice effect is more likely to be performed when the timer display is "00:00". In other words, despite the fact that the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, if the timer advance notice display is erased before or during the countdown of the timer display, the advance notice effect is not performed, The timer notice display in the high-reliability display mode is displayed, the timer display is counted down, and when the timer display is “00:00”, the notice effect may be necessarily performed. Even if the timer notice display is displayed, the notice production may be performed even if the timer notice display is deleted before the start of the countdown or during the countdown, or the timer notice display is displayed. Therefore, the timer display may be counted down in the timer notice display, and the notice production may not be performed even when the timer display is "00:00". In addition, even if the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the display mode of the timer advance notice display changes when the timer advance notice display is erased before starting the countdown of the timer display or during the countdown. For example, the display color of the timer display may change from black to iridescent, or the background of the timer notice display and the color of the frame may change. Even if the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed, if the timer advance notice display is erased before or during the countdown of the timer display, the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. You may do it. The above may also be applied to the timer advance notice display in the default display mode.

If the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed and is deleted before the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, the display time is displayed in the default advance display timer advance notice display. When the countdown of the timer display starts after the start of the timer display, it may be set longer or shorter than the time from the display of the timer notice display until the start of the countdown of the timer display, or the same. It may be time.

Also, when the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed and is deleted before the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, the display time is set to the time shown in the timer display in the timer advance notice display. It may be longer than the corresponding period. Specifically, for example, when the time displayed in the timer display when the timer notification display in the high reliability display mode is displayed is a time displayed as a premier notification such as “07:77”, When the display is stopped before the countdown of the display is started, the time from the start of the display of the timer notice display until the display is deleted may be 10 seconds, which is longer than 7.77 seconds. In addition, when the timer advance notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed and erased before the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display is started, the display time is changed to the time shown in the timer display in the timer advance notice display. It may be shorter than the corresponding period or may be the same. This city is also applicable to the timer advance notice display in the default display mode.

In addition, when the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is displayed and the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, the default time is the time until the timer notice display is displayed and the countdown of the timer display starts. The timer advance notice display in the display mode may be displayed longer than the time until the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display starts, or may be shorter or the same time. Good.

In the above description, for example, a notice effect that is executed as a result of the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode is a notice effect (for example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed). In the case where the preview effect executed as a result of the timer preview effect related to the timer preview display in the default display mode is a preview effect different from a preview effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) The relationship may be such that these effects are interchanged. That is, the preview effect executed as a result of the timer preview effect related to the timer preview display in the high-reliability display mode is a pseudo continuous effect, and the timer preview effect related to the timer preview display in the default display mode is performed. The notice effect executed as a result may be the display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v.

Further, the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode and the timer notice effect related to the timer notice effect in the default display mode are executed as a result. There may be a case where the notice production is the same.

In the explanation of this effect pattern, the explanation is given with reference to the effect example executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern, but as shown in, for example, FIGS. 386 to 407, the timer advance notice effect during the big hit game should also be applied. You can

In the above description,
[A game table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 239(3)],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the like],
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect (for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00") is satisfied, and a certain effect (hereinafter, " First effect [for example, pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 239(9), strong sabotani group notice shown in FIG. 243(9), hold change shown in FIG. 246(6), strong cut-in shown in FIG. 350(35). The display of the image CI1a, the display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.]” is started.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)],
Display of the timer display of the second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1A of high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)]”) is started. In this case, the first effect is always started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(3) to (7), the timer notification effect for the timer notification effect TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed by the timer notification effect). Will be changed to "00:00", etc.]
The timer display of the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [e.g., timer advance notice display TM1 of default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)]") and the second timer display. Is different in at least a part in a period after the display of the display of the time is started and before the change of the display of the display of the time is started (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”) [eg, 247(19), the default display mode timer advance notice display TM1 and the high-reliability display mode timer advance notice display TM1A shown in FIG. 246(3) have different display modes at the start of display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, there may be a case where only the first effect is started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where an effect other than the first effect is started in response to the satisfaction of the condition. In addition, the first effect may be necessarily started in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition after the display of the timer display is started, or the certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where the first effect is not started in response to the action.

There may be a case where the first effect is started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain condition is started after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where the first effect is started in accordance with something other than the fact that is established.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in any one of the plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any of the plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any of the plurality of modes. Good.

In addition, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the first effect may be started without fail, and when the display of the second timer display is started, other than the first effect. The production may be started without fail. Further, the first effect may be always started only when the display of the second timer display is started, or in the case other than the case where the display of the second timer display is started, The production of may be started without fail.

In addition, the first timer display and the second timer display may be different in at least a part only in the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display are in the first period. The aspects may be different in at least some of the periods other than the above. In addition, the first timer display and the second timer display may be different from each other in at least part of the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display may be different from each other in the first period. There may be a case where the aspect does not differ at least in part.

In addition, the first timer display and the second timer display may be different in a part in the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display are all in the first period. The aspect may be different.

In addition, "in the first period, the display of the time of the first timer display is a display indicating the first time (hereinafter, "first time display [for example, the default shown in FIG. 247 (19) Display of timer advance notice display "1" in the timer display of TM1]".
In the first period, the display of the time of the second timer display is a display indicating the second time (hereinafter, "second time display [for example, "7:77 shown in FIG. 290(a)". “Timer display etc.]”),
The first time display is a display showing that the value of a lower rank [eg, a place after the decimal point] is 0 than a certain place [eg, a one's place, etc.],
The second time display is a display showing that the value of the lower rank than the certain rank is a certain value [for example, “77”, etc.],
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player can recognize in advance that a certain performance will be started by setting the timer display value as a special value, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. There are cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" is "the value after the decimal point",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the color of the time display of the first timer display is a first color [for example, black, etc.],
The color of the time display of the second timer display is a second color [for example, red, etc.],
The first color and the second color are different colors,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first color and the second color may be partially different colors, or all may be different colors.

The first color may be composed of one color or may be composed of two or more colors. The second color may be composed of one color, or may be composed of two or more colors.

In addition, “the first timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time,
The second timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time,
The color of the frame display of the first timer display is a third color [for example, white, etc.],
The frame display color of the second timer display is a fourth color [for example, red, etc.],
The third color and the fourth color are different colors,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may include only the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may include the display other than the frame display surrounding the time display and the time display. It may be. Also, the first timer display may necessarily include a time display and a frame display surrounding the time display, or may not include a time display and a frame display surrounding the time display. It may be.

The second timer display may include only the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may include the display other than the frame display surrounding the time display and the time display. May be. The second timer display may include a time display and a frame display surrounding the time display, or may not include a time display and a frame display surrounding the time display. It may be.

In addition, the third color and the fourth color may be partially different colors or all different colors.

The third color may be composed of one color or two or more colors. The fourth color may be composed of one color or may be composed of two or more colors.

In addition, “the size of the display of the time in the first timer display is a first size [for example, a default size],
The size of the display of the time in the second timer display is a second size [eg, a size larger than the default size, etc.],
The first size and the second size are different sizes,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The second size may be larger than the first size, and the first size may be larger than the second size.

In addition, "when the display of the first timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect [for example, pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 239 (9), FIG. 243 (9) The notice of the strong sabotani group shown, the hold change shown in FIG. 246(6), the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350(35), etc. may be started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation to the first timer display.

Here, when the display of the first timer display is started, there may be a case where only a certain effect different from the first effect is started, or the display of the first timer display is started. In this case, an effect other than a certain effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect may be started without fail, or when the display of the first timer display is started, There may be a case where a certain effect other than the first effect is not started.

Further, only when the display of the first timer display is started, there may be a case where a certain effect different from the first effect is started, and the display of the first timer display is started. In a case other than the case described above, a certain effect different from the first effect may be started.

Further, "When the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may be started [for example, the timer advance notice display TM1A in the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19) is displayed. When displayed, a specific notice effect (for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) may be performed), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation to the first timer display.

Here, when the display of the first timer display is started, only the first effect may be started, or when the display of the first timer display is started, There may be cases where an effect other than the effect is started. In addition, when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may be started without fail, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect is not started. There may be cases.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the display of the first timer display is started, or in a case other than the case where the display of the first timer display is started. The first effect may be started.

Further, “The first effect is started only when the display of the second timer display is started [for example, the timer advance notice display TM1A in the highly reliable display mode shown in FIG. 246(3) is displayed. Only when this is done, a specific notice effect (for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a)) is performed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation to the second timer display.

Here, only the first effect may be started only when the display of the second timer display is started, or only when the display of the second timer display is started. Effects other than the above may be started. In addition, the first effect may be always started only when the display of the second timer display is started, or the first effect is performed only when the display of the second timer display is started. It may not be started.

In addition, "the first effect is a pseudo-relational effect [eg, pseudo-rear effect shown in Fig. 239(7) to Fig. 239(9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of a prefetching notice [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which a notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as the notice item shown in FIGS. 253(9) to (10) is stocked, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, an effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.] for notifying that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is a pseudo-relation effect, a pre-reading notice effect, an effect in which a notice icon is stocked, a certain super reach effect, and a jackpot pattern mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display. Any one of the effects to be notified or two or more effects,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time or the start timing may be different. Further, the number of effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, and may be three or more, and effects of pseudo-relation, effects of pre-reading notice, effects in which notice icon is stocked, and certain super reach. All of the effects and the effects of informing that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display may be performed.

In addition, “a big jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed as the first effect [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display is “00:00”, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”] Is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display means is a means that can display a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (12), the decorative symbol variable display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (3), high reliability is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol). Timer advance notice display TM1A in display mode has started timer advance notice production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, only the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display other than the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. Further, the display of the timer display may be necessarily started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or the display of the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display of the timer display may be started other than during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

Further, "the time represented by the display of the time in the first period of the second timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display [for example, high reliability display mode When the timer advance notice display TM1A is displayed, the time indicated by the timer display is "30:00", and the execution time of the variable display may be 10 seconds, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the time represented by the time display in the first period of the second timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display, or the second timer display. The time other than the time represented by the time display in the first period may be longer than the symbol variation display execution time. Further, the time represented by the display of the time in the first period of the second timer display may be always longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display, or the first of the second timer display. The time represented by the time display in the period may not be longer than the symbol variation display execution time.

In addition, “second display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 284] is provided,
The display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like shown in FIG. 284],
The first timer display, the first display means is easier to display than the second display means,
The second timer display, the second display means is more easily displayed than the first display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, “the certain condition is that the display of the time is a display indicating a certain time [for example, a display of “00:00” or the like],
The certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the certain condition for starting the first effect may be a condition other than that the time display is a display indicating a certain time.

In addition, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display showing the certain time [for example, high reliability 252 (35a), for example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed during the countdown of the timer in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1A in the degree display mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the second timer display is started, there may be a case where only the first effect is started before the display of time becomes a display showing a certain time, or After the timer display is started, an effect other than the first effect may be started before the time display becomes a display indicating a certain time. In addition, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started without fail before the time display becomes a display showing a certain time, or the display of the second timer display may be started. After the start, the first effect may not be started before the time display becomes a display indicating a certain time.

In addition, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started only before the display of time becomes a display showing a certain time. After the display of the display is started, the first effect may be started other than before the display of the time is the display showing a certain time.

Further, the first effect may be started only after the display of the second timer display is started and before the display of the time is a display showing a certain time, or the second timer may be displayed. Other than after the display of the display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display showing a certain time.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[A game table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 239(3)],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the like],
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect (for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00") is satisfied, and a certain effect (hereinafter, " In some cases, the first effect [for example, display of strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a)] is started.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)],
When the display of the timer display of the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 or the like in default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)]”) is started. May start a certain effect different from the first effect [for example, change effect of display mode of hold icon shown in FIG. 257 (6) to (7)],
Display of the timer display of the second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1A of high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)]”) is started. In this case, the first effect is always started [for example, in the timer notification effect related to the timer notification display TM1A in the high reliability display mode, the strongest cut-in image CI1v is always displayed when the timer display is "00:00". Etc.],
The first timer display and the second timer display are periods (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”) from the start of the display of the time display to the start of the change of the display of the time display. .) in at least a part of the different manners. [For example, in the timer notice display TM1 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19) and the timer notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3), The display mode is different at the beginning],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, there may be a case where only the first effect is started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where an effect other than the first effect is started in response to the satisfaction of the condition. In addition, the first effect may be necessarily started in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition after the display of the timer display is started, or the certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where the first effect is not started in response to the action.

Further, there may be a case where the first effect is started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where the first effect is started in response to a condition other than the condition that is satisfied.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in any one of the plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any of the plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any of the plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, only a certain effect other than the first effect may be started, or the display of the first timer display is started. In the case, an effect other than a certain effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect may be started without fail, or when the display of the first timer display is started, There may be a case where a certain effect other than the first effect is not started.

In addition, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the first effect may be started without fail, and when the display of the second timer display is started, other than the first effect. The production may be started without fail. Further, the first effect may be always started only when the display of the second timer display is started, or in the case other than the case where the display of the second timer display is started, The production of may be started without fail.

In addition, the first timer display and the second timer display may be different in at least a part only in the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display are in the first period. The aspects may be different in at least some of the periods other than the above. In addition, the first timer display and the second timer display may be different from each other in at least part of the first period,
The first timer display and the second timer display may be the same in at least a part in the first period.

In addition, the first timer display and the second timer display may be different in a part in the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display are all in the first period. The aspect may be different.

Further, "at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display, the display position may be moved in the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible for the player to easily notice that the timer display is displayed.

Here, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may move only the display position in the first period, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be moved. At least one of the displays may move in a position other than the display position in the first period. Further, the display position of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may always move during the first period, or the display position of the first timer display and the second timer display may change. At least one of the display positions may not move in the first period.

Further, the display position of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may move only during the first period, and the first timer display and the second timer display may be displayed. The display position of at least one of them may move during a period other than the first period.

Further, only the first timer display may move the display position during the first period, or only the second timer display may move the display position during the first period. The display positions of both the first timer display and the second timer display may move during the first period.

Further, "When the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may be started [for example, the timer advance notice display TM1A in the default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19) is displayed. When displayed, the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) may be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation to the first timer display.

Here, when the display of the first timer display is started, only the first effect may be started, or when the display of the first timer display is started, There may be a case where an effect other than the effect is started. In addition, when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may be always started, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect is not started. There may be cases.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the display of the first timer display is started, or in a case other than the case where the display of the first timer display is started. The first effect may be started.

Further, “The first effect is started only when the display of the second timer display is started [for example, the timer advance notice display TM1A in the highly reliable display mode shown in FIG. 246(3) is displayed. 252 (35a), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an expectation to the second timer display.

Here, only the first effect may be started only when the display of the second timer display is started, or only when the display of the second timer display is started. Effects other than the above may be started. In addition, the first effect may be always started only when the display of the second timer display is started, or the first effect is performed only when the display of the second timer display is started. It may not be started.

In addition, "the first effect is a pseudo-relational effect [eg, pseudo-rear effect shown in Fig. 239(7) to Fig. 239(9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of a prefetching notice [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which a notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as the notice item shown in FIGS. 253(9) to (10) is stocked, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, an effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.] for notifying that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is a pseudo-relation effect, a pre-reading notice effect, an effect in which a notice icon is stocked, a certain super reach effect, and a jackpot pattern mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display. Any one of the effects to be notified or two or more effects,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time or the start timing may be different. Further, the number of effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, and may be three or more, and effects of pseudo-relation, effects of pre-reading notice, effects in which notice icon is stocked, and certain super reach. All of the effects and the effects of informing that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display may be performed.

In addition, “a big jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed as the first effect [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display is “00:00”, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”] Is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "in the first period, the display of the time of the first timer display is a display indicating the first time (hereinafter, "first time display [for example, the default shown in FIG. 247 (19) Display of timer advance notice display "1" in the timer display of TM1]".
In the first period, the display of the time of the second timer display is a display indicating the second time (hereinafter, "second time display [for example, "7:77 shown in FIG. 290(a)". “Timer display etc.]”),
The first time display is a display showing that the value of a lower rank [eg, a place after the decimal point] is 0 than a certain place [eg, a one's place, etc.],
The second time display is a display showing that the value of the lower rank than the certain rank is a certain value [for example, “77”, etc.],
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player can recognize that a certain effect will be started in advance by setting the timer display value to a special value, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. There are cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" is "the value after the decimal point",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the color of the time display of the first timer display is a first color [for example, black, etc.],
The color of the time display of the second timer display is a second color [for example, red, etc.],
The first color and the second color are different colors,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first color and the second color may be partially different colors, or all may be different colors.

The first color may be composed of one color or may be composed of two or more colors. The second color may be composed of one color, or may be composed of two or more colors.

In addition, “the first timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time,
The second timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time,
The color of the frame display of the first timer display is a third color [for example, white, etc.],
The frame display color of the second timer display is a fourth color [for example, red, etc.],
The third color and the fourth color are different colors,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may include only the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may include the display other than the frame display surrounding the time display and the time display. It may be. Also, the first timer display may necessarily include a time display and a frame display surrounding the time display, or may not include a time display and a frame display surrounding the time display. It may be.

Further, the second timer display may include only the time display and the frame display surrounding the time display, or may include the display other than the frame display surrounding the time display and the time display. May be. In addition, the second timer display may necessarily include a time display and a frame display surrounding the time display, or may not include a time display and a frame display surrounding the time display. It may be.

In addition, the third color and the fourth color may be partially different colors or all different colors.

The third color may be composed of one color or two or more colors. The fourth color may be composed of one color or may be composed of two or more colors.

In addition, “the size of the display of the time in the first timer display is a first size [for example, a default size],
The size of the display of the time in the second timer display is a second size [eg, a size larger than the default size, etc.],
The first size and the second size are different sizes,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The second size may be larger than the first size, and the first size may be larger than the second size.

In addition, "the display means is a means that can display a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (12), the decorative symbol variable display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (3), high reliability is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol). Timer advance notice display TM1A in display mode has started timer advance notice production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, only the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display other than the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. Further, the display of the timer display may be necessarily started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or the display of the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display of the timer display may be started other than during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

Further, "the time represented by the display of the time in the first period of the second timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display [for example, high reliability display mode When the timer advance notice display TM1A is displayed, the time indicated by the timer display is "30:00", and the execution time of the variable display may be 10 seconds, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the time represented by the time display in the first period of the second timer display may be longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display, or the second timer display. The time other than the time represented by the time display in the first period may be longer than the symbol variation display execution time. Further, the time represented by the display of the time in the first period of the second timer display may be always longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display, or the first of the second timer display. The time represented by the time display in the period may not be longer than the symbol variation display execution time.

In addition, “second display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 284] is provided,
The display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like shown in FIG. 284],
The first timer display, the first display means is easier to display than the second display means,
The second timer display, the second display means is more easily displayed than the first display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, “the certain condition is that the display of the time is a display indicating a certain time [for example, a display of “00:00” or the like],
The certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the certain condition for starting the first effect may be a condition other than that the time display is a display indicating a certain time.

In addition, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display showing the certain time [for example, high reliability 252 (35a), for example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed during the countdown of the timer in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1A in the degree display mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the second timer display is started, there may be a case where only the first effect is started before the display of time becomes a display showing a certain time, or After the timer display is started, an effect other than the first effect may be started before the time display becomes a display indicating a certain time. In addition, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started without fail before the time display becomes a display showing a certain time, or the display of the second timer display may be started. After the start, the first effect may not be started before the time display becomes a display indicating a certain time.

In addition, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started only before the display of time becomes a display showing a certain time. After the display of the display is started, the first effect may be started other than before the display of the time is the display showing a certain time.

Further, the first effect may be started only after the display of the second timer display is started and before the display of the time is a display showing a certain time, or the second timer may be displayed. Other than after the display of the display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display showing a certain time.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

A gaming table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 239(3)],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the like],
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)],
Display of the timer display of the second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1A of high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)]”) is started. In this case, a certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect [eg, display of strongest cut-in image CI1v]”) may be started.
When the display of the timer display of the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 or the like in default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)]”) is started. Is referred to as a certain effect different from the first effect (hereinafter, referred to as “second effect [for example, change effect of display mode of hold icon shown in FIG. 257(6) to FIG. 7(7)]”. .) may be started,
The second timer display disappears after the display of the time display is started and before the change of the display of the time display starts (hereinafter, "the first case [for example, the countdown in the timer display is "When deleting before starting, etc.]" is displayed. [For example, the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is deleted before the countdown in the timer display starts, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in any one of the plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any of the plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any of the plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the first effect may be started, and when the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect is displayed. There may be a case where an effect other than the effect is started. Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started without fail, and when the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect is not started. There may be cases.

Moreover, when the display of the first timer display is started, only the second effect may be started, or when the display of the first timer display is started, the second effect is displayed. There may be a case where an effect other than the effect is started. Further, when the display of the first timer display is started, the second effect may be started without fail, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the second effect is not started. There may be cases.

In addition, the second timer display may disappear only after the display of the time display starts and before the change of the display of the time display starts, or the display of the time display may not be displayed. There may be cases where the display of the time disappears after the start, other than before the change in the display of the time. In addition, the second timer display may be one that always disappears after the display of the time display is started and before the change of the display of the time display is started, or the display of the time display is started. It may not disappear before the display change of the time display starts.

In addition, “When the display of the time is started to change after the display of the display of the time is started (hereinafter, “the second case [for example, high reliability display mode When the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1A is started, etc.]").
The first effect is more likely to be started in the second case than in the first case [for example, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is started, the strongest cut-in image is started. CI1v is easy to be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of the timer display that may start the first effect, which may improve the interest of the game.

Here, the second timer display may only start changing the display of the time display after the display of the time display is started, or may be the time after the display of the time display is started. There may be a case where something other than the change in the display of the display is started. In the second timer display, the display of the time display may always start changing after the display of the time display is started, or the display of the time display may be displayed after the display of the time display is started. There may be cases where the change does not start.

Further, in the second case than in the first case, only the first effect may be started easily, and in the second case than in the first case, other than the first effect. The presentation may be easy to start. In addition, the first effect may be more easily started in the second case than in the first case, and the first effect may be started in the second case rather than the first case. It may not be easy to be done.

In the first case, the first effect may not necessarily be started, and the first effect may or may not be started.

Further, in the second case, the first effect may be always started, or the first effect may or may not be started.

In the first case, the first effect is not started [for example, when the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is erased before the countdown in the timer display is started, the strongest cut is performed. In image CI1v is not displayed, etc.],
In the second case, the first effect is started [eg, when the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is started, the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed. etc],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the first case, only the first effect may not be started, and in the first case, effects other than the first effect may not be started. Further, in the first case, the first effect may not necessarily be started, and in the first case, the first effect may be started.

Further, in the second case, only the first effect may be started, and in the second case, effects other than the first effect may be started. Further, in the second case, the first effect may be necessarily started, and in the second case, the first effect may not be started.

In the first case, the first effect is always started [for example, the timer advance notice display TM1 in the high reliability display mode before the countdown in the timer display is started.
When A is deleted, the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the period from the start of the display of the time display in the first timer display to the start of the change of the display of the time display is the first period [for example, the timer notice of the default display mode] Period from the start of display of the display TM1 to the start of countdown of the timer display],
In the first case, the period from the start of the display of the time display in the second timer display until the display of the time disappears is the second period [for example, a timer in a high reliability display mode]. From the start of displaying the notice display TM1A until the timer notice display TM1A is erased, etc.]
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to notify for a long time that the display of the time display does not change.

Here, the second period may be always longer than the first period, the first period and the second period may have the same length, and the second period The first period may be longer than the first period.

In addition, “When the display of the time is started to change after the display of the display of the time is started (hereinafter, “the second case [for example, high reliability display mode When the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1A is started, etc.]").
In the second case, the period from the start of the display of the time display in the second timer display to the change of the display of the time display is the third period [for example, high reliability display A period from the start of displaying the timer notice display TM1A of the aspect to the start of the countdown of the timer display, etc.],
The third period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a feeling of strangeness to the change in the display of the time display, and to improve the premium feeling.

Here, the third period may be always longer than the first period, the first period and the third period may be the same length, and the third period may be longer. The first period may be longer than the first period.

In addition, "the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be a display showing the first time [for example, a display of "7:77", etc.],"
The second period is longer than the period corresponding to the first time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display is only the display showing the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display. May be a display other than the display indicating the first time. Further, the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be always the display showing the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be the first display. It may not be a display showing time.

Further, there may be a case where only the time display first displayed in the second timer display is the display representing the first time, and other than the time display first displayed in the second timer display. The display of may be a display showing the first time.

Note that the period corresponding to the first time may be longer than the second period, or the period corresponding to the first time and the second period may have the same length. ..

In addition, in the first case, the display mode of the display other than the display of the time in the second timer display may change [for example, in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode]. In the case of deleting before the countdown starts, the color of the display frame of the timer notice display TM1A changes from red to iridescent, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to increase the feeling of premier by changing the display mode of the timer display that does not change the display of time.

Here, in the first case, only the display mode of the display other than the display of the time in the second timer display may change, and in the first case, the time in the second timer display may be changed. There may be a case where a display other than the display other than the display is changed. Also, in the first case, the display mode of the display other than the time display in the second timer display may change without fail, and in the first case, the display other than the time display in the second timer display may be performed. The display mode of may not change.

In the first case, the display mode may change only in the display other than the time display in the second timer display, and in the first case, other than the time display in the second timer display. The display mode of the display other than the display may change.

Also, only in the first case, the display mode of the display other than the time display in the second timer display may change, and in the case other than the first case, the second timer display may be displayed. The display mode of the display other than the time display may change in some cases.

In addition, "the first effect is a pseudo-relational effect [eg, pseudo-rear effect shown in Fig. 239(7) to Fig. 239(9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of a prefetching notice [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which a notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as the notice item shown in FIGS. 253(9) to (10) is stocked, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, an effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.] for notifying that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is a pseudo-relation effect, a pre-reading notice effect, an effect in which a notice icon is stocked, a certain super reach effect, and a jackpot pattern mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display. Any one of the effects to be notified or two or more effects,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time or the start timing may be different. Further, the number of effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, and may be three or more, and effects of pseudo-relation, effects of pre-reading notice, effects in which notice icon is stocked, and certain super reach. All of the effects and the effects of informing that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display may be performed.

In addition, “a big jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed as the first effect [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display is “00:00”, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”] Is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display means is a means that can display a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (12), the decorative symbol variable display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (3), high reliability is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol). Timer advance notice display TM1A in display mode has started timer advance notice production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, only the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display other than the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. Further, the display of the timer display may be necessarily started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or the display of the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display of the timer display may be started other than during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

In addition, “second display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 284] is provided,
The display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like shown in FIG. 284],
The first timer display, the first display means is easier to display than the second display means,
The second timer display, the second display means is more easily displayed than the first display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, “When a certain condition after the display of the timer display in the second timer display is started [for example, the timer display in the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is “00:00”, Etc.] is established, the first effect [for example, display of strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a)] may be started.
After the display of the timer display in the first timer display is started, the certain condition [for example, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 in the default display mode is "00:00", etc.] In some cases, the second effect [for example, change effect of display mode of hold icon shown in FIG. 257(6) to FIG. 257(7)] is started in response to the establishment.
The certain condition is that the display of the time is a display indicating a certain time [for example, a display of “00:00”, etc.],
The certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the first effect is started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display in the second timer display is started, or the second timer is displayed. There may be a case where an effect other than the first effect is started in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition after the display of the timer display in the display is started. In addition, the first effect may be necessarily started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display in the second timer display is started, or the timer display of the second timer display may be started. The first effect may not be started in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition after the display is started.

Further, the first effect may be started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display in the second timer display is started, or the second timer display may be started. There may be a case where the first effect is started in response to a condition other than that a certain condition is satisfied after the timer display is started.

Further, there may be a case where only the second effect is started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display in the first timer display is started, or the first timer display. There may be a case where an effect other than the second effect is also started in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition after the display of the timer display in (3) is started. In addition, the second effect may be always started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display in the first timer display is started, or the second display may be started in the first timer display. The second effect may not be started in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition after the display is started.

Further, the second effect may be started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display in the first timer display is started, or the first timer display may be started. There may be a case where the second effect is started in response to a condition other than that a certain condition is satisfied after the timer display in (1) is started.

It should be noted that the certain condition for starting the first effect may be a condition other than that the time display is a display indicating a certain time.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[A game table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 239(3)],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the like],
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain condition [for example, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 becomes “00:00” or the like] is satisfied, a certain effect [for example, a figure Display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in 252 (35a)] may be started.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)],
When the timer display of the second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1A of high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)]”) is displayed. , The big hit symbol aspect is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display,
When the second timer display disappears before the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed without changing the display of the time display in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed (hereinafter, " In the case of one [for example, before the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display in which the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed, the countdown in the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM1A of the high reliability display mode is erased without starting. Etc.]”). ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, there may be a case where only a certain effect is started in response to the satisfaction of a certain condition after the display of the timer display is started, or there is a case after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where an effect other than a certain effect is started in response to the condition being satisfied. Further, a certain effect may be necessarily started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the timer display is started, or a certain condition is satisfied after the timer display is started. In some cases, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is started only when a certain condition is satisfied after the display of the timer display is started, or after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where a certain effect is started in response to something other than the condition being satisfied.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in any one of the plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any of the plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any of the plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the second timer display is displayed, only the big hit symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the second timer display is displayed, the big jack symbol aspect in the symbol variation display. A symbol mode other than the above may be confirmed and displayed. Also, when the second timer display is displayed, the big hit symbol aspect may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the second timer display is displayed, the big jack symbol aspect in the symbol variation display. May not be confirmed and displayed.

Further, only when the second timer display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and also in cases other than the case where the second timer display is displayed, the symbol variation display The jackpot pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed in.

Further, in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed, only the second timer display may disappear before the jackpot pattern mode is fixedly displayed without changing the display of the time display. However, in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed, the display other than the second timer display may disappear before the jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display. Good. Also, the second timer display may disappear before the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed, or There may be a case where the second timer display does not disappear before the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed.

Further, in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed, the display of the time display may not be changed and the second timer display may disappear only before the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. However, even if the second timer display disappears in addition to before the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time display in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed. Good.

In addition, there may be a case where the second timer display disappears before the jackpot pattern mode is fixedly displayed without changing the display of the time display only in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed. However, there is a case where the second timer display disappears before the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed without changing the display of the time display other than the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed. Good.

In addition, in the case where the display change of the time display starts after the display of the time display is started in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed (hereinafter, "the second case [eg, , A case where the timer display countdown starts in the symbol variation display in which the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed]”).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed, only the change in the display of the time display may be started after the display of the time display is started, or the second timer display may be started. There may be a case where a display other than the change in the display of the time is started after the display of the time is started in the symbol variable display in which is displayed. Also, in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed, the display of the time may start changing after the display of the time display is started, or the second timer display is displayed. There may be a case where the display change of the time display does not start after the display of the time display is started in the symbol variable display.

In addition, there may be a case where the display of the time display starts to change after the display of the time display starts only in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed. In the symbol variable display other than the displayed symbol variable display, the display of the time display may start to change after the display of the time display is started.

In addition, “one of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)],
A case where the timer display of the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1A etc. of high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)]”) is displayed. It is easier to start the certain effect when the second timer display is displayed,
The period from the start of the display of the time display in the first timer display to the start of the change of the display of the time display is the first period [for example, the timer advance notice display TM1 in the default display mode]. From the start of the display until the countdown of the timer display is started, etc.]
In the first case, the period from the start of the display of the time display in the second timer display until the display of the time disappears is the second period [for example, a timer in a high reliability display mode]. From the start of displaying the notice display TM1A until the timer notice display TM1A is deleted]
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to notify for a long time that the display of the time display does not change.

Here, when the second timer display is displayed, it may be easier to start a certain effect than when the first timer display is displayed, or the first timer display is displayed. When the second timer display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect may be started more easily than in the case. In addition, when a second timer display is displayed, a certain performance may be easier to start than when the first timer display is displayed, or when the first timer display is displayed. It may be possible that a certain effect is not started more easily than when the second timer display is displayed.

Further, when the first timer display is displayed, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, and a certain effect may or may not be started. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, a certain effect may be easily started, or a certain effect may or may not be started.

Note that the second period may be longer than the first period, the first period and the second period may have the same length, and the second period may be longer than the first period. In some cases, the first period may be longer.

In addition, “one of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)],
A case where the timer display of the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1A etc. of high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)]”) is displayed. It is easier to start the certain effect when the second timer display is displayed,
The period from the start of the display of the time display in the first timer display to the start of the change of the display of the time display is the first period [for example, the timer advance notice display TM1 in the default display mode]. From the start of the display until the countdown of the timer display is started, etc.]
In the second case, the period from the start of the display of the time display on the second timer display to the start of the change of the display of the time display is the third period [for example, high reliability From the time when the timer notice display TM1A in the degree display mode is started until the countdown of the timer display is started]
The third period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give a feeling of strangeness to the change in the display of the time display, and to improve the premium feeling.

Here, when the second timer display is displayed, it may be easier to start a certain effect than when the first timer display is displayed, or the first timer display is displayed. When the second timer display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect may be started more easily than in the case. In addition, when a second timer display is displayed, a certain performance may be easier to start than when the first timer display is displayed, or when the first timer display is displayed. It may be possible that a certain effect is not started more easily than when the second timer display is displayed.

Further, when the first timer display is displayed, a certain effect may not necessarily be started, and a certain effect may or may not be started. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, a certain effect may be easily started, or a certain effect may or may not be started.

The third period may be longer than the first period, the first period and the third period may be the same length, and the third period may be longer than the third period. In some cases, the first period may be longer.

Also, in the first case, the period from the start of the display of the time display in the second timer display to the disappearance of the time display is the second period [for example, high reliability display A period from the start of displaying the timer notice display TM1A until the timer notice display TM1A is erased].
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to notify for a long time that the display of the time display does not change.

Here, the second period may be always longer than the first period, the first period and the second period may have the same length, and the second period The first period may be longer than the first period.

In addition, "the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be a display showing the first time [for example, a display of "7:77", etc.],"
The second period is longer than the period corresponding to the first time,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display is only the display showing the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display. May be a display other than the display indicating the first time. Further, the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be always the display showing the first time, or the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display may be the first display. It may not be a display showing time.

Further, there may be a case where only the time display first displayed in the second timer display is the display representing the first time, and other than the time display first displayed in the second timer display. The display of may be a display showing the first time.

Note that the period corresponding to the first time may be longer than the second period, or the period corresponding to the first time and the second period may have the same length. ..

In addition, “the certain effect is a pseudo-relational effect [eg, pseudo-relational effect shown in FIG. 239(7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain effect is an effect of a prefetching notice [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain effect is an effect in which a notice icon is stocked (for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as the notice item shown in FIG. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked, etc.).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain effect is a certain super-reach effect [for example, a super-reach (swordsman reach) effect shown in FIG. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the certain effect is an effect for notifying that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "The certain effect is a pseudo-relation effect, a look-ahead notice effect, an effect in which a notice icon is stocked, a certain super-reach effect, and the fact that the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display is notified. Any one of the effects to be performed or two or more effects,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time or the start timing may be different. Further, the number of effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, and may be three or more, and effects of pseudo-relation, effects of pre-reading notice, effects in which notice icon is stocked, and certain super reach. All of the effects and the effects of informing that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display may be performed.

In addition, “a big hit pattern mode is definitely displayed as the certain effect [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display is “00:00”, a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display means is a means that can display a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (12), the decorative symbol variable display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (3), high reliability is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol). Timer advance notice display TM1A in display mode has started timer advance notice production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, only the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display other than the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. Further, the display of the timer display may be necessarily started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or the display of the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display of the timer display may be started other than during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

In addition, “the certain condition is that the display of the time is a display indicating a certain time [for example, a display of “00:00” or the like],
The certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the certain condition for starting the first effect may be a condition other than that the time display is a display indicating a certain time.

In addition, after the display of the second timer display is started, the certain effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display showing the certain time [for example, high reliability After the timer advance notice display TM1A in the display mode is displayed and before the timer display becomes "00:00", the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a) is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the second timer display is started, there may be a case where only a certain effect is started before the time display is a display showing a certain time. After the display of the display is started, an effect other than the certain effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display indicating the certain time. Further, after the display of the second timer display is started, a certain effect may be necessarily started before the display of the time becomes the display showing the certain time, or the display of the second timer display is started. There may be a case where, after being performed, a certain effect is not started before the time display becomes a display indicating a certain time.

Further, after the display of the second timer display is started, there may be a case where a certain effect is started only before the time display becomes a display showing a certain time. After the display of No. is started, a certain effect may be started other than before the display of the time is the display showing the certain time.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is started only after the display of the second timer display is started and before the display of the time is a display showing a certain time, or the second timer display is displayed. Other than after the display of No. is started, a certain effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display showing the certain time.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[A game table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 239(3)],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the like],
After the display of the timer display is started, the display of the time becomes a display showing a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as “first display [eg, display of “00:00”, etc.]”). A certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect [for example, change effect of display mode of hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246]”) is started. Yes,
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)],
When the timer display of the second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1A of high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)]”) is displayed. , The big hit symbol aspect is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display,
When the second timer display is displayed, even when the display of the time is the first display, the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed without the first effect being started. [For example, when the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode becomes “00:00”, a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, after the display of the timer display is started, only a certain effect may be started in response to the display of the time being the first display, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the effect other than a certain effect may be started in response to the time display becoming the first display. In addition, a certain effect may be always started in response to the display of the time being the first display after the display of the timer display is started, or the time after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where a certain effect is not started in response to the first display.

Further, after the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started only when the time display is changed to the first display, or the timer display is started. After that, a certain effect may be started in response to something other than the time display becoming the first display.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in any one of the plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any of the plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any of the plurality of modes. Good.

Further, when the second timer display is displayed, only the big hit symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the second timer display is displayed, the big jack symbol aspect in the symbol variation display. A symbol mode other than the above may be confirmed and displayed. Also, when the second timer display is displayed, the big hit symbol aspect may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, and when the second timer display is displayed, the big jack symbol aspect in the symbol variation display. May not be confirmed and displayed.

Further, only when the second timer display is displayed, the jackpot pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and also in cases other than the case where the second timer display is displayed, the symbol variation display The jackpot pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed in.

Further, when the second timer display is displayed, even when the time display is the first display, the first effect may not be started and only the jackpot pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed. There may be, if the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the first effect is not started and the symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect May be confirmed and displayed. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the big effect pattern mode may be definitely displayed without the first effect being started. However, if the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the first effect may not be started and the jackpot pattern mode may not be confirmed and displayed. Good.

Further, only when the second timer display is displayed, even when the time display is the first display, the big effect pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed without starting the first effect. There may be, even in the case other than when the second timer display is displayed, even if the time display is the first display, the first effect is not started and the jackpot pattern mode May be confirmed and displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)],
The first effect is started when the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) is displayed rather than when the second timer display is displayed. Cheap,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to expect the first timer display.

Here, only the first effect may be started more easily when the second timer display is displayed than when the first timer display is displayed, or the first timer display is displayed. The effects other than the first effect may be more easily started when the second timer display is displayed than when the second effect is displayed. In addition, the first effect may be more easily started when the second timer display is displayed than when the first timer display is displayed, or the first timer display is displayed. The first effect may not be started easily when the second timer display is displayed than when the second timer display is displayed.

In addition, when the first timer display is displayed, the first effect may not necessarily be started, and a certain effect may or may not be started. Further, when the second timer display is displayed, the first effect may be easily started, or a certain effect may or may not be started.

In addition, "the period from the display of the time in the first timer display to the first display until the first timer display disappears is the first period [for example, the timer in the default display mode] From the time when the timer display of the advance notice display TM1 is "00:00" until the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, etc.],
The time from when the display of the time in the second timer display becomes the first display to when the second timer display disappears is a second period [for example, a timer advance notice display in a highly reliable display mode]. From the time when the timer display of TM1 is "00:00" until the timer notice display TM1A is deleted]
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give an uncomfortable feeling to the display of time and improve the premium feeling.

Note that the second period may be longer than the first period, the first period and the second period may have the same length, and the second period may be longer than the first period. In some cases, the first period may be longer.

In addition, "an effect different from the first effect (hereinafter, "second effect [e.g., FIG. 252 Display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in (35a)]” is started.
The second effect is an effect that is executed only when the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the second effect may be started in response to the display of the time on the second timer display becoming the first display, or the display of the time on the second timer display may be the first display. Effects other than the second effect may be started in response to the display. Further, the second effect may be always started in response to the display of the time on the second timer display becoming the first display, and the display of the time on the second timer display may be the first display. There may be a case where the second effect is not started in response to the change.

Further, the second effect may be started only when the time display in the second timer display is changed to the first display, and the time display in the second timer display is the first display. The second effect may be started in response to a matter other than that.

In addition, "the first effect is a pseudo-relational effect [eg, pseudo-rear effect shown in Fig. 239(7) to Fig. 239(9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of a prefetching notice [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which a notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as the notice item shown in FIGS. 253(9) to (10) is stocked, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, an effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is any one or two or more of a pseudo-relation effect, a pre-reading notice effect, an effect in which a notice icon is stocked, and a certain super reach effect. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time or the start timing may be different. Further, the number of effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, and may be three or more, effects of pseudo-relation, effects of pre-reading notice, effects in which notice icon is stocked, and certain effects. All of the super reach production may be performed.

In addition, "the display means is a means that can display a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (12), the decorative symbol variable display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (3), high reliability is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol). Timer advance notice display TM1A in display mode has started timer advance notice production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, only the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display other than the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. Further, the display of the timer display may be necessarily started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or the display of the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display of the timer display may be started other than during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

In addition, “second display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 284] is provided,
The display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like shown in FIG. 284],
The first timer display, the first display means is easier to display than the second display means,
The second timer display, the second display means is more easily displayed than the first display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, “the certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display indicates the second time (hereinafter, “second time display [for example, “7:77 shown in FIG. 290(a)”. "Timer display etc.]").
The second time display is a display showing that the value of the lower order than a certain place is a certain value [for example, “77”, etc.],
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player can recognize that a certain effect will be started in advance by setting the timer display value to a special value, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. There are cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" is "the value after the decimal point",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[A game table provided with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 239(3)],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the like],
After the display of the timer display is started, the display of the time becomes a display representing a certain time [for example, a display of “00:00” or the like], and a certain effect (hereinafter, “first display”). (For example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246(7))” is started.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)],
When the display of the timer display of the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 or the like in default display mode shown in FIG. 247(19)]”) is started. May not start the first presentation,
Display of the timer display of the second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1A of high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 246(3)]”) is started. In this case, a certain effect different from the first effect (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect [for example, display of strongest cut-in image CI1v]") is always performed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

In addition, only the first effect may be started in response to the time display becoming the first display after the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, there may be a case where an effect other than the first effect is started in response to the time display becoming the first display. In addition, the first effect may be always started in response to the time display becoming the first display after the display of the timer display is started, or the time after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where the first effect is not started in response to the first display being displayed.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the time display is the first display after the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the first effect may be started in response to something other than the time display becoming the first display.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only in any one of the plurality of modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than any one of the plurality of modes. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in any of the plurality of modes, or may not be displayed in any of the plurality of modes. Good.

Moreover, when the display of the first timer display is started, only the first effect may not be started, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect is displayed. There may be cases where other effects are not started. Also, when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect does not necessarily have to be started, and when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect is started. It may be done.

Further, only when the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may not be started, and in cases other than the case where the display of the first timer display is started, The first effect may not be started.

In addition, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the second effect may be performed without fail, and when the display of the second timer display is started, the second effect other than the second effect The production may be performed without fail. In addition, the second effect may be always performed only when the display of the second timer display is started, or in the case other than the case where the display of the second timer display is started, The production of may be performed without fail.

In addition, "when the display of the second timer display is started, the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, only the big hit symbol aspect may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the display of the second timer display is started, the symbol variation display In, a symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed. Further, when the display of the second timer display is started, the big hit symbol mode may be definitely displayed in the symbol variable display, and when the display of the second timer display is started, the symbol variable display There may be a case where the jackpot pattern mode is not confirmed and displayed.

Further, only when the display of the second timer display is started, the big hit symbol mode may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, and also in cases other than the case where the display of the second timer display is started. The jackpot pattern mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, "the first effect is a pseudo-relational effect [eg, pseudo-rear effect shown in Fig. 239(7) to Fig. 239(9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of a prefetching notice [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which a notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as the notice item shown in FIGS. 253(9) to (10) is stocked, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, an effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is any one or two or more of a pseudo-relation effect, a pre-reading notice effect, an effect in which a notice icon is stocked, and a certain super reach effect. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time or the start timing may be different. Further, the number of effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, and may be three or more, effects of pseudo-relation, effects of pre-reading notice, effects in which notice icon is stocked, and certain effects. All of the super reach production may be performed.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a), etc.] for notifying that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "a jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed as the second effect [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display becomes "00:00", a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" Is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display means is a means that can display a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (12), the decorative symbol variable display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (3), high reliability is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol). Timer advance notice display TM1A in display mode has started timer advance notice production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, only the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display other than the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. Further, the display of the timer display may be necessarily started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or the display of the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display of the timer display may be started other than during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

In addition, “second display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 284] is provided,
The display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like shown in FIG. 284],
The first timer display, the first display means is easier to display than the second display means,
The second timer display, the second display means is more easily displayed than the first display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means. ..

Further, the second timer display may be displayed only on the second display means, may be displayed on the first display means, and may be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, “the certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the display of the time displayed first in the first timer display indicates the first time (hereinafter, “first time display [eg, default display mode shown in FIG. 247 (19) Display of "5:00" in the timer display of TM1]])).
The display of the time displayed first in the second timer display is a display showing the second time (hereinafter, "second time display [for example, a timer of "7:77" shown in FIG. 290(a)" Display etc.]”).
The first time display is a display showing that the value of a lower order [eg, a place after the decimal point] is 0 than a certain place [eg, a place of ones].
The second time display is a display showing that the value of the lower rank than the certain rank is a certain value [for example, “77”, etc.],
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player can recognize that a certain effect will be started in advance by setting the timer display value to a special value, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. There are cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" is "the value after the decimal point",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with multiple display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like shown in FIG. 284],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 284],
The first display unit is a unit capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 284(3)],
The second display means displays a timer [for example, a 7-segment display device S shown in FIG. 284(3)].
EG timer advance notice display, etc.],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer advance notice display TM1 or a timer display in a timer advance notice display in the 7-segment display device SEG],
After the display of the timer display is started, the display of the time becomes a display showing a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as “first display [eg, display of “00:00”, etc.]”). A certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect [eg, weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 241(14) or strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250(35)]”) is started. Is
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on any one of the first display means and the second display means (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
When the timer display is displayed on both the display means of the first display means and the display means of the second display (hereinafter, “second case [for example, in FIG. 284 (3) to FIG. As shown in the above, when the timer notice display is displayed on each of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG]".),
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

Here, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the first display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. The second display means may display the timer display without fail, or may not display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, after the display of the timer display is started, only the first effect may be started in response to the display of the time being the first display, or the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where an effect other than the first effect is started in response to the display of the time being changed to the first display. In addition, after the display of the timer display is started, the first presentation may be always started in response to the display of the time being the first display, or after the display of the timer display is started. The first effect may not be started in response to the time display becoming the first display.

In addition, the first effect may be started only when the time display is changed to the first display after the timer display is started, or the timer display is started. There may be a case where the first effect is started in response to something other than the time display being changed to the first display.

Further, only the timer display may be displayed on either one of the first display means and the second display means, or the first display means and the second display means may be displayed. There may be a case where a display other than the timer display is displayed on any one of the display means. Further, the timer display may be always displayed on either one of the first display means and the second display means, or either the first display means or the second display means. The timer display may not be displayed on one of the display means.

Further, the timer display may be displayed on only one of the first display means and the second display means, and the timer display may be displayed on the first display means and the second display means. The timer display may be displayed on the display means other than either one of the display means.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the timer display may be displayed only on the second display means.

Further, only the timer display may be displayed on both the first display means and the second display means, or both the first display means and the second display means may be displayed. In some cases, displays other than the timer display may be displayed. Further, the timer display may be always displayed on both the first display means and the second display means, or the timer display may be displayed on both the first display means and the second display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, the timer display may be displayed only on both the first display means and the second display means, or both the first display means and the second display means may be displayed. The timer display may be displayed by other display means.

In the second case, the timer display displayed on the first display means (hereinafter, “first timer display [for example, displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 284(3)]. "Timer advance notice display TM1 etc.") and the timer display displayed on the second display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display [e.g., shown in FIG. 284(3)]. There is a case (hereinafter, referred to as a “third case”) in which the time is displayed in the same manner (hereinafter referred to as “timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG”] (for example, FIG. 284 (3) to the same). As shown in FIG. (11), the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG are the same. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the timer display may be recognizable even if one of the display devices fails.

Here, in the second case, the display of the time of the first timer display and the display of the time of the second timer display may be the same, or in the second case, the display of the first timer display may be the same. The time display and the display other than the time display of the second timer display may be the same. In the second case, the time display of the first timer display and the time display of the second timer display may be the same, and in the second case, the time display of the first timer display may be the same. The display and the display of the time of the second timer display may be different.

Also, only in the second case, the time display of the first timer display and the time display of the second timer display may be the same, or in the case other than the second case, the first time display may be the same. The time display on the timer display and the time display on the second timer display may be the same.

In this case, the time display when the first timer display and the second timer display are started is the same, and the time display between the first timer display and the second timer display is changing. The display of the time in is also the same, and the timing of the display of the time of the first timer display and the display of the time of the second timer is also the same.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a display mode of a cut-in image by the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 241(14), etc.],
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a display mode of a cut-in image by the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250(35), etc.],
When the first effect according to the second aspect is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display than when the first effect according to the first aspect is performed. ,
In the case where the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is more likely to be the second case than the first case. The first effect according to the mode is likely to be started [for example, when the timer notice display is performed only on one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device. When the timer notice display is performed in both SEG and the timer display is the same, the case where the timer notice display is performed in both the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG is stronger cut-in image CI1a. Is easily displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than the plurality of modes. The first effect may be always executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

Further, in the case where the first effect according to the second aspect is performed, only the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the first effect according to the first aspect is performed. Good, in the case where the first effect according to the second aspect is performed than when the first effect according to the first aspect is performed, the symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect in the symbol variation display The confirmation display may be easy. Further, when the first effect according to the second aspect is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display than when the first effect according to the first aspect is performed. Good, the big hit symbol aspect is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the first effect according to the second aspect is performed than when the first effect according to the first aspect is performed. There may be no cases.

Further, when the first effect according to the first aspect is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect may not necessarily be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, and the jackpot symbol aspect is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display. There may be cases where it is not done. Further, when the first effect according to the second aspect is performed, the big hit symbol aspect may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, and the big hit symbol aspect is not definitely displayed in the symbol variation display. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is the first case according to the second mode rather than the first case. Only the presentation may be easier to start, or if the first time display in the timer display is the same as the first time display in the third case, the third case is better than the first case. The effects other than the first effect according to the second aspect may be easily started. Further, when the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is the first case according to the second mode rather than the first case. It may be easier to start the production, or if the first time and the third case have the same time display in the timer display, the third case is more likely than the first case. The first effect according to the second aspect may not be easily started.

In addition, only in the case where the first time display in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the third case is the first case according to the second mode rather than the first case. In the case of the third case rather than the first case, even if the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is not the same in the first case and the third case It may be easier for the first effect according to the second aspect to be started.

Further, in the first case, the first effect according to the second aspect may not necessarily be started, and in some cases, the first effect according to the second aspect may or may not be started. Good. Further, in the third case, the second production by the ocean may be always started, and in some cases, the first production by the second mode may or may not be started. Good.

In addition, “in the second case, a third timer display is displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 249(3)]. One of the two timer advance notices TM1L and TM1R displayed at 208] may be displayed.
The display of the displayed time is different between the third timer display and the first timer display [for example, two timer notice displays displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(3)]. One of the TM1L and TM1R timer advance notice display TM1L has a timer display of "10:00", the other timer advance notice display TM1R has a timer display of "45:00", which is different, etc.],
In the third timer display and the second timer display, the displayed time is different,
After the display of the third timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect in response to the display of the time in the third timer display reaching the certain time [For example, the effect of pseudo-relation shown in FIG. 249 (12) to (13) in FIG. 24] may be started.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, only one of the first display means and the second display means may display only the third timer display, or the second case. In, the display other than the third timer display may be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means. In the second case, the third timer display may be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means without fail, and in the second case, the first timer display may be displayed. The third timer display may not be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means.

In the second case, the third timer display may be displayed only on one of the first display means and the second display means, or in the second case. The third timer display may be displayed on the display means other than the one of the first display means and the second display means.

Further, only in the second case, there may be a case where the third timer display is displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means, and other than the second case. Also in this case, the third timer display may be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means.

Further, the third timer display and the first timer display may be different from each other only in the displayed time, and the third timer display and the first timer display may be different from the displayed time display. The display of may also be different. In addition, the displayed time display may be different between the third timer display and the first timer display, and the displayed time display may be different between the third timer display and the first timer display. It may not be different.

Further, the third timer display and the second timer display may be different from each other only in the displayed time, and the third timer display and the second timer display may be different from the displayed time. The display of may also be different. Also, the displayed time display may be different between the third timer display and the second timer display, and the displayed time display may be different between the third timer display and the second timer display. It may not be different.

Further, after the display of the third timer display is started, only a certain effect other than the first effect is started in response to the time display in the third timer display becoming a certain time. May be performed, and after the display of the third timer display is started, the first effect is displayed when the time display on the third timer display reaches a certain time. There may be a case where an effect other than another certain effect is started. In addition, after the display of the third timer display is started, a certain effect other than the first effect is surely started in response to the time display in the third timer display reaching a certain time. Alternatively, after the display of the third timer display is started, a certain time different from the first effect is displayed in response to the time display on the third timer display reaching a certain time. The production may not be started in some cases.

Further, after the display of the third timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect is started only when the time display in the third timer display reaches a certain time. May be performed, or after the display of the third timer display is started, the first display may be performed in addition to the fact that the time display on the third timer display has reached a certain time. There may be a case where a certain production different from the production of is started.

Further, only after the display of the third timer display is started, a certain effect different from the first effect is started in response to the time display in the third timer display being a certain time. May be performed, and even after the display of the third timer display is not started, the first effect is displayed in response to the time display on the third timer display reaching a certain time. There may be a case where another certain effect is started.

In the second case, the timer display displayed on the first display means (hereinafter, "Eleventh timer display [for example, displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (5) The timer advance notice display TM1 etc.]") and the timer display displayed on the second display means (hereinafter, referred to as "twelfth timer display [for example, FIG. 285 (5). There is a case (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth case”) in which the display of the time is different in the “7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG.”]”) (for example, in FIG. 285 (5). As shown, the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (“06:11”) and the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. ("30:00") is different, etc.],
In the fourth case, the first display is performed in response to the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becoming the first display. Production of is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, only the time display of the eleventh timer display and the time display of the twelfth timer display may be different, and in the second case, the eleventh timer display may be different. The display of the time displayed on the timer and the display other than the display of the time displayed on the twelfth timer may be different. In the second case, the time display of the eleventh timer display and the time display of the twelfth timer display may be different, and in the second case, the eleventh timer display time may be displayed. There is a case where the display of No. does not differ from the display of the time of the twelfth timer display.

In addition, only in the second case, the time display of the eleventh timer display and the time display of the twelfth timer display may be different, or in the cases other than the second case as well, The time display of the eleventh timer display and the time display of the twelfth timer display may be different.

Further, in the fourth case, only the first effect is produced in response to the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becoming the first display. It may be started, or in the fourth case, in response to the time display of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becoming the first display. Effects other than the one effect may be started. In addition, in the fourth case, the first presentation is always performed when the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becomes the first display. It may be started, or in the fourth case, in response to the time display of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becoming the first display. There may be a case where the first presentation is not started.

Further, in the fourth case, the first effect is produced only when the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becomes the first display. It may be started, or in the fourth case, except that the time display of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becomes the first display. Accordingly, the first effect may be started.

In the fourth case, the first effect may be started in response to the display of the time of the eleventh timer display becoming the first display, or in the fourth case, the tenth display. The first effect may be started in response to the display of the time of the second timer display becoming the first display, or in the fourth case, the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display. The first effect may be started in response to the display of both times of the display becoming the first display.

Further, only in the fourth case, the first effect is produced in response to the display of the time of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display becoming the first display. It may be started, and in cases other than the fourth case, the time display of at least one of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display is the first display. The first effect may be started according to.

In addition, “the first display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 284(3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays one timer notice display]. Only TM1 is displayed, etc.],
The first display means is a means in which a plurality of timer displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 249(3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are displayed. Displayed, etc.],
The second display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 284(3), in the 7-segment display device SEG, only one timer notice display TM1 is displayed. Displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display means may display only one timer display, or may display a display other than one timer display. .. Further, the first display means may always display only one timer display, or may only display one timer display in some cases.

The first display means may display only a plurality of timer displays, or may display a display other than the plurality of timer displays. Further, the first display means may be one in which a plurality of timer displays are always displayed, or may be one in which a plurality of timer displays may not be displayed.

In addition, the second display means may display only one timer display, or may display a display other than one timer display. Further, the second display means may be one in which only one timer display is always displayed, or may be one in which only one timer display may not be displayed.

In addition, "a plurality of the timer displays (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of timer displays") may be displayed on the first display means,
One of the plurality of timer displays on the first display means is a twenty-first timer display [for example, a timer notice display displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(3)]. TM1L, etc.],
One of the plurality of timer displays on the first display means is a twenty-second timer display [for example, a timer notice display displayed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249(3)]. TM1R, etc.],
In the twenty-first timer display, the first display of the time is a display representing the twenty-first time [for example, a display of "10:00", etc.],
The display of the time displayed first in the display of the twenty-second timer is a display representing the twenty-second time [for example, a display of “45:00”, etc.],
The period corresponding to the twenty-second period [for example, 45 seconds] is longer than the period corresponding to the twenty-first time [for example, 10 seconds],
In the second case, the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the display of the time displayed on the twenty-second timer display are the same. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only a plurality of timer displays may be displayed on the first display means, or a display other than the plurality of timer displays may be displayed on the first display means. Further, the plurality of timer displays may be displayed on the first display means without exception, or the plurality of timer displays may not be displayed on the first display means.

In addition, a plurality of timer displays may be displayed only on the first display means, and a plurality of timer displays may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. ..

Further, in the second case, only the time display displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the time display displayed on the twenty-second timer display may be the same. However, in the second case, the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the display other than the time display displayed on the twenty-second timer display are the same. Good. Further, in the second case, the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the display of the time displayed on the twenty-second timer display may be the same. However, in the second case, the time display displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the time display displayed on the twenty-second timer display may be different. ..

Further, only in the second case, the display of the time displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the display of the time displayed on the twenty-second timer display may be the same. However, also in cases other than the second case, the time display displayed on the timer display displayed on the second display means and the time display displayed on the twenty-second timer display are the same. May be.

In addition, "the second display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a third mode [for example, a rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 286(24)],
When the second display means displays the timer display in the third aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying the timer display only in a plurality of modes, or may be capable of displaying the timer display in a mode other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the second display means may always display the timer display in a plurality of modes, or may not display the timer display in a plurality of modes.

When the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, only the big hit symbol mode may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, and the second display means uses the timer in the third mode. When the display is displayed, a symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, and the second display means uses the timer in the third mode. When the display is displayed, the big hit symbol mode may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, only when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display, and the second display means may display the timer in the third mode. In cases other than the case where the display is displayed, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, “the display of the time displayed first in the first timer display indicates the second time (hereinafter, “second time display [for example, “7:77 shown in FIG. 290(a)”. "Timer display etc.]")), the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display,
In the second time display, the value of a place lower than a certain place [eg, one's place, etc.] [eg, the place after the decimal point] is a certain value [eg, “77”, etc.]. Is a display that represents
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player can recognize that a certain effect will be started in advance by setting the timer display value to a special value, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. There are cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" is "the value after the decimal point",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is a pseudo-relational effect [eg, pseudo-rear effect shown in Fig. 239(7) to Fig. 239(9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of a prefetching notice [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect in which a notice icon is stocked [for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as the notice item shown in FIGS. 253(9) to (10) is stocked, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first effect is a certain super reach effect [for example, an effect of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is any one or two or more of a pseudo-relation effect, a pre-reading notice effect, an effect in which a notice icon is stocked, and a certain super reach effect. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as the first effect, each effect may be started at the same time or the start timing may be different. Further, the number of effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, and may be three or more, effects of pseudo-relation, effects of pre-reading notice, effects in which notice icon is stocked, and certain effects. All of the super reach production may be performed.

In addition, "the display means is a means that can display a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (12), the decorative symbol variable display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (3), high reliability is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol). Timer advance notice display TM1A in display mode has started timer advance notice production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, only the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display other than the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. Further, the display of the timer display may be necessarily started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or the display of the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display of the timer display may be started other than during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

In addition, “the certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with multiple display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like shown in FIG. 284],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 284],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 285(5)],
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, a timer advance notice display in the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 285(5)],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer advance notice display TM1 or a timer display in a timer advance notice display in the 7-segment display device SEG],
After the display of the timer display is started, the display of the time becomes a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as “first display [eg, display of “00:00” or the like]”). In response to a certain effect [for example, a weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 241(14) or a strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 250(35)] is started,
When the timer display is displayed on both display means of the first display means and the second display means during execution of a certain symbol variable display (hereinafter, “second case [eg, FIG. 285 ( As shown in 5), a case where a timer notice display is displayed on each of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, etc.]").
In the second case, the time display of the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit are displayed. The display of the time of the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) may be different [for example, as shown in FIG. 285(5), a timer notice displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208]. The time indicated by the timer display of the display TM1 (“06:11”) is different from the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG (“30:00”), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the display means.

Here, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the first display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. The second display means may display the timer display without fail, or may not display the timer display in some cases.

Further, the timer display may include only the time display, or may include a display other than the time display. Further, the timer display may necessarily include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, after the display of the timer display is started, only a certain effect may be started in response to the display of the time being the first display, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the effect other than a certain effect may be started in response to the time display becoming the first display. In addition, a certain effect may be always started in response to the display of the time being the first display after the display of the timer display is started, or the time after the display of the timer display is started. There may be a case where a certain effect is not started in response to the first display.

Further, after the timer display is started, a certain effect may be started only when the time display is changed to the first display, or the timer display is started. After that, a certain effect may be started in response to something other than the time display becoming the first display.

In addition, there may be a case where only the timer display is displayed on both the display means of the first display means and the display means of the second display during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and execution of a certain symbol variation display. In some cases, a display other than the timer display may be displayed on both the first display means and the second display means. Further, the timer display may be always displayed on both the display means of the first display means and the second display means during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the first display during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the timer display is not displayed on both the display means and the second display means.

Further, there may be a case where the timer display is displayed only on both the first display means and the second display means during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and execution of a certain symbol variation display. The timer display may be displayed in the display means other than both the first display means and the second display means.

Further, in the second case, only the time display of the first timer display and the time display of the second timer display may be different, and in the second case, the time display of the first timer display may be different. The display other than the time display of the second timer display may be different. Further, in the second case, the time display of the first timer display and the time display of the second timer display may be different from each other, and in the second case, the time display of the first timer display may be different from the time display. The time display of the second timer display may not be different.

Further, only in the second case, the time display of the first timer display and the time display of the second timer display may be different, or in the case other than the second case, The display of the time displayed on the timer and the display of the time displayed on the second timer may be different.

In addition, “when either one of the first timer display and the second timer display is displayed during execution of the certain symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”). There is a gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to perform an effect with a wide variety of timer displays using the first display device and the second display device.

Here, there may be a case where either one of the first timer display and the second timer display is displayed only during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Besides, either the first timer display or the second timer display may be displayed. Further, either one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be displayed during execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the first timer during execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where one of the display and the second timer display is not displayed.

Further, only the first timer display may be displayed, or only the second timer display may be displayed.

In addition, "the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be fixedly displayed in the certain symbol variable display in the second case than in the first case,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case rather than in the first case, it may be easier to confirm and display only the big hit symbol aspect in a certain symbol variation display, or in the second case rather than in the first case. In the symbol variable display, the symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be easily confirmed and displayed. Also, in the second case than in the first case, the big hit symbol mode may be more likely to be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and in the second case than in the first case. There may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is not easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, in the first case, the big hit symbol aspect may not necessarily be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display, and the big jackpot symbol aspect may or may not be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variation display. Good.

Further, in the second case, the big hit symbol aspect may be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variable display, and the big jack symbol aspect may or may not be definitely displayed in a certain symbol variable display. Good.

In addition, “the period corresponding to the display of the time displayed first in the first timer display is the first period [for example, the timer notice displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285(3)] 10 seconds corresponding to "10:00" first displayed on the timer display of the display TM1],
The period corresponding to the display of the time displayed first in the second timer display is the second period [for example, the timer advance notice display timer displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 285 (5). For example, 30 seconds corresponding to "30:00" that is first displayed on the display],
The second period is longer than the first period,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, in the second case, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be the same,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, only the timing at which the first timer display starts to be displayed and the timing at which the second timer display starts to be displayed may be the same, or in the second case, the first timer display may be displayed. The timing at which the display of the timer display is started may be the same as the timing other than the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started. In the second case, the display start timing of the first timer display may be the same as the display start timing of the second timer display. In the second case, the first timer display may be displayed. There may be a case where the timing when the display is started and the timing when the second timer display is started are not the same.

Further, only in the second case, the timing at which the first timer display starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the second timer display is displayed, or in the cases other than the second case. The first timer display may be displayed at the same timing as the second timer display is displayed at the same timing.

In addition, in the second case, the timing at which the first timer display starts to be displayed may differ from the timing at which the second timer display starts to be displayed [for example, FIG. 285(3) to FIG. As shown in (5), the timing at which the timer advance notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 is started and the timing at which the timer advance notice display displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG is started are different. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, only the timing when the first timer display starts to be displayed may differ from the timing when the second timer display starts to display, and in the second case, the first timer display may start. The timing at which the timer display starts to be displayed may be different from the timing other than the timing at which the second timer display starts to be displayed. In the second case, the timing at which the first timer display starts to be displayed may be different from the timing at which the second timer display starts to display. In the second case, the first timer display may be displayed. There may be cases where the start timing and the display start timing of the second timer display do not differ.

Further, the timing at which the first timer display starts to be displayed may differ from the timing at which the second timer display starts to display only in the second case, and also in cases other than the second case. The timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be different.

Further, in the "second case, the first timer display is started to be displayed after the second timer display is started to be displayed, and the display of the time of the first timer display is the first time." The second timer display may be displayed even after the certain effect is started in response to the display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the second case, the first timer display is started to be displayed after the second timer display is started to be displayed, and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. Accordingly, there may be a case where only the second timer display is displayed even after a certain effect is started, and in the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started. The timer display is started and the display other than the second timer display is displayed even after a certain effect is started in response to the time display of the first timer display becoming the first display. There may be cases. Also, in the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started, and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. The second timer display may be always displayed even after a certain effect is started, and in the second case, the first timer display is displayed after the second timer display is started. There may be a case where the second timer display is not displayed even after a certain effect is started in response to the start and the display of the time of the first timer display becoming the first display.

Also, in the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started, and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. There may be a case where the second timer display is displayed even after only a certain effect is started, and in the second case, the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started. The timer display is started, and the second timer display is displayed even after effects other than a certain effect are started in response to the time display of the first timer display becoming the first display. There may be cases.

In the second case, only the first timer display is started after the second timer display is started, and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. Accordingly, the second timer display may be displayed even after a certain effect is started, or in the second case, the first timer display may be displayed after the second timer display is started. The timer display is started, and the second timer display is displayed even after a certain effect is started in response to the fact that the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. There may be cases.

Also, in the second case, the first timer display is started to be displayed only after the second timer display is started to be displayed, and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. Accordingly, the second timer display may be displayed even after a certain effect is started, and in the second case, the first timer display may be performed after the second timer display is not displayed. In some cases, the second timer display is displayed even after a certain effect is started in response to the start of the timer display of, and the display of the time of the first timer display becoming the first display. It may be.

Also, only in the second case, after the second timer display is started to be displayed, the first timer display is started to be displayed, and the time display of the first timer display is changed to the first display. Accordingly, the second timer display may be displayed even after a certain effect is started, or in a case other than the second case, after the second timer display is displayed. The first timer display is started with, and the second timer display is displayed even after a certain effect is started in response to the time display of the first timer display becoming the first display. There may be cases.

In addition, “the first display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 284(3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays one timer notice display]. Only TM1 is displayed, etc.],
The first display means is a means in which a plurality of timer displays may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 249(3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are displayed. Displayed, etc.],
The second display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 284(3), in the 7-segment display device SEG, only one timer notice display TM1 is displayed. Displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display means may display only one timer display, or may display a display other than one timer display. .. Further, the first display means may always display only one timer display, or may only display one timer display in some cases.

The first display means may display only a plurality of timer displays, or may display a display other than the plurality of timer displays. Further, the first display means may be one in which a plurality of timer displays are always displayed, or may be one in which a plurality of timer displays may not be displayed.

In addition, the second display means may display only one timer display, or may display a display other than one timer display. Further, the second display means may be one in which only one timer display is always displayed, or may be one in which only one timer display may not be displayed.

In addition, "the second display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a third mode [for example, a rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 286(24)],
When the second display means displays the timer display in the third aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying the timer display only in a plurality of modes, or may be capable of displaying the timer display in a mode other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the second display means may always display the timer display in a plurality of modes, or may not display the timer display in a plurality of modes.

When the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, only the big hit symbol mode may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, and the second display means uses the timer in the third mode. When the display is displayed, a symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, and the second display means uses the timer in the third mode. When the display is displayed, the big hit symbol mode may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, only when the second display means displays the timer display in the third mode, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display, and the second display means may display the timer in the third mode. In cases other than the case where the display is displayed, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, “the display of the time displayed first in the first timer display indicates the second time (hereinafter, “second time display [for example, “7:77 shown in FIG. 290(a)”. "Timer display etc.]")), the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display,
In the second time display, the value of a place lower than a certain place [eg, one's place, etc.] [eg, the place after the decimal point] is a certain value [eg, “77”, etc.]. Is a display that represents
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the player can recognize that a certain effect will be started in advance by setting the timer display value to a special value, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced. There are cases.

In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" is "the value after the decimal point",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain effect is a pseudo-relational effect [eg, pseudo-relational effect shown in FIG. 239(7) to (9)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain effect is an effect of a prefetching notice [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 246(6) to FIG. 246].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain effect is an effect in which a notice icon is stocked (for example, an effect in which the princess character HME as the notice item shown in FIG. 253 (9) to (10) is stocked, etc.).
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the certain effect is a certain super-reach effect [for example, a super-reach (swordsman reach) effect shown in FIG. 237 (15) to (19)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the certain effect is an effect for notifying that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display [for example, display of the strongest cut-in image CI1v shown in FIG. 252 (35a)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "The certain effect is a pseudo-relation effect, a look-ahead notice effect, an effect in which a notice icon is stocked, a certain super-reach effect, and the fact that the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display is notified. Any one of the effects to be performed or two or more effects,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

When a plurality of effects are executed as a certain effect, each effect may be started at the same time or the start timing may be different. Further, the number of effects to be executed is not limited to one and two, and may be three or more, and effects of pseudo-relation, effects of pre-reading notice, effects in which notice icon is stocked, and certain super reach. All of the effects and the effects of informing that the big hit symbol mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variable display may be performed.

In addition, “a big hit pattern mode is definitely displayed as the certain effect [for example, when the timer display in the timer notice display is “00:00”, a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display means is a means that can display a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (12), the decorative symbol variable display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (3), high reliability is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol). Timer advance notice display TM1A in display mode has started timer advance notice production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, only the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display other than the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. Further, the display of the timer display may be necessarily started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, or the display of the timer display may not be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started only during the display of the decorative pattern variable display, or the display of the timer display may be started other than during the display of the decorative pattern variable display. Good. For example, the display of the timer display may be started during the big hit game or in the standby state where the variable display of symbols is not performed.

In addition, “the certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Hereinafter, based on the effect examples described so far, other effect patterns of the preliminary announcement effect during preparation will be described while appropriately showing the above-mentioned drawings.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 307(a1) to (a14), an example of performing an effect in which a notice display corresponding to a region illuminated in red in the roulette effect is prepared is shown, but may be executed, for example. A plurality of (for example, six) notice effects are displayed, and one or more notice effects are prepared from the plurality of notice effects by operating the roulette effect shown in FIG. 307 and the operation of the effect button 136. It may be performed. Specifically, each of the thumbnail screens of the notice effect A to the notice effect F is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the operation promotion display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. After that, the production button 136 is played by the player.
When is operated, one or more notice effects may be selected (in the following description, it is assumed that two notice effects A and F are selected). For the selected notice effect A and notice effect F, in-preparation displays RDY1 and RDY2 indicating that the notice effect is performed are displayed at the corresponding positions. After that, at the execution start timing of the notice effect A, the in-preparation display RDY1 corresponding to the notice effect A starts moving, and for example, a display showing a state of heading for the family crest part 224E is displayed. That is, a state in which the in-preparation display RDY1 moves to the lower center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, the in-preparation display RDY1 is erased, the family crest accessory 224E performs an ascending operation, and then returns to the initial position. After that, the in-preparation display RDY2 corresponding to the notice effect F moves to the center while expanding, and thereafter, the effect of displaying the cut-in image on the entire surface of the display screen is performed.

Further, as another example of the effect, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 305(a1), the number of times the button effect is generated (that is, the number of button stocks) in the reception count display 850 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It is assumed that “4 more times” indicating that it is 4 times is displayed. That is, it is displayed that four button effects are being prepared. After that, the reception count display 850 starts to blink, and it is notified that the first button effect of the four button effects whose start is reserved is started. At this time, the time until the button effect is started may be configured such that a countdown is displayed by a timer display, for example.

When the first button effect is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, and the operation of the effect button 136 is ready to be accepted. After that, when the player operates the effect button 136, for example, a response display (notice display) such that a certain character appears and ranks up is started. It should be noted that a button effect unrelated to the button stock may occur in the middle of starting the digestion of the button effect related to the button stock.

After that, the reception count display 850 starts blinking again, and it is notified that the second and third button effects of the three button effects whose start is reserved are started. At this time, two timer displays are displayed and a countdown is performed in each timer display. In these timer displays, the start and the end of the countdown are performed at the same timing, but one timer display may start the countdown first, and then the other timer display may start the countdown. Further, one timer display may end the countdown first, and then the other timer display may end the countdown.

After that, two operation promotion displays are simultaneously displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is enabled. However, in this effect example, only one button effect is accepted by one operation of the effect button 136, and when the response display is displayed for each of the two button effects, the operation of the effect button 136 is performed twice. is necessary. In addition, you may make it display the response display of both two button productions by operation of the production button 136 once. Further, in this effect example, the decreasing speeds of the remaining time meters MT included in the two operation promotion displays are different, which indicates that the operation effective periods are different. Further, when two operation promotion displays are displayed, the button effects that are effective when the effect button 136 is operated may be in a predetermined order, or the decreasing speed of the remaining time meter MT. May be in ascending order. In this effect example, when one of the reserved button effects remains and the response display corresponding to the two button effects is performed, it may be notified that the jackpot will be a big hit. In addition, it may be notified that the game will be lost.

After that, promotion effect of whether or not it is a big hit with the probability variation pattern is performed. Then, the remaining one button effect that has been reserved is consumed, and the operation promotion display is displayed. That is, the promotion of the chance of promotion is started. After that, when the player operates the production button 136, the promotion display succeeds as a response display, and it is informed that the jackpot will be a big hit with the probability variation pattern. It should be noted that the promotion effect is not limited to a lottery as to whether or not it will be a jackpot with a probability variation pattern. ).

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [preparation display, for example, preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d)],
The third display is a notice display [a mini game or a timer notice, for example, a mini game display shown in FIGS. 291(o) to (p), or FIGS. 293(b3) to (b4). [Timer notice effect, etc.] shown in FIG.
It is configured such that the third display may be started in the first state. [The display of the preparing display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 291(d). , The display of the preparing image RDY is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],
The third display started to be displayed in the first state may be ended in the second state. [The in-preparation display started when the hold icon is displayed is The display ends when the icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to (n), the in-preparation image RDY displayed when the UI unit UI3 is displayed is displayed. , The display has ended in the state where the UI portion UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [Preparation in the state where the hold icon is hidden]. After the display of the display is finished, the mini game or the timer advance notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291(n) to (o), the UI is displayed after the display of the image RDY in preparation. Display of the mini game is started in a state where the section UI3 is hidden, or after the display of the preparing image RDY is finished as shown in FIGS. 293(b1) to (b4). , The timer notice effect is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the relevant notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291(q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294(c4), etc.] [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or when the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 291(o) to FIG. When the display result becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 294 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display is completed, the button notification effect by the deca button 136aL is displayed. Etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
After the first state, there may be a case where the second state occurs, and there is a case where there is a case where a state where the hold icon can be displayed is changed to a state where the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in (m), when transitioning to Swordsman Reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden and transitions from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed to the state in which it is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 before transitioning to Swordsman Reach is displayed, etc.],
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in Swordsman Reach].
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Although there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game table, this game table can realize a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, so that the user can concentrate on the fluctuation. Sometimes it can be entertained.

Also, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to entertain the beginner with a preparatory display to make it entertaining or not, and for some experienced users, the preparatory display will be displayed. In some cases, it may be easier to understand if it is displayed, and it is possible to clarify the expectations.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be easier to understand which advance notice will be given depending on the timing of ending the display during preparation.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or the display other than the third display may be started in the first state. Further, the third display may be always started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display may be displayed in the first state. However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display started to be displayed in the first state is In some cases, the display may not end in this state.

In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, there may be a case where only the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of the display other than the certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. There may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state after the completion of.

Further, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state. The display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state other than after the display of the display is finished.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the states other than the second state.

Further, there may be a case where only a certain effect is started after a certain notice display is displayed, and after the certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than a certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be always started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is not displayed. It may be.

Further, the certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to the symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that does not relate to the symbol change display being executed.

Further, the second state may be set only after the first state, or the second state may be set even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may be always set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or one of the states in which displays other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

In addition, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed or one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

The third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

Further, the certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may be terminated in the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end in the third state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end in the fourth state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Further, the first state may be a state including that the symbol variable display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

Further, "a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Note that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a false notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when the certain notice display is the mini game, the certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

Further, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a mini item display such as a notice item.

Further, "it is configured so that it may be in the second state after the first state" is "may be in the second state following the first state It is also configured to be “.

In addition, after the first state, there may be a case where the state shifts to the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, the third state or the third state) and then the second state is entered. Further, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where the one symbol variable display is performed.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display is faded out.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a hold icon display area, for example, UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least behind the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is being displayed, and the [hold icon can be displayed while an image including the hold icon display area is being displayed, for example, the hold icon is It can be displayed with the UI unit UI3 being displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 291(m), When the UI unit UI3 is hidden, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side only of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of the display other than the hold icon. The sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back side of the hold icon, or may be a display of at least an image that is not displayed on the back side of the hold icon.

Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed, or display other than the hold icon may be configured to be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. May be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be configured to be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. May be.

Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon is not displayed in the state where the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon is not displayed in the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed without the sixth display being displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed without the sixth display being displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

Note that the sixth display may be a display that does not overlap the changing decorative pattern.

Further, in the configuration in which a part of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the third display is overlapped with the decorative pattern. May be.

Further, the sixth display may include a display of the base of the hold icon.

Further, the sixth display may include a display of the base of the variable icon.

Further, the sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

In addition, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed [in the state where the hold icon is displayed, A part of the image including the icon display area is displayed so as to overlap the display during preparation. For example, as shown in FIG. 291(d), the image during preparation RDY is superimposed on the tutorial display portion TT1 in the UI portion UI3. Displayed, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position. [Display of the display during preparation in the state where the hold icon is displayed] The position and the display position of the in-preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the in-preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d) and the in-preparation image shown in FIG. 291(m). The display positions of RDY are the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent the user from overlooking by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being given.

Here, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display only, or in the first state, The display of at least a part of the six displays may be configured to be overlapped with the displays other than the third display. Further, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display without fail, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display.

In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [default display aspect, for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291(a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [a display mode of an advance notice or a pre-reading advance notice, for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 291(e)],
The case where the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is easier to start [The image including the hold icon display area is more default than when the image including the hold icon display area is not changed from the default display mode to the prefetch notice display mode. In the case where the display mode of the pre-reading notice is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice is more likely to be displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in a gold display mode. If it is done, it is easy to display a red hold icon, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. Only the display of the display may be easily started, and the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the display is changed to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the display may be always started, and the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may not start when the display has changed.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in the case other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth mode is not changed from the first mode to the second mode" Is configured so that the display of the second display is more easily started", "in a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode." It is configured such that the display of the second display is easier to start when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when it does not change. It is also possible.

In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [default display aspect, for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291(a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [a display mode of an advance notice or a pre-reading advance notice, for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 291(e)],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It becomes easier to confirm the jackpot symbol in the variable display of the symbols [The image including the hold icon display area is the default than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the prefetch notice display mode. When the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice, the jackpot is more likely to occur. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in a gold display mode, the hold icon The display mode is likely to change, and thus the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display has not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of only the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed, the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode rather than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to the mode, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, the case where the sixth display has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display has not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may be definitely displayed in, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, only when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, and the sixth display is the first aspect. Even in the case other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, "when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth mode is not changed from the first mode to the second mode" Is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display," "in a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display than when it is not changed. It is also possible.

In addition, it is possible to execute “a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)].
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [a state before a specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. Before the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Figure (q) is started, etc.],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, the super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 291(m) to (q). Reach) is being executed], etc.,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than the certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or may be configured not to execute a certain reach effect.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the above states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of the certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before the SP reach is developed in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which the SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

Further, the first state is a state before the SP reach in a certain variation is developed, and further, a certain state before the reach state is established, and the second state is an SP in the certain variation. It may be in a state where the reach is being executed.

That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

Further, “the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, display of timer notice effect shown in FIG. 294(b3) to FIG. 294(b5)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The timer advance notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice display, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

Further, “the certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291(o) to (q) and the like],”
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini game.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, display of button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6)].
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only a fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect without fail, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291(q)],
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect without fail, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Note that the fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be easier to be confirmed and displayed, or more than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the case where the fifth display is a display that appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode There may be

In addition, "the third display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started [in a certain symbol variation display. The in-preparation display started to be displayed is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 291(i) to (j), the in-preparation image RDY. Is displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and the goal is easy to understand, so the period of giving a sense of expectation may be clear.

Here, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol variable display to be started next is started, or The third display started to be displayed in the symbol variable display may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variable display is started. In addition, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display, which is started to be displayed, may not be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variable display is started.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIG. Ninja character NJ4 etc. shown in FIG.
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice, for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 291(h), etc.],
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice,
There is a case where the display of the second display is started after the display of the first display is started. [After the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started, the hold icon is a display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291(f) to (h), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the default after the hold change pre-effect display is performed by the ninja character NJ4. Has changed to a red display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon, or an effect display in the calibration of the character (navi character) that is constantly displayed. ..

In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the hold icon in the default display mode to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

In addition, “the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started” is “the second display after the display of the first display is started”. There may be a case where the display for starting the display of is displayed.” Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. The second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

In addition, "the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be erased before the next symbol variable display is started [display is started in a certain symbol variable display The character relating to the change effect display (hold change change preliminary effect display) of the displayed display mode of the held icon is erased before the next symbol variable display is started, for example, FIGS. 291(f) to (h). ), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be configured to be erased only before the symbol variable display to be started next is started, The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, may be erased other than before the next symbol variable display is started. Further, the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be surely deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation display. In the display, the first display started to be displayed may be configured not to be deleted before the next symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may be performed across the symbol variable display, or may not be performed. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may be performed across the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state), or may not be performed.

In addition, in the area in which the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [in the area in which the in-preparation display is displayed, the notice is executed, for example, in FIG. 297 (a4 ), there is a case where a notice display composed of the characters "intense heat" is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY being prepared is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than a certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where In addition, a certain effect may be necessarily executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is also executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where

In addition, "operation means [buttons and levers, for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6)],
The seventh display is a display urging the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [the display of the image of the button or lever is started after the preparation display is started, For example, as shown in FIGS. 294(b1) to (b6), the decal button image 136aL is the image R under preparation.
The display is started after DY is displayed, etc.],
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated during the display of the image of the button or lever, the notice is given. When the production button 136 is started, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed when the production button 136 is operated while the large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6) is being displayed],
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started [The display during preparation is terminated before the image of the button or lever is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 294(b1) to FIG. 294(b6), the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed before the deca button image 136aL is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may prompt other operations than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may be a message that always prompts the user to operate the operating device, or may not prompt the user to operate the operating device.

Further, the seventh display may be a display which is started only after the third display is started, or is a display which is started even after the third display is started. It may be. Further, the seventh display may be that the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. Good.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is not started. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is being displayed, and a certain effect may be generated when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is not being displayed. It may be started. Also, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and a certain effect may be generated when the operation means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is being displayed. May be started.

In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display starts. It may be one that does. In addition, the third display may be the display that is always finished before the display of the seventh display is started, or when the display is not finished before the display of the seventh display is started. There may be

The seventh display may be a big button image of the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the big button image is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

The seventh display may be a special color button image of the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, in the case where the button image of the normal color is displayed and the case where the button image of the special color is displayed, the case where the special color button image is displayed is easier to confirm the jackpot pattern. Good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means of the images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot pattern is better when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. The confirmation display may be easy.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display [for example, a united animation or the like shown in FIG. 294 (b4) to (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for announcing that the display of the seventh display will be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button advance notice effect is produced by a united animation. ], that is, the display of the big button image 136aL is foretold],
The third display is a display that is terminated during the display of the eighth display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may give a notice only when the display of the seventh display is started, or may give a notice other than that the display of the seventh display is started. May be Further, the eighth display may be a notification that the display of the seventh display is started, or may not notify that the display of the seventh display is started. It may be.

Further, the third display may be finished only while the eighth display is being displayed, or may be finished while the display other than the eighth display is being displayed. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301(a)],
The ninth display is a variable icon display,
The third display may be displayed two times. [Two preparations may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 304(a), two preparations RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. Etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes, and [the display of one of the two preparing displays ends and the other preparing The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 301(g), the preparing image RDY is enlarged and displayed, etc.],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display. [The in-preparation display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the variable icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The displayed in-preparation image RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

Further, only one of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed, or the other display mode may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed. The display modes other than the display modes of No. may be changed. Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is ended, or the display mode of the other of the two may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is ended. The display mode of may not change.

Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may change only after the display of one of the three third displays ends, or even after the display of one of the three third displays ends. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

Note that the ninth display may overlap with the third display whose display mode has changed.

Further, the third display may overlap the display other than the ninth display, or may overlap. The third display and the mini item may not have an overlapping relationship, but the ninth display may have an overlapping relationship.

Further, “change in display mode” includes enlarged display, color change (a red timer becomes a gold timer or a rainbow timer, etc.) and the like. Further, the change of the display mode may be performed even in the state where only the third display is performed.

Further, the display mode may be changed more easily when two or three third displays are displayed simultaneously than when only one is displayed.

Further, the display mode of the third display may be changed more easily when the display mode of the sixth display is changed to a certain display mode.

Further, at least one of the various display changes may not be performed after the countdown of the timer advance notice display as a certain advance notice display is started.

In addition, in the timer notice display as a certain notice display, the timer may be added or the countdown may be temporarily stopped.

In addition, the timer additional display may be performed in the timer advance notice display while the third display is displayed. For example, a small display such as “+20” or “+5” may be overlapped with the third display. It may be displayed or displayed in the vicinity of the third display, and then, when the countdown is started, for example, "60" is displayed, then "85" is displayed, and then the countdown may be started. ..

In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 408 to 485 and described later, the tutorial display is enlarged, and after a certain display displayed on the tutorial display unit in the enlarged mode is displayed, the third display mode is changed. Changes may be made. Further, the display mode of the third display may be changed more easily after the certain display is displayed than when the certain display is not displayed.

In addition, "when the three third displays are displayed, all the displays of the third display are ended in one symbol variable display [When two preparation displays are the same, All are consumed in the symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 301(b) to (k), the two in-preparation images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, all three third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. May terminate the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variable display. In addition, when the third display is displayed twice, all the display of the third display may be ended without fail in one symbol variation display, or when the third display is displayed two The display of all the third displays may not end in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, when three third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may be ended in the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended in one symbol variable display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display [explanatory display, for example, “Panda is master of lord” displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 291(a). The displayed explanation, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanation display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area (may be referred to as “a certain display area”) of the display means when it is displayed. Is displayed in a specific display area. For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), the explanation display is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area. [The in-preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which an explanation display is displayed, for example, FIG. ), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may be displayed in addition to the above. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. May be

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, "the display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to start" means "a character display in preparation [for example, a "preparation" in the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d). Character display, etc.”,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is an eleventh display [ball-out display, for example, ball-out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 322(a1)],
The eleventh display is a display that prompts the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, a character display "Please remove the ball" prompts the player to remove the ball, etc.],
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display [Preparation In a state where both the middle display and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the display-in-progress is overlapped with the ball-out display. For example, as shown in FIG. Are overlapped with the ball error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display urging only to eject the game ball or may be a display urging to do something other than ejecting the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the player to eject the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the player to eject the game ball.

The eleventh display may be a display prompting to eject only the game ball or a display prompting to eject other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed only on the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the eleventh display. It may be configured to be performed. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or when both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in a state other than the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed as.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the third display is configured to be overlapped with the eleventh display. The third display and the eleventh display are both displayed, and the entire third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be.

Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. [In the state where both the mini game and the timer notice and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game and the timer notice overlaps the ball-out display, for example, shown in FIG. 322(b1). The remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display and is displayed. Alternatively, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are being displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed as.

Further, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. It may be configured such that, while both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are being displayed, the entire display of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],"
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "The gaming table is a slot machine [revolving type gaming machine],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Note that the hold icon may be used in a display indicating that the start of a certain effect is held on the slot machine, but this game table can realize this.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [eg, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [preparation display, for example, preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d)],
The third display is a notice display [a mini game or a timer notice, for example, a mini game display shown in FIGS. 291(o) to (p), or FIGS. 293(b3) to (b4). [Timer notice effect, etc.] shown in FIG.
It is configured such that the third display may be started in the first state. [The display of the preparing display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 291(d). , The display of the preparing image RDY is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],
The third display started to be displayed in the first state may be ended in the second state. [The in-preparation display started when the hold icon is displayed is The display ends when the icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to (n), the in-preparation image RDY displayed when the UI unit UI3 is displayed is displayed. , The display has ended in the state where the UI portion UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [Preparation in the state where the hold icon is hidden]. After the display of the display is finished, the mini game or the timer advance notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291(n) to (o), the UI is displayed after the display of the image RDY in preparation. Display of the mini game is started in a state where the section UI3 is hidden, or after the display of the preparing image RDY is finished as shown in FIGS. 293(b1) to (b4). , The timer notice effect is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the relevant notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291(q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294(c4), etc.] [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or when the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 291(o) to FIG. When the display result becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 294 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notification display is completed, the button notification effect by the deca button 136aL is displayed. Etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
After the first state, there may be a case where the second state occurs, and there is a case where there is a case where a state where the hold icon can be displayed is changed to a state where the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. As shown in (m), when transitioning to Swordsman Reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden and transitions from the state in which the hold icon can be displayed to the state in which it is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 before transitioning to Swordsman Reach is displayed, etc.],
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in Swordsman Reach],
The third display may not be displayed before the display of a certain notice display is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

Although there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game table, this game table can realize a game table having a characteristic in the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, so that the user can concentrate on the fluctuation. Sometimes it can be entertained.

Also, according to this gaming machine, it is possible to entertain the beginner with a preparatory display to make it entertaining or not, and for some experienced users, the preparatory display will be displayed. In some cases, it may be easier to understand if it is displayed, and it is possible to clarify the expectations.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be easier to understand which advance notice will be given depending on the timing of ending the display during preparation.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or the display other than the third display may be started in the first state. Further, the third display may be always started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display may be displayed in the first state. However, the display may end in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display started to be displayed in the first state may always end in the second state, and the third display started to be displayed in the first state is In some cases, the display may not end in this state.

In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, there may be a case where only the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of the display other than the certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. There may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state after the completion of.

Further, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state only after the display of the third display is finished in the second state. The display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state other than after the display of the display is finished.

Further, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the states other than the second state.

Further, there may be a case where only a certain effect is started after a certain notice display is displayed, and after a certain notice display, effects other than a certain effect are also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be always started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is not displayed. It may be.

Further, the certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. Further, a certain effect may be a notice that always relates to the symbol change display being executed, or may be a notice that does not relate to the symbol change display being executed.

Further, the second state may be set only after the first state, or the second state may be set even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may be always set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or one of the states in which displays other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

In addition, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed or one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

The third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a display in progress.

Further, the certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

Further, there may be a case where only the third display is not displayed before the display of the certain notice display is started, or before the display of the certain notice display is started, other than the third display. The display may not be displayed in some cases. Further, the third display may not necessarily be displayed before the display of the certain notice display is started, or the third display is displayed before the display of the certain notice display is started. There may be cases.

Further, the third display may not be displayed only before the display of a certain notice display is started, and the third display may be displayed before the display of a certain notice display is started. May not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may be terminated in the first state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end in the third state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

In addition, “the third display started to be displayed in the first state may end in the fourth state,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Further, the first state may be a state including that the symbol variable display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

Further, "a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
May be

Note that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a false notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when the certain notice display is the mini game, the certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

Further, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a mini item display such as a notice item.

Further, "it is configured so that it may be in the second state after the first state" is "may be in the second state following the first state It is also configured to be “.

In addition, after the first state, there may be a case where the state shifts to the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, the third state or the third state) and then the second state is entered. Further, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where the one symbol variable display is performed.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display is faded out.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a hold icon display area, for example, UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(a)],
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least behind the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is being displayed, and the [hold icon can be displayed while an image including the hold icon display area is being displayed, for example, the hold icon is It can be displayed with the UI unit UI3 being displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 291(m), When the UI unit UI3 is hidden, the hold icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side only of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of the display other than the hold icon. The sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back side of the hold icon, or may be a display of at least an image that is not displayed on the back side of the hold icon.

Further, only the hold icon may be configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed, or display other than the hold icon may be configured to be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. May be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be configured to be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. May be.

Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon is not displayed in the state where the sixth display is not displayed, or the display other than the hold icon is not displayed in the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed without the sixth display being displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed without the sixth display being displayed. May be configured.

Further, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

Note that the sixth display may be a display that does not overlap the changing decorative pattern.

Further, in the configuration in which a part of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the third display is overlapped with the decorative pattern. May be.

Further, the sixth display may include a display of the base of the hold icon.

Further, the sixth display may include a display of the base of the variable icon.

Further, the sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

In addition, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed [in the state where the hold icon is displayed, A part of the image including the icon display area is displayed so as to overlap the display during preparation. For example, as shown in FIG. 291(d), the image during preparation RDY is superimposed on the tutorial display portion TT1 in the UI portion UI3. Displayed, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position. [Display of the display during preparation in the state where the hold icon is displayed] The position and the display position of the in-preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the in-preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d) and the in-preparation image shown in FIG. 291(m). The display positions of RDY are the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent the user from overlooking by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being given.

Here, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display only, or in the first state, The display of at least a part of the six displays may be configured to be overlapped with the displays other than the third display. Further, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display without fail, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display may be overlapped with the third display and not displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display, and in the first state, the sixth display may be displayed. The display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display.

In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [default display aspect, for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291(a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [a display mode of an advance notice or a pre-reading advance notice, for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 291(e)],
The case where the sixth indication is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is easier to start [The image including the hold icon display area is more default than when the image including the hold icon display area is not changed from the default display mode to the prefetch notice display mode. In the case where the display mode of the pre-reading notice is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice is more likely to be displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in a gold display mode. If it is done, it is easy to display a red hold icon, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. Only the display of the display may be easily started, and the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the display is changed to, the display other than the second display may be more easily started. Further, the case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is more than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the display may be always started, and the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may not start when the display has changed.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in the case other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth mode is not changed from the first mode to the second mode" Is configured so that the display of the second display is more easily started", "in a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode." It is configured such that the display of the second display is easier to start when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when it does not change. It is also possible.

In addition, "the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect [default display aspect, for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 291(a), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of modes is a second mode [a display mode of an advance notice or a pre-reading advance notice, for example, a gold display mode shown in FIG. 291(e)],
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It becomes easier to confirm the jackpot symbol in the variable display of the symbols [The image including the hold icon display area is the default than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the prefetch notice display mode. When the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice, the jackpot is more likely to occur. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in a gold display mode, the hold icon The display mode is likely to change, and thus the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be displayed in the first aspect and the second aspect. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display has not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of only the jackpot symbol may be easily confirmed and displayed, the sixth display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode rather than the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to the mode, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, the case where the sixth display has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect is more variable display than the case where the sixth display has not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may be definitely displayed in, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.

Further, only when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display, and the sixth display is the first aspect. Even in the case other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display.

In addition, "when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, as compared with the case where the sixth mode is not changed from the first mode to the second mode" Is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display," "in a certain state, the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. When the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display than when it is not changed. It is also possible.

In addition, it is possible to execute “a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 291 (m) to (q)].
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [a state before a specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. Before the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Figure (q) is started, etc.],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, the super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 291(m) to (q). Reach) is being executed], etc.,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than the certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a certain reach effect, or may be configured not to execute a certain reach effect.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the above states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is necessarily started, or one of the states in which the execution of the certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is being executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before the SP reach is developed in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which the SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

Further, the first state is a state before the SP reach in a certain variation is developed, and further, a certain state before the reach state is established, and the second state is an SP in the certain variation. It may be in a state where the reach is being executed.

That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

Further, “the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, display of timer notice effect shown in FIG. 294(b3) to FIG. 294(b5)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The timer advance notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice display, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

Further, “the certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 291(o) to (q) and the like],”
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini game.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, display of button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6)].
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only a fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect without fail, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 291(q)],
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured such that only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect without fail, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

Note that the fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be easier to be confirmed and displayed, or more than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, in the case where the fifth display is a display that appears only under special conditions, the case where at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode There may be

In addition, "the third display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started [in a certain symbol variation display. The in-preparation display started to be displayed is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 291(i) to (j), the in-preparation image RDY. Is displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of expectation over a plurality of fluctuations by the third display, and the goal is easy to understand, so the period of giving a sense of expectation may be clear.

Here, the third display started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be continuously displayed only after the symbol variable display to be started next is started, or The third display started to be displayed in the symbol variable display may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variable display is started. In addition, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display, which is started to be displayed, may not be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variable display is started.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIG. Ninja character NJ4 etc. shown in FIG.
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice, for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 291(h), etc.],
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice,
There is a case where the display of the second display is started after the display of the first display is started. [After the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started, the hold icon is a display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, as shown in FIGS. 291(f) to (h), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the default after the hold change pre-effect display is performed by the ninja character NJ4. Has changed to a red display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to the effect of changing the display form of the hold icon, or an effect display in the calibration of the character (navi character) that is constantly displayed. ..

In addition, the second display may be a display that changes from the hold icon in the default display mode to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

In addition, “the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started” is “the second display after the display of the first display is started. There may be a case where the display of the display of is started. Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. The second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

In addition, "the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be erased before the next symbol variable display is started [display is started in a certain symbol variable display The character relating to the change effect display (hold change change preliminary effect display) of the displayed display mode of the held icon is erased before the next symbol variable display is started, for example, FIGS. 291(f) to (h). ), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display may be configured to be erased only before the symbol variable display to be started next is started, The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, may be erased other than before the next symbol variable display is started. Further, the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be surely deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation display. In the display, the first display started to be displayed may be configured not to be deleted before the next symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may be performed across the symbol variable display, or may not be performed. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may be performed across the first state to the second state (the second state to the first state), or may not be performed.

In addition, in the area in which the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [in the area in which the in-preparation display is displayed, the notice is executed, for example, in FIG. 297 (a4 ), there is a case where a notice display composed of the characters "intense heat" is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY being prepared is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than a certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where In addition, a certain effect may be necessarily executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, there may be a case where a certain effect is executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, and a certain effect is also executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases where

In addition, "operation means [buttons and levers, for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided,
One of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6)],
The seventh display is a display urging the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is displayed after the third display is started [the display of the image of the button or lever is started after the preparation display is started, For example, as shown in FIGS. 294(b1) to (b6), the deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed.],
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated during the display of the image of the button or lever, the notice is given. When the production button 136 is started, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed when the production button 136 is operated while the large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 294(b6) is being displayed],
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started [The display during preparation is terminated before the image of the button or lever is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 294(b1) to FIG. 294(b6), the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed before the deca button image 136aL is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that is not operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may prompt other operations than the operation of the operating means. Further, the seventh display may be a message that always prompts the user to operate the operating device, or may not prompt the user to operate the operating device.

Further, the seventh display may be a display which is started only after the third display is started, or is a display which is started even after the third display is started. It may be. Further, the seventh display may be that the display is always started after the third display is started, or the display is not started after the third display is started. Good.

Further, when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started without fail, and when the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is not started. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is being displayed, and a certain effect may be generated when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is not being displayed. It may be started. Also, a certain effect may be started when the operation means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and a certain effect may be generated when the operation means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is being displayed. May be started.

In addition, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display starts, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display starts. It may be one that does. In addition, the third display may be the display that is always finished before the display of the seventh display is started, or when the display is not finished before the display of the seventh display is started. There may be

The seventh display may be a big button image of the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the big button image is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

Further, the seventh display may be a special color button image of the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the button image of the normal color is displayed and when the button image of the special color is displayed, when the button image of the special color is displayed, the jackpot pattern is more likely to be confirmed and displayed. Good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means of the images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot pattern is better when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. The confirmation display may be easy.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display [for example, a united animation or the like shown in FIG. 294 (b4) to (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for announcing that the display of the seventh display will be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b4) to (b6), a button advance notice effect is produced by a united animation. ], that is, the display of the big button image 136aL is foretold],
The third display is a display that is terminated during the display of the eighth display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may give a notice only when the display of the seventh display is started, or may give a notice other than that the display of the seventh display is started. May be Further, the eighth display may be a notification that the display of the seventh display is started, or may not notify that the display of the seventh display is started. It may be.

Further, the third display may be finished only while the eighth display is being displayed, or may be finished while the display other than the eighth display is being displayed. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 301(a)],
The ninth display is a variable icon display,
The third display may be displayed two times. [Two preparations may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 304(a), two preparations RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. Etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays ends, the display mode of the other changes, and [the display of one of the two preparing displays ends and the other preparing The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 301(g), the preparing image RDY is enlarged and displayed, etc.],
The third display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display. [The in-preparation display in which the display mode has changed overlaps with the variable icon, for example, as shown in FIG. The displayed in-preparation image RDY overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be easy to notice that the two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

Further, only one of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed, or the other display mode may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is completed. The display modes other than the display modes of No. may be changed. Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is ended, or the display mode of the other of the two may be changed after the display of one of the three third displays is ended. The display mode of may not change.

Further, the display mode of the other of the two third displays may change only after the display of one of the three third displays ends, or even after the display of one of the three third displays ends. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with displays other than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. ..

Note that the ninth display may overlap the third display whose display mode has changed.

Further, the third display may overlap the display other than the ninth display, or may overlap. Further, the third display and the mini item may not have an overlapping relationship, but the ninth display may have an overlapping relationship.

Further, “change in display mode” includes enlarged display, color change (a red timer becomes a gold timer or a rainbow timer, etc.) and the like. Further, the change of the display mode may be performed even in the state where only the third display 1 is performed.

Further, the display mode may be changed more easily when two or three third displays are displayed at the same time than when only one is displayed.

Further, the display mode of the third display may be changed more easily when the display mode of the sixth display is changed to a certain display mode.

Further, at least one of the various display changes may not be performed after the countdown in the timer advance notice display as a certain advance notice display is started.

In addition, in the timer notice display as a certain notice display, the timer may be added or the countdown may be temporarily stopped.

Further, the timer additional display may be performed in the timer advance notice display while the third display is displayed. For example, a small display such as “+20” or “+5” may be overlapped with the third display. It may be displayed or displayed in the vicinity of the third display, and then, when the countdown is started, for example, "60" is displayed, then "85" is displayed, and then the countdown may be started. ..

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 408 to 485 and described later, the tutorial display is enlarged, and after a certain display displayed on the tutorial display unit in the enlarged mode is displayed, the display mode of the third display is changed. Changes may be made. Further, the display mode of the third display may be changed more easily after the certain display is displayed than when the certain display is not displayed.

In addition, "when the three third displays are displayed, all the displays of the third display are ended in one symbol variable display [When two preparation displays are the same, All are consumed in the symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 301(b) to (k), the two in-preparation images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, all three third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. May terminate the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variable display. In addition, when the third display is displayed twice, all the display of the third display may be ended without fail in one symbol variation display, or when the third display is displayed two The display of all the third displays may not end in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, when three third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended only in one symbol variation display, or when three third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may be ended in the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, all third displays may be ended in one symbol variable display, except when two third displays are displayed. In the case of, the display of all the third displays may be ended in the one symbol variable display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a tenth display [explanatory display, for example, “Panda is master of lord” displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 291(a). The displayed explanation, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanation display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area (may be referred to as “a certain display area”) of the display means when displayed [the explanation display is displayed. In this case, it is displayed in a specific display area. For example, as shown in FIG. 291(a), the explanation display is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area. [The in-preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which an explanation display is displayed, for example, FIG. ), the in-preparation image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 where the explanation display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may be displayed in addition to the above. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. May be

The third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, "the display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to start" means "a character display in preparation [for example, a "preparation" in the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 291(d). Character display, etc.”,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is an eleventh display [ball-out display, for example, ball-out error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 322(a1)],
The eleventh display is a display that prompts the player to eject the game ball [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, a character display "Please remove the ball" prompts the player to remove the ball, etc.],
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display [Preparation In a state where both the middle display and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the display-in-progress is overlapped with the ball-out display. For example, as shown in FIG. Are overlapped with the ball error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display urging only to eject the game ball or may be a display urging to do something other than ejecting the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the player to eject the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the player to eject the game ball.

The eleventh display may be a display prompting to eject only the game ball or a display prompting to eject other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed only on the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the eleventh display. It may be configured to be performed. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or when both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in a state other than the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least part of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed as.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the third display is configured to be overlapped with the eleventh display. The display of the third display may be overlapped with the display of the eleventh display when both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed. May be.

Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. [In the state where both the mini game and the timer notice and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game and the timer notice overlaps the ball-out display, for example, shown in FIG. 322(b1). The remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. May be displayed, or in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured in some cases.

Further, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display and is displayed. Alternatively, in a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are being displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display overlaps the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed as.

Further, in a state in which both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. It may be configured such that, while both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are being displayed, the entire display of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],"
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "The gaming table is a slot machine [revolving type gaming machine],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Note that the hold icon may be used in a display indicating that the start of a certain effect is held on the slot machine, but this game table can realize this.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 408 to 455. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiment described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far. That is, each of the effects shown in FIGS. 408 to 455 may be performed in combination with any of the effects described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 407. In other words, in the present embodiment, effects by mini-items (which may also be referred to as advance notice icons or advance notice items), effects by timer advance notice, effects by mini-games, and effects by chance-up timing meter are appropriately selected according to the progress of the game. It may be executed in combination. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 408 to 455 are basically used only for the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 408 to 455, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, Priority is given to the reference numerals 408 to 455. Further, in FIGS. 408 to 455, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is provided. May be Further, the transparent light guide plate IL or the POV display described above may be arranged on the front surface side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 408 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 408, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a universal symbol. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 408(a), the combination of decorative patterns "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for informing whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is being stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the general figure, the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1 , It becomes the notification area during symbol change of special figure 2. While the design of the universal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit up and displayed, but during the change of the design of the universal figure, the quadrangle figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 1, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), and the player can discriminate it at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 408 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric power support state.

The hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1, and the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2. .. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lighting of special figure 1 holding lamps 218. The number of holdings of special figure 2 is the number of lighting of special figure 2 holding lamps 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of holding icons in special figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon,.... In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icons on the right side become hold icons with older winnings. In the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon.

In FIG. 408(a), two holding icons h11 and h12 of the special drawing 1 are displayed in the holding icon display area 281 of the special drawing 1, and both of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the two special drawing 1 are displayed. , Is displayed in a default display mode (a circular unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in Tokushu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that, in FIG. 408(a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. This is, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 408 is a non-electric power support state (non-time saving state), so it is difficult to open the electric Chu and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. It should be noted that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative pattern display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for clarity. A line that defines the area may be provided, or a line that defines the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the pending icon display area of the special map that is more likely to win the prize in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric power support state, as shown in FIG. 408(a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 is a rectangular unpatterned and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from the hold icon of special figure 1 but also the display mode ( The shapes are also different here, so that the player can tell the difference by just seeing it. The default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of special figure 2 may be the same.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variable display of the special symbols is changed in the special symbol display device→starting or extinguishing the fourth symbol blinking→starting or erasing the moving animation of the hold icon→starting the variation of the decorative symbols. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 408(b), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is extinguished, but the hold icon and the decoration are displayed. The pattern has not changed yet.

In FIG. 408(c), the moving animation of the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 (the hold icon that is the subject of this pattern change) starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon located at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started.

In FIG. 408(d), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 40(e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of variation, reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but at this stage, still, The variable display of decorative patterns has not started. In addition, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 until then may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 408(f).

On the decorative pattern display device 208 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 408(g), an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the production button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative pattern may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative pattern is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 408(h), the valid period has decreased, and in FIG. 40(i), the player has pressed the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 408(j), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the character display "Chance" is displayed on the right side of the character image of the hero.

In FIG. 408(k), the reach state advance notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered in some cases, but it is also possible to always enter.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

In FIG. 408(m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced, and in FIG. 408(n). , Has been developed into super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 408(n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 408(o), the main character and the enemy swordsman duel. An animation of the scene is displayed.

The reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to a notice of entering the reach state, and may be a notice of development of super reach.

FIG. 409 is a diagram showing a sequel to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 408.

In FIG. 409(p) continuing from FIG. 408(o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 409(s). In FIG. 409(s), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 409(t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of non-display, a background image different from the conventional one may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in (u) of the figure, the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be a non-displayed background image or a background image different from the past. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 409(v), the combination of decorative patterns of 15R probability variation big hit confirmation of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 409(v) is lit. In FIG. 409(v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 409(w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “probable variation big hit” is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

On the other hand, in the case where the reach state is reached with a different decorative design (substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 408(l), a case of another case continuing from FIG. 409(t) In 409(u′), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” is displayed, and in FIG. 409(v′) following FIG. 409(u′), “decoration 6-decoration The combination of the jackpot decorative patterns of "6-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 409 (w′) that follows FIG. 409 (v′), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of “big hit” is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

FIG. 410 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect in another case following that of FIG. 409(q).

In FIG. 410(a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 408(o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 410(b). In FIG. 410(b), the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 410(c), like the FIG. 409(t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 410(d), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 410(e), the fourth symbol (circular figure) of Toku-zu 1 is turned on, and the combination of the missing decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period of the special figure 1, in the variable icon display area 280, an erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In (f) of the figure, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, and the erasing animation continues in (g) of the figure, and the varying icon h0 completely disappears in the (h) of FIG. It should be noted that the changing icon h0 may be erased before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

Next, the notice icon displayed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 and 412. Here, FIG. 411(a) is a diagram for explaining a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 411(b) is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display region information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of the notice icon being consumed, and FIG. 7D is a diagram illustrating an example of the timing of increasing the notice icon. Also, FIG. 412(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the pre-change notice icon, and FIG. 412(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the post-change notice icon.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 411(a), a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is further displayed). Is 8 in total), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the number of noticeable icons and the number of hold icons that can be displayed may be the same. Further, the number of areas forming the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to any number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 411(a), a notice icon I6 of a hat having a hat design is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a notice box second display area YA2 shows a thousand box. The notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes made up of a design is displayed, the notice icon I10 of a fan made up of a design of a fan is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is shown. A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is indicated. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 411(b). It is determined. In this embodiment, one advance notice icon is displayed for each area, but two or more advance notice icons may be displayed for each area.

As shown in FIG. 411(a), the respective notice icons displayed in the respective areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208 are consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 411(c), for example. Controlled to be done. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is appropriately read and executed. That is, 8 seconds after the variation display (variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 411(a) is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. A corresponding effect may be executed. After that, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and when the variable display of the decorative symbol (the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 is consumed, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (in FIG. 411(a), the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11) is moved toward the change icon display area 280. Along with the start of, the variation display of the decorative symbol (the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2) is started, and 4 seconds after the symbol variation is started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, and thereafter, The effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed after the SP reach was started, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes may be consumed, and thereafter, the effect corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box may be executed. After that, when 2 seconds have elapsed after all the decorative patterns are in the temporarily stopped state, the fan advance notice icon I10 is consumed, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the exhausted fan advance notice icon I10 may be executed. .. Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon notifies the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 411(a), each of the notice icons displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208 has, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 411(d). It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is appropriately read and executed. That is, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 411(a) was started, the lord appearance appears on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the hall effect that increases the notice icon is executed. To be done. In this lord's presentation, the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is started, the DJ effect that the DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 to increase the notice icon is executed. In this DJ effect, an effect is displayed in which the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, and 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the second pseudo continuous production, the hall production is executed and the fan The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo continuous effect is a variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol are executed plural times in the variable display of one special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be greater than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a jackpot. For example, the maximum number of notice icons that increase in the deviating symbol variation display may be one, and the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

Next, the contents of the effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 412. As the notice icons, there are those in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear as shown in FIG. 412(a) and those in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear as shown in FIG. 412(b).

For example, as shown in FIG. 412(a), the notice icon for which the content of the corresponding presentation is not clear (the notice icon before the change) includes the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord. There is a third lord's notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The first notice icon I1 of the lord is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in white, and the reliability of the big hit is weak. Further, the second lord's notice icon I2 is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is shown in green, and the reliability of the big hit is medium. Further, the third lord's notice icon I3 is a notice icon in which the lord's face silhouette is represented in red, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is either weak to strong. When the first notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2, and the third notice icon I3 arrive at a predetermined change display timing (for example, the increase display timing of the notice icon), 412(b) changes to any of the changed notice icons. Further, the first button notice icon I4 changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 412(b) at the timing when the player operates the effect button 136. The first button notice icon I4 may be changed to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the player operates the effect button 136.

In this way, in the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4, the symbol variation, which is the target of prefetching, is started. It may be displayed before the warning and may function as a prefetch notice. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed accompanying the notice icon. When the second palace's notice icon I2 and the third lord's notice icon I3 are displayed, a “question mark” may be additionally displayed.

On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 412(b), the notice icon (the notice icon after change) whose content of the corresponding effect is clear is, for example, a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I7 for a shuriken, and a ribbon notice icon. There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by a bancho character, and the reliability of the big hit is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 for one hat is consumed, the pseudo-relational effect may be performed only once. Here, the pseudo continuous production includes a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gasse pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo continuous production, for example, as described later, a character of a length appears when the pseudo continuous production starts. The display state is wrapped) to notify that the reliability is strong. Note that, for example, in spite of the second pseudo-reproduction, the third-time pseudo-reproduction may be informed to indicate that the reliability is strong. In addition, in the pseudo continuous production of the weak pattern, the appearing length character is displayed in a normal display mode to notify that the reliability is weak. Also, the pseudo continuous effect of the gasse pattern is an effect of performing a false display while pretending that the pseudo continuous effect is performed, as described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is high, the pattern A is displayed as “continuation” in red or black. There are cases where Alternatively, a "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continuation” in black letters with “question” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the pseudo-relational production may be performed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon that imitates a shuriken thrown by the Oniwaban (ninja) character, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, there may be a case where the notice effect being executed is changed to the strong notice effect with high reliability through the freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be given to notify a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed along with the shuriken notice icon I7, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern if the reliability is high. Alternatively, a "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed as “Cham”. Alternatively, a "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon imitating a ribbon worn by Princess Chibi, and the jackpot reliability is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is high, the background may shift to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, an effect may be executed in which the displayed background is changed from one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in a normal gaming state (stage change weak). Production). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the text notation is displayed in association with the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, if the reliability is high, the pattern A is displayed in red or black as “STETCHEN”. There are cases where Alternatively, a "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is low, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “STETCHEN”. Alternatively, a "question mark" may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, either one of the strong stage change effect and the weak stage change effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The 1,000-box warning icon I9 is a warning icon that imitates a thousand boxes thrown by a lord's character toward a farmer, and the reliability of the big hit is determined to be big, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is strong, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is consumed during execution of the weak reach production with low reliability, and the reach transition production is performed. After that, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach transfer effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the low-reliability weak cut-in notification is executed, and then the high-reliability strong cut-in notification is executed (advance notification promotion). Production). If the jackpot is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in association with the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, if the big hit is confirmed, the pattern A may be displayed as “large board behavior”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the degree of reliability is strong, the pattern A may be displayed as “promotion” in red or black. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed in black characters as “promotion”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. It should be noted that when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is exhausted, any one of the fixed effect, the reach transition effect, and the notice promotion effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon that imitates a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the big hit is confirmed as the big hit. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is exhausted, a premiere notice for notifying in advance that the big hit is finalized or a premier reach in which the big hit is fixed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested after the out-of-reach is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed in association with the fan advance notice icon I10, “Blessing” may be displayed. It should be noted that when the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, one of the premiere effect and the revival effect may be executed without fail. Further, in the present embodiment, the content to be produced differs depending on the timing at which the fan advance notice icon I10 is consumed, but the digestion timing may be the same.

The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one of the second button notice icons I11 is consumed, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, when the operation acceptance period is started and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as a cap notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, and a ribbon. There is a case where any one of the notice icon I8, the notice icon I8 of a thousand boxes and the notice icon I10 of a fan is changed to a digested display, and a corresponding effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing any of the notice icons.

In the present embodiment, the change notice of the notice icon is performed when the notice icon before the change is changed to the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon before the change is changed to the notice icon via the change display of the notice icon. It is also possible to perform a display for erasing the notice icon (“No” notice icon shown in item 5 of FIG. 412 (b): elimination effect). In this presentation, it is notified that the variation is out of alignment. That is, it is a preliminary announcement indicating that the pattern is a loss confirmation pattern. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erase effect is executed, a big hit may occur.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 413 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 413, a decorative pattern display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a general figure display device 210, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a general figure. The figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 408, and, for example, displays the display result of the fourth symbol by the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is, for example, the game board 20.
It is provided at a predetermined position of 0 and is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a symbol variation notification region of a normal figure, a symbol variation notification region of Toku-zu 1, and a symbol variation notification region of Toku-zu 2. The LED in the area in which the quadrangle figure is displayed is lit up while the symbol of the universal figure is stopped, but is blinked or extinguished during the variation of the symbol of the universal figure. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 1, it is displayed in blinking or turned off. While the symbol of special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but during the change of symbol of special figure 2, it is blinked or turned off. In this way, the fourth symbol is different not only in the display position but also in the display mode (here, the shape), and the player can make a distinction at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, and the flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed in a lighted state while the symbol is stopped.

Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 413(1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part. Note that in FIG. 413(1), no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display regions 285. In addition, as shown in FIG. 413(1), the first special map display device 212 is performing variable display of symbols, and accordingly, the decorative pattern display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is performed. The advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as needed.

Further, in FIG. 413(1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, all of the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode (round unpatterned and white display mode). In addition, in this effect example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 413(2), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lights in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by 1 to 3 It is shown that the number has become three. In addition, the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display the notice icon, as described later. For convenience of explanation, the third preserving icon h13 of the special figure 1 that is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching, but in reality, it is the same as the other preserving icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1. The display mode is a circular non-patterned and white display mode. The same applies to the following description.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 413(3), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 413(4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 413(5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. Change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the 1st second hold icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 413(6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the result of the prefetch. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 413(7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed at the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 413(8). An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 413(9), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 413(10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. As a result, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to give a notice that the pseudo-relationship will be executed in the future.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 413(11) to 413(12), a display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 413 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 414 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 413 in stages.

In FIG. 414 (14) continuing from FIG. 413 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol are not changed. It has not yet occurred.

In FIG. 414(15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of Toku-zu 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. It becomes the icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 414 (16), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 414(17), at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display in which the icon I9 and the fan advance notice icon I10 are thrown toward the advance notice icon display area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 414 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is shown in the notice icon third display area. The fan advance notice icon I10 is displayed in YA3, and is displayed in the advance notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as in FIGS. 413(10) to (12) is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 414 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 414(21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is further performed, but no change has occurred in the hold icon and the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 414(22), the hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1 is moved and displayed by a moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, as shown in FIG. 414 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is started. That is, a display is made in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the notice icon digesting effect of digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. As shown in FIG. 414(23), when the same notice icon is displayed more than once in the notice icon display area 285, for example, two notice icons I6 of a hat are displayed, for example, on the left side. Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the displayed notice icon, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. In addition, which of the notice icons to use may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are consumed is limited to the above-described order and can be set as appropriate.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 414(24), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 414(25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is performed is additionally displayed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Good. Further, when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display state of the variable icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat disappears along with the character display of "Continue" at the timing of FIG. 414(26), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 414(27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.

FIG. 415 is a diagram showing, in stages, the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 414.

In FIG. 415 (28) continued from FIG. 414 (27), the bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the end of the hat notice icon I6, and is displayed in a stopped state. The effect display that pushes up the design is performed, and the player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, " The decoration 1”) may be formed to form the reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 415 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a pseudo continuous symbol representing the lord's character is displayed. It is displayed that the vehicle moves slowly from the upper side to the lower side.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 415 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed. In this embodiment, in this manner, the pseudo-relational symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby informing that the pseudo-relational is being executed. In addition, if the pseudo-relational pattern is not stopped and displayed, and the frame is framed out downward, the pseudo-relation is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 415 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo×2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous production is started is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 415 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. .. At this time, the reach effect has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 415 (34). That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 415 (35), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 415 (36). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is performed is additionally displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat disappears at the timing of FIG. 415 (37) together with the character display of "Continue", and thereafter, in FIG. 415 (38), the hat appears. In response to the end of the notice icon I6 of No. 6, the bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right display that is stopped and displayed is pushed up, and the second pseudo-continuous production is performed. The player is informed that there is a possibility that the game will be started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 415 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c changes from "decoration 1" to "decoration 1". The decoration is changed to "2", a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is displayed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo×2” is erased while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed, the character information of “pseudo×2” may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the “pseudo×2” character information may be changed while the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed. In this effect example, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again to maintain the reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 415(40), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display and is displayed to inform that the pseudo-link will be executed. In the present embodiment, as the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted in one pattern variation display, the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit. That is, in the case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed and the pseudo-representation is performed only once, and when the two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo-representation is performed twice, the hat is generated. It is easier for you to hit the two notice icons I6 of “6”, which is a big hit. When only two notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed and the pseudo continuous production is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are consumed. It can be said that when the pseudo continuous production is performed three times, it is more likely to be a big hit if the three hat notice icons I6 are consumed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 415 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo×3” indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous production is started is displayed.

FIG. 416 is a diagram showing, in stages, the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 415.

In FIG. 416 (43) continuing from FIG. 415 (42), the decorative pattern of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. Here, the reach effect is to be started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 416 (44), the super reach (swordsman reach) described above develops. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and reduced. Is displayed. A large image of the enemy swordsman is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 416(44), and in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 416(45), a duel between the main character and the enemy swordsman. The animation display of the scene starts.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 416 (46), the display that the 1,000-box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed is started. That is, a display is made in which the 1,000-box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand box is moved to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 416 (47), and above the notice icon I9 of the thousand box which is enlarged and displayed. The character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to notify that the production is to have a higher reliability. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is erased together with the display of "promotion" at the timing of FIG. The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 416 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 416 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed is slightly darkened, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display. A display for cutting off the reach effect display being executed is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 416 (50 ), the background turns dark.

Then, as shown in FIG. 416 (51), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a highly reliable strong reach effect (button reach effect) is started. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 416 (51 ), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character “Is it too hot?” on the dark background, and then FIG. 416 (52 ). At the timing shown in, the character display of "No" is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 416 (53), the character display of “one shot” is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 416 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button image 136a together with a button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 416 (55), as shown in FIG. 416 (56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative pattern display device 208, It shows that the button reach production has failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 416 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

FIG. 417 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 416 step by step.

In FIG. 417 (58) subsequent to FIG. 416 (57), all are temporarily hidden, including the notice icon display area 285. Eventually, in FIG. 417 (59 ), the swing fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

After that, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started at the timing shown in FIG. 417 (60). .. That is, a display is made in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the fan advance notice icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 417 (61). At this time, for example, below the enlarged fan notification icon I10, a character display of "blessing" for notifying that the big hit is set may be added. In addition, when the character display is additionally displayed, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after the enlarged display.

After that, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased and the notice icon display area 285 is framed out upward at the timing of FIG. 417 (62). Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 417 (63), the variable display of the decorative symbols, which had been fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is restarted and re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

In the re-changing effect, as shown in FIG. 417 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. It

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 417 (65), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 417 (66), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is confirmed as a big hit is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the 1st special figure display device 212, "special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and in the 4th symbol display device 284a, the 4th symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the big hit game start effect described above is executed.

In the present embodiment, the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon display region 285 is exhausted, so that the re-variation effect is executed and a big hit occurs. If it is not displayed in 285, the re-display effect may not be performed and the display result of the outlier may be derived. That is, when the reach transition effect executed by digesting the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is not performed, this reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, when a reach transition effect as a false notice of a type corresponding to the notice icon I9 of a consumed box is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols is displayed. It can be said that is out of range. This also applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, it is explained that the notice icon is consumed only during the execution of the pattern variation display which is the subject of the notice ahead of time, and the effect corresponding to the noticed icon after the notice is executed is executed. Even in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be consumed and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons exhausted in the pattern variation display subject to the prefetching notice and the number of notice icons consumed in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display subject to the readahead notice are made different. Or they may be the same.

Next, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 418 to 420. Here, FIGS. 418 to 420 are diagrams showing, in stages, other effect examples of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 418 to 420, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

FIGS. 418(8a) to (10a) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413(8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 418(8a), not the notice icon I6 of the hat, but the notice icon I1 of the first lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (9a-1), the thrown first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 418(9a-2), after the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 explodes, the timing shown in FIG. 418(10a). Then, the exploding first lord's notice icon I1 changes to the hat's notice icon I6, and an effect display is displayed in which the lord's character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icons and makes a happy expression. Even with this example of effect, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

FIGS. 418(8b) to (9b) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413(8) to 413(8). That is, in FIG. 418(8b), the effect display in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed.

Then, the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 418(9b). When the effect button 136 is operated during the period from the display of the first button notice icon I4 in the notice icon display area 285 to the disappearance of the first button notice icon I4, the first button notice icon The notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2 of the second person, and the third notice icon I3 of the second person change. As described above, in this example of performance, it is difficult to recognize the reliability of the big hit indicated by the notice icon until the effect button 136 is operated. Therefore, an incentive to operate the effect button 136 in order to know the reliability of the big hit May work, and the staging effect may be enhanced. The period from the time the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until the time it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be invalidated. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid during the stop display period. If the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the notice effect of the notice icon was displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or when the button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated, the notice that was scheduled to be displayed. The effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. In addition, after the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the button effect is started, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 was operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon.

FIGS. 418(8c) to (9c) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413(8) to 413(8). That is, in FIG. 418(8c), the effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed as in FIG. 413(8).

However, in the case of FIG. 418(9c), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute an increase effect that fails to increase the number of notice icons. It should be noted that a gasse increase effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, a notice icon having a higher jackpot reliability may be configured to be less likely to be executed.

FIGS. 418(7d) to (9d) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413(7) to 413(9). That is, in FIG. 418(7d), similar to FIG. 413(7), a state in which the lord's character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved to a predetermined throwing position is displayed. After that, in FIG. 418 (8d), not only one notice icon I6 of the hat but also three notice icons I6 of the hat are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. The effect display may be thrown one by one, not simultaneously.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three thrown caps are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, the increase in the number of notice icons at one time improves the expectation for the increase in the number of notice executions, and may enhance the effect. Note that, for example, as shown in FIG. 418 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, so that the pseudo link is performed. It may be possible to give a notice that the big hit is settled because the effect is guaranteed to be executed three times. The notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and the notice icon with low reliability is easy to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). Or vice versa.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 418 (9 d ′), some or all of the three trailing notice icons I 6 of the hats have not reached the notice icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area. It is also possible to execute a partly uncontrolled increase effect or an entirely uncontrolled increase effect.

FIGS. 418(7e) to (9e) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413(7) to (13). That is, in FIG. 418(7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 413(7), the lord's character YM having the notice icon I6 for one hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 for a fan in addition to the notice icon I6 for one hat. Is displayed to be moved to a predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected. You may make it display only. After that, in FIG. 418 (8e), an effect display is displayed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. The effect display may be thrown one by one, not simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other, and for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 418(9e), the three notice icons thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285. Displayed respectively. As described above, also in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of types of notice icons with one increase effect. Therefore, since the number of notice icons increases at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notices executed can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of notices can be increased, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. There are cases.

Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 418 (9 e ′), some or all of the thrown three notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It is also possible to execute a partial gall increase effect or an all gase increase effect that causes a frame out from the left side of the area.

FIG. 418 (12f-1) to FIG. 418 (12f-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 413 (12). That is, in FIG. 418 (12f-1), similarly to FIG. 413 (12), the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed with the notice icon I6 of the hat being displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is being done. Then, as shown in FIG. 418 (12f-2), the decorative pattern of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. It As described above, in this embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot is over.

FIG. 419(8g) shows another effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 413(8). That is, in FIG. 419 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (display mode by the character of Sabohani), the lord's character YM displays the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285. A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-read notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

419(8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 413(8). That is, in FIG. 419 (8h), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect hold lamp 286 is set at a predetermined position on the game board 200 (for example, It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208), so that the number of holdings is displayed. The effect holding lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED and is drive-controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default light emitting mode (for example, lighting in white), pre-reading notice light emission is performed. Drive control can be performed according to the mode (for example, lighting while switching between 7 colors). Note that, in FIG. 419 (8h), for convenience of description, the holding lamp of the second special diagram 1 which is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching, but actually, the first special diagram 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 2, the second hold lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emission mode.

FIGS. 419(8i) to (9i-2) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413(8) to 413(8). That is, in FIG. 419(8i), as in the case of FIG. 413(8), the effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

However, in the case of FIG. 419 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 419 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the look-ahead notice. The effect display that changes to (holding change effect) is being performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hat notice icon I6 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285 and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice by the hold icon. The hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the big hit may be less likely to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 420 (9i-2′), the variable symbol display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and are held using the effect holding lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, after the notice icon I6 of the hat drops below the display area, the light emitting mode of the first holding lamp of the special figure 1 may be changed to the light emitting mode of the pre-reading notice.

FIGS. 419(8j) to (9j) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413(8) to 413(8). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 413(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 419(8j), it differs from FIG. 413(8). It is shown that, instead of the lord's character YM, the DJ character BY having the notice icon appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area (DJ effect). In the example illustrated in FIG. 419(8j), the DJ character appears with the hat notice icon I6. Then, as shown in FIG. 419(9j), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner, and changes the hat's notice icon I6 to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The effect display that is left on is displayed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the effect of increasing the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY once. As described above, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). Depending on the configuration, the production may be diversified and the production effect can be enhanced.

FIGS. 419(8k) to (9k) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 413(8) to 413(8). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 413(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285. However, in FIG. 419(8k), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 419(8k),
The DJ character appears with a thousand box notice icon I9. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 419 (9k), the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While moving toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000-box that is held is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 419 (9k′), the DJ character is placed in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 so that the DJ character passes behind the notice icon. You may display as if you are doing. Further, as shown in FIG. 419 (9k″), the DJ character BY is displayed in a thousand boxes so as to overlap with the hat notice icon I6 thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. You may make it perform the effect display which puts the notice icon I9 in the notice icon 1st display area YA1. That is, the notice icon may be overwritten. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect of the effects.

FIG. 419 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 413 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 419 (12l), the character representations corresponding to the respective notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed together. For example, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the word "continuation", and the 1,000-box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. "Promotion" is additionally displayed, and the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is additionally displayed with "Blessing" and the notice icon fourth display. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the characters "Chan eyes", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 is "STETCHEN". The characters are additionally displayed, and the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 is additionally indicated with the characters "question mark" together with "continue." This may make it easier to understand the contents of the notice effect that is predicted to be executed thereafter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 419 (12 l ′) and the same figure (12 l ″), some or all of the characters additionally displayed on the notice icon are changed to “question mark” to clarify the corresponding notice effect. It may not be displayed in. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon will be executed, which may improve interest.

Further, it may be possible to give a notice that the effect display in which the big hit is determined is executed according to the combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of the notice icons displayed, for example, FIG. 419. As shown in (12l″′″), when three hat notice icons I6 with the wording “continuation” added are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four big pseudo-fixes are determined. It may be possible to give an advance notice that the effect display including the continuous effect is performed. When the character additionally displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when the character "promotion" is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. The result of the symbol variation display when is digested is a big hit confirmation (or, there may be a big hit in the hold) may be a premier notice display.

In the effect example described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the lord's character YM and the character BY of DJ, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 420, the notice icon is increased by the display of the decorative pattern. It is something to do.

In FIG. 420(A1), the decorative symbols of “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, normal reach.

After the reach effect is started, the notice icon pattern imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 420(A2). In the example shown in FIG. 420(A2), the hat notice icon pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped and displayed. The word "stock" is added near the lower part of the notice icon pattern of this hat, and when the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is informed that the notice icons are increased and displayed. doing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 420(A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in (A4), the decorative pattern of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon pattern is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the display result is out of alignment. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this way.

In FIG. 420(B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 420(A1), the decorative symbols of “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. , Normal reach production is started.

After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 420 (B2), the first paltry's notice icon design imitating the first lord's notice icon I1 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the effect example shown in FIG. 420 (B2), the notice icon “STOCK” is added to the notice icon design of the first lord, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that the notice icon is increased and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 420(B3), the notice icon pattern of the first lord changes to the notice icon I1 of the first lord and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 420 (B4), the decorative design of “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the result is a display defect. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. It is needless to say that the changed notice icon is not limited to the hat notice icon I6, and may be another type of notice icon. Further, the timing of changing the notice icon is not limited to the period during which the symbol variation display is being executed, and for example, the notice icon may be changed during the execution of the symbol variation display from the next time onward. The icon may not change until it is exhausted. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this way.

Next, another example of the above-mentioned notice icon digesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 421 to 424. Here, FIG. 421 to FIG. 424 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 421 to 424, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

421 (38m) to (40m-3) in the same figure show another example of the effect shown in (415) to (415) in FIG. 415. 421 (38m) to (39m) in FIG. 421 (38m) to (39m) the same effect is performed, but in FIG. 421 (40m-1) in the middle symbol display area 208b at low speed Although the pseudo-relational pattern appears in a variably displayed manner, after that, as shown in FIG. 421 (40m-2), immediately before the pseudo-relational pattern comes to the stop display position of the decorative pattern, the variable display becomes high speed and the pseudo-relational pattern. Is scrolled out to the lower part of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 421 (40m-3), a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed as a temporary stop, and fluctuations are displayed. , It is informed that the result of the stop display is out. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

421 (23n) to FIG. 424 (24n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 414 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 421 (23n), the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed starts, but as shown in FIG. 421 (24n), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed and that the digested effect is not performed.

FIGS. 421 (23o) to (24o-2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 414 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 421 (23o), the display of the hat notice icon I6 is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 421 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 of is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 421 (24o-2), the combination of the decorative patterns that are out of order without the pseudo continuous production being started (in FIG. 421 (24o-2), "decoration 1-decoration 2 -A combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2") is displayed as a temporary stop, and fluctuations are displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may not be performed.

421 (22p) to (23p) of FIG. 41 show another example of the effects shown in (414) to (23) of FIG. 414. That is, as shown in FIG. 421 (22p), for example, 4 seconds after the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, in FIG. 421 (23p), the leftmost side of the notice icon display area 285 (the notice icon Instead of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1), an effect may be performed in which other notice icons are consumed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 421 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the notice icons may not be sequentially consumed from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are consumed in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stocked order), but the notice icons stored later are consumed first. There may be cases. For example, when the notice icon that has been stocked later is first consumed, it may be likely to be a big hit, or conversely, it may be difficult to be a big hit. In addition, regardless of the stock order, the notice order of the notice icon may be determined. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, or the notice degree of the notice icon may change the reliability of the jackpot. You may do so. Further, it may be possible to give a notice that the jackpot is settled by digesting the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order. For example, the notice icon I6 for a hat and a shuriken A rule may be set such that when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order, the jackpot is confirmed. As a result, the player may be given an incentive to find out the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, which may improve the game motivation.

FIG. 421 (24q-1) to FIG. 421 (24q-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 414 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 421 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested to the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy is generated, as shown in FIG. 421 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left side, respectively. You may At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as when the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

FIGS. 422(Aa) to 422(Ae) show an example of the effect when the notice effect of the notice icon is increased and then the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. That is, as shown in FIG. 422(Aa), after the shuriken's notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, the stop symbol notice is executed, At the timing indicated by 422 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and it is informed that the display result is out of alignment. After that, as shown in FIG. 422(Ac), after the hold is exhausted and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, as shown in FIG. 422(Ad), the effect of increasing the notice icon by the lord's character YM is performed. When the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 422(Ae), the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested to leave a blank notice icon third. The notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. As described above, the increasing number of the notice icons may be displayed in the notice icon display area that is blank due to the notice icons being consumed.

FIG. 422(B) shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks appearing in the notice icon display area due to the consumption of a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 422(B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are consumed, the lord's character YM is displayed. When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 that are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, the display of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed. Note that when there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas in which the increasing notice icons are displayed is not limited to the order described above, and may be another order. It may be preset in 400. In addition, in this example of performance, the reliability of the big hit and the number of the notice icons are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be possible to suggest that the reliability and the number of displayed notice icons are different. For example, in the case where the increasing number of the notice icons are displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 which is the most right side among the blank display areas in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed. It may be suggested that it is displayed in the display area 285, or that the reliability of the big hit is the highest.

FIG. 422(C) shows an example of the effect when the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of the one-time symbol variable display. That is, as shown in FIG. 422(C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, It is displayed that the notice YI icon for the hat Y, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 for the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 when the notice YI icon is increased by the character YM. Here, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is the notice icon increased in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display is executed. Thus, the notice effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during the execution of the one-time symbol variable display. At this time, the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is performed may overlap with the period in which the notice effect of the notice icon is increased. Further, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the notice effect of the notice icon is started, the digest effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon The digesting effect of and the increasing effect of the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the time of starting the variable display of symbols, or after the variable display of symbols is started, the increase effect of the notice icon is increased. It may be an area that is planned to be blank before it is started.

422 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 417 (59). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 422 (59r), before the digest effect of the notice icon is started, the effect of inspiring whether or not the notice icon is consumed is performed. Specifically, for example, of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon, which is the target of the digest, starts shaking and fluctuates to determine whether or not the notice icon is digested. I am trying to fuel it. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 417 (60), the fan advance notice icon I10 may be exhausted, or the fan advance notice icon I10 may not be exhausted. When not digested, the notice icon may be deleted without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the notice icon may be suspended. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 422 (59r), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is erased without being consumed, thereafter, a stop display is performed with a combination of the decorative decorative patterns, and the result is the defective display. You may notify that.

422 (59s) to (60s) of FIG. 422 show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 417 (59) to (60) of FIG. That is, in FIG. 422 (59s), the notice icon display area 285 displays two hat notice icons I6, a thousand-box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10. Among these notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 after the shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1", the fan notice icon is displayed. When I10 is digested, it gives a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 422 (60s), when another notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat) is digested, it is left as it is. The combination of the decorative symbols may be used to notify that the display will be stopped and not displayed.

422 (23t) to FIG. 42 (32t) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 414 (23) to 415 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 422 (23t), in this effect example, in the notice icon display area 285, an in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the noticed icon that has been consumed is added. As shown in FIG. 422 (23t) to FIG. 422 (25t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the digested hat notice icon I6 is started. Is displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIG. 422 (28t) to FIG. 422 (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digesting notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed even after being digested, and the corresponding effect (pseudo continuous effect) is displayed. ) Is displayed continuously until the end. Note that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the during-digest notice icon display area YA0 may be after the notice effect of the notice icon is started or before the notice effect of the notice icon is started. It may be the same as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the during-digest notice icon display area YA0 is erased may be after the notice effect of the notice icon ends, or before the notice effect of the notice icon ends. Good, it may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has started, or after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon has ended. May be the same as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts, or the digested notice icon It may be performed at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol variation in which the notice icon is erased (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure), or the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0. Is deleted at the timing (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion are deleted in FIG. 416 (44), or only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is eliminated). May be. In addition, when a plurality of notice icons are consumed during one-time symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the notice-during-prediction icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A that was digested first is the notice icon A digested. The effect may be erased after or at the same time as the effect is finished, and no notice icon may be displayed in the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0, or the digestion effect of the notice icon B to be digested next may be started. May be deleted at the same time as or after being started, or may be deleted at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digesting notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. The notice icon a may be left as a history even during the production of the notice icon B, or at the end of the symbol variation in which the notice icon A and the notice icon B are consumed (for example, It may be erased at the symbol stop timing in the figure). When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during super reach effect, big hit effect, simultaneous island effect, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted and the notice is being consumed. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the digesting notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

423(Aa) to FIG. 423(Ae) show examples of effects in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 423(Aa), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. The ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Then, of these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are used respectively. The production is started. Here, the start timings of the digestion effects of the respective notice icons may be the same or different. In this case, the order of digesting the notice icons may be the order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 423(Ab), they are enlarged and additionally displayed with a character display. .. Specifically, a character display of "Continue" is additionally displayed near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and a character display of "Stetchen" is additionally displayed near the lower part of the notice icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the stage change effect is started in response to the completion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 423(Ac), after the shoji closes and Chibihime's character CH appears on the front side thereof, FIG. 423(Ad).
As shown in, the shoji opens, and the background (moon surface) showing how the universe is seen from the moon surface is displayed. In addition, during execution of the stage change effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moves to and is displayed in reduced size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 423(Ae), the reduced decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area, and then the banquet character BC is displayed in correspondence with the notice of the hat notice icon I6. Appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the right symbol stopped and displayed is performed, after which the player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be executed. ..

In this example of effect, the start timings of the effects corresponding to the digested notice icon are made different, but they may be started at the same time.

FIGS. 423 (66u-1) to (66u-3) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 417 (66). That is, in FIG. 423 (66u-1), the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 is continuously displayed. It is indicated that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 423 (66u-2), after the jackpot start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 423 (66u-3), even after the jackpot round game is started, undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example of performance, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during the big hit game, but it may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect that notifies that the probability variation big hit is confirmed), for example, FIG. 423 (66u). In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed during execution of the jackpot game, it is notified that the probability variation jackpot is confirmed, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is consumed. May notify that the 15R jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when the other notice icon is consumed, for example, it may have a meaning indicating that it may be promoted. In this way, even with the same notice icon, when it is exhausted during the execution of the big hit game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game may be different from the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon specific to a big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during execution of the big hit game may be the same as the notice icon displayed during execution of the variable display, or only some notice icons may be commonly used. ..

423(Ba) to FIG. 423(Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 423 (Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, the hold is exhausted and symbol fluctuation. When the display is started, the stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 423 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect ends, as shown in FIG. 423(Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variable display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be erased when the stage is changed. It should be noted that after the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be deleted without fail, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or even if it is not deleted. Good.

FIGS. 423(22v-1) to (23v) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 414(22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 423 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 423 (22v-2), a lord's character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. Notify in advance the type of notice icon that will be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 423 (23v), the digestion effect of the notice icon in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is consumed is started. Even when the type of the notice icon to be digested is announced in advance, the notice icon may not be digested, and a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon that was announced in advance is digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance is consumed, it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is high.

FIG. 423(22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 414(22). That is, as shown in FIG. 423 (22w), after the variation display of the symbols is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the digestion of the notice icon. Good.

In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo continuous effect is executed, and other effects are not executed. Although the production corresponding to is executed and the other productions are not executed, for example, even though the notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested, the bancho character BC does not appear, and the princess character appears. The big hit may be settled when an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called, the rule is broken) such as the big hit is settled.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is predetermined and is configured so that it cannot be selected by the player. However, for example, by operating the effect button 136 or the like, the notice icon to be digested You may make it selectable.

In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is erased when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when the big hit in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is displayed again after the probability variation state or the time saving state is finished. May be configured as follows. Further, it may be configured not to be carried over even after the probability variation state or the time saving state is completed.

Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect that gives advance notice of the contents of the reach effect that will be transferred thereafter depending on the type of the notice icon that is consumed.

As shown in FIG. 424(Aa), when "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, then the enlarged-length character BC2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 424 (Ac-1). It appears, and then shifts to the Bancho reach that corresponds to the appeared character. Further, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is consumed, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ac-2), the enlarged lord's character YM3 is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the lord's reach corresponding to the appeared character. Further, as shown in FIG. 424 (Ab-3), when the fan advance notice icon I10 is exhausted, thereafter, the enlarged princess character HM is displayed as shown in FIG. 424 (Ac-3). Appears, and then moves to Princess Reach corresponding to the appeared character. In addition, in this example of performance, the jackpot reliability indicated by the notice icon is supported, and the jackpot reliability of these reach effects is configured in the order of princess reach>lord'sreach> bancho reach. There is. Note that when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a lord's character that has been enlarged and displayed after the notice icon I6 of the hat has disappeared) appears (in the case where a so-called collapse of the law occurs). May be configured so that a jackpot is confirmed. In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may appear corresponding to the notice icons to execute the combined notice. In addition, a special effect (digest-only effect) for digesting a plurality of notice icons may be executed, and it is a big hit if a plurality of notice icons are consumed rather than one notice icon is consumed. May be configured to have high reliability.

Next, a button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 has been consumed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 424 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variable display is started, At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of consuming the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 424 (Bc), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter and the effect button 136 is displayed. It notifies that the operation can be accepted, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136.

Next, another effect example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 424 (Ca), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Further, the above-mentioned button reach effect is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Then, at the timing of FIG. 424 (Cb), the display in which the second button notice icon I11 is consumed is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 424 (Cc). As described above, the projecting button image 136b is changed to a projecting button image 136b that is shown in a projecting manner. That is, it is shown that the button has been promoted to a button reach effect with higher reliability of the big hit.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 425 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 426 is a stepwise continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 425. FIG. 427 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 426, and FIG. 428 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 429 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 428 step by step.

Note that in FIGS. 425(1) to 426(14), the notice icon I6 of the hat was changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat used in the effect of increasing the notice icon. Since it is the same as FIGS. 413(1) to 414(14) except for the points, the description thereof is omitted here. In addition, regarding the effect performed between FIG. 426 (14) and FIG. 426 (20), all the notice icons used in the increase effect of the notice icon are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 415 (15) to (19) in FIG. 414 except for.

In FIG. 426(20), the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased.

And in FIG. 426 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 426(22), the hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, as shown in FIG. 426 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. Also, the display that the first notice icon I1 of the Lord is consumed is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 426 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially consume the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digesting may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the notice icons is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be preferentially consumed. That is, the order in which the notice icons are consumed is not limited to the above-described order and can be set appropriately.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As indicated by 426 (25), the character display of "continuation" for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, displayed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display. Good.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (26), the character display of "continuation" attached to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is deleted. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In this way, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. It should be noted that when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, it may be displayed so that it can be recognized that it has been digested, for example, by changing the display area where the digested notice icon is displayed. The display may be grayed out, or the character information “done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

After that, in the effect contents shown in FIGS. 426(27) to 427(33), the notice icon I6 of the digested cap is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. 414 (27) to 415 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, so here The description of is omitted.

On the decorative symbol display device 208, display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 427 (34), in which the first icon of the palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is consumed. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 427 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As indicated by 427 (36 ), a character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), at the timing shown in FIG. 427 (37), the character display of "continuation" attached to the hat notice icon I6 disappears and the hat notice icon is deleted. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, the effect contents shown in FIGS. 427 (38) to (45) are that the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 respectively, and the notice is displayed. 415 (38) to FIG. 416 (except that the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are both changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Since it is the same as that of (45), the description thereof is omitted here.

At the timing shown in FIG. 427 (46), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed. That is, the display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice box I9 of a thousand boxes at the timing shown in FIG. 427 (47) and is enlarged and displayed. Above the displayed notice icon I9 of the 1000-box, a character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to notify that a production with higher reliability will be performed. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is enlarged, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Good.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes was added.
After the character display of “promotion” disappears and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 427 (48), the original display position, that is, the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285 A display for moving to the area YA3 is displayed.

After that, the reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of FIG. 428 (49). In the present production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 428 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the production display such as the occurrence of the power failure is performed, the highly reliable strong reach is performed. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in this effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 427 (50-1), after the character display "Is it a chance?" is displayed on the dark background in the decorative pattern display device 208. , 428 (50-2), the character display of "No" is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 428(51), after the character display “Is it too hot?” is displayed, the character display of “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428(52). After that, as shown in FIG. 428 (53), the character display of “one shot” is displayed to notify that the button effect will be performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 428 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted, and inform the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (55), as shown in FIG. 428 (56), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative pattern display device 208, It shows that the button reach production has failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 428 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1".

In FIG. 428 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is once hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 428 (59 ), swing fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

After that, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display that the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the first palace's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, it changes to the fan notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (61) and is enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, below the enlarged fan notification icon I10, a character display of "blessing" for notifying that the big hit is set may be added. In addition, when the character display is additionally displayed, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan advance notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after the enlarged display.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, after the fan advance notice icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 429 (62), the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon fourth display region of the advance notice icon display region 285. A display for moving to YA4 is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 429 (63), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 2
In 08c, the variable display of the decorative pattern, which has been swinging and varying, is restarted and the re-fluctuation effect is started. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed.

In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 429 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. It

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 429 (65 ), the fluctuation fluctuation of the combination of decorative patterns “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (66), the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is confirmed as a big hit is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the 1st special figure display device 212, "special figure A" which is a 15R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed, and in the 4th symbol display device 284a, the 4th symbol (round figure) of special figure 1 Is lit. After that, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the big hit game start effect described above is executed.

Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 430 to 432. Here, FIG. 430 to FIG. 432 are diagrams showing stepwise other effect examples of the effect of increasing the notice icon. 430 to 432, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

FIGS. 430(8a) to (9a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 425(8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 430(8a), the effect display in which the notice icon I3 of the third palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed. Note that the same can be done for the second palace's notice icon I2. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 429 (9a), the thrown third palace's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

FIGS. 430(8b) to (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 425(8) to 425(8). That is, in FIG. 430(8b), as in the case of FIG. 425(8), an effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

However, in the case of FIG. 430 (9 b ), it is shown that the notice icon I 1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and the frame is out from the left of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the amount of gambling using the announcement icon of the lord.

FIGS. 430(8c) to (9c) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 425(8) to (9). In other words, in FIG. 430(8c), not only one notice icon I1 of the first lord but also three notice icons I1 of the first lord are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 for effect display. ing. The effect display may be thrown one by one, not simultaneously.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (9c), the three first palace's notice icons I1 thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon of the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to increase the plurality of notice icons by one increase effect. Therefore, the increase in the number of notice icons at one time improves the expectation for the increase in the number of notice executions, and may enhance the effect. Further, a highly reliable notice icon (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord) is less likely to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (difficult to be stocked) and has a low reliability (for example, the first lord notice). The notice icon I1) of 1 may be easily displayed (prone to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this example of performance, the same notice icon (the notice icon I1 of the first lord) is increased by three, but a plurality of types of notice icons having different degrees of reliability may be increased at the same time. The notice icon I1 of the first palace and the notice icon I3 of the third lord may be simultaneously increased.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 430 (9 c ′), some or all of the thrown three first palace's notice icons I1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern It is also possible to execute a partial gall increase effect or an all gase increase effect that causes a frame out from the left of the display area of the display device 208.

FIG. 430(8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 425(8). That is, in FIG. 430(8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (display mode by the character of Savohani), the lord's character YM notifies the first lord's notice icon I1. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the increase effect of the notice icon even during the execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-read notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

FIG. 430(8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 425(8). That is, in FIG. 430 (8f), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number is displayed by the effect hold lamp 286. Note that, in FIG. 430 (8f), for convenience of description, the holding lamp of the second special diagram 1 which is the target of prefetching is shown by hatching, but actually, the first special diagram 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 2, the second hold lamp of Toku-zu 1 is also turned on by the default light emission mode.

FIGS. 430(8g) to (9g-2) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425(8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 430(8g), as in the case of FIG. 425(8), an effect display in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed.

However, in the case of FIG. 430 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 430 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first person acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to read the advance notice. The effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is being performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the first palace's notice icon I1 may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first person, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

FIGS. 430(12h-1) to (12h-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 425(12). That is, in FIG. 430 (12h-1), as in the case of FIG. 425 (12), the decorative symbol in the state in which the first palace's notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The variable display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 430 (12h-2), the decorative pattern of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed and the reach effect is started. It As described above, in this embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, a big hit may be made. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot is over.

FIGS. 431(8i) to (9i) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425(8) to (425). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 425(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 431(8i), it differs from FIG. 425(8). , The character YM of DJ, not the lord's character YM, appears on the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 431(8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace's notice icon I1. After that, as shown in FIG. 431 (9i), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and changes the notice icon I1 of the first lord who has it to the notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display to be placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of the notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the effect of increasing the advance notice icon by the DJ character BY once. As described above, a plurality of types of increase effects of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord's character YM and a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). Depending on the configuration, the production may be diversified and the production effect can be enhanced.

FIGS. 431(8j) to (9j) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425(8) to (425). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 425(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 431(8j), the DJ with the notice icon is further added. Character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 431(8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace's notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 431 (9j), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ's As the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the first palace's notice icon I1 he/she has is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 431 (9 j ′), by placing the character BY of DJ on a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the rear side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as passing.

FIGS. 431(8k) to (9k) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 425(8) to (425). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 425(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon to the notice icon display area 285.
1 (8k) further shows that the DJ character BY having the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 431 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third palace's notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 431 (9k), the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ's While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The effect display in which the DJ character BY places the third palace's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. That is, an effect of promotion may be performed by overwriting the notice icon having a low reliability of the big hit with the notice icon having a high reliability of the big hit. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect of the effects. This promotion effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed a plurality of times in the symbol variable display. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-relationship effect is performed.

FIG. 431 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 425 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 431 (12l), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed in association with the character notation of "question mark". For example, the notice icon I1 of the first visitor is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second visitor is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area is displayed. The notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed on YA3, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed on the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is shown on the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the letter notation of "question mark" is added to each notice. According to this effect example, it may be possible to give an expectation to the changed notice icon.

Further, as shown in FIG. 431 (12l′), for some of the pre-change pre-notification icons, the type of the post-change pre-notification icon may be pre-announced in text. For example, the first palace's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth. The second palace's notice icon I2 displayed in the display area YA4 is marked with the "question mark" character notation and the changed notice icon cannot be recognized, but the notice icon third display area is displayed. The first palace's notice icon I1 displayed on YA3 is annotated with the character notation "Chan eyes" to change to the shuriken notice icon I7, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord, who is displayed, is annotated to be changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat by adding the character notation of "continuation", and is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6. The notice icon I1 of the No. 1 lord is annotated with the character notation of "question mark" together with "continuation", and is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 431 (12 l″), all or some of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed notice icons, and the changed notice icons are displayed. You may make it add the corresponding character notation only about things.

432(8m-1) to FIG. 9(9m) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 425(8) to 425(8). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 425(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285. However, in FIG. 432(8m-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in Fig. 432 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the 1,000-box warning icon I9. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 432 (8m-2), after the first palace's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 432 (9 m ), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and throws the 1,000-box box of the notice icon I 9 thrown by the lord's character YM and the notice icon first display area. A production display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the 1,000-box box of the notice icon I9 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA1. According to this effect example, the pre-change notice icon may be overwritten with the post-change notice icon. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect of the effects. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed a plurality of times in the symbol variable display. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed every time the pseudo-relational effect is performed.

FIGS. 432(8n-1) to FIG. 9(9n) show other effect examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 425(8) to 425(8). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 425(8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285. However, in FIG. 432(8n-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 432 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace's notice icon I1. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 432 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9n), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown by the lord's character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. The production display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first palace's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the thousand-box notice icon I9 displayed in YA1. In this way, the changed notice icon may be overwritten with the changed notice icon. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may enhance the effect of the effects. In addition, this overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variable display, or may be performed a plurality of times in the symbol variable display. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed every time the pseudo-relational effect is performed. Further, when the notice icon before the change after the overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord) is consumed, the notice icon after the change becomes the notice icon before the overwriting (for example, the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured that the jackpot reliability is higher when the notice icon after overwriting is consumed than when the notice icon before overwriting is consumed, or it is configured so that the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the reliability of the big hit may not be changed.

Next, an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. 433. Here, FIG. 433 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of an effect in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 433, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and the fourth figure. Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 433(A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is put on hold. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first visitor is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third visitor. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 433(A), the lord's character YM2 holding the placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. This placard is given the character notation "I'll be changing" to announce that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

After that, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 433(B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 433 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was displayed in the default display mode is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Changes to. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change. As described above, in the present production example, as a result of performing a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production being performed, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where both the display mode of the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

Further, as shown in 39(C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variable of the decorative symbol, but the variable symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right. Then, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is put on hold. ing. Note that both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first visitor is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third visitor. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 433(C), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a Chibihime chance effect is performed. The Chibihime chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned universal figure fluctuation game is executed. The Chibi-hime chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery, in which the Chibi-hime character selects one of five start points, moves from the selected start point along the Amida route, and reaches the goal point. It is foretold that the effect corresponding to the icon shown will be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is foretold to be long opened, and “Super hot” is displayed. When reaching the goal point indicated by the letter notation, it is highly possible that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit, and when reaching the goal point indicated by the cross icon. Indicates that the variable display result of the general map is out of order.

Further, in this example of performance, when the player reaches the goal point where the lord's notice icon is displayed, one of the pre-change notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed as shown in FIG. 433 (D1). At least one of them changes to the changed notice icon. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 433 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first notice icon I1 of the lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

When the character Sabohani reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 433 (D2), at least one of the hold icons in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1 is displayed. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 433 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, has changed to the display mode of the prefetching notice. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, any of the two hold icons h11, h12 may change, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change. May change.

As described above, in the present production example, as a result of performing a certain production, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain production being performed, the notice icon may be held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that there may be a case where both the display mode of the hold icon and the notice icon change due to this effect.

Next, a display example when power is cut off/power is restored while the notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 434. Here, FIG. 434 is a diagram showing, step by step, a display example in the case where power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 434(A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, and it is shown that the start of the two symbol variations is put on hold. ing. It should be noted that, of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is a mode. Further, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, respectively, and the notice icon third display area YA3 displays a thousand-box box. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

In FIG. 434(B), the power is cut off for some reason, and FIG. 434(C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the power is restored instantaneously. On the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 434(C), a character display of "restore, please wait for a while" which is a return display is displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220 and the general figure holding device. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. After that, as shown in FIG. 434(D), the variable display of the symbols is finished, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed "Special figure I" which is the display result of the deviation. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the variable display of the symbols is finished, the display is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7” which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Then, when the power is cut off or restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are erased. Further, when the power is cut off or restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the prefetching notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or restored, the prefetch result information stored in the special diagram 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special diagram 2 preread result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undetermined” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undetermined” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The pre-reading notice including the notice effect and the increase notice of the notice icon may not be given until all the reserved reservations have been consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for the newly increased hold (holding that the pre-reading result was saved) after the power interruption/recovery, but the pre-reading notice is given after all the holdings including "undetermined" information have been exhausted. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may be given before the suspension including the “undetermined” information is exhausted for the suspension that is newly increased after the power interruption/recovery.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 435 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a step-by-step example of another effect of the notice icon increasing effect and digestion effect. 436 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner following the example of the effect shown in FIG. 435. 435 to 436, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 435, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

FIG. 435(1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 413(5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the center of the display screen, a large decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, A second decorative symbol display area is formed above the hold icon display area 281, and the three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size, which is different from FIG. 413(5). The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured such that, after the fluctuation starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to fluctuate until the fixed stop.

At the timing shown in FIG. 435(2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, unlike the case of FIG. 413(6), the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I21 of “house” in which the letters “house” are circled.

At the timing shown in FIG. 435(3), the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 435(4), the notice icon I21 of the possessed “house” is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, the notice icon I21 of the thrown "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 435(5), and then as shown in FIG. 435(6). In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Thus, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a crest effect described later may be executed in the future.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 435(7) to 435(8), display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 435(9), the decorative pattern display device 208 stops and displays the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 435(10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are respectively moved by the movement animation. The displayed hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 changes to the special figure 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 435(11), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the lord's character YM has a notice icon I22 of "monkey" in which the characters of "monkey" are circled.

Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 435(12), the advance notice icon I22 of the “crest” possessed is announced at the timing shown in FIG. 435(13). An effect display that is thrown toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 435(14), the thrown "montle" notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, after the same effect display as in FIG. 435(6) is performed, the same effect display as in FIG. 435(7) to FIG. 435(8) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 435(17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 435(18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. ..

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 436 (19) following FIG. 435 (18), the notice icon I21 and notice icon of “house” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display in which the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of "monkey" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The notice icon display area 285 may be erased after the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” are consumed. The timing for deleting the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the end of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. Further, the movement of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "crest" may start at the same time, or the notice icon I21 of the "house" notice may move to "crest". May be earlier than the start of movement, or the movement of the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be earlier than the start of movement of the notice icon I21 of the "house".

After that, when the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) At the timing shown in 21), the family crest accessory 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative pattern display device 208, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect image to that effect. A fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 436(22), it develops into a super reach (swordsman reach). The effect contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS.

In the present embodiment, when the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "crest") are consumed, the corresponding notice effect (decline for crest fall effect) is performed. Is configured. Even if these notice icons are consumed, the family crest fall effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when the family crest drop effect is performed, it may be guaranteed that a big hit will occur in the symbol variation display, or there may be a case of a loss. Further, it may be configured such that the case where the crest fall effect is performed is easier to hit than the case where the crest fall effect is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured such that the family crest drop effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is a big hit. In addition, it is easier to consume the two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for "house" and the notice icon I22 for "Crest") in the variation display that is a big hit than in the variation display that is a loss. May be configured.

437 and 438 are diagrams showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 437 to 438, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

437(a1) is different from FIG. 435(5) in that the notice icon I22 of “monkey” appears before the notice icon I21 of “house” and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 437(a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 437(a3), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed. The display that the notice icon I21 of the "house" that has been used is simultaneously consumed is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of the "house" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display for moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 1” is formed and the reach effect is started.

After that, when the "crest" notice icon I22 and the "house" notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437(a4-1). It At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order in which the “house” and the “crest” are arranged) instead of the order in which the “crest” and the “house” are arranged. Further, as shown in FIG. 437(a4-2), the notice icon I22 of “monk” and the notice icon I21 of “house” may be enlarged and displayed in the order of arrangement of “monk” and “house”. In this effect example, the above-mentioned family crest fall effect is configured to be performed thereafter regardless of the case shown in FIG. 437 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of the “house” and the “crest” (that is, the correct arrangement order), the family crest fall effect is performed, and the arrangement order of the “crest” and the “house” (that is, When the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", the family crest fall effect is more likely to be started than when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured as.

437(b1) to FIG. 437(b6) show another effect form of the crest drop effect.

First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 437(b1), in the state where only the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the “crest” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is being consumed without waiting for the notice icon I22 to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 437(b2), when only the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative pattern display device 208, and vertically while overlapping a part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. It is operating (stirring) as if it is vibrating in the direction. At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of "preparing for family crest" indicating that there is a possibility that the crest fall effect will be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. The production of the lord has started. At this time, the lord's character YM possesses the notice icon I22 of the "crest". Then, as shown in FIG. 437(b4), when the lord's character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I22 of “monkey” is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. The notice icon is displayed in the second display area YA2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the notice icon I22 of the “crest” is still displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. At this time, the family crest monument 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position to make it easy to recognize that the symbol is definitely stopped. However, it is not retracted to the initial position and the flapping motion is continued. Good. On the other hand, the character display of "preparing for family crest" is continuously displayed.

Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 437 (b6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the family crest monument 224B that has been evacuated descends again and resumes the slinging operation. In this example of performance, after that, for example, when the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, the family crest cast 224B descends, and FIG. The family crest fall effect shown in (21) is performed. In addition, the notice icon I22 of “Crest” may not be digested and the family crest fall effect may not be performed. Further, in FIG. 437(b2), the notice icon I21 of "house" may be displayed in an enlarged state until the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed later is consumed. At this time, the notice icon I22 of the “crest” may be stocked, but may be digested as it is without being stocked.

FIGS. 437(c1) to (c2-3) show other examples of the notice icon digesting effect. In this example of performance, the background notice in which the background is changed is shown by digesting the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 437(c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I31 of “don” enclosing the letters “don” in a circle is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, the notice icon I32 of "Princess" enclosing the character of "Princess" is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I33 of "Grandpa" enclosing the letter of "Grandpa" is announced. It is displayed in the icon third display area YA3.

In FIG. 437 (c2-1), the state of the background display after the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of “Denki”, the notice icon I32 of “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” is consumed is shown. ing. As shown in FIG. 437 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the image of the grandfather's face up from the left side of the display screen and the lord's face. A background display is displayed in which the uploaded image and the image of the princess' face are divided into three equal parts. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. Is configured to be displayed with a background display that indicates that is the highest. Further, the three notice icons may be digested at the same time or one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are consumed one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons that are consumed, and for example, the notice icon I31 of “Den”> “hime” The highest degree of reliability may be achieved when the notice icon I32 of “” and the notice icon I33 of “grandpa” are digested in this order, but the relationship between the digestion order and the reliability of the jackpot can be set as appropriate. ..

In addition, in FIG. 437 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of “donor”, the notice icon I32 of “princess”, and the notice icon I33 of “grandpa”, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" has been consumed is shown. As shown in FIG. 437 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image of the princess's face up from the left side of the display screen and the grandfather's face. A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two notice icons out of the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, but the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are consumed is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of “Princess” and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” have been digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, “Denshi” The notice icon I31 of “No.” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be consumed, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “Grandpa” may be consumed. Further, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are consumed, "donor". The notice icon I31 of "and grandfather", the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", or the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" have higher jackpot reliability than when they are consumed, and the notice icon I31 of "donor" When the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are consumed. These can be set appropriately.

Further, in FIG. 437 (c2-3), among the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa", only the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is shown. The state of the background display after the is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 437 (c2-3), when this one advance notice icon is consumed, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a background display in which the image of the grandfather's face is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, that is, the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is consumed, the symbol variable display is performed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the two notice icons are exhausted. Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the "grandpa" notice icon I33 of the three notice icons is consumed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the "donor" notice icon I31 is consumed. The notice icon I32 of "Princess" may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be changed depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" is digested, the notice icon I32 of "princess" or the notice of "grandpa" is announced. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than that when the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is consumed than when the notice icon I33 of the "grandpa" is consumed. However, these can be set appropriately.

Further, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "President" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "Princess" or "Grandpa" is displayed. The reliability of the big hit is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "is displayed". When the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is larger than when the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" is displayed. May be set higher, or, for example, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "donor" and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the "princess" notice icon I32 and the "grandpa" notice icon I33 are displayed, and the "donor" notice icon I31 and the "grandparent" notice icon I33 are displayed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be set higher than when the "princess" notice icon I32 and the "grandpa" notice icon I33 are displayed, but these can be set appropriately.

Further, in this effect example, the background display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed is configured to be displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change, and in this case, the fact that the big hit is confirmed may be notified as a so-called law break.

Further, when displaying the three notice icons, the three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. You may In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

Further, in this example of performance, when the notice icon I31 of "donor" has been digested, the character of the lord appears and the lord reach is started, and when the notice icon I32 of "princess" is digested, When the princess character appears to start the princess reach and the "grandpa" notice icon I33 is consumed, the grandpa character may appear to start the grand reach. In addition, when the "grandpa" notice icon I33 and the "princess" notice icon I32 are consumed, the grandfather character and the princess character appear to start the grandfather and princess reach, and the "donor" notice icon. When I31 and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, the lord's character and the princess character will appear and the lord & princess reach will start, and the notice icon of "Den" I31 and the notice icon of "grandpa" will be started. When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather may appear to start the lord and grandfather reach. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "donor", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" are exhausted, a lord's character, a princess's character, and a grandfather's character appear and lord & Hime & Grand Reach may be started. In this way, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

Further, what is displayed by digesting these notice icons is not limited to the notice of the reach effect and the background display described above, and for example, the effect mode in the big hit game or the mode during the pattern change may be changed. Alternatively, another notice (for example, various notices such as a character increasing the notice icon) may be given. Further, the effect performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and a sound output (for example, a music piece) corresponding to the notice icon that has been digested may be performed. You may make it produce by the corresponding light emission pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 438, regarding an example in which an effect may be performed for each of when the “house” notice icon I21 is consumed and when the “monkey” notice icon I22 is consumed. explain.

First, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 438 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “crest” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms the reach state by "decoration 1", and the reach effect is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 438(d2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, only the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested from the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest”. Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 438 (d3), the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested to change to the chance symbol which is the special symbol.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 438(d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the display of the chance pattern, or as shown in FIG. 438(d4-2), the effect pattern is displayed together with the family crest. In some cases, a family crest fall effect for dropping the accessory 224B may be performed. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be moved to. In addition, you may make it move to the swordsman reach after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image, or the effect image and the swordsman reach without dropping the family crest actor 224B. You may make it shift. Further, as shown in FIG. 438 (d4-3), the normal reach effect may be started without any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

Further, when the chance pattern is stopped and displayed, another super reach (family crest challenge reach) may be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 438(d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after being stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1”, at the timing shown in FIG. 438(d4-4). On the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display of "family crest challenge" indicating that the family crest challenge reach has been made is displayed. The first decorative pattern is shaken and changed while maintaining the combination of "decoration 1-chance pattern-decoration 1" at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 438 (d5-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the lord's character YM pulls the notice icon I22 of the “crest” with a rope, and the notice of the “crest” is shown. This suggests that the attraction of the icon I22 increases the expectation for a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 438(d6-4), when the lord's character YM succeeds in drawing the notice icon I22 of “crest”, as shown in FIG. 438(d7-4), the family crest actor 224B falls. At the same time, a family crest fall effect in which a predetermined effect image is displayed is performed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the “crest” has been successfully digested. It should be noted that, after the crest dropping effect is performed, for example, the above-mentioned swordsman reach will be transferred.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 438 (d6-4a), the rope that the lord's character YM is pulling may break and fail to pull the notice icon I22 of the “crest”. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 438 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the above-mentioned swordsman reach may be shifted to. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is successfully drawn. In addition, as shown in FIG. 438 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the lord's character YM is broken and the pulling of the notice icon I22 of the “crest” fails, FIG. 438 (d7-4b) is displayed. As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the notice icon I22 of the “crest” is first consumed. In addition, it may be configured such that the family crest fall effect is more likely to occur when the “crest” notice icon I22 is consumed than when the “house” notice icon I21 is consumed. The reverse is also possible.

In addition to the "house" notice icon I21, the "crest" notice icon I22, the "donor" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "grandparent" notice icon I33, There may be a gaze notice icon that resembles the icon, for example, a "U" notice icon, a "shark" notice icon, an "old" notice icon, a "subject" notice icon, or an "aunt" A notice icon or the like of “” may be prepared. For example, even if the "house" notice icon and the "shark" notice icon are consumed, the crest fall effect may not be performed, or the "house" notice icon and the "crest" notice icon may be consumed. The crest dropping effect may be performed less frequently when the notice icon of “house” and the notice icon of “shark” are consumed than when it is performed. In addition, the notice icon of Gase such as “shark” may be changed to the notice icon such as “crest”.

Further, in the above-mentioned example of the effect, one word is formed by two characters of "house" and "mon", and the predetermined effect is performed by satisfying the requirement for forming the word. However, for example, a word composed of three or more characters may be used to apply to this example of performance, for example, a “suspect” notice icon, a “like” notice icon, and a “run” notice. The pseudo-relational effect may be performed when the three icons, namely the icons, are consumed.

Further, in this example of performance, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest”, and there is only one available stock in the notice icon display area 285, , The "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may not be displayed. Alternatively, only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may be displayed, and in this case, the notice icon of the one that could not be displayed is displayed as the notice icon. If there is a space in the area 285, the increase display may be performed. If there is no space in the notice icon display area 285, the displayed notice icon may not be consumed. Further, even if the notice icon display area 285 becomes empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be used as it is.

Further, when the notice icon display area 285 is full and at least one of them is not displayed by the time the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” are consumed, for example, “house” When the notice icon I21 of “No” is consumed, the effect that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is also consumed may be performed, or the notice icon I21 of “house” alone may be performed.

FIG. 439 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in stages. In FIG. 439, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 439(e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice, and its display mode is another hold icon (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed larger than the hold icon h11) and is in the display mode of the prefetching notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is largely displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. In addition, the second decorative pattern is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area. In this effect example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, shows that various parts are added, and in FIG. 439(e1), it is shown in the hold icon display area 281. The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. The first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(e1), a state in which the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen is shown. It carries the second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating the head of a snowman.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3
Is an image simulating a bucket to cover the head of a snowman.

At the timing shown in FIG. 439 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed out, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 439(e4) after the lord's character YM has been moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, at a timing shown in FIG. Is done.

Then, the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (e5). That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts forming the hold icon. After that, the lord's character YM is framed out as described above with reference to FIGS. 435(6) to 435(8).

FIG. 439(e6) shows that the display result of the loss is derived, one pending variable display of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the symbol variable display is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 439 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the read-ahead notice display mode, or the hold icon display mode that is already the read-ahead notice display mode is more reliable when the jackpot is larger. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a high frequency. In addition, the big hit announcement display is also performed in the symbol variation display being executed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439(e7), variable display of symbols is started in the chance roulette display area 287.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 439(e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third notice part P3 is being digested. The third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen is shown. The DJ character BY possesses the fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wrapped around the neck of a snowman.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 439 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model of the head forming the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. Of the DJ, the character BY of the DJ flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the DJ character BY jumps to the notice icon display area 285. The effect display to be placed in the 2 display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, the variable display of symbols is still displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (e10), the display result in which the character “Get” is displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 in the chance roulette display area 287 is derived. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

Then, as shown in FIG. 439 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the body part of the first hold icon h11 which is the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 439 (e11′), the fifth notice part P5 is not immediately mounted, but the third notice icon P3 is once displayed, and the notice icon first area of the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. You may make it display once (stock) in the display area YA1. In this case, instead of displaying in the first notice area YA1 of the notice icon, it may be displayed in another display area (for example, the third notice area YA3 of the notice icon).

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 439 (e12), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and is removed. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". In this example of effect, the variable icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but it may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 439 (e13), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 439 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is being digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variable icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman. Then, as shown in FIG. 439 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the variable icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman, and the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon of the display mode of the snowman). ) Is completed. As a result, it is reported that the reliability of the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. When the display mode of the completed snowman is the hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and moreover, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit in the variation is high.

In addition, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to being displayed during the normal symbol variation display, but may be attached, for example, when the super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 439 (e14-2). As shown in FIG. 4, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach, and is attached to the variation icon h0 in the snowman display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (e15-2). You may do it. Here, as the variable icon h0 shifts to the super reach, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed out downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

In this example of performance, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, although the displayed notice parts are exhausted, attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be reduced. Also, when the displayed advance notice part is consumed, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of read ahead, functions as another read ahead notice of hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not the target of read ahead. , It may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

FIG. 440 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment and It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestive production step by step, and FIG. 441 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the production shown in FIG. 440 stepwise. 440 to 441, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 440, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. 440 to 441 differ from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. .. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

As shown in FIG. 440(1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second symbol. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 440(1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

At the timing shown in FIG. 440(2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the hall effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the lord's character YM. The advance notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a advance notice icon first display area YA1, a advance notice icon second display area YA2, a advance notice icon third display area, and a advance notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative pattern display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the display area is increased and even if it is informed that the notice icon can be stocked. Of course, for example, the display area may be increased by one each time the display area being displayed is filled with the notice icon, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the lord's character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the lord's character YM. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. In, in the case where the lord's character YM possesses one notice icon when the lord's effect is started, one display area is displayed when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. It may be increased only by this, or all four displayable remaining display areas may be displayed. If the lord's character YM possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by only three when the lord's character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four displayable areas may be displayed. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative pattern display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the notice icon display area including the four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed (first notice) The icon display area) is reduced to display a new icon display area (second notification icon display area) including four new display areas in which the notification icon is not yet displayed, and the second notification icon is displayed. You may make it display the notice icon newly stocked in a display area. Here, the timing for displaying the second notice icon display area may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the notice icon display area 285 is replaced and the notice icon stock number is displayed. Alternatively, the notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be possible to give the prefetching notice by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

At the timing shown in FIG. 440(3), the lord's character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 440(4), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. A performance display that is thrown at is displayed. In this example of performance, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, it may be arranged so as not to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, the first decorative symbol display device. The notice icon entered in the predetermined warp entrance displayed in 208A may be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing in the predetermined position of the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 440(5), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 440(6). On the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed. Accordingly, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby giving a notice that the pseudo-relation effect may be executed in the future. After that, the lord's character YM frames out toward the lower part of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

In FIG. 440(7), the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2” as a stop, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

After that, as a result of the symbol variable display based on the suspension of the variable display of the first special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 440 (8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, "decoration 7-decoration 6 -Display is stopped by the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative pattern is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative patterns "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A continues to be continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 440(9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation. The displayed hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 440(10), the notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285A of the second notice symbol display device 208B is the first notice icon. The display in which the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is consumed is started. That is, the display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. When the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to cross the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 440(11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208A, and then is enlarged at the timing shown in FIG. 440(12). To be done. It should be noted that the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display is such that the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 440(11) is the first decorative symbol display. It may be the timing of moving to the center of the device 208A, or the timing of displaying the notice icon in an enlarged manner as shown in FIG. 440(12).

In FIG. 441 (13) that continues from FIG. 440 (12), the character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged and displayed hat. In addition, the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing at which the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed, or the timing before the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, at the timing of FIG. 441 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "Continue", and the notice is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative pattern is displayed over the two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative pattern is displayed on one display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 441 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is in the non-reach state.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (16), the enlarged-length character BC2 of the length appears, and is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B, As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed. The player is informed that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the length-long character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 441 (16), the longest length character BC2 does not have to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "display across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be that. Further, the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be integrally displayed. Further, display may be performed by moving from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 441 (18), the pseudo continuous symbol is framed in from the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and a display is displayed in which it moves slowly downward. At this time, the pseudo continuous symbols are displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 441 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (19). After that, for example, the pseudo continuous effect is performed in the manner described above and shown in FIG. 415 (31 ).

442 and 443 are diagrams showing, in stages, another modified example of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 444 shows the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of a digestive effect in steps. 442 to 444, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 442 and 443, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

In FIG. 442 (a1) to (a7-2), the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 440 to 441, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be vertically movable, When the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that the second decorative symbol display device 208B can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

As shown in FIG. 442(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. Then, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and variable display of symbols is performed. Chance roulette display area 28
The content displayed in 7 is as described above with reference to FIG. 439, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. Note that, as shown in FIG. 442(a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 442(a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 442(a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps with substantially the center on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. Note that the advance notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 442(a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 440(2) and described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 442(a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display region 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B moves up and returns to the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 442 (a5-1), the variable display of Toku-zu 1 ends and the display is stopped with the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" which is the result of the loss. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not erased, but it may be erased at a timing before the variable display of Toku-zu 1 ends. Also, in FIG. 442 (a5-1), the result of the misalignment is displayed only in the second decorative pattern, and the first decorative pattern is not displayed, but the first decorative pattern is displayed, and also in this first decorative pattern. The result of loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable during the symbol stop display. In addition, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interruption, regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 442(a5-2), even after the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A may be maintained in the overlapping state. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in the lowered state until the pattern variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are exhausted is finished, but at any timing 2 Whether to raise the decorative pattern display device 208B can be set appropriately. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 442 (a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the result of the loss "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". Is displayed in combination. Here, the first decorative design is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, and the second decorative design is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

FIG. 442 (a6-2) shows that after that, the two reservations have been exhausted and the variable display of symbols that is the target of prefetching has started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative design display device 208B, the variable display of the first decorative design is performed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208A, the variation of the second decorative design. The display is done.

After that, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is consumed, the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged as shown in FIG. 442 (a7-2). Then, it is displayed so as to extend from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed throughout. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so as to be easily visible to the player. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may thereafter be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be kept in the lowered state until the symbol variation is completed.

442 (b1) ~ (b4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208), the notice icon display number display An example is shown in which a device 288 is provided. The notice icon display number display device 288 includes, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) of the notice icons displayed.

442 (b1) to (b3) in FIG. 414 (17) to (19) in FIG. 414 (17) is the same content of the effect, in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this example of the effect, A state is shown in which the numerical value changes in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 442(b1), since only one notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display number display device 288 displays "01" indicating the number. There is. At the timing shown in FIG. 442(b2), the lord's character YM throws three notice icons (a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 for a fan). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value displayed in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the lord's character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called gasse is displayed). Then, when the above three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 442(b3), the value is updated and “04” is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. To be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 442 (b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of notice icons displayed is reduced by one, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “03”. The timing at which the value of the notice icon display number display device is decreased may be the timing before the notice icon is consumed, may be the same as the notice icon is consumed, or the notice icon may be displayed. The timing may be after digestion. It should be noted that, as shown by enclosing with a broken line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is exhausted, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this example of performance, the number of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7-segment. However, for example, an operation by a light emitting unit such as an LED or a movable unit such as a production movable body, for example, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, voice, decorative symbol display device (decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and others) The number of displayed notice icons may be notified by a decorative pattern display device or the like).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 443(c1) to (c9) use two display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 440 to 441. However, they are different in that they use the same size display device. In FIG. 443, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 443(c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to show that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching. The mode is a default display mode, like the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are It is arranged so as to substantially overlap. Then, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are reserved. “2” and “0” are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 443(c1). At the timing shown in, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. The chance roulette display area 287 described above is displayed in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 443(c1). It is shown. Further, the background display is also greatly displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

As shown in FIG. 443(c1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, the second decorative symbol display device 208D displays the first decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 443(c2). It descends to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C, which was performing the background display, is switched to a display including the notice icon display area 285B, and is derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stock). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the display mode at the time of displaying the notice icon is changed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol becomes small and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

In FIG. 443(c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. .. At the timing shown in FIG. 443(c3), since the number of reservations is one, the special reservation 1 second reservation number display H1 displays “1” to that effect.

FIG. 443(c4) shows the state when the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested. That is, it is notified that the notice of the chance eye is given by the notice icon I7 of the shuriken being digested. At this time, effect display in which the notice icon is consumed is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, as shown in FIG. 443(c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of this loss is an opportunity, and it is notified that the symbol variation display, which is highly likely to be a big hit, is being held. In other words, the pre-reading notice is given by displaying this chance opportunity.

FIG. 443(c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat has been digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 has started. That is, it announces that the second pseudo-announcement will be made. As the notice icon I6 of the second hat is consumed, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 443(c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 443(c8), the decorative design is displayed from the first decorative design display device 208C to the second decorative design display device 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative design display device 208C. And, it will be displayed on the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, as shown in FIG. 443(c9), the bancho character BC appears outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C in response to the end of the second hat notice icon I6, and the stop display is displayed. The effect display that pushes up the right pattern being displayed is performed, and the player is informed that the second pseudo continuous effect may be started. At this time, the guard length character BC is displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 443(c9), when the decorative design is displayed large, for example, a large design in which a numerical design and a character image are integrated is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When a small decorative design is displayed, a small design consisting only of numerical designs is displayed, and a large design and a small design are displayed in different display modes, but a large design and a small design are displayed. It is also possible to make the display mode the same by changing only the size.

In addition, in this effect example, when the notice icon display area 285B is displayed, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. The first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may both be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved in the respective directions away from each other, in which case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that the character objects arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized, and further, the character objects can be moved so as to project forward. You may. You may make it maintain such a state until all the notice icons are exhausted.

FIG. 443(d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 443(d), a first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. Display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but have a slightly smaller width. The three decorative pattern display devices may have the same size.

The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 443(d), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and particularly, the notice icon second display area YA2. The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed on is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208F and the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, a notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbol is displayed on one decorative symbol display device for each symbol column. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is the third decorative symbol display. It is displayed on device 208G. Note that there may be a decorative pattern display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable to the embodiments described so far as well as the embodiments described below.

FIG. 444 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 444, a first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. , And the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction, but are slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with the frame portions protruding at the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side and the right end side. A frame portion is provided so as to protrude from each. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are respectively configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are in positions closest to each other, It is possible to display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be coated.

Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

FIG. 444(e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 416(47) and covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in FIG. 444(e1), while the swordsman reach is being executed, the 1,000-box icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed and a notice is given that the production will shift to a more reliable production. Is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 444(e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in the directions in which they approach each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digesting the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 444(e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. It becomes a state. Then, at this time, the reach transition effect as shown in FIG. 416 (49) and described above is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. That is, the reach effect display that has been executed across the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J becomes slightly darker, and the lord's character appears in the cut-in display, and the reach effect being performed. The display is cut. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative pattern and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 444(e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect is started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

Then, as shown in FIG. 444(e6), a button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is informed that the player can operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the reduced decorative design is displayed at the lower right corner of the second decorative design display device 208I.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 444(e7), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 2" over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1".

Then, as shown in FIGS. 444(e8) to (e9), all are once hidden, and in that state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotates 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in directions away from each other and return to the initial position, at the timing shown in FIG. 444(e10), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display of the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 444 (e11-1), the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” that has been fluctuating is removed. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, and is displayed as a result of losing.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, display is started at which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 444 (e11-2). That is, a display is performed in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. In this way, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate even if the notice icon is consumed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 454 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed, and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative pattern is reduced and displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208H and the third decorative pattern display device 208J and displayed again and again, and then a combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit (for example, "decoration 1-decoration The combination of decorative patterns of "1-decoration 1" is derived and displayed.

FIG. 444(e7′) shows an example in which, when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in FIG. It is a figure. That is, when the player operates the effect button 136, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 444(e7′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather character is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, a combination of decorative patterns "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to the original position (for example, the initial position).

FIG. 444(e7″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of production when it is performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 444(e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also has these. It is also possible to rotate together with. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured, or separately. It may be configured as a body and configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be rotated in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the player operates the effect button 136 after the display shown in FIG. 6(e6) is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The devices 208J move in directions away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 444(e7′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third. The decorative pattern display device 308J can be displayed in a state where the horizontal widths of the respective display screens are aligned.

FIG. 445 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another modification of the increase effect and the digest effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 445, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is made in each of the transmission regions of each layer. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 445, the first layer panel arranged on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 445, the light guide plate I
L is shown surrounded by a broken line. Further, the number of layers of the panel of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case where it is configured by one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be configured to be different by changing the pattern of lens cut. Further, in FIG. 445, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 445, the hold icon that is the subject of the prefetching notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for the purpose of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

As shown in FIG. 445(f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variable icon display area 280 and In the hold icon display area 281, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part of the display screen, and the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed on the lower right corner of the display screen. The content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above with reference to FIG. 439, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 445(f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. 445(f2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a dark display is displayed. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 445 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon by the dark display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (lights off), and the dark display in the decorative pattern display device 208 ends. The dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 445 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While displaying the movement toward, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, whereby stock production of the notice icon is performed. You may want to be told.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 445 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, dark display is performed and guidance is performed. Stock production of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise to cause the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into a first layer panel and a second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated to rotate the first layer panel. The layer panel may not be rotated, or the first layer panel may be rotated together with the second layer panel.

After that, as shown in FIG. 445 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 to simulate the future. It announces that continuous production will be executed.

FIG. 445(g) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been consumed. As shown in FIG. 445(g), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, at that timing. The notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

In FIG. 445(h), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock production of the notice icon is executed). It shows the situation of giving advance notice. As shown in FIG. 445(h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of symbols is performed in the chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and as a result of the variable display of the symbols in the chance roulette display area 287, The advance notice icon I6 is announced.

FIG. 445(i) shows another example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 445(i), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate A pattern imitating the effect image is formed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and also causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer to emit light. The notice icon is being digested as well. At this time, when the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are made different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel and the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

FIG. 445(j) shows another example of the notice icon digesting effect. As shown in FIG. 445(j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, after moving the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to the center of the display screen, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. The screen is enlarged and displayed, and at this timing, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, thereby performing the notice icon digesting effect. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

FIG. 446 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon digesting effect. 446(1) to (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I10 for the fan and changed to the notice icon I31 for the drink. 416 (44) to (54) are the same as those in FIG. 416. Therefore, only the portions different from the above description with reference to FIG. In addition, in this effect example, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced in accordance with the effect content. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between the normal position (default position) and the protruding position.

As shown in FIG. 446(1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I31 for this drink is a notice icon for giving a notice that the content to be rendered is changed by digestion.

At the timing shown in FIG. 446(11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 446(12). Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 446(14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display of sprinkling the content of the drink on the button image 136a is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (16), on the decorative symbol display device 208, after the image of the liquid disappears, a protrusion button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protrusion position is displayed. At this time, the state is before the start of operation reception of the effect button 136.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 446 (17), after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 446 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button reception time meter decreases. Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 446(16), or the protruding button image 136b. The timing may be before the display of, or may be the timing after the projection button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 446(13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon I31 of the drink. Further, in this example of performance, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation acceptance period of the production button 136. In addition, during the period other than the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136, for example, it lights up in a mode of notifying that it is a period other than the operation acceptance period (for example, lights in blue). You may make it light in the mode which alerts to that effect (for example, lights in red).

FIG. 447 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of effect using the movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 447(a1) to (a3) show that when the notice icon is stocked, the effectable movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the stock of the notice icon. There is. FIG. 447(a1) shows the same display as FIG. 435(1), but the production movable body 224C simulating a placard with the character display of "STOCK" on the right side of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the production device. It is arranged so as to be hidden behind the 206.

FIG. 447(a2) shows that the effect movable body 224C is moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to the visible position which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a notice is given that any one of the plurality of types of notice icons will be stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, or a notification may be given by voice or a lamp. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of effect movable bodies 224C according to the type of the notice icon and notify the type of the notice icon stocked according to the type of the effect movable body 224C that appears.

Then, as shown in FIG. 447 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the stocked notice icon. FIG. 447(a3) shows that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

In FIG. 447(b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that are rotatable around the depth direction as rotation axes are arranged in the upper and lower neighborhoods of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable member 224Da with the character "large", the fifth effect movable member 224De with the asterisk symbol, and the "board". The second effect movable bodies 224Db to which the characters are attached are arranged side by side in the lateral direction, and in the vicinity of the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable bodies 224Dc to which the characters “shake” are attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df marked with an asterisk and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd marked with the character “Mai” are arranged side by side in the lateral direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate according to the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 447(b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, the rotation of the produced movable bodies may be stopped, or the number of produced movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the notice icons stocked may be rotated. Good.

FIGS. 447 (c1) to (c6) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is informed that the prefetch mode has been entered. In this example of performance, a special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is exhausted, the mode shifts to the pre-reading mode informing that the variable display of the special map which is likely to be a big hit is being held.

FIG. 447(c1) shows a state in which the special notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This production movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the production device 206 via the rotation axis ax1. .. Further, the forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via the rotation axis ax2.

When the notice icon I41 for special training is digested and the prefetch mode is started, as shown in FIG. 447 (c2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character display “special training in preparation” is displayed on the right in the strip-shaped scroll display area. Is scrolled from to the left. As a result, the player is notified that the read-ahead mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the production movable body 224, an initial position in which the upper arm 224a does not overlap the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position (first position) that covers the front surface side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. A reciprocating operation (prefetch operation) is performed between the two. The prefetch operation by the effect movable body 224 is made to return to the initial position once during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, during execution of the prefetch operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate. However, in addition to the upper arm 224a, the forearm 224b may also operate, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm does not operate. Only the part 224b may operate.

FIG. 447(c3) shows a state in which two "decorations 1" are aligned and a reach state is formed during the variable display of the special figure 1 which is the target of prefetching. The look-ahead operation is also continued here.

FIG. 447(c4) shows a state in which special training reach as a super reach effect is started. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the scroll display of "preparing for special training" is finished, and the character display of "starting special training" indicating that the special training reach has started is displayed. In addition, after the production movable body 224 once returns to the initial position, the upper arm portion 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 447(c5), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 447(c6). Then, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high.

FIG. 448 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a figure showing stepwise another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect. Is. In FIG. 448, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 448, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

Since FIG. 448(1) shows the same display as FIG. 435(1) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 448(2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6.

In this effect example, the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 448(3), but the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat has not been thrown yet, and FIG. 448(4) As shown in FIG. 7, in a state in which the lord's character YM stands by at the throwing position, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 448(5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by moving animations. The displayed hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 changes to the special figure 1 Becomes the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The lord's character YM still stands by at the throwing position.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 448(6), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetch is suspended, the notice icon is announced during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notice icon is not stocked. Not, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variable display ends and the next symbol variable display starts. It should be noted that when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, a notice is displayed that the notice icon will be displayed during the symbol variation display that is being executed, but a so-called gaze notice that does not display the notice icon is given. May be. In this case, for example, the lord's character YM may be terminated before the variable display of the symbols to be read ahead starts, for example, one symbol before the symbol variable display to be read ahead. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the lord's character YM may be terminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is terminated, for example, the super reach which is performed during the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching is started. The display of the lord's character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the lord's character YM may be continuously displayed even after the notice icon is stocked. Also, in the state where the lord's character is on standby, if a big hit occurs in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing of deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the swinging fluctuation is being displayed), the lord's character may continue the standby display with the notice icon, or may be deleted.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 448(7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 448(7) to (10) are shown in FIGS. 413(9) to 413(9). Since it is the same as (12) except that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is displayed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 448(11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 448(11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the outlier is confirmed. There is. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 448(12), the hold icon h11 of Toku-zu 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and changes to the variable icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative symbol has started, as shown in FIG. 448 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is performed.

FIG. 449 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the advance notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 449, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 449, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

FIGS. 449(a1) to (a6) show that the notice icon is stocked after the effect of giving notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

FIG. 449(a1) shows a state in which the boring effect that is performed during the symbol variation display that is being executed is started when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 449(a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 449(a1), when the strike is acquired in the bowling game, the character display of “Strike item Get” indicating that the item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this example of performance, when a strike is won in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, bowling effect by the lord's character is started. The contents of the mission and the success reward displayed on the explanation display unit 288 are related to the stock of the notice item, for example, the pending display is related to the change to the display mode of the prefetch notice, and It may be related to a notice about the symbol variable display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a special effect display that is displayed only for the notice regarding the stock of the notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that the notice of the advance notice icon being stocked is given by performing the bowling effect as shown in FIG. 449(a1). In addition, this bowling effect may be a special effect that is provided only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used in the advance notice effect in the symbol variation display being executed, or may be used as another prefetch advance notice. You may be asked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 449(a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect has not ended, and the character display of "following the next change" is displayed, which indicates that it is continuously performed in the symbol change display to be executed next. It should be noted that “Strike item Get” showing the mission and the success reward thereof is also displayed on the upper portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 449(a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball thrown by the lord's character rolls on the lane toward the aligned ten bowling pins. , Is fueling the expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 449(a4), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the image of the scene where the strike has been taken is displayed together with the character display of “strike”, and it is assumed that the mission has been achieved, and as shown in FIG. 449(a5). As shown in the figure, a character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 449(a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is reported that stock has been made. In this way, in this effect example, the notice item is not displayed (stock) during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetch is suspended, and the notice item is displayed. Has been announced.

As shown in FIG. 449(b), a wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-mentioned bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 449(c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped to the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, and the notice icon display area 285C that displays the notice icon in the lower half is displayed to perform the above-mentioned bowling effect in the wipe display area WP2 and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. You may make it display on.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 449, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the bowling effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during fluctuation display). Background display may be displayed, or a background display different from this may be displayed, and for example, the state shown in FIG. 449(a2) may be displayed.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 449(b), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. .. Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 449(c), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be ended, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

FIG. 450 is a diagram showing, step by step, another modified example of the effect of increasing the number of advance notice icons applicable to this embodiment. In the above-mentioned embodiment, the one in which the special display of the special figure 2 is preferentially displayed over the special figure 1 has been described, but in this effect example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game. Nonetheless, the special figure variation game according to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the variation of the starting mouth winning order in which the starting mouth winning order is started. It should be noted that this production example can also be applied to the case where the special figure 2 priority variation is performed. Further, in FIG. 450, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 450, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold that is a target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the second hold icon h11, it has a default display mode. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h11, the third hold icon h12, and the fifth hold icon h13 are displayed in the first special figure starting port 230. The second holding icon h21 and the fourth holding icon h22 are the holding icons showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that is won and held, and the second special figure starting port 232 is won and held. It is a hold icon showing a variable display of special figure 2.

The effect shown in FIG. 450 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variable display, which is the object of prefetching, is suspended, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rule of Midaduji and reaches the destination. It is a production (Amida production) for acquiring a notice item.

First, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the variable display of the special diagram 2 is displayed. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Amida effect has been started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 450(a1-1), the character SB of the sabotani is placed at any one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. And a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and an icon IX for a loss are placed for each end point of the three horizontal lines. In addition, an appropriate number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of holdings at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the character of Sabohani moves on the line according to the rule of Mida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stocked. Then, when the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Then, every time the symbol variable display is started, the character SB of the sabotani moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that the character SB of the sabotani may be moved to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-repeating is performed. For example, when the pseudo-repeating occurs, the character SB advances to a position two vertical lines ahead. You may do the same. Further, it is also possible to proceed to the vertical line two or more ahead with one symbol variation display. The effect as shown in FIG. 450 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or the sub display device 208K as described above with reference to FIGS. 449(c) and (d), for example. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the mami effect even during execution of the super reach. Then, for example, there may be a case where an effect of increasing the number of notice icons can be performed in parallel during the super reach.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 450(a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative pattern starts variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 450(a2-1), when the symbol variable display is started, the character SB of Sabohani starts moving from the start point of the horizontal line in the upper row of the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and a state in which the horizontal line in the upper row and the horizontal line in the middle row are connected by the vertical line is displayed, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 450(a2-1), the middle horizontal line is reached halfway.

After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, the variable display of the special figure 2 continues, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by moving animations. To be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 450(a3-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the second vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the lower row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being erased, it was found that this vertical line was cut in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the horizontal line in the middle row to the horizontal line in the lower row. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani is in the middle row. Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

Then, when the variable display of the special map 2 is finished, the variable display of the special map 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the moving animations. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 450(a4-1), when the character SB of the sabotani reaches the third vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being eliminated, the vertical line connects the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row. Therefore, the Sabohani character SB follows the horizontal line in the middle row from the horizontal line in the upper row by the vertical line according to the rule of Amida Lottery. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of Sabohani reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 450(a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating the acquisition is performed, the Amida effect is finished, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 450(a6). To be done.

It should be noted that in this example of performance, as shown in FIG. 450(a1-1) and described above, one of the plurality of different types of notice icons is selected, but, for example, FIG. As shown in 2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged at all the end points of the horizontal line, or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged at all the end points of the horizontal line as shown in FIG. 450(a1-3). Good. In this way, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is confirmed that the displayed notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 450 (a1-3), the fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon indicating that an effect for giving notice that the big hit will be settled is performed as described above, so that the player It may be possible to further increase the expectation for a big hit. The effect as shown in FIG. 450(a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 450(a1-4), the icon IX for losing is not arranged, but the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I10 for a fan, and the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes are arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines. It may be determined that one of the notice icons is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind.

Further, as shown in FIG. 450(a1-5), the sabotani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I10 of the fan) arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines. Alternatively, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand boxes are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 450(a1-5), since the fan advance notice icon I10 is included, it is assured that an effect for giving advance notice that the big hit will be settled will be performed, so that the player makes a big hit. It may be possible to further increase the expectation of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 450(a1-6), the notice icon of the lord of which the type of the notice icon is not clear at the end of each horizontal line (the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, The notice icon I3) of the Lord of 3 may be arranged. In this way, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, expectations can be improved. Also, the notice icon of the lord has different colors depending on the type as described above, and the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the sense of expectation for the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color of the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the third palace's notice icon I3, which is the red lord's notice icon, is more likely to be changed to a "pseudo-relation" confirmation notice icon than the "pseudo-relation" confirmation notice icon. The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon of, can be changed to a notice icon in which "pseudo-ream" is not fixed.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 450(a3-1) and as described above, it is difficult to specify the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani by hiding the central portion of the vertical line with smoke, but for example, FIG. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke and the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani may be specified at the time when the Amida effect is started. This allows the player to recognize in advance which of the notice icons will be stocked, and thus may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line on which the character SB of the sabotani is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

Further, in this example of production, as described above with reference to FIG. 450(a2-1), the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida production is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 450 (a2-2a), during execution of the Amida effect, the areas in which the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines are displayed are hidden by smoke, and then, shown in FIG. ), the notice icons respectively arranged at the end points of the horizontal lines may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 450 (a2-2a), the lost icon IX is changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the content of the Amida effect is promoted. Note that, for example, some or all of the notice icons respectively placed at the end points of the horizontal lines are changed to the missing icon IX or the notice icon of a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida production are demoted. You may

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 450(a4-1), the center portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the character SB of the sabotani can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), the smoke that hides a part of the vertical line extends in the vertical direction during execution of the Amida effect, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 450 (a4-2a). Vertical lines may be increased or decreased before and after. In the example illustrated in FIG. 450 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, it is suggested that one of the hat notice icon I6 and the fan notice icon I10 may be acquired. Then, the third vertical line is erased, and it is assured that the fan notice icon I10 is stocked.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 450(a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut midway, the lost icon IX is not selected. As shown in 450(a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut, and therefore, the icon IX with the loss is selected, and after the Amida effect is finished, the state shown in FIG. 450(a4-3a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 7, it may be notified that no notice icon is stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

In addition, in the above-mentioned Amida effect, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice about the symbol variable display which is the target of the pre-reading, depending on the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

FIG. 451 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a figure showing stepwise another effect example of the notice icon increasing effect. is there. In FIG. 451, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 451, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of the prefetch, and the hold display is the display mode of the prefetch notice (hold icon of Sabohani). It is different from the above-described embodiment in that

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 451(1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed on the upper part. Note that in FIG. 451(1), no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display regions 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 451(1), the first special symbol display device 212 is performing variable display of the symbols, and accordingly, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The variable display of the symbols is being performed.

Further, in FIG. 451(1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Therefore, all of the two holding icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode (round unpatterned and white display mode).

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon h13 of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. It is displayed to inform that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special diagram 1 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetching notice (the display mode of Sabohani) instead of the default display mode.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (3), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, when the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 451 (4), the holding icons h11, h12, h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold of the special figure 1. It becomes the icon h11, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the second hold icon h1 of the special figure 1.
2, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. FIG. 451(5) shows that the symbol variable display is being continued.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord's character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord's effect is started. Here, the lord's character YM possesses the hat notice icon I6. In this way, in this production example, the notice icon is displayed (stock) in the symbol variation display that is started next to the symbol variation display that is being performed when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. The production of a certain lord has started.

Then, after the lord's character YM is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 451(7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed at the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 451(8). An effect display that is thrown toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 451(9), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 451(10). On the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the lord's character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and has a happy expression is performed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 451 (11) to (12), display is performed in which the lord's character YM is framed out toward the bottom of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (13), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 451 (14), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the moving animation and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. ..

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 451 (15), the decorative pattern display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and is lost. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 451 (16), the hold icon which is moved and displayed by the movement animation and which is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. That is, the variable display of the symbols that have been read ahead is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative pattern has started, as shown in FIG. 451 (17), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays it in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is performed. As described above, according to this effect example, it can be said that the pre-reading notice using the notice icon and the pre-reading notice using the hold icon are simultaneously performed.

FIG. 452 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and stepwise other examples of the notice icon increasing effect and the digesting effect. FIG. In FIG. 452, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 452, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

FIGS. 452(a1) to 452(a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect for notifying in advance that the notice icon is stocked is performed. As shown in FIG. 452(a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display is out of order. The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any display area.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 452(a2-1), it is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is held at the display position of the first holding icon h11. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of special figure 1 and the third hold icon h13. The hold icon at the display position becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 452(a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the next symbol variation display. Specifically, on this placard PL1, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed following "at the next fluctuation", and further, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed following that. Warns that the product will always be stocked during the next symbol fluctuation display.

After that, when the variable time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variable display is ended, and the next variable display of the special figure 1 is started, for example, a hall effect is performed during the execution of the symbol variable display, As shown in 452(a3-1), the hat notice icon I6 is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. This allows the player to recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 will be stocked, which may allow the player to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the placard PL1 is displayed to notify that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 452(a2-2) is displayed. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed following "in the next change", and further, "ga stock" is displayed following this, but the question mark is added. In this case, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next variable display.

When the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, no production is performed regarding the stock of the notice icon, as shown in FIG. 452(a3-2). It should be noted that although production related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, hall effect) may be performed, in this case, a so-called gasse stock production in which the notice icon is not stocked is performed.

452 (b1) to (b3) in FIG. 452 shows that the pre-reading mode, which is one of the pre-reading notices, is being performed during the symbol changing display that is being executed when the symbol changing display that is the target of the pre-reading is suspended. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 452(b1), the game ball is won in the first special figure starting port 230 and the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetch is suspended, and the prefetch notice is displayed as the display mode of the third suspend icon h13. The hold icon in the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special figure 1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 452(b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the look-ahead mode, which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variable display that is likely to be a big hit is being held, is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 452(b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “intense heat approaching” scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Is displayed.

After that, when the variable time of the special figure 1 elapses and the variable display ends, and the next variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 452(b3), during the execution of the symbol variable display. The lord's presentation is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to give a pre-reading notice by changing the background display in addition to the pre-reading notice by the stock of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 452(c1) to (c2), during the symbol variation display that is being executed at the time when the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead is suspended, the hall effect etc. is performed and the notice icon is displayed. May be stocked.

452(d1) to 452(d3) show that stocking of the notice icon and digestion are performed during execution of the same symbol variable display. That is, the stocking and digesting of the notice icon relating to the notice effect being performed during the variable display of the symbol can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 452(d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the lord's effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat displays the notice icon I6 as shown in FIG. 452(d2). The notice icon is first stocked in the first display area YA1 of the area 285. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 452(d3), the notice icon digesting effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

As shown in FIGS. 452(e1) to 452(e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by the production of the lord, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may do it.

FIG. 453 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the effect centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of this in steps. In FIG. 453, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the general figure holding lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 453, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is the hold of the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching, but the display mode is For example, like the first hold icon h11, it has a default display mode.

FIGS. 453(a1) to 453(a3) show that the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are shared.

As shown in FIG. 453(a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “castle town”. There is. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display of the details of the notice, explanation of the appearing characters, or the like may be performed, or the notice display may be performed. Good. In this way, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as the explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 453(a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the above-mentioned hall effect is performed and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 453(a2), on the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the notice image of "stock" is additionally added, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 453(a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is changed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the first icon display area YA1.

As shown in FIGS. 453(b1) to 453(b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat appearing due to the lord's effect is not stocked and is kept as it is. It may be digested. As a result, it is possible to perform the digesting effect of the notice icon related to the notice that is being displayed in the symbol variation display.

FIGS. 453(c1) to (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 453(c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end of the display screen, and a second notice icon display area is provided at the right end of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area in which a notice icon other than the button notice icon is displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAL1, a notice icon second display area YAL2, a notice icon third display area YAL3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is shown in the notice icon third display area YAL3. It is displayed. The second notice icon display area 285F also has four display areas (a notice icon first display area YAR1, a notice icon second display area YAR2, a notice icon third display area YAR3, and a notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 453(c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this example of performance, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. That is, that is, when the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, and when the number is smaller than that. Even when the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted, the reliability of the jackpot may be different. Well, for example, the larger the number of the second button notice icons I11 in stock, the more likely it is to be a big hit. It should be noted that all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may not be consumed, for example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two may be consumed. In this case, In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being consumed. Also, the first notice icon display area 285E may be configured so that the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the number of notice items stocked.

FIGS. 453(d1) to 453(d3) show another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 453(d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed in a small size overlapping the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is displayed as the first hold. It is displayed in a small size overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which the notice icon is included in the hold icon and may be displayed is shown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 453 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced display hat displayed in the variable icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and the character display of "stock" is added, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. To be done. In addition, in this effect example, the effect of stocking the notice icon displayed in the change icon h0 is performed every time the suspension of the variable display of the symbol is exhausted, but the timing of stocking the notice icon is set to this. Not limited.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 453(e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all the variation icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the variation icons or the hold icons.

FIGS. 453(f1) to (f3) show an example in which the advance notice icon may not be stocked even though the advance notice icon is displayed on the variable icon h0.

FIG. 453(f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 453(d1), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

In this effect example, thereafter, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 453(f2), and then, as shown in FIG. 453(f3), the variation icon is displayed. Although h0 is deleted, at this time, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also removed together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. In this way, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked even if the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon or the hold icon.

FIG. 453(g1) to FIG. 453(g3) show how, when a certain notice icon is consumed, an effect is obtained in which the same effect as that when a plurality of notice icons are consumed is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 453(g1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the bouquet notice icon I51 as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I51 of this bouquet includes two or more of the plurality of types of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 412(b). Which notice icon is included? It is difficult to specify.

Then, as shown in FIG. 453(g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is consumed, the bouquet notice icon I51 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen, and then is enlarged and displayed. It

After that, as shown in FIG. 453 (g3), the notice icon I51 of the bouquet changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the kind of the notice icon included in the notice icon I51 of the bouquet is changed. Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation as to which type of notice icon is included, while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the notice icon may be displayed continuously even after the symbol is stopped and displayed. Not only when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, but when the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed without the variable display of the symbol being displayed, the stock status is displayed even during the demo display. May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked, regardless of whether the variable display of symbols is held or not.

Further, it may be possible to give a notice of the time until the notice icon is displayed.

Further, the stocked notice icon may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the stocked notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the fan notice icon I10. , When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed due to a combination of chances while the hat notice icon I6 is stocked, the notice icon I6 of the hat may be changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. .. On the contrary, the stocked notice icon may be demoted (downgraded).

Further, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is consumed may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is performed. While the fan notification icon I10 is changed, an effect may be performed, or in the pseudo effect that the hat notification icon I6 is consumed and executed, the number of pseudo operations may be increased. Good. In addition, conversely, an effect of degrading (leveling down) the effect display performed when the notice icon is consumed may be performed.

Also when the button notice icon is displayed, the button holding icon may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

Further, depending on the length of the symbol variation display time, whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon may be determined.

The length of the variable display time when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not given may be the same or different between the symbol variation display that is a big hit and the symbol variation display that is a loss.

Further, as the variation display time of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 which is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, a variation time of a length that does not stock the notice icon may be selected.

Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the advance notice of stocking the advance notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the effect data table may be set not to give the notice of stocking the notice icon.

Further, when the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is interrupted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is executed, the variation time of the length of stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked notice icon may be consumed in the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be consumed during the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 before the interruption is performed. The notice icon may be kept in stock and not digested, or may be configured to be digested.

Further, the types of the notice icons are not limited to those described above or those described below, and various types can be adopted.

For example, as a notice icon, an item for customization may be displayed. When the item for customization is consumed, for example, the number of selectable BGMs, the number of selectable backgrounds, and the player's selection are increased. The number of possible effect modes (for example, one-shot notification mode) may be increased.

Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed. When the item for effect selection is consumed, for example, BGM can be changed, effect mode can be changed, volume setting, The brightness may be settable.

Also, for example, a user setting clearing item may be displayed, and when this user setting clearing item is consumed, for example, the user setting may be made clear or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do it.

Further, for example, the effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is consumed, for example, it is possible to end the prefetch mode or the effect mode. Alternatively, the pre-reading mode or the effect mode may be confirmed before ending.

Also, for example, points-acquiring items and level-up gift items may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points may be gifted or the level may be increased. You may

Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, and, for example, when the lord's icon is consumed, the lord's VS swordsman reach may be performed.

Further, for example, the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is exhausted, the icon "next notice" is displayed, and the notice effect for "next notice" is displayed. May be started.

Further, for example, there may be an icon (divination icon) in which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that displays information regarding the island simultaneous production when it is consumed. For example, the countdown to the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production may be started, or the content of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Good.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that allows the store side customization when it is consumed. For example, even if it is possible to set the effect of producing an effect associated with the area of the installed game shop (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) or the name of the installed game shop. Good. For example, depending on the setting, the group notice character that appears in the Tohoku region mode (for example, Namahage group) and the group notice character that appears in the Chubu region mode (for example, Sachihoko group) can be different. There are cases.

Further, for example, there may be an icon for which the tutorial display is started when it is consumed.

Further, for example, there may be an icon for which the roulette effect is started when it is consumed. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed, a result indicating that a notice about the symbol variable display is given, and the like are displayed.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when it is consumed.

Next, a modified example of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 454 and 455. Here, FIG. 454 is a diagram showing step by step an example of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 455 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table related to notice items. Is.

FIG. 454 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure holding lamp 218 and a second special figure holding lamp 220. The illustration of the universal figure display device 210, the universal figure holding lamp 216, and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454(a), the reserved icon display area 281A of the special symbol 1 and the reserved icon display area 282A of the special symbol 2 are adjacent to each other below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the left and right. It is displayed as if. In FIG. 454(a), the number of reservations is 0 in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Further, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2, and the notice icon Ih of the princess is displayed. It should be noted that although the notice icons are displayed left-justified in the notice icon display area 285A, the display position of the notice icons is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may not be displayed as needed.

FIG. 454(b) shows a state in which two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of special figure 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side in the left alignment. Both of these hold icons h11 and h12 have default display modes.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 454(c), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, since the first hold has been exhausted, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left and becomes the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the game ball has won in the second special figure starting port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. This hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 454(d) comes, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. 1 is the display mode of the prefetch notice (the display mode displayed as "heat"). ) Changes to.

After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, when the timing shown in FIG. 454(e) is reached, the notice icon It of the lord and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. It That is, a display is being made in which the number of notice icons increases.

Then, as shown in FIG. 454(f), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is consumed. Then, the princess character HI accompanied by the balloons of "Atari" and "Question mark" is displayed. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 454(g), "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which means that the result is out of alignment. Is notified.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1, so at the timing shown in FIG. 454(h), the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is started. It In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, the notice icon Will not be digested and the notice icon will not be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variable display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the variable display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, it is possible not to display the notice icon and increase the display of the notice icon, or to display the notice icon and increase the notice icon. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, or any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of the special figure 2 may be displayed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. When the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When the dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 454(i), the display is stopped with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3", and it is notified that the result of the symbol variable display of special figure 2 is out of alignment. ..

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 454(j), after the suspended variable display of the special diagram 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is digested, and “Atari” and “Question mark” are displayed. A lord's character YI appears with a balloon of characters. The appearance timing of the lord's character YI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the start of the symbol variable display of the decorative symbol. Also, in FIG. 454(j), the notice icon Id of the evil officer is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display is being made in which the number of notice icons increases. Here, the timing at which the notice icon Id of the evil officer is additionally displayed may be before or after the display of the notice icon It of the Lord is started, or at the same time. May be

Then, as shown in FIG. 454(k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the evil vice notice icon are displayed. The Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil boss character DI appear. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. The timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the timing of appearance of the evil proxy character DI.

Then, at the timing of FIG. 454(m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. , It is reported that the big hit.

Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to execute the increase display and the exhaustion display of the notice icon in this example of performance will be described.

As shown in FIG. 455(A), when the jackpot determination result executed along with the start of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pending look-ahead of Toku-zu 1, 4 /50 probability of increasing the Lord's notice icon, 3/50 probability of increasing the Princess notice icon, and 2/50 of increasing the evil officer notice icon. .. On the other hand, 40/50 has the probability of displaying the notice icon of the lord's notice, 35% of the chances of displaying the notice icon of the princess, and 25/50 of the notice icon of the evil officer. Perform the digest display of. In addition, since the execution lottery for the increase display and the exhaustion display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time, or when the digest display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time. There is.

In addition, when the result of the big hit judgment which is executed with the start of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is out of line, as a result of the prefetching of the hold of special figure 1, the symbol fluctuation display which becomes the big hit is suspended. In this case, there is a 3/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Lord's notice icon, a 2/50 chance of displaying the increase of the Princess notice icon, and a 1/50 chance of displaying the evil prominence notice icon. Incremental display is executed. On the other hand, there is a 1/50 chance to execute the display of the Lord's notice icon, a 10/50 chance to execute the display of the Princess notice icon, and a 15/50 chance to show the evil representative notice icon. Perform the digest display of.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 455(B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 2 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pending look-ahead of Toku-zu 1 , With a probability of 25/50, the increase display of the Lord's notice icon is executed, with a probability of 20/50, the increase display of the Princess's notice icon is executed, and with a probability of 7/50, the increase display of the evil prominent notice icon. Execute. On the other hand, there is a 20/50 chance to execute the display of the Lord's notice icon, a 15/50 chance to execute the display of the Princess notice icon, and a 5/50 chance to show the evil representative notice icon. Perform the digest display of. In addition, for example, in a normal game state (non-electric power support state), in a pachinko machine which is not supposed to win the second special figure starting port 232, even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, It is also possible not to increase the display of the notice icon of No. and not display the digest of any notice icon.

In addition, when the big hit judgment result which is executed with the start of the variable display of the special figure 2 is out of order, regardless of the result of the prefetch of the hold of the special figure 1, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons. Not performed, and neither of the notice icons is displayed for digestion.

Note that, for example, when the electric power support state is terminated and one or more suspensions of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 remain, the notice display of the notice icon is not performed as a prefetch notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, the notice display may be increased and the display may be performed in accordance with the big hit determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 456 to 468. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiment described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far. That is, the effects shown in FIGS. 456 to 468 may be performed in combination with any of the effects shown and described in FIGS. 14 to 455. In other words, in the present embodiment, effects by mini-items (which may also be referred to as advance notice icons or advance notice items), effects by timer advance notice, effects by mini-games, and effects by chance-up timing meter are appropriately selected according to the progress of the game. It may be executed in combination. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 456 to 468 are basically used only for the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 456 to 468, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, Priority is given to the reference numerals 456 to 468.

456 to 468 are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 456 to 468, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 456 to 468 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. The width of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Note that the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbols for each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it is added here to make sure that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to perform variable display of, and perform multiple types of effect display. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 456 to 468, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern simulating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where the light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in FIGS. 456 to 466 and 468, the states of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 are shown. In the present embodiment, the POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device.

FIG. 456 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice icon increasing effect and the digesting effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 457 is a diagram showing stepwise the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 456. Is.

As shown in FIG. 456(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a reservation icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reservation icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 456(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two holding icons h11 and h12 have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information regarding the game and the effect is displayed (tutorial display), and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 456(a), "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation about the character of the Lord is given. Also, the first decorative symbol display device 208
In L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed. The UI section is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative pattern, but with the display region of the first decorative pattern. May overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or the explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed, in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when a certain stage is entered, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, when displaying a normal stage name in white, it is not as hot as displaying a red stage name, so this may also be a kind of notice.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 456(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general officer 224Fb each have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 456(b), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting opening 230, the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the variable display of the symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, the display mode with a blue circle). At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Pong" to notify that the pre-reading notice is displayed by the hold display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 456(c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the result of the display is off. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 456(d), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon in the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to change icon h0, and the second hold icon h1
The hold icon at the display position of 2 becomes the first hold icon h11, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, which respectively move to the corresponding pedestals. .. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 456(d), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 456(e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the lord's character sets the bomb-like icon (bomb icon) I61. It is shown trying to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that, when thrown by the lord's character, has various effects on the effect. In addition, the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed in an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of throwing or may be identifiable from the beginning. In addition, there is an animation related to the notice icon with a high expectation of jackpot when digested (high expectation notice icon) and an animation related to the notice icon with a low expectation of jackpot when digested to higher than the notice animation with high expectation. The animation display modes may be the same or different.

At the timing shown in FIG. 456(f), the appearance of the lord's character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (g), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." There is an explanation of what happens. The timing at which the display on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be earlier than the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the bomb icon I61. The timing may be after the movement to. As described above, in the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of explanation display may be displayed in one symbol variable display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 456(h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts, the burst bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman's notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 456(i). .. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is an icon for giving a notice to shift to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform the fact. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of 1 to 1 to many to many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 456(j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 456(k), the character's character throws the bomb icon I61. The animation ends. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize that it is more difficult to visually recognize than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front surface side of the tutorial display section TT1. To put it another way, by making the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, it is easy for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the swordsman's notice icon I62. May be possible. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial and to concentrate on the symbol variable display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur in the future or in the future.
Note that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be arranged not only at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 but also at a position near the tutorial display section TT1. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the content not related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 at all. The content may be content related to the current performance, or content not related to the current performance. In FIG. 456(j), although the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display relating to the notice icon and is related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed. Although it is not displayed in connection with, but is related to the content of the explanation by chance, the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be configured to be performed. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The swordsman's notice icon I62 arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 is digested in the pattern variation display which is the target of prefetching, as described later. In addition, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be consumed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 is resolved before the pattern variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, the one in which the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display portion TT1 has been described, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display portion ST1.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 456(l), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, as shown in FIG. 456(l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display portion TT1 is changed from "The notice icon is exhausted..." to "Panda is the master of the lord". , The relationship between the lord's character and the panda character is explained. That is, in this effect example, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be changed to a new content while the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display is started in a state where the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display section TT1. Note that the display change timing of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative design is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the timing of the display change of the tutorial display section TT1 is a timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display section TT1 displays a plurality of explanatory displays in one symbol variable display. It can be said that it may be started.

FIG. 456(m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, also on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 456(m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "When General Yatsushiro moves...". It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb operate.

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 456(n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 456(n), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 456 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, to form the reach state. To be done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, which fuels an expectation as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 will be consumed. By doing so, it may be possible to make the player covet the early use of the notice icon. At this time, the effect display is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62. The effect display may not be performed. This effect display depends on the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore, the explanation display may be able to be focused on.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 456(q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 has moved upward and is being digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of “paquine” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. As a result, the overlapping state due to the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is resolved, and the player may easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 457(a) subsequent to FIG. 456(q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a message notifying that the super reach (swordsman reach) will be developed. That is, in this example of performance, the development of the swordsman reach is announced by the digestion of the swordsman's announcement icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 457(b), the light-emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which shows that the swordsman reach has a high reliability for the big hit. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

FIG. 457(c) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 457(c), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, so that the display position of the variable icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may frame out after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may frame out together with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, when the explanation display is being performed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are erased at the same time. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted may be different.

In FIG. 457(d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 457(e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that the operation acceptance state is set. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 457(f), as shown in FIG. 457(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player goes up with " The cut-in image to which the character display "" is added is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene.

Then, as shown in FIG. 457(h), the main character loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 4(i), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. The combination of decorative patterns is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 457(j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -Decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns, and the display result of the discontinuation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". If a notice icon (for example, the fan notice icon I10 described above) is displayed in stock, which is displayed after losing the display once, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town, which is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

FIG. 458 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of the notice icon increasing effect and the digesting effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 459 is a diagram showing a step sequence of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 458. Is. Note that FIGS. 458(a) to (l) are the same as FIGS. 456(a) to (l), and therefore description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 458(m) shows a state in which the symbol variable display that is performed immediately before the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 458(m), the notice icon pattern CS (may be referred to as "decoration C") displayed as "C" in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" The temporary stop display is made by the combination of the decorative patterns of "6". When this notice icon pattern CS is displayed in a derived manner, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later will be stocked. When the notice icon design CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be always stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon pattern CS may include an image (including the enlarged/reduced image itself) imitating the notice icon I63 of increasing the chance, and it may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the notice icon acquisition animation based on the pattern may be any one that can display the notice icon in a identifiable manner. In addition, the notice icon pattern CS and the chance increase notice icon I63 may not correspond to each other. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be larger or smaller than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of the notice icon displayed at the moment of the animation related to the character of the lord (for example, the throwing animation) is the notice displayed at the moment of the animation related to the symbol (for example, the animation performed by displaying the notice icon symbol CS). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons that are displayed when both animations are triggered. A certain notice icon may be displayed as both a design and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed at two triggers, and two fluctuations may be stocked at different triggers, or may not be stocked at different triggers. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in any symbol row. Although the variable icon h0 is erased here, it may be displayed. Further, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "When General Yatsushiro moves...".

As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 458(n), the chance up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon design CS, and FIG. ), it is moved to the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 and arranged (stock). Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Paquine" to notify that the chance-up notice icon I63 has been stocked. At the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, there is no particular notification by voice output. This is because it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chances of being stocked is derived by deriving the advance notice icon design CS, but it is also possible to give a notification by voice. As described above, in this production example, it may be possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 by using the plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this effect example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. Further, in this example of performance, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have different triggers for stocking. Therefore, the contents of the production until the stocking are different.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 458(p), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation Is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 458(q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed to become the variable icon h0. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 458(q), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 459(a) following FIG. 458(q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively. It is displayed and the reach state is formed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 459(b), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1. In some cases, it can be noted that the chance up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 459(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is shown to be digested. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of “paquine” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this production example, the overlapping state of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is still overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is consumed, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman's notice icon I62 to make the swordsman's notice icon I62 stand out. As shown, this effect display is on the tutorial display portion TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display and the chance-up notice icon I63.

At the timing shown in FIG. 459(d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to inform that the swordsman reach will be developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 459(e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63 that was not digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance-up notice icon I63. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 459(e), a part of the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. There is. Here, since a predetermined space is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative pattern display device, it is possible to avoid the overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player. In some cases, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be easily visible.

FIG. 459(f) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. On the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is being performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 459(f), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward, but the advance notice icon I63 of the chance up is not affected by it and the display position is changed. Not changed.

In FIG. 459(g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 459(h), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that it is in the operation acceptance state. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts swinging, and fuels an expectation as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed. At this time, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the advance icon I63 for increasing the chance.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 459(i), as shown in FIG. 459(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player goes up with "Go. The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display "Z" is added is displayed in an overlapping manner on the animation display of the duel scene.

Then, as shown in FIG. 459(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swaying chance up notice icon I63 moves upward and is shown to be digested.

Then, as shown in FIG. 459(l), the second cut-in image in which the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed with the second cut-in image overlapping the first cut-in image because the angle of the lord's face is different. Has been informed that the reliability of That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked higher by digesting the notice icon I63 of the chance up. The first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image may be replaced with the second cut-in image for display. May be. In addition, when another notice icon is stocked when the second cut-in image is displayed, the second cut-in image may overlap the noticed icon that is stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon. In the embodiment described so far and the embodiment described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is erased is the same as the timing at which execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be the timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or the timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In addition, in this effect example, the notice icon overlaps the tutorial display section TT1 when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, but is displayed when the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed. However, they do not overlap. That is, the stocked notice icon has a predetermined area to be displayed, and may overlap with another image at one trigger, but may not overlap with another image at one trigger. You can Note that when the chance-up notice icon I63 is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 459(h), the notice icon is consumed and disappeared before the start of the cut-in display that is another promotion target. It may or may not disappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 459(m), the main character wins over the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 4(n), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination of the decorative patterns is derived and the fluctuation of the swing is started.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 459(o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -Decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

FIG. 460 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 460, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so that the displayed notice icon is conveyed to the stock position. It shows how they are doing.

As shown in FIG. 460(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 460(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 460(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as described later, there is a case where an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR is displayed. In addition, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is displayed as "The notice icon is exhausted...". In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460(a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown protruding downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "Delivery of the notice icon..." to "Swordsman is your nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR, or may be the timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or may be at a timing later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460(a3), the bomb icon I popped out of the treasure chest image TR.
6 bursts. This burst effect display overlaps the front surface side of the tutorial display section TT1, and it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 460(a4), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "PAKINE" to notify that effect, indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460(a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, as shown in FIG. 460(a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N heads toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 460(a6), the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 completely moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 460(a7).

Next, with reference to FIG. 460(b1) to FIG. 460(b8), another example of the notice icon increasing effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

As shown in FIG. 460(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. The hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 460(b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. In addition, in this example of production, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged in the lower right portion of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the explanation display "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis" is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 460(b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed below the display screen, and an effect display in which the notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 460(b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown protruding upward from the inside.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460(b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out of the treasure box image TR is changed to a magnified swordsman notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 460(b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "PAKINE" for notifying that, and notifies that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of voice output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or more than the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, the timing later than the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460(b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front surface side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 460(b5), the portion overlapping the UI unit displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the first decorative pattern display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative pattern display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display part TT1 is difficult to see. May be

After that, as shown in FIG. 460(b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N heads toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner (as if going forward). At the timing shown in FIG. 460 (b6), the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 460(b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is eliminated, and the player is The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460(b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see.

In addition, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 460 (b5′), for example, as shown in FIG. 460(b5′), the heights of the lower edges of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at least the first decorative symbol display device. When the tutorial display section TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the displayed position, the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed even if the third decorative pattern display device 208N slides and overlaps the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Since it is possible to create a state where they do not overlap with each other, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is near the tutorial display part TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since the slide movement is performed by, the effect by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be seen while visually checking the display state of the tutorial display section TT1.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 460, when the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1, after sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the notice icon is displayed as the third decorative symbol display device 208N. May be overlapped, and an effect display may be performed in which the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlapping state of the notice icon on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

FIG. 461 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increasing effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 461 shows that the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally framed out, and when the explanation display is performed, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below.

As shown in FIG. 461(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 461(a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 461(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and general actor 224Fb. Are arranged. At the timing shown in FIG. 461(a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 461(a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and then shown in FIG. 461(a3). At the timing, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and "Tama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 at the timing shown in FIG. 461(a4).

After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 461(a5) to (a6), and the first decorative pattern Frame out from the display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be erased before the frame-out animation is started, may be erased at the timing when the frame-out animation is started, or may be frame-out. It may be deleted at a timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display unit TT1 is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 461(a7), for example, after the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 456(e) to (j), FIG. 461(a8). As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 461(a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is restarted from below the right frame of the display screen, and then in FIG. 461(a10). At the timing shown, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 461(a11), the tutorial display section TT1 displays the explanation display "Due to the completion of the notice icon...", but the tutorial display section TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden and it is difficult to visually recognize.

After that, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 461 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the swordsman's notice icon I62. The overlap condition with TT1 is eliminated. If the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is framed out, the explanation display may be easily visible due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 461(a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

Also in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 461(b1) and (b2), even when the notice icon is consumed and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlapped state on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. Since 461(b1) to (b2) in FIG. 461 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 456(p) to (q) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 462 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 462, in addition to the tutorial display on the tutorial display section TT1, the tutorial display is also shown in the conversation effect of the character.

As shown in FIG. 462(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 462(a1), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 462(a1) indicates that "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun". In this rendering example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display section. Furthermore, in this effect example, the balloon CHTT1 as the second tutorial display section (explanation display section) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (explanation display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 462(a1), an explanation display that "gold is hotter than red" is displayed in the blowing portion TT2, and an explanation is given regarding the advance notice to be made in the pachinko machine 100. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Although the blowing portion TT2 may overlap the first decorative pattern, it may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed in the balloon section TT2 or the balloon section TT3 described later. Further, the same display as the display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 may have a larger display area or a smaller display area than the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. In the tutorial display section TT1, the font of characters may be larger or smaller than that of the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3 may have the same font or different fonts. Further, although the balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is configured not to overlap in the display area for performing other description display, but may overlap. In the tutorial display section TT1, the frequency of explanation display may be lower or higher than that in the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not partitioned by lines.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 462(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actors 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 462(a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the Chibihime character CH. Also, the decorative pattern is still in variable display. Thus, unlike the tutorial display section TT1, the balloon section TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays. The balloon section TT2 may also be configured to be able to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display result of the deviation Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". The tutorial display section TT1 still displays "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun."

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 462 (a4), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to be the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 462 (a4), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In addition, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Tonosama is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. In this way, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variable displays.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 462(a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Chibihime character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 462(a5), an explanation display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed in the balloon portion TT2, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach is given. The timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, the timing at which the throwing animation is started, or the timing after the throwing animation is started. It may be.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 462(a6), the appearance of the lord's character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 462(a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT3 as a third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the grandfather character GY1. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (description display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 462(a6), an explanation display “When pandas intrude” is displayed in the balloon unit TT3, and the notice effect is explained. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front surface side of the first decorative pattern, but may be arranged at a position that does not overlap. The timing at which the balloon portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing at which the lord's character throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandpa character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 462(a7), the bomb icon I61 is at a position overlapping the front surface side of the balloon TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon section TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon section TT3. The timing may be earlier than the timing or may be later than the timing when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the front surface side of the balloon TT3.

Then, as shown in FIG. 462(a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 462(a9), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to see. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “Don” to inform the fact. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible that only one of the two displayed conversation effect displays (speech bubble portion TT2 and speech bubble portion TT3) is overlapped by another image. It is configured.

Then, as shown in FIG. 462(a10), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Paquine" to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. In this way, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap with the plurality of display units (the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation is displayed.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 462(a1) to (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed in the balloons (the balloons TT2 and TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 462(b), the display mode of the balloon TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon TT2 is red), and the word "intense heat" is displayed. In some cases, such as displaying, a notice display or a prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

462(c1) to FIG. 462(c3) show another example of the contents displayed in the tutorial display section TT1.

As shown in FIG. 462 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has started rocking. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 has moved upward and is being digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is Master of the Lord” to “Development into Swordsman Reach”, and an explanation display of the events that will occur (live commentary) Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. Note that at the timing of FIG. 462 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs the sound “Paquine” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of performing an explanation display of the production, but, for example, as shown in FIG. 462(d), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a display mode. While changing (for example, making the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 red) and displaying the word "intense heat", a notice display or a look-ahead notice may be displayed in the symbol variation display. Good.

FIG. 463 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 463, the UI section is displayed with the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display section TT4, and the stage name display section ST2 being integrally displayed at the bottom of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is erased. Even in this example of performance, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed without being framed out even when the super reach is reached. You can leave it alone.

As shown in FIG. 463(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 463(a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI section, and the variable icon is displayed in such a manner that it is placed on the frame formed by the UI section. At the timing shown in FIG. 463(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two holding icons h11 and h12 have default display modes. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1 described above, and a description thereof will be omitted here. Note that in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 463(a1), “Due to the notice icon being exhausted... ”is displayed, and the stage name display section ST2 is displayed.
In, "Castle Town Stage" is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is Castle Town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general officer substance. 224Fb is arranged.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 463 (a2), when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the third hold icon of the special figure 1 (third hold icon h13) in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the variable display of the symbols that is the target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, the display mode with a blue circle).

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 463(a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the first decorative symbol as a stop in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not deleted, but it may be deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

After that, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 463(a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 456(e) to (k) and described above.

In FIG. 463(a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character ruptures, the blasted bomb icon I61 changes to the princess's notice icon I64, and is moved to the stage name display portion ST2 while being reduced and displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 463(a5), although it overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2, it does not reach the predetermined display position (stock position). .. In this case, since the princess notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, the explanation display of “Castle Town Stage” is displayed, and at least a part of the princess notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. The explanation display may be erased before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon design CS (see FIG. 458), the explanation display is erased based on the trigger of acquisition of the notice icon, such as the explanation display being erased before overlapping the stage name display portion ST2. It may be configured such that the timing of erasing is different. The throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display unit. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired may be provided after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may not pass through the stage name display portion ST2 and the notice icon may not be acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, in the case of a gasse pattern, the explanation display is not erased. In the true pattern in which the notice icon is obtained, for example, the explanation display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display portion ST2. When the UI part is hidden during the blackout effect, at least part of the process from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gaze are executed when the blackout effect is being executed. Specifically, when the darkening effect starts after the bomb icon I61 throwing animation is started and the darkening effect ends and the UI unit is redisplayed, a notice is given. The icon may be acquired (a state in which the explanation display disappears from a state in which the explanation display is displayed), in which case at least one of sound and lamp effect is performed. May be in the open state, or may not be in both states.

Then, as shown in FIG. 463(a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position on the stage name display portion ST2, the "castle town" that has been displayed until now on the stage name display portion ST2. The explanation display of “Stage” is deleted, and it functions as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters "STOCK" are displayed above the stage name display portion ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display portion ST2, the stage name is not displayed. Note that the scene in which the notice icon is consumed and the execution of the above-described darkening effect may overlap. In addition, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or configured to overlap with at least a part of the previously-obtained notice icons (at least one of the plurality of notice icons, the whole notice icon, a part of one notice icon, etc.) You may. Further, the movable means is arranged to move in at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the bomb icon I61 throwing animation, and at least part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. Good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 463 (a7), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the first decorative pattern is the decorative pattern of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. Further, also on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 463 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by a moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 463 (a8), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 463(a8), the stage is changed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, and when the stage name display portion ST2 is in the non-display state, the stage name after the change is displayed. No display is made. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed for a predetermined time on the stage name display portion ST2, and then the stage name may be erased and a notice icon may be displayed.

FIG. 463(a9) shows that five notice icons are stocked. That is, up to three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display portion ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is erased, and the area functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, the tutorial display (explanation display) is not performed. In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 463(a9), first, the stage name display portion ST2 is stocked with the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65, and then the tutorial display portion. In TT4, a swordsman's notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

In addition, in this example of performance, for example, when the notice icons are consumed in order from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the consumed notice icons may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 463(a9), when the princess's notice icon I64 is exhausted, the two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65 move to the left one by one, and the tutorial display The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the section TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display section ST2, and the chance up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the left side. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the stage name display section ST2, it may be moved momentarily so as not to affect the visibility of other displays.

Then, when all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 are exhausted, the explanation display is resumed on the tutorial display section TT4 and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 are consumed. In this case, the display of the stage name is restarted on the stage name display portion ST2. The explanation display and the display of the stage name may not be restarted. The restart of the explanation display may be restarted within the same variable display as the symbol variable display in which the notice icon has been exhausted (for example, restarting after the super reach). Further, when the explanation display is restarted, the exact same display may be restarted, or the display of a different portion may be restarted in the telop display (scrolling) display.

Further, the type of the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the type of the notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be predetermined. In this case, when the notice icon is consumed, other notice icons may not be moved.

The execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the moving animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the moving animation of the hold icon, or may be It may be longer than the execution time of the moving animation of the icon.

Also, in this example of performance, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and when the number of stocked icons is three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is displayed in the tutorial display section. Although it is configured that up to 3 more can be stocked in TT4, if the number of stocks in the tutorial display section TT4 is first 3 and the number of stocks becomes 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is further 3 in the stage name display section ST2. It may be configured such that up to three can be stocked.

Further, in this example of performance, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4. In the (state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon is completely set in the stage name display portion ST2 or the tutorial display portion TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after starting the upward movement when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display portion ST2 and the tutorial display portion TT4, and immediately after the notice icon starts moving upward when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display is displayed. You may not be allowed to.

Further, in this example of production, the above-mentioned thing shown in FIG. 456 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it goes without saying that the modes shown in other figures can be combined.

Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be consumed, such as the variable icon display area.

Further, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed in a toothless manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to fill the empty space. You don't have to move.

In addition, a so-called MAX8 machine (8 which can be assigned to the first special prize winning opening and the second special prize winning opening per starting opening and can hold eight symbol variation displays in a normal gaming state (8 (In some cases, it is called a maintenance order machine), the hold icon display area has a display area for four reservations in advance, and when the number of reservations reaches four, the display area expands to five. It may be enlarged or expanded to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display portion ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

FIG. 463(b1) to FIG. 46(b2) show the situation where the stocked notice icon is consumed.

As shown in FIG. 463 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are being variably displayed.

Then, after that, it is the timing when the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is consumed, and as shown in FIG. 462(b2), the advance notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is moving upward. In this example of performance, even when the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position in the stage name display portion ST2, at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display portion ST2, the explanation is displayed. The display of stage names has not been resumed. This also applies to the tutorial display section TT4. The display of the stage name may be restarted immediately after the advance notice icon moves from the display position on the stage name display portion ST2.

FIG. 464 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 464(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 464(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 464(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actors 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

FIGS. 464(a1) to (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

FIG. 464(a1) shows a state of the castle town stage. Note that the display mode of this castle town stage is the same as the mode shown in FIG. 456(a), so description will be omitted.

FIG. 464(a2) shows a state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that the UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section on the space stage, the variation icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and the hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side vertically. The display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle town stage described above with reference to FIG. 456. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 464(a2), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon, unlike the display modes of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage, and in the default display mode, for example, The white pentagonal display mode, and the look-ahead notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 464(a2), the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is in the prefetch notice display mode. Is becoming In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is master of lord" is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Thus, on the space stage, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display region TT1 are different, the notice icon does not overlap the tutorial display region TT1.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

FIG. 464(a3) shows a state immediately after shifting from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 464(a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is hidden immediately after shifting to the castle town stage, and remains hidden until a new explanation display is performed. To be done. As shown in FIG. 464(a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. Note that the explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. Further, when the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage), if the stage is moved to another stage (for example, a space stage), an explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

FIGS. 464(b1) to 464(b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged in the third decorative pattern display device 208N and the tutorial display area TT1 is deleted when the notice icon is stocked. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 464(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 464(b1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 464(b1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the display screen and is displayed as "Due to the end of notice icon...". In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 464(b2), the button icon I
When BT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but in this case, the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked, and, for example, are icons that preliminarily notify the number of times of the effect of operating the button during a specific effect, and for example, the number of times of the button operation effect is high. It can be said that the higher the reliability of the big hit is, that is, the larger the stock number of the button icon IBT is, the easier it is to hit the big hit.

Thus, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that another display is sacrificed.

FIG. 465 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 465 shows another example of the effect using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord.

FIGS. 465(a1) to 465(a6) show that the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation.

As shown in FIG. 465(a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal. In this case, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 465(a1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 465(a1) indicates that "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun". Further, as shown in FIG. 465(a1), the notice icon I66 of Hatena is displayed (stock) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before the timing to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested, so-called gasse. May also function as a notice icon. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 465(a1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E described above is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actors 224Fb described above. Are arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 465(a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 465(a3), it is shown that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 465(a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is changed to "Due to the notice icon being exhausted...".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 465(a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the Hatena's notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena's notice icon I66 is difficult to visually recognize. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the notice icon I66 of Hatena. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 465(a6), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to Swordsman's notice icon I62. Then, the speaker 120 outputs the sound "Paquine" to notify that the Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to view. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 465(a6), what was displayed as "Due to the notice icon being exhausted..." is changed to "Swordsman is Lord's nemesis." The timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started, or may be changed from the timing at which the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. May be before the timing, or may be after the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIGS. 465(b1) to (b3) show how the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 465(b1) is the same as FIG. 465(a4), and FIG. 465(b3) is the same as FIG. 465(a6), so description of these drawings will be omitted. In the tutorial display area TT1 in FIG. 465(b3), “Due to the announcement of the notice icon... ”is displayed.

After the effect shown in FIG. 465(b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 465(b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front surface of the tutorial display section TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display section TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and the tutorial display portion TT1 are difficult to see, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 465(a5). When a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIGS. 465(c1) to (c3) show that the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 465(c1) is the same as FIG. 465(b1) and FIG. 465(c2) is the same as FIG. 465(b2), so description of these drawings will be omitted.

After the bomb icon I61 bursts at the timing shown in FIG. 465(c2), as shown in FIG. 465(c3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 informs the swordsman. The icon I62 and the chance up notice icon I63 have changed. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock production of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the production of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

FIGS. 465(d1) to (d3) show that the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 465(d1) is the same as FIG. 465(a4), description of this drawing is omitted.

After the effect shown in FIG. 465(d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 465(d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character becomes the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Reach and burst. At this time, the effect image showing that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the second holding icon h12, and at least a part of the second holding icon h12 is difficult to visually recognize. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 465 (d3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, from the blue display mode to the red display mode). )doing. Then, the speaker 120 outputs a sound "Pong" to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 465, at least a part of the animation when the notice icon is acquired is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol) The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

FIG. 466 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 466(a1) to 466(a7) show that a specific notice icon has been stocked, and by displaying that fact, a notification indicating that the mission has been achieved is shown. Note that FIGS. 466(a1) to (a3) are the same as FIGS. 456(h) to (j), and thus the description of these drawings is omitted.

After the effect shown in FIG. 466(a3) is performed, as shown in FIG. 466(a4), the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character ends. Further, as shown in FIG. 466(a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, above the tutorial display unit TT1, the achievement display unit KM1 as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays "Swordsman Stock" indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. That is, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, and if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display section KM1 displays that fact to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display section KM1 is displayed in order to explicitly notify that the swordsman's notification icon I62 for predicting that a performance with an extremely high expectation for a big hit will be performed. Good. The timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be the same as the end of the throwing animation, the timing before the end of the throwing animation, or the time after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display section KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, the achievement display section KM1 may be noticeable in some cases. In addition, the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed so as to overlap the achievement display section KM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 466(a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" The temporary stop display is made by the combination of the decorative patterns of "6". Although the variable icon h0 is erased here, it may be displayed.

As described above, when the notice icon pattern CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 466(a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is displayed from the notice icon pattern CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 466(a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making at least part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1 difficult to see.

In addition, in this example of performance, when the display position of the notice icon is preset depending on the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, for example, the achievement display section KM1 May be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked and the notice icons are exhausted to move the remaining notice icons to be arranged at predetermined intervals, among the notice icons, When a predetermined number of notice icons are consumed, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display section KM1 may be eliminated.

In FIG. 466(b1) to FIG. 466(b3), for example, an example of an operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operates when developing into a super reach or when a big hit occurs It is shown.

FIG. 466(b1) shows that super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 466(b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background screen of super reach is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower center of the display screen. .. As described above, the UI portion is framed out downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variable icon h0 is lower than that when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is being performed above the display screen, the second reserved number display of special diagrams 1 and 2 and the special symbols 1 and 2 of FIG. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 466(b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions in which they approach each other. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. According to this, due to a phenomenon in which the decorative symbol display device hides the movable operation and the explanation display, it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display while giving an expectation for a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 466(b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N which are close to each other are integrally formed along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It rotates 90 degrees clockwise. The variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end portion of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a rectangular shape. The image in which the character "Holiday" is given in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display portion 208N, in the lower right corner of the display screen, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 466(b3), the family crest accessory 224E disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overlies the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The 8th character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, are moved downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is overlapped. There are cases. Further, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro 224Fa or the general officer 224Fb. Further, when the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. According to this, due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to focus the explanation display while giving an expectation for the big hit.

In FIG. 466(c1) to FIG. 466(c4), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is constantly or at least displayed for a certain period of time, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed, whereby the effect button 136 is displayed. It is shown that the state is notified.

FIG. 466(c1) shows a state in which an animation of a duel scene in Swordsman Reach is being performed. 466(c1) corresponds to FIG. 457(d), but the stage name display portion ST1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, The difference is that the button image 136a is constantly or at least displayed for a certain period below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in the normal state (default display state).

In FIG. 466(c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 466(c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays the button reception time meter and the button image. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the player to press the effect button 136. This display notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) indicating that it is in the operation acceptance state.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 466(c3), as shown in FIG. 466(c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the player goes up with " The cut-in image to which the character display "" is added is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this effect example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-mentioned button notice icon (first button notice icon I4 or second button notice icon I11) is enabled, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

FIG. 466(d) shows an example of the notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, in addition to Hatena's notice icon I66, pseudo-reminder icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, pending promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68. , Panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the hold promotion notice icon I67 is an icon that gives a notice that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon will be changed to a display mode with higher reliability for the big hit when it is consumed. Further, the pseudo-reminder icon is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-representation will be performed when it is consumed. Further, the notice icon I68 of the chance eye is an icon for giving notice that the chance eye will be derived as a display result of the decorative pattern when the notice icon I68 is consumed. Further, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that the player will move to the look-ahead zone when digested. Further, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon for giving notice that, when digested, an effect of panda invasion is performed, and that a big hit (win) is surely made.

FIG. 467 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

FIGS. 467(a1) to 467(a7) show that the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is the enemy of Tonosama”) displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is scroll-displayed. The left side of the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 467 is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62.

FIG. 467(a1) shows a state before the scroll display of the explanation display is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 467(a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display “Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis” scrolls in sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 467(a2), only the "Swordsman is" portion is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 467(a3), only the "Swordsman is your lord" portion is scrolled in. There is. In these cases, since neither of the characters overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognizable in some cases.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 467(a4), the entire text "Swordsman is the Lord's nemesis" is displayed. In this case, at least a part of the character "Swordsman" is overlapped with the notification icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

At the timing shown in FIG. 467(a5), the “Swordsman” part scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the “I'm Lord's nemesis” part is displayed in the tutorial display part TT1. .. In this case, at least a part of the word "Tonosama" overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a visually difficult state.

At the timing shown in Fig. 467 (a6), the "Swordsman is the Lord" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the "Nemesis" section is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. .. In this case, at least a part of the character "I'm a nemesis" overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is difficult to see.

At the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 467(a7), the scroll of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this example of performance, the characters overlapped by the notice icon are continuously changed by scrolling the explanation display. Further, scrolling of the explanation display causes a period in which the notice display overlaps with the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display does not overlap. Note that when the explanation display is scrolled repeatedly, these periods also occur repeatedly.

FIGS. 467(b1) to (b7) show that in the tutorial display section TT1, while the scrolling display of the explanation display (for example, “Swordsman is Lord's nemesis” display) is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. A state in which a display (for example, a notice display of "intense heat") is performed is shown. Note that FIGS. 467(b1) to (b3) and FIGS. 467(b6) to (b7) respectively show FIGS. 467(a1) to (a3) and FIGS. 467(a6) to (467). Since it is the same as FIG. (a7), detailed description is omitted.

After the explanation display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 467(b3), as shown in FIGS. 467(b4) to 467(b5), the preview display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. As for the notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is set to red, and the character "intense heat" is displayed to perform the notice display or the prefetch notice display in the symbol variation display. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the scroll display of the explanation display may be switched to the notice display.

After that, when the notice display ends, as shown in FIG. 467(b6), the scroll display of the explanation display restarts. The scroll display of the explanation display is proceeding in the background even while the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the explanation display is restarted is the display after proceeding in the background. It is a mode. The display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is restarted may be the display mode at the time of interruption. After that, when the timing shown in FIG. 467(b7) comes, the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Although the notice display is described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

FIGS. 467(c1) to (c5) show the explanatory display (for example, “Swordsman is the Lord’s nemesis” display) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 when multiple notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as part of the notice icons are exhausted.

In FIG. 467(c1), the chance-up notice icon I63, which is the notice icon to be first digested, and the swordsman notice icon I62, which is the notice icon to be secondly digested, are the notice-up icon I63 of chance increase. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged side by side on the right side of, and overlaps on the left side of the tutorial display section TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is in a visually difficult state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 467(c2), when the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, as shown in FIGS. 467(c3) to (c5), the swordsman's notice icon I62 increases the chance. The notice icon moving animation of moving to the position where the notice icon I63 was displayed. As a result, after the overlap range of the swordsman's notice icon I62 with respect to the tutorial display section TT1 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is easy to see. May be. That is, in this effect example, the notice icon may or may not overlap the tutorial display section TT1 depending on the number of the notice icons stocked. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display may overlap with each other.

FIG. 468 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 468, when the notice icon is stocked, the stocked notice icon is enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 468(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In this UI unit UI1, a hold icon display area in which four hold icons can be displayed in a substantially rectangular display frame is formed on the left side, and four notice icons are respectively displayed in the substantially square display frame on the upper right side. The notice icon display area that can be displayed in is formed in the upper right, and the tutorial display portion TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed above the UI unit UI1 and at a position close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variable icon display area is arranged above the display frame in which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 468(a), since three variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the read-ahead notice display mode. There is. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5 shown in FIG. 468(a), "Tonosama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed. Further, in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 468(a), two pseudo-repeated notice icons I65 are stocked, and both are in the normal display mode (in this example of performance, the "first display mode" is called). In some cases.) is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon in the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located apart from the display area of the decorative design, it is not overlapped with the decorative design, and the decorative design is also included. Do not overlap. The notice icon in the normal display mode may be overlapped with the decorative design, or the decorative design may be overlapped.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 468(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, a button image 136a is displayed above the stage name display portion ST1 in a default display mode, and the display mode is changed when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed.
It should be noted that this button image 136a may be displayed all the time or may be displayed for a period. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are also displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general officer substance. 224Fb is arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 468(b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the state that the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown. Has been done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(c), it is shown that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(d), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The bomb icon I61 overlaps with the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner, but the bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 468(e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the display frame where the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and explodes. At this time, the effect image representing the explosion of the bomb icon I61 overlaps the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. At least part of the displayed frame is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. As a result, a notice is given that the third notice icon will be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 468(e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to part of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT5 or the display frame of the reserved display area where the bomb icon I61 has exploded. When the display frame is displayed and the notice icon is stocked in this display frame, it overlaps with the notice icon.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(f), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode changes to the flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with a flame. Therefore, the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and the tutorial display unit TT5 are difficult to visually recognize as well as the notice icon displayed on the UI unit UI1. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be hidden or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed so that the entire UI unit UI1 is overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI part UI1, and at least part of the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5 may be visible, or the notice icon display area. Only visible may be difficult.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 468(g), the notice icon enlargement animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI portion UI1 is the flame effect. A state of appearing from inside EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. A swordsman's notice icon I62 is newly displayed in the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is , Are displayed enlarged in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF with respect to the normal display mode. This may allow the player to easily recognize that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is further enlarged and displayed. Part of the left side of the display frame in which the icons are stocked and part of the right side of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It Further, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also enlarged and displayed according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-announcement icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front side of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is difficult to visually recognize. Further, since the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed, it may be easier to understand that the notice icon is stocked. In other words, it can be said that the enlarged and displayed notice icon may overlap the decorative pattern. Note that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, in this example of performance, when the effect of stocking the notice icon is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other displays (for example, notice display) (overlap). ), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may be overlapped with another notice display.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame in which the third notice icon in which the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed is stocked is displayed at approximately the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged and displayed up to the maximum size. That is, the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62 and the already-stocked pseudo-reminder icon I65 are displayed in an enlarged display mode having a size larger than the normal display mode (first display mode). Second display mode"). At this time, part of the display frame in which the second notice icon adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked and part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are , Each of which is displayed outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-repeating notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 respectively overlap the front side of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at least a part of the pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and is visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. Furthermore, in other words, it can be said that a part of the already-stocked pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 is visible while the third notice icon is in the enlarged display mode. Since the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is entirely outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. The pseudo-reminder icon I65 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 468(j), the notice icon reduction animation is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and at the position where the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display is moving toward you. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced in size according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the pseudo-repeating notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed and is in an easily visible state. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo link is displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is made visible. That is, in this effect example, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually visible in the notice icon reduction animation. In other words, it can be said that the number of visible notice icons is increasing due to the notice icon reduction animation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 468(k), the first decorative symbol display device 208L continues the reduction animation of the notice icon display frame YF. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 468(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced and at the position where the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display is moving toward you. The notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced in size according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the notice icon display frame YF is entirely within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF (two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 and The swordsman's notice icon I62) is all visible. That is, it can be said that the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode, but all of them are visible.

After that, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. 468(l). That is, as shown in FIG. 468(l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is deleted, and the flame effect EF1 overlapping the notice icon display frame YF is also deleted. , The UI unit UI1 is displayed again. At this time, in the notice icon display area, in addition to the two pseudo-reminder icons I65, a state in which a swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked is shown. Also, the tutorial display section TT5
Then, what was displayed as "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "Panda is the Master of the Lord". Here, the flame effect EF1 may be deleted after the notice icon display frame YF is deleted, or the notice icon display frame YF may be deleted after the flame effect EF1 is deleted. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be deleted at the same time. Further, the display change of the tutorial display section TT5 may be performed before the flame effect EF1 is erased or after the flame effect EF1 is erased. Further, the display of the tutorial display section TT5 may not be changed. Further, the variable icon or the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 468(k) and the timing shown in FIG. In this case, it may be configured so that an increase in the number of holdings is reflected firmly.

In addition, in this example of performance, the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described. However, for example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the above-mentioned notice icon expansion animation ends, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is in the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF is visible, In the area on the left side of the left end of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background display appears. Further, in this case, since there is no notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon that is difficult to view is not generated.

Further, in this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. For example, the flame effect EF1 is displayed. After that, the advance notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 468(i) without performing the advance notice icon enlargement animation. After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 468(l) without passing through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area. It may be displayed by displaying.

Further, in this effect example, the stocked notice icon is displayed in the normal display mode by the reduction animation after being enlarged and displayed. However, for example, the notice icon is consumed in the enlarged display state. In some cases, the notice icon may be consumed without being displayed in the normal display mode.

Further, in this example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed to enlarge and display the notice icon. However, when the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon is used as described above. The notice icon to be digested may be enlarged (displayed in the second display mode) and then digested, or the notice icon may be enlarged (displayed in the second display mode) when digested. You may do it.

Further, in this example of performance, some of the advance notice icon enlargement animations performed when the advance notice icons are stocked may be partially canceled due to the stock trigger. For example, in the stock of the notice icon by the action of the character (for example, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character, etc.), if it is performed immediately before the stop display of the decorative pattern, a part is canceled (for example, the latter half part). May be canceled), or, for example, in the stock of the notice icon due to the stop of the special symbol such as the pseudo continuous symbol, it may not be canceled.

Further, the enlarged display mode may be different depending on the number of the notice icons already stocked or the number of the notice icons stocked. Also, the enlarged display mode may be the same regardless of the number of the notice icons.

In addition, when the number of holdings increases while the notice icon is enlarged, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the starting port) blinks, and the effect sound is output. And so on. This may be performed, for example, at the time of increasing the number of holdings to be pre-read at the time of winning the start prize. Further, even if the notice icon is enlarged and the number of holdings is increased, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the starting port) is blinked, and the effect sound is output. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is finished without performing the above. By doing so, the player becomes aware of the change of the display mode of the hold icon. Sometimes it can be easier.

In addition, when the notice icon is enlarged, the variable icon and the hold icon may be also enlarged. In this case, the hold increase animation may not be performed when the hold increases during the enlarged display of the notice icon.

Further, in the above description, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, “chance”, “heat”, “SP”, “pseudo-ren” etc.), it may be referred to as a notice text.

Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 469. Here, FIG. 469 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 469(a-1), in the game board 200 applicable to this embodiment, on the front surface side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. The transparent protective member CL is provided. The transparent protection member CL is formed, for example, so as to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and has a rib RB formed at the upper end thereof, and is provided so as to protrude forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about 1/3 below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the transparent protective member CL. There is. By this rib RB, the game ball jumping into the stage 244 is prevented from jumping over the transparent protection member CL and deviating backward, and the decorative symbol display device 208, or between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a problem from colliding with the production movable body or the like arranged in.

FIG. 469(a-2) shows that the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) is applied and effect display is performed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 469, a family crest accessory 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208, and is located between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the transparent protection member CL. It is configured so that it can be displaced by. As shown in FIG. 469(a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, a variable icon h0 is displayed in a rectangular shape in a suspended display. It is displayed in a form accommodated in the frame FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 469(a-2), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode and is displayed in blinking. It is a display mode of a notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. The tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 469(a-2) is in a non-display state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI section is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative pattern, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative pattern, but with the display region of the first decorative pattern. May overlap. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 469(a-2), the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the grandpa character GY1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The balloon TT3 is displayed. A speech line "Where is my grandfather" is displayed in the speech bubble portion TT2, and a speech message "here" is displayed in the speech bubble portion TT3. The balloons TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed, and are in a state that is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state where the decorative pattern is not overlapping with the decorative pattern that is being variably displayed. In addition, a part of the UI unit (the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold display frame FL1) and the Chibihime character CH1 overlap the transparent protection member CL and are transparent. The visibility may be reduced as compared with the case where it does not overlap with the protection member CL.

FIG. 469(a-3) shows a state in which the family crest accessory 224E rises and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the pending display frame FL1 has its range enlarged so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the enlarged portion. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 469(a-3), the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 469(a-4), the family crest monument 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative pattern display device 208, and the overlapping state with respect to the decorative pattern display device 208 is eliminated. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 469(a-4), the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction in the extended display frame FL1 that is displayed in an expanded manner. Has been done. Note that the balloon portion TT2 overlaps with the expanded portion of the extended display frame FL1 that is displayed in an expanded manner and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the balloon portion TT2 does not overlap the expanded portion of the extended display frame FL1 that is displayed in an expanded manner. Since the balloon section TT3 is displayed above the reserved display frame FL1, it does not overlap. Further, the decorative pattern in the variable display is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1, and a part of the decorative pattern is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not overlapped with the hold display frame FL1. In addition, in this embodiment, since the pending display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, it is possible to display the pending display frame FL1 above the transparent protective member CL, and thus the visibility of the pending display frame FL1 may be improved.

FIG. 469(b-1) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 4(a-2), and FIG. 469(b-1a) shows a cross section taken along the line AA of FIG. 4(b-1). The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 469(b-1a), between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL, the size of the decorative pattern display device 208 is approximately the same as the size of the decorative pattern display device 208 in addition to the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E. A light guide plate IL is arranged. The light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side (that is, the player side) of the family crest monument 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 469(b-1), the family crest accessory 224E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this way, a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and another part is seen through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visually recognized. The configuration of the light guide plate IL is as described above with reference to FIG. 445, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

FIG. 469(b-2) shows the above-described state shown in FIG. 4(a-3), and FIG. 469(b-2a) shows the BB cross section of FIG. 4(b-2). The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 469(b-2a), the family crest actor 224E is interposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the family crest actor 224E has the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative pattern display device 208 is more difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where it is not interposed.

FIG. 469(b-3) shows the above-described state shown in FIG. 4(a-4), and FIG. 469(b-3a) shows the section taken along the line CC of FIG. The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 469(b-3a), since the family crest actor 224E has moved to the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the player has the family crest actor 224E between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. As compared with the case where the decorative pattern display device 208 is interposed, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to visually recognize through the transparent protection member CL and the light guide plate IL.

FIG. 469(c-1) and FIG. 469(c-2) are diagrams illustrating an example of a layer configuration in which an image displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 469(c-1), the hold display frame FL1 described above is arranged in the first layer layer LY1. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 469(c-2), the upwardly expanded portion (expanded portion) of the reserved display frame FL1 is the second layer arranged behind the first layer layer LY1. It is arranged in the layer LY2. The ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extended portion of the pending display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged in each of the two layers forming the reserved display frame FL1, and, for example, a serif notice, a decorative pattern, or a notice display (for example, an arrow fly display). ), etc. can be displayed. Further, the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that the parts are not spread over two or more layers and configured as one image data. You may

The display mode of the UI unit may be configured differently depending on the effect stage and the effect mode according to each game state (hereinafter, referred to as “effect stage etc.”).

Further, at least a part of the effect stage or the like may be selectable by the operation of the player, or may change in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, every number of changes). Good.

Further, the characteristic operation of the present invention, "the hold display frame FL1 is extended and displayed upward", is at least a part of the production stage or the like (for example, the production stage in the non-electric support state, or the design It may be performed on a part of the production stage or the like that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is being changed, or may be performed on all the production stages or the like.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 470 to 485. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. In addition, it goes without saying that the embodiment described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far. That is, each effect shown in FIGS. 470 to 485 may be performed in combination with any of the effects shown and described in FIGS. 14 to 468. In other words, in the present embodiment, effects by mini-items (which may also be referred to as advance notice icons or advance notice items), effects by timer advance notice, effects by mini-games, and effects by chance-up timing meter are appropriately selected according to the progress of the game. It may be executed in combination. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 470 to 485 are used only for the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 470 to 485, and even if the duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, Reference numerals 470 to 485 are given priority.

470 to 485 are diagrams showing, in stages, an example of an effect centered on the decorative pattern display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 470 to 485, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the public figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the general figure hold. Illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, FIGS. 470 to 481, 483, and 485 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative pattern display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative pattern display devices, the second decorative pattern display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and the first decoration The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be a sub display device, and a second decorative symbol display device. The width of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the width direction, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the right edge portion thereof overlaps the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has its left edge portion the first. 1 The decorative pattern display device 208N overlaps with the front surface side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the directions close to each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the state of being closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Note that the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily variable display of the decorative symbols for each display device, and are named for convenience. Note that it does not limit the interpretation of the display device. Further, these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) are summarized as effect display means, and the effect display means is the decorative pattern. It is also possible to display the variable display of, or to display a plurality of types of effect. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmissive region. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 470 to 485, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of a region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. Further, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, in FIGS. 470 to 481 and FIGS. 483 to 485, the appearance of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown. In the present embodiment, the POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device.

FIG. 470 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of the pending change notice effect as the prefetch notice effect by the hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 471 is a stepwise continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 470(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI unit, the variable icon h0 is located at the center thereof. It is displayed in such a manner as to be accommodated in the rectangular hold display frame FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. There is. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a pedestal for the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 470(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 have default display modes. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information (game display) regarding the game and the effect is displayed (the tutorial display), and the content is updated at an appropriate timing. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 470(a), "The Lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation about the character of the Lord is given. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI section is displayed with priority during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap with the display region of the first decorative symbol, but with the display region of the first decorative symbol. May overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or the explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed, in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and it is hot when a certain stage is entered, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, when displaying a normal stage name in white, it is not as hot as displaying a red stage name, so this may also be a kind of notice.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 470(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, a button image 136a is displayed above the stage name display portion ST1 in a default display mode, and the display mode is changed when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed all the time or may not be displayed for a certain period. Also, the UI unit may be always displayed, or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the lord's character is on the stage, and performs various actions according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper portion of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The lord's character may or may not always be displayed.

Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest monument 224E has a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yashiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged and can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. Further, both the Yatsushiro 224Fa and the general 224Fb have a light emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the contents of the effect.

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 470(b), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting opening 230, the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed to notify that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the variable display of the symbols that is the target of prefetching. However, in this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 470(b).

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 470(c), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, the display mode blinking in white). At this time, a sound output of "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice is displayed by the hold display. The voice output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed before the voice output from the speaker 120. May be. In this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. Further, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed along with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (explanation display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 470(c), an explanation display “This fluctuation is...” Is made on the balloon TT2, and a suggestion is given regarding the advance notice to be made in the pachinko machine 100. The blowing portion TT2 is overlapped with the first decorative pattern, but it may be arranged at a position where it is not overlapped. Further, the princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon TT2 may be displayed after the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, or the balloon TT2 may be displayed. After being displayed, the princess Chibi character CH1 may be displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Then, as shown in FIG. 470(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that a plurality of arrows descend from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. The plurality of arrows appear as a notice display, and are overlapped with the decorative pattern in the variable display. In addition, the balloon section TT2 is changed to an explanatory display of "maybe...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows is started may be the timing before the explanation display of the balloon TT2 is changed, or the timing after the explanation display of the balloon TT2 is changed. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing at which the explanation display of the balloon section TT2 is changed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the princess Chibi character CH1 and the balloon TT2 are overlapped with a plurality of arrows, but may be overlapped with a plurality of arrows. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display section TT1. The timing at which the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the display of the balloon section TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon section TT2 is changed. Good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 is deleted may be the same timing as the timing at which the display on the balloon section TT2 is changed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Then, as shown in FIG. 470(e), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the left symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6”. The left symbol stopped and displayed in "decoration 6" is displayed so as to partially overlap the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon TT2. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be stuck on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 470(f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the right symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”. Note that the plurality of arrows and the Chibihime character CH1 have been deleted. The timing at which the plurality of arrows are erased may be after the Chibihime character CH1 has been erased, before the Chibihime character CH1 is erased, or may be erased by the Chibihime character CH1. It may be the same timing as the timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 470(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as "decoration 2", a combination of decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" After the shaking fluctuation is performed, the display result of the loss is confirmed. In addition, at the timing of the fixed stop display of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed in the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". .. At this time, the variable icon h0 may be erased or may remain displayed. Further, it may be configured to be erased before the swinging fluctuation state of the decorative pattern is started.

FIG. 471(a) shows a state where the symbols are stopped and displayed, continuing from FIG. 470(g).

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 471(b), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is stored in the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 471(b), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. To be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the same timing as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the change of the decorative pattern. The timing may be before the start of display. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 471(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is provided on the left side of the display screen together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. It is displayed. In the speech bubble portion TT2, a dialogue such as "where is the grandfather" is displayed, and the conversation notice is started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which a plurality of arrows again descend from the upper right side to the lower left side of the display screen is shown. As described above, the plurality of arrows may function as continuous notices that are continuously displayed in the symbol variable display a plurality of times. In addition, in this effect example, as in FIG. 470(c), the Chibihime character CH1 is displayed, but other characters may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 471(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon character TT3 as the third tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the grandfather character GY1. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (description display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 471(d), in response to the dialogue display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech display "here" is displayed in the balloon portion TT3, and the conversation announcement is continued. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon character TT3 may be displayed after the grandpa character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The grandfather character GY1 may be displayed later. In addition, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandpa character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display section TT1. Note that the tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at a timing after the grandpa character GY1 is displayed, or at a timing before the grandpa character GY1 is displayed. Good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and the timing at which the grandpa character GY1 is displayed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be stuck on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 471(e), the state that the family crest monument 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. More specifically, the family crest monument 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after moving, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the balloon part TT2. Each part is covered.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 471(f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extension animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, and the hold display frame FL1 is extended upward, and the family crest actor 224E. It is shown to appear above. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 shows a portion that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. Further, the expanded reserved display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon TT2 and overlaps the balloon TT2, but does not overlap the balloon TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the dialogue display (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. In this way, the display mode of the pending display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an expanded display mode. It should be noted that, in this example of performance, a drawing of the pending display frame FL1 before expansion and the pending display frame FL1 after expansion is shown, but the extended animation also includes the expansion of the pending display frame FL1 step by step.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 471(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is shown. In addition,
The Ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and is more difficult to visually recognize than when the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

In FIG. 471(h), the state that the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side or the rear side of the conversation notice display by the character CH1 of the princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather. .. It should be noted that the effect by the ninja character NJ1 can be said to be performed in the expanded portion of the post-expansion pending display frame FL1. In other words, it can be said that the Ninja character NJ1, which is an example of effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode. It can also be said. The effect by the ninja character NJ1 may function as an effect of the look-ahead notice or the change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect (effect by the ninja character NJ1) performed in the extended display frame FL1 after expansion, but it can be said that the effect display is performed outside the retained display frame FL1.

After that, in FIG. 471(i), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12. As shown in FIG. 471(i), the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is configured to include the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the region inside the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is large.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 471(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. As a result, the player may have an expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change and the reliability of the big hit may increase.

After that, in FIG. 471(k), it is shown that the emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. In other words, the predetermined light emitting means (such as the LED incorporated in the family crest part 224E or the LED provided in the special figure starting port) is placed on the hold icon before the hold icon of the hold that is the target of prefetching changes. It can be said that the aspect is changed according to the aspect after the change of.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 471(l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is again displayed in an easily visible manner. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. It should be noted that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed, the display mode of the hold icon h12 may change after the voice output, or the display of the hold icon h12. The mode change and the voice output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 471(m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the hold display frame FL1 is changed to the same figure (a). An animation display (reduced animation) is performed to reduce the shape to the one shown. A reduced animation may be performed without deleting the ninja character NJ1. In this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward in accordance with the reduction of the pending display frame FL1, and the change icon h0 is displayed. May be overlapped with each other so that they are finally erased.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 471(n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the start timing of each production such as Chibihime character CH1, grandfather character GY1, advance notice display of a plurality of arrows, family crest part 224E, decorative pattern variable display, and extension operation of hold display frame FL1. The end timing and the end timing can be set in any combination.

Further, in this effect example, a character (for example, a ninja character NJ1) for changing the hold icon is displayed in the extended hold display frame FL1. However, an image substantially the same as the changed hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so as to display, or may be configured to display an image (corresponding to the changed hold icon) that recalls the changed hold icon.

Next, in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1, an example of the effect when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails will be described.

471(i′) corresponds to FIG. 471(i) and has the same effect contents as in FIG. 471(i). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 471(j′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, but the effect EF2 is not displayed, and the shuriken SH1 is the second hold. After passing through the icon, as shown in FIG. 471(k′), the shuriken SH1 is framed out below the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, thereby failing to change the display mode of the hold icon. Directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains the mode of blinking in white.

FIG. 472 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. In FIG. 472, it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the decorative design in which the character display of “change” is displayed in the middle design is stopped and displayed. That is, it can be said that the decorative pattern of "change" is a display suggesting the effect contents.

As shown in FIG. 472(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in the UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the reserved display frame FL1 in the center thereof. It is displayed in a housed state, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 472(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white, and the prefetch advance notice is displayed. It is displayed in a manner. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration 3-
It is shown that the combination of decorative patterns of "change-decoration 1" is swinging and fluctuating. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 472(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display portion ST1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done.

After that, in FIG. 472(b), the state that the family crest accessory 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. At this time, the family crest monument 224E completely covers the reserved display frame FL1, and also partially covers the first reserved icon h11, the tutorial display section TT1, and a part of the middle pattern of “change”. Covering. Note that the family crest monument 224E may not overlap the decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 472(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and is displayed above the family crest part 224E. At this time, the pending display frame FL1 after expansion overlaps the decorative pattern (the middle pattern of "change"). In other words, it can be said that the decorative design (the middle design of “change”) is overlapped with the expanded pending display frame FL1. The extended display frame FL1 may not overlap the decorative pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 472(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1 is shown. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, which is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

In FIG. 472(e), a state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in a state where the display indicating the effect content (decorative pattern of “change”) is overlapped.

After that, FIG. 472(f) shows that the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 472(g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

After that, in FIG. 472(h), it is shown that the emission color of the family emblem 224E changes from white to green.

Then, as shown in FIG. 472(i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is easily visible again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 472(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the pending display frame FL1 disappears, and thereafter, a reduced animation of the pending display frame FL1 is performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 472(k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, the decorative pattern overlapped by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative pattern is easier to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the overlap display frame FL1 overlapped by the decorative pattern is not eliminated.

FIG. 473 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 473, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally framed out, and when the explanation display is performed, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below. Note that FIGS. 473(a) to 473(n) are the same as FIGS. 471(a) to 471(n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an animation of frame-in and frame-out, and therefore is different. Only the part will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 471(a) to 471(n) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 473(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed and is in a frame-out state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 473(b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in animation (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and thereafter, At the timing shown in FIG. 473(c), the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the tutorial display section TT1 displays a character display of "panda is master of lord". The timing at which the character display of the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. May be Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the character display of "Panda is master of lord" in the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed until the frameout animation (frameout animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 473(f) (for example, It is continuously displayed for 5 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 473(e), when the family crest part 224E rises and overlaps with a part of the tutorial display section TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed. It may be overlapped.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 473(f) to 473(h), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation for frame-out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L is performed. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or the frame-out animation starts. It may be erased at a timing after that, or may be displayed until the frame-out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. The start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation in the hold display frame FL1, may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or may be the timing before the start of the extended animation. The timing may be after the start. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 can be said to be an example of the second extended display. For example, the tutorial display section TT1 is similar to the extended reserved display frame FL1 (may be an example of the first extended display in this example of performance) in that it is not overlapped with the decorative pattern, but the dialogue is It can be said that they are different in that they do not overlap the notice, that there are few overlapping areas, that they do not overlap frequently, and so on.

FIG. 474 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect shown in FIG. 471. In FIG. 474, after the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanation and the frame is displayed, the tutorial display unit TT1 again enters the frame and the preview display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, in FIGS. 474(a) to 474(n), after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again, and the preview display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Since it is similar to (a) to (n) in the figure, only different parts will be described, and description of the same contents as in (473) to (n) in FIG. 473 will be omitted.

After the effects shown in FIGS. 474(a) to 474(h) are performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 474(i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial is started from below the frame on the right side of the display screen. The frame-in animation of the display unit TT1 is restarted, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown in FIG. The display is displayed. That is, there is a display indicating that pseudo-linking may be performed. That is, in the tutorial display section TT1, not only the tutorial display but also the notice display can be displayed. It should be noted that the character display of "pseudo-relation" may be a notice of the change or a look-ahead notice. The timing of completion of the frame-in animation on the tutorial display section TT1 may be a timing before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or a timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be present or at the same timing as when the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. After that, as shown in FIGS. 474(j) to (n), the tutorial display section TT1 is continuously displayed. In this example of performance, the display time of the tutorial display section TT1 is longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed, but even if the display time is the same, Alternatively, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to have a longer display time when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. Further, the color of the characters may be different between the case of the explanation display and the case of the notice display. As described above, in this production example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

In the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a pattern of success or failure are displayed, and when a success pattern of the mini-game is performed, simultaneously with the display indicating success or after the display. , A display that gives a change to another effect display such as a hold change (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, a change in the display mode of the variable icon, the stop of the pseudo-relational pattern, the occurrence of the pseudo-repeation, the display mode of the dialogue notice Changes (for example, blue lines or blue background lines changed to red lines or red greeting lines), step-up of the line notice (for example, when the character A line notice is displayed, then the character B line It may be configured to display a notice).

FIG. 475 is a diagram showing, step by step, an example of the super reach effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 475 is, for example, executed after the effect display shown in FIG. 471 is performed, and the variable display of symbols based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is changed as described above is performed. Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 475(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the pending display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed state, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 475(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a display mode of a pre-reading notice that is displayed in a green light, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 have a default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is erased. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the explanation display is displayed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 475(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display portion ST1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done. The family coat emblem 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the variable icon h0.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 475(b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a message notifying that the super reach (swordsman reach) will be developed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 475(c), the light-emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which shows that the swordsman reach has a high reliability against the big hit. .. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon, and the tutorial display section TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon. It may be difficult to visually recognize these displays as compared with the case where they do not overlap.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 475(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part is framed out below the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI part FO animation is started, the character display displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 is erased and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted. The timing of erasing the character display on the tutorial display section TT1 may be a timing before the timing of erasing the hold icon or a timing after the timing of erasing the hold icon. The timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Although the variable icon h0 has not been deleted, the variable icon h0 may also be deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 475(d) to 475(g), the UI unit frames out by the UI unit FO animation. In some cases, even if the hold display frame FL1 is deleted, the display mode of the hold icon may be recognized by the emission color of the family crest monument 224E. That is, as described above, it is displayed by performing the variable display of symbols based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the effect of changing the display state of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1. It may be possible to confirm the display mode after the change of the hold icon even after the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is housed is hidden.

FIG. 475(h) shows that a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to Swordsman Reach, and the second decorative symbol display. In the stage name display portion ST1 of the device 208M, the character display of "Swordsman Reach" is displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 475(h), a state in which the lord's character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed.

After that, for example, after the animation display of the duel scene by the lord's character and the swordsman character shown in FIGS. 457(c) to (h) is performed, the first decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 475(i). In the pattern display device 208L, the main character is defeated by an enemy swordsman, and as a result, a combination of decorative patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is derived for both the first and second decorative symbols, and fluctuations are caused. Is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 475(j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach is changed to the background of the castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIGS. 475(j) to (n), an animation (UI portion FI animation) in which the UI portion is framed in from below the display screen is performed. Although the hold icon is displayed again after the UI section FI animation is displayed, it may be displayed after the UI section FI animation is displayed, or the UI section FI animation is displayed. It may be displayed upon completion. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 475(o), the first decorative pattern displayed on the third decorative pattern display device 208N is a decoration of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" on the first decorative pattern display device 208L. It is stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". Further, the family crest monument 224E changes from a green light emission mode to a default light emission mode (white light emission mode). Although the first decorative symbol is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be erased at the stop display. The timing at which the family crest monument 224E changes to the default light emission mode may be the same as the stop display of the decorative design, or may be a timing before the stop display of the decorative design, or the decoration. The timing may be after the stop display of the symbols. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the variable icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode once before the stop display of the decorative pattern and then deleted, or may be changed to the default display mode after the stop display of the decorative pattern. It may be erased after that, before the stop display of the decorative pattern, it may be erased without changing the display mode, or after the stop display of the decorative pattern, the display mode is It may be erased without changing, or may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the stop display of the decorative pattern.

It should be noted that while the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is being displayed, the hold display frame FL1 after expansion/expansion/reduction may be displayed. The hold display frame FL1 may be configured so as not to overlap the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

In addition, the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 may be displayed during the super reach, and in this configuration, each timing during the super reach (for example, cut-in of an ally character or cut-in of an enemy character). Display timing, or the display timing of the dialogue displayed in blue, the display timing of the dialogue displayed in red, and the like) may be changed.

In addition to or in place of the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be frame-in during super reach, and the display mode at each timing may be changed. You may make it display one of the multiple types of display which shows.

FIG. 476 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 476(a-1) to (a-4), it is shown that the effect display in which the notice icon is stocked is performed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 1) to (b-6) in FIG. 476 (c-1) to FIG. 476 (c-1) show that a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed while the notice icon is stocked. FIG. (c-6) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the notice icon is performed by an effect that is partially common to the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon.

The effect example shown in FIG. 476(a-1) is the same as that in FIG. 471(g) except that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed instead of the ninja character NJ1. Omit it. Note that, as shown in FIG. 476(a-1), a part of the treasure chest notice icon BX is overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and a part thereof is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. It is difficult to see when compared. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is used as an example of the notice icon, but it is also applicable to the case of displaying various notice icons shown in FIGS. 412 and 467(d), for example. Needless to say.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 476(a-2), the state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the part of the notice icon BX of the treasure box that is not overlapped with the family crest 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it.

Thereafter, in FIG. 476(a-3), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed reduced, but it may be displayed without being reduced or may be displayed enlarged. Further, the shape may be changed and the display color may be changed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 476(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is stopped and displayed above the second hold icon h12, and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. It suggests that some kind of notice will be given in the symbol variation display based on the hold. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by the notice icon BX of the treasure box.

471(g) in the effect example shown in FIGS. 476(b-1) to (b-6), except that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed above the second hold icon h12. -Since it is the same as that of the same figure (l), detailed description is abbreviate|omitted. Note that the notice icon BX shown in FIG. 476(b-1) is not limited to the one displayed in the above-described manner in FIGS. 476(a-1) to (a-4), but may be another effect, for example. It may be displayed by (for example, an effect produced by stopping the chance symbol). Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

FIG. 476(b-3) shows that the shuriken SH1 overlaps the notice icon BX of the treasure box. Here, the shuriken SH1 may be overlapped with the notice icon BX of the treasure box or may be overlapped with the notice icon BX of the treasure box. That is, for example, even if the treasure chest notice icon BX is displayed in the manner described above in FIGS. 476(a-1) to (a-4), the shuriken SH1 is better than the treasure chest notice icon BX. May be displayed on the front side or the back side.

FIG. 476(b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps not only the second hold icon h12 but also the notice icon BX of the treasure box. As a result, it may not be known whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box changes, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 476(c-1) to (c-5) are the same as those in FIGS. 476(b-1) to (b-5), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 476(c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second hold icon h12, but the emission of the family crest actor 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the changed hold icon is changed. No change in aspect is observed. That is, it can be said that the change in the hold icon is not displayed due to the change in the emission color of the family crest monument 224E.

FIG. 476(c-6) subsequent to FIG. 476(c-5) shows the state after the effect EF2 is erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 476(c-6), after the effect EF2 is erased, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box changes. In some cases, the player may be surprised at the production and further increase the expectation for the big hit, because the notice icon BX of the treasure box is changed not by the change of the display mode of the hold icon but by the promotion change. is there. The change mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box is not limited to the change in size, and for example, the shape may be changed, the color may be changed, or the combination may be changed. .. As shown in FIG. 476(c-6), the speaker 120 outputs a voice notifying that the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box has changed, but the voice output does not appear. You may

FIG. 477 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 477(a-1) to (a-6), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icons other than the hold icons displayed in the preread advance notice display mode (for example, blinking in white) 477(b-1) to (b-4) in FIG. 477(b-1) to FIG. 4(b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 to display the hold icon. FIG. 477(c-1) to (c-5) in FIG. 477(c-1) to (c-5) show that the display mode of all the displayed hold icons is changed. Is shown.

The example of the effect shown in FIG. 477(a-1) is the same as that in FIG. 471(g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 477(a-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 477(a-1) followed by FIG. 477(a-2), it is shown that the family crest monument 224E is descending toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h12, which is making a pre-reading notice, instead of the second hold icon h12.

After that, in FIG. 477(a-3), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is facing the third hold icon h13.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 477(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the third hold icon h13, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the third hold icon h13 explodes is displayed. Has been done. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire third hold icon h13 and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second hold icon h12. The second hold icon h12 remains in the display mode of the prefetching notice (blinking in white).

After that, in FIG. 477(a-5), it is shown that the emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is given that the display color of the third hold icon h13 changes from white to green.

Then, as shown in FIG. 477(a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a green lighting state. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. It should be noted that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h13 may be changed after the voice output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h13 may be performed. The mode change and the voice output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged from the display mode of the prefetching notice. According to this effect example, not only the second hold icon h12 but also the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h12 is changed, so that the effect can be made to have an unexpectedness and the second hold icon h13 can be displayed. In some cases, it is possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13 while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12. .. It should be noted that although this example of effect has been described with respect to the third hold icon adjacent to the second hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice, it may be applied to the first hold icon. However, if there is a fourth hold, it may be performed for the fourth hold icon h14.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 477(b-1) to (b-4), the extended character FC1 instead of the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the throwing object is also displayed. 471 (g) to (j) of FIG. 471 except that the point is changed. Therefore, only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 477(b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, not the ninja character NJ1 but the banquet character BC1 appears in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1. Note that the bancho character BC1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

In FIG. 477(b-2), a state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the part of the bancho character BC1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bancho character BC1 is throwing a qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a thrown item. The qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice. The effect display of the qigong wave KK1 may be displayed on the front side or on the back side of the conversation notice display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather. Good.

After that, FIG. 477(b-3) shows that the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the qigong wave KK1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 477(b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. Is being done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different between the case of the shuriken SH1 and the case of the qigong wave KK1. Further, at this time, the bancho character BC1 is erased from the reserved display frame FL1, but may be displayed. As described above, in this example of performance, by displaying a character other than the ninja character NJ1, it may be possible to change the jackpot reliability depending on the appearing character, for example.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 477(c-1) to (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. Other than the above, it is the same as FIG. 477 (b-1) to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 477 (c-3) followed by the same figure (c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, the effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but also in the entire hold icon display area. That is, the display of the effect EF3 informs that all of the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are subject to change in display mode. This may give rise to the expectation that confidence may increase for all pending. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 477(c-4), the longest character BC1 is erased from the reserved display frame FL1, but it may be displayed. Further, the effect by the effect EF3 may be an effect that is performed only when the bancho character BC1 appears, and may not be an effect when the ninja character NJ1 appears. Further, when the banchou character BC1 appears, the effect EF3 may be performed without fail.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 477 (c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the first hold icons h11 to h3 are compared with the state in which the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 of is displayed again easily and visually. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this effect example, not only the hold icon that is the target of prefetching but also the display mode of all the displayed hold icons can be changed, so that the effect can be given a surprise and In some cases, the expectation for a big hit can be dramatically improved. This effect example may be performed, for example, when the hold is increased at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold is increased after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. You may make it to.

FIG. 478 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 478(a-1) to (a-5) show that the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged, and FIGS. 478(b-1) to (478). FIG. 478(c-1) to FIG. 478(c-4) show that the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened and a character related to the hold change notice effect appears in b-5). In the figure, it is shown that an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is being performed.

The effect example shown in FIG. 478(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 471(g) and described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in (a-2) of FIG. 478 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. In addition, the ninja character NJ1 is further moved upward in accordance with the further expansion of the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E and is easier to visually recognize as compared with the state in which it is overlapped with the family crest monument 224E. Further, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon TT3, and the display of the balloon TT3 is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state in which it does not overlap the balloon TT3. Further, the family crest monument 224E is descending toward the initial position.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 478(a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing three shurikens SH1. All of these three shurikens SH1 are moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives advance notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps the balloon TT2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 478(a-3), the family crest monument 224E has returned to the initial position.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 478(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shurikens SH1 overlap the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 explodes in the effect EF2. The display is done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 478 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of the lord. At this time, a notification sound that the display mode of the hold icon has changed may be output from the speaker 120. Further, at this time, the light emission mode of the family crest monument 224E has not changed, but may change. In this way, in this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 471, the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 is further increased upward and the effect contents are partially different. The effect contents may be the same even if the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 is increased. Further, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. As a result, it may be possible to change the feeling of expectation for a big hit depending on the amount of change in the hold display frame FL1.

The extension range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only in the upper direction but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 478(a-3′), in addition to expanding the hold display frame FL1 upward, the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction to a range overlapping the hold icon to be read ahead. Good. Further, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 in the vertical direction may be set to the extent shown in FIG. 471(g), and the extension range in the width direction may be set to a range overlapping the hold icon to be read ahead. Also, when the third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 that is the target of prefetching is displayed, the third hold icon is expanded in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon. You may comprise. In other words, a part of the hold display frame FL1 may be overlapped with the third hold icon.

In FIG. 478(b-1), the family crest monument 224E rises from the initial position and the pending display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the expansion animation of the pending display frame FL1, but the character does not appear in the expanded part, and then, It is shown that the family crest monument 224E has moved to the initial position. Since the other effect contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 471(g), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 478(b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the opening operation of raising the background of the hold display frame FL1 like a shutter is started, and the back side of the background is visually recognized. It is shown that various forms of display are being performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 478(b-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background of the reserved display frame FL1 is in a fully open state, and the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 is shown. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 whose background is fully opened, and to make the color different depending on the degree of expectation of a change in the display mode of the hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 478(b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1. The timing at which the throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 is started may be later than the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, or the same as the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. Alternatively, the timing may be before the background of the reserved display frame FL1 is fully opened. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 478(b-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

Then, as shown in FIG. 478 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. At this time, the closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 descends like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. The start timing of the closing operation of the background of the hold display frame FL1 may be before the display of the effect EF2 or the same as the display of the effect EF2. Alternatively, it may be after the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

The example of the effect shown in FIG. 478(c-1) is the same as FIG. 471(i) except that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken toward the variable icon h0. A detailed description will be given, and a description of others will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 478(c-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken SH1 toward the variable icon h0.

Then, as shown in FIG. 478(c-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the variable icon h0, and the effect EF3 in which the variable icon h0 explodes is displayed. This effect EF3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire variable icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. The second hold icon h12 remains unchanged in the display mode of the prefetching notice. This may change the display mode of the variation icon h0 while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon, and may increase the reliability of the jackpot for the variation. It may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

After that, in FIG. 478 (c-3), it is shown that the emission color of the family coat emblem 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is given that the display color of the variable icon h0 changes from white to green. In other words, the predetermined light emitting means (such as the LED incorporated in the family crest part 224E or the LED provided in the special figure starting port) is changed to the change icon before the notice that the change icon display mode is changed is given. It can be said that the aspect is changed according to the aspect after the change of h0.

Then, as shown in FIG. 478(c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the variable icon h0 is again displayed in an easily visible manner. At this time, the variation icon h0 is displayed in a green lighting state. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed. It should be noted that voice output may be performed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the voice output, or the display of the variable icon h0 may be changed. The mode change and the voice output may be performed at the same time.

FIG. 479 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 479 shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the UI unit is framed out of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 479(a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the reserved display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed state, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 479(a), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the prefetch advance display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the first decorative symbol is variably displayed. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the princess Chibi character CH1 on the left side of the display screen. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side in the balloon portion TT2, which suggests that a UI portion FO animation in which the UI portion including the pending display frame FL1 is framed out, which will be described later, is performed. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 479(a) is a display related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is hidden due to the frame-out.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 479(a), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display portion ST1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second hold number display and special symbols of special maps 1 and 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol of 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done.

FIG. 479(b) shows a state in which the UI portion FO animation is performed and the UI portion is framed out below the display screen together with the hold display frame FL1. This UI part FO animation is performed, for example, when shifting to a darkening effect or SP reach.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 479(c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed, and the shuriken SH1 is thrown toward the position where the second hold icon h12 was displayed. Is being done. That is, in this effect example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 479(c), the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the decorative pattern and also the balloon portion TT2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 479(d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the explosion effect EF2 is displayed. There is.

After that, in FIG. 479(e), it is shown that the emission color of the family coat emblem 224E changes from white to green. That is, the advance notice is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 479(f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, but the UI portion is still in the frame-out state, so the second hold icon h12 is still displayed. It has not been. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

FIG. 479(g) shows a state in which an animation (UI section FI animation) in which the UI section is framed in is performed and the UI section FI animation is completed. When the UI section FI animation is completed, the UI section is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

In this example of effect, the UI part including the hold display frame FL1 is framed out, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed during this, but for example, FIG. 479(a′) to FIG. As shown in ′), the UI section may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, the effect example shown in FIG. 479(a') is the same as that in FIG. 479(a), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 479(a') is followed by the same figure (b'), showing that the UI part FO animation is completed. As shown in FIG. 479(b′), in this effect example, when the UI part FO animation is performed, the UI part is framed out below the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is not framed out and is displayed. Is maintained.

In FIG. 479(c′), an extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 479(c′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed as the second hold icon h12. The production is being thrown towards the position where it had been. That is, in this effect example, even when the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode is not displayed, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed.

FIG. 480 is a diagram showing, in steps, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 480(a-1) to (a-7), it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are performed at the same time. FIG. 480(b-1) to FIG. 480(b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

The effect example shown in FIG. 480(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 471(f) and described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in (a-2) of FIG. 480 (a-1), a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the reserved display frame FL1 is shown in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest monument 224E, and it is difficult to visually recognize the character NJ1 as compared with the state where the family crest monument 224E is not partially overlapped.

Further, in the third decorative pattern display device 208N, a state in which the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started and the lord's character tries to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown.

Thereafter, in FIG. 480(a-3), a state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to visually recognize it. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice.

On the other hand, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the lord's character has thrown the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 is thrown may be the same as the timing at which the ninja character NJ1 starts throwing the shuriken SH1 or may be before the throwing of the shuriken SH1. The timing may be after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, in FIG. 480(a-4), the state in which the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position is shown. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 480(a-4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The bomb icon I61 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and also overlaps with the old character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the bomb icon I61, and the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon TT3 are also overlapped with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the grandfather character GY1 or the balloon portion TT3.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 480(a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 480(a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character is ruptured. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed. May be the timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

After that, in FIG. 480(a-6), a notice is given that the light emission color of the family crest monument 224E changes from white to green and the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 480(a-6), the exploding bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62, and the swordsman reach is announced. Here, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 may output a sound notifying that effect. Further, the timing at which the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes may be the same as the timing at which the emission color of the family crest 224E changes to green, or before the emission color of the family crest 224E changes to green. Or the timing after the emission color of the family coat emblem 224E changes to green. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 480(a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. On the other hand, the sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 480(a-7), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size, and thereafter, the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character. Ends the throwing animation. It should be noted that it may be notified by voice output that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been placed in the tutorial display section TT1. In this way, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping with the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, so that a comparison is made with the state in which the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not arranged in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Then, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. In other words, according to this effect example, it can be said that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display section TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. Thus, in this example of performance, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, so that the player can easily draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the swordsman's notice icon I62. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the presentation explanation that may occur in the future.

The effect example shown in FIG. 480(b-1) is the same as that in FIG. 470(a) except that the text display “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, and thus the detailed example is detailed. The description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 480(b-1) followed by FIG. 480(b-2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the lord's character is started, and the lord's character is bomb icon. It is shown trying to throw I61.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 480(b-3), the lord's character throws a bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is shown.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 480(b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord's character reaches the second hold icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 bursts. Is shown. The display of the exploded bomb icon I61 covers the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 480(b-5), in the first decorative pattern display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased, and the ruptured bomb icon I61 is compared to the state in which the bomb icon I61 is not erased. The hold icon h12 is displayed again in an easily visible manner. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a prefetch advance notice display mode (display mode blinking in white). As described above, the manner of changing the display mode of the read-ahead notice of the hold icon is not limited to when the hold is increased, and may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold is increased. Further, like this example of effect, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by another change effect. In addition, the above-described effect of changing the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon may be performed, for example, in a state where the UI unit is out of frame.

FIG. 481 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 481, it is shown that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while moving the sub display devices (the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N).

The effect example shown in FIG. 481(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 471(d) and described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 481(a-2) following FIG. 481(a-1) shows that the lord's character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased for each stage.

After that, in FIG. 481(a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moving toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, the grand character GY1, the balloon section TT3, the tutorial display section TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative pattern are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the grand character GY1 and the balloon section. TT3, the tutorial display portion TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are in a visually difficult state when compared with a state in which they are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, in FIG. 481(a-4), it is shown that the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuously moving. Then, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the variable icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are respectively larger in size than the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an extended display of the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 481(a-4), although the overlap with the old-fashioned character GY1 has been eliminated, the balloon portion TT3, each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is still the third decorative symbol display. It is overlapped with device 208N. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 481(a-4), the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 and each part of the balloon portion TT2 are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 housed in the hold display frame FL1, and each of the balloon portions TT2 is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 481 (a-5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is at a position where its center is aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the movement is completed. Then, all of the reserved display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and together with the medium symbol and the reserved display frame FL1. The change icon h0 becomes invisible in a front view. In addition, a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon TT2, and the balloon TT3 is also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first reserve icon h11, the balloon TT2, and a part of the balloon TT3 are partially overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state where they are not overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 481 (a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an expansion animation of the reserved display frame FL2 is performed and the reserved display frame FL2 expands upward, and the expanded portion is a ninja. The appearance of the character NJ2 is shown. That is, it can be said that the pending display frame FL2 displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in an expanded manner and the pending display frame FL2 is displayed in a further expanded manner. Although the ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the size may be the same. However, it may be made smaller.

Then, as shown in FIG. 481(a-7), a state in which the ninja character NJ2 is throwing the shuriken SH1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 that gives the look-ahead notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side or the back side of the conversation notice display by the character CH1 of the princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather. .. It can be said that the production by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the expanded portion of the expanded pending display frame FL2. In other words, it can be said that the Ninja character NJ2, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect by the ninja character NJ2 may function as an effect of a look-ahead notice or a change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect (effect by the ninja character NJ2) performed in the extended display frame FL2 after expansion, but can be said to be the effect performed outside the retained display frame FL2.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 481(a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves so as to straddle the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 481 (a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. This effect EF2 is partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, in FIG. 481 (a-10), a state in which the emission color of the family emblem 224E changes from white to green is shown. Further, the LED arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, and these light emitting means notify the advance notice that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. To do. The timing of changing the emission color of the family crest monument 224E may be the same as the timing at which the LED provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, or on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or before the LED provided in the third decorative pattern display device 208N emits green light. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 481 (a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared to the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the second hold icon h12
The display mode of is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, a change in the display mode of the hold icon may be notified by voice output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 481(a-12), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state is shown in which the hold display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, the animation may be performed by frame-out from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the fade-out may be performed, or the erase may be performed suddenly.

After that, in FIG. 481 (a-13), a state is shown in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves to the right and moves toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 481 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is eliminated, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the third decorative symbol display. A part of the device 208N is overlapped and a part of the device 208N is visible together with the change icon h0. In addition, the middle pattern of the first decorative symbol is also partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and compared with the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not partially overlapped. While the part is visible, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is difficult to see compared to the non-overlapped state.

After that, in FIG. 481 (a-14), it is shown that the third decorative symbol display device 208N is in the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 481 (a-14), since the overlap has been eliminated for each display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L that has been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far, the overlap is achieved. Compared with the state in which is not eliminated, each display is in a state where it is easy to visually recognize.

After that, in FIG. 481 (a-15), it is shown that the LED emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N is turned off. Instead of turning off the light, the light may be turned on in a default light emitting mode (for example, a white light emitting mode). On the other hand, the family coat emblem 224E still emits green light in correspondence with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

In this production example, one display device (third decorative symbol display device 208N) of the two sub display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is the first decorative symbol. Although the display device 208L is moved so as to overlap the display device 208L, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 481(b), both of the two sub display devices are displayed. You may make it perform the effect which moves and changes the display mode of a hold icon.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 481(b), when performing the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the first decorative symbol The display device 208L is moved to a position close to each other in the center. Then, while extending and displaying the reserved display frame FL2 from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the lower part of the reserved display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And the ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variation icon h00. At this time, by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the balloon portion TT2, the balloon portion TT3, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon. All of h0 are overlapped, and the tutorial display portion TT1 and a part of the character CH1 of Princess Chibi are overlapped.

FIG. 482 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 482, a sub display device (only one sub decorative pattern display device 208P is provided in place of the above two sub display devices, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed in this sub decorative pattern display device 208P Is shown.

482 differs from the above-described embodiment in that it includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub display device. The sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper edge of the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps a part of the front side of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 482(a), the holding display frame FL1 and the holding icon display area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the sub-decorative pattern display device 208P, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged below them. The UI section in which is formed is displayed, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the prefetch advance display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord is explained. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the Chibihime character CH1 on the left side of the display screen. The speech display "Where is the grandfather?" is displayed in the balloon portion TT2. On the right side of the display screen, a balloon portion TT3 is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1. In the speech bubble portion TT3, a dialogue display saying "Here". That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 482(a), the conversation notice is given. Although the balloons TT2 and TT3 overlap the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern may overlap the balloons TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 482(a), the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed.

After that, in FIG. 482(b), an extended animation of the pending display frame FL1 is performed, the pending display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and a state in which the ninja character NJ2 appears in the expanded portion is shown. At this time, the reserved display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P extends from the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reserved display frame displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon section TT2 is overlapped with the expanded reserved display frame FL1 and a part of the balloon section TT2 is visually recognized in comparison with a state where it is not overlapped with the expanded reserved display frame FL1. It is considered difficult. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 482(b), the thrown shuriken SH1 is displayed in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P. It is shown that the user is moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12.

After that, in FIG. 482(c), the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub decorative symbol display device 208P, and is shown toward the second hold icon h12.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 482(d), in the secondary decorative symbol display device 208P, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. There is. The effect EF2 overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11 that is displayed adjacently.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 482(e), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is again easily visually displayed as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. To be done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a state of lighting in green. Here, a change in the display mode of the hold icon may be notified by voice output.

FIG. 483 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIG. 483(a-1) to FIG. 48(a-6) show that an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed while the error display is being performed. In FIG. 483(b), it is shown that an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed while the effect display is being performed across the plurality of decorative symbol display devices, and FIG. (C-1) to (c-3) of FIG. 48 show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed by operating the effect button 136. In (d-3) of the same figure, a state is shown in which an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136 and that changes the display mode of the hold icon while the button effect is being performed is being performed.

The example of the effect shown in FIG. 483(a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 471(d) except that an error display is performed, so only the different points will be described in detail. Detailed explanations of other parts are omitted.

In Fig. 483(a-1), when the lower plate is full, the message "Please remove the ball" is displayed to inform that the lower plate full error has occurred. It is shown that the tan error display ER is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display ER is an example of the error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door open display that notifies that the front frame door 106 is open. Such an error display is displayed prior to other displays because it is necessary to promptly inform the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 483(a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the lower plate full tank error display ER is shown as overlapping with a part of the balloon portion TT2. Note that such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 483(a-2), the state that the family crest accessory 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlaps with the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown. In FIG. 483(a-2), since the family crest 224E is arranged on the front surface of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest 224E. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the lower plate full tank error display ER as compared with the state in which a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped with the family coat emblem 224E.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 483(a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extension animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, and the hold display frame FL1 is extended upward, and is more than the family crest part 224E. The appearance is shown above. In this production example, since the error display is displayed with priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1. Is difficult to visually recognize as compared with a state where the lower tray full tank error display ER is not overlapped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 483(a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper portion of the reserved display frame FL1 is shown. Note that a part of the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ER, and it is difficult to see when compared with a state in which a part of the ninja character NJ1 does not overlap the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is said that.

FIG. 483(a-5) shows a state in which the family crest monument 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest monument 224E is enlarged. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 is still overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, compared to a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is difficult to visually recognize the character NJ1. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a pre-reading notice.

After that, FIG. 483(a-6) shows that the family crest monument 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, the overlapping state of the family crest 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the variable icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is canceled. However, since the lower plate full tank error is still continuing, the lower plate full tank error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the reserved display frame FL1 and the extended part of the reserved display frame FL1 is displayed. Part of it overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ER. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the shuriken SH1 is facing the second hold icon h12 is shown.

In FIG. 483(b), the notice display YK is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and scrolls in the left direction. Has been done. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. The situation is shown. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 483(b), the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetching notice. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display of "enemy invades" is displayed, and the content related to the notice display YK is displayed. In this effect example, since the effect display of the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the extended hold display frame FL1.

In FIG. 483(c-1), as an example of the display mode of the prefetching notice, it is shown that the second hold icon h12 is a button hold icon that is a display mode imitating the effect button 136. In addition, in this example of performance, the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandfather character GY1 are not displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a non-display state. Although the button image 136a is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since the button hold icon is displayed at a position apart from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that even if the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged and displayed, it does not overlap. Further, the display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, a default display mode) after the hold is increased.

Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 483 (c-2), the second hold icon h12 is changed from the button hold icon as shown in FIG. 483 (c-3). The display icon of the lord's character changes to a hold icon. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 is in a state in which it can be accepted on the condition that the symbol is changing and cannot be accepted during the symbol stop display, but the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even during the symbol stop display. Good.

FIG. 483(d-1) shows a state in which an effect for changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while the button effect is being performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, the button effect is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is also performed. .. In this effect example, since the effect display for changing the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the button effect, the hold image frame FL1 in which the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar are partly expanded and displayed. It is overlapped. Further, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed, and therefore, the button effect can be said to be an effect that does not overlap the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is the button effect. It can be said that the productions do not overlap. At this time, when the above-described error display is performed, the button effect and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed in priority. When the button hold icon described above is displayed, the button image 136a is displayed in front of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar and is displayed in front of the hold display frame FL1. It may be displayed on the back side of the remaining time display bar or on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 483 (d-2), the cut-in in which the lord's character is displayed up is displayed as shown in FIG. 483 (d-3). Display may occur. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is highly reliable. In this effect example, since the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped and displayed on the hold display frame FL1 that is displayed in an expanded manner. .. At this time, when the above-described error display is performed, the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed in priority. Further, when the above-mentioned button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display and on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

FIG. 484 is a diagram showing, stepwise, an example of the symbol variation display applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 484(a-1) to (a-5) do not include a sub display device, and effect display is performed only by the decorative pattern display device 208 as the main display device. FIG. 484(b-1) to FIG. 484(b-2) show a state in which an error display is performed. Also, FIG. 484(c) shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 484(d-1) to FIG. -2) shows that a hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

FIG. 484(a-1) is different from the above-described embodiment in that only the decorative pattern display device 208 as the main display device is provided and the sub display device is not provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 484(a-1), the UI section is arranged at the bottom of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the second decorative pattern is displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the display screen is also displayed. In the upper right of the, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed.

Further, the family crest actor 224E is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Yatsushiro actor 224Fa and the general actor symbol 224Fb are disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208.

As shown in FIG. 484(a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and fluctuation fluctuation is performed. Moreover, the variable display is performed in the second decorative pattern. In addition, in the UI unit, a hold display frame FL1 accommodating the variable icon h0 is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 484(a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right of the display screen toward the center is performed. In this example of the effect, images that imitate the sliding doors are used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and the wiping display is such that the sliding doors are closed. Here, the wipe means a video effect in which an image to be displayed next is interrupted from a part of the display screen when the image is switched. There are various types of wipe techniques, but any technique can be applied. In this example of performance, the wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after the shake variation is started by the combination of the decorative decorative patterns, but the wipe display is performed at the timing when the shake variation is completed and the confirmation display is performed. May be performed. In addition, for example, it may be performed when the stage is changed, or may be performed when shifting to the super reach effect, and can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 are overlapped with the UI portion and the first decorative symbol, while being overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the second reserved number display and the fourth symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 484(a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area are not overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are displayed. Here, the timing at which the variable icon h0 is deleted may be a timing before the start of displaying the wipe images WP1 and WP2, or the same timing as the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. It may be present, or it may be a timing later than the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the timing is always performed, or the timing may be different depending on the case.

FIG. 484(a-3) shows that the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are further moving toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 484(a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area are overlapped with the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 shows the wipe image WP1. , WP2 is not overlapped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 484(a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and a state in which the fixed symbol is definitely displayed is displayed. Therefore, the entire hold display frame FL1 is in a state of being entirely overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. In addition, the second decorative pattern displayed on the upper left of the display screen is a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" in accordance with the combination of the decorative patterns displayed when the fluctuation of the first decorative pattern changes. It is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol 1 4th symbol is also stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

After that, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variable display of the special figure 1 is started, the wipe pattern is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are respectively framed out in the left-right direction of the display screen. Be seen. As a result, the UI portion is visible, and the hold display frame FL1 is also visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol have begun variably displayed. At this time, for example, by the hold movement animation, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 moves to the hold display frame FL1 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the second hold icon that was displayed as the second hold icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, the character display "Panda is master of lord" is displayed.

FIGS. 484(b-1) to (b-2) show a state in which the wipe display is being performed during the display of the error display. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 484(b-1) to (b-2) are different from FIGS. 484(a-3) to ((a-3) except that the lower plate full tank error display ER is displayed. Since it is the same as a-4), only the different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of the other points will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 484(b-1) to (b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described lower plate full tank error display ER is shown to overlap the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Has been done. Such an error display is displayed prior to other displays because it is necessary to promptly inform the player. Therefore, also in the case shown in FIG. 484(b-1), the lower plate full tank error display ER is given priority over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. As shown in FIG. 484(b-2), even when the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the lower plate full tank error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. .. Note that an error display such as the lower plate full tank error display ER may be overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

FIG. 484(c) shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 484(c) is the same as FIG. 471(i) except that the display position of the variable icon h0 and the display position of the ninja character NJ1 are reversed. Therefore, only the different points will be described in detail, and the others. A detailed description is omitted. In the effect example shown in FIG. 484(c), for example, when an extension animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the change icon h0 moves upward with the extension of the hold display frame FL1, and from the rear side of the change icon h0. The effect is such that the ninja character NJ1 appears. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the variable icon h0 is changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

In FIG. 484(d-1), a hold display frame FL4 that surrounds the second hold icon h12 that is the subject of the prefetching notice is displayed, and this hold display frame FL4 expands upward, and a ninja appears in the expanded portion. It is shown that the character NJ3 is displayed. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 484(d-1), except that the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 is displayed and is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, FIG. 471( Since it is the same as that of b), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 484(d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice. The hold display frame FL4 is, for example, in a default display mode having a size matching the size of the second hold icon h12, and is framed in from the bottom of the display screen and moved to a position surrounding the second hold icon h12. After that, a display in which the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward is performed by the expanded animation in the above-described manner. Then, the ninja character NJ3 is displayed in the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed. May be overlapped, or the times when both effects are performed may not be overlapped.

Further, when the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed, the symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the next symbol variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 484(d-2), The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the extended reserved display frame FL4 is reduced to the default display mode, and then the symbol is fixedly displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 in the default display mode is moved in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation, and the variable display of symbols is started. Then, the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward by expanding animation. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in this manner. Further, at the time of the symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be temporarily deleted, and after the next symbol variable display is started, the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again. Further, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state even at the time of the symbol stop display, and the hold display frame FL4 may be moved in accordance with the moving display of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation.

FIG. 485 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the effect of expanding the hold display frame. Here, FIGS. 485(a-1) to (a-4) show that the tutorial display section TT6 serving as a hold display frame is expanded, and FIGS. 485(b-1) to (a-4). In b-5), a state in which the hold display frame accommodating the hold icon is expanded and displayed and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed is shown.

As shown in FIG. 485(a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI section is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and in this UI section, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the center of the pending display frame. It is displayed in a state of being housed in the FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 485(a-1), since two variable displays of Toku-zu 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 have default display modes. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative pattern. In addition, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is arranged below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. .. Then, in the tutorial display section TT6, the character display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed, and the appearance of the explanation display is shown. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display portion ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 485(a-1), "Castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. Note that the button image 136a is not displayed in this effect example.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done.

FIG. 485(a-2) shows a state in which the tutorial display section TT6 is expanded upward to push the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area upward to expand the range of the tutorial display section TT6. ing. The expanded tutorial display unit TT6 is configured to include the expanded tutorial display unit TT6. Further, in the expanded tutorial display section TT6, a drink confrontation reach production is started. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative pattern is not disturbed is expanded. In other words, by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, the area below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area (lower area) is expanded. The display that is performed in the lower area is a decorative pattern that is being variably displayed, for example, a dialogue display such as a conversation notice, a notice display, or a display that is not overlapped with the effect of the change in the display of the hold icon. Can be said. Note that, for example, in addition to the first decorative design, a mini decorative design may be displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative design display device 208L, and in this case, even after the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded, the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed. You may overlap and display. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character display of "SP development by victory" is displayed, and the content of the effect performed when the win in the drinking/drinking confrontation reach effect is informed. In the production of a drinker confrontation reach, a battle between the protagonist's lord and the grandfather will be compared, and if the grandfather gets drunk, it will be announced that the protagonist's lord will win and that SP will be reached. In addition, when the drink-drink confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 may be displayed and the hold icon display area may be hidden. May be. Further, in this example of effect, the enlarged tutorial display section TT6 does not display the explanation display displayed in the reduced tutorial display section TT6, but the enlarged tutorial display section TT6 also displays the explanation display. Good. In this case, an explanation display different from the explanation display displayed on the reduced tutorial display section TT6 (for example, an explanation display such as "excitement when oolong tea appears in the drinking confrontation reach production!") is displayed, and the reduced tutorial display. The explanation display displayed in the section TT6 may not be displayed in the enlarged tutorial display section TT6, and conversely, the explanation display displayed in the enlarged tutorial display section TT6 may be displayed in the reduced tutorial display section TT6. You may not be allowed to.

In FIG. 485(a-3), a state where the drinking drink confrontation reach effect is continuously performed is shown.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 485(a-4), in the case of shifting to SP reach, the grandfather is drunk and the effect display in which the main character's lord has won is displayed. Specifically, after the production display in which the main character wins is won (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "success pattern production display"), the UI section is erased and the SP reach (for example, FIG. 457) is displayed. The swordsman reach described above, etc.) will be started. It should be noted that the type of SP reach to be developed may be one type of reach that is determined in advance, or any one of a plurality of types may be selected and performed. Further, when the UI unit is erased, the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 may also be erased, and a part of the configuration of the UI unit (for example, a hold display frame FL1 and a pedestal displaying the hold icon, etc. ) May be left and the display of the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 may be maintained. The types of icons to be deleted may include, for example, the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and when the notice icon is displayed, the notice icon. Also, any one or more of them may be conceptualized as an icon, or all of them may be conceptualized as an icon. Further, the icon may be hidden even when the tutorial display section TT6 is not enlarged. For example, the icon may be hidden when transitioning to SP reach. Then, when the SP reach is completed, the UI section is displayed again. At this time, for example, it is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1). In this case, for example, when the display indicating the loss is performed in the SP reach, the loss wipe is displayed after the display, and the display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1). May be. On the other hand, when the lost result is displayed without shifting to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 485(a-4'), the main character's lord is drunk and the main character's lord is defeated by the grandfather. (Hereinafter, it may be called "effect display of a failure pattern."). After that, after the animation in which the tutorial display section TT6 shrinks downward is performed, the UI section returns to the state shown in FIG. In addition, the variable display of the decorative pattern may be continued and the reach state may be entered, and then the SP reach may be entered. Further, a plurality of types of effect display of the success pattern may be prepared. For example, when the effect display that the main character wins is displayed as described above, the process proceeds to SP reach, and the main character also When an effect display is displayed in which the grandfather does not get drunk and is drawn, an animation in which the expanded tutorial display section TT6 shrinks is performed, and normal reach may be started after the reduced display mode is achieved. .. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 485(a-1) may be configured not to perform the effect display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 485(a-2). The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 485(a-2) may be configured not to display the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the state of FIG. 485(a-1). Further, in the state shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the hold icon and the variable icon may be hidden.

Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. 485(a-4) or (a-4'), the tutorial display unit TT6 is enlarged and the UI unit is expanded. In addition, although the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variation icon h0 are also configured to move their display positions upward with the upward expansion of the tutorial display section TT6, when the UI section becomes an expanded display mode, The icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 may not be displayed. As a display mode in this case, for example, after the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 are erased, an animation (extended animation) in which the tutorial display section TT6 expands upward may be performed, or the expanded animation is completed. After that, the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 may be deleted, or the hold icons h11 to h14 and the variable icon h0 may be deleted during the execution of the extended animation. If the number of holds increases while the extended animation is being executed, the extension animation will continue without the animation with the hold icon increasing (hold increasing animation). May be started.

Further, the drinking-drinking confrontation reach effect may be performed only in the expanded tutorial display section TT6, or may be performed in an area other than the tutorial display section TT6.

The effect examples shown in FIG. 483(a-1) to FIG. 48(a-4) or (a-4') are executed in a single variable display of the decorative symbol. As a notice, the tutorial display unit TT6 may be maintained in an expanded state over a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, as a pre-reading notice, there may be a case in which a curt effect is displayed a plurality of times to show the extended squinting of the reduced-size tutorial display unit TT6.

As shown in FIG. 485(b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this example of performance, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided into four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 485(b-1), the four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and among the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. The second hold icon h12 is a display mode of the prefetching notice (for example, a display mode that lights in blue), and the other hold icons are default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame accommodating the first hold icon h11, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area during the symbol variable display. Here, the area in which the variable icon h0 is displayed may be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 485(b-1), the tutorial display section TT7 displays the character display of "Delivery of notice icon...", which suggests that notice production is performed. The tutorial display unit TT7 may display an explanation. It should be noted that neither the variation icon h0 nor the first holding icon h11 to the fourth holding icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In this example of performance, the stage name display portion and the button image 136a are not displayed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the appearance of the lord's character on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and special figure 1 And the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed.

In addition, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned family crest actor 224E is arranged, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yashiro actor 224Fa and the general actor 224Fb are disposed. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 485(b-1), the family crest monument 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 485(b-2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The hold icon display area can be enlarged and displayed by, for example, an animation display that gradually enlarges. At the timing shown in FIG. 485(b-2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12 is displayed in an expanded manner. At the timing shown in FIG. 485(b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 485(b-3), the emission color of the family coat emblem 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is predicted to change from blue to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 485(b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase his/her expectation for the big hit with respect to the variable display of symbols relating to the suspension corresponding to the second suspension icon h12.

Then, as shown in FIG. 485(b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced and the default display mode is restored. The reduction display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display effect of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame.

Next, another effect pattern that is performed along with the expanded effect of the tutorial display section TT6 in the UI section shown in FIGS. 485(a-1) to (a-4) will be described. In the following description, the mode of the UI section in which the tutorial display section TT6 is reduced as shown in FIG. 485(a-1) may be referred to as the UI section reduction mode, and as shown in FIG. 485(a-2). The mode of the UI part in which the tutorial display section TT6 is expanded may be referred to as an expanded mode of the UI part. In addition, the production pattern described below is applied to an embodiment including three decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N). Alternatively, it may be applied to the embodiment in which the sub-display device 208P is provided below the decorative pattern display device 208, or to the embodiment in which the display device is configured by one decorative pattern display device 208. Good. Further, for example, a 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 285 is provided with a display device separate from the decorative symbol display device 208, and instead of the decorative symbol display device 208 or together with the decorative symbol display device 208, timer advance notice production is performed. It may be configured as follows. It should be noted that the effect carried out in the effect pattern accompanied by the expanded effect of the tutorial display section TT6 in the UI section described below is one of the effect patterns described above (in particular, the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 291 to 324). Although it can be applied, a representative effect pattern among them is appropriately shown and described below.

(First production pattern)
In the first effect pattern, the mini game is displayed on the tutorial display section TT6 in a reduced mode of the UI section shown in FIG. 485(a-1). The mini game to be executed here may be any of the mini games described above, but in this effect pattern, for example, the target mini games shown in FIGS. 296(a3) to (a4) are executed. Alternatively, the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6) may be played, or the golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7) may be played. .. In the case where the target hitting mini-game is played, as shown in FIG. 296(a3), for example, the target TGT is divided into a plurality of areas (for example, four areas), and the lord's character MC1 is released. When the arrow hits the hit area, the tutorial display section TT6 expands, and the drinking drink confrontation reach effect shown in FIG. 91(a-2) is started. On the other hand, when an arrow hits the lost area (in the case of a failure pattern), the tutorial display section TT6 is not expanded and the UI section remains in the contracted state, and the variable display of the decorative pattern continues. In the bowling chance game and the golf game, when the mini game succeeds (in the case of success pattern; in the bowling chance game, when the strike display shown in FIG. 312(a5) is derived, In the golf game, when the display of the cup-in shown in FIG. 312 (b6) is derived), the tutorial display section TT6 expands, and the drinking confrontation reach production is started. On the other hand, when it fails (failure) In the case of a pattern; in a bowling chance game, if a display that leads to the failure of a strike due to remaining inclinable pins is derived, or in a golf game that a display that cup-in failed is derived) , The tutorial display section TT6 is not expanded, and the UI section remains in the contracted mode, and the variable display of the decorative pattern continues.

In the first effect pattern, when the result of the mini game is a result of success (success pattern), the tutorial display section TT6 is expanded and the UI section is changed from the contraction mode to the expansion mode. The tutorial display unit TT6 may be expanded regardless of the game result, and the UI unit may be changed from the contracting mode to the expanding mode, that is, even if the mini game result is a failure result (failure pattern), the tutorial There may be a case where the display unit TT6 is expanded and the UI unit is changed from the reduction mode to the expansion mode. The positioning of the mini game in this case may be an example of a big hit announcement. Further, before the end of the mini game, the UI unit may start changing from the reduction mode to the expansion mode regardless of the result of the mini game. Even when the success pattern is performed in the mini game, the UI part does not change from the contracting mode to the expanding mode in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is being executed, and the drinking drink confrontation reach effect is displayed on the enlarged tutorial display section TT6. May not start.

Further, in the first effect pattern, when the success result is derived as the result of the mini game, the tutorial display section TT6 may be in the reach state and may be expanded to the SP reach without expanding. .. As an SP reach that develops in this case, an SP reach of a different type from the above-mentioned swordsman reach (for example, a super long reach, a triple line reach, an amedri reach, etc.) is performed. This SP reach may be an SP reach performed only when a success result is derived as a result of the mini game. In addition, an SP reach may be prepared which may or may not be performed via the mini game. In this case, if SP reach is started without passing through the mini game. Instead, the big hit symbol mode may be more easily confirmed and displayed when SP reach is started via the mini game. In addition, the same SP reach as the SP reach (swordsman reach) that is started when a victory is achieved in a drinker confrontation reach production may be performed. In addition, after the tutorial display unit TT6 is enlarged and the UI unit is in the expanded mode, SP reach may be performed in the enlarged tutorial display unit TT6.

In addition, when the mini game is played on the tutorial display unit TT6 when the UI unit is in the contracted mode and the result of success is derived as a result, the UI unit changes from the contracted mode to the expanded mode, In the tutorial display unit TT6 of the UI unit, a drinker confrontation reach production may be performed, and the hero of the protagonist may win and shift to the SP reach according to the result of the success of the mini game.

Also, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 485(a-1) to (a-4), the drinker confrontation reach effect is performed after the UI unit is changed from the contraction mode to the expansion mode, but the UI unit is changed from the contraction mode. There may be a case where the mini game described above is performed instead of the reach production in the enlarged tutorial display section TT6 after the expansion mode is set, and the mini game is not performed in the enlarged tutorial display section TT6, and the drink confrontation is performed. The reach production may be performed without fail.

Here, in the case where the UI unit is in an enlarged mode and there is a case where the drinking drink confrontation reach effect is performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 and a case where a mini game is performed, the effect display of the success pattern is performed in the drink drink confrontation reach effect. The symbol variation display being executed when the production display of the success pattern is performed in the mini game may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol mode than the symbol variation display being executed when it is performed. In this case, for example, the production display of the success pattern is performed in the mini game, as compared with the case where the SP reach (for example, swordsman reach) is performed after the production display of the success pattern is performed in the drinking confrontation reach production. When the SP reach (for example, ultra long reach, triple line reach or candy reach etc.) to be transferred later is performed, the jackpot pattern mode may be more easily confirmed and displayed. Further, even if the type of SP reach to be transferred after the effect pattern of the success pattern is displayed in the mini game is the same as the type of SP reach to be transferred after the effect display of the success pattern is performed in the drinker confrontation reach effect. Good. It should be noted that the effect display of the success pattern is displayed in the mini game performed in the tutorial display section TT6 of the UI section in the enlargement mode, the process shifts to SP reach, and when this SP reach is completed, the UI unit enters the contraction mode.

It should be noted that the symbol variation display being executed when the success pattern production display is performed in the drinker confrontation reach production is more than the symbol variation display being executed when the success pattern production display is performed in the mini game. You may make it easy to be confirmed and displayed in the jackpot pattern mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1), when the UI unit is in the reduction mode, the first half of the mini game (first part) is played on the tutorial display unit TT6, and then, FIG. As shown in -2), the UI part may be in an expanded mode, and the second half part (second part) of the mini game may be performed instead of the drink drinking confrontation reach effect, and the mini game may be heaped up. Specifically, for example, in a bowling chance game, the display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is the first half of the mini game, and the first half of the game is as shown in FIG. 312(a3). 312(a4) to FIG. 312(a5) after the tutorial display unit TT6 is enlarged and the UI unit is in the expanded mode after the UI display unit TT6 is expanded before the UI unit is in the contracted mode. As shown in ), by showing how the ball of the bowling approaches the pin and whether or not it becomes a strike, even if a success pattern that eventually becomes a strike or a failure pattern in which an inclinable pin remains is performed. Good. Further, in the golf game, as shown in FIG. 312(b4), the display showing how the lord's character is putting is the first half of the mini game, and the first half is the UI mode in a reduced mode. After being displayed on the tutorial display section TT6 before being enlarged in FIG. 7, after the tutorial display section TT6 is enlarged and the UI section is in the expanded state, the ball is cupped as shown in FIGS. 312(b5) to (b6). It is also possible to indicate whether or not to make a cup-in by showing a state of approaching to, and to finally perform a success pattern of cup-in or a failure pattern of falling out of the cup. The first half of the mini game may be played in an area other than the tutorial display section TT6. Also, a chance-up effect may be performed in at least one part of the first half and the second half of the mini game to enhance the reliability of the jackpot. For example, the background color in the first half of the mini game is blue. In some cases, a default effect mode in which the background color in the latter half is also blue is performed, and in other cases, a chance up effect mode in which the background color in the first half of the mini game is blue and the background color in the latter half is red is performed. There may be cases.

Further, there may be a case where two types of mini games are played in each of the reduction mode and the expansion mode of the UI unit. Specifically, for example, in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced mode of the UI unit, when the target mini-game shown in FIGS. 296(a3) to (a4) is played and the bow is the target TGT, the tutorial display is displayed. After the part TT6 is expanded and the UI part is expanded, a mini game (for example, a bowling chance game or a golf game) according to the hit area may be played. In addition, a bowling chance game (or a golf game) is played on the tutorial display section TT6 in the UI mode in the reduced mode, and when the mini game is successful, the UI section is changed from the reduced mode to the expanded mode and then changed to the expanded mode. A golf game (or a bowling chance game) may be played in the tutorial display section TT6 later. Further, the mini game played in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the UI mode reduction mode and the mini game played in the extension mode tutorial display unit TT6 may be the same, for example, the tutorial display unit in the UI mode reduction mode. In TT6, the first target mini-game is played, and when the bow hits the area of development in the target TGT, the UI section changes from the contracting mode to the expanding mode, and then the tutorial display section TT6 in the expanding mode of the UI section. In, a second target mini-game may be played, and when the bow hits the area of SP reach development in the target TGT, it may be developed into SP reach. In this case, the contents of each area of the target TGT in the first target mini-game and the content of each area of the target TGT in the second target mini-game are made different (that is, the content of the reward per hit). , But they may be the same. Further, for example, in a Sugoroku-style mini game, an effect of shifting from the first map to the second map may be performed.

In this example of performance, a plurality of mini games are not played at the same time (for example, a bowling chance game and a golf game are not played at the same time), but they may be played at the same time. The second mini game may be started during the execution of the mini game.

In addition, for example, when the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 293(b3) to (b4) is performed and the countdown in the timer display is “0:00”, the tutorial display section TT6 is enlarged. Then, after the UI unit is changed from the contraction mode to the expansion mode, the drinking drink confrontation reach effect shown in FIG. 485(a-2) may be performed. In addition, effects other than the drinker confrontation reach effect (for example, mini game, SP reach effect, notice effect, etc.) may be performed. In this case, the preparation-in-progress image RDY may be displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 293(b1) to FIG. 293(b2) before the countdown in the timer display is started. Further, in this effect pattern, one or both of the timer display and the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT6. Also, during the countdown in the timer display, an effect that the countdown is temporarily stopped or an addition of the timer is performed, so that it is difficult to understand the timing when the UI unit changes from the reduction mode to the expansion mode, and the effect is raised. You may In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the countdown is performed from the time indicated when the timer display is started to be displayed, and a certain effect is performed when it becomes 0. It may be configured such that a certain effect is performed when the time indicated when the timer display is started is 0 and the target time is counted up.

Further, in this effect pattern, for example, the display mode of the UI unit may change in the manner shown in FIGS. 291 (d) to (e), and specifically, FIG. In the UI part shown in 1), the display color of the frame part arranged above the tutorial display part TT6 may change from the default color (for example, blue) to the notice color (for example, gold). The look-ahead notice may be given according to a change in the display mode of the set, or the change notice may be given. It should be noted that the notice color is not limited to one color and may be a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the big hit and the degree of expectation that the UI unit is in an expanded mode may be changed depending on the changing color. Further, in this case, the jackpot may change to a color that is determined (for example, a rainbow color). When the display color of the frame part of the UI part changes from the default color to the notice color, the tutorial display part TT6 expands and the UI part is likely to change from the contracting mode to the expanding mode than when the display color does not change to the notification color. May be In addition, when the display color of the frame portion of the UI unit changes from the default color to the notice color, the success pattern in the mini game may be more likely to occur than when the display color does not change to the notice color. As a result, it may be possible to indirectly give a sense of expectation that the tutorial display section TT6 will be expanded. That is, the change in the display color of the frame part of the UI part may be a pre-reading notice that the UI part is in the enlargement mode, or the change notice. Further, although the display color of the frame part is not changed even after the UI part is changed from the reduction mode to the enlargement mode, the display color of the frame part is changed to another color after the UI part is changed to the enlargement mode ( For example, the default color may be returned). Note that the display mode of the UI unit may be changed by changing the shape or pattern of the frame unit instead of changing the color of the frame unit.

Subsequently, a modified example of the expansion mode of the UI unit will be described. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 482, the display device adopts a mode in which the sub display device 208P is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208 as the main display device. In this effect example, in the reduced mode of the UI unit in which the tutorial display unit TT6 is reduced, the entire UI unit is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the production example shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 extends upward, and the UI unit is expanded in a mode of expanding the display area in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example, the tutorial display section TT6 extends downward, and the tutorial display section TT6 is displayed so as to extend downward so that the tutorial display section TT6 straddles the decorative symbol display device TT6 and the sub display device 208P. In the expanded mode of the UI section, the entire tutorial display section TT6 may be displayed on the sub display device 208P. In this case, when the UI unit is in the reduced mode, the above-described mini game may be played on the sub display device 208P, or an explanation display may be displayed.

In this effect example, the tutorial display section TT6 has a two-stage display mode of a reduced mode and an expanded mode, but for example, there are a plurality of types of results in the mini game, and depending on the result, The degree of expansion of the tutorial display section TT6 may be different. Specifically, for example, the degree of expansion of the tutorial display unit TT6 is medium (eg, the tutorial display shown in FIG. 485(a-2), depending on the area of the target TGT where the arrow hits in the target mini-game. The area may be about half the area of the section TT6) or may be large (for example, the mode of the tutorial display section TT6 shown in FIG. 485(a-2)).

Further, when the animation for expanding the tutorial display unit TT6 upward is executed, a meter or a numerical value indicating the expansion degree may be displayed. For example, the frame portion of the UI unit may be displayed depending on the size of the meter or the numerical value. The display mode (for example, display color, pattern, etc.) may be changed.

The effect on the tutorial display section TT6 and the expanded animation on the tutorial display section TT6 may be performed only in a certain effect state (a certain effect mode). Further, for example, it may not be performed in the probability changing state with electric support in which the game speed is prioritized.

Further, the mini game may be played only in the tutorial display section TT6 when the UI section is in the reduced mode.

Further, in this example of production, the situation where the drinking drink confrontation reach effect is performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 when the UI unit is in the expanded mode has been described, but this drinking drink confrontation reach effect is executed only in the expanded tutorial display unit TT6. On the other hand, the mini game may be played in an area other than the tutorial display section TT6.

Further, for example, the following effects may be performed. Specifically, for example, at the start of SP reach (and/or during execution of SP reach), the UI section changes from the contracting mode to the expanding mode and the tutorial display section TT6 expands, and there is an SP reach chance. Whether or not an up is performed Chance up possibility production (for example, SP Reach is a character vs swordsman of Tonosama, and in the chance up possibility production, a panda character trains and succeeds (success pattern production display) When the production display of the success pattern is displayed, the panda character becomes the lord's character in the SP reach after the production of the chance up possibility is finished. By encouraging, the match composition of the lord's character + the panda's character vs the swordsman's character is changed, and the expectation of the big hit is improved. That is, the step up of SP reach is performed. After that, the UI unit performs a reduction animation that returns from the expansion mode to the reduction mode, and then the SP reach is continued with the panda character added.

(Second effect pattern)
In the second effect pattern, the tutorial display unit TT6 expands from the UI mode reduction mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1), but the UI unit expansion mode shown in FIG. 485(a-2) ( No. 1 enlargement mode). In addition to the UI mode enlargement mode shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display section TT6 is reduced in size (second enlargement mode). It may be changed). The degree of expansion of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the second expansion mode is, for example, between the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the contraction mode of the UI unit and the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first expansion mode of the UI unit. However, the size is not limited to this and can be set to any size. The tutorial display section TT6 in the second enlargement mode of the UI section may be larger than the tutorial display section TT6 in the first enlargement mode of the UI section. In this example of the effect, the drink drinking confrontation reach effect may be performed both in the tutorial display section TT6 of the first enlargement mode of the UI section and in the tutorial display section TT6 of the second enlargement mode of the UI section. In this case, the case where the drinking drink confrontation reach effect is performed on the tutorial display section TT6 of the first enlargement mode is more prominent than the case where the drinking display confrontation reach effect is performed on the tutorial display section TT6 of the second enlargement mode. The production display (that is, the success production pattern) in which the lord has won is easily displayed (high reliability). Therefore, when the UI unit is in the second enlargement mode, the drinker confrontation reach effect is easier to perform. Note that the UI unit may be in the first enlargement mode and in the second enlargement mode in the same appearance frequency of the drink drinking confrontation reach effect, and the reliability may be the same.

Further, in the second effect pattern, when the UI section is in the second expansion mode, the above-mentioned mini game (a bowling chance game, a golf game, a target mini game, etc.) is used instead of the drink confrontation reach effect. May be done. Furthermore, when the UI unit is in the second enlargement mode, there may be a case where a drinker confrontation reach effect is performed and a case where a mini game is performed. In this example of performance, when the UI unit is in the first expansion mode, the drinker confrontation reach effect is easier to perform than in the mini game, and when the UI unit is in the second expansion mode, the mini game is easier to be performed than the drinker confrontation reach effect. Has become. In other words, when the UI unit is in the first expansion mode, the drinker confrontation reach effect is easier to perform than in the second expansion mode. The reverse pattern may be used. Further, in this effect example, for example, when comparing the case where the pseudo continuous effect is not performed, when the tutorial display section TT6 is expanded, the UI section becomes the second expansion mode and the second expansion mode. Compared to the case where the mini game is played on the tutorial display section TT6 and the success pattern is achieved, the UI section is in the first enlargement mode, and the drink display confrontation reach effect is performed successfully in the tutorial display section TT6 in the first enlargement mode. In the case of the pattern, it is easier for the final display in the big hit symbol mode to be finally displayed in the symbol variable display. On the contrary, in the case where the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded, the UI unit is in the first enlargement mode than in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first enlargement mode, in which the drinking drink confrontation reach effect is performed and the success pattern is formed. , When the UI section becomes the second enlargement mode and the mini-game is played in the tutorial display section TT6 of the second enlargement mode and the pattern becomes a success pattern, it is finally decided in the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display. You may make it easy to be displayed. In addition, when the UI unit is in the first enlargement mode and the tutorial display unit TT6 in the first enlargement mode is a successful pattern due to the drinker confrontation reach effect, the UI unit is in the second enlargement mode. The reliability may be the same as when the mini game is played on the tutorial display unit TT6 in the second enlargement mode and the success pattern is obtained.

Also, in the case where the UI unit becomes the first enlargement mode, the drink display confrontation reach effect is performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the first enlargement mode, and the SP reach is performed after the effect pattern effect display is displayed. , When the UI unit becomes the second enlargement mode and the drink display confrontation reach effect is performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second enlargement mode and the SP reach is performed after the effect pattern effect display is displayed, After that, the UI portion is displayed in a reduced form.

Further, when the UI unit changes from the reduction mode to the second expansion mode and the drink display confrontation reach effect is performed in the tutorial display section TT6 of the second expansion mode and the success pattern effect display is displayed, the tutorial display is displayed. The section TT6 may be further expanded so that the UI section changes from the second enlargement mode to the first enlargement mode. That is, the mode of the UI unit may be upgraded. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the first enlargement mode, the second drinker confrontation reach effect may be performed, or the above-described mini game may be performed. Then, in the case where the drink display confrontation reach effect performed in the tutorial display section TT6 of the first enlargement mode or the effect display of the success pattern as a result of the mini game being performed, the SP reach may be shifted to. .. If the UI unit is in the first enlargement mode and the demonstration display of the failure pattern is displayed as a result of the drink drinking confrontation reach production being performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 of the second enlargement mode, the UI unit is Instead of the first enlargement mode, the tutorial display section TT6 may be reduced to a reduction mode so that the effect does not develop.

Further, in this effect example, an example in which the drinker confrontation reach effect is performed when the UI unit is in the expansion mode has been described, but for example, the multi-chance up notice shown in FIGS. 309(b) to (i) is given. You may make it displayed on the enlarged tutorial display part TT6. That is, when the UI part is changed from the reduction mode to the first expansion mode and the multi-chance up notice is started, and the mission of at least one of the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production is achieved, the SP reach is achieved. You may make it shift to. In this case, the type of SP reach that shifts when the mission of Chibihime Musou production is achieved may be the same as the type of SP reach that transitions when the mission of drinking and comparing production is achieved. , May be different. In addition, when both the mission of the Chibihime Musou production and the mission of the drinking comparison production are achieved, it is possible to shift to another SP reach with high reliability. In addition, the mission of Chibi Hime Musou production was achieved, and the type of SP reach that shifts when the mission of drinking comparison was not achieved, the mission of drinking comparison production was achieved, and the mission of Chibi Hime Musou production was achieved. The type of SP reach that shifts when there is no such change may be the same as the type of SP reach that shifts when both the mission of Chibihime Musou and the mission of drinking comparison are achieved, in which case The reliability may be different depending on whether or not the production mission has been achieved. For example, when both missions are achieved, the jackpot pattern mode is more than when only one of the missions is achieved. May be made to be confirmed and displayed easily, or when both missions are achieved, the big hit symbol mode may be definitely displayed in the symbol variation display (that is, the big hit is confirmed). In addition, in this production example, a case has been described in which the multi-chance advance notice is given on the tutorial display section TT6 in the first enlargement mode of the UI section. There may be a case where an up notice is given. In this case, when the UI part is in the first expansion mode, the multi-chance up notice is given a larger hit than when the UI part is in the second expansion mode and the multi-chance up notice is given. You may make it easy to confirm and display a symbol mode.

Also in this effect example, when the UI unit is in the reduced mode, the mini game described above may be played on the tutorial display unit TT6, and as a result of the mini game being played, a success pattern is displayed. The UI unit may change from the reduction mode to the first expansion mode. In addition, when the failure pattern is displayed as a result of the mini game, the UI unit may be changed from the reduction mode to the second enlargement mode, or the UI unit mode is not changed. Good.

Further, in this effect example, for example, the display mode of the frame section may be changed according to the mode of the UI section. Specifically, when the UI part is in the reduction mode, the color of the frame is the default color (for example, blue), and in the second enlargement mode, the color of the frame is green. In the case of the enlargement mode of No. 3, the color of the frame part may be red, and the mode of the UI part may be notified by the color. Further, the pattern or a part of the shape may be changed instead of the color or with the color. In addition, by increasing the size of the tutorial display section TT6, the tutorial display section TT6 may be made to function as a rank-up effect that improves the reliability of the big hit. The degree of expectation of the SP reach and the degree of expectation of the big hit may be different.

(Third production pattern)
In the third effect pattern, the tutorial display unit TT6 expands from the UI mode reduction mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1), and the tutorial display in the UI unit expansion mode shown in FIG. 485(a-2) is performed. In the section TT6, there may be a case where the above-mentioned drinking drink confrontation reach effect is performed and a case where a mini game is performed. As the mini game performed here, for example, the hits shown in FIG. 291(o) to FIG. An example of an effect in which the mini game is played will be described.

After the UI section is changed from the reduced mode to the enlarged mode, when the target mini game is started in the tutorial display section TT6, for example, the target TGT in which the region is divided into three is displayed. These areas are composed of, for example, a "big hit" area, a "medium hit" area, and a "off edge" area. Then, when the mini character MC1 of the lord releases a bow and hits the area of "big hit" (that is, when the effect display of the second success pattern is performed), for example, the UI unit is erased, and SP reach (for example, , Swordsman Reach). It should be noted that when transitioning to SP reach, the display of only a part of the configuration in the UI unit may be maintained. For example, only the hold icon display area and the hold display frame FL1 are kept displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed. The frame portion may be erased. Further, when hitting the “middle hit” area (that is, when the effect display of the first successful pattern is performed), for example, after the animation in which the UI part changes from the enlargement mode to the reduction mode is performed, the normal reach is performed. Is done. Also, when the area of “off” is hit, for example, after the animation in which the UI part changes from the enlarged mode to the reduced mode is performed, the off display mode is displayed. It should be noted that the target TGT displayed in the target hitting mini game is divided into two areas, and is composed of only the "big hit" area and the "middle hit" area, and the effect of determining the normal reach or higher is achieved. Alternatively, an effect may be performed in which the transition to SP reach is finalized by being configured only by the “big hit” area. Note that, as the mini-game applicable to this effect, in addition to the above-mentioned target mini-game, for example, the drum mini-game shown in FIG. 292(c3) to (c4) and FIG. 307(a2)- It is possible to apply the mini game or the like by the roulette effect shown in FIG.

In the above description,
[Image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variable display [eg, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a shielding device 246, a performance movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542, etc.] ,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area [for example, a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, a hold icon display area of special figure 2, a variable icon display area 280, etc.] of the image display means,
The hold display is a display corresponding to the number of the operation of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1]. , The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , It is configured to display a notice icon in each area],
The notice means is means for executing, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, executing the notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [eg, , When the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is consumed, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During the period in which the symbol variable display is executed once, the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat] of the plurality of types of notice icons has a first number [for example, two, etc.]. ] A second number that is larger than the first number [eg, three, etc.] is more likely to be a big hit than a digested case,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the image display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

Further, according to this gaming table, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and consumption of the notice icons.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the variable display of symbols, or may be capable of executing other than the variable display of symbols. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variable display, or may not execute the symbol variable display.

Further, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the advance notice means may execute a plurality of types of advance notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of advance notices.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display or may not display the hold display.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than the hold display area of the image display means.

Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be the hold icon, and may be represented by characters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be started other than when the hold is exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started when the hold is exhausted.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in areas other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the type of notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a notice other than the type of notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be executable. Further, the advance notice means may be a device which, when one of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area is exhausted, always executes an advance notice of a type corresponding to the type of the exhausted advance notice icon, When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is equal to that of the notice icons. The notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested, so that the player should not miss the notice display. It may be possible to

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be displayed in a number other than the number according to the number of possibilities of the notice being executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. There may be

In addition, the "previous notice means" uses a false notice [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production that is outlying] of the same form as the aspect of the previous notice [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production that is a big hit]. Is a viable means,
When the one of the notice icons (for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.) displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice means is a type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Is a means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the execution of the false notice, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be off,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice is executed.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice in the same manner as the notice, or may be a device other than a false notice in the same manner as the notice. May be. Further, the notifying means may always execute a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner, or may not execute a false notice in the same manner as the notice manner.

Further, even if the notice means is capable of executing only fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been exhausted, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is exhausted. Or, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it may be possible to execute something other than a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. .. Further, the notice means may execute a fake notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. However, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a false notice of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be executed.

Further, after the false notice is executed, the result of the variable display of symbols may be configured to be always out of order, or the result of the variable display of symbols may be a big hit after the false notice is executed. It may be.

It should be noted that there may be a case in which, after the false notice is executed, the notice in which the jackpot symbol is highly likely to be displayed on the symbol display means is executed.

In addition, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [for example, one, etc.]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the third number, is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

In addition, “holding display means capable of executing display according to the number of holdings [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, production holding lamp 286, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the display of the notice icon.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only the display corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of executing other than the display according to the hold number. Further, the hold display means may always perform display according to the number of reservations, or may not perform display according to the number of reservations.

In addition, “the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

In addition, the light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single color package may include a plurality of LEDs, such as a full-color LED. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, “a pre-reading notice means capable of executing a pre-reading notice [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a shielding device 246, a performance movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the expectation for a big hit may be increased by displaying the notice icon.

Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only the pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than the pre-reading notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

Further, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing the prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may be one that always executes the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 413(2)]” The notice icon may be consumed by a fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period in which
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [eg, three that are targets of prefetch shown in FIG. 413(2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period in which the "variable display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]" is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The suspension display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 413(4) The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetching is displayed during the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch is displayed. Etc. displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being performed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

In the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. The number of the notice icon different from the sixth number may be consumed. Further, in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or the first During the period in which the symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. Further, the hold display, in the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed, may necessarily inform that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol In the period in which the variable display is executed, there may be a case where the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended is not notified.

Further, in the period in which the “variable display of the symbol in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed, the notice icon may start to be displayed [eg, As shown in FIG. 422(C), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat and the increase of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in a single pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the notice icons may increase even in the pattern variation display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until all the notice icons are consumed.

Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always started, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed. May start to be displayed.

Note that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

Further, in the period in which the “symbol fluctuation display executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol fluctuation display”) is being executed, The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 422(C) is the symbol variation display. Is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed before],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured to start displaying the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it is possible to start displaying the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed may be configured to always start displaying, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

Note that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is executed does not have to start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight],
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icon.

Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

The maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the notice icon may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of noticeable icons that can be displayed may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of the pending display of special figure 1.

Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of the pending display of special figure 2.

Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the total displayable maximum number of the pending displays of the special diagrams 1 and 2, and at least the same may be the same.

In addition, “a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, FIG. 416 (49) to FIG. (50), the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 428 (49), and the like],
One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a second advance notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 423 (Ac) or the same FIG. (Bb)],
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 416(51) to (57) and FIGS. 428(50-1) to (57). Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect will be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be performed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the advance notice means may execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice without fail, or may not execute the first advance notice and the second advance notice.

Further, the production means may be capable of executing only the first production and the second production,
Effects other than the first effect and the second effect may be executable. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

In addition, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. .. In addition, the first notice may always notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. .. In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed [for example, FIGS. 413(1) to 417(66) and FIGS. 425(1) to 425(1) to As shown in FIG. 429 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, which may improve the player's expectation.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.],
Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286],
A gaming machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of the operation of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number") in a hold display area [for example, hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1]. , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. , It is configured to display a notice icon in each area],
The second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a display capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. This is a means [for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is exhausted, a pseudo-link effect may be executed, and when the 1000-box notice icon I9 is exhausted, a reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed once, a second number [eg, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed than when the notice icon is exhausted by the first number. If it is done, it is structured so that it is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the image display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Further, according to this gaming machine, since the notice icon is displayed, it is easy to recognize that there is a change in which the notice icon may be consumed, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent missing the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

Further, according to this gaming table, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and consumption of the notice icons.

Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of performing other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always execute the variable display of symbols, or may not execute the variable display of symbols.

The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. In addition, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display the plurality of types of advance notice displays.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings only in the holding display area, or may display a display corresponding to the number of holdings other than the holding display area. It may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area. ..

Further, the symbol variation display may be one that can be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be one that can be started even when the hold is not exhausted. Further, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started even when the hold is exhausted.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed in a region other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

Further, the second display means is capable of displaying only the type of the notice display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. However, if one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, a notice display other than the type of notice display corresponding to the type of notice icon that has been consumed can also be displayed. Good. In addition, the second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Alternatively, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times the notice display is displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be consumed, so that the player does not miss the notice display. You may be able to

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be displayed in accordance with the number of times the notice display may be displayed. Other items may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, “the second display means is a false notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo continuous production that is a big hit, a reach transition production, or the like] [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach that is an outlier]. Transition effect, etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice that has been consumed A display unit capable of displaying the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, false pseudo notice or reach transition effect, etc.]
After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is consumed and the notice display is displayed.

Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display, or other than a fake advance notice display in the same mode as the advance notice display. May be displayable. Further, the second display means may always display a fake advance notice display in the same form as the advance notice display, or may not display a fake advance notice display in the same form as the advance notice display. It may be.

Further, the second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area has been consumed. Or, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, it is possible to display other than the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. May be In addition, the second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. It may be possible, or when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is exhausted, it may not display a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. ..

Further, after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display may be always off, or after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit. There may be cases.

In addition, after the false notice display is displayed, there is a case where the notice display in which the jackpot symbol is highly likely to be displayed is displayed on the symbol display means.

In addition, “the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed is more than the third number [for example, one, etc.]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the third number, is more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the variable display of symbols.

Further, "the second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The holding display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings in the holding display area [for example, lighting a number of holding lamps according to the number of holdings, etc.],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative symbols,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the hold display and the display of the notice icon.

Here, the second display means may be composed of two display means, or may be composed of three or more display means.

Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured by including other than the image display means and the hold display means. In addition, the second display means may necessarily include the image display means and the hold display means, or may not include at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of hold only in the hold display area, or may display a display corresponding to the number of hold other than the hold display area. Good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display corresponding to the number of hold in the hold display area, or may not display a display corresponding to the number of hold in the hold display area.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative design, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative design. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to clearly recognize the hold display.

Here, the hold display means may be configured to include only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include a portion other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

In addition, the light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single color package may include a plurality of LEDs, such as a full-color LED. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, the firing operation informing means for informing about the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the variable display of the decorative pattern and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holding while visually observing the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative design, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative design. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, “a pre-reading notice means capable of executing a pre-reading notice [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a shielding device 246, a performance movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the expectation for a big hit may be increased by displaying the notice icon.

Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only the pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than the pre-reading notice. Further, the prefetching advance notice means may always execute the prefetching advance notice, or may not execute the prefetching advance notice.

Further, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing the prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may be one that always executes the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 413(2)]” The notice icon may be consumed by a fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period in which
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [eg, three that are targets of prefetch shown in FIG. 413(2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period in which the "variable display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]" is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [eg, FIG. 413]. Corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetch in the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch shown in (4) is being executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1], and the like, a gaming machine. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the number of times the notice icon is consumed differs between the case where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is being performed and the case where the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is performed. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easy to understand the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to.

Here, in the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed. In, there may be a case where the notice icon is consumed by a number different from the fifth number. Further, in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the fifth number.

In the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only in the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. The number of the notice icon different from the sixth number may be consumed. Further, in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely consumed by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variable display is being executed. , The notice icon may not be digested in the sixth number.

Further, the display according to the number of hold may be able to inform only that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed. In the period in which the first symbol variable display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended. Further, the display according to the number of holding, in the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed, may necessarily inform that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended, In the period in which the first symbol variable display is executed, it may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended.

Further, in the period in which the “variable display of the symbol in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed, the notice icon may start to be displayed [eg, As shown in FIG. 422(C), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat and the increase of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in a single pattern variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the notice icons may increase even in the pattern variation display in which the notice icons are consumed, it may be possible to make the player have expectations until all the notice icons are consumed.

Here, in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon may be always started, or in the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, the advance notice icon is displayed. The display may not be started in some cases. Further, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during a period other than the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed. May start to be displayed.

The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the variable display in which the notice icon is consumed.

Further, in the period in which the “symbol fluctuation display executed before the fourth symbol fluctuation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol fluctuation display”) is being executed, The notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 422(C) is the symbol variation display. Is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed before],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed, it may be configured to start displaying the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is being executed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, it is possible to start displaying the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed may be configured to always start displaying, In the period in which the third symbol variable display is being executed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is being executed is not started to be displayed.

Note that the notice icon that is consumed during the period when the fourth symbol variable display is executed does not have to start to be displayed during the period when the third symbol variable display is being executed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight],
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the display of the notice icon.

Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the hold number, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the hold number. Good.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

Note that the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings and the maximum displayable number of the notice icon may be the same.

In addition, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the maximum displayable number of the displays corresponding to the number of reservations of special figure 1, or at least the same or the same.

Moreover, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of the displays corresponding to the number of holdings of special figure 2.

Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be greater than the total displayable maximum number of the displays corresponding to the number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2, at least good, or even the same. Good.

In addition, “a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is a first advance notice display [for example, FIG. 416 (49) to FIG. (50) or reach transition effect shown in FIG. 428 (49), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 423 (Ac) or the same figure (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 416(51) to (57) and FIGS. 428(50-1) to (57). Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,
The game machine, wherein the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is to be executed. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be performed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the production means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of productions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of productions. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, or may display a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may necessarily display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Good.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. .. In addition, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed [for example, FIGS. 413(1) to 417(66) and FIGS. 425(1) to 425(1) to As shown in FIG. 429 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, which may improve the player's expectation.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that.

Although the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice in the above-described embodiment, it may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or disappear even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or disappear even while the special background mode for prefetching is being executed. Good.

Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice c is configured to be displayed without fail. It is a display that is displayed in the case of, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are exhausted, and "the pattern in which the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed more easily when the "variable display in which the notice display a is displayed" is performed than when the "variable display" is performed. The notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is consumed, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is consumed. It is a display, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when "the symbol variable display with the notice display b" is executed than with "the symbol variable display with the notice display c" being executed. May be configured. Further, the notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are exhausted. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed when the "variable display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B, or the notice icon D is consumed" is executed, rather than the "variable display in which the notice icon C is consumed" is executed. It may be configured to be easy. In addition, a big hit symbol is obtained when the "variable symbol display in which the notice display a, the notice display b, or the notice display c is displayed" is executed rather than the "symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed". It may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed.

Also, in the above description,
"First display means [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variation display,
Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 or the production holding lamp 286],
A gaming machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of the operation of the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number") in a hold display area [for example, hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1]. , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, The number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying, when the notice icon in the notice icon display area has been consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed [eg, , When the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo-relation effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is consumed, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
In the period in which the symbol variable display is executed once, the second number larger than the first number [than the first number [eg, one]] is consumed For example, 3 etc.] It is configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit when it is digested,
The second display means is the symbol variable display (hereinafter, “second symbol variable display [for example, based on the third hold, which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 413(2), which is the target of prefetching. The display means is capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a read-ahead notice display prior to the start of ".
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to be displayed in a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the second display means is a false notice display in the same manner as the manner of the notice display [for example, a pseudo continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is a big hit] [for example, a pseudo consecutive effect or reach that is an outlier. Transition effect, etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of a hat, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice that has been consumed A display unit capable of displaying the false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, false pseudo notice or reach transition effect, etc.]
After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, and the like]. Display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The holding display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings in the holding display area [for example, lighting a number of holding lamps according to the number of holdings, etc.],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative symbols,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(9) to 414(20), display of the notice icon as a prefetch notice). Is performed by the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, in the period in which the “second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 413(2)] is executed, the notice icon is displayed. May be digested in the fifth number [eg 3],
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display [eg, three that are targets of prefetch shown in FIG. 413(2). There is a case where the notice icon is consumed by a sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period in which the "variable display of symbols based on the reservation held before the eye is held]" is executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [eg, FIG. 413]. Corresponding to the second hold that is the target of prefetch in the period in which the variable display of symbols based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the target of prefetch shown in (4) is being executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1], and the like, a gaming machine. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed before the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of the look-ahead [eg, FIG. 413(1). As shown in FIG. 417(66) and FIG. 425(1) to FIG. 429(66), the increased notice icons are all consumed by the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") is being executed [eg, As shown in FIG. 422(C), the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes and the notice icon I10 of the fan increase display are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "in the period in which the symbol variable display is executed before the fourth symbol variable display is executed, it is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variable display is executed There is a case where the notice icon is started to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 422(C) is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, the "holding display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings up to a seventh number [eg, four or eight],
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icons up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of production [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 210, a shielding device 246, a production movable body 224, various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, a game underframe lamp 542]. Etc.]
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes shown in FIG. 416 (47) or 427 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon shown in FIG. 423(Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of advance notice displays is a first advance notice display [for example, FIG. 416 (49) to FIG. (50) or reach transition effect shown in FIG. 428 (49), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 423 (Ac) or the same figure (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is displayed,
When the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice display is configured to be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 416(51) to (57) and FIGS. 428(50-1) to (57). Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,
The game machine, wherein the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is to be executed. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300 and the like],
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.],
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means [eg, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.],
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the pending held before the third pending which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 413(2)], the notice icon is displayed. As a result, the display of the first notice icon [eg, the notice icon I6 of the hat] may be started [eg, as shown in FIG. 413(9), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Etc.],
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 413(9) to 414. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 413(9), has not been digested even if the next symbol variable display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 414(14). ],
Symbol variation display that is displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [eg, a symbol based on the third hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 413(2)) "Variable display, etc.]") is configured so that the first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variable display may be digested [eg, FIG. 9) to 414(25), the hat notice icon I6 started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 413(9), as shown in FIG. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, "the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be exhausted during the display of the first symbol variation display [eg, the notice icon of a hat] The notice icon I6 of this hat is consumed in the pattern variation display in which the display of I6 is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may start to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 413(9) to FIG. As shown in 414(25), the design change subject to prefetching is performed so that the notice icon I6 of the hat, which has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 413(9), is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 414(23). A hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a read-ahead notice for display, etc.]. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “during the display of the one-time symbol variable display, the second number [for example, 3 etc. ] When the first notice icon of [] is digested, it is more likely to be a big hit,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10 or the like] can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the exhausted pattern variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 417 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is consumed. Then, the result of the symbol variation display is a big hit, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop pattern announcement, stage change production, reach transition production, premier announcement production, re-variation production, etc.] ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon for hat I6, etc.] is consumed, the first notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIGS. 415 (28) to (31) in FIG. , Etc. may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a false notice display [for example, a false continuous production or a reach transition production that is out of order],
When the first notice icon [for example, a hat notice icon I6, etc.] is consumed, a first false notice table [for example, a false pseudo-reproduction effect] is displayed as the false notice display. Sometimes,
The display mode of the first false notification display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notification display,
The first fake advance notice display is configured to be shifted in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect that is an effect that shifts to a special stage shown in FIG. 412(b), etc.],
As the notice icon, a third notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 on a ribbon] can be displayed.
When the third notice icon is consumed, the prefetch effect display may be started [for example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is high, The effect that the background shifts to the prefetch mode is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the display means is configured by a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, a production holding lamp 286, etc.] Is,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 413(1), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a variable display of a decorative symbol, etc.] Is,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variable display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 413(9)] The notice icon I6 of the hat which is started to be displayed during the variable display of symbols] is configured to be completely consumed by the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols [for example, a hold that is a target of prefetching] The notice icon I6 of the hat is being digested while the pattern variation display based on
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285 or the like] of the display unit,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes the notice icon first display area YA1 to the notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500, etc.] is provided,
The effect control unit is a unit capable of executing control of the display unit [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300 and the like],
With a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.],
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 412(a) and 412(b), a notice icon I21 for "house", a notice icon I22 for "crest"). , A notice icon I31 of "donor", a notice icon I32 of "princess", a notice icon I33 of "grandpa", etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 435(1)]) ") is held, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started in the period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases, [for example, as shown in FIGS. 435 to 436, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching to the end of the symbol variation display. And the notice icon I22 of "Crest" are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is a performance display,
When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 414(23) to 415(32), a hat is displayed. When the notice icon I6 of No. 1 is consumed, pseudo-linking may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 416 (46) to (57), when the notice icon I9 of 1,000 boxes is consumed, a strong reach effect is produced. It may be started],
The first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons [for example, the combination of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "monkey" shown in FIG. 435] is one symbol variation. When the display is consumed, a first effect display [for example, an effect image displayed in the crest fall effect shown in FIG. 436(21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to continue to give a sense of expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the first combination notice icon is consumed.

Further, according to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons can be shown during the pattern variation display prior to the start of the pattern variation display which is the target of prefetching, and the expectation for a big hit can be given. Sometimes you can.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the read-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the read-ahead notice display.

Also, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is ended, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

Also, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed, and when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that has been consumed. There may be a case where a display other than the effect display corresponding to is displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is consumed, a display effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed There may be a case where the effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

Further, even if the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variable display, only the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display. Good, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is exhausted in one symbol variation display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as the effect display. May be done. Further, even if the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is exhausted in one symbol variable display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. It is possible that the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be exhausted in one symbol variable display, so that the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display.

In addition, even if the first combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed is consumed only in one symbol variable display, the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display. Good, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is configured to display the first effect display as the effect display, in addition to the fact that the first combination is exhausted in the single symbol variation display. May be done.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of a first number [for example, two, etc.] of the notice icons,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first combination icons including the first number of the notification icons is displayed until the first number of the notification icons is consumed. It may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that may be displayed.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of “house”] and a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I22 of crest”]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, it may be possible to enhance the effect.

Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including notice icons other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 435(1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIG. 436 (19), the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the symbol, the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "crest" displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, in the "one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are exhausted, the first effect display is configured not to be displayed [for example, The effect image shown in FIG. 436(21) is not displayed even if only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is consumed], etc.]. Stand. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is not digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed, so the first effect display It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who can see the.

Here, in the one-time symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, it may be configured such that only the first effect display is not displayed. In the symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in the one-time symbol variable display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may not necessarily be displayed, or only one notice icon may be displayed. In the symbol variation display, even if only some of the first notice icons in the first combination are consumed, the first effect display may be displayed.

In addition, only in the one-time symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are exhausted, the first effect display may not be displayed, or only one notice icon may be displayed. Even in a symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are consumed.

In addition, when the third notice icon [eg, the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 414, etc.] is consumed as the notice icon, the third effect display [eg, FIG. 415 (28 ) Shown in FIG. 4), the banchou character BC displayed corresponding to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 pushes up the right symbol, etc.] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, there are cases in which variations in production are increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

Here, it may be configured such that only the third effect display is displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or by the third notice icon being digested, The display other than the effect display may be displayed. Also, the third notice icon may be configured to be always displayed when the third notice icon is consumed, or the third notice icon may be configured to be displayed. The display may not be displayed in some cases.

Further, the third effect display may be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or in addition to the fact that the third notice icon is consumed, It may be configured to display the third effect display.

In addition, “The pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414(21) to 417(66) is a symbol that is lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the display of the variable display etc.]) until the display of the fourth symbol variable display is completed [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 417 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414(21) to 417(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(2) to 417(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, it is possible that the plurality of notice icons are not digested.

In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 435. In the display area 281, a number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

Further, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of operations of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 that are suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
[First display means [eg, first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 440, first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 443],
Second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 440, a second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 443],
A gaming machine equipped with
The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 440(10) to 441(13) is exhausted or FIGS. 441(16) to 441(16). ) Shown in FIG. 4B) and displaying the banquet character BC corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, or the pseudo continuous production, or the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 443(c1) to (c5). Etc.] can be displayed,
The second display means displays the notice icon [for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 440(2) to 441(13) or the notice icon display area 285A to FIG. 440(5) to FIG. Display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 443, or the display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 443(c6), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 412 may function as a look-ahead notice display, etc.],
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, a symbolic variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 443 (c1)]) ") is held, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started in the period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. There is a case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 443(c1) to (c9), the notice icon display is displayed during the period from the suspension of the pre-reading target variable display until the end of the variable display. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

Further, according to this gaming table, since the display relating to the notice icon may be displayed on the plurality of display means, the line of sight of the player who sees the display regarding the notice icon should not be concentrated on one display means. Sometimes it can entertain the player.

Here, the display means may consist only of the first display means and the second display means, or may be provided with a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display regarding the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

The second display means may be capable of displaying only the display regarding the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display regarding the notice icon. In addition, the second display means may always display the display regarding the notice icon, or may not display the display regarding the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started.
Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 443(c1)] is suspended, and then the second The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished [for example, as shown in FIGS. 443(c1) to (c9), it is a target of prefetching. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken and the notice icon I6 of the two hats have been consumed in the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the variable display of symbols],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Also, in the "second display means [eg, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 440, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 443, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. Configured [for example, as shown in FIG. 440(5), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative pattern display device 208B, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the display means capable of performing the stock production is determined, it may be possible not to miss the stocked notice icon.

Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured to always display the advance notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to not display the advance notice icon in some cases.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on the display means other than the second display means. Good.

Further, in the "first display means [eg, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 440, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 443, etc.], the notice icon is displayed. A notice may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 440(2) to (5), notice display of the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. Effect) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the advance notice icon may be displayed in advance, so it may be possible to keep the player in the display means and prevent the player from missing the advance notice icon. is there.

Here, in the first display means, there may be a case in which only a display for notifying that the notice icon is displayed may be performed, or in the first display means, a display for notifying that the notice icon is displayed. Other displays may be displayed. In addition, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, and the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. You may not do it.

Further, there may be a case where a display for giving notice that the notice icon is displayed is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed also on the display means other than the first display means. There may be a case in which a display for announcing is displayed.

In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 440, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 443]. Is the means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the second decorative pattern display device 208B shown in FIG. 440, the display screen of the second decorative pattern display device 208D shown in FIG. 443]. Means,
The advance notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 440(4) or FIG. 1 decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B are displayed, etc.], The gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with a high impact, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed in areas other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be always displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the entire range.

In addition, “the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 440, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 443]. Is the means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the second decorative pattern display device 208B shown in FIG. 440, the display screen of the second decorative pattern display device 208D shown in FIG. 443]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of types of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 412],
When the notice icon is consumed, a performance display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [eg, FIG. As shown in 441 (16) to (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged and displayed Bancho character BC2 changes from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which the length character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo continuous symbol is the second symbol. And the like displayed from the decorative design display device 208B to the first decorative design display device 208A],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a notice icon with a high impact, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be always provided with the first display area, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be always provided with the second display area, or may not be provided with the second display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in the display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon consumed may be displayed only over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Good. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be always displayed in the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. , When the notice icon is consumed, even if the effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed is displayed across the first display area and the second display area, Good.

In addition, “The pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414(21) to 417(66) is a symbol that is lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the display of the variable display etc.]) until the display of the fourth symbol variable display is completed [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 417 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414(21) to 417(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(2) to 417(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, it is possible that the plurality of notice icons are not digested.

In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) in which the start of the variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 440. In the display area 281, a number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols variable display operation is suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
A first movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 446 (12), a family crest actor 224B shown in FIG. 438 (d4-2), etc.]
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 412(a) and FIG. 4(b), a notice icon I21 for “house”, a notice icon I22 for “crest”]. , Drink notice icon I31, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the third hold that is the object of prefetching shown in FIG. 413(2)]) ") is held, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started in the period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. There is a case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(2) to 417(66) or FIG. 446, in the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching to the termination of the symbol variation display, In the notice icon display area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are displayed],
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [eg, movable effect for displacing the effect button 136 from the default position to the projecting position as shown in FIGS. 446 (12) to (17)]. Is a viable means,
The first movable effect may be executed when the fourth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I31 for a drink, etc.] among the displayed notice icons is consumed. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the movable means, but according to this game table, a game table characterized by the movable means can be realized.

Further, according to this gaming machine, when the fourth notice icon is consumed by the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. There are cases.

Further, according to this gaming table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the staging effect can be enhanced in some cases.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in the display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in the display mode according to the type.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the prefetch notice display, or may not be displayed as the prefetch notice display.

Also, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is ended, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the first movable effect. In addition, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon It may be configured such that a movable effect other than the first movable effect may be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted. Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, the first movable effect may be executed without fail, or the first notice effect may be displayed. The first moving effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

Further, it may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon of the notice icons displayed has been exhausted, or the notice icon displayed may be changed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed in a case other than the case where the fourth notice icon is not consumed.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 413(2)] is suspended, and then the second The plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed in the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(2) to 417(66) and FIG. In the period from the suspension of the target symbol variable display until the end of the symbol variable display, the two hat notice icons I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the drink notice icon I31 are digested, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, in the period from the second symbol variable display being suspended to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, some icons other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Also, when the “fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 412, the notice icon I21 of “house”, etc.] is consumed, the first movable icon” is displayed. The production is configured not to be executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, only the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or of the notice icons displayed. When the fifth notice icon is consumed, the movable effects other than the first movable effect may not be executed. Further, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed without fail, or the first notice effect of the displayed notice icons may be executed. The first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are exhausted.

Further, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon among the notice icons displayed is exhausted, or the first notice effect among the notice icons displayed may be executed. The first movable effect may be configured not to be executed even in the case other than the case where the five notice icons are exhausted.

In addition, "operating means [for example, effect button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player is provided,
The first movable means is a means for moving the operating means,
The first movable effect refers to a mode of the operation means from a first mode [for example, a default position shown in FIG. 446(12)] to a second mode [for example, shown in FIG. 446(17). It is the effect of changing to the projected position etc.,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the change of the operation means may be notified by the notification icon, so that the operation means may also be noticed.

Here, the operating means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by anyone other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player without exception, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the first movable means may be movable only by the operating means, or may be movable by means other than the operating means. Further, the first movable means may be one that can always move the operating means, or may not move the operating means.

In addition, “a second movable means [for example, a family crest part shown in FIG. 438 (d4-2)] is provided,
The second movable means is a means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest falling effect shown in FIG. 438(d4-2)].
The second movable effect may be executed when the sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of "house" etc.] among the displayed notice icons is consumed. ing,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes rich, and the interest may be improved.

Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing movable effects other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

Further, when the sixth notice icon of the notice icons displayed is exhausted, it may be configured such that only the second movable effect may be executed, or the notice icon displayed. It may be configured such that a movable effect other than the second movable effect may also be executed when the sixth notice icon among them is consumed. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the second notice effect may be displayed. The second moving effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is consumed.

Further, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is exhausted, or the displayed notice icon is displayed. The second movable effect may be executed in a case other than the case where the sixth notice icon is not consumed.

In addition, “The pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414(21) to 417(66) is a symbol that is lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the display of the variable display etc.]) until the display of the fourth symbol variable display is completed [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 417 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414(21) to 417(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(2) to 417(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, it is possible that the plurality of notice icons are not digested.

In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) of which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 435. In the display area 281, a number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Also,
The hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. 446 (a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes or a notice icon I31 of a drink, etc.). Is not an icon that indicates the number of operations of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1], etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIG. 412(a) and FIG. 4(b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the object of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, a symbolic variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 448(1)]) ") is held, and the display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of notice icons") is started in the period from the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(2) to 417(66), the notice icon display is displayed during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching to the termination of the symbol variation display. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon display suggestive display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 448 (2) to (6), a notice that a notice icon is displayed by a lord's effect, etc. ],
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that the notice icon display may be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may display only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may display a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the read-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the read-ahead notice display.

Also, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is ended, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variable display is finished, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of advance notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of only indicating that the notice icon may be displayed, or may be something other than that the notice icon may be displayed. It may be suggestable. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that the notice icon may be displayed, or may not indicate that the notice icon may be displayed. It may be.

In addition, “the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 448(1)] is suspended, and then the second In the period until the display of the symbol variable display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(2) to 417(66), it is a target of prefetching. During the period from the suspension of the variable display of the symbols until the end of the variable display, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes and the notice icon of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are exhausted. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, thereby responding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be consumed. Further, in the period from the second symbol variable display being held until the display of the second symbol variable display is completed, there may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variable display until the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Further, “The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, twice as shown in FIGS. 448(2) to (5)). The notice that the notice icon by the lord's production is displayed over the variable display of
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over the plurality of symbol variation displays, so that it may be possible to enjoy the process until the notice icon is displayed.

Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than a plurality of symbol variation displays. There may be cases where Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In addition, "during the display of the symbol variation display displayed prior to the second symbol variation display, the notice icon display suggestion display is configured to end [for example, FIG. 448 (2). ~ As shown in (5) of the same figure, the advance notice that the advance notice icon by the lord's effect is displayed is finished before the start of the variable pattern display, which is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the notice icon display suggestive display is terminated before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started, so it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol variation that is the target of prefetching.

Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation display The display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion may be configured to be terminated during the display of the symbol variable display displayed before the display. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to always end during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not be terminated during the display of the symbol variable display displayed before the display.

Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end even when the symbol variable display that is displayed before is displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may indicate that at least one of the notice icons of a third number [eg, three] may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 450(a1-4), in the Amida production, display of at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand-box notice icon I9 may be started. Suggesting that there is such a thing],
The third number is a number greater than or equal to 2,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, at least one of the previously announced notice icons may be displayed, so that the player can understand which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the fluctuation of the design in which the notice icon is displayed.

Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that at least one of the third number notice icons may be displayed, or It may also indicate something other than that at least one of the number of notice icons may be displayed. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that at least one of the third number notice icons may be started, or the third notice icon may be displayed. It may not indicate that display of at least one of the may be initiated.

In addition, the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. As shown in 450(a1-1) to (a-6) in the figure, as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons, which has been suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon indication suggestion display, may be started. There may be a case where a display other than the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons, which has been suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggesting display, may be started. Further, it may be configured such that the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons, which has been suggested that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display, is always started. There may be a case where the display of at least one of the third number of advance notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display is not started.

In addition, “The pre-reading target is a symbol variation display (hereinafter, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414(21) to 417(66) is a symbol that is lost. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the suspension of the display of the variable display etc.]) until the display of the fourth symbol variable display is completed [eg, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 417 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variable display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended until the symbol variable display that is the target of prefetching ends. ],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be always started, The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414(21) to 417(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(2) to 417(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, it is possible that the plurality of notice icons are not digested.

In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) for which the start of the symbol variable display is held [eg, the holding icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, a number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (a notice icon I6 of a hat, etc. shown in FIG. 448) of FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols variable display operation is suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
“A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIG. 412(a) and FIG. 4(b)],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the first prefetch notice display,
Large-scale jackpot variable display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variable display [for example, symbolic variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 451 (2)]) Display) is held after ".") is suspended (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol display variation [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 451(4) to (13)]"). May be started,
In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) The display may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(4) to 417(66), the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is a big hit is suspended. From the start of the display of until the end of the pattern variation display that is the big hit that is the target of the prefetch, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is started to be displayed next to the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

Also, according to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display relating to the second symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, it starts after that. It may be possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as the read-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of the read-ahead from the displayed pattern change display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as the first look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the first look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display of the display is also started. Also, the display of the first symbol variation display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, and also after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only one symbol variable display is started.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the plurality of notice icons is started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display. Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started without fail in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, or The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display.

Further, "in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [eg, As shown in FIGS. 413(4) to 417(66), the target of the prefetch is started after the display of the symbol variable display started after the symbol variable display that is the big hit, which is the target of the prefetch, is suspended. By the end of the symbol variation display that is a big hit, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are consumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, it is started after that. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digesting the notice icon as a look-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of the look-ahead from the change display.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Also, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be surely consumed, or the first symbol variation display There may be a case where a plurality of notice icons are not digested in the period from the start of display of to the end of display of the second symbol variable display.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variable display to the end of the display of the second symbol variable display, In a period other than the period from the start of the display of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the second variable display of symbols, the plurality of advance notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) in which the start of the symbol variable display is held [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 451. In the display area 281, a number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (such as the notice icon I6 of a hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that the variable display operation is suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, in the case where the “second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the target of prefetch shown in FIG. 451 (2)] is suspended, the second The display of the hold display [for example, the display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 451(2)] is started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize that the second symbol variable display has been suspended.

Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, or in the case other than the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended. The display of the hold display may be started. Also, the display of the second hold display may be always started when the second symbol variable display is held, or the display of the second hold display when the second symbol variable display is held. It does not have to be started.

In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, the prefetch notice display mode (sabohani display mode) shown in FIG. 451(2)] May be
In the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. 451 (2 ), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode of Sabohani) when the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of read-ahead, is suspended. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the variation of the pre-reading notice display may increase and the interest may be improved.

Here, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode as the second look-ahead notice display, or the second hold display may be displayed as the second look-ahead notice display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Also, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is the second look-ahead display. It may not be displayed in the form.

Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode, or the second In the symbol variable display that is displayed when the symbol variable display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. Also, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or the second symbol variation display. The second variable display may not be displayed in the second read-ahead display mode in the symbol variable display that is displayed when is suspended.

Further, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode, or the second In the symbol variable display other than the symbol variable display displayed when the symbol variable display is suspended, the second reserved display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetching notice display [for example, the effect display of the prefetching mode shown in FIGS. 452(b2) to (b3)].
The third look-ahead notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variable display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 452(b1) to (b3). As described above, the effect display in the prefetch mode is started after the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third suspension which is the prefetching target, is suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, the variation of the pre-reading notice display is increased, so that the interest may be improved.

Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Other than that, the display may be started. Further, the third look-ahead notice display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or may not be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, “a loss symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “the fourth symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation that becomes a loss based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 451 (2)) "Display etc.]" is suspended and is referred to as a symbol variation display (hereinafter, "third symbol variation display [eg, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 451 (4) to (13)]". ) May be displayed,
The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display [eg, the figure As shown in 413(4) to 417(66), in the target of the prefetching after the display of the symbol variable display started after the symbol variable display which is the target of the prefetching is suspended is started. By the end of the pattern variation display which is a certain loss, the two hat notice icons I6, the thousand-box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed, etc.],
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is started to be displayed next to the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Further, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where a symbol variable display other than the display of the display is also started. Also, the display of the third symbol variation display may be always started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display is displayed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

In addition, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variable display is started only after the fourth symbol variable display is suspended, and also after the fourth symbol variable display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variable display is started.

Further, it is possible that only the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, In some cases, the display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display. Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started without fail during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

Further, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variable display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display.

In addition, after the “fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 414(21) to 417(66), which is a symbol variation display that is a deviation, etc.] is suspended, In the period until the display of the four symbol variable display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 413(2) to 417(66), it is a target of prefetching. Four notice icons have been consumed from the time when a certain pattern change display was suspended until the end of the pattern change display that is the target of prefetching, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is exhausted, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, or In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the icons other than the plurality of notice icons are also consumed. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, there may be a case where the plurality of notice icons are surely consumed, In the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, it is possible that the plurality of notice icons are not digested.

In addition, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variable display until the end of the display of the fourth symbol variable display, the fourth In the period other than the period from the suspension of the variable display of symbols to the end of the display of the fourth variable display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 412(a) and 4(b), notice icons shown in FIG. 466(d), and the like],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon [eg, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 463],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Due to announcement of notice icon..." displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4 shown in FIG. 463(a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 456(a). "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the department TT1, the "Panda is the master of the lord", etc. displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463] in the display means,
When the notice icon is displayed, it is an icon displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 463(a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 includes a swordsman notice icon I62. And the advance notice icon I63 for improving the chance is displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the read-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the read-ahead notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be capable of being displayed only in the first display area of the display means, or may be capable of being displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

The notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be one. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. ..

Also, “the first display is not displayed when the notice icon is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 463 (a7), when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, Explanation is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT4],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed, or may not be displayed in any state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is being displayed, or may be displayed when the notice icon is being displayed.

In addition, “When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 463(a7), the notice display icon TT4 is displayed. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the first display may be resumed. There may be Moreover, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of “intense heat” in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 462(d), etc.],”
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Text display is displayed, etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as "Due to notice notice icon..." in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463(a1)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

In addition, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

In addition, "the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display unit is a unit capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 460],
The third display means displays a display matched with the display of the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR shown in FIGS. A display in which the icon I62 is stocked],
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 460(a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration area]. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. In some cases, at least one of the means may not be included.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display matched with the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display matched with the display of the second display means. It can be anything. Further, the third display means may necessarily display the display matched with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display matched with the display of the second display means. Good.

The first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. ..

The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 463],
The third display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Castle Town Stage" displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 463(a1), a stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 457(c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.]
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area [eg, the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 463(a1)] of the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area as well. [For example, as shown in FIG. 463(a7), a princess notice icon I64 is displayed on the stage name display portion ST2. Two pseudo-announcement icons I65 are displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, “the third display is not displayed when the advance notice icon is displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 463(a7), the advance notice icon is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed on the stage name display portion ST2],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The third display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 463(a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the variable display of symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number") [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 463]. In the display area, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, pseudo notice notice icon I65 shown in FIG. 463 (a7), The swordsman's notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of the operations of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 412(a) and 4(b), notice icons shown in FIG. 466(d), and the like],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 463] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 463. The hold icon h11, h12, h13, etc.] is a display area different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area or the like shown in FIG. 463],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Due to announcement of notice icon..." displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4 shown in FIG. 463(a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 456(a). "The lord is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the department TT1, the "Panda is the master of the lord", etc. displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463] in the display means when displayed,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area. [For example, as shown in FIG. 463(a9), the tutorial display section TT4 shows a notice icon I62 of a swordsman and a chance up. The notice icon I63 of is displayed (stock), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display or may be displayed other than as the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the read-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the read-ahead notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or when it is displayed other than the first display area of the display means. May be displayed in the display area of. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “the first display is not displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 463(a9), the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, The display other than the display may not be displayed. The first display may not necessarily be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, or the first display may not be displayed in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed. The display may be displayed in some cases.

Further, the first display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, or in a state other than the state in which the notice icon first display area is displayed, Only the first display may not be displayed.

Also, “When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 463(a9), the notice display icon TT4 is displayed. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display is resumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the first display are also resumed. There may be cases where Moreover, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

Further, when the first display is, for example, an explanation of the first character, a tenth display which is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, FIG.
d), the character display of "intense heat", etc. in the tutorial display section TT1],
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Text display is displayed, etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as "Due to notice notice icon..." in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 463(a1)].
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. Good.

In addition, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display regarding the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may necessarily include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

Further, the notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

In addition, “One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of “hotter than red is hot” in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. 462(a1), (A6), the character display of "Swordsman Reach is hot" in the balloon section TT2, the character display of "Panda breaks in" in the balloon section TT3, etc.].
The third display is an explanation display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3 shown in FIG. 462(a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be different entirely.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, or when it is displayed other than the second display area of the display means. May be displayed in the display area of. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area or may be entirely different from the first display area.

In addition, "the third display may be displayed even when the advance notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 462(a10), Even when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, the word display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed in the balloon display section TT2, and "Panda breaks in" is displayed in the balloon display section TT3. Text display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. Even when the display is on, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be always displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

Further, the introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

Further, a notice display different from the first notice display (second notice display) may be displayed in the second display area. Further, the advance notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternatively.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 463],
The fourth display is an explanation display [for example, a display of "Castle Town Stage" displayed on the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 463(a1), a stage name display portion ST1 shown in FIG. 457(c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the third display area [for example, the stage name display portion ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 463(a1)] of the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In the state where the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when the three preview icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 463, a new preview icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be different entirely.

Further, the fourth display may be able to be displayed only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different from the first display area.

Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In the state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area without fail, and In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

Also, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

Further, here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed on a plurality of display means is also included.

In addition, “the fourth display is not displayed when the advance notice icon is displayed in the third display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 463(a9), the advance notice icon is displayed in the stage name display portion ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed on the stage name display portion ST2],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth display may not be displayed only in the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. The fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

In addition, "the display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display unit is a unit capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 460],
The third display means displays in cooperation with the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 460(a2) to (a4) and the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed. Are stocked, etc.],
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 460(a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration area]. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. In some cases, at least one of the means may not be included.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variable display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variable display, or may not display the symbol variable display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display linked with the display of the second display means, or a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It can be anything. Further, the third display means may necessarily display the display associated with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display associated with the display of the second display means. Good.

The first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. ..

The first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be one that has been created. Further, the first display area may be necessarily provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means. It may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 463(a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned by a line into a square shape, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be always partitioned by a line, or may not be partitioned by a line.

Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “holding display means [eg, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the variable display of symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number") [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 463]. In the display area, the number of holding icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings according to the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, pseudo notice notice icon I65 shown in FIG. 463(a9), The swordsman's notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the number of holdings. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations.

Note that the number of holdings and the number of notice icons may happen to coincide with each other.

Further, the maximum hold number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, a second decorative design display device 208M, a third decorative design display device 208N, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, notice icons shown in FIGS. 412(a) and 4(b), notice icons shown in FIG. 466(d), and the like],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [eg, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 468],
It is configured to display the notice icon in a plurality of display modes,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the display mode of the swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 468(l)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, display of the enlarged swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 468(i). Aspect etc.],
The size of the notice icon is larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode [for example, from the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 468(l). Also, the swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 468(i) has a larger size, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when stocked [for example, as shown in FIG. 468(i), when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked, The swordsman's notice icon I62 is enlarged, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the read-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the read-ahead notice display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a mode other than a plurality of types of display modes. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the size of the notice icon may be larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode, and the size of the notice icon may be larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode. There may be no cases.

The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in the display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. May be. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display mode when stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when stocked.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode [for example, the swordsman icon I62 is shown in FIG. ) And then displayed in a normal display mode as shown in FIG. 468(l), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or after being displayed in the second display mode. In some cases, the display may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode of.

In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after being displayed in the second display mode, or other than after being displayed in the second display mode. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode after being displayed in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 468(a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a variable display of a decorative symbol. etc],
The notice icon is an icon that is not overlapped with the decorative symbol variable display in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 468(l), the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area]. The pseudo-rendition notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are not overlapped with the decorative pattern that is being displayed in a variable manner],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variable display, or may not display the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the notice icon may not overlap the decorative symbol variable display only in the first display mode, or may not overlap the decorative symbol variable display in display modes other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the notice icon may not necessarily overlap the decorative symbol variable display in the first display mode, or may be overlapped with the decorative symbol variable display in the first display mode. ..

In addition, “the decorative symbol variable display is a display that does not overlap the notice icon of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 468(l), the decorative pattern in the variable display is the notice icon It is not overlapped with the pseudo-reminder icon I65 in the normal display mode displayed in the display area or the swordsman's notice icon I62],
The decorative pattern variable display is a display that may be overlapped with the notice icon in the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 468(i), the decorative pattern in the variable display is a notice. It is overlapped with the pseudo-reminder icon I65 in the enlarged display mode displayed in the icon display frame YF or the swordsman notice icon I62],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap only the notice icon in the first display mode, or may not overlap other than the notice icon in the first display mode. .. Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not necessarily overlap the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap the notice icon of the first display mode.

Further, the decorative pattern variable display may be overlapped only with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the notice icon of the second display mode. There may be some. Further, the decorative pattern variable display may be always overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not be overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode.

Further, "the notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode even when it is consumed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when it is consumed, or may be displayed in the second display mode when it is not digested. It may be. Also, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode without fail when it is consumed, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when it is consumed.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in a hold display area [for example, a notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 468(a)].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 468(l), the notice icon display area is displayed. The pseudo-rendition notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are displayed in the normal display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying the advance notice icon only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying the advance notice icon in an area other than the hold display area. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon in the hold display area, or may not display the notice icon in the hold display area.

In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or when displayed in the hold display area other than the first display mode. The display mode may also be displayed. The notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when it is displayed in the hold display area, or in the first display mode even when it is not displayed in the hold display area. It may be displayed by.

Further, “When the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area is displayed in the second display mode [eg, FIG. 468(i) When the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo-repeated notice icon I65 displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed in an enlarged display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. Further, when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be always displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

In addition, “the second display mode is a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is enlarged [for example, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 468(i) is 468(l) is an enlarged display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the normal display mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the notice icon in the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which any other than the notice icon in the first display mode is also enlarged. Good. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is necessarily enlarged, or a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is not enlarged.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design notice, stage change production, reach transition production, premier notice production, re-variation production, etc.]. Yes,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of the notice icons [for example, the notice icons shown in FIGS. 412(a) and 4(b), the notice icons shown in FIG. 466(d), etc.]. And
When the notice icon is consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 414(23) to (25). When the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIGS. 415(28) to (31) is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying an item other than a plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notice icons.

Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed, or when the notice icon is consumed, the notice icon may be consumed. There may be a case where a notice display of a type other than the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon is displayed. Also, when the notice icon is consumed, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed without fail, and when the notice icon is consumed, the type of notice icon that is consumed There may be a case where the type of notice display corresponding to is not displayed.

In addition, only when the notice icon has been consumed, a notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed may be displayed, or when the notice icon is not consumed. There may be a case where a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed is displayed.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as the "hold number") for which the start of the variable display of the symbols is held [for example, in FIG. In the hold icon display area of the UI unit UI1 shown in a), the number of hold icons for which the operation of the variable display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon (two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65) shown in FIG. The icon is not an icon indicating the number of the variable display operations that have been suspended, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold. Good. Further, the display means may always display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold, or may not display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
"A gaming table provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 471(a)],
An icon (hereinafter, referred to as “icon”) relating to the variable display of symbols is configured to be displayed in a region inside the frame (hereinafter, referred to as “in-frame region”) of the icon display frame [for example, As shown in FIG. 471(a), the variable icon h0 is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, etc.],
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 471(a)],
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, an extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 471(i)],
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded [for example, the extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 471(i) is shown in FIG. 471. The pending display frame FL1 of the default display mode shown in (a) is a display mode expanded upward, etc.],
The second display is a decorative symbol variable display [for example, a variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 471(b) and a second ornament on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Variable display of symbols etc.]
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that does not overlap the second display [for example, in the default display mode shown in FIG. 471(b). The hold display frame FL1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. so,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Further, according to this gaming machine, the player is aware that the icon display frame that is preferentially displayed is expanded, and that the effect is given to the player by performing an effect such as a notice or a prefetch notice in the expanded portion. In some cases it can be done. In recent game consoles, a variety of colorful effect displays are displayed simultaneously, so it tends to be complicated and difficult to see. However, according to this game console, the icon relating to the symbol variation display that the player always pays attention to. By expanding the icon display frame for displaying, it becomes possible to distinguish and distinguish from other effect displays, and the effect effect may be enhanced in some cases.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may include only the icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. Further, the first display may include a display other than the icon display frame. Further, the first display may necessarily include the icon display frame, or may not include the icon display frame.

Here, the "icon display frame" may be referred to as "holding display frame", "holding frame", "UI", "holding icon display area", or the like. The "icon display frame" is a display that may be overlapped with at least a part of the hold icon, the variable icon, or the like. Further, since the "icon display frame" is displayed near the end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect display. The “icon display frame” may be a frame in which one variable icon or hold icon is displayed. Further, the "icon display frame" is a display frame which is not overlapped with the decorative pattern after the stop, and can also be said to be a display frame which is overlapped with at least a part of the hold icon or the like. It can also be said that the “icon display frame” is a background display displayed on the back side of the hold icon or the like and is a background display different from the background display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, here, the “icon display frame” is a portion where the player can recognize that the icon is displayed without being caught by the word “frame”. This is an example and not a limitation.

In addition, only the icon may be configured to be displayed in the inner frame area of the icon display frame, or other than the icon may be configured to be displayed in the inner frame area of the icon display frame. Further, the icon display frame may be configured such that the icon is always displayed in the frame inner area, or the icon display frame may be configured such that the icon may not be displayed in the frame inner area. Good.

Note that, here, the in-frame region constitutes an icon display frame, and is therefore a concept included in the first display.

Further, the icon display frame may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the icon display frame may be able to be displayed only in the first display mode and the second display mode, or may be display modes other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be one. Further, the icon display frame may necessarily display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. Good.

Further, the second display mode may be an expansion of only a part of the first display mode, or may be an expansion of the entire first display mode.

Here, the "display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

In addition, the term “expansion” can be said to mean a display of an “icon display frame” in a broad sense, or it can be said that the area of an image or a region is increased.

Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, and also in the display modes other than the second display mode. It may not be overlapped. The first display displayed in the first display mode may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may overlap the second display. It may be.

Here, the "decorative design variable display" may include a decorative symbol stop display and a display in a state in which the symbols can be identified at the start of variation, for example, during high-speed variation, during stop display. Display that is more difficult to identify than the display state of the display or the display state at the start of the change (for example, a semi-transparent display during high-speed change), or a decoration with a smaller size displayed during SP reach, etc. A variable display of symbols may be included.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is the effect display [for example, the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 shown in FIGS. 471(g) to 471(l) to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12. Performance display, etc.]
A portion expanded from the first display aspect of the second display aspect (hereinafter, "extended portion [for example, an extended portion in the reserved display frame FL1 of the extended display aspect illustrated in FIG. 471(i), etc. ]”), the third display is configured to be overlapped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 471(g) to 471(l), the second hold icon h12 is displayed. In the effect display that changes the display mode of N., the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, etc.],
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the second display [for example, as shown in FIG. 471(f), the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is the variable display first 1 is not overlapped with the decorative pattern or the second decorative pattern, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, at least the expanded display of the icon display frame is prioritized over the variable display of the decorative pattern indicating whether the change is appropriate or not, and the effect display such as the advance notice or the prefetch advance notice is displayed in the extended portion, so In some cases, the effect can be improved.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the third display. Further, the display means may necessarily display the third display, or may not display the third display.

Here, the “effect display” includes an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes, an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes.

Further, only the third display may be overlapped and displayed on the expanded portion, or displays other than the third display may be overlapped and displayed on the expanded portion. In addition, the third display may be configured to be displayed in the expanded portion without fail, or the third display may be configured not to be displayed in the expanded portion in some cases. Good.

Note that, here, the “extended part” may refer to the difference from the part before expansion, or when only a part of the icon display frame before expansion is expanded (or expanded). ..

Further, the expanded portion may not overlap only the second display, or may not overlap any display other than the second display. In addition, the expanded portion may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may sometimes overlap the second display.

In addition, “the effect display is a display of a prefetching notice [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 471 (g) to (l)],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “The effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 471(g) to 471(l), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white. Effect display to change from a display mode to a display mode that lights up in green]
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display is a display that may overlap with the expanded portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 471(f), the decorative pattern being variably displayed is in the expanded display mode being held. It is overlapped with the display frame FL1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be overlapped only with the expanded portion, or may be overlapped with a portion other than the expanded portion. Further, the second display may be one that is always overlapped with the expanded portion, or may be one that may not be overlapped with the expanded portion.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display of a dialogue [for example, a dialogue display by the character CH1 of Chibihime in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. 471(i), a dialogue display by the grandpa character GY1 in the balloon TT3, and the like]. Yes,
The fourth display is a display that does not overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 471(d), the default display mode is a hold display. The frame FL1 does not overlap the balloons TT2 and TT3, etc.],
The fourth display is a display that may overlap the expanded portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 471(i), the suspended display frame FL1 in the expanded display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. It overlaps with the dialogue displayed by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may necessarily display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Note that, here, the “display of the dialogue” may be referred to as “serif notice” or “conversation notice”, and may include, for example, notice of the change, prefetch notice, tutorial display, or the like.

Further, the fourth display may not overlap only the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be things that don't exist. Further, the fourth display may not necessarily overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode. It may be.

It should be noted that here, "the fourth display is a display that does not overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode" is such that the display position is not overlapped. It is a concept that also includes structured ones.

Further, the fourth display may be overlapped only with the expanded portion, or may be overlapped with a portion other than the expanded portion. Further, the fourth display may be one that is always overlapped with the expanded portion, or may be one that may not be overlapped with the expanded portion.

In addition, the "display of the dialog" includes the display of the first dialog and the display of the second dialog, and the display of the first dialog is a display that may overlap with the extension part. The display of the second line may be a display that does not overlap the extension.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a notice display [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 476(c-1) to (c-6), or FIG. 478(c)). -1) to (c-4) in the figure, the effect display for changing the display mode of the variable icon h0, etc.],
In the expanded portion, the fifth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable [for example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 476(c-1) to (c-6) is displayed. In the effect display that changes the display mode and the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 478(c-1) to (c-4), the ninja character NJ1 is in the extended display mode. It overlaps the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1, etc.],
Part of the third display and the fifth display are the same display [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 471(g) to (l). 478 (c-1) to (c-) in FIG. 478 (c-1) to (c-) in FIG. 478 (c-1) to (c-6) in FIG. Also in the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in 4), the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the expanded display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, for example, it is difficult to confirm whether the change is correct or not with the decorative pattern, but by displaying both the third display and the fifth display with the expanded icon display frame, the icon display frame is displayed. If you look at it, you may be able to see both displays without missing them. In addition, if all of the third display and the fifth display are in different modes, it may become clear whether or not the change should be expected or the pattern change display to be performed after the next change. By making part of the display of No. 5 and the display of No. 5 the same, it may be possible to increase the sense of expectation until it becomes possible to recognize which of the expected pattern variation displays.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

Further, in the expanded portion, only the fifth display may be configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner, or in the expanded portion, a display other than the fifth display may be configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner. It may be one that has been created. Further, in the expanded portion, the fifth display may be configured to be always displayed in an overlapped manner, and in the expanded portion, the fifth display may not be displayed in an overlapped manner. It may be configured as.

Further, the fifth display may be configured to be able to be overlapped and displayed only in the expanded portion, or the fifth display may be overlapped and displayed in the portion other than the expanded portion. It may be configured.

Here, the "preliminary notice display" may be a change effect of the variable icon, a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo continuous symbol, or the like.

In addition, "a part of the third display and the fifth display are the same display" is a concept including, for example, that the animation up to the appearance of the character is the same.

In addition, “the area within the frame in the first display mode (hereinafter, “the area within the frame of the first display area [for example, the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode illustrated in FIG. 471(a)] Etc.]”) is the first area,
The area inside the frame in the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second frame area [for example, an area inside the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 471(i)]." .) is the second area,
The second area is an area larger than the first area,
The expanded portion is a portion of a difference area between the second in-frame area and the first in-frame area,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second in-frame region is a region configured to include the first in-frame region [for example, as shown in FIG. 471(i), the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is displayed. The area within the frame is configured to include the area within the frame of the reserved display frame FL1 in the default display mode, etc.], The gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second in-frame region may be configured to include a part of the first in-frame region, or may be configured to include all of the first in-frame region. It may be.

Further, "the display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" according to claim 1 means that "the area of the in-frame region in the first display mode is increased. "Display mode" [for example, as shown in FIG. 471(i), in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode, the area of the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is increased. Display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the icon display frame is configured to be displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed [for example, there is no hold, and no symbol variable display is performed. , The hold display frame FL1 is displayed even when neither the change icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayable only in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. It may be configured to be displayable in display modes other than the first display mode. Further, the icon display frame may be configured to be always displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

The icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in an area other than the icon display frame.

In addition, “The icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 471(i), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the pending display frame FL1 in the extended display mode. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon that can be displayed in the frame area may be a hold icon.

In addition, “the display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, a first hold icon h11 to a fourth hold icon h14 and the like displayed in a hold icon display area] as the icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may display only the hold icon as an icon, or may display other than the hold icon as the icon. Further, the display means may always display the hold icon as the icon, or may not display the hold icon as the icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of holding icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held, or corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held. A hold icon other than the number of hold icons may be displayed. In addition, the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the variable display of symbols may be displayed without fail, or the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the variable display of symbols being held may be held. May not be displayed.

In addition, “The first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [for example, FIG. 471(f) to FIG. The extended display mode holding display frame FL1 shown in) is overlapped with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May not be overlapped. Further, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily overlap with the second display mode, or may overlap with the second display mode. There may be cases.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display [for example, the tutorial display shown in FIG. 485(a-2) to FIG. (a-4) (or FIG. (a-4′). Liquor confrontation reach production etc. displayed in section TT6],
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, the UI unit shown in FIG. 485(a-1)],
The third display is an explanation display [for example, a character display such as “Panda is master of lord” displayed on the tutorial display section TT6 shown in FIG. 485(a-1)],
The fourth display is a failure pattern [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-4′), the protagonist's hall is drunk and the protagonist's hall is defeated by the grandfather. Production pattern etc.] and a success pattern [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-4), a grandfather is drunk, and a production pattern of a drinker confrontation reach production in which the production display in which the protagonist's lord has won the grandpa is performed] It is a prepared notice display,
The icon display frame includes a first area [for example, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 485(a-1)] and a second area [for example, the tutorial shown in FIG. 485(a-1). Display unit TT6, etc.],
In the first area, an icon relating to the variable display of symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "icon [for example, variable icon h0 or hold icons h11 to h14]") is configured to be displayed,
In the second area, the third display is configured to be displayable,
In the second area, the fourth display is configured to be displayable,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the tutorial display section TT6 is the display mode of the UI section that is the display mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1)].
The icon display frame may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, the display mode of the UI unit, which is a display mode in which the range of the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded as shown in FIG. 485(a-2)]. ,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode [for example, shown in FIG. 485(a-2). The display mode of the UI unit to be displayed is a display mode in which the tutorial display unit TT6 of the display mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1) is expanded upward, etc.],
The third display may be displayed in the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode [for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1). In the tutorial display section TT6 in the UI section of ", the character display of "Panda is master of lord" is displayed, etc.],
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the fourth display is displayed [for example, in the UI unit in the display mode shown in FIG. 485(a-2). In the tutorial display section TT6, a drinker confrontation reach effect is displayed, etc.],
Position of the first area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, and position of the first area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode Are different positions [for example, the display positions of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area in the UI section of the display form shown in FIG. 485(a-1) and the display form shown in FIG. 485(a-2). The display positions of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area in the UI unit are different, etc.],
After the fourth display of the success pattern is displayed, it is configured to develop into a super reach production,
After the fourth display of the failure pattern is displayed, the icon display frame displayed in the second display mode is configured to be displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

In addition, “the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode and the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode are , The same size [for example, the sizes of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area in the UI unit of the display form shown in FIG. 485(a-2) are the same as those of the display form shown in FIG. 485(a-1). The size is the same as the size of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area in the UI unit],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode is the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode. The tutorial display section TT6 in the UI section of the display mode shown in FIG. 485(a-2) is a tutorial display section in the UI section of the display mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1). And the like, including TT6],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first area and the second area are adjacent to each other [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1) or FIG. 485(a-2), the hold display frame FL1 or the hold icon The display area is adjacent to the upper side of the tutorial display section TT6, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a decorative symbol variable display [for example, a variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 485(a-1), or FIG. 485(a-2). The variable display of the first decorative symbol in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The second display is not displayed in an overlapping manner on the front side of the first display displayed in the first display mode [for example, the UI of the display mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1)]. The part is displayed at a position that does not overlap the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “when the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the display position of the second display moves [eg, as shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display section TT6 Is expanded, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of sizes,
One of the plurality of sizes is a first size [for example, the size of the first decorative pattern shown in FIG. 485(a-1), etc.],
One size of the plurality of sizes is the second size [for example, the size of the first decorative pattern shown in FIG. 485(a-2) (of the first decorative pattern shown in FIG. 485(a-1) Smaller than size) etc.],
The second size is smaller than the first size,
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the second display displayed in the first size is displayed in the second size [for example, FIG. 485(a -2), when the tutorial display section TT6 is expanded, the first decorative symbol is displayed small above the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the second display does not overlap with the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode [for example, the UI unit illustrated in FIG. 485(a-2) Not overlapped with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the third decorative symbol display device 208N], and the like, a gaming table. ]
Was also explained.

Further, ““a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode”” means “the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode. The display mode in which the area of the second region is increased in the state of being displayed” [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 485(a-2), the expanded tutorial display unit TT6 has -1) is a display mode in which the area of the tutorial display section TT6 in the UI section of the display mode shown in -1) is increased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Further, "the icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed [for example, there is no hold, and no symbol variation display is performed, Even when neither the change icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, the UI unit is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the icon is a variable icon [for example, a variable icon h0],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the icon is a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.],
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a fifth display [eg, lower plate full tank error display ER shown in FIG. 483(a-1)],
The fifth display is an error display,
On the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode, the fifth display may overlap,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with a first display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.],
A certain display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT6 or the like shown in FIG. 485(a-1) or FIG. 485(a-2)] is a display area that can take a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a reduced aspect shown in FIG. 485(a-1)],
One mode of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, an expanded mode shown in FIG. 485(a-2)],
The certain display area of the second aspect has a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect,
The certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including the certain display area of the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. , The expanded tutorial display section TT6 is configured to include the reduced tutorial section TT6],
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, "first display [e.g., drinking drink confrontation reach production shown in FIGS. 485(a-2) to (a-4)]". Can be displayed,
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode is changed from the second mode to the first mode [for example, when the drink confrontation reach production is finished, the tutorial display section is displayed. TT6 returns from an expanded aspect to a reduced aspect, etc.],
In a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display [for example, target display shown in FIGS. 296(a3) to (a4)]. Of the mini-game, bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6), golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7), etc.]”.
The second display is a display of a mini game,
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Here, a certain display area may have only a plurality of modes, or may have a mode other than a plurality of modes. Further, a certain display area may necessarily take a plurality of modes, or may not have a plurality of modes.

Further, only the size of the certain display area of the second aspect may be larger than that of the certain aspect of the first aspect, and the certain area of the second aspect may be larger than the certain display area of the first aspect. A certain display area may have a size other than the size. In addition, the certain display area of the second aspect may have a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect, and the certain display area of the second aspect may have a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect. The size of a certain display area may not be large.

The certain display area of the second aspect may include only the certain display area of the first aspect, or may include an area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. May be. Further, the certain display area of the second aspect may necessarily include the certain display area of the first aspect, or may not include the certain display area of the first aspect. It may be.

Further, in the certain display area of the second mode, only the first display may be displayed, and in the certain display area of the second mode, displays other than the first display may be displayed. It may be. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the second mode, or the first display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode. ..

Further, the first display may be able to be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the first display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be regarded as from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. The certain display area of the second aspect may be an aspect other than the second aspect to the first aspect. In addition, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be necessarily changed from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. There may be a case where a certain display area of the second mode does not change from the second mode to the first mode.

Further, only after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be changed from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. Besides, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

In the certain display area of the first aspect, only the second display may be able to be displayed, and in the certain display area of the first aspect, it is possible to display a display other than the second display. Good. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the first mode, or the second display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the first mode.

Further, the second display may be able to be displayed only in a certain display area of the first aspect, and the second display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. It may be possible.

In addition, "the first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display [for example, effect display in which the protagonist's lord wins as shown in FIG. 485(a-4) and the like]"] can be displayed. Yes,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect display [for example, effect display in which the protagonist's lord shown in FIG. 485(a-4') is defeated by the grandfather]") can be displayed. Yes,
When the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect [eg 485(a-4'), after the representation display that the protagonist's lord has been defeated by the grandfather is performed, after the animation in which the tutorial display unit TT6 shrinks downward is performed, the UI unit is displayed in FIG. 485. Returning to the state shown in (a-1), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the second effect display may be displayed, or effect displays other than the second effect display may be displayed. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed, or the second effect display may not be displayed.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the certain display area of the second aspect may be regarded as the second aspect to the first aspect. When the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may be changed from the second aspect to an aspect other than the first aspect. Good. Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the certain display area of the second aspect may be changed from the second aspect to the first aspect. When the display of the second effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may not change from the second aspect to the first aspect. ..

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, only the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. When the display of the second effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the display areas other than the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. Good.

Further, when the display of the second effect display is finished only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. , In a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display ends, the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect. Good.

In addition, “first super reach effect [for example, swordsman reach shown in FIG. 63(c) to FIG. 63(j)] can be executed,
When the display of the first effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-4), after the performance display in which the main character's lord has won is performed, SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in 457(c) to (j) is started. , When the SP reach ends, the tutorial display section TT6 is displayed in a reduced size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be executable, or reach effects other than the first super reach effect may be executable. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, only the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is finished, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display areas other than the certain display area are also changed to the first display area. It may be one mode. Further, when the display of the first effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area is always the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, when the display of the first effect display ends in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. Good morning. In the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when only the display of the first effect display ends, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display is finished, the certain display area is changed to the first It may be one mode.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Also, in the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area is changed to the first display area after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one mode.

In addition, “the second display of the success pattern (hereinafter, “third effect display [for example, display that becomes a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6), FIG. 312(b4) Display such as "a cup-in in the golf game shown in (b7) of FIG. 7]" is displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth effect display [for example, display that does not strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6), FIG. 312(b4) to FIG. Display that does not show cup-in in the golf game shown in (b7)].
After the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, in FIG. 312(a3) to FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. 485(a-1) even if a display that does not cause a strike in the bowling chance game shown or a display that does not cup in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7) is displayed. As shown in 2), the tutorial display section TT6 may change from a contracted mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the third effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the third effect display may be displayed. Further, the third effect display may be always displayed, or the third effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the fourth effect display may be displayed, or effect displays other than the fourth effect display may be displayed. Further, the fourth effect display may be always displayed, or the fourth effect display may not be displayed.

In addition, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, or the display of the fourth effect display is started. After that, a certain display area may become a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. In addition, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may be necessarily changed from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the fourth effect display is started, There may be a case where a certain display area does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, only a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the display of the fourth effect display is started. After that, a display area other than a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, only after the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the display of the fourth effect display is started. There may be a case where a certain display area is changed from the first mode to the second mode other than after the display.

In addition, “after the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, in FIG. 312(a3) to FIG. When the display indicating a strike in the bowling chance game shown or the display indicating cup-in in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7) is displayed, FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. As shown in 2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a contracted mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area may be regarded as from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the third effect display is started. A certain display area may be a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. In addition, after the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the third effect display is started, There may be a case where a certain display area does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, after the display of the third effect display is started, only a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the third effect display is started, Display areas other than a certain display area may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, a certain display area may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect only after the display of the third effect display is started, and except after the display of the third effect display is started. Also, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, it is possible to execute "Second Super Reach production [eg, Super Long Reach, Triple Line Reach, American Dream Reach, Swordsman Reach, etc.],
The second super reach effect may be started after the display of the third effect display is started [for example, strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6)). Or a display for cup-in in the golf game shown in FIG. 312(b4) to FIG. 312(b7) is displayed, transition to super long reach (triple line reach, medley reach, swordsman reach), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the second super reach effect may be executable, or reach effects other than the second super reach effect may be executable. In addition, the second super reach effect may be always executed, or the second super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, there may be a case where only the second super reach effect is started after the display of the third effect display is started, or after the display of the third effect display is started, A reach production other than the super reach production may be started in some cases. In addition, the second super reach effect may be always started after the display of the third effect display is started, or the second super reach effect is started after the display of the third effect display is started. It may not be started.

In addition, the second super reach effect may be started only after the display of the third effect display is started, or other than after the display of the third effect display is started. The second super reach effect may be started in some cases.

In addition, “the display of the first display may be started after a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode [for example, FIG. 485 ( a-1) to (a-2) in the same figure, a drinker confrontation reach production may be performed after the tutorial display unit TT6 is changed from the reduced mode to the expanded mode, etc.],
The display of the third display may be started after a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, FIG. 485(a-1). -As shown in (a-2) of the same figure, after the tutorial display section TT6 is changed from the reduced mode to the expanded mode, the bowling chance game shown in FIG. 312(a3)-(a6), The golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7) may be played, etc.],
The third display is a display of a mini game,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after a certain display area of the first aspect has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, there may be a case where only the first display is started. There may be a case where display of a display other than the first display is started after a certain display area is changed from the first display to the second display. Further, after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the first display may be always started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. The display of the first display may not be started after is changed from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only after the certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the first display may be started other than after the certain display area is changed from the first display to the second display.

Further, it may be possible that the display of the first display is started after only the certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the first display may start after the display area other than a certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, there may be a case where only the third display is started after a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the display other than the third display may be started after the display area corresponding to the first display changes from the first display to the second display. Further, after the certain display area of the first aspect is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the third display may be always started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. There may be a case where the display of the third display is not started after is changed from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, there may be a case where the display of the third display is started only after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and The display of the third display may be started other than after a certain display area is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, it may be possible that the display of the third display is started after only the certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the third display may be started after the display area other than a certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, “the display of the first display is started after a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode [for example, FIG. 485(a-1 )-(A-2), as shown in (a-2), after the tutorial display unit TT6 is changed from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, a drinker confrontation reach effect is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of only the first display may be started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. The display of a display other than the first display may be started after is changed from the first mode to the second mode. Further, after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the first display may be always started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. The display of the first display may not be started after is changed from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started other than after the change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, the display of the first display may be started after only the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started after the display area other than the above changes from the first mode to the second mode.

The first display may be started only after a certain display area of the first mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, “the second display is a display including a first partial display [for example, a first part of a mini game] and a second partial display [for example, a second part of a mini game]. ,
After the first partial display is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode [for example, a display showing how a lord's character throws a bowling ball in the manner shown in FIG. 312(a3) is displayed. It is performed as the first half of the mini game, and then the tutorial display section TT6 changes from a contracted mode to an expanded mode. Shows how close you are and encourages whether or not a strike will occur, and a success pattern that eventually becomes a strike or a failure pattern that leaves an invincible pin will be performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may include only the first partial display and the second partial display, or may include a display other than the first partial display and the second partial display. May be. Further, the second display may necessarily include the first partial display and the second partial display, or may include at least one of the first partial display and the second partial display. It may not be the case.

In addition, after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the second aspect There may be a case where only the second partial display is displayed in a certain display area of, or the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first mode. After the area has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, a display other than the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode. In addition, after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the second aspect The second partial display may always be displayed in a certain display area of, or the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect is There may be a case where the second partial display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second mode after the display mode of the above is changed to the second display mode.

In addition, after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the second aspect There may be a case where the second partial display is displayed only in a certain display area of, and the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first mode. After the area changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second mode.

In addition, only after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect is changed from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the mode, or the first portion may be displayed in the certain display area of the first mode and the certain display of the first mode may be displayed. The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode other than after the area is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, after the first portion is displayed only in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, There may be a case where the second partial display is displayed in a certain display area of the aspect, or the first portion is displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. The second partial display may be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode after the certain display area of is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, "an icon relating to symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "icon [for example, variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 485(a-1), hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]"] is displayed in the icon display area [for example, FIG. 485. Can be displayed in the hold display frame FL0 or the hold display area shown in (a-1)],
A certain display area is an area arranged below the icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 displays the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area. Placed below, etc.],
The position of the icon display area is different between when the certain display area is the first aspect and when the certain display area is the second aspect [for example, FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. -2), the positions of the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area are different depending on whether the tutorial display section TT6 is in a contracted mode or an expanded mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be displayed only in the icon display area, or the icon may be displayed in a display area other than the icon display area. The icon may be always displayed in the icon display area, or the icon may not be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, only the icon may be displayed in the icon display area, or something other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

A certain display area may be arranged only below the icon display area, or may be arranged at a position other than below the icon display area. In addition, a certain display area may be always arranged below the icon display area, or may not be arranged below the icon display area.

Further, only the position of the icon display area may be different between the case where the certain display area is the first mode and the case where the certain display area is the second mode, or the certain display area is the case of the first mode. A case other than the position of the icon display area may be different between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second mode. Further, the position of the icon display area may be different between the case where the certain display area is the first mode and the case where the certain display area is the second mode, or the certain display area is the case of the first mode. The position of the icon display area may not be different between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second mode.

Further, it is possible to display an icon relating to the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “icon [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]]”.
When a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed is hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, only the icon may be displayed, or something other than the icon may be displayed. Further, the icon may be always displayed, or the icon may not be displayed.

Further, when the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, only the icon being displayed may be hidden, or the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect. In the second mode, the icons other than the displayed icon may be hidden. Further, when the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed may be always hidden, or the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect. In the second mode, the displayed icon may not be hidden.

Further, "a timer display [for example, the timer display shown in FIG. 293(b3) to FIG. 293(b4)] can be displayed."
After the countdown of the timer in the timer display is started and the timer display becomes a display showing 0, execution of a certain effect is started [for example, shown in FIG. 293(b3) to FIG. As a result, when the timer display reaches "0:00" as a result of the countdown of the timer display, a notice effect is performed, etc.],
As the certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as a result of countdown of the timer display, the timer display is "0". "00", as shown in FIGS. 485(a-1) to 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the timer display may be displayed, or displays other than the timer display may be displayed. Further, the timer display may be always displayed, or the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, after the timer display has started counting down in the timer display and then the timer display has changed to a display showing 0, only execution of a certain effect may be started, or the timer counting down in the timer display has started. After the timer display is changed to the display showing 0, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, after the timer countdown in the timer display is started and then the timer display becomes 0, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. The execution of a certain effect may not be started after the timer display has changed to 0.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only after the timer display starts to count down in the timer display and then the timer display becomes 0, or the timer countdown in the timer display has started. The execution of a certain effect may be started other than after the timer display is changed to the display showing 0.

Further, there may be a case where a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode as a certain effect, and a certain display area of the first mode is changed as a certain effect. There may be cases where the first aspect becomes an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect is the first. There may be a case where the mode does not become the second mode.

Further, as a certain effect, only a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, other than the certain display area of the first aspect. The display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, there is a case where a display for announcing that the timer display is displayed [for example, a preparation-in-progress display RDY shown in FIG. 283(b1)] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a display that notifies that the timer display is displayed may be displayed, or a display other than a display that notifies that the timer display is displayed may be displayed. Good. Further, a display notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed without fail, or a display notifying that the timer display is displayed may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, it is possible to display the decorative pattern variable display,
The decorative pattern variable display does not overlap with a certain display area of the second mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded mode displays the variable display. Decorative patterns do not overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, only the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed, or a display other than the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed. Further, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed without fail, or the decorative symbol variable display may not be displayed.

Further, only the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap the certain display area of the second mode, or the display other than the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap the certain display area of the second mode. You may Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not necessarily overlap with the certain display area of the second mode, and the decorative pattern variable display may overlap with the certain display area of the second mode. Good.

Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not overlap only in a certain display area of the second mode, or the decorative pattern variable display may overlap in a display area other than the certain display area of the second mode. You may not.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain explanation display (hereinafter, “first explanation display [for example, displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in FIG. 485(a-1)” "Panda is the master's teacher's character display, etc.]") may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 in a reduced mode displays "Panda". "Has master's teacher" is displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the certain display area of the first aspect, only the first explanation display may be displayed, and in the certain display area of the first aspect, other than the first explanation display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the first explanation display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, and the first explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect. Good.

Further, the first explanation display may be displayed only in the certain display area of the first aspect, and in the display areas other than the certain display area of the first aspect, the first explanation display may be displayed. An explanation display may be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the first explanation display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded mode]. Then, the character display is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first explanation display need not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode, and a display other than the first explanation display may be performed in the certain display area of the second mode. It may not be displayed. In addition, the first explanation display may not necessarily be displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanation display may be displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect. There may be.

Further, the first explanation display may not be displayed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanation display may be performed in the display areas other than the certain display area of the second aspect. May not be displayed.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain explanation display different from the first explanation display (hereinafter, “second explanation display [for example, “Oolong tea appears in a drink confrontation reach production. Then, the explanation display of "Super hot!"]] may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second explanation display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the second explanation display is displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and in the certain display area of the second aspect, other than the second explanation display. The display may also be displayed. In addition, the second explanation display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the second explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect. Good.

Further, only the second explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, or a display other than the second explanation display may be performed in the certain display area of the first aspect. May not be displayed. Further, the second explanation display may not necessarily be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, or the second explanation display may be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect. There may be cases where

In addition, a display frame (hereinafter, referred to as “area display [for example, display of tutorial display area TT6 shown in FIG. 485(a-1) and the like]” for specifying a certain display area]. "Icon display frame [for example, display of UI unit shown in FIG. 485(a-1)]" can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or displays other than the icon display frame may be displayed. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

In addition, "the icon display frame can be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode in which the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(a) is displayed in blue],
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in gold color, etc.],
The first display mode is a default display mode,
The second display mode is a look-ahead notice display mode [for example, by displaying the UI unit UI3 in a gold display mode, it is predicted that the tutorial display unit TT6 will be expanded in the pending state],
When the icon display frame has not changed from the first display mode to the second display mode when the icon display frame has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode Than the certain display area of the first aspect is likely to be the second aspect from the first aspect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or displays other than the icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or the icon display frame may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

In addition, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is more preferable than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The certain display area of the mode may be easily changed from the first mode to the second mode, or when the icon display frame is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. Even if the certain display area of the first mode is likely to be a mode other than the second mode than the case where the display frame is not changed from the first display mode to the second display mode Good. In addition, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is first than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The certain display area of the mode may be easily changed from the first mode to the second mode, and when the icon display frame is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, Even if the certain display area of the first aspect is less likely to be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the display frame is not changed from the first display aspect to the second display aspect Good.

In addition, when the icon display frame is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, a certain display area of the first mode may be necessarily changed from the first mode to the second mode. However, there may be a case where a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode.

Also, when the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode, a certain display area of the first mode is not always changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display area of the first mode may or may not be changed from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, “second display means [for example, the sub-display device 208P or the like shown in FIG. 482 (a)] is provided,
The second display means is a means arranged below the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 482(a), the sub display device 208P is arranged below the decorative pattern display device 208. Etc.],
In the case where a certain display area is the first aspect, the entire area display is displayed on the first display means,
In the case where a certain display area is the second aspect, at least a part of the area display is displayed on the second display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display means may be arranged only below the first display means, or may be arranged at a position other than below the first display means. Good. Further, the second display means may be necessarily arranged below the first display means, or may not be arranged below the first display means.

Further, when a certain display area is the first aspect, the entire area display may be displayed only on the first display means, or when the certain display area is the first aspect, the area is displayed. The entire display may be displayed on a display device other than the first display means. Further, when a certain display area is in the first mode, the entire area display may be necessarily displayed on the first display means, and when a certain display area is in the first mode, The entire display may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, in the case where a certain display area is the second mode, at least a part of the area display may be displayed only on the second display means, and when the certain display area is the second mode, At least a part of the area display may be displayed on display means other than the second display means. Further, in the case where a certain display area is the second mode, at least a part of the area display may be always displayed on the second display means, and when the certain display area is the second mode. At least a part of the area display may not be displayed on the second display means.

In addition, it is possible to display an animation in which the area display changes from a display corresponding to a certain display area of the first aspect to a display corresponding to a certain display area of the second aspect [eg, FIG. As shown in (a-1) to (a-2) of the figure, an animation in which the tutorial display section TT6 expands upward causes the tutorial display section TT6 to change from a contracted mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the animation in which the area display changes from the display corresponding to the certain display area of the first mode to the display corresponding to the certain display area of the second mode may be displayed, or the area display may be displayed. An animation other than the animation in which the display changes from the display corresponding to the certain display area of the first aspect to the display corresponding to the certain display area of the second aspect may be displayed. Further, an animation in which the area display changes from a display corresponding to a certain display area in the first mode to a display corresponding to a certain display area in the second mode may be displayed without fail, or the area display may be the first. There may be a case where the animation changing from the display corresponding to the certain display area of the above aspect to the display corresponding to the certain display area of the second aspect is not displayed.

Further, it may be possible to display an animation in which the area display changes only from a display corresponding to a certain display area in the first mode to a display corresponding to a certain display area in the second mode. An animation that changes from a display corresponding to a certain display area of the first aspect to a display other than the display corresponding to a certain display area of the second aspect may be displayed.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, etc.],
A certain display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT6 or the like shown in FIG. 485(a-1) or FIG. 485(a-2)] is a display area that can take a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a reduced aspect shown in FIG. 485(a-1)],
One mode of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, an expanded mode shown in FIG. 485(a-2)],
The certain display area of the second aspect has a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect,
The certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including the certain display area of the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. , The expanded tutorial display section TT6 is configured to include the reduced tutorial section TT6],
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, "first display [e.g., drinking drink confrontation reach production shown in FIGS. 485(a-2) to (a-4)]". Can be displayed,
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode is changed from the second mode to the first mode [for example, when the drink confrontation reach production is finished, the tutorial display section is displayed. TT6 returns from an expanded aspect to a reduced aspect, etc.],
A certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display [e.g., the target mini-game shown in FIG. 296 (a3) to (a4), FIG. 312 (a3) to FIG. The bowling chance game shown in (a6) and the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7) in FIG. 312]” are displayed.
The second display is a display of a mini game,
After the display of the second display is started, a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to 312(a6). 485(a-1) to FIG. 485(a-2) when the display indicating a strike in the bowling chance game and the display to cup in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7) are displayed. ), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a contracted mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Here, a certain display area may have only a plurality of modes, or may have a mode other than a plurality of modes. Further, a certain display area may necessarily take a plurality of modes, or may not have a plurality of modes.

Further, only the size of the certain display area of the second aspect may be larger than that of the certain aspect of the first aspect, and the certain area of the second aspect may be larger than the certain display area of the first aspect. A certain display area may have a size other than the size. In addition, the certain display area of the second aspect may have a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect, and the certain display area of the second aspect may have a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect. The size of a certain display area may not be large.

The certain display area of the second aspect may include only the certain display area of the first aspect, or may include an area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. May be. Further, the certain display area of the second aspect may necessarily include the certain display area of the first aspect, or may not include the certain display area of the first aspect. It may be.

Further, in the certain display area of the second mode, only the first display may be displayed, and in the certain display area of the second mode, displays other than the first display may be displayed. It may be. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the second mode, or the first display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode. ..

Further, the first display may be able to be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the first display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be regarded as from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. The certain display area of the second aspect may be an aspect other than the second aspect to the first aspect. In addition, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be necessarily changed from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. There may be a case where a certain display area of the second mode does not change from the second mode to the first mode.

Further, only after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be changed from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. Besides, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Further, only the second display may be displayed, or displays other than the second display may be displayed. Further, the second display may be always displayed, or the second display may not be displayed.

Further, after the display of the second display is started, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the second display is started. In some cases, a certain display area may have a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. Further, after the display of the second display is started, a certain display area may be necessarily changed from the first mode to the second mode, and after the display of the second display is started, The display area may not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, after the display of the second display is started, only a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the second display is started. The display areas other than a certain display area may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, only after the display of the second display is started, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the second display is started. Besides, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, "the first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display [for example, effect display in which the protagonist's lord wins as shown in FIG. 485(a-4) and the like]"] can be displayed. Yes,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect display [for example, effect display in which the protagonist's lord shown in FIG. 485(a-4') is defeated by the grandfather]") can be displayed. Yes,
When the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect [for example, 485(a-4'), after the representation display in which the protagonist's lord has been defeated by the grandfather is performed, after the animation in which the tutorial display unit TT6 shrinks downward is performed, the UI unit is displayed in FIG. 485. Returning to the state shown in (a-1), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the second effect display may be displayed, or effect displays other than the second effect display may be displayed. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed, or the second effect display may not be displayed.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the certain display area of the second aspect may be regarded as the second aspect to the first aspect. When the display of the second effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may be changed from the second aspect to an aspect other than the first aspect. Good. Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, the certain display area of the second aspect may be changed from the second aspect to the first aspect. When the display of the second effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may not change from the second aspect to the first aspect. ..

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display is completed, only the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. When the display of the second effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the display areas other than the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. Good.

Further, when the display of the second effect display is finished only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect. , In a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the second effect display ends, the certain display area of the second aspect changes from the second aspect to the first aspect. Good.

In addition, “first super reach effect [for example, swordsman reach shown in FIG. 63(c) to FIG. 63(j)] can be executed,
When the display of the first effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-4), after the performance display in which the main character's lord has won is performed, SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in 457(c) to (j) is started. , When the SP reach ends, the tutorial display section TT6 is displayed in a reduced size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be executable, or reach effects other than the first super reach effect may be executable. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, only the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is finished, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display areas other than the certain display area are also changed to the first display area. It may be one mode. Further, when the display of the first effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area is always the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, when the display of the first effect display ends in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. Good morning. In the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when only the display of the first effect display ends, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display is finished, the certain display area is changed to the first It may be one mode.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Also, in the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area is changed to the first display area after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one mode.

In addition, “the second display of the success pattern (hereinafter, “third effect display [for example, display that becomes a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6), FIG. 312(b4) Display such as "a cup-in in the golf game shown in (b7) of FIG. 7]" is displayed.
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth effect display [for example, display that does not strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6), FIG. 312(b4) to FIG. Display that does not show cup-in in the golf game shown in (b7)].
After the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area changes from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, the bowling chance shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6). If the display that causes a strike in the game or the display that cups in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7) is displayed, the display in FIGS. 485(a-1) to (a-2) As shown, the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the third effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the third effect display may be displayed. Further, the third effect display may be always displayed, or the third effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the fourth effect display may be displayed, or effect displays other than the fourth effect display may be displayed. Further, the fourth effect display may be always displayed, or the fourth effect display may not be displayed.

In addition, after the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area may be regarded as from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the third effect display is started, A certain display area may be a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. In addition, after the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the third effect display is started, There may be a case where a certain display area does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, after the display of the third effect display is started, only a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the third effect display is started, Display areas other than a certain display area may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, a certain display area may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect only after the display of the third effect display is started, and except after the display of the third effect display is started. Also, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, “a display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect after the display of the fourth effect display is started [for example, FIG. 312(a3) to FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. 312(b4) to FIG. (b7) even if a display indicating no strike is displayed in the bowling chance game shown in FIG. As shown in (a-2), the tutorial display section TT6 may change from a contracted mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, or the display of the fourth effect display is started. After that, a certain display area may become a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. In addition, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may be necessarily changed from the first mode to the second mode, or after the display of the fourth effect display is started, There may be a case where a certain display area does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, after the display of the fourth effect display is started, only a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the display of the fourth effect display is started. After that, a display area other than a certain display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

Further, only after the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area may be changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the display of the fourth effect display is started. There may be a case where a certain display area is changed from the first mode to the second mode other than after the display.

In addition, it is possible to execute "Second Super Reach production [eg, Super Long Reach, Triple Line Reach, American Dream Reach, Swordsman Reach, etc.],
The second super reach effect may be started after the display of the third effect display is started [for example, strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6)). Or a display for cup-in in the golf game shown in FIG. 312(b4) to FIG. 312(b7) is displayed, transition to super long reach (triple line reach, medley reach, swordsman reach), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the second super reach effect may be executable, or reach effects other than the second super reach effect may be executable. In addition, the second super reach effect may be always executed, or the second super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, there may be a case where only the second super reach effect is started after the display of the third effect display is started, or after the display of the third effect display is started, A reach production other than the super reach production may be started in some cases. In addition, the second super reach effect may be always started after the display of the third effect display is started, or the second super reach effect is started after the display of the third effect display is started. It may not be started.

In addition, the second super reach effect may be started only after the display of the third effect display is started, or other than after the display of the third effect display is started. The second super reach effect may be started in some cases.

Further, “the display of the first display is started after a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode [for example, FIG. 485(a-1 )-(A-2), as shown in (a-2), after the tutorial display unit TT6 is changed from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, a drinker confrontation reach effect is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of only the first display may be started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. The display of a display other than the first display may be started after is changed from the first mode to the second mode. Further, after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the first display may be always started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. The display of the first display may not be started after is changed from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started other than after the change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, the display of the first display may be started after only the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started after the display area other than the above changes from the first mode to the second mode.

The first display may be started only after a certain display area of the first mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, “the second display is a display including a first partial display [for example, a first part of a mini game] and a second partial display [for example, a second part of a mini game]. ,
After the first partial display is displayed in an area other than the certain display area and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second aspect There is a case where the second partial display is displayed in a certain display area of [for example, a display showing how the lord's character throws a bowling ball is displayed in the mini game in the manner shown in FIG. 312(a3). This is performed as the first half, and then the tutorial display section TT6 changes from a contracted mode to an expanded mode, and then, as shown in FIGS. 312(a4) to 312(a5), the bowling ball approaches the pin. Indicating whether or not it will be a strike, and a success pattern that eventually becomes a strike or a failure pattern in which an invincible pin remains is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may include only the first partial display and the second partial display, or may include a display other than the first partial display and the second partial display. May be. Further, the second display may necessarily include the first partial display and the second partial display, or may include at least one of the first partial display and the second partial display. It may not be the case.

In addition, after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the second aspect There may be a case where only the second partial display is displayed in a certain display area of, or the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first mode. After the area has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, a display other than the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode. In addition, after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the second aspect The second partial display may always be displayed in a certain display area of, or the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect is There may be a case where the second partial display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second mode after the display mode of the above is changed to the second display mode.

In addition, after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the second aspect There may be a case where the second partial display is displayed only in a certain display area of, and the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first mode. After the area changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second mode.

In addition, only after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect is changed from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the mode, or the first portion may be displayed in the certain display area of the first mode and the certain display of the first mode may be displayed. The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode other than after the area is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, after the first portion is displayed only in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, There may be a case where the second partial display is displayed in a certain display area of the aspect, or the first portion is displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. The second partial display may be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode after the certain display area of is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, "an icon relating to symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "icon [for example, variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 485(a-1), hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]"] is displayed in the icon display area [for example, FIG. 485. Can be displayed in the hold display frame FL0 or the hold display area shown in (a-1)],
A certain display area is an area arranged below the icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 displays the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area. Placed below, etc.],
The position of the icon display area is different between when the certain display area is the first aspect and when the certain display area is the second aspect [for example, FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. -2), the positions of the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area are different depending on whether the tutorial display section TT6 is in a contracted mode or an expanded mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be displayed only in the icon display area, or the icon may be displayed in a display area other than the icon display area. The icon may be always displayed in the icon display area, or the icon may not be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, only the icon may be displayed in the icon display area, or something other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

A certain display area may be arranged only below the icon display area, or may be arranged at a position other than below the icon display area. In addition, a certain display area may be always arranged below the icon display area, or may not be arranged below the icon display area.

Further, only the position of the icon display area may be different between the case where the certain display area is the first mode and the case where the certain display area is the second mode, or the certain display area is the case of the first mode. A case other than the position of the icon display area may be different between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second mode. Further, the position of the icon display area may be different between the case where the certain display area is the first mode and the case where the certain display area is the second mode, or the certain display area is the case of the first mode. The position of the icon display area may not be different between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second mode.

Further, it is possible to display an icon relating to the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “icon [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]]”.
When a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed is hidden.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon may be displayed, or something other than the icon may be displayed. Further, the icon may be always displayed, or the icon may not be displayed.

Further, when the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, only the icon being displayed may be hidden, or the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect. In the second mode, the icons other than the currently displayed icon may be hidden. Further, when the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed may be always hidden, or the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect. In the second mode, the displayed icon may not be hidden.

In addition, “a certain display different from the first display and the second display (hereinafter, “third display [for example, the target mini-game shown in FIGS. 296(a3) to (a4), 312(a3) to FIG. 312(a6), a golf game shown in FIG. 312(b4) to FIG. 312(b7), etc.]” can be displayed.
The third display does not start when the second display is displayed [for example, a plurality of mini games are not played at the same time],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the third display may be displayed, or displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, the third display may be always displayed, or the third display may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may not be started only when the second display is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the second display. May not be started. In addition, the third display may not always start in the state where the second display is displayed, or the display may start in the state where the second display is displayed. There may be cases where

Further, "a timer display [for example, the timer display shown in FIG. 293(b3) to FIG. 293(b4)] can be displayed."
After the countdown of the timer in the timer display is started and the timer display becomes a display showing 0, execution of a certain effect is started [for example, shown in FIG. 293(b3) to FIG. As a result, when the timer display reaches "0:00" as a result of the countdown of the timer display, a notice effect is performed, etc.],
As the certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as a result of countdown of the timer display, the timer display is "0". "00", as shown in FIGS. 485(a-1) to 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the timer display may be displayed, or displays other than the timer display may be displayed. Further, the timer display may be always displayed, or the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, after the timer display countdown is started in the timer display and then the timer display becomes 0, only execution of a certain effect may be started, or the timer countdown display in the timer display is started. After the timer display is changed to the display showing 0, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, after the timer countdown in the timer display is started and then the timer display becomes 0, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, or the timer countdown in the timer display has started. The execution of a certain effect may not be started after the timer display has changed to 0.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only after the timer display starts to count down in the timer display and the timer display becomes 0, or the timer countdown in the timer display has started. The execution of a certain effect may be started other than after the timer display is changed to the display showing 0.

Further, there may be a case where a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode as a certain effect, and a certain display area of the first mode is changed as a certain effect. There may be cases where the first aspect becomes an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect is the first. There may be a case where the mode does not become the second mode.

Further, as a certain effect, only a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, other than the certain display area of the first aspect. The display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, there is a case where a display for announcing that the timer display is displayed [for example, a preparation-in-progress display RDY shown in FIG. 283(b1)] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a display for warning that the timer display is displayed may be displayed, or a display other than a display for warning that the timer display is displayed may be displayed. Good. Further, a display notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed without exception, or a display notifying that the timer display is displayed may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, it is possible to display the decorative pattern variable display,
The decorative pattern variable display does not overlap with a certain display area of the second mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded mode displays the variable display. Decorative patterns do not overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed, or a display other than the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed. Further, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed without fail, or the decorative symbol variable display may not be displayed.

Further, only the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap the certain display area of the second mode, or the display other than the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap the certain display area of the second mode. You may Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not necessarily overlap with the certain display area of the second mode, and the decorative pattern variable display may overlap with the certain display area of the second mode. Good.

Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not overlap only in a certain display area of the second mode, or the decorative pattern variable display may overlap in a display area other than the certain display area of the second mode. You may not.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain explanation display (hereinafter, “first explanation display [for example, displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in FIG. 485(a-1)” "Panda is the master's teacher's character display, etc.]") may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 in a reduced mode displays "Panda". "Has master's teacher" is displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the certain display area of the first aspect, only the first explanation display may be displayed, and in the certain display area of the first aspect, other than the first explanation display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the first explanation display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, and the first explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect. Good.

Further, the first explanation display may be displayed only in the certain display area of the first aspect, and in the display areas other than the certain display area of the first aspect, the first explanation display may be displayed. An explanation display may be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the first explanation display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded mode]. Then, the character display is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first explanation display need not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode, and display other than the first explanation display may be performed in the certain display area of the second mode. It may not be displayed. Further, in the case where the first explanation display is not necessarily displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanation display is displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect There may be

Further, the first explanation display may not be displayed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanation display may be performed in the display areas other than the certain display area of the second aspect. May not be displayed.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain explanation display different from the first explanation display (hereinafter, “second explanation display [for example, “Oolong tea appears in a drink confrontation reach production. Then, the explanation display of "Super hot!"]] may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second explanation display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the second explanation display is displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and in the certain display area of the second aspect, other than the second explanation display. The display may also be displayed. In addition, the second explanation display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the second explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect. Good.

Further, only the second explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, or a display other than the second explanation display may be performed in the certain display area of the first aspect. May not be displayed. Further, the second explanation display may not necessarily be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, or the second explanation display may be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect. There may be cases where

Further, a display frame for specifying a certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as “icon display frame [eg, display of UI unit shown in FIG. 485(a-1)]”) can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or displays other than the icon display frame may be displayed. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

In addition, "the icon display frame can be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode in which the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(a) is displayed in blue],
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in gold color, etc.],
The first display mode is a default display mode,
The second display mode is a look-ahead notice display mode [for example, by displaying the UI unit UI3 in a gold display mode, it is predicted that the tutorial display unit TT6 will be expanded in the pending state],
When the icon display frame has not changed from the first display mode to the second display mode when the icon display frame has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode Than the certain display area of the first aspect is likely to be the second aspect from the first aspect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of display modes, or displays other than the icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or the icon display frame may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

In addition, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is more preferable than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The certain display area of the mode may be easily changed from the first mode to the second mode, or when the icon display frame is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. Even if the certain display area of the first mode is likely to be a mode other than the second mode than the case where the display frame is not changed from the first display mode to the second display mode Good. In addition, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is first than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The certain display area of the mode may be easily changed from the first mode to the second mode, and when the icon display frame is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, Even if the certain display area of the first aspect is less likely to be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the display frame is not changed from the first display aspect to the second display aspect Good.

In addition, when the icon display frame is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, a certain display area of the first mode may be necessarily changed from the first mode to the second mode. However, there may be a case where a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode.

Also, when the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode, a certain display area of the first mode is not always changed from the first mode to the second mode. The display area of the first mode may or may not be changed from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, etc.],
A certain display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT6 or the like shown in FIG. 485(a-1) or FIG. 485(a-2)] is a display area that can take a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a reduced aspect shown in FIG. 485(a-1)],
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect [for example, an extended aspect (first extended aspect) or the like shown in FIG. 485(a-2)],
The certain display area of the second aspect has a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect,
The certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including the certain display area of the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. , The expanded tutorial display section TT6 is configured to include the reduced tutorial section TT6],
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, "first display [e.g., drinking drink confrontation reach production shown in FIGS. 485(a-2) to (a-4)]". Can be displayed,
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode is changed from the second mode to the first mode [for example, when the drink confrontation reach production is finished, the tutorial display section is displayed. TT6 returns from an expanded aspect to a reduced aspect, etc.],
One mode of the plurality of modes is the third mode [for example, the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the reduced mode shown in FIG. 485(a-1) and FIG. 485(a-2). The second expansion mode which is an intermediate size of the size of the tutorial display section TT6 of the first expansion mode shown in FIG.
The certain display area of the third aspect is larger in size than the certain display area of the first aspect,
The display area of the second aspect and the display area of the third aspect have different sizes [for example, the size of the tutorial display unit TT6 in the second expansion aspect is shown in FIG. 485(a-1). The size of the reduced size of the tutorial display section TT6 shown in Fig. 485 and the size of the tutorial display section TT6 of the first expanded mode shown in Fig. 485(a-2).
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Here, a certain display area may have only a plurality of modes, or may have a mode other than a plurality of modes. Further, a certain display area may necessarily take a plurality of modes, or may not have a plurality of modes.

Further, only the size of the certain display area of the second aspect may be larger than that of the certain aspect of the first aspect, and the certain area of the second aspect may be larger than the certain display area of the first aspect. A certain display area may have a size other than the size. In addition, the certain display area of the second aspect may have a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect, and the certain display area of the second aspect may have a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect. The size of a certain display area may not be large.

The certain display area of the second aspect may include only the certain display area of the first aspect, or may include an area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. May be. Further, the certain display area of the second aspect may necessarily include the certain display area of the first aspect, or may not include the certain display area of the first aspect. It may be.

Further, in the certain display area of the second mode, only the first display may be displayed, and in the certain display area of the second mode, displays other than the first display may be displayed. It may be. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the second mode, or the first display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode. ..

Further, the first display may be able to be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the first display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be regarded as from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. The certain display area of the second aspect may be an aspect other than the second aspect to the first aspect. In addition, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be necessarily changed from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. There may be a case where a certain display area of the second mode does not change from the second mode to the first mode.

Further, only after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be changed from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. Besides, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Only a certain size may differ between the certain display area of the second aspect and the certain display area of the third aspect, and the size may vary between the certain display area of the second aspect and the certain display area of the third aspect. Other than this may be different. Further, the size may be different between the certain display area of the second mode and the certain display area of the third mode, or the certain display area of the second mode and the certain display area of the third mode. There may be cases where the sizes do not differ.

In addition, "in a certain display area of the third aspect, it is possible to display the first display,
It is possible to display the first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect display [for example, effect display in which the protagonist of the protagonist has won in FIG. 485 (a-4)]”).
It is possible to display the first display of the failure pattern [for example, an effect display in which the main character's lord shown in FIG. 485(a-4′) is defeated by the grandfather],
The first effect display in the certain display area of the third aspect is more easily started to be displayed than the first effect display in the certain display area of the second aspect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the certain display area of the third aspect, only the first display may be able to be displayed, or in the certain display area of the third aspect, displays other than the first display can be displayed. May be Further, the first display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the third aspect, or the first display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the third aspect. ..

Further, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the first display of the failure pattern may be displayed, or the effect display other than the first display of the failure pattern may be displayed. Further, the first display of the failure pattern may be always displayed, or the first display of the failure pattern may not be displayed.

It should be noted that the first effect display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect.

Further, in the certain display area of the third aspect, the first effect display may always be easily started to be displayed.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the third aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, “second display [for example, FIG. 296(a3) to FIG. The target mini game shown, a bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6), a golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7), etc.]” can be displayed. ,
The second display is a display of a mini game,
It is possible to display the first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect display [for example, effect display in which the protagonist of the protagonist has won in FIG. 485 (a-4)]”).
It is possible to display the first display of the failure pattern [for example, an effect display in which the main character's lord shown in FIG. 485(a-4′) is defeated by the grandfather],
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter, "the third effect display [for example, FIG. 312 (a3)
-Display that strikes in the bowling chance game shown in (a6) of the figure, display that becomes cup-in in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312 (b4) to (b7), etc.]". ) Can be displayed,
The second display of the failure pattern [for example, a display that does not strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6), a cup shown in FIG. 312(b4) to (b7) in the golf game. Not displayed, etc.] can be displayed.
In the certain display area of the third aspect, the first effect in the certain display area of the second aspect, rather than the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the third effect display is started. When the display of the display is started, the symbol variation display being executed is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot pattern mode,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, in the certain display area of the third aspect, only the second display may be able to be displayed, or in the certain display area of the third aspect, a display other than the second display can also be displayed. May be Further, the second display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the third mode, or the second display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the third mode.

Further, the second display may be able to be displayed only in a certain display area of the third aspect, or the second display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the third aspect. It may be possible.

Further, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the first display of the failure pattern may be displayed, or the effect display other than the first display of the failure pattern may be displayed. Further, the first display of the failure pattern may be always displayed, or the first display of the failure pattern may not be displayed.

Incidentally, in the symbol variation display which is being executed when the display of the third effect display is started in a certain display area of the third aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect may not always be finally confirmed and displayed. In the end, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

Also, in the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the first effect is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the jackpot symbol aspect may be finally definitely displayed. In the end, there may be a case where the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, "variable display of decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "first variable display") in which a certain display area becomes the second mode and the first effect display is displayed can be displayed. It is possible to display a variable display of the decorative pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second variable display") in which the display area is in the third mode and the third effect display is displayed, and more than the second variable display. The third variable display is more likely to be finally finalized in the big hit symbol mode (finalized display of the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the big hit will occur).

Further, "the first variable display is a variable display in which a certain display area is in the third mode and the third effect display is not displayed, and the second variable display is a second display in which a certain display area is the second. It is a variable display in which the first effect display is not displayed, and may be ".

In addition, “the certain display area of the second aspect is more likely to start the first effect display than the certain display area of the third aspect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first effect display may be more easily started in the certain display area of the second aspect than the certain display area of the third aspect, or the certain display area of the third aspect. The display other than the first effect display may be more easily started in a certain display area of the second aspect than in the area. In addition, the certain display area of the second aspect may be easier to start the first effect display than the certain display area of the third aspect, or the certain display area of the third aspect. In some cases, the certain display area of the second aspect may be less likely to start the first effect display.

In the certain display area of the third aspect, the first effect display may not necessarily be started, and the first effect display may or may not be started.

Further, in a certain display area of the second aspect, the first effect display may be always started, or the first effect display may or may not be started.

In addition, “first super reach effect [for example, swordsman reach shown in FIG. 63(c) to FIG. 63(j)] can be executed,
When the display of the first effect display ends in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super-reach effect is performed [eg, As shown in FIG. 485(a-4), after the production display in which the main character wins in the drinking confrontation reach production in the tutorial display area TT6 of the first expansion mode is performed, FIG. When the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. (j) is started and the SP reach is finished, the tutorial display section TT6 is displayed in a reduced form, etc.],
When the display of the first effect display is finished in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super-reach effect is performed [ For example, after the production display in which the main character wins is displayed in the drink drinking confrontation reach production in the tutorial display area TT6 of the second expansion mode, the SP reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 457(c) to (j) is displayed. Reach) is started and SP reach is finished, the tutorial display section TT6 is displayed in a reduced size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be executable, or reach effects other than the first super reach effect may be executable. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, only the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is finished, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display areas other than the certain display area are also changed to the first display area. It may be one mode. Further, when the display of the first effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area is always the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, when the display of the first effect display ends in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. Good morning. In the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is finished, the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when only the display of the first effect display ends, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display is finished, the certain display area is changed to the first It may be one mode.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Also, in the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area is changed to the first display area after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one mode.

Also, in the certain display area of the third aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, only the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the third aspect, when the display of the first effect display is finished, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display areas other than the certain display area are also changed to the first display area. It may be one mode. In addition, when the display of the first effect display is completed in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area is always the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, when the display of the first effect display is finished in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, in the certain display area of the third aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. Good morning. In the certain display area of the third aspect, when the display of the first effect display is finished, the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, in the certain display area of the third aspect, when only the display of the first effect display ends, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the third aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display is finished, the certain display area is changed to the first display area after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one mode.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Even in a display area other than the certain display area of the third aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, a certain display area is changed to the first display area after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one mode.

In addition, “after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area of the third aspect is changed from the third aspect to the second aspect. The mode may change [for example, after the demonstration display in which the main character wins in the drink display confrontation reach production in the tutorial display region TT6 of the second expansion mode is performed, the tutorial display region TT6 is expanded and displayed. As shown in 485(a-2), the tutorial display area TT6 becomes the first expansion mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area of the third aspect is changed only from the third aspect to the second aspect. In some cases, after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third mode, the certain display area of the third mode is changed from the third mode to the second mode. There may be cases other than the aspect. Further, after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area of the third aspect is always changed from the third aspect to the second aspect. The display area of the third aspect does not change from the third aspect to the second aspect after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect. There may be cases.

Also, in the case where only the certain display area of the third aspect changes from the third aspect to the second aspect after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect May be present, and after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the display areas other than the certain display area of the third aspect are also from the third aspect. It may be changed to the second mode.

Further, when the certain display area of the third aspect changes from the third aspect to the second aspect only after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect May be present, and even after the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the third aspect, the certain display area of the third aspect is changed from the third aspect to the second aspect. There may be cases where the mode changes.

In addition, "the first display is a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display [eg, Chibihime Musou production shown in FIG. 309(b)],
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display [for example, drinking comparison effect shown in FIG. 309(b)],
In some display areas of the second aspect, both the first type of display and the second type of display may be performed [eg, as shown in FIG. 309(b), Princess Chibi Both warrior production and drinking comparison production are being performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the first display may always display a plurality of types of display, or may not display a plurality of types of display.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, there may be a case where both the first type of display and the second type of display are performed, and in the certain display area of the second aspect, The display other than both the first type display and the second type display may be performed in some cases. Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, both the first type of display and the second type of display may be performed without fail, and in the certain display area of the second aspect, There may be a case where both the display of the type and the display of the second type are not performed.

Further, there may be a case where both the first type of display and the second type of display are performed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, and other than the certain display area of the second aspect. Also in the display area of No. 2, both the first type of display and the second type of display may be performed.

In addition, “when either one of the display of the first type and the display of the second type is displayed as the first effect display (hereinafter, “the first case [eg, FIG. 309(b) If either one of the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production is displayed, etc.]”).
When both the first type of display and the second type of display are displayed as the first effect display (hereinafter, “second case [for example, Chibi Hime Musou shown in FIG. 309(b). If both the presentation and the presentation compared to drinking are displayed]”).
In the first case and the second case, in the second case, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the first case and the second case, in the second case, it may be easier to finally display only the big hit symbol in the symbol variable display, and in the first case and the second case. Then, in the second case, symbols other than the big hit symbol may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display. Further, in the first case and the second case, in the second case, the big hit symbol may be definitely definitely displayed in the final in the variable display, and in the first case and the second case. In the second case, the jackpot design may not be easily finalized and displayed in the design variation display.

In the first case, the jackpot design may not always be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and the jackpot symbol may or may not be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. Good.

Further, in the second case, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display, and the jackpot symbol may or may not be finally displayed in the symbol variable display. May be.

In addition, “a certain display area of the second aspect has a larger size than a certain display area of the third aspect [for example, the size of the tutorial display section TT6 of the second expansion aspect is With a size intermediate between the size of the reduced size tutorial display section TT6 shown in FIG. 485(a-1) and the size of the first expanded mode tutorial display section TT6 shown in FIG. 485(a-2). Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, "an icon relating to symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "icon [for example, variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 485(a-1), hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]"] is displayed in the icon display area [for example, FIG. 485. Can be displayed in the hold display frame FL0 or the hold display area shown in (a-1)],
A certain display area is an area arranged below the icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 displays the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area. Placed below, etc.],
The position of the icon display area is different between when the certain display area is the first aspect and when the certain display area is the second aspect [for example, FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. -2), the positions of the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area are different depending on whether the tutorial display section TT6 is in a contracted mode or an expanded mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be displayed only in the icon display area, or the icon may be displayed in a display area other than the icon display area. The icon may be always displayed in the icon display area, or the icon may not be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, only the icon may be displayed in the icon display area, or something other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, a certain display area may be arranged only below the icon display area, or may be arranged at a position other than below the icon display area. In addition, a certain display area may be always arranged below the icon display area, or may not be arranged below the icon display area.

Further, only the position of the icon display area may be different between the case where the certain display area is the first mode and the case where the certain display area is the second mode, or the certain display area is the case of the first mode. A case other than the position of the icon display area may be different between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second mode. Further, the position of the icon display area may be different between the case where the certain display area is the first mode and the case where the certain display area is the second mode, or the certain display area is the case of the first mode. The position of the icon display area may not be different between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second mode.

Further, it is possible to display an icon relating to the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “icon [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]]”.
When a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed is hidden.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon may be displayed, or something other than the icon may be displayed. Further, the icon may be always displayed, or the icon may not be displayed.

Further, when the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, only the icon being displayed may be hidden, or the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect. In the second mode, the icons other than the currently displayed icon may be hidden. Further, when the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed may be always hidden, or the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect. In the second mode, the displayed icon may not be hidden.

Further, "a timer display [for example, the timer display shown in FIG. 293(b3) to FIG. 293(b4)] can be displayed."
After the countdown of the timer in the timer display is started and the timer display becomes a display showing 0, execution of a certain effect is started [for example, shown in FIG. 293(b3) to FIG. As a result, when the timer display reaches "0:00" as a result of the countdown of the timer display, a notice effect is performed, etc.],
As the certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as a result of countdown of the timer display, the timer display is "0". "00", as shown in FIGS. 485(a-1) to 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the timer display may be displayed, or displays other than the timer display may be displayed. Further, the timer display may be always displayed, or the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, after the timer display has started counting down in the timer display and then the timer display has changed to a display showing 0, only execution of a certain effect may be started, or the timer counting down in the timer display has started. After the timer display is changed to the display showing 0, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, after the timer countdown in the timer display is started and then the timer display becomes 0, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. The execution of a certain effect may not be started after the timer display has changed to 0.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only after the timer display starts to count down in the timer display and then the timer display becomes 0, or the timer countdown in the timer display has started. The execution of a certain effect may be started other than after the timer display is changed to the display showing 0.

Further, there may be a case where a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode as a certain effect, and a certain display area of the first mode is changed as a certain effect. There may be cases where the first aspect becomes an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect is the first. There may be a case where the mode does not become the second mode.

Further, as a certain effect, only a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, other than the certain display area of the first aspect. The display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, there is a case where a display for announcing that the timer display is displayed [for example, a preparation-in-progress display RDY shown in FIG. 283(b1)] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a display for warning that the timer display is displayed may be displayed, or a display other than a display for warning that the timer display is displayed may be displayed. Good. Further, a display notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed without exception, or a display notifying that the timer display is displayed may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, it is possible to display the decorative pattern variable display,
The decorative pattern variable display does not overlap with a certain display area of the second mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded mode displays the variable display. Decorative patterns do not overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed, or a display other than the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed. Further, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed without fail, or the decorative symbol variable display may not be displayed.

Further, only the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap the certain display area of the second mode, and the display other than the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap the certain display area of the second mode. You may Further, the decorative symbol variable display may not necessarily overlap with the certain display region of the second aspect, and the decorative symbol variable display may overlap with the certain display region of the second aspect. Good.

Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not overlap only in a certain display area of the second mode, or the decorative pattern variable display may overlap in a display area other than the certain display area of the second mode. You may not.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain explanation display (hereinafter, “first explanation display [for example, displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in FIG. 485(a-1)” "Panda is the master's teacher's character display, etc.]") may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 in a reduced mode displays "Panda". "Has master's teacher" is displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the certain display area of the first aspect, only the first explanation display may be displayed, and in the certain display area of the first aspect, other than the first explanation display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the first explanation display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, and the first explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect. Good.

Further, the first explanation display may be displayed only in the certain display area of the first aspect, and in the display areas other than the certain display area of the first aspect, the first explanation display may be displayed. An explanation display may be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the first explanation display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded mode]. Then, the character display is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first explanation display need not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode, and display other than the first explanation display may be performed in the certain display area of the second mode. It may not be displayed. Further, in the case where the first explanation display is not necessarily displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanation display is displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect There may be

Further, the first explanation display may not be displayed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanation display may be performed in the display areas other than the certain display area of the second aspect. May not be displayed.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain explanation display different from the first explanation display (hereinafter, “second explanation display [for example, “oolong tea appears in a drinker confrontation reach production In that case, it is configured such that the explanation display of "Super hot!"]] is displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second explanation display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the certain display area of the second aspect, only the second explanation display may be displayed, and in the certain display area of the second aspect, other than the second explanation display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the second explanation display may be displayed without fail in the certain display area of the second mode, and the second explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode. Good.

Further, only the second explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, or a display other than the second explanation display may be performed in the certain display area of the first aspect. May not be displayed. Further, the second explanation display may not necessarily be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, or the second explanation display may be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect. There may be cases where

Further, a display frame for specifying a certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as “icon display frame [eg, display of UI unit shown in FIG. 485(a-1)]”) can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or displays other than the icon display frame may be displayed. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

In addition, "the icon display frame can be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode in which the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(a) is displayed in blue],
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 291(e) is displayed in gold color, etc.],
The first display mode is a default display mode,
The second display mode is a look-ahead notice display mode [for example, by displaying the UI unit UI3 in a gold display mode, it is predicted that the tutorial display unit TT6 will be expanded in the pending state],
When the icon display frame has not changed from the first display mode to the second display mode when the icon display frame has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode Than the certain display area of the first aspect is likely to be the second aspect from the first aspect,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or displays other than the icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or the icon display frame may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

In addition, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is more preferable than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The certain display area of the mode may be easily changed from the first mode to the second mode, or when the icon display frame is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode. Even if the certain display area of the first aspect is likely to be an aspect other than the second aspect than the case where the display frame is not changed from the first display aspect to the second display aspect Good. In addition, the case where the icon display frame changes from the first display mode to the second display mode is more preferable than the case where the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. The certain display area of the mode may be easily changed from the first mode to the second mode, or when the icon display frame is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, Even if the certain display area of the first aspect is less likely to change from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the display frame does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Good.

In addition, when the icon display frame is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, a certain display area of the first mode may be necessarily changed from the first mode to the second mode. However, there may be a case where a certain display area of the first mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode.

Also, when the icon display frame does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode, a certain display area of the first mode is not always changed from the first mode to the second mode. Alternatively, there may be a case where a certain display area of the first mode changes from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Also, in the above description,
A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208, a first decorative design display device 208L, etc.],
A certain display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT6 or the like shown in FIG. 485(a-1) or FIG. 485(a-2)] is a display area that can take a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a reduced aspect shown in FIG. 485(a-1)],
One mode of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, an expanded mode shown in FIG. 485(a-2)],
The certain display area of the second aspect has a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect,
The certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including the certain display area of the first aspect [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. , The expanded tutorial display section TT6 is configured to include the reduced tutorial section TT6],
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter, "first display [e.g., drinking drink confrontation reach production shown in FIGS. 485(a-2) to (a-4)]". Can be displayed,
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode is changed from the second mode to the first mode [for example, when the drink confrontation reach production is finished, the tutorial display section is displayed. TT6 returns from an expanded aspect to a reduced aspect, etc.],
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display [for example, target display shown in FIGS. 296(a3) to (a4)]. The mini game of FIG. 312(a3) to the bowling chance game of FIG. 312(a6) and the golf game of FIG. 312(b4) to FIG. 312(b7).
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide the game table having the characteristic display means.

Here, a certain display area may have only a plurality of modes, or may have a mode other than a plurality of modes. Also, a certain display area is
A plurality of aspects may be taken without exception, and a plurality of aspects may not be taken.

Further, only the size of the certain display area of the second aspect may be larger than that of the certain aspect of the first aspect, and the certain area of the second aspect may be larger than the certain display area of the first aspect. A certain display area may have a size other than the size. In addition, the certain display area of the second aspect may have a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect, and the certain display area of the second aspect may have a larger size than the certain display area of the first aspect. The size of a certain display area may not be large.

The certain display area of the second aspect may include only the certain display area of the first aspect, or may include an area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. May be. Further, the certain display area of the second aspect may necessarily include the certain display area of the first aspect, or may not include the certain display area of the first aspect. It may be.

Further, in the certain display area of the second mode, only the first display may be displayed, and in the certain display area of the second mode, displays other than the first display may be displayed. It may be. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the second mode, or the first display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode. ..

Further, the first display may be able to be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the first display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

Further, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be regarded as from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. The certain display area of the second aspect may be an aspect other than the second aspect to the first aspect. In addition, after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be necessarily changed from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. There may be a case where a certain display area of the second mode does not change from the second mode to the first mode.

Further, only after the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area of the second mode may be changed from the second mode to the first mode, or after the display of the first display is finished. Besides, a certain display area of the second aspect may change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, only the second display may be able to be displayed, or in the certain display area of the second aspect, a display other than the second display can be displayed. It may be. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the second mode, or the second display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode.

Further, the second display may be able to be displayed only in a certain display area of the second aspect, or the second display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible.

In addition, "the first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display [for example, effect display in which the protagonist's lord wins as shown in FIG. 485(a-4) and the like]"] can be displayed. Yes,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second effect display [for example, effect display in which the protagonist's lord shown in FIG. 485(a-4') is defeated by the grandfather]") can be displayed. Yes,
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter, "third effect display [e.g., display that strikes in bowling chance game shown in FIG. 312(a3) to FIG. 312(a6), FIG. 312(b
4) to (b7), a display such as a cup-in in the golf game]”. ) Can be displayed,
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth effect display [for example, display that does not strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6), FIG. 312(b4) to FIG. Display that does not show cup-in in the golf game shown in (b7)].
The third effect in a certain display area of the second aspect, rather than the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the first effect display is started in the certain display area of the second aspect The gaming table characterized in that the symbol variation display being executed when the display of the display is started is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol mode. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first effect display may be displayed, or an effect display other than the first effect display may be displayed. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed, or the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the second effect display may be displayed, or effect displays other than the second effect display may be displayed. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed, or the second effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the third effect display may be displayed, or effect display other than the third effect display may be displayed. Further, the third effect display may be always displayed, or the third effect display may not be displayed.

Further, only the fourth effect display may be displayed, or effect displays other than the fourth effect display may be displayed. Further, the fourth effect display may be always displayed, or the fourth effect display may not be displayed.

Incidentally, in the symbol variation display which is being executed when the display of the first effect display is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, it may be arranged such that it is not always finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol aspect. Finally, there may be a case where it is finally confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol mode and a case where it is not displayed.

Further, in the symbol variation display which is being executed when the display of the third effect display is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, finally it may be definitely confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol aspect. However, there may be a case where it is finally confirmed and displayed in the big hit symbol mode, and there is a case where it is not displayed.

In addition, “first super reach effect [for example, swordsman reach shown in FIG. 63(c) to FIG. 63(j)] can be executed,
When the display of the first effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-4), after the performance display in which the main character's lord has won is performed, SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in 457(c) to (j) is started. , When the SP reach ends, the tutorial display section TT6 is displayed in a reduced size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be executable, or reach effects other than the first super reach effect may be executable. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, only the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is finished, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display areas other than the certain display area are also changed to the first display area. It may be one mode. Further, when the display of the first effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area is always the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, when the display of the first effect display ends in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. Good morning. In the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when only the display of the first effect display ends, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, even if the display other than the display of the first effect display is finished, the certain display area is changed to the first It may be one mode.

Further, when the display of the first effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Also, in the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the first effect display is completed, the certain display area is changed to the first display area after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one mode.

In addition, it is possible to execute "Second Super Reach production [eg, Super Long Reach, Triple Line Reach, American Dream Reach, Swordsman Reach, etc.],
Compared to the case where the first super reach effect is executed, the case where the second super reach effect is executed is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot pattern mode in the symbol variation display,
In the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. ,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the second super reach effect may be executable, or reach effects other than the second super reach effect may be executable. In addition, the second super reach effect may be always executed, or the second super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, when the second super-reach effect is executed, it may be easier to finally display only the big hit symbol aspect in the symbol variable display when the second super-reach effect is performed. When the second super-reach effect is executed more than when the first super-reach effect is executed, even if the symbol aspect other than the jackpot symbol aspect is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, Good. Further, in the case where the second super reach effect is executed, it may be more likely that the final big hit symbol mode is always definitely displayed in the symbol variable display when the second super reach effect is executed. In some cases, when the second super-reach effect is executed, it may not be easier to finally display the final jackpot pattern in the symbol variation display, than when the first super-reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, when the first super reach effect is executed, it may not be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot pattern mode in the symbol variation display, or may be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display. There may or may not be done.

In the case where the second super reach effect is executed, it may be finally and definitely displayed in the jackpot pattern mode in the symbol variation display, or finally in the jackpot pattern mode in the symbol variation display. It may or may not be displayed.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, only the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is finished, after the second super reach effect is performed, the display areas other than the certain display area are also set to the first area. It may be in the form of. In addition, when the display of the third effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area is always the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, when the display of the third effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the second super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, when the display of the third effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second mode, the certain display area is changed to the first mode even after the second super reach effect is performed. May be.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when only the display of the third effect display ends, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the display other than the third effect display ends, the certain display area becomes the first display area after the second super reach effect is performed. It may be an aspect.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the second super reach effect is performed. Also, even in an area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the certain display area becomes the first area after the second super reach effect is performed. It may be in the form of.

In addition, “first super reach effect [for example, swordsman reach shown in FIG. 63(c) to FIG. 63(j)] can be executed,
When the display of the third effect display is finished in a certain display area of the second aspect, the first super reach effect is performed [for example, shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6). 457(c) to FIG. 457 after the display indicating the strike in the bowling chance game is displayed, and after the display indicating the cup in in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7) is displayed. SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in (j) is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be executable, or reach effects other than the first super reach effect may be executable. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, only the first super reach effect may be performed, or in the certain display area of the second aspect, When the display of the third effect display is completed, effects other than the first super reach effect may be performed. Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, the first super reach effect may be performed without fail, or in the certain display area of the second aspect, When the display of the third effect display ends, the first super reach effect may not be performed.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when only the display of the third effect display is completed, the first super reach effect may be performed, or in the certain display area of the second aspect, When the display of the display other than the third effect display ends, the first super reach effect may be performed.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the first super reach effect may be performed, or in the area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. Also in the display area, the first super reach effect may be performed when the display of the third effect display is completed.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, after a first super reach effect is performed, a certain display area is changed to the first display area. [For example, after the display indicating a strike in the bowling chance game shown in FIGS. 312(a3) to (a6) is displayed, or in the golf game shown in FIGS. 312(b4) to (b7). After the display indicating the cup-in is displayed, the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 457(c) to (j) is started, and when the SP reach is completed, the tutorial display unit TT6 is displayed in a reduced mode. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

In addition, when the display of the third effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, only the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, after the first super reach effect is performed, the display areas other than the certain display area are also changed to the first display area. It may be one mode. Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area is always the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, when the display of the third effect display ends in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area does not become the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. There may be cases.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect only after the first super reach effect is performed. Good morning. In the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is finished, the certain display area becomes the first aspect other than after the first super reach effect is performed. Good.

Further, in the certain display area of the second aspect, when only the display of the third effect display ends, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Alternatively, even if the display other than the display of the third effect display is finished in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area is changed to the first display area after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one mode.

Further, when the display of the third effect display is completed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area becomes the first aspect after the first super reach effect is performed. Also, even in a display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect, when the display of the third effect display is completed, a certain display area is changed to the first display area after the first super reach effect is performed. It may be one mode.

In addition, “first super reach effect [for example, swordsman reach shown in FIG. 63(c) to FIG. 63(j)] can be executed,
The first effect display is an effect display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of success patterns,
One of the plurality of types of success patterns is a first success pattern [for example, a draw effect pattern in which neither the main character nor the grandfather gets drunk]
One of the plurality of types of success patterns is a second success pattern [for example, an effect pattern in which the main character's lord shown in FIG. 485(a-4) wins]
After the display of the first effect display according to the first success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, normal reach is started [for example, in the drink confrontation reach effect, the main character is also the grandfather. If a draw effect pattern that does not get drunk is displayed, then shift to normal reach, etc.],
It is possible to execute the first super reach effect after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect [for example, FIG. As shown in a-4), in the drunken confrontation reach production, after the production display in which the main character's lord has won is displayed, the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 457(c) to (j) is displayed. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first super reach effect may be executable, or reach effects other than the first super reach effect may be executable. Further, the first super reach effect may be always executed, or the first super reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first effect display may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of success patterns, or may be capable of displaying a pattern other than the plurality of types of success patterns. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed with a plurality of types of success patterns, or may not be displayed with a plurality of types of success patterns.

Further, after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second mode, only normal reach may be started, or a certain display area of the second mode. In, the reach other than the normal reach may be started after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started. Further, the normal reach may always be started after the display of the first effect display according to the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, or the certain display area of the second aspect. There may be a case where the normal reach is not started after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started.

Further, the normal reach may be started only after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second mode, or the certain reach display area of the second mode. The normal reach may be started other than after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started.

Further, the normal reach may be started after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started only in the certain display area of the second mode, or the certain reach display area of the second mode. The normal reach may be started even after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the display area other than the above.

Further, after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, only the first super reach effect may be executed, or the second After the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the mode, the reach effect other than the first super reach effect may be executable. Also, the first super reach effect may be executed without fail after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect. There may be a case where the first super reach effect is not executed after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area.

Further, the first super reach effect may be executable only after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect. The first super reach effect may be executable other than after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in the certain display area in the above mode.

In addition, the first super-reach effect may be able to be executed after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started only in a certain display area of the second aspect. The first super reach effect may be executable even after the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in the display area other than the certain display area of the aspect.

Further, it is possible to display a display frame for specifying a certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as “icon display frame [for example, display of UI unit shown in FIG. 485(a-1)]”),
After the display of the first effect display by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect is displayed. Executable [For example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-4), in the drinking/drinking confrontation reach production, after the production display in which the main character has won is displayed, the UI unit is hidden and SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 457(c) to FIG.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or displays other than the icon display frame may be displayed. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

Further, after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and only the first super reach effect can be executed. It may be, or after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second mode, the icon display frame is hidden and other than the first super reach effect. The reach production of may be executable. Also, after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect is always executed. After the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second mode, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect is not executed. There may be cases.

Further, only after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect can be executed. The icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach is displayed even after the display of the first effect according to the second success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second mode. The effect may be executable.

Also, after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started only in a certain display area of the second aspect, the icon display frame is hidden and the first super reach effect can be executed. The icon display frame may not be displayed even after the display of the first effect by the second success pattern is started in the display area other than the certain display area of the second aspect. It may be possible to execute the super reach effect of.

In addition, “after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect is changed to the second The normal reach is started from the mode to the first mode [for example, in the case of a drinker confrontation reach production, when a draw production pattern in which neither the protagonist of the protagonist nor the grandfather is drunk is displayed, the tutorial display section TT6 is reduced. After the animation has been performed and the tutorial display section TT6 has changed from the expanded mode to the contracted mode, the mode transitions to the normal reach, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect. Only the normal reach may be started in the mode, or after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second mode, the second reach mode is started. The reach other than the normal reach may be started when the display area changes from the second mode to the first mode. Further, after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect. Therefore, the normal reach may be started without fail, or after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display of the second aspect is started. There may be a case where the area changes from the second mode to the first mode and normal reach is not started.

Further, after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, only the certain display area of the second aspect is changed from the first aspect to the first aspect. The normal reach may be started as a mode, or after the display of the first effect display according to the first success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second mode, a certain display of the second mode is started. The normal reach may be started when the display area other than the area changes from the second mode to the first mode.

Further, only after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect is changed from the first aspect to the first aspect. The normal reach may be started as a mode, or other than after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in a certain display area of the second mode. Normal reach may be started when a certain display area changes from the second mode to the first mode.

Further, after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started only in the certain display area of the second aspect, the certain display area of the second aspect is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect. The normal reach may be started in the form, or even after the display of the first effect display by the first success pattern is started in the display region other than the certain display region of the second form. The normal reach may be started by changing a certain display area of the mode from the second mode to the first mode.

Further, a display frame for specifying a certain display area (hereinafter, referred to as “icon display frame [eg, display of UI unit shown in FIG. 485(a-1)]”) can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon display frame may be displayed, or displays other than the icon display frame may be displayed. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed, or the icon display frame may not be displayed.

In addition, “the icon display frame may be hidden after the display of the first display is finished [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-4), in the drink drinking confrontation reach production, After the performance display in which the lord has won is displayed, the UI unit is hidden when the SP reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 457(c) to (j) is started],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the icon display frame is hidden after the display of the first display is finished, and the display other than the icon display frame is also hidden after the display of the first display is finished. It may be displayed. Also, the icon display frame may not be hidden after the display of the first display is finished, or the icon display frame may not be hidden after the display of the first display is finished. Good.

Further, the icon display frame may be hidden only after the display of the first display is finished, or the icon display frame is hidden even after the display of the first display is finished. There may be cases where

In addition, “the display of the first display may be started after a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode [for example, FIG. a-1) to (a-2) in the same figure, a drinker confrontation reach effect is performed after the tutorial display unit TT6 has changed from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
The display of the second display may be started after a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode [for example, the tutorial display unit TT6 is reduced in size]. 296(a3) to FIG. 312(a4) and the bowling chance game shown in FIG. 312(a3) to FIG. 312(a6) after the target mode is expanded to the expanded mode. (B4) to the golf game shown in (b7) of the same figure etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of only the first display may be started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. The display of a display other than the first display may be started after is changed from the first mode to the second mode. Further, after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the first display may be always started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. The display of the first display may not be started after is changed from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, the display of the first display may be started only after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started other than after the change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, the display of the first display may be started after only the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the first display may be started after the display area other than the above changes from the first mode to the second mode.

The first display may be started only after a certain display area of the first mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, after the certain display area of the first aspect is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, only the second display may be started, or the certain display area of the first aspect is The display of the display other than the second display may be started after the first mode is changed to the second mode. Also, after the certain display area of the first aspect has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the second display may be always started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. There may be a case where the display of the second display is not started after is changed from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only after the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the certain display area of the first aspect may be started. The display of the second display may be started other than after the change from the first mode to the second mode.

Further, after only the certain display area of the first aspect has changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the display of the second display may be started, or the certain display area of the first aspect. The display of the second display may be started after the display area other than the above changes from the first mode to the second mode.

The second display may be started only after a certain display area of the first mode has changed from the first mode to the second mode.

In addition, “the second display is a display including a first partial display [for example, a first part of a mini game] and a second partial display [for example, a second part of a mini game]. ,
After the first partial display is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode [for example, a display showing how a lord's character throws a bowling ball in the manner shown in FIG. 312(a3) is displayed. It is performed as the first half of the mini game, and then the tutorial display section TT6 changes from a contracted mode to an expanded mode. Shows how close you are and encourages whether or not a strike will occur, and a success pattern that eventually becomes a strike or a failure pattern that leaves an invincible pin will be performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may include only the first partial display and the second partial display, or may include a display other than the first partial display and the second partial display. May be. Further, the second display may necessarily include the first partial display and the second partial display, or may include at least one of the first partial display and the second partial display. It may not be the case.

In addition, after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the second aspect There may be a case where only the second partial display is displayed in a certain display area of, or the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first mode. After the area has changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, a display other than the second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode. In addition, after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the second aspect The second partial display may always be displayed in a certain display area of, or the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect is There may be a case where the second partial display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second mode after the display mode of the above is changed to the second display mode.

In addition, after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, the second aspect There may be a case where the second partial display is displayed only in a certain display area of, and the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first mode. After the area changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second partial display may be displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the second mode.

In addition, only after the first portion is displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect is changed from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the mode, or the first portion may be displayed in the certain display area of the first mode and the certain display of the first mode may be displayed. The second partial display may be displayed in a certain display area of the second mode other than after the area is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, after the first portion is displayed only in the certain display area of the first aspect and the certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first display aspect to the second display aspect, There may be a case where the second partial display is displayed in a certain display area of the aspect, or the first portion is displayed in a display area other than the certain display area of the first aspect. The second partial display may be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode after the certain display area of is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, "an icon relating to symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "icon [for example, variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 485(a-1), hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]"] is displayed in the icon display area [for example, FIG. 485. Can be displayed in the hold display frame FL0 or the hold display area shown in (a-1)],
A certain display area is an area arranged below the icon display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 displays the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area. Placed below, etc.],
The position of the icon display area is different between when the certain display area is the first aspect and when the certain display area is the second aspect [for example, FIG. 485(a-1) to FIG. -2), the positions of the hold display frame FL0 and the hold display area are different depending on whether the tutorial display section TT6 is in a contracted mode or an expanded mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, the icon may be displayed only in the icon display area, or the icon may be displayed in a display area other than the icon display area. The icon may be always displayed in the icon display area, or the icon may not be displayed in the icon display area.

Further, only the icon may be displayed in the icon display area, or something other than the icon may be displayed in the icon display area.

A certain display area may be arranged only below the icon display area, or may be arranged at a position other than below the icon display area. In addition, a certain display area may be always arranged below the icon display area, or may not be arranged below the icon display area.

Further, only the position of the icon display area may be different between the case where the certain display area is the first mode and the case where the certain display area is the second mode, or the certain display area is the case of the first mode. A case other than the position of the icon display area may be different between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second mode. Further, the position of the icon display area may be different between the case where the certain display area is the first mode and the case where the certain display area is the second mode, or the certain display area is the case of the first mode. The position of the icon display area may not be different between the case and the case where a certain display area is the second mode.

Further, it is possible to display an icon relating to the symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “icon [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]]”.
When a certain display area of the first aspect changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed is hidden.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the icon may be displayed, or something other than the icon may be displayed. Further, the icon may be always displayed, or the icon may not be displayed.

Further, when the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, only the icon being displayed may be hidden, or the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect. In the second mode, the icons other than the currently displayed icon may be hidden. Further, when the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the icon being displayed may be always hidden, or the first certain display area is changed from the first aspect. In the second mode, the displayed icon may not be hidden.

Further, "a timer display [for example, the timer display shown in FIG. 293(b3) to FIG. 293(b4)] can be displayed."
After the countdown of the timer in the timer display is started and the timer display becomes a display showing 0, execution of a certain effect is started [for example, shown in FIG. 293(b3) to FIG. As a result, when the timer display reaches "0:00" as a result of the countdown of the timer display, a notice effect is performed, etc.],
As the certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect [for example, as a result of countdown of the timer display, the timer display is "0". "00", as shown in FIGS. 485(a-1) to 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 changes from a reduced mode to an expanded mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the timer display may be displayed, or displays other than the timer display may be displayed. Further, the timer display may be always displayed, or the timer display may not be displayed.

Further, after the timer display has started counting down in the timer display and then the timer display has changed to a display showing 0, only execution of a certain effect may be started, or the timer counting down in the timer display has started. After the timer display is changed to the display showing 0, execution of an effect other than a certain effect may be started. In addition, after the timer countdown in the timer display is started and then the timer display becomes 0, the execution of a certain effect may be started without fail, or the timer countdown in the timer display is started. The execution of a certain effect may not be started after the timer display has changed to 0.

In addition, the execution of a certain effect may be started only after the timer display starts to count down in the timer display and then the timer display becomes 0, or the timer countdown in the timer display has started. The execution of a certain effect may be started other than after the timer display is changed to the display showing 0.

Further, there may be a case where a certain display area of the first mode is changed from the first mode to the second mode as a certain effect, and a certain display area of the first mode is changed as a certain effect. There may be cases where the first aspect becomes an aspect other than the second aspect. Further, as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, a certain display area of the first aspect is the first. There may be a case where the mode does not become the second mode.

Further, as a certain effect, only a certain display area of the first aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, and as a certain effect, other than the certain display area of the first aspect. The display area may change from the first aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, there is a case where a display for announcing that the timer display is displayed [for example, a preparation-in-progress display RDY shown in FIG. 283(b1)] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only a display for warning that the timer display is displayed may be displayed, or a display other than a display for warning that the timer display is displayed may be displayed. Good. Further, a display notifying that the timer display is displayed may be displayed without exception, or a display notifying that the timer display is displayed may not be displayed in some cases.

In addition, it is possible to display the decorative pattern variable display,
The decorative pattern variable display does not overlap with a certain display area of the second mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded mode displays the variable display. Decorative patterns do not overlap, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed, or a display other than the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed. Further, the decorative symbol variable display may be displayed without fail, or the decorative symbol variable display may not be displayed.

Further, only the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap the certain display area of the second mode, or the display other than the decorative symbol variable display may not overlap the certain display area of the second mode. You may Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not necessarily overlap with the certain display area of the second mode, and the decorative pattern variable display may overlap with the certain display area of the second mode. Good.

Further, the decorative pattern variable display may not overlap only in a certain display area of the second mode, or the decorative pattern variable display may overlap in a display area other than the certain display area of the second mode. You may not.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain explanation display (hereinafter, “first explanation display [for example, displayed on the tutorial display unit TT6 shown in FIG. 485(a-1)” "Panda is the master's teacher's character display, etc.]") may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-1), the tutorial display unit TT6 in a reduced mode displays "Panda". "Has master's teacher" is displayed.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, in the certain display area of the first aspect, only the first explanation display may be displayed, and in the certain display area of the first aspect, other than the first explanation display. The display may also be displayed. Further, the first explanation display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, and the first explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect. Good.

Further, the first explanation display may be displayed only in the certain display area of the first aspect, and in the display areas other than the certain display area of the first aspect, the first explanation display may be displayed. An explanation display may be displayed in some cases.

In addition, “the first explanation display is not displayed in a certain display area of the second mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 485(a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 of the expanded mode]. Then, the character display is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

Here, only the first explanation display need not be displayed in the certain display area of the second mode, and display other than the first explanation display may be performed in the certain display area of the second mode. It may not be displayed. Further, in the case where the first explanation display is not necessarily displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanation display is displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect There may be

Further, the first explanation display may not be displayed only in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the first explanation display may be performed in the display areas other than the certain display area of the second aspect. May not be displayed.

In addition, “in a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain explanation display different from the first explanation display (hereinafter, “second explanation display [for example, “Oolong tea appears in a drink confrontation reach production. Then, the explanation display of "Super hot!"]] may be displayed.
A game table characterized in that the second explanation display is not displayed in a certain display area of the first aspect. ]
Was also explained.

Here, there may be a case where only the second explanation display is displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and in the certain display area of the second aspect, other than the second explanation display. The display may also be displayed. In addition, the second explanation display may be always displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect, and the second explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect. Good.

Further, only the second explanation display may not be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, or a display other than the second explanation display may be performed in the certain display area of the first aspect. May not be displayed. Further, the second explanation display may not necessarily be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect, or the second explanation display may be displayed in the certain display area of the first aspect. There may be cases where

In addition, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, in the above description,
“A gaming table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like],
The display means is means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, a timer advance notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 239(3)],
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 or the like],
After the display of the timer display is started, the timer display becomes a display indicating that it is a certain time [for example, a display of "00:00", etc. There is a case that the "1st production" is started.
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is a first mode [for example, a display mode that the notice effect is started after 5 seconds shown in FIG. 239(3)]
One of the plurality of modes is a second mode [for example, a time longer than the symbol fluctuation display time shown in FIG. 290(b) (time during which fluctuation is recognized as not completing countdown). Display mode, etc.]
Display of the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [eg, timer advance notice display TM1 etc. started to be displayed at "05:00" shown in FIG. 239(3)]"). When the process is started, a certain effect different from the first effect [for example, a pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 239(9)] may be started,
Display of the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display [eg, timer advance notice display TM1 etc. started to be displayed at "99:99" shown in FIG. 290(b)]"). When is started, the first effect is always started,
The first effect is an effect that allows the player to recognize that the symbol variation display is a big hit,
The time indicated by the initial value of the timer value when the second timer display is started [eg, 99.99 seconds corresponding to “99:99” shown in FIG. 290(b)] is the second time. There is a case (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") where the timer display is longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display which is started to be displayed,
In the first case, execution of the first effect is started before the second timer display indicates the certain time.
A game table characterized by that. ]
I explained.
In addition, "at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display, the display position may move during the period in which the countdown of the timer display is being executed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Further, "When the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may be started,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the first effect is an effect that notifies that the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
Also, "as the first effect, the jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the display of the time indicating the initial value of the timer value when the display of the first timer is started is the display indicating the first time (hereinafter, "the first time display [for example, FIG. It is referred to as "display of 05:00", etc. shown in 3)]).
The display of the time indicating the initial value of the timer value when the display of the second timer is started is the display indicating the second time (hereinafter, “second time display [for example, see FIG. 290(b). The display of “99:99”, etc.]”).
The first time display is a display showing that the value of a lower rank [eg, a place after the decimal point] is 0 than a certain place [eg, a one's place, etc.],
The second time display is a display indicating that the value of the lower rank than the certain rank is a certain value [for example, “99” or the like],
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the value of the place lower than a certain place" is "the value after the decimal point",
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the color of the time display of the first timer display is a first color [for example, black or the like],
The color of the time display of the second timer display is a second color [for example, red, etc.],
The first color and the second color are different colors,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the first timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time,
The second timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time,
The color of the frame display of the first timer display is a third color [for example, white, etc.],
The frame display color of the second timer display is a fourth color [for example, red, etc.],
The third color and the fourth color are different colors,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the size of the display of the time in the first timer display is a first size [for example, a default size],
The size of the display of the time in the second timer display is a second size [eg, a size larger than the default size, etc.],
The first size and the second size are different sizes,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, "the display means is a means that can display a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (12), the decorative symbol variable display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 246(2) to (3), high reliability is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol). Timer advance notice display TM1A in display mode has started timer advance notice production],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “second display means [for example, a 7-segment display device SEG or the like shown in FIG. 284] is provided,
The display means is a first display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 or the like shown in FIG. 284],
The first timer display, the first display means is easier to display than the second display means,
The second timer display, the second display means is more easily displayed than the first display means,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, after the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes the display showing the certain time [for example, high reliability 252 (35a), for example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed during the countdown of the timer in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1A in the degree display mode],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.
In addition, “the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like shown in FIG. 1],
A game table characterized by that. ]
Was also explained.

The following is a supplementary description including the ones described so far.

(Appendix 1)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is the first display,
The first display is a display for notifying the time until a certain effect is performed,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display that may give a notice that the time until the certain effect starts changes,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the "certain effect" may be an effect by display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix 2)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 1,
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Further, the display mode of the first display may change only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix 3)
The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 3,
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed,
By the second image display means is displayed the second display, the first image display means may be overlapped,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
Even when the second display is displayed, the time informed by the first display is advanced,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
It is easier to hit big when the second display is displayed than when it is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
One of the multiple types of display is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means,
The display of the surrogate sign is a production display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 7,
Equipped with staging movable means,
The effect movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of operations,
One type of motion among the plurality of types of motion is a staging motion,
The certain performance is a performance operation by the performance moving means,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and as the operation other than the effect operation, for example, there is an operation at power-on, an initial position returning operation, or a retracting operation. Further, the effect moving means is not limited to one provided on the game board, and may be one provided on a frame (front door), for example.

(Appendix 10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
When the certain effect occurs, it is easier to hit big than when it does not occur,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
In some cases, a hot effect display may be displayed from the time the first display is displayed until the time the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”) at which the first effect display may be displayed,
Before the first timing, the period display may be erased,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to during the reach, but may be during the change or during the big hit. Further, even during the reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

(Appendix 15)
The gaming table described in Appendix 14,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display,
The timing for displaying the third effect display may not be notified by the period display,
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball pulling error, a notification indicating a firing position, a notification other than an error such as a notification for preventing the player from forgetting to remove the prepaid card, LED light emission, and a performance operation by a character May be performed. Further, the timing of displaying the third display may be notified by the period display. The timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine described in Appendix 15,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The gaming machine described in appendix 16,
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “missing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit determination is out of alignment,
It is configured such that the big hit symbol variation has a higher frequency of displaying the third effect display than the lost symbol variation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
Equipped with staging movable means,
The effect moving means is a means for performing an effect operation,
The game machine characterized in that the output movable means may perform the production operation during the display of the third production display.

(Appendix 19)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 18,
After the period display is hidden, the period display is in an easily visible state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 19,
The period display is hidden until a certain period during the reach ends,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 19,
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 21,
The period display is a display for notifying the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timing”).
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three times or more. In addition, the place to notify the chance increase may be fixed corresponding to the reach, such that the chance increase is notified three times when a certain reach occurs and the chance increase is notified twice when another reach occurs. It is also possible to change the location for notifying the chance up such that the notification is given three times when it is and the notification is given only once when it is. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit, or may be more likely to be missed, than the case of "notifying very often". Also, the likelihood of a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of timings notified. Further, the larger the number of opportunities increased, the larger the jackpot may be made, or the smaller the number of opportunities increased, the larger the jackpot may be made.

(Appendix 23)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 22,
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means,
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display,
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform a performance operation,
The second image display means may overlap at least part of the period display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 14 to 23,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
A gaming table equipped with image display means,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”) at which the first effect display may be displayed,
Before the first timing, at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display,
Depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes at a first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a second display,
Depending on the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
The gaming table described in appendix 26,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a time display,
The time display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period,
One display of the time display is the first display,
One display of the time display is the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The gaming table according to appendix 26 or 27,
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 26 to 28,
The first display is a display that changes the display mode until the first time has elapsed,
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time passes,
When the first time has elapsed, a third display is displayed,
When the second time has elapsed, a fourth display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, and the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

(Appendix 30)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 26 to 29,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
As the first type of display, there are the first display and the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of display.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 30,
The first type of display is a timer notice display,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
The timer notice display is a display for notifying a time until the first effect display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 30,
Equipped with operating means,
The first type of display is an operation valid period display,
The operation valid period display is a display showing a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 30,
The first type of display is a period display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display,
The period display is a display that may notify a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”) at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period,
From the start to the end of the first period, the first timing is notified,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 26 to 33,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 35)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a countdown display,
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of a time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as “time notification”) may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode,
When the time notification is being performed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The gaming table described in appendix 35,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size,
The second display size is larger than the first display size,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The gaming table according to appendix 35 or 36,
When the display of the countdown display is started, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,
When the countdown display is displayed, it surely changes from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 37,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the case of changing to the second display mode, rather than being displayed as it is in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 39,
The start and end of the countdown display are performed within the period of one symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 40,
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The gaming table described in appendix 41,
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification is continued by the countdown display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 43)
The gaming table described in appendix 41,
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 43,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, a notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display is 0 is given,
The countdown display is configured to be erased after a notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 is made by the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
The gaming table described in appendix 44,
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 45,
In some cases, it may not change to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 47)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 46,
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 48)
The gaming table described in Appendix 47,
The countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 48,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 50)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 35 to 48,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 51)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is the first display,
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display for notifying the first timing,
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may be displayed,
The first display may be deleted before the first timing after the first display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 52)
The gaming table described in appendix 51,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a performance display,
The third display is a display different from the second display,
The third display may be displayed before the first timing,
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing when the third display is started,
In the display of the third display, the first display is erased,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The gaming table described in appendix 52,
The third display is a notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
The gaming machine described in appendix 53,
When the third display is displayed, it is easier to finally confirm and display the big hit symbol than when the third display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 55)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 52 to 54,
Equipped with effect moving means that can execute multiple types of movements,
One of the plurality of types of actions is the first action,
The first motion is a performance motion,
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 56)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 55,
The first display is redisplayed after the first display has been erased,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 57)
The gaming table according to supplementary notes 51 to 55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is not displayed until the certain period of time has passed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 55,
After the first display is erased, the first display is re-displayed by the time the certain period elapses.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 58,
The certain period is a period during which the super reach is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 59,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a performance display,
The fourth display is a display different from the second display,
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing,
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the fourth display may start,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 61)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 51 to 60,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 62)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is the first display,
The first display is a display including a countdown display,
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification,
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at a timing when a certain effect is performed,
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 63)
The gaming table according to appendix 62,
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
The gaming table according to Appendix 63,
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a first display size,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size,
In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 64,
When the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 66)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 65,
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 67)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 65,
When the first display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display is not changed from the first display mode to the second display mode It is easier to finalize and display the jackpot pattern finally,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 68)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 67,
The display of the first display is started and ended while one symbol variable display is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 68,
The first display is a display whose display position may change,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The gaming machine according to Appendix 69,
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position, It may be a gaming table.

(Appendix 71)
The gaming table according to appendix 69 or 70,
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed,
By the moving display, the display position of the first display changes,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming table according to appendix 71,
While the moving display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The gaming table according to appendix 71,
During the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 74)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 73,
The countdown display is a time countdown display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The gaming table according to Appendix 74,
The timing notification is a notification for notifying that it is a timing at which the certain effect is performed by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 76)
The gaming table according to appendix 74 or 75,
After the display showing 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 77)
The gaming table described in appendix 76,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display not included in the certain effect,
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 77,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The gaming table described in Appendix 78,
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 79,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 62 to 79,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A1)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of states,
One of the states of the plurality of types in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the states of the plurality of types in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One of the states of the plurality of types in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. , The expectation of a big hit is high,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. , Expectation of big hit is high,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A2)
In the gaming table described in Appendix A1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is more than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A3)
The gaming table described in Appendix A1 or A2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The above-mentioned first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative design is stopped, wherein the gaming table is characterized.

(Appendix A4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A1 to A3,
The fourth meter display is a display started in the fourth state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A5)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A4,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first meter display has a higher expectation of a big hit when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A6)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A1 to A5,
Of the plurality of types of display, one display is the first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state by displaying the first icon the first number of times,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first icon is displayed a second number of times, changing from the fourth state to the sixth state,
The second number is a number less than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A1 to A6,
One of the plurality of displays is a big hit display,
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the sixth state is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A8)
The gaming table described in Appendix A7,
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the fifth state is displayed,
When the fifth state is displayed rather than the second state, the jackpot display is more likely to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A9)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A8,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo-relational effect,
The pseudo-announcement is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo-announcement is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A10)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A1 to A9,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation prompting display is a display that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A11)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a certain effect,
The certain effect is an effect in which the big hit display is likely to be displayed in the variation of the decorative pattern in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A12)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
The period display is a display for notifying the start of a certain period in the period in which the reach effect display is performed,
The period display is a display for informing the first timing during the display of the reach effect display,
The first timing is a timing at which the first effect display may be started during the display of the reach effect display,
The notice display is a display for giving notice that the first timing is notified by the period display,
The advance notice display may be displayed before the start of the certain period is notified by the period display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A13)
The gaming table described in Appendix A12,
The period display is a display including a cursor display,
By moving the cursor display from the second position (start position) to the third position (end position) via the first position, the start to end of the first period is notified. Is configured,
The second position is a position before the first position,
The first position is a position before the third position,
When the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that it is the first timing,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A14)
The gaming table described in Appendix A13,
The period display is a display in which a chance up display (first chance up display) may be displayed,
The chance up display is a display for notifying that the first effect display has started at the first timing,
When the display of the first effect display is started at the first timing, the chance-up display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first position,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A15)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A12 to A14,
The period display is a display that may be a moving display,
A game table that is long.

(Appendix A16)
The gaming table described in Appendix A15,
The movement display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A17)
The gaming table described in Appendix A15 or A16,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the period display changes,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A18)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A17,
The notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, finally (in the pattern variation display in which the period display is displayed) when the display is displayed in the first display mode. It is easy to confirm and display the symbol aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A19)
The gaming table described in Appendix A18,
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the first effect display is performed when the first timing is reached, as compared with the case where it is displayed in the first display mode. Is easy to start,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A20)
The gaming table described in Appendix A18 or A19,
The notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A20,
The period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a third display mode (for example, a defometer),
One display mode of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter),
When the period display is displayed in the fourth display mode, it is easier to finally confirm and display the jackpot symbol mode than when it is displayed in the third display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A22)
The gaming table described in Appendix A21,
Depending on the display mode of the notice display, it is unknown whether the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A23)
The gaming table according to Appendix A21 or A22,
When the notice display is displayed in the second display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the fourth display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix A24)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A21 to A23,
When the notice display is displayed in the first display mode, the period display is more likely to be displayed in the third display mode than when the notice display is displayed in the second display mode. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix A25)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A24,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second notice display,
The notice display is the first notice display,
The second notice display may give notice that the first notice display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A26)
The gaming table described in Appendix A25,
The symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed is more likely to be a big hit than in the case where the first notice display is foretold by the second notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A27)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A26,
When the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed, the final jackpot pattern mode is easier to be finalized and displayed than when the notice display is not displayed before the period display is displayed. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A28)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A29)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A27,
The notice display is a display different from the period display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A30)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A29,
By notifying that the reach effect display is displayed by the notification display, it is notified that the period display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A31)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A30,
The notice display may be displayed in the same symbol variation display as the period display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A32)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A12 to A31,
The notice display may be displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the period display is performed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A33)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A32.
The notice display is also displayed during the period when the symbol stop display is being performed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A34)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A12 to A32.
The notice display is hidden during the period when the symbol stop display is being performed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A35)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A12 to A34,
The notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A36)
The notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A37)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means for displaying the first display,
The first display is a display for notifying the timing when a certain effect may be started,
The display unit is a unit that may display the A-th display as a certain effect,
At the timing when the A-th display starts (hereinafter, referred to as “A-th timing”), the A-th display may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the certain effect may be the A-th display. Further, the display of the Pth display may be started as a certain effect.

(Appendix A38)
The gaming table described in Appendix A37,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying a timing at which the A-th display may be displayed in a certain period,
Depending on the passage of time of a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
While at least a part of the display mode of the period display is changing, the timing at which the A-th display is started is notified.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A39)
The gaming table described in Appendix A38,
The period display is a display that may display the Bth display,
When the Ath display is displayed at the Ath timing, the Bth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A40)
The gaming table described in Appendix A37,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the A-th display is displayed,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the A-th display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A41)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A40,
When it is the A-th timing, the A-th display may be displayed,
When the A-th timing comes, the A-th display may not be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A42)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A40,
When the A-th timing comes, the A-th display is always displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A43)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A42,
The display means is a means for displaying a second display,
The second display is a display notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A44)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A37 to A43,
The first display is a display that may be moved display,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the moving display may be always performed, and the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A45)
The gaming table described in Appendix A44,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed,
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display form of the first display is changed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A46)
The gaming table described in Appendix A44,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed,
While the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changing, the moving display may be performed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A47)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A46,
When the A-th display is displayed at the A-th timing, at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the A-display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A48)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A37 to A47,
When the A-th display is displayed at the A-th timing, the first display is hidden, and the first display is displayed in an area overlapping at least a part of the area where the first display was displayed. The display of A is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A49)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A37 to A48,
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of types of image display means is a first image display means,
One image display means of the plurality of types of image display means is a second image display means,
The second image display means is a means provided on the front side of the first image display means,
The first display is displayed by the first image display means,
The second image display means displays the Ath display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A50)
The gaming table described in Appendix A49,
The second image display means is a means for performing a performance operation,
When the first display is being displayed by the first image display means, the second image display means may perform the first stage production operation at the A-th timing. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A51)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A37 to A50,
Equipped with operating means,
The A-th display is a display relating to the operation means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A52)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A51,
The display means is a means that may display a Cth display as a certain effect,
The C-th display may be displayed at the timing when the C-th display is started (hereinafter, referred to as “C-th timing”),
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A53)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A52,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A54)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A37 to A52,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A55)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means for displaying the first display,
The first display is a display for notifying the timing when a certain effect is started,
The above-mentioned first display is a display which may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variable displays, wherein the gaming table is characterized.

(Appendix A56)
The gaming table described in Appendix A55,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for informing a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “certain timing”) at which a certain effect may be started in a certain period.
Depending on the passage of time of a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
While at least a part of the display mode of the period display is changing, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A57)
The gaming table described in Appendix A56,
The period display is a display that may display the Bth display,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the Bth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A58)
The gaming table described in Appendix A55,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A59)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A55 to A58,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may not be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A60)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A55 to A58,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect is always started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A61)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A60,
The display means is a means for displaying a second display,
The second display is a display notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A62)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A61,
The first display is a display that may be moved display,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the moving display may be always performed, and the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A63)
The gaming table described in Appendix A62,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed,
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display form of the first display is changed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A64)
The gaming table described in Appendix A62,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed,
While the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changing, the moving display may be performed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A65)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A64.
In the first symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation display, the display of the first display is started,
In the second symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation display, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified,
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A66)
The gaming table described in Appendix A65,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display is configured to change according to the passage of time in a certain period,
In the second symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
In the first symbol variable display, the display mode of the first display is configured not to change,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A67)
The gaming table described in Appendix A65,
The display mode of at least a part of the first display is configured to change according to the passage of time in a certain period,
In the first symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A68)
The gaming table described in Appendix A67,
During the period from the end of the first symbol variation display to the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is not changed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A68)
The gaming table described in Appendix A67,
Between the end of the first symbol variation display and the start of the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may be changed. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A69)
The gaming table described in Appendix A65,
The display means is a means for displaying a second display,
The second display is a display notifying that the first display is displayed,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol variable display. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the first symbol variation display.

(Appendix A70)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A69,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A71)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A55 to A69,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A72)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means for displaying the first display,
The first display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “certain timing”) at which a certain effect may be started,
Depending on the passage of time until the certain effect is started, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change,
Before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the lapse of time until the certain effect is started, a notice display may be performed by the first display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A73)
The gaming table described in Appendix A72,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
Depending on the passage of time of a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
While the display mode of at least a part of the period display is changing, the certain timing is notified.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A74)
The gaming table described in Appendix A73,
The period display is a display that may display the Bth display,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the Bth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A75)
The gaming table described in Appendix A72,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A76)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A75,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may not be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A77)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A75,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect is always started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A78)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A77,
The display means is a means for displaying a second display,
The second display is a display notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A79)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A78,
The first display is a display that may be moved display,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the moving display may be always performed, and the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A80)
The gaming table described in Appendix A79,
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display form of the first display is changed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A81)
The gaming table described in Appendix A79,
While the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changing, the moving display may be performed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A82)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A81,
The notice display is a display for giving a notice of a time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A83)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A82,
Equipped with operating means,
The notice display is a display related to the operation means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A84)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A83,
After the notice display is performed, the time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A85)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A84,
Before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, a notice display is always performed by the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A86)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A85,
When the first display is displayed, a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display is started according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A87)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A86,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A88)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A86,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A89)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means by which the first display may be displayed,
The first display is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “certain timing”) at which a certain effect may be started,
The display means is a means by which a second display may be displayed,
The second display is a display notifying that the first display is displayed,
A plurality of the second displays (hereinafter, referred to as “plurality of second displays”) may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A90)
The gaming table described in Appendix A89,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for informing the certain timing in a certain period,
Depending on the passage of time of a certain period, at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes,
While the display mode of at least a part of the period display is changing, the certain timing is notified.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A91)
The gaming table described in Appendix A90,
The period display is a display that may display the Bth display,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the Bth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A91)
The gaming table described in Appendix A89,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least part of the timer display changes,
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A92)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A89 to A91,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may not be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A93)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A89 to A91,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect is always started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A94)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A89 to A93,
The first display is a display that may be moved display,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the moving display may be always performed, and the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A95)
The gaming table described in Appendix A94,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed,
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display form of the first display is changed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A96)
The gaming table described in Appendix A94,
Depending on the passage of time, the display mode of at least a part of the first display may be changed,
While the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changing, the moving display may be performed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A97)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A89 to A96,
When the second display is displayed, the first display is always displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A98)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A89 to A96,
When the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A99)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A89 to A98,
The second display is a display during preparation,
The display of the plurality of older brothers means a plurality of preparation-in-progress displays,
One of the plurality of preparing displays is a first preparing display,
One of the plurality of preparing displays is a second preparing display,
The first in-preparation display is a display displayed prior to the second in-preparation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A100)
The gaming table described in Appendix A99,
After the first in-preparation display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) corresponding to the first in-preparation display is displayed,
After the second in-preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the second in-preparation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed,
The first timer display is configured to be displayed before the second timer display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparing displays.

(Appendix A101)
The gaming table described in Appendix A99,
After the first in-preparation display is displayed, a timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) corresponding to the first in-preparation display is displayed,
After the second in-preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the second in-preparation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed,
The first timer display may be displayed before the second timer display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A102)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A89 to A101,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A103)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A89 to A101,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A104)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means for displaying the first display,
The first display is a display for notifying the timing when a certain effect is started,
Depending on the passage of time until the certain effect is started, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change,
Before the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display according to the lapse of time until the certain effect is started, a notice may be given,
The notice is a notice that the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A105)
The gaming table described in Appendix A104,
The first display is a period display,
The period display is a display for informing a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “certain timing”) at which the certain effect may be started in a certain period.
While at least a part of the display mode of the period display is changing, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A106)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A105,
The period display is a display that may display the Bth display,
When the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the Bth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A107)
The gaming table described in Appendix A104,
The first display is a timer display,
The timer display is a display for notifying the timing at which the certain effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as “certain timing”),
When the change of the display mode of at least a part of the timer display ends, the certain effect is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A108)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A104 to A107,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may be started,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect may not be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A109)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A104 to A107,
When the certain timing comes, the certain effect is always started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A110)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A104 to A109,
The display means is a means for displaying a second display,
The second display is a display notifying that the first display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A111)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A104 to A110,
The first display is a display that may be moved display,
When the moving display is performed, the display position of the first display changes,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the moving display may be always performed, and the moving display may or may not be performed.

(Appendix A112)
The gaming table described in Appendix A111,
The moving display may be performed after the first display is displayed and before at least a part of the display form of the first display is changed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A113)
The gaming table described in Appendix A111,
While the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changing, the moving display may be performed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A114)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A104 to A113,
The notice is a notice displayed by the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A115)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 104 to A114,
Before the change of at least a part of the display mode of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, a false notice may be given.
Even if the false notice is given, the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A116)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices 104 to A115,
Before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, it is configured to give a notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A117)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A104 to A116,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A118)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A104 to A116,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A119)
A gaming machine provided with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It was a directing
It is configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the jackpot game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A120)
The gaming table described in Appendix A119,
The big hit game is configured by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A121)
The gaming table described in Appendix A119,
The big hit game is configured by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A122)
The gaming table described in Appendix A120 or A121,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and then subtract from the initial value to display the certain time.
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0,
The timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer effect”) indicates a first time as the initial value,
The first timer effect may be executed over a first number of round games,
The first timer effect may be executed over a second number of round games,
The second number is a number more than the first number,
The first number is one or more times,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A123)
The gaming table described in Appendix A120 or A121,
One round game is configured to end when the first time has elapsed,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and then subtract from the initial value to display the certain time.
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0,
The second time may be displayed as the initial value,
The second time is shorter than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A124)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A119 to A123,
The certain effect is an effect that may be started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
The certain effect is an effect that may be started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”),
The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect”),
The certain effect in the second case is an effect that may be executed in a second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second effect”),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A125)
The gaming table described in Appendix A124,
It is configured such that the timing at which the second effect can be started tends to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A126)
The gaming table described in Appendix A124 or A125,
The first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case,
In the second case, the timing at which the first effect is executed is different from the timing at which the second effect is executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A127)
The gaming table according to supplementary notes A119 to A126,
The certain effect is a confirmed effect that notifies the player that an advantageous privilege is granted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A128)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A127, wherein any one of supplementary notes A124 to A126 is cited,
The confirmation effect is an effect to notify that a pattern variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold,
When the number of symbol fluctuation displays that are a big hit included in the hold is one, it is configured to execute one of the first effect and the second effect. ,
When the number of symbol variation displays that are a big hit included in the hold is two or more, it is configured so that both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A129)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A124 to A126,
The certain effect is an effect that suggests that advantageous benefits may be given to the player,
The second effect is more likely than the first effect to be provided with advantageous benefits to the player,
There is a case where the first effect is performed as a confirmed effect informing that the advantageous privilege is given to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
There is a case where the first effect is not the fixed effect (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”),
The second effect is a finalized effect that informs the player that advantageous benefits are granted.
In the second case than the first case, the second effect is configured to be easily executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A130)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A119 to A129,
The timer display is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the big hit game. Has been
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A131)
The gaming table described in Appendix A130,
The timer effect is configured so that it may be executed in one symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “third case”),
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A132)
The gaming table described in Appendix A119,
The timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game ends. Is
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A133)
The gaming table described in Appendix A132,
The timer display is configured to initiate a display change to indicate the certain time when a certain condition regarding a game is achieved,
Depending on the timing when the certain condition is achieved, it is configured so that it may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display that is executed after the jackpot game is finished,
Depending on the timing when the certain condition is achieved, it may be configured to display the certain time during execution of the jackpot game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A134)
The gaming table described in Appendix A119, A132, or A133,
As the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is finished (hereinafter, referred to as "eleventh effect") may be executed,
As the certain effect, there is a case where an effect (hereinafter, referred to as "twelfth effect") for notifying that a pattern variation display that is a big hit is included in the hold is executed.
The certain effect is configured to be executed even when the timer display does not indicate the certain time,
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect is more easily executed than the twelfth effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A135)
A gaming machine provided with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It was a directing
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game,
It is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as a "fourth effect") suggesting that a privilege advantageous to the player is given during the execution of the jackpot game may be executed,
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once or more,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A136)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A119 to A135,
The rendering means is a display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A137)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A119 to A136,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A138)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A119 to A137,
The certain time is a time at which the remaining time of the timer shows 0.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A139)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A119 to A138,
The certain effect is an effect that can be executed even during an interval during execution of a big hit game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A140)
A gaming machine provided with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain effect”) is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It was a directing
The timer effect is performed at least during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the certain effect may be performed during a period in which a new symbol variation display is not performed after the symbol variation display is finished,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A141)
Display means,
Operation means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means in which an operation display may be displayed,
The operation display is a display related to the operation means,
The display means is a means that may display a timer display,
The timer display is a display that gives advance notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed,
The timer display is a display in which at least a part of the timer display changes according to the lapse of time until the operation display is displayed,
The operation display may be displayed after the timer display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A142)
The gaming table described in Appendix A141,
As the timer display, the first timer display may be displayed,
At least a part of the display of the first timer display is started to change, and when a first time elapses as a certain time, the operation display in the first display mode may be displayed,
As the timer display, a second timer display may be displayed,
After the change of at least a part of the display of the second timer display is started, when a second time elapses as a certain time, the operation display of the second display mode may be displayed,
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A143)
The gaming table described in Appendix A141 or A142,
Equipped with a second operating means,
The operating means is the first operating means,
The operation display is the first operation display,
The display means is a display that may display a second operation display,
The second operation display is a display related to the second operation means,
While the timer display is being displayed, the second operation display may be displayed when a certain time has elapsed until the operation display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A144)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A141 to A143,
When the operation means is operated during the display of the timer display, the display mode of the timer display may change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A145)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A141 to A144,
The display mode of the timer display may change in the case where the display mode is changed according to the passage of a certain time until the operation display by the timer display is displayed. A gaming table.

(Appendix A146)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A141 to A145,
The display means is a means that may display a notice display,
The notice display is a display for giving notice that the timer notice is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A147)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A141 to 146,
Whether or not the big hit symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed or the lost symbol mode is finally fixedly displayed is configured to be determined by the big hit judgment performed at the start of fluctuation of the symbol,
The result of the jackpot determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display,
The jackpot determination is configured to be determined according to a jackpot lottery result using a random number obtained when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board,
The probability that the jackpot is determined in the jackpot lottery (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot probability") is predetermined.
The jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A148)
A gaming machine provided with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is an effect configured to start a certain effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started,
It is configured such that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A149)
The gaming table described in Appendix A148,
The timer display is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and the timer display may be a display indicating the certain time during the execution of the big hit game. Has been
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A150)
The gaming table according to Appendix A148 or A149,
The timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and the display may be a display indicating the certain time during execution of the symbol variation display executed after the big hit game is finished. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A151)
The gaming table described in Appendix A150,
The timer effect is an effect that may start execution when a certain condition regarding the game is achieved,
It is configured so that it may be a display showing the certain time during the execution of the symbol variation display executed after the jackpot game is finished according to the timing when the certain condition is achieved,
Depending on the timing when the certain condition is achieved, it may be configured to display the certain time during execution of the jackpot game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A152)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A148 to A151,
As the certain effect, an effect suggesting a game state after the jackpot game is finished (hereinafter, referred to as “eleventh effect”) may be executed,
In the case where a certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as “twelfth effect”) is executed as the certain effect, which notifies that the symbol variable display that is being held is included in the symbol variable display that is a big hit. There is
The certain effect is an effect configured to be executed even when the timer display does not become the display indicating the certain time,
When the timer display does not indicate the certain time during execution of the jackpot game, the eleventh effect is configured to be more easily executed than the twelfth effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A153)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A148 to A152,
There is a case where the timer display becomes a display indicating the certain time and the certain effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
There is a case where the certain effect is started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”),
The certain effect in the first case is an effect executed in the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect”),
The certain effect in the second case is an effect that may be executed in a second mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second effect”),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The type suggested by performing the first effect and the type suggested by performing the second effect are the same type,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A154)
The gaming table described in Appendix A153,
It is configured such that the timing at which the first effect can be started tends to be earlier than the timing at which the second effect can be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A155)
The gaming table described in Appendix A153 or A154,
In the second case, the certain effect may be executed in the first aspect as the second effect,
In the first case, when the certain effect is executed in the first aspect as the first effect, and in the second case, the certain effect is applied in the first aspect as the second effect. The timing of performance is different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A156)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A148 to A155,
The certain effect is a confirmed effect that notifies the player that an advantageous privilege is granted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A157)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A153 to A155,
The certain effect is a confirmed effect that informs the player that an advantageous privilege is granted,
The fixed effect is an effect that notifies that the symbol variable display that is a big hit is included in the symbol variable display whose execution is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “held symbol variable display”),
If the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is one, one of the first effect and the second effect may be executed Has been done,
If the number of symbol variation displays that are big hits included in the pending symbol variation display is two or more, it is configured so that both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A158)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A148 to A157,
The big hit game is configured by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game of the plurality of round games,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A159)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A148 to A157,
The big hit game is configured by a plurality of round games,
The timer effect is an effect that may be executed over two or more round games of the plurality of round games,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A160)
The gaming table described in Appendix A158 or A159,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and then subtract from the initial value and display the display indicating the certain time.
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0,
The timer display displayed during execution of a certain timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer effect”) is a display indicating a first time as the initial value,
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over a first number of round games of the plurality of round games,
The first timer effect is an effect that may be executed over a second number of round games of the plurality of round games,
The second number is a number more than the first number,
The first number is one or more times,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A161)
The gaming table described in Appendix A158 or A159,
One round game is configured to end when the second time has elapsed,
The timer display is a display configured to display an initial value and then subtract from the initial value to display the display indicating the certain time.
The display showing the certain time is a display showing the time when the timer display becomes 0,
A display indicating the third time may be displayed as the initial value,
The third time is shorter than the second time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A162)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A148 to A161,
It is configured so that there is a case (hereinafter, referred to as a "third case") in which the timer effect is executed in one symbol variation display,
The certain effect in the third case is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A163)
A gaming machine provided with a production means capable of executing a timer production,
The timer effect is an effect configured to start a certain effect when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started,
It is configured so that at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during the execution of the big hit game,
It is configured such that an effect (hereinafter, referred to as a "third effect") that suggests that a privilege advantageous to the player is given during the execution of the jackpot game may be executed.
The third effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A164)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A148 to A163,
The rendering means is a display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix A165)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices A148 to A164,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B1)
Image display means,
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
A notice means that can execute multiple types of notices,
A gaming machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area in the image display means,
The hold display is a display according to the number of the operation of the symbol variable display being held (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”),
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more of the notice icons,
The notice means is a means that, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, is a means capable of executing the notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed,
In a period in which the symbol variable display is being executed once, a first larger number than the first number of the first number of the plurality of types of the preliminary notice icons is consumed It is structured so that it is more likely to be a big hit when the second number is digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B3)
The gaming table described in Appendix B1 or B2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a false notice in the same manner as the notice.
The notice means is a means capable of executing, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the false notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. ,
After the execution of the false notice, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be off,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B4)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3,
In the period in which the one-time symbol variable display is executed, the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number and is larger than the third number by a fourth number. Is designed to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B5)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B1 to B4,
A hold display means capable of executing display according to the number of holds,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B6)
The gaming table described in Appendix B5,
The pending display means is a display means including a light emitting means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B7)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B1 to B6,
Equipped with pre-reading notice means that can execute pre-reading notice,
The prefetching notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetching notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B8)
The gaming table described in Appendix B7,
In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) that is the target of prefetching is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by the fifth number,
In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested several times,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The suspension display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B9)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B1 to B8,
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B10)
The gaming table described in Appendix B9,
In the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the fourth symbol variation In some cases, the notice icon that is consumed during the display is started to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B11)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B10,
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by

(Appendix B12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B1 to B11,
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production,
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of types of notice is the second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect will be executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B13)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B1 to B12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B14)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B1 to B13,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B15)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variation display") displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first that is not consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon of is configured so that it may be digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B16)
The gaming table described in Appendix B15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B17)
The gaming table described in Appendix B15 or B16,
As a look-ahead notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B18)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B15 to B17,
During the display of the one-time symbol variable display, a big hit when the second number of the first notice icons is consumed, rather than when the first number of the first notice icons are consumed. Is easy to become,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B19)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B15 to B18,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayable as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested pattern variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B20)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B15 to B19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, a first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B21)
The gaming table described in Appendix B20,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, a first false notice display may be displayed as the false notice display,
The display mode of the first false notification display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notification display,
The first fake advance notice display is configured to be shifted in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B22)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B15 to B21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a prefetch effect display,
As the notice icon, a third notice icon is configured to be displayable,
When the third notice icon is consumed, the prefetch effect display may be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B23)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B15 to B22,
The display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B24)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B15 to B23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B25)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B15 to B24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be surely consumed by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B26)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B15 to B25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B27)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B15 to B26,
Equipped with production control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B28)
The gaming table described in Appendix B27,
Main control means,
Symbol display means capable of displaying symbol fluctuation display,
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B29)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B15 to B28,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B30)
First display means capable of executing variable display of symbols,
A second display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number") in which the operation of the symbol variable display is held in the holding display area,
The symbol variation display is a display started when the hold is exhausted,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the pending number depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the type of the notice display corresponding to the type of the noticed icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is consumed,
In the period in which the symbol variable display is executed once, a big hit when the notice icon is consumed by the second number larger than the first number than when the first number is consumed It is configured to be
The second display means, in advance of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) that is the target of prefetching, in the notice icon display area as the prefetching notice display. A display unit capable of displaying the notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B31)
The gaming table described in Appendix B30,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B32)
The gaming table described in Appendix B30 or B31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display.
The second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, can display the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been consumed. Display means,
After the false notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of alignment,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B33)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B30 to B32,
The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B34)
The gaming table described in Appendix B33,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a hold display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The holding display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holdings in the holding display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative symbols,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B35)
The gaming table described in Appendix B34,
The pending display means is a display means including a light emitting means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B36)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B30 to B32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying variable display of decorative symbols,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B37)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B30 to B36,
In the period in which the second symbol variable display is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted a fifth number,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter,
It is called "first symbol variation display". ) Is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted the sixth number,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of holding is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended in the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B38)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B30 to B36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely consumed by the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B39)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B30 to B38,
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B40)
The gaming table described in Appendix B39,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the execution of the fourth symbol variation display, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B41)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B30 to B40,
The reserved display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of reservations up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B42)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B30 to B41,
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production,
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon is configured to be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is the first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
When the first notice icon is consumed, the first notice display is displayed,
When the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice display is configured to be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed,
The game machine, wherein the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is to be executed.

(Appendix B43)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B30 to B42,
Main control means,
Production control means,
Equipped with
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B44)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B30 to B43,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B45)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons are newly added. May be displayed,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a performance display,
When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
One of the plurality of notice icons is the first notice icon,
One of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In one symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “first number of notice icons”) are exhausted, and the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Is configured to
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon,
The gaming machine, wherein the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a display characteristic.

Further, according to this gaming machine, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one icon of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons are consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have expectations for something.

Further, according to this gaming machine, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to a big hit by making the number of the notice icons look like a symbol change before the hold which is the prefetch target.

Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

Further, when the first notice icon is consumed, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be displayed, or when the second notice icon is consumed, the second notice icon is displayed. Corresponding effect display B may be performed, or effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are consumed. You may go.

Also, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be consumed, or only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed on the screen.

(Appendix B46)
The gaming table described in Appendix B45,
Even if the second number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as the “second number of notice icons”) are exhausted in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon that includes one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon that does not include the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming machine, the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed in one pattern variation display. However, since the first effect display is not displayed, it may be possible to give a feeling of superiority to the player who can see the first effect display.

Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, and the second number may be larger than the first number.

Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are consumed.

Also, a part of the first effect display may be displayed even if the second number of notice icons are exhausted, or all of the first effect display may be displayed.

Further, the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of the notice icons that have been consumed, or the reliability of the big hit for the first effect display may be the same.

Further, when the notice icons including the first notice icon and the second notice icon are displayed, the first number of notice icons may be configured to be consumed.

Further, even if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not consumed and the second number of notice icons are consumed. Alternatively, both the first notice icon and the second notice icon may not be deleted.

(Appendix B47)
The gaming table described in Appendix B45 or B46,
One of the plurality of notice icons is the third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is consumed, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming table, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the production and enhance the production effect.

The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix B48)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B45 to B47,
In the case where the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the multiple notice icons may be consumed by the time it is finished.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily mean a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold to be pre-read is over.

In addition, depending on whether the result of the pattern change display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol change display or the third symbol change display to the symbol change display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

In addition, depending on whether the result of the design variation display of the prefetching is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first design variation display or the third design variation display to the design variation display of the prefetching target. The minimum number of the notice icons may be the same or different.

Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) The maximum number of notice icons that can be consumed in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display of the prefetching is a big hit or a miss. It may be the same or different.

Also, in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the one symbol that is performed before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) The minimum number of notice icons that can be consumed in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display of the pre-reading is a big hit and when it is lost. It may be the same or different.

In addition, the maximum number of notice icons that can be consumed in the pattern variation display that is the target of prefetching (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended The result of the variable display of the pattern to be pre-read may be the same or different in the case of a big hit and in the case of a loss.

In addition, the minimum number of notice icons that are consumed in the pattern variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended The result of the variable display of the pattern to be pre-read may be the same or different in the case of a big hit and in the case of a loss.

(Appendix B49)
The gaming table described in Appendix B48,
In the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed from the start of the third symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display. Sometimes,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big jackpot, so it may be possible to entertain until the change in the hold to be read ahead ends.

(Appendix B50)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B45 to B49,
With a hold display means,
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the number (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) in which the start of the symbol variable display is held,
A game table characterized by that.

Note that the hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix B51)
The gaming table described in Appendix B50,
Depending on the number of the notice icon displayed, the hold number is configured not to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holdings.

(Appendix B52)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B45 to B51,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B53)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B45 to B51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B54)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon,
One type of display of a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon,
The advance notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch advance notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. By the time it is finished, there may be a case where a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) are consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons are newly added. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern is formed by cutting the light guide plate with a lens and irradiating it with a light source from the side. , LED or the like, or 7 segments.

Further, the display related to the notice icon may be a display regarding that the notice icon is stocked, a display regarding that the notice icon is exhausted, or a notice of stocking the notice icon. It may be a display, or may be an effect display executed when the notice icon is exhausted.

Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, and the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix B55)
The gaming table described in Appendix B54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, one notice icon may be newly displayed.

Moreover, you may make it perform the effect|action that a notice icon is consumed by a 2nd display means.

(Appendix B56)
The gaming table described in Appendix B54 or B55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

It should be noted that the "display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. You may make it perform in the symbol variable display.

(Appendix B57)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B54 to B56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B58)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B54 to B56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
Performance display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B59)
Display means,
Movable means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. By the time it is finished, there may be a case where a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) are consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons are newly added. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is consumed, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as "notice icon digest effect") is performed.
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "first movable means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

Note that the effect by the movable means may be performed only by the first movable means effect, but may be performed by another movable means effect different from the first movable means effect. In this case, the notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or the notice icon corresponding to the movable means for which the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix B60)
The gaming table described in Appendix B59,
When the 21st notice icon is consumed as the notice icon, the first moving means effect may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first moving means effect may not be performed, and if the 21st notice icon is exhausted, the first movable means production is always performed. Means production may be performed.

In addition, when the 21st notice icon is consumed, an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect having a different operation) may be performed.

In addition, when the 21st notice icon is consumed, the production may be performed by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the 21st notice icon is consumed. Then, the effect may always be performed by the first movable means.

(Appendix B61)
The gaming table described in Appendix B59 or B60,
When the twenty-second notice icon is exhausted as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game table characterized by that.

It should be noted that the first moving means effect may be performed even if the twenty-second notice icon is consumed, or another effect (or effect display) when the twenty-second notice icon is consumed. May be performed.

(Appendix B62)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B59 to B61,
Equipped with operating means,
The movable means is the operation means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the aspect of the operating means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, “change” means deformation, displacement, movement, and operation.

(Appendix B63)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B59 to B62,
A second movable means,
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B64)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the big hit symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") that is the target of prefetching is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. By the time it is finished, there may be a case where a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) are consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons are newly added. May be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays,
A game table characterized by that.

Note that the notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed without fail when the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once in the symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be always displayed in only one symbol variation display.

The notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix B65)
The gaming table described in Appendix B64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the advance notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end,
A game table characterized by that.

The change in which the display of the advance notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this case, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix B66)
The gaming table described in Appendix B64 or B65,
One icon of the 11th number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

The advance notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display indicating that the advance notice icon is increased by one.

Further, the notice icons displayed in the notice increase notice display may not be increased.

Moreover, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of a gasse that the notice icon does not increase.

Further, the advance notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of advance notice icons will increase. In this case, for example, when the number of the notice icons suggested in the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice increase notice display may be increased.

(Appendix B67)
The gaming table described in Appendix B64 or B65,
A twelfth number of the notice icons of the eleventh number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon in some cases. Stand.

(Appendix B68)
Display means,
Hold display means,
A gaming machine equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the number of the hold,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
When the pending display (hereinafter, referred to as "second pending display") of the big hit symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variable display") that is the target of prefetching is displayed, the first A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) may be consumed from the start of the symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display.
In the case where the second pending display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variable display and the end of the second symbol variable display. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B69)
The gaming table described in Appendix B68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a prefetch display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B70)
The gaming table described in Appendix B68 or B69,
In the case where the pending display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth pending display") of the lost symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth symbol variable display") that is the target of prefetching is displayed, the third From the start of the symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B71)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanation display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area when displayed,
The notice icon, when displayed, is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area,
A game table characterized by that.

The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of the effect mode names of the selectable effect modes. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, or a frequency of occurrence of one-shot notification effect There is a mode for making it.

In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the animation that appears when the notice icon is displayed. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

Further, here, the “preliminary icon” may be only one preliminary icon, only some of the plural preliminary icons, or all of the plural preliminary icons. It may be a notice icon. In addition, the “trailer icon” may be only the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons, or a part of the trailer icon including the trailer icon displayed first among the plurality of trailer icons. It may be an icon.

Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the first display. Further, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display.

Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time.

Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, if the display frequency of the second display is higher than that of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon is displayed. May be easy. Further, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, or the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display may not be performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix B72)
The gaming table described in Appendix B71,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B73)
The gaming table described in Appendix B71 or B72,
The first display is a variable icon display,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as “first part”),
When the notice icon is consumed, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this gaming table, by displaying in the second display area in which the notice icon related to the relevant symbol and the subsequent symbol variation display is explained rather than the change icon, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, it may be possible to newly give expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the prefetch notice notice is consumed.

The entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

Further, during the period in which the variable icon is displayed, the variable icon may be one that can at least suggest an expectation for the big hit in the symbol variable display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a read-ahead notice display or may be consumed in the symbol variation display which is a subject of the read-ahead.

Further, the notice icon may be surely consumed in the design variation display that is the target of prefetching, or the notice icon may not be consumed in the design variation display that is the target of prefetching.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be able to be displayed only in a single number, or may be configured to be able to be displayed in a plurality. Here, in the case of displaying a plurality of advance notice icons, the advance notice icon may be able to be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the advance notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix B74)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B71 to B73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B75)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B71 to B73,
The gaming table, wherein the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix B76)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B71 to B75,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
The gaming table, wherein when the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix B77)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B71 to B76,
The second display area is an area divided by a line,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B78)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B71 to B77,
As described in appendix B71, "the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed" means "the notice icon. Is displayed in the second display area when displayed".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B79)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B71 to B78,
The symbol variation display that is a big hit is more frequently consumed by the notice icon than the symbol variation display that is lost.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B80)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of explanation display is a first explanation display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The jackpot variation is more likely to consume the notice icon than the loss variation,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B81)
The gaming table described in Appendix B80,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area in which the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first display area”),
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B82)
The gaming table described in Appendix B81,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B83)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B80 to B82,
One of the plurality of types of explanation display is a second explanation display,
The second explanation display is a display showing the current performance stage,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area in which the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “second display area”),
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B84)
The gaming table described in Appendix B83,
Even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the production stage changes,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B85)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B80 to B84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plurality of types of notice icons”) as the notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is the first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B86)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanation display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B87)
The gaming table described in Appendix B86,
When the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B88)
The gaming table described in Appendix B87,
When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may restart.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B89)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B86 to B88,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B90)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B86 to B89,
The display means is a means configured by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a performance display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display matched with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a partial area of the third display means,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B91)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B86 to B90,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanation display,
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix B92)
The gaming table described in Appendix B91,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining the character displayed on the second display means.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the reach jackpot expectation degree.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display regarding the jackpot expectation of the character.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

(Appendix B93)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display,
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area in which the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including one of the plurality of notification icons (hereinafter, referred to as “first notification icon”),
The second display is a display including a display in which the first notice icon is displayed in a large size,
The first display may be made after the second display is made,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged view of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix B94)
The gaming table described in Appendix B93,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a variable display of decorative patterns,
The first display is a display showing that the first notice icon is stocked,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B95)
The gaming table described in Appendix B93 or B94,
The third display is a display that may not overlap with the first display,
The third display is a display that may overlap the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B96)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B93 to B95,
The first display is a display displayed in the hold display frame,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B97)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B93 to B96,
The game machine, wherein the second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.

(Appendix B98)
The gaming table described in Appendix B97,
The second display is a display that is also performed when the first notice icon is consumed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B99)
The gaming table described in Appendix B97 or B98,
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the notice icons already acquired is enlarged and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B100)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a hold display frame,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a display of a decorative pattern,
The first display is a display that is not overlapped with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B101)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B100,
The display of the position of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display,
The fourth display is a performance display,
In the portion of the second display expanded from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "extended portion"), the fourth display is configured to be displayable,
The extension portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B102)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B101,
The effect display is a look-ahead notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B103)
The gaming table described in Appendix B101 or B102,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the expanded portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable,
Part of the fourth display and the fifth display are the same display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B104)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B100 to B103,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of the serif notice,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may overlap the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B105)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon relating to the variable display of symbols,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative pattern variable display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B106)
The gaming table described in Appendix B105,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a performance display,
In the portion of the second display expanded from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "extended portion"), the fourth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable,
The extension portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B107)
The gaming table described in Appendix B106,
The effect display is a pre-reading notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B108)
The gaming table described in Appendix B106 or B107,
The effect display is a display for changing the display mode of the icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B109)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B106 to B108,
The third display is a display that may overlap the extension.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B110)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B106 to B109,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a line display,
The fifth display is a display that is not overlapped with the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may overlap the extension.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B111)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B106 to B110,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the expanded portion, the sixth display is configured to overlap and display,
Part of the fourth display and the sixth display are the same display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B112)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B105 to B111,
The icon is a hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B113)
The gaming table described in Appendix B112,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B114)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B105 to B113,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B115)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
An icon (hereinafter, referred to as "icon") related to the variable display of symbols is configured to be displayed in a region inside the frame (hereinafter, referred to as "region in frame") of the icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
One of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded,
The second display is a decorative pattern variable display,
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that is not overlapped with the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B116)
The gaming table described in Appendix B115,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a performance display,
A portion expanded from the first display aspect of the second display aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "extended portion"), the third display is configured to be overlapped and displayable,
The extension portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B117)
The gaming table described in Appendix B116,
The effect display is a pre-reading notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B118)
The gaming table according to supplementary note B116 or B117,
The effect display is a display for changing the display mode of the icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B119)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B116 to B118,
The second display is a display that may overlap the extension.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B120)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B116 to B119,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a line display,
The fourth display is a display that is not overlapped with the icon display frame of the first display mode,
The fourth display is a display that may overlap the extension.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B121)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B116 to B120,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a notice display,
In the expanded portion, the fifth display is configured to be overlapped and displayable,
Part of the third display and the fifth display are the same display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B122)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B116 to B121,
The area of the in-frame area (hereinafter, referred to as “first in-frame area”) in the first display mode is a first area,
The area of the framed area in the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second framed area”) is a second area,
The second area is an area larger than the first area,
The expanded portion is a portion of a difference area between the second in-frame area and the first in-frame area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B123)
The gaming table described in Appendix B122,
The second in-frame area is an area configured to include the first in-frame area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B124)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B115 to B123,
The "display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" according to claim 1 is "a display mode in which the area of the frame area in the first display mode is large". Is that
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B125)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B115 to B124,
The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B126)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B115 to B125,
The icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B127)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B115 to B126,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon as the icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B128)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B115 to B127,
The first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that is not overlapped with the second display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B129)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B115 to B128,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B130)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The third display is an explanation display,
The fourth display is a notice display,
The icon display frame is a display frame configured to include a first area and a second area,
In the first area, an icon relating to the variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "icon") is configured to be displayed,
In the second area, the third display is configured to be displayable,
In the second area, the fourth display is configured to be displayable,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the first display mode,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode,
In the second area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, the third display may be displayed,
In the second area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the fourth display is displayed,
Position of the first area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, and position of the first area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode Are in different positions,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B131)
The gaming table described in Appendix B130,
The first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode and the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode have the same size. Is
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B132)
The gaming table described in Appendix B130 or B131,
The second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode includes the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode Is the area
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B133)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B130 to B132,
The first region and the second region are adjacent,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B134)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B130 to B133,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a decorative pattern variable display,
On the front side of the first display displayed in the first display mode, the second display is not displayed in an overlapping manner.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B135)
The gaming table described in Appendix B134,
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the display position of the second display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B136)
The gaming table described in Appendix B134 or B135,
The second display is a display that can be displayed in multiple sizes,
One size of the plurality of sizes is a first size,
One size of the plurality of sizes is a second size,
The second size is smaller than the first size,
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the second display that was displayed in the first size is displayed in the second size,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B137)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B134 to B136,
Also on the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode, the second display does not overlap,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B138)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes B130 to B137,
The “display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode” described in appendix B130 means “the icon display frame is in the first display mode. It is a display mode in which the area of the second region in the displayed state is increased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B139)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B130 to B138,
The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B140)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B130 to B139,
The icon is a variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B141)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B130 to B139,
The icon is a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B142)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B130 to B141,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is an error display,
On the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode, the fifth display may overlap,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B143)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B130 to B142,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B144)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The third display is an explanation display,
The fourth display is a notice display,
The icon display frame is a display frame configured to include a first area and a second area,
In the first area, an icon relating to the variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "icon") is configured to be displayed,
In the second area, the third display is configured to be displayable,
In the second area, the fourth display is configured to be displayable,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the first display mode,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode,
In the second area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, the third display may be displayed,
In the second area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the fourth display is displayed,
Position of the first area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, and position of the first area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode Are in different positions,
By displaying the icon in the notice display mode, the notice can be executed.
The display means is a means including a plurality of display devices,
One display device of the plurality of display devices is a first display device,
One display device of the plurality of display devices is a second display device,
In a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, the entire icon display frame is configured to be displayed on the first display device,
In a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, a part of the icon display frame is configured to be displayed on the first display device,
In a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, a portion other than the portion of the icon display frame is configured to be displayed on the second display device,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B145)
The gaming table described in Appendix B144,
The first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode and the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode have the same size. Is
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B146)
The gaming table described in Appendix B144 or B145,
The second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode includes the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode Is the area
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B147)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B144 to B146,
The first region and the second region are adjacent,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B148)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B144 to B147,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a decorative pattern variable display,
On the front side of the first display displayed in the first display mode, the second display is not displayed in an overlapping manner.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B149)
The gaming table described in Appendix B148,
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the display position of the second display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B150)
The gaming table described in Appendix B148 or B149,
The second display is a display that can be displayed in multiple sizes,
One size of the plurality of sizes is a first size,
One size of the plurality of sizes is a second size,
The second size is smaller than the first size,
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the second display that was displayed in the first size is displayed in the second size,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B151)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B148 to B150,
Also on the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode, the second display does not overlap,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B152)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B144 to B151,
The “display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode” described in appendix B144 means “the icon display frame is in the first display mode. It is a display mode in which the area of the second region in the displayed state is increased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B153)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B144 to B152,
The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B154)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B144 to B153,
The icon is a variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B155)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B144 to B153,
The icon is a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B156)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B144 to B155,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is an error display,
On the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode, the fifth display may overlap,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B157)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B144 to B156,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B158)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The third display is an explanation display,
The fourth display is a notice display in which failure patterns and success patterns are prepared,
The icon display frame is a display frame configured to include a first area and a second area,
In the first area, an icon (hereinafter, referred to as "icon") related to the variable display of symbols is configured to be displayed,
In the second area, the third display is configured to be displayable,
In the second area, the fourth display is configured to be displayable,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the first display mode,
The icon display frame may be displayed in the second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode,
In the second area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, the third display may be displayed,
In the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the fourth display is displayed,
Position of the first area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode, and position of the first area in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode Are in different positions,
After the fourth display of the success pattern is displayed, it is configured to develop into a super reach production,
After the fourth display of the failure pattern is displayed, the icon display frame displayed in the second display mode is configured to be displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B159)
The gaming table described in Appendix B158,
The first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode and the first area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode have the same size. Is
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B160)
The gaming table according to supplementary note B158 or B159,
The second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode includes the second area in the state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode Is the area
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B161)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B158 to B160,
The first region and the second region are adjacent,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B162)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B158 to B161,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a decorative pattern variable display,
On the front side of the first display displayed in the first display mode, the second display is not displayed in an overlapping manner.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B163)
The gaming table described in Appendix B162,
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the display position of the second display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B164)
The gaming table described in Appendix B162 or B163,
The second display is a display that can be displayed in multiple sizes,
One size of the plurality of sizes is a first size,
One size of the plurality of sizes is a second size,
The second size is smaller than the first size,
When the icon display frame is displayed in the second display mode, the second display that was displayed in the first size is displayed in the second size,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B165)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B162 to B164,
Also on the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode, the second display does not overlap,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B166)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B158 to B165,
The "display mode in which the second area is expanded in a state where the icon display frame is displayed in the first display mode" according to claim 1 means "the icon display frame is in the first display mode". Is a display mode in which the area of the second region in the state of being displayed is increased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B167)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B158 to B166,
The icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B168)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B158 to B167,
The icon is a variable icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B169)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B158 to B167,
The icon is a hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variable display being held,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B170)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B158 to B169,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is an error display,
On the front side of the first display displayed in the second display mode, the fifth display may overlap,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix B171)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices B158 to B170,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C1)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
A certain display area is a display area that can take a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The size of the certain display area of the second aspect is larger than the size of the certain display area of the first aspect,
The certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including a part or all of the certain display area of the first aspect,
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") is configured to be displayed,
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area is configured to be the first aspect from the second aspect,
In a certain display area of the first aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") is configured to be displayed,
The second display is a display of a mini game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C2)
The gaming table described in Appendix C1,
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") is configured to be displayed,
In a certain display area of the second aspect, after the second effect display is completed, a certain display area is configured to become the first aspect from the second aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C3)
The gaming table described in Appendix C1 or C2,
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect display") is configured to be displayable,
After the display of the fourth effect display is started, a certain display area is configured to be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C4)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C1 to C3,
It is configured to be able to display an icon (hereinafter, referred to as "icon") related to variable display of symbols,
A certain display area is an area arranged below the area in which the icon is displayed,
The position of the area where the icon is displayed in the case where the certain display area is the first aspect and the position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the second aspect are different positions. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C5)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
A certain display area is a display area that can take a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The size of the certain display area of the second aspect is larger than the size of the certain display area of the first aspect,
The certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including a part or all of the certain display area of the first aspect,
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") is configured to be displayed,
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area is configured to be the first aspect from the second aspect,
It is configured to be able to display a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter referred to as "second display"),
The second display is the mini-game display,
After the display of the second display is started, a certain display area is configured to be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C6)
The gaming table described in Appendix C5,
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") is configured to be displayed,
In a certain display area of the second aspect, after the display of the second effect display is completed, a certain display area is configured to become the first aspect from the second aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C7)
The gaming table described in Appendix C5 or C6,
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect display") is configured to be displayable,
After the display of the third effect display is started, a certain display area is configured to change from the first aspect to the second aspect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C8)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C5 to C7,
It is configured to be able to display an icon (hereinafter, referred to as "icon") related to variable display of symbols,
A certain display area is an area arranged below the area in which the icon is displayed,
The position of the area where the icon is displayed in the case where the certain display area is the first aspect and the position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the second aspect are different positions. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C9)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
A certain display area is a display area that can take a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The size of the certain display area of the second aspect is larger than the size of the certain display area of the first aspect,
The certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including a part or all of the certain display area of the first aspect,
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display (hereinafter referred to as "first display") is configured to be displayed,
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area is configured to be the first aspect from the second aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
The size of the certain display area of the third aspect is larger than the size of the certain display area of the first aspect,
The size of a certain display area of the second aspect and the size of a certain display area of the third aspect are different sizes,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C10)
The gaming table described in Appendix C9,
In a certain display area of the third aspect, it is configured to be able to display the first display,
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") is configured to be displayed,
In the certain display area of the second aspect, the ratio of the first effect display of the first display to the display of the first display in the certain display area of the third aspect is displayed. Of these, the proportion of the first effect display displayed is configured to be higher.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C11)
The gaming table described in Appendix C9,
In a certain display area of the third aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") can be displayed.
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The second display of the success pattern (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect display") is configured to be displayable,
In the variable display in which the third effect display is displayed in the certain display area of the third aspect, compared to the variable display in which the first effect display is displayed in the certain display area of the second aspect Is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the big hit mode,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C12)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C9 to C11,
It is configured to be able to display an icon (hereinafter, referred to as "icon") related to variable display of symbols,
A certain display area is an area arranged below the area in which the icon is displayed,
The position of the area where the icon is displayed in the case where the certain display area is the first aspect and the position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the second aspect are different positions. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C13)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
A certain display area is a display area that can take a plurality of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The size of the certain display area of the second aspect is larger than the size of the certain display area of the first aspect,
The certain display area of the second aspect is a display area including a part or all of the certain display area of the first aspect,
A certain display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display") in a certain display area of the second aspect.
It is configured to display
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area is configured to be the first aspect from the second aspect,
In a certain display area of the second aspect, a certain display different from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C14)
The gaming table described in Appendix C13,
The first display of the success pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The first display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The second display of the successful pattern (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") is configured to be displayed,
The second display of the failure pattern (hereinafter referred to as "fourth effect display") is configured to be displayable,
In a certain display area of the second aspect, the variable display in which the third effect display is displayed is finally the final confirmation display in the jackpot mode than the variable display in which the first effect display is displayed. It is easy to be configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C15)
The gaming table described in Appendix C13 or C14,
After the display of the first display is finished, a certain display area may be hidden,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C16)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C13 to C15,
It is configured to be able to display an icon (hereinafter, referred to as "icon") related to variable display of symbols,
A certain display area is an area arranged below the area in which the icon is displayed,
The position of the area where the icon is displayed in the case where the certain display area is the first aspect and the position of the area where the icon is displayed when the certain display area is the second aspect are different positions. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C17)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a display of time,
A certain effect may be started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display is started,
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is started, the certain effect is always started,
The timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) and the second timer display are displayed after the display of the time is started and before the change of the display of the time is started. During the period (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”), at least in part, different aspects,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C18)
The gaming table described in Appendix C17,
In the first period, the display of the time of the first timer display is a first time,
In the first period, the display of the time of the second timer display is a second time,
The first time is a time when a value less than a certain value becomes 0,
The second time is a time at which the value below the certain level does not become 0,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C19)
The gaming table described in Appendix C17 or C18,
The color of the time display of the first timer display is a first color,
The color of the time display of the second timer display is a second color,
The first color and the second color are different colors,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C20)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C17 to C19,
The first timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display,
The second timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display,
Colors of the frame display of the first timer display and the frame display of the second timer display are different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C21)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C17 to C20,
The display size of the time in the first timer display and the display size of the time in the second timer display are different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C22)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a display of time,
A certain effect may be started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display is started,
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
When the timer display of the first aspect is started, an effect different from the certain effect may be started,
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is started, the certain effect is always started,
The timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) and the second timer display are displayed after the display of the time is started and before the change of the display of the time is started. During the period (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”), at least in part, the aspect is different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C23)
The gaming table described in Appendix C22,
At least one timer display of the first timer display and the second timer display, the position of the timer display may move in the first period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C24)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a display of time,
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is started, a certain effect may be started,
When the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) is started, an effect different from the certain effect may be started,
The second timer display is a display that may disappear after the display of the time starts and before the change of the display of the time starts (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”).
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C25)
The gaming table described in Appendix C24,
In the second timer display, there is a case where the time display starts to change after the display of the coin time (hereinafter referred to as “second case”).
The certain effect is more easily started in the second case than in the first case,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C26)
The gaming table described in Appendix C25,
In the first case, the certain effect is not started,
In the second case, the certain effect is started,
A gaming platform that uses wiretapping.

(Appendix C27)
The gaming table described in Appendix C24,
In the first case, the certain performance is always started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C28)
The gaming table described in Appendix C27,
In the first timer display, the time from the start of the display of the time to the start of the change of the display of the time is the first time,
In the second timer display, the time from the start of the display of the time until the display of the time disappears is the second time,
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C29)
The gaming table described in Appendix C28,
The second timer display may start changing the display of the time after the display of the time is started,
In the second timer display, the time from the start of the display of the time to the start of the change of the display of the time is the third time,
The third time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C30)
The gaming table described in Appendix C28 or C29,
The time displayed first in the second timer display may be the fourth time,
The second time may be longer than the fourth time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C31)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C24 to C30,
In the first case, the second timer display may change in display mode other than the time display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C32)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a display of time,
A certain effect may be started in response to a certain condition being satisfied after the display of the timer display is started,
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display,
When the second timer display disappears before the large value symbol is fixedly displayed without changing the display of the time in the symbol variation display in which the second timer display is displayed (hereinafter, "first There is a case.),
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C33)
The gaming table described in Appendix C32,
There is a case where the display of the time starts to change after the display of the time is started in the symbol variable display in which the second timer display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”).
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C34)
The gaming table described in Appendix C32 or C33,
The certain effect is more easily started when the second timer display is displayed than when the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) is displayed. ,
In the first timer display, the time from the start of the display of the time to the start of the change of the display of the time is the first time,
In the second timer display, the time from the start of the display of the time until the display of the time disappears is the second time,
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C35)
A gaming machine described in C34 including Supplementary Note C33,
In the second case, the time from the start of the display of the time to the start of the change of the display of the time is the third time,
The third time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C36)
The gaming table described in Appendix C34 or C35,
The time displayed first in the second timer display may be the fourth time,
The second time may be longer than the fourth time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C37)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a display of time,
There is a case where a certain effect is started in response to the display of the time becoming a certain time after the display of the timer display is started,
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "second timer display") is displayed, the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variable display,
When the second timer display is displayed, even when the display of the time is the certain time, the certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C38)
The gaming table described in Appendix C37,
The certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) is displayed than when the second timer display is displayed. , A gaming table characterized by that.

(Appendix C39)
The gaming table described in Appendix C38,
The time from when the display of the time in the first timer display is the certain time to when the first timer display disappears is the first time,
The time from when the display of the time in the second timer display is the certain time until the second timer display disappears is the second time,
The second time is longer than the first time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C40)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C37 to C39,
An effect different from the certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first effect”) is started in response to the display of the time in the second timer display reaching the certain time. Has been done,
The first effect is an effect executed only when the jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C41)
A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a display of time,
There is a case where a certain effect is started in response to the display of the time becoming a certain time after the display of the timer display is started,
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
When the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) is started, the certain effect may not be started,
When the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is started, an effect different from the certain effect is always performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C42)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including the display of time,
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect is started in response to the display of the time becoming a certain time,
There is a case where a timer display is displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”),
There is a case where the timer display is displayed on both the first display means and the second display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”).
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C43)
The gaming table described in Appendix C42,
In the second case, the timer display displayed on the first display means (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) and the timer displayed on the second display means. There is a case (hereinafter, referred to as a “third case”) in which the display of the time (hereinafter, referred to as a “second timer display”) is the same,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C44)
The gaming table described in Appendix C43,
The certain effect is an effect that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the certain effect is performed according to the second aspect than when the certain effect according to the first aspect is performed,
In the case where the display of the time displayed first in the timer display is the same in the first case and the third case, the second case is more likely to occur in the third case than in the first case. The certain effect according to the mode is likely to be started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C45)
The gaming table described in Appendix C43 or C44,
In the second case, a third timer display may be displayed on one display means of the first display means and the second display means,
The display of the time displayed on the third timer display is different from the display of the time displayed on the first timer display,
The display of the time displayed on the third timer display is different from the display of the time displayed on the second timer display,
After the display of the third timer display is started, an effect different from the certain effect may be started in response to the display of the time becoming a certain time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C46)
The gaming table described in Appendix C42,
In the second case, the time display of the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “eleventh timer display”) displayed on the first display means and the second display means are displayed. There is a case where the display of the time on the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as “twelfth timer display”) is different (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth case”),
In the fourth case, the certain effect related to at least one timer display of the eleventh timer display and the twelfth timer display is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C47)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C42 to C46,
The first display means is a display means in which one or more timer displays may be displayed,
The second display means is a means in which only one timer display may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C48)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including the display of time,
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect is started in response to the display of the time becoming a certain time,
There is a case where a timer display is displayed on both the display means of the first display means and the display means of the second display during execution of a certain symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"),
In the second case, the timer display displayed on the first display means (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer display”) and the timer displayed on the second display means. The display of the time (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) may be different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C49)
The gaming table described in Appendix C48,
There is a case where one of the first timer display and the second timer display is performed during execution of the certain symbol variable display (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”).
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C50)
The gaming table described in Appendix C49,
In the second case, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the certain symbol variable display than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C51)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C48 to C50,
The second timer display has a longer display time of the time displayed first than the first timer display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C52)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C48 to C51,
In the second case, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be the same,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C53)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C48 to C52,
In the second case, the timing at which the first timer display is started and the timing at which the second timer display is started may be different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C54)
The gaming table described in Appendix C53,
In the second case, the first timer display is started to be displayed after the second timer display is started to be displayed, and the timer display is also performed after the certain effect regarding the first timer display is performed. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C55)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice,
The third display is a display showing that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display,
It is configured so that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started,
It is configured so that the third display may be started in the first state,
The third display started to be displayed in the first state is configured so that the display may end in the second state,
The display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state after the display of the third display is finished in the second state,
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain production is started,
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
It is configured so that it may become the second state after the first state,
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C56)
The gaming table described in Appendix C55,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least behind the hold icon,
The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed,
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed in a state where the sixth display is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C57)
The gaming table described in Appendix C56,
In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the third display,
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C58)
The gaming table described in Appendix C56 or C57,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be easily started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C59)
The gaming table described in Appendix C56 or C57,
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect,
The case where the sixth indication changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth indication does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is configured so that the big hit symbol is easily displayed in the symbol variable display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C60)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C56 to C59,
It is configured such that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C61)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C56 to C59,
In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. Is
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C62)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C61,
It is configured to execute a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started,
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C63)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C62,
The certain notice display is a timer notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C64)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C63,
The certain notice display is a display of a mini game,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C65)
The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes C55 to C64.
One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
It is configured such that the fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C66)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C65,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
It is configured such that the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C67)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C66,
The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, is configured so that it may be continuously displayed even after the symbol variable display to be started next is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C68)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C67,
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variable display, is configured to be erased before the symbol variable display to be started next is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C69)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C68,
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C70)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C69,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display,
The seventh display is a display urging the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started,
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started,
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C71)
The gaming table described in Appendix C70,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an eighth display,
The eighth display is a display notifying that the display of the seventh display is started,
The third display is a display that is terminated during the display of the eighth display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C72)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C71,
One of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display,
The ninth display is a variable icon display,
There are cases where two of the third displays are displayed,
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes,
The third display in which the display mode is changed overlaps with the ninth display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C73)
The gaming table described in Appendix C72,
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is configured to end in one symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C74)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C73,
One of the plurality of types of display is a tenth display,
The tenth display is an explanation display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed,
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C75)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C74,
The “display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be displayed” described in appendix C55 is a “character display in preparation”.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C76)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C75,
One of the plurality of types of display is an eleventh display,
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to eject the game ball,
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C77)
The gaming table described in Appendix C76,
In a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap with the eleventh display. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C78)
The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C77,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.

The gaming table according to any one of appendices C55 to C77,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game table characterized by that.

It should be noted that the term of the notice icon explained so far is given for the sake of convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience according to the display mode (motif). When the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, when the notice icon indicates a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , Notice medal). The term “preliminary notice” in the notice icons is also given for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

FIG. 486 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 486, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium shot from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, ball rental, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

It should be noted that a mode in which the above-mentioned display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 may be adopted, and this display means 903 is further provided with a touch panel. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as the operation unit. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hit operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, or when the long press automatic continuous hit function is enabled, the touch panel It may be configured such that the pseudo continuous tapping operation is performed on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may not be set to an effective state. Further, in some of the effects, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, in the touch panel, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated, may not be activated, or may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to have few effects. .. In addition, when there are a plurality of effects by the repeated hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long-press auto continuous hitting function may not be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured in a small number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 486 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine for use. May be performed by credit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 487, a slot machine (revolving cylinder gaming machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 487 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 487 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 487), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are housed, and the slot machine 1000 has It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each pattern is printed on the belt-shaped member at an equal number of intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by attaching the belt-shaped member to a predetermined circular tubular frame material. The symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 by the player, so that a total of 9 symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player will change. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be uniformly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided near each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotation direction of the symbol on the reel is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that shows the pay line 1014 that is activated. The winning line to be activated is predetermined according to the number of medals bet as the game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one bet on a medal is bet, the horizontal pay line on the middle row is valid, and when two bets are placed on a medal, an upper horizontal pay line and a lower horizontal pay line are added. When 3 coins are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines to which the rightward winning line and the rightward winning line are added are valid as winning lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one bet is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right line. Five lines of the downward winning line and the rightward winning line may be valid as the winning line. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes effective may be referred to as an effective line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for informing that the game medal can be inserted by the player. The re-play lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (there is no need to insert medals) when a re-play, which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a production lamp.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one coin is inserted up to a maximum of three, when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two coins are inserted, and when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed, three coins are inserted. It is designed to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, a game start notification is given to inform that the game can be started. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, and an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display device 126 is a display device for displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of paid-out medals during a bonus game) by numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel targeted for the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel targeted for the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel targeted for the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. It should be noted that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing the medal when the inserted medal is jammed to remove the medal. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and bets that have been bet, and discharging from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 may be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or may be operated in relation to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may change during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting player's individual game history information), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to the operating means.

Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and attaching various certificate sheets is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. Below the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal receiving tray 1061 are provided.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for raising the game. A rendering device 1060 is provided above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The rendering device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown in the drawings) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , A production image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It is a structure that appears on the person side).

It should be noted that it is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display. It may be a reel (drum) or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole of the display screen is visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. It is also possible to provide a decoration (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks odd. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may be a curved surface.

The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 488(a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and displays a lottery result on a lottery result display device 2008." However, at the time of winning, the bonus coin number is added to the remaining credit number, and when the cash-out 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt in which a code corresponding to the remaining credit number is issued. May be

Further, as shown in FIG. 2B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. May be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the above, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for implementing the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 shown in FIG. 1B has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (book). A storage unit that stores electronic data for implementing the invention) and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 7C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data regarding a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data regarding the acquired game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The household video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and acquired game-related data ( A storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

The present invention can also be applied to execute a game in a game program that simulates the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, although the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball game machine, a smart ball, or the like.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of each of the embodiments, examples, modified examples, various examples, and supplementary notes described above,
The constituent features may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like. That is, as long as there is no factor that prevents application, constituent elements included only in the description of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, the supplementary notes, etc. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, and supplementary notes, it is established as one cohesive technical idea.

Further, in the above, "may be" may be replaced with "must be", "must be", or "must be", etc. It may be replaced with "always do ○○".

In addition, the above-mentioned, for example, "first display" and "second display" such as "X × XX" is only named to improve readability, "X X XX" It is added here that “” has no special meaning.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Performance button 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 224 Performance movable body 246 Shielding device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 first sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Game board lamp 542 Game frame lamp

Claims (15)

A gaming table equipped with display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display,
The timer display is a display including a display of time,
When a certain effect (hereinafter referred to as “first effect”) is started in response to the timer display becoming a display indicating that it is a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. There is
The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
When the display of the timer display of the first aspect (hereinafter referred to as “first timer display”) is started, a certain effect different from the first effect may be started. ,
When the display of the timer display of the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is started, the first effect is always started,
The first effect is an effect that allows the player to recognize that the symbol variation display is a big hit,
When the time indicated by the initial value of the timer value when the second timer display is started is longer than the execution time of the symbol variable display when the second timer display is started (hereinafter, There is a "first case"),
In the first case, execution of the first effect is started before the second timer display indicates the certain time.
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to claim 1,
At least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may move the display position during the period in which the countdown of the timer display is being executed ,
A game table characterized by that. It is the game table according to claim 1 or 2,
When the display of the first timer display is started, the first effect may be started,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The first effect is an effect that notifies that the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed in the symbol variable display,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
As the first effect, the jackpot pattern mode is confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The display of the time indicating the initial value of the timer value when the display of the first timer is started is a display indicating the first time (hereinafter, referred to as “first time display”),
The display of the time indicating the initial value of the timer value when the display of the second timer is started is a display indicating the second time (hereinafter, referred to as “second time display”),
The first time display is a display showing that the value of a lower order than a certain order is 0,
The second time display is a display showing that the value of the lower rank than the certain rank is a certain value,
The certain value is a value other than 0,
A game table characterized by that. The game machine according to claim 6,
The “value lower than a certain place” according to claim 6 is a “value below the decimal point”.
A game table characterized by that. The game table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The color of the time display of the first timer display is a first color,
The color of the time display of the second timer display is a second color,
The first color and the second color are different colors,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The first timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time,
The second timer display is a display including a display of the time and a frame display surrounding the display of the time,
The frame display color of the first timer display is a third color,
The color of the frame display of the second timer display is the fourth color,
The third color and the fourth color are different colors,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The size of the display of the time in the first timer display is a first size,
The size of the display of the time in the second timer display is a second size,
The first size and the second size are different sizes,
A game table characterized by that. The game table according to any one of claims 1 to 10,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variable display,
The display of the timer display may be started during the display of the decorative pattern variable display,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
A second display means,
The display means is a first display means,
The first timer display, the first display means is easier to display than the second display means,
The second timer display, the second display means is more easily displayed than the first display means,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The certain time is a time indicating 0,
A game table characterized by that. The game machine according to claim 12,
After the display of the second timer display is started, the first effect may be started before the display of the time becomes a display representing the certain time,
A game table characterized by that. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A game table characterized by that.